2006 LX SM

GROUP TAB LOCATOR
Introduction
0
2
3
4
5
7
8A
8B
8C
8E
8F
8G
8H
8I
8J
8L
8M
8N
8O
8P
8Q
8R
8T
8W
9
11
13
14
19
21
22
23
24
25
Lubrication & Maintenance

Suspension
Differential & Driveline
Vehicle Quick Reference
Brakes
Cooling
Audio/Video
Chime/Buzzer
Clock
Electronic Control Modules
Engine Systems
Heated Systems
Horn
Ignition Control
Instrument Cluster
Lamps
Message Systems
Power Systems
Restraints
Speed Control
Vehicle Theft Security
Wipers/Washers
Navigation/Telecommunication
Wiring
Engine
Exhaust System
Frame & Bumpers
Fuel System
Steering
Automatic Transmission
Tires/Wheels
Body
Heating & Air Conditioning
Emissions Control
Component and System Index
DTC Index
Service Manual Comment Forms
(Rear of Manual)
INTRODUCTION
LX
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
BODY CODE PLATE

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
FASTENER IDENTIFICATION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FASTENER USAGE
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MANUFACTURE PLATE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
METRIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
TORQUE REFERENCES
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
VECI LABEL
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
INTRODUCTION
LX
BODY CODE PLATE

DESCRIPTION
LOCATION AND DECODING
The Body Code Plate is located in the engine compartment on the front right side shock tower mounting
front panel.
BODY CODE PLATE

1 - PRIMARY PAINT
2 - SECONDARY PAINT
3 - VINYL ROOF
4 - VEHICLE ORDER NUMBER
5 - CAR LINE SHELL
6 - PAINT PROCEDURE
7 - ENGINE
8 - TRIM
9 - TRANSMISSION
10 - MARKET
11 - VIN
BODY CODE PLATE LINE 3

There are seven lines of information on the body code
plate. Lines 4, 5, 6, and 7 are not used to define service information. Information reads from left to right,
starting with line 3 in the center of the plate to line 1
at the bottom of the plate.
DIGITS 1, 2, AND 3
Paint procedure
DIGIT 4
Open Space
DIGITS 5 THROUGH 7
Primary Paint
DIGIT 8 AND 9
Open Space
LX
DIGITS 10 THROUGH 12
Secondary Paint
DIGIT 13 AND 14
Open Space
DIGITS 15 THROUGH 18
Interior Trim Code
DIGIT 19
Open Space
DIGITS 20, 21, AND 22
Engine Code
EER = 2.7 L, V-6 Cylinder, 24 Valve, DOHC, Gasoline, Aluminum Block (MPI)
EGG = 3.5 L, V -6 Cylinder, 24 Valve, High Output, Gasoline, Aluminum Block (MPI)
ESF = 6.1 L, V-8 Cylinder, HEMI, Gasoline (SMPI)
EZB = 5.7 L, V-8 Cylinder, HEMI, Multi-Displacement, Gasoline,
DIGIT 23
Open Space

DIGITS 1 THROUGH 12
Vehicle Order Number
DIGITS 13, THROUGH 15
Vinyl Roof Code
DIGITS 16 AND 17
Open space
DIGITS 18 AND 19
Vehicle Shell Line
LX
DIGITS 20
Carline
C = Chrysler
D = Dodge
DIGIT 21
Price Class
E = Economy
H = High Line
L = Low Line
M = Medium
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
LX
P = Premium
S = Sport
X = Special
DIGITS 22 AND 23
Body Type
48 = Four Door Sedan Tall
49 =Hatchback Tall

DIGITS 1, 2, AND 3
Transmission Codes
DG6 = 4-Speed Electronic Automatic Transmission
DGJ = 5-Speed Automatic Transmission
DIGIT 4
Open Space
DIGIT 5
Market Code
C = Canada
B = International
M = Mexico
U = United States
DIGIT 6
Open Space
DIGITS 7 THROUGH 23
Vehicle Identification Number
(Refer to VEHICLE DATA/VEHICLE INFORMATION/VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER - DESCRIPTION)
for proper breakdown of VIN code.
IF TWO BODY CODE PLATES ARE REQUIRED

The last code shown on either plate will be followed by END. When two plates are required, the last code space on
the first plate will indicate (CTD)
When a second plate is required, the first four spaces of each line will not be used due to overlap of the plates.
INTRODUCTION
LX
FASTENER IDENTIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
The SAE bolt strength grades range from grade 2 to grade 8. The higher the grade number, the greater the bolt
strength. Identification is determined by the line marks on the top of each bolt head. The actual bolt strength grade
corresponds to the number of line marks plus 2. The most commonly used metric bolt strength classes are 9.8 and
10.9. The metric strength class identification number is imprinted on the head of the bolt. The higher the class
number, the greater the bolt strength. Some metric nuts are imprinted with a single-digit strength class on the nut
face. Refer to the Fastener Identification and Fastener Strength Charts.
Bolt Markings and Torques - Metric
Bolt Markings
8.8/8.9
10.9
12.9
Bolt Dia.
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
12
105*
14
120*
16
12
25
250*
32
23
38
28
10
54
40
60
45
74
55
12
95
70
108
80
135
100
14
155
115
175
130
216
160
16
243
180
324
210
324
240
* Inch Lbs.
Bolt Markings and Torques - U. S. Customary
Bolt Markings
Grade 5
Grade 8
Bolt Dia.
Nm
Ft. Lbs
Nm
Ft. Lbs
1/4 - 20
10
95*
14
125*
1/4 - 28
10
95*
17
150*
5/16 - 18
22
200*
30
270*
5/16 - 24
26
240*
33
300*
3/8 - 16
40
30
55
40
3/8 - 24
47
35
60
45
7/16 - 14
68
50
88
65
7/16 - 20
74
55
95
70
1/2 - 13
101
75
135
100
1/2 -20
115
85
150
110
9/16 - 12
135
105
182
135
9/16 - 18
155
115
202
150
5/8 - 11
202
150
263
195
5/8 - 18
215
160
284
210
3/4 - 10
230
170
297
220
3/4 - 16
236
175
304
225
7/8 - 14
405
300
540
400
* Inch Lbs.
INTRODUCTION
LX
LX
INTRODUCTION
FASTENER USAGE
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
WARNING: Use of an incorrect fastener may result in component damage or personal injury.
Fasteners and torque specifications references in this Service Manual are identified in metric and SAE format.
During any maintenance or repair procedures, it is important to salvage all fasteners (nuts, bolts, etc.) for reassembly. If the fastener is not salvageable, a fastener of equivalent specification must be used.
DESCRIPTION
Most stripped threaded holes can be repaired using a HelicoilT. Follow the vehicle or HelicoilT recommendations for
application and repair procedures.
INTRODUCTION
LX
DESCRIPTION
The graphic symbols illustrated in the following International Control and Display Symbols Chart are used to identify
various instrument controls. The symbols correspond to the controls and displays that are located on the instrument
panel.
LX
MANUFACTURE PLATE
DESCRIPTION
The Manufacturer Plate is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side rear corner of the
hood. The plate contains five lines of information:
1. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
2. Gross Vehicle Mass (GVM)
3. Gross Train Mass (GTM)
4. Gross Front Axle Rating (GFAR)
5. Gross Rear Axle Rating (GRAR)
INTRODUCTION
10
INTRODUCTION
METRIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
LX
INTRODUCTION
LX
11
The metric system is based on quantities of one, ten, one hundred, one thousand and one million.
The following chart will assist in converting metric units to equivalent English and SAE units, or vise versa.
CONVERSION FORMULAS AND EQUIVALENT VALUES
MULTIPLY
BY
TO GET
MULTIPLY
BY
TO GET
in-lbs
x
0.11298
= Newton Meters
(Nm)
Nm
x 8.851
= in-lbs
ft-lbs
x
1.3558
= Newton Meters
(Nm)
Nm
x
0.7376
= ft-lbs
Inches Hg (60 F)
x 3.377
= Kilopascals (kPa)
kPa
x
0.2961
= Inches Hg
psi
x 6.895
= Kilopascals (kPa)
kPa
x 0.145
= psi
Inches
x 25.4
= Millimeters (mm)
mm
x
0.03937
= Inches
Feet
x
0.3048
= Meters (M)
x 3.281
= Feet
Yards
x
0.9144
= Meters
x
1.0936
= Yards
mph
x
1.6093
= Kilometers/Hr.
(Km/h)
Km/h
x
0.6214
= mph
Feet/Sec
x
0.3048
= Meters/Sec (M/S)
M/S
x 3.281
= Feet/Sec
mph
x
0.4470
= Meters/Sec (M/S)
M/S
x 2.237
= mph
Kilometers/Hr. (Km/h)
x
0.27778
= Meters/Sec (M/S)
M/S
x 3.600
Kilometers/Hr. (Km/h)
COMMON METRIC EQUIVALENTS

1 inch = 25 Millimeters
1 Cubic Inch = 16 Cubic Centimeters
1 Foot = 0.3 Meter
1 Cubic Foot = 0.03 Cubic Meter
1 Yard = 0.9 Meter
1 Cubic Yard = 0.8 Cubic Meter
1 Mile = 1.6 Kilometers

Refer to the Metric Conversion Chart to convert torque values listed in metric Newton- meters (Nm). Also, use the
chart to convert between millimeters (mm) and inches (in.).
12
INTRODUCTION
LX
TORQUE REFERENCES
DESCRIPTION
Individual Torque Charts appear within many or the Groups. Refer to the Standard Torque Specifications Chart for
torque references not listed in the individual torque charts.
INTRODUCTION
LX
13
VECI LABEL
DESCRIPTION
All vehicles are equipped with a combined VECI label. This label is located in the engine compartment.
The
VECI label contains the following:

Engine family and displacement
Evaporative family
Emission control system schematic
Certification application
Engine timing specifications (if adjustable)
Idle speeds (if adjustable)
Spark plug and gap
The label also contains an engine vacuum schematic. There are unique labels for vehicles built for sale in the state
of California and the country of Canada. Canadian labels are written in both the English and French languages.
These labels are permanently attached and cannot be removed without defacing information and destroying label.
14
INTRODUCTION
LX
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

DESCRIPTION
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is
attached to the top left side of the instrument panel.
The VIN contains 17 characters that provide data concerning the vehicle. Refer to the decoding chart to
determine the identification of a vehicle.
To protect the consumer from theft and possible fraud
the manufacturer is required to include a Check Digit
at the ninth position of the Vehicle Identification Number. The check digit is used by the manufacturer and
government agencies to verify the authenticity of the
vehicle and official documentation. The formula to use
the check digit is not released to the general public.
VIN DECODING INFORMATION

POSITION
INTERPRETATION
Country of Origin
CODE = DESCRIPTION
1 = Manufactured by
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc.
A = Chrysler (Hatchback)
Make
B = Dodge (Sedan)
C = Chrysler (Sedan)
D = Dodge (Hatchback)
3 = Passenger Car
Vehicle Type
4 = Multipurpose Passenger Vehicle

Without Side Air Bags Sales Code
(CGS) (Hatchback)
With Side Air Bags Sales Code
(CGS) (Hatchback)
INTRODUCTION
LX
POSITION
INTERPRETATION
15
CODE = DESCRIPTION
H = Restraint System Air bags
Front Next Generation Multi-Stage
Sales Code (CG1) Witht Side Air
Bags Sales Code (CGS)
J = Restraint System Air Bags Front
Next Generation Multi Stage Sales
Code (CG1) Without Side Air Bags
Sales Code (CGS)
Restraint System
K = Restraint System Advanced

Multistages Front Air Bags Sales
Code (CG3) With Side Air Bags
Sales Code (CGS)
L = Restraint System Advanced
Multistage Front Air Bags Sales
Code (CG3) With Side Air Bags
Sales Code (CGS)

Without Side Air Bags Sales Code
(CGS) (Hatchback)
8= Multipurpose Passenger Vehicle
With Side Air Bags Sales Code
(CGS) (Hatchback)
E = 3001- 4000 lbs. (1361- 1814)
KG (Hatchback)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
F = 4001- 5000 lbs. (1815 - 2267)
KG (Hatchback)
A = 300 / 300C / SRT-8/ Charger
(RWD) (LWD)
5
Vehicle Line
K = 300 / 300C (AWD) (LWD)

R = 300C/ SRT-8 (RWD) (RHD)
V = 300 Touring / Magnum (RWD)
Z = 300 Touring Magnum (AWD)
4 - H High Line
5 = P Premium
6 = S Sport
7 = X Special
Series
B = 4 Speed Automatic, Sales

Code (DG6)
B = 4 Speed Automatic VLP, Sales
Code (DGV)
E = 5 Speed Automatic, Sales
Code (DGJ)
3 = 4 Door Sedan Tall
Body Style
7 = Hatchback Tall
16
INTRODUCTION
POSITION
LX
INTERPRETATION
CODE = DESCRIPTION
D = 3.0L V-6 cyl. Turbo Diesel
Sales Code (EXL)
G = 3.5L V-6 cyl. High Output 24
Valve MPI Gasoline Sales Code
(EGG)
H = 5.7L V-8 cyl. HEMI Multiple
Displacement Gasoline Sales Code
(EZB)
M = 3.0L V6 CYL 24 Valve Turbo
Diesel Sales Code (EXL)
(Hatchback)
R = 2.7L V6 Cyl. 24V DOHC
Gasoline (MPI) Sales Code (EER)
Engine
T = 2.7L V6 CYL 24 ValveDOHC

Gasoline MPI Sales Code (EER)
(Hatchback)
V = 3.5l V6 CYL 24 Valve High
Output Gasoline, Sales Code (EZB)
(Hatchback)
W= 6.1L V8 CYL SRT HEMI
Gasoline SMPI, Sales Code (ESF)
2 = 5.7L V8 CYL HEMI Multiple
Displacement Gasoline Sales Code
( EZB) (Hatchback)
3 = 6.1L V8 CYL SRT HEMI
Gasoline SMPI, Sales Code (ESF)
(Hatchback)
Check Digit
0 through 9 or X
10
Model Year
6 = 2006
11
Assembly Plant
12 Through 17
Vehicle Build Sequence
H = Brampton Assembly
Six Digit Number Assigned By
Assembly Plant
LX
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

DESCRIPTION
A vehicle certification label is attached to every
DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicle. The label certifies that the vehicle conforms to all applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Standards. The label also lists:
Month and year of vehicle manufacture.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The gross
front and rear axle weight ratings (GAWRs) are
based on a minimum rim size and maximum cold
tire inflation pressure.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Type of vehicle.
Type of rear wheels.
Bar code.
Month, Day and Hour (MDH) of final assembly.
Paint and Trim codes.
Country of origin.
The label is located on the driver-side door shut-face.
INTRODUCTION
17
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
LX
0-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PARTS AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS
DESCRIPTION
LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
FLUID TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
FLUID TYPES
DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ENGINE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ENGINE COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TRANSFER CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
BRAKE FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
POWER STEERING FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
OPERATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
FLUID CAPACITIES
SPECIFICATIONS - FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . 10
FLUID FILL AND CHECK LOCATIONS
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
LUBRICATION POINTS
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
DESCRIPTION
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
HOISTING
STANDARD PROCEDURE - HOISTING . . . . . . . . . 20
JUMP STARTING
STANDARD PROCEDURE
JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
TOWING
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . 24
0-2
DESCRIPTION
DaimlerChrysler Corporation uses international symbols to identify engine compartment lubricant and fluid
inspection and fill locations.
LX
LX
0-3
PARTS AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

DESCRIPTION
LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS
SPECIALIZED LUBRICANTS AND OILS
Some maintenance or repair procedures may require the use of specialized lubricants or oils. Consult the appropriate sections in this manual for the correct application of these lubricants.
Chassis
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Steering Gear & Linkage, Ball

Joints, Prop Shafts & Yokes,
Wheel Bearings
MoparT Multi-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB
Body
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, and Genuine Part
Hinges:
Door & Hood
Swing Gate
MoparT Engine Oil

MoparT Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB
Latches: Door, Hood/Safety

Catch, Swing Gate
Seat Regulator & Track
Lock Cylinders
MoparT Lock Cylinder Lube
FLUID TYPES
When service is required, DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends that only MoparT brand parts, lubricants and
chemicals be used. MoparT provides the best engineered products for servicing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles.
Only lubricants bearing designations defined by the following organization should be used to service a Chrysler
Corporation vehicle.
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
American Petroleum Institute (API)
National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI)
API QUALITY CLASSIFICATION

This symbol on the front of an oil container means
that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API) to meet all the lubrication requirements specified by DaimlerChrysler Corporation.
0-4
LX
GEAR LUBRICANTS
SAE ratings also apply to multigrade gear lubricants. In addition, API classification defines the lubricants usage.
Such as API GL-5 and SAE 75W-90.
LX
0-5
FLUID TYPES
DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
NOTE: Refer to Service Procedures in this group for fluid level checking procedures.
MoparT ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid is the recommended fluid for DaimlerChrysler automatic transmissions.
Dexron II fluid IS NOT recommended. Clutch chatter can result from the use of improper fluid.
MoparT ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified
from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an
indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually
become brown. This is normal. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and
color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change.
FLUID ADDITIVES
DaimlerChrysler strongly recommends against the addition of any fluids to the transmission, other than those automatic transmission fluids listed above. Exceptions to this policy are the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks.
Various special additives and supplements exist that claim to improve shift feel and/or quality. These additives and
others also claim to improve converter clutch operation and inhibit overheating, oxidation, varnish, and sludge.
These claims have not been supported to the satisfaction of DaimlerChrysler and these additives must not be
used. The use of transmission sealers should also be avoided, since they may adversely affect the integrity of
transmission seals.
AXLE
NOTE: DaimlerChrysler recommends the use of MoparT lubricants. Fluid additives are not required for these
axles.
FRONT AXLE
175MM FIA - MoparT Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant 75W-90
REAR AXLE
198MM RII - MoparT Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant 75W-140
210MM RII - MoparT Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant 75W-140
ENGINE OIL
WARNING: New or used engine oil can be irritating to the skin. Avoid prolonged or repeated skin contact
with engine oil. Contaminants in used engine oil, caused by internal combustion, can be hazardous to your
health. Thoroughly wash exposed skin with soap and water. Do not wash skin with gasoline, diesel fuel,
thinner, or solvents, health problems can result. Do not pollute, dispose of used engine oil properly. Contact
your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area.
When service is required, DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends that only MoparT brand parts, lubricants and
chemicals be used. MoparT provides the best engineered products for servicing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles.
Only
lubricants bearing designations defined by the following organization should be used.

Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
American Petroleum Institute (API)
National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI)
0-6
LX
Association des Constructeurs Europens d Automobiles (European Automobile Manufacturers Association)

(ACEA)
API SERVICE GRADE CERTIFIED

Use an engine oil that is API Certified. MoparT provides engine oils, meeting Material Standard
MS-6395, that meet or exceed this requirement.
SAE VISCOSITY
SAE 5W-30 engine oils are recomended for the
2.7L and 3.5L engines, for all operating temperatures. These engine oils improve low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The recommended engine oil viscosity for vehicles equipped
with the 5.7L engine is SAE 5W-20. Vehicles with
5.7L engines equipped with Multiple Displacement
System (MDS) must use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to
do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS). Refer to Multi
Displacement System under Starting and Operating for details. Refer to the engine oil filler cap for
the recommened engine oil viscosity for each
vehicle. An SAE viscosity grade is used to specify the
viscosity of engine oil. Use only engine oils with multiple viscosities such as 5W-20 or 5W-30. These are specified
with a dual SAE viscosity grade which indicates the cold-to-hot temperature viscosity range.
NOTE: For 5.7L INTERNATIONAL APPLICATIONS ONLY: SAE 5W30 may be substituted for the recommended SAE 5W20 if the 5W20 viscosity is not available in the region.
NOTE: For 6.1L only Use API rated SL/CF full synthetic engine oil, such as Mobil 1T. SAE 0W-40 is
recommended. Refer to the engine oil viscosity
chart for the correct SAE grade meeting
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-10725.
ACEA Categories
For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils that meet the requirements of ACEA A1/B1, A2/B2, or A3/B3.
ENERGY CONSERVING OIL

An Energy Conserving type oil is recommended for gasoline engines. The designation of ENERGY CONSERVING
is located on the label of an engine oil container.
LX
0-7
CONTAINER IDENTIFICATION
Standard engine oil identification notations have been
adopted to aid in the proper selection of engine oil.
The identifying notations are located on the front label
of engine oil plastic bottles and the top of engine oil
cans.
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). DiamlerChrysler only recommend API Certified engine oils
that meet the requirements of Material Standard
MS-6395. Use MoparT or an equivalent oil meeting
the specification MS-6395.
SYNTHETIC ENGINE OILS

There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity
standard. Follow the service schedule that describes
your driving type.
ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES/SUPPLEMENTS

The manufacturer does not recommend the addition of any engine oil additives/supplements to the specified
engine oil. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to enhance engine oil performance. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to extend engine oil change intervals. No additive is known to be safe for
engine durability and can degrade emission components. Additives can contain undesirable materials that harm the
long term durability of engines by:
Doubling the level of Phosphorus in the engine oil. The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standard Approval
Committee) GF-2 and GF-3 standards require that engine oil contain no more than 0.10% Phosphorus to protect the vehicles emissions performance. Addition of engine oil additives/supplements can poison, from the
added sulfur and phosphorus, catalysts and hinder efforts to guarantee emissions performance to 80,000
miles.
Altering the viscosity characteristics of the engine oil so that it no longer meets the requirements of the specified viscosity grade.
Creating potential for an undesirable additive compatibility interaction in the engine crankcase. Generally it is
not desirable to mix additive packages from different suppliers in the crankcase; there have been reports of
low temperature engine failures caused by additive package incompatibility with such mixtures.
ENGINE COOLANT
WARNING: ANTIFREEZE IS AN ETHYLENE GLYCOL BASE COOLANT AND IS HARMFUL IF SWALLOWED OR
INHALED. IF SWALLOWED, DRINK TWO GLASSES OF WATER AND INDUCE VOMITING. IF INHALED, MOVE
TO FRESH AIR AREA. SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY. DO NOT STORE IN OPEN OR UNMARKED
CONTAINERS. WASH SKIN AND CLOTHING THOROUGHLY AFTER COMING IN CONTACT WITH ETHYLENE
GLYCOL. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. DISPOSE OF GLYCOL BASE COOLANT PROPERLY, CONTACT YOUR DEALER OR GOVERNMENT AGENCY FOR LOCATION OF COLLECTION CENTER IN YOUR
AREA.
WARNING: DO NOT OPEN A COOLING SYSTEM WHEN THE ENGINE IS AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE OR
HOT UNDER PRESSURE, PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT. AVOID RADIATOR COOLING FAN WHEN
ENGINE COMPARTMENT RELATED SERVICE IS PERFORMED, PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT.
0-8
LX
CAUTION: Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze protection and less corrosion protection.
The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder
head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/
fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air.
The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection.
MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene glycol base coolant
with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% Ethylene Glycol and 50% distilled water
to obtain a freeze point of -37C (-35F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with
fresh properly mixed coolant solution.
CAUTION: Do not use coolant additives that are claimed to improve engine cooling.
CAUTION: MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any
other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified non-HOAT or other HOAT coolant, may
result in engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion
protection.
COOLANT PERFORMANCE
The required ethylene-glycol (antifreeze) and distilled water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating
conditions. The coolant performance of various mixtures follows:
Pure Distilled Water - Distilled water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for
purpose of heat transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion.
100 percent Ethylene-Glycol - The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of distilled
water to dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to
rise to as high as 149C (300F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic and soften solder. The increased
temperature can result in engine detonation. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22C (-8F).
50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Distilled Water - Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to
-37C (-34F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If
percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided
with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7C (-90F). A higher percentage
will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat
because specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water.
CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol.
TRANSFER CASE
Recommended lubricant for the MS140 transfer case is MoparT Transfer Case Lubricant - LX.
BRAKE FLUID
The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type
of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only MoparT Brake Fluid or
equivalent from a tightly sealed container.
CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from an container which has been left open. An open
container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid.
CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type
fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake
system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid,
etc.
LX
0-9
POWER STEERING FLUID

The recommended fluid for the power steering system is MoparT Power Steering fluid + 4 or MoparT ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Both Fluids have the same material standard specifications (MS-9602).
MoparT ATF+4 (and MoparT Power Steering fluid + 4), when new, is red in color. ATF+4 is dyed red so it can be
identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and
is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, ATF+4 will begin to look darker in color and may
eventually become brown. THIS IS NORMAL. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change.
The power steering system is filled-for-life at the factory and requires no regular maintenance. Although not required
at specific intervals, the fluid level may be checked periodically. Check the fluid level anytime there is a system
noise or fluid leak suspected. (Refer to 19 - STEERING/PUMP/FLUID - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
OPERATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

The automatic transmission fluid is selected based upon several qualities. The fluid must provide a high level of
protection for the internal components by providing a lubricating film between adjacent metal components. The fluid
must also be thermally stable so that it can maintain a consistent viscosity through a large temperature range. If the
viscosity stays constant through the temperature range of operation, transmission operation and shift feel will remain
consistent. Transmission fluid must also be a good conductor of heat. The fluid must absorb heat from the internal
transmission components and transfer that heat to the transmission case.
0 - 10
LX
FLUID CAPACITIES
SPECIFICATIONS - FLUID CAPACITIES
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
Fuel Tank - V6 Engine
68 L (18 gal.)
Fuel Tank - V8 Engine
72 L (19 gal.)
Engine Oil* - 2.7L
5.7L (6.0 qts.)
Engine Oil* - 3.5L
5.7L (6.0 qts.)
Engine Oil* - 5.7L
6.6 L (7.0 qts.)
Engine Oil* - 6.1L
6.6 L (7.0 qts.)
Cooling System - 2.7L**
9.2 L (9.7 qts.)
10.0 L (10.6 qts.)
13.8 L (14.6 qts.)
14.0 L (14.8 qts.)
*(includes filter)
**(includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Service Fill - NAG1
5.0 L (10.6 pts.)
Overhaul Fill - NAG1
7.7 L (16.3 pts.)L
Service Fill - 42RLE
3.8L (4.0 qts)
Overhaul Fill - 42RLE
8.3L (17.6 pts)L
LDry fill capacity. Depending on type and size of internal cooler, length and inside diameter of cooler lines, or use
of an auxiliary cooler, these figures may vary. (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/AUTOMATIC/FLUID - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
TRANSFER CASE
MS140
0.6L (1.3 pts.)

AXLE - FRONT
175MM FIA Axle
600 ml (0.63 qts)

AXLE - REAR
198 MM RII Axle
1.4L (1.5 qts.)
210 MM RII Axle
1.6L (1.7 qts.)
LX
FLUID FILL AND CHECK LOCATIONS

DESCRIPTION
The fluid check/fill points and lubrication locations are located in each applicable Sections.
0 - 11
0 - 12
LUBRICATION POINTS
DESCRIPTION
Lubrication point locations are located in each applicable Sections.
LX
LX
0 - 13
DESCRIPTION
For 2.7L engines with Federal Certified Emission Control Systems, and all 6.1L engines, follow Maintenance
Schedule A from 0 to 102,000 miles, or Schedule B from 0 to 105,000 miles.
For 2.7L engines with California Certified Emission Control Systems, and all 3.5L and 5.7L engines follow
Maintenance Schedule A or B from 0120,000 miles.
There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule B. It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the
vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an L.
Day or night temperatures are below 32 F (0 C).
Stop and go driving.
Extensive engine idling.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90 F (32 C).
Trailer towing.L
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).L
Off-road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule B of the (Maintenance Schedules( section of this manual.
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170,000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow schedule B of the (Maintenance Schedules( section of
this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule (B(.
Second is Schedule A. It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule
9B9.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval
that occurs first.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION: Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel

Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is
at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
Once a Month
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
0 - 14
LX
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation.
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for proper fit.
At Each Oil Change
Change the engine oil filter.

Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the brake hoses.
Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension components.
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
SCHEDULE B
Follow schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions. Change the
automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under one
or more of the conditions marked with an L.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
Trailer towing.L
Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial services).L
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.
this manual.
Miles
(Kilometers)
3,000
6,000
9,000
12,000
15,000
18,000
(5 000)
(10 000)
(15 000)
(20 000)
(25 000)
(30 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if

not replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace

if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings

and rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.

Miles
21,000
24,000
27,000
30,000
33,000
36,000
(35 000)
(40 000)
(45 000)
(50 000)
(55 000)
(60 000)


if required.*
(Kilometers)
LX
Miles
(Kilometers)
21,000
24,000
27,000
30,000
33,000
36,000
(35 000)
(40 000)
(45 000)
(50 000)
(55 000)
(60 000)
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.

and rotors.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV

valve.*
Rotate the tires.
Miles
(Kilometers)
0 - 15
X
X
39,000
42,000
45,000
48,000
51,000
54,000
(65 000)
(70 000)
(75 000)
(80 000)
(85 000)
(90 000)


if required.*

and rotors.
Change the rear axle fluid.
Rotate the tires.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All

Wheel Drive (AWD) only
Miles
57,000
60,000
63,000
66,000
69,000
72,000
(95 000)
(100 000)
(105 000)
(110 000)
(115 000)
(120 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter,

if not replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and

replace if required.*
(Kilometers)
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L

Engine.

and rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive

belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
Check and replace, if necessary, the

PCV valve.*
Change the automatic transmission

fluid and filter.
Flush and replace engine coolant at

60 months if not done at 102,000
miles.
Rotate the tires.
0 - 16
Miles
(Kilometers)
LX
75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
90,000
(125 000)
(130 000)
(135 000)
(140 000)
(145 000)
(150 000)


Engine.

and rotors.

PCV valve.*
Rotate the tires.

Miles
93,000
96,000
99,000
102,000
105,000
(155 000)
(160 000)
(165 000)
(170 000)
(175 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not

replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if

required.*
(Kilometers)
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and

rotors.
Replace the engine timing belt 3.5L

Engine.
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L

Engines.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt

and tensioner. Replace if required.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel

Drive (AWD) only
Flush and replace engine coolant at 102,000

miles if not done at 60 months.
Rotate the tires.

Miles
108,000
111,000
114,000
117,000
120,000
(180 000)
(185 000)
(190 000)
(195 000)
(200 000)


required.*
(Kilometers)

rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engines.
X
X
X
X
LX
Miles
(Kilometers)
0 - 17
108,000
111,000
114,000
117,000
120,000
(180 000)
(185 000)
(190 000)
(195 000)
(200 000)

valve.*
Change the automatic transmission fluid and

filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120

months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions
warranty.
This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
receipts.
SCHEDULE A
Miles
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
(10 000)
(20 000)
(30 000)
(40 000)
(50 000)
(60 000)
[6]
[12]
[18]
[24]
[30]
[36]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.

if required.*
(Kilometers)
[Months]

and rotors.
Miles
Rotate the tires.
X
X
X
X
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
(70 000)
(80 000)
(90 000)
(100 000)
(110 000)
(120 000)
[42]
[48]
[54]
[60]
[66]
[72]
Change engine oil and engine oil

filter.

(Kilometers)
[Months]

Inspect the front and rear brake
linings and rotors.
Engine.
X
X
X
X
Check and Inspect the accessory

drive belt and tensioner. Replace if
required.
miles.
0 - 18
Miles
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
(70 000)
(80 000)
(90 000)
(100 000)
(110 000)
(120 000)
[42]
[48]
[54]
[60]
[66]
[72]
(Kilometers)
[Months]
LX

PCV valve. *

Rotate the tires.
X
X
Miles
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
(130 000)
(140 000)
(150 000)
(160 000)
(170 000)
[78]
[84]
[90]
[96]
[102]

required.*
(Kilometers)
[Months]

rotors.

Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L Engines.

valve.*
Replace the engine timing belt 3.5L Engine.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at

102,000 miles if not done at 60 months.

Rotate the tires.
X
X
Miles
108,000
114,000
120,000
(180 000)
(190 000)
(200 000)
[108]
[114]
[120]
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
(Kilometers)
[Months]

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
X
X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve.*
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, if not

replaced at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions
warranty.
receipts.
LX
0 - 19
WARNING:
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
0 - 20
LX
HOISTING
STANDARD PROCEDURE - HOISTING
The lifting points for the sedan.
Refer to Owners Manual provided with vehicle for
proper emergency jacking procedures.
WARNING: THE HOISTING AND JACK LIFTING
POINTS PROVIDED ARE FOR A COMPLETE VEHICLE. WHEN THE ENGINE OR REAR SUSPENSION
IS REMOVED FROM A VEHICLE, THE CENTER OF
GRAVITY IS ALTERED MAKING SOME HOISTING
CONDITIONS UNSTABLE. PROPERLY SUPPORT
OR SECURE VEHICLE TO HOISTING DEVICE
WHEN THESE CONDITIONS EXIST.
CAUTION: Do not position hoisting device on any
suspension component, including the front or rear
suspension crossmembers. Do not hoist on the
front and rear bumpers, the lower liftgate crossmember, the lower radiator crossmember, or the
front engine mount.
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
DRIVE ON LIFT
SAE HOISTING SYMBOLS
FRAME CONTACT LIFT (SINGLE POST)
CHASSIS LIFT (DUAL LIFT)
OUTBOARD LIFT (DUAL LIFT)
FLOOR JACK
HOISTING PADS
FLOOR JACK
LX
The lifting points for the wagon.
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
DRIVE ON LIFT
SAE HOISTING SYMBOLS
FLOOR JACK
HOISTING PADS
FLOOR JACK
0 - 21
0 - 22
LX
JUMP STARTING
STANDARD PROCEDURE
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: REVIEW ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND WARNINGS IN THE BATTERY SYSTEM SECTION OF
THE SERVICE MANUAL. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
DO NOT JUMP START A FROZEN BATTERY, PERSONAL INJURY CAN RESULT.
IF EQUIPPED, DO NOT JUMP START WHEN MAINTENANCE FREE BATTERY INDICATOR DOT IS YELLOW
OR BRIGHT COLOR.
DO NOT JUMP START A VEHICLE WHEN THE BATTERY FLUID IS BELOW THE TOP OF LEAD PLATES.
DO NOT ALLOW JUMPER CABLE CLAMPS TO TOUCH EACH OTHER WHEN CONNECTED TO A
BOOSTER SOURCE.
DO NOT USE OPEN FLAME NEAR BATTERY.
REMOVE METALLIC JEWELRY WORN ON HANDS OR WRISTS TO AVOID INJURY BY ACCIDENTAL ARCING OF BATTERY CURRENT.
WHEN USING A HIGH OUTPUT BOOSTING DEVICE, DO NOT ALLOW BATTERY VOLTAGE TO EXCEED 16
VOLTS. REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED WITH DEVICE BEING USED.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous
if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Dont
lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the
vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12
volts.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: When using another vehicle as a booster, do not allow vehicles to touch. Electrical systems can
be damaged on either vehicle.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting.
NOTE: The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
LX
0 - 23
TO JUMP START A DISABLED VEHICLE:

Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable
reach and without letting the vehicles touch. Set
the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the
OFF (or LOCK) position for both vehicles.
Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary
electrical loads.
Connect one end of the jumper cable RED clamp
to the remote jump start positive battery post in
the engine compartment of the disabled vehicle.
Connect the other end of the jumper cable RED
clamp to the positive terminal of the booster battery.
Connect the jumper cable BLACK clamp, first to
the negative terminal of the booster battery and
then connect the other end of the jumper cable BLACK clamp to a suitable engine ground on the disabled
vehicle battery. Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground.
DISCONNECT CABLE CLAMPS AS FOLLOWS:

Disconnect BLACK cable clamp from engine ground on disabled vehicle.
When using a booster vehicle, disconnect BLACK cable clamp from battery negative terminal. Disconnect RED
cable clamp from battery positive terminal.
Disconnect RED cable clamp from battery positive terminal on disabled vehicle.
0 - 24
LX
TOWING
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TOWING
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not allow towing attachment devices to contact the fuel tank or lines, fuel leak can result.
Do not lift or tow vehicle by front or rear bumper.
Do not go under a lifted vehicle if not supported properly on safety stands.
Do not allow passengers to ride in a towed vehicle.
Use a safety chain that is independent from the towing attachment device.
CAUTION: Do not damage brake lines, exhaust system, shock absorbers, sway bars, or any other under
vehicle components when attaching towing device to vehicle.
Do not secure vehicle to towing device by the use of front or rear suspension or steering components.
Remove or secure loose or protruding objects from a damaged vehicle before towing.
Refer to state and local rules and regulations before towing a vehicle.
Do not allow weight of towed vehicle to bear on lower fascia, air dams, or spoilers.
RECOMMENDED TOWING EQUIPMENT

RWD vehicles, a flat bed towing device is recommended.
AWD vehicles, a flat bed towing device is recommended.
CAUTION:
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to
the front fascia and air dams will result.
The only approved method of towing is with a
flat bed truck.
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will
occur.
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission
may result.
GROUND CLEARANCE
CAUTION: If vehicle is towed with wheels removed, install lug nuts to retain brake drums or rotors.
be sure the has at least 100 mm (4 in.) ground clearance. If minimum ground clearance cannot be reached, use a
towing dolly. If a flat bed device is used, the approach angle should not exceed 15 degrees.
If using a wheel lift towing device, the disabled vehicle should be raised until the lifted wheels are a minimum 100
mm (4 in.) from the ground. Be sure there is at least 100 mm (4 in.) clearance between the tail pipe and the ground.
If necessary, remove the wheels from the front end of the vehicle and lower the front end closer to the ground, to
increase the ground clearance at the rear of the vehicle. Install lug nuts on wheel attaching studs to retain brake
rotors.
LOCKED VEHICLE TOWING

When a locked vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly or flat bed hauler.
LX
0 - 25
FLAT BED TOWING TIE DOWNS

CAUTION: Do not tie vehicle down by attaching chains or cables to suspension components or engine
mounts, damage to vehicle can result.
The vehicle can be tied to a flat bed device using the pair of front transportation slots on the bottom surface of the
rails, behind the front wheels. The rear transportation slots are on the bottom of the left bumper extension and in the
bracket extending inboard of the right bumper extension.
WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved
method of towing with out the ignition key is with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on
the ground)
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to
be traveled must not exceed 48 km (30) miles, and the towing speed must not exceed 48 km/h (30 mph). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative, or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 48 km (30) miles, the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed or the drive
shaft disconnected at the rear axle drive flange.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLEY

The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolley. Vehicle damage may occur.
SUSPENSION
LX
2-1
SUSPENSION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
SUSPENSION
STANDARD PROCEDURE
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
REAR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
WHEEL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2-2
SUSPENSION
LX
SUSPENSION
STANDARD PROCEDURE
LUBRICATION
There are no serviceable lubrication points on the front or rear suspension. The ball joints are sealed-for-life and
require no maintenance.
FRONT
LX
2-3
FRONT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
FRONT
DESCRIPTION
FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FRONT SUSPENSION - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT SUSPENSION FASTENER TORQUE . . . 5
SPECIAL TOOLS
FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
HUB AND BEARING
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
HUB AND BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
REMOVAL
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
INSTALLATION
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
KNUCKLE - AWD
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
KNUCKLE - RWD
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DISASSEMBLY - BALL JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
ASSEMBLY - BALL JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
BALL JOINT - LOWER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
LOWER BALL JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
ARM - LOWER CONTROL - AWD

REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ARM - LOWER CONTROL - RWD
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SHOCK ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
INSTALLATION
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
BAR - STABILIZER
REMOVAL
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
INSTALLATION
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
STRUT - TENSION
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
BALL JOINT - UPPER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
UPPER BALL JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ARM - UPPER CONTROL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
2-4
FRONT
LX
FRONT
DESCRIPTION
FRONT SUSPENSION
The front suspension for both All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) and Rear-Wheel-Drive (RWD) vehicles is a long and short arm
design.
Each side of the AWD front suspension includes the
following components:
Hub And Bearing
Knuckle (4)
Lower Control Arm (4)
Shock Assembly (2)
Stabilizer Bar and Link (2)
Upper Control Arm (1)
Each side of the RWD front suspension includes the

following components:
Hub And Bearing
Knuckle (3)
Lower Control Arm (5)
Shock Assembly (1)
Stabilizer Bar (6) and Link (7)
Tension Strut (4)
Upper Control Arm (2)
FRONT SUSPENSION - SRT8

The SRT8 front suspension is very similar to the standard RWD front suspension but some components have been
modified for better handling and durability. Most component bushings are increased rate bushings. Service of all
front suspension components remain the same as the standard RWD components. When components differ, be
sure to use only SRT8 components on SRT8 vehicles.
FRONT
LX
2-5
The front knuckle (8) for the SRT8 is different from the
standard RWD knuckle. Although similar in appearance, the knuckle has been modified to accept the
larger 20 inch tire and wheel assembly. Also, the
mounting bosses for the disc brake caliper have been
moved downward to allow for mounting of the Brembo
four-piston disc brake caliper (2).
Although serviced the same, the components of the SRT8 shock assembly are unique to this vehicle. The front
shock absorber is manufactured by BilsteinT. It can be easily identified by its color. It is painted yellow. Because the
shock absorber is a mono-tube design, it is important to handle it with care and not support the shock by it tubular
housing.
The front stabilizer bar diameter has been increased for the SRT8 to the size of that used on Export vehicles, 30
mm. It is serviced in the same manner as the standard RWD bar.
SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT SUSPENSION FASTENER TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
ENGINE CRADLE MOUNTING BOLTS
185
136
HUB NUT - AWD
212
157
HUB NUT - RWD
250
184
KNUCKLE DUST SHIELD SCREWS
10
89
LOWER CONTROL ARM CRADLE NUT
176
130
LOWER CONTROL ARM BALL JOINT

NUT - AWD
122
90
LOWER CONTROL ARM BALL JOINT

NUT - RWD
68 + 90 TURN
50 + 90 TURN
176
130
68 + 90 TURN
50 + 90 TURN
SHOCK ABSORBER CLEVIS BRACKET

LOWER BOLT - AWD
174
128
SHOCK ABSORBER CLEVIS BRACKET

PINCH BOLT - AWD
61
45
SHOCK ABSORBER LOWER

MOUNTING BOLT - RWD
174
128
SHOCK ABSORBER UPPER

MOUNTING NUTS
27
20
239
SHOCK ABSORBER SHAFT NUT
95
70
STABILIZER BAR LINK UPPER

(SHOCK) NUT
128
95
TENSION STRUT CRADLE NUT

TENSION STRUT BALL JOINT NUT
2-6
FRONT
DESCRIPTION
LX
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
STABILIZER BAR LINK LOWER NUT
128
95
STABILIZER BAR ISOLATOR RETAINER

BOLTS
60
44
STABILIZER BAR HEAT SHIELD

SCREWS
62
UPPER CONTROL ARM BALL JOINT

NUT
47 + 90 TURN
35 + 90 TURN
UPPER CONTROL ARM BODY NUTS
75
55
OUTER TIE ROD BALL JOINT NUT
85
63
TIE ROD JAM NUT
75
55
FRONT
LX
SPECIAL TOOLS
FRONT SUSPENSION
Remover/Installer, Ball Joint 9320
Remover, Ball Stud 9360
Wrench, Shock Nut 9362
2-7
2-8
FRONT
LX
HUB AND BEARING

DESCRIPTION
The front wheel bearing and wheel hub of this vehicle are a one piece sealed unit or hub and bearing unit type
assembly.
On All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicles, the hub and bearing (1) is mounted to the knuckle using four mounting
bolts and to the axle half shaft using a retaining nut.
The center of the AWD hub and bearing is splined to
match the outer joint of the axle half shaft.
On Rear-Wheel-Drive (RWD) vehicles, the hub and

bearing (1) is mounted to the center of the spindle
using a retaining nut.
All front hub and bearings have five wheel mounting
studs (3) on the hub flange for mounting the wheel to
the vehicle. The wheel mounting studs are the only
replaceable components of the hub and bearing. Otherwise, the hub and bearing is serviced only as a
complete assembly.
On RWD vehicles, a magnetic encoder (2) for
wheel speed sensor is pressed onto the hub
bearing. A magnetic encoder is not located on
AWD hub and bearing. It is pressed onto the axle
shaft outer joint.
the
and
the
half

HUB AND BEARING
NOTE: The hub and bearing is designed for the life of the vehicle and should require no maintenance.
With wheel and brake rotor removed, rotate flanged outer ring of hub. Excessive roughness, lateral play or resistance to rotation may indicate dirt intrusion or bearing failure. If the rear wheel bearings exhibit these conditions
during inspection, the hub and bearing assembly should be replaced.
Damaged bearing seals and resulting excessive grease loss may also require bearing replacement. Moderate
grease loss from bearing is considered normal and should not require replacement of the hub and bearing assembly.
LX
FRONT
2-9
REMOVAL
AWD
1. Raise and support vehicle. (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
2. Remove wheel mounting nuts (3), then tire and
wheel assembly (1).
3. While a helper applies brakes to keep hub from

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from the axle half
shaft (2).
4. Access and remove front brake rotor. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR
REMOVAL)
2 - 10
FRONT
LX
5. Remove four bolts (3) fastening hub and bearing

(2) to knuckle.
6. Slide hub and bearing (2) off axle half shaft (1) and
knuckle.
RWD
wheel assembly (1).
REMOVAL)
LX
4. Remove dust cap (2). When doing this, avoid damaging internal bore of hub to preserve seal integrity.
5. Remove hub nut (1).
6. Slide hub and bearing off knuckle spindle.
INSTALLATION
AWD
NOTE: Before installing hub and bearing on end of
axle half shaft, ensure isolation washer is present
on end of half shaft. Inspect washer making sure it
is not worn or damaged. Washer can be installed
in either direction on shaft.
FRONT
2 - 11
2 - 12
FRONT
1. Slide hub and bearing (2) onto axle half shaft (1).
Position hub and bearing onto knuckle, lining up
mounting bolt holes.
2. Install four bolts (3) fastening hub and bearing in
place. Tighten mounting bolts to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.)
torque.
3. Install brake rotor, then disc brake caliper and
adapter assembly. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR - INSTALLATION)
4. Install hub nut (1) on end of axle half shaft (2).

While a helper applies brakes to keep hub from
turning, tighten hub nut to 213 Nm (157 ft. lbs.)
torque.
5. Install tire and wheel assembly (1) (Refer to 22 TIRES/WHEELS - INSTALLATION). Tighten wheel
mounting nuts (3) to 150 Nm (110 ft. lbs.) torque.
6. Lower vehicle.
LX
LX
7. Pump brake pedal several times to ensure vehicle
has a firm brake pedal before moving vehicle.
8. Check and adjust brake fluid level in reservoir (1)
as necessary.
9. Road test vehicle and make several stops to wear
off any foreign material on brakes and to seat
brake pads.
RWD
NOTE: Prior to installation, inspect magnetic
encoder (for wheel speed sensor) (2) for any damage and make sure any metal debris sticking to it
is removed.
1. Slide hub and bearing onto knuckle spindle.
FRONT
2 - 13
2 - 14
FRONT
2. Install hub nut (1) on end of spindle. Tighten hub

nut to 250 Nm (184 ft. lbs.) torque.
NOTE: Install a new dust cap to preserve seal
integrity.
4. Install NEW dust cap (2) on hub and bearing.
6. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
brake pads.
LX
LX
FRONT
2 - 15
KNUCKLE - AWD
REMOVAL
wheel assembly (1).

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from axle half shaft
(2).
2 - 16
FRONT
4. Remove clip (3) fastening wheel speed sensor (2)

to knuckle (4).
5. Remove screw (1) fastening wheel speed sensor
(2) to knuckle (4). Pull sensor head (4) out of
knuckle.
REMOVAL)
7. Remove nut (1) from outer tie rod end (2) stud.
8. Using Puller (2), Special Tool 9360, separate tie

rod stud (1) from knuckle.
LX
LX
9. Loosen nut (4) attaching lower control arm ball joint
stud to knuckle (3). Back nut off until nut is even
with end of stud. Keeping nut on at this location
will help keep end of stud from distorting while
using Puller in next step.
CAUTION: In following step, use care not to damage ball joint seal boot while sliding Puller, Special
Tool 9360, into place past seal boot.
10. Using Puller (2), Special Tool 9360, separate ball
joint stud from knuckle.
11. Remove tool.
12. Remove nut (1) from end of ball joint stud.
13. Loosen nut (4) attaching upper ball joint stud (1)
to knuckle. Back nut off until nut is even with end
of stud. Keeping nut on at this location will
help keep end of stud from distorting while
FRONT
2 - 17
2 - 18
FRONT
14. Using Puller (2), Special Tool 9360, separate
upper ball joint stud (1) from knuckle.
15. Remove tool.
16. Remove nut (1) from end of upper ball joint stud.
17. Slide knuckle (3) off half shaft (1) and remove
from vehicle.
18. If hub and bearing and dust shield need to be

removed:
a. Remove four bolts (3) fastening hub and bearing (2) to knuckle.
b. Slide hub and bearing out of knuckle along
with shield.
LX
FRONT
LX
INSTALLATION
1. If hub and bearing and dust shield needs to be
installed on knuckle, perform following:
a. Slide shield onto rear of hub and bearing.
b. Slide hub and bearing into knuckle, lining up
mounting holes in hub and bearing with those
in shield and knuckle
c. Install four bolts (3) fastening hub and bearing
in place. Tighten mounting bolts to 68 Nm (50
ft. lbs.) torque.

2 - 19
2 - 20
FRONT
2. Place knuckle (3) over lower ball joint stud and

guide hub and bearing (2) onto axle half shaft (1).
3. Start NEW nut (4) on lower ball joint stud. Do not
tighten at this time.
CAUTION: It is important to tighten nut as

described in following step to avoid damaging ball
stud joint.
4. Place upper ball joint stud (1) through hole in top of
knuckle and install nut (4). Tighten nut by holding
ball joint stud with a hex wrench while turning nut
with a wrench. Tighten nut using crow foot wrench
on torque wrench to 47 Nm + 90 turn (35 ft. lbs. +
90 turn) torque.

stud joint.
5. Tighten lower ball joint nut (4) by holding ball joint
stud with a hex wrench while turning nut with a
wrench. Tighten nut using crow foot wrench on
torque wrench to 68 Nm + 90 turn (50 ft. lbs. +
90 turn) torque.
LX
LX
stud joint.
6. Place outer tie rod stud through hole in knuckle (3)
and install nut (1). Tighten nut by holding stud with
a wrench while turning nut with another wrench.
Tighten nut using crow foot wrench on torque
wrench to 85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.) torque.

torque.
9. Install wheel speed sensor (2) head into knuckle

(4) and install mounting screw (1). Tighten screw to
11 Nm (95 in. lbs.) torque.
10. Attach wheel speed sensor cable routing clip (3)
at knuckle (4).
FRONT
2 - 21
2 - 22
FRONT
12. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
15. Perform wheel alignment. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL
ALIGNMENT
STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
LX
LX
FRONT
2 - 23
KNUCKLE - RWD
REMOVAL
wheel assembly (1).
3. Remove screw (3) fastening wheel speed sensor to

knuckle (1). Pull sensor head (4) out of knuckle.
4. Remove wheel speed sensor cable routing clip (2)
from brake flex hose routing bracket (5).
2 - 24
FRONT
5. Remove screw (3) fastening brake flex hose routing bracket (2) to knuckle (4).
REMOVAL)
7. Remove nut (1) from outer tie rod end stud.
8. Using Puller (2), Special Tool 9360, separate tie

rod stud (1) from knuckle.
LX
LX
9. Loosen nut (4) attaching upper ball joint stud (1) to
knuckle. Back nut off until nut is even with end of
stud. Keeping nut on at this location will help
keep end of stud from distorting while using
Puller in next step.
11. Remove nut (4) from end of upper ball joint stud
(1).
FRONT
2 - 25
2 - 26
FRONT
12. Loosen nut (3) attaching tension strut (2) ball joint
stud to knuckle. Back nut off until nut is even with
end of stud. Keeping nut on at this location will
13. Using Puller (1), Special Tool 9360, separate tension strut ball joint stud (2) from knuckle.
14. Remove nut (3) from end of tension strut (2) ball
joint stud.
15. Loosen nut (5) attaching ball joint stud to lower
control arm (4). Back nut off until nut is even with
LX
FRONT
LX
joint stud (2) from lower control arm.
17. Remove nut (5) from end of ball joint stud attaching lower control arm to knuckle.
18. Remove knuckle from vehicle.
19. If hub and bearing needs to be removed, perform

the following:
a. Remove dust cap (2). When doing this, avoid
damaging internal bore of hub to preserve seal
integrity.
b. Remove hub nut (1).
c. Slide hub and bearing off knuckle spindle.
20. If shield needs to be removed from knuckle,
remove 3 mounting screws, then shield.
21. If lower control arm ball joint needs to be removed
from knuckle, (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/
FRONT/KNUCKLE - DISASSEMBLY).
2 - 27
2 - 28
FRONT
DISASSEMBLY - BALL JOINT

NOTE: To perform this procedure it works best to
mount Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F, in a vise
and hold the component in your hands.
1. Place Receiver (1), Special Tool 9320-5, into cup
area of Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F, as shown
and tighten set screw.
2. Place Remover (2), Special Tool 9320-3, onto end
of screw-drive of Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F,
as shown.
3. Using a pair of snap-ring pliers (2), remove snapring (3) from bottom of ball joint (1).
LX
LX
4. Install halves of Support Clamp (1), Special Tool
9320-1, over ball joint (2) and around knuckle surface (3) as shown. Install and snug Support Clamp
(1) screws from underside.
5. Position knuckle (1) over tools guiding top of ball

joint inside of Receiver (6), then hand tighten Press
screw-drive (4) until Remover (3) comes into contact with bottom of ball joint (2).
NOTE: When positioning knuckle over tools, make

sure Receiver, Special Tool 9320-5, sets into
recessed area (4) of Support Clamp, Special Tool
9320-1.
FRONT
2 - 29
2 - 30
FRONT
6. Tighten Press screw-drive (4) forcing ball joint out

of knuckle (1) and into Receiver (6).
7. Loosen screw-drive (4) and remove knuckle (1)
from Press. Remove ball joint from Receiver (6).
8. Remove Support Clamp (1) from knuckle (3).
LX
LX
ASSEMBLY - BALL JOINT

NOTE: To perform this procedure it works best to
mount Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F, in a vise
and hold the component in your hands.
1. Place Installer (1), Special Tool 9320-4, into cup
area of Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F, as shown
and tighten set screw.
2. Place Remover (2), Special Tool 9320-3, onto end
of screw-drive of Press (3), Special Tool C-4212F,
as shown.Note: This is the reverse of how
Remover is installed on screw-drive for
removal.
3. Start NEW ball joint (1) into bore of knuckle (2).
FRONT
2 - 31
2 - 32
FRONT
LX
4. Position knuckle (1) over tools guiding top of ball

joint inside of Installer (5) until outside flange of ball
joint (4) comes into contact with Installer, then hand
tighten Press screw-drive (3) until Remover (2)
comes into contact with bottom of knuckle (1).
5. Using hand tools, tighten screw-drive (3), pressing
ball joint into knuckle until flange (4) comes to a
stop against the knuckle.
6. Loosen screw-drive and remove knuckle from
Press.
7. Install snap-ring (3) into groove on bottom of ball

joint.
8. Inspect ball joint for proper fit. Make sure seal boot
is uniform and wire rings are in place.
9. Install knuckle on vehicle. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
1. If shield needs to be installed on knuckle, place shield in place and attach to knuckle using 3 screws. Tighten
screws to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.) torque.
FRONT
LX
2. If hub and bearing needs to be installed on
knuckle, perform the following:
a. Slide hub and bearing onto knuckle spindle.
b. Install hub nut (1) on end of spindle. Tighten
hub nut to 250 Nm (184 ft. lbs.) torque.
c. Install NEW dust cap (2).
NOTE: Install a new dust cap to preserve seal
integrity.
CAUTION: Before installing knuckle on lower control arm, measure height of ball joint seal boot (1)
mounted on knuckle. If seal boot height is above
25.5 mm, any air inside seal boot must be
expelled. To do so, follow these steps.
Tip ball joint stud completely to one side.
Using thumb and index finger, gently squeeze
seal boot together at center expelling any air.
Do not allow grease to be release.
Push down very top of seal boot.
Return ball joint stud to original centered
position.
Measure ball joint seal boot height (1) making
sure it is within specification.
Wipe any grease from ball joint stud.
3. Place knuckle (1) over lower ball joint studs on

vehicle and loosely install NEW nuts by hand.
CAUTION: It is important to tighten nuts as
described in following steps to avoid damaging
ball stud joints.
4. Completely install NEW nut (5) on ball joint stud
attaching lower control arm (4) to knuckle (1).
Tighten nut by holding ball joint stud with a hex
wrench while turning nut with a wrench. Tighten nut
using crow foot wrench on torque wrench to 68
Nm + 90 turn (50 ft. lbs. + 90 turn) torque.
attaching tension strut (2) to knuckle (1). Tighten
nut by holding ball joint stud with a hex wrench
while turning nut with a wrench. Tighten nut using
crow foot wrench on torque wrench to 68 Nm +
90 turn (50 ft. lbs. + 90 turn) torque.
2 - 33
2 - 34
FRONT

stud joint.
90 turn) torque.

stud joint.
7. Place outer tie rod stud through hole in knuckle (2)
and install nut (1). Tighten nut by holding stud with
a wrench while turning nut with another wrench.
9. Install screw (3) fastening brake flex hose routing

bracket (2) to knuckle (4). Tighten screw to 12 Nm
(106 in. lbs.) torque.
LX
LX
10. Install wheel speed sensor head (4) into knuckle
and install mounting screw (3). Tighten screw to
11. Attach wheel speed sensor cable and routing clip
(2) to brake flex hose routing bracket (5).
13. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
ALIGNMENT
STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
FRONT
2 - 35
2 - 36
FRONT
LX
BALL JOINT - LOWER

DESCRIPTION
AWD
The ball joint for the lower control arm is pressed into the lower control arm. The ball joint is a sealed for life
component and cannot be maintenance lubricated. The ball joint is lubricated for life at the time of assembly. No
attempt should be made to ever add any lubrication to these ball joints.
Neither the ball joint, nor the seal boot for the lower control arm can be serviced as a separate component. They
entire arm must be replaced if either are damaged.
RWD
There are two lower ball joints on the RWD version of this vehicle. One in for the lower control arm and the other
for the tension strut. The ball joint for the lower control arm is pressed into the knuckle and the ball joint for the
tension strut is part of the tension strut. The ball joints are both sealed for life components and cannot be maintenance lubricated. These ball joints are lubricated for life at the time of assembly. No attempt should be made to
ever add any lubrication to these ball joints.
The ball joint for the lower control arm is a ball joint and seal boot cartridge type and can be replaced as a separate
component of the knuckle. The boot cannot be serviced separately. To service this ball joint, (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - DISASSEMBLY).
Neither the ball joint, nor the seal boot for the tension strut can be serviced as a separate component. They entire
tension strut must be replaced if either are damaged.
The ball joint connection to the lower control arm and the ball joint connection at the knuckle is achieved by an
interference fit created by the tapered stud of the ball joint and a tapered hole in the steering knuckle. The ball joint
stud is retained in the steering knuckle using a locking nut.

LOWER BALL JOINT
1. Raise vehicle on a drive-on hoist.
NOTE: If a drive-on hoist is not available, use wooden blocks with jack stands to support the lower control
arm in the ball joint area. Place the jack stands appropriately and lower the hoist placing weight on the
lower control arm. The lower control arms should now be supporting the vehicle weight.
2. Using a jack, lift the front end off the hoist and position a wooden block underneath lower control arm supporting
that corner of the vehicles weight.
3. Remove tire and wheel assembly. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - REMOVAL)
4. Attach a dial indicator as follows:
a. AWD Lower Control Arm Attach a dial indicator to base of lower control arm, then align dial indicators
contact pointer with direction of stud axis and touch machined flat on knuckle near ball joint. Zero dial indicator.
b. RWD Tension Strut Attach a dial indicator to base of tension strut, then align dial indicators contact pointer
with direction of stud axis and touch machined flat on knuckle near ball joint. Zero dial indicator.
c. RWD Lower Control Arm Attach a dial indicator to base of lower control arm, then align dial indicators
contact pointer with direction of stud axis and touch machined flat on knuckle near ball joint. Zero dial indicator.
NOTE: Use care when applying the load to the knuckle so as to not damage components of the suspension.
5. Insert a pry bar and rest it against lower control arm or tension strut (depending on which is being tested) and
use lever principle to push knuckle upward until dial indicator no longer moves.
LX
FRONT
2 - 37
6. Record any ball joint movement. If movement in the lower control arm exceeds 1.5 mm (.059 in.), the ball joint
is faulty.
7. If the lower ball joint for an All-Wheel-Drive vehicle needs replaced, the lower control arm needs to be replaced.
(Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/LOWER CONTROL ARM - REMOVAL)
8. If the ball joint for the lower control arm on a Rear-Wheel-Drive vehicle needs replaced, it can be serviced separately. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - DISASSEMBLY)
9. If the tension strut ball joint (RWD vehicle) needs replaced, the entire tension strut needs to be replaced. (Refer
to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/TENSION STRUT - REMOVAL)
REMOVAL
To service the lower ball joint for the lower control arm on RWD vehicles, the knuckle must be removed from the
vehicle, then the ball joint can be removed. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - REMOVAL) (Refer to
2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - DISASSEMBLY)
INSTALLATION
To install the ball joint for the lower control arm on RWD vehicles, refer to the following information. (Refer to 2 SUSPENSION/FRONT/KNUCKLE - ASSEMBLY)
2 - 38
FRONT
LX
ARM - LOWER CONTROL - AWD

REMOVAL
wheel assembly (1).

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from the axle half
shaft (2).
4. Remove belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
LX
5. Loosen nut (4) attaching lower control arm ball joint
stud to knuckle (3). Back nut off until nut is even
with end of stud. Keeping nut on at this location
will help keep end of stud from distorting while
joint stud from knuckle.
7. Remove tool.
8. Remove nut (1) from end of ball joint stud.
9. Back off nut (3) from bolt (1) attaching shock clevis
bracket (2) to lower control arm (7) until it is flush
with end of bolt.
10. Using a brass drift punch, tap the bolt out of the
clevis bracket until bolt serrations clear bracket.
11. Remove nut (3) and bolt (1) for clevis bracket and
control arm.
FRONT
2 - 39
2 - 40
FRONT
12. Remove mounting screws, then heat shields (3)

above both inner tie rod bellows (2).
CAUTION: While steering gear bolts are removed,

it important to avoid putting downward force on
steering gear.
13. Remove steering gear mounting bolts as listed:
a. Left side arm Remove bolts (3) and (4).
Loosen, but do not remove, bolt (2). It is important leave bolt (2) installed to avoid dropping
gear too far, putting excessive force on steering coupling.
b. Right side arm Remove bolts (2) and (3).
Loosen, but do not remove, bolt (4). It is important to leave bolt (4) installed to avoid dropping
gear too far, putting excessive force on steering coupling.
CAUTION: If the lower control arm bolt at the

engine cradle has a lengthwise grooved shaft (2),
it is a special wheel alignment adjustment bolt and
the bolt head (1) must not be rotated in the vehicle
or damage to the bolt and engine cradle will
result. While holding the bolt in place with a
wrench, remove the nut, then slide the bolt out of
the bushing and cradle taking note of bolt positioning in engine cradle for reassembly purposes.
The bolt needs to be installed in the same position
as removed to make sure wheel camber and
caster return to adjusted position.
LX
LX
14. Remove bolt (3) and nut securing forward end of
lower control arm (1) to engine cradle (2). If bolt
has a lengthwise grooved shaft (see above note),
remove bolt and nut by holding bolt stationary
with a wrench, removing nut, then sliding bolt out
of bushing and cradle while taking note of bolt
positioning in engine cradle for reassembly purposes.
15. Remove bolt and nut (4) securing rearward end of
lower control arm (1) to engine cradle (2). If bolt
has a lengthwise grooved shaft (see above note),
remove bolt and nut by holding bolt stationary
with a wrench, removing nut, then sliding bolt out
of bushing and cradle while taking note of bolt
positioning in engine cradle for reassembly purposes.
16. Slide lower control arm (1) from engine cradle (2)
and knuckle, and remove from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: If installing a lower control arm engine cradle bolt that is a wheel alignment adjustment bolt
(1) (identifying lengthwise grooved shaft (2)), make
sure to install it in the same position which it was
in upon removal. For more details on installation
of this special bolt, (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/
WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
1. Slide lower control arm (1) into position in engine

cradle (2) and place ball joint stem into mounting
hole in knuckle.
NOTE: When installing lower control arm engine
cradle bolts, it important to note that the forward
bolt is installed front-to-rear and the rearward bolt
is installed rear-to-front.
2. Install lower control arm mounting bolts and nuts (3
and 4). Do not tighten bolts at this time.
FRONT
2 - 41
2 - 42
FRONT
3. Raise steering gear to mounted position and install

lower mounting bolts (2 and 3). Install upper
mounting bolt (4) and nut. Tighten all mounting
bolts to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.) torque.
4. Install heat shields (3) above both inner tie rod bellows (2). Tighten mounting screws to 7 Nm (62 in.
lbs.) torque.
5. Pull downward on control arm and guide ball joint

stud into knuckle (3). Install NEW nut (4) on ball
joint stud. Tighten nut by holding ball joint stud with
a hex wrench while turning nut with a wrench.
LX
LX
6. Align shock clevis bracket (2) with lower control
arm (7) bushing and install mounting bolt (1) and
nut (3). Do not tighten nut at this time.

torque.
9. Lower vehicle.
10. Position vehicle on an alignment rack/drive-on lift.
FRONT
2 - 43
2 - 44
FRONT
NOTE: When tightening lower shock clevis mounting bolt, do not attempt rotating bolt. Bolt shaft is
serrated. Turn nut only.
11. Tighten lower shock clevis bracket bolt nut (3) to
174 Nm (128 ft. lbs.) torque.
ALIGNMENT
STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
CAUTION: If lower control arm engine cradle bolt

is a wheel alignment adjustment bolt (lengthwise
grooved shaft (2)), be sure to only tighten nut. Do
not rotate bolt or damage to cradle will occur.
13. Once camber is found to be within specifications,
tighten lower control arm cradle bolt nuts to 176
Nm (130 ft. lbs.) torque while holding the bolts
stationary.
14. install belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - INSTALLATION)
LX
LX
FRONT
2 - 45
ARM - LOWER CONTROL - RWD

REMOVAL
wheel assembly (1).
4. Remove screws (1) fastening stabilizer bar heat

shield (3) on side of control arm repair.
2 - 46
FRONT
5. Remove bolts (2) fastening stabilizer bar bushing

retainer (1) in place on side of control arm repair.
6. Remove retainer halves (1)(2) from around stabilizer bar bushing (3).
7. Utilizing slit, remove bushing (1) from stabilizer bar

(2).
LX
LX
NOTE: In the following step, the lower control arm
cradle bolt (3) is accessed through the opening (2)
created by removal of the bushing from the stabilizer bar (4).
CAUTION: If the lower control arm bolt at the

engine cradle has a lengthwise grooved shaft (2),
it is a special wheel alignment adjustment bolt and
the bolt head (1) must not be rotated in the vehicle
or damage to the bolt and engine cradle will
result. While holding the bolt in place with a
wrench, remove the nut, then slide the bolt out of
the bushing and cradle taking note of bolt positioning in engine cradle for reassembly purposes.
The bolt needs to be installed in the same position
as removed to make sure wheel camber and
caster return to adjusted position.
8. Remove bolt and nut (1) securing lower control arm

(2) to engine cradle. If bolt has a lengthwise
grooved shaft (see above note), remove bolt and
nut by holding the bolt in place with a wrench,
removing nut, then sliding bolt out of bushing and
cradle while taking note of bolt positioning in lower
control arm bushing for reassembly purposes.
FRONT
2 - 47
2 - 48
FRONT
9. Remove bolt (3) securing shock assembly (1) to

lower control arm (4).

to knuckle (1). Pull sensor head (4) out of
knuckle.
from brake flex hose routing bracket (5).
12. Loosen nut (5) attaching ball joint stud to lower

control arm (4). Back nut off until nut is even with
LX
LX
joint stud (2) from lower control arm.
14. Remove nut (5) from end of ball joint stud attaching lower control arm to knuckle.
15. Pry knuckle downward and slide ball joint stud out
of lower control arm. Position knuckle outward,
away from lower control arm.
16. Slide lower control arm out of engine cradle and
remove from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: If installing a lower control arm engine cradle bolt that is a wheel alignment adjustment bolt
(1) (lengthwise grooved shaft (2)), make sure to
install it in the same position which it was in upon
removal. For more details on installation of this
special bolt, (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL
ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
FRONT
2 - 49
2 - 50
FRONT
1. Slide lower control arm (4) into position in engine

cradle and install mounting bolt from rear.
2. Install nut (1) on lower control arm cradle bolt, but

do not tighten at this time.
CAUTION: Before installing knuckle to lower control arm, measure height of ball joint seal boot (1)
mounted on knuckle. If seal boot height is above
25.5 mm, any air inside seal boot must be
expelled. To do so, follow these steps.
Tip ball joint stud completely to one side.
Using thumb and index finger, gently squeeze
seal boot together at center expelling any air.
Do not allow grease to be release.
Push down very top of seal boot.
Return ball joint stud to original centered
position.
Measure ball joint seal boot height (1) making
sure it is within specification.
Wipe any grease from ball joint stud.
LX
LX
3. Pull knuckle (1) downward and position lower control arm (4) over ball joint stud. Release knuckle,
guiding stud into lower control arm. Install NEW nut
(5) on ball joint stud attaching lower control arm (4)
to knuckle (1). Tighten nut by holding ball joint stud
with a hex wrench while turning nut with a wrench.
wrench to 68 Nm + 90 turn (50 ft. lbs. + 90 turn)
torque.

and install mounting screw (3). Tighten screw to 11
Nm (95 in. lbs.) torque.
(2) to brake flex hose routing bracket (5).
6. Install lower shock mounting bolt (3) attaching

shock assembly (1) to lower control arm (4). Do
not tighten bolt at this time.
FRONT
2 - 51
2 - 52
FRONT
8. Lower vehicle.
CAUTION: Because stabilizer bar is disconnected
at cradle it is important to use extra care while
moving vehicle to alignment rack/drive-on lift.
10. Tighten lower shock mounting bolt (3) to 174 Nm
(128 ft. lbs.) torque.
11. Perform wheel alignment. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE)

CAUTION: If the control arm engine cradle bolt is
a wheel alignment adjustment bolt (lengthwise
grooved shaft (2)), be sure to only tighten the nut.
Do not rotate the bolt head (1) or damage to the
bushing will occur.
12. Once camber is found to be within specifications,
using a crowfoot wrench, tighten lower control
arm cradle bolt nut (1) to 176 Nm (130 ft. lbs.)
torque while holding the bolt stationary.
LX
LX
CAUTION: Because of stabilizer bushing outer
shape, it is very important to install bushings in
position discussed in following step.
13. Utilizing slit in bushing, install stabilizer bar bushing (1) against locating collar on stabilizer bar (2)
as shown. Make sure slit in bushing is positioned
toward rear of vehicle.
14. Install stabilizer bar bushing retainer halves (1)(2)

around bushing (3).
15. Install bolts (2) securing stabilizer bar bushing

retainer halves (2) to cradle. Tighten bolts (2) to
FRONT
2 - 53
2 - 54
FRONT
16. Install stabilizer bar heat shield (3) over stabilizer

bar bushing retainer. Install mounting screws (1).
17. Install belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/
BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
LX
LX
FRONT
2 - 55
SHOCK ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
AWD
wheel assembly (1).
3. While holding link ball joint stem from rotating,

remove nut (2) fastening stabilizer link (1) to shock
clevis bracket (3). Slide link ball joint stem from clevis bracket.
2 - 56
FRONT
4. Remove nut and pinch bolt (1) fastening clevis

bracket (3) to bottom of shock assembly (2).
5. Remove nut (3) and bolt (1) attaching shock clevis

bracket (2) to lower control arm (7).
6. Pull lower end of clevis bracket outward away from
lower control arm bushing, then slide it off shock
assembly. It may be necessary to use an appropriate prying tool to spread clamp area of clevis
bracket allowing removal from shock assembly.
7. Lower vehicle just enough to access upper shock

assembly mounting nuts (2).
8. If equipped, remove shock tower cap (1) from top
of shock assembly (4).
9. Remove three nuts (2) fastening shock assembly
(4) to shock tower (3).
10. Remove shock assembly from vehicle.
LX
LX
RWD
1. If equipped, remove front shock tower cap (1) from
top of shock assembly (4).
3. Raise and support vehicle. (Refer to LUBRICATION
& MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).
FRONT
2 - 57
2 - 58
FRONT
5. Remove nut (2) fastening stabilizer link (3) to shock

assembly (1). Slide link ball joint stem from shock
assembly.
6. Remove bolt (3) securing shock assembly (1) to

7. Disconnect wheel speed sensor cable routing clip

(2) at brake tube bracket (3).
LX
LX
9. Using Puller (2), Special Tool 9360, separate upper
ball joint stud (1) from knuckle.
(1).
11. Tip top of knuckle outward using care not to overextend bake flex hose.
12. Remove shock assembly from vehicle.
FRONT
2 - 59
2 - 60
FRONT
LX
DISASSEMBLY
The shock assembly must be removed from vehicle for it to be disassembled and assembled.
For shock assembly disassembly and assembly, use of shock Spring Compressor, Pentastar Service Equipment
(PSE) tool W-7200, or equivalent, is recommended to compress coil spring. Follow manufacturers instructions
closely.
WARNING: Do not remove shock shaft nut before coil spring is compressed. Coil spring is held under pressure and must be compressed, removing spring tension from upper and lower mounts, before shock
removal.
1. Position shock assembly coil spring (1) on hooks
(2) of Compressor following manufacturers instructions. Install clamp securing shock to lower spring
coil.
2. Position Compressor upper hooks (1) on upper coil

spring (2) following manufacturers instructions. To
ease installation, rotate shock as necessary positioning shock in compressor so that upper spring
coil ends (step in upper mount) at straight outward
position from Compressor.
3. Compress coil spring until all spring tension is
removed from upper mount.
LX
FRONT
2 - 61
4. Position Wrench (2), Special Tool 9362, on shock

shaft retaining nut. Next, insert 8 mm socket
though Wrench onto hex located on end of shock
shaft. While holding shock shaft from turning,
remove nut from shock shaft using Wrench.
5. Remove clamp from bottom of coil spring and
remove shock and lower isolator out through bottom of coil spring.
NOTE: If upper mount or coil spring needs to be serviced, proceed with next step, otherwise, proceed with
step 8.
6. Remove upper mount (1) from shock shaft and coil

spring.
NOTE: Prior to removing spring from compressor,
note location of lower spring coil end in relationship to compressor to ease assembly of components later.
7. Back off Compressor drive, releasing tension from
coil spring. Push back compressor upper hooks
and remove coil spring from Compressor.
2 - 62
FRONT
LX
8. Remove jounce bumper (4) from shock shaft by

pulling straight up and off.
9. Remove lower isolator (2) from shock body by pulling straight up and off shock shaft.
10. Inspect shock assembly components for following
and replace as necessary:
Inspect shock (3) for any condition of shaft binding over full stroke of shaft.
Inspect upper mount (5) for cracks and distortion
and its retaining studs for any sign of damage.
Inspect upper spring isolator (5) for severe deterioration.
Inspect lower spring isolator (2) for severe deterioration.
Inspect dust shield for tears and deterioration.
Inspect coil spring (1) for cracks in the coating
and corrosion.
Inspect jounce bumper (4) for cracks and signs of deterioration.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Use care not to damage coil spring coating during spring assembly. Damage to coating will jeopardize its corrosion protection.
NOTE: Left and right springs must not be interchanged.
NOTE: If coil spring has been removed from spring compressor, proceed with next step, otherwise, proceed
with step 4.
1. Place coil spring (part number tag end upward)
in compressor lower hooks following manufacturers
instructions. To ease shock reassembly, rotate coil
spring around until upper coil (1) ends at straight
outward position from Compressor. Proper orientation of spring to upper mount (once installed) is
necessary.
2. Position compressor upper hooks over coil spring
following manufacturers instructions.
3. Compress coil spring far enough to allow shock
installation.
LX
4. If separated, install upper mount (1) onto coil
spring (2). Match step in upper isolator to end of
spring coil.
5. Install lower spring isolator (2) on shock body (3).

6. Install jounce bumper (4) on shock shaft, small end
first.
7. Install shock through bottom of coil spring until

lower spring isolator (on shock) contacts lower end
of coil spring. Match step built into isolator (1) to
lower coil end (2). Once in this position, stabilizer
bar bracket, or clevis key on AWD models, should
point straight inward toward Compressor body. If
not, rotate isolator on shock body until alignment is
achieved when isolator is correctly positioned with
lower spring coil.
8. Install clamp to hold shock and coil spring together.
FRONT
2 - 63
2 - 64
FRONT
9. Install retaining nut (1) on shock shaft (2) as far as

possible by hand. Make sure nut is installed far
enough for 8 mm socket to grasp hex (2) on end of
shaft for tightening.
10. Install Wrench (on end of a torque wrench), Special Tool 9362, on shock shaft retaining nut. Next,
insert 8 mm socket though Wrench onto hex
located on end of shock shaft. While holding
shock shaft from turning, tighten nut using Wrench
to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.) torque.
11. Slowly release tension from coil spring by backing
off Compressor drive fully. As tension is relieved,
make sure shock components are properly in
place.
12. Remove clamp from lower end of coil spring and
shock. Push back spring compressor upper and
lower hooks, then remove shock assembly from
spring compressor.
13. Install shock assembly on vehicle. (Refer to 2 SUSPENSION/FRONT/SHOCK - INSTALLATION)
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
AWD
1. Guide shock assembly up into shock tower (3) and
into mounting holes.
2. Install three nuts (2) fastening shock assembly (4)
to shock tower (3). Tighten nuts to 27 Nm (20 ft.
lbs.) torque.
3. If equipped, align shock tower cap (1) with shock
mounting nuts (2) and snap into place.
4. Raise and support vehicle.

5. Pull lower end of shock assembly outward, then
slide clevis bracket (3) onto lower end. Slide clevis
bracket onto shock assembly until bracket contacts
collar on shock housing (2).
6. Install pinch bolt and nut (1) fastening clevis
bracket (3) to bottom of shock assembly (2). Install
pinch bolt from rear. Do not tighten at this time.
FRONT
2 - 65
2 - 66
FRONT
7. Slide clevis bracket (2) over bushing mounted in

8. Install bolt (1) and nut (3) attaching shock clevis
bracket (2) to lower control arm (7). Do not tighten
at this time.
9. Tighten pinch bolt (1) attaching clevis bracket to

shock assembly to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
10. Slide stabilizer link ball joint stem into clevis

bracket. Install nut (2) fastening link to clevis
bracket (3). Tighten nut by holding ball joint stud
while turning nut. Tighten nut using crow foot
wrench on torque wrench to 128 Nm (95 ft. lbs.)
torque.
LX
LX
12. Lower vehicle.
FRONT
2 - 67
2 - 68
FRONT
RWD
1. Place shock assembly into front suspension using
reverse direction in which it was removed.
stud joint.
90 turn) torque.
3. Connect wheel speed sensor cable routing clip (2)

at brake tube bracket (3).
LX
LX
4. Install lower shock mounting bolt (3) attaching
shock assembly (1) to lower control arm (4). Do
5. Slide stabilizer link (3) ball joint stem into shock

assembly from front. Install nut fastening link (3) to
shock assembly (1). Tighten nut by holding ball
joint stud while turning nut. Tighten nut using crow
foot wrench on torque wrench to 128 Nm (95 ft.
lbs.) torque.
7. Lower vehicle.
FRONT
2 - 69
2 - 70
FRONT

lbs.) torque.
LX
LX
FRONT
2 - 71
BAR - STABILIZER
REMOVAL
AWD
3. On each side of vehicle, remove nut (5) fastening
stabilizer link (3) to stabilizer bar (4). Slide link ball
joint stem (1) from bar.
4. On each side of vehicle, remove bolts (2) fastening

stabilizer bar isolator retainer (3) in place.
5. Remove stabilizer bar with isolators and retainers
from vehicle.
6. On each side of bar, remove retainers (3) from
around stabilizer bar isolators (1).
7. Utilizing slit, remove each isolator (1) from stabilizer bar (2).
RWD
2 - 72
FRONT
3. On each side of vehicle, remove screws (1) fastening stabilizer bar heat shield (3). Remove heat
shield.
4. On each side of vehicle, remove bolts (2) fastening

stabilizer bar isolator retainer (1) in place.
5. On each side of vehicle, remove retainer halves

(1)(2) from around stabilizer bar isolator (3).
LX
LX
FRONT
2 - 73
6. Utilizing slit, remove each isolator (1) from stabilizer bar (2).
7. On each side of vehicle, remove nut (5) fastening

stabilizer link (3) to stabilizer bar (4). Slide link ball
joint stem (1) from bar, then remove bar from
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
AWD
1. Utilizing slit in isolator, install each stabilizer bar isolator on bar. Make sure slit in isolator is positioned toward
rear of vehicle once installed on vehicle.
2. Install stabilizer bar isolator retainer over each isolator.
2 - 74
FRONT
NOTE: When attaching stabilizer link to stabilizer

bar, make sure link ball joint stem is pointed
inboard toward engine cradle.
3. Install stabilizer bar ends (4) to each stabilizer link
(3). Slide link ball joint stem (1) through mounting
hole in bar. Loosely install nuts (5) at this time.
4. Raise stabilizer bar to engine cradle, placing bushings (1) into mounted position.
5. Install bolts (2) securing each stabilizer bar isolator
retainer (3) to cradle. Tighten bolts to 60 Nm (44
ft. lbs.) torque.
6. While holding stem from rotating at hex (1) or flat

(2) tighten stabilizer link nuts at each end of stabilizer bar (4) to 128 Nm (95 ft. lbs.) torque.
LX
LX
7. Install belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
8. Lower vehicle.
RWD
NOTE: When attaching stabilizer link to stabilizer
bar, make sure link ball joint stem is pointed
inboard toward engine cradle.
1. On each side of vehicle, raise stabilizer bar (4) to
stabilizer link (3) and slide link ball joint stem (1)
through mounting hole in bar. Loosely install nut (5)
at this time.
CAUTION: Because of stabilizer isolator outer

shape, it is very important to install isolators in
position discussed in following step.
2. Utilizing slit in isolator, install each stabilizer bar
isolator (1) on bar resting against locating collar (2)
as shown. Make sure slit in isolator is positioned
toward rear of vehicle.
FRONT
2 - 75
2 - 76
FRONT
3. On each side of vehicle, install stabilizer bar isolator retainer halves (1)(2) around isolator (3).
4. On each side of vehicle, install bolts (2) securing

stabilizer bar isolator retainer halves (2) to cradle.
Tighten bolts (2) to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.) torque.
5. On each side of vehicle, install stabilizer bar heat

shield (3) over stabilizer bar isolator retainer. Install
mounting screws (1).
LX
LX
6. While holding stem from rotating at hex (1) or flat
(2) tighten stabilizer link nuts at each end of stabilizer bar (4) to 128 Nm (95 ft. lbs.) torque.
7. Install belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)

8. Lower vehicle.
FRONT
2 - 77
2 - 78
FRONT
LX
STRUT - TENSION
REMOVAL
wheel assembly (1).
4. Loosen nut (3) attaching tension strut (2) ball joint

stud to knuckle. Back nut off until nut is even with
LX
5. Using Puller (1), Special Tool 9360, separate tension strut ball joint stud (2) from knuckle.
6. Remove nut (3) from end of tension strut (2) ball

joint stud.
7. Rotate knuckle outward and push ball joint upward,
out of knuckle.
CAUTION: If the tension strut bolt at the engine

cradle has a lengthwise grooved shaft (2), it is a
special wheel alignment adjustment bolt and the
bolt head (1) must not be rotated in the vehicle or
damage to the bolt and engine cradle will result.
While holding the bolt in place with a wrench,
remove the nut, then slide the bolt out of the
bushing and cradle taking note of bolt positioning
in engine cradle for reassembly purposes. The
bolt needs to be installed in the same position as
removed to make sure wheel camber and caster
return to adjusted position.
FRONT
2 - 79
2 - 80
FRONT
8. Remove nut and bolt (2) securing tension strut (1)

to engine cradle (3).
9. Slide tension strut out of cradle bracket and
INSTALLATION
NOTE: If installing a tension strut engine cradle
bolt that is a wheel alignment adjustment bolt
(lengthwise grooved shaft (2)), make sure to install
it in the same position which it was in upon
removal. For more details on installation of this
special bolt, (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL
ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
1. Slide bushing end of tension strut (1) into cradle

bracket (3).
2. Install mounting bolt (2) from front through cradle
and bushing.
3. Install nut (2), but do not tighten at this time.
LX
LX
FRONT
2 - 81
4. Insert tension strut (2) ball joint stud downward,

into knuckle hole.
attaching tension strut (2) to knuckle (1). Tighten
nut by holding ball joint stud with a hex wrench
while turning nut with a wrench. Tighten nut using
crow foot wrench on torque wrench to 68 Nm +
90 turn (50 ft. lbs. + 90 turn) torque.
6. Install tire and wheel assembly (1) (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - INSTALLATION). Tighten wheel mounting
nuts (3) to 150 Nm (110 ft. lbs.) torque.
7. Lower vehicle.

CAUTION: If the tension strut engine cradle bolt is
a wheel alignment adjustment bolt (lengthwise
grooved shaft (2)), be sure to only tighten the nut.
Do not rotate the bolt head (1) or damage to the
bushing will occur.
2 - 82
FRONT
10. Once alignment is found to be within specifications, using a crowfoot wrench, tighten tension
strut cradle bolt nut (2) to 176 Nm (130 ft. lbs.)
torque while holding the bolt stationary.
11. Install belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/
BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
LX
LX
FRONT
2 - 83
BALL JOINT - UPPER

DESCRIPTION
The upper ball joint is pressed into the upper control arm. The ball joint is a sealed for life component and cannot
be maintenance lubricated. This ball joint is lubricated for life at the time of assembly. No attempt should be made
to ever add any lubrication to this ball joint.
Neither the upper ball joint, nor the seal boot can be serviced as a separate component. The entire upper control
arm must be replaced if either are damaged.
The ball joint connection at the knuckle is achieved by an interference fit created by the tapered stud of the ball joint
and a tapered hole in the steering knuckle. The ball joint stud is retained in the steering knuckle using a locking nut.

UPPER BALL JOINT
1. Raise vehicle on a drive-on hoist.
NOTE: If a drive-on hoist is not available, use wooden blocks with jack stands to support the lower control
arm in the ball joint area. Place the jack stands appropriately and lower the hoist placing weight on the
lower control arm. The lower control arms should now be supporting the vehicle weight.
2. Using a jack, lift the front end off the hoist and position a wooden block underneath lower control arm supporting
that corner of the vehicles weight.
3. Remove tire and wheel assembly. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - REMOVAL)
4. Attach a dial indicator to body of upper control arm, then align dial indicators contact pointer with direction of
stud axis and touch machined flat on end of knuckle near ball joint. Zero dial indicator.
NOTE: Use care when applying the load to the knuckle so as to not damage components of suspension.
5. Insert a pry bar and rest it against bottom of upper control arm and use lever principle to push arm upward until
dial indicator no longer moves.
6. Record any ball joint movement. If movement in the control arm exceeds 1.5 mm (.059 in.), the ball joint is faulty.
7. If the ball joint needs replaced, the entire upper control arm needs to be replaced. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/
FRONT/UPPER CONTROL ARM - REMOVAL)
2 - 84
FRONT
LX
ARM - UPPER CONTROL

REMOVAL
1. If removing left upper control arm, remove and reposition coolant recovery container. (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
ENGINE/COOLANT RECOVERY CONTAINER - REMOVAL)
2. If removing right upper control arm, remove IPM from mount and reposition. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
DISTRIBUTION/INTEGRATED POWER MODULE - REMOVAL)
3. If equipped, remove front shock tower cap (1) from
top of shock assembly (4).
5. Remove nuts (2) from upper control arm mounting

bolts (1).
PROCEDURE)
LX
wheel assembly (1).
8. Disconnect wheel speed sensor cable routing clip

(2) at brake tube bracket (3).

FRONT
2 - 85
2 - 86
FRONT
(1).
12. Pull shock assembly (3) downward until studs
clear shock tower (2), then pull it outward allowing
access to upper control arm mounting bolts.
13. Export Only If servicing right upper control arm,

disconnect headlamp leveling sensor (2) link at
upper control arm (1).
LX
LX
FRONT
2 - 87
14. Remove upper control arm mounting (flag) bolts

(1).
15. Remove upper control arm (2) from bracket (3) in
shock tower (4).
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Although AWD and RWD upper control arms are similar in appearance, they are not interchangeable.
1. Slide upper control arm (2) into bracket (3) located
in shock tower (4).
2. Install upper control arm mounting (flag) bolts (1)
through bracket, arm and tower. Position flags on
bolt heads outward, toward wheel opening.
2 - 88
FRONT
3. Export Only If servicing right upper control arm,

connect headlamp leveling sensor (2) link at upper
control arm (1).
4. Move shock assembly (3) allowing studs to be

inserted through shock tower (2) mounting holes.
90 turn) torque.
6. Connect wheel speed sensor cable routing clip (2)

at brake tube bracket (3).
LX
LX
8. Lower vehicle to curb position.
9. Install nuts (2) on upper control arm body mounting

bolts (1). Tighten nuts to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.) torque.

lbs.) torque.
FRONT
2 - 89
2 - 90
FRONT
LX
12. If installing left upper control arm, install coolant recovery container. (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/COOLANT
RECOVERY CONTAINER - INSTALLATION)
13. If installing right upper control arm, install IPM. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER DISTRIBUTION/INTEGRATED POWER MODULE - INSTALLATION)
REAR
LX
2 - 91
REAR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
REAR
DESCRIPTION
REAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
REAR SUSPENSION - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
SPECIFICATIONS
REAR SUSPENSION FASTENER TORQUE . . . . 93
SPECIAL TOOLS
REAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
HUB AND BEARING
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
HUB AND BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
REMOVAL
HUB AND BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
HUB AND BEARING - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
INSTALLATION
HUB AND BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
HUB AND BEARING - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
KNUCKLE
REMOVAL
KNUCKLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
KNUCKLE - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
INSTALLATION
KNUCKLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
KNUCKLE - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
CAMBER LINK
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
COMPRESSION LINK
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
SPRING LINK
REMOVAL
SPRING LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
SPRING LINK - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
INSTALLATION
SPRING LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
SPRING LINK - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
TENSION LINK
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
TOE LINK
REMOVAL
LEFT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
RIGHT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
INSTALLATION
LEFT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
RIGHT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
SHOCK ABSORBER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
REMOVAL
STANDARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
LOAD-LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
INSTALLATION
STANDARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
LOAD-LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
SPRING
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
BAR - STABILIZER
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
2 - 92
REAR
LX
REAR
DESCRIPTION
REAR SUSPENSION
This vehicle utilizes a five-link rear suspension including the following major components:
Camber Link (1)
Compression Link (5)
Spring Link (2)
Tension Link (6)
Toe Link (3)
Coil Spring
Crossmember
Hub And Bearing
Knuckle (4)
Shock Absorber
Stabilizer Bar
The knuckle, camber link, compression link and tension link are aluminum castings. Extra care needs to
be taken when servicing these components.
Service Procedures for the crossmember can be
found in Frame And Bumpers. (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/FRAME/REAR CROSSMEMBER - REMOVAL)
REAR SUSPENSION - SRT8

The SRT8 rear suspension is very similar to the standard RWD front suspension but some components have been
modified for better handling and durability. Most component bushings are increased rate bushings. Service of all
rear suspension components remain the same as the standard RWD components. When components differ, be sure
to use only SRT8 components on SRT8 vehicles.
The rear knuckle for the SRT8 is different from the standard RWD knuckle. Although similar in appearance and in
service, the mounting bosses for the disc brake caliper have been moved downward to allow mounting of the
Brembo four-piston brake caliper. Due to this change, an updated special tool is needed to remove the sleeve that
retains the lower control arm ball joint to the knuckle.
The rear shock absorber used on this vehicle is a
load-leveling shock (2). This shock absorber appears
the same as the one used on the standard LX, but
has been specially calibrated for this vehicle. It can be
easily identified by an identification tag on its side (1).
This shock absorber is serviced the same as the standard load-leveling shock absorber.
REAR
LX
2 - 93
The rear stabilizer bar diameter has been increased for the SRT8 to the size of that used on Export vehicles, 15
mm. It is serviced in the same manner as the standard RWD bar.
SPECIFICATIONS
REAR SUSPENSION FASTENER TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
Brake Caliper Adapter Knuckle Bolts
119
88
Camber Link Crossmember Bolt
85
63
Camber Link Knuckle Bolt
98
72
Compression Link Crossmember Bolt
85
63
Compression Link Knuckle Bolt
81
60
Crossmember Mounting Bolts
180
133
Hub And Bearing Mounting Bolts
68
50
Hub Nut
213
157
Parking Brake Cable Knuckle Screw
71
Shock Absorber Mounting Bolts - Upper
52
38
Shock Absorber Mounting Bolt Nut - Lower
72
53
Spring Link Crossmember Bolt
108
80
Spring Link Knuckle Nut
138
102
Stabilizer Bar Isolator Retainer Bolts
61
45
Stabilizer Link Nuts
61
45
Tension Link Crossmember Bolt
85
63
Tension Link Knuckle Bolt
98
72
Toe Link Crossmember Nut
108
80
Toe Link Knuckle Bolt
81
60
2 - 94
REAR
SPECIAL TOOLS
REAR SUSPENSION
Remover/Installer, Sleeve 9361
Remover/Installer, Sleeve 9361-UPD
LX
LX
REAR
2 - 95
HUB AND BEARING

DESCRIPTION
The rear wheel bearing and wheel hub of this vehicle
are a one piece sealed unit or hub and bearing unit
type assembly. The hub and bearing (1) is mounted to
the center of the knuckle using 4 bolts. It has five
wheel mounting studs (2) on the hub flange.
The center of the hub and bearing is splined to match
the axle half shaft.
The wheel mounting studs used to mount the tire and
wheel to the vehicle are the only replaceable components of the hub and bearing. Otherwise, the hub and
bearing is serviced only as a complete assembly.

HUB AND BEARING
NOTE: The hub and bearing is designed for the life of the vehicle and should require no maintenance.
With wheel and brake rotor removed, rotate flanged outer ring of hub. Excessive roughness, lateral play or resistance to rotation may indicate dirt intrusion or bearing failure. If the rear wheel bearings exhibit these conditions
during inspection, the hub and bearing assembly should be replaced.
Damaged bearing seals and resulting excessive grease loss may also require bearing replacement. Moderate
grease loss from bearing is considered normal and should not require replacement of the hub and bearing assembly.
REMOVAL
HUB AND BEARING
2 - 96
REAR

wheel assembly (1).

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from the half shaft (2).
NOTE: In some cases, it may be necessary to

retract caliper piston in its bore a small amount in
order to provide sufficient clearance between
shoes and rotor to easily remove caliper from
knuckle. This can usually be accomplished before
guide pin bolts are removed, by grasping rear of
caliper and pulling outward working with guide
pins, thus retracting piston. Never push on piston
directly as it may get damaged.
4. Remove two bolts (1) securing disc brake caliper
adapter (3) to knuckle (2).
5. Remove disc brake caliper and adapter (3) from
knuckle as an assembly. Hang assembly out of
way using wire or a bungee cord. Use care not to
overextend brake hose when doing this.
LX
LX
REAR
2 - 97
6. Remove any clips (2) retaining brake rotor (3) to

wheel mounting studs.
7. Slide brake rotor (3) off hub and bearing (1).
8. Loosen each hub and bearing mounting bolt (2) a

turn or two at a time while pulling outward on hub
and bearing to avoid bolt contact with half shaft
outer joint. Once removed from threads in hub and
bearing (but not knuckle), allow bolts to stay in and
protrude through knuckle and brake support plate
to keep brake support plate in place when hub and
bearing is removed.
9. Slide hub and bearing off knuckle and half shaft.
HUB AND BEARING - SRT8

2 - 98
REAR
LX

wheel assembly (1).

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from the half shaft (2).
CAUTION: When pushing pistons back into caliper bores, use only a trim stick as shown or other suitable
soft tool. Never use a screwdriver or other metal pry bar due to potential damage to braking surface of
rotor, caliper, pistons or dust boots.
LX
4. Place trim stick (4) between brake pad (2) and
outer edge of rotor (3).
5. Using trim stick, slowly apply pressure against
brake pad (2) until both pistons (on that side of caliper) are completely bottomed in bores of caliper
half.
NOTE: Repeat above procedure to opposite brake
pad (1) and pistons as necessary.
6. Support spring link (1) using a transmission jack (5)

or other appropriate jack. Raise spring link just
enough to access brake caliper lower mounting bolt
(4) from above compression link (2).
7. Remove the lower and upper caliper mounting

bolts (1).
8. Remove brake caliper (2) with pads from knuckle
and brake rotor. Hang assembly out of way using
wire or a bungee cord. Use care not to overextend
brake hose when doing this.
REAR
2 - 99
2 - 100
REAR

11. Push inward on end of half shaft (2) until C/V

joints bottom. This is necessary to give as much
access to hub and bearing mounting bolts as
possible.
NOTE: It is important to keep suspension jacked

up as requested in Step 6 to ease access to lower
hub and bearing mounting bolts.
NOTE: Use a 3/8 inch drive wobble extension
along with a TorxT socket to access and remove
two top and lower front mounting bolt. Use a standard 3/8 inch drive universal joint along with a
TorxT socket to access and remove lower rear
mounting bolt.
12. Loosen each (of the four) hub and bearing mounting bolt a turn or two at a time while pulling outward on hub and bearing to avoid bolt contact
with half shaft outer joint. Once removed from
threads in hub and bearing (but not knuckle),
allow bolts to stay in and protrude through
knuckle and parking brake adapter to keep brake
LX
LX
REAR
2 - 101
adapter in place while hub and bearing is off vehicle.

13. Slide hub and bearing out of knuckle and off half shaft.
INSTALLATION
HUB AND BEARING
1. Position hub and bearing bolts though rear of knuckle and parking brake support just enough to hold support in
place as hub and bearing is installed.
2. Slide hub and bearing onto half shaft. Place hub and bearing through brake support, onto knuckle, lining up
mounting bolt holes with bolts.
3. Install four bolts (2) fastening hub and bearing in
place. Tighten mounting bolts to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.)
torque.
2 - 102
REAR
NOTE: Inspect disc brake pads and parking brake

shoes before brake rotor installation. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/
SHOES - INSPECTION)
4. Install brake rotor (3) over wheel mounting studs
and onto hub (1).
5. Install disc brake caliper and adapter assembly (3)

over brake rotor.
6. Install mounting bolts (1) securing caliper adapter
(3) to knuckle (2). Tighten bolts to 95 Nm (70 ft.
lbs.) torque.
7. Install hub nut (1) on end of half shaft (2). While a

helper applies brakes to keep hub from turning,
tighten hub nut to 213 Nm (157 ft. lbs.) torque.
8. Verify proper adjustment of the parking brake
shoes and adjust as necessary. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/PARKING
BRAKE/SHOES
ADJUSTMENT)
LX
LX
10. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
brake pads.
REAR
2 - 103
2 - 104
REAR
HUB AND BEARING - SRT8

axle half shaft, ensure isolation washer (1) is
present on end of half shaft. Inspect washer making sure it is not worn or damaged. Washer can be
installed in either direction on shaft.
NOTE: To help upon installation, make sure that

hub and bearing mounting bolts (1) extend
through knuckle (3) and parking brake adapter (2)
to hold adapter in place during hub and bearing
installation.
1. Position hub and bearing mounting bolts (1) though
rear of knuckle (3) and parking brake adapter (2)
just enough to hold adapter in place.
LX
LX
REAR
2 - 105
NOTE: Hub and bearing mounting bolt holes are

not evenly spaced. Upper mounting holes (2) are
not as far apart as lower mounting holes (1). Make
note of this before installing hub and bearing.
2. Slide hub and bearing onto half shaft. Insert hub
and bearing through parking brake adapter and
knuckle, lining up mounting bolt holes with bolts.
NOTE: Make sure suspension is jacked up as

requested during removal to ease access to lower
hub and bearing mounting bolts.
NOTE: Use a 3/8 inch drive wobble extension
along with a TorxT socket to slip past half shaft
outer C/V joint and install two top and lower front
mounting bolts. Use a standard 3/8 inch drive universal joint along with a TorxT socket to install
lower rear mounting bolt.
3. Carefully start all four mounting bolts into hub and
bearing. Using a cross pattern, tighten each hub
and bearing mounting bolt a turn or two at a time,
slowly drawing hub and bearing into mounted position. Periodically, push in on end of half shaft to
give as much room as possible for tools on mounting bolts. Tighten mounting bolts to 68 Nm (50 ft.
lbs.) torque.
NOTE: Inspect disc brake pads and parking brake shoes before brake rotor installation. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)
2 - 106
REAR
4. Clean hub face (1) to remove any dirt or corrosion

where rotor mounts.
5. Install brake rotor (2) over studs on hub and bearing (1).
6. Slide caliper with pads (2) over brake rotor and

align with knuckle.
7. Install caliper mounting bolts (1). Tighten bolts to
8. Remove jack from under spring link.
9. Install hub nut (1) on end of half shaft (2). While a

helper applies brakes to keep hub from turning,
tighten hub nut to 213 Nm (157 ft. lbs.) torque.
10. Verify proper adjustment of the parking brake
shoes and adjust as necessary. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/PARKING
BRAKE/SHOES
ADJUSTMENT)
LX
LX
12. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
brake pads.
REAR
2 - 107
2 - 108
REAR
LX
KNUCKLE
REMOVAL
KNUCKLE
2. Unclip wheel speed sensor cable at rear brake
rotor shield (1).
3. Remove screw (2) fastening sensor head (3) to
rear knuckle.
4. Remove wheel speed sensor head from knuckle.
5. Access and remove rear hub and bearing. (Refer
to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING REMOVAL)
6. Remove parking brake shoes. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES - REMOVAL)
7. If not removed, remove parking brake shoe actuator lever (1) from end of cable (2).
8. Remove shoe support from knuckle.
LX
9. Remove parking brake cable screw (2) at knuckle
(3) and pull cable (1) out of knuckle.
10. Position under-hoist utility jack or jack stand under
spring link. Raise jack head to contact spring link
at shock mount secure in place.
11. Remove spring link-to-knuckle nut and bolt (2).
CAUTION: It important to use Guide (2) , Special

Tool 9361-2, when tapping sleeve in knuckle to
help keep Tap (1) , Special Tool 9361-1, straight
during use or damage to Tap may occur.
12. Place Guide 9361-2 (2) against sleeve (3) in
knuckle to keep Tap 9361-1 (1) straight. Using
Tap with an appropriate handle, cut threads
approximately halfway through bushing (or about
six complete threads). It is important to back
tap out, clean out burrs and lubricate Tap
often during process.
REAR
2 - 109
2 - 110
REAR
LX
NOTE: Prior to using Special Tool 9361, lubricate

Bolt (1) threads to provide ease of use and promote tool longevity.
13. Assemble Remover, Special Tool 9361, as shown.
(1) Bolt 9361-3
(2) Nut
(3) Spherical Washer
(4) Thrust Bearing
(5) Sleeve 9361-4 (RWD)
(5) Sleeve 9361-5 (AWD Left Side)
(5) Sleeve 9361-6 (AWD Right Side)
NOTE: When installing thrust bearing on Remover,
be sure to place hardened side against nut. Place
bearing outer cage against stationary component.
NOTE: It is important to use appropriate Sleeve on
Remover to provide proper Tool-to-Knuckle contact. RWD sleeve can be used on either side while AWD
knuckles require specific left or right side Sleeves.
14. Thread Remover Bolt 9361-3 (1) into tapped
knuckle sleeve.
15. Rotate Nut down, matching Sleeve angled end
with angled face of knuckle.
16. Continue to rotate Nut until knuckle sleeve is
removed from knuckle. Discard knuckle sleeve;
replace it with new upon installation.
LX
REAR
2 - 111
17. Remove bolt and nut fastening compression link

(5) to knuckle (4).
18. Remove bolt fastening toe link (3) to knuckle (4).
19. Remove nut and bolt fastening stabilizer link to
knuckle (4).
20. Remove nut and bolt fastening tension link (6) to
knuckle (4).
21. Remove nut and bolt fastening camber link (1) to
knuckle (4).
22. Remove knuckle (4).
23. Remove hub mounting bolts from knuckle.
KNUCKLE - SRT8
2. Unclip wheel speed sensor cable at rear brake
rotor shield (1).
rear knuckle.
4. Remove wheel speed sensor head from knuckle.
5. Access and remove rear hub and bearing. (Refer
to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING REMOVAL)
6. Remove parking brake shoes. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES - REMOVAL)
7. If not removed, remove parking brake shoe actuator lever (1) from end of cable (2).
8. Remove shoe support from knuckle.
2 - 112
REAR
9. Remove parking brake cable screw (2) at knuckle

(3) and pull cable (1) out of knuckle.
spring link. Raise jack head to contact spring link
at shock mount secure in place.
CAUTION: It important to use Guide (2), Special

knuckle to keep Tap 9361-1 (1) straight. Using
Tap with an appropriate handle, cut threads
approximately halfway through bushing (or about
six complete threads). It is important to back
tap out, clean out burrs and lubricate Tap
often during process.
LX
LX
(1) Bolt 9361-3
(2) Nut
(3) Thrust Bearing
(5) Sleeve 9361-9 (Left Side - Shown in figure)
(5) Sleeve 9361-10 (Right Side)
NOTE: When installing thrust bearing (3) on
Remover, be sure to place hardened side against
nut (2). Place bearing outer cage against stationary component.
NOTE: It is important to use appropriate Sleeve
(9361-9 or 9361-10) on Remover to provide proper Tool-to-Knuckle contact.
knuckle sleeve.
15. Rotate Nut down, matching Sleeve (9361-9 or
9361-10) angled end with angled face of knuckle
(1). Make sure foot on Sleeve (3) is inserted
behind machined brake caliper mounting
boss.
17. Remove bolt and nut fastening compression link

(5) to knuckle (4).
18. Remove bolt fastening toe link (3) to knuckle (4).
19. Remove nut and bolt fastening stabilizer link to
knuckle (4).
20. Remove nut and bolt fastening tension link (6) to
knuckle (4).
21. Remove nut and bolt fastening camber link (1) to
knuckle (4).
22. Remove knuckle (4).
23. Remove hub mounting bolts from knuckle.
REAR
2 - 113
2 - 114
REAR
LX
INSTALLATION
KNUCKLE
1. Install four hub mounting bolts through knuckle from inboard side allowing ends to protrude from opposite side.
2. Position knuckle on vehicle and install bolt and nut
fastening camber link (1) to knuckle (4) as shown.
Do not tighten bolt at this time.
3. Install bolt and nut fastening tension link (6) to
knuckle (4) as shown. Do not tighten bolt at this
time.
4. Install bolt and nut fastening stabilizer link to
knuckle (4). Do not tighten bolt at this time.
5. Install bolt fastening toe link (3) to knuckle (4). Do
6. Install bolt and nut fastening compression link (5)
to knuckle (4). Do not tighten bolt at this time.
NOTE: If a new knuckle sleeve is not installed in knuckle, perform Step 7 through Step 11.
bolt (1) threads to provide ease of use and promote tool longevity.
7. Place NEW knuckle sleeve (2) onto Installer Bolt
9361-7 (1), and slide it up to Bolts head.
LX
8. Starting from knuckle forward end, slide Bolt
9361-7 (1) with sleeve (5) through knuckle (2) and
spring link ball joint (3).
9. Install thrust bearing and nut (4) on end of Bolt.
When installing thrust bearing on Installer, be
sure to place hardened side against nut. Place
10. While holding Bolt head (1) stationary, rotate Nut
(4) (using hand tools) installing sleeve in knuckle.
Install sleeve until Nut stops turning. Do not overtighten Nut.
11. Remove special tool.
12. Install spring link-to-knuckle bolt (2) front-to-rear

through knuckle and link, then install nut. While
holding bolt head stationary, tighten nut to 138
Nm (102 ft. lbs.) torque.
13. Remove under-hoist utility jack or jack stand from
under spring link.
14. Insert end of cable (1) through rear knuckle (3)

15. Install parking brake shoe support over hub and
bearing mounting screws and onto face of
knuckle.
REAR
2 - 115
2 - 116
REAR
16. Install shoe actuator lever (1) on end of parking

brake cable (2). Make sure actuator lever is positioned with word UP facing outward.
17. Install parking brake shoes as well as all components necessary to access them. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/PARKING
BRAKE/SHOES
INSTALLATION)

18. Install hub and bearing as well as all components
necessary to access it. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING - INSTALLATION)
19. Insert wheel speed sensor head (3) into mounting

hole in rear of knuckle.
20. Install screw (2) fastening sensor head (3) to rear
knuckle. Tighten Screw to 11 Nm (97 in. lbs.)
torque.
21. Install sensor cable at rear brake rotor shield (1).
22. Lower vehicle.
23. Adjust parking brake shoes as necessary. (Refer
to 5 - BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES ADJUSTMENTS)
24. Position vehicle on alignment rack/drive-on hoist.
Raise vehicle as necessary to access mounting
bolts.
LX
LX
REAR
2 - 117
25. Tighten fasteners at knuckle (vehicle at curb

height) as follows:
Camber Link (1) 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.) torque.
Compression Link (5) 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.)
torque.
Stabilizer Link 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
Tension Link (6) 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.) torque.
Toe Link (3) 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.) torque.
KNUCKLE - SRT8
1. Install four hub mounting bolts through knuckle from inboard side allowing ends to protrude from opposite side.
2. Position knuckle on vehicle and install bolt and nut
fastening camber link (1) to knuckle (4) as shown.
3. Install bolt and nut fastening tension link (6) to
knuckle (4) as shown. Do not tighten bolt at this
time.
4. Install bolt and nut fastening stabilizer link to
knuckle (4). Do not tighten bolt at this time.
5. Install bolt fastening toe link (3) to knuckle (4). Do
6. Install bolt and nut fastening compression link (5)
to knuckle (4). Do not tighten bolt at this time.
NOTE: If a new knuckle sleeve is not installed in knuckle, perform Step 7 through Step 11.
2 - 118
REAR


9. Install Installation Thrust Bearing (around 3/8 inch
thick) and special flange nut (4) on end of Bolt.

holding bolt head stationary, tighten nut to 138
under spring link.
LX
LX
14. Insert end of cable (1) through rear knuckle (3)
15. Install parking brake shoe support over hub and
bearing mounting screws and onto face of
knuckle.

17. Install parking brake shoes as well as all components necessary to access them. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/PARKING
BRAKE/SHOES
INSTALLATION)

18. Install hub and bearing as well as all components
necessary to access it. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING - INSTALLATION)
REAR
2 - 119
2 - 120
REAR

torque.
22. Lower vehicle.
23. Adjust parking brake shoes as necessary. (Refer
to 5 - BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES ADJUSTMENTS)
bolts.
25. Tighten fasteners at knuckle (vehicle at curb

height) as follows:
Camber Link (1) 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.) torque.
Compression Link (5) 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.)
torque.
Stabilizer Link 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
Tension Link (6) 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.) torque.
Toe Link (3) 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.) torque.
LX
REAR
LX
2 - 121
CAMBER LINK
REMOVAL
2. On both sides of vehicle, remove wheel mounting
nuts (3), then rear tire and wheel assembly (1).
WARNING: Before opening fuel system, review all

Warnings and Cautions.
3. If servicing left side, remove fuel filler tube. (Refer
to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL DELIVERY/FUEL
TANK FILLER TUBE - REMOVAL)
4. Position an extra pair of jack stands under and
support forward end of engine cradle to help stabilize vehicle during rear suspension removal/installation.
5. Perform following if vehicle is equipped with dualexhaust or are servicing right side on vehicle with
single exhaust.
a. Position under-hoist utility jack or stand several
inches below exhaust at muffler.
b. Disconnect exhaust isolators at muffler and
resonators hangers.
c. Lower exhaust down to rest upon top of jack or
stand placed below muffler.
2 - 122
REAR
LX
6. Position under-hoist utility jack or transmission jack

(3) under center of rear axle differential (1). Raise
jack head to contact differential and secure in
place. When securing crossmember to jack, be
sure not to secure stabilizer bar.
7. Remove shock
screws (2).
absorber
(1)
upper
mounting
8. Remove shock absorber (1) lower mounting bolt (2)

and nut (4).
LX
NOTE: If equipped with AWD, when removing
crossmember mounting bolts in following step, be
sure to not to misplace spacers (1) between crossmember mounts (2) and body.
CAUTION: When removing crossmember mounting

bolts (2 and 3) it is important NOT to loosen or
remove crossmember mounting bolts on opposite
side of vehicle. Doing so will require rear wheel
alignment following reinstallation to ensure proper
thrust angle.
9. Remove both front and rear crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3) on repair-side of vehicle.
CAUTION: To avoid damaging other components
of vehicle, do not lower crossmember (1) any further than necessary to remove shock absorber.
10. Slowly lower jack allowing repair-side of crossmember to drop. Do not lower jack at a fast
rate. Lower jack just enough to allow top of shock
absorber to clear body flange.
11. Remove shock absorber (3) by tipping top outward and lifting lower end out of pocket in spring
link (4).
REAR
2 - 123
2 - 124
REAR
NOTE: Do not lower repair-side of crossmember

any further than necessary to gain access to link
mounting bolts at crossmember.
12. Remove
(3).
13. Remove
member
14. Remove
nut and bolt (2) mounting link to knuckle

nut and bolt (2) mounting link to cross(1).
link.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: When installing link (1), ensure following to
avoid mis-installation:
Heavier, thicker end goes toward crossmember.
Fore-or-aft bow faces forward (curves around
coil spring).
Up-or-down bow faces downward.
LX
LX
1. Place link in bracket on crossmember (1). Install
bolt and nut (2) at crossmember (1) as shown. Do
2. Install bolt and nut (2) mounting link to knuckle (3)
as shown. Do not tighten bolt at this time.
3. Install shock absorber (3) by setting lower end into

pocket in spring link (4), then tipping top inward
until aligned with upper mounting holes.
4. Install lower shock mounting bolt and nut. Do not

REAR
2 - 125
2 - 126
REAR
5. If vehicle is equipped with AWD, make sure spacers (1) on top of crossmember mount bushings (2)
on side of repair are in position.
6. Carefully raise jack, guiding coil spring and upper

end of shock absorber (4) into mounted positions.
7. Install shock absorber upper mounting screws (2).
Tighten upper mounting screws to 52 Nm (38 ft.
lbs.) torque.
NOTE: Rear crossmember mounting bolts (2) are

longer than front mounting bolts (3). Do not interchange mounting bolts.
8. Install crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3).
Snug, but do not fully tighten bolts at this time.
LX
LX
9. Measure distance (1) between from tension link (2)
to body weld flange (3) directly in front of it, just
outboard of front mount bushing (4). This distance
must be at least 12 mm to allow proper clearance for suspension movement. If distance is
less than 12 mm, shift that side of rear crossmember directly rearward until distance is 12 mm or
greater. To do so, loosen 3 mounting bolts slightly,
leaving one on opposite side of shift snugged to
pivot off of. Shift crossmember rearward and snug
loosened bolts. Measure opposite side to be sure it
also maintains minimum 12 mm distance.
10. Tighten all crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3)

11. Remove jack (3) from under rear axle differential.

12. If previously lowered, raise rear exhaust back to
mounted position and connect exhaust isolators at
muffler and resonators hangers. Remove jack or
stand below exhaust muffler.
REAR
2 - 127
2 - 128
REAR
13. If removed, install fuel filler tube. (Refer to 14 FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL DELIVERY/FUEL TANK
FILLER TUBE - INSTALLATION)
14. Lower vehicle until front tires contact floor but rear
is still suspended. Place jack stands under each
rear suspension spring link. Place an appropriate
wooden block between stand and link to avoid
damaging spring link, then lower vehicle until full
vehicle weight is supported by suspension.
15. Tighten camber link fasteners (2) to:

Bolt at crossmember 85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.)
torque.
Bolt nut at knuckle 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.) torque.
LX
LX
16. Tighten shock absorber lower mounting bolt nut
(4) to 72 Nm (53 ft. lbs.) torque.
17. Raise vehicle and remove jack stands (3).
18. Install tire and wheel assemblies (1). Tighten

wheel mounting nuts (3) to 150 Nm (110 ft. lbs.)
torque. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - INSTALLATION)
19. Lower vehicle.
REAR
2 - 129
2 - 130
REAR
LX
COMPRESSION LINK
REMOVAL
2. Remove wheel mounting nuts (3), then rear tire
and wheel assembly (1).
3. Remove bolt and nut (2) mounting link (3) at

knuckle.
4. Remove bolt and nut (1) mounting link (3) at crossmember.
5. Remove link (3).
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Although the compression link is different end-to-end, there is no top and bottom.
LX
1. Position link and install bolt and nut (1) mounting
link (3) at crossmember. Do not tighten bolt at
this time.
2. Install bolt and nut (2) mounting link (3) at knuckle.
3. Install tire and wheel assembly (1). Tighten wheel

(Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - INSTALLATION)
4. Lower vehicle.
5. Position vehicle on alignment rack/drive-on lift.
Raise vehicle as necessary to access link fasteners.
6. Tighten compression link fasteners to:
Bolt at crossmember 85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.)
torque.
Bolt at knuckle 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.) torque.
ALIGNMENT
STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
REAR
2 - 131
2 - 132
REAR
LX
SPRING LINK
REMOVAL
SPRING LINK
2. Access and remove rear spring. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/SPRING - REMOVAL)
3. Export Only If servicing right spring link, disconnect headlamp leveling sensor (1) link at spring link
(3).
LX
REAR
2 - 133

knuckle to keep Tap 9361-1 (1) straight. Using Tap
with an appropriate handle, cut threads approximately halfway through bushing (or about six complete threads). It is important to back tap out,
clean out burrs and lubricate Tap often during
process.

(1) Bolt 9361-3
(2) Nut
(4) Thrust Bearing
(5) Sleeve 9361-4 (RWD)
(5) Sleeve 9361-5 (AWD Left Side)
(5) Sleeve 9361-6 (AWD Right Side)
NOTE: When installing thrust bearing on Remover,
be sure to place hardened side against nut. Place
NOTE: It is important to use appropriate Sleeve on
Remover to provide proper Tool-to-Knuckle contact. RWD sleeve can be used on either side while AWD
knuckles require specific left or right side Sleeves.
2 - 134
REAR
LX

knuckle sleeve.
8. Rotate Nut down, matching Sleeve angled end with
angled face of knuckle.
10. Remove bolt and nut (1) fastening spring link (4)
to crossmember.
11. Remove spring link (4).
SPRING LINK - SRT8

1. Access and remove rear brake rotor on side of repair. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR - REMOVAL)
2. Access and remove rear spring on side of repair. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/SPRING - REMOVAL)
LX

knuckle to keep Tap 9361-1 (1) straight. Using Tap
with an appropriate handle, cut threads approximately halfway through bushing (or about six complete threads). It is important to back tap out,
clean out burrs and lubricate Tap often during
process.

(1) Bolt 9361-3
(2) Nut
(3) Thrust Bearing
(5) Sleeve 9361-9 (Left Side - Shown in figure)
(5) Sleeve 9361-10 (Right Side)
NOTE: When installing thrust bearing (3) on
Remover, be sure to place hardened side against
nut (2). Place bearing outer cage against stationary component.
REAR
2 - 135
2 - 136
REAR
LX
NOTE: It is important to use appropriate Sleeve (9361-9 or 9361-10) on Remover to provide proper Tool-toKnuckle contact.
knuckle sleeve.
7. Rotate Nut down, matching Sleeve (9361-9 or
9361-10) angled end with angled face of knuckle
(1). Make sure foot on Sleeve (3) is inserted
behind machined brake caliper mounting boss.
9. Remove bolt and nut (1) fastening spring link (4) to

crossmember.
10. Remove spring link (4).
LX
INSTALLATION
SPRING LINK
1. Guide ball joint end of spring link (4) into mounting
pocket of knuckle, then swing opposite end up to
bushing in crossmember and install bolt and nut (1)
fastening spring link (4) to crossmember. Do not
tighten bolt at this time.

REAR
2 - 137
2 - 138
REAR

4. Install thrust bearing and nut (4) on end of Bolt.

holding bolt head stationary, tighten nut to 138 Nm
8. Export Only If servicing right spring link, connect

headlamp leveling sensor (1) link at spring link (3).
9. Install rear spring as well as all components necessary to access it. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/
REAR/SPRING - INSTALLATION)
10. Lower vehicle.
bolt.
12. Tighten spring link bolt at crossmember to 108
ALIGNMENT
STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
LX
LX
SPRING LINK - SRT8

1. Guide ball joint end of spring link (4) into mounting
pocket of knuckle, then swing opposite end up to
bushing in crossmember and install bolt and nut (1)
fastening spring link (4) to crossmember. Do not
tighten bolt at this time.

REAR
2 - 139
2 - 140
REAR

4. Install Installation Thrust Bearing (around 3/8 inch
thick) and special flange nut (4) on end of Bolt.

holding bolt head stationary, tighten nut to 138 Nm
8. Install rear spring and all components necessary to
access it, except rear tire and wheel assembly on
side of repair. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/
SPRING - INSTALLATION)
9. Install rear brake rotor and components necessary
to access it. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/
MECHANICAL/ROTOR - INSTALLATION)
10. Lower vehicle.
12. Position vehicle on alignment rack/drive-on lift. Raise vehicle as necessary to access mounting bolt.
13. Tighten spring link bolt at crossmember to 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.) torque.
14. Tighten shock absorber lower mounting bolt nut to 72 Nm (53 ft. lbs.) torque.
LX
REAR
LX
2 - 141
TENSION LINK
REMOVAL

3. If servicing left side, remove fuel filler tube. (Refer
to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL DELIVERY/FUEL
TANK FILLER TUBE - REMOVAL)
single exhaust.
resonators hangers.
2 - 142
REAR
LX

7. Remove shock
screws (2).
absorber
(1)
upper
mounting

and nut (4).
LX

thrust angle.
link (4).
REAR
2 - 143
2 - 144
REAR
NOTE: Do not lower repair-side of crossmember

any further than necessary to gain access to link
mounting bolts at crossmember.
12. Remove
(3).
13. Remove
member
14. Remove
nut and bolt (4) mounting link to knuckle

nut and bolt (4) mounting link to cross(1).
link.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: When installing tension link, although link
(6) is same end-to-end, make sure that center bow
is facing downward.
LX
LX
1. Place link in bracket on crossmember (1). Install
bolt and nut (4) at crossmember (1) as shown. Do
2. Install bolt and nut (4) mounting link to knuckle (3)
as shown. Do not tighten bolt at this time.


REAR
2 - 145
2 - 146
REAR

lbs.) torque.

LX
LX


REAR
2 - 147
2 - 148
REAR
14. Lower vehicle until front tires contact floor but rear
is still suspended. Place jack stands under each
rear suspension spring link. Place an appropriate
wooden block between stand and link to avoid
damaging spring link, then lower vehicle until full
vehicle weight is supported by suspension.
15. Tighten tension link fasteners (4) to:

Bolt nut at crossmember 85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.)
torque.
LX
LX
17. Raise vehicle and remove jack stands (3).

19. Lower vehicle.
REAR
2 - 149
2 - 150
REAR
LX
TOE LINK
REMOVAL
LEFT LINK

3. Remove fuel filler tube. (Refer to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL DELIVERY/FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE
- REMOVAL)
5. Perform following if vehicle is equipped with dualexhaust.
resonators hangers.
LX
place.

and nut (4).

thrust angle.
8. Remove both front and rear crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3) on repair-side of vehicle. If
equipped with AWD, be sure to not to misplace
spacers between crossmember mounts and
body.
9. Slowly lower jack allowing repair-side of crossmember to drop. Do not lower jack at a fast rate.
REAR
2 - 151
2 - 152
REAR
Lower jack just enough to allow toe link mounting bolt at crossmember.
10. If equipped, remove wheel speed sensor cable (2)
from toe link.
11. While holding toe adjustment cam bolt from rotating, remove nut (3) securing toe link at crossmember (1).
LX
LX
REAR
2 - 153
12. Slide cam bolt (2) rearward out of crossmember

and link (1).
13. Remove mounting bolt (3) and nut at knuckle.
14. Remove toe link (1).
RIGHT LINK
2. Remove wheel mounting nuts (3), then rear tire
and wheel assembly (1).
2 - 154
REAR
3. If equipped, remove wheel speed sensor cable (2)

from toe link.
4. While holding toe adjustment cam bolt from rotating, remove nut (3) securing toe link at crossmember (1).
5. Slide cam bolt (2) rearward out of crossmember

and link (1).
6. Remove mounting bolt (3) and nut at knuckle.
7. Remove toe link (1).
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
LEFT LINK
1. Slide crossmember end of toe link (1) into box
bracket on crossmember. Slide cam bolt (2)
through bracket and link from rear.
2. Install bolt (3) and nut securing link to knuckle. Do
3. While holding toe adjustment cam bolt from rotating

(cam facing upward), Install cam washer (2) and
nut (3) securing toe link at crossmember (1). Do
not tighten nut at this time.
REAR
2 - 155
2 - 156
REAR
4. If equipped, Attach wheel speed sensor cable (2) to

toe link.
5. Carefully raise jack, guiding coil spring and lower

6. When lower shock mounting bolt holes line up
install bolt (2) and nut (4). Do not tighten at this
time.

7. Continue to raise crossmember in not already in
mounted position, then install crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3). Snug, but do not fully tighten
bolts at this time.
LX
LX


REAR
2 - 157
2 - 158
REAR
12. Install fuel filler tube. (Refer to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL DELIVERY/FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE
- INSTALLATION)

14. Lower vehicle.
bolts.

LX
LX
17. Tighten toe link (1) fasteners to:
Nut at crossmember 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.)
torque (This nut may be tightened after rear
wheel alignment toe is set. Do not tighten from
bolt head end.).
RIGHT LINK
1. Slide crossmember end of toe link (1) into box
bracket on crossmember. Slide cam bolt (2)
through bracket and link from rear of vehicle.
2. Install bolt (3) and nut securing link to knuckle. Do
REAR
2 - 159
2 - 160
REAR
3. While holding toe adjustment cam bolt from rotating

(cam facing upward), Install cam washer (2) and
nut (3) securing toe link at crossmember (1). Do
not tighten nut at this time.
4. If equipped, Attach wheel speed sensor cable (2) to

toe link.
5. Raise rear exhaust back to mounted position and
connect exhaust isolators at muffler and resonators
hangers. Remove jack or stand below exhaust
muffler.

7. Lower vehicle.
bolts.
LX
LX
9. Tighten toe link (1) fasteners to:
Nut at crossmember 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.)
torque (This nut may be tightened after rear
wheel alignment toe is set. Do not tighten from
bolt head end.).
REAR
2 - 161
2 - 162
REAR
LX
SHOCK ABSORBER
DESCRIPTION
This vehicle is available with either standard gascharged shock absorbers or Nivomat load-leveling
shock absorbers for the rear suspension. Depending
on options, the load-leveling shock absorbers may
either be standard or optional equipment.
On the exterior, the load-leveling shock absorbers (1)
are larger in diameter than the standard shock absorbers. Each load-leveling shock absorber is a self-contained vehicle leveling system and shock absorber
combined. It does not require any external compressor, hoses, or height leveling sensors. When cargo or
passengers are added, the load-leveling shock
absorbers use normal ride motions during driving,
even on smooth roads, to raise the rear of the vehicle
automatically to the unloaded (or curb) height. When
the load is removed, the vehicle maintains this rear
ride height.
The rear shock absorber used on the SRT8 is a loadleveling shock (2). This shock absorber appears the
same as the standard load-leveling shock, but has
been specially calibrated for this vehicle. It can be
identified by an identification tag on its side (1). This
shock absorber is serviced the same as the standard
load-leveling shock absorber.
REMOVAL
STANDARD
LX
wheel assembly (1).
outer spring link adding just enough support to
keep suspension from going into full-rebound when
shock absorber mounting bolts are removed.

and nut (4).
5. Remove shock absorber (1) upper mounting bolts

(2).
6. Remove shock absorber (4).
REAR
2 - 163
2 - 164
REAR
LX
LOAD-LEVELING

3. If servicing left side shock absorber, remove fuel
filler tube. (Refer to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL
DELIVERY/FUEL
TANK
FILLER
TUBE
REMOVAL)
single exhaust.
resonators hangers.
c. Lower exhaust down to rest upon top of jack or stand placed below muffler.
REAR
LX
7. Remove shock
screws (2).
absorber
(1)
upper
mounting

and nut (4).
2 - 165
2 - 166
REAR


thrust angle.
link (4).
LX
REAR
LX
INSTALLATION
STANDARD
1. Insert lower end of shock absorber (3) into well of
spring link (4).
2. Raise upper end

mounted position
mounting screws
screws to 52 Nm
of shock absorber (4) up into

on body (1) and install upper
(2). Tighten upper mounting
2 - 167
2 - 168
REAR
3. Install lower shock mounting bolt (2) and nut (4).

Do not tighten at this time.
under spring link.

6. Lower vehicle.
Raise vehicle as necessary to access lower mounting bolt.
8. Tighten shock absorber lower mounting bolt nut (4)

LX
LX
LOAD-LEVELING

REAR
2 - 169
2 - 170
REAR

lbs.) torque.

LX
LX


REAR
2 - 171
2 - 172
REAR

13. Lower vehicle.
Raise lift as necessary to access lower mounting
bolt.

LX
REAR
LX
2 - 173
SPRING
REMOVAL

3. If servicing left side shock absorber, remove fuel
filler tube. (Refer to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL
DELIVERY/FUEL
TANK
FILLER
TUBE
REMOVAL)
single exhaust.
resonators hangers.
c. Lower exhaust down to rest upon top of jack or stand placed below muffler.
2 - 174
REAR
LX

7. Remove shock
screws (2).
absorber
(1)
upper
mounting

and nut (4).
LX

thrust angle.
link (4).
12. Disconnect brake hose at bracket mounted to
body to allow to avoid overextending hose, damaging it, during following step.
13. Slowly lower jack until crossmember is low
enough to remove coil spring. Do not lower jack
any further than necessary to remove spring.
14. Remove coil spring and isolators (1, 2 and 5).
REAR
2 - 175
2 - 176
REAR
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Rear coil springs are interchangeable.
1. Install upper (1) and lower (5) isolators on coil
spring (2).
NOTE: Before installing coil spring, make sure isolators (1 and 5) are completely installed on ends of
spring.
2. Install coil spring with isolators into spring pocket of
spring link (1) fitting lower isolator (2) to shape of
pocket, then align top of spring with body mount.
LX
LX

REAR
2 - 177
2 - 178
REAR

lbs.) torque.


LX
LX

- INSTALLATION)
REAR
2 - 179
2 - 180
REAR

15. Lower vehicle.
Raise lift as necessary to access lower mounting
bolt.

LX
LX
REAR
2 - 181
BAR - STABILIZER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable (2)
from battery post.
3. On each side of vehicle rear, remove wheel mounting nuts (3), then tire and wheel assembly (1).
2 - 182
REAR
4. Remove rear exhaust system (2) (dual-outlet

exhaust shown in figure). (Refer to 11 - EXHAUST
SYSTEM - REMOVAL)
5. Apply alignment index marks (3) to the propeller

shaft rubber coupler (1) and axle flange (2).
6. Remove three (four if equipped with 215 MM axle)

propeller shaft coupler-to-axle flange bolts and
nuts.
LX
LX
7. Support propeller shaft (2) using a bungee cord (1).
Attach ends of cord to fuel tank straps as shown.
NOTE: Due to short travel and low spring tension,

it is not necessary to lock-out parking brake lever
to service parking brake components.
8. Disconnect front parking brake cable (5) at connector (3) to right rear parking brake cable (4).
REAR
2 - 183
2 - 184
REAR
9. Remove front parking brake cable (3) from equalizer (2).
10. Remove screw (2) fastening front parking brake

cable (1) routing bracket to rear crossmember
front flange (3).
LX
REAR
LX
11. If equipped with standard or premium disc brakes,
on each rear disc brake:
a. While holding guide pins from turning, remove
disc brake caliper guide pin bolts (2).
b. Remove brake caliper (1) from brake adapter
(3) and pads.
c. Guide brake caliper up through suspension, following brake hose path. Support caliper above
rear suspension using with bungee cord or wire
to keep caliper from overextending brake hose
when crossmember is lowered.
CAUTION: When pushing pistons back into caliper

bores, use only a trim stick as shown or other
suitable soft tool. Never use a screwdriver or other
metal pry bar due to potential damage to braking
surface of rotor, caliper, pistons or dust boots.
12. If equipped with SRT8 disc brakes, on each rear
disc brake, place trim stick (4) between brake pad
(2) and outer edge of rotor (3).
disc brake, using trim stick, slowly apply pressure
against brake pad (2) until both pistons (on that
side of caliper) are completely bottomed in bores
of caliper half.

disc brake, support spring link (1) using a transmission jack (5) or other appropriate jack. Raise
spring link just enough to access brake caliper
lower mounting bolt (4) from above compression
link (2).
2 - 185
2 - 186
REAR

disc brake, remove the lower and upper caliper
mounting bolts (1).
disc brake, remove brake caliper (2) with pads
from knuckle and brake rotor. Hang assembly out
of way using wire or a bungee cord. Use care not
to overextend brake hose when doing this.
17. If equipped with SRT8 disc brakes, remove jack
from under spring link.
NOTE: To remove wheel speed sensor connector

from body wiring harness connector, move retaining clip (2) and pull sensor connector outward.
18. Remove wheel speed sensor connectors (3 and

4) from body wiring harness connector (1) located
in luggage compartment floor pan (2).
LX
LX
19. Unclip left wheel speed sensor cable (3) from
routing clip (1) near body connector.
20. On each side of vehicle, remove shock absorber

(1) lower mounting bolt (2) and nut (4).
21. Carefully mark location of rear crossmember on

body at all four mount (bushing) locations using a
marker or crayon. Do not use a scratch awl to
mark location.
REAR
2 - 187
2 - 188
REAR
LX
22. Position an extra pair of jack stands under and support forward end of engine cradle to help stabilize vehicle
during rear suspension removal/installation.
23. Position under-hoist utility jack or transmission
jack (3) under center of rear axle differential (1).
Raise jack head to contact differential and secure
in place. When securing crossmember to jack,
be sure not to secure stabilizer bar.

24. Remove fuel filler tube. (Refer to 14 - FUEL SYSTEM/FUEL DELIVERY/FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE
- REMOVAL)
LX
REAR
2 - 189

25. Remove both front (3) and both rear (2) mounting
bolts fastening crossmember (1) in place.
26. Slowly lower crossmember using jack. Do not lower jack at a fast rate. Lower just enough to allow propeller
shaft removal from rear axle differential. Do not lower jack any further than necessary. Slide propeller shaft
out of rear axle differential and allow bungee cord previously installed to support.
27. Continue to lower jack until crossmember is at a comfortable working level to access stabilizer bar fasteners.
2 - 190
REAR
28. On each end, remove bolt (3) and nut fastening

stabilizer bar (4) to stabilizer link (2).
29. Remove bolts (1) fastening each stabilizer bar isolator retainer to crossmember.
30. Remove stabilizer bar (4) with isolators and
retainers.
31. Remove retainers from isolators.
32. Remove isolators from stabilizer bar utilizing slits
in bushings.
INSTALLATION
1. Install isolators on stabilizer bar utilizing slits in
bushings. Install each isolator so its slit faces forward and flat side is positioned toward crossmember once installed.
2. Install retainers on isolators.
3. Install stabilizer bar (4) with isolators and retainers
on crossmember.
4. Install isolator retainer mounting bolts (1). Do not
5. Install bolt (3) and nut fastening stabilizer bar ends
to each stabilizer links (2). Do not tighten at this
time.
6. Tighten isolator retainer mounting bolts (1) to 61
LX
LX
REAR
2 - 191
7. Remove coil springs (2) with isolators (1 and 5)

from spring links (4).
8. Raise crossmember to body mounting points. As crossmember is raised, slide propeller shaft onto rear axle differential flange and align shocks with pockets in spring links.
NOTE: There are four crossmember mounting
bolts. Rear mounting bolts (2) are longer than
front mounting bolts (3). Do not interchange
mounting bolts.
9. Continue to raise crossmember (1) with jack until
crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3) can be
installed. Install left side crossmember mounting
bolts, but not the right side bolts. It is not necessary to tighten bolts at this point.
2 - 192
REAR

of vehicle, do not lower crossmember any further
than necessary to install coil spring (2).
10. Slowly lower jack allowing right side of crossmember to drop. Do not lower jack at a fast
rate. Lower jack just enough to allow spring (2)
Installation. Do not lower jack any further than
necessary.
spring.
11. Install coil spring (2) with isolators into spring
pocket of spring link fitting the lower isolator to the
shape of the pocket, then align top of spring with
body mount.
Once shock absorber (1) lower mounting hole
lines up with hole in spring link (3), stop jacking.
14. If vehicle is equipped with AWD, insert spacers (1)

on top of right crossmember mount bushings (2)
before crossmember is raised into place.
LX
LX
mounting bolts.
15. Raise right side of crossmember (1) into mounted
position. Install right side crossmember mounting
bolts (2 and 3). Snug, but do not fully tighten
bolts at this time.
16. Remove both front and rear crossmember mounting bolts (2 and 3) on left side of vehicle.

of vehicle, do not lower crossmember any further
than necessary to install coil spring (2).
17. Slowly lower jack allowing left side of crossmember to drop. Do not lower jack at a fast rate.
Lower jack just enough to allow spring (2) Installation. Do not lower jack any further than necessary.
spring.
18. Install coil spring (2) with isolators into spring
pocket of spring link fitting the lower isolator to the
shape of the pocket, then align top of spring with
body mount.
Once shock absorber (1) lower mounting hole
lines up with hole in spring link (3), stop jacking.
REAR
2 - 193
2 - 194
REAR
21. If vehicle is equipped with AWD, insert spacers (1)

on top of left crossmember mount bushings (2)
before crossmember is raised into place.

mounting bolts.
22. Raise left side of crossmember (1) into mounted
position. Install left side crossmember mounting
bolts (2 and 3). Snug, but do not fully tighten
bolts at this time.
23. Shift crossmember as necessary to line up

mounts (3) with location marks drawn on body (1)
before removal.
LX
LX
24. Once mounts are lined up with location marks, on
both sides of vehicle, measure distance (1)
between the tension link (2) and weld flange (3)
on body directly in front of it, just outboard of the
front mount bushing (4). This distance must be
at least 12 mm to allow proper clearance for
suspension movement. If distance is less than
12 mm on either side of vehicle, shift that side of
rear crossmember directly rearward until distance
is 12 mm or greater. To do so, loosen 3 mounting
bolts slightly, leaving one on opposite side of shift
snugged to pivot off of. Shift crossmember rearward and snug loosened bolts. Remeasure opposite side to be sure it still maintains minimum 12
mm distance.
25. Tighten all four crossmember mounting bolts (2

and 3) to 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.) torque.
REAR
2 - 195
2 - 196
REAR
27. Remove bungee cord (1) supporting propeller

shaft (2).
28. Align propeller shaft index marks (3) placed upon

removal. Install propeller shaft rear coupler-to-axle
flange bolts and nuts by hand. Tighten propeller
shaft rear coupler-to-axle flange bolts to 81 Nm
- INSTALLATION)
LX
REAR
LX
30. Clip left rear wheel speed sensor cable (3) to
routing clip (1) near body connector.
31. Match left rear wheel speed sensor connector (4)

to right sensor connector (3) to make one connector.
32. Insert speed sensor connectors (3 and 4) into
body wiring harness connector (1) located in luggage compartment floor pan (2). When installing
connector, make sure retaining clip on body connector is properly in place and sensor connector
cannot be pulled out.
CAUTION: Extreme caution should be taken not to

cross-thread caliper guide pin bolts (2) when they
are installed.
33. If equipped with standard or premium disc brakes,
on each rear disc brake:
a. Push caliper guide pins into caliper adapter to
clear caliper mounting bosses when installing.
b. Guide caliper and brake hose down through
rear suspension, then slide caliper over brake
pads and onto caliper adapter (3).
c. Align caliper mounting holes with guide pins,
then install guide pin bolts (2). While holding
guide pins from turning, tighten bolts to 31 Nm
d. Make sure brake hose is properly routed and
will not come in contact with suspension
components.
2 - 197
2 - 198
REAR
LX
34. If equipped with SRT8 disc brakes, at each rear disc brake, support spring link using a transmission jack or
other appropriate jack as indicated in removal procedure. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/STABILIZER BAR
- REMOVAL)
disc brake, slide caliper with pads (2) over brake
rotor and align with knuckle.
disc brake, install caliper mounting bolts (1).
Tighten bolts to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.) torque.
disc brake, remove jack from under spring link.
38. Insert routing front parking brake cable bracket

locating pin in front flange of crossmember (3),
then install screw (2) fastening cable (1) routing
bracket to rear crossmember.
LX
39. Route parking brake cable above rear crossmember, then slide cable (1, 3) through equalizer (2)
above rear axle differential.

40. Connect front parking brake cable (5) at connector (3) to right rear parking brake cable (4).
REAR
2 - 199
2 - 200
REAR
41. Install rear exhaust system (2) (dual-outlet

exhaust shown in figure). (Refer to 11 - EXHAUST
SYSTEM - INSTALLATION)

43. Lower vehicle until rear wheels are just above
floor level.
44. Apply parking brake lever. Release lever, then
reapply.
45. Check to make sure rear wheels will not rotate
with lever applied.
46. Lower vehicle.
47. Connect battery negative cable (2) to battery post.

It is important that this is performed properly.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM STANDARD PROCEDURE)
bolts.
LX
LX
50. Tighten shock absorber lower mounting bolt nuts
51. Tighten stabilizer link fasteners (3) to 61 Nm (45

ft. lbs.) torque.
52. Perform wheel alignment, paying special attention
to thrust angle. If rear crossmember needs to be
shifted to align thrust angle, try to avoid compromising tension link clearance (Refer to Step 24).
(Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
REAR
2 - 201
2 - 202
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
SUSPENSION AND STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
VEHICLE LEAD/PULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
STANDARD PROCEDURE
WHEEL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
LX
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
2 - 203
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
DESCRIPTION
Vehicle wheel alignment is the positioning of all interrelated front and rear suspension angles. These angles affect
the handling and steering of the vehicle when it is in motion. Proper wheel alignment is essential for efficient steering, good directional stability, and proper tire wear.
The method of checking a vehicles front and rear wheel alignment varies depending on the manufacturer and type
of equipment used. The manufacturers instructions should always be followed to ensure accuracy of the alignment,
except when DaimlerChrysler Corporations wheel alignment specifications differ.
On this vehicle, the suspension angles that can be adjusted are as follows:
FRONT:
Camber (with cradle shift/service adjustment bolt package)
Caster (with cradle shift/service adjustment bolt package)
Toe
REAR:
Toe
Check the wheel alignment and make all wheel alignment adjustments with the vehicle standing at its proper curb
height specification. Curb height is the normal riding height of the vehicle. It is measured from a certain point on the
vehicle to the ground or a designated area while the vehicle is sitting on a flat, level surface. Refer to Curb Height
Measurement in this section for additional information.
Typical wheel alignment angles and measurements are described in the following paragraphs.
CAMBER
Camber is the inward or outward tilt of the top of the
tire and wheel assembly. Inward tilt (2) is negative
camber. Outward tilt (1) is positive camber. Camber is
measured in degrees of angle relative to a true vertical line. Camber is a tire wearing angle.
Excessive negative camber will cause tread wear
at the inside of the tire.
Excessive positive camber will cause tread wear
on the outside of the tire.
CROSS CAMBER
Cross camber is the difference between left and right
camber. To achieve the cross camber reading, subtract the right side camber reading from the left. For
example, if the left camber is +0.3 and the right camber is 0.0, the cross camber would be +0.3.
2 - 204
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
CASTER
Caster is the forward or rearward tilt of the steering
knuckle in reference to the position of the upper and
lower ball joints. Caster is measured in degrees of
angle relative to a true vertical center line. This line is
viewed from the side of the tire and wheel assembly.
Forward tilt (upper ball joint ahead of lower)
results in a negative caster angle.
Rearward tilt (upper ball joint trailing lower)
results in a positive caster angle.
Although caster does not affect tire wear, a caster
imbalance between the two front wheels may cause
the vehicle to lead to the side with the least positive
caster.
CROSS CASTER
Cross caster is the difference between left and right
caster.
LX
LX
TOE
Toe is the inward or outward angle of the wheels as
viewed from above the vehicle.
Toe-in (1) is produced when the front edges of
the wheels on the same axle are closer together
than the rear edges.
Toe-out (2) is produced when the front edges of
the wheels on the same axle are farther apart
than the rear edges.
Toe-in and toe-out can occur at the front wheels and
the rear wheels.
Toe is measured in degrees or inches. The measurement identifies the amount that the front of the wheels
point inward (toe-in) or outward (toe-out). Toe is measured at the spindle height. Zero toe means the front
and rear edges of the wheels on the same axle are
equally distant.
TOE-OUT ON TURNS
Toe-out on turns is the relative positioning of the front
wheels while steering through a turn. This compensates for each front wheels turning radius. As the
vehicle encounters a turn, the outboard wheel must
travel in a larger radius circle than the inboard wheel.
The steering system is designed to make each wheel
follow its particular radius circle. To accomplish this,
the front wheels must progressively toe outward as
the steering is turned from center. This eliminates tire
scrubbing and undue tire wear when steering a vehicle through a turn.
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
2 - 205
2 - 206
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX
DYNAMIC TOE PATTERN

Dynamic toe pattern is the inward and outward toe movement of the front and rear tires through the suspensions
jounce and rebound travel. As the vehicles suspension moves up and down, the toe pattern varies. Toe pattern is
critical in controlling the directional stability of the vehicle while in motion. Front and rear dynamic toe pattern is
preset by the factory at the time the vehicle is assembled.
It is not necessary to check or adjust front or rear dynamic toe pattern when doing a normal wheel alignment. The
only time dynamic toe pattern needs to be checked or adjusted is if the frame of the vehicle has been damaged.
STEERING AXIS INCLINATION (S. A. I.)

Steering axis inclination is the angle between a true
vertical line starting at the center of the tire at the road
contact point and a line drawn through the center of
the upper ball joint (or strut) and the lower ball joint
(1). S.A.I. is built into the vehicle and is not an adjustable angle. If S.A.I. is not within specifications, a bent
or damaged suspension component may be the
cause.
INCLUDED ANGLE (I. A.)

Included angle (3) is the sum of the S.A.I. angle (1)
plus or minus the camber angle (2), depending on
whether or not the wheel has positive or negative
camber. If camber is positive (2), add the camber
angle to the S.A.I. angle. If camber is negative, subtract the camber angle from the S.A.I. angle. Included
angle is not adjustable, but can be used to diagnose a
frame misalignment or bent suspension component
(spindle, strut).
THRUST ANGLE
Thrust angle is the averaged direction the rear wheels
are pointing in relation to the vehicles center line. The
presence of negative or positive thrust angle causes
the rear tires to track improperly to the left or right of
the front tires (dog tracking).
Negative thrust angle means the rear tires are
tracking to the left of the front tires.
Positive thrust angle means the rear tires are
tracking to the right of the front tires.
Improper tracking can cause undue tire wear, a lead
or pull and a crooked steering wheel. Excessive thrust
angle can usually be corrected by adjusting the rear
wheel toe so that each wheel has one-half of the total
toe measurement.
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX
2 - 207

SUSPENSION AND STEERING
CONDITION
Front End Whine On Turns
Front End Growl Or

Grinding On Turns
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
1. Defective wheel bearing
1. Replace wheel bearing
2. Incorrect wheel alignment
2. Check and reset wheel alignment
3. Worn tires
3. Replace tires
1. Replace wheel bearing
2. Engine mount grounding
2. Check for motor mount hitting frame

rail and reposition engine as required
3. AWD - Worn or broken C/V joint
3. Replace C/V joint
4. Loose wheel lug nuts
4. Verify wheel lug nut torque
6. Worn tires
6. Replace tires
1. Loose lug nuts
1. Tighten wheel lug nuts to

specifications
2. Worn or loose tie rod
2. Tighten or replace tie rod end
3. Worn or loose ball joint
3. Tighten or replace ball joint
4. Worn/loose control arm bushing
4. Replace control arm or bushing
5. Loose control arm fasteners
5. Tighten control arm fasteners to

specified torque
6. Loose stabilizer bar
6. Tighten stabilizer bar fasteners to

specified torque
7. Loose crossmember bolts
7. Tighten crossmember bolts to

specified torque
1. Replace hub and bearing assembly
3. Worn tires
3. Replace tires
Front End Growl Or

Grinding With Vehicle
Going Straight At A
Constant Speed
1. Engine mount grounding
1. Reposition engine/mount as required
Front End Clunk When

Accelerating Or
Decelerating
1. Worn or broken engine mount
1. Replace engine mount
2. Loose lug nuts
2. Tighten wheel lug nuts to specified

torque
3. Worn or loose ball joint
3. Replace ball joint/control arm
4. Worn or loose control arm bushing
5. Loose control arm fasteners
5. Tighten fasteners to specified torque
6. Loose crossmember bolts
6. Tighten crossmember bolts to

specified torque
7. Worn tie rod end
7. Replace tie rod end
Front End Clunk Or Snap

On Turns
Front End Whine With

Vehicle Going Straight At A
Constant Speed
2 - 208
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
CONDITION
Road Wander
Lateral Pull
Excessive Steering Free

Play
Excessive Steering Effort
LX
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
1. Incorrect tire pressure
1. Inflate tires to recommended pressure
2. Incorrect front or rear wheel toe
2. Check and reset wheel toe
3. Worn wheel bearing
3. Replace hub and bearing
4. Worn control arm bushings
5. Excessive friction in steering gear
5. Replace steering gear
6. Excessive friction in steering shaft

coupling
6. Replace steering intermediate

shaft/coupler
1. Unequal tire pressure
1. Inflate all tires to recommended

pressure
2. Radial tire lead
2. Perform lead correction procedure
3. Incorrect front wheel camber
3. Check and reset front wheel camber
4. Power steering gear imbalance
4. Replace power steering gear
5. Wheel braking
5. Correct braking condition causing

lateral pull
1. Incorrect Steering Gear Adjustment
1. Replace Steering Gear
2. Worn or loose tie rod ends
2. Replace tie rod ends
3. Loose steering gear mounting bolts
3. Tighten steering gear mounting bolts

to specified torque
4. Loose or worn steering shaft coupler

shaft/coupler
1. Low tire pressure
1. Inflate all tires to recommended

pressure
2. Lack of lubricant in steering gear
3. Low power steering fluid level
3. Fill power steering fluid reservoir to

correct level. Bleed as necessary
4. Loose drive belt
4. Replace adjuster or drive belt
5. Lack of lubricant in ball joints
5. Replace ball joints
6. Steering gear malfunction
7. Lack of lubricant in steering shaft

coupler

shaft/coupler
VEHICLE LEAD/PULL
To assure correct diagnosis, it is important to follow the steps outlined below in the order shown. Road test the
vehicle before and after each step to verify that the lead condition has been corrected. When evaluating a vehicle,
always drive the same road in both directions to get a feel for the effect of road crown and cross wind. A neutral
vehicle will exhibit a small amount of drift on both right and left crowned roads (normal crown sensitivity). A vehicle
with pronounced lead/pull may have one or more of the following conditions:
1. UNEQUAL TIRE PRESSURE. Adjust tire pressure to the pressure stated on door placard. Make sure the tire
pressure is equal on all four tires and evaluate the car. Also verify that the tire size and type are correct and
match each other. If the car still has a lead condition go to step (2).
2. TIRE CONICITY. Excessive tire conicity is one of the more frequent causes of vehicle lead. Cross-switch the
front tires and evaluate the car. If the car still leads in the same direction or gets worse, return the front tires to
their original position, then go to step (3).
3. SUSPENSION ALIGNMENT. Check and record the wheel alignment settings. Non-symmetrical front caster or
camber can sometimes cause a lead condition or can be used to fix a lead condition. Adjust the wheel alignment
as necessary to preferred settings (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE). If the car still leads, go to step (4).
LX
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
2 - 209
4. STEERING GEAR VALVE IMBALANCE. Steering gear valve imbalance can sometimes cause a vehicle lead.
Although there is no quick test or measurement that can be performed to verify a good or bad steering gear
valve, generally the steering efforts will feel much lighter in the lead direction and heavier in the opposite direction with an unbalanced valve. Replace the steering gear only as a 9last resort9 to solve the problem. To replace
the steering gear, (Refer to 19 - STEERING/GEAR - REMOVAL).
STANDARD PROCEDURE
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
PRE-WHEEL ALIGNMENT INSPECTION
Before any attempt is made to change or correct the wheel alignment, the following inspection and necessary corrections must be made to ensure proper alignment.
1. Verify that the fuel tank is full of fuel. If the tank is not full, the reduction in weight will affect the curb height of
the vehicle and the alignment angles.
2. The vehicles passenger and luggage compartments should be free of any load that is not factory equipment.
3. Check the tires on the vehicle. All tires must be the same size and in good condition with approximately the
same amount of tread wear. Inflate all the tires to the recommended air pressure.
4. Check the wheel and tire assemblies for excessive radial runout.
5. Inspect lower ball joints and all steering linkage for looseness, binding, wear or damage. Repair as necessary.
6. Check suspension fasteners for proper torque and tighten as necessary.
7. Inspect all suspension component rubber bushings for signs of wear or deterioration. Replace any faulty bushings or components before aligning the vehicle.
8. Check the vehicles curb height to verify it is within specifications. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE - CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT)
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SETUP

1. Position the vehicle on an alignment rack.
2. Install all required alignment equipment on the vehicle per the alignment equipment manufacturers instructions.
On this vehicle, a four-wheel alignment is recommended.
NOTE: Prior to reading the vehicles alignment readouts, the front and rear of vehicle should be jounced
(suspension compressed/released). Induce jounce (rear first, then front) by grasping the center of the
bumper and jouncing each end of vehicle an equal number of times. The bumper should always be released
when vehicle is at the bottom of the jounce cycle.
3. Read the vehicles current front and rear alignment settings. Compare the vehicles current alignment settings to
the vehicle specifications for camber, caster and toe-in. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS)
4. If front camber and caster are not within specifications, proceed to CAMBER AND CASTER below. If caster and
camber are within specifications, proceed to TOE which can be found following CAMBER AND CASTER. Rear
camber and caster are not adjustable. If found not to be within specifications, reinspect for damaged suspension
or body components and replace as necessary. If rear toe is not within specifications, adjust rear toe before
proceeding to adjust front toe.
CAMBER AND CASTER

Camber and caster settings on this vehicle are determined at the time the vehicle is designed, by the location of the
vehicles suspension components. This is referred to as NET BUILD. The result is no required adjustment of camber
and caster after the vehicle is built or when servicing the suspension components. Thus, when performing a wheel
alignment, caster and camber are not normally considered adjustable angles. Camber and caster should be
checked to ensure they meet vehicle specifications.
If individual front camber or caster is found not to meet alignment specifications, each can be adjusted by shifting
the engine cradle if cross-camber and cross-caster are within specifications, or by using an available service adjustment bolt package. Always try to shift the cradle first (if camber and caster are off slightly) to correct the mis-
2 - 210
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX
alignment before installing an adjustment bolt package. If an adjustment bolt package installation is necessary,
inspect the suspension components for any signs of damage or bending first.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the vehicles wheel alignment by heating, bending or by performing any
other modification to the vehicles front suspension components or body.
ADJUSTMENT BY SHIFTING CRADLE
CAUTION: Always use care when shifting cradle to avoid damaging other components on the vehicle.
1. Loosen the four bolts (1) fastening the engine cradle (2) to the frame just enough to allow movement
of the cradle.
2. Shift cradle as necessary to bring camber or caster
into specifications. When shifting cradle, use care
not to move other angles (camber or caster) that
are within specifications, out of specifications.
3. Tighten the four bolts (1) fastening the engine cradle (2) to the frame to specifications.
4. Jounce the rear, then front of the vehicle an equal
amount of times.
5. Measure camber and caster. If camber and caster
are within specifications, proceed to TOE. If camber or caster cannot be brought into specifications,
perform the ADJUSTMENT BOLT PACKAGE
INSTALLATION below.
ADJUSTMENT BOLT PACKAGE INSTALLATION - AWD

NOTE: Adjustment bolts for AWD and RWD are not
interchangeable.
The adjustment bolt package contains 2 special bolts
(1). These bolts can be identified by the offset grooves
cut into the thread section (2). These bolts are
designed to replace the inboard mounting bolts of the
lower control arm at the engine cradle. Each bolt
allows approximately 0.3 degrees of movement. To
adjust camber only, use both bolts, one at each leg of
the control arm. To adjust caster only, use one bolt at
the front leg only.
1. Raise the vehicle by the frame until the tires are not supporting the weight of the vehicle.
2. Remove the belly pan as necessary. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)
3. Lower control arm rear bolt only:
a. Remove the screws fastening the heat shields covering the steering gear inner tie rod boots. Remove the
heat shields.
b. Loosen (do not remove) the steering gear mounting bolt furthest from the side of adjustment bolt installation.
c. Remove the two remaining steering gear mounting bolts and allow steering gear to relax on the side of
adjustment bolt installation, giving access to the lower control arm rear mounting bolt.
LX
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
2 - 211
CAUTION: Wheel alignment adjustment bolts have

offset grooves cut into the length of the bolt (2). If
removing or installing lower control arm or tension strut mounting bolts that have these grooves,
DO NOT ROTATE THE BOLT. To remove the bolt,
hold the bolt head stationary and rotate the nut,
then slide the bolt straight out of the bushing.
This is necessary to avoid damaging the bat wings
in the bushing inner metal or cradle.
4. Hold the head of the control arm or tension strut mounting bolt stationary and remove the nut. Slide the bolt
straight out of the bushing and discard.
CAUTION: When installing an adjustment bolt, be sure to install it in the correct direction. Lower control
arm rear mounting bolts must be installed from the rear-forward and lower control arm front mounting bolts
must be installed from the front-rearward.
NOTE: The grooves on the adjustment bolts are off-center forcing the bolt to be installed in one of two
ways depending on whether more positive or negative camber or caster is necessary. The Bolts must be
rotated 180 to achieve either more positive or negative camber or caster. DO NOT force the adjustment
bolt.
NOTE: The original (non-grooved) mounting bolt
(3) lies through the center of the hole (1), between
the bat wings as shown in (c).
5. Camber Adjustment The adjustment bolts are
designed to work in conjunction with bat wing
holes that are formed into the engine cradle (1)
allowing for lower control arm movement approximately 0.3 in either direction.
To achieve more positive camber, refer to (a) in
the figure. Move the control arm in the desired
direction, then insert the adjustment bolt (2) with
a washer installed through the bat wing hole in
the engine cradle (1) and round hole in the bushing inner metal.
To achieve more negative camber, refer to (b) in
the figure. Move the control arm in the desired
the engine cradle (1) and round hole in the bushing inner metal.
2 - 212
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX

the bat wings as shown in (c).
6. Caster Adjustment The adjustment bolts are
designed to work in conjunction with bat wings
that are formed into the engine cradle (1) allowing
for lower control arm movement approximately 0.3
in either direction.
To achieve more positive caster, refer to (a) in
the figure. Move the lower control arm in the
desired direction, then insert the adjustment bolt
(2) with a washer installed through the bat wing
hole in the engine cradle (1) and the round hole
in the bushing inner metal.
To achieve more negative caster, refer to (b) in
the figure. Move the lower control arm in the
desired direction, then insert the adjustment bolt
(2) with a washer installed through the bat wing
hole in engine cradle (1) and round hole in the
bushing inner metal.
7. Start a NEW nut on the end of the mounting bolt by hand, then while holding the head of the bolt stationary,
install the nut. Do not tighten the nut at this time.
8. Rear adjustment bolt only Reinstall the steering gear and heat shields. (Refer to 19 - STEERING/GEAR INSTALLATION)
9. Lower the vehicle to curb position. Jounce the rear, then the front of the vehicle an equal amount of times.
10. Using a crowfoot wrench, tighten the adjustment bolt nut to 176 Nm (130 ft. lbs.) torque while holding the bolt
stationary. A socket on the end of a breaker bar works well for holding the rear bolt stationary with the steering
gear is installed.
11. Measure camber and caster. If camber and caster are not within specifications, inspect the suspension components for any signs of damage or bending. If camber and caster (and cross-camber and cross-caster) are within
specifications, proceed with TOE to check and adjust toe.
12. Install the belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - INSTALLATION)
ADJUSTMENT BOLT PACKAGE INSTALLATION - RWD
NOTE: Adjustment bolts for AWD and RWD are not
interchangeable.
The adjustment bolt package contains 2 special bolts
(1). These bolts can be identified by the offset grooves
cut into the thread section (2). These bolts are
designed to replace the inboard mounting bolts of the
lower control arm and tension strut. Each bolt allows
approximately 0.3 degrees of movement. To adjust
camber only, use both bolts, one at the tension strut
and the other at the lower control arm. To adjust
caster only, use one bolt at the tension strut only.
1. Raise the vehicle by the frame until the tires are not supporting the weight of the vehicle.
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX
2 - 213
2. Remove the belly pan as necessary. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL)

3. Lower control arm bolt only:
a. Remove the screws fastening the heat shields covering the stabilizer bar bushing retainers to the cradle.
Remove the heat shields.
b. Remove the four bolts (two each) fastening the stabilizer bar bushing retainers to the cradle.
c. Swing the stabilizer bar rearward and down out of the way of the control arm mounting bolts.
CAUTION: Wheel alignment adjustment bolts have
offset grooves cut into the length of the bolt (2). If
removing or installing lower control arm or tension strut mounting bolts that have these grooves,
DO NOT ROTATE THE BOLT. To remove the bolt,
hold the bolt head stationary and rotate the nut,
then slide the bolt straight out of the bushing.
This is necessary to avoid damaging the bat wings
in the bushing inner metal or cradle.
4. Hold the head of the control arm or tension strut mounting bolt stationary and remove the nut. Slide the bolt
straight out of the bushing and discard.
CAUTION: When installing an adjustment bolt, be sure to install it in the correct direction. Lower control
arm bolts must be installed from the rear-forward to avoid contact with the stabilizer bar upon installation.
Tension strut bolts must be installed from the front-rearward.
NOTE: The grooves on the adjustment bolts are off-center forcing the bolt to be installed in one of two
ways depending on whether more positive or negative camber or caster is necessary. The Bolts must be
rotated 180 to achieve either more positive or negative camber or caster. DO NOT force the adjustment
bolt.
2 - 214
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX

the bat wings (c).
5. Camber Adjustment The adjustment bolts are
designed to work in conjunction with bat wing
holes that are formed into the inner metal of the
lower control arm bushing (1) allowing for lower
control arm movement approximately 0.3 in either
direction.
To achieve more positive camber, refer to (a) in
the figure. Move the control arm or tension strut
in the desired direction, then insert the adjustment bolt (2) with a washer installed through the
round hole in the engine cradle and bat wing
hole (1) in the bushing inner metal.
To achieve more negative camber, refer to (b) in
the figure. Move the control arm or tension strut
in the desired direction, then insert the adjustment bolt (2) with a washer installed through the
round hole in the engine cradle and bat wing
hole (1) in the bushing inner metal.

the bat wings (c).
6. Caster Adjustment The adjustment bolts are
designed to work in conjunction with bat wings
that are formed into the engine cradle (1) allowing
for tension strut movement approximately 0.3 in
either direction.
To achieve more positive caster, refer to (a) in
the figure. Move the tension strut in the desired
the engine cradle (1) and the round hole in the
To achieve more negative caster, refer to (b) in
the figure. Move the tension strut in the desired
the engine cradle (1) and the round hole in the
7. Start a NEW nut and a washer (on RWD vehicles) on the end of the mounting bolt by hand, then while holding
the head of the bolt stationary, install the nut. Do not tighten the nut at this time.
LX
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
2 - 215
8. Lower the vehicle to curb position. Jounce the rear, then the front of the vehicle an equal amount of times.
9. Using a crowfoot wrench, tighten the adjustment bolt nut to 176 Nm (130 ft. lbs.) torque while holding the bolt
stationary.
10. Lower control arm adjustment bolt only Reinstall the stabilizer bar and heat shields.
11. Measure camber and caster. If camber and caster are not within specifications, inspect the suspension components for any signs of damage or bending. If camber and caster (and cross-camber and cross-caster) are within
specifications, proceed with TOE to check and adjust toe.
12. Install the belly pan. (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - INSTALLATION)
TOE
CAUTION: If the steering wheel is excessively off-center while driving, outside of Chassis specifications,
inadvertent ESP activations may occur on a vehicle so equipped.
1. Center the steering wheel and lock in place using a steering wheel clamp.
NOTE: When performing the toe adjustment procedure, set rear toe to specifications before setting front
toe.
2. If rear toe is not within specifications, perform the REAR TOE procedure below.
3. If front toe is not within specifications, perform the FRONT TOE procedure below.
4. Remove the steering wheel clamp.
5. Remove the alignment equipment.
6. Road test the vehicle to verify the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle does not wander or pull.
REAR TOE
NOTE: Perform the following procedure to each side of the vehicle as necessary.
1. Loosen the cam bolt nut securing the toe link to the
rear crossmember (front of rear crossmember) just
enough to rotate the cam bolt (1).
2 - 216
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
NOTE: When adjusting rear toe, the eccentric

lobes on the toe adjustment cam bolts and washers are not to be facing downward. The lobes
should only be facing upward or up to 90 to one
side or the other from the 12 Oclock position.
2. Rotate the cam bolt head on the opposite side
(rear) of the crossmember in either direction until
the preferred specification is obtained. (Refer to 2 SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - SPECIFICATIONS)
3. While holding the cam bolt (1) from turning, tighten
the cam bolt nut to specifications.
4. Adjust rear toe on opposite side of vehicle using
above procedure as necessary.
5. Once rear toe is set, proceed to FRONT TOE to set the vehicles front toe.
FRONT TOE
NOTE: Perform the following procedure to each side of the vehicle as necessary.
CAUTION: Do not twist the inner tie rod-to-steering gear boots during front wheel Toe adjustment.
Remove the boot clamps (2) at the inner tie rods
and make sure the boots move freely on the inner
tie rods.
1. AWD Loosen the jam nut (1) at the inner-to-outer
tie rod (3-4) connection.
LX
LX
2. RWD Loosen the jam nut (3) at the inner-to-outer
tie rod (4-5) connection.
3. Grasp the inner tie rod at the hex and rotate as

necessary to adjust front toe to the preferred toe
specification. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL
ALIGNMENT - SPECIFICATIONS)
4. AWD Tighten the tie rod jam nut (3) to 75 Nm

(55 ft. lbs.) torque using care not to lose
adjustment.
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
2 - 217
2 - 218
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX
5. RWD Tighten the tie rod jam nut (3) to 75 Nm

(55 ft. lbs.) torque using care not to lose adjustment.
6. Make sure the inner tie rod-to-steering gear boot is
not twisted, then reinstall the boot clamp at the
inner tie rod.
7. Adjust front toe on opposite side of vehicle using
the above procedure as necessary.
CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT

The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb
height specification.
Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The
tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment.
Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load.
Vehicle height is not adjustable. If the measurement is not within specifications, inspect the vehicle for bent or weak
suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle
sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new
or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak.
NOTE: When measuring, the maximum left-to-right differential is not to exceed 12.5 mm (0.5 in.).
1. Front On each side of the vehicle, measure the
distance (2) from the frame rail just behind the
engine cradle rear mount (1) to the floor or alignment rack/lift runway surface. It may be necessary
to measure to the bottom of a straight edge, placed
from lift runway to runway, to get an accurate
measurement.
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX
2 - 219
2. Rear On each side of the vehicle, measure the

distance (2) from the travel limiter (1) attached to
the front rear crossmember mount bushing to the
floor or alignment rack/lift runway surface. It may
be necessary to measure to the bottom of a
straight edge, placed from lift runway to runway, to
get an accurate measurement.
3. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart.
CURB HEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL
FRONT
REAR
ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE
352 mm 10 mm
13.85 in. 0.39 in
308 mm 10 mm
12.13 in. 0.39 in.
REAR-WHEEL-DRIVE
328 mm 10 mm
12.91 in. 0.39 in
296 mm 10 mm
11.65 in. 0.39 in.
SRT8
321 mm 12 mm
12.64 in. 0.47 in
290 mm 12 mm
11.42 in. 0.47 in.
POLICE PACKAGE (Without Equipment*)
345 mm 10 mm
13.58 in. 0.39 in
315 mm 10 mm
12.40 in. 0.39 in
* NOTE:
Police Package height specifications given are for settled vehicles without additional standard police equipment
added. Once police equipment is added, estimated at 520 lbs. (400 lbs. for Magnum with 5.7L), vehicles should
meet normal REAR-WHEEL-DRIVE specifications as listed above.
SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
NOTE: All specifications are given in degrees.
NOTE: All wheel alignments are to be set at curb height. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT STANDARD PROCEDURE)
ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
PREFERRED SETTING
ACCEPTABLE RANGE
0.00
20.50 to +0.50
20.30
20.80 to +0.20
CROSS-CAMBER (Maximum side-to-side

difference)
0.30
20.25 to +1.00
CASTER - LEFT
+4.50
+3.50 to +5.50
CAMBER - LEFT
CAMBER - RIGHT
2 - 220
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX
PREFERRED SETTING
ACCEPTABLE RANGE
CASTER - RIGHT
+5.10
+4.10 to +6.10
CROSS-CASTER (Maximum side-to-side

difference)
20.60
21.20 to 0.00
TOE - INDIVIDUAL
0.00
20.05 to +0.05
TOE - TOTAL**
0.00
20.10 to +0.10
Maximum side-to-side difference
0.00
0.06
PREFERRED SETTING
ACCEPTABLE RANGE
20.75
21.25 to 20.05

difference)
0.00
20.80 to +0.80
TOE - INDIVIDUAL LEFT
+0.17
+0.02 to +0.32
TOE - INDIVIDUAL RIGHT
+0.03
20.12 to +0.18
THRUST ANGLE
+0.07
20.08 to +0.22
REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT

CAMBER*
Notes:
* For reference only. These are nonadjustable angles.
** TOTAL TOE is the sum of both left and right wheel toe settings. TOTAL TOE must be equally split between
each wheel on the same axle to ensure the steering wheel is centered after setting toe. Positive toe is toe-in and
negative toe is toe-out
REAR-WHEEL-DRIVE
PREFERRED SETTING
ACCEPTABLE RANGE
0.00
20.50 to +0.50
20.30
20.80 to +0.20

difference)
0.30
20.25 to +1.00
CASTER - LEFT
+9.40
+8.40 to +10.40
CASTER - RIGHT
+10.40
+9.40 to +11.40

difference)
21.00
21.60 to 20.40
TOE - INDIVIDUAL
0.00
20.05 to +0.05
TOE - TOTAL**
0.00
20.10 to +0.10
0.00
0.06
PREFERRED SETTING
ACCEPTABLE RANGE
20.75
21.25 to 20.05

difference)
0.00
20.80 to +0.80
+0.17
+0.02 to +0.32
+0.03
20.12 to +0.18
THRUST ANGLE
+0.07
20.08 to +0.22
CAMBER - LEFT
CAMBER - RIGHT

CAMBER*
Notes:
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX
2 - 221
RIGHT-HAND-DRIVE
PREFERRED SETTING
ACCEPTABLE RANGE
20.20
20.70 to +0.30
0.10
20.40 to +0.60

difference)
20.30
21.00 to +0.25
CASTER - LEFT
+10.30
+9.30 to +11.30
CASTER - RIGHT
+9.50
+8.50 to +10.50

difference)
0.80
0.20 to 1.40
TOE - INDIVIDUAL
0.00
20.05 to +0.05
TOE - TOTAL**
0.00
20.10 to +0.10
0.00
0.06
PREFERRED SETTING
ACCEPTABLE RANGE
20.75
21.25 to 20.05

difference)
0.00
20.80 to +0.80
+0.17
+0.02 to +0.32
+0.03
20.12 to +0.18
THRUST ANGLE
+0.07
20.08 to +0.22
CAMBER - LEFT
CAMBER - RIGHT

CAMBER*
Notes:
2 - 222
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
LX
SRT8
PREFERRED SETTING
ACCEPTABLE RANGE
CAMBER - LEFT
20.05
20.55 to +0.45
CAMBER - RIGHT
20.35
20.85 to +0.15

difference)
0.25
20.25 to +0.75
CASTER - LEFT
+9.70
+8.40 to +11.00
CASTER - RIGHT
+10.30
+8.40 to +11.00

difference)
20.60
21.20 to 0.00
TOE - TOTAL**
+0.20
0.00 to +0.40
0.00
0.06
PREFERRED SETTING
ACCEPTABLE RANGE
20.75
21.25 to 20.05

difference)
0.00
20.80 to +0.80
+0.17
+0.02 to +0.32
+0.03
20.12 to +0.18
THRUST ANGLE
0.07
20.08 to +0.22

CAMBER*
Notes:
DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE
LX
3-1
DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
SHAFT-PROPELLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SHAFT-HALF (REAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
FRONT AXLE - 175 FIA

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
REAR AXLE - 198RII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
REAR AXLE - 210RII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
REAR AXLE - 215RII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
SHAFT-PROPELLER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
SHAFT-PROPELLER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
REMOVAL
REMOVAL - FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
REMOVAL - REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION - FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
INSTALLATION - REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SPECIFICATIONS PROPELLER SHAFT . . . . . . . 13
SPECIAL TOOLS PROPELLER SHAFT . . . . . . . . 14
BEARING-CENTER
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3-2
SHAFT-PROPELLER
LX
SHAFT-PROPELLER
DESCRIPTION
REAR
WARNING: Due to propeller shaft imbalance concerns, rear propeller shaft service is limited to center support bearing and coupler replacement only. The rear segment single-cardan universal joint is not serviceable.
Both RWD and AWD models utilize a two-piece rear propeller shaft design to transmit torque to the rear axle
assembly. This two-piece design consists of:
Front and rear shaft segments
Center support bearing/bracket assembly
Single-Cardan u-joint at rear segment/bearing interface
Rubber couplers at transmission and rear axle flanges
Fore-mounted vibration damper (V6 Models)
Rear Propeller Shaft Assembly (V8 System Shown)

1
2
3
4
5
6
FRONT COUPLER
FRONT SEGMENT
BEARING/BRACKET ASSEMBLY
SINGLE-CARDAN U-JOINT
REAR COUPLER
REAR SEGMENT
The front shaft segment is designed with a collapsing feature, consisting of two concentric tubes secured by shear
pins. This feature allows the tubes to telescope up to 200 mm (8 in.) during certain impacts.
The flexible rubber couplers at the transmission and axle flanges absorb vibration. The low-travel Single-Cardan
universal joint permits the minimal axial and angular variations that occur with independant rear suspension.
Additionally, models equipped with the V6 engine utilize a vibration damper which is designed to absorb and isolate
driveline vibrations and harmonics. This damper is mounted to the front segment, sandwiched between the coupler
and propeller shaft.
SHAFT-PROPELLER
LX
3-3
FRONT
Front Propeller Shaft Assembly

1 - FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT ASSEMBLY
WARNING: Due to propeller shaft imbalance concerns, front propeller shaft service is limited to rubber coupler and entire shaft replacement. The single-cardan universal joints are not serviceable.
AWD models utilize a two-piece front propeller shaft design to transmit torque to the front axle assembly. This
two-piece design consists of:
Front and rear shaft segments
Single-Cardan u-joints at end flanges
Rubber boot at front/rear segment interface
3-4
SHAFT-PROPELLER
REMOVAL
REMOVAL - FRONT
1. Place gearshift lever in NEUTRAL and raise vehicle
on hoist.
2. Remove propeller shaft heat shield.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Apply alignment index marks on the propeller shaft and front axle flanges.
Remove and discard four (4) front propeller shaft-to-axle flange bolts (2).
Apply alignment index marks on the propeller shaft and transfer case flanges.
Remove and discard four (4) front propeller shaft-to-transfer case flange bolts(2).
Remove propeller shaft assembly (1).
LX
LX
SHAFT-PROPELLER
3-5
REMOVAL - REAR
CAUTION: Propeller shaft removal is a two-man operation. Never allow propeller shaft to hang from the center bearing, or while only connected to the transmission or rear axle flanges. A helper is required. If a propeller shaft section is hung unsupported, damage may occur to the shaft, coupler, and/or center bearing
from over-angulation. This may result in driveline vibrations and/or component failure.
1. With vehicle in neutral, position on hoist.
2. Apply alignment index marks (3) on the transmission and axle flanges (2) and rubber couplers (1).
3. Remove crossmember (1).
3-6
SHAFT-PROPELLER
4. Remove rear exhaust system (2).
5. Remove heat shield (1).
6. Remove propeller shaft front coupler-to-flange

bolts.
LX
LX
7. Remove propeller shaft rear coupler-to-flange bolts.
8. Remove center bearing (1) mounting bolts.

9. With the aid of a helper, remove propeller shaft
assembly.
SHAFT-PROPELLER
3-7
3-8
SHAFT-PROPELLER
LX
COUPLER/DAMPER SERVICE
1. Remove three coupler-to-propeller shaft bolt/nuts.
2. Separate coupler (1) and damper (3) (if equipped)
from propeller shaft. Note orientation and direction
of components. It is imperative that they are properly reinstalled.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION - FRONT
1. Install propeller shaft (1) into position.

2. Starting at transfer case end, align index marks placed upon removal and loose-install new propeller shaft-totransfer case flange bolts.
3. Align index marks at front axle end of shaft, and loose-install new propeller shaft-to-front axle flange bolts.
4. Torque propeller shaft-to-transfer case and axle flange bolts (2) to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.).
LX
SHAFT-PROPELLER
3-9
5. Install propeller shaft heat shield.

6. Lower vehicle.
INSTALLATION - REAR
CAUTION: Propeller shaft installation is a two-man operation. Never allow propeller shaft to hang from the
center bearing, or while only connected to the transmission or rear axle flanges. A helper is required. If a
propeller shaft section is hung unsupported, damage may occur to the shaft, coupler, and/or center bearing
from over-angulation. This may result in driveline vibrations and/or component failure.
COUPLER/DAMPER SERVICE
1. If coupler and/or damper (V6 Models) were
removed, align index marks and reinstall. Make
sure protruding sleeve (2) is properly seated
into propshaft or damper counterbores.
2. Install three bolts with washers and nuts and
torque to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.) torque.
3 - 10
SHAFT-PROPELLER
1. Obtain helper and install propeller shaft into position at axle. Align index marks (3) placed upon
removal. Install propeller shaft rear coupler-to-axle
flange bolt/nuts by hand. Do not torque at this time.
2. Install propeller shaft into position at transmission

flange. Align index marks placed upon removal.
Install propeller shaft front coupler-to-transmission
flange bolt/nuts by hand. Do not torque at this time.
3. Loosely install center bearing-to-body bolts. Do not

torque at this time.
LX
LX
4. Torque propeller shaft front coupler-to-transmission
flange bolt/nuts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.)
5. Torque propeller shaft rear coupler-to-axle flange

bolt/nuts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.)
NOTE: Note: It is necessary to compress rear suspension to ride height before securing center
bearing to body. Failure to compress suspension
may result in objectionable noise and premature
bearing wear.
6. Compress rear suspension with suitable jack
stands (2).
SHAFT-PROPELLER
3 - 11
3 - 12
SHAFT-PROPELLER
7. Torque center bearing-to-body bolts to 27 Nm (20

ft. lbs.).
8. Install heat shield (1).
9. Install rear exhaust system (2)
LX
SHAFT-PROPELLER
LX
10. Install crossmember (1).
SPECIFICATIONS PROPELLER SHAFT

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
BOLT/NUT - SHAFT
COUPLER-TOTRANSMISSION
58
43
BOLT/NUT - SHAFT
COUPLER-TO-REAR
AXLE ASSEMBLY
58
43
BOLT/NUT - COUPLER/
DAMPER-TOPROPELLER SHAFT
(REAR)
58
43
BOLT - CENTER
BEARING-TO-BODY
(REAR)
27
20
BOLT - FRONT
PROPELLER SHAFT TO
AXLE/TRANSFER CASE
FLANGE
61
45
3 - 13
3 - 14
SHAFT-PROPELLER
SPECIAL TOOLS PROPELLER SHAFT
Bearing Splitter, 1130
Installer C-4735-1
LX
LX
BEARING-CENTER
REMOVAL
1. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle.
NOTE: To address propeller shaft imbalance concerns, the propeller shaft spline interface has a
skip-tooth design allowing only one possible
assembly orientation. Install reference marks only
to aid in assembly.
2. Mark front and rear shaft segments (2,3) with
installation reference marks (1).
3. Separate propeller shaft front and rear segments at

bearing and remove boot (1)
SHAFT-PROPELLER
3 - 15
3 - 16
SHAFT-PROPELLER
4. Press center bearing (1) off of rear shaft segment

using arbor press and Bearing Splitter 1130 (2).
INSTALLATION
1. Install propeller shaft rear segment into press, supported on joint yoke (3).
2. Install bearing assembly as shown (2).
3. Using Tool C-4735-1 (1), press bearing assembly
(2) onto shaft.
LX
LX
4. Remove propeller shaft from press.
5. Install boot (1) to rear shaft segment.
NOTE: To address propeller shaft imbalance concerns, the propeller shaft spline interface has a
skip-tooth design allowing only one possible
assembly orientation.
6. Align index marks placed upon disassembly and
install front segment (1) to rear segment.
7. Install boot (2) to front segment, seating boot into
groove (3).
8. Install propeller shaft into vehicle.
SHAFT-PROPELLER
3 - 17
3 - 18
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
LX
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HALF SHAFT . . . . . . 19
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
SPECIFICATIONS - HALFSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SPECIAL TOOLS
HALFSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
BOOT-CV INNER
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
BOOT-CV OUTER
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
LX
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
3 - 19
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
DESCRIPTION
The inner joints of both half shaft assemblies are
cross-groove joints. The outer joints of both assemblies are Rzeppa Joints. The cross-groove joints are
true constant velocity (CV) joint assemblies, which
allow for the changes in half shaft length through the
jounce and rebound travel of the rear suspension.
Left Halfshaft and Intermediate Shaft

The inner cross-groove joint of the left halfshaft
assembly is splined to the intermediate shaft and
retained with a snap ring. The right halfshaft is splined
to the front axle assembly and retained with a snap
ring. The outer CV joint has a stub shaft that is splined
into the wheel hub and retained by a steel hub nut.
Right Halfshaft Assembly
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HALF SHAFT

VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. Check for grease in the vicinity of both the inboard and outboard joints. This is a sign of inner or outer joint seal
boot or seal boot clamp damage.
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION IN TURNS

A clicking noise and/or a vibration in turns could be caused by one of the following conditions:
Damaged outer CV or inner cross-groove joint seal boot or seal boot clamps. This will result in the loss and/or
contamination of the joint grease, resulting in inadequate lubrication of the joint.
Noise may also be caused by another component of the vehicle coming in contact with the half shafts.
3 - 20
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
LX
CLUNKING NOISE DURING ACCELERATION

This
noise may be a result of one of the following conditions:

A torn seal boot on the inner or outer joint of the half shaft assembly.
A loose or missing clamp on the inner or outer joint of the half shaft assembly.
A damaged or worn half shaft CV joint.
A worn intermediate shaft bearing (AWD Models).
SHUDDER OR VIBRATION DURING ACCELERATION

This
problem could be a result of:

A worn or damaged half shaft inner cross-groove joint.
Improper wheel alignment. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS

This

Foreign material (mud, etc.) packed on the backside of the wheel(s).
Out of balance tires or wheels. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Improper tire and/or wheel runout. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
REMOVAL
& MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
wheel assembly (1).
LX
3. While holding link ball joint stem from rotating,
remove nut (2) fastening stabilizer link (1) to shock
clevis bracket (3). Slide link ball joint stem from clevis bracket.
4. Remove nut and pinch bolt (1) fastening clevis

5. Remove nut (3) and bolt (1) attaching shock clevis

bracket (2) to lower control arm (7).
6. Pull lower end of clevis bracket outward away from
lower control arm bushing, then slide it off shock
assembly. It may be necessary to use an appropriate prying tool to spread clamp area of clevis
bracket allowing removal from shock assembly.
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
3 - 21
3 - 22
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
LX

rotating, remove hub nut (1) from axle half shaft
(2).
NOTE: In some cases, it may be necessary to retract caliper piston in its bore a small amount in order to
provide sufficient clearance between shoes and rotor to easily remove caliper from knuckle. This can usually be accomplished before mounting bolts are removed, by grasping rear of caliper and pulling outward
working with guide pins, thus retracting piston. Never push on piston directly as it may get damaged.
and adapter (2) to knuckle (3).
knuckle (3) as an assembly. Hang assembly out of
LX
wheel studs.
13. Remove tool.
14. Remove nut (1) from end of upper ball joint stud.
15. Remove clip (3) fastening wheel speed sensor (2)

to knuckle (4).
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
3 - 23
3 - 24
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
LX
16. Disengage right halfshaft (1) from axle and

Right Halfshaft Removal/Installation

17. Remove left halfshaft (1) from vehicle.
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY

NOTE: The intermediate shaft assembly is serviced only as an assembly.
LX
1. Remove four (4) intermediate shaft assembly-to-oil
pan bolts.
2. Remove intermediate shaft assembly (2) from
engine oil pan.
INSTALLATION
1. If previously removed, install intermediate shaft
assembly (2). Install four intermediate shaft-to-oil
pan bolts and torque to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
2. Install left halfshaft assembly (1).
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
3 - 25
3 - 26
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
LX
3. Using Tool C-4193-A (1), install new axle seal.
4. Install right halfshaft assembly (1).
Right Halfshaft Removal/Installation

5. Install halfshaft (1) into hub/bearing assembly (2).
LX
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
3 - 27
6. Loosely install halfshaft hub nut (1), and do not


stud joint.
90 turn) torque.
NOTE: Inspect brake shoes (pads) before installation. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/

BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)
3 - 28
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)

where rotor mounts.
9. Install brake rotor (2) over studs on hub and
bearing.
10. Install disc brake caliper and adapter assembly

(2) over brake rotor.
(2) to knuckle (3). Tighten bolts to 169 Nm (125
ft. lbs.) torque.
12. Pull lower end of shock assembly outward, then

slide clevis bracket (3) onto lower end. Slide clevis bracket onto shock assembly until bracket
contacts collar on shock housing (2).
13. Install pinch bolt and nut (1) fastening clevis
Install pinch bolt from rear. Do not tighten at this
time.
LX
LX
14. Slide clevis bracket (2) over bushing mounted in
15. Install bolt (1) and nut (3) attaching shock clevis
bracket (2) to lower control arm (7). Do not
16. Tighten pinch bolt (1) attaching clevis bracket to

shock assembly to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
17. Slide stabilizer link ball joint stem into clevis

bracket. Install nut (2) fastening link to clevis
bracket (3). Tighten nut by holding ball joint stud
while turning nut. Tighten nut using crow foot
wrench on torque wrench to 146 Nm (108 ft. lbs.)
torque.
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
3 - 29
3 - 30
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
18. Attach wheel speed sensor cable routing clip (3)

at knuckle (4).
torque.
21. Lower vehicle.
LX
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
LX
SPECIFICATIONS - HALFSHAFT
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
Nut, Halfshaft Hub
213
157
Bolt, Intermediate
Shaft-to-Oil Pan
25
18
3 - 31
3 - 32
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
SPECIAL TOOLS
HALFSHAFT
Seal Installer C-4193A
Clamp, C-4975-A
Remover, Ball Stud 9360
LX
LX
BOOT-CV INNER
REMOVAL
1. Remove large boot clamp which retains inner tripod
joint sealing boot to tripod joint housing and discard. Remove small clamp which retains inner tripod joint sealing boot to interconnecting shaft and
discard. Remove the sealing boot (3) from the tripod housing and slide it down the interconnecting
shaft.
CAUTION: When removing the tripod joint housing
from the spider assembly, hold the bearings in
place on the spider trunions to prevent the bearings from falling away.
2. Slide the tripod joint housing (1) off the spider
assembly and the interconnecting shaft.
3. Remove snap ring (3) which retains spider assembly to interconnecting shaft (1). Do not hit the
outer tripod bearings in an attempt to remove
spider assembly from interconnecting shaft.
4. Remove the spider assembly (1) from interconnecting shaft (4). If spider assembly will not come off
interconnecting shaft by hand, it can be removed
by tapping spider assembly with a brass drift (3).
5. Slide sealing boot off interconnecting shaft.
6. Thoroughly clean and inspect spider assembly, tripod joint housing, and interconnecting shaft for any
signs of excessive wear. If any parts show signs
of excessive wear, the driveshaft assembly will
require replacement. Component parts of these
driveshaft assemblies are not serviceable.
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
3 - 33
3 - 34
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
INSTALLATION
1. Slide inner tripod joint seal boot retaining clamp,
onto interconnecting shaft. Then, slide the replacement inner tripod joint sealing boot (1) onto the
interconnecting shaft. Inner tripod joint seal boot
MUST be positioned on interconnecting shaft,
so the raised bead on the inside of the seal
boot is in groove (3) on interconnecting shaft
(4).
2. Install spider assembly (1) onto interconnecting

shaft (2). Spider assembly must be installed on
interconnecting shaft far enough to fully install spider retaining snap ring.
3. If spider assembly (2) will not fully install on interconnecting shaft by hand, it can be installed by
tapping the spider body with a brass drift (4). Do
not hit the outer tripod bearings in an attempt
to install spider assembly on interconnecting
shaft.
LX
LX
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
3 - 35
4. Install the spider assembly to interconnecting shaft

retaining snap ring (3) into groove on end of interconnecting shaft. Be sure the snap ring is fully
seated into groove on interconnecting shaft.
5. Distribute 1/2 the amount of grease provided in the

seal boot service package (DO NOT USE ANY
OTHER TYPE OF GREASE) into tripod housing.
Put the remaining amount into the sealing boot.
6. Align tripod housing (1) with spider assembly (2)
and then slide tripod housing over spider assembly
and interconnecting shaft.
7. Install inner tripod joint seal boot to interconnecting

shaft clamp evenly on sealing boot.
8. Clamp sealing boot (4) onto interconnecting shaft
(3) using crimper, Special Tool C-4975-A and the
following procedure. Place crimping tool C-4975-A
over bridge of clamp. Tighten nut on crimping tool
C-4975-A until jaws on tool (2) are closed completely together, face to face.
CAUTION: Seal must not be dimpled, stretched or out of shape in any way. If seal is NOT shaped correctly,
equalize pressure in seal and shape it by hand.
9. Position sealing boot into the tripod housing retaining groove. Install seal boot retaining clamp evenly on sealing
boot.
CAUTION: The following positioning procedure determines the correct air pressure inside the inner tripod
joint assembly prior to clamping the sealing boot to inner tripod joint housing. If this procedure is not done
prior to clamping sealing boot to tripod joint housing sealing boot durability can be adversely affected.
3 - 36
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
LX
CAUTION: When venting the inner tripod joint assembly, use care so inner tripod sealing boot does not get
punctured, or in any other way damaged. If sealing boot is punctured, or damaged in any way while being
vented, the sealing boot can not be used.
10. Insert a trim stick (4) between the tripod joint (3)
and the sealing boot (2) to vent inner tripod joint
assembly. When inserting trim stick between
tripod housing and sealing boot ensure trim
stick is held flat and firmly against the tripod
housing. If this is not done damage to the
sealing boot can occur. If inner tripod joint has a
Hytrel (hard plastic) sealing boot, be sure trim
stick is inserted between soft rubber insert and tripod housing not the hard plastic sealing boot and
soft rubber insert.
11. With trim stick inserted between sealing boot and

tripod joint housing, position the interconnecting
shaft so it is at the center of its travel in the tripod
joint housing. Remove the trim stick from between
the sealing boot and the tripod joint housing. This
procedure will equalize the air pressure in the
tripod joint, preventing premature sealing boot
failure.
12. Position trilobal boot to interface with the tripod
housing. The lobes of the boot must be properly
aligned with the recesss of the tripod housing.
13. Clamp tripod joint sealing boot to tripod joint,
using required procedure for type of boot clamp
application.
CRIMP TYPE BOOT CLAMP

1. Clamp sealing boot onto tripod housing using
Crimper, Special Tool C-4975-A (3).
2. Place crimping tool C-4975-A over bridge of clamp.
LX
3. Tighten nut on crimping tool C-4975-A (3) until jaws
on tool are closed completely together, face to face
(4).
LATCHING TYPE BOOT CLAMP

1. Clamp sealing boot (3) onto tripod housing using
clamp locking tool, Snap-On YA3050 (2) or an
equivalent.
2. Place prongs of clamp locking tool in the holes of
the clamp (1).
3. Squeeze tool together until top band of clamp is

latched behind the two tabs on lower band of
clamp (2).
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
3 - 37
3 - 38
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
BOOT-CV OUTER
REMOVAL
1. Remove large boot clamp (4) retaining C/V joint
sealing boot to C/V joint housing and discard.
Remove small clamp (1) that retains outer C/V joint
sealing boot to interconnecting shaft and discard.
Remove sealing boot from outer C/V joint housing
and slide it down interconnecting shaft.
2. Wipe away grease to expose outer C/V joint and
interconnecting shaft.
3. Remove outer C/V joint from interconnecting shaft

using the following procedure: Support interconnecting shaft in a vise equipped with protective
caps on jaws of vise to prevent damage to
interconnecting shaft. Then, using a softfaced
hammer, sharply hit the end of the C/V joint housing to dislodge housing from internal circlip on
interconnecting shaft. Then slide outer C/V joint off
end of interconnecting shaft, joint may have to be
tapped off shaft using a softfaced hammer.
4. Remove large circlip from the interconnecting shaft

(3) before attempting to remove outer C/V joint
sealing boot.
5. Slide failed sealing boot off interconnecting shaft.
6. Thoroughly clean and inspect outer C/V joint
assembly and interconnecting joint for any signs of
excessive wear. If any parts show signs of
excessive wear, the driveshaft assembly will
require replacement. Component parts of these
driveshaft assemblies are not serviceable.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Slide new sealing boot (1) to interconnecting shaft
retaining clamp onto interconnecting shaft. Slide
the outer C/V joint assembly sealing boot onto the
interconnecting shaft. Seal boot MUST be positioned on interconnecting shaft so the raised
bead on the inside of the seal boot is in groove
on interconnecting shaft.
2. Align splines on interconnecting shaft with splines

on cross of outer C/V joint assembly and start
outer C/V joint onto interconnecting shaft.
3. Install outer C/V joint assembly onto interconnecting shaft by using a softfaced hammer (1) and
tapping end of stub axle (with nut installed) until
outer C/V joint is fully seated on interconnecting
shaft.
4. Outer C/V joint assembly must be installed on

interconnecting shaft until cross of outer C/V joint
assembly is seated against circlip on interconnecting shaft (1).
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
3 - 39
3 - 40
SHAFT-HALF (FRONT)
5. Distribute 1/2 the amount of grease provided in

seal boot service package (DO NOT USE ANY
OTHER TYPE OF GREASE) into outer C/V joint
assembly housing. Put the remaining amount into
the sealing boot.
6. Install outer C/V joint sealing boot to interconnecting shaft clamp evenly on sealing boot.
7. Clamp sealing boot onto interconnecting shaft
using crimper, Special Tool C-4975-A and the following procedure. Place crimping tool C-4975-A
C-4975-A until jaws on tool are closed completely
together, face to face (2).
CAUTION: Seal must not be dimpled, stretched, or

outofshape in any way. If seal is NOT shaped
correctly, equalize pressure in seal and shape it by
hand.
8. Position outer C/V joint sealing boot into its retaining groove on outer C/V joint housing. Install sealing boot to outer C/V joint retaining clamp evenly
on sealing boot.
9. Clamp sealing boot onto outer C/V joint housing
using Crimper, Special Tool C-4975-A (3) and the
following procedure. Place crimping tool C-4975-A
C-4975-A until jaws on tool are closed completely
together, face to face (2).
LX
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
LX
3 - 41
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HALF SHAFT . . . . . . 42
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SPECIFICATIONS - TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3 - 42
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
LX
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
DESCRIPTION
The inner joints of both half shaft assemblies are cross-groove joints and are splined to the differential side gears.
The outer joints of both assemblies are Rzeppa Joints. The cross-groove joints are true constant velocity (CV) joint
assemblies, which allow for the changes in half shaft length through the jounce and rebound travel of the rear suspension.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HALF SHAFT

VEHICLE INSPECTION
1. Check for grease in the vicinity of both the inboard and outboard joints. This is a sign of inner or outer joint seal
boot or seal boot clamp damage.
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION IN TURNS

A clicking noise and/or a vibration in turns could be caused by one of the following conditions:
Damaged outer CV or inner cross-groove joint seal boot or seal boot clamps. This will result in the loss and/or
contamination of the joint grease, resulting in inadequate lubrication of the joint.
Noise may also be caused by another component of the vehicle coming in contact with the half shafts.
CLUNKING NOISE DURING ACCELERATION

This
noise may be a result of one of the following conditions:

A torn seal boot on the inner or outer joint of the half shaft assembly.
A loose or missing clamp on the inner or outer joint of the half shaft assembly.
A damaged or worn half shaft CV joint.
SHUDDER OR VIBRATION DURING ACCELERATION

This

A worn or damaged half shaft inner cross-groove joint.
Improper wheel alignment. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/WHEEL ALIGNMENT - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS

This

Foreign material (mud, etc.) packed on the backside of the wheel(s).
Out of balance tires or wheels. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
Improper tire and/or wheel runout. (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
REMOVAL
NOTE: This procedure requires the compression of the rear suspension to ride height. A drive-on hoist
should be used. If a drive-on hoist is not used, screw-style under-hoist jack stands are required to compress the rear suspension, facilitating rear halfshaft removal.
NOTE: Halfshaft inner and outer boots are not serviceable separately. Boot replacement requires entire
shaft assembly replacement.
CAUTION: Unequal-length halfshafts are used. The left halfshaft is shorter than the right, and it is necessary
to identify and tag halfshafts upon removal to ensure proper installation.
LX
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
3 - 43
CAUTION: Never grasp halfshaft assembly by the inner or outer boots. Doing so may cause the boot to
pucker or crease, reducing the service life of the boot and joint. Avoid over angulating or stroking the C/V
joints when handling the halfshaft.
1. With vehicle in neutral, position and raise vehicle
on hoist.
2. Using 14mm hex, remove axle drain plug (1) and
drain rear axle fluid into container suitable for fluid
reuse.
3. Install drain plug (1) and torque to:
198 Axle: 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.)
210 Axle: 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.)
4. Remove rear exhaust system (2) on V8-equipped

models.
3 - 44
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
5. Remove wheel/tire assembly (1) from sides that

shaft is to be removed.
6. Remove wheel hub nut (1) and discard.

LX
LX
8. Remove three (3) propeller shaft coupler-to-axle
flange bolt/nuts.
9. Using suitable screwdriver (1), partially disengage

halfshaft(s) (2) from axle assembly.
10. If a drive-on hoist is used, position transmission

jack(1) to rear axle assembly. If a drive-on hoist is
not used, compress rear suspension using screwstyle under-hoist jack stands (2), then position
transmission jack to rear axle assembly.
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
3 - 45
3 - 46
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
11. Remove rear axle forward mount isolator (1) bolt/

nut (2).
CAUTION: Access to rear axle-to-crossmember

bolts is best achieved by use of short socket and
a flexible-head ratchet.
12. Remove two rear axle-to-crossmember bolts (1).
13. Carefully lower rear axle. While lowering axle,

separate propeller shaft from axle and support
with suitable rope or wire (1).
LX
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
LX
CAUTION: Unequal-length halfshafts are used. The
left halfshaft is shorter than the right, and it is
necessary to identify and tag halfshafts upon
removal to ensure proper installation.
14. Lower axle just enough to remove
at a time. Shift axle assembly in
compressing one halfshaft while
other (1). Use caution to protect
journal.
halfshafts one
one direction,
removing the
axle seal and
CAUTION: Never grasp halfshaft assembly by the

inner or outer boots. Doing so may cause the boot
to pucker or crease, reducing the service life of
the boot and joint. Avoid over angulating or stroking the C/V joints when handling the halfshaft.
CAUTION: Use care while handling/storing halfshaft assembly. Damage to the slinger can result
from improper handling. If slinger gets bent or
damaged, straighten slinger to avoid contact with
axle seal assembly.
15. Remove halfshaft from hub. Remove and inspect
rubber isolation washer (1). Discard washer if rubber surfaces are worn away. Repeat on other side
if necessary.
3 - 47
3 - 48
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
LX
16. Remove axle seals (2) using suitable screwdriver.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Halfshaft inner and outer boots are not serviceable separately. Boot replacement requires entire
shaft assembly replacement.
CAUTION: Unequal-length halfshafts are used. The left halfshaft is shorter than the right, and it is necessary
to identify and tag halfshafts upon removal to ensure proper installation.
1. Install new axle seal(s) (1) using Tool 9223 (2).
LX
2. Install halfshaft isolation washer (1). Washer is bidirectional, and can be installed in either direction.
3. Install halfshaft (2) to wheel hub/knuckle assembly.

Install new hub nut (1) by hand.
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
3 - 49
3 - 50
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
NOTE: Inspect slinger(s) for handling damage.

Straighten as necessary to avoid contact with axle
seal.
NOTE: Use care when installing halfshaft to axle
assembly. The halfshaft installation angle should
be minimized to avoid damage to seal upon installation.
4. Lubricate halfshaft inner joint bearing journal (3)
with MoparT Gear and Axle Lubricant (75W-140).
Using new circlip(s), install halfshaft (1) to rear axle
assembly. Use care not to damage axle seals (2).
Verify proper installation by pulling outward on joint
by hand.
5. Raise rear axle assembly into position. Align propeller shaft index marks (3) and start propeller
shaft coupler-to-axle bolt/nuts by hand.
6. Install two rear axle-to-crossmember bolts (1) and

torque to 220 Nm (162 ft. lbs.).
LX
LX
7. Install rear axle front mount isolator (1) as shown
and torque bolt/nut to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.).
8. Again verify halfshaft inner joints are fully engaged

to axle assembly.
9. Remove transmission jack (1).
10. If used, remove screw-type under-hoist jack
stands (2).
11. Torque propeller shaft coupler-to-axle flange bolt/

nuts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.).
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
3 - 51
3 - 52
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
12. Using a 14mm hex, remove rear axle fill plug (1).
Fill axle with MoparT 75W-140 Synthetic Gear &
Axle Lubricant in the following quantities:
198 Axle: 1.4L (1.5 qts.)
210 Axle: 1.6L (1.7 qts.)
13. Install and torque fill plug (1) to:

198 Axle: 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.)
210 Axle: 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.)
14. V8 Models: Install exhaust system. Tighten band

clamps (1) to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.).
LX
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
LX
15. Lower vehicle. Torque halfshaft hub nut (1) to 213
Nm (157 ft. lbs.). Install wheel center cap.
16. Install wheel/tire assembly (1) and torque lug nuts

to 150 Nm (110 ft. lbs.).
SPECIFICATIONS - TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
Bolt, Axle Housing-toCrossmember
220
162
Bolt/Nut, Axle Front

Isolator
65
48
Clamp, Exhaust System

Band
61
45
Nut, Axle Hub
213
157
3 - 53
3 - 54
SHAFT-HALF (REAR)
SPECIAL TOOLS
Installer, 9223
LX
SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE
LX
3 - 55
SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3 - 56
SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE
SHAFT-INTERMEDIATE
REMOVAL
NOTE: The intermediate shaft is serviced only as a
complete assembly.
1. Remove left halfshaft assembly (2). (Refer to 3 DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT REMOVAL)
2. Remove four intermediate shaft-to-oil pan bolts(1).
Remove assembly (3) from engine
INSTALLATION
1. Install intermediate shaft assembly (3). Install and
torque four intermediate shaft-to-oil pan bolts (1) to
25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
2. Install left halfshaft assembly (2).
LX
LX
3 - 57

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
SPECIFICATIONS - 175MM FIA FRONT AXLE . . . 96
SPECIAL TOOLS - 175MM FIA FRONT AXLE . . . . 97
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL
REMOVAL - RIGHT AXLE SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
REMOVAL LEFT AXLE SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION - RIGHT AXLE SEAL . . . . . . . . . 100
INSTALLATION - LEFT AXLE SEAL . . . . . . . . . . 100
FLUID
STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID FILL . . . . . . . 102
SEAL-PINION
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3 - 58
LX

DESCRIPTION
175MM FIA Axle Section View

1
2
3
4
5
6
PINION HOUSING ASSEMBLY

SHIM, PINION DEPTH
O-RING SEAL, PINION HOUSING
BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE (LARGE)
SHIM, SELECT
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
7 - RING GEAR
8 - COVER, AXLE
9 - BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE (SMALL)
10 - GEAR, PINION
11 - BEARING, PINION HEAD
12 - BEARING, PINION TAIL
The 175MM FIA (Front Independent Aluminum) is an independent assembly with an aluminum housing and cast iron
differential. The 175MM FIA uses an open differential which is supported by two tapered roller bearings located on
either side of the case. Differential bearing preload and ring gear backlash are controlled with select shims located
on the outside of the differential bearing cups. Pinion height is set with a select shim sandwiched between the
pinion housing assembly and the axle housing.
The 175MM FIA Axle is available only in All-Wheel Drive models, and only in a 3:07:1 ratio.
LX
3 - 59
175MM FIA Front Axle Exploded View

1 - NUT, PINION FLANGE1
2 - FLANGE, PINION
3 - SEAL, PINION
5 - BOLT, PINION HOUSING
6 - HOUSING, PINION
7 - SPACER, SELECT
9 - SEAL, PINION HOUSING O-RING
10 - GEAR, PINION
11 - SHIM, PINION DEPTH (SELECT)
12 - HOUSING, AXLE
13 - VENT, HOUSING
14 - HOUSING, AXLE
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
- BAFFLE, VENT
- SEAL, AXLE
- SHIM, PRELOAD
- BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE
- ASSEMBLY, RING GEAR/DIFFERENTIAL
- SEAL, AXLE COVER O-RING
- SHIM, BEARING PRELOAD
- COVER, AXLE HOUSING
- BOLT, AXLE HOUSING COVER
- SEAL, AXLE
- PLUG, AXLE FILL
- SHAFT, DIFFERENTIAL PINION
REMOVAL
2. Remove both front halfshafts. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT - REMOVAL)
3. Remove front intermediate shaft assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
- REMOVAL)
4. Remove front propeller shaft. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT - REMOVAL)
5. Remove RH catalytic converter/exhaust pipe assembly. (Refer to 11 - EXHAUST SYSTEM/CATALYTIC CONVERTER - REMOVAL)
3 - 60
6. Separate power steering return line (3) from cradle

by unfastening clips (1).
7. Remove front axle housing support bracket (1).
8. Remove seven front axle assembly-to-oil pan bolts.

Remove axle assembly (1) from vehicle.
LX
LX
DISASSEMBLY

2 - FLANGE, PINION
3 - SEAL, PINION
6 - HOUSING, PINION
7 - SPACER, SELECT
10 - GEAR, PINION
12 - HOUSING, AXLE
13 - VENT, HOUSING
14 - HOUSING, AXLE
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
- BAFFLE, VENT
- SEAL, AXLE
- SHIM, PRELOAD
- SEAL, AXLE
- PLUG, AXLE FILL
3 - 61
3 - 62
1. Remove pinion housing assembly (4).

2. Remove pinion flange nut: Install Tool 6958 (1) as
shown.
LX
LX
3. Using suitable socket (1) remove pinion flange nut.
4. Using puller 1026 (1), remove pinion flange.
5. Using suitable screwdriver, remove pinion seal (1).
3 - 63
3 - 64
6. Remove pinion housing assembly bolts (1)
7. Remove pinion depth shim (1).
8. Remove pinion housing o-ring seal (1).
LX
LX
9. Measure pinion housing assembly rotating torque.
Rotating torque should be 130-250 Ncm (12-22 in.
lbs.). If rotating torque is outside of this range,
bearing replacement is required. Refer to Pinion
Housing Disassembly.
10. Measure differential rotating torque with Tool

C-4995-A. Rotating torque should be within 190260 Ncm (1723 in. lbs). Measurements recorded
out of this range require differential side bearing
replacement and/or side bearing preload
adjustment.
3 - 65
3 - 66
11. Remove axle housing cover (5). Remove differential assembly (3) and inboard axle seal (2).
12. Remove axle housing cover o-ring (1).
LX
LX
PINION HOUSING DISASSEMBLY
1. Press pinion gear/shaft (2) out of housing. Use
suitable adapter (1) to protect end of shaft
2. Remove pinion bearing spacer (1)
3 - 67
3 - 68
Using splitter 1130 or equivalent (2), press off pinion

head bearing (1).
3. Using a suitable punch, remove pinion tail bearing

cup (1).
4. Using suitable punch, remove pinion head bearing

cup (1).
LX
LX
DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: The differential ring gear is welded to the differential case and is not serviceable separately.
1. Rotate differential side gears about case and
remove side gears (2) and thrust washers (1).
2. Using suitable punch, drive pinion shaft roll pin (1)

into case until it bottoms.
3 - 69
3 - 70
3. Remove pinion shaft (1), pinion gears (3) and

thrust washers (2). Drive out and discard pinion
shaft roll pin.
4. Using Tool 9676 (1) and Tool 1130 (3), press differential side bearing (2) off of ring gear side and
discard.
5. Using Tool 9676 (1) and Tool 1130 (3), press differential side bearing (2) off of opposite side and
discard.
LX
LX
AXLE HOUSING
1. Remove differential side bearing cup from axle
housing cover. Install Tool 6514 (1) as shown.
2. Remove differential side bearing cup with Tool

6514 (1).
3 - 71
3 - 72
LX
NOTE: Side bearing preload shims affect adjust

differential bearing preload and ring gear backlash
and must not be mixed up. Measure and tag side
bearing preload shims upon removal.
3. Remove side bearing preload shim (1).
4. Measure preload
replacement.
shim
(1)
to
identify
for
5. Using Tool 9664 (1) and Slide Hammer C-637 (2),

remove and discard inboard differential side bearing cup.
LX
6. Remove side bearing preload shim from housing
(1).
7. Measure preload
replacement.
shim
(1)
to
identify
for
3 - 73
3 - 74
LX
ASSEMBLY

2 - FLANGE, PINION
3 - SEAL, PINION
6 - HOUSING, PINION
7 - SPACER, SELECT
10 - GEAR, PINION
12 - HOUSING, AXLE
13 - VENT, HOUSING
14 - HOUSING, AXLE
DIFFERENTIAL/RING GEAR ASSEMBLY

1. Install pinion shaft (1), pinion gears (3) and thrust
washers (2) as shown.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
- BAFFLE, VENT
- SEAL, AXLE
- SHIM, PRELOAD
- SEAL, AXLE
- PLUG, AXLE FILL
LX
2. Using suitable punch, install new roll pin and install
flush to differential case (1).
3. Install differential side gears and thrust washers

(1,2). Rotate into position.
4. Using Tool 9666 (1), install new differential side

bearing (ring gear side).
3 - 75
3 - 76
5. Using Tool 9665 (1), install new differential side

bearing (opposite side).
PINION HOUSING ASSEMBLY

1. Using Tools C-4171 (2) and D-129 (1), press new
pinion head bearing cup (3) into pinion gear
housing.
LX
LX
2. Using Tools C-4171 (1) and D-130 (2), press new
pinion tail bearing cup into pinion gear housing.
3. Using Tool L-4507, install new pinion head bearing.
4. Install pinion bearing select spacer (1) removed

upon dissasembly. Spacer thickness will be measured/verified at end of assembly.
3 - 77
3 - 78
5. Install pinion gear/bearing assembly into pinion

housing. Using Tool L-4507 (1) , press new pinion
tail bearing (2) onto shaft.
6. Usint Tool 9677 (1), install new pinion seal.
7. Using Tool L-4507 (1), install pinion flange (2) until

it bottoms.
LX
LX
8. Using Tool 6958 (2), install pinion flange nut and
9. Measure pinion housing assembly rotating torque

(1). Rotating torque should be within 130-260 Ncm
(12-23 in. lbs.).
10. If rotating torque is lower than this range, disassemble pinion housing, measure and install a
slightly thicker spacer (1), reassemble and
reverify. If rotating torque is higher than this
range, disassemble pinion housing, install a
slightly thinner spacer, reassemble and reverify
rotating torque.
3 - 79
3 - 80
AXLE HOUSING ASSEMBLY

1.
2.
3.
4.
Using Tool L-4507, install new axle seal (inner) into housing.
Install side bearing preload shim into axle housing.
Using Tools C-4171 and D-145, press new side bearing cup into housing until it bottoms.
Install differential side bearing preload shim (1) into
axle housing cover (2).
5. Using Tools C-4171 and D-129 (1), press new side

bearing cup into cover until it bottoms. Use suitable
cup (3) to support and protect cover.
LX
LX
6. Install differential/ring gear assembly (3), new cover o-ring seal (4), and cover (5).
7. Install and torque cover-to-housing bolts to:
M10x40 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.)
M8x25 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.)
8. Using Tool C-4995 (1), measure differential side
bearing rotating torque (preload). Rotating torque
should be within 190-260 Ncm (17-23 in. lbs.).
3 - 81
3 - 82
9. If rotating torque is below this range, disassemble

housing, measure and install slightly thicker preload shims (1). Add thickness equally to both sides.
If rotating torque is above this range, disassembe
housing, measure and install slightly thinner preload shims. Remove thickness equally from both
sides.
10. Install new pinion housing o-ring seal (1).
11. Install pinion housing assembly into axle housing

with proper pinion depth shim (1). (Refer to 3 DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/FRONT AXLE ADJUSTMENTS)
LX
LX
12. Install and torque pinion housing-to-axle housing
bolts (1) to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.)
13. Measure and adjust ring gear backlash. Backlash
should be within 0.05-0.11mm (0.002-0.004 in.).
(Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/
FRONT AXLE - ADJUSTMENTS)
INSTALLATION
1. Install front axle assembly (1) into position. Install
and torque seven bolts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.).
3 - 83
3 - 84
LX
2. Install power steering return line to cradle by fastening clips (1) as shown.
3. Install axle assembly support bracket (1) and

torque bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.).
4. Install RH catalytic converter/exhaust pipe assembly. (Refer to 11 - EXHAUST SYSTEM/CATALYTIC CONVERTER - INSTALLATION)
5. Install front propeller shaft. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT - INSTALLATION)
6. Install intermediate shaft. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/INTERMEDIATE SHAFT - INSTALLATION)
7. Install both front halfshafts. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT - INSTALLATION)
LX
3 - 85
8. Fill axle with 600ml (0.64 qts.) of MoparT 75W-90

Synthetic Gear Lubricant. Fluid level should be at
or near bottom of fill hole. Torque fill plug (1) to 30
Nm (22 ft. lbs.).
9. Lower vehicle.
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT
PINION BEARING PRELOAD
NOTE: Pinion bearing preload is controlled and adjusted by means of a select-thickness spacer sandwiched
between the pinion head and tail bearing cones.
1. Remove pinion
housing.
housing
assembly
from
axle
3 - 86
2. Using a dial-type torque wrench (1), measure pinion housing rotating torque. Rotating torque
should be within 130-260 Ncm (12-23 in. lbs.). If
rotating torque is below this range, disassemble
pinion housing, measure and install a slightly
thicker spacer (1), reassemble and reverify. If rotating torque is above this range, disassemble pinion
housing, install a slightly thinner spacer, reassemble and reverify rotating torque.
3. Using Tool 6958 (2), remove pinion flange nut.
4. Using Puller 1026 (1), remove pinion flange.
LX
LX
5. Press pinion gear (2) out of housing.
6. Remove pinion bearing preload spacer (1).
7. Measure spacer (1) and correct per rotating torque

measurement.
3 - 87
3 - 88
8. Install proper pinion bearing preload spacer (1).
9. Install pinion gear/bearing assembly to housing.

Using Tool L-4507 (1), press pinion tail bearing (2)
onto shaft until it bottoms.
10. Using Tool L-4507 (1), press on pinion flange (2).
LX
LX
3 - 89
11. Install and torque pinion flange nut to 475 Nm

(350 ft. lbs.).
12. Install pinion housing assembly and depth shim to

axle assembly.
bolts (1) to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.).
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD

NOTE: Differential side bearing preload is controlled and adjusted by means of select-thickness shims
sandwiched between the side bearing cups and the housing/cover.
NOTE: For accurate results, differential side bearing preload must only be measured when the pinion housing assembly is removed from the axle.
3 - 90
1. Remove pinion housing-to-axle housing bolts (1).
2. Remove pinion housing and depth shim (1) from

axle assembly.
3. Install Tool C-4995 (1) to differential housing as

shown. Measure and record differential rotating
torque. Differential rotating torque should be
within 190-260 Ncm (17-23 in. lbs.). If rotating
torque is below this range, disassemble housing,
measure and install slightly thicker preload shims
(1). Add thickness equally to both sides. If rotating
torque is above this range, disassembe housing,
measure and install slightly thinner preload shims.
Remove thickness equally from both sides.
LX
LX
4. Remove axle housing cover and differential assembly.

5. Remove differential side bearing cup from axle
housing cover. Install Tool 6514 (1) as shown.
3 - 91
3 - 92
LX
6. Remove differential side bearing cup with Tool

6514 (1).
7. Remove side bearing preload shim (1).
8. Measure preload
replacement.
shim
(1)
to
identify
for
LX
9. Install new differential side bearing preload shim (1)
into axle housing cover (2).
10. Using Tools C-4171 and D-129 (1), press new

side bearing cup into cover until it bottoms. Use
suitable cup (3) to support and protect cover.
11. Using Tool 9664 (1) and Slide Hammer C-637 (2)
, remove differential side bearing (inboard) cup
3 - 93
3 - 94
12. Measure preload shim (1) to identify for replacement.

13. Install new differential side bearing preload shim
(1) into axle housing.
14. Using Tools C-4171 and D-145, press differential
side bearing cup into housing until it bottoms.
15. Install differential/ring gear assembly (3), new cover o-ring seal (4), and cover (5).
M10x40 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.)
M8x25 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.)
LX
LX
17. Re-verify rotating torque measurement. Repeat
adjustment procedure until proper rotating torque
is obtained.
18. Install pinion housing assembly and depth shim

(1). Use new o-ring on housing.

bolts (1) to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.)
3 - 95
3 - 96
LX
SPECIFICATIONS - 175MM FIA FRONT AXLE

SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
Axle Ratio
3.07
Ring Gear Diameter
175 mm (6.9 in.)
Ring Gear Backlash
0.05-0.11 mm (0.002-0.004 in.)
Differential Torque-to-Rotate
190-260 Ncm (17-23 in. lbs.)
Pinion Housing Torque-to-Rotate
130-260 Ncm (12-23 in. lbs.)
Pinion Depth Shim Size
1.15-2.11mm (0.045-0.083 in.) Available in 0.04 mm

(0.0015 in.) increments
Pinion Bearing Preload Spacer Size
9.60-10.59mm (0.378-0.417 in.) Available in 0.03 mm

Differential Bearing Preload Shim Size
1.31-2.51 mm (0.051-0.099 in.) Available in 0.04 mm

Differential Backlash Shim Size
1.34-2.98 mm (0.053-0.117 in.) Available in 0.04 mm

DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
Bolt, Axle Cover-toHousing (M10x40)
65
48
Bolt, Axle Cover-toHousing (M8x25)
34
25
Bolt, Axle Housing-toEngine
65
48
Bolt, Intermediate
Shaft-to-Engine
25
19
Bolt, Pinion Housing-toAxle Housing
34
25
Nut, Pinion Flange
475
350
Plug, Axle Housing Fill
30
22
LX
SPECIAL TOOLS - 175MM FIA FRONT

AXLE
Installer, D-130
Handle, Driver - C-4171
Installer, D-145
Seal Installer C-4193A

Installer L-4507
Torque Tool, C-4995
Puller, 1026
Installer, D-129
Bearing Splitter, 1130
3 - 97
3 - 98
LX
Bearing Remover, 6514
Plug, 9676
Wrench, Spanner - 6958
Installer, 9677
Remover, 9664
Installer, 9665
Installer, 9666
LX
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL
REMOVAL - RIGHT AXLE SEAL
1. Remove right halfshaft assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT REMOVAL)
2. Using suitable screwdriver, remove axle seal (1).
REMOVAL LEFT AXLE SEAL

NOTE: Inboard (Left) axle seal replacement requires removal and disassembly of the axle assembly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove front axle assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/FRONT AXLE - REMOVAL)
Drain axle lubricant by turning housing on its side and draining out of left output bore.
Remove differential cover (5) and differential (3). Remove and discard o-ring seal.
Using Tool 9664 and Slide Hammer C-637, remove left axle seal.
3 - 99
3 - 100
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION - RIGHT AXLE SEAL
1. Using Tool C-4193-A (1), install new axle shaft
seal.
2. Install right halfshaft assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION - LEFT AXLE SEAL
1. Using Tool L-4507, install left (inboard) axle seal (2).

2. Install differential (3). Install cover (5) with new o-ring seal (4).
M10x40 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.)
M8x25 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.)
LX
LX
4. Install axle assembly into vehicle. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/FRONT AXLE INSTALLATION)
5. Fill axle with 600ml (0.64 qts.) MoparT 75W-90
Synthetic Gear Lubricant. Torque fill plug (1) to 30
Nm (22 ft. lbs.)
3 - 101
3 - 102
LX
FLUID
STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID FILL
NOTE: The 175MM FIA Front Axle assembly is designed for fill for life and is not manufactured with a fluid
drain plug.
2. Remove axle fill plug (1).
3. Fill axle with 600ml (0.64 qts.) of MoparT 75W-90
Synthetic Gear Lubricant. Fluid should be within
3/16 of bottom of fill hole.
LX
3 - 103
SEAL-PINION
REMOVAL
1. Remove propeller shaft and heat shield. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL)
2. Using Tool 6958 (2), remove pinion flange nut.
3. Using Puller 1026 (1), remove pinion flange.
3 - 104
4. Remove pinion flange seal (1) with suitable screwdriver and discard.
INSTALLATION
1. Using Tool 9677 (1), install new pinion flange seal.
LX
LX
3 - 105
2. Using Tool L-4507 (1) , lightly tap pinion flange (2)

onto shaft, just enough to start flange nut by hand.
3. Install pinion flange nut and torque to 475 Nm

(350 ft. lbs.).
4. Install propeller shaft and heat shield. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/PROPELLER SHAFT INSTALLATION)
3 - 106
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
REAR AXLE - 198RII

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
REAR AXLE - 198RII

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT - PINION DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ADJUSTMENT - SIDE BEARING PRELOAD
AND RING GEAR BACKLASH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
SPECIFICATIONS - 198 RII AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
SPECIAL TOOLS - 198 RII AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
SEAL-PINION FLANGE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
BEARING-DIFFERENTIAL CASE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
COVER-DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
GEAR-PINION/RING
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
3 - 107
REAR AXLE - 198RII

DESCRIPTION
198/210 MM RII Axle Section View

1
2
3
4
5
BEARING, PINION TAIL

SHIM, PINION DEPTH
BEARING, PINION HEAD
GEAR/SHAFT, PINION
BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE
6
7
8
9
DIFFERENTIAL
RING, SNAP
COVER, AXLE
GEAR, RING
The 198 MM RII (Rear-Independent-Iron) axle is an independent assembly with a cast iron housing and differential.
The 198 MM RII uses an open differential which is supported by two tapered roller bearings located on either side
of the case. Differential bearing preload and ring gear backlash are controlled with select snap-rings located on the
outside of the differential bearing cups. Pinion height is set with a select shim located under the rear pinion bearing
cup.
The 198 axle is available only in all-wheel-drive (AWD) models, and in V-6 engine-equipped rear-wheel-drive (RWD)
models, and is available in three gear ratios: 3.07 3.64 & 3.90:1.
3 - 108
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
198/210 Axle Components

1 - NUT, PINION FLANGE
2 - FLANGE, PINION
3 - SEAL, PINION
4 - CONE, PINION TAIL BEARING
5 - CUP, PINION TAIL BEARING
6 - CUP, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING
7 - HOUSING, AXLE
8 - GEAR/SHAFT, PINION
9 - CONE, PINION HEAD BEARING
10 - CUP, PINION HEAD BEARING
11 - SHIM, PINION DEPTH

12 - WASHER (2)
13 - SPACER, COLLAPSIBLE
14 - GEAR, RING
15 - CONE, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING
16 - DIFFERENTIAL
17 - SEAL, AXLE
18 - RING, SNAP
20 - COVER, AXLE HOUSING
LX
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 109
AXLE IDENTIFICATION
The 198 MM axle utilizes a barcoded label (1) which
is adhered to the top of the axle housing as shown.
The following information is found on the identification
label:
Traceability Code (Plant Use)
Axle Part Number
Axle Gear Ratio
198 Axle Identification Label

GEAR NOISE
Axle gear noise can be caused by insufficient lubricant, incorrect backlash, incorrect pinion depth, tooth contact,
worn/damaged gears, or the carrier housing not having the proper offset and squareness.
Gear noise usually happens at a specific speed range. The noise can also occur during a specific type of driving
condition. These conditions are acceleration, deceleration, coast, or constant load.
When road testing, first warm-up the axle fluid by driving the vehicle at least 5 miles and then accelerate the vehicle
to the speed range where the noise is the greatest. Shift out-of-gear and coast through the peak-noise range. If the
noise stops or changes greatly:
Check for insufficient lubricant.
Incorrect ring gear backlash.
Gear damage.
Differential side gears and pinions can be checked by turning the vehicle. They usually do not cause noise during
straight-ahead driving when the gears are unloaded. The side gears are loaded during vehicle turns. A worn pinion
shaft can also cause a snapping or a knocking noise.
BEARING NOISE
The differential and pinion bearings can produce noise when worn or damaged. Bearing noise can be either a whining, or a growling sound.
Pinion bearings have a constant-pitch noise. This noise changes only with vehicle speed. Pinion bearing noise will
be higher pitched because it rotates at a faster rate. Drive the vehicle and load the differential. If bearing noise
occurs, the rear pinion bearing is the source of the noise. If the bearing noise is heard during a coast, the front
pinion bearing is the source.
Worn or damaged differential bearings usually produce a low pitch noise. Differential bearing noise is similar to
pinion bearing noise. The pitch of differential bearing noise is also constant and varies only with vehicle speed.
Wheel hub bearings produce noise and vibration when worn or damaged. The noise generally changes when the
bearings are loaded. Road test the vehicle. Turn the vehicle sharply to the left and to the right. This will load the
bearings and change the noise level. Where axle bearing damage is slight, the noise is usually not noticeable at
speeds above 30 mph.
3 - 110
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
LOW SPEED KNOCK

Low speed knock is generally caused by a worn U-joint or by worn side-gear thrust washers. A worn pinion shaft
bore will also cause low speed knock.
VIBRATION
Vibration at the rear of the vehicle is usually caused by a:
Damaged propeller shaft.
Missing propeller shaft balance weight(s).
Worn or out-of-balance wheels.
Loose wheel lug nuts.
Worn U-joints or CV joints.
Loose/broken springs.
Damaged axle shaft bearing(s).
Loose pinion gear nut.
Excessive pinion yoke run out.
Bent halfshaft(s).
Check for loose or damaged front-end components or engine/transmission mounts. These components can contribute to what appears to be a rearend vibration. Do not overlook engine accessories, brackets and drive belts.
All driveline components should be examined before starting any repair.
DRIVELINE SNAP
A snap or clunk noise when the vehicle is shifted into gear, can be caused by:
High engine idle speed.
Transmission shift operation.
Loose engine/transmission/transfer case mounts.
Worn or broken axle mount isolators.
Loose pinion gear nut and yoke.
Excessive ring gear backlash.
Excessive side gear to case clearance.
The source of a snap or a clunk noise can be determined with the assistance of a helper. Raise the vehicle on a
hoist with the wheels free to rotate. Instruct the helper to shift the transmission into gear. Listen for the noise, a
mechanics stethoscope is helpful in isolating the source of a noise.
DIAGNOSTIC CHART
CONDITION
Wheel Noise
Differential Cracked
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
1. Wheel loose.
1. Tighten loose nuts.
2. Faulty, brinelled wheel bearing.
2. Replace bearing.
1. Improper differential side bearing

preload.
1. Replace case and inspect gears

and bearings for further damage.
Set differential bearing preload
properly.
2. Excessive ring gear backlash.

Set ring gear backlash properly.
3. Vehicle overloaded.

Avoid excessive vehicle weight.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
CONDITION
Differential Gears Scored
Loss Of Lubricant
Axle Overheating
Gear Teeth Broke
Axle Noise
POSSIBLE CAUSE
3 - 111
CORRECTION
1. Insufficient lubrication.
1. Replace scored gears. Fill

differential with the correct fluid type
and quantity.
2. Improper grade of lubricant.

differential with the proper fluid type
and quantity.
3. Excessive spinning of one

wheel/tire.
3. Replace scored gears. Inspect all

gears, pinion bores, and shaft for
damage. Service as necessary.
1. Lubricant level too high.
1. Drain lubricant to the correct

level.
2. Worn axle shaft seals.
2. Replace seals.
3. Cracked axle housing.
3. Repair as necessary.
4. Worn pinion seal.
4. Replace seal.
5. Worn/scored pinion flange

journal.
5. Replace pinion flange and seal.
6. Axle cover not properly sealed.
6. Remove, clean, and re-seal

cover.
1. Lubricant level low.
1. Fill differential to correct level.
2. Fill differential with the correct

fluid type and quantity.
3. Bearing preload too high.
3. Readjust bearing pre-load.
4. Insufficient ring gear backlash.
4. Re-adjust ring gear backlash.
1. Overloading.
1. Replace gears. Examine other

gears and bearings for possible
damage.
2. Ice-spotted pavement.
2. Replace gears and examine

remaining parts for damage.
3. Improper adjustments.

remaining parts for damage. Ensure
ring gear backlash is correct.
1. Insufficient lubricant.
1. Fill axle with the correct fluid type

and quantity.
2. Improper ring gear and pinion

adjustment.
2. Check ring gear and pinion

contact pattern. Adjust backlash or
pinion depth.
3. Unmatched ring gear and pinion.
3. Replace gears with a matched

ring gear and pinion.
4. Worn teeth on ring gear and/or

pinion.
4. Replace ring gear and pinion.
5. Loose pinion bearings.
5. Adjust pinion bearing pre-load.
6. Loose differential bearings.
6. Adjust differential bearing preload.
7. Misaligned or sprung ring gear.
7. Measure ring gear run-out.

Replace components as necessary.
8. Housing not machined properly.
8. Replace housing.
3 - 112
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND FILL

NOTE: Note: The fluid required for use in this axle is MoparT Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant 75W-140.
1. Drive the vehicle until the differential lubricant is at
the normal operating temperature.
on hoist.
3. Remove rear axle drain plug and drain lubricant
completely from the axle.
4. Install drain plug and tighten to 60 Nm (44 ft lbs).
5. Remove fill plug (1) and fill rear axle with 1.4 L (1.5
qts.) MoparT Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant 75W140.
6. Install fill plug and tighten to 60 Nm (44 ft lbs).
REMOVAL
LX
on hoist.
reuse.
3. Install drain plug (1) and torque to 60 Nm (44 ft.
lbs.) torque.
4. Remove rear exhaust system (2) on dual-outlet

exhaust models, otherwise, lower exhaust system
at rear hanger(s) to provide adequate clearance.

REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 113
3 - 114
REAR AXLE - 198RII

flange bolt/nuts.


LX
LX
nut (2).

REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 115
3 - 116
REAR AXLE - 198RII
12. Lower axle just enough to remove both halfshafts

one at a time. Shift axle assembly in one direction, compressing one halfshaft while removing
the other (1). Use caution to protect axle seal and
journal.
13. Remove axle assembly from vehicle and transfer

to bench.
14. Using suitable screwdriver, remove axle seals and
discard.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION

2. Using new circlip(s), install halfshaft (1) to rear axle
assembly. Use care not to damage axle seals (2).
by hand.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 117
3 - 118
REAR AXLE - 198RII


LX
LX
to axle assembly.
8. If used, remove screw-type under-hoist jack stands
(2).

Fill axle with 1.4L (1.5 qts.) of MoparT 75W-140
Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant. Install fill plug
and torque to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.).
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 119
3 - 120
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT - PINION DEPTH
PINION DEPTH VARIANCE
Ring gear and pinion are supplied as matched sets.
Identifying numbers for the ring gear and pinion are
painted onto the pinion gear shaft and the side of the
ring gear. A plus (+) number, minus () number or zero
(0) along with the gear set sequence number (01 to
99) is on each gear. The pinion depth variance (1) is
the amount the depth varies from the standard depth
setting of a pinion marked with a (0). The remaining
numbers (2) are the sequence number of the gear set.
The standard depth provides the best gear tooth contact pattern.
Compensation for pinion depth variance is achieved

with select shims (3). The shims are sandwiched
between the pinion head bearing cup (4) and axle
housing.
If installing a new gear, note the depth variance number of the original and replacement pinion. Add or subtract this
number from the original depth shim to compensate for the difference in the depth variances. The numbers represent deviation from the standard in microns. If the number is negative, add that value to the required thickness of
the depth shims. If the number is positive, subtract that value from the thickness of the depth shim.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
3 - 121
PINION GEAR DEPTH VARIANCE

Original Pinion
Gear Depth
Variance
Replacement Pinion Gear Depth Variance

24
23
22
21
+1
+2
+3
+4
+4
+0.08
+0.07
+0.06
+0.05
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
+3
+0.07
+0.06
+0.05
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
20.01
+2
+0.06
+0.05
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
20.01
20.02
+1
+0.05
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
20.01
20.02
20.03
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
20.01
20.02
20.03
20.04
21
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
20.01
20.02
20.03
20.04
20.05
22
+0.02
+0.01
20.01
20.02
20.03
20.04
20.05
20.06
23
+0.01
20.01
20.02
20.03
20.04
20.05
20.06
20.07
24
20.01
20.02
20.03
20.04
20.05
20.06
20.07
20.08
PINION DEPTH MEASUREMENT

Pinion depth measurement is taken with the pinion head and tail bearing cups pressed into the axle housing without
the shim.
1. Press pinion head bearing cup into housing using
Tools C-4171 (1) and C-4310 (2).
3 - 122
REAR AXLE - 198RII
2. Press pinion tail bearing cup into housing using

Tools C-4171 (1) and D-146 (2).
3. Install Pinion Height Block 6739 (3), Pinion Gage

Block 9227 (2), and pinion head bearing cone (1)
onto Screw 6741. Install assembly into axle housing and through bearing cups.
LX
LX
4. Install pinion tail bearing and Cone 6740 (4).
Tighten Cone 6740 by hand until 3.4 Nm (30 in.
lbs.) of rotating torque is measured at Screw 6741
(5).
5. Install Arbor Discs 9228 (1).
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 123
3 - 124
REAR AXLE - 198RII
6. Install Arbor Bar D-115-3 (1).
7. Verify pinion depth setup is a shown.
8. Install Dial Indicator 9524 (1) to Scooter Block

D-115-2A (2). Secure with set-screw (3).
LX
LX
9. Install Indicator/Block assembly to top of Height
Block 6739 (1). Zero indicator on top surface.
10. Slide indicator probe off of height block and onto

Arbor Bar D-115-3 (2). As indicator contacts Arbor
Bar (2), indicator needle will rotate clockwise.
Continue moving indicator probe to the crest of
the arbor bar and record the highest reading.
11. Select a shim equal to the dial indicator reading

plus the drive pinion gear depth variance number
(1) written on the side of the pinion shaft. For
example, if the depth variance is 1, subtract 0.01
mm (0.0004 in.) from dial indicator reading.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 125
3 - 126
REAR AXLE - 198RII
ADJUSTMENT - SIDE BEARING PRELOAD AND RING GEAR BACKLASH

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD MEASUREMENT/CORRECTION
Differential side bearing preload should be measured and adjusted after the following scenarios:
Differential case replacement
Differential side bearing replacement
Axle housing replacement
Loss or replacement of side bearing snap rings
If none of these situations apply, refer to Adjustment Ring Gear Backlash
1. Install Spreader Adapter Plates 9226 (1) as shown
2. Mount axle housing to Spreader W-129-B (1).
LX
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
3. Set up Dial Indicator Set C-3339-A as shown to
measure axle housing spread:
a. Clamp SP-5426 (1)
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
c. Metric Dial Indicator 9524 (3)
4. If differential side bearing cups and snap rings are

removed at this point, skip to Step 8. Otherwise,
expand spreader to spread axle housing no more
than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
5. Remove both differential side bearing snap rings

(1). Tag snap ring to ensure replacement to original
position.
3 - 127
3 - 128
REAR AXLE - 198RII
6. Measure and record snap ring (2) thickness for

later use.
7. Relax spreader (1) to relieve tension on axle

housing.
8. Install right (pinion) side bearing cup and snap ring

(1).
LX
LX
9. Zero dial indicator.
10. Expand spreader (1) to spread axle housing no
more than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
11. Install left (ring gear) side bearing cup and snap
ring (1).

housing.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 129
3 - 130
REAR AXLE - 198RII
13. Measurement showing on indicator is the axle

housing retained spread. Proper differential side
bearing preload is achieved with an axle housing
retained spread of 0.18-0.23 mm (0.007-0.009
in.).
14. If retained spread is less than 0.18 mm (0.007
in.), increase snap ring thickness at each side in
equal increments.
15. If retained spread is greater than 0.23 mm (0.009
in.), decrease snap ring thickness at each side in
equal increments.
RING GEAR BACKLASH MEASUREMENT/CORRECTION

Differential Ring Gear Backlash should be measured and adjusted after the following scenarios:
1. Ring and pinion gear replacement
2. Pinion head bearing replacement
3. Pinion depth (shim) adjustment
4. Differential case replacement
5. Differential side bearing replacement
6. Axle housing replacement
NOTE: If Spreader W-129-B is installed, make sure tension on axle housing is relieved.
measure ring gear backlash:
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
8. Rotate ring gear one direction to take up clearance
to pinion. Verify indicator tip is in contact with ring
gear and zero indicator. Rotate ring gear back and
forth and record measurement. Ring gear backlash
should be 0.13-0.18 mm (0.005-0.007 in.). Verify
back lash measurement in four (4) positions.
LX
LX
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 131
9. If backlash measurement is less than 0.13 mm

(0.005 in.), it is necessary to decrease the snap
ring thickness on the ring gear (left) side, and
increase the thickness on the pinion (right) side.
10. If backlash measurement is greater than 0.18 mm
(0.007 in.), it is necessary to increase the snap
ring thickness on the ring gear (right) side, and
decrease the thickness on the pinion (left) side.
GEAR CONTACT PATTERN

The ring gear and pinion teeth contact patterns will show if the pinion depth is correct in the housing. It will also
show if the ring gear backlash has been adjusted correctly. The backlash can be adjusted within specifications to
achieve desired tooth contact patterns.
1. Apply a thin coat of hydrated ferric oxide or equivalent to the drive and coast side of the ring gear teeth.
2. Wrap, twist, and hold a shop towel around the pinion yoke to increase the turning resistance of the pinion. This
will provide a more distinct contact pattern.
3. With a boxed end wrench on a ring gear bolt, rotate the differential case one complete revolution in both directions while a load is being applied from shop towel.
The areas on the ring gear teeth with the greatest degree of contact against the pinion teeth will squeegee the
compound to the areas with the least amount of contact. Note and compare patterns on the ring gear teeth to Gear
Tooth Contact Patterns chart and adjust pinion depth and gear backlash as necessary.
3 - 132
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
Gear Tooth Contact Patterns
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
3 - 133
SPECIFICATIONS - 198 RII AXLE

SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
Axle Ratios
3.07, 3.64, 3.90
Ring Gear Diameter
198 mm (7.8 in.)
Ring Gear Backlash
0.13-0.18 mm (0.005-0.007 in.)
Side Bearing Preload
6000-8000 N
Axle Housing Retained Spread
0.18 mm to 0.23 mm (0.007 in. to 0.009 in.)
Select Snap Ring Size
3.60-4.68 mm (0.14-0.18 in.) In 0.02mm (0.0007 in.)

increments
Select Pinion Shim Size
1.40-2.50mm (0.05-0.10 in.) In 0.01mm (0.0004 in.)

increments
Pinion Torque To Rotate
2.25Nm (20 in. lbs.)
Total Torque To Rotate (Approx.)
3.38Nm (30 in. lbs.)
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
Plug, Rear Axle Drain/Fill
60
44
Bolt, Differential Cover
30 +45
22 + 45
Bolt, Ring Gear-toDifferential Case
85
63
220
162
Bolt/Nut, Axle Front Mount

Isolator
65
48
3 - 134
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
SPECIAL TOOLS - 198 RII AXLE
Puller, 1026
Spreader Adapters, 9226
Installer, 6448A
Pinion Height Gage, 9227

Remover, 9084
Arbor Discs, 9228

Installer, 9223
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
Installer, 9231A
Mounting Plate, 9630
Removal/Installation Arbor, 9522
Fixture, 9631
Puller Press, C-293-PA
Installer, 9523
Adapters, C-293-37
Dial Indicator, 9524
3 - 135
3 - 136
REAR AXLE - 198RII
Installer, C-3095-A
LX
Installer, D-146
Flange Wrench, C-3281

Remover, D-149
Dial Indicator Set, C-3339-A
Adapter, SP-3289
Handle, C-4171
Installer, C-4310
Spreader, W-129-B
LX
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL
1. Remove halfshaft(s). (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL
& DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT - REMOVAL)
2. Using suitable screwdriver (1), remove axle shaft
seal (2).
3. Visually inspect halfshaft seal journal for damage
(excessive seal groove, nicks, scratches, etc.
Replace halfshaft if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. Using Tool 9223 (2), install NEW axle shaft seal
(1). Lubricate the inside diameter with MoparT
Gear and Axle Lubricant 75W-140 to protect seal
during halfshaft installation.
2. Install halfshaft(s). (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL &
DRIVELINE/HALF SHAFT - INSTALLATION)
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 137
3 - 138
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3. Remove fill plug (1) to check and adjust rear axle

fluid level. Top off axle with MoparT Gear and Axle
Lubricant 75W-140. Reinstall fill plug torque to 60
LX
LX
SEAL-PINION FLANGE
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear axle assembly from vehicle. Refer to
Rear Axle Removal.
2. Measure axle assembly rotating torque and record
measurement for reuse on assembly.
3. Using flange holder C-3281(1) and 41mm socket,

remove pinion flange nut and discard.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 139
3 - 140
REAR AXLE - 198RII
NOTE: Due to axle imbalance concerns, it is necessary to make sure pinion flange-to-shaft orientation is maintained. If alignment marks are not
visible, apply appropriate marks before removing
pinion flange.
4. Using puller 1026 (1), remove pinion flange (2)
from pinion shaft.
5. Using suitable tool (1), remove pinion seal (2) and

discard.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Apply light coating of gear lubricant to the lip of the
pinion seal.
2. Using Tool 9231A (1), install pinion seal until tool
bottoms on carrier.
3. Install pinion flange into position. Align index marks

to maintain assembly balance.
4. Using Installer 6448A (1), lightly tap on pinion
flange (2) until adequate pinion shaft threads are
exposed.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 141
3 - 142
REAR AXLE - 198RII
5. Install new pinion flange nut. Using flange holder

tool C-3281(1) and 41mm socket, torque nut to 136
Nm (100 ft. lbs.).
6. Measure assembly turning torque. Axle assembly

rotating torque must be should be equal to the
reading recorded upon seal/flange removal.
7. If rotating torque is low, increase pinion flange nut

torque in 7 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments. Repeat until
proper rotating torque is received.
LX
LX
8. Stake pinion flange nut (1) as shown.
9. Install rear axle assembly. Refer to Rear Axle
Installation.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 143
3 - 144
REAR AXLE - 198RII
DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL
1. Clamp rear axle assembly into bench vise (1).
2. Remove drain plug (1) and drain fluid into container

suitable for reuse.
3. Install drain plug and torque to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.).
LX
LX
4. Using suitable torque wrench (1), measure and
record rear axle assembly total turning torque.
5. Using suitable screwdriver (1), remove both axle

seals (2).
6. Remove twelve axle cover-to-housing bolts (1) and

remove cover (2).
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 145
3 - 146
REAR AXLE - 198RII
7. Install spreader adapters (1), Tool 9226, as shown.

Adapters contain two hole patterns and are labeled
accordingly.
8. Install spreader, Tool W-129-B (1), as shown.
9. Set up Dial Indicator Set C-3339-A to measure

housing spread as shown.
LX
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
10. Spread axle housing no more than 0.30 mm
(0.012 in.).
NOTE: The differential side bearing snap rings are

select-fit, and control ring gear backlash and differential side bearing preload. It is important to
return original snap rings to their original position.
11. Using suitable snap ring pliers (2), compress and
remove differential side bearing snap rings (1).
Identify and tag for proper reuse.
3 - 147
3 - 148
REAR AXLE - 198RII
12. Back off W-129-B spreader (1) to relax tension on

housing.
13. Measure snap ring thickness and record for future
use.
14. Install Tool 9522 (1) into one side of housing and
push inward to release differential side bearing
cup (2) from opposite side. Repeat for other
bearing.
LX
LX
15. Remove differential assembly from axle housing.
NOTE: Note: If difficulty removing differential is
encountered due to interference with W-129-B
spreader and adapter plates, remove spreader and
adapter plates to facilitate removal.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove differential ring gear-to-case bolts (1).
2. Using brass drift (1), remove ring gear (2).
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 149
3 - 150
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3. Remove bearings (2) from the differential case (3)

with Puller/Press C-293-PA (5), Adapters C-293-37
(1) and Plug SP-3289 (4).
4. Drive out pinion shaft-to-case roll pin using hammer and suitable punch.
LX
LX
5. Using brass drift (2), drive out pinion shaft (1).
6. Install Tool 9631 (1) into differential side gear.
7. Rotate Tool 9631 (1) to gain access to and remove

pinion gears and thrust washers.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 151
3 - 152
REAR AXLE - 198RII
8. Remove differential side gears (4) and thrust washers (5).
ASSEMBLY
1. Lubricate all differential components with hypoid
gear lubricant.
2. Install differential side gears (2) and thrust washers
to Tools 9631 (1) as shown in illustration.
LX
LX
3. Install differential pinion gears (1) and thrust washers into position across from each other.
4. Rotate pinion gears into place using Tool 9631 and

line up gear centers with pinion shaft bore.
5. Using a brass hammer, drive pinion shaft (3) into

differential case (1), making sure to line up roll pin
bores.
6. Using suitable punch (2), drive new roll pin into
position.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 153
3 - 154
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
7. Measure differential gear rotating torque as shown.

Differential gear rotating torque should be 5-30 Nm
(44-266 in. lbs.) Rotating torque is adjusted using
select side gear thrust washers. Refer to the following chart.
Available Side Gear Thrust Washer Thicknesses

1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
1.30 mm (0.051 in.)
1.35 mm (0.053 in.)
1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
1.45 mm (0.057 in.)
1.50 mm (0.059 in.)
1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
1.65 mm (0.065 in.)
8. Remove differential case from Tool 9630 (2).
LX
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 155
9. Install ring gear to case. Lightly tap ring gear into

position to facilitate starting of bolts.
10. Install new ring gear-to-case bolts and torque to
85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.).
11. Using Tool 9523 (2) and Handle C-4171 (1), press
new differential side bearings (3) onto differential
case.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: If replacement differential side bearings or differential case are being installed, it is necessary to
measure and adjust Differential Side Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash. Refer to Adjustments Differential Side Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash to determine proper snap ring selection.
3 - 156
REAR AXLE - 198RII
1. Install differential assembly (1) into axle housing.
2. Install differential side bearing cups (2).
3. Use Tool 9522 (1) to aid in seating side bearing

cups (2).
LX
REAR AXLE - 198RII
LX
3 - 157

housing spread as shown:
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
5. Expand spreader W-129-B (1) to spread axle housing no more than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
NOTE: The differential side bearing snap rings are select-fit, and control ring gear backlash and differential
side bearing preload. It is necessary to return snap rings to their original position. If replacement differential
side bearings or differential case are being installed, refer to Adjustments Differential Side Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash to determine proper snap ring selection.
3 - 158
REAR AXLE - 198RII
6. Using suitable snap ring pliers (2), install differential

side bearing snap rings (1).

housing.
8. Install axle seals (1) using Tool 9223 (2).
LX
LX
9. Remove spreader W-129-B and adapter plates
9226 (1).
10. Apply 4mm (0.157 in.) bead (2) of MoparT Axle

RTV to axle housing cover (1) as shown.
11. Install cover to axle housing. Install and torque

cover-to-housing bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) +
90.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 159
3 - 160
REAR AXLE - 198RII
REMOVAL
1. Remove differential assembly from axle. Refer to
Differential Removal.

(1) and Plug SP-3289 (4).
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Using Tool 9523 and Handle C-4171, press differential side bearings onto differential case.
2. Install differential and reassemble axle assembly.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 161
3 - 162
REAR AXLE - 198RII
COVER-DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL
1. Remove axle assembly from vehicle. (Refer to 3 DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE 198MM - REMOVAL)
2. Remove axle housing cover bolts (1).
3. Using suitable screwdriver, remove axle housing
cover (1).
INSTALLATION
1. After thoroughly cleaning axle housing cover (1),
apply a 4 mm (0.157 in.) bead (2) of MoparT Axle
RTV as shown.
LX
LX
2. Immediately install cover (2) to axle housing. Install
and torque axle housing cover bolts (1) to 30 Nm
(22 ft. lbs.) + 45.
3. Install axle assembly to vehicle. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE - 198MM INSTALLATION)
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 163
3 - 164
REAR AXLE - 198RII
GEAR-PINION/RING
REMOVAL
1. Remove differential assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE - 198MM/
DIFFERENTIAL - REMOVAL)
2. Place differential case in a soft-jawwed vise and
remove ring gear-to-case bolts.
3. Remove ring gear from differential case with a

brass drift and hammer.
4. Using 41mm socket and flange wrench Tool

C-3281 (1), remove pinion nut and discard.
LX
LX
5. Using puller Tool 1026 (1), remove pinion flange
(2).
6. Using a suitable screwdriver, remove and discard

the pinion seal.
7. Remove pinion tail bearing cone.
8. Move axle housing to press and press out pinion

shaft (1) as shown.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 165
3 - 166
REAR AXLE - 198RII
9. Remove collapsible spacer (1) and washers (2).

Discard collapsible spacer.
10. Remove pinion head bearing (2) with Puller

C-293-PA (1) and Adapters C-293-37 (3,4).
LX
LX
11. Using driver handle C-4171(2) and remover Tool
9084 (1), drive out pinion head bearing cup.
12. Remove pinion head shim. Measure and record

shim thickness.
13. Using driver handle C-4171 (2) and remover Tool

D-149 (1), drive out pinion tail bearing cup.
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 167
3 - 168
REAR AXLE - 198RII
INSTALLATION
1. Install selected pinion depth shim (1) into housing.

Tools C-4171 (1) and C-4310 (2).
LX
LX
Tools C-4171 (1) and D-146 (2).
4. Press new pinion head bearing (2) onto pinion

shaft using Tool C-3095-A (1).
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 169
3 - 170
REAR AXLE - 198RII
5. Install washers (2) and new collapsible spacer (1)

to pinion shaft.
6. Install pinion shaft (1) into housing and support on

press table atop Tool 8255 (2). Ensure pinion
gear face is centered atop Tool 8255.
LX
LX
7. Using Tool C-3095-A (1), press on new pinion tail
bearing (2).
8. Install new pinion seal into position.

9. Press pinion seal into housing using Tool 9231A
(1).
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 171
3 - 172
REAR AXLE - 198RII
10. Lightly lubricate pinion flange seal with axle lubricant for flange installation.
11. Align index marks and press pinion flange (2) on
using Tool C-3095-A (1).
12. Install new pinion flange nut by hand.

13. Hold pinion flange with Tool C-3281 (1). Using a
deep 41 mm socket, tighten pinion flange nut to
an initial torque of 203 Nm (150 ft. lbs.).
14. Rotate pinion flange to ensure bearing is properly

seated.
15. Measure pinion rotating torque using suitable
torque wrench (1). Pinion rotating torque
should be 215-245 N. cm (19-22 in. lbs.).
16. If pinion rotating torque exceeds the specified
range, the pinion shaft must be removed and the
crush sleeve replaced.
LX
LX
17. If pinion rotating torque is below the specified
range, increase nut torque by 7 Nm (5 ft. lbs.)
increments and recheck turning torque until rotating torque is within range.
18. Stake pinion flange nut (1) using hammer and

suitable punch.
19. Install ring gear to differential case. Loosely install

new ring-gear-to-differential case bolts.
20. Torque all ring gear-to-case bolts to 85 Nm (64 ft.
lbs.)
REAR AXLE - 198RII
3 - 173
3 - 174
REAR AXLE - 198RII

(Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR
AXLE - 198MM/DIFFERENTIAL - INSTALLATION)
LX
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
3 - 175
REAR AXLE - 210RII

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
REAR AXLE - 210RII

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT - PINION DEPTH
MEASUREMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
ADJUSTMENT SIDE BEARING PRELOAD
AND RING GEAR BACKLASH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
SPECIFICATIONS - 210 MM RII AXLE . . . . . . . . . 202
SPECIAL TOOLS - 210 RII AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
SEAL-PINION FLANGE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
COVER-DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
GEAR-PINION/RING
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
3 - 176
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
REAR AXLE - 210RII

DESCRIPTION
198/210 MM RII Axle Section View

1
2
3
4
5
BEARING, PINION TAIL

SHIM, PINION DEPTH
BEARING, PINION HEAD
GEAR/SHAFT, PINION
BEARING, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE
6
7
8
9
DIFFERENTIAL
RING, SNAP
COVER, AXLE
GEAR, RING
cup.
The 210 MM axle is available only in V8 engine-equipped models with a 2.82:1 gear ratio.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
3 - 177
198/210 MM Axle Components

1 - NUT, PINION FLANGE
2 - FLANGE, PINION
3 - SEAL, PINION
4 - CONE, PINION TAIL BEARING
5 - CUP, PINION TAIL BEARING
7 - HOUSING, AXLE
8 - GEAR/SHAFT, PINION
9 - CONE, PINION HEAD BEARING
10 - CUP, PINION HEAD BEARING
11 - SHIM, PINION DEPTH

12 - WASHER (2)
13 - SPACER, COLLAPSIBLE
14 - GEAR, RING
15 - CONE, DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING
16 - DIFFERENTIAL
17 - SEAL, AXLE
18 - RING, SNAP
20 - COVER, AXLE HOUSING
AXLE IDENTIFICATION
The 210 MM axle utilizes a barcoded label which is adhered to the top of the axle housing as shown. The following
information is found on the identification label:
Axle Part Number
Axle Gear Ratio
3 - 178
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX

GEAR NOISE
Axle gear noise can be caused by insufficient lubricant, incorrect backlash, incorrect pinion depth, tooth
contact, worn/damaged gears, or the carrier housing
not having the proper offset and squareness.
Gear noise usually happens at a specific speed range.
The noise can also occur during a specific type of
driving condition. These conditions are acceleration,
deceleration, coast, or constant load.
When road testing, first warm-up the axle fluid by driving the vehicle at least 5 miles and then accelerate
the vehicle to the speed range where the noise is the
greatest. Shift out-of-gear and coast through the peaknoise range. If the noise stops or changes greatly:
Gear damage.
210 MM Axle Identification Tag
BEARING NOISE
LOW SPEED KNOCK

VIBRATION
Bent halfshaft(s).
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
3 - 179
DRIVELINE SNAP
DIAGNOSTIC CHART
CONDITION
Wheel Noise
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
1. Wheel loose.
2. Replace bearing.

preload.

properly.



and quantity.

and quantity.

wheel/tire.

3 - 180
REAR AXLE - 210RII

CONDITION
Loss Of Lubricant
Axle Overheating
Gear Teeth Broke
Axle Noise
LX
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION

level.
2. Replace seals.
4. Replace seal.

journal.

cover.

1. Overloading.

damage.



and quantity.

adjustment.

pinion depth.


pinion.

8. Replace housing.
LX
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 181

NOTE: The fluid required for use in this axle is MoparT Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant 75W-140.
on hoist.
3. Remove rear axle drain plug (1) and drain lubricant
REMOVAL
3 - 182
REAR AXLE - 210RII

on hoist.
reuse.
lbs.) torque.

at rear hanger(s).

LX
LX
flange bolt/nuts.


REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 183
3 - 184
REAR AXLE - 210RII

nut (2).

LX
LX
journal.

to bench.
discard.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 185
3 - 186
REAR AXLE - 210RII
INSTALLATION

assembly. Use care not to damage axle seals(2).
by hand.
LX
LX


REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 187
3 - 188
REAR AXLE - 210RII

to axle assembly.
(2).

LX
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
3 - 189
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT - PINION DEPTH MEASUREMENT
PINION DEPTH VARIANCE
Ring gear and pinion are supplied as matched sets.
Identifying numbers for the ring gear and pinion are
etched into the pinion gear face. A plus (+) number,
minus () number or zero (0) along with the gear set
sequence number (01 to 99) is on each gear. The pinion depth variance (1) is the amount the depth varies
from the standard depth setting of a pinion marked
with a zero. The remaining numbers are the sequence
number of the gear set. The standard depth provides
the best gear tooth contact pattern.
Compensation for pinion depth variance is achieved

with select shims. The shims (3) are sandwiched
between the pinion head bearing cup and axle
housing.
Pinion Depth Shim and Collapsible Washer

If installing a new gear, note the depth variance number of the original and replacement pinion. Add or subtract this
number from the original depth shim to compensate for the difference in the depth variances. The numbers represent deviation from the standard in microns. If the number is negative, add that value to the required thickness of
the depth shims. If the number is positive, subtract that value from the thickness of the depth shim.
3 - 190
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
PINION GEAR DEPTH VARIANCE

Original Pinion
Gear Depth
Variance
Replacement Pinion Gear Depth Variance

204
203
-02
201
00
+01
+02
+03
+04
+04
+0.08
+0.07
+0.06
+0.05
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
+03
+0.07
+0.06
+0.05
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
-0.01
+02
+0.06
+0.05
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
-0.01
-0.02
+01
+0.05
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
-0.01
-0.02
-0.03
00
+0.04
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
-0.01
-0.02
-0.03
-0.04
201
+0.03
+0.02
+0.01
-0.01
-0.02
-0.03
-0.04
-0.05
202
+0.02
+0.01
-0.01
-0.02
-0.03
-0.04
-0.05
-20.06
203
+0.01
-0.01
-0.02
-0.03
-0.04
-0.05
-0.06
-0.07
204
0.01
-0.02
-0.03
-0.04
-0.05
-0.06
-0.07
-0.08
PINION DEPTH MEASUREMENT

Pinion depth measurement is taken with the pinion head and tail bearing cups pressed into the axle housing without
the shim.
Tools C-4171 (1) and C-4310 (2).
LX
Tools C-4171 (1) and D-146 (2).
3. Install Pinion Height Block 6739 (3), Pinion Gage

Block 9085 (2), and pinion head bearing cone (1)
onto Screw 6741. Install assembly into axle housing and through bearing cups.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 191
3 - 192
REAR AXLE - 210RII
4. Install pinion tail bearing and Cone 6740 (4).

Tighten Cone 6740 by hand until 3.4 Nm (30 in.
lbs.) of rotating torque is measured at Screw 6741
(5).
5. Install Arbor Discs 9083 (1).
LX
LX
6. Install Arbor Bar D-115-3 (1).
7. Verify pinion depth setup is a shown.
8. Install Dial Indicator 9524 (1) to Scooter Block

D-115-2A (2). Secure with set-screw (3).
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 193
3 - 194
REAR AXLE - 210RII
9. Install Indicator/Block assembly to top of Height

Block 6739 (1). Zero indicator on top surface.
10. Slide indicator probe off of height block and onto

Arbor Bar D-115-3 (2). As indicator contacts Arbor
Bar (2), indicator needle will rotate clockwise.
Continue moving indicator probe to the crest of
the arbor bar and record the highest reading.
11. Select a shim equal to the dial indicator reading

plus the drive pinion gear depth variance number
etched into the pinion face (1). For example, if the
depth variance is 01, subtract 0.01mm (0.0004
in.) from dial indicator reading.
LX
LX
REAR AXLE - 210RII
12. Using Tool C-4171 (2) and Remover 9084 (1),

drive out pinion head bearing cup and insert specified shim.
ADJUSTMENT SIDE BEARING PRELOAD AND RING GEAR BACKLASH

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD MEASUREMENT/CORRECTION
Differential side bearing preload should be measured and adjusted after the following scenarios:
Loss or replacement of side bearing snap rings
If none of these situations apply, refer to Adjustment Ring Gear Backlash
1. Install Spreader Adapter Plates 9226 (1).
3 - 195
3 - 196
REAR AXLE - 210RII
2. Mount axle housing to Spreader W-129-B (1)

measure axle housing spread:
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
4. If differential side bearing cups and snap rings are

already removed at this point, skip to Step 8. Otherwise, expand spreader (1) to spread axle housing
no more than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
LX
LX
5. Remove both differential side bearing snap rings
(1). Tag snap ring to ensure replacement to original
position.
6. Measure and record snap ring (2) thickness for

later use.

housing.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 197
3 - 198
REAR AXLE - 210RII
8. Install right (pinion) side bearing cup and snap ring

(1).
9. Zero dial indicator.

10. Expand spreader (1) to spread axle housing no
more than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
11. Install left (ring gear) side bearing cup and snap
ring (1).
LX
LX
REAR AXLE - 210RII

housing.
13. Measurement showing on indicator (3) is the axle

housing retained spread. Proper differential side
bearing preload is achieved with an axle housing
retained spread of 0.11-0.17 mm (0.004-0.007 in.).
14. If retained spread is less than 0.11 mm (0.004
in.), increase snap ring thickness at each side in
equal increments.
15. If retained spread is greater than 0.17 mm (0.007
in.), decrease snap ring thickness at each side in
equal increments.
RING GEAR BACKLASH MEASUREMENT/CORRECTION

Differential Ring Gear Backlash should be measured and adjusted after the following scenarios:
1. Ring and pinion gear replacement
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Pinion head bearing replacement

Pinion depth (shim) adjustment
3 - 199
3 - 200
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
NOTE: If Spreader W-129-B is installed, make sure

tension on axle housing is relieved.
measure ring gear backlash:
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
8. Rotate ring gear one direction to take up clearance
to pinion. Verify indicator tip is in contact with ring
gear and zero indicator. Rotate ring gear back and
forth and record measurement. Ring gear backlash
should be 0.10-0.16 mm (0.004-0.006 in.). Verify
back lash measurement in four (4) positions.
9. If backlash measurement is less than 0.10 mm

(0.004 in.), it is necessary to decrease the snap
ring thickness on the ring gear (left) side, and
increase the thickness on the pinion (right) side.
10. If backlash measurement is greater than 0.16 mm
(0.006 in.), it is necessary to increase the snap
ring thickness on the ring gear (right) side, and
decrease the thickness on the pinion (left) side.
GEAR CONTACT PATTERN

The ring gear and pinion teeth contact patterns will show if the pinion depth is correct in the housing. It will also
show if the ring gear backlash has been adjusted correctly. The backlash can be adjusted within specifications to
achieve desired tooth contact patterns.
1. Apply a thin coat of hydrated ferric oxide or equivalent to the drive and coast side of the ring gear teeth.
2. Wrap, twist, and hold a shop towel around the pinion yoke to increase the turning resistance of the pinion. This
will provide a more distinct contact pattern.
3. With a boxed end wrench on a ring gear bolt, rotate the differential case one complete revolution in both directions while a load is being applied from shop towel.
The areas on the ring gear teeth with the greatest degree of contact against the pinion teeth will squeegee the
compound to the areas with the least amount of contact. Note and compare patterns on the ring gear teeth to Gear
Tooth Contact Patterns chart and adjust pinion depth and gear backlash as necessary.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
GEAR TOOTH CONTACT PATTERNS
3 - 201
3 - 202
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
SPECIFICATIONS - 210 MM RII AXLE

SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
Axle Ratios
2.82
Ring Gear Diameter
210 mm (8.3 in.)
Ring Gear Backlash
0.10-0.16 mm (0.004-0.006 in.)
Side Bearing Preload
6-8000 N
Axle Housing Retained Spread
0.11 mm to 0.17 mm (0.004 in. to 0.007 in.)
Select Snap Ring Size
3.60-4.50mm (0.14-0.17 in.) In 0.02mm (0.0007 in.)

increments
Select Pinion Shim Size
1.40-2.50mm (0.05-0.10 in.) In 0.01mm (0.0004 in.)

increments
Pinion Torque To Rotate
2.25Nm (20 in. lbs.)
Total Torque To Rotate (Approx.)
3.38Nm (30 in. lbs.)
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
Plug, Rear Axle Drain/Fill
50
37
Bolt, Differential Cover
50
37
Bolt, Ring Gear-toDifferential Case
85
63
220
162
Bolt/Nut, Axle Front Mount

Isolator
65
48
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
SPECIAL TOOLS - 210 RII AXLE
Puller 1026
Pinion Height Gage, 9085
Installer, 6448A
Installer, 9223
Arbor Discs, 9083

Spreader Adapters, 9226
Remover, 9084
3 - 203
3 - 204
REAR AXLE - 210RII
Installer, 9231
Removal/Installation Arbor, 9522
LX
Mounting Plate, 9630
Fixture, 9631
Puller Press, C-293-PA
Installer, 9523
Adapters, C-293-37
Dial Indicator, 9524
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
Installer, C-3095-A
Installer, D-146
Flange Wrench, C-3281

Remover, D-149
Dial Indicator Set, C-3339-A
Adapter, SP-3289
Handle, C-4171
Installer, C-4310
Spreader, W-129-B
3 - 205
3 - 206
REAR AXLE - 210RII
SEAL-AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL
seal (2).
INSTALLATION
LX
LX
Lubricant 75W-140. Reinstall fill plug and torque to
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 207
3 - 208
REAR AXLE - 210RII
SEAL-PINION FLANGE
REMOVAL
Rear Axle Removal.

LX
LX
pinion flange.
from pinion shaft.

discard.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 209
3 - 210
REAR AXLE - 210RII
INSTALLATION
pinion seal.
2. Using Tool 9231A (1), install pinion seal until tool
bottoms on carrier.

exposed.
LX
LX
Nm (100 ft. lbs.).


REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 211
3 - 212
REAR AXLE - 210RII

Installation.
LX
LX
DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL
1. Remove drain plug (1) and drain fluid into container
suitable for reuse.
2. Install drain plug and torque to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
3. Remove twelve axle cover-to-housing bolts (1) and

remove cover (2) with a suitable screwdriver.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 213
3 - 214
REAR AXLE - 210RII
4. Install spreader adapters (1), Tool 9226, as shown.

Adapters contain two hole patterns and are labeled
accordingly.
5. Mount spreader Tool W-129-B (1) into bench vise.

Install axle assembly to spreader and secure with
nuts 9226-2.
6. Using suitable torque wrench (1), measure and

record rear axle assembly total turning torque.
LX
LX
7. Using suitable screwdriver (1), remove both axle
seals (2).
8. Set up dial indicator C-3339-A to measure housing

spread as shown.
9. Spread axle housing no more than 0.30 mm (0.012

in.).
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 215
3 - 216
REAR AXLE - 210RII
NOTE: The differential side bearing snap rings are

select-fit, and control ring gear backlash and differential side bearing preload. It is important to
return original snap rings to their original position.
10. Using suitable snap ring pliers (2), compress and
remove differential side bearing snap rings (1).
Identify and tag for proper reuse.

housing.
12. Measure snap ring thickness and record for future

use.
LX
LX
13. Install Tool 9522 (1) into one side of housing and
push inward to release differential side bearing
cup (2) from opposite side. Repeat for other
bearing.
14. Remove differential assembly from axle housing.

NOTE: Note: If difficulty removing differential is
encountered due to interference with W-129-B
spreader and adapter plates, remove axle from
spreader and adapter plates from axle to facilitate
removal.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 217
3 - 218
REAR AXLE - 210RII
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove differential ring gear-to-case bolts (1).
2. Using brass drift (1), remove ring gear (2).
LX
LX
(1) and Plug SP-3289 (4).
4. Drive out pinion shaft-to-case roll pin using hammer and suitable punch.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 219
3 - 220
REAR AXLE - 210RII
5. Using brass drift (2), drive out pinion shaft (1).
6. Install Tool 9631 (1) into differential side gear.
7. Rotate Tool 9631 (1) to gain access to and remove

pinion gears and thrust washers.
LX
LX
8. Remove differential side gears (4) and thrust washers (5).
ASSEMBLY
1. Lubricate all differential components with hypoid
gear lubricant.
2. Install differential side gears (2) and thrust washers
to Tools 9631 (1) as shown in illustration.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 221
3 - 222
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3. Install differential pinion gears (1) and thrust washers into position across from each other.
4. Rotate pinion gears into place using Tool 9631 and

line up gear centers with pinion shaft bore.
5. Using a brass hammer, drive pinion shaft (3) into

differential case (1), making sure to line up roll pin
bores.
6. Using suitable punch (2), drive new roll pin into
position.
LX
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
7. Measure differential gear rotating torque as shown.
Differential gear rotating torque should be 5-30 Nm
(44-266 in. lbs.) Rotating torque is adjusted using
select side gear thrust washers. Refer to the following chart.
Available Side Gear Thrust Washer Thicknesses

1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
1.30 mm (0.051 in.)
1.35 mm (0.053 in.)
1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
1.45 mm (0.057 in.)
1.50 mm (0.059 in.)
1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
1.65 mm (0.065 in.)
8. Remove differential case from Tool 9630 (2).
3 - 223
3 - 224
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX
9. Install ring gear to case. Lightly tap ring gear into

position to facilitate starting of bolts.
10. Install new ring gear-to-case bolts and torque to
85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.).
11. Using Tool 9523 (2) and Handle C-4171 (1), press
new differential side bearings (3) onto differential
case.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: If replacement differential side bearings or differential case are being installed, it is necessary to
measure and adjust Differential Side Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash. Refer to Adjustments Differential Side Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash to determine proper snap ring selection.
LX
1. Install differential assembly (1) into axle housing.
Note: If difficulty installing differential is
encountered due to interference with spreader
and plates, remove axle housing from spreader,
plates from housing, and install differential.
Return assembly to the spreader.
2. Install differential side bearing cups (2). Use tool

9522 (1) to aid in differential alignment.
3. Use Tool 9522 (1) to aid in seating side bearing

cups (2).
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 225
3 - 226
REAR AXLE - 210RII
LX

housing spread as shown:
b. Post SP-5425-B (2)
5. Expand spreader W-129-B (1) to spread axle housing no more than 0.30 mm (0.012 in.).
NOTE: The differential side bearing snap rings are select-fit, and control ring gear backlash and differential
side bearing preload. It is necessary to return snap rings to their original position. If replacement differential
side bearings, differential case, or axle housing are being installed, refer to Adjustments Differential Side
Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash to determine proper snap ring selection.
LX
6. Using suitable snap ring pliers (2), install differential
side bearing snap rings (1).

housing.
8. Remove axle assembly from spreader. Remove

plates (1).
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 227
3 - 228
REAR AXLE - 210RII
9. Apply 4mm (0.157 in.) bead (2) of MoparT Axle

RTV to axle housing cover (1) as shown.
10. Install cover (2) to axle housing. Install and torque

cover-to-housing bolts (1) to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) +
90.
LX
LX
11. Install axle seals (1) using Tool 9223 (2).
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 229
3 - 230
REAR AXLE - 210RII
REMOVAL
1. Remove differential assembly from axle. Refer to
Differential Removal.

(1) and Plug SP-3289 (4).
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Using Tool 9523 and Handle C-4171, press differential side bearings onto differential case.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 231
3 - 232
REAR AXLE - 210RII
COVER-DIFFERENTIAL
REMOVAL
1. Remove axle assembly from vehicle. (Refer to 3 DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE 210MM - REMOVAL)
2. Remove axle housing cover bolts (1). Using suitable screwdriver, pry cover (2) from housing.
INSTALLATION
1. Thoroughly clean cover and install a 4 mm (0.157
in.) bead of MoparT AXLE RTV (2) as shown.
LX
LX
2. Immediately install cover. Install and torque bolts
(1) to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
3. Install axle assembly to vehicle. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE - 210MM INSTALLATION)
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 233
3 - 234
REAR AXLE - 210RII
GEAR-PINION/RING
REMOVAL
1. Remove differential assembly. (Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR AXLE - 210MM/
DIFFERENTIAL - REMOVAL)
2. Place differential case in a soft-jawwed vise and

remove ring gear-to-case bolts (1).
3. Remove ring gear from differential case with a

brass drift (1) and hammer.
LX
LX
4. Using 41mm socket and flange wrench Tool
C-3281 (1), remove pinion nut and discard.
5. Using puller Tool 1026 (1), remove pinion flange

(2).
6. Using a suitable screwdriver, remove and discard

the pinion seal.
7. Remove pinion tail bearing cone.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 235
3 - 236
REAR AXLE - 210RII
8. Move axle housing to press and press out pinion

shaft (1) as shown.
9. Remove collapsible spacer (1) and washers (2).

Discard collapsible spacer.
LX
LX
10. Remove pinion head bearing (2) with Puller
C-293-PA (1) and Adapters C-293-37 (3,4).
11. Using driver handle C-4171(2) and remover Tool

9084 (1), drive out pinion head bearing cup.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 237
3 - 238
REAR AXLE - 210RII
12. Remove pinion head shim. Measure and record

shim thickness.
13. Using driver handle C-4171 (2) and remover Tool

D-149 (1), drive out pinion tail bearing cup.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Install selected pinion depth shim into housing.

Tools C-4171 (1) and C-4310 (2).
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 239
3 - 240
REAR AXLE - 210RII

Tools C-4171 (1) and D-146 (2).
4. Press new pinion head bearing (2) onto pinion

shaft using Tool C-3095-A (1).
LX
LX
5. Install washers (2) and new collapsible spacer (1)
to pinion shaft.
6. Install pinion shaft (1) into housing and support on

press table atop Tool 8255 (2). Ensure pinion
gear face is centered atop Tool 8255.
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 241
3 - 242
REAR AXLE - 210RII
7. Using Tool C-3095-A (1), press on new pinion tail

bearing (2).
8. Install new pinion seal (1) into position.
LX
LX
9. Press pinion seal into housing using Tool 9231A
(1).
10. Lightly lubricate pinion flange seal with axle lubricant for flange installation.
11. Align index marks and press pinion flange (2) on
using Tool C-3095-A (1).
12. Install new pinion flange nut by hand.

13. Hold pinion flange with Tool C-3281 (1). Using a
deep 41 mm socket, tighten pinion flange nut to
an initial torque of 203 Nm (150 ft. lbs.).
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 243
3 - 244
REAR AXLE - 210RII
14. Rotate pinion flange to ensure bearing is properly

seated.
15. Measure pinion rotating torque using suitable
torque wrench (1). Pinion rotating torque
should be 215-245 N. cm (19-22 in. lbs.).
16. If pinion rotating torque exceeds the specified
range, the pinion shaft must be removed and the
crush sleeve replaced.
17. If pinion rotating torque is below the specified

range, increase nut torque by 7 Nm (5 ft. lbs.)
increments and recheck turning torque until rotating torque is within range.
18. Stake pinion flange nut (1) using hammer and

suitable punch.
LX
LX
19. Install ring gear to differential case. Loosely install
new ring-gear-to-differential case bolts.
20. Torque all ring gear-to-case bolts to 85 Nm (64 ft.
lbs.)

(Refer to 3 - DIFFERENTIAL & DRIVELINE/REAR
AXLE - 210MM/DIFFERENTIAL - INSTALLATION)
REAR AXLE - 210RII
3 - 245
3 - 246
REAR AXLE - 215RII
LX
REAR AXLE - 215RII

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
REAR AXLE - 215RII

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
SPECIAL TOOLS215 MM RII AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . 260

SEAL - PINION FLANGE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
SEAL - AXLE SHAFT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
LX
REAR AXLE - 215RII
3 - 247
REAR AXLE - 215RII

DESCRIPTION
cup.
AXLE IDENTIFICATION
The 215 MM axle utilizes a barcoded label which is adhered to the top of the axle housing as shown. The following
information is found on the identification label:
Axle Part Number
Axle Gear Ratio
3 - 248
REAR AXLE - 215RII
LX

GEAR NOISE
Axle gear noise can be caused by insufficient lubricant, incorrect backlash, incorrect pinion depth, tooth
contact, worn/damaged gears, or the carrier housing
not having the proper offset and squareness.
Gear noise usually happens at a specific speed range.
The noise can also occur during a specific type of
driving condition. These conditions are acceleration,
deceleration, coast, or constant load.
When road testing, first warm-up the axle fluid by driving the vehicle at least 5 miles and then accelerate
the vehicle to the speed range where the noise is the
greatest. Shift out-of-gear and coast through the peaknoise range. If the noise stops or changes greatly:
Gear damage.
BEARING NOISE
LOW SPEED KNOCK

VIBRATION
Bent halfshaft(s).
REAR AXLE - 215RII
LX
3 - 249
DRIVELINE SNAP
DIAGNOSTIC CHART
CONDITION
Wheel Noise
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
1. Wheel loose.
2. Replace bearing.

preload.

properly.



and quantity.

and quantity.

wheel/tire.

3 - 250
REAR AXLE - 215RII

CONDITION
Loss Of Lubricant
Axle Overheating
Gear Teeth Broke
Axle Noise
LX
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION

level.
2. Replace seals.
4. Replace seal.

journal.

cover.

1. Overloading.

damage.



and quantity.

adjustment.

pinion depth.


pinion.

8. Replace housing.
LX
REAR AXLE - 215RII
3 - 251

NOTE: The fluid required for use in this axle is MoparT Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant 75W-140.
on hoist.
3. Remove rear axle drain plug (1) and drain lubricant
REMOVAL
3 - 252
REAR AXLE - 215RII

on hoist.
reuse.
lbs.) torque.

at rear hanger(s).

LX
LX
flange bolt/nuts.


REAR AXLE - 215RII
3 - 253
3 - 254
REAR AXLE - 215RII

nut (2).

LX
LX
journal.

to bench.
discard.
REAR AXLE - 215RII
3 - 255
3 - 256
REAR AXLE - 215RII
INSTALLATION

assembly. Use care not to damage axle seals(2).
by hand.
LX
LX


REAR AXLE - 215RII
3 - 257
3 - 258
REAR AXLE - 215RII

to axle assembly.
(2).

LX
LX
REAR AXLE - 215RII
3 - 259
3 - 260
REAR AXLE - 215RII
SPECIAL TOOLS215 MM RII AXLE
Installer, 9754
Installer, 9755
LX
LX
SEAL - PINION FLANGE

REMOVAL
Rear Axle Removal.

REAR AXLE - 215RII
3 - 261
3 - 262
REAR AXLE - 215RII
pinion flange.
from pinion shaft.

discard.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
pinion seal.
2. Using Tool 9754 (1), install pinion seal until tool
bottoms on carrier.

exposed.
REAR AXLE - 215RII
3 - 263
3 - 264
REAR AXLE - 215RII

Nm (100 ft. lbs.).


LX
LX
Installation.
REAR AXLE - 215RII
3 - 265
3 - 266
REAR AXLE - 215RII
SEAL - AXLE SHAFT

REMOVAL
seal (2).
INSTALLATION
LX
LX
Lubricant 75W-140. Reinstall fill plug and torque to
REAR AXLE - 215RII
3 - 267
VEHICLE QUICK REFERENCE
LX
4-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
FLUID - CAPACITIES & RECOMMENDED

SPECIFICATIONS
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS
AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
FUSE LOCATIONS & TYPES
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Distribution Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
DESCRIPTION
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
REPLACEMENT BULBS
SPECIFICATIONS
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS - INTERIOR . . . 15
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS - EXTERIOR . . 15
TRAILER TOWING
SPECIFICATIONS
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4-2
FLUID - CAPACITIES & RECOMMENDED

SPECIFICATIONS
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
ENGINE
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant
Mopar T Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid

Organic Additive Technology)
Engine Oil (2.7 Liter)
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the
engine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
engine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
Spark Plugs
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine

compartment.
Oil Filter (2.7 Liter)
Mopar T 05281090 or equivalent.
Fuel Selection (2.7

Liter)
87 Octane
Fuel Selection (3.5

Liter)
89 Octane
Fuel Selection (5.7

Liter)
89 Octane
CHASSIS
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission
Mopar T ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder
Mopa T DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
Front Axle
API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W90 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Power Steering
Reservoir
Mopar T Power Steering Fluid + 4,

Mopar T ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Rear Axle
API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Transfer Case
Mopar T Transfer Case Lubricant LX, P/N 05170055EA, or equivalent.
LX
LX
CAPACITIES
DESCRIPTION
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (approximate)
2.7 Liter Engines (87 Octane)
18 gallons
68 liters
18 gallons
68 liters
19 gallons
72 liters
2.7 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20, API

Certified)
6.0 qts.
5.7 liters

Certified)
6.0 qts.
5.7 liters

Certified)
7.0 qts.
6.6 liters
2.7 Liter Engines (Mopar T

Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula) or equivalent.
9.7 qts
9.2 liters

10.6 qts
10.0 liters

14.6 qts
13.8 liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
Cooling System *
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
4-3
4-4
LX
FUSE LOCATIONS & TYPES

SPECIFICATIONS
Power Distribution Centers
Front Power Distribution Center Fuses
A power distribution center is located in the engine compartment. This center contains fuses and relays.
CAUTION:
When installing the Power Distribution Center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and
possibly result in a electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity
Fuse
Circuits
20 Amp
Yellow
Left High Beam Headlight
20 Amp
Yellow
Right High Beam Headlight
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
Adjustable Pedal
20 Amp
Yellow
Horn
25 Amp
Clear
Headlamp Washer If Equipped
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
Front Control Module (FCM)
20 Amp
Yellow
Fog Lamp
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
Park Lamp
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
Non ABS Brakes
10
5 Amp
Orange
Starter
11
20 Amp
Yellow
Auto Shutdown/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
12
13
14
25 Amp
Clear
Powertrain Control Module
15
20 Amp
Yellow
Injectors, Ignition Coils
16
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
Powertrain Control Module
17
30 Amp
Pink
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Valves
18
30 Amp
Pink
Windshield Wiper/Washer
LX
Cavity
Fuse
Circuits
19
50 Amp
Red
Radiator Fan
20
20 Amp
Lt. Blue
Starter
21
50 Amp Red
ABS Pump Motor
22
40 Amp
Green
Radiator Fan High/Low
23
50 Amp
Red
High Intensity Lighting
24
25
30 Amp
Pink
Lighting Left High Beam/Right Low Beam
26
20 Amp
Lt. Blue
Transmission
27
30 Amp
Pink
Lighting Left Low Beam/Right High Beam
4-5
Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses

There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains
fuses and relays.
CAUTION:
When installing the Power Distribution Center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and
possibly result in a electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity
Fuse
Circuits
60 Amp
Clear
Ignition Off Draw
40 Amp
Green
Battery
40 Amp
Green
Battery
30 Amp
Pink
Heated Seat/Steering Column
20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
Ignition Start/Run - Start
20 Amp
Yellow
Console Power Outlet
10
10 Amp
Red
Rear Fog Lamp If Equipped
11
25 Amp C/BRKR
Memory Module/Door Locks
12
25 Amp C/BRKR
Passenger Power Seat
4-6
LX
Cavity
Fuse
Circuits
13
30 Amp C/BRKR
Door Module Run/Acc/Delay
14
10 Amp
Red
Sentry Key/Remote Keyless Entry/Cluster
15
20 Amp
Yellow
Brake Light (5.7L)
16
20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet Trunk - if equipped
17
18
20 Amp
Yellow
Selectable Power Outlet
19
10 Amp Red
Stop Lamp
20
20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Wiper If Equipped
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
10 Amp
Red
Airbag/Occupant Classification Module
28
10 Amp
Red
Curtain Airbag - if equipped
29
5 Amp
Orange
Sentry Key/Remote Keyless Entry/Powertrain

Control Module Ignition Feed
30
10 Amp
Red
Steering Column Module/Power Mirrors - if

equipped
31
32
33
34
35
5 Amp
Orange
Power Antenna/Garage Door Opener/Ignition Delay
36
20 Amp
Yellow
Radio/Navigation
37
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
Transmission
38
5 Amp
Orange
Analog Clock/Garage Door Opener
39
10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirror
40
5 Amp
Orange
Power Mirror
41
10 Amp
Red
Climate Control Module/Headlamp Leveling if

equipped/Rear Park Assist if equipped/Tire
Pressure Monitoring if equipped
42
30 Amp
Pink
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Blower Motor
LX
Cavity
Fuse
Circuits
43
30 Amp
Pink
Rear Defroster
44
20 Amp
Lt. Blue
Audio Amplifier
4-7
4-8
LX
DESCRIPTION
For 2.7L engines with Federal Certified Emission Control Systems, and all 6.1L engines, follow Maintenance
Schedule A from 0 to 102,000 miles, or Schedule B from 0 to 105,000 miles.
For 2.7L engines with California Certified Emission Control Systems, and all 3.5L and 5.7L engines follow
Maintenance Schedule A or B from 0120,000 miles.
There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule B. It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the
vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an L.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
Trailer towing.L
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).L
this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule (B(.
Second is Schedule A. It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule
9B9.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval
that occurs first.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION: Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel

Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is
at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
Once a Month
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
LX
4-9
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation.
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for proper fit.
At Each Oil Change
Change the engine oil filter.

Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the brake hoses.
Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension components.
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
SCHEDULE B
Follow schedule B if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions. Change the
automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under one
or more of the conditions marked with an L.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
Trailer towing.L
Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial services).L
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.
this manual.
Miles
(Kilometers)
3,000
6,000
9,000
12,000
15,000
18,000
(5 000)
(10 000)
(15 000)
(20 000)
(25 000)
(30 000)


if required.*

and rotors.
Rotate the tires.

Miles
21,000
24,000
27,000
30,000
33,000
36,000
(35 000)
(40 000)
(45 000)
(50 000)
(55 000)
(60 000)


if required.*
(Kilometers)
4 - 10
Miles
(Kilometers)
LX
21,000
24,000
27,000
30,000
33,000
36,000
(35 000)
(40 000)
(45 000)
(50 000)
(55 000)
(60 000)

and rotors.

valve.*
Rotate the tires.
Miles
(Kilometers)
X
X
39,000
42,000
45,000
48,000
51,000
54,000
(65 000)
(70 000)
(75 000)
(80 000)
(85 000)
(90 000)


if required.*

and rotors.
Rotate the tires.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All

Wheel Drive (AWD) only
Miles
57,000
60,000
63,000
66,000
69,000
72,000
(95 000)
(100 000)
(105 000)
(110 000)
(115 000)
(120 000)


(Kilometers)

Engine.

and rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive

belt and tensioner. Replace if required.

PCV valve.*
Change the automatic transmission

fluid and filter.

miles.
Rotate the tires.
LX
Miles
(Kilometers)
4 - 11
75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
90,000
(125 000)
(130 000)
(135 000)
(140 000)
(145 000)
(150 000)


Engine.

and rotors.

PCV valve.*
Rotate the tires.

Miles
93,000
96,000
99,000
102,000
105,000
(155 000)
(160 000)
(165 000)
(170 000)
(175 000)


required.*
(Kilometers)

rotors.

Engine.

Engines.

Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel

Drive (AWD) only
Flush and replace engine coolant at 102,000

miles if not done at 60 months.
Rotate the tires.

Miles
108,000
111,000
114,000
117,000
120,000
(180 000)
(185 000)
(190 000)
(195 000)
(200 000)


required.*
(Kilometers)

rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engines.
X
X
X
X
4 - 12
LX
Miles
(Kilometers)
108,000
111,000
114,000
117,000
120,000
(180 000)
(185 000)
(190 000)
(195 000)
(200 000)

valve.*
Change the automatic transmission fluid and

filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120

months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions
warranty.
receipts.
SCHEDULE A
Miles
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
(10 000)
(20 000)
(30 000)
(40 000)
(50 000)
(60 000)
[6]
[12]
[18]
[24]
[30]
[36]

if required.*
(Kilometers)
[Months]

and rotors.
Miles
Rotate the tires.
X
X
X
X
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
(70 000)
(80 000)
(90 000)
(100 000)
(110 000)
(120 000)
[42]
[48]
[54]
[60]
[66]
[72]
Change engine oil and engine oil

filter.

(Kilometers)
[Months]

Inspect the front and rear brake
linings and rotors.
Engine.
X
X
X
X
Check and Inspect the accessory

drive belt and tensioner. Replace if
required.
miles.
LX
Miles
(Kilometers)
4 - 13
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
(70 000)
(80 000)
(90 000)
(100 000)
(110 000)
(120 000)
[42]
[48]
[54]
[60]
[66]
[72]
[Months]
PCV valve. *

Rotate the tires.
X
X
Miles
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
(130 000)
(140 000)
(150 000)
(160 000)
(170 000)
[78]
[84]
[90]
[96]
[102]

required.*
(Kilometers)
[Months]

rotors.


Engines.

valve.*

Engine.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at

102,000 miles if not done at 60 months.

Rotate the tires.
X
X
Miles
108,000
114,000
120,000
(180 000)
(190 000)
(200 000)
[108]
[114]
[120]
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
(Kilometers)
[Months]

Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
X
X
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve.*
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, if not

replaced at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions
warranty.
4 - 14
LX
receipts.
WARNING:
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
LX
4 - 15
REPLACEMENT BULBS
SPECIFICATIONS
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS - INTERIOR
LIGHT BULBS Interior
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights
W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light
579
Overhead Console Reading Lights
578
Visor Vanity Lights
A6220
Glove Box Light
194
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Light
JKLE14140
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and
should not be used for replacement.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS - EXTERIOR

LIGHT BULBS Exterior (300, 300 Touring Models)
Low Beam Headlamp
Bulb Number
9006
High Beam Headlamp
9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp
3757AK
Front Inner Park Lamp
194NA
Front Outer Park Lamp
194NA
Front Fog LampIf Equipped
9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer)
Front Sidemarker
W5W (Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp
3057
Rear Sidemarker
168
Backup Lamp
3057
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
LED
License
168
LIGHT BULBS Exterior (300C Models)
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen)
9006XS
Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge (HID)
D1S (Serviced at Dealer)
High Beam Headlamp
9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp
3157AK
Front Fog Lamp
9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer)
Front Sidemarker
W5W (Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/Stop Lamp
3057
Tail Lamp
3057
Turn Signal Lamp
3057
Backup Lamp
3057
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
LED
4 - 16
LX
LIGHT BULBS Exterior (300C Models)

License
Bulb Number
W5W
LX
4 - 17
TRAILER TOWING
SPECIFICATIONS
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its 9loaded and ready for operation9 condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
WARNING:
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more
than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and theyre
commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch includes a receiver attached to the tow vehicle, plus a removable hitch head and spring
bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the trailer
frame.
4 - 18
LX
Trailer Hitch Classification

Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
2.7L Automatic
3.5L & 5.7L Automatic
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer

Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square

meters)
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 1,000 lbs (454
kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)

meters)
Up to 3 persons &
kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)

meters)
Up to 4 persons &
kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)

meters)
Up to 5 persons & NO
kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)

meters)
Up to 2 persons &
kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)

meters)
Up to 3 persons &
kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)

meters)
Up to 4 persons &
kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)

meters)
Up to 5 persons & NO
Luggage 1,000lbs (454
kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
LX
4 - 19
Trailer and Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can
cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to
load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on
the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the
total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety
Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for Tongue Weights
(TW) above 150 lbs (68 kg) and required for Tongue Weights above 300 lbs (136 kg).
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION:
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your
vehicle.
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING:
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe
as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that
is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have an accident.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of
control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis
structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame
or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park. Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
4 - 20
LX
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the
10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements - Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to the (Refer to 22 - TIRES/
WHEELS/TIRES - DESCRIPTION) section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires refer to (Refer to 22 - TIRES/WHEELS/TIRES - DESCRIPTION) section of this manual on
Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements - Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This
could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated
brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION:
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be
of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING:
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicles hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements - Trailer Lights & Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
LX
4 - 21
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips - Automatic Transmission
The D range can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the 3
range should be selected.Using the 3 range while
operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This
action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more
than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission
fluid change intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid
level before towing.
Towing Tips - Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
Dont use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips - Autostick (If Equipped)
For vehicles equipped with Autostick. By using the Autostick modes, and selecting a specific gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance.
For example, choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the
desired speed.
Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed
when road conditions and RPM level allows.
Towing Tips - Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving - When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle
speed.
Highway Driving - Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning - Turn off temporarily.
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more information.
BRAKES
LX
5-1
BRAKES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
BRAKES - BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . 173
BRAKES - ABS SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . 385
BRAKES - BASE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
BRAKES - BASE
DESCRIPTION - BASE BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BASE BRAKE BLEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
BASE BRAKE BLEEDING - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE FASTENER TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SPECIAL TOOLS
BASE BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
SENSOR - BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL
DESCRIPTION
DISC BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
DISC BRAKES - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PADS - FRONT BRAKE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PADS - REAR BRAKE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PADS - FRONT/REAR BRAKE - SRT8
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BRAKE PAD BURNISHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
CALIPER - FRONT SINGLE PISTON DISC
BRAKE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CALIPER - FRONT TWIN PISTON DISC BRAKE
REMOVAL
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
INSTALLATION
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CALIPER - FRONT DISC BRAKE - SRT8
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
CALIPER - REAR DISC BRAKE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CALIPER - REAR DISC BRAKE - SRT8
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5-2
BRAKES - BASE
FLUID
BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
RESERVOIR - MASTER CYLINDER FLUID
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
JUNCTION BLOCK
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
MASTER CYLINDER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
STANDARD PROCEDURE
MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING - MK25 . . . . . . 84
MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING - MK25E . . . . . 85
REMOVAL
MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
MASTER CYLINDER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
INSTALLATION
MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
MASTER CYLINDER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
PEDAL
REMOVAL
PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
PEDAL - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
INSTALLATION
PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
PEDAL - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
PEDAL - ADJUSTABLE BRAKE
STANDARD PROCEDURE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SYCHRONIZATION . . 107
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
BOOSTER - POWER BRAKE
REMOVAL
BOOSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
BOOSTER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
INSTALLATION
BOOSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
LX
BOOSTER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
VALVE - PROPORTIONING
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ROTOR
BRAKE ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BRAKE ROTOR MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
REMOVAL
FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
FRONT - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
REAR - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
INSTALLATION
FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
FRONT - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
REAR - SRT8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
TUBES/HOSES
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
PARKING BRAKE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
CABLE - PARKING BRAKE FRONT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
CABLE - PARKING BRAKE REAR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
LEVER - PARKING BRAKE
REMOVAL
LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
LEVER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
INSTALLATION
LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
LEVER - RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
SHOE AND LINING - PARKING BRAKE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
ADJUSTMENTS
PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . 171
BRAKES - BASE
LX
5-3
BRAKES - BASE
DESCRIPTION - BASE BRAKES
The
base brake system consists of the following components:

Brake pedal
Master cylinder
Power brake booster
Brake tubes and hoses
Proportioning valve (non-ABS only)
Disc brakes (front and rear)
Brake lamp switch
Brake fluid level sensor
Parking brake
All brakes are power assist type through the use of a vacuum operated power brake booster.
The hydraulic brake system is front/rear split on both the non-antilock and antilock braking systems. This means the
front brakes are on one hydraulic circuit from the master cylinder and the rear brakes are on the other.
Front disc brakes control the braking of the front wheels; rear braking is controlled by rear disc brakes.
Some vehicles are equipped with an optional antilock brake system (ABS) with traction control. This system shares
most base brake hardware used on vehicles without ABS. An Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is also available.
All components differing from the base brake hardware are described in detail in the Antilock Brake System section.
The parking brake on this vehicle is pedal-operated.
For more information on the description of any individual base brake component, refer to that component elsewhere
in this section. For information on the brake lamp switch, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/BRAKE LAMP SWITCH - DESCRIPTION)
WARNING
WARNING: Dust and dirt accumulating on brake parts during normal use may contain asbestos fibers from
production or aftermarket brake linings. Breathing excessive concentrations of asbestos fibers can cause
serious bodily harm. Exercise care when servicing brake parts. Do not sand or grind brake lining unless
equipment used is designed to contain the dust residue. Do not clean brake parts with compressed air or
by dry brushing. Cleaning should be done by dampening the brake components with a fine mist of water,
then wiping the brake components clean with a dampened cloth. Dispose of cloth and all residue containing
asbestos fibers in an impermeable container with the appropriate label. Follow practices prescribed by the
Occupational Safety And Health Administration (OSHA) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for
the handling, processing, and disposing of dust or debris that may contain asbestos fibers.
CAUTION
CAUTION: Use only MoparT brake fluid or an equivalent from a tightly sealed container. Brake fluid must
conform to DOT 3 specifications. Do not use petroleum-based fluid because seal damage in the brake system will result.
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled on any painted surfaces, wash
it off immediately with water.
CAUTION: Never use gasoline, kerosene, alcohol, motor oil, transmission fluid, or any fluid containing mineral oil to clean system components. These fluids damage rubber cups and seals.
CAUTION: During service procedures, grease or any other foreign material must be kept off the caliper
assembly, brake linings, brake rotor and external surfaces of the hub.
5-4
BRAKES - BASE
LX
CAUTION: Disc brake calipers are made of aluminum. They are anodized and appear black in color. When
handling the calipers or brake rotors, be careful to avoid damaging them, and avoid scratching or nicking
the brake pad lining.
CAUTION: Anytime the battery has been disconnected and is reconnected it is important that this be performed properly. The vehicle may be equipped with systems that require special calibration processes.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BASE BRAKE BLEEDING
CAUTION: Before removing the master cylinder cover, wipe it clean to prevent dirt and other foreign matter
from dropping into the master cylinder.
CAUTION: Use only MoparT brake fluid or an equivalent from a fresh, tightly sealed container. Brake fluid
must conform to DOT 3 specifications.
NOTE: For bleeding the antilock brake hydraulic system, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
NOTE: Do not pump the brake pedal at any time while having a bleeder screw open during the bleeding
process. This will only increase the amount of air in the system and make additional bleeding necessary.
NOTE: Do not allow the master cylinder reservoir to run out of brake fluid while bleeding the system. An
empty reservoir will allow additional air into the brake system. Check the fluid level frequently and add fluid
as needed.
The following wheel circuit sequence for bleeding the brake hydraulic system should be used to ensure adequate
removal of all trapped air from the brake hydraulic system.
Right rear wheel
Left rear wheel
Right front wheel
Left front wheel
NOTE: Pressure bleeding is highly recommended to bleed this brake system to ensure all air is removed
from system. Manual bleeding may also be used, but additional time is needed to remove all air from system.
The base brake system can be bled using the pressure method or the manual method. Both methods are presented
in this text.
PRESSURE BLEEDING METHOD

NOTE: Follow pressure bleeder manufacturers instructions for use of pressure bleeding equipment.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
1. Remove filler cap from the top of fluid reservoir (2)

on master cylinder.
2. Install Adapter (1), Special Tool 6921, in the caps
place on the reservoir (2).
3. Attach Bleeder Tank, Special Tool C-3496-B, or
equivalent, to Adapter 6921 (1). Pressurize the system following the pressure bleeder manufacturers
instructions.
NOTE: To ensure all air is bled from the ICU or

junction block in a timely manner, it is recommended to raise the rear of the vehicle approximately 5 higher than the front or approximately
1012 inches as measured at the rear bumper (1).
4. Raise and support vehicle placing rear of vehicle
approximately 5 higher than the front or if measured at the rear bumper (1), approximately 1012
inches above level. It will be necessary to add
extra support stands under vehicle to support this
angle.
5. If installed, remove rubber dust caps from all four

bleeder screws on calipers.
6. Starting at the first wheel circuit as listed earlier,
attach a clear hose (1) to the bleeder screw at that
wheels brake caliper and feed the other end of
hose into a clear jar (2) containing enough fresh
brake fluid to submerge the end of the hose.
CAUTION: Open the bleeder screw at least one full
turn when instructed. Some air may be trapped in
the brake lines or valves far upstream, as far as
ten feet or more from the bleeder screw. If the
bleeder screw is not opened sufficiently, fluid flow
is restricted causing a slow, weak fluid discharge.
This will NOT get all the air out. Therefore, it is
essential to open the bleeder screw at least one
full turn to allow a fast, large volume discharge of
brake fluid.
7. Open bleeder screw at least one full turn or more to obtain an adequate flow of brake fluid.
5-5
5-6
BRAKES - BASE
LX
8. After 4 to 8 ounces of brake fluid has been bled through the brake hydraulic circuit, and an air-free flow (no
bubbles) is maintained in the clear plastic hose (1) and jar (2), close the bleeder screw.
9. Bleed the remaining wheel circuits in the same manner until all air is removed from the brake hydraulic system.
10. Check brake pedal travel. If pedal travel is excessive or has not improved, some air may still be trapped in the
hydraulic system. Rebleed the brake system as necessary.
11. If equipped with antilock brakes, the hydraulic control unit may need to be bled, then rebleed base brakes.
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
12. Reinstall all 4 bleeder screw dust caps.
13. Test drive vehicle to ensure brakes are operating properly and pedal feel is correct.
MANUAL BLEEDING METHOD

NOTE: To bleed the base brake system manually, an assistants help is required.
angle.
2. Remove rubber duct caps from all 4 bleeder

screws.
3. Attach a clear hose (1) to the bleeder screw at one
wheel and feed the other end of the hose into a
clear jar (2) containing fresh brake fluid.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal three or
four times and hold it down before the bleeder
screw is opened.
full turn to allow a fast, large volume discharge of brake fluid.
5. While the pedal is being held down, open the bleeder screw at least 1 full turn. When the bleeder screw opens
the brake pedal will drop all the way to the floor. Continue to hold the pedal all the way down.
6. Once the brake pedal has dropped, close the bleeder screw. The pedal can then be released.
7. Repeat steps One through Five until all trapped air is removed from that wheel circuit (usually four or five times).
This should pass a sufficient amount of fluid to expel all the trapped air from the brakes hydraulic system. Be
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5-7
sure to monitor brake fluid level in master cylinder fluid reservoir making sure it stays at a proper level. This will
ensure air does not reenter brake hydraulic system through master cylinder.
NOTE: Monitor the brake fluid level in the fluid reservoir periodically to make sure it does not go too low.
This will ensure that air does not reenter the brake hydraulic system.
8. Bleed the remaining wheel circuits in the same manner until all air is removed from the brake hydraulic system.
9. Check brake pedal travel. If pedal travel is excessive or has not improved, some air may still be trapped in the
hydraulic system. Rebleed the brake system as necessary.
10. If equipped with antilock brakes, the hydraulic control unit may need to be bled, then rebleed base brakes.
11. Reinstall all 4 bleeder screw dust caps.
BASE BRAKE BLEEDING - SRT8

Use the following procedure to bleed the rear brake calipers of this vehicle. The front brake calipers may be bled
using the same procedure as the standard model.
CAUTION: Before removing the master cylinder cover, wipe it clean to prevent dirt and other foreign matter
from dropping into the master cylinder.
CAUTION: Use only MoparT brake fluid or an equivalent from a fresh, tightly sealed container. Brake fluid
must conform to DOT 3 specifications.
NOTE: For bleeding the antilock brake hydraulic system, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
NOTE: Do not pump the brake pedal at any time while having a bleeder screw open during the bleeding
process. This will only increase the amount of air in the system and make additional bleeding necessary.
NOTE: Do not allow the master cylinder reservoir to run out of brake fluid while bleeding the system. An
empty reservoir will allow additional air into the brake system. Check the fluid level frequently and add fluid
as needed.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding is highly recommended to bleed this brake system to ensure all air is removed
from system. Manual bleeding may also be used, but additional time is needed to remove all air from system.
Although it is recommended that the base brake system be bled using the pressure method, the manual method
can also be performed. Both methods are presented in this text.
PRESSURE BLEEDING METHOD

NOTE: Follow pressure bleeder manufacturers instructions for use of pressure bleeding equipment.
5-8
BRAKES - BASE
LX
1. Remove filler cap from the top of fluid reservoir (2)

on master cylinder.
2. Install Adapter (1), Special Tool 6921, in the caps
place on the reservoir (2).
3. Attach Bleeder Tank, Special Tool C-3496-B, or
equivalent, to Adapter 6921 (1). Pressurize the system following the pressure bleeder manufacturers
instructions.

angle.
NOTE: The following wheel circuit sequence for bleeding the brake hydraulic system should be used to
ensure adequate removal of all trapped air from the brake hydraulic system.
Right rear wheel
Left rear wheel
Right front wheel
Left front wheel
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5-9
REAR BRAKES
1. If installed, remove rubber dust caps from both
bleeder screws on each caliper.
2. Starting at the first wheel circuit that needs to be
bled (See list in above note), attach a clear hose
(3) to the inboard bleeder screw (2) at that wheels
brake caliper and feed the other end of hose into a
clear jar (4) containing enough fresh brake fluid to
submerge the end of the hose.
brake fluid.
3. Open inboard bleeder screw (2) at least one full turn or more to obtain an adequate flow of brake fluid.
bubbles) is maintained in the clear plastic hose (3) and jar (4), close the bleeder screw (2).
5. Remove clear hose and install bleeder screw dust cap.
6. Attach a clear hose (5) to the outboard bleeder
screw (1) at that same wheels brake caliper and
feed the other end of hose into a clear jar (4) containing enough fresh brake fluid to submerge the
end of the hose.
brake fluid.
7. Open outboard bleeder screw (1) at least one full
turn or more to obtain an adequate flow of brake
fluid.
bubbles) is maintained in the clear plastic hose (5) and jar (4), close the bleeder screw (1).
10. Bleed opposite rear brake wheel circuits as necessary in the same manner until all air is removed from the
brake hydraulic system, then proceed to the front brakes.
5 - 10
BRAKES - BASE
LX
FRONT BRAKES
1. If installed, remove rubber dust cap from bleeder
screw on each front brake caliper.
(1) to the bleeder screw at that wheels brake caliper and feed the other end of hose into a clear jar
(2) containing enough fresh brake fluid to submerge the end of the hose.
full turn to allow a fast, large volume discharge of brake fluid.
3. Open bleeder screw at least one full turn or more to obtain an adequate flow of brake fluid.
bubbles) is maintained in the clear plastic hose (1) and jar (2), close the bleeder screw.
5. Install bleeder screw dust cap.
6. Bleed opposite front brake wheel circuit as necessary in the same manner until all air is removed from the brake
hydraulic system.
5. If equipped with antilock brakes, the hydraulic control unit may need to be bled, then rebleed base brakes. (Refer
to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
6. Once all brakes are bled, check brake pedal travel. If pedal travel is excessive or has not improved, some air
may still be trapped in the hydraulic system. Rebleed the brake system as necessary.
MANUAL BLEEDING METHOD

NOTE: To bleed the base brake system manually, an assistants help is required.
angle.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 11
NOTE: The following wheel circuit sequence for bleeding the brake hydraulic system should be used to
ensure adequate removal of all trapped air from the brake hydraulic system.
Right rear wheel
Left rear wheel
Right front wheel
Left front wheel
REAR BRAKES
1. If installed, remove rubber dust caps from both
bleeder screws on each caliper.
(3) to the inboard bleeder screw (2) at that wheels
brake caliper and feed the other end of hose into a
clear jar (4) containing enough fresh brake fluid to
submerge the end of the hose.
four times, then hold it down before the bleeder
screw is opened.
essential to open the bleeder screw at least one full turn to allow a fast, large volume discharge of brake
fluid.
4. While the pedal is being held down, open the inboard bleeder screw (2) at least one full turn. When the bleeder
screw opens the brake pedal will drop all the way to the floor. Continue to hold the pedal all the way down.
6. Repeat the above three steps until all trapped air is removed from that wheel circuit (usually four or five times).
sure to monitor brake fluid level in master cylinder fluid reservoir making sure it stays at a proper level.
This will ensure air does not reenter brake hydraulic system through master cylinder.
5 - 12
BRAKES - BASE
LX
8. Attach a clear hose (5) to the outboard bleeder

screw (1) at that same wheels brake caliper and
feed the other end of hose into a clear jar (4) containing enough fresh brake fluid to submerge the
end of the hose.
four times, then hold it down before the bleeder
screw is opened.
brake fluid.
10. While the pedal is being held down, open the outboard bleeder screw (2) at least one full turn. When the
bleeder screw opens the brake pedal will drop all the way to the floor. Continue to hold the pedal all the way
down.
12. Repeat the above three steps until all trapped air is removed from that wheel circuit (usually four or five times).
sure to monitor brake fluid level in master cylinder fluid reservoir making sure it stays at a proper level.
This will ensure air does not reenter brake hydraulic system through master cylinder.
14. Bleed opposite rear brake wheel circuits as necessary in the same manner until all air is removed from the
brake hydraulic system, then proceed to the front brakes.
FRONT BRAKES
1. If installed, remove rubber dust cap from bleeder
screw on each front brake caliper.
(1) to the bleeder screw at one wheel and feed the
other end of the hose into a clear jar (2) containing
fresh brake fluid.
four times and hold it down before the bleeder
screw is opened.
is restricted causing a slow, weak fluid discharge. This will NOT get all the air out. Therefore, it is essential
to open the bleeder screw at least one full turn to allow a fast, large volume discharge of brake fluid.
4. While the pedal is being held down, open the bleeder screw at least one full turn. When the bleeder screw opens
the brake pedal will drop all the way to the floor. Continue to hold the pedal all the way down.
BRAKES - BASE
LX
5 - 13
6. Repeat steps One through Five until all trapped air is removed from that wheel circuit (usually four or five times).
sure to monitor brake fluid level in master cylinder fluid reservoir making sure it stays at a proper level. This will
ensure air does not reenter brake hydraulic system through master cylinder.
7. Install bleeder screw dust cap.
8. Bleed opposite front brake wheel circuit as necessary in the same manner until all air is removed from the brake
hydraulic system.
2. If equipped with antilock brakes, the hydraulic control unit may need to be bled, then rebleed base brakes. (Refer
3. Once all brakes are bled, check brake pedal travel. If pedal travel is excessive or has not improved, some air
may still be trapped in the hydraulic system. Rebleed the brake system as necessary.
SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE FASTENER TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
ABS ICU Mounting Bolts To Bracket
11
97
ABS ABM-To-HCU Mounting Screws
17
ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Head Mounting Screw - Front
11
97
ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Head Mounting Screw - Rear
11
97
Adjustable Pedal Position Sensor Mounting Screws
7.5
5.5
66
Brake Pedal Mounting Nuts
25
18
221
Brake Tube Nuts
20
15
177
Brake Hose-to-Front knuckle Bracket Screw
11
97
Brake Hose Caliper Banjo Bolt
50
37
Brake Hose Caliper Banjo Bolt - SRT8
33
24
__
Disc Brake Caliper Adapter Mounting Bolts - Front
95
70
Disc Brake Caliper Adapter Mounting Bolts - Rear
115
85
Disc Brake Caliper Guide Pin Bolts - Front
60
44
Disc Brake Caliper Guide Pin Bolts - Rear
31
23
275
Disc Brake Caliper Mounting Bolts - Front - SRT8
190
140
Disc Brake Caliper Mounting Bolts - Rear - SRT8
130
96
Disc Brake Caliper Bleeder Screw
11
97
Master Cylinder Mounting Nuts - MK25
25
18
221
Master Cylinder Mounting Nuts - MK25E
15
11
133
Power Brake Booster Mounting Nuts
25
18
221
Parking Brake Cable Knuckle Mounting Screw
71
Parking Brake Lever (Pedal) Mounting Bolt And Nuts
26
19
230
Wheel Mounting (Lug) Nuts
150
110
5 - 14
BRAKES - BASE
LX
SPECIAL TOOLS
BASE BRAKE SYSTEM
Adapter, Master Cylinder Pressure Bleed Cap 6921
Installer, Dust Boot 9315
Adapters, Master Cylinder 9748

Tubes, Master Cylinder Bleed 8358
Adapters, Master Cylinder 8822
Installer, Dust Boot 9314
Dial Indicator C-3339A
Handle, Universal C4171
LX
SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
DESCRIPTION
The adjustable pedals switch is located on the left
side trim of the drivers seat cushion. Fore and Aft
movement of the paddle-type switch allows front-torear travel of the adjustable pedals, up to approximately 76 mm (3 inches) total movement. Pushing the
paddle forward moves the peddles away from the
driver and vice-versa. Movement stops when the
switch is released.
The switch actuates the electric motor-driven adjustable pedals mechanism through the memory seat
module (MSM). MSM logic prevents pedal adjustment
while the speed control is set and when the transmission is in Reverse.
REMOVAL
1. Move drivers seat to full-forward, full-upward position.
2. Disconnect battery negative cable from battery post and isolate.
3. Remove seat belt shield from drivers seat cushion left side trim.
4. Remove three screws fastening seat cushion side trim in place.
5. Lift side trim from seat and utilizing slack in seat belt, turn trim over.
6. Disconnect wiring connector (2) from adjustable
pedals switch (3).
7. Remove two mounting screws (1) and remove
switch (3).
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 15
5 - 16
BRAKES - BASE
INSTALLATION
1. Position switch (3) connector-side-down on the
inside of the drivers seat cushion side trim.
2. Install two screws (1) fastening switch in place.
3. Connect wiring connector (2) to adjustable pedals
switch (3).
4. Position side trim on drivers seat cushion left side
and install three screws fastening side trim in
place.
5. Install seat belt shield on drivers seat cushion left
side trim.
6. Connect negative battery cable to battery post.
7. Check operation of adjustable pedals.
8. If vehicle is equipped with memory seats, the system will need to be initialized. Refer to appropriate
diagnostic information.
LX
LX
SENSOR - BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

REMOVAL
The brake fluid level sensor (2) is an integral part of
the master cylinder fluid reservoir (1). (Refer to 5 BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/FLUID RESERVOIR - REMOVAL)
INSTALLATION
The brake fluid level sensor (2) is an integral part of
the master cylinder fluid reservoir (1). (Refer to 5 BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/FLUID RESERVOIR - INSTALLATION)
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 17
5 - 18
BRAKES - BASE
LX
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL
DESCRIPTION
DISC BRAKES
Four-wheel disc brakes are standard on this vehicle. There are two four-wheel disc brake systems available, a standard and a premium. The standard disc brake system is referred to as Seventeen-Inch. The premium disc brake
system is referred to as Eighteen-Inch.
Seventeen-inch four-wheel disc brakes (so called
because they are designed to fit inside 17-inch
wheels) are standard on rear-wheel drive models with
V6 engines. They feature single-piston aluminum calipers (2) and vented rotors (1) in the front and singlepiston aluminum calipers (4) with solid rotors (3) in the
rear.
Eighteen-inch four-wheel disc brakes (so called

because they are designed to fit inside 18-inch
wheels) are standard on Chrysler 300 Hemi C and all
international models, and optional on other models.
They feature twin-piston aluminum calipers (1) and
vented rotors (2) in the front and single-piston aluminum calipers (4) with vented rotors (3) in the rear.
Although the rear calipers appear the same as the
17-inch system, the rear calipers used with this system feature a wider jaw to compensate for the wider,
vented brake rotors used.
Although the twin-piston caliper used is the same,
Rear-Wheel-Drive (RWD) models mount the caliper to
the rear (trailing end) of the knuckle while All-WheelDrive (AWD) models mount the caliper to the front
(leading end) of the knuckle.
Vehicles equipped with the Police Package have heavy-duty brakes. Special brake linings are used front and rear.
The front brake calipers and rotors are the same as the premium Eighteen-inch brakes, but the rear brakes are
somewhat different. The rear brake caliper is similar, using the same diameter piston and seals, but is larger to
accommodate a larger brake rotor. The rear brake rotor is a thicker (4 mm thicker than premium), larger diameter
(350 mm) vented unit. The hat section of the rotor remains the same as premium to allow use of the standard
parking brake system. The rear brake caliper adapter (anchor) is different to allow for the larger brake rotor. All
components are serviced the same as premium brakes.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 19
All calipers are aluminum construction and are the low-drag type. New-technology caliper construction allows minimal drag of the pads on the discs with low clearance to the rotors to maintain maximum pedal feel and responsiveness.
All calipers are anodized, giving them an off-black appearance. This coating offers corrosion protection and a longterm neat appearance.
Phenolic pistons are used in all calipers. The premium twin caliper pistons have stainless steel caps for protection
against damage due to contact with the brake pads.
All brake rotors are fully coated with Geomet, a water-soluble, environmental friendly corrosion preventive. Both
the friction surfaces and the vents are coated. During initial brake applications of a new rotor, the brake pads scrub
the coating off the friction surfaces, ensuring that the remainder will be rust free. Coating the vents also ensures that
there will not be a loss of heat capacity over time.
DISC BRAKES - SRT8

SRT8 models utilize four-wheel disc brakes. All brake
calipers (2) are four-piston opposed fixed design manufactured by Brembo. While identical in all other ways,
Chrysler SRT8 calipers are silver in color while Dodge
SRT8 calipers are red.
All brake rotors (3) are the internal vented type. There
are no dust shields behind the front brake rotors.
Each front brake caliper features four 42 mm pistons, two in each outer half of the caliper. The two outer halves of
this caliper connect hydraulically using internal passageways. These calipers are not serviceable. Do not attempt
disassembly.
Each rear brake caliper features four pistons also, two in each half of the caliper. Each half has one 28 mm and one
32 mm piston. When mounted, the smaller size (28 mm) piston is located at the top while the larger size (32 mm)
piston is located at the bottom. The two halves of the caliper are connected hydraulically by means of an external
brake tube located on the bottom of the caliper assembly. Each caliper half has its own bleeder screw at the top
and must be bled individually when bleeding is required. These calipers are not serviceable. Do not attempt disassembly.
All SRT8 calipers mount directly to the knuckle. They do not use brake caliper adapters.
The SRT8 rear brake rotors have integrated parking brake drums like the standard rear disc brake system.
5 - 20
BRAKES - BASE
LX
PADS - FRONT BRAKE

REMOVAL
NOTE: Before proceeding, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - WARNING) (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - CAUTION).
NOTE: Perform steps 2 through 6 on each side of the vehicle.
wheel assembly (1).
provide sufficient clearance between shoes and rotor to easily remove caliper from knuckle. This can usually be accomplished before guide pin bolts are removed by grasping rear of caliper and pulling outward
3. Remove Lower caliper guide pin bolt. To do so,
hold the guide pin (3) stationary while turning bolt
(1).
BRAKES - BASE
LX
5 - 21
4. Rotate caliper upward (1), exposing brake pads (2

and 5). Use care not to overextend brake hose
when doing this or damage may occur.
5. Remove inboard (2) and outboard (5) brake pads
from caliper adapter (4).
6. If necessary, remove anti-rattle clips (3) from upper
and lower abutments of adapter (4).
CLEANING
occupational Safety And Health Administration (OSHA) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for
INSPECTION
Visually inspect brake pads for uneven lining wear. Also inspect for excessive lining deterioration. Check the clearance between the tips of the wear indicators (if equipped) on the pads and the brake rotors.
If a visual inspection does not adequately determine the condition of the lining, remove the disc brake pads from the
calipers and perform a physical check.
NOTE: It is important to inspect both front and rear brake pads during the same inspection. Typically, front
and rear brake pads wear out at the same time.
When servicing, replace both disc brake pads (inboard and outboard) for each caliper. It is necessary to replace the
pads on the opposite side of the vehicle as well as the pads failing inspection.
If the brake pads do not require replacement, be sure to reinstall the brake pads in the original position they were
removed from.
INSTALLATION
1. Completely retract caliper piston(s) back into bore(s) of caliper. To do so:
a. Remove fluid reservoir cap.
b. Use hand pressure or a C-clamp may be used to retract piston, first placing a wood block over piston(s)
before installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston(s).
c. Install fluid reservoir cap.
5 - 22
BRAKES - BASE
2. If removed, attach anti-rattle clips (3) to upper and

lower abutments of adapter (4).
3. Install NEW inboard (2) and outboard (5) brake
pads on caliper adapter (4). NEW Inboard and outboard pads are interchangeable.
4. Push caliper guide pins into caliper adapter to clear
caliper mounting bosses when installing.
5. Rotate caliper downward, aligning upper mounting
boss with lower guide pin.
6. Install Upper caliper guide pin bolt (1). While holding guide pin (3) stationary tighten bolt to 60 Nm

8. Lower vehicle.
9. Pump brake pedal several times to set pads to caliper and brake rotor.
LX
LX
10. Check and adjust brake fluid level in reservoir (1).
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/FLUID - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
CAUTION: When NEW brake pads have been
installed, keep in mind that braking effectiveness
might be somewhat reduced during the first brake
applications following installation.
11. Road test vehicle making several stops to wear off
any foreign material on brakes and to seat brake
shoes.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 23
5 - 24
BRAKES - BASE
LX
PADS - REAR BRAKE

REMOVAL
wheel assembly (1).
provide sufficient clearance between shoes and rotor to easily remove caliper from knuckle. This can usually be accomplished before guide pin bolts are removed by grasping rear of caliper and pulling outward
3. Remove Upper caliper guide pin bolt (1). To do so,
hold the guide pin (3) stationary while turning bolt.
BRAKES - BASE
LX
5 - 25
4. Rotate caliper downward (5), exposing brake pads

(2 and 3). Use care not to overextend brake
hose when doing this or damage may occur.
5. Remove inboard (2) and outboard (3) brake pads
from caliper adapter (4).
6. If necessary, remove anti-rattle clips (1) from upper
and lower abutments of adapter (4).
CLEANING
INSPECTION
removed from.
INSTALLATION
1. Completely retract caliper piston back into bore of caliper. To do so:
a. Remove fluid reservoir cap.
b. Use hand pressure or a C-clamp may be used to retract piston, first placing a wood block over piston before
installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
c. Install fluid reservoir cap.
5 - 26
BRAKES - BASE
2. If removed, attach anti-rattle clips (1) to upper and

lower abutments of adapter (4).
3. Install NEW inboard (2) and outboard (3) brake
pads on caliper adapter (4). NEW Inboard and outboard pads are interchangeable.
4. Push caliper guide pins into caliper adapter to clear
caliper mounting bosses when installing.
5. Rotate caliper upward, aligning upper mounting
boss with upper guide pin.
6. Install Upper caliper guide pin bolt (1). While holding guide pin (3) stationary tighten bolt to 31 Nm

8. Lower vehicle.
9. Pump brake pedal several times to set pads to caliper and brake rotor.
LX
LX
CAUTION: When NEW brake pads have been
shoes.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 27
5 - 28
BRAKES - BASE
LX
PADS - FRONT/REAR BRAKE - SRT8

STANDARD PROCEDURE
BRAKE PAD BURNISHING
CAUTION: After installing NEW brake pads, keep in mind that braking effectiveness might be somewhat
reduced during the first brake applications.
When NEW brake pads are installed on a vehicle, this procedure must be used to correctly burnish (seat) the brake
linings to the brake rotor discs.
1. Accelerate the vehicle to a steady speed of about 40 mph (65 km/h).
2. Using light brake pedal pressure, slow the vehicle from 40 mph to 0 mph in approximately 6 seconds.
3. Accelerate back up to 40 mph for approximately one minute to allow the brakes to cool down.
4. Repeat this procedure 15 to 20 times to correctly seat the brake lining material.
REMOVAL
NOTE: Review all Warnings and Cautions. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - WARNING)
NOTE: Perform Step 2 through Step 8 on each side of vehicle to complete pad set removal.
wheel assembly (1).
LX
3. Using hammer (4) and pin punch (3) on outboard
end, tap lower brake pad support pin (2) out of caliper (1).
4. Remove brake pad spring clip (2) out from under

the upper support pin (1) still in caliper.
5. Using pin punch (3) and hammer (4), remove

upper brake pad support pin (2) in same manner
used on lower support pin.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 29
5 - 30
BRAKES - BASE
LX
CAUTION: When pushing pistons back into caliper bores, if hand pressure is not sufficient, use only a trim
stick as shown or other suitable soft tool to do so. Never use a screwdriver or other metal pry bar due to
potential damage to braking surface of rotor or pads.
6. Using hand pressure, pull pads back to seat caliper
pistons into bores if possible. If not possible, perform the following to do this correctly without damaging the caliper, pistons, dust boots or brake rotor
disc.
a. Place trim stick (3) between inboard brake pad
and outer edge of rotor (1).
b. Using trim stick (3), apply pressure against the
inboard brake pad until both pistons are completely bottomed in bores of inboard caliper
half. Leave trim stick in place to hold pistons in
place.
c. Place second trim stick between outboard
brake pad and rotor, then repeat above step on
outboard pad and pistons.
7. Remove inboard brake pad (2) through opening in

caliper (1). Remove outboard brake pad in same
manner.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 31
8. Once brake pads are removed from caliper (1),

inspect all four caliper pistons (3) and dust boots
(2) for evidence of brake fluid leakage. Also inspect
dust boots on all caliper pistons for any cuts, tears
or heat cracks and brake pad supports (4) (if
equipped) for excess wear or damage. If caliper
fails inspection, it should be replaced.
CLEANING
INSPECTION
remove from.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Perform Step 1 through Step 10 on each side of vehicle to complete pad set installation before proceeding with Step 11.
1. Make sure all caliper pistons are fully seated (bottomed) in bores.
5 - 32
BRAKES - BASE
2. Slide NEW inboard (2) and outboard brake pads

into opening (1) in disc brake caliper. If installing
rear brake pads, make sure beveled end of
each pad lining is directed against the direction
the rotor is rotating in when vehicle is moving
forward, in other words, the rear pads need to
have beveled end facing upward.
3. From inboard side, slide upper brake pad support

pin (2) through caliper (3) and upper holes in both
brake pads (1). Ensure that small end of support
pin is in hole (4) in outboard half of caliper.
4. Install upper end of brake pad spring clip (2) under

upper brake pad support pin (1).
LX
LX
5. Press on lower end of spring clip (5) until it touches
brake rotor.
6. Slide lower brake pad support pin (2) through caliper (1) and lower holes in both brake pads (3) in
the same manner the upper pin was installed.
Ensure small end of support pin is in hole (4) in
outboard half of caliper.
7. Release the spring clip allowing it to engage lower
support pin.
8. From inboard side, seat upper and lower support

pins (4) into caliper (3) using pin punch (1) and
hammer (2). Support pins must be driven into caliper until support pin retaining rings are locked into
place.
9. Once support pins are fully installed into caliper,

inspect assembled caliper to make sure spring clip
(2) is centered in opening (1) of caliper, correctly
engaging upper and lower support pins, and is
resting against both brake pads (3).
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 33
5 - 34
BRAKES - BASE
LX

11. Lower vehicle.
12. Pump brake pedal several times to set pads to
caliper and brake rotor.

CAUTION: When NEW brake pads have been installed, keep in mind that braking effectiveness might be
somewhat reduced during the first brake applications following installation.
NOTE: When NEW brake pads are installed, they must be burnished (seated) to the rotor. This must be done
to ensure the proper performance of the replacement brake pads.
14. Road test vehicle making several stops to wear off any foreign material on brakes and to seat brake pad linings. NEW brake pads need to be burnished properly. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/
BRAKE PADS/SHOES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
LX
BRAKES - BASE
CALIPER - FRONT SINGLE PISTON DISC BRAKE

REMOVAL
from battery post.
2. Using a brake pedal holding tool, depress brake
pedal past its first inch of travel and hold it in this
position. Holding pedal in this position will isolate
master cylinder from hydraulic brake system and
will not allow brake fluid to drain out of brake fluid
reservoir while brake lines are open.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).
5 - 35
5 - 36
BRAKES - BASE
LX
5. Remove banjo bolt (6) connecting flexible brake

hose (1) to caliper (5). There are two sealing washers (7) (one one each side of hose fitting) that will
come off when bolt is removed. Discard these
washers; install NEW washers on installation.
6. While holding guide pins from turning, remove caliper guide pin bolts (2).
7. Remove brake caliper (1) from brake adapter (3)
and pads.
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Before disassembling brake caliper, clean and inspect it. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/DISC BRAKE CALIPER - CLEANING) (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/DISC
BRAKE CALIPER - INSPECTION)
WARNING: Under no condition should high pressure air ever be used to remove a piston from a caliper
bore. Personal injury could result from such a practice.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when clamping caliper in vise. Excessive vise pressure will cause
bore distortion.
1. Drain brake fluid from caliper.
LX
2. Mount caliper in a vise equipped with protective
jaws.
3. Place a wooden block (2) (padded with approximately one-inch thickness of shop towels) in front
of caliper (1) piston as shown. Padded block
should be sized to allow piston to push out of bore
far enough to be removed by hand after being
loosened by air pressure, yet large enough to keep
piston from coming completely out. This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal.
WARNING: Do not place face or hands near caliper
and piston if using compressed air pressure to
remove piston. Do not use high pressure.
4. Apply low pressure compressed air to caliper fluid
inlet in short spurts to ease piston out of bore.
5. Remove piston from caliper (1).
CAUTION: When working on disc brake caliper,
always use care and suitable tools to avoid damaging the aluminum housing.
6. Using a suitable tool (1), carefully remove dust
boot (2) and discard it.
CAUTION: Do not use a screw driver or other

metal tool for seal removal. Using such tools can
scratch bore or leave burrs on seal groove edges.
7. Using a soft tool such as a plastic trim stick (2),
work piston seal (1) out of its groove in caliper piston bore. Discard used seal.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 37
5 - 38
BRAKES - BASE
LX
8. Remove caliper bleeder screw (1) from caliper

housing (2).
9. Clean piston bore and drilled passage ways with
alcohol or a suitable solvent. Wipe it dry using only
a lint-free cloth.
10. Inspect both piston and bore for scoring or pitting.
NOTE: It is not recommended to hone caliper
bore.
The
anodized
coating
would
be
compromised.
CLEANING
To clean or flush the internal passages of the brake caliper, use fresh brake fluid or MoparT Non-Chlorinated Brake
Parts Cleaner. Never use gasoline, kerosene, alcohol, oil, transmission fluid or any fluid containing mineral oil to
clean the caliper. These fluids will damage rubber cups and seals.
INSPECTION
Inspect the disc brake caliper for the following:
Cracked or damaged housing
Brake fluid leaks in and around boot area
Ruptures, brittleness or damage to the piston dust boot
If caliper fails inspection, disassemble and recondition caliper, replacing the seals and dust boots or replace caliper.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage caliper seals. Ensure assembly area is clean and dry.
NOTE: Always use new, clean MoparT DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid or equivalent when assembling
brake caliper.
NOTE: Never use used or old piston seals or boots for reassembly.
LX
1. Lubricate caliper piston, piston seal (1) and piston
bore (2) with clean, fresh brake fluid.
2. Install NEW piston seal (1) in groove of caliper
bore (2). Seal should be started at one area of
groove and gently worked around and into the
groove using only your clean fingers to seat it.
3. Install NEW dust boot (1) on piston (2) and work

boot lip into groove at top of piston. Stretch boot
downward, straightening boot folds, then move
boot back upward as necessary until folds snap
uniformly into place.
4. Install piston (1) into caliper piston (2) bore, pressing piston down to bottom of bore using hand-pressure. Using a piece of wood or wooden hammer
handle may also suffice as long as piston and boot
damage can be avoided. The dust boot will not
seat at this time. Refer to following step.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 39
5 - 40
BRAKES - BASE
LX
5. Seat dust boot (3) in caliper counterbore using

Installer (2), Special Tool 9315, with Handle (1),
Special Tool C-4171. Install dust boot until it bottoms. Do not over-seat dust boot or damage will
occur.
6. Install bleeder screw in correct threaded hole. Caliper housing is not side-specific, so it is important
to install bleeder screw in threaded hole that will be
uppermost once caliper is installed on vehicle.
Tighten bleeder screw to 15 Nm (125 in. lbs.)
torque.
7. Install caliper on vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/DISC BRAKE CALIPER INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Always inspect brake pads before installing disc brake caliper and replace as necessary. (Refer
to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)
1. Completely retract caliper piston back into bore of caliper. Use hand pressure or a C-clamp may be used to
retract piston, first placing a wood block over piston before installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
CAUTION: Use care when installing caliper onto disc brake adapter to avoid damaging boots on caliper
guide pins.
2. Push caliper guide pins into caliper adapter to clear caliper mounting bosses when installing.
LX
3. Slide caliper over brake pads and onto caliper
adapter (3).
crossthread caliper guide pin bolts (2) when they
are installed.
4. Align caliper mounting holes with guide pins, then
install guide pin bolts (2). While holding guide pins
from turning, tighten bolts to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.)
torque.
5. Install banjo bolt (6) attaching brake hose (1) to

caliper (5). Install NEW washers (7) on each side
of hose fitting as banjo bolt is placed through fitting. Thread banjo bolt into caliper and tighten to

7. Lower vehicle.
8. Remove brake pedal holding tool.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 41
5 - 42
BRAKES - BASE

It is important that this is performed properly. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
10. Bleed (1) base brake hydraulic system as necessary. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
shoes.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
CALIPER - FRONT TWIN PISTON DISC BRAKE

REMOVAL
AWD
from battery post.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).
5 - 43
5 - 44
BRAKES - BASE

and pads.
RWD
LX
LX
from battery post.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).

BRAKES - BASE
5 - 45
5 - 46
BRAKES - BASE
LX
and pads.
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Before disassembling the brake caliper, clean and inspect it. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/DISC BRAKE CALIPER - CLEANING) (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/DISC
bore. Personal injury could result from such practice.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when
clamping caliper (2) in vise. Caliper housing is
made of aluminum. Excessive vise pressure will
cause bore distortion.
2. Mount caliper (2) in vise equipped with protective
jaws.
3. C-clamp (1) a block of wood (3) over one piston.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 47
4. Take another block of wood and pad it with oneinch thickness of shop towels. Padded block should
be sized to allow piston to push out of bore far
enough to be removed by hand after being loosened by air pressure, yet large enough to keep piston from coming completely out.
5. Place the padded block of wood (1) in outboard
shoe side of caliper (2) in front of exposed piston
(3). This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal.
and piston if using compressed air to remove piston. Do not use high pressure.
WARNING: Never attempt to catch piston as it
leaves bore. This could result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not blow piston out of bore with sustained air pressure. This could result in a cracked piston.
Use only short spurts of air.
6. Apply short spurts of low pressure air with a rubber tipped blow gun through caliper brake hose port. Use only
enough air pressure to ease piston out of bore.
8. Remove C-clamp and block of wood.
9. C-clamp (1) the block of wood (3) over dust boot of
first piston removed. This will seal empty piston
bore.
5 - 48
BRAKES - BASE
10. Move padded piece of wood (1) in front of piston

(2) yet to be removed.
11. Remove second piston using same procedure with
short spurts of low pressure air.
12. Remove C-clamp and block of wood from caliper.
13. Remove piston dust boots (1) (over each bore)

with an appropriate pry tool (2). Use care not to
damage aluminum housing.
CAUTION: Use an appropriate tool (1) to remove

piston seals (2) to avoid scratching piston bore.
Do not use a screwdriver or other metal tool to
remove seals.
remove piston seals (2) from caliper bores.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 49

housing (1).
alcohol or a suitable solvent. Wipe it dry using
only a lint-free cloth.
bore.
The
anodized
coating
would
be
compromised.
CLEANING
INSPECTION
ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Always use new, clean MoparT DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid when assembling brake caliper.
NOTE: Never use old or used piston seals or boots for assembly.
5 - 50
BRAKES - BASE
1. Lubricate caliper pistons, piston seals (1) and piston bores (2) with clean, fresh brake fluid.
2. Install NEW piston seal (1) into groove of each caliper piston bore (2).
NOTE: Make sure seal is fully seated and not
twisted in groove.
3. Install NEW boot (1) on each piston (2) and work

rearward straightening boot folds, then move boot
forward as necessary until folds snap uniformly into
place.
4. Install each piston (1), one at a time, into its caliper

piston (2) bore, pressing piston down to bottom of
bore using hand-pressure. Using a piece of wood
or wooden hammer handle may also suffice as
long as piston and boot damage is avoided.
LX
LX
CAUTION: When seating dust boots in following
step, use care not to over-install boots or damage
will occur. Each boot (2) will bottom in the counterbore before the top of the boot reaches the surface of the caliper. The boot will bottom with
approximately 2 mm (1/16 inch) (3) of boot still
showing above caliper housing.
5. Seat dust boots (3) in caliper counterbores using

Installer (2), Special Tool 9315, with Handle (1),
Special Tool C-4171. Install each dust boot until it
bottoms. Do not over-seat dust boot or damage will
occur.
6. Install caliper bleeder screw (2) in caliper housing

(1). Tighten bleeder screw to 15 Nm (125 in. lbs.)
torque.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 51
5 - 52
BRAKES - BASE
LX
INSTALLATION
AWD
1. Completely retract caliper pistons back into bores of caliper. Use hand pressure or a C-clamp may also be used
to retract pistons, first placing a wood block over piston before installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
guide pins.
3. Slide caliper (3) over brake pads and onto caliper
adapter (2).
are installed.
torque.

LX
7. Lower vehicle.

shoes.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 53
5 - 54
BRAKES - BASE
LX
RWD
to retract pistons, first placing a wood block over piston before installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
guide pins.
adapter (3).
are installed.
torque.

LX
7. Lower vehicle.

shoes.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 55
5 - 56
BRAKES - BASE
CALIPER - FRONT DISC BRAKE - SRT8

REMOVAL
from battery post.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 57

hose (5) to caliper (1). There are two sealing washers (2, 3) (one one each side of hose fitting) that
will come off when bolt is removed. Discard these
washers; use NEW washers upon installation.
half.
5 - 58
BRAKES - BASE
LX
8. Remove caliper mounting bolts (1).

(3) and brake rotor (3).
10. If brake pads need to be removed from caliper,
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - REMOVAL).
NOTE: These calipers are not serviceable. Do not attempt disassembly.
INSTALLATION
to retract pistons, first placing a wood block or used brake pad (not to be reused) over pistons before installing
C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
2. If brake pads need to be installed in caliper before installation, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSTALLATION).
3. Slide caliper with pads (2) over brake rotor (3) and
align with knuckle (8).
LX
caliper (1). Install NEW washers (2, 3) on each
side of hose fitting as banjo bolt is placed through
banjo fitting. Thread banjo bolt into caliper and
tighten to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) torque.

7. Lower vehicle.

BRAKES - BASE
5 - 59
5 - 60
BRAKES - BASE
CAUTION: If NEW brake pads have been installed,
keep in mind that braking effectiveness might be
somewhat reduced during the first brake applications.
pads. If NEW brake pads are installed, they need
to be properly burnished. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE
PADS/
SHOES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
CALIPER - REAR DISC BRAKE

REMOVAL
from battery post.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).
5 - 61
5 - 62
BRAKES - BASE
LX

and pads.
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Before disassembling brake caliper, clean and inspect it. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/DISC BRAKE CALIPER - CLEANING) (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/DISC
bore. Personal injury could result from such a practice.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when clamping caliper in vise. Excessive vise pressure will cause
bore distortion.
LX
2. Mount caliper in a vise equipped with protective
jaws.
3. Place a wooden block (2) (padded with approximately one-inch thickness of shop towels) in front
of caliper (1) piston as shown. Padded block
should be sized to allow piston to push out of bore
far enough to be removed by hand after being
loosened by air pressure, yet large enough to keep
piston from coming completely out. This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal.
and piston if using compressed air pressure to
remove piston. Do not use high pressure.
4. Apply low pressure compressed air to caliper fluid
inlet in short spurts to ease piston out of bore.
CAUTION: When working on disc brake caliper,
always use care and suitable tools to avoid damaging the aluminum housing.
6. Using a suitable tool (1), carefully remove dust
boot (2) and discard it.
CAUTION: Do not use a screw driver or other

metal tool for seal removal. Using such tools can
scratch bore or leave burrs on seal groove edges.
work piston seal (1) out of its groove in caliper piston bore. Discard used seal.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 63
5 - 64
BRAKES - BASE
LX

housing (2).
alcohol or a suitable solvent. Wipe it dry using only
a lint-free cloth.
bore.
The
anodized
coating
would
be
compromised.
CLEANING
INSPECTION
ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Always use new, clean MoparT DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid or equivalent when assembling
brake caliper.
NOTE: Never use used or old piston seals or boots for reassembly.
LX
1. Lubricate caliper piston, piston seal (1) and piston
bore (2) with clean, fresh brake fluid.
2. Install NEW piston seal (1) in groove of caliper
bore (2). Seal should be started at one area of
groove and gently worked around and into the
groove using only your clean fingers to seat it.
3. Install NEW dust boot (1) on piston (2) and work

downward, straightening boot folds, then move
boot back upward as necessary until folds snap
uniformly into place.
4. Install piston (1) into caliper piston (2) bore, pressing piston down to bottom of bore using hand-pressure. Using a piece of wood or wooden hammer
handle may also suffice as long as piston and boot
damage can be avoided.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 65
5 - 66
BRAKES - BASE
CAUTION: When installing dust boot in following

step, use care not to over-install boot or damage
will occur. The boot (3) will bottom in the counterbore before the top of the boot reaches the surface of the caliper. The boot will bottom with
approximately 2 mm (1/16 inch) (2) of boot still
showing above caliper housing.
5. Seat dust boot (3) in caliper counterbore using

Installer, Special Tool 9314, with Handle, Special
Tool C-4171. Install dust boot until it bottoms. Do
not over-seat dust boot or damage will occur.
6. Install bleeder screw in correct threaded hole. Caliper housing is not side-specific, so it is important
to install bleeder screw in threaded hole that will be
uppermost once caliper is installed on vehicle.
Tighten bleeder screw to 15 Nm (125 in. lbs.)
torque.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 67
INSTALLATION
1. Completely retract caliper piston back into bore of caliper. Use hand pressure or a C-clamp may be used to
retract piston, first placing a wood block over piston before installing C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
guide pins.
adapter (3).
are installed.
torque.

5 - 68
BRAKES - BASE

7. Lower vehicle.

shoes.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
CALIPER - REAR DISC BRAKE - SRT8

REMOVAL
from battery post.
PROCEDURE)

wheel assembly (1).
5 - 69
5 - 70
BRAKES - BASE
LX

hose (5) to caliper (4). There are two sealing washers (2, 3) (one one each side of hose fitting) that
will come off when bolt is removed. Discard these
half.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 71


bolts (1).
and brake rotor.
11. If brake pads need to be removed from caliper,
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - REMOVAL).
NOTE: These calipers are not serviceable. Do not attempt disassembly.
INSTALLATION
to retract pistons, first placing a wood block or used brake pad (not to be reused) over piston before installing
C-clamp to avoid damaging piston.
2. If brake pads need to be installed in caliper before installation, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSTALLATION).
5 - 72
BRAKES - BASE

align with knuckle.

caliper (4). Install NEW washers (2, 3) on each
side of hose fitting as banjo bolt is placed through
banjo fitting. Thread banjo bolt into caliper and
tighten to 33 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) torque.

8. Lower vehicle.
LX
LX
CAUTION: If NEW brake pads have been installed,
keep in mind that braking effectiveness might be
somewhat reduced during the first brake applications.
12. Road test vehicle making several stops to wear
brake pads. If NEW brake pads are installed, they
need to be properly burnished. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE
PADS/SHOES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 73
5 - 74
BRAKES - BASE
LX
FLUID
BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION
Indications of fluid contamination are swollen or deteriorated rubber parts.
Swollen rubber parts indicate the presence of petroleum in the brake fluid.
To test for contamination, put a small amount of drained brake fluid in clear glass jar. If fluid separates into layers,
there is mineral oil or other fluid contamination of the brake fluid.
If brake fluid is contaminated, drain and thoroughly flush system. Replace master cylinder, proportioning valve, caliper seals, wheel cylinder seals, Antilock Brake hydraulic unit and all hydraulic fluid hoses.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL CHECKING
Check master cylinder reservoir fluid level a minimum
of twice annually.
Fluid reservoirs (1) are marked with the words MAX
and MIN to indicate proper brake fluid fill level of the
master cylinder.
If necessary, add brake fluid to bring the level to the
bottom of the MAX mark on the side of the master cylinder fluid reservoir (1).
Use only MoparT brake fluid or equivalent from a
sealed container. Brake fluid must conform to DOT 3
specifications (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/FLUID - SPECIFICATIONS).
DO NOT use brake fluid with a lower boiling point, as brake failure could result during prolonged hard braking.
Use only brake fluid that was stored in a tightly-sealed container.
DO NOT use petroleum-based fluid because seal damage will result. Petroleum based fluids would be items such
as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid etc.
SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE FLUID
The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type
of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only MoparT Brake Fluid or
equivalent from a tightly sealed container.
CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from an container which has been left open. An open
container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid.
CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type
fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake
system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid,
etc.
LX
RESERVOIR - MASTER CYLINDER FLUID

REMOVAL
1. Remove access panel (1) in cowl area to expose
master cylinder (2).
2. Thoroughly clean all surfaces of brake fluid reservoir and master cylinder. Use only MoparT Brake
Parts Cleaner or equivalent.
3. Disconnect wiring harness connector (4) from

brake fluid level sensor (2) in master cylinder brake
fluid reservoir (1).
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 75
5 - 76
BRAKES - BASE
4. Remove brake fluid reservoir cap (1). Using a

clean syringe or equivalent type tool, empty as
much brake fluid as possible from the reservoir.
CAUTION: When removing fluid reservoir from the
master cylinder, do not pry off using any type of
tool. This can damage the fluid reservoir or master
cylinder housing.
5. Remove screw (3) fastening fluid reservoir to master cylinder housing.
6. Rock the brake fluid reservoir side-to-side while
pulling up to remove it from seal grommets in master cylinder housing.
7. Remove two brake fluid reservoir seal grommets

(2) from master cylinder housing (1).
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Install NEW brake fluid reservoir sealing grommets
(2) in master cylinder housing (1).
2. Lubricate reservoir mounting area with fresh clean

brake fluid. Place reservoir in position over sealing
grommets. Seat reservoir into sealing grommets
using a rocking motion while firmly pressing down
on fluid reservoir. Once installed, make sure fluid
reservoir is touching the top of both sealing grommets (2) or reservoir is not properly installed.
3. Install fluid reservoir mounting screw (3). Tighten
screw to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) torque.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 77
5 - 78
BRAKES - BASE
4. Connect wiring harness connector (4) to brake fluid

level sensor (2) mounted in brake fluid reservoir
(1).
5. Fill master cylinder fluid reservoir (1) with clean,

fresh MoparT Brake Fluid or equivalent.
6. Install access panel in cowl area.
WARNING: Be certain a firm brake pedal is
achieved prior to attempting vehicle operation. If a
firm brake pedal cannot be achieved, bleed entire
brake hydraulic system and check for leaks. (refer
to 5 - brakes - standard procedure)
7. Road test vehicle to ensure proper operation of
brakes.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 79
JUNCTION BLOCK
DESCRIPTION
A junction block is used on vehicles that are not equipped with antilock brakes (ABS) allowing use of the same
brake tubes on all applications. The junction block is located in the engine compartment, in front of the right wheel
well. The junction block mounts in the same location as the ABS integrated control unit (ICU) does on vehicles with
ABS.
It has six threaded ports to which the brake tubes connect. Two are for the brake tubes coming from the master
cylinder. The remaining four ports are for the brake tubes going to each wheel brake assembly.
The junction block contains a proportioning valve. The proportioning valve is not serviced separately from the junction block. For more information on the proportioning valve, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/
PROPORTIONING VALVE - DESCRIPTION)
OPERATION
The junction block distributes the brake fluid coming from the master cylinder primary and secondary ports to the
four brake tubes leading to the wheel brakes. Since the junction block mounts in the same location as the ABS
integrated control unit (ICU), it allows for the common use of brake tubes on the vehicle whether it is equipped with
or without ABS.
The junction block includes a rear brake proportioning valve. Placed in the fluid flow passages leading to the rear
brake tube ports, it balances front-to-rear braking. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - BASE/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/PROPORTIONING VALVE - OPERATION)
REMOVAL
from battery post.
5 - 80
BRAKES - BASE
3. Remove brake tubes (1, 2, 3 and 10) at junction

block (5).
4. Remove remaining brake tubes (1 and 3) at junction block (5).
5. Pull up on junction block (5) and remove from

mounting grommets (8).
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Install junction block (5), pushing mounting bracket
down into mounting grommets (8) located in body
of vehicle.
2. Install brake tubes to rear (1 and 3) at hydraulic

control unit. Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177 in.
lbs.) torque.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 81
5 - 82
BRAKES - BASE
3. Install brake tubes (1, 2, 3 and 10) at junction block

(5). Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177 in. lbs.)
torque.

6. Fill and bleed (1) base brake hydraulic system.

7. Road test vehicle to verify proper operation of
brakes.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 83
MASTER CYLINDER
DESCRIPTION
There are two different master cylinder designs used depending on whether the vehicle is an early build vehicle or
a later build vehicle. To simplify the differentiation between early and later brake systems, for this service information
they are referred to as the MK25 master cylinder and the MK25E master cylinder. This is because the master cylinders change when the availability of the antilock brake systems change. Early build vehicles use MK25 ABS and
later build vehicles use MK25E ABS. Be aware that these type master cylinders are also used on vehicles that are
not equipped with antilock brakes.
Although similar in function and appearance, the
MK25E master cylinder does not have a pressure
switch located on the bottom and it has larger outlet
ports with SAE flares. The primary port (1) is designed
for 5/16 inch (8 mm) tubing and the secondary port (2)
is designed for 1/4 inch (6.25 mm) tubing.
Both standard MK25 and MK25E master cylinders have 25.4 mm bores. Although appearing and serviced the same,
the master cylinder used on SRT8 and Police vehicles has a larger 27 mm bore. The SRT8 and Police Package
master cylinder can be identified by a green dot placed on the body of the master cylinder.
On SRT8 vehicles with the MK25 ABS system, the
brake pressure sensor (3) which normally mounts to
the bottom of the master cylinder is mounted to the
primary brake tube (3) near the master cylinder (1).
5 - 84
BRAKES - BASE
LX
STANDARD PROCEDURE
MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING - MK25
NOTE: Vehicles that are not equipped with ABS also use this master cylinder, but in an effort to simplify the
differentiation between early and late brake systems it is being referred to as the MK25 master cylinder.
CAUTION: When clamping master cylinder in vise, only clamp master cylinder by its mounting flange. Do
not clamp master cylinder piston rod, reservoir, seal or body.
1. Clamp master cylinder in a vise.
2. Attach special tools for bleeding master cylinder in
the following fashion:
a. Thread one Adapter (3), Special Tool 88222,
in each outlet port. Tighten Adapters to 14 Nm
b. Thread a Bleeder Tube (1), Special Tool
83581, into each Adapter. Tighten each tube
to 14 Nm (124 in. lbs.) torque. Flex each
bleeder tube and place open end into mouth of
fluid reservoir as far down as possible.
NOTE: Make sure open ends of bleeder tubes stay

below surface of brake fluid once reservoir is filled
to proper level.
3. Fill brake fluid reservoir (1) to the MAX level with
MoparT brake fluid or equivalent conforming to
DOT 3 specifications. Make sure fluid level is
above tips of bleeder tubes in reservoir to ensure
no air is ingested during bleeding.
BRAKES - BASE
LX
5 - 85
4. Using a wooden dowel as a pushrod (2), slowly

depress master cylinder pistons, then release pressure, allowing pistons to return to released position.
Repeat several times until all air bubbles are
expelled. Make sure fluid level stays above tips of
bleeder tubes in reservoir while bleeding.
5. Remove bleeder tubes (1) and adapters (3) from
master cylinder outlet ports, then plug outlet ports
and install fill cap on reservoir.
6. Remove master cylinder from vise.
7. Install master cylinder on vehicle. (Refer to 5 BRAKES - BASE/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/
MASTER CYLINDER - INSTALLATION)
MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING - MK25E

NOTE: Vehicles that are not equipped with ABS also use this master cylinder, but in an effort to simplify the
differentiation between early and late brake systems it is being referred to as the MK25E master cylinder.
CAUTION: When clamping master cylinder in vise, only clamp master cylinder by its mounting flange. Do
not clamp master cylinder piston rod, reservoir, seal or body.
1. Clamp master cylinder in a vise.
CAUTION: When installing Adapters in master cylinder, do not overtighten. Damage to master cylinder could occur.
NOTE: Adapters 9748-1 and 9748-2 are not interchangeable. To avoid mix-up of Adapters, 97481
is silver while 97482 is black.
2. Attach special tools for bleeding master cylinder in
following fashion:
a. Thread Adapter (3), Special Tool 97482, into
primary outlet port. Tighten Adapter to 14 Nm
(124 in. lbs.).
b. Thread Adapter (4), Special Tool 97481, into
secondary outlet port. Tighten Adapter to 14
Nm (124 in. lbs.).
c. Thread a Bleeder Tube (2), Special Tool
83581, into each Adapter. Tighten each tube
to 14 Nm (124 in. lbs.). Flex each bleeder tube and place open end into mouth of fluid reservoir as far down
as possible.
5 - 86
BRAKES - BASE
LX
NOTE: Make sure open ends of bleeder tubes stay

below surface of brake fluid once reservoir is filled
to proper level.
3. Fill brake fluid reservoir (1) to the MAX level with
MoparT brake fluid or equivalent conforming to
DOT 3 specifications. Make sure fluid level is
above tips of bleeder tubes in reservoir to ensure
no air is ingested during bleeding.
4. Using a wooden dowel as a pushrod (1), slowly

depress master cylinder pistons, then release pressure, allowing pistons to return to released position.
Repeat several times until all air bubbles are
expelled. Make sure fluid level stays above tips of
bleeder tubes in reservoir while bleeding.
5. Remove bleeder tubes (2) and adapters (3, 4) from
master cylinder outlet ports, then plug outlet ports
and install fill cap on reservoir.
6. Remove master cylinder from vise.
7. Install master cylinder on vehicle. (Refer to 5 BRAKES - BASE/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/
MASTER CYLINDER - INSTALLATION)
REMOVAL
MASTER CYLINDER
CAUTION: Vacuum in power brake booster must be pumped down (removed) before removing master cylinder from power brake booster. This is necessary to prevent power brake booster from sucking in any
contamination as master cylinder is removed. This can be done simply by pumping brake pedal, with vehicles engine not running, until a firm feeling brake pedal is achieved.
1. With engine not running, pump brake pedal until a firm pedal is achieved (4-5 strokes).
LX
from battery post.


BRAKES - BASE
5 - 87
5 - 88
BRAKES - BASE
NOTE: SRT8 vehicles with MK25 ABS are not

equipped with a master cylinder mounted pressure
switch for the Electronic Stability Program. The
switch is located in the primary brake tube.
6. If equipped with MK25 ABS and Electronic Stability
Program (non-SRT8), disconnect wiring harness (6)
connector from pressure switch (5).
7. Disconnect primary (3) and secondary (2) brake

tubes from master cylinder (4). Install sealing plugs
in open brake tube outlet ports.
CAUTION: Before removing master cylinder from

power brake vacuum booster, master cylinder and
vacuum booster must be thoroughly cleaned. This
must be done to prevent dirt particles from falling
into power brake vacuum booster. Use only
MoparT Brake Parts Cleaner or equivalent.
8. Remove two nuts (2) attaching master cylinder (3)
to power brake booster (1).
9. Slide master cylinder (3) straight out of power
brake booster (1).
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 89
CAUTION: Vacuum seal (1) on rear of master cylinder (2) is used to allow vacuum ability in power
brake vacuum booster. Vacuum seal MUST be
replaced whenever master cylinder is removed
from power brake vacuum booster.
10. Remove vacuum seal (1) located on mounting
flange of master cylinder (2). Vacuum seal is
removed by carefully pulling it off rear of master
cylinder. Do not attempt to pry seal off master
cylinder by inserting a sharp tool between seal
and master cylinder casting. Damage can
occur.
MASTER CYLINDER - RHD

from battery post.
5 - 90
BRAKES - BASE

master cylinder.
5. Remove purge solenoid (1) from mount (2) and

move it to side leaving hoses and wiring
connected.

LX
LX
7. Remove primary (3) and secondary (2) brake tubes
from master cylinder (4). Install sealing plugs in
open brake tube outlet ports.

brake booster (1).
CAUTION: Vacuum seal (1) on rear of master cylinder (2) is used to allow vacuum ability in power
brake vacuum booster. Vacuum seal MUST be
replaced whenever master cylinder is removed
from power brake vacuum booster.
10. Remove vacuum seal (1) located on mounting
flange of master cylinder (2). Vacuum seal is
removed by carefully pulling it off rear of master
cylinder. Do not attempt to pry seal off master
cylinder by inserting a sharp tool between seal
and master cylinder casting. Damage can
occur.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 91
5 - 92
BRAKES - BASE
DISASSEMBLY
1. Clean master cylinder housing and brake fluid reservoir. Use only MoparT Brake Parts Cleaner or
equivalent.
2. If equipped, remove pressure switch on bottom of
3. Remove brake fluid reservoir cap (1). Using a

syringe or equivalent type tool, empty as much
brake fluid as possible from the reservoir.
CAUTION: When removing fluid reservoir from the
master cylinder, do not pry off using any type of
tool. This can damage the fluid reservoir or master
cylinder housing.
4. Remove screw (3) fastening fluid reservoir to master cylinder housing.
5. Rock the brake fluid reservoir side-to-side while
pulling up to remove it from seal grommets in master cylinder housing.
LX
LX
6. Remove two brake fluid reservoir seal grommets
(2) from master cylinder housing (1).
ASSEMBLY
1. Install NEW brake fluid reservoir sealing grommets
(2) in master cylinder housing (1).
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 93
5 - 94
BRAKES - BASE
LX
2. Lubricate reservoir mounting area with fresh clean

brake fluid. Place reservoir in position over sealing
grommets. Seat reservoir into sealing grommets
using a rocking motion while firmly pressing down
on fluid reservoir. Once installed, make sure fluid
reservoir is touching the top of both sealing grommets (2) or reservoir is not properly installed.
3. Install fluid reservoir mounting screw (3). Tighten
4. If equipped, install pressure switch (1) on bottom of

master cylinder. Tighten switch to 28 Nm (250 in.
lbs.) torque.
5. Thoroughly bleed master cylinder before installing it
on vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/
MECHANICAL/MASTER CYLINDER - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
6. Install master cylinder on power brake booster.
Upon installation, vacuum seal (2) on rear of master cylinder must be replaced. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/MASTER
CYLINDER - INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
MASTER CYLINDER
1. Thoroughly bleed master cylinder before installing it on vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/MASTER CYLINDER - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
LX
CAUTION: When replacing master cylinder on
vehicle, a NEW vacuum seal (2) MUST be installed
on master cylinder.
2. Install NEW vacuum seal (1) on rear of master cylinder (2) making sure seal fits squarely in mounting
groove.
3. Position master cylinder (3) on studs of power

brake booster, aligning booster push rod with master cylinder piston.
NOTE: In an effort to simplify the differentiation
between early and late brake systems the master
cylinders are being referred to MK25 or MK25E
master cylinders. Vehicles that are not equipped
with ABS use the same master cylinder as the
ABS system available at that build date.
4. Install two master cylinder mounting nuts (1).
Tighten mounting nuts as follows:
MK25 master cylinder Tighten mounting nuts to
25 Nm (221 in. lbs.).
MK25E master cylinder Tighten mounting nuts
to 15 Nm (133 in. lbs.).
5. Thread primary (3) and secondary (2) brake tubes

into master cylinder primary and secondary ports.
Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177 in. lbs.).
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 95
5 - 96
BRAKES - BASE
NOTE: SRT8 vehicles with MK25 ABS are not

equipped with a master cylinder mounted pressure
switch for the Electronic Stability Program. The
switch is located in the primary brake tube.
6. If equipped with MK25 ABS and Electronic Stability
Program (non-SRT8), connect wiring harness (6)
connector to pressure switch (5).

(1).

LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 97

brake hydraulic system and check for leaks. (Refer
brakes.
MASTER CYLINDER - RHD

1. Thoroughly bleed master cylinder before installing it on vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/MASTER CYLINDER - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
on master cylinder.
groove.
5 - 98
BRAKES - BASE

Tighten mounting nuts to 15 Nm (133 in. lbs.).


(1).
LX
LX
7. Install purge solenoid (1) on mount (2).


brake hydraulic system and check for leaks. (Refer
brakes.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 99
5 - 100
BRAKES - BASE
PEDAL
REMOVAL
PEDAL
from battery post.
2. Remove driver side silencer under instrument
panel. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/
INSTRUMENT PANEL SILENCER - INSTALLATION)
3. Remove steering column opening cover. (Refer to
23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING
COLUMN OPENING COVER - INSTALLATION)
4. Remove brake lamp switch. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING

EXTERIOR/BRAKE
LAMP SWITCH - REMOVAL)
5. Remove booster push rod from pin on brake pedal.
To do so:
a. Position small screwdriver between center tang
on power brake booster brake pedal pin retaining clip (3).
b. Rotate screwdriver enough to allow retaining
clip center tang to pass over end of brake
pedal pin, then slide retaining clip off brake
pedal pin.
c. Discard retaining clip (3). It is not to be
reused. Install NEW retaining clip when
assembling.
6. Slide booster push rod (5) off brake pedal pin (4).
LX
LX
7. Remove four power brake booster (3) mounting
nuts (1).
8. Remove two nuts (1) fastening pedal bracket to
upper dash panel (2).
9. Push power brake booster (3) forward into engine
compartment as far as possible by hand. Do not
force it.
10. Remove brake pedal (4).
PEDAL - RHD
1. Move drivers seat to full rearward position.
from battery post.
3. Remove driver side silencer under instrument
panel. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/
INSTRUMENT PANEL SILENCER - INSTALLATION)
4. Remove steering column opening cover. (Refer to
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 101
5 - 102
BRAKES - BASE
5. Remove stop lamp switch (2). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/BRAKE

CAUTION: When removing booster push rod from

brake pedal pin, be careful not to damage rubber
O-ring on pin.
To do so:
a. Position small screwdriver (1) between center
tang on power brake booster brake pedal pin
retaining clip (4).
pedal pin (3), then slide retaining clip off brake
pedal pin.
c. Discard retaining clip. It is not to be reused.
Install NEW retaining clip when assembling.
8. Remove two lower (2) and one upper mounting
screw fastening the radio amplifier/transmission
control module assembly (1) in place.
9. Disconnect four wiring connectors and remove
radio amplifier/transmission control module assembly (1).
LX
LX
10. Remove four power brake booster (2) mounting
nuts (5).
force it.
13. Remove brake pedal (1).
INSTALLATION
PEDAL
1. Install adjustable brake pedal assembly (4) under
instrument panel and slide over booster push rod.
2. From engine compartment side, push power brake
booster (3) mounting studs back through dash
panel (2) and brake pedal bracket.
3. Install two upper mounting nuts (1) fastening pedal
bracket to upper dash panel (2). Do not tighten at
this time.
4. Install four power brake booster mounting nuts (1).
Tighten nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) torque.
5. Tighten two upper mounting nuts (1) to 25 Nm (18
ft. lbs.) torque.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 103
5 - 104
BRAKES - BASE
LX
6. Slide booster push rod (5) onto brake pedal pin (4).
Install NEW retaining clip (3) securing push rod to
brake pedal.
7. Install and adjust brake lamp switch (2). (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/
BRAKE LAMP SWITCH - INSTALLATION)
8. Install steering column opening cover. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING COLUMN OPENING COVER - INSTALLATION)
9. Install driver side silencer under instrument panel. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL SILENCER - INSTALLATION)
11. Road test vehicle testing operation of brakes.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 105
PEDAL - RHD
1. Install brake pedal assembly (4) under instrument
panel and slide over booster push rod.
3. Install two upper mounting nuts (4) fastening pedal
bracket to dash panel (3). Do not tighten at this
time.
Tighten nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
ft. lbs.).
CAUTION: When installing booster push rod on brake pedal pin, be careful not to damage rubber O-ring on
pin.
6. Slide booster push rod onto brake pedal pin. Install NEW retaining clip securing push rod to brake pedal.
5 - 106
BRAKES - BASE
8. Connect four wiring connectors to radio amplifier/

transmission control module assembly (1).
9. Place radio amplifier/transmission control module
assembly (1) in mounted position. Install one upper
and two lower (2) mounting screws.
10. Install steering column opening cover. (Refer to
11. Install driver side silencer under instrument panel.
(Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT PANEL SILENCER - INSTALLATION)

13. Road test vehicle testing operation of brakes.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 107
PEDAL - ADJUSTABLE BRAKE

STANDARD PROCEDURE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SYCHRONIZATION
NOTE: Although the pedals can be synchronized at either the full-forward or full-rearward positions (both
pedals must be in the same position), it is recommended to do so with the pedals positioned in the fullforward position due to service part positioning from the factory.
1. Disconnect the adjuster cable (1) running between
the accelerator pedal module and the brake pedal
assembly at the adjuster motor (2).
2. Using the switch, position the accelerator pedal (2)

in the full-forward position. The pin on the pedal (1)
will line up with the adjustment line (2) at this point.
5 - 108
BRAKES - BASE
3. Using a drill motor, or other suitable device, rotate

the adjuster cable strand (2) from the accelerator
pedal end to position the brake pedal (1) toward
the full-forward position.
4. Rotate the adjuster cable strand until the brake

pedal (4) gear drive block (1) lines up with the fullforward adjustment line (3) as shown. If equipped,
fine adjustments can be made by turning the
adjustment knob (2) by hand to line up the components.
5. Reconnect the adjuster cable to the adjuster motor.
If the cable resists connection, if equipped, turn the
adjustment knob (2) by hand until the cable drops
into place. If not equipped with the adjustment
knob, wiggle the cable around until the cable drops
into place.
6. Verify proper operation of the adjustable pedals.
REMOVAL
LX
BRAKES - BASE
LX
from battery post.
3. Disconnect adjuster
adjuster motor (2).
cable
(1)
at
accelerator

EXTERIOR/BRAKE
To do so:
pedal pin.
assembling.
5 - 109
5 - 110
BRAKES - BASE
7. Disconnect wiring connector (2) at brake pedal

position sensor (3).
8. Remove four power brake booster mounting nuts

(4).
force it.
11. Remove adjustable brake pedal assembly (3).
12. Remove adjuster cable at brake pedal gear drive.
INSTALLATION
1. Attach cable to brake pedal gear drive.
LX
LX
2. Install adjustable brake pedal assembly (3) under
instrument panel and slide over booster push rod.
4. Install two nuts (5) fastening pedal bracket to upper
dash panel (2). Do not tighten at this time.
ft. lbs.) torque.
7. Connect wiring connector (2) at brake pedal position sensor (3).
brake pedal.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 111
5 - 112
BRAKES - BASE

11. Synchronize brake pedal to accelerator pedal,

then connect adjuster cable (1) to adjuster motor
(2). (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/PEDAL - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
12. If vehicle is equipped with memory seats, the system will need to be initialized. Refer to appropriate
13. Test operation of adjustable pedals.
14. Road test vehicle testing operation of brakes and
accelerator.
LX
LX
BOOSTER - POWER BRAKE

REMOVAL
BOOSTER
from battery post.
3. Remove windshield wiper module. (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER MODULE - REMOVAL)
4. Remove master cylinder. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL)
5. If equipped with MK25 and Electronic Stability Program (ESP), disconnect wiring harness (6) connector at pedal travel sensor (7) on power brake
booster (3).
6. If equipped with MK25 and ESP, disconnect wiring
harness (6) connector at active brake booster solenoid (4).
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 113
5 - 114
BRAKES - BASE
7. Disconnect vacuum hose (3) from check valve (2)

on face of booster (1). Do not remove check
valve from booster.

EXTERIOR/BRAKE
To do so:
pedal pin.
assembling.
(4).
12. Slide power brake booster forward out of dash
panel and remove through opening between
cross-brace and windshield.
LX
LX
BOOSTER - RHD
from battery post.
3. Remove windshield wiper module. (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER MODULE - REMOVAL)

BRAKES - BASE
5 - 115
5 - 116
BRAKES - BASE

from master cylinder (4). Install sealing plugs in
open brake tube outlet ports.

brake booster (1).
8. Disconnect vacuum hose (1) from check valve on

face of booster (2). Do not remove check valve
from booster.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
LX
5 - 117
9. Remove driver side silencer under instrument panel. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
10. Remove steering column opening cover. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING COLUMN
OPENING COVER - INSTALLATION)
11. Remove stop lamp switch (2). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/BRAKE
CAUTION: When removing booster push rod from

brake pedal pin, be careful not to damage rubber
O-ring on pin.
12. Remove booster push rod from pin on brake
pedal. To do so:
a. Position small screwdriver (1) between center
tang on power brake booster brake pedal pin
retaining clip (4).
pedal pin (3), then slide retaining clip off brake
pedal pin.
c. Discard retaining clip. It is not to be reused.
Install NEW retaining clip when assembling.
5 - 118
BRAKES - BASE

(5).
15. Slide power brake booster forward out of dash
panel and remove through opening between
cross-brace and windshield.
INSTALLATION
BOOSTER
NOTE: Before installing booster, make sure there
is a NEW booster seal (2) placed over push rod
and mounting studs on rear of booster (1).
LX
LX
1. Install power brake booster through opening
between cross-brace and windshield. Guide
booster (1) push rod and mounting studs through
dash panel (2).
NOTE: Be sure to tighten all four booster mounting nuts to specifications or a vacuum leak can
result.
brake pedal.
5. Connect vacuum hose (3) to check valve (2) on

face of booster (1). Do not remove check valve
from booster.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 119
5 - 120
BRAKES - BASE
6. If equipped with MK25 and Electronic Stability Program (ESP), connect wiring harness (6) connector
at pedal travel sensor (7) on power brake booster
(3).
7. If equipped with MK25 and ESP, connect wiring
harness (6) connector at active brake booster solenoid (4).
8. Install master cylinder (1). (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/MASTER CYLINDER INSTALLATION)
9. Install windshield wiper module and components
removed to access. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER
MODULE
INSTALLATION)

11. Fill and bleed brakes as necessary.
brakes.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 121
BOOSTER - RHD
NOTE: Before installing booster, make sure there
is a NEW booster seal (2) placed over push rod
and mounting studs on rear of booster (1).
1. Install power brake booster through opening

between cross-brace and windshield. Guide
booster (2) push rod and mounting studs through
dash panel (3).
NOTE: Be sure to evenly tighten all four booster
mounting nuts to specifications or a vacuum leak
can result.
Tighten nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
CAUTION: When installing booster push rod on brake pedal pin, be careful not to damage rubber O-ring on
pin.
3. Slide booster push rod onto brake pedal pin. Install NEW retaining clip securing push rod to brake pedal.
5 - 122
BRAKES - BASE
LX

5. Install steering column opening cover. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING COLUMN OPENING COVER - INSTALLATION)
7. Connect vacuum hose (1) to check valve on face
of booster (2). Do not remove check valve from
booster.
LX
on master cylinder.
groove.

Tighten mounting nuts to 15 Nm (133 in. lbs.).

BRAKES - BASE
5 - 123
5 - 124
BRAKES - BASE
LX
12. Connect wiring harness connector (4) to brake

fluid level sensor (2) mounted in brake fluid reservoir (1).
13. Install windshield wiper module and components removed to access. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/
WASHERS/WIPER MODULE - INSTALLATION)
15. Fill and bleed brakes as necessary.
brakes.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 125
VALVE - PROPORTIONING
DESCRIPTION
A proportioning valve is used on each vehicle without antilock brakes. One valve is used for both rear brake hydraulic circuits. The proportioning valve is located in the junction block (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - BASE/HYDRAULIC/
MECHANICAL/JUNCTION BLOCK - DESCRIPTION). The valve is not serviceable and must be replaced as part of
the junction block.
OPERATION
Proportioning valves balance front to rear braking by controlling (at a given ratio) brake hydraulic pressure to the
rear brakes above a preset level (split point). On light pedal applications equal brake pressure is transmitted to both
the front and rear brakes. On heavier pedal applications, through the use of proportioning valves, the pressure
transmitted to the rear will be lower than the front brakes. This prevents premature rear wheel skid.
5 - 126
BRAKES - BASE
LX
ROTOR
BRAKE ROTOR
Any servicing of the rotor requires extreme care to maintain the rotor within service tolerances to ensure proper
brake action.
Excessive runout or wobble in a rotor can increase pedal travel due to piston knock-back. This increases guide pin
sleeve wear due to the tendency of the caliper to follow the rotor wobble.
When diagnosing a brake noise or pulsation, the machined disc braking surface should be inspected.
BRAKING SURFACE INSPECTION

Light braking surface scoring and wear is acceptable. If heavy scoring or warping is evident, the rotor must be
refaced or replaced. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTORS - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Excessive wear and scoring of the rotor can cause improper lining contact on the rotors braking surface. If the
ridges on the rotor are not removed before new brake shoes are installed, improper wear of the shoes will result.
If a vehicle has not been driven for a period of time, the rotors braking surface will rust in the areas not covered by
the brake shoes at that time. Once the vehicle is driven, noise and chatter from the disc brakes can result when the
brakes are applied.
Some discoloration or wear of the rotor surface is normal and does not require resurfacing when linings are
replaced. If cracks or burned spots are evident, the rotor must be replaced.
ROTOR MINIMUM THICKNESS

Measure rotor thickness (1) at the center of the brake
shoe contact surface. Replace the rotor if it is worn
below minimum thickness or if machining the rotor will
cause its thickness to fall below specifications.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
CAUTION: Do not machine the rotor if it will cause the rotor to fall below minimum thickness.
Most minimum thickness specifications (1) are cast
into the rotors unmachined surface (2). Some brake
rotors have the minimum thickness specification
located elsewhere. Refer to the following paragraph.
Limits can also be found in this components specification table. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR - SPECIFICATIONS)
SRT8 vehicles have the minimum thickness specification stamped into the outer diameter edge (1) (along
vented end) of the disc.
ROTOR THICKNESS VARIATION

Thickness variation in a rotors braking surface can
result in pedal pulsation, chatter and surge. This can
also be caused by excessive runout in the rotor or the
hub.
Rotor thickness variation measurements should be
made in conjunction with measuring runout. Measure
thickness of the brake rotor (2) at 12 equal points
around the rotor braking surface with a micrometer (1)
at a radius approximately 25 mm (1 inch) from edge of
rotor. If thickness measurements vary beyond the
specification listed in the specification table (Refer to 5
BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR
SPECIFICATIONS), the rotor should be refaced or
replaced. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
5 - 127
5 - 128
BRAKES - BASE
LX
ROTOR RUNOUT
On-vehicle rotor runout is the combination of the individual runout of the hub face and the runout of the
brake rotor (hub runout can be measured separately).
To measure rotor runout on the vehicle:
2. Remove tire and wheel assembly. (Refer to 22 TIRES/WHEELS - REMOVAL)
3. Install standard wheel mounting nuts, flat side to
rotor, on all studs (2). Progressively tighten nuts to
4. Mount Dial Indicator (1), Special Tool C-3339A,
with Wheel, Special Tool 25w, or equivalent, to
knuckle. Position Dial Indicator Wheel to contact
rotor braking surface approximately ten millimeters
from outer edge of rotor (3).
5. Slowly rotate brake rotor checking lateral runout,
marking the low and high spots. Record these
measurements.
6. Check and record runout of opposite side of rotor in same fashion, marking the low and high spots.
7. Compare runout measurement to specifications. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR SPECIFICATIONS)
If runout is in excess of specifications, check the lateral runout of the hub face. Before removing the rotor
from the hub, place a chalk mark across both the rotor
(1) and the one wheel stud (2) closest to where the
high runout measurement was taken. This way, the
original mounting spot of the rotor on the hub is
indexed.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 129
8. Remove the rotor from the hub. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTORS - REMOVAL)

NOTE: Before measuring hub runout, clean the
hub face surface with an appropriate cleaner. This
provides a clean surface to get an accurate indicator reading.
9. Mount Dial Indicator (2), Special Tool C-3339A, to
the knuckle. Position Dial Indicator stem so it contacts hub face (1) near outer diameter. Care must
be taken to position stem outside of stud circle, but
inside of chamfer on the hub rim.
10. Slowly rotate hub measuring runout. Hub runout
should not exceed 0.01 mm (0.0004 inch). If
runout exceeds this specification, the hub must be
replaced. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/FRONT/
HUB / BEARING - REMOVAL) (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING - REMOVAL)
11. If hub runout does not exceed this specification,

install original rotor back on hub, aligning chalk
5 - 130
BRAKES - BASE
LX
mark on rotor (2) with a wheel mounting stud, two studs apart from original stud (1).
12. Install standard wheel mounting nuts, flat side to
rotor, on all studs (2). Progressively tighten nuts
13. Mount Dial Indicator (1) and remeasure runout on
both sides of the brake rotor as explained in earlier steps to see if runout is now within specifications. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/
MECHANICAL/ROTOR - SPECIFICATIONS)
14. If runout is still not within specifications, reface or
replace brake rotor. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTORS - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BRAKE ROTOR MACHINING
NOTE: Refacing the rotor is not required each time the brake pads are replaced, only when the need is
foreseen.
Any servicing of the rotor requires extreme care to maintain the rotor within service tolerances to ensure proper
brake action.
If the rotor surface is deeply scored or warped, or
there is a complaint of brake roughness or brake
pedal pulsation, the rotor should be refaced using a
hub-mounted on-car brake lathe (1), or replaced.
The use of a hub-mounted on-car brake lathe (1) is
highly recommended to eliminate the possibility of
excessive runout. It trues the brake rotor to the vehicles hub and bearing.
Minimum allowable thickness is the minimum thickness which the brake rotor machined surface may be cut to.
CAUTION: Do not machine the rotor if it will cause the rotor to fall below minimum thickness.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 131
NOTE: Most brake rotors (2) have markings for

minimum allowable thickness specification cast
into an unmachined surface of the rotor or
stamped into the hat section (1). Some brake
rotors have the minimum thickness specification
located elsewhere. Refer to the following paragraph. Minimum thickness specifications can also
be found in this components specification table.
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/
ROTOR - SPECIFICATIONS)
NOTE: SRT8 vehicles have the minimum thickness

specification stamped into the outer diameter edge
(1) (along vented end) of the disc.
Before lathe installation, verify the brake rotor face and the hub adapters are free of any chips, rust, or contamination.
When mounting and using the brake lathe, strict attention to the brake lathe manufacturers operating instructions is
required.
Machine both sides of the brake rotor at the same time. Cutting both sides at the same time minimizes the possibility of a tapered or uneven cut.
When refacing a rotor, the required TIR (Total Indicator Reading) and thickness variation limits MUST BE MAINTAINED. Extreme care in the operation of rotor turning equipment is required. Specifications for brake rotor machining can be found in this sections specification table. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ROTOR SPECIFICATIONS)
REMOVAL
FRONT
5 - 132
BRAKES - BASE
LX
2. Remove wheel mounting nuts(3), then tire and

wheel assembly (1).
provide sufficient clearance between shoes and rotor to easily remove caliper from knuckle. This can usually be accomplished before mounting bolts are removed, by grasping rear of caliper and pulling outward
3. AWD Remove two bolts (1) securing disc brake
caliper and adapter (2) to knuckle (3).
4. AWD Remove disc brake caliper and adapter (2)
from knuckle (3) as an assembly. Hang assembly
out of way using wire or a bungee cord. Use care
not to overextend brake hose when doing this.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 133
5. RWD Remove two bolts (2) securing disc brake

caliper and adapter (3) to knuckle (1).
6. RWD Remove disc brake caliper and adapter (3)
from knuckle (1) as an assembly. Hang assembly
out of way using wire or a bungee cord. Use care
not to overextend brake hose when doing this.

wheel studs.
REAR
5 - 134
BRAKES - BASE
LX

wheel assembly (1).
provide sufficient clearance between shoes and rotor to easily remove caliper from knuckle. This can usually be accomplished before guide pin bolts are removed, by grasping rear of caliper and pulling outward
adapter (3) to knuckle (2).
knuckle as an assembly. Hang assembly out of
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 135

FRONT - SRT8
wheel assembly (1).
5 - 136
BRAKES - BASE
LX

half.
5. Remove caliper mounting bolts (1).

(8) and brake rotor (3). Hang assembly out of way
using wire or a bungee cord. Use care not to overextend brake hose when doing this.
wheel studs.
REAR - SRT8
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 137

wheel assembly (1).
half.
5 - 138
BRAKES - BASE


bolts (1).
and brake rotor. Hang assembly out of way using
wire or a bungee cord. Use care not to overextend
brake hose when doing this.

LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 139
INSTALLATION
FRONT
NOTE: Inspect brake pads before installation. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE
PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)
where rotor mounts.
2. Install brake rotor (2) over studs on hub and
bearing.
3. AWD Install disc brake caliper and adapter

assembly (2) over brake rotor.
4. AWD Install mounting bolts (1) securing caliper
adapter (2) to knuckle (3). Tighten bolts to 95 Nm
5 - 140
BRAKES - BASE
5. RWD Install disc brake caliper and adapter

assembly (3) over brake rotor.
6. RWD Install mounting bolts (2) securing caliper
adapter (3) to knuckle (1). Tighten bolts to 95 Nm
8. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
CAUTION: If NEW brake rotors or pads have been
brake shoes.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 141
REAR
NOTE: Inspect disc brake pads and parking brake shoes before installation. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)
1. Clean hub face to remove any dirt or corrosion
where brake rotor mounts (1).
2. Install brake rotor (3) over wheel mounting studs
and onto hub (1).
3. Install disc brake caliper and adapter assembly (3)

over brake rotor.
(3) to knuckle (2). Tighten bolts to 115 Nm (85 ft.
lbs.) torque.
5 - 142
BRAKES - BASE
LX
6. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
brake shoes.
FRONT - SRT8
NOTE: Inspect brake pads before installation. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE
PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)
LX
where rotor mounts.
3. Slide caliper with pads (2) over brake rotor (3) and
align with knuckle (8).

6. Lower vehicle.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 143
5 - 144
BRAKES - BASE
LX

as necessary.
pads. If NEW brake pads are installed, they need
to be properly burnished. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/
HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES
- STANDARD PROCEDURE)
REAR - SRT8
NOTE: Inspect brake pads and parking brake shoes before installation. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/
MECHANICAL/BRAKE PADS/SHOES - INSPECTION)
where rotor mounts.
LX
align with knuckle.

7. Lower vehicle.

as necessary.
10. Road test vehicle making several stops to wear
brake pads. If NEW brake pads are installed, they
need to be properly burnished. (Refer to 5 BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/BRAKE
PADS/SHOES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 145
5 - 146
BRAKES - BASE
LX
SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE ROTOR
NOTE: When refacing a rotor, the required TIR (Total Indicator Reading) and thickness variation limits MUST
BE MAINTAINED. Extreme care in the operation of rotor turning (machining) equipment is required.
LIMITS/SPECIFICATIONS - 17 INCH BRAKES (BASE)
Brake Rotor
Rotor Thickness
Minimum Rotor
Thickness
Rotor
Thickness
Variation
Rotor Runout *
Front
27.87-28.13 mm
1.097-1.107 in.
26.5 mm
1.040 in.
0.010 mm
0.0004 in.
0.035 mm
0.0014 in.
Rear
9.87-10.13 mm
0.389-0.399 in.
8.5 mm
0.335 in.
0.010 mm
0.0004 in.
0.035 mm
0.0014 in.
* TIR Total Indicator Reading (Measured On Vehicle)

LIMITS/SPECIFICATIONS - 18 INCH BRAKES (PREMIUM)
Brake Rotor
Rotor Thickness
Minimum Rotor
Thickness
Rotor
Thickness
Variation
Rotor Runout *
Front
27.87-28.13 mm
1.097-1.107 in.
26.5 mm
1.040 in.
0.010 mm
0.0004 in.
0.035 mm
0.0014 in.
Rear
21.87-22.13 mm
0.861-0.871 in.
20.5 mm
0.807 in.
0.010 mm
0.0004 in.
0.035 mm
0.0014 in.

LIMITS/SPECIFICATIONS - SRT8 BRAKES
Brake Rotor
Rotor Thickness
Minimum Rotor
Thickness
Rotor
Thickness
Variation
Rotor Runout *
Front
31.90-32.10 mm
1.256-1.264 in.
30.00 mm
1.181 in.
0.040 mm
0.0016 in.
0.030 mm
0.0012 in.
Rear
27.90-28.10 mm
1.098-1.106 in.
26.00 mm
1.024 in.
0.040 mm
0.0016 in.
0.030 mm
0.0012 in.

LIMITS/SPECIFICATIONS - POLICE PACKAGE BRAKES
Brake Rotor
Rotor Thickness
Minimum Rotor
Thickness
Rotor
Thickness
Variation
Rotor Runout *
Front
27.87-28.13 mm
1.097-1.107 in.
26.5 mm
1.040 in.
0.010 mm
0.0004 in.
0.035 mm
0.0014 in.
Rear
25.87-26.13 mm
1.019-1.029 in.
24.5 mm
0.965 in.
0.008 mm
0.0003 in.
0.025 mm
0.0010 in.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 147
TUBES/HOSES
DESCRIPTION
The brake tubes are steel with a corrosion-resistant nylon coating applied to the external surfaces.
The flex hoses used at each wheel brake are made of reinforced rubber with fittings at each end. The fitting at each
brake caliper is the banjo-type and requires a special banjo bolt and copper washers.
INSPECTION
Brake tubing should be inspected periodically for evidence of physical damage or contact with moving or hot components.
Flexible rubber hose is used at both the front and rear wheel brakes. Inspection of the flexible brake hoses should
be performed whenever the brake system is serviced and every 7,500 miles or 12 months, whichever comes first.
Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If the fabric casing of the hose becomes
exposed due to cracks or abrasions in the hose cover, the hose should be replaced immediately. Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with possible burst failure. Faulty installation can cause twisting, resulting in
wheel, tire, or chassis interference.
5 - 148
BRAKES - BASE
LX
PARKING BRAKE
DESCRIPTION
This vehicle uses drum-in-hat style parking brakes at each rear wheel. The system is actuated using a foot-operated
mechanism and three parking brake cables.
The SRT8 uses the same parking brake system as other models. The rear parking brake cables (and the knuckle)
have been modified at the knuckle mounting bracket to clear the larger rear axle half shaft.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 149
CABLE - PARKING BRAKE FRONT

REMOVAL
2. Disconnect front parking brake cable (5) at connector (3) to right rear parking brake cable (4) above
axle differential (not shown).
3. Remove front cable (3) from equalizer (2).
5 - 150
BRAKES - BASE
4. Remove screw (2) fastening cable (1) routing

bracket to rear crossmember front flange (3).
5. Remove nuts (1), bolt (2) and push-pins (4), securing lower rear wheelhouse shield (3) to body of
vehicle. Remove lower rear wheelhouse shield.
6. Remove screw (6) and routing clip (4) nuts fastening cable (7) to underside of body (3).
LX
LX
7. Lower vehicle.
8. Remove driver door opening sill scuff plate and cowl side trim.
9. Remove clip and roll back carpet away from front cable.
10. Disconnect front parking brake cable strand (3) at
lever connector (2).
11. Place 13 mm 12-point box wrench (2) over cable

retainer (1) at lever bracket as shown to collapse
retainer fingers. Pull cable from bracket.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 151
5 - 152
BRAKES - BASE
12. Remove parking brake cable grommet (2) from floor pan (3).
13. Remove parking brake cable (7) through hole in floor pan.
INSTALLATION
1. Guide parking brake cable (7) down through hole in floor pan.
2. Install parking brake cable grommet (2) in hole of floor pan (3).
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
3. Guide cable end (3) up through lever bracket and

press cable housing retainer (7) into bracket allowing retainer fingers to lock cable in place.
4. Connect front parking brake cable strand (3) at
5. Lay carpet back into place and install retaining clip.
6. Install driver door opening sill scuff plate and cowl
side trim.
8. Install screw (6) and routing clip (4) nuts fastening cable (7) to underside of body (3).
5 - 153
5 - 154
BRAKES - BASE
9. Route cable above rear crossmember, then slide

cable end (1) (shown with connector) and housing
(3) through equalizer (2) above rear axle
differential.

10. Connect front parking brake cable (5) at connector (3) to right rear parking brake cable (4) (axle
differential not shown).
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
11. Install screw (2) fastening cable (1) routing

bracket to rear crossmember front flange (3).
12. Position lower rear wheelhouse shield (3) onto

body of vehicle. Install nuts (1), bolt (2) and pushpins (4) securing lower rear wheelhouse shield to
body. Tighten nuts and bolt securely.
13. Lower vehicle until rear wheels are just above floor level.
14. Apply parking brake lever. Release lever, then reapply.
15. Check to make sure rear wheels will not rotate with lever applied.
16. Release parking brake lever, then check to make sure rear wheels rotate without excessive drag.
17. Apply parking brake lever.
18. Lower vehicle.
5 - 155
5 - 156
BRAKES - BASE
LX
CABLE - PARKING BRAKE REAR

REMOVAL
2. Disconnect rear parking brake cable near front
cable as follows:
If removing left rear cable, disconnect cable (1)
at equalizer (2) above rear axle differential (not
shown) and rear crossmember (6).
If removing right rear cable, disconnect cable (4)
at connector (3) above rear axle differential (not
3. Remove parking brake shoes on side of cable service. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES REMOVAL)
4. Remove shoe actuator lever (1) from end of cable
(2) and support.
LX
5. Remove screw (4) fastening cable (2) to knuckle
(3). Remove cable from knuckle.
6. Remove cable (2) from routing guide (1).

strand and completely onto cable retainer (3) as
shown at crossmember bracket (1 - left)(2 - right).
It may be necessary to wiggle wrench around
somewhat to collapse retainer fingers. With wrench
in place, pull cable from bracket.
8. Remove parking brake cable from vehicle.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 157
5 - 158
BRAKES - BASE
INSTALLATION
1. Route leading end of rear parking brake cable (2)
up through cable guide (1) on crossmember.
2. Guide cable leading end through crossmember

bracket (1 - left)(2 - right) near equalizer and press
cable housing retainer into bracket allowing retainer
fingers to lock cable in place.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
LX
3. Insert opposite end of cable (2) through rear
knuckle (3) and install mounting screw (4). Tighten
4. Install shoe actuator lever (1) on end of

brake cable (2). Make sure actuator lever
tioned with word UP facing outward.
5. Install parking brake shoes as well as all
nents necessary to access them. (Refer
BRAKES/PARKING
BRAKE/SHOES
INSTALLATION)
parking
is posicompoto 5 -

it is not necessary to lock out parking brake lever
6. Connect rear parking brake cable at equalizer/front
cable as follows:
If installing left rear cable, connect cable (1) at
equalizer (2) above rear axle differential (not
If installing right rear cable, connect cable (4) at
connector (3) above rear axle differential (not
7. Lower vehicle until rear wheels are just above floor level.
8. Apply parking brake lever. Release lever, then reapply.
9. Check to make sure rear wheels will not rotate with lever applied.
5 - 159
5 - 160
BRAKES - BASE
LX
10. Release parking brake lever, then check to make sure rear wheels rotate without excessive drag.
11. Adjust parking brake shoes as necessary. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES - ADJUSTMENT)
12. Lower vehicle.
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 161
LEVER - PARKING BRAKE

REMOVAL
LEVER
2. Disconnect front parking brake cable (5) at connector (3) to right rear parking brake cable.
3. Lower vehicle.
5 - 162
BRAKES - BASE
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove fasteners (6) securing steering column opening cover (1) in place.
Disconnect wiring connector (3) at decklid release switch.
Disconnect parking brake release cable (4) at lever (5) and remove steering column opening cover (1).
Disconnect wiring connector (7) at parking brake
switch (1).

LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 163
10. Remove bolt (4) and two nuts (2) mounting parking brake lever (3) to body (5).
11. Remove parking brake lever (3).
LEVER - RHD
2. Disconnect front parking brake cable (5) at connector (2) to right rear parking brake cable.
3. Lower vehicle.
4. Remove driver side silencer under instrument panel. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
5. Remove steering column opening cover. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING COLUMN
6. Remove foot rest. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/FRONT FLOOR FOOT REST - REMOVAL)
7. Roll back carpet at center console to access lever mounting nuts.
5 - 164
BRAKES - BASE
8. Disconnect wiring connector at parking brake

switch on lever.

11. Loosen nut (5) mounting parking brake lever (7) to

body.
12. Remove nuts (8) mounting parking brake lever (7)
to body.
13. Remove parking brake lever (7).
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
LEVER
1. Install parking brake lever (3) over mounting studs
(1).
2. Install bolt (4) and two nuts (2) mounting parking
brake lever to body (5). Tighten bolt and nuts to 26
3. Connect wiring connector (7) at parking brake

switch (1).
4. Guide cable end (3) up through lever bracket and
press cable housing retainer (7) into bracket allowing retainer fingers to lock cable in place.
5. Connect front parking brake cable strand (3) at
6. If installing new lever, remove pin locking out automatic tensioning spring.
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 165
5 - 166
BRAKES - BASE
7. Connect parking brake release cable (4) at handle (5) in steering column opening cover (1).
8. Connect wiring connector (3) at decklid release switch.
9. Position steering column opening cover (1) and install fasteners (6) securing it in place.
11. Connect front parking brake cable (5) at connector
(3) to right rear parking brake cable (4).
floor level.
13. Apply parking brake lever. Release lever to test
release cable and handle. Reapply lever. While
doing this, check to make sure the red indicator
lamp in the cluster turns on and off properly.
with lever applied.
15. Release parking brake lever, then check to make
sure rear wheels rotate without excessive drag.
17. Lower vehicle.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 167
LEVER - RHD
1. Install parking brake lever (7) over mounting studs
(2, 3).
2. Install two nuts (8) mounting left side of parking
brake lever to body. Tighten nuts to 26 Nm (19 ft.
lbs.).
3. Tighten nut (5) left on stud (3) to 26 Nm (19 ft. lbs.).

4. Connect wiring connector at parking brake switch.
5. Guide front parking brake cable strand (3) up
through lever bracket and press cable housing
retainer (4) into bracket allowing retainer fingers to
lock cable in place.
6. Connect parking brake cable strand (3) at lever
connector (2).
7. If installing new lever, remove pin locking out automatic tensioning spring.
8. Reposition carpet back to original position at center console.

9. Install foot rest. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/FRONT FLOOR FOOT REST - INSTALLATION)
10. Install steering column opening cover. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING COLUMN
5 - 168
BRAKES - BASE

13. Connect front parking brake cable (5) at connector (2) to left rear parking brake cable (1).
floor level.
15. Apply parking brake lever. Release lever to test
release cable and handle. Reapply lever. While
doing this, check to make sure the red indicator
lamp in the cluster turns on and off properly.
with lever applied.
17. Release parking brake lever, then check to make
sure rear wheels rotate without excessive drag.
19. Lower vehicle.
LX
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 169
SHOE AND LINING - PARKING BRAKE

REMOVAL
NOTE: The following procedure may be used to remove shoes on either side of the vehicle.
2. Access and remove rear hub and bearing. (Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING - REMOVAL)
3. Completely back off parking brake shoe adjustment
(8).
4. Remove parking brake shoe adjuster spring (3).
5. Remove shoe adjuster (8).
6. Remove upper brake shoe hold-down clip and pin
(7).
7. Remove upper shoe (6) from return spring (4) and
shoe actuator lever (1).
8. Remove return spring (4) from lower shoe (6).
9. Remove shoe actuator lever (1) from end of cable

(2).
10. Remove lower brake shoe hold-down clip and pin

(7).
11. Remove lower shoe (6).
12. Inspect springs, adjuster, lever and aluminum
shoe anchor pin for wear or damage. Replace as
necessary.
5 - 170
BRAKES - BASE
LX
INSTALLATION
NOTE: The following procedure may be used to install shoes on either side of the vehicle.
NOTE: Inspect springs, adjuster, lever and aluminum shoe anchor pin for wear or damage prior to installation. Replace as necessary.
1. Install lower brake shoe hold-down pin (7) through
rear of support (2).
2. Install lower shoe (6) against support plate (2).
3. Install lower brake shoe hold-down clip (7).

5. Install return spring (4) to lower shoe (6).

6. Install upper shoe (6) against support plate and
onto shoe actuator lever.
7. Install upper brake shoe hold-down pin (7) through
rear of support and upper shoe.
8. Install upper brake shoe hold-down clip (7).
9. Attach return spring (4) to upper shoe (6).
10. Install shoe adjuster (8). Place end of adjuster
with star wheel upward.
11. Install parking brake shoe adjuster spring (3).
LX
BRAKES - BASE
5 - 171
12. Using Brake Shoe Gauge, Special Tool C-3919, or

equivalent, measure inside diameter of parking
brake drum portion of rotor. Set gauge.
13. Place Gauge (1) over parking brake shoes at widest point.
14. Using adjuster star wheel (2), adjust parking
brake shoes until linings on both park brake
shoes just touch jaws on gauge. This will give a
good preliminary adjustment of parking brake
shoes, before a final adjustment is made at end of
this procedure.
15. Install hub and bearing with wheel speed sensor
as well as all components necessary to access it.
(Refer to 2 - SUSPENSION/REAR/HUB / BEARING - INSTALLATION)
16. Lower vehicle.
17. Perform final adjustment of parking brake shoes.
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES/PARKING BRAKE/SHOES
- ADJUSTMENT)
ADJUSTMENTS
PARKING BRAKE SHOE ADJUSTMENT
1. Place parking brake lever in full released position.
3. Remove plug in parking brake shoe support to
access adjuster star-wheel (1).
NOTE: Through the access hole (2), rotate the
adjuster star wheel (1) in the following direction to
expand the shoes outward against the drum.
Left brake Rotate star-wheel toward rear of
vehicle.
Right brake Rotate star-wheel toward front of
vehicle.
4. Using an appropriate tool, turn adjuster star wheel
(1) until wheel will not rotate (dead lock).
5. Back off adjuster six detents (teeth).
6. Rotate wheel, checking for light drag. If drag is too
heavy, continue to back off adjuster one detent at a
time until light drag is present. Do not back off
star-wheel more than 17 detents from wheel lock.
5 - 172
BRAKES - BASE
7. Install access plug.

8. Adjust opposite wheel parking brake shoes using same method.
9. Lower vehicle.
10. Apply and release parking brake lever once to ensure proper operation of parking brakes.
LX
BRAKES - ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
LX
5 - 173

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

APS-INTERMITTENT CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . 176
B1D4F-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
B1D50-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
B1D51-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
B1D56ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
B1D57ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
B1D5BADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH
CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
B1D5CADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH
CIRCUIT STUCK FORWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
B1D5DADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH
CIRCUIT STUCK REARWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
B1D67ADJUSTABLE PEDAL CONTROL
CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
ABS INTERMITTENT CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . 208
C100ALEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
C1014-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED
COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . 219
C1015RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
C101C-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
C101F-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED
C1020LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
C1027-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . 241
C102A-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED
C102BRIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
C1032-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
C1035-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED
C1041-LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
C1042-RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL

PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
C1043-LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
C1044-RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
C1046LEFT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE
PHASE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
C1047-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE
C1048-LEFT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE
C1049-RIGHT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE
C1073-ABS PUMP MOTOR CONTROL
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
C1078TIRE REVOLUTIONS RANGE
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
C107CBRAKE PEDAL SWITCH 1/2 STUCK . . 282
C107D-BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH 1/2
CORRELATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
C1210G SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
C1219-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
ERRATIC PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
C121ASTEERING ANGLE SENSOR NOT
INITIALIZED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
C121CTORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL
DENIED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
C121E-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR
C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
C1232DRIVE TEST: PRESSURE SENSOR . . 303
C1234DRIVE TEST: SENSOR CLUSTER
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
C1238-DRIVE TEST: UNSUCCESSFUL . . . . . . 305
C1239EMISSIONS ROLLS TEST ACTIVE . . . 305
C123A-ESP SYSTEM SENSORS
CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
C123B-ESP SYSTEM CONTROL TOO LONG . 308
C123C-DYNAMICS SENSOR MOUNTING/
INSTALLATION PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 310
C123FSTEERING ANGLE SENSOR
C1240STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
OVERTRAVEL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
C1242G SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
5 - 174
C1243G SENSOR NOT INITIALIZED . . . . . . . . 320

C2100-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
C2101-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 323
C2111-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
C2112-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
C2114-DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY
VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
C2115-DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY
VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
C2116-ABS PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY LOW
VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
C2200-ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
C2202-ORIGINAL VIN MISMATCH/MISSING . . 341
C2204-DYNAMICS SENSOR INTERNAL . . . . . 342
C2205-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
C2206-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION
MISMATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
U0002CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . . 348
U0100LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
ECM/PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
U0101LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM . 354
LX
DYNAMICS SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
CENTRAL GATEWAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
U0401IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED
FROM ECM/PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
U0429IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED
FROM SCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
U1003ESP CAN C BUS PERFORMANCE . . . 368
U1104CAN C BUS CRC PERFORMANCE . . . 372
U140EIMPLAUSIBLE VEHICLE
CONFIGURATION DATA RECEIVED . . . . . . . . 376
U1501IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA
LENGTH RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM. . . . . . 378
LENGTH RECEIVED FROM TCM. . . . . . . . . . . 380
LENGTH RECEIVED FROM FCM. . . . . . . . . . . 382
STANDARD PROCEDURE
APS VERIFICATION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
ABS VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 . . . . . . . . . 384
LX

5 - 175
5 - 176
LX
APS-INTERMITTENT CONDITION
For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
Diagnostic Test
1.
WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands
near the pulleys, belts, or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions can result in
personal injury or death.
The DTC is not active at this time. The following list may help to identify an intermittent condition:
1. Refer to any Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) that may apply.
2. Use DTC environmental data to try to duplicate the conditions in which the DTC was set.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Inspect the related wiring harness and connectors. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, partially broken wires,
or broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
5. Perform a voltage drop test on the circuits between the component and the applicable module.
6. If multiple DTCs are set, use a wiring schematic and inspect any common ground or supply circuits.
7. Inspect and clean all ground circuits that are related to the most current DTC.
8. Use the scan tool to perform a System Test or Actuation, if one applies to the component.
9. Perform a wiggle test on the related wiring and connectors while monitoring the scan tool. Look for the DTC to
reset or data to change during the test.
10. A co-pilot, data recorder, and/or lab scope should be used to diagnose an intermittent condition.
Were any problems found during the above inspection?
Yes
>> Repair as necessary.

Perform APS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
B1D4F-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT CIRCUIT LOW
5 - 177
5 - 178
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module detects low voltage on the Adjustable Pedals Relay control circuit.
Possible Causes
WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR/TERMINALS
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY
FRONT CONTROL MODULE
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE
Turn the ignition on.

With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Record DTC and DTC Environmental data.
With the scan tool, clear stored DTCs.
Cycle the ignition switch off then on.
WARNING: Apply the parking brake. The vehicle may roll when the Transmission is shifted out of Park.
Shift into Reverse for at least 5 seconds, then move the shifter back into Park.
With the scan tool, select view DTCs.
Is the status active for this DTC?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Refer to the Adjustable Pedal System intermittent condition test. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING)
2.
Turn the ignition off.

Remove the Adjustable Pedals Relay from the IPM.
Remove the Front Control Module from the IPM.
Visually inspect the connector terminals for damage or corrosion.
Were any problems found?
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
FUSED B+ CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (IPM)
Using a 12volt test light connect to ground, check the internal Fused
B(+) circuits at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector of the IPM.
NOTE: The test light should be illuminated and bright. Compare
the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.
Is the test light illuminated and bright for both circuits?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Remove and inspect Fuse in the IPM. If the fuse is open,
test the circuit for a short to ground. Repair as necessary. If
the fuse is OK, replace the Integrated Power Module in
accordance with the Service Information.
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
4.
(P201) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (IPM)
Connect a jumper wire between the (P201) Adjustable Pedals Relay

Control circuit and ground at the FCM connector of the IPM.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (P201)
Adjustable Pedals Relay Control circuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay
connector of the IPM.
NOTE: Remove the jumper wire before proceeding to the next test.
Is the test light illuminated and bright?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Replace the Integrated Power Module in accordance with

the Service Information.
5.
(P201) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND (IPM)
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P201) Adjustable

Pedals Relay Control circuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector of
the IPM.
Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms?
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
5 - 179
5 - 180
6.
LX
Reconnect all components.

With the scan tool, actuate the Adjustable Pedals Relay.
Measure the voltage of the (P201) Adjustable Pedals Relay Control circuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector of the IPM.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated ON, the circuit voltage should be 0
volts.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated OFF, the circuit voltage should be
approximately 2.5 volts.
Does the circuit voltage display as described during the actuation test?
Yes
>> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Relay in accordance with the

Service Information.
No
>> Replace the Front Control Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
LX
B1D50-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT CIRCUIT HIGH
5 - 181
5 - 182
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module detects high voltage on the Adjustable Pedals Relay control circuit.
Possible Causes
TERMINAL/CONNECTOR DAMAGE OR CORROSION
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE

Start the engine.
WARNING: Apply the brakes. The vehicle may roll when the Transmission is shifted out of Park.
With the scan tool, select view DTCs..
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
AND TESTING)
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
5 - 183
(P201) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE (IPM)

Measure the voltage of the (P201) Adjustable Pedals Relay Control circuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector of the IPM.
Is there any voltage present?
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.

Measure the voltage of the (P201) Adjustable Pedals Relay Control circuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector
of the IPM.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated ON, the circuit voltage should be 0 volts.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated OFF, the circuit voltage should be approximately 2.5 volts.
Yes
>> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Relay in accordance with the Service Information.
No
5 - 184
B1D51-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL INHIBIT CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
5 - 185
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module fails the Adjustable Pedal Inhibit Relay circuit.
Possible Causes
TERMINAL/CONNECTOR DAMAGE OR CORROSION
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE

WARNING: Apply the parking brake. The vehicle may roll when the Transmission is shifted out of Park.
With the scan tool, select view DTCs..
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
AND TESTING)
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 186
3.
LX
FUSED B+ CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE (IPM)
Using a 12volt test light connect to ground, check the internal Fused
B(+) circuits at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector of the IPM.
Is the test light illuminated and bright for both circuits?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Remove and inspect Fuse 3 in the IPM. If the fuse is open,
test the circuit for a short to ground. Repair as necessary. If
the fuse is OK, replace the Integrated Power Module in
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.

Measure the voltage of the (P201) Adjustable Pedals Relay Control circuit at the Adjustable Pedals Relay connector
of the IPM.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated ON, the circuit voltage should be 0 volts.
NOTE: With the Relay actuated OFF, the circuit voltage should be approximately 2.5 volts.
Yes
>> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Relay in accordance with the Service Information.
No
LX
B1D56ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
5 - 187
5 - 188
LX
When Monitored:
The Adjustable Pedal Motor is in active operation.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects a low signal circuit voltage that is not within voltage specification from the
Adjustable Pedal Sensor.
Possible Causes
(G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN/HIGH RESISTANCE
(G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUNDOR OPEN/HIGH RESISTANCE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC B1D56ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
NOTE: This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
Cycle the ignition switch from off to on.
Cycle the Adjustable Pedals Switch forward and rearward.
With the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1D56ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
AND TESTING)
2.
CHECK CONNECTOR/TERMINAL FOR DAMAGE
NOTE: Check all terminals for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Inspect the Seat Memory Module harness connector, Adjustable Pedals Sensor, and Adjustable Pedals Sensor harness connector.
Is the Adjustable Pedals Sensor or any of the connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Seat Memory Module harness connector.

Disconnect the Adjustable Pedals Sensor harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Supply circuit at the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Does the test light illuminate brightly?
Yes
>> Repair the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Supply circuit

for a short to ground.
Perform APS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Connect a jumper wire between the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor

Supply circuit and ground at the Adjustable Pedal Sensor harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Supply circuit at the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Does the test light illuminate brightly
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

for an open.
5.
(G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit at the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit for
a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 6
5 - 189
5 - 190
6.
(G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Connect a jumper wire between the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor

Signal circuit and ground at the Adjustable Pedal Sensor harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit at the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit for
an open.
7.
(G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the voltage between the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Supply circuit and ground at the Adjustable Pedal Sensor harness connector.
Is the voltage between 4.0 and 5.0 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Replace and reprogram the Seat Memory Module in accordance with the Service Information.
8.
(G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Reconnect Adjustable Pedal Sensor harness connector.

Turn ignition on.
Measure the voltage of the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit in the Seat Memory Module C1 harness connector.
Is the voltage above 0.5 volts?
Yes
>> Replace the Seat Memory Module in accordance with the

No
>> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Sensor in accordance with

LX
LX
B1D57ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
5 - 191
5 - 192
LX
When Monitored:
The Adjustable Pedal Motor is in active operation.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects a high signal circuit voltage that is not within voltage specification from the
Adjustable Pedal Sensor.
Possible Causes
(G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE

With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Record all DTC information.
Move the Adjustable Pedals Switch forward and rearward several times.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
AND TESTING)
2.

Disconnect the Memory Seat Module harness connector.
Inspect the wiring harness, connectors and terminals.
Yes

Perform APS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(G13) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (G13) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Supply circuit and ground at the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Yes

for a short to voltage.
Perform APS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES
- STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit and ground at the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit

No
>> Go To 5
5.
(G14) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Reconnect all connectors.
Measure the voltage of the (G14) Adjustable Pedals Sensor Signal circuit at the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
Is the voltage below 4.0 volts?
Yes
>> Replace and reprogram the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Sensor in accordance with

5 - 193
5 - 194
B1D5BADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
5 - 195
When Monitored:
The Adjustable Pedals Switch is in active operation.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects an activation of both pedal switches at the same time.
Possible Causes
(Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
AND TESTING)
2.

Disconnect the Adjustable Pedals Switch harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 196
3.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (Q103)
Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit at the Memory Seat Module
C5 harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit for a short to ground.
Perform APS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No
>> Go To 4
4.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (Q102)

Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit at the Memory Seat Module
Yes
>> Repair the (Q102) Adjustable Pedals Switch Forward circuit

No
>> Go To 5
5.
(Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Q102) ADJUSTABLE
PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch

Rearward circuit and the (Q102) Adjustable Pedals Switch Forward circuit at the Memory Seat Module C5 harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit for a short to the (Q102) Adjustable Pedals Switch Forward circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
5 - 197
Measure the resistance between the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit and (Q102) Adjustable Pedals Switch Forward circuit at the terminals of the Adjustable Pedals Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Switch in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information.
5 - 198
B1D5CADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK FORWARD
LX
LX
5 - 199
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects that the Adjustable Pedals Switch has been activated in the forward position
for more than 50 seconds.
Possible Causes
(Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q101) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
AND TESTING)
2.

Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Does the status remain active for this DTC?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
3.

Inspect the Adjustable Pedals Sensor and Memory Seat Module wiring harness, connectors and terminals.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
5 - 200
4.
LX
Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q102) Adjustable

Pedals Switch Forward circuit.
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
(Q102) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q101) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
Measure the resistance between the (Q102) Adjustable Pedals Switch

Forward circuit and the (Q101) Adjustable Pedals Switch Ground circuit.
Yes

for a short to the (Q101) Adjustable Pedals Switch Ground
circuit.
No
>> Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the

LX
B1D5DADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK REARWARD
5 - 201
5 - 202
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects that the Adjustable Pedals Switch has been activated in the rearward position for more than 50 seconds.
Possible Causes
(Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q101) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE

With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Record all DTC and DTC Environmental data.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
AND TESTING)
2.

Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Does the status remain active for this DTC?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
3.

Inspect the Adjustable Pedals Switch and Memory Seat Module wiring harness, connectors and terminals.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.
5 - 203
Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q103) Adjustable

Pedals Switch Rearward circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
(Q103) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q101) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
Measure the resistance between the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit and the (Q101) Adjustable
Pedals Switch Ground circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q103) Adjustable Pedals Switch Rearward circuit for a short to the (Q101) Adjustable Pedals Switch Ground circuit.
No
>> Replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information.
5 - 204
B1D67ADJUSTABLE PEDAL CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
5 - 205
When Monitored:
The Adjustable Pedals Motor is in active operation.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects that the Adjustable Pedals Motor has been activated for a time period and
has not spun with three motor direction commands.
Possible Causes
(P205) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD CIRCUIT OPEN
(P206) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD CIRCUIT OPEN
(G914) RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS ASSEMBLY
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE

With the scan tool, select view DTCs. Record all DTC and DTC Environmental data.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
AND TESTING)
2.

Disconnect the Adjustable Pedals Motor harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 206
3.
LX
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS ASSEMBLY

Inspect the Adjustable Pedals Assembly for a condition that would cause the motor to stick or stall.
Yes
>> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Assembly in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(P205) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Connect a jumper wire between the (P205) Adjustable Pedals Motor

Forward circuit and ground at the Adjustable Pedals Motor harness
connector.
Adjustable Pedals Motor Forward circuit at the Memory Seat Module
harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (P205) Adjustable Pedals Motor Forward circuit

for an open circuit or high resistance.
5.
(P206) ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD CIRCUIT OPEN CIRCUIT OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Connect the jumper wire between the (P206) Adjustable Pedals Motor
Rearward circuit and ground at the Adjustable Pedals Motor harness
connector.
Adjustable Pedals Motor Rearward circuit at the Memory Seat Module
harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (P206) Adjustable Pedals Motor Rearward circuit

for an open.
LX
6.
(G914) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Connect the jumper wire between the (G914) Sensor Return circuit and
ground at the Adjustable Pedals Motor harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (G914) Sensor Return circuit at the Memory Seat Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the (G914) Sensor Return circuit for an open.

7.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR

Disconnect the Adjustable Pedals Motor harness connector.
Measure the resistance between the (P205) Adjustable Pedals Motor
Forward circuit and the (P206) Adjustable Pedals Motor Rearward circuit at the terminals of the Adjustable Pedals Motor.
Yes
>> Replace and reprogram the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Replace the Adjustable Pedals Motor in accordance with

5 - 207
5 - 208
LX
ABS INTERMITTENT CONDITION

Diagnostic Test
1.
PERFORM ABS INTERMITTENT CONDITION TEST
NOTE: The conditions that set the DTC are not present at this time. The following list may help in identifying the intermittent condition.
Refer to any Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) that may apply.
Review the scan tool Environmental Data (EV Data). If possible, try to duplicate the conditions under which the DTC
set.
Visually inspect the related wire harness. Disconnect all the related harness connectors. Look for any chafed,
pierced, pinched, partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Wiggle the wires while checking for shorts and open circuits.
Perform a voltage drop test on the related circuits between the suspected faulty component and the Anti-Lock Brake
Module.
Inspect and clean all PCM, ABS, engine, and chassis grounds that are related to the most current DTC.
If numerous trouble codes were set, use a wire schematic and look for any common ground or supply circuits
For any Relay DTCs, actuate the Relay with the scan tool and wiggle the related wire harness to try to interrupt the
actuation.
Use the scan tool to perform a System Test if one applies to failing component.
A co-pilot, data recorder, and/or lab scope should be used to help diagnose intermittent conditions.
Were any problems found during the above inspections?
Yes
>> Perform the necessary repairs.

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
C100ALEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
5 - 209
5 - 210
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor circuit fails the diagnostic test.
Possible Causes
WIRING HARNESS, TERMINAL, CONNECTOR DAMAGE
(B9) LEFT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (B9) LEFT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
LEFT FRONT WSS
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C100ALEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
NOTE: The Anti-Lock Brake Module must sense ALL 4 wheels at 12 km/h (7.5 mph) before it will extinguish
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C100ALEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Refer to the INTERMITTENT CONDITION diagnostic procedure.

2.
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Front WSS, and Left Front WSS harness connector.
Is the Left Front WSS or any of the connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK (B9) LEFT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Left Front WSS harness connector.

Measure the voltage of the (B9) Left Front WSS 12 Volt Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK (B9) LEFT FRONT WSS SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Left Front WSS harness connector.
Disconnect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (B9) Left
Front WSS Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (B9) Left Front WSS Supply circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 5
5 - 211
5 - 212
5.
CHECK (B9) LEFT FRONT WSS SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B9) Left Front WSS
Supply circuit in the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with

No
>> Repair the (B9) Left Front WSS Supply circuit for an open.
6.
CHECK (B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Front WSS Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 7
LX
LX
7.
CHECK (B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B8) Left Front WSS
Signal circuit in the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Repair the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit for an open.
8.
CHECK (B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Remove all jumper wires.
Measure the voltage between the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit
and ground.
Is the voltage above one volt?
Yes
>> Repair the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit for a short to
voltage.
No
>> Go To 9
5 - 213
5 - 214
9.
LX
CHECK (B8) LEFT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (B9) LEFT FRONT WSS SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT
TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit
and the (B9) Left Front WSS Supply circuit.
Is the resistance above 5.0 ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Repair the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal circuit and the (B9)
Left Front WSS Supply circuit for a short together.
10.
LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
Replace the Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
CAUTION: Ensure brake capability is available before road testing.
Road test the vehicle over 40 km/h (25 m.p.h.).
NOTE: Vehicle must be driven above 40 km/h (25 m.p.h.) for set conditions to be meet.
With the scan tool, read ABS DTCs.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C100ALEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT reset?
Yes
>> Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
5 - 215
C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
5 - 216
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Left Front WSS Signal is intermittently missing a vehicle speed above 40 kph (25 mph) or erratic
wheel speed signal during acceleration or sensed wheel speed is different from other wheels.
Possible Causes
LEFT FRONT WSS LOOSE B8, B9 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE
LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
LEFT FRONT WHEEL BEARING DAMAGE
IMPROPER LEFT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
LEFT FRONT WSS
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
NOTE: If DTC C100A Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit is present it must be repaired before continuing.
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 2
2.
CHECK WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNALS

With the scan tool, monitor and graph ALL the WSS speeds and compare graph while an assistant drives the vehicle.
NOTE: If graph shows periodic dropouts pay close attention to the tone wheel.
Slowly accelerate as straight as possible from a stop to 40 km/h (25 m.p.h.).
Is the Left Front WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
5 - 217
CHECK FOR IMPROPER LEFT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Left Front Tire pressure.
Check and adjust all other tire pressures.
Inspect for mismatched tires on vehicle.
Is the Left Front Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
Yes
>> Repair as necessary

No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK LEFT FRONT WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B8, B9 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
NOTE: Check all terminals for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Front WSS, and Left Front WSS harness connector
Inspect the Left Front WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal and (B9) Left Front WSS Supply circuits between the Left Front WSS and
Anti-Lock Brake Module for damage.
Is the Left Front WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Left Front Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
NOTE: The Tone Wheel teeth should be perfectly square, not bent, or nicked.
Is the Left Front Tone Wheel damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK LEFT FRONT WHEEL BEARING FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Left Front wheel bearing for excessive runout or clearance.
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate service information, if necessary, for procedures or specifications.
Is the Left Front Wheel Bearing Damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 7
5 - 218
7.
LX
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
C1014-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
5 - 219
5 - 220
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Left Front WSS reading is different from the readings received from the other WSSs at a vehicle
speed above 40 kph (25 mph). The Anti-Lock Brake Module compares WSS readings from side-to-side on an
axle and front-to-rear.
Possible Causes
LEFT FRONT WSS LOOSE B8, B9 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE
IMPROPER LEFT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGE
LEFT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C1014-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1014-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Is the Left Front WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
5 - 221
CHECK FOR IMPROPER LEFT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Left Front Tire pressure.
Is the Left Front Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK LEFT FRONT WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B8, B9 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Front WSS, and Left Front WSS harness connector
Inspect the Left Front WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B8) Left Front WSS Signal and (B9) Left Front WSS Supply circuits between the Left Front WSS and
Is the Left Front WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Left Front Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Left Front Tone Wheel damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1011-LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
5 - 222
C1015RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
LX
LX
5 - 223
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor circuit fails the diagnostic test.
Possible Causes
(B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
RIGHT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C1015RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1015RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Front WSS, and Right Front WSS harness connector.
Is the Right Front WSS or any of the connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 224
3.
CHECK (B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Right Front WSS harness connector.

Measure the voltage of the (B7) Right Front WSS 12 Volt Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK (B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Right Front WSS harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (B7) Right
Yes
>> Repair the (B7) Right Front WSS Supply circuit for a short
to ground.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
CHECK (B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B7) Right Front WSS
Yes

No
>> Repair the (B7) Right Front WSS Supply circuit for an
open.
6.
CHECK (B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Yes
>> Repair the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit for a short
to ground.
No
>> Go To 7
5 - 225
5 - 226
7.
CHECK (B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B6) Right Front WSS
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Repair the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit for an open.
8.
CHECK (B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit
and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit for a short
to voltage.
No
>> Go To 9
LX
LX
9.
5 - 227
CHECK (B6) RIGHT FRONT WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (B7) RIGHT FRONT WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY
CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit and the (B7) Right Front WSS Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Repair the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal circuit and the (B7)
Right Front WSS Supply circuit for a short together.
10.
RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
Replace the Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1015RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
5 - 228
LX
C101C-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
LX
5 - 229
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Right Front WSS Signal is intermittently missing a vehicle speed above 25mph (40 kph) or erratic
Possible Causes
RIGHT FRONT WSS LOOSE B6, B7 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE
RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
RIGHT FRONT WHEEL BEARING DAMAGE
IMPROPER RIGHT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
RIGHT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C101C-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
NOTE: If DTC C1015Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit is present it must be repaired before continuing.
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C101C-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Is the Right Front WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

5 - 230
3.
LX
CHECK FOR IMPROPER RIGHT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Right Front Tire pressure.
Is the Right Front Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK RIGHT FRONT WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B6, B7 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Front WSS, and Right Front WSS harness connector
Inspect the Right Front WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal and (B7) Right Front WSS Supply circuits between the Right Front WSS
and Anti-Lock Brake Module for damage.
Is the Right Front WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Right Front Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Right Front Tone Wheel damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK RIGHT FRONT WHEEL BEARING FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Right Front wheel bearing for excessive runout or clearance.
Is the Right Front Wheel Bearing Damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 7
LX
7.
5 - 231
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C101C-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
5 - 232
C101F-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
5 - 233
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Right Front WSS reading is different from the readings received from the other WSSs at a vehicle
Possible Causes
RIGHT FRONT WSS LOOSE B6, B7 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE
IMPROPER RIGHT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGE
RIGHT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C101F-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C101F-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Is the Right Front WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

5 - 234
3.
LX
CHECK FOR IMPROPER RIGHT FRONT TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Right Front Tire pressure.
Is the Right Front Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK RIGHT FRONT WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B6, B7 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Front WSS, and Right Front WSS harness connector
Inspect the Right Front WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B6) Right Front WSS Signal and (B7) Right Front WSS Supply circuits between the Right Front WSS
Is the Right Front WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Right Front Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Right Front Tone Wheel damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C101F-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
C1020LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
5 - 235
5 - 236
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor circuit fails the diagnostic test.
Possible Causes
(B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
LEFT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C1020LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1020LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Rear WSS, and Left Rear WSS harness connector.
Is the Left Rear WSS or any of the connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK (B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Left Rear WSS harness connector.

Measure the voltage of the (B4) Left Rear WSS 12 Volt Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK (B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Left Rear WSS harness connector.
Rear WSS Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (B4) Left Rear WSS Supply circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 5
5 - 237
5 - 238
5.
CHECK (B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B4) Left Rear WSS
Yes

No
>> Repair the (B4) Left Rear WSS Supply circuit for an open.
6.
CHECK (B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Rear WSS Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 7
LX
LX
7.
CHECK (B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B3) Left Rear WSS
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Repair the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit for an open.
8.
CHECK (B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit
and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit for a short to
voltage.
No
>> Go To 9
5 - 239
5 - 240
9.
LX
CHECK (B3) LEFT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (B4) LEFT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SHORTED TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit
and the (B4) Left Rear WSS Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Repair the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal circuit and the (B4)
Left Rear WSS Supply circuit for a short together.
10.
LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
Replace the Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1020LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
5 - 241
C1027-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
5 - 242
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Left Rear WSS Signal is intermittently missing a vehicle speed above 25mph (40 kph) or erratic
Possible Causes
LEFT REAR WSS AIR GAP FAULT
LEFT REAR WSS LOOSE B3, B4 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE
LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
LEFT REAR WHEEL BEARING DAMAGE
IMPROPER LEFT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
LEFT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C1027-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1027-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 2
2.
CHECK LEFT REAR WSS AIR GAP

Using a feeler gauge, measure the Left Rear WSS air gap.
Is the Left Rear WSS air gap within specifications?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
5 - 243

Is the Left Rear WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
CHECK FOR IMPROPER LEFT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Left Rear Tire pressure.
Is the Left Rear Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK LEFT REAR WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B4, B5 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Rear WSS, and Left Rear WSS harness connector
Inspect the Left Rear WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal and (B4) Left Rear WSS Supply circuits between the Left Rear WSS and
Is the Left Rear WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Left Rear Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Left Rear Tone Wheel damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 7
5 - 244
7.
LX
CHECK LEFT REAR WHEEL BEARING FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Left Rear wheel bearing for excessive runout or clearance.
Is the Left Rear Wheel Bearing Damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 8
8.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1027-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
C102A-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
5 - 245
5 - 246
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Left Rear WSS reading is different from the readings received from the other WSSs at a vehicle
Possible Causes
LEFT REAR WSS LOOSE B3, B4 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE
IMPROPER LEFT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
LEFT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C102A-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C102A-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Is the Left Rear WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
5 - 247
CHECK FOR IMPROPER LEFT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Left Rear Tire pressure.
Is the Left Rear Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK LEFT REAR WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B3, B4 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Left Rear WSS, and Left Rear WSS harness connector
Inspect the Left Rear WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B3) Left Rear WSS Signal and (B4) Left Rear WSS Supply circuits between the Left Rear WSS and
Is the Left Rear WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Left Rear Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Left Rear Tone Wheel damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C102A-LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
5 - 248
C102BRIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
LX
LX
5 - 249
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor circuit fails the diagnostic test.
Possible Causes
(B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, GROUND, OR OPEN
(B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
RIGHT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C102BRIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C102BRIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Rear WSS, and Right Rear WSS harness connector.
Is the Right Rear WSS or any of the connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 250
3.
CHECK (B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Right Rear WSS harness connector.

Measure the voltage of the (B2) Right Rear WSS 12 Volt Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK (B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Right Rear WSS harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (B2) Right Rear WSS Supply circuit for a short
to ground.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
CHECK (B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B2) Right Rear WSS
Yes

No
>> Repair the (B2) Right Rear WSS Supply circuit for an open.
6.
CHECK (B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Yes
>> Repair the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 7
5 - 251
5 - 252
7.
CHECK (B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Connect a jumper wire between ground and the (B1) Right Rear WSS
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Repair the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit for an open.
8.
CHECK (B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit
and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit for a short to
voltage.
No
>> Go To 9
LX
LX
9.
5 - 253
CHECK (B1) RIGHT REAR WSS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (B2) RIGHT REAR WSS 12 VOLT
SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit and the (B2) Right Rear WSS Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Repair the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal circuit and the (B2)
Right Rear WSS Supply circuit for a short together.
10.
RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
Replace the Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C102BRIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
5 - 254
C1032-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
5 - 255
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Right Rear WSS Signal is intermittently missing a vehicle speed above 25mph (40 kph) or erratic
Possible Causes
RIGHT REAR WSS AIR GAP FAULT
RIGHT REAR WSS LOOSE B1, B2 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE
RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
RIGHT REAR WHEEL BEARING DAMAGE
IMPROPER RIGHT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
RIGHT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C1032-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1032-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECK RIGHT REAR WSS AIR GAP

Using a feeler gauge, measure the Right Rear WSS air gap.
Is the Right Rear WSS air gap within specifications?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

5 - 256
3.
LX

Is the Right Rear WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
CHECK FOR IMPROPER RIGHT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Right Rear Tire pressure.
Is the Right Rear Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK RIGHT REAR WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B1, B2 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Rear WSS, and Right Rear WSS harness connector
Inspect the Right Rear WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal and (B2) Right Rear WSS Supply circuits between the Right Rear WSS
Is the Right Rear WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Right Rear Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Right Rear Tone Wheel damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 7
LX
7.
5 - 257
CHECK RIGHT REAR WHEEL BEARING FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Right Rear wheel bearing for excessive runout or clearance.
Is the Right Rear Wheel Bearing Damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 8
8.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1032-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL ERRATIC PERFORMANCE reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
5 - 258
C1035-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
5 - 259
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Right Rear WSS reading is different from the readings received from the other WSSs at a vehicle
Possible Causes
RIGHT REAR WSS LOOSE B1, B2 CIRCUITS/CONNECTOR/TERMINAL DAMAGE
IMPROPER RIGHT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES
RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL DAMAGE
RIGHT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC C1035-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1035-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Is the Right Rear WSS speed showing 0 km/h (0 m.p.h.) or not matching other wheel speeds?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

5 - 260
3.
LX
CHECK FOR IMPROPER RIGHT REAR TIRE PRESSURE/MISMATCHED TIRES

Check and adjust the Right Rear Tire pressure.
Is the Right Rear Tire improperly inflated or mismatched tires on vehicle?
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK RIGHT REAR WSS LOOSENESS, INSPECT B1, B2 CIRCUITS/TERMINALS FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Anti-Lock Brake Module harness connector, Right Rear WSS, and Right Rear WSS harness connector
Inspect the Right Rear WSS for looseness, excessive corrosion and not properly fastened.
Inspect the (B1) Right Rear WSS Signal and (B2) Right Rear WSS Supply circuits between the Right Rear WSS
Is the Right Rear WSS loose or any of the wiring/connectors/terminals damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the Right Rear Tone Wheel for damage, missing teeth, cracks, or looseness.
Is the Right Rear Tone Wheel damaged?
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1035-RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
5 - 261
C1041-LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module detects periodic drops of a WSS signal.
Possible Causes
LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL
DIRTY TONE WHEEL/SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C1041-LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE
Record DTC and Freeze Frame information.
With the scan tool, erase DTCs.
Test drive the vehicle in a straight line to 40 km/h (25 mph).
Does the scan tool display: C1041-LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Replace the Left Front Tone Wheel in accordance with the Service Information.
No

5 - 262
LX
C1042-RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C1042-RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE
Test drive the vehicle in a straight line to 40 Km/h (25 mph).
Does the scan tool display: C1042-RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Replace the Right Front Tone Wheel in accordance with the Service Information.
No

LX
5 - 263
C1043-LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C1043-LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE
Does the scan tool display: C1043-LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECK THE LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE
NOTE: Check the tone wheel teeth for missing teeth, cracks, or looseness. Teeth should be perfectly
square, not bent, or nicked.
Check the Left Rear Tone Wheel for damage.
Check the Left Rear Tone Wheel for dirt.
Was the tone wheel dirty?
Yes
>> Clean tone wheel and sensor. Clear codes and retest.
No
>> Replace the Left Rear Tone Wheel in accordance with the Service Information.
5 - 264
LX
C1044-RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C1044-RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE
Does the scan tool display: C1044-RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECK THE RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL FOR DAMAGE
NOTE: Check the tone wheel teeth for missing teeth, cracks, or looseness. Teeth should be perfectly
square, not bent, or nicked.
Check the Right Rear Tone Wheel for damage.
Check the Right Rear Tone Wheel for dirt.
Was the tone wheel dirty?
Yes
>> Clean tone wheel and sensor. Clear codes and retest.
No
>> Replace the Right Rear Tone Wheel in accordance with the Service Information.
LX
C1046LEFT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING
5 - 265
5 - 266
LX
When Monitored:
During active ABS control.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects a pressure reduction phase and the following pressure hold phase is
too long.
Possible Causes
LEFT FRONT TONE WHEEL/BEARING DAMAGED
WHEEL SPEED SIGNALS SWAPPED
LEFT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.
COMPARE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNALS
WARNING: Ensure brake capability is available before road testing.

With the scan tool, monitor ALL the WSS speeds while an assistant drives the vehicle.
Does the Left Front WSS speed differ from the other WSS speeds by 8 km/h (5 m.p.h.) or show NO
speed?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Perform the ABS Intermittent Condition diagnostic procedure in this Section.
2.
INSPECT TONE WHEEL/BEARING

Visually inspect the tone wheel and bearing for damage.
Check the tone wheel teeth for missing teeth, cracks, and looseness. The teeth must be perfectly square, not
bent, or nicked. Check the wheel bearing for worn/looseness.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK WHEEL SPEED SENSOR WIRING
Check the Anti-Lock Brakes Module and Wheel Speed Sensors harness connectors for incorrectly wired connectors.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.
5 - 267
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1046LEFT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
5 - 268
C1047-RIGHT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING
LX
LX
5 - 269
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
too long.
Possible Causes
RIGHT FRONT TONE WHEEL DAMAGED
RIGHT FRONT WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the Right Front WSS speed differ from the other WSS speeds by 8 km/h (5 m.p.h.) or show NO
speed?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
5 - 270
4.
LX
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1047RIGHT FRONT WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
C1048-LEFT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING
5 - 271
5 - 272
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
too long.
Possible Causes
LEFT REAR TONE WHEEL/WHEEL BEARING
LEFT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the Left Rear WSS speed differ from the other WSS speeds by 8 km/h (5 m.p.h.) or show NO
speed?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.
5 - 273
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1048LEFT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
5 - 274
C1049-RIGHT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING
LX
LX
5 - 275
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects a pressure reduction phase and the following pressure hold phase
is too long.
Possible Causes
RIGHT REAR TONE WHEEL DAMAGED
RIGHT REAR WSS
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the Right Rear WSS speed from the other WSS speeds by 8 km/h (5 m.p.h.) or show NO speed?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
5 - 276
4.
LX
the ABS indicators.
Did DTC C1049RIGHT REAR WHEEL PRESSURE PHASE MONITORING reset?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
C1073-ABS PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
5 - 277
5 - 278
LX
When Monitored:
When the ABS Pump Motor is activated.
Set Condition:
The ABM detects low pump motor feedback voltage with actuation of the pump motor relay.
Possible Causes
BLOWN PUMP FUSE
(A107) HIGH RESISTANCE IN B+ CIRCUITS
(Z903) HIGH RESISTANCE IN GROUND CIRCUITS
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C1073-ABS PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
the ABS indicators.
Does the scan tool display: C1073-ABS PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
INSPECT RELATED WIRING HARNESS, TERMINALS, & CONNECTORS

Visually inspect the related wiring harness. Look for any pinched, chafed, pierced, and partially broken wires.
Visually inspect the related wiring harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE ABS PUMP MOTOR FUSED B+ FOR AN OPEN

Remove and visually inspect the ABS Pump Motor B+ fuse.
Is the ABS Pump Motor B+ fuse open?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 6
LX
4.
5 - 279
CHECK THE (A107) FUSED B(+) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Using a 12volt test light connected to 12volts, probe the (A107)
Fused B+ circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (A921) Fused B(+) circuit for a short to ground.
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to 5 BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK THE (A107) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT

Visually inspect the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit in the wiring harness.
Look for any signs of intermittent short to ground.
Is the wiring harness OK?
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
6.
CHECK THE VOLTAGE ON THE (A107) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT

Measure the voltage of the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit in the Anti-Lock
Brake Module harness connector.
Is the voltage above 10 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit for an open.

5 - 280
7.
CHECK THE (Z903) AND (Z107) GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (Z903) Ground circuit between the AntiLock Brake Module harness connector and ground
Yes
>> Replace the ICU per service information.

No
>> Repair the high resistance in the affected circuit.

LX
LX
5 - 281
C1078TIRE REVOLUTIONS RANGE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
A comparison between the tire circumference value contained in the EEPROM and the tire circumference
value received on the CAN bus. Programmed value for tire size is not within acceptable range.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT VALUE PROGRAMMED INTO FCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY FCM IS PROGRAMMED WITH CORRECT TIRE/WHEEL INFORMATION
Verify the correct Tire/wheel information is programmed in the FCM.

Is the correct value programmed in the FCM?
Yes
>> Replace the Front Control Module in accordance with service information.
No
>> Program the correct Tire/Wheel information in the FCM.

5 - 282
C107CBRAKE PEDAL SWITCH 1/2 STUCK
LX
LX
5 - 283
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, but not during first run.
Or, with low supply voltage.
Or, if a Pressure Sensor fault is active.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects a mismatch between the Brake Test Signal (BTS) from the Pressure
Sensor and the (B15) Secondary Brake Switch Signal circuit (Diesel) or the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal
circuit (Gas).
Possible Causes
STOP LAMP RELATED DTCs OR SYMPTOMS PRESENT
MISADJUSTED PEDAL SWITCH
PRESSURE SENSOR OR VOLTAGE RELATED DTCs PRESENT
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY DTC IS ACTIVE
NOTE: Diagnose and repair all Pressure Sensor and Voltage related DTCs and all Stop Lamp related DTCs
and symptoms before diagnosing this DTC.
With the scan tool, read and record ABS DTCs.
With the scan tool, read and record Environmental Data (EV Data).
With the scan tool, erase ABS DTCs.
Cycle the ignition switch.
Press and release the brake pedal several times.
Does this DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 284
3.
CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FUNCTION WHILE DEPRESSING & RELEASING
THE BRAKE PEDAL
Disconnect the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12 volts, probe the (B15) Brake
Switch No. 1 Signal circuit in the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Depress and release the brake pedal.
Does the test light illumination toggle from off to on?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Disconnect the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit
between the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector and the Stop
Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit for an
open.
5.
LX
CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

between ground and the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Is the resistance below 10k ohms?
Yes
>> Repair the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
6.
CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT (GAS) FOR A OPEN GROUND
Measure the resistance on the (Z940) Ground circuit and ground in the
Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Is the resistance below 5 ohms?
Yes
>> Replace the Stop Lamp Switch in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Repair the open in the (Z940) Ground circuit.
7.
CHECK BRAKE PEDAL ADJUSTMENT
Reconnect the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12 volts, backprobe the (B15)
Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Does the test light illumination toggle from off to on within 45
mm of brake pedal travel?
Yes
>> Replace the Anti-Lock Bakes Module in accordance with the

No
5 - 285
5 - 286
C107D-BRAKE PEDAL SWITCH 1/2 CORRELATION
LX
LX
5 - 287
When Monitored:
When the vehicle is driven.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects an implausible signal from the Stop Lamp Switch.
Possible Causes
STOP LAMP RELATED DTCs OR SYMPTOMS PRESENT (F942 CIRCUIT/FUSE OPEN)
MISADJUSTED PEDAL SWITCH
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: Diagnose and repair all Pressure Sensor and Voltage related DTCs and all Stop Lamp related DTCs
and symptoms before diagnosing this DTC.
Test drive the vehicle as follows: Drive for more than 6 minutes at a speed greater than 40 km/h (25 m.p.h.) and
accelerate to a speed greater than 40 km/h (25 m.p.h.) and then decelerate to a speed lower than 3 km/h (2 m.p.h.)
five consecutive times.
Park the vehicle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 288
3.
CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FUNCTION WHILE DEPRESSING & RELEASING
THE BRAKE PEDAL

Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit in the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Does the test light illumination toggle from off to on?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

between ground and the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
LX
CHECK (B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
between the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector and the Stop
Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (B15) Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit for an
open.
LX
CHECK
BRAKE
NO.
1 SIGNAL
CIRCUIT
FOR AinOPEN
GROUND
6.
Measure
the (B15)
resistance
onSWITCH
the (Z912)
Ground
circuit
and ground
the Stop
Lamp Switch harness
connector.
Yes
No
7.
CHECK BRAKE PEDAL ADJUSTMENT
Reconnect the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.

Brake Switch No. 1 Signal circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
urn the ignition on.
Does the test light illumination toggle from off to on within 45
mm of brake pedal travel?
Yes
>> Replace the Anti-Lock Bakes Module in accordance with the

No
5 - 289
5 - 290
C1210G SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
5 - 291
When Monitored:
Continuously, with ignition on, until vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h (12.4 m.p.h.) for the first time, but not if the
sensor voltage is out of range.
Or, during diagnostic mode.
Or, if the monitoring was inhibited by a corresponding diagnostics command.
Set Condition:
If the measured acceleration signal is higher than 0.8 g for longer than the specified detection time.
Possible Causes
(G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY HIGH RESISTANCE
(G94) GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
DYNAMICS SENSOR INSTALLATION
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C1210G SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
With the scan tool, read and record DTCs.
With the scan tool, read and record Freeze Frame information.
Does the scan tool display: C1210G SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECK THE TERMINALS/CONNECTORS/WIRING HARNESS FOR DAMAGE
Check the Steering Angle Sensor installation.

Check all related wiring for bruised, chafed, pierced, or partially broken wires.
Check all related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 292
3.
LX
(G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY HIGH RESISTANCE

Disconnect the Dynamics Sensor harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit
between the Dynamics Sensor harness connector and the Anti-Lock
Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit for high
resistance.
4.
(G94) GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance between the (G94) Ground circuit and ground.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (G94) Ground circuit for high resistance.

5.
CHECK THE DYNAMICS SENSOR INSTALLATION
NOTE: Dynamics Sensor installation and mounting bolt torque is crucial for proper operation.
Check the Dynamics Sensor for damaged, modified, and bent mounting brackets.
Check the Dynamics Sensor mounting bolts for a loose or over tightened condition.
Yes

No
>> Replace the Dynamics Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
LX
C1219-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
5 - 293
5 - 294
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brake Module detects that the calculated steering wheel angle exceeds what is physically possible.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE DAMAGE
STEERING COLUMN / INTERMEDIATE SHAFT DAMAGE
STEERING WHEEL ALIGNMENT
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR LOOSE
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR IMPROPERLY INSTALLED (WRONG MOUNTING POSITION)
(A913) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
(Z910) GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
PERFORM TEST DRIVE & VERIFY DTC IS STILL ACTIVE

Test drive the vehicle by turning the vehicle left or right in a curving manner at a velocity between 10 and 25 km/hr
(6 and 15 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
INSPECT VEHICLE, STEERING COLUMN, & INTERMEDIATE SHAFT FOR DAMAGE
NOTE: If possible, check vehicle repair history for collision damage.

Inspect the vehicle for damage causing tracking problems or steering wheel misalignment.
Inspect the steering column and intermediate shaft for damage.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
5 - 295
CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR OUTPUT
Start the engine.

Turn the steering wheel so wheels point in a straight ahead position.
With the scan tool, read the Steering Angle Sensor Position.
Is the Steering Angle Sensor Position within 15 degrees?
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSTALLATION
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental
restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, occupant classification system, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect
and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge
before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental
restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment.
NOTE: Proper Steering Angle Sensor installation is crucial for proper operation.
Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor are properly installed.
Is the Steering Angle Sensor properly installed?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair as necessary and clear offsets by initializing ECU with wheels pointing straight ahead.
5.
NOTE: A low voltage condition at the Steering Angle Sensor will cause this DTC to set.
Check all related wiring for pinched, chafed, pierced, and partially broken wires.
Check all related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
5 - 296
6.
LX
CHECK (A913) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Steering Angle Sensor harness connector.

Measure the voltage of the (A913) Fused Ignition Switch Output (RunACC) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the (A913) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-ACC)

circuit for high resistance.
7.
CHECK (Z910) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance of the (Z910) Ground circuit between ground
and the Steering Angle Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Steering Angle Sensor in accordance with the

Service Information and clear offsets by initializing ECU
with wheels pointing straight ahead. Refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No
>> Repair the (Z910) Ground circuit for high resistance.

8.
CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR OUTPUT WHILE ROTATING THE STEERING WHEEL
With the scan tool, read the Steering Angle Sensor Position while rotating the steering wheel to the right and then
to the left. The Steering Angle Sensor Position should decrease when rotating the steering wheel to the right and
increase when rotating the steering wheel to the left.
Did the steering angle change accordingly?
Yes
>> Replace the Anti-Lock Brake Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Replace the Steering Angle Sensor in accordance with the Service Information and clear offsets by initializing ECU with wheels pointing straight ahead.
LX
5 - 297
C121ASTEERING ANGLE SENSOR NOT INITIALIZED

When Monitored:
During the Drive Test.
Set Condition:
This DTC may set with DTC C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR due to cycling of ignition
several times or entering and exiting diagnostics several times.
Refer to C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR in this Section for the diagnostic test procedure.
5 - 298
LX
C121CTORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL DENIED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module indicates if engine management relevant for Automatic Yaw Control/Traction
Control System control can be accomplished.
Possible Causes
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C121C-TORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL DENIED
NOTE: This DTC must be active for the results of this test to be valid and this DTC may set while driving
under severe load conditions.
Start Engine.
Does the scan tool display: C121C-TORQUE REQUEST SIGNAL DENIED?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECK THE POWERTRAIN DTCs
With the scan tool, read and record Powertrain DTCs.

Were any Powertrain ESP related DTCs found?
Yes
>> Replace the Powertrain Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No
LX
5 - 299
C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module indicates that the Brake Pressure Sensor Signal is out of range.
Possible Causes
INTEGRATED CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Start the engine.
Does the scan tool display: C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
RECHECK FOR A DTC C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

With the scan tool, read and record Freeze Fame information.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Replace the ICU in accordance with the Service Information.

No
>> Test complete
5 - 300
LX
C121E-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE

For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
RECHECK FOR A DTC C121D-BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Start the engine.
Yes
>> Replace the ICU in accordance with the Service Information.

No
>> Test complete
LX
5 - 301
C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects implausible Steering Angle Sensor data.
Possible Causes
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSTALLATION
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
NOTE: If any of the following DTCs are present they must be repaired before continuing.
DTC C1219-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ERRATIC PERFORMANCE
DTC C121A-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NOT INITIALIZED
DTC C123F-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
DTC C1240-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ANGLE OVERTRAVEL PERFORMANCE
Perform ECU initialization with drive test. Refer to Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Start the engine.
Does the scan tool display: C1231DRIVE TEST: STEERING ANGLE SENSOR?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

Refer to the ABS-INTERMITTENT CONDITION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2.
VERIFY THAT THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS
With the scan tool, select ECU View.

Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor is active on the bus.
Is the Steering Angle Sensor active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for No

Response related diagnostic procedures.
5 - 302
3.
LX
CHECK STEERING ANGLE
Turn steering wheel so wheels point in a straight ahead position.

With scan tool check steering angle.
Is the Steering Angle reading within 15 degrees?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.
CHECK STEERING ANGLE CHANGE

With scan tool check steering angle.
Rotate steering wheel to the right and the degrees will decrease and rotating steering wheel to the left the degrees
will increase.
Yes
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No
5.
Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor is properly installed. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCKSPRING
- INSTALLATION.
Yes
No
LX
5 - 303
C1232DRIVE TEST: PRESSURE SENSOR

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Pressure Sensor fails to activate.
Possible Causes
HYDRAULIC / BRAKE SYSTEM COMPONENT INSTALLATION
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT
PRESSURE SENSOR (HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT)
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C1232DRIVE TEST: PRESSURE SENSOR
Perform ECU initialization with drive test. Refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD
PROCEDURE).
Start the engine.
Does the scan tool display: C1232DRIVE TEST: PRESSURE SENSOR?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECK HYDRAULIC SYSTEM & BRAKE SYSTEM COMPONENT INSTALLATION & FUNCTION
Verify that the Anti-Lock Brakes Module and Hydraulic Control Unit are properly installed.
Verify that the hydraulic system is properly filled and bled.
Verify that the brake system components are installed and functioning properly.
Yes

No
>> Clean contacts in HCU first if problem reoccurs replace the Integrated Control Unit in accordance with
5 - 304
LX
C1234DRIVE TEST: SENSOR CLUSTER INSTALLATION

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects implausible Dynamics Sensor data.
Possible Causes
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C1234DRIVE TEST: SENSOR CLUSTER INSTALLATION
Perform ECU initialization with drive test. Refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD
PROCEDURE).
Start the engine.
Does the scan tool display: C1234DRIVE TEST: SENSOR CLUSTER INSTALLATION?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
Yes

No
LX
5 - 305
C1238-DRIVE TEST: UNSUCCESSFUL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects a fault with the Steering Angle Sensor, the Pressure Sensor, or the
Dynamics Sensor.
Possible Causes
PRESSURE SENSOR
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
DIAGNOSE & REPAIR ALL DTCs
Repair
Diagnose and repair all DTCs.
C1239EMISSIONS ROLLS TEST ACTIVE

Theory of Operation
The functional effects are that the output signal for all wheel speeds mimic the wheel with the highest wheel speed.
This DTC sets when the Emissions Rolls Test is active.
Close out the Emissions Rolls Test though the FCM.
5 - 306
C123A-ESP SYSTEM SENSORS CALIBRATION
LX
LX
5 - 307
When Monitored:
Once per ignition cycle.
Set Condition:
If the calculated checksum does not match the stored checksum.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
INITIALIZE ANTI-LOCK BRAKES MODULE
Initialize ECU refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
5 - 308
C123B-ESP SYSTEM CONTROL TOO LONG
LX
LX
5 - 309
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module indicates ESP control lasting longer the 15 seconds.
Possible Causes
HYDRAULIC/BRAKE ISSUE
DYNAMICS SENSOR
INTEGRATED CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: If other DTCs are set they must be repaired before continuing. This DTC must be active for the
results of this test to be valid and this DTC may set while driving under excessive driving conditions.
(6 and 12 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK HYDRAULIC SYSTEM & BRAKE SYSTEM COMPONENT INSTALLATION & FUNCTION
Verify that the Anti-Lock Brakes Module and Hydraulic Control Unit are properly installed.
Verify that the hydraulic system is properly filled and bled.
Verify that the brake system components are installed and functioning properly.
Yes

No
5 - 310
C123C-DYNAMICS SENSOR MOUNTING/INSTALLATION PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
5 - 311
When Monitored:
With vehicle speed above 11 km/h (7 m.p.h.), but not if the sensor signal is invalid.
Or, during skidding.
Or, when driving in reverse.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects implausible Dynamics Sensor values.
Possible Causes
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: If present, diagnose and repair DTC C2114DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW or DTC
C2115DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH before diagnosing this DTC.
(6 and 12 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 312
3.
LX
Yes

No
LX
C123FSTEERING ANGLE SENSOR COMPARATIVE PERFORMANCE
5 - 313
5 - 314
LX
When Monitored:
With ignition on, but not if a checksum failure of the stored offset values is detected.
Or, a CAN time-out failure is detected.
Or, a failure is detected by the Steering Angle Sensor.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that either the calculated steering wheel angle offset or the steering
wheel angle signal measured output is out of range.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE DAMAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

(6 and 15 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
5 - 315
CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR OUTPUT
Start the engine.

Turn the steering wheel so wheels point in a straight ahead position.
With the scan tool, read the Steering Angle Sensor Position.
Is the Steering Angle Sensor Position within 15 degrees?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.
Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor are properly installed.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
5.
CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR OUTPUT WHILE ROTATING THE STEERING WHEEL
With the scan tool, read the Steering Angle Sensor Position while rotating the steering wheel to the right and then
to the left. The Steering Angle Sensor Position should decrease when rotating the steering wheel to the right and
increase when rotating the steering wheel to the left.
Yes
No
Perform the ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
5 - 316
C1240STEERING ANGLE SENSOR OVERTRAVEL PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
5 - 317
When Monitored:
With ignition on, but not if a CAN time out failure is detected.
Or, if a fault is detected by the Steering Angle Sensor.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that the absolute value of the measured steering wheel angle is greater
than 720 degrees.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE DAMAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

(6 and 15 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 318
3.
LX
CHECK STEERING ANGLE CHANGE

With scan tool check steering angle if reading travels to 720 degrees whiling rotating wheel from lock to lock.
NOTE: Sensor damage can occur if wheel is turned over 720 degrees.
Rotate steering wheel to the right and the degrees will decrease and rotating steering wheel to the left the degrees
will increase.
Did the steering angle change accordingly and display less the 720 degrees from lock to lock?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor are properly installed. Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCKSPRING - INSTALLATION.
Yes
>> Replace the Steering Angle Sensor and clear offsets by initializing ECU with wheels pointing straight
ahead, in accordance with the Service Information.
No
LX
5 - 319
C1242G SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
sensor voltage is out of range,
Or, if the vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12.4 m.p.h.) during the actual ignition cycle.
Or, if at least one over spinning wheel is detected.
Or, if one of the control functions is active.
Set Condition:
If the measured acceleration signal is higher than 0.8 g and longer than the specified detection time.
Possible Causes
DYNAMICS SENSOR OR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

(6 and 12 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes

No
>>
NOTE: Vehicles without a Dynamics Sensor replace Anti-Lock Brake Module.

Replace the Dynamics Sensor or Anti-Lock Brake Module in accordance with the Service Information.
5 - 320
LX
C1243G SENSOR NOT INITIALIZED

When Monitored:
Once after ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the stored zero point calibration value of the longitudinal acceleration sensor is invalid.
Possible Causes
DYNAMICS SENSOR NOT CALIBRATED
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
PERFORM ECU INITIALIZATION

Perform ECU initialization with drive test refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD
PROCEDURE).
NOTE: The ECU Initialization process must include driving the vehicle into a 90 turn.
Park the vehicle.
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY IF DTC IS STILL ACTIVE

(6 and 15 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes
>>
NOTE: Vehicles without a Dynamics Sensor replace Anti-Lock Brake Module.

Replace the Dynamics Sensor or Anti-Lock Brake Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No
LX
C2100-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
5 - 321
5 - 322
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects system voltage is below 7.5 volts.
Possible Causes
ECM OR PCM DTCs PRESENT
VEHICLE BATTERY / CHARGING SYSTEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTCS IN THE PCM
With the scan tool, read and record DTCs from the PCM.
Start the engine.
With the scan tool read DTCs from the PCM.
Are any charging system codes present?
Yes
>> Repair the charging system DTC in the PCM.

No
>> Go To 2
2.
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
Start the engine.

Connect voltmeter to vehicle battery.
Is the vehicle battery voltage under 8.2 volts?
No
>> Go To 3
Yes
>> Repair the charging system per service information.

3.
CHARGING POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
With a scan tool read Power Supply Voltage.

Is Power Supply Voltage under 8.2 volts?
No
>> Refer to the INTERMITTENT CONDITION Diagnostic Procedure.

Yes
LX
C2101-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
5 - 323
5 - 324
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects system voltage is above 17 volts.
Possible Causes
ECM/PCM DTCs PRESENT
VEHICLE BATTERY / CHARGING SYSTEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
With the scan tool, read and record DTCs from the ECM/PCM.
Start the engine.
With the scan tool read DTCs from the PCM.
Are any charging system codes present?
Yes
>> Repair the charging system DTC in the ECM/PCM.

Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No
>> Go To 2
2.
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
Start the engine.

Connect voltmeter to vehicle battery.
Is the vehicle battery voltage over 16.8 volts?
No
>> Go To 3
Yes
>> Repair the charging system per service information.

3.
CHARGING POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
With a scan tool read Power Supply Voltage.

Is Power Supply Voltage over 16.8 volts?
No

Yes
LX
C2111-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT LOW
5 - 325
5 - 326
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that the supply voltage for external analog sensors is out of range.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPLACE ANTI-LOCK BRAKES MODULE & VERIFY IF DTC IS STILL ACTIVE

Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform ABS VERIFICATION
TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes
>> Replace the Hydraulic Control Unit in accordance with the Service Information.
No
LX
C2112-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT HIGH
5 - 327
5 - 328
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that the supply voltage for external analog sensors is out of range.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Information. Perform ABS VERIFICATION
TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Yes
No
LX
C2114-DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW
5 - 329
5 - 330
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Dynamics Sensor status changes from initialized to not initialized due to low voltage on the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit.
Possible Causes
(G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
(G94) DYNAMICS SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
(G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO OTHER ABS CIRCUITS
DYNAMICS SENSOR
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK (G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT & (G94) DYNAMICS SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
FUNCTION

Measure the voltage between the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply Circuit
and the (G94) Dynamics Sensor Ground Circuit.
Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK (G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance of the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit for high
resistance.
5.
5 - 331
CHECK (G94) DYNAMICS SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the (G94) Dynamics Sensor Ground circuit

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (G94) Dynamics Sensor Ground circuit for high
resistance.
5 - 332
6.
CHECK (G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO OTHER ABS CIRCUITS
Measure the resistance between the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit and the B46, B15, D21, D65, D64, Z127, D52, D51, G94, B6, B7,
B4. B3, B1, B2, B9, B8, and Z107 circuit in the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Is the resistance below 10k ohms on any of the circuits?
Yes
>> Repair all circuits with a resistance below 10k ohms for a
short to the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit.
No

LX
LX
C2115-DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH
5 - 333
5 - 334
LX
When Monitored:
Upon ignition on, prior to switching the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit power on.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects voltage on the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply circuit when the circuits
power is turned off.
Possible Causes
(G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK (G4) DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply Circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (G4) Dynamics Sensor Supply Circuit for a short
to voltage.
No

LX
C2116-ABS PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY LOW VOLTAGE
5 - 335
5 - 336
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on and the ABS Pump Motor deactivated, but not if supply voltage faults are detected.
Or, if the control is switched off.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects either a low voltage condition when the ABS Pump Motor is activated
or deactivated or a high voltage condition when the ABS Pump Motor is deactivated.
Possible Causes
ABS PUMP MOTOR FUSE OPEN
(A107) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, OPEN, OR HIGH RESISTANCE
(Z903) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN, OR HIGH RESISTANCE
PUMP MOTOR (HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT)
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C2116ABS PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY LOW VOLTAGE
Does the scan tool display: C2116ABS PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY LOW VOLTAGE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE). Diagnostic Test
2.

Visually inspect the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector and wiring harness for damage.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK ABS PUMP MOTOR FUSE
Remove and visually inspect the ABS Pump Motor fuse.

Is the fuse open?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.
CHECK (A107) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit between
ground and the Anti-Lock Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK (A107) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Replace the ABS Pump Motor fuse.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (A107) Fused
B(+) circuit.
NOTE: The test light should illuminate brightly. Compare the
brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (A107) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or high
resistance.
5 - 337
5 - 338
6.
LX
CHECK (Z903) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12 volts, probe the (Z903)

Ground circuit.
NOTE: The test light should illuminate brightly. Compare the
brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.
Does the test light illuminate brightly on both circuits?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair (Z903) circuit for an open or high resistance.

7.
Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Yes
No
LX
C2200-ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE INTERNAL
5 - 339
5 - 340
LX
When Monitored:
Ignition on. The Anti-Lock Brake Module monitors its internal microprocessors for correct operation.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-lock brake module detects an internal fault, the DTC is set.
Possible Causes
ABM - INTERNAL FAULT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
With
Turn
Turn
With
ABM INTERNAL FAILURE DTC PRESENT

the
the
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
scan tool, read DTCs.
scan tool, erase DTCs.
ignition off.
ignition on.
Does the scan tool display ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE INTERNAL FAILURE?
Yes
No

LX
5 - 341
C2202-ORIGINAL VIN MISMATCH/MISSING

When Monitored:
At power up, VIN is read off the CAN bus.
Set Condition:
The VIN stored in the ABM does not match the VIN read off of the CAN bus.
Possible Causes
ABM MOVED FROM DIFFERENT VEHICLE
WRONG VIN PROGRAMMED INTO VEHICLE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C2202-ORIGINAL VIN MISMATCH/MISSING
Perform ECU initialization with drive test. Refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Start the engine.
Does the scan tool display: C2202-ORIGINAL VIN MISMATCH/MISSING?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
WRONG VIN PROGRAMMED INTO VEHICLE
Is the correct VIN programmed into the vehicle?

Yes
No
>> Reprogram the VIN per service information.

5 - 342
C2204-DYNAMICS SENSOR INTERNAL
LX
LX
5 - 343
When Monitored:
sensor voltage is out of range.
Or, if the vehicle speed has exceeded 20 km/h (12.4 m.p.h.) during the actual ignition cycle.
Or, if at least one over spinning wheel is detected.
Or, if one of the control functions is active.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that the Lateral Sensor signal is out of range.
Possible Causes
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

(6 and 12 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 344
3.
LX
CHECK DYNAMICS SENSOR OUTPUT
CAUTION: All previously removed connectors must be connected before test driving the vehicle.
Connect all previously disconnected components and connectors.
Monitor Dynamics Sensor operation while an assistant drives the vehicle.
Is Lateral Sensor output between 0.02 G to 0.16 G and Yaw Sensor output between 1.30 to 5.70
Yes
No
LX
C2205-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INTERNAL
5 - 345
5 - 346
LX
When Monitored:
With ignition on, but not if supply voltage faults are detected.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects that the Steering Angle Sensor is either not calibrated, or not initialized,
or its status changes from initialized to not initialized, or if the sensor sends an internal failure message.
Possible Causes
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NOT INITIALIZED
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C2205-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INTERNAL
(6 and 15 m.p.h.).
Park the vehicle.
Does the scan tool display: C2205-STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INTERNAL?
Yes
No

LX
5 - 347
C2206-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module detects the signal from the gateway module relevant for vehicle characteristic is missing or does not match for a period greater than the specified fault duration.
Possible Causes
FCM / PCM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR A DTC C2206-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH
NOTE: This DTC will be active when a new module is installed until initialization is performed.
Perform ECU initialization with drive test on ABM. Refer to ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Does the scan tool display: C2206-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VERIFY THAT THE FCM/PCM IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY

Check the following data to ensure the FCM/PCM is configured correctly. Engine Displacement (PCM), XWD 4x2,
4x4, all Wheel Drive, (FCM), Axle ratio (FCM), Vehicle Line (FCM), Brake type 0= ABS 1=ESP (FCM).
NOTE: The DTC will be active when a new controller is installed until initialization is performed.
Was the FCM/PCM configured correctly?
Yes
No
>> Reprogram the appropriate module.

Perform ABS or PCM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD
PROCEDURE).
5 - 348
LX
U0002CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The FCM detects a short in either CAN C Bus circuit.
Possible Causes
(D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT
ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG1 ONLY)
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (NAG1 ONLY)
STEERING CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
TEST FOR INTERMITTENT CONDITION

With the scan tool, record and erase FCM DTCs.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times.
With the scan tool, read active FCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display U0002-CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE as active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE INTERNAL SHORT

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace the Antilock Brake Module in accordance with the service information.
LX
3.
5 - 349
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module C1 harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 5.
4.
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG1 ONLY) INTERNAL SHORT

NOTE: If the vehicle is not equipped with a NAG1 controller then skip this step.
Disconnect the Shifter Lever Assembly harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Shifter
Lever Assembly in accordance with the service information.
Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
5.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (NAG1 ONLY) INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Transmission Control Module C2 harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Transmission Control Module in accordance with the service information.
5 - 350
6.
LX
STEERING CONTROL MODULE INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Steering Control Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Steering Control Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
7.

Disconnect the Front Control Module C1 harness connector.
Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
Measure the voltage between the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No
>> Go To 9
9.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit.
Is any resistance present?
Yes
>> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 10
LX
10.
5 - 351
Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for a short to ground.
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)..
No
>> Go To 11
11.
Measure the resistance between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Front
Control Module in accordance with the service information.
5 - 352
LX
U0100LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM

When Monitored:
With the ignition on
Battery voltage between 10 and 16 volts
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module fails to receive bus messages from the ECM or PCM for approximately 500 ms.
Possible Causes
DTCs RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES
CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED
ECM OR PCM POWER AND GROUND
ECM OR PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: Ensure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10 and 16 volts before proceeding.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Perform the Stored Lost Communication test procedure. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
2.
CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCs
With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all CAN C Bus modules.
NOTE: Check for CAN C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs related to the conditions listed above?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to the Table of Contents in the applicable Section.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE ECM OR PCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the ECM or PCM is active on the bus.
Is the ECM or PCM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

LX
4.
5 - 353
CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCs
With the scan tool, select Network View and select Advanced.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the ECM or PCM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the ECM or PCM in accordance with the service information.
Perform POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
No
>> Replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the service information.
5 - 354
LX
U0101LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module fails to receive bus messages from the TCM for approximately 500 ms.
Possible Causes
TCM POWER AND GROUND
PCM DTCs PRESENT
TCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: If present, diagnose and repair DTC U0002CAN C BUS OFF PERFORMANCE, DTC U0146LOST
COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL GATEWAY, or DTC U1502IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH
RECEIVED FROM FCM / BCM before diagnosing this DTC.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Perform the Stored Lost Communication test procedure. Refer to the table of contents in this section.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
5 - 355
VERIFY THAT THE TCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the TCM is active on the bus.
Is the TCM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Refer to the Table of Contents located in this section for a no response test procedure.
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the TCM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the TCM in accordance with the service information.

No
5 - 356
U0125LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DYNAMICS SENSOR
LX
LX
5 - 357
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module fails to receive bus messages from the Dynamics Sensor.
Possible Causes
(D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, OR
OPEN
(D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, OR
OPEN
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: If present, diagnose and repair DTC C2114DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW or DTC
C2115DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH before proceeding.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
5 - 358
3.
CHECK THE (D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (D52) Dynamics Sensor High Data Link circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D52) Dynamics Sensor High Data Link circuit
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (D52) Dynamics Sensor High Data Link
circuit between ground and the Dynamics Sensor harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK THE (D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
circuit between the Dynamics Sensor harness connector and the AntiLock Brakes Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
for an open.
LX
LX
6.
CHECK THE (D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (D51) Dynamics Sensor Low Data Link circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D51) Dynamics Sensor Low Data Link circuit for
a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
CHECK THE (D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (D51) Dynamics Sensor Low Data Link
Yes
a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
CHECK THE (D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Yes
No
an open.
5 - 359
5 - 360
LX
U0126LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module fails to receive bus messages from the Steering Angle Sensor for approximately 500 ms.
Possible Causes
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Refer to the Stored Lost Communication test procedure. Refer to the table of contents in this section.
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
5 - 361
VERIFY THAT THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the Steering Angle Sensor is active on the bus.
Is the Steering Angle Sensor active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the STEERING ANGLE SENSOR?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Steering Angle Sensor in accordance with the service information.
No
5 - 362
LX
U0141LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
FCM is configured correctly
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Front Control Module for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
DTCS RELATED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE, IGNITION, OR VIN MESSAGES
FCM NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
FRONT CONTROL MODULES POWER AND GROUND
MODULE THAT SET THIS DTC
Diagnostic Test
1.
With the scan tool, read active DTCs.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
2.
CHECK FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIVE DTCS
With the scan tool, read all active DTCs from all modules.
NOTE: Check for FCM configuration, CAN B or C hardware electrical, VIN Missing/Mismatch, battery or ignition related DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs to the conditions listed above?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Table of Contents for a complete list of the symptoms.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE FCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics.
Verify that the FCM is active on the bus.
Is the FCM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

Response diagnostic procedures.
LX
4.
CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCS
With the scan tool, select Network Diagnostics.

Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the FCM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the service information
5 - 363
5 - 364
LX
U0146LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL GATEWAY

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module either fails to receive bus messages from the Front Control Module (FCM) for
approximately 500 ms, or it receives invalid messages from the FCM, or it detects messages from the FCM
are of improper data length.
Possible Causes
FCM POWER AND GROUND
FCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Perform the Stored Lost Communication test procedure. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
5 - 365

Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
Yes
>> Replace/update the FCM in accordance with the service information.

No
5 - 366
LX
U0401IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on, one valid CAN message received at least once, and no U0002-CAN C Bus
Off Performance DTC present.
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module detects an incorrect CAN message from the Engine Control Module (ECM).
Possible Causes
ABM CAN BUS DTCS
ENGINE DTCS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DTC U0401-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM
Does the scan tool display: U0401-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE). Diagnostic Test
2.
CHECK IF FCM CAN BUS DTCs ARE PRESENT
With the scan tool, read FCM DTCs.

Are there any FCM CAN BUS DTCs present?
Yes
>> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and diagnose the appropriate symptom.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK IF ENGINE DTCs ARE PRESENT
With the scan tool, read Engine DTCs.

Are there any Engine DTCs present?
Yes
>> Refer to the 9 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS and diagnose the appropriate symptom.
No
>> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-Lock Brake Module pins, terminals, and connectors for
corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all power and ground circuits. If no
problems are found, replace the Anti-Lock Brake Module per the Service Information.
LX
5 - 367
U0429IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM SCM

When Monitored:
With ignition on, but not if low voltage is detected.
Or, if a CAN Bus off event is detected.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects either the sequence or integrity of the Steering Angle Sensor messages
is invalid.
Possible Causes
CAN C BUS CIRCUIT(S) SHORTED
LOAD TOO HIGH ON CAN C BUS
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR DTCs PRESENT
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK IF COMMUNICATION RELATED DTCs ARE PRESENT

Are any Communication related DTCs present?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list of
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
CHECK IF OTHER STEERING ANGLE SENSOR RELATED DTCs ARE PRESENT

Are any other STEERING ANGLE SENSOR DTCs present?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list of
symptoms.
No
>> Replace the Steering Angle Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
5 - 368
U1003ESP CAN C BUS PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
5 - 369
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects too many CAN Bus off events on the Dynamics Sensor Data Link circuits.
Possible Causes
(D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, VOLTAGE, OR OPEN
(D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, VOLTAGE, OR OPEN
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
5 - 370
4.

Yes
No
>> Go To 5
5.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
for an open.
6.

Yes
a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 7
LX
LX
7.

Yes
a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
Yes
No
an open.
5 - 371
5 - 372
U1104CAN C BUS CRC PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
5 - 373
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects an invalid CAN message from the Dynamics Sensor.
Possible Causes
(D52) DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, VOLTAGE, OR OPEN
(D51) DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND, VOLTAGE, OR OPEN
DYNAMICS SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
5 - 374
4.

Yes
No
>> Go To 5
5.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
for an open.
6.

Yes
a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 7
LX
LX
7.

Yes
a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
Yes
No
an open.
5 - 375
5 - 376
LX
U140EIMPLAUSIBLE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION DATA RECEIVED

When Monitored:
Once per ignition cycle, but not during cranking.
Or, if low supply voltage faults are detected.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module either fails to receive vehicle configuration data from the Engine Control Module
(ECM) or Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or the configuration data it receives from the ECM or PCM is
different than that received during the previous ignition cycle.
Possible Causes
ECM OR PCM NOT PROGRAMMED OR PROGRAMMED WITH INCORRECT VIN
ECM OR PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-Lock Brakes Module and the ECM or PCM pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, and terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all
Communication circuits.
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
5 - 377
CHECK IF ECM OR PCM DTCs ARE PRESENT
With the scan tool, read ECM or PCM DTCs.

Are any DTCs present?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
VERIFY CORRECT ECM OR PCM IS INSTALLED IN THE VEHICLE
With the scan tool, verify that the ECM or PCM part number is correct for the vehicle.
Is the correct ECM or PCM installed in the vehicle?
Yes
>> Replace and program the ECM or PCM in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
VERIFY ECM OR PCM IS PROGRAMMED WITH CORRECT VIN
With the scan tool, verify that the ECM or PCM is programmed with the correct VIN.
Is the ECM or PCM programmed with the correct VIN?
Yes
>> Using the scan tool, perform PCM Replaced to update the VIN in the PCM.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
Yes
No
>> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-Lock Brakes Module pins, terminals, and connectors
for corrosion, damage, and terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all Communication circuits. If
no problems are found, replace the Anti-Lock Brakes Module in accordance with the Service Information.
5 - 378
LX
U1501IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED FROM ECM/PCM

When Monitored:
Continuously, with ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects bus messages from the Engine Control Module (ECM) or Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) are of improper data length.
Possible Causes
ECM OR PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-Lock Brakes Module and the ECM or PCM pins, terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, and terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
5 - 379
CHECK IF ECM OR PCM DTCs ARE PRESENT
With the scan tool, read ECM or PCM DTCs.

Are any DTCs present?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
Yes
No
5 - 380
LX
U1502IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED FROM TCM

When Monitored:
Continuously, with ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the Anti-Lock Brakes Module detects bus messages from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) are of
improper data length.
Possible Causes
TCM DTCs PRESENT
TCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Using the schematics as a guide, check the Anti-Lock Brakes Module, the BCM, and the TCM pins,
terminals, and connectors for corrosion, damage, and terminal push out. Pay particular attention to all
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
5 - 381
CHECK IF TCM DTCs ARE PRESENT
With the scan tool, read TCM DTCs.

Are any TCM DTCs present?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s).

Perform TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No
5 - 382
LX
U1503IMPLAUSIBLE MESSAGE DATA LENGTH RECEIVED FROM FCM

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the Anti-Lock Brake Module detects an incorrect CAN message from the Front Control Module (FCM).
Possible Causes
FCM CAN BUS DTCS
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK IF FCM CAN BUS DTCs ARE PRESENT

Are there any FCM CAN BUS DTCs present?
Yes
>> Refer to 8-ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and diagnose the appropriate symptom.
No
STANDARD PROCEDURE
LX
5 - 383
APS VERIFICATION TEST

APS VERIFICATION TEST
1.
1. Make sure that all accessories are turned off and the battery is fully charged.
2. Make sure that all wiring and components are connected.
3. If the module or the pedal assembly was replaced, reprogram the Adjustable Pedals hard stop.
Move the Adjustable Pedals to full forward and continue to apply the switch for 10 seconds to learn the hard
stop.
Repeat for the rearward direction.
4. Verify that the Adjustable Pedals System is disabled with the shifter in reverse and with the speed control
engaged.
5. With the scan tool, clear DTCs in all modules.
6. Move the Adjustable Pedals Switch forward and rearward several times.
7. Turn the ignition off for 5 seconds, then turn the ignition on.
8. Using the scan tool, select view DTCs in all modules.
Are there any DTCs present?
Yes
>> The repair is not complete. Refer to the symptom list and perform the appropriate diagnostic procedure.
No
>> Test complete.
5 - 384
LX
ABS VERIFICATION TEST VER 1
1.
ABS VERIFICATION TEST VER 1
WARNING: Ensure braking capability is available before road testing.

NOTE: If the ABM (Anti-Lock Brake Module), SAS (Steering Angle Sensor), Dynamics Sensor was replaced,
it must be initialized using the scan tool. If not initialized, the ABS indicator will flash continuously with no
DTCs. To initialize the ABM and clear offsets have wheels pointing straight ahead and follow the directions
on the scan tool. The drive test requires a 90 turn. If the Dynamics Sensor was replaced, test drive the
vehicle by turning the vehicle left or right in a curving manner at a velocity between 10 and 25 km/hr (6 and
15 m.p.h.).
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Connect all previously disconnected components and connectors.
3. Ensure all accessories are turned off and the battery is fully charged.
4. Ensure that the ignition is on, with the scan tool, erase all Diagnostic Trouble Codes from All modules. Start the
engine and allow it to run for 2 minutes and fully operate the system that was malfunctioning.
5. Turn the ignition off and wait 5 seconds. Turn the ignition on and using the scan tool, read DTCs from all modules.
6. If any Diagnostic Trouble Codes are present, return to symptom list and trouble shoot new or recurring symptom.
NOTE: For Sensor Signal and Pump Motor faults, the ABM must sense all 4 wheels at 12 km/h (7.5 mph)
before it will extinguish the ABS indicator.
7. If there are no DTCs present after turning ignition on, road test the vehicle for at least 5 minutes. Perform several
anti-lock braking stops.
8. Again, with the scan tool read DTCs. If any DTCs are present, refer to the Table of Contents in the applicable
Section for the diagnostic test procedure and troubleshoot the new or recurring symptom.
9. If there are no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present, and the customers concern can no longer be duplicated, the repair is complete.
Are any DTCs present or is the original concern still present?
Yes
>> Repair is not complete, refer to appropriate symptom.
No
>> Repair is complete.
BRAKES - ABS SERVICE INFORMATION
LX
5 - 385

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH
TRACTION CONTROL - MK25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
TRACTION CONTROL - MK25E . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25 . 387
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM MK25E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE
PROPORTIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
OPERATION
TRACTION CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25 . 390
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM MK25E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE
PROPORTIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
STANDARD PROCEDURE
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING . . . . . 391
SPECIFICATIONS
ABS FASTENER TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
SENSOR-DYNAMICS (ESP)
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
SENSOR-BRAKE PRESSURE - MK25
REMOVAL
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR - SRT8 . . . . . . . . 397
INSTALLATION
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR - SRT8 . . . . . . . . 399
SENSOR-TRAVEL - MK25
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
SENSOR-FRONT WHEEL SPEED
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
REMOVAL
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
INSTALLATION
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
RWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
SENSOR-REAR WHEEL SPEED
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
SWITCH-ESP
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL/ASR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
BOOSTER-ACTIVE BRAKE - MK25
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT - MK25
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT - MK25E
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
5 - 386
LX

DESCRIPTION
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH TRACTION CONTROL - MK25
Early launch vehicles use the MK25 Antilock braking
system (ABS). This system, a combined ABS and
Traction Control system is standard on some vehicles
and optional on others.
This antilock brake system uses components of the
base brake system, but also features the following
components:
Integrated Control Unit (ICU) - Includes Hydraulic
Control Unit (HCU) (2) and Antilock Brake Module (ABM) (3)
Wheel Speed Sensors (WSS) - Four sensors
(one at each wheel)
ABS
The purpose of the antilock brake system (ABS) is to prevent wheel lockup under braking conditions on virtually any
type of road surface. Antilock braking is desirable because a vehicle that is stopped without locking the wheels
retains directional stability and some steering capability. This allows the driver to retain greater control of the vehicle
during braking.
ALL-SPEED TRACTION CONTROL

The traction control system is an all-speed traction control. All-Speed Traction Control enhances mobility and prevents wheel slip when accelerating on slippery surfaces. Depending on how slippery, an automatically activated
Winter Mode feature will select lower transmission up-shift speeds. It also provides a measure of directional stability
control. Using the wheel-speed sensors, it can detect excessive yaw and help keep the car on the intended course,
as for instance, when accelerating around a curve.
With rear-wheel drive, All-Speed Traction Control is effective up to 85 mph (137 km/h); with AWD, All-Speed Traction
Control is effective up to 45 mph (72 km/h), which is common among competitive AWD vehicles with traction control.
LX
5 - 387
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH TRACTION CONTROL - MK25E

Later launch vehicles uses the MK25E Antilock braking system (ABS). This system, a combined ABS and
Traction Control system is standard on some vehicles
and optional on others.
This antilock brake system uses components of the
base brake system, but also features the following
components:
Integrated Control Unit (ICU) - Includes Hydraulic
Control Unit (HCU) (2) and Antilock Brake Module (ABM) (1)
Wheel Speed Sensors (WSS) - Four sensors
(one at each wheel)
ABS
The purpose of the antilock brake system (ABS) is to prevent wheel lockup under braking conditions on virtually any
type of road surface. Antilock braking is desirable because a vehicle that is stopped without locking the wheels
retains directional stability and some steering capability. This allows the driver to retain greater control of the vehicle
during braking.

The traction control system is an all-speed traction control. All-Speed Traction Control enhances mobility and prevents wheel slip when accelerating on slippery surfaces. Depending on how slippery, an automatically activated
Winter Mode feature will select lower transmission up-shift speeds. It also provides a measure of directional stability
control. Using the wheel-speed sensors, it can detect excessive yaw and help keep the car on the intended course,
as for instance, when accelerating around a curve.
With rear-wheel drive, All-Speed Traction Control is effective up to 85 mph (137 km/h); with AWD, All-Speed Traction
Control is effective up to 45 mph (72 km/h), which is common among competitive AWD vehicles with traction control.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25

ESPT (Electronic Stability Program), which includes a Brake Assist feature, is standard on some models and
optional on others. ESP aids the driver in maintaining vehicle directional stability. ESP will do whatever can be done,
within the limits of available traction, to keep the car on course.
ESP
uses the ABS with Traction Control along with the following components to operate:
Active Brake Booster
Brake Pressure Switch
Dynamics (ESP) Sensor
Travel Sensor
Steering Angle Sensor (SAS)
The Active Brake Booster is part of the Power Brake Booster. The Brake Pressure Switch is mounted to the bottom
of the Master Cylinder. The Dynamics Sensor that is mounted under the center console, which is near the center of
gravity of the car for effective sensing. The Travel Sensor is mounted in the Power Brake Booster. The Steering
Angle Sensor is located in the steering column.
5 - 388
LX
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25E

ESPT (Electronic Stability Program), which includes a Brake Assist feature, is standard on some models and
optional on others. ESP aids the driver in maintaining vehicle directional stability. ESP will do whatever can be done,
within the limits of available traction, to keep the car on course.
ESP uses the ABS with Traction Control (MK25E) along with the following components to operate:
Dynamics (ESP) Sensor
Steering Angle Sensor (SAS)
The Dynamics Sensor that is mounted under the center console, which is near the center of gravity of the car for
effective sensing. The Steering Angle Sensor is located in the steering column.
NOTE: Some components that were necessary with earlier ESP systems are not necessary on vehicles
equipped with the MK25E system.
ESP can be turned off by using the ESP Off switch. When the ESP Off switch is depressed and released, turning
ESP off, it does not completely turn the system off. The ESP system reduces torque management to a lesser
amount, but ESP function can still occur if the system perceives the need.
SRT8 (with MK25E ABS) and Police Package equipped vehicles have what is known as three-mode ESP. When the
ESP Off switch is depressed and quickly released, the system turns off ESP like any other model, but if the switch
is held down for a period of five seconds or longer before releasing, the ESP system further reduces the amount of
torque management provided. The system can be returned to normal by briefly pressing and releasing the ESP Off
switch.
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE PROPORTIONING

Vehicles equipped with ABS use electronic variable brake proportioning (EVBP) to balance front-to-rear braking. The
EVBP is used in place of a rear proportioning valve. The EVBP system uses the ABS system to control the slip of
the rear wheels in partial braking range. The braking force of the rear wheels is controlled electronically by using the
inlet and outlet valves located in the integrated control unit (ICU).
EVBP activation is invisible to the customer since there is no pump motor noise or brake pedal feedback.
OPERATION
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM WITH TRACTION CONTROL
ABS
There are a few performance characteristics of the Antilock Brake System (ABS) that may at first seem abnormal,
but in fact are normal. These characteristics are described below.
NORMAL BRAKING
Under normal braking conditions, the ABS functions the same as a standard base brake system with a diagonally
split master cylinder and conventional vacuum assist.
ABS BRAKING
ABS operation is available at all vehicle speeds above 35 mph. If a wheel locking tendency is detected during a
brake application, the brake system enters the ABS mode. During ABS braking, hydraulic pressure in the four wheel
circuits is modulated to prevent any wheel from locking. Each wheel circuit is designed with a set of electric solenoids to allow modulation, although for vehicle stability, both rear wheel solenoids receive the same electrical signal.
Wheel lockup may be perceived at the very end of an ABS stop and is considered normal.
During an ABS event, the integrated control unit (ICU) regulates hydraulic pressure at all four of the vehicles
wheels.
The hydraulic pressure at each front wheel is controlled independently (relative to the amount of slip at each wheel)
in order to maximize the braking force generated by the front brakes. The rear wheels are controlled such that the
hydraulic pressure at either rear wheel does not exceed that of the highest slip rear wheel in order to maintain
vehicle stability.
LX
5 - 389
The system can build and release pressure at each wheel, depending on signals generated by the wheel speed
sensors (WSS) at each wheel and received at the Antilock Brake Module (ABM).
NOISE AND BRAKE PEDAL FEEL
During ABS braking, some brake pedal movement may be felt. In addition, ABS braking will create ticking, popping,
or groaning noises heard by the driver. This is normal and is due to pressurized fluid being transferred between the
master cylinder and the brakes. If ABS operation occurs during hard braking, some pulsation may be felt in the
vehicle body due to fore and aft movement of the suspension as brake pressures are modulated.
At the end of an ABS stop, ABS is turned off when the vehicle is slowed to a speed of 34 mph. There may be a
slight brake pedal drop anytime that the ABS is deactivated, such as at the end of the stop when the vehicle speed
is less than 3 mph or during an ABS stop where ABS is no longer required. These conditions exist when a vehicle
is being stopped on a road surface with patches of ice, loose gravel, or sand on it. Also, stopping a vehicle on a
bumpy road surface activates ABS because of the wheel hop caused by the bumps.
TIRE NOISE AND MARKS
Although the ABS system prevents complete wheel lockup, some wheel slip is desired in order to achieve optimum
braking performance. Wheel slip is defined as follows: 0 percent slip means the wheel is rolling freely and 100
percent slip means the wheel is fully locked. During brake pressure modulation, wheel slip is allowed to reach up to
2530 percent. This means that the wheel rolling velocity is 2530 percent less than that of a free rolling wheel at
a given vehicle speed. This slip may result in some tire chirping, depending on the road surface. This sound should
not be interpreted as total wheel lockup.
Complete wheel lockup normally leaves black tire marks on dry pavement. The ABS will not leave dark black tire
marks since the wheel never reaches a fully locked condition. However, tire marks may be noticeable as light
patched marks.
START-UP AND DRIVE-OFF CYCLES
When the ignition is turned on, a popping sound and a slight brake pedal movement may be noticed. The ABS
warning lamp will also be on for up to 5 seconds after the ignition is turned on.
When the vehicle is first driven off, a humming may be heard or felt by the driver at approximately 1225 mph
(2040 km/h). All of these conditions are a normal function of ABS as the system is performing a diagnosis check.
PREMATURE ABS CYCLING
Symptoms of premature ABS cycling include: clicking sounds from the solenoid valves; pump/motor running; and
pulsations in the brake pedal. Premature ABS cycling can occur at any braking rate of the vehicle and on any type
of road surface. Neither the red BRAKE indicator lamp, nor the amber ABS indicator lamp, illuminate and no faults
are stored in the ABM.
Premature ABS cycling is a condition that needs to be correctly assessed when diagnosing problems with the
antilock brake system. It may be necessary to use a scan tool to detect and verify premature ABS cycling.
Check the following common causes when diagnosing premature ABS cycling: damaged wheel bearings (causing
tone wheel issues); damaged wheel bearing housings where wheel speed sensors mount; and loose wheel speed
sensor mounting bolts.
After diagnosing the defective component, repair or replace it as required. When the component repair or replacement is completed, test drive the vehicle to verify that premature ABS cycling has been corrected.

Traction control systems sense impending wheel spin based on a model of the rate of change of wheel speed under
normal traction conditions. The All-Speed Traction Control uses signals from the same wheel speed sensors as ABS
to determine when to apply the brakes to one or more wheels and when to reduce engine torque output using the
electronic throttle control (ETC) to prevent wheel slip during acceleration. Throttle control makes the vehicle less
reliant on brake application alone to maintain traction, increasing the operating speed range and more closely modulates speed, resulting in smoother operation. With All-Speed Traction Control reducing engine torque as well as
applying the brakes, it is possible to achieve almost seamless torque application at the wheels.
If the wheel slip is severe enough to require throttle intervention, All-Speed Traction Control will reduce engine
torque and sometimes upshift the transmission to avoid the condition. In milliseconds, All-Speed Traction Control
5 - 390
LX
interrogates the engine control system to determine the current torque output, determines how much the torque
output the current conditions will allow, and signals this requirement to the engine control system, which reduces the
torque by partially closing the throttle. With execution of the torque reduction, the brake system reduces brake pressure to make the transition smooth, while maintaining forward progress. By reducing engine power, braking effectiveness is maintained and the system can operate throughout the normal vehicle speed range. That is why the
system is identified as providing all-speed traction control.
With AWD, where front-wheel slip can occur, the degree of throttle intervention is relatively less than with rear-wheel
drive. The difference in speed capability and the degree of throttle intervention between rear-wheel drive and allwheel drive is due to the fact that non-driven front wheels on a rear-wheel drive vehicle give the system an accurate
vehicle speed reference on which to base responses. With AWD, the possibility that the front wheels may also be
slipping makes appropriate corrective action more difficult to determine, thus limiting the effective speed range. Offsetting this is the fact that loss of traction is less likely with AWD because torque is transmitted through all four
wheels to begin with. In actual driving situations on snow or ice, the rear-wheel drive and AWD systems respond in
essentially the same way up to the 45 mph (72 km/h) limit of the AWD system.
When severe wheel slippage is detected (as on snow-covered roads), the Winter Mode feature of All-Speed Traction
Control causes the transmission to up-shift to higher gears at lower speeds than normal. Once a slippery launch
condition is detected, the transmission will remain in Winter Mode for a minimum of three minutes. After that, if the
road is providing normal traction, the system returns to providing normal up-shifts.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25

To determine whether the car is responding properly to cornering commands, ESP uses steering wheel angle, yaw
(turning) rate and lateral acceleration sensors (combined into Dynamics Sensor). Using signals from these sensors,
in addition to individual wheel speed sensor signals, the system determines appropriate brake and throttle actions.
Once initiated, ESP operates much like All-Speed Traction Control, except that the goal is directional stability. If the
vehicle yaw response, or rate of turning, is inconsistent with the steering angle and vehicle speed indications, the
ESP system applies the brakes and, if necessary closes the throttle, to restore control. This occurs whether the
vehicle is turning too rapidly (oversteering) or not rapidly enough (understeering).
ESP notifies the active brake booster electronically of the need for maximum output. A solenoid opens a valve in the
booster that immediately applies maximum boost to the master cylinder. A travel sensor in the booster detects the
rate and travel of the brake pedal. Above the threshold of an extreme brake application, ESP activates the solenoid, thus applying maximum available hydraulic pressure to the brakes. In this type of situation, stopping distance
is determined by the ABS system based on available traction, rather than the amount of force that the driver can
exert on the brake pedal. This becomes the deciding factor in how quickly the vehicle will stop.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM - MK25E

To determine whether the car is responding properly to cornering commands, ESP uses steering wheel angle, yaw
(turning) rate and lateral acceleration sensors (combined into Dynamics Sensor). Using signals from these sensors,
in addition to individual wheel speed sensor signals, the system determines appropriate brake and throttle actions.
Once initiated, ESP operates much like All-Speed Traction Control, except that the goal is directional stability. If the
vehicle yaw response, or rate of turning, is inconsistent with the steering angle and vehicle speed indications, the
ESP system applies the brakes and, if necessary closes the throttle, to restore control. This occurs whether the
vehicle is turning too rapidly (oversteering) or not rapidly enough (understeering).
ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE PROPORTIONING

Upon entry into EVBP the inlet valve for the rear brake circuit is switched ON so that the fluid supply from the
master cylinder is shut off. In order to decrease the rear brake pressure, the outlet valve for the rear brake circuit
is pulsed. This allows fluid to enter the low pressure accumulator (LPA) in the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) resulting
in a drop in fluid pressure to the rear brakes. In order to increase the rear brake pressure, the outlet valve is
switched off and the inlet valve is pulsed. This increases the pressure to the rear brakes. This back-and-forth process will continue until the required slip difference is obtained. At the end of EVBP braking (brakes released) the
fluid in the LPA drains back to the master cylinder by switching on the outlet valve and draining through the inlet
valve check valve. At the same time the inlet valve is switched on in case of another brake application.
The EVBP will remain functional during many ABS fault modes. If both the red BRAKE and amber ABS warning
indicators are illuminated, the EVBP may not be functioning.
LX
5 - 391
STANDARD PROCEDURE
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING
The base brakes hydraulic system must be bled anytime air enters the hydraulic system. The ABS must always be
bled anytime it is suspected that the HCU has ingested air.
Brake systems with ABS must be bled as two independent braking systems. The non-ABS portion of the brake
system with ABS is to be bled the same as any non-ABS system.
The ABS portion of the brake system must be bled separately. Use the following procedure to properly bleed the
brake hydraulic system including the ABS.
NOTE: During the brake bleeding procedure, be sure the brake fluid level remains close to the FULL level in
the master cylinder fluid reservoir. Check the fluid level periodically during the bleeding procedure and add
MoparT DOT 3 brake fluid as required.
BLEEDING
When bleeding the ABS system, the following bleeding sequence must be followed to insure complete and adequate
bleeding.
1. Make sure all hydraulic fluid lines are installed and properly torqued.
2. Connect the scan tool to the diagnostics connector. The diagnostic connector is located under the lower steering
column cover to the left of the steering column.
3. Using the scan tool, check to make sure the ABM does not have any fault codes stored. If it does, clear them.
WARNING: When bleeding the brake system wear
safety glasses. A clear bleed tube (1) must be
attached to the bleeder screws and submerged in
a clear container filled part way with clean brake
fluid (2). Direct the flow of brake fluid away from
yourself and the painted surfaces of the vehicle.
Brake fluid at high pressure may come out of the
bleeder screws when opened.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding is recommended to bleed the base brake system to ensure all air is removed from
system. Manual bleeding may also be used, but additional time is needed to remove all air from system.
4. Bleed the base brake system. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - BASE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
5. Using the scan tool, select ECU VIEW, followed by ABS MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS to access bleeding.
Follow the instructions displayed. When finished, disconnect the scan tool and proceed.
6. Bleed the base brake system a second time. Check brake fluid level in the reservoir periodically to prevent emptying, causing air to enter the hydraulic system.
5 - 392
7. Fill the master cylinder fluid reservoir (1) to the

MAX level.
8. Test drive the vehicle to be sure the brakes are
operating correctly and that the brake pedal does
not feel spongy.
SPECIFICATIONS
ABS FASTENER TORQUE
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES - BASE - SPECIFICATIONS - BRAKE FASTENER TORQUE)
LX
LX
SENSOR-DYNAMICS (ESP)
DESCRIPTION
The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are
housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor.
The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral)
motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the
vehicle is turning - Yaw).
Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor must be
replaced when necessary.
REMOVAL
from battery post.
2. Remove floor console. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - REMOVAL)
5 - 393
5 - 394
3. Disconnect wiring harness (1) connector at sensor

(3).
4. Remove nuts (2) mounting sensor (3) to floor pan
tunnel (4).
5. Remove dynamics sensor (3) from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Install dynamics sensor (3) over studs mounted to
floor pan tunnel (4).
2. Install mounting nuts (2). Tighten nuts to 12 Nm
3. Connect wiring harness (1) connector to module
(3).
4. Install floor console. (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTALLATION)
LX
LX
6. Perform Verification Test and clear any faults.
(Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING)
5 - 395
5 - 396
SENSOR-BRAKE PRESSURE - MK25

REMOVAL
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Disconnect wiring harness (6) connector from pressure sensor (5).
2. Remove pressure sensor (1) on bottom of master

cylinder.
LX
LX
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR - SRT8

1. Disconnect wiring harness connector (4) from pressure sensor (3) below master cylinder (1).
2. Remove pressure sensor (3) from fitting in primary
brake tube (2).
INSTALLATION
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Install pressure sensor (1) on bottom of master cylinder. Tighten sensor to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.)
torque.
5 - 397
5 - 398
2. Connect wiring harness (6) connector to pressure

switch (5).

TESTING)
LX
LX
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR - SRT8

1. Install pressure sensor (3) into fitting on primary
brake tube (2) below master cylinder (1). Tighten
switch to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) torque.
2. Connect wiring harness connector (4) to pressure
sensor (3).

TESTING)
5 - 399
5 - 400
LX
SENSOR-TRAVEL - MK25
REMOVAL
from battery post.
3. Disconnect wiring harness (6) connector at pedal

travel sensor (7) on power brake booster (3).
LX
4. Using a small screwdriver, remove sensor retaining
ring (1).
5. Pull travel sensor straight out of booster.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Before installing new pedal travel sensor, replace O-ring (2) inside booster opening.
Sparingly lubricate NEW O-ring with brake fluid.
Use care not to lose O-ring inside booster.
1. Install NEW sensor retaining ring (1) in groove on
booster.
5 - 401
5 - 402
2. Align sensor keyway with notch in top of sensor

mount on booster housing, then install pedal travel
sensor (2). The sensor will snap into place past the
retaining ring (1).
3. Connect wiring harness (6) connector to pedal

travel sensor (7).

LX
LX
5. Perform Verification Test and clear any faults. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
6. Start vehicle and check for vacuum leaks around sensor. Correct as necessary.
5 - 403
5 - 404
LX
SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE
REMOVAL
WARNING: BEFORE SERVICING THE STEERING COLUMN THE AIRBAG SYSTEM MUST BE DISARMED.
REFER TO ELECTRICAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM FOR SERVICE PROCEDURES. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT OF THE AIRBAG AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: All fasteners must be torqued to specification to ensure proper operation of the steering column.
1. Position the front wheels straight ahead.
2. Fully extend or pull out adjustable steering column.
3. Disconnect the negative (ground) cable from the battery.
4. Remove the airbag (3) from the steering wheel (1).
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER
AIRBAG - REMOVAL).
5. Remove the steering wheel mounting bolt (2) then

remove the steering wheel (1).
LX
6. Remove the clock spring screws (1), (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCKSPRING
REMOVAL).
7. Remove the steering angle sensor (3) screws.
8. Remove the steering angle sensor (1) from the column (2).
5 - 405
5 - 406
INSTALLATION
1. Install the steering angle sensor (1) to the SCCM
(2).
2. Tighten the screws securing the steering angle

sensor (3) to the SCCM.
LX
LX
3. Install the clockspring and tighten the screws (1).
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCKSPRING - REMOVAL)
4. Align the spline on the steering wheel hub to the

steering column shaft.
5. Slide the steering wheel (1) onto the shaft and
install a new mounting bolt (2). Tighten the bolt to
61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.).
6. Install the airbag (3) on the steering wheel (1).

(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER
AIRBAG - INSTALLATION)
5 - 407
5 - 408

(Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
9. Test the operation of the horn, lights and any other
functions that are steering column operated.
LX
LX
5 - 409
SENSOR-FRONT WHEEL SPEED

DESCRIPTION
One wheel speed sensor is mounted to each knuckle.
The wheel speed sensor, using a tone wheel attached
to the hub and bearing (RWD) or front half shaft
(AWD) as a trigger mechanism, communicates with
the Antilock Brake Module, informing it of that wheels
speed.
The head of the front wheel speed sensor used on
Rear-Wheel-Drive (RWD) vehicles mounts to the
inside of the knuckle.
The head of the front wheel speed sensor used on AllWheel-Drive (AWD) vehicles mounts to the rear of the
knuckle.
Vehicles without antilock brakes are equipped with
one front wheel speed sensor. It is attached to the
right front knuckle and is used to provide wheel speed
sense to various vehicle systems.
REMOVAL
AWD
5 - 410
2. Remove sensor cable routing clip (2) from brake

hose bracket (3).
NOTE: To release sensor connector from body wiring harness connector (1) in following step, move
retaining clip (2) as indicated here, then pull sensor connector (3) outward.
3. Remove sensor connector (1) from body wiring

harness connector (4).
LX
LX
5 - 411

(2) to knuckle (4). Pull sensor head out of knuckle.
from knuckle (4).
6. Remove wheel speed sensor (2).
RWD
2. Remove sensor cable routing clip (2) from brake
hose bracket (3).
5 - 412
3. Remove sensor connector (1) from body wiring

harness connector (4).
4. Remove screw (3) fastening wheel speed sensor to

knuckle (1). Pull sensor head (4) out of knuckle.
from brake hose routing bracket (5).
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
AWD
1. Install wheel speed sensor (2) head into knuckle
(4) and install mounting screw (1). Tighten screw to
(3) to knuckle (4).
3. Attach sensor cable routing clip (2) to brake hose

bracket (3).
4. Connect sensor connector (1) to body wiring harness connector (4). When installing connector,
make sure retaining clip on body connector is properly in place and sensor connect cannot be pulled
out.
5. Lower vehicle.
TESTING)
5 - 413
5 - 414
RWD
(2) to brake hose routing bracket (5).
3. Attach sensor cable routing clip (2) to brake hose

bracket (3).
4. Connect sensor connector (1) to body wiring harness connector (4). When installing connector,
make sure retaining clip on body connector is properly in place and sensor connect cannot be pulled
out.
5. Lower vehicle.
TESTING)
LX
LX
5 - 415
SENSOR-REAR WHEEL SPEED

DESCRIPTION
One wheel speed sensor (3) is mounted to the rear of
each rear knuckle. The wheel speed sensor, using a
tone wheel attached to the rear axle half shaft as a
trigger mechanism, communicates with the Antilock
Brake Module, informing it of that wheels speed.
REMOVAL
5 - 416
2. Remove sensor connectors (3 and 4) from body

wiring harness connector (1) located in luggage
compartment floor pan (2).
3. Separate left sensor connector (4) from right sensor connector (3).
4. If removing left sensor, unclip sensor cable (3) from

routing clip near body connector (1).

routing clips (2) along rear of crossmember near
rear differential (3).
LX
LX
routing clip (1) above toe link mount on rear crossmember.
7. Unclip sensor cable (2) from routing clips (3) along
toe link.
8. Unclip sensor cable at rear brake rotor shield (1).

rear knuckle.
10. Remove wheel speed sensor.
5 - 417
5 - 418
INSTALLATION
torque.
4. Clip sensor cable (2) to routing clips (3) along toe

link.
5. If installing left sensor, clip sensor cable (2) to routing clip (1) above toe link mount on rear
crossmember.
LX
LX
6. If installing left sensor, clip sensor cable (1) to routing clips (2) along rear of crossmember near rear
differential (3).
7. If installing left sensor, clip sensor cable (3) to routing clip near body connector (1).
8. Match left sensor connector (4) to right sensor connector (3) to make one connector.
9. Insert sensor connectors (3 and 4) into body wiring
harness connector (1) located in luggage compartment floor pan (2). When installing connector,
make sure retaining clip on body connector is properly in place and sensor connector cannot be
pulled out.
5 - 419
5 - 420
LX
SWITCH-ESP
DESCRIPTION
The ESP Off Switch is located in the Instrument Panel
Switch Pod in the center of the instrument panel. The
ESP Off switch turns the Electronic Stability Program
off whenever the switch is depressed. Depressing the
switch a second time turns the ESP back on. The
switch resets itself each time the ignition is cycled.
When the ESP Off switch is depressed and released,
turning ESP off, it does not completely turn the system
off. The ESP system reduces torque management to a
lesser amount, but ESP function can still occur if the
system perceives the need.
SRT8 (with MK25E ABS) and Police Package
equipped vehicles have what is known as three-mode
ESP. When the ESP Off switch is depressed and
quickly released, the system turns off ESP like any
other model, but if the switch is held down for a period
of five seconds or longer before releasing, the ESP
system further reduces the amount of torque management provided. The system can be returned to normal by briefly pressing and releasing the ESP Off switch.
The ESP Off switch is serviced as part of the Instrument Panel Switch Pod.
REMOVAL
The ESP Off switch is serviced as part of the Instrument Panel Switch Pod. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER/INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD - REMOVAL)
INSTALLATION
The ESP Off switch is serviced as part of the Instrument Panel Switch Pod. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER/INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD - INSTALLATION)
LX
5 - 421
SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL/ASR
DESCRIPTION
The Traction Control Off Switch (TCS OFF or ASR
OFF on Export vehicles) is part of the Instrument
Panel Switch Pod located in the center of the instrument panel. The traction control Off switch turns the
traction control off whenever the switch is depressed.
Depressing the switch a second time turns the traction
control back on. The switch resets itself each time the
ignition is cycled.
The traction control Off switch is serviced as part of
the Instrument Panel Switch Pod.
REMOVAL
The traction control Off switch is serviced as part of the Instrument Panel Switch Pod. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER/INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD - REMOVAL)
INSTALLATION
The traction control Off switch is serviced as part of the Instrument Panel Switch Pod. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER/INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD - INSTALLATION)
5 - 422
LX
BOOSTER-ACTIVE BRAKE - MK25

DESCRIPTION
The active brake booster is part of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP). It is serviced as part of the power brake
booster. For more information on ESP, (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DESCRIPTION).
LX
5 - 423
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

REMOVAL
To remove the HCU, the ICU must be removed and disassembled. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU (INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT) - REMOVAL) (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU
(INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT) - DISASSEMBLY)
INSTALLATION
To install the HCU, assemble and install the ICU. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU (INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT) - ASSEMBLY) (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU (INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT) - INSTALLATION)
5 - 424
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT - MK25

REMOVAL
from battery post.
3. Remove brake tubes (1, 2, 3 and 10) at hydraulic

control unit (5).
LX
LX
4. Remove remaining brake tubes (1 and 3) at

hydraulic control unit.
5. Disconnect 47-way wiring connector (5) at antilock
brake module (ABM) (6).
6. Pull up on unit (5) and remove from mounting

grommets (8).
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove two screws attaching mounting bracket to HCU. Remove bracket.
5 - 425
5 - 426
2. Remove three screws (2) attaching ABM (1).
3. Remove ABM (1) from HCU (3).
LX
LX
ASSEMBLY
1. Align ABM solenoids and pump/motor wiring connector (4) with HCU valves (2) and connector passage. Slide ABM (1) onto HCU (3).
2. Install three screws (2) attaching ABM (1). Tighten

screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.) torque.
3. Attach mounting bracket to HCU. Install two mounting bracket attaching screws and tighten to 11 Nm
4. Install ICU in vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU (INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT) - INSTALLATION)
5 - 427
5 - 428
INSTALLATION
1. Install unit (5), pushing mounting bracket down into
mounting grommets (8) located in body of vehicle.
2. Connect 47-way wiring connector (5) at antilock

brake module (ABM) (6).
3. Install brake tubes to rear (1 and 3) at hydraulic
control unit. Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177 in.
lbs.) torque.
LX
LX
4.
Install brake tubes (1, 2, 3 and 10) at hydraulic

control unit (5). Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177
in. lbs.) torque.

7. Fill and bleed (1) base brake hydraulic system and

ABS. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
TESTING)
5 - 429
5 - 430
LX
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT - MK25E

DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Later launch vehicles use the MK25E
Antilock Braking System (ABS). The MK25E ICU
can be easily identified by the brake tube ports on
two sides as shown instead of on one side as
used on previous systems.
The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (2) and the Antilock
Brake Module (ABM) (1) used with this antilock brake
system are combined (integrated) into one unit, which
is called the Integrated Control Unit (ICU).
The ICU (1) is located in the engine compartment,

mounted to a bracket that is attached to the right side
rail through the use of isolation grommets (2).
The ABS with traction control ICU consists of the following components: the ABM, eight (build/decay) solenoid
valves (four inlet valves and four outlet valves), two traction control solenoid valves, two hydraulic shuttle valves,
valve block, fluid accumulators, a pump, and an electric pump/motor.
The replaceable components of the ICU are the HCU and the ABM. No attempt should be made to service any
components of the HCU or ABM.
For additional information on the ABM, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/ANTILOCK
BRAKE MODULE - DESCRIPTION).
LX
REMOVAL
from battery post.

(from master cylinder) at hydraulic control unit (7).
4. Remove remaining brake tubes (2, 3, 5, 6) at
hydraulic control unit (7).
5 - 431
5 - 432
NOTE: Use this figure in the following step to

release the ABM harness connector cover. It
shows the location of the release tabs.
5. Disconnect ABM harness connector from antilock

brake module (ABM). To do so:
a. Depress tabs on each side of connector cover,
then
b. Pull outward and upward on lower half of cover
until it locks into position pointing straight outward (2). Connector can then be pulled straight
outward off ABM (1).
6. Pull up on unit (1) and remove from mounting

grommets (2) in body side rail.
LX
LX
5 - 433
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove two screws attaching the mounting bracket to the HCU. Remove the bracket.
2. Remove four screws (1) attaching ABM (2) to HCU.
3. Separate ABM (1) from HCU (2).
ASSEMBLY
1. Clean any debris off the mating surfaces of the HCU and ABM.
CAUTION: When installing new O-rings or solenoid valve stem seals, do not use any type of lubricant.
5 - 434
2. If the seals (1) on the solenoid valve stems (2) are

not new, replace them all. Each of the solenoid
valve stem seals must be new to keep out moisture
and debris; do not reuse solenoid valve stem
seals.
3. Replace the pump/motor connector O-ring (1) if it is

not new. Be sure the O-ring is properly seated in
the mounting groove (2).
4. Align components and install the ABM (1) on the

HCU (2).
LX
LX
5 - 435
5. Install the four screws (1) attaching the ABM (2) to

the HCU. Tighten the mounting screws to 2 Nm
(17 in. lbs.).
6. Attach the mounting bracket to the HCU. Install two mounting bracket attaching screws and tighten to 11 Nm (97
in. lbs.).
7. Install the ICU in the vehicle. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES/HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL/ICU (INTEGRATED CONTROL
UNIT) - INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION
1. Install unit (1), pushing mounting bracket down into
mounting grommets (2) located in body side rail.
5 - 436
CAUTION: Before installing the ABM harness connector (2) on the ABM (1), be sure the seal is properly installed in the connector.
2. Insert ABM harness connector (2) into socket of
ABM (1) and close cover, locking connector in
place.
3. Install left (2) and right (1) rear brake tubes at

hydraulic control unit (4). Tighten tube nuts to 20
4. Install left (2) and right (3) brake tubes at hydraulic

control unit (4). Tighten tube nuts to 20 Nm (177
in. lbs.) torque.
LX
LX
5.
Install primary (4) and secondary (1) brake tubes

at hydraulic control unit (7). Tighten tube nuts to 20

8. Fill and bleed (1) base brake hydraulic system and

ABS. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
9. Perform Diagnostic Verification Test and clear any
faults. (Refer to 5 - BRAKES - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING)
5 - 437
COOLING
LX
7-1
COOLING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
COOLING
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS (OBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
COOLING SYSTEM - TESTING FOR LEAKS . . . . 7
PRELIMINARY CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
STANDARD PROCEDURE
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM - ALL
ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
COOLING SYSTEM FILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
REFILLING COOLING SYSTEM - 3.0L
DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ADDING ADDITIONAL COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

COOLANT LEVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM - ALL
ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
COOLING SYSTEM CLEANING/REVERSE
FLUSHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
FILL VOLUMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SPECIAL TOOLS
COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ACCESSORY DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ENGINE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TRANSMISSION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7-2
COOLING
LX
COOLING
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
The
cooling system consists of :

Radiator
Electric Cooling fan
Hydraulic Cooling Fan (Diesel Engine)
Fan shroud
Radiator pressure cap
Thermostat
Coolant reserve/overflow system
EGR Cooler (Diesel Engine)
Transmission oil cooler (if equipped with an automatic transmission)
Coolant
Water pump
Hoses and hose clamps
3.0L DIESEL
COOLING FLOW - 3.0L DIESEL

The cooling system regulates engine operating temperature. It allows the engine to reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, maintains normal operating temperature and prevents overheating.
COOLING
LX
7-3
The cooling system also provides a means of heating the passenger compartment. The cooling system is pressurized and uses a centrifugal water pump to circulate coolant throughout the system. A separate and remotely
mounted, pressurized coolant tank using a pressure/vent cap is used.
COOLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

The
cooling system consists of:

Charge Air Cooler
Hydraulic Cooling Fans
A aluminum-core radiator with plastic side tanks
A separate pressurized coolant bottle
A pressure/vent cap on the coolant bottle
Thermostat
Coolant
Coolant temperature gauge
Water pump
Hoses and hose clamps
OPERATION
COOLING FLOW - 2.7L ENGINE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RADIATOR
COOLANT RECOVERY BOTTLE
HEATER CORE
CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER BLOCK
WATER PUMP
THERMOSTAT
7-4
COOLING
LX
COOLING FLOW - 3.5L W/ENGINE OIL COOLER ENGINE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RADIATOR
HOT BOTTLE/COOLANT RECOVERY BOTTLE
HEATER CORE
CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER BLOCK
WATER PUMP
ENGINE OIL COOLER
THERMOSTAT
COOLING
LX
COOLING FLOW - 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE

1 - HOT BOTTLE/COOLANT RECOVERY BOTTLE
CHARGE AIR COOLER - DIESEL ENGINE
2 - HEATER CORE
3 - CYLINDER HEAD
4 - CYLINDER BLOCK
5 - WATER PUMP
6 - THERMOSTAT
7 - RADIATOR
7-5
7-6
COOLING
LX
COOLING FLOW - 3.0L DIESEL

The cooling system regulates engine operating temperature. It allows the engine to reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible. It also maintains normal operating temperature and prevents overheating.
The cooling system also provides a means of heating the passenger compartment and cooling the automatic transmission fluid (if equipped). The cooling system is pressurized and uses a centrifugal water pump to circulate coolant
throughout the system.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS (OBD)
COOLING SYSTEM RELATED DIAGNOSTICS
The powertrain control module (PCM) has been programmed to monitor certain cooling system components:
If the engine has remained cool for too long a period, such as with a stuck open thermostat, a Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) can be set.
If an open or shorted condition has developed in the relay circuit controlling the electric radiator fan, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) can be set.
If the problem is sensed in a monitored circuit often enough to indicated an actual problem, a DTC is stored. The
DTC will be stored in the PCM memory for eventual display to the service technician. (Refer to 25 - EMISSIONS
CONTROL - DESCRIPTION).
ACCESSING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

To read DTCs and to obtain cooling system data, (Refer to 25 - EMISSIONS CONTROL - DESCRIPTION).
ERASING TROUBLE CODES

After the problem has been repaired, use the scan tool to erase a DTC. Refer to the appropriate Powertrain Diagnostic Procedures service information for operation of the scan tool.
LX
COOLING
7-7
COOLING SYSTEM - TESTING FOR LEAKS

ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT METHOD
A leak detection additive is available through the parts
department that can be added to cooling system. The
additive is highly visible under ultraviolet light (black
light) (1). Pour one ounce of additive into cooling system. Place heater control unit in HEAT position. Start
and operate engine until the radiator upper hose is
warm to touch. Aim the commercially available black
light tool at components to be checked. If leaks are
present, black light will cause the additive to glow a
bright green color.
The black light can be used in conjunction with a pressure tester to determine if any external leaks exist.
PRESSURE TESTER METHOD

The engine should be at normal operating temperature. Recheck the system cold if the cause of coolant
loss is not located during the warm engine examination.
WARNING: Hot, pressurized coolant can cause
injury by scalding.
Carefully remove the radiator pressure cap from the
filler neck and check coolant level. Push down on cap
to disengage it from the stop tabs. Wipe the inside of
filler neck and examine the lower inside sealing seat
for nicks, cracks, paint, dirt and solder residue. Inspect
the radiator-to- reserve/overflow tank hose for internal
obstructions. Insert a wire through the hose to be sure
it is not obstructed.
Inspect cams on the outside of filler neck. If the cams
are damaged, seating of the pressure cap valve and
tester seal will be affected.
Attach pressure tester (7700 or an equivalent) (1) to
radiator filler neck.
Operate tester pump to apply 124.1 kPa (18 psi) pressure to system. If hoses enlarge excessively or bulge while testing, replace as necessary. Observe the gauge
pointer and determine the condition of the cooling system according to the following criteria:
Holds Steady: If the pointer remains steady for two minutes, serious coolant leaks are not present in system. However, there could be an internal leak that does not appear with normal system test pressure. If it is certain that
coolant is being lost and leaks cannot be detected, inspect for interior leakage or perform Internal Leakage Test.
Refer to INTERNAL LEAKAGE INSPECTION .
7-8
COOLING
LX
Drops Slowly: Indicates a small leak or seepage is occurring. Examine all connections for seepage or slight leakage with a flashlight. Inspect radiator, hoses, gasket edges and heater. Seal small leak holes with a Sealer Lubricant
(or equivalent). Repair leak holes and inspect system again with pressure applied.
Drops Quickly: Indicates that serious leakage is occurring. Examine system for external leakage. If leaks are not
visible, inspect for internal leakage. Large radiator leak holes should be repaired by a reputable radiator repair shop.
INTERNAL LEAKAGE INSPECTION

Remove engine oil pan drain plug and drain a small amount of engine oil. If coolant is present in the pan, it will
drain first because it is heavier than oil. An alternative method is to operate engine for a short period to churn the
oil. After this is done, remove engine dipstick and inspect for water globules. Also inspect the transmission dipstick
for water globules and the transmission fluid cooler for leakage.
WARNING: With radiator pressure tester tool installed on radiator, do not allow pressure to exceed 145 kpa
(21 psi). Pressure will build up quickly if a combustion leak is present. To release pressure, rock tester from
side to side. When removing tester, do not turn tester more than 1/2 turn if system is under pressure.
Operate the engine without the pressure cap on the radiator until the thermostat opens. Attach a Pressure Tester to
filler neck. If pressure builds up quickly it indicates a combustion leak exists. This is usually the result of a cylinder
head gasket leak or crack in engine. Repair as necessary.
If there is not an immediate pressure increase, pump the Pressure Tester. Do this until indicated pressure is within
system range of 124.1 kPa (18 psi). Fluctuation of gauge pointer indicates compression or combustion leakage into
cooling system.
Because the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter, do not remove spark plug cables or short out cylinders
to isolate compression leak.
If the needle on the dial of pressure tester does not fluctuate, race engine a few times to check for an abnormal
amount of coolant or steam. This would be emitting from exhaust pipe. Coolant or steam from exhaust pipe may
indicate a faulty cylinder head gasket, cracked engine cylinder block or cylinder head.
A convenient check for exhaust gas leakage into cooling system is provided by a commercially available Block Leak
Check tool. Follow manufacturers instructions when using this product.
COMBUSTION LEAKAGE TEST - WITHOUT PRESSURE TESTER

DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If the solution is clean, drain the coolant into a clean container for reuse.
WARNING: Do not remove cylinder block drain plugs or loosen radiator draincock with system hot and
under pressure. Serious burns from coolant can occur.
Drain sufficient coolant to allow thermostat removal (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT - REMOVAL) for 2.7L/3.5L engine, (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT REMOVAL) for 5.7L engine. Remove accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS - REMOVAL).
Add coolant to radiator to bring level to within 6.3 mm (1/4 in) of the top of the thermostat housing.
CAUTION: Avoid overheating. Do not operate engine for an excessive period of time. Open draincock immediately after test to eliminate boil over.
Start engine and accelerate rapidly three times, to approximately 3000 rpm while observing coolant. If internal
engine combustion gases are leaking into cooling system, bubbles will appear in coolant. If bubbles do not appear,
internal combustion gas leakage is not present.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM OVERHEATING
Establish what driving conditions caused the complaint. Abnormal loads on the cooling system such as the following
may be the cause:
Prolonged idle
Very high ambient temperature
COOLING
LX
7-9
Slight tail wind at idle

Slow traffic
Traffic jams
High speed or steep grades
Driving techniques that avoid overheating are:

Idle with A/C off when temperature gauge is at end of normal range.
Increasing engine speed for more air flow is recommended.
TRAILER TOWING:
Consult Trailer Towing section of owners manual. Do not exceed limits.
RECENT SERVICE OR ACCIDENT REPAIR:
Determine if any recent service has been performed on vehicle that may effect cooling system. This may be:
Engine adjustments (incorrect timing)
Slipping engine accessory drive belt(s)
Brakes (possibly dragging)
Changed parts. Incorrect water pump or pump rotating in wrong direction due to belt not correctly routed
Reconditioned radiator or cooling system refilling (possibly under filled or air trapped in system).
NOTE: If investigation reveals none of the previous items as a cause for an engine overheating complaint,
refer to COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CHART BELOW.
These charts are to be used as a quick-reference only. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CHART
7 - 10
COOLING
LX
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CHART

CONDITION
TEMPERATURE GAUGE READS
LOW
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
1. Has a Diagnostic Trouble Code

(DTC) been set indicating a stuck
open thermostat?
1. (Refer to 25 - EMISSIONS
CONTROL - DESCRIPTION).
Replace thermostat if necessary.
2. Is the temperature sending unit

connected?
2. Check the temperature sensor

connector. (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING). Repair connector if
necessary.
3. Is the temperature gauge

operating OK?
3. Check gauge operation. (Refer to

8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER/ENGINE
TEMPERATURE GAUGE DESCRIPTION) . Repair as
necessary.
4. Coolant level low in cold ambient

temperatures accompanied with
poor heater performance.
4. Check coolant level in the coolant

reserve/overflow tank or degas
bottle and the radiator. Inspect
system for leaks. Repair leaks as
necessary. Refer to the Coolant
section of the manual text for
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
associated with removing the
radiator cap.
5. Improper operation of internal

heater doors or heater controls.
5. Inspect heater and repair as

necessary. (Refer to 24 - HEATING
& AIR CONDITIONING DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
COOLING
LX
CONDITION
TEMPERATURE GAUGE READS
HIGH OR THE COOLANT
WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATES.
COOLANT MAY OR MAY NOT BE
LOST OR LEAKING FROM THE
COOLING SYSTEM
7 - 11
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
1. Trailer is being towed, a steep

hill is being climbed, vehicle is
operated in slow moving traffic, or
engine is being idled with very high
ambient (outside) temperatures and
the air conditioning is on. Higher
altitudes could aggravate these
conditions.
1. This may be a temporary

condition and repair is not
necessary. Turn off the air
conditioning and attempt to drive the
vehicle without any of the previous
conditions. Observe the temperature
gauge. The gauge should return to
the normal range. If the gauge does
not return to the normal range,
determine the cause for overheating
and repair. Refer to Possible
Causes (2-18).
2. Is the temperature gauge reading

correctly?
2. Check gauge. (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT

TESTING). Repair as necessary.
3. Is the temperature warning

illuminating unnecessarily?
3. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
4. Coolant low in coolant reserve/

overflow tank and radiator?
4. Check for coolant leaks and

repair as necessary. (Refer to 7 COOLING - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING).
5. Pressure cap not installed tightly.

If cap is loose, boiling point of
coolant will be lowered. Also refer
to the following Step 6.
5. Tighten cap
6. Poor seals at the radiator cap.
6. (a) Check condition of cap and

cap seals. Refer to Radiator Cap.
Replace cap if necessary.
(b) Check condition of radiator filler
neck or degas bottle. If neck is bent
or damaged, replace radiator or
degas bottle.
7. Coolant level low in radiator but

not in coolant reserve/overflow tank.
This means the radiator is not
drawing coolant from the coolant
reserve/overflow tank as the engine
cools
7. (a) Check condition of radiator

cap and cap seals. Refer to
Radiator Cap in this Group. Replace
cap if necessary.
(b) Check condition of radiator filler
neck. If neck is bent or damaged,
replace radiator.
(c) Check condition of the hose from
the radiator to the coolant tank. It
should fit tight at both ends without
any kinks or tears. Replace hose if
necessary.
(d) Check coolant reserve/overflow
tank and tanks hoses for blockage.
Repair as necessary.
8. Incorrect coolant concentration
8. Check coolant. (Refer to

LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/
FLUID TYPES - DESCRIPTION)
7 - 12
COOLING
CONDITION
9. Coolant not flowing through

system
LX
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
9. Check for coolant flow at radiator

filler neck with some coolant
removed, engine warm and
thermostat open. Coolant should be
observed flowing through radiator. If
flow is not observed, determine
area of obstruction and repair as
necessary.
10. Radiator or A/C condenser fins
are dirty or clogged.
10. Remove insects and debris.

(Refer to 7 - COOLING STANDARD PROCEDURE).
11. Radiator core is corroded or

plugged.
11. Have radiator re-cored or

replaced.
12. Dragging brakes
12. Check and correct as necessary.

(Refer to 5 - BRAKES DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
13. Fuel or ignition system

problems.
13. Refer to 14 - Fuel System or 8 Electrical for diagnosis and testing

procedures.
14. Bug screen or cardboard is

being , reducing airflow.
14. Remove bug screen or

cardboard.
15. Thermostat partially or

completely shut.
15. Check thermostat operation and

replace as necessary. (Refer to 7 COOLING/ENGINE/ENGINE
COOLANT THERMOSTAT REMOVAL).
16. Cooling fan(s) not operating

properly.
16. Check cooling fan drive

operation. Refer to appropriate
Diagnostic Information.
17. Cylinder head gasket leaking.
17. Check for cylinder head gasket

leaks. (Refer to 7 - COOLING DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
18. Heater core leaking.
18. Check heater core for leaks.

(Refer to 24 - HEATING & AIR
CONDITIONING - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING) . Repair as necessary.
COOLING
LX
7 - 13
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
TEMPERATURE GAUGE READING

IS INCONSISTENT (FLUCTUATES,
CYCLES, OR IS ERRATIC
1. During cold weather operation,

with the heater in the high position,
the gauge reading may drop
slightly.
1. During cold weather operation,

with the heater in the high position,
the gauge reading may drop slightly.
2. Temperature gauge or engine

mounted gauge sensor defective or
shorted. Also, corroded or loose
wiring in this circuit.
2. Check operation of gauge and

repair if necessary. (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
TESTING).
3. Gauge reading rises when

vehicle is brought to a stop after
heavy use (engine still running)
3. A normal condition. No correction

is necessary. Gauge should return
to normal range after vehicle is
driven.
4. Gauge reading high after

re-starting a warmed up (hot)
engine.
4. A normal condition. No correction

is necessary. The gauge should
return to normal range after a few
minutes of engine operation.
5. Coolant level low in radiator (air

will build up in the cooling system
causing the thermostat to open
late).
5. Check and correct coolant leaks.

(Refer to 7 - COOLING DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
6. Cylinder head gasket leaking

allowing exhaust gas to enter
cooling system causing a
thermostat to open late.
6. (a) Check for cylinder head

gasket leaks. (Refer to 7 COOLING - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING).
(b) Check for coolant in the engine
oil. Inspect for white steam emitting
from the exhaust system. Repair as
necessary.
PRESSURE CAP IS BLOWING

OFF STEAM AND/OR COOLANT
TO COOLANT TANK.
TEMPERATURE GAUGE READING
MAY BE ABOVE NORMAL BUT
NOT HIGH. COOLANT LEVEL MAY
BE HIGH IN COOLANT RESERVE/
OVERFLOW TANK
7. Water pump impeller loose on

shaft.
7. Check water pump and replace

as necessary. (Refer to 7 COOLING/ENGINE/WATER PUMP REMOVAL).
8. Loose accessory drive belt.

(water pump slipping)
8. Check and correct as necessary.

(Refer to 7 - COOLING/
ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS
- DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
9. Air leak on the suction side of the

water pump allows air to build up in
cooling system causing thermostat
to open late.
9. Locate leak and repair as

necessary.
1. Pressure relief valve in radiator

cap is defective.
1. Check condition of radiator cap

and cap seals. (Refer to 7 COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR
PRESSURE CAP - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING). Replace cap as
necessary.
7 - 14
COOLING
LX
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
COOLANT LOSS TO THE

GROUND WITHOUT PRESSURE
CAP BLOWOFF. GAUGE READING
HIGH OR HOT
1. Coolant leaks in radiator, cooling

system hoses, water pump or
engine.
1. Pressure test and repair as

necessary. (Refer to 7 - COOLING DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
DETONATION OR PRE-IGNITION
(NOT CAUSED BY IGNITION
SYSTEM). GAUGE MAY OR MAY
NOT BE READING HIGH
1. Engine overheating.
1. Check reason for overheating

and repair as necessary.
2. Freeze point of coolant not

correct. Mixture is too rich or too
lean.
2. Check coolant concentration.

(Refer to LUBRICATION &
MAINTENANCE/FLUID TYPES DESCRIPTION).
HOSE OR HOSES COLLAPSE

WHILE ENGINE IS RUNNING
1. Vacuum created in cooling

system on engine cool-down is not
being relieved through coolant
reserve/overflow system.
1. (a) Radiator cap relief valve

stuck. (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
ENGINE/RADIATOR PRESSURE
CAP - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
Replace if necessary
(b) Hose between coolant
reserve/overflow tank and radiator is
kinked. Repair as necessary.
(c) Vent at coolant reserve/overflow
tank is plugged. Clean vent and
repair as necessary.
(d) Reserve/overflow tank is
internally blocked or plugged. Check
for blockage and repair as
necessary.
NOISY COOLING FAN
1. Fan blades loose.
1. Replace fan blade assembly

(Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/
RADIATOR FAN - REMOVAL).
2. Fan blades striking a surrounding

object.
2. Locate point of fan blade contact

and repair as necessary.
3. Air obstructions at radiator or air

conditioning condenser.
3. Remove obstructions and/or

clean debris or insects from radiator
or A/C condenser.
COOLING
LX
CONDITION
INADEQUATE HEATER
PERFORMANCE. THERMOSTAT
FAILED IN OPEN POSITION
POSSIBLE CAUSES
7 - 15
CORRECTION
1. Has a Diagnostic trouble Code

(DTC) been set?
1. (Refer to 25 - EMISSIONS
CONTROL - DESCRIPTION) for
correct procedures and replace
thermostat if necessary
2. Coolant level low
2. (Refer to 7 - COOLING STANDARD PROCEDURE).
3. Obstructions in heater hose/

fittings
3. Remove heater hoses at both

ends and check for obstructions
4. Heater hose kinked
4. Locate kinked area and repair as

necessary
5. Water pump is not pumping

water to/through the heater core.
When the engine is fully warmed
up, both heater hoses should be
hot to the touch. If only one of the
hoses is hot, the water pump may
not be operating correctly or the
heater core may be plugged.
Accessory drive belt may be
slipping causing poor water pump
operation.
5. (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/
WATER PUMP - REMOVAL) for
2.7L engine, (Refer to 7 COOLING/ENGINE/WATER PUMP REMOVAL) for 3.5L engine, (Refer
to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/WATER
PUMP - REMOVAL) for 5.7L/6.1L
engine. If a slipping belt is detected,
(Refer to 7 - COOLING/
ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS
- DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If
heater core obstruction is detected,
(Refer to 24 - HEATING & AIR
CONDITIONING/PLUMBING/
HEATER CORE - REMOVAL).
STEAM IS COMING FROM THE

FRONT OF VEHICLE NEAR THE
GRILL AREA WHEN WEATHER IS
WET, ENGINE IS WARMED UP
AND RUNNING, AND VEHICLE IS
STATIONARY. TEMPERATURE
GAUGE IS IN NORMAL RANGE
1. During wet weather, moisture

(snow, ice or rain condensation) on
the radiator will evaporate when the
thermostat opens. This opening
allows heated water into the
radiator. When the moisture
contacts the hot radiator, steam
may be emitted. This usually occurs
in cold weather with no fan or
airflow to blow it away.
1. Occasional steam emitting from

this area is normal. No repair is
necessary.
COOLANT COLOR
1. Coolant color is not necessarily

an indication of adequate corrosion
or temperature protection. Do not
rely on coolant color for determining
condition of coolant.
1. (Refer to LUBRICATION &

MAINTENANCE/FLUID TYPES DESCRIPTION) Adjust coolant
mixture as necessary.
COOLANT LEVEL CHANGES IN

COOLANT RESERVE/OVERFLOW
TANK. TEMPERATURE GAUGE IS
IN NORMAL RANGE
1. Level changes are to be

expected as coolant volume
fluctuates with engine temperature.
If the level in the tank was between
the MIN. and MAX. marks at normal
operating temperature, the level
should return to within that range
after operation at elevated
temperatures.
1. A normal condition. No repair is

necessary.
7 - 16
COOLING
LX
STANDARD PROCEDURE
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM - ALL ENGINES
WARNING: Do not remove cylinder block drain
plugs or loosen radiator draincock with system
hot and under pressure. Serious burns from coolant can occur.
NOTE: Typical drain plug shown in illustration.
DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If solution is clean,
drain coolant into a clean container for reuse.
1. Remove radiator pressure cap.
2. Loosen radiator petcock.
3. Remove drain plug (1).
COOLING SYSTEM FILLING
The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. In
order to maintain the required protection for these components and cooling system performance, only use the
appropriate fluid (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/FLUID TYPES - DESCRIPTION) when servicing the
vehicle. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain
a freeze point of -37 C (-35 F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh
properly mixed coolant solution.
WARNING: Make sure engine cooling system is cool before removing pressure cap or any hose. severe
personal injury may result from escaping hot coolant. The cooling system is pressurized when hot.
LX
COOLING
7 - 17
NOTE: Cooling system fill procedure is critical to overall cooling system performance.
1. Close radiator draincock. Hand tighten only.
2. Install engine block drain plugs, if removed. Coat the threads with MoparT Thread Sealant with Teflon.
WARNING: When installing drain hose to air bleed valve, route hose away from accessory drive belts,
accessory drive pulleys, and electric cooling fan motors.
NOTE: It may be necessary to install a bleed fitting on the 5.7L engine.
3. Attach a 1.5 - 2 m (4 - 6 ft.) long 6.35 mm (1/4 inch.) ID clear hose to bleeder fitting
Bleed Valve Location (2.7L): Located on the water outlet connector at the front of engine.
Bleed Valve Location (3.5L): Located on the lower intake manifold, left of center and below the upper intake
plenum.
Plug Location (5.7L/6.1L): Located on the front of the water outlet housing at the front of engine.
4. Route hose (2) away from the accessory drive belt, drive pulleys and electric cooling fan. Place the other end of
hose (2) into a clean container. The hose will prevent coolant from contacting the accessory drive belt when
bleeding the system during the refilling operation.
NOTE: It is imperative that the cooling system air bleed valve be opened before any coolant is added to the
cooling system. Failure to open the bleed valve first will result in an incomplete fill of the system.
5. 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE - Install a threaded and barbed fitting (1/4 - 18 npt) into water pump housing.
6. Attach Tool 8195, Filling Aid Funnel to pressure bottle filler neck.
7. Using hose pinch-off pliers, pinch overflow hose (3) that connects between the two chambers of the coolant
bottle (2).
8. Open bleed fitting.
CAUTION: Do not mix coolants. If coolant is used other than specified, a reduction in corrosion protection
will occur.
9. Pour the antifreeze mixture (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/FLUID TYPES - DESCRIPTION) into the
larger section of Filling Aid Funnel (the smaller section of funnel is to allow air to escape). For system capacity,
(Refer to 7 - COOLING - SPECIFICATIONS).
10. Slowly fill the cooling system until a steady stream of coolant flows from the hose attached to the bleed valve.
11. Close the bleed valve and continue filling system to the top of the Tool 8195, Filling Aid Funnel.
12. Remove pinch-off pliers from overflow hose.
13. Allow the coolant in Filling Funnel to drain into overflow chamber of the pressure bottle.
14. Remove Tool 8195, Filling Aid Funnel. Install cap on coolant pressure bottle.
15. Remove hose from bleed valve.
16. 5.7L/6.1L ENGINE - Install fitting into thermostat housing. Coat the threads with MoparT Thread Sealant with
Teflon.
17. Start engine and run at 1500 - 2000 RPM for 30 minutes.
NOTE: The engine cooling system will push any remaining air into the coolant bottle within about an hour
of normal driving. As a result, a drop in coolant level in the pressure bottle may occur. If the engine cooling
system overheats and pushes coolant into the overflow side of the coolant bottle, this coolant will be
sucked back into the cooling system ONLY IF THE PRESSURE CAP IS LEFT ON THE BOTTLE. Removing
the pressure cap breaks the vacuum path between the two bottle sections and the coolant will not return to
cooling system.
18. Shut off engine allow it to cool down for 30 minutes. This permits coolant to be drawn into the pressure chamber.
19. With engine COLD, observe coolant level in pressure chamber. Coolant level should be within MIN and MAX
marks. Adjust coolant level as necessary.
7 - 18
COOLING
LX
NOTE: The coolant bottle has two chambers. Coolant will normally only be in the inboard of the two. The
outboard chamber is only to recover coolant in the event of an overheat or after a recent service fill.
REFILLING COOLING SYSTEM - 3.0L DIESEL

1. Tighten the radiator draincock and the cylinder block drain plug(s) (if removed).
2. Remove thermostat housing bleed hose from two
clips.
3. Hold the thermostat housing bleed hose up so that
air can flow up to bottle.
CAUTION: Failure to purge air from the cooling
system can result in an overheating condition and
severe engine damage.
4. Fill cooling system with the antifreeze mixture
(Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/FLUID
TYPES - DESCRIPTION). Fill pressure bottle to
service line and install cap.
NOTE: The engine cooling system will push any
remaining air into the coolant bottle within about
an hour of normal driving. As a result, a drop in
coolant level in the pressure bottle may occur. If
the engine cooling system overheats and pushes
coolant into the overflow side of the coolant bottle, this coolant will be sucked back into the cooling system ONLY IF THE PRESSURE CAP IS LEFT
ON THE BOTTLE. Removing the pressure cap
breaks the vacuum path between the two bottle
sections and the coolant will not return to cooling
system.
5. With heater control unit in the HEAT position, operate engine with pressure bottle cap in place.
6. Add coolant to pressure bottle as necessary. Only
add coolant to the pressure bottle when the
engine is cold. Coolant level in a warm engine
will be higher due to thermal expansion.
7. Reinstall the thermostat housing bleed hose in the
two clips.
ADDING ADDITIONAL COOLANT

The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads
and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Only MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (glycol base coolant with corrosion inhibitors called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain
to obtain a freeze point of -37C (-35F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with
LX
COOLING
7 - 19
COOLANT LEVEL CHECK

NOTE: Do not remove radiator cap for routine
coolant level inspections. The coolant level can be
checked at coolant recovery bottle (2).
The coolant reserve/overflow system provides a quick
method for determining coolant level. With engine not
running, the coolant level should be between MIN and
MAX marks (3). If the coolant level is at or below the
MIN mark, fill the recovery bottle with a 50/50 mixture
of antifreeze and water ONE QUART AT A TIME.
Repeat this procedure until the coolant level is at the
FULL mark.
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM - ALL ENGINES

WARNING: Do not remove cylinder block drain
plugs or loosen radiator draincock with system
hot and under pressure. Serious burns from coolant can occur.
NOTE: Typical drain plug shown in illustration.
DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If solution is clean,
drain coolant into a clean container for reuse.
1. Remove radiator pressure cap.
2. Loosen radiator petcock.
3. Remove drain plug (1).
COOLING SYSTEM CLEANING/REVERSE FLUSHING

CLEANING
Drain cooling system and refill with water. Run engine with radiator cap installed until upper radiator hose is hot.
Stop engine and drain water from system. If water is dirty, fill system with water, run engine and drain system.
Repeat until water drains clean.
REVERSE FLUSHING
Reverse flushing of cooling system is the forcing of water through the cooling system. This is done using air pressure in the opposite direction of normal coolant flow. It is usually only necessary with very dirty systems with evidence of partial plugging.
7 - 20
COOLING
LX
REVERSE FLUSHING RADIATOR

Disconnect radiator hoses from radiator inlet and outlet. Attach a section of radiator hose to radiator bottom outlet
fitting and insert flushing gun. Connect a water supply hose and air supply hose to flushing gun.
CAUTION: Internal radiator pressure must not exceed 138 kPa (20 psi) as damage to radiator may result.
Allow radiator to fill with water. When radiator is filled, apply air in short blasts. Allow radiator to refill between blasts.
Continue this reverse flushing until clean water flows out through rear of radiator cooling tube passages. Have radiator cleaned more extensively by a radiator repair shop.
REVERSE FLUSHING ENGINE

Drain cooling system. Remove thermostat housing and thermostat. Install thermostat housing. Disconnect radiator
upper hose from radiator and attach flushing gun to hose. Disconnect radiator lower hose from water pump and
attach a lead-away hose to water pump inlet fitting.
CAUTION: On vehicles equipped with a heater water control valve, be sure heater control valve is closed
(heat off). This will prevent coolant flow with scale and other deposits from entering heater core.
Connect water supply hose and air supply hose to flushing gun. Allow engine to fill with water. When engine is filled,
apply air in short blasts, allowing system to fill between air blasts. Continue until clean water flows through the lead
away hose.
Remove lead away hose, flushing gun, water supply hose and air supply hose. Remove thermostat housing and
install thermostat. Install thermostat housing with a replacement gasket. Refer to Thermostat Replacement. Connect
radiator hoses. Refill cooling system with correct antifreeze/water mixture. Refer to Refilling the Cooling System.
CHEMICAL CLEANING
In some instances, use a radiator cleaner (Mopar Radiator Kleen or equivalent) before flushing. This will soften
scale and other deposits and aid flushing operation.
CAUTION: Follow manufacturers instructions when using these products.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
54
40
17
No. 1 and No.2
54
40
No. 3
40
30
Automatic Belt Tensioner to Block - Bolts

3.0L Diesel
Block Heater - Bolt
Generator/Compressor Mounting Bracket - Bolts -
Fan Shroud Mounting - Bolts
50
Fan Blade to Fan Motor - Bolts
23
17
Idler Pulley - Bolt - 5.7L/6.1L
54
40
Idler Pulley - Bolt - 2.7L/3.5L
28
250
Radiator to Support Bracket - Bolts
12
106
Thermostat Housing - Bolts - 2.7L/3.5L
11.8
105
Housing - Coolant Outlet - 2.7L
11.8
105
Housing - Coolant - 3.0L Diesel
11.8
105
Heater Supply Tube
3.4
30
COOLING
LX
DESCRIPTION
Thermostat Housing - Bolts - 5.7L/6.1L
Upper Radiator Closure Panel - Bolts
7 - 21
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
13
112
10
90
Water Pump - Bolts - 2.7L/3.5L
11.8
105
Water Pump - Bolts - 5.7L/6.1L
28
20
Transmission Cooler Lines at Transmission
20
18
Transmission Cooler lines at thermal bypass valve
20
28
Transmission Cooler lines at thermal bypass valve
20
18
FILL VOLUMES
SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION
Metric
Standard
2.7L
9.2
9.7
3.5L
10.0
10.6
5.7L
13.8
14.6
6.1L
14.0
14.8
3.0L Diesel
14.0
14.8
7 - 22
COOLING
LX
SPECIAL TOOLS
COOLING
COOLANT REFRACTOMETER 8286
PLIERS 6094
PRESSURE TESTER 7700
RELEASE TOOL 8875A
FILLING AID FUNNEL 8195
ACCESSORY DRIVE
LX
7 - 23
ACCESSORY DRIVE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
BELT TENSIONER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DRIVE BELT
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
IDLER PULLEY
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.0L Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
7 - 24
ACCESSORY DRIVE
LX
BELT TENSIONER
DESCRIPTION
Correct drive belt tension is required to ensure optimum performance of the belt (1) driven engine accessories. If specified tension is not maintained, belt
slippage may cause; engine overheating, lack of
power steering assist, loss of air conditioning capacity,
reduced generator output rate, and greatly reduced
belt life.
It is not necessary to adjust belt tension on the 2.7L/
3.5L or 5.7L/6.1L engines. These engines are
equipped with an automatic belt tensioner (2). The
tensioner maintains correct belt tension at all times.
Due to use of this belt tensioner (2), do not attempt to
use a belt tension gauge on these engines.
OPERATION
The automatic belt tensioner maintains belt tension by using internal spring pressure, a pivoting arm and pulley to
apply force against the drive belt.
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
On all engines, the tensioner (1) is equipped with
an indexing tang on back of tensioner and an
indexing stop on tensioner housing. If a new belt
is being installed, tang must be within approximately 6 - 8mm (0.24 - 0.32 in.) of indexing stop
(i.e. tang is approximately between the two indexing stops). Belt is considered new if it has been
used 15 minutes or less.
If the above specification cannot be met, check for:
The wrong belt being installed (incorrect length/
width)
Worn bearings on an engine accessory (A/C
compressor, power steering pump, water pump,
idler pulley or generator)
Belt is not installed in pulley grooves
A pulley on an engine accessory being loose
Misalignment of an engine accessory
Belt incorrectly routed.
NOTE: A used belt should be replaced if tensioner indexing arrow has moved to the minimum tension indicator. Tensioner travel stops at this point.
1. Remove accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS - REMOVAL).
LX
ACCESSORY DRIVE
7 - 25
WARNING: Because of high spring pressure, do not attempt to disassemble automatic tensioner. Unit is
serviced as an assembly except for pulley on tensioner.
2. Remove tensioner assembly bolt (2).
3. Remove tensioner assembly (1) from mounting bracket.
3.5L ENGINE
width)
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
width)
7 - 26
ACCESSORY DRIVE
LX

3.0L DIESEL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY
DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS
REMOVAL).
3. Remove belt tensioner retaining bolt and remove
tensioner (5) from bracket.
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
1. Install tensioner bolt (2) to tensioner (1). Tighten
bolt to 34 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque.
2. Install accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS - INSTALLATION).
3. Check belt indexing marks.
LX
3.5L ENGINE
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
ACCESSORY DRIVE
7 - 27
7 - 28
ACCESSORY DRIVE
3.0L DIESEL
1. Install belt tensioner (5) on bracket. Torque retaining bolt to 47 Nm.
3. Connect negative battery cable.
LX
ACCESSORY DRIVE
LX
7 - 29
DRIVE BELT
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT
VISUAL DIAGNOSIS
When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belts,
small cracks (1) that run across the ribbed surface of
the belt from rib to rib , are considered normal. These
are not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks
(2) running along a rib (not across) are not normal.
Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also replace the belt if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords, severe glazing or chunking.
Any belt with bumps, surface coming apart, or any
other uneven indications along the flat surface of the
belt must be remove and inspected and replaced if
necessary.
Refer to ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS
CHART for further belt diagnosis.
NOISE DIAGNOSIS
Noises generated by the accessory drive belt are most noticeable at idle. Before replacing a belt to resolve a noise
condition, inspect all of the accessory drive pulleys for alignment, glazing, or excessive end play.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART
CONDITION
RIB CHUNKING (One or more ribs
has separated from belt body)
RIB OR BELT WEAR
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
1. Foreign objects imbedded in

pulley grooves.
1. Remove foreign objects from

pulley grooves. Replace belt.
2. Installation damage
2. Replace belt
1. Pulley misaligned
1. Align pulley(s)
2. Abrasive environment
2. Clean pulley(s). Replace belt if

necessary
3. Rusted pulley(s)
3. Clean rust from pulley(s)
4. Sharp or jagged pulley groove

tips
4. Replace pulley. Inspect belt.
5. Belt rubber deteriorated
5. Replace belt
7 - 30
ACCESSORY DRIVE
CONDITION
BELT SLIPS
LONGITUDINAL BELT CRACKING
9GROOVE JUMPING9
(Belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
BELT BROKEN
(Note: Identify and correct problem
before new belt is installed)
NOISE
(Objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive
belt is in operation)
TENSION SHEETING FABRIC

FAILURE
(Woven fabric on outside,
circumference of belt has cracked or
separated from body of belt)
LX
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
1. Belt slipping because of

insufficient tension
1. Inspect/Replace tensioner if
necessary
2. Belt or pulley exposed to

substance that has reduced friction
(belt dressing, oil, ethylene glycol)
2. Replace belt and clean pulleys
3. Driven component bearing failure

(seizure)
3. Replace faulty component or

bearing
4. Belt glazed or hardened from

heat and excessive slippage
4. Replace belt.
1. Belt has mis-tracked from pulley

groove
1. Replace belt
2. Pulley groove tip has worn away

rubber to tensile member
2. Replace belt
1. Incorrect belt tension
necessary
2. Pulley(s) not within design

tolerance
2. Replace pulley(s)
3. Foreign object(s) in grooves
3. Remove foreign objects from

grooves
4. Pulley misalignment
4. Align component
5. Belt cord line is broken
5. Replace belt
1. Replace Inspect/Replace
tensioner if necessary
2. Tensile member damaged during

belt installation
2. Replace belt
3. Severe misalignment
3. Align pulley(s)
4. Bracket, pulley, or bearing failure
4. Replace defective component

and belt
necessary
2. Bearing noise
2. Locate and repair
3. Belt misalignment
3. Align belt/pulley(s)
4. Belt to pulley mismatch
4. Install correct belt
5. Driven component induced

vibration
5. Locate defective driven

component and repair
6. Belt flat surface coming apart
6. Replace belt
1. Tension sheeting contacting

stationary object
1. Correct rubbing condition
2. Excessive heat causing woven

fabric to age
2. Replace belt
3. Tension sheeting splice has

fractured
3. Replace belt
ACCESSORY DRIVE
LX
CONDITION
CORD EDGE FAILURE
(Tensile member exposed at edges
of belt or separated from belt body)
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
necessary
2. Belt contacting stationary object
2. Replace belt
3. Pulley(s) out of tolerance
3. Replace pulley
4. Insufficient adhesion between

tensile member and rubber matrix
4. Replace belt
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
CAUTION: Do not let tensioner arm snap back to
the freearm position, sever damage may occur to
the tensioner.
Belt tension is not adjustable. Belt adjustment is maintained by an automatic, spring loaded belt tensioner.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery.
2. Rotate belt tensioner (5) counterclockwise until it
contacts its stop. Remove belt, then slowly rotate
the tensioner into the freearm position.
3.5L ENGINE
the tensioner.
7 - 31
7 - 32
ACCESSORY DRIVE
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
the tensioner.
3.0L DIESEL
NOTE: The belt routing schematics are published
from the latest information available at the time of
publication. If anything differs between these
schematics and the Belt Routing Label, use the
schematics on Belt Routing Label. This label is
located in the engine compartment.
the freearm position, severe damage may occur to
the tensioner.
Belt tension is not adjustable. Belt adjustment is maintained by an automatic, spring loaded belt tensioner
(5).
2. Rotate belt tensioner (5) until it contacts its stop.
Remove belt, then slowly rotate the tensioner (5)
into the freearm position.
LX
LX
ACCESSORY DRIVE
7 - 33
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
Belt tension is not adjustable. Belt adjustment is maintained by an automatic ( spring load ) belt tensioner.
1. Check condition of all pulleys.
CAUTION: When installing the serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly.
If not, the engine may overheat due to the water
pump rotating in the wrong direction.
2. Install new belt. Route the belt around all pulleys
except the idler pulley. Rotate the tensioner arm
until it contacts its stop position. Route the belt
around the idler and slowly let the tensioner rotate
into the belt. Make sure the belt is seated onto all
pulleys.
ON all engines, the tensioner (5) is equipped with
is being installed, tang must be within approximately 6 - 8mm (0.24 - 0.32 in.) of indexing stop (i.e. tang is approximately between the two indexing stops).
Belt is considered new if it has been used 15 minutes or less.
3. With the drive belt installed, inspect the belt wear indicator.
3.5L ENGINE
pulleys.
7 - 34
ACCESSORY DRIVE
LX
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
pulleys.
3.0L DIESEL
Belt tension is not adjustable. Belt adjustment is maintained by an automatic ( spring load ) belt tensioner
(5).
2. Install new belt (3). Route the belt around all pulleys except the idler pulley. Rotate the tensioner
arm until it contacts its stop position. Route the belt around the idler and slowly let the tensioner rotate into the
belt. Make sure the belt (3) is seated onto all pulleys.
LX
IDLER PULLEY
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS
REMOVAL).
2. Remove cover (3).
3. Remove bolt (2) and idler pulley (1).
3.5L ENGINE
DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS
REMOVAL).
ACCESSORY DRIVE
7 - 35
7 - 36
ACCESSORY DRIVE
5.7L ENGINE
1. Remove accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/BELT TENSIONERS REMOVAL).
3.0L Diesel Engine

DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS
REMOVAL).
2. Remove cover.
3. Remove bolt (5) and idler pulley.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position idler pulley (1).

Tighten bolt (2) to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.).
Install cover (3).
Install accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS - INSTALLATION)
3.5L ENGINE
1. Position idler pulley (1).
2. Tighten bolt to (2) 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.).
3. Install cover (3).
ACCESSORY DRIVE
7 - 37
7 - 38
ACCESSORY DRIVE
LX
5.7L ENGINE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position idler pulley (1).

Tighten bolt (2) to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
Install cover (3).
Install accessory drive belt (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
INSTALLATION
2. Install new belt (3). Route the belt around all pulleys except the idler pulley. Rotate the tensioner
arm until it contacts its stop position. Route the belt
around the idler and slowly let the tensioner rotate into the belt. Make sure the belt (3) is seated onto all pulleys.
ENGINE
LX
7 - 39
ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
COOLANT
DESCRIPTION
ENGINE COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
HOAT COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
COOLANT CONCENTRATION TESTING . . . . . . 42
HOUSING-COOLANT OUTLET
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.0L Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.0L Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
COOLANT RECOVERY CONTAINER
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
REMOVAL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
OPERATION
GAS ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . 55
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HEATER SUPPLY TUBE
REMOVAL
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
INSTALLATION
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
RADIATOR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
RADIATOR CAP-TO-FILLER NECK SEAL . . . . . . 65
RADIATOR CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
WATER PUMP
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
INSPECTION - 2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
FAN-RADIATOR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7 - 40
ENGINE
LX
COOLANT
DESCRIPTION
ENGINE COOLANT
ETHYLENE-GLYCOL MIXTURES
The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Only
MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 year/100,000 Mile Formula (ethylene-glycol base coolant with corrosion inhibitors
called HOAT, for Hybrid Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without
corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37 C (-35 F).
The required ethylene-glycol (antifreeze) and water mixture depends upon the climate and vehicle operating conditions. The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower than 44 percent, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation, and cooling system
components may be severely damaged by corrosion. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a
68% antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7 C (-90 F). A higher percentage will freeze at
a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because the specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water.
Use of 100 percent ethylene-glycol will cause formation of additive deposits in the system, as the corrosion inhibitive
additives in ethylene-glycol require the presence of water to dissolve. The deposits act as insulation, causing temperatures to rise to as high as 149 C (300 F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic and soften solder.
The increased temperature can result in engine detonation. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at 22
C (-8 F ).
PROPYLENE-GLYCOL MIXTURES
Its overall effective temperature range is smaller than that of ethylene-glycol. The freeze point of 50/50 propyleneglycol and water is -32 C (-26 F). 5 C higher than ethylene-glycols freeze point. The boiling point (protection
against summer boil-over) of propylene-glycol is 125 C (257 F ) at 96.5 kPa (14 psi), compared to 128 C (263
F) for ethylene-glycol. Use of propylene-glycol can result in boil-over or freeze-up on a cooling system designed for
ethylene-glycol. Propylene glycol also has poorer heat transfer characteristics than ethylene glycol. This can
increase cylinder head temperatures under certain conditions.
Propylene-glycol/ethylene-glycol Mixtures can cause the destabilization of various corrosion inhibitors, causing damage to the various cooling system components. Also, once ethylene-glycol and propylene-glycol based coolants are
mixed in the vehicle, conventional methods of determining freeze point will not be accurate. Both the refractive index
and specific gravity differ between ethylene glycol and propylene glycol.
HOAT COOLANT
WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene-glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical
attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly
after coming in contact with ethylene-glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol base coolant
properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not
open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury
can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal
injury can result.
CAUTION: Use of Propylene-Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze protection and less corrosion protection.
LX
ENGINE
7 - 41
The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder
head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/
fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air.
The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection.
MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene-glycol base coolant
with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% distilled water to
obtain a freeze point of -37 C (-35 F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with
CAUTION: MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any
other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-HOAT or other HOAT), may result in
engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion protection.
COOLANT PERFORMANCE
The required ethylene-glycol (antifreeze) and water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating conditions.
The coolant performance of various mixtures follows:
Pure Water-Water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for purpose of heat
transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion.
100 percent Ethylene-Glycol-The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of water to
dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to rise to as
high as 149 C (300 F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic and soften solder. The increased temperature can result in engine detonation. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22 C (-8 F).
50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Water-Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to -37 C
(-34 F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a
68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7 C (-90 F). A higher percentage will
freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because
specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water.
COOLANT SELECTION AND ADDITIVES

The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Only
MoparT Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (glycol base coolant with corrosion inhibitors called HOAT,
for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37 C (-35 F). If it loses color or becomes
contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution.
OPERATION
Coolant flows through the engine block absorbing the heat from the engine, then flows to the radiator where the
cooling fins in the radiator transfers the heat from the coolant to the atmosphere. During cold weather the ethyleneglycol or propylene-glycol coolant prevents water present in the cooling system from freezing within temperatures
indicated by mixture ratio of coolant to water.
7 - 42
ENGINE
LX

COOLANT CONCENTRATION TESTING
Coolant concentration should be checked when any additional coolant was added to system or after a coolant drain,
flush and refill. The coolant mixture offers optimum engine cooling and protection against corrosion when mixed to
a freeze point of -37C (-34F) to -46C (-50F). The use of a hydrometer or a refractometer can be used to test
coolant concentration.
A hydrometer will test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture. The higher
the concentration of ethylene glycol, the larger the number of balls that will float, and higher the freeze protection
(up to a maximum of 60% by volume glycol).
A refractometer Tool 8286 (Refer to 7 - COOLING - SPECIAL TOOLS) will test the amount of glycol in a coolant
mixture by measuring the amount a beam of light bends as it passes through the fluid.
Some coolant manufactures use other types of glycols into their coolant formulations. Propylene glycol is the most
common new coolant. However, propylene glycol based coolants do not provide the same freezing protection and
corrosion protection and is not recommended.
CAUTION: Do not mix types of coolant - corrosion protection will be severely reduced.
LX
HOUSING-COOLANT OUTLET
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
WARNING: Do not remove pressure cap with the
system hot and under pressure because serious
burns from coolant can occur.
1. Drain cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING STANDARD PROCEDURE).
2. Remove radiator (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/
RADIATOR - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor connector.
4. Remove radiator upper hose at tube (3).
5. Remove heater hose from heater tube at rear of
engine.
6. Disconnect heater tube from retaining clip at rear of
engine.
7. Disconnect electrical connector from coolant temperature sensor.
8. Remove screws (2) attaching Water housing outlet
tube (3) to outlet connector (1).
9. Disengage Water housing outlet tube (3) from outlet connector (1). To remove heater tube, move forward until the tube (3) clears cylinder heads.
3.0L Diesel
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drain cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

Remove heater return tube.
Remove lower radiator hose from coolant outlet housing.
Remove coolant outlet housing bolts and remove housing.
ENGINE
7 - 43
7 - 44
ENGINE
LX
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
1. Inspect heater tube O-ring (4). Replace as necessary.
2. Lubricate O-ring (4) with a silicone type grease
such as MoparT Dielectric Grease.
3. Install the Water housing Outlet with tube (3) by
inserting tube in-between cylinder heads. Insert
tube into outlet connector (1).
4. Attach Water housing Outlet tube (3) to the retaining clip at rear of engine.
5. Install attaching screws and tighten to 3 Nm (30 in.
lbs.).
6. Install radiator (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/
RADIATOR - INSTALLATION).
7. Fill cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8. Operate engine until it reaches normal operating
temperature. Check cooling system for correct fluid
levels.
3.0L Diesel
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position the Water Outlet Housing on the cylinder block.

Install mounting nuts and tighten to 11.8 Nm (105 in. lbs.).
Fill cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
Operate engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. Check cooling system for correct fluid levels.
LX
COOLANT RECOVERY CONTAINER

REMOVAL
1. Remove coolant recovery container pressure cap
(3).
2. Remove and plug coolant recovery tube (1).
3. Remove mounting nuts (2).
4. Remove coolant recovery container (3) from
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position coolant recovery container (3).
2. Install mounting nuts (2). Tighten to 10 Nm (89 in.
lbs.).
3. Install coolant recovery tube (1).
5. Install coolant recovery container pressure cap (4).
ENGINE
7 - 45
7 - 46
ENGINE
LX
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER

DESCRIPTION
The engine block heater (1) is mounted in the cylinder
block (2), near the right rear corner. The block heater
is a dry cylinder type design and is powered by 110
volt AC. The power cord must be secured in its
retainer clips, and not positioned so it could contact linkages or exhaust manifolds and become
damaged.
The engine block heater (1) is mounted in the cylinder

block, near the left rear corner. The block heater is a
dry cylinder type design and is powered by 110 volt
AC. The power cord must be secured in its
retainer clips, and not positioned so it could contact linkages or exhaust manifolds and become
damaged.
OPERATION
When power is applied (110 volt AC) to the block heater, the heating element transfers heat through the aluminum
engine block and into the coolant without directly penetrating the cooling system.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
If unit does not operate, trouble can be in either the power cord or the heater element. Test power cord for continuity with a 110-volt voltmeter or 110-volt test light; test heater element continuity with an ohmmeter or 12-volt test
light.
LX
REMOVAL
REMOVAL
1. Raise vehicle on hoist.
2. Detach power cord plug from block heater (1).
3. Remove block heater attaching screw located
below heater terminals.
4. Remove block heater from cylinder block (2).
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Raise vehicle.
2. Remove power cord from block heater.
3. Remove bolt on block heater. Remove heater
assembly.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
1. Thoroughly clean cylinder block heater cavity.
2. Insert heater assembly (1) into block (2) with
mounting hole is located below heater terminals.
3. Install mounting screw and tighten to 12 Nm (105
in. lbs.).
4. Attach power cord to heater.
CAUTION: To prevent damage, the power cord
must be secured in its retainer clips, and not positioned so it could contact linkages or exhaust
manifolds.
ENGINE
7 - 47
7 - 48
ENGINE
5. Lower vehicle.
5.7L ENGINE
1. Thoroughly clean cylinder block core hole and
block heater seat.
2. Insert block heater assembly into the block.
3. With block heater fully seated, tighten bolt to 2 Nm
LX
LX
ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR

REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
2. Partially drain cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (2).
4. Remove engine coolant sensor (1) from coolant
outlet tube (3).
3.5L ENGINE
3. With the engine cold, disconnect coolant sensor
electrical connector.
4. Remove sensor (2).
ENGINE
7 - 49
7 - 50
ENGINE
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (3) on
the 5.7L/6.1L engine is located under the air conditioning compressor. It is installed into a water jacket at the
front of the cylinder block .
WARNING: Hot, pressurized coolant can cause
injury by scalding. Cooling system must be partially drained before removing the coolant temperature sensor.
1. Partially drain the cooling system (Refer to 7 COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS
REMOVAL).
3. Carefully unbolt air conditioning compressor from
front of engine. Do not disconnect any A/C hoses
from compressor. Temporarily support compressor
to gain access to ECT sensor (3).
4. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from sensor (3).
5. Remove sensor (3) from cylinder block.
3.0L DIESEL
WARNING: Risk of injury to skin and eyes from
scalding with hot coolant. Risk of poisoning from
swallowing coolant. Do not open cooling system
unless coolant temperature is below 90C. Open
cap slowly to release pressure. Store coolant in
suitable and appropriately marked container. Wear
protective gloves, clothes and eye wear.
2. Remove engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE REMOVAL).
3. Partially drain coolant system (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
4. Unplug coolant temperature sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: Capture any residual coolant that may flow.
5. Remove coolant temperature sensor (2).
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
1. Apply thread sealant to sensor threads.
2. Install engine coolant temperature sensor (1) into
coolant outlet tube (3).
3. Tighten sensor to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) torque.
4. Connect electrical connector (2) to engine coolant
temperature sensor (1).
3.5L ENGINE
1. Install engine coolant temperature sensor (2).
Tighten sensor to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) torque.
2. Attach electrical connector to sensor.
ENGINE
7 - 51
7 - 52
ENGINE
LX
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Apply thread sealant to sensor threads.

Install ECT sensor (3) to engine.
Tighten sensor to 11 Nm (97.3 in. lbs.) torque.
Connect electrical connector (2) to ECT sensor (3).
5. Fill the cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING STANDARD PROCEDURE).
3.0L DIESEL
unless coolant temperature is below 90C (194f).
Open cap slowly to release pressure. Store coolant in suitable and appropriately marked container.
Wear protective gloves, clothes and eye wear.
1. Position and install coolant temperature sensor.
2. Connect coolant temperature sensor electrical connector.
3. Refill coolant system to proper level with proper
mixture of coolant (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
4. Install engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE INSTALLATION).
WARNING: Use extreme caution when engine is
operating. Do not stand in a direct line with fan. Do not put your hands near pulleys, belts or fan. Do not
wear loose clothes.
6. Start engine and inspect for leaks.
LX
ENGINE
7 - 53

DESCRIPTION
The engine cooling thermostats are a wax pellet driven, reverse poppet choke type. The thermostats have an air
bleed located in the thermostat flange. The air bleed allows internal trapped air during cooling system filling to be
released. The thermostat on the 2.7L and 3.5L engines are located on the lower left side of engine, near the front.
The thermostat on both engines are on the inlet side of the water pump.
The thermostat on the 5.7L/6.1L gas powered engine is located beneath the thermostat housing (1) at the front of
the intake manifold.
The thermostat on the 3.0L Diesel engine is integrated
into the thermostat housing located at the front of the
right intake manifold and is serviced as an assembly.
A rubber seal is used to seal the thermostat housing
to the intake manifold. The thermostat contains the following components:
Main Valve (4) - Controls coolant flow through
the radiator
Bypass Valve (2) - Controls coolant flow through
the bypass passage to the inlet side of the water
pump
Vent Valve (1) - Vents the cooling system via a
ball valve when it is filled and when the engine is
running
Thermostat Housing Seal (3)
OPERATION
GAS ENGINE
The engine cooling thermostat is a wax pellet driven, reverse poppet choke type. The thermostat is designed to
provide the fastest warm up possible by preventing leakage through it and to guarantee a minimum engine operating temperature of 88 to 93 C (192 to 199 F). The thermostat also will automatically reach wide open so it will
not restrict flow to the radiator as temperature of the coolant rises in hot weather to around 104 C (220 F). Above
this temperature the coolant temperature is controlled by the radiator, fan, and ambient temperature, not the thermostat.
The thermostat is operated by a wax filled container (pellet) which is sealed. When heated coolant reaches a predetermined temperature, the wax expands enough to overcome the closing spring and water pump pressure, which
forces the valve to open.
7 - 54
ENGINE
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE

WARM-UP PHASE
Up to a coolant temperature of approximately 87 C
(189 F), the main valve is closed and the bypass
valve fully open. The flow through the radiator is interrupted and coolant flows through the bypass passage
directly to the inlet side of the water pump.
PARTIAL-LOAD PHASE
The main valve begins to open at a coolant temperature of 86 C (189 F), and a small amount of coolant
flows through the radiator. As the engine temperature
increases, the main valve opens further and the
bypass valve gradually closes. More coolant flows
through the radiator and less coolant flows through the
bypass passage.
LX
LX
ENGINE
7 - 55
FULL-LOAD PHASE
The main valve is fully open at a coolant temperature
above 102 C (216 F). The bypass plate seals off the
bypass passage. The entire quantity of coolant flows
through the radiator.

The thermostat is operated by a wax filled chamber (pellet) which is sealed. When heated coolant reaches a predetermined temperature the wax pellet expands enough to overcome the closing spring and water pump pressure,
which forces the valve to open. Coolant leakage into the pellet will cause a thermostat to fail open. Do not attempt
to free up a thermostat with a screwdriver.
Thermostat diagnostics is included in powertrain control modules (PCM) programing for on-board diagnosis. The
malfunction indicator light (MIL) will illuminate and a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) will be set when an open too
soon condition occurs. Do not change a thermostat for lack of heater performance or temperature gauge position,
unless a DTC is present. For other probable causes, (Refer to 7 - COOLING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). Thermostat failing shut is the normal long term mode of failure, and normally, only on high mileage vehicles. The temperature gauge will indicate this (Refer to 7 - COOLING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
7 - 56
ENGINE
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
1. Disconnect negative cable.
3. Remove radiator lower hose from thermostat housing (1).
4. Remove nuts (3) from heater tube flange studs.
5. Loosen starter bolt at heater tube bracket.
6. Pull heater tube out of thermostat housing and
position out of the way.
7. Remove bolt (3) and two studs.
8. Remove thermostat housing (1), O-ring (2) and

thermostat (4).
LX
LX
ENGINE
7 - 57
3.5L ENGINE
1. Disconnect negative cable.
4. Disconnect electrical connectors from engine oil
and power steering pressure switches.
5. Disconnect radiator and heater hoses from thermostat housing.
6. Remove thermostat housing bolts.
7. Remove housing, thermostat, and gasket.
NOTE: The OEM thermostat is staked in place at
the factory. To ensure proper seating of replacement thermostat, carefully remove the bulged
metal from the thermostat housing using a suitable hand held grinder. It is not necessary to restake the
replacement thermostat into the thermostat housing.
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery.
3. Remove radiator hose at thermostat housing (1).
NOTE: Thermostat o-ring is part of thermostat (2)
and is not serviced separately.
4. Remove thermostat housing mounting bolts (3),
thermostat housing (1) and thermostat (2).
3.0L DIESEL
WARNING: Risk of injury to skin and eyes from scalding with hot coolant. Risk of poisoning from swallowing coolant. Do not open cooling system unless coolant temperature is below 90 C (194 F). Open cap
slowly to release pressure. Store coolant in suitable and appropriately marked container. Wear protective
gloves, clothes and eye wear.
NOTE: Inspect condition of all clamps and hoses, replace as necessary.
2. Remove engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - REMOVAL).
7 - 58
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ENGINE
LX
Drain engine coolant (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/COOLANT - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

Remove bracket for fuel line.
Remove coolant hoses and thermostat housing.
Remove thermostat housing.
Clean all sealing surfaces.
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
1. Clean gasket sealing surfaces.
NOTE: Install thermostat with the bleed valve
located at the 12 oclock position, between tabs on
seal.
2. Install thermostat (4) and O-Ring (2) into thermostat housing (1).
3. If removed, install two studs (3).
4. Install thermostat (4) , thermostat housing (1),
O-ring (2) and bolt. Tighten attaching bolts to 12
Nm (105 in. lbs.).
5. Lubricate new heater return tube O-ring with coolant.

6. Position heater return tube flange over two studs.
Install nuts (3). Tighten retaining nuts (3) to 6 Nm
(53 in. lbs.).
7. Tighten starter bolt to 54.3 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
8. Connect the lower radiator hose to the thermostat
housing (1). Install hose clamps.
9. Refill cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING STANDARD PROCEDURE).
10. Connect negative cable.
3.5L ENGINE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Position gasket on thermostat and housing.

Install thermostat housing, gasket and mounting bolts onto block. Tighten attaching bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.).
Install radiator hose.
Install bypass hose.
Fill cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
LX
ENGINE
7 - 59
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Clean mating areas of timing chain cover and thermostat housing (1).
NOTE: Install thermostat with the bleed valve
located at the 12 oclock position.
2. Install thermostat (2) (spring side down) into
recessed machined groove on timing chain cover
with bleed valve located at the 12 oclock position.
3. Position thermostat housing (1) on timing chain
cover.
4. Install two housing-to-timing chain cover bolts (3).
Tighten bolts to 13 Nm (112 in. lbs.) torque.
CAUTION: Thermostat housing must be tightened
evenly and thermostat (2) must be centered into
recessed groove in timing chain cover. If not, it
may result in a cracked thermostat housing (1),
damaged timing chain cover threads or coolant
leaks.
5. Install lower radiator hose on thermostat housing.
6. Lower vehicle.
8. Connect negative battery cable to battery.
9. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks.
3.0L DIESEL
1. Clean all sealing surfaces.
2. Position and install thermostat housing Tighten bolts to 9 Nm (80 lbs.in.).
NOTE: Inspect condition of all clamps and hoses, replace as necessary.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connect coolant hoses,

Install bracket for fuel line.
Close coolant drain.
Install engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - INSTALLATION).

8. Fill coolant system to proper level with appropriate coolant mixture (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/COOLANT
WARNING: Use extreme caution when engine is operating. Do not stand in direct line with fan. Do not put
your hands near pulleys, belts or fan. Do not wear loose clothes.
7 - 60
ENGINE
HEATER SUPPLY TUBE

REMOVAL
3.5L ENGINE
WARNING: Do not remove pressure cap with system hot and under pressure because serious
2. Remove upper and lower intake manifold (Refer to
9 - ENGINE/MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD UPPER - REMOVAL) and (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - LOWER REMOVAL).
3. Position lower intake manifold upside down on
bench and remove the tube retaining bolt (5).
4. Remove heater supply tube (4) from manifold and
discard O-ring (2).
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
3. Remove intake manifold (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - REMOVAL).
4. Remove heater hoses from heater tubes.
5. Remove heater tube mounting bolts.
6. Remove heater tubes from water pump housing
and remove from vehicle.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
3.5L ENGINE
1. Clean heater tube sealing surfaces.
2. Inspect heater tube O-ring (2). Replace as necessary.
3. Lubricate O-ring (2) with a silicone type grease
such as MoparT Dielectric Grease.
4. Install O-ring (2) on heater supply tube (4).
5. Install heater tube (4) on manifold.
6. Install retaining bolts. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105
in. lbs.).
7. Install lower and upper intake manifolds (Refer to 9
- ENGINE/MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD INSTALLATION - Lower) and (Refer to 9 ENGINE/MANIFOLDS/INTAKE
MANIFOLD
INSTALLATION - Upper).
8. Refill cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING STANDARD PROCEDURE).
temperature. Check cooling system for correct fluid
levels.
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Position heater tubes into water pump housing.
2. Install mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 10 Nm (88
in. lbs.).
3. Install heater hose onto heater tubes.
4. Install intake manifold (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - INSTALLATION).
7. Start vehicle and check for cooling system leaks.
ENGINE
7 - 61
7 - 62
ENGINE
RADIATOR
REMOVAL
1. DIsconnect negative battery cable.
3. Remove upper radiator hose (2).
4. Remove upper radiator closure panels (1).
5. Remove radiator fan assembly (4) (Refer to 7 COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - REMOVAL).
6.
7.
8.
9.
Raise vehicle.
Remove lower splash shield.
Remove lower radiator hose (1).
Remove lower condenser mount bolts.
LX
LX
ENGINE
7 - 63
10. Lower vehicle.

11. Remove upper radiator hose.
CAUTION: Bolts have a tread locker on them, use
hand tools to remove the upper radiator mounting
bolts.
12. Remove upper radiator mounting brackets (1) and
bolts (2).
13. Remove upper condenser mounting bolts.
14. Separate condenser assembly from radiator.
15. Tilt radiator toward engine and remove radiator
from vehicle.
CLEANING
Clean radiator fins are necessary for good heat transfer. The radiator and air conditioning fins should be cleaned
when an accumulation of debris has occurred. With the engine cold, apply cold water and compressed air to the
back (engine side) of the radiator to flush the radiator and/or A/C condenser of debris.
INSPECTION
Inspect the radiator tanks for cracks, broken or missing fittings also inspect the joint where the tanks seam up to the
radiator core for signs of leakage and/or deteriorating seals.
Inspect radiator core for corroded, bent or missing cooling fins. Inspect the core for bent or damaged cooling tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. Position radiator into engine compartment. Seat the
radiator assembly lower rubber isolators into the
mounting holes in radiator lower support.
2. Install radiator mounting bracket (1) and bolts (2).
Tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.).
3. Position condenser on radiator and install upper
mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.).
4. Raise vehicle.
7 - 64
ENGINE
5. Install lower condenser mounting bolts. Tighten

bolts to 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.)
6. Install lower radiator hose (1) and clamp.
7. Lower vehicle.
8. Install the radiator fan (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - INSTALLATION).

9. Install upper radiator upper hose. Align hose so it
does not interfere with the accessory drive belt or
engine. Position hose clamp so it will not interfere
with the hood.
10. Install upper radiator closure panels.
11. Connect negative cable.
12. Fill cooling system with coolant (Refer to 7 COOLING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
temperature. Check cooling system and automatic
transmission for correct fluid levels.
LX
LX
ENGINE
7 - 65
RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP

DESCRIPTION
All cooling systems are equipped with a pressure cap
on the radiator. This cap releases pressure at some
point within a range of 110-138 kPa (16-20 psi). The
pressure relief point (in pounds) is engraved on top of
the cap (3).
The cooling system will operate at pressures slightly
above atmospheric pressure. This results in a higher
coolant boiling point allowing increased radiator cooling capacity. The cap contains a spring-loaded pressure relief valve (4). This valve opens when system
pressure reaches the release range of 110-138 kPa
(16-20 psi).
A rubber gasket (2) seals the radiator filler neck. This
is done to maintain vacuum during coolant cool-down
and to prevent leakage when system is under
pressure.
OPERATION
A vent valve in the center of the cap will remain shut as long as the cooling system is pressurized. As the coolant
cools, it contracts and creates a vacuum in cooling system. This causes the vacuum valve to open and coolant in
reserve/overflow tank to be drawn through connecting hose into radiator. If the vacuum valve is stuck shut, or overflow hose is kinked, radiator hoses will collapse on cool-down.

RADIATOR CAP-TO-FILLER NECK SEAL
The pressure cap upper gasket (seal) pressure relief can be tested by removing overflow hose from radiator filler
neck nipple. Attach hose of pressure tester tool 7700 (or equivalent) to nipple. It will be necessary to disconnect
hose from its adapter for filler neck. Pump air into radiator. The pressure cap upper gasket should relieve at 124
kPa (18 psi) and hold pressure at a minimum of 110 kPa (186psi).
WARNING: The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on radiator pressure cap, are a safety precaution.
When hot, pressure builds up in cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, radiator cap should not be
removed while system is hot and/or under pressure.
Do not remove radiator cap at any time except for the following purposes:
1. Check and adjust antifreeze freeze point.
2. Refill system with new antifreeze.
3. Conducting service procedures.
4. Checking for vacuum leaks.
7 - 66
ENGINE
LX
WARNING: If vehicle has been run recently, wait at least 15 minutes before removing radiator cap. With a
rag, squeeze radiator upper hose to check if system is under pressure. Place a rag over cap and without
pushing cap down, rotate it counter-clockwise to first stop. Allow fluid to escape through the coolant
reserve/overflow hose into reserve/overflow tank. Squeeze radiator upper hose to determine when pressure
has been released. When coolant and steam stop being pushed into tank and system pressure drops,
remove radiator cap completely.
RADIATOR CAP
Remove cap (1) from radiator. Be sure that sealing
surfaces are clean. Moisten rubber gasket with water
and install cap (1) on pressure tester 7700 (2) or an
equivalent.
Operate tester pump to bring pressure to 124 kPa (18
psi) on gauge. If pressure cap (1) fails to hold pressure of at least 110 kPa (16 psi) replace cap. Refer to
the following CAUTION.
The pressure cap may test properly while positioned
on tool 7700 (or equivalent). It may not hold pressure
or vacuum when installed on radiator. If so, inspect
radiator filler neck and caps top gasket for damage.
Also inspect for dirt or distortion that may prevent cap
from sealing properly.
CAUTION: Radiator pressure testing tools are very
sensitive to small air leaks, which will not cause
cooling system problems. A pressure cap that
does not have a history of coolant loss should not
be replaced just because it leaks slowly when
tested with this tool. Add water to tool. Turn tool
upside down and recheck pressure cap to confirm
that cap needs replacement.
CLEANING
Use only a mild soap and water to clean the radiator cap. Using any type solvent may cause damage to the seal
in the radiator cap.
INSPECTION
Hold cap at eye level, right side up. The vent valve at bottom of cap should open. If rubber gasket has swollen and
prevents vent valve from opening, replace cap.
Hold cap at eye level, upside down. If any light can be seen between vent valve and rubber gasket, replace cap. Do
not use a replacement cap that has a spring to hold vent shut. A replacement cap must be the type designed
for a coolant reserve/overflow system with a completely sealed diaphragm spring and a rubber gasket. This gasket
is used to seal to radiator filler neck top surface. Use of proper cap will allow coolant return to radiator.
LX
WATER PUMP
DESCRIPTION
The 2.7L and 3.5L pumps have a die cast aluminum
housing and a plastic swept vane impeller. The 2.7L
water pump bolts directly to the cylinder block, behind
the timing chain cover and is driven by the engine primary timing chain.
The 3.5L water pump bolts directly to the rear timing

belt cover using a press-in-place gasket for sealing.
The water pump is driven by the engine timing belt.
ENGINE
7 - 67
7 - 68
ENGINE
REMOVAL
2.7L ENGINE
system hot and pressurized. Serious burns from
coolant can result.
2. Remove radiator fan assembly (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - REMOVAL).
DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS
REMOVAL).
NOTE: The water pump is driven by the primary
timing chain.
4. Remove the timing chain and all chain guides
(Refer to 9 - ENGINE/VALVE TIMING/TIMING
BELT/CHAIN AND SPROCKETS - REMOVAL).
5. Remove bolts (2 and 3) attaching water pump (1)
to block.
6. Remove water pump (1) and gasket.
3.5L ENGINE
The water pump on all models can be replaced without discharging the air conditioning system.
2. Remove accessory drive belts (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY
DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS
REMOVAL).
NOTE: The water pump is driven by the timing
belt.
3. Remove engine timing belt (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
VALVE TIMING/TIMING BELT/CHAIN AND SPROCKETS - REMOVAL).
4. Remove water pump mounting bolts (1). Note position of longer bolts for proper re-installation.
5. Remove water pump body (2) from engine.
LX
LX
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
3. Remove radiator fan assembly (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - REMOVAL).
DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS
REMOVAL)
5. Remove termostat (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/ENGINE
COOLANT
THERMOSTAT
REMOVAL)
NOTE: The water pump mounting bolts (2) are different lengths. Note the location of the water
pump mounting bolts (2).
6. Remove water pump mounting bolts (2) and
remove water pump (1).
3.0L DIESEL
unless coolant temperature is below 90C (194F).
Open cap slowly to release pressure. Store coolant in suitable and appropriately marked container.
Wear protective gloves, clothes and eye wear.
2. Remove engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE REMOVAL).
3. Drain engine coolant (Refer to 7 - COOLING STANDARD PROCEDURE).
DRIVE/DRIVE
BELTS
REMOVAL)
5. Disconnect coolant hoses at water pump.
6. Remove idler pulley (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/IDLER PULLEY - REMOVAL).
7. Remove water pump and clean sealing surfaces.
ENGINE
7 - 69
7 - 70
ENGINE
INSPECTION - 2.7L ENGINE

Inspect and replace the water pump if it has any of
the following defects:
1. Damage or cracks on the pump body.
2. Coolant leaks: If the shaft seal is leaking, this will

be evident by traces of thick deposits of dried glycol running down from the pump primary weep
passage. A thin black stain below the pump primary
weep hole/passage is considered normal operation.
3. Coolant leaks: If the pump primary weep passage

is plugged, coolant may come from the secondary
weep passage and collect in the valley of the
engine. The coolant will eventually run out the back
side of the engine. Leakage from the secondary
weep passage may give false indications that core
plug(s) may be leaking on the back side of the
engine block. If this condition is found, clean the
primary weep passage of debris.
4. Impeller rubs inside of cylinder block.
5. Excessively loose or rough turning bearing.
LX
LX
ENGINE
7 - 71
NOTE: It is normal for the water pump to weep a small amount of coolant from the primary weep hole (black
stain at weep passage). Do not replace the water pump if this condition exists. Replace the water pump if
a heavy deposit or a steady flow of engine coolant is evident from the primary weep passage. This indicates
a shaft seal failure and pump must be replaced. Coolant may leak from the secondary weep passage and fill
the valley of the engine. If this condition is found, clean the primary weep passage of debris. Be sure to
perform a thorough analysis before replacing water pump.
INSTALLATION
2.7L ENGINE
2. Install water pump (1) and gasket. Tighten mounting bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.).
3. Install timing chain guides and timing chain (Refer
to 9 - ENGINE/VALVE TIMING/TIMING BELT/
CHAIN AND SPROCKETS - INSTALLATION).
4. Install the accessory drive belts (Refer to 7 COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS INSTALLATION).
5. Install the radiator fan assembly (Refer to 7 COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - INSTALLATION).
3.5L ENGINE
1. Clean all O-ring surfaces on front cover.
2. Position water pump (3) and O-ring to engine.
3. Install mounting bolts. Tighten to 12 Nm (105 in.
lbs.).
4. Install timing belt (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/VALVE
TIMING/TIMING BELT/CHAIN AND SPROCKETS INSTALLATION).
5. Install accessory drive belts (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE/DRIVE BELTS - INSTALLATION).
7 - 72
ENGINE
LX
5.7L/6.1L ENGINE
1. Install water pump and mounting bolts (2). Tighten
mounting bolts to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.).
2. Make sure double ended bolt (3) is in the proper
location. Tighten double ended bolt to 28 Nm (20
ft. lbs.).
3. Install thermostat (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/
ENGINE COOLANT THERMOSTAT - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the radiator fan assembly (Refer to 7 COOLING/ENGINE/RADIATOR FAN - INSTALLATION).
8. Pressure test cooling system (Refer to 7 - COOLING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
3.0L DIESEL
2. Position and install water pump. Tighten M6 bolts
to 14 Nm (124 lbs. in.) and M8 bolts to 20 Nm
(177 lbs. in.).
3. Install idler pulley. Tighten bolt to 35 Nm (26 lbs.
ft.).
4. Install coolant hoses.
6. Close coolant drain.
7. Install engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE INSTALLATION).
9. Fill coolant system to proper level with the appropriate coolant mixture (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ENGINE/COOLANT - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
WARNING: Use extreme caution when engine is operating. Do not put your hands near pulleys, belts or fan.
Do not wear loose clothes.
LX
FAN-RADIATOR
REMOVAL
3. Remove upper radiator hose (3).
4. Disconnect cooling fan electrical connector (2).
5. Remove cooling fan mounting bolts.
6. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly (1) from
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position radiator cooling fan assembly (1) in vehicle.
2. Install cooling fan mounting bolts. Tighten to 6 Nm
(50 in. lbs.)
3. Connect cooling fan electrical connector (2).
4. Install upper radiator hose (3).
temperature. Check cooling system and automatic
transmission for correct fluid levels.
ENGINE
7 - 73
7 - 74
TRANSMISSION
LX
TRANSMISSION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
TRANSMISSION
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TRANSMISSION COOLER LINE QUICK
CONNECT FITTING DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
TRANSMISSION COOLER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
TRANSMISSION COOLER LINES
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
LX
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TRANSMISSION COOLER LINE QUICK CONNECT FITTING DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY
DISCONNECT
1. Remove dust cap by pulling it straight back off of
quick connect fitting.
2. Place disconnect tool 8875A onto transmission
cooler line with the fingers of the tool facing the
quick connect fitting.
3. Slide disconnect tool down the transmission line
and engage the fingers of the tool into the retaining
clip. When properly engaged in the clip, the tool
will fit flush against the quick connect fitting.
4. Rotate the disconnect tool 60 to expand the
retaining clip.
5. While holding the disconnect tool against the quick
connect fitting, pull back on the transmission cooler
line to remove.
7 - 75
7 - 76
TRANSMISSION
CONNECT
1. Align transmission cooler line with quick connect fitting while pushing straight into the fitting.
2. Push in on transmission cooler line until a click is
heard or felt.
3. Slide dust cap down the transmission cooler line
and snap it over the quick connect fitting until it is
fully seated and rotates freely. Dust cap will only
snap over quick connect fitting when the transmission cooler line is properly installed.
NOTE: If dust cap will not snap into place, repeat
assembly step #2.
LX
LX
TRANSMISSION COOLER
DESCRIPTION
The automatic transmission cooler (2) is located in the
front of the radiator and behind the front fascia and is
combined with the A/C condenser. The transmission
cooler is a heat exchanger that allows heat in the
transmission fluid to be transferred to the air passing
over the cooler fins.
The Transmission oil cooler/A/C condenser assembly
is equipped with quick connect fitting for the transmission oil cooler lines, a tapping block (3) for the receiver/drier (4) and mounting provisions for the power
steering cooler (5).
The transmission oil cooler/AC condenser is service
as an assembly. For removal (Refer to 24 - HEATING
& AIR CONDITIONING/PLUMBING/A/C CONDENSER
- REMOVAL) and installation (Refer to 24 - HEATING
& AIR CONDITIONING/PLUMBING/A/C CONDENSER
- INSTALLATION).
TRANSMISSION
7 - 77
7 - 78
TRANSMISSION
LX
TRANSMISSION COOLER LINES

REMOVAL
1. Remove upper radiator closure panels
2. Using Release Tool 8875A, remove transmission cooler lines from transmission cooler (Refer to 7 - COOLING/
TRANSMISSION - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
4. Remove front transmission cooler lines from the thermal bypass valve block.
5. Remove rear transmission cooler lines from the thermal bypass valve block
6. Remove the transmission cooler lines from the transmission.
INSTALLATION
1. Install rear transmission cooler lines at transmission. Tighten fittings to 20 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
2. Install rear transmission cooler lines to thermal bypass valve. Tighten fittings to 20 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
3. Install front transmission cooler lines to thermal bypass valve. Tighten fittings to 20 Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
4. Install front transmission cooler lines into transmission cooler (Refer to 7 - COOLING/TRANSMISSION - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
5. Lower vehicle.
6. Check transmission fluid level (Refer to 21 - TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/AUTOMATIC - 42RLE/FLUID STANDARD PROCEDURE).
AUDIO/VIDEO
LX
8A - 1
AUDIO/VIDEO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
AUDIO - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . . . . . . . . . 1
AUDIO/VIDEO - SERVICE INFORMATION. . . . . . 131
AUDIO - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
B221F-AMPLIFIER INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B1488CABIN EQ MISMATCH
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
B1460-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER
OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . 9
OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . 19
OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 22
B146A-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER
B146B-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER
B146C-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER
B146D-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER
B146E-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER
B146F-CHANNEL 4 AUDIO SPEAKER

B147A-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER
B147B-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER
B147C-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER
B147D-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER
B147E-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER
B147F-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER
8A - 2

U0019CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . . . . 93
FRONT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
B1401-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER
OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
B1405-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER
OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
B1409-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER
LX
B140A-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER
OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
B140B-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER
B140D-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER
B140E-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER
OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
B140F-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER
B1421-AUDIO CD READ ERROR/
INOPERABLE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
B1422-AUDIO DVD READ ERROR/
INOPERABLE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
B1429-RADIO DISPLAY HIGH
TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
B142A-RADIO UNIT HIGH TEMPERATURE . . . 127
B142D-AUDIO ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED . 128
B142E-GPS ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED . . . 129
B221E-RADIO INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
LX

8A - 3
8A - 4
LX
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the battery voltage is less than 9.0 volts for 1 second.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION
Turn the ignition on, then off, and then on again.

With the scan tool, read Amplifier DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER-1.
2.
CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE TO THE AMPLIFIER
With the scan tool in Data Display, read Amplifier battery voltage.
Is the battery voltage less than 9.0 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the Service Information.

Perform OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
3.
CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM RELATED DTCs IN THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
With the scan tool in ECU View, select PCM and check for any Charging System related DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any Charging System related DTCs?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTCs. Refer to (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
No

LX
8A - 5
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the battery voltage is greater 16.5 volts for 1 second.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE TO THE AMPLIFIER
With the scan tool in Data Display, read Amplifier battery voltage.
Is the battery voltage greater than 16.5 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.
Yes
No

8A - 6
B221F-AMPLIFIER INTERNAL
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Amplifier detects a software checksum test failure.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPLACE THE AMPLIFIER
When this code is set, the Amplifier must be replaced.
Repair
Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
LX
LX
8A - 7
B1488CABIN EQ MISMATCH PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the cabin EQ message is incompatible with the EQs stored in the amplifier for 10 consecutive cycles, then
the amplifier will set this DTC.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
NO COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE
ACTIVE FCM DTCs
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
Turn
With
With
With

the
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
radio on.
scan tool, erase Amplifier DTCs.
scan tool, reset the amplifier.
scan tool, read Amplifier DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1488CABIN EQ MISMATCH PERFORMANCE?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK AMPLIFIER BUSSED INPUTS/OUTPUTS
With the scan tool in Amplifier Data Display, read the Cabin EQ# settings in the Bussed Inputs and Bussed Outputs
Sections.
NOTE: The Cabin EQ# settings in the Inputs/Outputs section should match one another. The Cabin EQ# in
the Inputs section is the information that is received form the FCM. The Cabin EQ# in the Outputs section
is the information that is Stored in the Amplifiers memory.
The Cabin EQ# settings are as follows:
$51: HB Premium 1 (w/o Subwoofer)
$52: HB Premium 2 (with Subwoofer)
Do the Cabin EQ# settings match one another?
Yes
>> Replace the Amplifier in accordance to the service information.

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
No
>> Go To 3
8A - 8
3.
VERIFY COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE
With the scan tool in ECU VIEW, read active modules on the bus.
Does the scan tool show the Front Control Module active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Refer to the Communication category for the related symptoms.

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
4.
With
Turn
Turn
With
CHECK FRONT CONTROL MODULE FOR ACTIVE DTCs

the
the
the
the
scan tool, erase FCM DTCs.

ignition off. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
ignition on.
scan tool, read FCM DTCs.
Are any active DTCs present?

Yes
>> Refer to symptom list for problems related to the Front Control Module.
No
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER.1
LX
LX
8A - 9
B1460-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if a DC offset occurs on the output channel, the amplifier shall set a DTC after a maturity
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B1460-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the service information.

No
8A - 10
B1461-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8A - 11
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Amplifier detects a shorted to ground condition on the speaker output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B1461-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Amplifier C2 harness connector.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X209) Amplified Left
Front I/P Speaker (+) circuit.
Is the resistance below 10K ohms?
Yes
>> Repair the (X209) Amplified Left Front I/P Speaker (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 3
8A - 12
3.
CHECK THE (X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X299) Amplified Left
Front I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X299) Amplified Left Front I/P Speaker (-) for a
short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Left Front I/P Speaker.
Measure the resistance of the speaker circuit between the Amplifier C2
harness connector and ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Left Front I/P Speaker in accordance with the
service information.
No

LX
LX
B1462-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8A - 13
8A - 14
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Amplifier detects a short to battery condition on the output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B1462-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Amplified Left I/P Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (+) circuit for a
short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit for a
short to voltage.
No

8A - 15
8A - 16
B1463-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8A - 17
When Monitored:
Amplifier Bus wake-up. Amplifier reset with scan tool.
Set Condition:
The Amplifier detects an open condition on the speaker output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
Turn
With
With
With

the
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
radio on.
Does the scan tool display active: B1463-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE LEFT FRONT I/P SPEAKER
Disconnect the Left I/P Speaker harness connector.

Turn the radio on and turn the volume to mid level.
With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the
Amplified Left I/P Speaker circuits in the Amplified Left I/P Speaker harness connector.
Is the voltage present greater than 1 volt?
Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Left I/P Speaker in accordance with

the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
8A - 18
3.
CHECK THE (X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (+) circuit between the Amplifier C2 harness connector and the Amplified Left
I/P Speaker harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (+) circuit for
an open.
4.
CHECK THE (X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit between the Amplifier C2 harness connector and the Amplified Left
I/P Speaker harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit for
an open.
LX
LX
8A - 19
B1464-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
8A - 20
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on. Radio volume at 25 or higher.
Set Condition:
The amplifier detects that the output circuits are shorted together.
Possible Causes
(X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER
(-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
Turn
With

the
the
the
the
the
ignition on, then off, and then on again.

radio on.
volume level to 25.
Does the scan tool display active: B1464-CHANNEL 1 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER
Disconnect the Amplified Left I/P Speaker.

Measure the resistance of the speaker between the two terminals.
Is the resistance of the speaker less than 1 ohm?
Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Left I/P Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8A - 21
CHECK THE (X209) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X299) AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P
SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker
(+) circuit, and the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X209) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (+) circuit, and
the (X299) Amplified Left I/P Speaker (-) circuit for a short
together.
No

8A - 22
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes

No
LX
8A - 23
8A - 24
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X208) Amplified Right
Front I/P Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X208) Amplified Right Front I/P Speaker (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE (X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X298) Amplified Right
Front I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X298) Amplified Right Front I/P Speaker (-) for
a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
8A - 25
CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Right Front I/P Speaker.
Measure the resistance of the speaker circuit between the Amplifier C2
harness connector and ground..
Yes
>> Replace the Right Front I/P Speaker in accordance with the
No

8A - 26
LX
LX
8A - 27
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Amplified Right I/P Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (+) circuit for
a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
8A - 28
3.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-) circuit for
a short to voltage.
No

LX
LX
8A - 29
8A - 30
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
RIGHT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
Turn
With
With
With

the
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
radio on.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE RIGHT FRONT I/P SPEAKER
Disconnect the Right I/P Speaker harness connector.

With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the
Amplified Right I/P Speaker circuits in the Amplified Right I/P Speaker
harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Right I/P Speaker in accordance with

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE (X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (+)
circuit between the Amplifier C2 harness connector and the Amplified
Right I/P Speaker harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (+) circuit for
an open.
4.
CHECK THE (X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-)
circuit between the Amplifier C2 harness connector and the Amplified
Right I/P Speaker harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-) circuit for
an open.
8A - 31
8A - 32
LX
LX
8A - 33
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P
SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
Turn
With

the
the
the
the
the

radio on.
volume level to 25.
TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER
Disconnect the Amplified Right I/P Speaker.

Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Right I/P Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
8A - 34
3.
LX
CHECK THE (X208) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X298) AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P
SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker
(+) circuit, and the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X208) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (+) circuit,
and the (X298) Amplified Right I/P Speaker (-) circuit for a
short together.
No

LX
8A - 35
B146A-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B146A-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes

No
8A - 36
B146B-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8A - 37
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B146B-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X291) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X291) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (-) for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
8A - 38
4.
CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Left Front Door Speaker.
Measure the resistance of the speaker circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness connector and ground..
Yes
>> Replace the Left Front Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No

LX
LX
B146C-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8A - 39
8A - 40
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B146C-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Amplified Left Front Door Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X291) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X291) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
No

LX
B146D-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
8A - 41
8A - 42
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
Turn
With
With
With

the
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
radio on.
Does the scan tool display active: B146D-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Disconnect the Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.

With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker circuits in
the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X201) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness
connector and the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (X201) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for an open.
LX
4.
8A - 43
CHECK THE (X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X291) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness
Yes

No
>> Repair the (X291) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit for an open.
8A - 44
B146E-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
LX
LX
8A - 45
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X291) AMPLIFIED LEFT
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
Turn
With

the
the
the
the
the

radio on.
volume level to 25.
Does the scan tool display active: B146E-CHANNEL 3 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Disconnect the Amplified Left Front Door Speaker.

Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Left Front Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X201) AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X291) AMPLIFIED
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X291) Amplified
Left Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X201) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X291) Amplified Left Front
Door Speaker (-) circuit for a short together.
No

8A - 46
LX
B146F-CHANNEL 4 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B146F-CHANNEL 4 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes

No
LX
8A - 47
8A - 48
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X202) Amplified Left Front Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.
CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Right Front Door Speaker.
Yes
>> Replace the Right Front Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No

8A - 49
8A - 50
LX
LX
8A - 51
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
No

8A - 52
LX
LX
8A - 53
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
Turn
With
With
With

the
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
radio on.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Disconnect the Right Front Door Speaker harness connector.

With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker circuits
in the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness connector and the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit for an open.
8A - 54
4.
LX
CHECK THE (X292) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness connector and the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (X292) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit for an open.
LX
8A - 55
8A - 56
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X292) AMPLIFIED
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
Turn
With

the
the
the
the
the

radio on.
volume level to 25.
TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Disconnect the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker.

Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Right Front Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X202) AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X292)
AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X292) Amplified
Right Front Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X202) Amplified Right Front Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X292) Amplified Right Front
No

LX
8A - 57

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes

No
8A - 58
LX
LX
8A - 59
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
8A - 60
4.
CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Left Rear Door Speaker.
Yes
>> Replace the Left Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No

LX
LX
8A - 61
8A - 62
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
No

LX
8A - 63
8A - 64
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
Turn
With
With
With

the
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
radio on.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Disconnect the Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.

With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker circuits in
the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Left I/P Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for an open.
LX
4.
8A - 65
CHECK THE (X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness
Yes

No
>> Repair the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit for an open.
8A - 66
LX
LX
8A - 67
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X303) AMPLIFIED LEFT
REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
Turn
With

the
the
the
the
the

radio on.
volume level to 25.
TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Disconnect the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker.

Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X393) AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X303) AMPLIFIED
LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X303) Amplified
Left Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X393) Amplified Left Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X303) Amplified Left Rear Door
Speaker (-) circuit for a short together.
No

8A - 68
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes

No
LX
B147A-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8A - 69
8A - 70
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B147A-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.
CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Reconnect and reinstall the Right Rear Door Speaker.
Yes
>> Replace the Right Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No

8A - 71
8A - 72
B147B-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8A - 73
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B147B-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
No

8A - 74
B147C-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8A - 75
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
Turn
With
With
With

the
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
radio on.
Does the scan tool display active: B147C-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Disconnect the Right Rear Door Speaker harness connector.

With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker circuits
in the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness connector and the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit for an open.
8A - 76
4.
LX
CHECK THE (X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness connector and the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (X394) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit for an open.
LX
8A - 77
B147D-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
8A - 78
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X394) AMPLIFIED RIGHT
REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
Turn
With

the
the
the
the
the

radio on.
volume level to 25.
Does the scan tool display active: B147D-CHANNEL 6 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Disconnect the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker.

Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X304) AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X394) AMPLIFIED
RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X394) Amplified
Right Rear Door Speaker (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X304) Amplified Right Rear Door Speaker (+) circuit, and the (X394) Amplified Right Rear
No

LX
8A - 79
B147E-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
rate of 5 1 sec.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B147E-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes

No
8A - 80
B147F-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8A - 81
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1(+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

(X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
SUBWOOFER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B147F-CHANNEL 7 AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
8A - 82
4.
CHECK OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER

Reconnect the Subwoofer harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Subwoofer 1 in accordance with the service information.

No

LX
LX
8A - 83
8A - 84
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

(X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Amplified Subwoofer 1 harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit.

Yes
>> Repair the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
No

LX
8A - 85
8A - 86
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

(X299) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
SUBWOOFER
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
Turn
With
With
With

the
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
radio on.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE SUBWOOFER
Disconnect the Subwoofer harness connector.

With a voltmeter set to read in A/C voltage, measure the voltage of the Amplified Subwoofer 1 circuits in the Amplified Subwoofer harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Subwoofer in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness connector
and the Amplified Subwoofer harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit for an open.
LX
4.
8A - 87
CHECK THE (X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit between the Amplifier C1 harness connector
and the Amplified Subwoofer harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit for an open.
8A - 88
LX
LX
8A - 89
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-)
CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
Turn
With

the
the
the
the
the

radio on.
volume level to 25.
TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1
Disconnect the Amplified Subwoofer 1.

Yes
>> Replace the Amplified Subwoofer 1 in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE (X300) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) CIRCUIT, AND THE (X390) AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER
1 (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit, and the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer
1 (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X300) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (+) circuit, and the (X390) Amplified Subwoofer 1 (-) circuit for
a short together.
No

8A - 90
U0019CAN B BUS
LX
LX
8A - 91
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
Whenever the Can B Bus (+) or B Bus () circuit is open, shorted to voltage or shorted to ground, this code
will set.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS DTCs IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE

(D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT OPEN
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs
Does the scan tool display U0019CAN B BUS CIRCUIT?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FRONT CONTROL MODULE DTCs
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module DTCs

Does the scan tool display any CAN B BUS DTCs ACTIVE?
Yes
>> Refer to the symptom list for problems related to Communication in the ELECTRICAL. ELECTRONIC
CONTROL MODULES ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSES section.
No
>> Go to 3
3.
CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the Amplifier harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (D55) Can B Bus (+) circuit between the Front Control Module C1 harness connector
and the Amplifier harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the Can B Bus (+) circuit for an open.

8A - 92
4.
LX
CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (D54) Can B Bus () circuit between the Front Control Module C1 harness connector
Yes
>> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the service information..

No
>> Repair the Can B Bus () circuit for an open.

LX
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE
8A - 93
8A - 94
LX
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
will set.
Possible Causes

AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
No
>> Go to 3
3.

Disconnect the Amplifier harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

LX
4.
8A - 95
Yes
>> Replace the Amplifier in accordance with the service information..

No


(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic
test procedure.
8A - 96
B1401-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8A - 97
When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
When the Output circuit is LOW for more than 3 seconds.
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X201) (X291) LEFT FRONT SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
INTERMITTENT CONDITION
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Scan Tool, clear all Audio DTCs.
Radio on.
Scan Tool, read the DTC information.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1401-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The condition that caused the symptom is currently not present. Inspect the related wiring for a possible
intermittent condition. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires.
2.
(X201) (X291) SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUITS.

Disconnect the Radio C1 harness connector.
Disconnect the Front Left Audio Speaker connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and each speaker (X201)(+) and (X291)(-) circuit.
Is the resistance below 1000.0 ohms for each circuit?
Yes
>> Repair the applicable Speaker (+) or (-) Output circuit for a short to ground condition.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
SPEAKER

Disconnect the Front Left Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
With the Scan Tool, clear all Audio DTCs.
With the Scan Tool, read the DTC information.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1401-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Replace the Speaker in accordance with the service information.

No
>> Test Complete.
8A - 98
B1402-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8A - 99
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X201) SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT (+)
(X291) SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT (-)
Diagnostic Test
1.

With the scan tool, read Radio DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1402-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X201) SPEAKER (+) CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Left Front Speaker harness connector.
Measure for voltage on the (X201) Speaker (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X201) Speaker (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
8A - 100
3.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (X291) SPEAKER (-) CIRCUIT
Measure for voltage on the (X291) Speaker (-) circuit.

Yes
>> Repair the (X291) Speaker (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Replace the Radio in accordance with the service information.

LX
LX
B1403-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
8A - 101
8A - 102
LX
When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
When the Output circuit is open for more than 3 seconds. The Radio will not set the fault if the radio confirms
an amplifier is on the BUS.
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X201) (X291) LEFT FRONT SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1403-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Front Left Audio Speaker connector.
Measure the resistance of each speaker (X201)(+) and (X291)(-) circuit between the Radio and the Speaker.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the applicable Output Speaker circuit for an open condition.
3.
SPEAKER

Disconnect the Front Left Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1403-FRONT LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
B1405-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8A - 103
8A - 104
LX
When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X202) (X292) RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1405-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Front Right Audio Speaker connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
SPEAKER

Disconnect the Front Right Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1405-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
B1406-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8A - 105
8A - 106
LX
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B1406-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Right Rear Speaker harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Yes
No

8A - 107
8A - 108
B1407-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8A - 109
When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X202) (X292) RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1407-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(X202) (X292) Speaker Output circuits.

Disconnect the Front Right Audio Speaker connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
3.
Speaker

Disconnect the Front Right Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1407-FRONT RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8A - 110
B1409-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8A - 111
When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X303) (X393) LEFT REAR SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1409-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Rear Left Audio Speaker connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
SPEAKER

Disconnect the Rear Left Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1409-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8A - 112
B140A-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8A - 113
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B140A-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Left Rear Speaker harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8A - 114
3.

Yes
No

LX
LX
B140B-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
8A - 115
8A - 116
LX
When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X303) (X393) LEFT REAR SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
Intermittent Condition
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140B-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Rear Left Audio Speaker connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
3.
Speaker

Disconnect the Rear Left Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140B-REAR LEFT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
B140D-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8A - 117
8A - 118
LX
When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X304) (X394) RIGHT REAR SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140D-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Rear Right Audio Speaker connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
Speaker

Disconnect the Rear Right Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140D-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
B140E-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8A - 119
8A - 120
LX
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B140E-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Right Rear Speaker harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Yes
No

8A - 121
8A - 122
B140F-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8A - 123
When Monitored:
With the Radio on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPEAKER
(X304) (X394) RIGHT REAR SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140F-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Rear Right Audio Speaker connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
3.
Speaker

Disconnect the Rear Right Audio Speaker.
Turn the Radio on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B140F-REAR RIGHT AUDIO SPEAKER OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8A - 124
B1421-AUDIO CD READ ERROR/INOPERABLE DISC

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and the radio CD player turned on.
Set Condition:
The code will set if a CD that is not formatted as a music CD is installed in the radio CD player.
Possible Causes
CD READ FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1.
RADIO
Replace the problem CD with a good, clean,unscratched, music CD.

Turn the radio CD player on.
With the Scan Tool, read DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool display: B1421 Audio CD Read Error/Inoperable Disc?
Yes
>> Eject the inoperative CD and replace the CD in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
LX
B1422-AUDIO DVD READ ERROR/INOPERABLE DISC

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition on and the DVD player turned on.
Set Condition:
The code will set if a DVD that is not formatted as a DVD is installed in the DVD player.
Possible Causes
DVD READ FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1.
DVD PLAYER
Replace the problem DVD with a good, clean,unscratched DVD.

Turn the DVD player on.
With the Scan Tool, read DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool display: B1422 Audio DVD Read Error/Inoperable Disc?
Yes
>> Eject the inoperative DVD and replace the DVD in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Test Complete.
8A - 125
8A - 126
LX
B1429-RADIO DISPLAY HIGH TEMPERATURE

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition and Navigation Radio on.
Set Condition:
The code will set if the temperature inside the display exceeds 158F
Possible Causes
HIGH TEMPERATURE FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1429RADIO DISPLAY HIGH TEMPERATURE IS ACTIVE.
With the Scan Tool, erase the Audio DTCs.

Start the engine and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
If the vehicle has been in the hot sunlight or extreme cold, move the vehicle indoors and open the doors to allow
the inside temperature to stabilize.
The radio display should operate to 158F.
With the Scan Tool, read the DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool display, B1429 Radio Display High Temperature?
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
8A - 127
B142A-RADIO UNIT HIGH TEMPERATURE

When Monitored:
Continuously with the ignition and Radio on
Set Condition:
The code will set if the temperature inside the radio is above +65C ( +145F )
Possible Causes
HIGH TEMPERATURE FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B142ARADIO UNIT HIGH TEMPERATURE IS ACTIVE.
With the Scan Tool, erase the Audio DTCs.

Start the engine and allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
If the vehicle has been in the hot sunlight or extreme cold, move the vehicle indoors and open the doors to allow
the inside temperature to stabilize.
The Radio should operate between 23C and 65C ( 10F and +145F ).
Does the Scan Tool display, B142A Radio Unit High Temperature?
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8A - 128
LX
B142D-AUDIO ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED

When Monitored:
With the ignition on and the radio in seek mode.
Set Condition:
With the radio in seek mode for two loops around the band. The radio does not detect an antenna connection
or does not receive a radio station signal.
Possible Causes
BAD ANTENNA CONNECTION
RADIO
Diagnostic Test
1.
Test Antenna

Disconnect the Radio Antenna connector.
Inspect the Radio Antenna connection.
Was the Antenna connection clean and secure?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Repair the Antenna connection as needed.

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER1.
2.
ANTENNA
Refer to the Audio System in the service information and test the antenna in accordance with the service procedure.
Is the Antenna ok?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair or replace the Antenna assembly as necessary.

3.
RADIO
NOTE: Reconnect all previously disconnected components.

NOTE: Move vehicle outside approximately 30ft from any structure.
Turn the ignition and radio on.
With the Scan Tool, erase the audio DTCs, put the radio in seek up and down mode for 2 loops around the band
cycle before proceeding.
With the Scan Tool, read the audio DTCs.
Did this DTC reset?
Yes
>> Replace the radio in accordance with the service information.

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER1.
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
8A - 129
B142E-GPS ANTENNA NOT CONNECTED

When Monitored:
With the ignition on and the radio in navigation mode.
Set Condition:
With the radio does not detect GPS antenna connection.
Possible Causes
BAD ANTENNA CONNECTION
RADIO
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding.
Diagnostic Test
1.
TEST ANTENNA

Disconnect the GPS Antenna connector.
Inspect the GPS Antenna connection.
Was the Antenna connection clean and secure?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Repair the Antenna connection as needed.

2.
ANTENNA
Refer to the Audio System in the service information and test the antenna in accordance with the service procedure.
Is the Antenna ok?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair or replace the Antenna assembly as necessary.

3.
RADIO
NOTE: Reconnect all previously disconnected components.

NOTE: Move vehicle outside approximately 30ft from any structure.
Turn the ignition and radio on.
With the Scan Tool, erase the audio DTCs and operate the navigation system.
With the Scan Tool, read the audio DTCs.
Did this DTC reset?
Yes
>> Replace the radio in accordance with the service information.

No
>> Test Complete.
8A - 130
B221E-RADIO INTERNAL
When Monotored:
Continuously with the ignition on and radio turned on
Set Condition:
The code will set if the radio detects a radio internal failure
Possible Causes
RADIO INTERNAL FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Verify DTC B221E-RADIO INTERNAL IS ACTIVE
NOTE: If a DTC is set, erase the DTC and attempt to reset the DTC. If the DTC resets, follow test.
This is an internal radio failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B221E-Radio Internal?
Repair
Replace the Radio in accordance with the service information.
LX
AUDIO/VIDEO - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX
8A - 131

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
AUDIO/VIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
AMPLIFIER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ANTENNA - SATELLITE RADIO
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
ANTENNA - NAVIGATION
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
ANTENNA-REAR GLASS INTEGRAL
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
REAR GLASS INTEGRAL ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . 140
ANTENNA CABLE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
ANTENNA CABLE-INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
MODULE-ANTENNA
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ANTENNA MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
NOISE SUPPRESSION COMPONENTS-RADIO
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
RADIO
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
RECEIVER-SATELLITE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
SPEAKER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8A - 132
LX

DESCRIPTION
Several radios are offered. The audio system uses a CAN B bus Ignition ON message so that the system will only
operate when the ignition switch is in the RUN or ACCESSORY/ACCESSORY DELAY positions.
The
audio system includes the following components:

Amplifier
Antenna (Radio, Navigation, Satellite)
Radio noise suppression components
Radio
Speakers
Certain functions and features of the audio/video system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules
in the vehicle over the CAN bus network. For diagnosis of the CAN bus network, the use of a scan tool and the
proper Diagnostic Procedures information is recommended.
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information.

AUDIO/VIDEO
Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the use of
the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIRBAGS, REFER TO ELECTRICAL, RESTRAINTS BEFORE
ATTEMPTING ANY STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
AUDIO SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
CONDITION
NO AUDIO.
NO DISPLAY.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
1. FUSE INOPERATIVE.
1. CHECK RADIO FUSES IN INTEGRATED POWER MODULE

(IPM). REPLACE FUSES, IF REQUIRED.
2. RADIO CONNECTOR
DAMAGED.
2. CHECK FOR LOOSE OR CORRODED RADIO CONNECTOR.

REPAIR, IF REQUIRED.
3. WIRING DAMAGED.
3. CHECK FOR BATTERY VOLTAGE AT RADIO CONNECTOR.

REPAIR WIRING, IF REQUIRED.
4. GROUND DAMAGED.
4. CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN RADIO CHASSIS AND

A KNOWN GOOD GROUND. THERE SHOULD BE
CONTINUITY. REPAIR GROUND, IF REQUIRED.
5. RADIO
INOPERATIVE.
5. EXCHANGE OR REPLACE RADIO, IF REQUIRED.
6. AMPLIFIER
INOPERATIVE.
6. PERFORM DIAGNOSIS ON AMPLIFIER. REPLACE AS

NECESSARY.
1. CHECK RADIO FUSES. REPLACE FUSES, IF REQUIRED.
2. RADIO CONNECTOR
DAMAGED.

3. WIRING DAMAGED.

LX
CONDITION
NO MEMORY.
POOR RADIO
RECEPTION.
SOUND
DISTORTION
(VIBRATION
FROM SPEAKER
AREA, BUZZING
- HUMMING
NO/POOR TAPE
OPERATION.
8A - 133
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
4. GROUND DAMAGED.

5. RADIO
INOPERATIVE.
1. CHECK IGNITION-OFF DRAW FUSE. REPLACE FUSE, IF

REQUIRED.
2. RADIO CONNECTOR
DAMAGED.

3. WIRING DAMAGED.

4. GROUND DAMAGED.

5. RADIO
INOPERATIVE.
1. ANTENNA OR CABLE
DAMAGED OR
INOPERATIVE.
1. REFER TO ANTENNA DIAGNOSIS. REPAIR OR REPLACE

ANTENNA, IF REQUIRED.
2. GROUND DAMAGED.

3. RADIO
INOPERATIVE.
4. POOR ANTENNA
CONNECTION AT
RADIO OR IN LINE.
4. VERIFY PROPER CONNECTION.
1. DOOR TRIM PANEL

LOOSE OR MISSING
FASTENERS.
1. INSPECT DOOR TRIM PANEL AND CORRECT AS

NECESSARY. REPLACE ANY MISSING FASTENERS.
2. WATER SHIELD
LOOSE OR
MISALIGNED.
2. INSPECT WATER SHIELD AND ADJUST AS REQUIRED.
3. ITEMS PLACED IN
DOOR TRIM PANEL
MAP POCKETS
VIBRATING OR
MOVING FROM SIDE
TO SIDE.
3. REMOVE ITEMS FROM DOOR TRIM PANEL. ENSURE THAT

VIBRATION IS NO LONGER PRESENT.
1. TAPE DAMAGED.
1. INSERT KNOWN GOOD TAPE AND TEST OPERATION.
2. FOREIGN OBJECTS
BEHIND TAPE DOOR.
2. REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECTS AND TEST OPERATION.
3. DIRTY CASSETTE
TAPE HEAD.
3. CLEAN HEAD WITH MOPAR CASSETTE HEAD CLEANER.
4. RADIO
INOPERATIVE.
8A - 134
CONDITION
NO COMPACT
DISC
OPERATION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
LX
CORRECTION
1. CD DAMAGED.
1. INSERT KNOWN GOOD CD AND TEST OPERATION. AVOID

THE USE OF 9HOME MAID9 CDS WITH ADHESIVE LABELS.
THE LABELS MAY CAUSE DISC TO BECOME JAMMED IN THE
RADIO.
2. FOREIGN MATERIAL
ON CD.
2. CLEAN CD AND TEST OPERATION.
3. CONDENSATION ON
CD OR OPTICS.
3. ALLOW TEMPERATURE OF VEHICLE INTERIOR TO

STABILIZE AND TEST OPERATION.
4. RADIO
INOPERATIVE.
LX
8A - 135
AMPLIFIER
DESCRIPTION
The amplifier (2) is available in two ratings: 288 watt
(RD7), and 380 watt (RDF). The amplifier is mounted
to the left of the steering column under the instrument
panel.
OPERATION
The amplifier receives fused battery current from a fuse in the rear Power Distribution Center (PDC) at all times.
The internal circuitry of the amplifier switches the amplifier ON based upon a CAN bus message that is received
from the radio receiver whenever the radio is turned on. The amplifier receives the sound signal inputs from the left
and right rear outputs of the radio, then sends the amplified speaker outputs for each of those channels to the
speakers.

AMPLIFIER
Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic
Service information.
Refer to the appropriate wiring information.
The amplifier unit should be checked if there is no sound output noted from the speakers. For diagnosis of the
power amplifier, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AUDIO/SPEAKER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
REMOVAL
NOTE: A battery reconnect procedure must be performed anytime the battery has been disconnected. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY
SYSTEM - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
1. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable.
2. Remove the instrument panel silencer.
3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors.
8A - 136
4. Remove the mounting fasteners (1).

5. Remove the amplifier (2).
INSTALLATION
1. Position amplifier (2) into place.
2. Install mounting fasteners (1).
3. Connect electrical harness connectors.

4. Install instrument panel silencer.
5. Connect battery negative cable.
LX
LX
ANTENNA - SATELLITE RADIO

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. Lower the rear portion of the headliner as necessary to access underside of antenna
3. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from the
antenna.
4. Remove the mounting fastener.

5. From inside the vehicle, and using a flat bladed
tool, depress one of the retaining tabs on the
antenna. Push up the one side of the antenna connector through the roof panel. Depress the other
side of the connector and remove the antenna.
INSTALLATION
1. Insert wire harness through hole in roof panel.
Press antenna into position until both retainers
engage into position.
2. Install and tighten mounting fastener.
8A - 137
8A - 138
3. Connect wire harness connectors to antenna.

4. Install headliner.
LX
LX
ANTENNA - NAVIGATION
REMOVAL
1. Remove the radio (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AUDIO/RADIO - REMOVAL).
2. Remove the instrument cluster (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the navigation antenna fasteners (1).
4. Remove the navigation antenna (2) from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the navigation antenna (2) into the vehicle.
2. Install the navigation antenna fasteners (1).
3. Install the instrument cluster (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - INSTALLATION).
4. Install the radio (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AUDIO/
RADIO - INSTALLATION).
8A - 139
8A - 140
LX
ANTENNA-REAR GLASS INTEGRAL

DESCRIPTION
The integral antenna element is bonded to the rear glass and is replaced with the glass assembly only.
OPERATION
The integral antenna receives radio frequencies and sends them to the antenna module for amplification.

REAR GLASS INTEGRAL ANTENNA
The antenna grid pattern is located above the EBL grid.
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. To detect breaks in the integral
antenna elements, the following procedure is required:
1. Disconnect the antenna module connector from the antenna terminals on the glass.
2. Using an ohmmeter, place a lead on one of the terminals and check each end of the grid pattern connected to
this terminal for continuity. If continuity is present, move one lead through the grid in progression starting at the
terminal with the other lead on the terminal until continuity is lost. Repeat procedure for the other terminal. A
break in the antenna grid can be repaired using a Mopar Rear Window Defogger Repair Kit or equivalent.
LX
8A - 141
ANTENNA CABLE
REMOVAL
NOTE: A battery reconnect procedure must be performed anytime the battery has been disconnected. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable.

Remove right side cowl trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/COWL TRIM COVER - REMOVAL).
Disconnect antenna cable from instrument panel antenna cable.
Remove right side front and rear door scuff plates (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/DOOR SILL SCUFF PLATE
- REMOVAL).
5. Remove right side C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
6. Disconnect antenna cable from antenna module.
7. Move floor carpet aside.
8. Remove antenna cable.
INSTALLATION
1. Position antenna cable and secure to wire harness.
2. Connect antenna cable to antenna module.
3. Connect antenna cable to instrument panel antenna cable.
4. Install right side C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - INSTALLATION).
5. Install right side front and rear door scuff plates (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/DOOR SILL SCUFF PLATE INSTALLATION).
6. Install right side cowl trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/COWL TRIM COVER - INSTALLATION).
8A - 142
ANTENNA CABLE-INSTRUMENT PANEL

REMOVAL
2. Remove the radio (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AUDIO/RADIO - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the glove box (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the right side cowl trim (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/COWL
TRIM
COVER
REMOVAL).
5. Disconnect antenna cable at right side cowl area.
6. Remove cable from instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Install cable to instrument panel.
2. Connect antenna cable at right side cowl area.
3. Install the right side cowl trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/COWL TRIM COVER - INSTALLATION).
4. Install the glove box (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the radio (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AUDIO/
RADIO - INSTALLATION).
6. Connect the battery negative cable.
LX
LX
8A - 143
MODULE-ANTENNA
DESCRIPTION
The antenna module is an electronic circuit component designed to capture and enhance RF (Radio Frequency)
signals in both the AM and FM broadcast bands. The antenna module is mounted to the right C-pillar (sedan) or
rear liftgate (wagon). The module is grounded through the mounting bracket and fastener. The module has a two
wire electrical connector that connects to the integral radio antenna and EBL grid, located on the rear window. There
is also an electrical connector for battery voltage and a coax cable connector.
OPERATION
The antenna module receives both AM and FM radio signals supplied by the rear window integral radio antenna and
selectively amplifies them. The amplified signal is then sent through the body length coax cable to the radio input.

ANTENNA MODULE
CONDITION
NO AM RECEPTION,
WEAK FM RECEPTION
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
1. Antenna module to antenna

connector open or disconnected.
1. Repair open or reconnect

antenna module connector to
glass mounted antenna.
2. Cable open or disconnected.
2. Replace antenna cable or,

reconnect cable.
3. No battery power at antenna

module.
3. Check fuse. If okay, repair

open in battery voltage circuit.
4. Antenna module disconnected

from glass.
4. Connect module connector to

glass.
NO AM OR FM
RECEPTION
1. Coax disconnected at radio.
1. Reconnect coax.
2. Coax shorted to ground.
2. Repair or Replace coax
WEAK OR NO AM/FM
RECEPTION
1. Antenna Module inoperative.
1. Replace antenna module.
REMOVAL
SEDAN
2. Remove C-pillar upper trim.
3. Disconnect wire harness connectors and antenna
cable.
4. Remove mounting fasteners and antenna module.
8A - 144
WAGON
2. Remove the liftgate trim.
3. Disconnect wire harness connectors and antenna
cable.
4. Remove mounting fasteners and antenna module.
INSTALLATION
SEDAN
1. Position module into place.
2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners.
3. Connect wire harness connectors and antenna
cable to antenna module.
4. Install C-pillar upper trim.
LX
LX
WAGON
3. Connect wire harness connectors and antenna
cable to antenna module.
4. Install the liftgate trim.
8A - 145
8A - 146
LX
NOISE SUPPRESSION COMPONENTS-RADIO

DESCRIPTION
Radio noise suppression devices are installed on this vehicle. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) can be produced by any on-board or external source of electromagnetic energy. These electromagnetic energy sources can radiate electromagnetic signals through the air, or conduct them through the vehicle
electrical system.
When the audio system converts RFI or EMI to an audible acoustic wave form, it is referred to as radio noise. This
undesirable radio noise is generally manifested in the form of buzzing, hissing, popping, clicking, crackling,
and/or whirring sounds. In most cases, RFI and EMI radio noise can be suppressed using a combination of vehicle
and component grounding, filtering and shielding techniques. This vehicle is equipped with radio noise suppression
devices that were designed to minimize exposure to typical sources of RFI and EMI; thereby, minimizing radio noise
complaints.
Radio noise suppression is accomplished primarily through circuitry or devices that are integral to the radios, audio
power amplifiers and other on-board electrical components such as generators, wiper motors, blower motors, and
fuel pumps that have been found to be potential sources of RFI or EMI. External radio noise suppression devices
that are used on this vehicle to control RFI or EMI, and can be serviced, include the following:
Engine-to-frame ground strap - This length of braided ground strap has an eyelet terminal connector crimped
to each end. One end is secured to the engine cylinder heads. The other is secured to the frame.
Resistor-type spark plugs - This type of spark plug has an internal resistor connected in series between the
spark plug terminal and the center electrode to help reduce the production of electromagnetic radiation that
can result in radio noise.
Exhaust-to-frame ground strap - This length of braided ground strap has an eyelet terminal connector
crimped to each end. One end is secured to the exhaust pipe. The other is secured to the frame.
OPERATION
There are two common strategies that can be used to suppress Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) radio noise. The first suppression strategy involves preventing the production of RFI
and EMI electromagnetic signals at their sources. The second suppression strategy involves preventing the reception of RFI and EMI electromagnetic signals by the audio system components.
The use of braided ground straps in key locations is part of the RFI and EMI prevention strategy. These ground
straps ensure adequate ground paths, particularly for high current components such as many of those found in the
starting, charging, ignition, engine control and transmission control systems. An insufficient ground path for any of
these high current components may result in radio noise caused by induced voltages created as the high current
seeks alternative ground paths through components or circuits intended for use by, or in close proximity to the audio
system components or circuits.
Preventing the reception of RFI and EMI is accomplished by ensuring that the audio system components are correctly installed in the vehicle. Loose, corroded or improperly soldered wire harness connections, improperly routed
wiring and inadequate audio system component grounding can all contribute to the reception of RFI and EMI. A
properly grounded antenna body and radio chassis, as well as a shielded antenna coaxial cable with clean and tight
connections will each help reduce the potential for reception of RFI and EMI.
LX
RADIO
DESCRIPTION
Available radios include:
AM/FM/MP3/6 disc CD with full screen navigation (REC sales code)
AM/FM/MP3/6 disc CD (RAQ sales code)
AM/FM/cassette/6 disc CD/MP3 (RAK sales
code)
AM/FM/CD with changer control (REF sales
code)
AM/FM/6 disc CD/RDS (RAR sales code) export only
AM/FM/CD/RDS (REG sales code) - export only
AM/FM with integrated display (REJ sales code)
- export only
REMOVAL
2. Remove instrument panel center bezel (Refer to 23
BODY/INSTRUMENT
PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL CENTER BEZEL - REMOVAL).
3. Remove mounting fasteners.
8A - 147
8A - 148
CAUTION: Pulling the antenna cable straight out

of the radio without pulling on the locking antenna
connector could damage the cable or radio.
4. Disconnect the antenna cable (3) by pulling the
locking antenna connector (2) away from the radio
(1).
5. Disconnect the electrical harness connector and
remove radio.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the electrical harness and antenna cable
(3) to radio (1).
2. Position radio and install mounting fasteners.

3. Install instrument panel center bezel (Refer to 23 BODY/INSTRUMENT
PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL CENTER BEZEL - INSTALLATION).
LX
LX
8A - 149
RECEIVER-SATELLITE
REMOVAL
NOTE:
If the owners satellite service was active before the satellite receiver was replaced the new satellite receiver
will have to be activated. The existing satellite receiver will have to be deactivated before the replacement
satellite receiver can be activated.
To activate Sirius satellite radio service, call Sirius at their toll-free number. Please have the following information available when activating a system:
Electronic Serial Number / Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) of the unit to be replaced
ESN/SID of the replacement receiver
Vehicle Owners name and address
VIN
The ESN/SID number can be obtained through the radio display by following the steps in the satellite
radio owners manual.
The vehicle must be outside with the audio system powered on, in the satellite radio mode, to receive the
activation signal.
SEDAN
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.

Remove left side trunk trim.
Disconnect electrical harness connector (3).
Disconnect antenna harness connectors.
5. Remove mounting bracket fasteners (1).

6. Remove module to mounting bracket fasteners (2).
WAGON
NOTE:
VIN
activation signal.
8A - 150
2. Remove the left rear quarter trim panel.
3. Disconnect electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect antenna harness connectors.
5. Remove mounting bracket fasteners
.
6. Remove module to mounting bracket fasteners (2).
LX
LX
8A - 151
INSTALLATION
SEDAN
NOTE:
VIN
activation signal.
1. Install and tighten module to mounting bracket fasteners (2).
3. Install and tighten mounting bracket fasteners (1).
4. Connect antenna harness connectors.
5. Connect electrical harness connectors (3).
6. Install left side trunk trim.
WAGON
NOTE:
VIN
activation signal.
8A - 152
1. Install and tighten module to mounting bracket fasteners (2).
3. Install and tighten mounting bracket fasteners.
4. Connect antenna harness connectors.

5. Connect electrical harness connectors.
6. Install left rear quarter trim panel.
LX
LX
8A - 153
SPEAKER
DESCRIPTION
FOUR SPEAKER
The four speaker system includes four speakers in four locations. One 15.2 X 23 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter
speaker is located in each front door. There is also one 15.2 X 23 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter speaker located
on each side of the rear shelf.
SIX SPEAKER
The six speaker system features six speakers in six locations. One 15.2 X 23 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter
speaker is located in each front door. One 15.2 X 23 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter speaker located on each side
of the rear shelf. Two 8.9 centimeter (3.5 inch) speakers are located on the top portion of the instrument panel.
SIX SPEAKER - BOSTON ACOUSTICS

The six speaker system features six speakers in six locations. One 15.2 X 23 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter
of the rear shelf. Two 8.9 centimeter (3.5 inch) speakers are located on the top portion of the instrument panel. This
speaker system also includes an amplifier. The total available power of the speaker system is 288 watts.
EIGHT SPEAKER - BOSTON ACOUSTICS

The eight speaker system features eight speakers in eight locations. One 16.5 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) diameter
of the rear shelf. A subwoofer is located on the rear shelf (sedan only). Three 8.9 centimeter (3.5 inch) speakers are
located on the top portion of the instrument panel. This speaker system also includes an amplifier. The total available power of the speaker system is 380 watts.

SPEAKER
Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic
Service information.
WARNING: DISABLE THE AIRBAG SYSTEM BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY STEERING WHEEL, STEERING
COLUMN, SEAT BELT TENSIONER, SIDE AIRBAG, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
SERVICE. DISCONNECT AND ISOLATE THE BATTERY NEGATIVE (GROUND) CABLE, THEN WAIT TWO MINUTES FOR THE AIRBAG SYSTEM CAPACITOR TO DISCHARGE BEFORE PERFORMING FURTHER DIAGNOSIS OR SERVICE. THIS IS THE ONLY SURE WAY TO DISABLE THE AIRBAG SYSTEM. FAILURE TO TAKE
THE PROPER PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: The speaker output of the radio is a floating ground system. Do not allow any speaker lead to
short to ground, as damage to the radio may result.
1. If all speakers are inoperative, check the radio fuses in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair
the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse.
2. Check the amplifier fuse (if equipped) in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the shorted
circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Turn the radio receiver ON. Adjust the balance and fader control
controls to check the performance of each individual speaker. Note the speaker locations that are not performing
correctly. Go to Step 4.
4. Turn the radio OFF. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. If vehicle is not
equipped with a amplifier, remove the radio receiver. If the vehicle is equipped with an amplifier, disconnect the
wire harness connectors. There are two connectors. The one on the body harness has body speakers only. The
8A - 154
LX
other on the instrument panel harness has the instrument panel speakers, battery, ground, and CAN. Go to Step
5.
5. Check both the speaker feed (+) circuit and return (-) circuit cavities for the inoperative speaker at the wire harness connector for continuity to ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the
shorted speaker feed (+) and/or return (-) circuits(s) to the speaker as required.
6. Disconnect wire harness connector at the inoperative speaker. Check for continuity between the speaker feed (+)
circuit cavities of the radio receiver wire harness connector or if equipped, the amplifier wire harness connector
and the speaker wire harness connector. Repeat the check between the speaker return (-) circuit cavities of the
radio receiver wire harness connector and the speaker wire harness connector. In each case, there should be
continuity. If OK, replace the faulty speaker. If not OK, repair the open speaker feed (+) and/or return (-) circuits(s) as required.
REMOVAL
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
2. Remove front door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
DOOR - FRONT/TRIM PANEL - REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect electrical harness
remove speaker.
connector
and
INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE SPEAKER

2. Remove speaker cover from instrument panel.
4. Disconnect electrical
remove speaker.
harness
connector
and
LX
INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER SPEAKER
2. Remove speaker cover from instrument panel.
4. Disconnect electrical harness
remove speaker.
connector
and
REAR SPEAKER - SEDAN

2. Remove upper C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the lower C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the rear shelf trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/REAR
SHELF
TRIM
PANEL
REMOVAL).
5. Remove the mounting fasteners.
remove speaker.
REAR SPEAKER - WAGON

2. Remove the quarter trim speaker cover (Refer to
23 - BODY/INTERIOR/SPEAKER BOX TRIM
COVER - REMOVAL).
remove speaker.
8A - 155
8A - 156
SUBWOOFER
2. Remove upper C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the lower C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the rear shelf trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/REAR
SHELF
TRIM
PANEL
REMOVAL).
remove subwoofer.
INSTALLATION
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
1. Connect electrical harness connector and position
speaker.
3. Install front door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
DOOR - FRONT/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
LX
LX
INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE SPEAKER
speaker.
3. Install speaker cover to instrument panel.
INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER SPEAKER

speaker.
3. Install speaker cover to instrument panel.
REAR SPEAKER - SEDAN

speaker.
3. Install the rear shelf trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/REAR SHELF TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
4. Install the lower C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the upper C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
8A - 157
8A - 158
REAR SPEAKER - WAGON

speaker.
3. Install the speaker grille trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/SPEAKER BOX TRIM COVER INSTALLATION).
SUBWOOFER
subwoofer.
4. Install the lower C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
5. Install the upper C-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/
LX
LX
SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO
DESCRIPTION
Four rocker-type switches are mounted on the front of
the steering wheel spokes.
The left switches control the following functions:
SCROLL - Controls the radio station seek
up/down, CD change track, tape change side,
satellite radio change channel, trip functions,
navigation, system status messages, and personal settings
FUNCTION SELECT - Controls the radio preset
advance or disc change (in audio mode), reset or
trip functions and scroll through warning messages, and personal feature selection (only when
vehicle is in Park).
AUDIO SYSTEM HOT KEY - Controls mode
selection: AM, FM, Tape, CD, Satellite Radio
The
right switches control the following:

MENU - Controls trip functions, navigation, system status, personal settings, and telephone
C/T - Compass/Temperature hot key
AUDIO SYSTEM VOLUME - Controls the system volume level
REMOVAL
2. Remove the driver airbag (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER AIRBAG - REMOVAL).
3. Using a trim stick, gently pry switch from steering
wheel at locations shown.
4. Disconnect electrical connector.
5. Remove switch from steering wheel.
8A - 159
8A - 160
INSTALLATION
1. Connect electrical harness connector to switch.
2. Position switch and press into place.
3. Install the driver airbag (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
RESTRAINTS/DRIVER AIRBAG - INSTALLATION).
LX
CHIME/BUZZER
LX
8B - 1
CHIME/BUZZER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
CHIME/BUZZER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . 1
CHIME/BUZZER - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . 59
CHIME/BUZZER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

B122C-PTS SENSOR 7 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . 4
B122E-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO
SHORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
B122F-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO
LONG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
B1231-PTS SENSOR 8 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 11
B1233-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO
SHORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
LONG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
B1236-PTS SENSOR 9 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 18
SHORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
LONG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
B123B-PTS SENSOR 10 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . 24
B123D-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO
SHORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
B123E-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO
LONG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
B2126-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . 32
B2127-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . 36
B212A-PTS DISPLAY SUPPLY VOLTAGE
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
B222A-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
B2232-(PTS) PARKTRONICS INTERNAL . . . . . . 43
B2234-(PTS) PARKTRONICS REAR DISPLAY
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED
FROM CLUSTER/CCN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
U0431-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED
FROM FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
U1002-PTS DISPLAY COMMUNICATION

CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
U1101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PTS
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . . 55
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . . 56
CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . 56
U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8B - 2

PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . 57
MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 57
SCCM-CAN-B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
LX
U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN
SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO
HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
LX

8B - 3
8B - 4
B122C-PTS SENSOR 7 CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8B - 5
When Monitored:
With the ignition in Run/Start, and the PRNDL in R, N, or D. (Late build vehicles will disable the Park Assist
System in Neutral)
Set Condition:
Sensor ring down time is too short (700 secs).
Possible Causes
(D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT
(D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
GROUND CIRCUIT
(D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z914) PARK ASSIST MODULE
GROUND CIRCUIT
(D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B122C-PTS SENSOR 7 CIRCUIT LOW

Apply the vehicle park brake.
Shift the transmission into reverse.
With the scan tool, record and erase Park Assist Module DTCs.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs.
Is DTC: B122C-PTS SENSOR 7 CIRCUIT LOW active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The condition that caused this code to set is not present at this time. Check for an intermittent condition
by inspecting the related wiring harness for chaffed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also
inspect the related connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
8B - 6
2.
CHECK PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Shift the transmission into park.

Disconnect Park Assist Sensor No. 7.
Does the scan tool display: B122C-PTS SENSOR 7 CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace Park Assist Sensor No. 7 in accordance with the

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to
BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
3.
CHECK THE (D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (X750) PARK
ASSIST SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Park Assist Module harness connector.
Measure the resistance between the (D700) Park Assist Sensor No. 7
Signal circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D700) Park Assist Sensor No. 7 Signal circuit
for a short to the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
LX
LX
4.
8B - 7
CHECK THE (D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (Z171) PARK
ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND CIRCUIT
Signal circuit and the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit.
Yes
for a short to the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
ASSIST MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
Signal circuit and the (Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
Yes
for a short to the (Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
8B - 8
6.
CHECK THE (D700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (D700) Park Assist
Sensor No. 7 Signal circuit.
Yes
No
>> Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the service information.
LX
LX
8B - 9
B122E-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO SHORT

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, transmission in reverse or neutral (Late build vehicles will disable the Park Assist System
in Neutral).
Set Condition:
Sensor ring down time exceeds limit (greater than 1450 secs).
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B122E-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO SHORT

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B122E-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO SHORT active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
REPLACE PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 7
View Repair
Repair
Replace Park Assist Sensor No. 7 in accordance with the service information.
8B - 10
LX
B122F-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO LONG

When Monitored:
in Neutral).
Set Condition:
Data line stuck at 0.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B122F-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO LONG

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B122F-PTS SENSOR 7 RING TIME TOO LONG active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
REPLACE PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO 7.
View Repair
Repair
LX
B1231-PTS SENSOR 8 CIRCUIT LOW
8B - 11
8B - 12
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition in Run/Start, and the PRNDL in R, N, or D (Late build vehicles will disable the Park Assist
System in Neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1231-PTS SENSOR 8 CIRCUIT LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1231-PTS SENSOR 8 CIRCUIT LOW active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
LX
2.
8B - 13

Does the scan tool display: B1231-PTS SENSOR 8 CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
8B - 14
4.
Yes
No
>> Go To 5
5.
Yes
No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
Yes
No
8B - 15
8B - 16
LX
B1233-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO SHORT

When Monitored:
in Neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1233-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO SHORT

Shift the transmission into Reverse.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1233-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO SHORT active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
View Repair
Repair
LX
8B - 17
B1234-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO LONG

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1234-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO LONG

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1234-PTS SENSOR 8 RING TIME TOO LONG active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
View Repair
Repair
8B - 18
B1236-PTS SENSOR 9 CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8B - 19
When Monitored:
System in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1236-PTS SENSOR 9 CIRCUIT LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1236-PTS SENSOR 9 CIRCUIT LOW active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Does the scan tool display: B1236-PTS SENSOR 9 CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

8B - 20
3.

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
Yes
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
Yes
No
>> Go To 6
6.
8B - 21
Yes
No
8B - 22
LX
B1238-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO SHORT

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1238-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO SHORT

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1238-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO SHORT active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
View Repair
Repair
LX
8B - 23
B1239-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO LONG

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST SENSOR N0. 9
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B1239-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO LONG

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B1239-PTS SENSOR 9 RING TIME TOO LONG active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
View Repair
Repair
8B - 24
B123B-PTS SENSOR 10 CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8B - 25
When Monitored:
With the ignition in Run/Start, and PRNDL in R, N, or D (Late build vehicles will disable the Park Assist System
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
GROUND CIRCUIT
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B123B-PTS SENSOR 10 CIRCUIT LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B123B-PTS SENSOR 10 CIRCUIT LOW active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Does the scan tool display: B123B-PTS SENSOR 10 CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

8B - 26
3.

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
Yes
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8B - 27
Yes
No
>> Go To 6
6.
Sensor No. 10 Signal circuit and ground.
Yes
No
8B - 28
LX
B123D-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO SHORT

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B123D-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO SHORT

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B123D-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO SHORT active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
REPLACE THE PARK ASSIST SENSOR N0. 10
View Repair
Repair
LX
8B - 29
B123E-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO LONG

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B123E-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO LONG

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC B123E-PTS SENSOR 10 RING TIME TOO LONG active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
View Repair
Repair
8B - 30
LX

When Monitored:
in neutral).
Set Condition:
Park Assist Module supply voltage less than 9.0 volts.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
VERIFY OPERATION OF THE VEHICLE CHARGING SYSTEM
NOTE: Troubleshoot any PCM charging/cranking DTCs before proceeding.

NOTE: Ensure the battery is fully charged.
Are any charging system DTCs present?
Yes
>> (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic test procedures.
No
LX
8B - 31

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, and the transmission in reverse or neutral (Late build vehicles will disable the Park Assist
System in neutral).
Set Condition:
Park Assist Module supply voltage greater than 16.0 volts.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
>> (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic test procedures.
No
8B - 32
B2126-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW
LX
LX
8B - 33
When Monitored:
System in neutral).
Set Condition:
Park assist Sensor supply voltage less than 7.2 volts.
Possible Causes
(X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z914) PARK ASSIST MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
PARK ASSIST SENSOR
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR AN ACTIVE DTC

Apply the park brake.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8B - 34
2.
LX
CHECK EACH PARK ASSIST SENSOR FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect one Park Assist Sensor.
With the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs. If DTC B2126 is still
active, repeat this procedure by disconnecting another park assist sensor. However, if DTC B2126 changes from active to stored, or if all four
sensors have been disconnected, proceed as follows:
Is B2126-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW still active?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Park Assist Sensor that caused DTC B2126 to
change from active to stored after disconnecting it in accordance with the service information.
3.
CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (X750) PARK ASSIST
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
NOTE: Perform this test with all Park Assist Sensors disconnected.
Measure the resistance between the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply
circuit and the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit for a
short to the (X750) Park Assist Sensor Ground circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.
8B - 35
CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (Z171) PARK ASSIST
DISPLAY GROUND CIRCUIT
circuit and the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit.
Yes
short to the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (Z914) PARK ASSIST
MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
circuit and the (Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
Yes
short to the (Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X700) Park Assist
Sensor Supply circuit.
Yes
short to ground.
No
8B - 36
B2127-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH
LX
LX
8B - 37
When Monitored:
With the ignition in Run/Start, PRNDL in R, N, or D; vehicle speed less than 40 mph (Late build vehicles will
disable the Park Assist System in neutral).
Set Condition:
Park Assist Sensor supply voltage greater than 9.2 volts.
Possible Causes
(X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B2127-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B2127-SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE HIGH active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (X700) PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (X700) Park Assist Sensor Supply circuit.
Yes
short to voltage.
No
8B - 38
B212A-PTS DISPLAY SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW
LX
LX
8B - 39
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Park Assist Sensor Display voltage less than 8.0 volts.
Possible Causes
(X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Z914) PARK ASSIST MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND
CIRCUIT
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B212A-PTS DISPLAY SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: B212A-PTS DISPLAY SUPPLY VOLTAGE LOW active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK PARK ASSIST MODULE FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO GROUND

Display Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8B - 40
3.
CHECK THE (X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z171) PARK
Disconnect the Park Assist Display harness connector.

Measure the resistance between the (X777) Park Assist Display Supply
Yes
>> Repair the (X777) Park Assist Display Supply circuit for a
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z914) PARK
Yes
short to the (Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK THE (X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X750) PARK
Yes
No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
CHECK THE (X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Display Supply circuit.
Yes
short to ground.
No
>> Replace the Park Assist Display in accordance with the service information.
8B - 41
8B - 42
LX
B222A-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Vehicle Line data transmitted on the CAN B bus doesnt correspond with the data stored in the Park
Assist Module.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK VEHICLE LINE IN THE PCM
With the scan tool, compare the vehicle line that is programmed in to the PCM to the vehicle line of the vehicle.
Does the vehicle line programmed into the PCM match the vehicle?
Yes
No
Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER 5. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING)
LX
8B - 43
B2232-(PTS) PARKTRONICS INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Park Assist Module detects an internal failure.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPLACE THE PARK ASSIST MODULE
View Repair
Repair
Replace the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information.
8B - 44
LX
B2234-(PTS) PARKTRONICS REAR DISPLAY INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Park Assist Module detects an internal Park Assist Display failure.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPLACE THE PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
View Repair
Repair
Replace the Park Assist Display in accordance with the Service Information.
LX
8B - 45
U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CLUSTER/CCN

When Monitored:
Park Assist Module supply voltage between 916 volts. Ignition in Run/Start.
Set Condition:
Ignition status = 7h
Possible Causes
NO COMMUNICATION WITH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DTCS STORED OR ACTIVE IN THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
ACTIVE DTCS IN THE FCM
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Wait
With
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CLUSTER/CCN

the ignition on.
the scan tool, record and erase Park Assist Module DTCs.
30 seconds.
the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs.
Is DTC: U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CLUSTER/CCN active?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER IS ACTIVE ON THE CAN B BUS

Verify that the Instrument Cluster is active on the bus.
Is the Instrument Cluster active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

Response diagnostic procedures.
3.
DTCS STORED OR ACTIVE IN THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Check for Ignition Switch DTCs in the Instrument Cluster.

Are any DTCs active or stored in the Instrument Cluster?
Yes
>> Refer to the appropriate section and perform the diagnostics for the DTCs.
No
>> Go to 4
8B - 46
4.
ACTIVE DTCS IN THE FCM
With the scan tool, select ECU View and select FCM.
Are any Communication DTCs active in the FCM Park Assist System?
Yes
>> Refer to the appropriate section and perform the diagnostics for the DTCs.
No
>> Replace and program the Park Assist Module in accordance with the Service Information.
LX
LX
8B - 47
U0431-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM FCM

When Monitored:
Park Assist Module supply voltage between 916 volts. Ignition in Run/Start.
Set Condition:
PRNDL = 7h, or vehicle speed greater than 511 km/hr.
Possible Causes
CAN B OPEN OR SHORTED
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Wait
With
U0431-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM FCM

the ignition on.
the scan tool, record and erase Park Assist Module DTCs.
30 seconds.
the scan tool, read Park Assist Module DTCs.
Is DTC: U0423-IMPLAUSIBLE DATA RECEIVED FROM CLUSTER/CCN active?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
U0019-NO COMMUNICATION ON THE CAN B BUS CIRCUIT ALSO ACTIVE
With a scan tool check for DTCs in the FCM.

Is the U0019-NO COMMUNICATION ON THE CAN B BUS CIRCUIT active at this time?
Yes
>> Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING for the
U0019-NO COMMUNICATION ON THE CAN B BUS CIRCUIT diagnostic procedures.
No
>> Replace and program the Park Assist Module according to the Service Information.
8B - 48
U1002-PTS DISPLAY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8B - 49
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Display data line low.
Possible Causes
(D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND
CIRCUIT
(D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (X750) PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND
CIRCUIT
(D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Z914) PARK ASSIST MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT
(D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: U1002-PTS DISPLAY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT LOW

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: U1002-PTS DISPLAY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT LOW active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK PARK ASSIST MODULE FOR AN INTERNAL SHORT TO GROUND

Display Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8B - 50
3.
CHECK THE (D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z171) PARK
Disconnect the Park Assist Display harness connector.

Measure the resistance between the (D777) Park Assist Display Signal
Yes
>> Repair the (D777) Park Assist Display Signal circuit for a
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (X750) PARK
Yes
No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK THE (D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (Z914) PARK
Yes
short to the(Z914) Park Assist Module Ground circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
CHECK THE (D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Display Signal circuit.
Yes
short to ground.
No
>> Replace the Park Assist Display in accordance with the service information.
8B - 51
8B - 52
U1101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PTS DISPLAY
LX
LX
8B - 53
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Data display line open.
Possible Causes
(D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN
(Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: U1101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PTS DISPLAY

Wait 30 seconds.
Is DTC: U1101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PTS DISPLAY active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8B - 54
2.
CHECK THE (D777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Disconnect the Park Assist Display Module harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (D777) Park Assist Display Signal circuit
between the Park Assist Module harness connector and the Park Assist
Display harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (D777) Park Assist Display Signal circuit for an
open.
3.
CHECK THE (X777) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X777) Park Assist Display Supply circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (X777) Park Assist Display Supply circuit for an
open.
LX
LX
4.
8B - 55
CHECK THE (Z171) PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (Z171) Park Assist Display Ground circuit for an
open.
5.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE PARK ASSIST DISPLAY
Replace the Park Assist Display in accordance with the service information.
Reconnect the Park Assist Module harness connector.
Does the scan tool display U1101-LOST COMMUNICATION
WITH PTS DISPLAY?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.


test procedure.
U0151-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

8B - 56
LX
test procedure.
U0154-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE

test procedure.
U0155-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CLUSTER/CCN

test procedure.
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0164-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HVAC CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0167-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL

MODULE
test procedure.
U0168-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE SECURITY CONTROL MODULE

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.
U0169-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0184-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RADIO

LX
8B - 57
test procedure.
U0186-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUDIO AMPLIFIER

test procedure.
U0195-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SDARS

test procedure.
U0196-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL

MODULE
test procedure.
U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE

test procedure.
U0199-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DRIVER DOOR MODULE

test procedure.
U0200-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PASSENGER DOOR MODULE

test procedure.
U0208-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0209-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE

8B - 58
LX
test procedure.
U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM-CAN-B

test procedure.
U0231-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RAIN SENSING MODULE

test procedure.
U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL

MODULE
test procedure.
CHIME/BUZZER - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX
8B - 59

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
MODULE-PARK ASSIST DISPLAY-FRONT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
PARK ASSIST MODULE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
PARK ASSIST SENSOR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8B - 60
LX

DESCRIPTION
CHIME WARNING SYSTEM
The chime warning system uses an electromechanical transducer and an electromechanical relay that are soldered
onto the electronic circuit board inside of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) to provide audible indications of various vehicle conditions that may require the attention of the vehicle operator or occupants. The EMIC
also includes the hardware and software necessary to serve as the electronic body control module and is sometimes referred to as the Cab Compartment Node or CCN.
The electromechanical transducer generates beep tones and chime tones, while the electromechanical relay generates click tones to emulate the sounds associated with conventional turn signal and hazard warning flasher operation. The microprocessor-based EMIC utilizes electronic chime request messages received from other modules in
the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus along with hard wired inputs to monitor many sensors
and switches throughout the vehicle. In response to those inputs, the circuitry and programming of the EMIC allow
it to control the audible outputs that are produced through its on-board transducer and relay.
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

The Park Assist System is an electronic parking aid that alerts the driver to obstacles which are located immediately
behind the vehicle. Objects are sensed using ultrasonic sound waves. When an object is detected, the system will
give the driver visual and audible warnings. The system is customer programmable through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) but will be enabled from the factory as a default.
The major components of the park assist system are:
Park Assist Module - supplies voltage to the object detection sensors and park assist display. It triggers the
sensors, analyzes the echo delay times and calculates obstacle distances. It sends display information to the
park assist display, performs system diagnostics, and communicates via the Programmable Communication
Interface (PCI) date bus network.
Park Assist Sensors - there are four sensors located in the rear bumper that generate ultrasonic pulses when
triggered by the park assist module. The sensors signal the park assist module when reflected ultrasonic
pulses are received.
Park Assist Display - there are sixteen Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicators which provide indication of relative distance to obstacles. When the system is engaged and no obstacles are detected, the two outermost
yellow LEDs are lit at reduced brightness to show the system is working. As the distance to a detected obstacle decreases, more yellow LEDs towards the center of the display illuminate.
For diagnosis and testing of the park assist system, use a scan tool and the appropriate body diagnostic information.
OPERATION
CHIME WARNING SYSTEM
The chime warning system operates on battery voltage received through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB) on a
non-switched fused B(+) circuit so that the system may operate regardless of the ignition switch position. The chime
warning system also monitors the ignition switch position so that some chime features are functional only with the
ignition switch in the On position, while others are functional regardless of the ignition switch position.
The chime warning system provides an audible indication to the vehicle operator or occupants under the following
conditions:
Airbag Indicator Warning - The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) transducer will generate one
short chime when the ignition switch is in the On position, and an electronic message is received over the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) requesting Airbag
indicator illumination. This warning will only occur following completion of the Airbag indicator bulb test, and
will only occur once during any ignition cycle.
Compass Mini-Trip Computer Global Reset - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the
ignition switch is in the On position, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus from the
optional Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) requesting that the CMTC average fuel economy, trip odometer
LX
8B - 61
and distance to empty data be reset. The CMTC monitors hard wired inputs from the U.S./Metric and Reset
button switches to determine the proper reset messages to send to the EMIC.
Door Ajar Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch
is in the On position, a hard wired input is received indicating that the status of any door ajar switch has
changed, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus indicating that the vehicle is moving.
Fasten Seat Belt Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to
announce that a hard wired input from the seat belt switch indicates that the driver side front seat belt is not
fastened with the ignition switch in the On position. The chime warning system also supports the enhanced
seat belt reminder (beltminder) when this feature is enabled.
Gate Ajar Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is
in the On position, a hard wired input is received indicating that the status of the liftgate ajar switch has
changed, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus indicating that the vehicle is moving.
Head/Park Lamps-On Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate to indicate that hard wired inputs from the driver door ajar switch, the headlamp switch, and the ignition switch indicate that the exterior lamps are turned On with the driver side front door opened and the ignition switch in the
Off position. The chimes will continue to sound until the exterior lamps are turned Off, the driver side front door
is closed, or the ignition switch is turned to the On position, whichever occurs first.
Key-In-Ignition Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate to indicate that
hard wired inputs from the driver door ajar switch, the ignition switch, and the key-in ignition switch circuitry of
the ignition switch indicate that the key is in the ignition lock cylinder with the driver side front door open and
the ignition switch in the Off position. The chimes will continue to sound until the key is removed from the
ignition lock cylinder, the driver side front door is closed, or the ignition switch is turned to the On position,
whichever occurs first.
Low Fuel Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the low fuel indicator
is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. This chime will only occur once during any ignition cycle.
Low Wash Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the low washer
fluid indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. This chime will only occur once during any ignition cycle.
Overspeed Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to indicate that the
vehicle speed is over a pre-programmed speed value. The EMIC monitors electronic vehicle speed messages
received over the CAN data bus. This feature is only enabled on an EMIC that has been programmed with a
Middle East Gulf Coast Country (GCC) code.
Park Brake Reminder - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime to announce that the hard wired
input from the park brake switch and a vehicle speed message input received over the CAN data bus indicate
that the park brake is applied and the vehicle is moving. This chime will repeat each time the input conditions
are met.
Sentry Key Customer Learn Mode Announcement - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime
to confirm that an electronic Customer Learn mode message has been received over the CAN data bus to
indicate that the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) is prepared for programming additional sentry
key transponders. This chime feature is only active on vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key system,
and sold in a market where Customer Learn programming is an allowed feature.
Trans Overtemp Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate
when the transmission overtemp indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster for a high or critical transmission fluid temperature condition. This chime will repeat each time the trans overtemp indicator is cycled
from Off to On.
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Flasher Emulation - The EMIC relay will generate repetitive clicks at a slow
rate to emulate an electromechanical flasher when the turn signal or hazard warning system are operating.
The EMIC relay will generate repetitive clicks at a fast rate to indicate that the right or left turn signal are
operating with one or more bulbs inoperative. In either case, the clicks will continue until the turn signal and
hazard warning systems are turned off.
Turn Signal On Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to indicate that
a turn signal has been active continuously for 1.6 kilometers (1 mile) with the vehicle speed greater than 22
kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-per hour). Vehicles built for markets other than the United States and Canada
have a revised distance threshold of 4 kilometers for this feature. The chime will continue until the turn signal
input becomes inactive or until the vehicle speed message indicates that the speed is less than 22 kilometersper-hour (15 miles-per-hour), whichever occurs first. The hazard warning flashers will not activate this chime
feature.
8B - 62
LX
Warning Indicator Announcement - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime each time the check
gauges indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. The check gauges indicator may be illuminated when any critical engine or transmission systems are operating outside of their normal parameters. The
instrument cluster monitors electronic messages received over the CAN data bus to determine when to illuminate the check gauges indicator.
The EMIC provides chime service for all available features in the chime warning system. The EMIC relies upon its
internal programming, numerous hard wired inputs, and electronic message inputs received from other modules
over the CAN data bus network to provide the chime warning system features. The internal programming of the
EMIC determines the priority of each chime request input that is received, as well as the rate and duration of each
chime that is to be generated.
The hard wired chime warning system inputs to the EMIC may be diagnosed and tested using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis
of the EMIC, the CAN data bus, or the electronic messages received by the EMIC from other modules. The most
reliable, efficient and accurate means to diagnose the EMIC, the CAN data bus, or the electronic message inputs
used for the chime warning system requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic
information.
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

The Park Assist System display activates an audible tone that changes from intermittent to continuous as the final
two Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are illuminated on one side or both sides of the display.
The system detection length from the rear of the vehicle is 0.3 meters to 1.5 meters. This area extends around the
rear side of the vehicle. The system detection height from the ground is 0.2 meters to about 1.5 meters. The radio
mutes when the system activates its audible tone.
When the driver selects Reverse, the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the
rear bumper. A warning display above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings indicating the
range of the object.
The system is active only when the transmission gear selector is in reverse for vehicle speeds less than 16 Km/h
(10 mph). If the vehicles Parking/Emergency Brake is applied, the system is deactivated.
The display contains two sets of yellow and red Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) that the driver can see as they look
over their shoulder while backing up. Each side of the vehicle has its own warning LEDs. The system provides a
visual warning by illuminating one or more yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer to the object. As the vehicle
continues to approach the object, one red LED is illuminated and the system emits a series of short beeps. The
tone will remain constant and both red LEDs are illuminated once the vehicle is within 12 inches (30.5 cm) of the
object.
The system can be turned ON or OFF through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is
in PARK. If the park assist system is turned OFF, a single chime will sound and the EVIC will display the following
message REAR PARK ASSIST OFF, when the vehicle is in reverse.
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system.
Ensure that the parking brake is not applied.
If Service Park Assist System appears in the EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean, proceed to diagnose the system using a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
LX
8B - 63
MODULE-PARK ASSIST DISPLAY-FRONT

DESCRIPTION
The Park Assist Display is a molded plastic unit, housing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a chime
module.
The Park Assist Display is located in the rear of vehicle, over the rear window in the headliner. Located in
the rear of the vehicle for easy visual reference when
the driver is backing up.
The display is used to alert the driver of any obstacles
detected in the rear of the vehicle. The chime or audible signal also comes from the display unit.
OPERATION
When the ignition is put in the RUN position, all the
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) will illuminate for
approximately one second. This will be interrupted if
the system senses an obstacle.
The ready status will be sensed by the outermost two
yellow LEDs (1) being illuminated. As the obstacle is
sensed, the yellow LEDs will start illuminating inward
(6) until the object in approximately 40 cm (16 in.)
away and then the inner red LED will light (3).
The display is sensitive to which side of the rear of the
vehicle that the object is detected. If on the left rear, the left segments will light and the same for the right side of
the vehicle.
CORRELATION OF LED SEGMENTS TO DISTANCE
DISPLAY LED
DISTANCE
REAR CORNERS
REAR CENTER
LED COLOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
1st LED
150 cm (59 in.)
Yellow
None
2nd LED
120 cm (47 in.)
Yellow
None
3rd LED
100 cm (39 in.)
Yellow
None
4th LED
80 cm (31.5 in.)
80 cm (31.5 in.)
Yellow
None
5th LED
65 cm (25.5 in.)
65 cm (25.5 in.)
Yellow
None
6th LED
50 cm (20 in.)
50 cm (20 in.)
Yellow
None
7th LED
40 cm (16 in.)
40 cm (16 in.)
Red
30 cm (12 in.)
Intermittant
8B - 64
8th LED
15 cm (6 in.)
30 cm (12 in.)
LX
Red
20 cm (8 in.)
Continuous
There will be an audible tone when the object gets within 40 cm (16 in.) from the rear of the vehicle.
To diagnose and test the Park Assist System, use a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
REMOVAL
2. Lower the headliner (3) in the rear of the vehicle in
the liftgate opening. Follow the headliner removal
procedure for the rear of the headliner (Refer to 23
- BODY/INTERIOR/HEADLINER - REMOVAL).
3. Bend the retaining tabs (2) upwards to allow the
park assist display (1) to drop out of the headliner
(3) opening.
4. Disconnect the display electrical connector (4) and
remove display (1) from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the Park Assist Display (1) in headliner (3)
opening and connect the display electrical connector (4).
2. Bend the retaining tabs (2) down behind the headliner (3).
3. Raise the headliner in the rear of the vehicle in the
liftgate opening (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/
HEADLINER - INSTALLATION).
LX
8B - 65
PARK ASSIST MODULE

DESCRIPTION
The Park Assist Module has a molded plastic housing
which housing internal circuitry and two electrical connectors. There are four mounting tabs that affix the
module to the right inner quarter trim panel with four
screws.
The Park Assist Module (2) is located on the right side

of the vehicle, in the trunk compartment, behind the
trunk carpet.
The module (2) has a number of functions:
Supply voltage to the sensors and display.
Disconnection of the display with bus idle and
over voltage Vmax.
Triggering the sensors.
Analyze echo delay times and calculate obstacle
distances.
Bi-directional data communication to the display
for diagnosis.
System diagnostics - diagnosis and error handling (sensors, display, module).
Data exchange over the Controller Area Network
(CAN) data bus.
OPERATION
The system detection length from the rear of the vehicle is 0.3 meters to 1.5 meters. This area extends around the
rear side of the vehicle. The system detection height from the ground is 0.2 meters to about 1.5 meters. The radio
mutes when the system activates its audible tone.
When the driver selects Reverse, the system scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the
rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 1.5 meters. A warning display above the rear window provides
both visible and audible warnings indicating the range of the object.
The system is active only when the vehicle is in reverse for vehicle speeds less than 16 Km/h (10 mph). If the
vehicles Parking/Emergency Brake is applied, the system is deactivated.
The display contains two sets of yellow and red Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) that the driver can see as they look
over their shoulder while backing up. Each side of the vehicle has its own warning LEDs. The system provides a
visual warning by illuminating one or more yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer to the object. As the vehicle
continues to approach the object, one red LED is illuminated and the system emits a series of short beeps. The
8B - 66
LX
tone will remain constant and both red LEDs are illuminated once the vehicle is within 12 inches (30.5 cm) of the
object.
The system can be turned ON or OFF through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is
in PARK. If the park assist system is turned OFF, a single chime will sound and the EVIC will display the following
message REAR PARK ASSIST OFF, when the vehicle is in reverse.
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly.
To diagnose the Park Assist Module, use a scan tool and the appropriate body diagnostic information.
REMOVAL
2. Peel back the right inner trunk carpet to expose the
Park Assist Module (2).
3. Remove the two attaching screws (1) and separate
the module (2) from the vehicle.
4. On the wagon, the module will be behind the right

side D-pillar trim and is attached the same as the
sedan.
LX
5. Disconnect the Park Assist Module (2) electrical
connector (1).
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the
connector.
Park
Assist
Module
electrical
8B - 67
8B - 68
2. Position the Park Assist Module (2) and install the

two attaching screws (1). Torque screws to 3.5 Nm
(30 in. lbs.).
3. Reposition the trunk carpet.
LX
LX
8B - 69
PARK ASSIST SENSOR

DESCRIPTION
The Park Assist Sensors generate ultrasonic pulses
when triggered by the park assist module when an
obstacle is detected. The sensors then signal the
module when reflected ultrasonic pulses are received.
The Park Assist Sensors are located in the rear

bumper fascia mounted equally apart. The sensors
detect objects with an ultrasonic pulse that reflects off
the object and then is sent to the module to determine
the distance of the object.
OPERATION
The
Park Assist Sensors:

Generate ultrasonic pulses when triggered by the Park Assist Module.
Reception/filtering of ultrasonic energy received.
Signalling the module of received ultrasonic pulses that meet threshold criteria.
The sensors are supplied power by the module. The sensor supply is enabled when the sensor function is necessary.
The sensors detection length from the rear of the vehicle is 0.3 meters to 1.5 meters. This area extends around the
rear side of the vehicle. The sensor detection height from the ground is 0.2 meters to about 1.5 meters.
Ensure that the rear bumper (sensors) is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly.
8B - 70
REMOVAL
2. Remove rear fascia (Refer to 13 - FRAME &
BUMPERS/BUMPERS/REAR
FASCIA
REMOVAL).
3. Unsnap Park Assist Sensor from the retaining
housing and remove from fascia.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the Park Assist Sensor over the retaining
housing and firmly snap into housing in rear fascia.
2. Install the rear fascia (Refer to 13 - FRAME &
BUMPERS/BUMPERS/REAR FASCIA - INSTALLATION).
LX
CLOCK
LX
8C - 1
CLOCK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
CLOCK - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
8C - 2
CLOCK
LX
CLOCK - SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
Some models include an analog clock. The time can
be adjusted by pushing the set button until it reaches
the desired time.
The analog clock is located in the instrument panel

center bezel, between the air distribution outlets. It
has one adjustment button for setting and no second
hand.
OPERATION
The analog clock is fed power through the M1 fuse. When installed, the clock, along with other noncritical options,
will be functional.
To set the analog clock, press and hold the adjustment button until desired time is reached.
LX
REMOVAL
2. Remove the Instrument Panel Center Bezel (Refer
to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER BEZEL - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the two retaining screws (1) holding the

clock to the rear of the I/P Center Bezel.
CLOCK
8C - 3
8C - 4
CLOCK
4. To replace the clock illumination lamps (1), turn

sockets (1) counterclockwise to remove lamp and
socket (1).
INSTALLATION
1. Place lamp and sockets (1) into opening and turn
clockwise till detent is felt.
LX
LX
2. Place the clock into bezel opening and then install
the two retaining screws (1).
3. Install the Instrument Panel Center Bezel (Refer to

23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT
5. Adjust clock to proper time.
CLOCK
8C - 5
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES
LX
8E - 1
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - SERVICE

INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
B2112-5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . 6
B2113-5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . 8
B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH . . . 10
B2215-FRONT CONTROL MODULE
INTERNAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT
PROGRAMMED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
U0001-CAN C BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
U0019-CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ECM/PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
U0101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM . . . 27
ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE . . . . . . . . . . 30
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (POLICE AND
TAXI INTERFACE MODULE) (PTIM) . . . . . . . . . 39
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
(ORC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
U0156LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . 51
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARK

ASSIST CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
HEADLAMP LEVELING TRANSLATOR . . . . . . . 69
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
TRAFFIC INFORMATION RECEIVER
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8E - 2
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

SCCM - CAN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
U1105-CAN B SIGNAL MISSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
U1106-CAN C SIGNAL MISSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
U1107-ECU IN SINGLE-WIRE MODE . . . . . . . . . 117
U1108-ADDITIONAL CAN B ECU DETECTED . 122
U110A-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SCCM - CAN C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
*STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS . . . 126
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) AND/OR CAN C
DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUITS HIGH . . . . . . . . . . 129
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . 131
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . 133
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) SHORTED TO
CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . 137
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . 139
*BOTH CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) AND CAN C
DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUITS OPEN. . . . . . . . . . 141
*NO RESPONSE FROM ABS (ANTILOCK
BRAKE MODULE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
*NO RESPONSE FROM AMP (AMPLIFIER) . . . 148
*NO RESPONSE FROM CCN (CLUSTER) . . . . 151
*NO RESPONSE FROM DDM (DRIVER
DOOR MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
*NO RESPONSE FROM ECM (ENGINE
CONTROL MODULE) - DIESEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
*NO RESPONSE FROM EOM (ELECTRONIC
OVERHEAD MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
*NO RESPONSE FROM ESM (ELECTRONIC
SHIFT MODULE) (SHIFTER LEVER
ASSEMBLY) - NAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
*NO RESPONSE FROM ESM (ELECTRONIC
SHIFT MODULE) - (COLUMN NAG1) . . . . . . . 168
*NO RESPONSE FROM FCM (FRONT
CONTROL MODULE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
*NO RESPONSE FROM HFM (HANDS FREE
MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
*NO RESPONSE FROM HIDT (HEADLAMP
LEVELING MODULE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM HSM (HEATED

SEAT MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
*NO RESPONSE FROM HVAC (HEAT
VENTILATION AND A/C) (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
*NO RESPONSE FROM ITM (INTRUSION
TRANSCEIVER MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
*NO RESPONSE FROM LRSM (LIGHT/RAIN
SENSOR MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
*NO RESPONSE FROM MULTI-PURPOSE
MODULE (POLICE AND TAXI INTERFACE
MODULE-PTIM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
*NO RESPONSE FROM MSMD (MEMORY
SEAT MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
*NO RESPONSE FROM OCM (OCCUPANT
CLASSIFICATION MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
*NO RESPONSE FROM ORC (OCCUPANT
RESTRAINT CONTROLLER MODULE). . . . . . 204
*NO RESPONSE FROM PCM
(POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) . . . . . . . 208
*NO RESPONSE FROM PDM (PASSENGER
DOOR MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
*NO RESPONSE FROM PTS (PARK ASSIST
MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
*NO RESPONSE FROM RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
*NO RESPONSE FROM SDAR (SATELLITE
RECEIVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
*NO RESPONSE FROM SCM (STEERING
CONTROL MODULE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
*NO RESPONSE FROM SUNR (SUNROOF
MOTOR/MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
*NO RESPONSE FROM TCM
(TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE) NAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
*NO RESPONSE FROM TCM
(TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE)
NGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
*NO RESPONSE FROM VES (MONITOR/
DVD MEDIA SYSTEM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
*NO RESPONSE FROM WCM (WIRELESS
CONTROL MODULE) (SENTRY KEY
REMOTE ENTRY MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
LX

8E - 3
8E - 4
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Battery voltage less than 9 volts for approximately 5 to 6 seconds.
Possible Causes
RESISTANCE IN THE BATTERY POSITIVE CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE IN THE GENERATOR CASE GROUND
GENERATOR OPERATION
(K20) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K20) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ANY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES DTCS
NOTE: Make sure the Battery is in good condition. Using the Midtronics Battery Tester, test the Battery
before continuing.
NOTE: Inspect the vehicle for after market accessories that may exceed the Generator System output.
NOTE: Make sure the generator drive belt is in good operating condition.
NOTE: Inspect the fuses in the IPM. If an open fuse is found, use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide,
inspect the wiring and connectors for damage.
With the scan tool, read active PCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active PCM DTCs?
Yes
>> (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic test procedure.
No
>> Check the above conditions that can cause a low voltage condition. Repair as necessary.
LX
8E - 5

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Battery voltage greater than 16 volts for approximately 5 to 6 seconds.
Possible Causes
(K20) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
GENERATOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ANY POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULES DTCS
before continuing.
With the scan tool, read active PCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active PCM DTCs?
Yes
>> (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the diagnostic test procedure.
No
>> Check the above conditions that can cause a high voltage condition. Repair as necessary.
8E - 6
B2112-5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8E - 7
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module detects the (F891) 5 volt supply circuit voltage below 4 volts.
Possible Causes
(F891) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC
With the scan tool, read the active DTCs.

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds.
Does the scan tool display this DTC as active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> If the DTC is stored, check for an intermittent condition. Visually inspect the related wiring harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
2.

Disconnect the A/C Pressure Transducer harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the A/C Pressure Transducer in accordance with the service information.
3.
(F891) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Disconnect the FCM C1 harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (F891) 5 Volt Supply
circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (F891) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to

ground.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to
BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted

circuits. If ok, replace and program the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
8E - 8
B2113-5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8E - 9
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module detects the (F891) 5 volt supply circuit voltage above 5.0 volts.
Possible Causes
(F891) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the A/C Pressure Transducer in accordance with the service information.
3.
(F891) 5 VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (F891) 5 Volt Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (F891) 5 Volt Supply circuit for a short to voltage.
No

8E - 10
LX
B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will receive and monitor the VIN message from the PCM and record the VIN if
different from the last VIN.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT VIN PROGRAMMED IN PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on at least 5 times, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds per
cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK VIN IN PCM
With the scan tool compare the VIN that is programmed into the PCM to the VIN on the vehicle.
Does the VIN programmed into the PCM match the vehicles VIN?
Yes
No
>> Program the correct VIN in the PCM and retest.
LX
8E - 11
B2215-FRONT CONTROL MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module detects an internal fault.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPLACE THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE IF DTC IS ACTIVE
With the scan tool, read the active FCM DTCs.

Yes
>> Replace and program the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 12
LX
B222C-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION NOT PROGRAMMED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module is not configured correctly to the vehicle.
Possible Causes
FRONT CONTROL MODULE NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CONFIGURE THE FCM TO THE VEHICLE
With the scan tool enter program network configuration and program the FCM to the vehicle configuration.
With the scan tool, erase FCM DTCs.
cycle.
Yes
No
LX
U0001-CAN C BUS
8E - 13
8E - 14
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (COLUMN NAG1)
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (DIESEL)
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display U0001CAN C BUS as active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Antilock Brake Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
LX
3.
8E - 15

Yes, with Floor Shift
Go To 4
Yes, with Column Shift
Go To 5
No
4.
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG1 ONLY) INTERNAL SHORT

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
5.
ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (COLUMN NAG1) INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Electronic Shift Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Electronic Shift Module in accordance with the service information.
8E - 16
6.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 7
No
7.
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (DIESEL) INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Engine Control Module C2 harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Engine
Perform the ECM VERIFICATION TEST.
8.

Remove the Steering Control Module.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
LX
9.

Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and
ground.
Yes
No
>> Go To 10
10.
Measure the voltage between the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit and
ground.
Yes
No
>> Go To 11
11.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D65) CAN C Bus (+)
circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 12
8E - 17
8E - 18
12.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-)
circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 13
13.
Measure the resistance between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and
the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to the
(D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
No

LX
LX
U0019-CAN B BUS
8E - 19
8E - 20
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The FCM detects an open, a short high, a short low or a short together in either of the CAN B Bus circuits.
Possible Causes
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT
ANY CAN B BUS MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
MEASURE VOLTAGE AT FCM
Gain access to the Front Control Module C1 harness connector, but do not disconnect.
Backprobe and measure the voltage on both the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) and the (D54) CAN B (-) circuits.
Does the voltage read approximately 4.65 - 4.98 volts on the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) and 0.39 - 0.46 volts
on the (D55) CAN B (+) circuits?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No - Voltage Between 0.3 - 0.7 Volts on Both Circuits

Go To 9
No - Voltage Reads 0 Volts on Either Circuit
Go To 7
No - Voltage Above 10 Volts on Either Circuit
Go To 5
LX
3.

With the scan tool select ECU View.
Using a fused jumper wire, connect one end to ground and with the
other end backprobe the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit at the FCM C1
harness connector.
NOTE: A red X will appear next to modules that can no longer
communicate on the Bus.
Did a red X appear next to any modules on the scan tool?
Yes
>> Using the Wiring Diagrams to further isolate the open in the
circuit, repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer
to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
No
>> Go To 4
4.
With the scan tool select ECU View.

Using a fused jumper wire, connect one end to ground and with the
other end backprobe the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit at the FCM C1
harness connector.
NOTE: A red X will appear next to modules that can no longer
communicate on the Bus.
Did a red X appear next to any modules on the scan tool?
Yes
>> Using the Wiring Diagrams to further isolate the open in the
circuit, repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage. If ok, replace
and program the Front Control Module in accordance with
the service information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION
TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST
VER 1).
5.
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit and
ground.
Yes
>> Disconnect each CAN B Bus module one at a time while

observing the voltage to determine if the short is caused by
an internal short within a module. Replace the module, in
accordance with the service information, that when disconnected eliminates the short to voltage. If the short condition
is still present with all CAN B Bus modules disconnected
8E - 21
8E - 22
LX
use the Wiring Diagrams to help isolate and repair the

(D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
No
6.
>> Go To 6
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit and
ground.
Yes

observing the voltage to determine if the short is caused by
an internal short within a module. Replace the module, in
accordance with the service information, that when disconnected eliminates the short to voltage. If the short condition
is still present with all CAN B Bus modules disconnected
use the Wiring Diagrams to help isolate and repair the
(D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage. If ok,

replace and program the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information. Perform the BODY
VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
7.
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D55) CAN B Bus (+)
circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

observing the resistance to determine if the short is caused
by an internal short within a module. Replace the module,
in accordance with the service information, that when disconnected eliminates the short to ground. If the short condition is still present with all CAN B Bus modules
disconnected use the Wiring Diagrams to help isolate and
repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to
ground.
LX
8.
8E - 23
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (D54) CAN B Bus (-)
circuit.
Yes
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage. If ok,

replace and program the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information. Perform the BODY
VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
No
>> Disconnect each CAN B Bus module one at a time while observing the resistance to determine if the
short is caused by an internal short within a module. Replace the module, in accordance with the service information, that when disconnected eliminates the short to ground. If the short condition is still
present with all CAN B Bus modules disconnected use the Wiring Diagrams to help isolate and repair
the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for a short to ground.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
9.
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit and
(D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit.
Yes

observing the resistance to determine if the short is caused
by an internal short within a module. Replace the module,
in accordance with the service information, that when disconnected eliminates the short between the two circuits. If
the short condition is still present with all CAN B Bus modules disconnected use the Wiring Diagrams to help isolate
and repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to
the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit.
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage. If ok, replace and program the Front Control Module in
accordance with the service information. Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to
8E - 24
U0100-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM
LX
LX
8E - 25
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the ECM/PCM for approximately 500ms.
Possible Causes
CAN B OR CAN C BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED
ECM/PCM
ECM/PCM POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE ECM/PCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the ECM/PCM is active on the bus.
Is the ECM/PCM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8E - 26
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the ECM/PCM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the ECM/PCM in accordance with the service information.

No
>> Replace/update the module that set this DTC in accordance with the service information.
LX
LX
U0101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM
8E - 27
8E - 28
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the TCM for approximately 500ms.
Possible Causes
TCM
TCM POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE TCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the TCM is active on the bus.
Is the TCM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 29
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the TCM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the TCM in accordance with the service information.

No
8E - 30
U0103-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE
LX
LX
8E - 31
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Electric Gear Shift Module (shifter lever assembly) for approximately
500ms.
Possible Causes
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG1 ONLY) POWER AND GROUND
ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (COLUMN NAG1) POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8E - 32
3.
LX
VERIFY THAT THE SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG 1 ONLY) OR IF APPLICABLE THE ELECTRONIC
SHIFT MODULE (COLUMN NAG 1) IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the Shifter Lever Assembly (NAG 1 Only) or if applicable the Electronic Shift Module (Column NAG 1) is
active on the bus.
Is the Shifter Lever Assembly (NAG 1 Only) or if applicable the Electronic Shift Module (Column NAG
1) active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the Shifter Lever Assembly (NAG 1
Only) or if applicable the Electronic Shift Module (Column NAG 1)?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Shifter Lever Assembly (NAG 1 Only) or if applicable the Electronic Shift Module
(Column NAG 1) in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE
8E - 33
8E - 34
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Antilock Brake Module for approximately 500ms.
Possible Causes
ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE ABS IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the ABS is active on the bus.
Is the ABS active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 35
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the ABS?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Antilock Brake Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 36
LX
LX
8E - 37
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Front Control Module for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED
FRONT CONTROL MODULES POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8E - 38
4.
Yes
>> Replace/update the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
LX
8E - 39
U0143-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (POLICE AND

TAXI INTERFACE MODULE) (PTIM)
8E - 40
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the MPM (PTIM) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (PTIM)
MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (PTIM) POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
With the scan tool, read active DTCs from all modules.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE MPM (PTIM) IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the MPM (PTIM) is active on the bus.
Is the MPM (PTIM) active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 41
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the MPM (PTIM)?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Multi-Purpose Module (PTIM) in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 42
U0151LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

(ORC)
LX
LX
8E - 43
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Occupant Restraint Controller for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE ORC IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the ORC is active on the bus.
Is the ORC active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8E - 44
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the ORC?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Occupant Restraint Controller in accordance with the service information.
Perform AIRBAG VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
No
LX
LX
U0154LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
8E - 45
8E - 46
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Occupant Classification Module for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE OCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the OCM is active on the bus.
Is the OCM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 47
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the OCM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Occupant Classification Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform AIRBAG VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
No
8E - 48
LX
LX
8E - 49
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Cluster/CCN for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
CLUSTER/CCN
CLUSTER/CCN POWER AND GROUND
MODULE THAT SET THE DTC
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE CCN IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the CCN is active on the bus.
Is the CCN active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8E - 50
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the CCN?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Cluster (CCN) in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
LX
U0156LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM
8E - 51
8E - 52
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE POWER OR GROUND
ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE EOM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the EOM is active on the bus.
Is the EOM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 53
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the EOM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 54
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARK ASSIST CONTROL MODULE
LX
LX
8E - 55
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Park Assist Module (PTS) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST MODULE
PARK ASSIST MODULE POWER OR GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE PTS IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the PTS is active on the bus.
Is the PTS active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8E - 56
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the PTS?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Park Assist Module (PTS) in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
LX
8E - 57
8E - 58
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the A/C Heater Control (HVAC) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
A/C HEATER CONTROL
A/C HEATER CONTROL POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE HVAC IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the HVAC is active on the bus.
Is the HVAC active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 59
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the HVAC?
Yes
>> Replace/update the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Replace/update the module that set the DTC in accordance with the service information
8E - 60

MODULE
LX
LX
8E - 61
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Intrusion Transceiver Control Module (ITM) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Index for a complete list of the symptoms.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE ITM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the ITM is active on the bus.
Is the ITM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Refer to the No Response test procedure. Refer to the table of contents in this section.
8E - 62
4.
LX
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the ITM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Intrusion Transceiver Control Module in accordance with the service information.
No
Perform the appropriate VERIFICATION TEST.
LX
8E - 63

(SKREEM/WCM)
8E - 64
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (WCM) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY MODULE
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE WCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the WCM is active on the bus.
Is the WCM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 65
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the WCM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 66
LX
LX
8E - 67
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Sunroof Control Module (SUNR) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE
SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE SUNR IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the SUNR is active on the bus.
Is the SUNR active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8E - 68
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the SUNR?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Sunroof Control Module in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
LX
U0181-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEADLAMP LEVELING TRANSLATOR
8E - 69
8E - 70
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Headlamp Leveling Module for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE
HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE HIDT IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the HIDT is active on the bus.
Is the HIDT active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 71
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the HIDT?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Headlamp Leveling Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 72
LX
LX
8E - 73
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Radio for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
RADIO
RADIO POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE RADIO IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the Radio is active on the bus.
Is the Radio active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8E - 74
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the Radio?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Radio in accordance with the service information.

No
LX
LX
8E - 75
8E - 76
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Amplifier for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFIER POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE AMPLIFIER IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the Amplifier is active on the bus.
Is the Amplifier active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 77
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the Amplifier?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Amplifier in accordance with the service information.

No
8E - 78
LX
U0193-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TRAFFIC INFORMATION RECEIVER MODULE
LX
8E - 79

When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Traffic Information Receiver Module (TIRM) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS CIRCUITS OPEN
(A300) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
(Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
TRAFFIC INFORMATION RECEIVER MODULE (TIRM)
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Index for a complete list of the symptoms.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE TIRM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

NOTE: A red X will be next to the module that is not communicating, indicating that the module is not active
on the Bus network. A green check indicates that the module is active on the Bus network.
Verify that the TIRM is active on the bus.
Is the TIRM active on the bus?
Yes
No
>> Go To 4
8E - 80
4.
(A300) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the Traffic Information Receiver Module harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A300) Fused
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (A300) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or short.
5.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z909)

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (Z909) ground circuit for an open.

6.
(D55) AND (D54) CAN B BUS CIRCUITS OPEN
NOTE: One open circuit will not cause this condition.

ground.
ground.
Is there any voltage present on either circuit?
Yes
>> Replace the Traffic Information Receiver Module in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Repair the (D55) and (D54) CAN B Bus circuits for an open.
Inspect the connector for damage.
LX
LX
8E - 81
8E - 82
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the Satellite Receiver (SDAR) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
SATELLITE RECEIVER
SATELLITE RECEIVER POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE SATELLITE RECEIVER IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the SDARS is active on the bus.
Is the SDARS active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 83
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the SDARS?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Satellite Receiver in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 84

MODULE
LX
LX
8E - 85
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the vehicle entertainment system (DVD player) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
MONITOR/DVD MEDIA SYSTEM
MONITOR/DVD MEDIA SYSTEM POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE VES IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the VES is active on the bus.
Is the VES active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Refer to the No Response test procedure. Refer to the table of contents in this section.
8E - 86
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the VES?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Monitor/DVD Media System in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
LX
8E - 87
8E - 88
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the HFM for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
HANDS FREE MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE HFM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the HFM is active on the bus.
Is the HFM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 89
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the HFM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Hands Free Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 90
LX
LX
8E - 91
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the DDM for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
DRIVER DOOR MODULE
DRIVER DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND
MODULE THAT SET THE DTC
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE DDM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the DDM is active on the bus.
Is the DDM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8E - 92
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the DDM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Driver Door Module in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
LX
8E - 93
8E - 94
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the PDM for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
PASSENGER DOOR MODULE
PASSENGER DOOR MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE PDM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the PDM is active on the bus.
Is the PDM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 95
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the PDM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Passenger Door Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 96
LX
LX
8E - 97
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the HSM for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
HEATED SEAT MODULE
HEATED SEAT MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE HSM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the HSM is active on the bus.
Is the HSM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8E - 98
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the HSM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Heated Seat Module in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
LX
8E - 99
8E - 100
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the MSMD for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
MEMORY SEAT MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE MSMD IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the MSMD is active on the bus.
Is the MSMD active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 101
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the MSMD?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 102
U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM - CAN B
LX
LX
8E - 103
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the SCM (CAN B) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE SCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the SCM is active on the bus.
Is the SCM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8E - 104
4.
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the SCM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Steering Control Module in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
LX
8E - 105
8E - 106
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the rain sensor (LRSM) for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSOR
RAIN SENSOR POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE LRSM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the LRSM is active on the bus.
Is the LRSM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 107
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the LRSM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Rain Sensor in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 108
U1105-CAN B SIGNAL MISSING
LX
LX
8E - 109
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
When the CAN B Bus messages are not received within 2 seconds.
Possible Causes
OTHER CAN B BUS DTCs SET IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTCS

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FRONT CONTROL MODULE FOR U0019 DTC
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module active DTCs
Does the scan tool display U0019 CAN B BUS ACTIVE?
Yes
>> Refer to the table of contents in this section and perform the U0019 diagnostic procedure.
No
>> Go To 3
3.

Disconnect the Front Control Module C1 connector.
Measure the voltage of the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit.
Is any voltage present on this circuit?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
8E - 110
4.
Measure the voltage of the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit.

Is any voltage present on this circuit?
Yes
>> Replace the Front Control Module in accordance with the

No
>> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus () circuit for an open.

LX
LX
U1106-CAN C SIGNAL MISSING
8E - 111
8E - 112
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (DIESEL)
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display U1106CAN C SIGNAL MISSING as active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
LX
3.
8E - 113

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (NAG1 ONLY) OR ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE (COLUMN NAG1)
INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Shifter Lever Assembly or Electronic Shift Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
5.

Yes
>> Go To 7
No
8E - 114
6.
LX
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (DIESEL) INTERNAL SHORT

Disconnect the Engine Control Module C2 harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Engine
7.

Disconnect the Steering Control Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
8.

Measure the voltage between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and
ground.
Yes
No
>> Go To 9
LX
9.
Measure the voltage between the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit and
ground.
Yes
No
>> Go To 10
10.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D65) CAN C Bus (+)
circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 11
11.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (D64) CAN C Bus (-)
circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 12
8E - 115
8E - 116
12.
Measure the resistance between the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit and
the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for a short to the
(D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit.
No

LX
LX
U1107-ECU IN SINGLE-WIRE MODE
8E - 117
8E - 118
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The FCM detects an open, a short high, a short low or a short together in either of the CAN B Bus circuits.
Possible Causes
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT
ANY CAN B BUS MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
ANY CAN B BUS MODULE INTERNAL FAULT

With the scan tool, monitor the active FCM DTCs.
While monitoring the scan tool, disconnect each CAN B Bus module one at a time.
NOTE: When performing the above step, turn the ignition off (wait one minute) before disconnecting any
module. When the module is disconnected turn the ignition on.
NOTE: This is to determine if the fault is internal within a module.
Check for this DTC to become active after disconnecting each CAN B Bus module the vehicle is equipped with.
NOTE: If the DTC becomes stored when a particular CAN B Bus module is disconnected, that module is
causing the DTC to set.
With all the CAN B Bus modules disconnected did the FCM still set this DTC as active?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the module that when disconnected the DTC became stored.
LX
3.
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

NOTE: Ensure each CAN B Bus module is disconnected at this
time.
ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

time.
ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

time.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (D55) CAN B Bus (+)
circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to
ground.
8E - 119
8E - 120
6.
(D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

time.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (D54) CAN B Bus (-)
circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for a short to
ground.
7.
(D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (D54) CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit and
time.
Yes
>> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short to the
No
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
8.
Measure the resistance of the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit between the
FCM connector and the Cluster connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open or high
resistance.
No
>> Go To 9
9.
Measure the resistance of the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit between the
FCM connector and the Cluster connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open or high
resistance.
No
8E - 121
8E - 122
LX
U1108-ADDITIONAL CAN B ECU DETECTED

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module detects an additional CAN B module and requires a re-configuration.
Possible Causes
ADDITIONAL MODULE ADDED/REMOVED FROM THE CAN B BUS NETWORK
Diagnostic Test
1.
RECONFIGURE THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE

With the scan tool, select network view and press the gateway button. This will list the CAN modules on the vehicle.
Read and record the listed modules.
With the scan tool, select FCM, miscellaneous functions then add/remove ECUs.
With the scan tool, add or remove the module that was not configured in the FCM.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times and read the active FCM DTCs.
Yes
>> Retest system and attempt to reconfigure the FCM.

No

LX
U110A-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM - CAN C
8E - 123
8E - 124
LX
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received from the SCM (CAN C) for approximately 200ms.
Possible Causes
STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Is this DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT THE SCM IS ACTIVE ON THE BUS

Verify that the SCM is active on the bus.
Is the SCM active on the bus?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8E - 125
Is there more than one module with active DTCs Logged Against the SCM?
Yes
>> Replace/update the Steering Control Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 126
*STORED LOST COMMUNICATION DTCS
LX
LX
8E - 127
When Monitored:
IOD fuse installed
Set Condition:
Bus messages not received for approximately 2 to 5 seconds.
Possible Causes
POWER OR GROUND FROM THE REPORTING MODULE
PREVIOUS SERVICE PERFORMED WITHIN THE LAST 100 KEY CYCLES (FUSE/RELAYS REMOVED, WIRING
SERVICE, BATTERY DISCONNECT)
LOW BATTERY/JUMP START CONDITION
IOD FUSE WAS REMOVED DURING SHIPPING
CHECK FOR RELATED TSBS
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY DTC IS STORED
NOTE: Stored faults may indicate a customer perceived intermittent condition.

With the scan tool, read stored DTCs.
Is this DTC stored?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Diagnose the active DTC. Refer to the table of contents for a list of the symptoms.
2.
CHECK THE ENVIRONMENTAL DATA
With the scan tool, read the loss of communication environmental data.
Does the loss of communication environmental odometer data match up to any of the previous service
procedures listed in the possible causes or are there any stored CAN B or C hardware electrical, battery, ignition voltage, VIN missing/mismatch, FCM configuration DTCs present with match environmental
data?
Yes
>> These DTCs may have been the result of other service procedures performed. Clear DTCs.
No
>> Go To 3
8E - 128
3.
LX
VERIFY INTERMITTENT LOST COMMUNICATION DTC-WIRING CONCERNS

Is there more than one ECU with stored DTCs Logged Against the module and one or more lost
communication DTCs stored in the offending module?
Yes
>> Verify if the vehicle was recently in for this type of service. Otherwise, visually inspect the related wiring
harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for
broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals. Repair as necessary.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
VERIFY INTERMITTENT LOST COMMUNICATION DTC-OFFENDING MODULE

Is there more than one ECU with stored DTCs Logged Against the module and NO lost communication DTCs stored in the offending module?
Yes
>> Check for TSB related to this offending module.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
VERIFY INTERMITTENT LOST COMMUNICATION DTC-REPORTING MODULE

Is there ONLY ONE ECU with stored DTCs Logged Against the module?
Yes
>> Check for TSB related to the module that set this DTC.
No
>> Verify if the vehicle was recently in for this type of service. Otherwise, visually inspect the related wiring
harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for
broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals. Repair as necessary.
LX
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) AND/OR CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUITS HIGH
8E - 129
8E - 130
LX
When Monitored:
When the scan tool queries the FCM.
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected a shorted high condition on either or both CAN C Diagnostic circuits.
Possible Causes
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK THE STATUS OF THE ERROR MESSAGE
NOTE: Ensure the vehicle being tested is a CAN BUS VEHICLE. If not, false error messages may be displayed.
NOTE: Ensure the scan tool is updated to the latest software.
With the scan tool, record the error message.
Disconnect the scan tool from the DLC.
Does the scan tool display this same error message?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The conditions that caused this error message to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
2.
CAN C DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the CAN C Diagnostic circuits.
Is the voltage above 6.0 volts for either circuit?
Yes
>> Repair the CAN C Diagnostic circuits for a short to voltage.

No

circuits. If ok, replace the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
LX
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT LOW
8E - 131
8E - 132
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected a shorted low condition on the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit.
Possible Causes
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit for a short to
ground.
No

LX
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT LOW
8E - 133
8E - 134
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected a shorted low condition on the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit.
Possible Causes
(D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit for a short to
ground.
No

LX
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) SHORTED TO CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-)
8E - 135
8E - 136
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected a shorted together condition on the CAN C Diagnostic circuits.
Possible Causes
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit
and the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit for a short to
the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit.
No

LX
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
8E - 137
8E - 138
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected an open condition on the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit.
Possible Causes
(D71) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the resistance of the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit
between the FCM connector and the DLC.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit for an open.
LX
*CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
8E - 139
8E - 140
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected an open condition on the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit.
Possible Causes
(D72) CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the resistance of the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit
Yes

No
>> Repair the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit for an open.
LX
8E - 141
*BOTH CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) AND CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) CIRCUITS OPEN
8E - 142
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The scan tool has detected an open condition on both CAN C Diagnostic circuits.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

NOTE: Check the connectors at both the DLC and the FCM.
Measure the resistance of the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (D72) CAN C Diagnostic (+) circuit for an open.
LX
3.

Measure the resistance of the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit

Yes

No
>> Repair the (D71) CAN C Diagnostic (-) circuit for an open.
8E - 143
8E - 144
*NO RESPONSE FROM ABS (ANTILOCK BRAKE MODULE)
LX
LX
8E - 145
Possible Causes
(A107) (A111) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
(F202) FUSED IGNITION SW OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
(D65) CAN C BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D64) CAN C BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1.

NOTE: Ensure the IOD fuse is installed and battery voltage is between 10.0 and 16.0 volts.
NOTE: Check the FCM for any active CAN C hardware DTCs, perform DTC before proceeding.
Does the scan tool display a red X next to the module?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The no response condition is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide,
inspect the wiring for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires and the wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, and corroded terminals.
2.
(A107) (A111) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check each (A107) and
(A111) Fused B(+) circuit.
Does the test light illuminate brightly for each circuit?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the Fused B(+) circuit for an open or short.

Perform ABS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8E - 146
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
(F202) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F202) Fused
Ignition Switch Output circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (F202) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit for
an open or short.
LX
LX
5.

Measure the resistance of the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit between the
FCM connector and the Antilock Brake Module connector.
Is resistance below 5.0 ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (D65) CAN C Bus (+) circuit for an open.
6.
Measure the resistance of the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit between the
FCM connector and the Antilock Brake Module connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Antilock Brake Module in accordance with the

No
>> Repair the (D64) CAN C Bus (-) circuit for an open.
8E - 147
8E - 148
*NO RESPONSE FROM AMP (AMPLIFIER)
LX
LX
8E - 149
Possible Causes
(X13) FUSED B (+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
AMPLIFIER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(X13) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Disconnect the Radio Amplifier C2 harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check each (X13) Fused
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (X13) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or short.
8E - 150
3.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check each (Z910)

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Radio Amplifier in accordance with the service

information.
No
>> Repair the (D55) and (D54) CAN B Bus circuits for an
open. Inspect the connector for damage.
LX
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM CCN (CLUSTER)
8E - 151
8E - 152
LX
Possible Causes
(A917) (A23) (A110) FUSED B(+) CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED
(Z910) (Z210) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN
CLUSTER (CCN)
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(A917) (A23) (A110) FUSED B(+) CIRCUITS OPEN OR SHORTED

Disconnect the Cluster harness connectors.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check each (A917) (A23)
(A110) Fused B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (A917) (A23) (A110) Fused B(+) circuit for an
open or short.
LX
3.
(Z910) (Z210) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN

(Z210) ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (Z910) (Z210) ground circuit for an open.

4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
an open or short.
8E - 153
8E - 154
5.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Cluster in accordance with the service information.

No
LX
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE)
8E - 155
8E - 156
LX
Possible Causes
(A913) FUSED B (+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
DRIVER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Driver Door Module harness connectors.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the

No
8E - 157
8E - 158
*NO RESPONSE FROM ECM (ENGINE CONTROL MODULE) - DIESEL
LX
LX
8E - 159
Possible Causes
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE POWER AND GROUND
ENGINE CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

NOTE: Check the FCM for any active CAN C hardware and any ignition related DTCs, perform DTCs before
proceeding.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK ECM POWER AND GROUND
Check the ECM power and ground circuits. Refer to 9 - ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS - DIESEL for the
diagnostic test procedure.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
8E - 160
3.

Disconnect the ECM C2 harness connector.
FCM connector and the ECM connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
FCM connector and the ECM connector.
Yes
>> Replace and program the Engine Control Module in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM EOM (ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE)
8E - 161
8E - 162
LX
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Electronic Overhead Module harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 163
8E - 164
*NO RESPONSE FROM ESM (ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE) (SHIFTER LEVER

ASSEMBLY) - NAG1
LX
LX
8E - 165

Possible Causes
(Z911) OR (Z912) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY (ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE)
Diagnostic Test
1.

proceeding.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (Z911) OR (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z911) or
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (Z911) or (Z912) ground circuit for an open.

Perform NAG1 TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
8E - 166
3.
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCKRUNSTART CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F902) Ignition
UnlockRunStart circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (F902) Ignition UnlockRunStart circuit for an

open or short.
4.

FCM connector and the Shifter Lever Assembly connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
LX
LX
5.

FCM connector and the Shifter Lever Assembly connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Shifter Lever Assembly in accordance with the

No
8E - 167
8E - 168
*NO RESPONSE FROM ESM (ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE) - (COLUMN NAG1)
LX
LX
8E - 169
Possible Causes
(Z910) GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
ELECTRONIC SHIFT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

proceeding.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (Z910) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Disconnect the Electronic Shift Module harness connector.
ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

8E - 170
3.
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCKRUNSTART CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (F902) Ignition
UnlockRunStart circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (F902) Ignition UnlockRunStart circuit for an

open or short.
4.

FCM connector and the Electronic Shift Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
LX
LX
5.

FCM connector and the Electronic Shift Module connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Electronic Shift Module in accordance with the

No
8E - 171
8E - 172
*NO RESPONSE FROM FCM (FRONT CONTROL MODULE)
LX
LX
8E - 173
Possible Causes
(A106) FUSED B (+) CIRCUIT OPEN AT DLC
(Z910) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN AT DLC
GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN AT FCM
FUSED B+ CIRCUITS OPEN AT FCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

NOTE: If the scan tool displays any error messages involving the CAN C Diagnostic circuits, diagnose and
repair the error message before proceeding. Refer to the Table of Contents.
NOTE: A loss of communication with the FCM can cause the ECU View button on the scan tool to be inoperative (not highlighted).
With the scan tool, attempt to select ECU View.
Can the scan tool communicate with the FCM?
Yes
No
>> Go To 2
2.
(A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN AT DLC

B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8E - 174
3.
(Z910) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN AT DLC

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN AT FCM C1 CONNECTOR

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check each ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the ground circuit for an open. Inspect the connector
for damage.
5.
GROUND CIRCUITS OPEN AT FCM PDM CONNECTOR
Remove the FCM from the PDM.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check each ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the ground circuit for an open. Inspect the connector
for damage.
LX
LX
6.

FUSED B(+) CIRCUITS OPEN AT FCM PDM CONNECTOR
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check each Fused B(+)
circuit.
Yes
No
>> Repair the Fused B(+) circuit for an open. Inspect the connector for damage.
8E - 175
8E - 176
*NO RESPONSE FROM HFM (HANDS FREE MODULE)
LX
LX
8E - 177
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Hands Free Module harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8E - 178
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Hands Free Module in accordance with the

No
LX
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM HIDT (HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE)
8E - 179
8E - 180
LX
Possible Causes
(F500) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
NOTE: Check the FCM for any ignition related DTCs before proceeding. If set (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/IGNITION CONTROL DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
Disconnect the Headlamp Leveling Module harness connector.
Run Relay Output circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (F500) Fused Run Relay Output circuit for an
open or short.
LX
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Headlamp Leveling Module in accordance with

No
8E - 181
8E - 182
*NO RESPONSE FROM HSM (HEATED SEAT MODULE)
LX
LX
8E - 183
Possible Causes
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Heated Seat Module harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8E - 184
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Heated Seat Module in accordance with the

No
LX
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM HVAC (HEAT VENTILATION AND A/C) (ATC)
8E - 185
8E - 186
LX
Possible Causes
HEAT VENTILATION AND A/C CONTROL (A/C HEATER CONTROL)
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the A/C Heater Control in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 187
8E - 188
*NO RESPONSE FROM ITM (INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE)
LX
LX
8E - 189
Possible Causes
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Intrusion Transceiver Module harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8E - 190
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance

with the service information.
No
LX
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM LRSM (LIGHT/RAIN SENSOR MODULE)
8E - 191
8E - 192
LX
Possible Causes
(F880) FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
LIGHT/RAIN SENSOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(F880) FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
Disconnect the Light/Rain Sensor harness connector.
Accessory Delay Relay Output circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (F880) Fused Accessory Delay Relay Output circuit for an open or short.
LX
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Light/Rain Sensor in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 193
8E - 194
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (POLICE AND TAXI INTERFACE

MODULE-PTIM)
LX
8E - 195

Possible Causes
MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (POLICE AND TAXI INTERFACE MODULE-PTIM)
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the C1 Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface
Module-PTIM) harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8E - 196
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) in accordance with the service information.
No
LX
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM MSMD (MEMORY SEAT MODULE)
8E - 197
8E - 198
LX
Possible Causes
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C1 harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes

No
8E - 199
8E - 200
*NO RESPONSE FROM OCM (OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE)
LX
LX
8E - 201
Possible Causes
(R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
(R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLTS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition off,

disconnect the battery and wait two minutes before proceeding.
Disconnect the Occupant Classification Module C1 harness connector.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition on,
then reconnect the battery.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
8E - 202
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
an open or short.
LX
LX
5.
8E - 203
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module is dropped at

any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and personal
injury or death.
ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
CHECK (R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage circuit.
Yes
>>
NOTE: Do not attempt to repair the Seat Harness. Replace the Seat Harness if the condition inspecting or
testing for is present in the Seat Harness.
Replace the OCM and Driver Seat Position Sensor Harness in accordance with the service information.
No
7.
>> Go To 7
CHECK (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLTS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Occupant Classification Module C2 harness connector.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 volt circuit.
Yes
>>
Replace the OCM and Driver Seat Position Sensor Harness in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Replace the Occupant Classification Module in accordance with the service information.
8E - 204
*NO RESPONSE FROM ORC (OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER MODULE)
LX
LX
8E - 205
Possible Causes
(F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN/START) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Occupant Restraint Controller Module harness connectors.
Connect the appropriate Load Tool ACM Adaptor to the ORC connector.
ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

Perform AIRBAG VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8E - 206
3.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
open or short.
4.
(F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN/START) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
Ignition Switch Output (RUN/START) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (RUN/

START) circuit for an open or short.
5.
WARNING: If the Occupant Restraint Controller is dropped at any

time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the proper precautions
could result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury
or death.
ground.
LX
LX
8E - 207
Measure the voltage between the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit and ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller Module in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Repair the (D55) and (D54) CAN B Bus circuits for an open. Inspect the connector for damage.
8E - 208
*NO RESPONSE FROM PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE)
LX
LX
8E - 209
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the PCM C1 harness connector.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing the
PCM harness connectors will damage the PCM terminals resulting
in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special Tool #8815
to perform diagnosis.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER
- 5.
8E - 210
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

- 5.
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
an open or short.
- 5.
LX
LX
5.

FCM connector and the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
- 5.
6.
FCM connector and the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in

accordance with the service information.
- 5.
No
- 5.
8E - 211
8E - 212
*NO RESPONSE FROM PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE)
LX
LX
8E - 213
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Passenger Door Module harness connectors.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8E - 214
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with

No
LX
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM PTS (PARK ASSIST MODULE)
8E - 215
8E - 216
LX
Possible Causes
PARK ASSIST MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
open or short.
LX
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
No
8E - 217
8E - 218
*NO RESPONSE FROM RADIO
LX
LX
8E - 219
Possible Causes
RADIO
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check each (A300)
Fused B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8E - 220
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes

No
LX
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM SDAR (SATELLITE RECEIVER)
8E - 221
8E - 222
LX
Possible Causes
SATELLITE RECEIVER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Satellite Receiver harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Satellite Receiver in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 223
8E - 224
*NO RESPONSE FROM SCM (STEERING CONTROL MODULE)
LX
LX
8E - 225
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect/remove the Steering Control Module harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

8E - 226
4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Steering Control Module in accordance with

No
LX
LX
*NO RESPONSE FROM SUNR (SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE)
8E - 227
8E - 228
LX
Possible Causes
(X13) FUSED B (+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
SUNROOF MOTOR/MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(X13) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (X13) Fused
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (X13) Fused B(+) circuit for an open or short.
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

LX
4.


ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with the

No
8E - 229
8E - 230
*NO RESPONSE FROM TCM (TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE) - NAG1
LX
LX
8E - 231
Possible Causes
(Z910) or (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(F942) FUSED TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

proceeding.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (Z910) OR (Z912) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the (Z910) or
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (Z910) or (Z912) ground circuit for an open.

8E - 232
3.
(F942) FUSED TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED

Transmission Relay Output circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (F942) Fused Transmission Relay Output circuit

for an open or short.
4.

Disconnect the TCM C2 harness connector.
FCM connector and the TCM connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
LX
LX
5.

FCM connector and the TCM connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Transmission Control Module in accordance

No
8E - 233
8E - 234
*NO RESPONSE FROM TCM (TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE) NGC
LX
LX
8E - 235
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
ATTEMPT TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE PCM
With the scan tool in ECU view, observe the status of the PCM.
Does the scan tool display a red X next to the PCM?
Yes
>> Refer to the No Response From PCM test procedure. Refer to the table of contents in this section.
No
>> Go To 3
3.

Disconnect the PCM C4 harness connector.
ground circuit.
Yes

No

Perform the appropriate TRANSMISSION VERIFICATION
TEST.
8E - 236
*NO RESPONSE FROM VES (MONITOR/DVD MEDIA SYSTEM)
LX
LX
8E - 237
Possible Causes
MONITOR/DVD MEDIA SYSTEM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Monitor/DVD Media System harness connector.
B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8E - 238
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Monitor/DVD Media System in accordance with

No
LX
LX
8E - 239
*NO RESPONSE FROM WCM (WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE) (SENTRY KEY

REMOTE ENTRY MODULE)
8E - 240
LX

Possible Causes
(A23), OR (A917) (RHD) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A23) or
(A917) (RHD) Fused B(+) circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (A23) or (A917) (RHD) Fused B(+) circuit for an
open or short.
Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST.
LX
3.

ground circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
an open or short.
5.

ground.
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8E - 241
8E - 242
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX

INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

INFORMATION
STANDARD PROCEDURE
PCM/SKREEM PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKE - MK25
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKE - MK25E
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
COMMUNICATION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
MODULE-DOOR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
MODULE-ENGINE CONTROL
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
STANDARD PROCEDURE - ECM/SKIM
PROGRAMMING - DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 . . . . . . . . 272
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
MODULE-SEAT MEMORY
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
MEMORY SEAT MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
MODULE-STEERING CONTROL
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION - PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
5 VOLT SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
POWER GROUNDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
SENSOR RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
OPERATION
OPERATION - PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
5 VOLT SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
OPERATION - IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE . . . . 284
NGC POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST
VER - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
VER - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
VER - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
VER - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
VER - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
VER - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TCM QUICK LEARN - 42RLE Only . . . . . . . . . . . 291
TCM ADAPTATION - NAG1 Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE 42RLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE NAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
OPERATION
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE 42RLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE NAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TCM QUICK LEARN - 42RLE Only . . . . . . . . . . . 303
TCM ADAPTATION - NAG1 Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
LX
8E - 243

STANDARD PROCEDURE
PCM/SKREEM PROGRAMMING
NOTE: Before replacing the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), be certain to check the related component/
circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most PCM driver/control circuit
failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relays and solenoids) and shorted circuits (i.e. pullups, drivers, and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a double fault has occurred
and only one Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) has been set.
NOTE: After a SKREEM/WCM is replaced, the ignition/transponder keys need to be programmed to the new
SKREEM/WCM. Follow the directions on the diagnostic scan tool. The transponder key for the SKREES/
SKIM and the RKE will both be programmed during this operation. There is no need to program the fob of
the key for RKE functionality once the transponder key is programmed to the new SKREEM/WCM.
NOTE: When a PCM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in
order:
Program the new PCM.
Program the new SKREEM/WCM.
Program all ignition/transponder keys to the new SKREEM/WCM.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE - PCM/SKREEM
PROGRAMMING).
PROGRAMMING THE PCM/SKREEM

The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in
the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM or SKREEM/WCM is
replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the
programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM Replaced or WCM Replaced under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM/Wireless Control Module menu item as appropriate.
NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is
programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM/WCM must be replaced.
NOTE: If the PCM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need
to be programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM.
NOTE: Programming the PCM or SKREEM/WCM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter
secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN,
secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN
position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. (Ensure all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the
battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary).
PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM/WCM

Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured.
When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the
transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the
SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for Program Ignition Keys or Key
FOBs under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM/Wireless Control Module menu item.
NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM/WCM. Once a key is learned to a
SKREEM/WCM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM/WCM and cannot be used on any
other vehicle at the same time.
8E - 244
LX
If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages:
Programming Not Attempted - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no
keys programmed into SKREEM memory.
Programming Key Failed (Possible Used Key From Wrong Vehicle) - SKREEM/WCM is unable to program
an ignition key transponder due to one of the following:
The ignition key transponder is faulty.
The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle.
8 Keys Already Learned, Programming Not Done - The SKREEM/FCM transponder ID memory is full.
Learned Key In Ignition - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is
already programmed into SKREEM/WCM memory.
LX
8E - 245
MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKE - MK25

DESCRIPTION
The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) is a microprocessor-based device which monitors the Antilock Brake
System (ABS) during normal braking and controls it
when the vehicle is in an ABS stop. The ABM also
monitors the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) if so
equipped.
The ABM (3) is mounted to the HCU (2) as part of the
Integrated Control Unit (ICU). The ABM uses a
47-Way connector on the vehicle wiring harness. The
power source for the ABM is through the ignition
switch in the RUN or ON position. The ABM is on the
CAN-C bus.
OPERATION
The
primary functions of the Antilock Brake Module (ABM) are to:

Monitor the Antilock Brake System (ABS) and Electronic Stability Program (ESP) for proper operation.
Detect wheel locking or wheel slipping tendencies by monitoring the speed of all four wheels of the vehicle.
Control fluid modulation to the wheel brakes while the system is in ABS or traction control mode.
Modulates fluid pressure to the wheel brakes to control vehicle yaw rate in ESP mode.
Store diagnostic information.
Provide communication to the scan tool while in diagnostic mode.
Illuminate the amber TCS/ESP indicator in the instrument cluster.
The ABM constantly monitors the ABS and ESP (if equipped) for proper operation. If the ABM detects a fault, it will
turn on the amber TCS/ESP indicator and disable the ABS or ESP if so equipped. The normal base braking system
will remain operational at that time.
The ABM continuously monitors the speed of each wheel through the signals generated by the wheel speed sensors
to determine if any wheel is beginning to lock. When a wheel locking tendency is detected, the ABM commands the
ABM solenoid coils to actuate. The coils then open and close the valves in the HCU that modulate brake fluid
pressure in some or all of the hydraulic circuits. The ABM continues to control pressure in individual hydraulic circuits until a locking tendency is no longer present.
8E - 246
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative (-) battery cable (2) from battery post and isolate.
2. Disconnect 47-Way wiring connector (5) at ABM

(6).
LX
LX
3. Unclip brake tubes (1, 2 and 10) from two routing

clips (6) along upper radiator support.
4. Unclip brake tube (3) from routing clip (4) below
Fuse And Relay Center.
5. Lift up on entire assembly (5) from mounting grommets (8) and move inboard allowing access to ABM
attaching screws. Do not force brake tubes.
Move assembly just enough to access mounting screws.
6. Remove three screws (2) attaching ABM (1).
7. Slide ABM (1) off HCU (3).
8E - 247
8E - 248
INSTALLATION
1. Align ABM solenoids and pump/motor wiring connector (4) with HCU valves (2) and connector passage. Slide ABM (1) onto HCU (3).
2. Install three screws (2) attaching ABM (1) to HCU.

Tighten screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.) torque.
LX
LX
3. Position assembly (5) above mounting grommets

(8) and press mounting bracket into place.
4. Clip brake tube (3) to routing clip (4) below Fuse
And Relay Center.
5. Clip brake tubes (1, 2 and 10) to two routing clips
(6) along upper radiator support.
6. Connect 47-way wiring connector (5) at ABM (6).

TESTING)
8E - 249
8E - 250
LX
MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKE - MK25E

DESCRIPTION
The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) is a microprocessor-based device which monitors the Antilock Brake
System (ABS) during normal braking and controls it
when the vehicle is in an ABS stop. The ABM also
monitors the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) if so
equipped.
The ABM (1) is mounted to the HCU (2) as part of the
Integrated Control Unit (ICU). The ABM uses a
47-Way connector on the vehicle wiring harness. The
power source for the ABM is through the ignition
switch in the RUN or ON position. The ABM is on the
CAN-C bus.
OPERATION
The
primary functions of the Antilock Brake Module (ABM) are to:

Monitor the Antilock Brake System (ABS) and Electronic Stability Program (ESP) for proper operation.
Detect wheel locking or wheel slipping tendencies by monitoring the speed of all four wheels of the vehicle.
Control fluid modulation to the wheel brakes while the system is in ABS or traction control mode.
Modulates fluid pressure to the wheel brakes to control vehicle yaw rate in ESP mode.
Store diagnostic information.
Provide communication to the scan tool while in diagnostic mode.
Illuminate the amber TCS/ESP indicator in the instrument cluster.
The ABM constantly monitors the ABS and ESP (if equipped) for proper operation. If the ABM detects a fault, it will
turn on the amber TCS/ESP indicator and disable the ABS or ESP if so equipped. The normal base braking system
will remain operational at that time.
The ABM continuously monitors the speed of each wheel through the signals generated by the wheel speed sensors
to determine if any wheel is beginning to lock. When a wheel locking tendency is detected, the ABM commands the
ABM solenoid coils to actuate. The coils then open and close the valves in the HCU that modulate brake fluid
pressure in some or all of the hydraulic circuits. The ABM continues to control pressure in individual hydraulic circuits until a locking tendency is no longer present.
LX
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative (-) battery cable (2) from battery post and isolate.
NOTE: Use this figure in the following step to

release the ABM harness connector cover. It
shows the location of the release tabs.
8E - 251
8E - 252
2. Disconnect ABM harness connector from antilock

brake module (ABM). To do so:
a. Depress tabs on each side of connector cover,
then
b. Pull outward and upward on lower half of cover
until it locks into position pointing straight outward (2). Connector can then be pulled straight
outward off ABM (1).
3. Unclip all brake tubes from two routing clips (1)

along upper radiator support.
4. Unclip right front brake tube (3) from routing clip on
bracket below Fuse And Relay Center.
5. Unclip rear brake tubes (1, 2) from routing clip (3)

on bracket below Fuse And Relay Center.
LX
LX
6. Lift ICU (1) from mounting grommets (2) and move

inboard allowing access to ABM attaching screws.
Do not force brake tubes. Move assembly just
enough to access mounting screws.
7. Remove four screws (1) attaching ABM (2) to HCU.
8. Slide ABM (1) off HCU (2).
8E - 253
8E - 254
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Clean any debris off the mating surfaces of the HCU and ABM.
CAUTION: When installing new O-rings or solenoid valve stem seals, do not use any type of lubricant.
2. If the seals (1) on the solenoid valve stems (2) are
not new, replace them all. Each of the solenoid
valve stem seals must be new to keep out moisture
and debris; do not reuse solenoid valve stem
seals.
3. Replace the pump/motor connector O-ring (1) if it is

not new. Be sure the O-ring is properly seated in
the mounting groove (2).
LX
4. Align components and install the ABM (1) on the

HCU (2).
5. Install the four screws (1) attaching the ABM (2) to

the HCU. Tighten the mounting screws to 2 Nm
(17 in. lbs.).
6. Position ICU (1) above mounting grommets (2)

located in body side rail and press mounting
bracket into place.
8E - 255
8E - 256
7. Clip rear brake tubes (1, 2) to routing clip (3) on

8. Clip right front brake tube (3) to routing clip on

9. Clip brake tubes to two routing clips (1) along
upper radiator support.
CAUTION: Before installing the ABM harness connector (2) on the ABM (1), be sure the seal is properly installed in the connector.
10. Insert ABM harness connector (2) into socket of
ABM (1) and close cover, locking connector in
place.
LX
LX

TESTING)
8E - 257
8E - 258
LX
COMMUNICATION
DESCRIPTION
The primary on-board communication network between microprocessor-based electronic control modules in this
vehicle is the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system. A data bus network minimizes redundant wiring connections; and, at the same time, reduces wire harness complexity, sensor current loads and controller hardware by
allowing each sensing device to be connected to only one module (also referred to as a node). Each node reads,
then broadcasts its sensor data over the bus for use by all other nodes requiring that data. Each node ignores the
messages on the bus that it cannot use.
The CAN bus is a two-wire multiplex system. Multiplexing is any system that enables the transmission of multiple
messages over a single channel or circuit. The CAN bus is used for communication between all vehicle nodes.
However, in addition to the CAN bus network, certain nodes may also be equipped with a dedicated Serial Controller Interface (SCI) or a K-Line serial link bus to provide direct communication between that node and certain
sensor inputs.
There are actually three separate CAN bus systems used in the vehicle. They are designated: the CAN-B, the
CAN-C and the Diagnostic CAN-C. The CAN-B and CAN-C systems provide on-board communication between all
nodes in the vehicle. The CAN-C is the faster of the two systems providing near real-time communication (500
Kbps), but is less fault tolerant than the CAN-B system. The CAN-C is used exclusively for communications
between critical powertrain and chassis nodes. The slower (83.3 Kbps), but more fault tolerant CAN-B system is
used for communications between body and interior nodes. The CAN-B fault tolerance comes from its ability to
revert to a single wire communication mode if there is a fault in the bus wiring.
The added speed of the CAN data bus is many times faster than previous data bus systems. This added speed
facilitates the addition of more electronic control modules or nodes and the incorporation of many new electrical and
electronic features in the vehicle. The Diagnostic CAN-C bus is also capable of 500 Kbps communication, and is
sometimes informally referred to as the CAN-D system to differentiate it from the other high speed CAN-C bus. The
Diagnostic CAN-C is used exclusively for the transmission of diagnostic information between the Front Control Module/Central GateWay (FCM or FCMCGW) and a diagnostic scan tool connected to the industry-standard 16-way
Data Link Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle.
The FCM is located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM), which is located in the engine compartment near the
battery. The central CAN gateway or hub module integral to the FCM is connected to all three CAN buses. This
gateway physically and electrically isolates the CAN buses from each other and coordinates the bi-directional transfer of messages between them.
OPERATION
The Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus allows all electronic modules or nodes connected to the bus to share
information with each other. Regardless of whether a message originates from a module on the low speed CAN-B
bus or on the high speed CAN-C or CAN-D bus, the message structure and layout is similar, which allows the Front
Control Module/Central GateWay (FCM or FCMCGW) to process and transfer messages between the buses. The
FCM also stores a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for certain bus network faults.
All modules (also referred to as nodes) transmit and receive messages over one of these buses. Data exchange
between nodes is achieved by serial transmission of encoded data messages. Each node can both send and
receive serial data simultaneously. Bus messages are carried over the data bus in the form of Variable Pulse Width
Modulated (VPWM) signals which, when the high and low voltage pulses are strung together, form a message. Each
node uses arbitration to sort the message priority if two competing messages are attempting to be broadcast at the
same time.
The voltage network used to transmit messages requires biasing and termination. Each module on the bus network
provides its own biasing and termination. Each node terminates the bus through a terminating resistor and a terminating capacitor. There are two types of nodes on the bus. The dominant node terminates the bus through a 1
KW resistor and a 3300 pF capacitor, typically resulting in about a 3300 ohm termination resistance. However, this
resistance value may vary somewhat by application. The FCM (or FCMCGW) is the only dominant node in this
network. A non-dominant (or recessive) node terminates the bus through an 11 KW resistor and a 330 pF capacitor,
typically resulting in about a 10800 ohm termination resistance.
The communication protocol being used for the CAN data bus is a non-proprietary, open standard adopted from the
Bosch CAN Specification 2.0b. The CAN-C is the faster of the two primary buses in the CAN bus system, providing
near real-time communication (500 Kbps).
LX
8E - 259
The CAN bus nodes are connected in parallel to the two-wire bus using a twisted pair, where the wires are wrapped
around each other to provide shielding from unwanted electromagnetic induction, thus preventing interference with
the relatively low voltage signals being carried through them. The twisted pairs have between 33 and 50 twists per
meter. While the CAN bus is operating (active), one of the bus wires will carry a higher voltage and is referred to as
the CAN High or CAN bus (+) wire, while the other bus wire will carry a lower voltage and is referred to as the CAN
Low or CAN bus () wire. Refer to the CAN Bus Voltages table.
CAN Bus Voltages (Normal Operation)
CAN-C Bus
Circuits
CAN-L ()
CAN-H (+)
Sleep
Recessive
(Bus
Idle)
Dominant
(Bus
Active)
0V
2.4 - 2.5
V
1.3 - 2.3
V
0V
2.4 - 2.5
V
2.6 - 3.5
V
CAN-L
Short to
Ground
CAN-H
Short to
Ground
CAN-L
Short to
Battery
CAN-H
Short to
Battery
CAN-H
Short to
CAN-L
0V
0.3 0.5V
Battery
Voltage
Battery
Voltage
Less 0.75
V
2.45 V
0.02 V
0V
Battery
Voltage
Less 0.75
V
Battery
Voltage
2.45 V
CAN-B Bus
Circuits
Key-Off (Bus Asleep)
Key-On
(Bus
Active)
CAN-L
Short to
Ground
CAN-H
Short to
Ground
CAN-L
Short to
Battery
CAN-H
Short to
Battery
CAN-H
Short to
CAN-L
CAN-L ()
10.99 V
4.65 4.98 V
0V
4.5 - 4.7
V
Battery
Voltage
4.5 - 4.7
V
0.3 - 0.7
V
CAN-H (+)
0.0 V
0.39 0.46 V
0.3 - 0.7
V
0V
0.3 - 0.7
V
Battery
Voltage
0.3 - 0.7
V
Notes
All measurements taken between node ground and CAN terminal with a standard DVOM.
DVOM will display average network voltage.
Total resistance of CAN-C network can also be measured (60 ohms). Cannot measure total resistance of CAN-B
network.
In order to minimize the potential effects of Ignition-Off Draw (IOD), the CAN-B network employs a sleep strategy.
However, a network sleep strategy should not be confused with the sleep strategy of the individual nodes on that
network, as they may differ. For example: The CAN-C bus network is awake only when the ignition switch is in the
ON or START positions; however, the FCM, which is on the CAN-C bus, may still be awake with the ignition switch
in the ACCESSORY or UNLOCK positions. The integrated circuitry of an individual node may be capable of processing certain sensor inputs and outputs without the need to utilize network resources.
The CAN-B bus network remains active until all nodes on that network are ready for sleep. This is determined by
the network using tokens in a manner similar to polling. When the last node that is active on the network is ready
for sleep, and it has already received a token indicating that all other nodes on the bus are ready for sleep, it
broadcasts a bus sleep acknowledgment message that causes the network to sleep. Once the CAN-B bus network is asleep, any node on the bus can awaken it by transmitting a message on the network. The FCM will keep
either the CAN-B or the CAN-C bus awake for a timed interval after it receives a diagnostic message for that bus
over the Diagnostic CAN-C bus.
In the CAN system, available options are configured into the FCM at the assembly plant, but additional options can
be added in the field using the diagnostic scan tool. The configuration settings are stored in non-volatile memory.
The FCM also has two 64-bit registers, which track each of the as-built and currently responding nodes on the
CAN-B and CAN-C buses. The FCM stores a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in one of two caches for any detected
active or stored faults in the order in which they occur. One cache stores powertrain (P-Code), chassis (C-Code)
and body (B-Code) DTCs, while the second cache is dedicated to storing network (U-Code) DTCs.
If there are intermittent or active faults in the CAN network, a diagnostic scan tool connected to the Diagnostic
CAN-C bus through the 16-way Data Link Connector (DLC) may only be able to communicate with the FCM. To aid
in CAN network diagnosis, the FCM will provide CAN-B and CAN-C network status information to the scan tool
using certain diagnostic signals. In addition, the transceiver in each node on the CAN-C bus will identify a bus off
8E - 260
LX
hardware failure, while the transceiver in each node on the CAN-B bus will identify a general bus hardware failure. The transceivers for some CAN-B nodes will also identify certain failures for both CAN-B bus signal wires.
LX
8E - 261
MODULE-DOOR
DESCRIPTION
The door modules control the express up and down
feature as well as normal window functions. It is used
only on vehicles equipped with the express up feature.
If equipped with memory system, the door module
controls the memory mirror. The modules are attached
to each front door trim panel.
OPERATION
If the vehicle is equipped with the Express Up power window feature there will be a door module on each front door
trim panel. The power window switches and motors are directly wired to the modules. If the vehicle is equipped with
the Memory System, the exterior power mirrors and switches are also directly wired to the modules along with the
rear door window switches. The modules are wired to the accessory delay relay which allows the operation of the
windows and mirrors for a given period of time after the ignition is turned off and providing the doors are not
opened. The modules communicate with each other and other modules on the vehicle via the CAN-B bus circuit.
There are several Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) the modules will store if there are problems with the power
window system or the memory power mirror system.
ANTI-PINCH
The 9Anti-Pinch9 function is a safety feature that senses obstacles at the top of the glass and anywhere on the seal
where it meets the glass to close during the window closing operation. When a front window switch is pressed to
the 9Auto-Up9 position and the closing window traps an object and the sense current passes its limit, the module will
stop the motor and drive the window down approximately 200 millimeters. The pinch force is speed dependent
which means that if the vehicle is going over 2km per hour the pinch force will be higher than if the vehicle is
stopped.
PANIC MODE
If the window switch is held in the 9Auto-Up9 position and the closing window traps an object, the module will stop
the motor and when the switch is released will drive the window in the opposite direction approximately 10 millimeters. If within 8 seconds after the switch was released to the neutral position, the switch is held again to the 9AutoUp9 position, the module will enter the second panic mode. During the second panic mode, the module will drive the
motor with full (stall) force and stop. If within 8 seconds after the switch is released again to the neutral position, the
switch is held again to the 9Auto-Up9 position, the module will drive the motor again with full (stall) force and stop.
8E - 262
REMOVAL
2. Remove front door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors.
4. Remove mounting fasteners and module.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position module.
Install and tighten mounting fasteners.
Connect electrical harness connectors.
Install door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/DOOR
- FRONT/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
LX
LX
8E - 263
MODULE-ENGINE CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
The ECM is located in the left side of engine compartment attached to the left inner fender behind the battery.
The electrical circuits at the ECM are split into two
separate wiring harnesses (vehicle and engine wiring
harness). The 58-pin connector is used for the vehicle
wiring harness. The 96-pin connector is for the engine
wiring harness.
The ECM connectors use slide locks. To remove the
ECM connectors, pull the slide locks sideways to the
end of their travel and lift the connectors.
A 32-bit microprocessor uses control algorithms to process the input signals and calculates the injected fuel based
on stored maps. The microprocessor triggers the driver stages for switching the output components. The ECM contains the following data storage elements:
1. Flash EPROMstores engine-specific curves, engine-management maps, and variant coding (engine and equipment options).
2. EEPROMstores immobilizer data, calibration and manufacturing data, adaptation values, operational faults and
variant coding.
3. RAMstores variable data such as calculations data and input values.
8E - 264
LX
OPERATION
The ECM has been programmed to monitor different
circuits of the diesel fuel injection system. This monitoring is called on-board diagnostics. Certain criteria
must be met for a diagnostic trouble code to be
entered into the ECM memory. The criteria may be a
range of: engine rpm, engine temperature, time or
other input signals to the ECM. If all of the criteria for
monitoring a system or circuit are met, and a problem
is sensed, then a DTC will be stored in the ECM
memory. It is possible that a DTC for a monitored circuit may not be entered into the ECM memory, even
though a malfunction has occurred. This may happen
when the monitoring criteria have not been met. The
ECM compares input signal voltages from each input
device with specifications (the established high and
low limits of the input range) that are programmed into
it for that device. If the input voltage is not within the
specifications and other trouble code criteria are met,
a DTC will be stored in the ECM memory.
ECM OPERATING MODES

As input signals to the ECM change, the ECM adjusts its response to the output devices. For example, the ECM
must calculate a different fuel quantity and fuel timing for engine idle condition than it would for a wide open throttle
condition. There are several different modes of operation that determine how the ECM responds to the various input
signals.
Ignition Switch On (Engine Off)
When the ignition is turned on, the ECM activates the glow plug relay for a time period that is determined by engine
coolant temperature, atmospheric temperature and battery voltage.
LX
8E - 265
Engine Start-Up Mode

The ECM uses the engine temperature sensor and the crankshaft position sensor (engine speed) inputs to determine fuel injection quantity.
Normal Driving Modes
Engine idle, warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are controlled based on all of the
sensor inputs to the ECM. The ECM uses these sensor inputs to adjust fuel quantity and fuel injector timing.
Limp-In Mode
If there is a fault detected with the accelerator pedal position sensor, the ECM will set the engine speed at 1100
RPM.
Overspeed Detection Mode
If the ECM detects engine RPM that exceeds 5200 RPM, the ECM will set a DTC in memory and illuminate the MIL
until the DTC is cleared.
After-Run Mode
The ECM transfers RAM information to ROM and performs an Input/Output state check.
MONITORED CIRCUITS
The ECM is able to monitor and identify most driveability related trouble conditions. Some circuits are directly monitored through ECM feedback circuitry. In addition, the ECM monitors the voltage state of some circuits and compares those states with expected values. Other systems are monitored indirectly when the ECM conducts a
rationality test to identify problems. Although most subsytems of the engine control module are either directly or
indirectly monitored, there may be occasions when diagnostic trouble codes are not immediately identified. For a
trouble code to set, a specific set of conditions must occur and unless these conditions occur, a DTC will not set.
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

Each diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is diagnosed by following a specific procedure. The diagnostic test procedure
contains step-by-step instruction for determining the cause of the DTC as well as no trouble code problems. Refer
to the appropriate Diesel Powertrain Diagnostic Manual for more information.
HARD CODE
A DTC that comes back within one cycle of the ignition key is a hard code. This means that the problem is current
every time the ECM/SKIM checks that circuit or function. Procedures in this manual verify if the DTC is a hard code
at the beginning of each test. When the fault is not a hard code, an intermittent test must be performed. NOTE: If
the DRBIIIT displays faults for multiple components (i.e. ECT, VSS, IAT sensors) identify and check the shared circuits for possible problems before continuing (i.e. sensor grounds or 5-volt supply circuits). Refer to the appropriate
schematic to identify shared circuits. Refer to the appropriate Diesel Powertrain Diagnostic Manual for more information.
INTERMITTENT CODE
A DTC that is not current every time the ECM/SKIM checks the circuit or function is an intermittent code. Most
intermittent DTCs are caused by wiring or connector problems. Problems that come and go like this are the most
difficult to diagnose; they must be looked for under specific conditions that cause them. NOTE: Electromagnetic
(radio) interference can cause an intermittent system malfunction. This interference can interrupt communication between the ignition key transponder and the SKIM. The following checks may assist you in identifying a possible intermittent problem:
Visually inspect the related wire harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out or corroded terminals.
Visually inspect the related wire harness. Look for chafed, pierced or partially broken wire.
Refer to hotlines or technical service bulletins that may apply.
Refer to the appropriate Diesel Powertrain Diagnostic Manual for more information.
8E - 266
LX
ECM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

IMPORTANT NOTE: Before replacing the ECM for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check
the related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM driver/
control circuit failures are caused by internal failures to components (i.e. relays and solenoids) and shorted circuits
(i.e. sensor pull-ups, drivers and ground circuits). These faults are difficult to detect when a double fault has
occurred and only one DTC has set. If the DRBIIIT displays faults for multiple components (i.e.VSS, ECT, Batt
Temp, etc.) identify and check the shared circuits for possible problems before continuing (i.e. sensor grounds or
5-volt supply circuits). Refer to the appropriate wiring diagrams to identify shared circuits. Refer to the appropriate
Diesel Powertrain Diagnostic Manual for more information.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - ECM/SKIM PROGRAMMING - DIESEL

NOTE: Before replacing the ECM for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check the
related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM
driver/control circuit failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relay and solenoids) and
shorted circuits (i.e. pull-ups, drivers and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a
double fault has occurred and only one DTC has set.
ECM/SKIM PROGRAMMING
When a ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order:
1. Program the new ECM.
2. Program the new SKIM.
3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM.
ECM/SKIM PROGRAMMING
When an ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order:
1. Program the new SKIM.
2. Program the new ECM.
PROGRAMMING THE ECM (Bosch)

1. To program the VIN, connect the scan tool and turn the ignition on.
2. Select Engine from the main menu. The scan tool will require the VIN to be entered before continuing.
3. Select ENTER to update the VIN. The scan tool will display the updated VIN.
4. If the engine is equipped with air conditioning, the ECM A/C function must be enabled. Enable the ECM A/C
function as follows:
Using the scan tool select ENGINE, MISCELLANEOUS, then ENABLE/DISABLE A/C
Push 1 to enable A/C, the scan tool screen should display A/C Activated.
PROGRAMMING THE SKIM

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn the ignition switch on (transmission in park/neutral).

Use the scan tool and select THEFT ALARM, SKIM then MISCELLANEOUS.
Select ECM REPLACED (DIESEL ENGINE).
Program the vehicle four-digit PIN into SKIM.
Select COUNTRY CODE and enter the correct country.
NOTE: Be sure to enter the correct country code. If the incorrect country code is programmed into SKIM,
the SKIM must be replaced.
6. Select YES to update VIN (the SKIM will learn the VIN from the PCM).
7. Press ENTER to transfer the secret key (the PCM will send the secret key to the SKIM).
8. Program ignition keys to SKIM.
LX
8E - 267
NOTE: If the ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle keys will need to be replaced and
programmed to the new SKIM.
PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKIM

1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn the ignition switch on (transmission in park/neutral).

Use the scan tool and select THEFT ALARM, SKIM then MISCELLANEOUS.
Select PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS.
Enter secured access mode by entering the vehicle four-digit PIN.
NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKIM. Once a key is learned to a SKIM it (the key)
cannot be transferred to another vehicle.
If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following messages:
Programming Not Attempted - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys
programmed into SKIM memory.
Programming Key Failed (Possible Used Key From Wrong Vehicle) - SKIM is unable to program key due to one of
the following:
faulty ignition key transponder
ignition key is programmed to another vehicle.
8 Keys Already Learned, Programming Not Done - SKIM transponder ID memory is full.
5. Obtain ignition keys to be programmed from customer (8 keys maximum).
6. Using the scan tool, erase all ignition keys by selecting MISCELLANEOUS and ERASE ALL CURRENT IGN.
KEYS.
7. Program all ignition keys.
Learned Key In Ignition - Ignition key transponder ID is currently programmed in SKIM memory.
8E - 268
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect ECM electrical connectors (1).
3. Remove ECM bracket to inner fender retaining nuts
(5).
4. Remove ECM and bracket assembly from vehicle.
5. Separate ECM from bracket.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Install ECM on bracket (3).
2. Position ECM and bracket assembly in vehicle.
3. Install ECM bracket to inner fender retaining nuts
(5).
4. Connect ECM electrical connectors (1).
8E - 269
8E - 270
LX
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
The Front Control Module (FCM) is a micro controller
based module located in the right front corner of the
engine compartment. The front control module mates
to the power distribution center to form the Integrated
Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the
battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical
systems. The FCM controls power to some of these
vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads
based on inputs received from hard wired switch
inputs and data received on the CAN bus circuit.
OPERATION
As messages are sent over the CAN bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt power (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM:
Air conditioning condenser cooling fan
Daytime running lamps - if equipped
Fog Lamps
Front and rear hazard warning lamps
Front turn signals
Headlamps
Horn
Radiator fans
Rear window defroster power and timing
Stop, turn signal and tail lamps
Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems
The FCM provides the following features for the above function:
Acts as a link between the CAN bus network for critical powertrain, anti-lock brake systems, electronic stability
program systems and the network for body and interior modules.
Controls the wipers based on messages on the CAN B bus from the rain sensor module (if equipped).
Controls the adjustable pedal motor on non-memory equipped vehicles.
Controls back-up lamps.
Flashes lamps in response to turn signal, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS) inputs.
Illuminated approach feature that turns the headlamps on when the vehicle is unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Minimizes voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the
lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance.
Monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger,
and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power.
Operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps.
Protects the battery from discharge if the headlamps are left on, by automatically turning them off after eight
minutes.
LX
8E - 271
Provides ambient temperature sensor information.

Provides A/C pressure transducer information.
Provides brake fluid level information.
Provides washer fluid level information.
Provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed
sensitive windshield wiper delay variation.
Sounds the horn in response to RKE and VTSS inputs.
Turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn.
Turns off the windshield washer motor after 10 seconds of continuous operation to protect the motor.
Controls headlamp washers (if equipped).
Provides wheel speed information on non-ABS equipped vehicles.
Stores vehicle configuration data.
8E - 272
LX
BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1

Diagnostic Test
1.
Perform Body Verification Test
1. Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors.
2. Ensure that all accessories are turned off.
3. Ensure that the battery is fully charged. If the battery was disconnected for any reason, refer to (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - STANDARD PROCEDURE - BATTERY RECONNECTION) for accessory calibration procedures.
4. If the FCM has been replaced, the Pinion Factor MUST be programmed into the FCM. Refer to the scan tool
for program procedure.
5. Turn the ignition on.
6. With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs from all modules.
7. (Export only) If the Intrusion Transceiver Module (ITM) and/or Siren was replaced, select ITM from the from
the scan tool ECU view menu then Misc. Functions and perform the applicable replacement procedure.
8. Perform this step only if diagnosing faults related to the HVAC system.
The Manual Temperature Control (MTC) is not on the Bus and not addressable with a scan tool.
Perform the following to clear DTCs from the MTC: 1. Turn the blower control on. 2. Press the A/C
mode switch down, turn the blower control to off, wait until both LEDs illuminate (approximately 5
seconds) and then release the A/C mode switch. 3. When the A/C status indicator begins flashing
DTCs, set the Mode switch to the floor position, simultaneously press the A/C mode switch and the
EBL mode switch down until both LEDs start flashing (approximately 5 seconds) and then release the
mode switches.
For vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), if repairs were made to any of the
HVAC doors, linkage, door actuators, or door actuator circuits, run the actuator calibration function by
selecting the following from the scan tool menu: select HVAC, More Options, System Tests, Actuator
Calibration Test, and Start. Follow the directions displayed by the scan tool. Allow the test to run to
completion before proceeding.
For vehicles equipped with MTC, if repairs were made to any of the HVAC doors, linkage, door actuators, or door actuator circuits, run the door calibration function by performing the following: 1. Turn the
ignition on. 2. Turn the blower control to off. 3. Press the EBL mode switch down, turn the blower
control on, wait until the EBL LED starts flashing (approximately 5 seconds) and then release the
mode switch. Wait approximately 90 seconds for the calibration process to run to completion before
proceeding.
9. Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on.
10. Operate all functions of the system that caused the original concern. If a repair or module replacement was
done to the power windows, operate the motor fully down and then to the full up position and stall it for 2 seconds.
11. With the scan tool, select ECU View and check for DTCs in the modules.
12. Perform this step only if diagnosing faults related to the MTC HVAC system.
NOTE: The A/C status indicator displays active DTCs when the EBL status indictor is not illuminated and
stored DTCs when the EBL status indicator is illuminated.
Perform the following to read DTCs from the MTC: 1. Turn the blower control on. 2. Press the A/C
mode switch down, turn the blower control to off, wait until both LEDs illuminate (approximately 5
seconds) and then release the A/C mode switch. 3. Read the DTCs from the flashing A/C status
indicator.
Are DTCs present in any of the modules or is the original condition still present?
Yes
>> The repair is not complete. Refer to the related category for the DTC or symptom that is still present.
No
>> The repair is complete.
LX
REMOVAL
NOTE: A battery reconnect procedure must be performed anytime the battery has been disconnected.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM STANDARD PROCEDURE).
3. Disconnect electrical connectors and remove Front
Control Module (FCM).
INSTALLATION
NOTE: A battery reconnect procedure must be performed anytime the battery has been disconnected.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM STANDARD PROCEDURE).
1. Position Front Control Module (FCM) and connect
electrical connectors.
8E - 273
8E - 274
LX
MODULE-SEAT MEMORY
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: The scan tool standardization process
must be performed on the Memory Seat Module
(MSM) any time a new module is installed or the
existing module is reflashed.
The Memory Seat Module (MSM) is located underneath the driver seat, towards the front and on the
outboard side. It is used in conjunction with the other
modules in the memory system to recall the driver
seat to one of two preset seat positions (horizontal,
vertical, and recliner). The switch for the memory seat
programming and selection mounts on the driver door
trim panel. The memory system is able to store and
recall all driver side power seat positions, outside mirror positions, power tilt/telescopic steering column
positions and power adjustable pedal position. The
system can be set for two different drivers. On vehicles with a factory installed radio connected to the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus network, the memory system is also able to store and recall up to twelve
radio station presets (six AM and six FM), also for two drivers. The memory system will also store and recall the last
station listened to for each driver, even if it is not one of the twelve preset stations.
The memory system will automatically recall all of these settings when a button of the memory switch is depressed,
or when the doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (if the RKE Linked to Memory
feature is enabled). If the vehicle has more than two drivers the RKE transmitter recall of memory features can be
disabled. This is a customer programmable feature of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
OPERATION
The Memory Seat Module (MSM) receives battery current through a 25 amp circuit breaker in the Power Distribution
Center (PDC) so that the memory system remains operational, regardless of the ignition switch position. When the
driver memory switch button is pushed, a resistance signal is sent to the MSM via the Controller Area Network
(CAN) bus circuit. The MSM is responsible for the 12v battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster
motor and other memory system components.
The MSM receives memory set/position switch input through the CAN bus circuit. The MSM also receives hard
wired input from the hall effect sensors, mounted on each of the driver power seat adjuster motors and the driver
side view mirror motor. The programmed software in the module allows it to know where the seat, adjustable pedals, and steering column tilt/telescope are located in its designed travel by a pulse count generated from the hall
effect sensors. This way, when the memory switch is depressed the module will power these components until the
correct preset location is achieved. The module will prevent the seat memory recall function from being initiated, if
the transmission gear selector lever is not in the Park position, or if the vehicle is moving. These inputs are monitored over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit by the MSM.
A memory setting is saved by pressing the set button, then pressing either the memory 1 or 2 button within 5
seconds of pressing the set button.
A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 or 2 button, or by pressing the unlock button on
a linked Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in a position other than Park or the
seat belt is latched.
The
MSM performs the following functions:

Positions the driver power seat (vertical, horizontal, and recliner positions).
Positions the power adjustable pedals.
Positions the power tilt/telescopic steering column positions.
LX
8E - 275
Sends the memory save or recall (#1 or #2) command over the CAN data bus circuit to the other memory
system components, radio station pre-sets and power mirror positions.
Provides for linking the key FOBs to memory.
Provides for the easy entry/exit feature.
Provides the tilt mirrors in reverse feature.
When a memory button is pressed (#1 or #2) on the memory switch, the Driver Door Module (DDM) sends a recall
message to the MSM. The MSM will then position the memory system components to the preprogrammed location/
setting. When the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter button is pressed, depending on which transmitter (#1
or #2), the SKREEM (RKE Receiver) sends the recall request and FOB number (#1 or #2) data message. This RKE
transmitter function depends on if the MSM is programmed to trigger the recall (linked FOBs).
For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in any position other than park or the
A key FOB is linked to a memory setting by pressing the set button and then pressing either the memory 1 or
2 button within 5 seconds of pressing the set button, and then, with the key removed from the cylinder, pressing
the lock button on the selected key FOB.
The memory system Easy Entry and Exit feature provides the driver with more room to enter or exit the vehicle.
This is a customer programmable feature of the overhead console. When the seat is in a memorized position, it will
move rearward 55 millimeters or to the end of its travel, whichever occurs first, when the key is removed from the
ignition switch lock cylinder. A lock out zone of 60 millimeters has been established to protect rear passengers from
injury. If the memorized seat position is within the lock out zone the Easy Exit/Entry seat glide feature is disabled.
The seat will return to the memory position when the driver turns the vehicles ignition switch out of the LOCK
position.
The memory system 9Tilt in Reverse9 feature tilts the outside mirrors down a fixed, incremental angle when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the RUN position. This feature provides the customer
with a better view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up. The mirrors move back
to their previous position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE.
The memory system learns the seat and adjustable pedal motor maximum end positions when the motor reaches
the limit of travel in any direction and stalls. Subsequently, movement will stop just short of that position to avoid
extra stress on the motors and mechanisms. If the system learned a maximum position as a result of an obstruction,
as for instance if a large object was placed on the floor behind the seat, the system can relearn the true maximum
position through manually operating the power seat after the obstruction is removed.
NOTE: It is normal for the power accessories contained in the memory system to stop at the maximum
learned position and then continue to the true maximum position when the control switch is released
and then applied in the same direction a second time.
Certain functions and features of the memory system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in
the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN bus allows the sharing of sensor information.
This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, internal controller hardware, and component sensor current loads. At
the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many
new feature capabilities. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the CAN bus, the use of a scan tool and
the proper diagnostic information are needed.

MEMORY SEAT MODULE
In order to obtain conclusive testing of the memory system, the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and all of
the electronic modules that provide inputs to, or receive outputs from the memory system components must be
checked. Any diagnosis of the memory system/module should begin with, the use of a scan tool and the
appropriate diagnostic service information.
Refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete circuit schematic or connector pin-out information.
8E - 276
LX
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the memory/heated seat option utilize a low voltage cut-off feature. This feature turns off the 12v power to the power seat system anytime vehicle voltage is below 11.7v. Be certain to
check the vehicle electrical system for proper voltage anytime the power seat system appears inoperative.
Before any testing of the power seat system is attempted, the battery should be fully-charged.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the driver seat cushion/cover (2) (Refer to
23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER REMOVAL).
3. Pivot the module upward and disconnect the electrical connectors (1).
4. Unsnap the memory seat module (4) from the side
brackets.
5. Pull the module rearward to remove it from the
front of the seat frame (3).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: The Memory Seat Module (MSM) mounting tabs can be damaged during module installation. Use
care to properly align tabs to prevent binding that could result in tab breakage.
1. Place the Memory Seat Module (MSM) (4) into
position making sure the mounting tabs are properly aligned with the front bracket.
2. Push down on the rear of the MSM (4) snapping
the retaining clips into place in the side brackets.
3. Connect the MSM rear harness connectors (1).
4. Connect the MSM front harness connectors.
5. Install the driver seat cushion/cover (2) (Refer to 23
- BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER INSTALLATION).
7. Using an appropriate scan tool go to the MSM miscellaneous functions and perform the standardization routine.
8. Verify system and vehicle operation.
LX
8E - 277
MODULE-STEERING CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
The Steering Control Module (SCM) is the module
located in the bottom of the Steering Column Control
Module (SCCM), retained by three screws, and is the
mating point for all the switches (remote radio
switches, horn, speed control, steering angle sensor,
tilt/telescopic switch, multi-function switch, clockspring)
located in the SCCM. The SCM is screwed directly to
the bottom of the multi-function switch. All the other
switches are mounted on top of the multi-function
switch.
OPERATION
The Steering Control Module (SCM) communicates via the Local Interconnect Network (LIN) serial data bus. This is
an ultra-low voltage serial data bus that allows the following components to communicate with the Controller Area
Network (CAN) B and C data buses.
Steering Wheel Switches
Horn
Speed Control Switch
Multi-function Switch
Tilt/Telescoping Switch (if equipped)
Steering Angle Sensor (if equipped with Electronic Stability Program (ESP))
Steering Control Module (SCM)
The SCM changes the LIN communication to CAN communication and also stores Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) for the switches within the SCCM.
For removal and installation, disassembly and assembly of the SCCM, refer to the following:
NOTE: For Steering Column Module (SCM) removal and installation, refer to the disassembly and assembly
procedures for the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM).
Removal of SCCM (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL).
Disassembly of SCCM (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE - DISASSEMBLY).
Assembly of SCCM (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE - ASSEMBLY).
Installation of the SCCM (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE INSTALLATION).
The SCM is not serviceable and if found faulty, it must be replaced as a unit.
8E - 278
LX
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION - PCM
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in
the engine compartment. The PCM is referred to as
NGC.
MODES OF OPERATION
As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output
devices. For example, the PCM must calculate different injector pulse width and ignition timing for idle than it does
for wide open throttle (WOT).
The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop.
During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes.
During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM
whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1
part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector
pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance.
The
fuel injection system has the following modes of operation:

Ignition switch ON
Engine start-up (crank)
Engine warm-up
Idle
Cruise
Acceleration
Deceleration
Wide open throttle (WOT)
Ignition switch OFF
The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle
modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed
Loop modes.
IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE

This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur:
The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy.
LX
8E - 279
The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this
input.
Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored.
Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored.
The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds.
The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged.
The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the O2S relays. The O2S sensor input is not used by the
PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation.
ENGINE START-UP MODE

This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged.
The
PCM receives inputs from:

Battery voltage
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Crankshaft position sensor
Intake manifold air temperature sensor
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
Throttle position sensor (TPS)
Starter motor relay
Camshaft position sensor signal
The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal
within approximately 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system.
The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay.
Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection
sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off.
The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor.
ENGINE WARM-UP MODE

This
is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from:
Battery voltage
Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signalauto. trans. only)
Air conditioning select signal (if equipped)
Air conditioning request signal (if equipped)
Based on these inputs the following occurs:

The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing.
The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected
by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat.
When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation.
8E - 280
LX
IDLE MODE
When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs
from:
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Oxygen sensors
Based on these inputs, the following occurs:
Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection
The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also
adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor.
The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance.
The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected
CRUISE MODE
When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives
inputs from:
Battery voltage
Oxygen (O2S) sensors
Based on these inputs, the following occurs:
Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector
pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off.
The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio.
The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coils on and off.
The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected
ACCELERATION MODE
This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a
demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response
to increased throttle opening.
LX
8E - 281
DECELERATION MODE
When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM
receives the following inputs.
Battery voltage
Vehicle speed
If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the
oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the
injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue
injection.
The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coils on and off.
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE

This
is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs.
Battery voltage
During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs:

sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM
ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done
by adjusting injector pulse width.
The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off.
IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE

When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and
fuel pump relay.
5 VOLT SUPPLIES
Two different Powertrain Control Module (PCM) five volt supply circuits are used; primary and secondary.
IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE

This circuit ties the ignition switch to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
POWER GROUNDS
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has 2 main grounds. Both of these grounds are referred to as power
grounds. All of the high-current, noisy, electrical devices are connected to these grounds as well as all of the sensor
returns. The sensor return comes into the sensor return circuit, passes through noise suppression, and is then connected to the power ground.
8E - 282
The
LX
power ground is used to control ground circuits for the following PCM loads:
Generator field winding
Fuel injectors
Ignition coil(s)
Certain relays/solenoids
Certain sensors
SENSOR RETURN
The Sensor Return circuits are internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Sensor Return provides a lownoise ground reference for all engine control system sensors. Refer to Power
Grounds for more information.
OPERATION
OPERATION - PCM
1. Also refer to Modes of Operation.
The PCM operates the fuel system. The PCM is a pre-programmed, triple microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed
control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to
meet changing operating conditions.
The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates
various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs.
The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold
absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed and the brake switch.
The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed,
transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch
switch and brake switch.
Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge
rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation.
NOTE: PCM Inputs:
A/C request
Auto shutdown (ASD) sense
Battery temperature
Battery voltage
Brake switch
J1850 bus circuits
Data link connections for scan tool
Five volts (primary)
Five volts (secondary)
Fuel level
Generator (battery voltage) output
Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position)
Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped)
LX
8E - 283

Oil pressure
Overdrive/override switch
Oxygen sensors
Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only)
Power ground
Sensor return
Signal ground
Speed control multiplexed single wire input
Throttle position sensor
Transmission governor pressure sensor
Transmission temperature sensor
Vehicle speed (from ABS module)
NOTE: PCM Outputs:

A/C clutch relay
Auto shutdown (ASD) relay
J1850 (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and
speed control warn. lamp
Data link connection for scan tool
EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped)
EVAP canister purge solenoid
Fuel injectors
Fuel pump relay
Generator field driver (-)
Generator field driver (+)
Generator lamp (if equipped)
Ignition coil
Natural Vacuum Leak detection Switch
Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through J1850 circuits.
Overdrive indicator lamp (if equipped). Driven through J1850 circuits.
Oxygen sensor heater relays (if equipped).
Radiator cooling fan relay (pulse width modulated)
Speed control source
Speed control vacuum solenoid
Speed control vent solenoid
Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through J1850 circuits.
Transmission convertor clutch circuit
Transmission 34 shift solenoid
Transmission relay
Transmission temperature lamp (if equipped)
Transmission variable force solenoid
5 VOLT SUPPLIES
Primary 5-volt supply:
supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
supplies a reference voltage for the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor.
supplies a reference voltage for the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) sensor.
Secondary 5-volt supply:
8E - 284
LX
supplies the required 5 volt power source to the oil pressure sensor.
supplies the required 5 volt power source for the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (if equipped).
supplies the 5 volt power source to the transmission pressure sensor (if equipped with an RE automatic transmission).
OPERATION - IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE

The ignition circuit sense input tells the PCM the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit.
Battery voltage is also supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the RUN or START
position. This is referred to as the 9ignition sense9 circuit and is used to 9wake up9 the PCM.
LX
8E - 285
NGC POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 1

For the Engine circuit diagram (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS).
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: 1. If this vehicle is equipped with an Electron Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM, or
Throttle Body Assembly have been replaced, use a scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
NOTE: 2. If the PCM or FCM have been replaced, the Pinion Factor MUST be programmed into the FCM.
While programming the Pinion Factor into the FCM the scan tool will send the Pinion Factor information to
the PCM at the same time. Refer to the scan tool for program procedure.
NOTE: 3. If the PCM has been replaced and the correct VIN and mileage have not been programmed, a DTC
will set in the ABS Module, Airbag Module and the SKIM.
NOTE: 4. If the vehicle is equipped with a Sentry Key Immobilizer System, Secret Key data must be updated.
Refer to the Service Information for the PCM, SKIM and the Transponder (ignition key) for programming
information.
5. Inspect the vehicle to ensure that all components related to the repair are properly installed and connected.
6. Inspect the engine oil for fuel contamination. Replace the oil and filter as necessary.
7. Attempt to start the engine.
8. If the No Start condition is still present, refer to the Engine Electrical Diagnostic list and perform the diagnostic
testing as necessary, refer to any Technical Service Bulletins that may apply.
9. Run the engine for one warm-up cycle to verify operation.
10. With the scan tool, confirm that no DTCs are present and that all components are functioning properly.
NOTE: The PCM can detect and compensate for variances in the engine and its components. To learn these
variations, the PCM uses the input of the actual crankshaft rotation pattern and ideal crankshaft rotation
pattern that has been calibrated into the PCM. The PCM then compares the two patterns. The variation
between the two values is the Adaptive Numerator. If the Adaptive Numerator is not learned by the PCM, the
misfire monitor will not run and the Multi-Cylinder Displacement System (MDS) will not operate. Without
MDS operation, the customer will experience decreased fuel economy. If the customer experiences decrease
fuel economy or after any repair use the scan tool to ensure that the Adaptive Numerator is learned.
Are any DTCs or symptoms remaining?
Yes
>> Check for any related Technical Service Bulletins and/or refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure.
No
8E - 286
LX

Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: 1. If this vehicle is equipped with a Electronic Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM,
or Throttle Body Assembly have been replaced, use a scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
NOTE: 2. If the PCM or FCM have been replaced, the Pinion Factor MUST be programmed into the FCM.
While programming the Pinion Factor into the FCM the scan tool will send the Pinion Factor information to
the PCM at the same time. Refer to the scan tool for program procedure.
information.
5. Inspect the vehicle to make sure that all components related to the repair are properly installed and connected.
6. With a scan tool, clear DTCs and Reset Memory all engine values.
7. Run the engine for one warm-up cycle to verify proper operation.
8. Road test the vehicle. Use all accessories that may be related to this repair.
9. With the scan tool, confirm that no DTCs are present and that all components are functioning properly.
10. If this test is being performed after a No Trouble Code test, verify the symptom is no longer present.
Yes
No
LX
8E - 287

Diagnostic Test
1.
1. If this vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM, or Throttle
Body Assembly has been replaced use a scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
NOTE: 2. After completing the Powertrain Verification Test the Transmission Verification Test must be performed.
information.
5. Inspect the vehicle to make sure that all components related to the repair are properly installed and connected.
6. With the scan tool, clear DTCs.
7. Perform generator output test. Refer to the appropriate service information as necessary.
8. Start the engine and set engine speed to 2000 RPM for at least thirty seconds.
9. Cycle the ignition key off and on.
10. With the scan tool, read the DTCs.
Yes
>> Check for any Technical Service Bulletins and/or refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure.
No
8E - 288
LX

Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: If this vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM, or
Throttle Body Assembly have been replaced, use the scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
information.
5. Inspect the vehicle to make sure that all engine components are properly installed and connected.
6. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector and erase all codes.
7. Turn the speed control ON (if equipped, cruise light will be on).
8. Depress and release the SET Switch when the vehicle speed is greater than 35 MPH. The speed control should
engage and hold the selected speed.
9. Press and hold the RESUME/ACCEL Switch. The vehicle speed should increase by at least 2 MPH.
10. Press and hold the COAST switch. The vehicle speed should decrease.
11. Using caution, press and release the brake pedal. The speed control should disengage.
12. Bring the vehicle speed back up to 35 MPH.
13. Press the RESUME/ACCEL switch. The speed control should resume the previously set speed.
14. Hold down the SET switch. The vehicle should decelerate.
15. Make sure vehicle speed is greater than 35 mph and release the SET Switch. The vehicle should adjust and set
a new vehicle speed.
16. Press and release the CANCEL switch. The speed control should disengage.
17. Bring the vehicle speed back up above 35 mph and engage speed control.
18. Turn the Speed Control Off. (Cruise light will be off). The speed control should disengage.
NOTE: OVERSHOOT/UNDERSHOOT FOLLOWING SPEED CONTROL SET.
20. If the vehicle operator repeatedly presses and releases the SET button with their foot off of the accelerator
(referred to as 9lift foot set9), the vehicle may accelerate and exceed the desired set speed by up to 5 mph (8 km/h).
21. It may also decelerate to less than the desired set speed, before finally achieving the desired set speed.
22. The Speed Control System has an adaptive strategy that compensates for vehicle-to-vehicle variations in speed
control cable lengths.
23. When the speed control is set with the vehicles operators foot off of the accelerator pedal, the speed control
thinks there is excessive speed control cable slack and adapts accordingly.
24. If the 9lift foot sets9 are continually used, a speed control overshoot/undershoot condition will develop.
25. To 9unlearn9 the overshoot/undershoot condition, the vehicle operator has to press and release the set button
while maintaining the desired set speed using the accelerator pedal (not decelerating or accelerating).
26. Then turn the cruise control switch to the OFF position (or press the CANCEL button if equipped) after waiting
10 seconds.
27. This procedure must be performed approximately 10-15 times to completely unlearn the overshoot/undershoot
condition.
LX
8E - 289
Did the Speed Control pass the above test?
Yes
No
8E - 290
LX

Diagnostic Test
1.
information.
NOTE: 4. If this vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM,
or Throttle Body Assembly have been replaced, use the scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
NOTE: 5. When replacing an O2 Sensor, the PCM RAM memory must be cleared, either by disconnecting the
PCM C-1 connector or momentarily disconnecting the Battery negative terminal.
6. The NGC learns the characteristics of each O2 heater element and these old values should be cleared when
installing a new O2 sensor. The customer may experience driveability issues if this is not performed.
7. Inspect the vehicle to ensure that all engine components are properly installed and connected. Reassemble and
reconnect components as necessary.
8. Connect the scan tool to the data link connector.
9. Make sure the fuel tank has at least a quarter tank of fuel. Turn off all accessories.
10. If the Catalyst was replaced, with the scan tool go to the Miscellaneous Menu Option 9Catalyst Replaced9 and
press enter.
11. If a Comprehensive Component DTC was repaired, perform steps 12 - 14. If a Major OBDII Monitor DTC was
repaired skip those steps and continue verification.
12. After the ignition has been off for at least 10 seconds, restart the vehicle and run 2 minutes.
13. With the scan tool, monitor the appropriate pre-test enabling conditions until all conditions have been met. Once
the conditions have been met, switch screen to the appropriate OBDII monitor, (Audible beeps when the monitor is
running).
14. If the repaired OBDII trouble code has reset or was seen in the monitor while on the road test, the repair is not
complete. Check for any related technical service bulletins or flash updates and return to Engine Electrical Diagnostic List.
15. If the conditions cannot be duplicated, erase all DTCs with the Scan Tool.
16. If another DTC has set, return to the Engine Electrical Diagnostic List and follow the path specified for that DTC.
Did the OBDII Monitor run successfully and has the Good Trip Counter changed to one or more?
Yes
No
LX
8E - 291

Diagnostic Test
1.
1. Install the Miller Tool #8404 Evaporative Emission Leak Detector (EELD) according to the instructions in the previous DTC table.
2. Set the smoke/air control switch to AIR.
3. Insert the testers AIR supply tip (clear hose) into the appropriate calibration orifice on the testers control panel
(based on DTC leak size).
4. Press the remote smoke/air start button.
5. Position the red flag on the air flow meter so it is aligned with the indicator ball.
6. When the calibration is complete, release the remote button. The EELD flow meter is now calibrated in liters per
minute to the size of leak indicated by the DTC set in the PCM.
7. Install the service port adapter #8404-14 on the vehicles service port.
8. Connect the Air supply hose from the EELD to the vehicle.
9. Press the remote button to activate AIR flow.
NOTE: 10. Larger volume fuel tanks, lower fuel levels or if the vehicle is equipped with a Flow Management
Valve may indicate high flow and will require 4 to 5 minutes to fill.
11. Compare the flow meter indicator ball reading to the red flag.
12. ABOVE the red flag indicates a leak present.
13. BELOW the red flag indicates a sealed system.
NOTE: If this vehicle is equipped with an Electronic Throttle Control system, and the APP Sensors, PCM, or
Throttle Body Assembly have been replaced, use the scan tool to perform the ETC RELEARN function.
15. If the indicator ball shows a leak present, perform the smoke test indicated in the previous test and identify the
leak and repair. Perform this verification test when the repair is complete.
Did the indicator ball indicate the a leak is present?
Yes
>> Repeat the DTC test to identify the leak and repair.
No
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TCM QUICK LEARN - 42RLE Only
The quick learn procedure requires the use of the appropriate scan tool.
This program allows the electronic transmission system to recalibrate itself. This will provide the proper transmission
operation. The quick learn procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed:
Transmission Assembly Replacement
Transmission Control Module Replacement
Solenoid Pack Replacement
Clutch Plate and/or Seal Replacement
Valve Body Replacement or Recondition
To perform the Quick Learn Procedure, the following conditions must be met:
8E - 292
LX
The brakes must be applied

The engine speed must be above 500 rpm
The throttle angle (TPS) must be less than 3 degrees
The shift lever position must stay in PARK until prompted to shift to overdrive
The shift lever position must stay in overdrive after the Shift to Overdrive prompt until the scan tool indicates
the procedure is complete.
The calculated oil temperature must be above 60 and below 200
TCM ADAPTATION - NAG1 Only

The adaptation procedure requires the use of the appropriate scan tool. This program allows the electronic transmission system to re-calibrate itself. This will provide the proper baseline transmission operation. The adaptation
procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed:
Electrohydraulic Unit Replacement or Recondition
1. With the scan tool, reset the Transmission adaptives. Resetting the adaptives will set the adaptives to factory
settings.
NOTE: Perform the Coast Down Adaptations first. The Transmission Temperature must be greater than 60C
(140F) and less than 70C (158F). Failure to stay within these temperature ranges will void the procedure.
2. Drive the vehicle until the transmission temperature is in the specified range.
3. Perform 4 to 5 coast downs from 5th to 4th gear and then 4th to 3rd gear.
NOTE: For Upshift adaptation, the Transmission temperature must be greater than 60C (140F) and less
than 100C (212F). Failure to stay within these temperature ranges will void this procedure.
4. From a stop, moderately accelerate the vehicle and obtain all forward gear ranges while keeping the Engine
RPM below 1800 RPM. Repeat this procedure 4 to 5 times.
5. Obtaining 5th gear may be difficult at 1800 RPM. Allow the transmission to shift into 5th gear at a higher RPM
then lower the RPM to 1800 and perform manual shifts between 4th and 5th gears using the shift lever.
6. The TCM will store the adaptives every 10 minutes. After completion of the adaptation procedure make sure the
vehicle stays running for at least 10 minutes.
7. It is possible to manually store the adaptives under the 10 minute time frame using the scan tool Store Adaptives
procedure.
REMOVAL
USE THE SCAN TOOL TO REPROGRAM THE NEW POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) WITH THE
VEHICLES ORIGINAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) AND THE VEHICLES ORIGINAL MILEAGE. IF THIS
STEP IS NOT DONE, A DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) MAY BE SET.
To avoid possible voltage spike damage to PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors.
LX
2. Remove PCM bracket-to-body mounting bolt.

3. Remove assembly from vehicle.
4. Unlock and disconnect the electrical connectors
from PCM.
5. Remove bracket from PCM.
8E - 293
8E - 294
LX
6. Remove the rubber bumper from PCM.
INSTALLATION
USE THE SCAN TOOL TO REPROGRAM THE NEW POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) WITH THE
VEHICLES ORIGINAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) AND THE VEHICLES ORIGINAL MILEAGE. IF THIS
STEP IS NOT DONE, A DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) MAY BE SET.
1. Install rubber bumper to PCM back.
2. Check pins in electrical connectors for damage.
Repair as necessary.
3. Install electrical connectors to PCM.
LX
8E - 295
4. Install mounting bracket to PCM.
5. Install assembly to body. Install bolt and tighten 9

6. Connect negative cable to battery.

7. Use the scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle
mileage.
8E - 296
LX
MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - 42RLE
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a submodule within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in
the right rear of the engine compartment, just in front
of the windshield.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - NAG1

The electronic control system consists of various components providing inputs to the transmission control
module (TCM). The TCM monitors transmission sensors, shift lever position, and bus messages to determine transmission shift strategy. After shift strategies
are determined, the TCM controls the actuation of
transmission solenoids, which controls the routing of
hydraulic fluid within the transmission, by moving a
sequence of four valves to make a shift occur.
The NAG1 electronic transmission has a fully adaptive
control system. The system performs its functions
based on continuous real-time sensor feedback information. In addition the TCM receives information from
the PCM (engine management) and ABS (chassis systems) controllers over the CAN bus. The CAN bus is a
high-speed communication bus that allows real time
control capability between various controllers. Most
messages are sent every 20 milliseconds. This means
critical information can be shared between the transmission, engine, and ABS controllers. The CAN bus is
a two wire bus with a CAN Bus (+) circuit and a CAN
Bus (-) circuit. These circuits are twisted pairs in the
harness to reduce the potential of radio and noise interference.
The transmission control system automatically adapts to changes in engine performance, vehicle speed, and transmission temperature variations to provide consistent shift quality. The control system ensures that clutch operation
during up-shifting and downshifting is more responsive without increased harshness. The TCM activates the solenoid valves and moves valves in the valve body to achieve the necessary gear changes. The required pressure
level is calculated from the load condition, engine speed. Vehicle speed (from ABS module) and transmission oil
temperature, matched to the torque to be transmitted. The TCM is located under the left side of the instrument panel
LX
8E - 297
for left hand drive vehicles. For right hand drive vehicles, the TCM is located in the mirrored location under the right
side of the instrument panel.
OPERATION
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - 42RLE
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives
information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the
transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the
TCM via the vehicle communication bus.
Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are:
Battery (B+) voltage
Ignition ON voltage
Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+)
Throttle Position Sensor
Crankshaft Position Sensor
Transmission Range Sensor
Pressure Switches
Transmission Temperature Sensor
Input Shaft Speed Sensor
Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Line Pressure Sensor
Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are:
Engine/Body Identification
Manifold Pressure
Target Idle
Torque Reduction Confirmation
Engine Coolant Temperature
Ambient/Battery Temperature
Scan Tool Communication
Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule
and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the
control of various direct and indirect outputs.
Some examples of TCM direct outputs are:
Transmission Control Relay
Solenoids
Torque Reduction Request
Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are:
Transmission Temperature (to PCM)
PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN)
In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions:
Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI)
Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules
System self-diagnostics
Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool)
NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8E - 298
LX
BATTERY FEED
A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain
memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored,
this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set.
CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI)

An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch
Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of
fluid needed to compress a clutch pack.
The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring
the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or
Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to
the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output
Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft
speed information.
By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine
transmission gear position. This is important to the
CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by
monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to
occur.
Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool
and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in
the Monitors display. Gear ratio can be obtained by
dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output
Speed Sensor value.
For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm
and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the
TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio
changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change
following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element.
The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases.
Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following chart identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated:
CLUTCH VOLUMES
Clutch
When Updated
Proper Clutch Volume
L/R
2-1 or 3-1 downshift
45 to 134
2C
3-2 kickdown shift
25 to 85
OD
2-3 upshift
30 to 100
4C
3-4 upshift
30 to 85
UD
4-3 kickdown shift
30 to 100
SHIFT SCHEDULES
As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule
selection is dependent on the following:
Shift lever position
Throttle position
Engine load
Fluid temperature
Software level
LX
8E - 299
As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions.
Schedule
Extreme Cold
Condition
Oil temperature below -16 F
Expected Operation
-Park, Reverse, Neutral and 1st and
3rd gear only in D position, 2nd
gear only in Manual 2 or L
-No EMCC
Super Cold
Oil temperature between -12 F and

10 F
- Delayed 2-3 upshift

- Early 4-3 coastdown shift
- High speed 4-2, 3-2, 2-1 kickdown
shifts are prevented
-Shifts at high throttle openings willl
be early.
- No EMCC
Cold
Oil temperature between 10 F and

36 F
-Shift schedule is the same as

Super Cold except that the 2-3
upshifts are not delayed.
Warm

80 F
- Normal operation (upshift,

kickdowns, and coastdowns)
- No EMCC
Hot

240 F
- Normal operation (upshift,

kickdowns, and coastdowns)
- Normal EMCC operation
Overheat
Oil temperature above 240 F or

engine coolant temperature above
244 F

- 3rd gear FEMCC from 30-48 mph
- 3rd gear PEMCC above 35 mph
- Above 25 mph the torque
converter will not unlock unless the
throttle is closed or if a wide open
throttle 2nd PEMCC to 1 kickdown
is made
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - NAG1

The transmission control module (TCM) determines the current operating conditions of the vehicle and controls the
shifting process for shift comfort and driving situations. It receives this operating data from sensors and broadcast
messages from other modules.
The TCM uses inputs from several sensors that are directly hardwired to the controller and it uses several indirect
inputs that are used to control shifts. This information is used to actuate the proper solenoids in the valve body to
achieve the desired gear.
The shift lever assembly (SLA) has sensors that are monitored by the TCM to calculate shift lever position. The
reverse light switch, an integral part of the SLA, controls the reverse light relay control circuit. The Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) solenoid and the park lockout solenoid (also part of the SLA) are controlled by the TCM.
The PCM and ABS broadcast messages over the controller area network (CAN) bus for use by the TCM. The TCM
uses this information, with other inputs, to determine the transmission operating conditions.
The TCM:
determines the momentary operating conditions of the vehicle.
controls all shift processes.
8E - 300
LX
considers shift comfort and the driving situation.

The TCM controls the solenoid valves for modulating shift pressures and gear changes. Relative to the torque being
transmitted, the required pressures are calculated from load conditions, engine rpm, vehicle speed, and ATF temperature.
The
following functions are contained in the TCM:

Shift Program
Downshift Safety
Torque Converter Lock-Up Clutch.
Adaptation.
The TCM continuously checks for electrical problems, mechanical problems, and some hydraulic problems. When a
problem is sensed, the TCM stores a diagnostic trouble code (DTC). Some of these codes cause the transmission
to go into 9Limp-In9 or 9default9 mode. Some DTCs cause permanent Limp-In and others cause temporary Limp-In.
The NAG1 defaults in the current gear position if a DTC is detected, then after a key cycle the transmission will go
into Limp-in, which is mechanical 2nd gear. Some DTCs may allow the transmission to resume normal operation
(recover) if the detected problem goes away. A permanent Limp-In DTC will recover when the key is cycled, but if
the same DTC is detected for three key cycles the system will not recover and the DTC must be cleared from the
TCM with the appropriate scan tool.
NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the TCM Adaptation Procedure must be performed. (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
TCM SIGNALS
The TCM registers one part of the input signals by direct inputs, the other part by CAN bus. In addition to the direct
control of the actuators, the TCM sends various output signals by CAN bus to other control modules.
Selector Lever Position
A series of sensors in the SLA inform the TCM of the position of the selector lever.
The TCM monitors the SLA for all shift lever positions through five position circuits. The SLA provides a low-current
12-volt signal to the TCM. The TCM compares the on/off signals to programmed combinations to determine the
exact position of the shift lever.
ATF Temperature Sensor
The ATF temperature sensor is a positive temperature co-efficient (PTC) thermistor. It measures the temperature of
the transmission fluid and is a direct input signal for the TCM. The temperature of the ATF has an influence on the
shifttime and resulting shift quality. As the temperature rises, resistance rises, and therefore, the probing voltage is
decreasing. Because of its registration, the shifting process can be optimized in all temperature ranges.
The ATF temperature sensor is wired in series with the park/neutral contact. The temperature signal is transmitted
to the TCM only when the reed contact of the park/neutral contact is closed because the TCM only reads ATF
temperature while in any forward gear, or REVERSE. When the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL, the TCM will
substitute the engine temperature for the ATF temperature.
Starter Interlock
The TCM monitors a contact switch wired in series with the transmission temperature sensor to determine PARK
and NEUTRAL positions. The contact switch is open in PARK and NEUTRAL. The TCM senses transmission temperature as high (switch supply voltage), confirming switch status as open. The TCM then broadcasts a message
over CAN bus to confirm switch status. The PCM receives this information and allows operation of the starter circuit.
N2 and N3 Speed Sensors
The N2 and N3 Input Speed Sensors are two Hall-effect speed sensors that are mounted internally in the transmission and are used by the TCM to calculate the transmissions input speed. Since the input speed cannot be
measured directly, two of the drive elements are measured. Two input speed sensors were required because both
drive elements are not active in all gears.
LX
8E - 301
CAN Bus Indirect Input Signals

A 2.5-volt bias (operating voltage) is present on the CAN bus any time the ignition switch is in the RUN position.
Both the TCM and the ABS apply this bias. On this vehicle, the CAN bus is used for module data exchange only.
The indirect inputs used on the NAG1 electronic control system are:
Wheel Speed Sensors.
Transfer Case Switch Status.
Brake Switch.
Engine RPM.
Engine Temperature.
Cruise Control Status.
Gear Limit Request.
Throttle Position - 0% at idle, 100% at WOT. If open, TCM assumes idle (0% throttle opening).
Odometer Mileage
Maximum Effective Torque.
Engine in Limp-In Mode/Mileage Where DTC Was Set.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK (BTSI)

The BTSI solenoid prevents shifting out of the PARK position until the ignition key is in the RUN position and the
brake pedal is pressed. The TCM controls the ground while the ignition switch supplies power to the BTSI solenoid.
The PCM monitors the brake switch and broadcasts brake switch status messages over the CAN C bus. If the park
brake is depressed and there is power (Run/Start) to SLA, the BTSI solenoid deactivates. The TCM monitors this for
the SLA because the SLA does not communicate on the CAN bus.
SHIFT SCHEDULES
The basic shift schedule includes up and downshifts for all five gears. The TCM adapts the shift program according
to driving style, accelerator pedal position and deviation of vehicle speed. Influencing factors are:
Road Conditions.
Incline, Decline and Altitude.
Trailer Operation, Loading.
Engine Coolant Temperature.
Cruise Control Operation.
Sporty Driving Style.
Low and High ATF Temperature.
Upshift To:
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
Activated By
Solenoid:
1-2/4-5
2-3
3-4
1-2/4-5
Shift Point (at

35.2% of throttle)
29 km/h (18 mph)
48 km/h (30 mph)
68 km/h (42 mph)
85 km/h (53 mph)
Downshift From:
5-4
4-3
3-2
2-1
Activated By
Solenoid:
1-2/4-5
3-4
2-3
1-2/4-5
Shift Point
55.7 km/h (34.61

mph)
40.5 km/h (25.17

mph)
24.4 km/h (15.16

mph)
15.1 km/h (9.38

mph)
DOWNSHIFT SAFETY
Selector lever downshifts are not performed if inadmissible high engine rpm is sensed.
8E - 302
LX
ADAPTATION
To equalize tolerances and wear, an automatic adaptation takes place for:
Shift Time.
Clutch Filling Time.
Clutch Filling Pressure.
Torque Converter Lock-Up Control.
Adaptation data may be stored permanently and to some extent, can be diagnosed.
Driving Style Adaptation
The shift point is modified in steps based on the information from the inputs. The control module looks at inputs
such as:
vehicle acceleration and deceleration (calculated by the TCM).
rate of change as well as the position of the throttle pedal (fuel injection information from the PCM).
lateral acceleration (calculated by the TCM).
gear change frequency (how often the shift occurs).
Based on how aggressive the driver is, the TCM moves up the shift so that the present gear is held a little longer
before the next upshift. If the driving style is still aggressive, the shift point is modified up to ten steps. If the driving
returns to normal, then the shift point modification also returns to the base position.
This adaptation has no memory. The adaptation to driving style is nothing more than a shift point modification meant
to assist an aggressive driver. The shift points are adjusted for the moment and return to base position as soon as
the inputs are controlled in a more normal manner.
CONTROLLER MODES OF OPERATION

Permanent Limp-In Mode
When the TCM determines there is a non-recoverable condition present that does not allow proper transmission
operation, it places the transmission in permanent Limp-In Mode. When the condition occurs the TCM turns off all
solenoids as well as the solenoid supply output circuit. If this occurs while the vehicle is moving, the transmission
remains in the current gear position until the ignition is turned off or the shifter is placed in the 9P9 position. When
the shifter has been placed in 9P,9 the transmission only allows 2nd gear operation. If this occurs while the vehicle
is not moving, the transmission only allows operation in 2nd gear.
Temporary Limp-In Mode
This mode is the same as the permanent Limp-In Mode except if the condition is no longer present, the system
resumes normal operation.
Under Voltage Limp-In Mode
When the TCM detects that system voltage has dropped below 8.5 volts, it disables voltage-dependant diagnostics
and places the transmission in the temporary Limp-In Mode. When the TCM senses that the voltage has risen
above 9.0 volts, normal transmission operation is resumed.
Hardware Error Mode
When the TCM detects a major internal error, the transmission is placed in the permanent Limp-In Mode and
ceases all communication over the CAN bus. When the TCM has entered this mode normal transmission operation
does not resume until all DTCs are cleared from the TCM.
Loss of Drive
If the TCM detects a situation that has resulted or may result in a catastrophic engine or transmission problem, the
transmission is placed in the neutral position. Improper Ratio, Input Sensor Overspeed or Engine Overspeed DTCs
cause the loss of drive.
LX
8E - 303
Controlled Limp-in Mode

When a failure does not require the TCM to shut down the solenoid supply, but the failure is severe enough that the
TCM places the transmission into a predefined gear, there are several shift performance concerns. For instance, if
the transmission is slipping, the controller tries to place the transmission into 3rd gear and maintain 3rd gear for all
forward drive conditions.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TCM QUICK LEARN - 42RLE Only
The quick learn procedure requires the use of the appropriate scan tool.
This program allows the electronic transmission system to recalibrate itself. This will provide the proper transmission
operation. The quick learn procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed:
Solenoid Pack Replacement
Valve Body Replacement or Recondition
To perform the Quick Learn Procedure, the following conditions must be met:
The brakes must be applied
The engine speed must be above 500 rpm
The throttle angle (TPS) must be less than 3 degrees
The shift lever position must stay in PARK until prompted to shift to overdrive
The shift lever position must stay in overdrive after the Shift to Overdrive prompt until the scan tool indicates
the procedure is complete.
The calculated oil temperature must be above 60 and below 200
TCM ADAPTATION - NAG1 Only

The adaptation procedure requires the use of the appropriate scan tool. This program allows the electronic transmission system to re-calibrate itself. This will provide the proper baseline transmission operation. The adaptation
procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed:
Electrohydraulic Unit Replacement or Recondition
1. With the scan tool, reset the Transmission adaptives. Resetting the adaptives will set the adaptives to factory
settings.
NOTE: Perform the Coast Down Adaptations first. The Transmission Temperature must be greater than 60C
(140F) and less than 70C (158F). Failure to stay within these temperature ranges will void the procedure.
2. Drive the vehicle until the transmission temperature is in the specified range.
3. Perform 4 to 5 coast downs from 5th to 4th gear and then 4th to 3rd gear.
NOTE: For Upshift adaptation, the Transmission temperature must be greater than 60C (140F) and less
than 100C (212F). Failure to stay within these temperature ranges will void this procedure.
4. From a stop, moderately accelerate the vehicle and obtain all forward gear ranges while keeping the Engine
RPM below 1800 RPM. Repeat this procedure 4 to 5 times.
5. Obtaining 5th gear may be difficult at 1800 RPM. Allow the transmission to shift into 5th gear at a higher RPM
then lower the RPM to 1800 and perform manual shifts between 4th and 5th gears using the shift lever.
6. The TCM will store the adaptives every 10 minutes. After completion of the adaptation procedure make sure the
vehicle stays running for at least 10 minutes.
8E - 304
LX
7. It is possible to manually store the adaptives under the 10 minute time frame using the scan tool Store Adaptives
procedure.
ENGINE SYSTEMS
LX
8F - 1
ENGINE SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
BATTERY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
BATTERY SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
BATTERY SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
BATTERY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BATTERY RECONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SPECIFICATIONS
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SPECIAL TOOLS
BATTERY SYSTEM SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . 8
BATTERY
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BATTERY CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
USING MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER . . . . . . . 12

OPEN-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
IGNITION-OFF DRAW TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
BATTERY HOLDDOWN
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
BATTERY CABLES
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
BATTERY CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
BATTERY TRAY
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8F - 2
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
This vehicle is equipped with a single 12-volt battery located in the rear floor area near the spare tire. The battery
system for this vehicle covers the following related components:
Battery - The storage battery provides a reliable
means of storing a renewable source of electrical
energy within the vehicle.
Battery Cables - The battery cables connect the
positive and negatively charged battery terminal
posts to the vehicle electrical system.
Battery Holddown - The battery holddown hardware secures the battery in the battery tray.
Battery Retention Strap - The battery retention
strap securely holds the battery in place in the
event of a rear impact collision.
Battery Tray - The battery tray provides a
secure mounting location in the vehicle for the
battery and an anchor point for the battery holddown hardware.
For battery system maintenance schedules (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES - DESCRIPTION). (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/JUMP STARTING - STANDARD PROCEDURE) for the proper jump starting procedure. The battery must be fully-charged before any battery system
diagnosis or testing procedures can be performed.
OPERATION
The battery system is designed to provide a safe, efficient, reliable and mobile means of delivering and storing
electrical energy. This electrical energy is required to operate the engine starting system, as well as many of the
other vehicle accessory systems for limited durations while the engine and/or the charging system are not operating.
The battery system is also designed to provide a reserve of electrical energy to supplement the charging system for
short durations while the engine is running and the electrical current demands of the vehicle exceed the output of
the charging system. In addition to delivering, and storing electrical energy for the vehicle, the battery system serves
as a capacitor and voltage stabilizer for the vehicle electrical system. It absorbs most abnormal or transient voltages
caused by the switching of any of the electrical components or circuits in the vehicle.

BATTERY SYSTEM
The battery, starting, and charging systems in the vehicle operate with one another and must be tested as a complete system. In order for the engine to start and the battery to maintain its charge properly, all of the components
that are used in these systems must perform within specifications. It is important that the battery, starting, and
charging systems be thoroughly tested and inspected any time a battery needs to be charged or replaced. The
cause of abnormal battery discharge, overcharging or early battery failure must be diagnosed and corrected before
a battery is replaced and before a vehicle is returned to service. The service information for these systems has
been separated within this service manual to make it easier to locate the specific information you are seeking. However, when attempting to diagnose any of these systems, it is important that you keep their interdependency in
mind.
The diagnostic procedures used for the battery, starting, and charging systems include the most basic conventional
diagnostic methods, to the more sophisticated On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) built into the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). Use of an induction-type milliampere ammeter, a volt/ohmmeter, a battery charger, a carbon pile rheostat
(load tester) and a 12-volt test lamp may be required. All OBD-sensed systems are monitored by the PCM. Each
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
8F - 3
monitored circuit is assigned a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). The PCM will store a DTC in electronic memory for
any inoperative system it detects. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for the proper charging
system on-board diagnostic test procedures.
MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER

The Micro 420 automotive battery system tester is designed to help the dealership technicians diagnose the cause
of a defective battery. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE) for
directions on using the Micro 420 battery tester.
BATTERY SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
CONDITION
THE BATTERY SEEMS
WEAK OR DEAD WHEN
ATTEMPTING TO START
THE ENGINE.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
1. The electrical system

ignition-off draw is excessive.
1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY
SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE
- IGNITION-OFF DRAW TEST) for the proper test
procedures. Repair the excessive ignition-off
draw, as required.
2. The charging system is

faulty.
2. Determine if the charging system is performing

to specifications. Repair the faulty charging
system, as required.
3. The battery is discharged.
3. Determine the battery state-of-charge using the

Micro 420 battery tester, (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY STANDARD PROCEDURE). Charge the faulty
battery as required.
4. The battery terminal

connections are loose or
corroded.
SYSTEM/CABLES - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING). Clean and tighten the battery terminal
connections, as required.
5. The battery has an

incorrect size or rating for
this vehicle.
5. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM

- SPECIFICATIONS) for the proper size and
rating. Replace an incorrect battery, as required.
6. The battery is faulty.
6. Determine the battery cranking capacity using

the Micro 420 battery tester, (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY STANDARD PROCEDURE). Replace the faulty
battery, as required.
7. The starting system is

faulty.
7. Determine if the starting system is performing

to specifications. Repair the faulty starting
8. The battery is physically

damaged.
8. Inspect the battery for loose terminal posts or a

cracked and leaking case. Replace the damaged
battery, as required.
8F - 4
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
CONDITION
THE BATTERY STATE OF
CHARGE CANNOT BE
MAINTAINED.
THE BATTERY WILL NOT

ACCEPT A CHARGE.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
1. The battery has an

incorrect size or rating for
this vehicle.
1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM

- SPECIFICATIONS) for the proper size and
rating. Replace an incorrect battery, as required.
2. The battery terminal

connections are loose or
corroded.
SYSTEM/CABLES - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING). Clean and tighten the battery terminal
connections, as required.
3. The electrical system

ignition-off draw is excessive.
SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
for the proper test procedures. Repair the faulty
electrical system, as required.
4. Test the battery using the Micro 420 battery

tester, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY
SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD
PROCEDURE). Replace the faulty battery, as
required.
5. The starting system is

faulty.
5. Determine if the starting system is performing

to specifications. Repair the faulty starting
6. The charging system is

faulty.
6. Determine if the charging system is performing

to specifications. Repair the faulty charging
7. Electrical loads exceed the

output of the charging
system.
7. Inspect the vehicle for aftermarket electrical

equipment which might cause excessive electrical
loads.
8. Slow driving or prolonged

idling with high-amperage
draw systems in use.
8. Advise the vehicle operator, as required.
1. Test the battery using the Micro 420 battery

tester, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY
SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD
PROCEDURE). Replace the faulty battery, as
required.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BATTERY RECONNECTION
NOTE: This reconnection procedure is to be performed anytime the battery has been disconnected.
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 5
1. Connect the battery negative cable (2) to the battery post and tighten the clamp nut.
2. Install the rear compartment floor trim panel.
CAUTION: Once the battery has been connected,
review and perform the following information as
applicable.
AUTO UP FRONT WINDOW

If the vehicle is equipped with the auto-up front window feature, once the battery is reconnected the door module
needs to be calibrated. The door module requires calibration anytime the battery or door module has been disconnected for any length of time. To calibrate, perform the following:
1. Turn the Ignition to the Run position.
2. Regardless of current window position, move the driver side front window upward until the window stalls in the
full up position. Allow the window motor to stall for at least 2 seconds before releasing the switch.
3. Move the driver side front window downward until the window stalls in the full down position. Allow the window
motor to stall for at least 2 seconds before releasing the switch.
4. Move the driver side front window upward until the window stalls in the full up position. Allow the window motor
to stall for at least 2 second before releasing the switch.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for the passenger side front window.
6. Verify the windows are properly calibrated by operating the express down and up features on the windows.
Repeat this procedure if the calibration failed. If unable to properly calibrate after the second attempt, check the
Drivers Door Module (DDM) and Passengers Door Module (PDM) for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
correct as required.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)

If the vehicle is equipped with ESP, once the battery is reconnected, the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) needs to be
calibrated. The SAS requires calibration anytime the battery or an ABS (ESP) component has been disconnected for
any length of time. If the SAS is not calibrated following battery reconnection, the ESP/BAS indicator lamp is
illuminated following 5 ignition cycles indicating the need for calibration.
To calibrate, perform the following:
1. Start the engine.
2. Center the steering wheel.
3. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left until the internal stop in the steering gear is met, then turn the
wheel all the way to the right until the opposite internal stop in the steering gear is met.
4. Center the steering wheel.
5. Stop the engine.
8F - 6
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
CLEANING
The following information details the recommended cleaning procedures for the battery and related components. In
addition to the maintenance schedules found in this service manual, (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES - DESCRIPTION) it is recommended that these procedures be performed any time
the battery or related components must be removed for vehicle service.
1. Clean the battery cable terminal clamps (2) of all
corrosion. Remove any corrosion using a wire
brush or cleaning tool (1), and a sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) and warm water cleaning
solution.
2. Clean the battery tray and battery holddown hardware using a stiff bristle parts cleaning brush and a sodium
bicarbonate (baking soda) and warm water cleaning solution.
3. If the removed battery is to be reinstalled, clean the
outside of the battery case and the top cover (3)
with a sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) and warm
water cleaning solution (2) using a stiff bristle parts
cleaning brush (1) to remove any acid film. Rinse
the battery with clean water. Ensure that the cleaning solution does not enter the battery cells through
the vent holes. If the battery is being replaced,
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS) for the factory-installed battery
specifications. Confirm that the replacement battery
is the correct size and has the correct ratings for
the vehicle.
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 7
4. Clean any corrosion from the battery terminals with

a wire brush or terminal cleaner (1), and a sodium
bicarbonate (baking soda) and warm water cleaning solution.
INSPECTION
The following information details the recommended inspection procedures for the battery and related components. In
addition to the maintenance schedules, (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES DESCRIPTION), it is recommended that these procedures be performed any time the battery or related components
are removed for vehicle service.
1. Inspect the battery cable terminals for damage. Replace any battery cable that has a damaged or deformed
terminal.
2. Inspect the battery tray and battery holddown hardware for damage. Replace any damaged parts.
3. Inspect the battery case for cracks or other damage that could result in electrolyte leaks. Also, check the battery
terminals for looseness. Batteries with damaged cases or loose terminals must be replaced.
4. Inspect the battery built-in test indicator sight glass (if equipped) for an indication of the battery condition. If the
battery is discharged, charge as required, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - BATTERY CHARGING).
SPECIFICATIONS
BATTERY
The battery Group Size number, the Cold Cranking Amperage (CCA) rating, and the Reserve Capacity (RC) rating
or Ampere-Hours (AH) rating can be found on the original equipment battery label. Be certain that a replacement
battery has the correct Group Size number, as well as CCA, and RC or AH ratings that equal or exceed the original
equipment specification for the vehicle being serviced. Battery sizes and ratings are discussed in more detail below.
Group Size - The outside dimensions and terminal placement of the battery conform to standards established
by the Battery Council International (BCI). Each battery is assigned a BCI Group Size number to help identify
a correctly-sized replacement.
Cold Cranking Amperage - The Cold Cranking Amperage (CCA) rating specifies how much current (in
amperes) the battery can deliver for thirty seconds at -18 C (0 F). Terminal voltage must not fall below 7.2
volts during or after the thirty second discharge period. The CCA required is generally higher as engine displacement increases, depending also upon the starter current draw requirements.
Reserve Capacity - The Reserve Capacity (RC) rating specifies the time (in minutes) it takes for battery terminal voltage to fall below 10.5 volts, at a discharge rate of 25 amperes. RC is determined with the battery
fully-charged at 26.7 C (80 F). This rating estimates how long the battery might last after a charging system
failure, under minimum electrical load.
8F - 8
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
Ampere-Hours - The Ampere-Hours (AH) rating specifies the current (in amperes) that a battery can deliver
steadily for twenty hours, with the voltage in the battery not falling below 10.5 volts. This rating is also sometimes identified as the twenty-hour discharge rating.
BATTERY CLASSIFICATIONS & RATINGS
Part Number
BCI Group Size

Classification
Cold Cranking
Amperage
Reserve
Capacity
Ampere Hours
Load Test
Amperage
04608719AC
H7
730
140 Minutes
72
250
SPECIAL TOOLS
BATTERY SYSTEM SPECIAL TOOLS
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 9
BATTERY
DESCRIPTION
This vehicle is equipped with a single, 12-volt, maintenance-free battery located in the rear floor area near
the spare tire. The battery is comprised of the following components:
Positive Post (1)
Vent (2)
Cell Cap (3)
Vent (4)
Cell Cap (5)
Vent (6)
Negative Post (7)
Indicator Eye (8) if equipped
Electrolyte Level (9)
Plate Groups (10)
Maintenance Free Battery assembly (11)
This battery is designed to provide a safe, efficient and reliable means of storing electrical energy in a chemical
form. This means of energy storage allows the battery to produce the electrical energy required to operate the
engine starting system, as well as to operate many of the other vehicle accessory systems for limited durations
while the engine and/or the charging system are not operating. The battery is made up of six individual cells that are
connected in series. Each cell contains positively charged plate groups that are connected with lead straps to the
positive terminal post, and negatively charged plate groups that are connected with lead straps to the negative terminal post. Each plate consists of a stiff mesh framework or grid coated with lead dioxide (positive plate) or sponge
lead (negative plate). Insulators or plate separators made of a non-conductive material are inserted between the
positive and negative plates to prevent them from contacting or shorting against one another. These dissimilar metal
plates are submerged in a sulfuric acid and water solution called an electrolyte.
The battery Group Size number, the Cold Cranking Amperage (CCA) rating, and the Reserve Capacity (RC) rating
or Ampere-Hours (AH) rating can be found on the original equipment battery label. Be certain that a replacement
battery has the correct Group Size number, as well as CCA, and RC or AH ratings that equal or exceed the original
equipment specification for the vehicle being serviced. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - SPECIFICATIONS) for the proper factory-installed battery specifications.
OPERATION
The battery is designed to store electrical energy in a chemical form. When an electrical load is applied to the
terminals of the battery, an electrochemical reaction occurs. This reaction causes the battery to discharge electrical
current from its terminals. As the battery discharges, a gradual chemical change takes place within each cell. The
sulfuric acid in the electrolyte combines with the plate materials, causing both plates to slowly change to lead sulfate. At the same time, oxygen from the positive plate material combines with hydrogen from the sulfuric acid, causing the electrolyte to become mainly water. The chemical changes within the battery are caused by the movement
of excess or free electrons between the positive and negative plate groups. This movement of electrons produces
a flow of electrical current through the load device attached to the battery terminals.
As the plate materials become more similar chemically, and the electrolyte becomes less acid, the voltage potential
of each cell is reduced. However, by charging the battery with a voltage higher than that of the battery itself, the
battery discharging process is reversed. Charging the battery gradually changes the sulfated lead plates back into
sponge lead and lead dioxide, and the water back into sulfuric acid. This action restores the difference in the electron charges deposited on the plates, and the voltage potential of the battery cells. For a battery to remain useful,
it must be able to produce high-amperage current over an extended period. A battery must also be able to accept
a charge, so that its voltage potential may be restored.
The battery is vented to release excess hydrogen gas that is created when the battery is being charged or discharged. However, even with these vents, hydrogen gas can collect in or around the battery. If hydrogen gas is
exposed to flame or sparks, it may ignite. If the electrolyte level is low, the battery may arc internally and explode.
If the battery cell caps cannot be removed, the battery must be replaced if the electrolyte level becomes low.
8F - 10
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX

BATTERY
The battery must be completely charged and the terminals should be properly cleaned and inspected before diagnostic procedures are performed. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - CLEANING) and (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - INSPECTION) for the proper battery cleaning and inspection procedures. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - BATTERY CHARGING) for the
proper battery charging procedures.
MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER

The Micro 420 automotive battery tester is designed to help the dealership technicians diagnose the cause of an
inoperative battery. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - USING
MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER) for instructions on the use of the Micro 420 battery tester.
WARNING: IF THE BATTERY SHOWS SIGNS OF FREEZING, LEAKING OR LOOSE POSTS, DO NOT TEST,
ASSIST-BOOST, OR CHARGE. THE BATTERY MAY ARC INTERNALLY AND EXPLODE. PERSONAL INJURY
AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
WARNING: EXPLOSIVE HYDROGEN GAS FORMS IN AND AROUND THE BATTERY. DO NOT SMOKE, USE
FLAME, OR CREATE SPARKS NEAR THE BATTERY. PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY
RESULT.
WARNING: THE BATTERY CONTAINS SULFURIC ACID, WHICH IS POISONOUS AND CAUSTIC. AVOID CONTACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES, OR CLOTHING. IN THE EVENT OF CONTACT, FLUSH WITH WATER AND CALL
A PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
A battery that will not accept a charge is inoperative, and must be replaced. Further testing is not required. A fullycharged battery must be load tested to determine its cranking capacity. A battery that is fully-charged, but does not
pass the load test, is inoperative and must be replaced.
NOTE: Completely discharged batteries may take several hours to accept a charge. Refer to Standard Procedures for the proper battery charging procedures.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
BATTERY CHARGING
Battery charging is the means by which the battery can be restored to its full voltage potential. A battery is fullycharged when:
Micro 420 electrical system tester indicates battery is OK.
All of the battery cells are gassing freely during battery charging.
Open-circuit voltage of the battery is 12.65 volts or above.
WARNING: NEVER EXCEED TWENTY AMPERES WHEN CHARGING A COLD (-1 C [30 F] OR LOWER) BATTERY. THE BATTERY MAY ARC INTERNALLY AND EXPLODE. PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
WARNING: IF THE BATTERY SHOWS SIGNS OF FREEZING, LEAKING, LOOSE POSTS, DO NOT TEST,
ASSIST-BOOST, OR CHARGE. THE BATTERY MAY ARC INTERNALLY AND EXPLODE. PERSONAL INJURY
AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
WARNING: EXPLOSIVE HYDROGEN GAS FORMS IN AND AROUND THE BATTERY. DO NOT SMOKE, USE
FLAME, OR CREATE SPARKS NEAR THE BATTERY. PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY
RESULT.
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
8F - 11
WARNING: THE BATTERY CONTAINS SULFURIC ACID, WHICH IS POISONOUS AND CAUSTIC. AVOID CONTACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES, OR CLOTHING. IN THE EVENT OF CONTACT, FLUSH WITH WATER AND CALL
A PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
WARNING: IF THE BATTERY IS EQUIPPED WITH REMOVABLE CELL CAPS, BE CERTAIN THAT EACH OF
THE CELL CAPS IS IN PLACE AND TIGHT BEFORE THE BATTERY IS RETURNED TO SERVICE. PERSONAL
INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY RESULT FROM LOOSE OR MISSING CELL CAPS.
CAUTION: Always disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable before charging a battery. Do not
exceed sixteen volts while charging a battery. Damage to the vehicle electrical system components may
result.
CAUTION: Battery electrolyte will bubble inside the battery case during normal battery charging. Electrolyte
boiling or being discharged from the battery vents indicates a battery overcharging condition. Immediately
reduce the charging rate or turn off the charger to evaluate the battery condition. Damage to the battery
may result from overcharging.
CAUTION: The battery should not be hot to the touch. If the battery feels hot to the touch, turn off the
charger and let the battery cool before continuing the charging operation. Damage to the battery may result.
After the battery has been charged to 12.65 volts or greater, perform a load test to determine the battery cranking
capacity, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - USING MICRO
420 BATTERY TESTER) for the proper battery load test procedures. If the battery will endure a load test, return the
battery to service. If the battery will not endure a load test, it is inoperative and must be replaced.
Clean and inspect the battery hold downs, tray, terminals, posts, and top before completing battery service. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - CLEANING) and (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM INSPECTION) for the proper battery system cleaning and inspection procedures.
CHARGING A COMPLETELY DISCHARGED BATTERY

The following procedure should be used to recharge a completely discharged battery. Unless this procedure is properly followed, a good battery may be needlessly replaced.
1. Measure the voltage at the battery posts with a voltmeter, accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt. If the reading is below ten
volts, the battery charging current will be low. It could take some time before the battery accepts a current
greater than a few milliamperes. Such low current may not be detectable on the ammeters built into many battery
chargers.
2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Connect the battery charger leads. Some battery chargers are
equipped with polarity-sensing circuitry. This circuitry protects the battery charger and the battery from being
damaged if they are improperly connected. If the battery state-of-charge is too low for the polarity-sensing circuitry to detect, the battery charger will not operate. This makes it appear that the battery will not accept charging current. See the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the battery charger for details on how to bypass
the polarity-sensing circuitry.
3. Battery chargers vary in the amount of voltage and current they provide. The amount of time required for a battery to accept measurable charging current at various voltages is shown in the Charge Rate Table. If the charging current is still not measurable at the end of the charging time, the battery is inoperative and must be
replaced. If the charging current is measurable during the charging time, the battery may be good and the charging should be completed in the normal manner.
CHARGE RATE TABLE
Voltage
Hours
16.0 volts maximum
up to 4 hours
14.0 to 15.9 volts
up to 8 hours
13.9 volts or less
up to 16 hours
8F - 12
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
CHARGING TIME REQUIRED

The time required to charge a battery will vary, depending upon the following factors:
Battery Capacity - A completely discharged heavy-duty battery requires twice the charging time of a small
capacity battery.
Temperature - A longer time will be needed to charge a battery at -18 C (0 F) than at 27 C (80 F). When
a fast battery charger is connected to a cold battery, the current accepted by the battery will be very low at
first. As the battery warms, it will accept a higher charging current rate (amperage).
Charger Capacity - A battery charger that supplies only five amperes will require a longer charging time. A
battery charger that supplies twenty amperes or more will require a shorter charging time.
State-Of-Charge - A completely discharged battery requires more charging time than a partially discharged
battery. Electrolyte is nearly pure water in a completely discharged battery. At first, the charging current
(amperage) will be low. As the battery charges, the specific gravity of the electrolyte will gradually rise.
The Battery Charging Time Table gives an indication of the time required to charge a typical battery at room temperature based upon the battery state-of-charge and the charger capacity.
BATTERY CHARGING TIME TABLE
Charging
Amperage
5 Amps
Open Circuit
Voltage
10
Amps
20 Amps
Hours Charging @ 21 C (70 F)
12.25 to 12.49
6 hours
3 hours
1.5
hours
12.00 to 12.24
10 hours
5 hours
2.5
hours
10.00 to 11.99
14 hours
7 hours
3.5
hours
Below 10.00
18 hours
9 hours
4.5
hours
USING MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER

Always use the Micro 420 Instruction Manual that was
supplied with the tester as a reference. If the Instruction Manual is not available the following procedure
can be used:
WARNING: ALWAYS WEAR APPROPRIATE EYE
PROTECTION AND USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN WORKING WITH BATTERIES.
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
8F - 13
BATTERY TESTING
1. If testing the battery OUT-OF-VEHICLE, clean the battery terminals with a wire brush before testing, (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM - CLEANING).
2. If testing the battery IN-THE-VEHICLE, make certain all of the vehicle accessory loads are OFF, including the
ignition. The preferred test position is at the battery terminals. If the battery is not accessible, you may test
using both the positive and negative jumper posts. Select TESTING AT JUMPER POST when connecting to that
location.
3. Connect the tester to the battery or jumper posts, the red clamp to positive (+) and the black clamp to negative
().
NOTE: Multiple batteries connected in parallel must have the ground cable disconnected to perform a battery test. Failure to disconnect may result in false battery test readings.
4. Using the ARROW key select in or out of vehicle testing and press ENTER to make a selection.
5. If not selected, choose the Cold Cranking Amp (CCA) battery rating. Or select the appropriate battery rating for
your area (see menu). The tester will then run its self programmed test of the battery and display the results.
Refer to the test result table noted below.
CAUTION: If REPLACE BATTERY is the result of the test, this may mean a poor connection between the
vehicles cables and battery exists. After disconnecting the vehicles battery cables from the battery, retest
the battery using the OUT-OF-VEHICLE test before replacing.
6. While viewing the battery test result, press the CODE button and the tester will prompt you for the last 4 digits
of the VIN. Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to scroll to the correct character; then press ENTER to select and
move to the next digit. Then press the ENTER button to view the SERVICE CODE. Pressing the CODE button
a second time will return you to the test results.
BATTERY TEST RESULTS
GOOD BATTERY
Return to service
GOOD - RECHARGE
Fully charge battery and return to service
CHARGE & RETEST
Fully charge battery and retest battery
REPLACE BATTERY
Replace the battery and retest complete system
BAD-CELL REPLACE
Replace the battery and retest complete system
NOTE: The SERVICE CODE is required on every warranty claim submitted for battery replacement.
OPEN-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST

A battery open-circuit voltage (no load) test will show the approximate state-of-charge of a battery. This test can be
used in place of the hydrometer test when a hydrometer is not available, or for maintenance-free batteries with
non-removable cell caps.
Before proceeding with this test, completely charge the battery, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/
BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - BATTERY CHARGING).
1. Before measuring the open-circuit voltage, the surface charge must be removed from the battery. Turn on the
headlamps for fifteen seconds, then allow up to five minutes for the battery voltage to stabilize.
2. Disconnect and isolate both battery cables, negative cable first.
8F - 14
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
3. Using a voltmeter connected to the battery posts,

measure the open-circuit voltage.
See the Open-Circuit Voltage Table. This voltage reading will indicate the battery state-of-charge, but will not reveal
its cranking capacity. If a battery has an open-circuit voltage reading of 12.4 volts or greater, it may be load tested
to reveal its cranking capacity, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - USING MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER).
OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TABLE
Open Circuit Voltage
Charge Percentage
11.7 volts or less
0%
12.0 volts
25%
12.3 volts
50%
12.6 volts
75%
12.8 volts or more
100%
IGNITION-OFF DRAW TEST

The term Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with
the ignition switch in the Off position. A normal vehicle electrical system will draw from five to thirty-five milliamperes
(0.005 to 0.035 ampere) with the ignition switch in the Off position, and all non-ignition controlled circuits in proper
working order. Up to thirty-five milliamperes are needed to enable the memory functions for the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM), digital clock, electronically tuned radio, and other modules which may vary with the vehicle equipment.
A vehicle that has not been operated for approximately twenty days, may discharge the battery to an inadequate
level. When a vehicle will not be used for twenty days or more (stored), remove the IOD fuse from the Junction
Block (JB). This will reduce battery discharging.
Excessive IOD can be caused by:
Electrical items left on.
Inoperative or improperly adjusted switches.
Inoperative or shorted electronic modules and components.
An internally shorted generator.
Intermittent shorts in the wiring.
If the IOD is over thirty-five milliamperes, the problem must be found and corrected before replacing a battery. In
most cases, the battery can be charged and returned to service after the excessive IOD condition has been corrected.
1. Verify that all electrical accessories are off. Turn off all lamps, remove the ignition key, and close all doors. If the
vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry system or an electronically tuned radio, allow the electronic timer
function of these systems to automatically shut off (time out). This may take up to three minutes. See the Electronic Module Ignition-Off Draw Table for more information.
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
8F - 15
ELECTRONIC MODULE IGNITION-OFF DRAW (IOD) TABLE

Module
Time Out?
(If Yes, Interval And Wake-Up Input)
IOD
IOD After Time

Out
Radio
No
1 to 3
milliamperes
N/A
Audio Power
Amplifier
No
up to 1
milliampere
N/A
Central Timer Module

(CTM)
No
4.75
milliamperes
(max.)
N/A
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
No
0.95 milliampere
N/A
ElectroMechanical
Instrument Cluster
(EMIC)
No
0.44 milliampere
N/A
Combination Flasher
No
0.08 milliampere
N/A
2. Determine that the underhood lamp is operating properly, then disconnect the lamp wire harness connector or
remove the lamp bulb.
3. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
4. Set an electronic digital multi-meter to its highest amperage scale. Connect the multi-meter between the disconnected battery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery negative terminal post. Make sure that the doors
remain closed so that the illuminated entry system is not activated. The multi-meter amperage reading may
remain high for up to three minutes, or may not give any reading at all while set in the highest amperage scale,
depending upon the electrical equipment in the vehicle. The multi-meter leads must be securely clamped to the
battery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery negative terminal post. If continuity between the battery
negative terminal post and the negative cable terminal clamp is lost during any part of the IOD test, the electronic timer function will be activated and all of the tests will have to be repeated.
5. After about three minutes, the high-amperage IOD reading on the multi-meter should become very low or nonexistent, depending upon the electrical equipment in the vehicle. If the amperage reading remains high, remove
and replace each fuse or circuit breaker in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and then in the Junction Block
(JB), one at a time until the amperage reading becomes very low, or nonexistent. Refer to the appropriate wiring
information for complete PDC and JB fuse, circuit breaker, and circuit identification. This will isolate each circuit
and identify the circuit that is the source of the high-amperage IOD. If the amperage reading remains high after
removing and replacing each fuse and circuit breaker, disconnect the wire harness from the generator. If the
amperage reading now becomes very low or nonexistent, diagnose and repair the Charging System as necessary. After the high-amperage IOD has been corrected, switch the multi-meter to progressively lower amperage
scales and, if necessary, repeat the fuse and circuit breaker remove-and-replace process to identify and correct
all sources of excessive IOD. It is now safe to select the lowest milliampere scale of the multi-meter to check the
low-amperage IOD.
CAUTION: Do not open any doors, or turn on any electrical accessories with the lowest milliampere scale
selected, or the multi-meter may be damaged.
6. Observe the multi-meter reading. The low-amperage IOD should not exceed thirty-five milliamperes (0.035
ampere). If the current draw exceeds thirty-five milliamperes, isolate each circuit using the fuse and circuit
breaker remove-and-replace process in Step 5. The multi-meter reading will drop to within the acceptable limit
when the source of the excessive current draw is disconnected. Repair this circuit as required; whether a wiring
short, incorrect switch adjustment, or an inoperative component is the cause.
8F - 16
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
REMOVAL
WARNING: A SUITABLE PAIR OF HEAVY DUTY RUBBER GLOVES AND SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE
WORN WHEN REMOVING OR SERVICING A BATTERY.
WARNING: REMOVE METALLIC JEWELRY TO AVOID INJURY BY ACCIDENTAL ARCING OF BATTERY CURRENT.
1. Make sure ignition switch is in OFF position and all accessories are turned OFF.
2. Remove the rear compartment floor, trim panel to gain access to the battery.
3. Disconnect the battery negative cable (2) from the
battery terminal.
4. Disconnect the battery positive cable (1) from the
battery terminal.
5. Unlatch the battery retention strap (4).
CAUTION: Use care when disconnecting the battery vent tube from the battery. The vent tube nipple is made of plastic and is easily damaged if not
disconnected properly.
6. Gently disconnect the battery vent tube from the
battery nipple.
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 17
7. Remove the battery hold down clamp and remove

the battery from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: A SUITABLE PAIR OF HEAVY DUTY RUBBER GLOVES AND SAFETY GLASSES SHOULD BE
WORN WHEN REMOVING OR SERVICING A BATTERY.
WARNING: REMOVE METALLIC JEWELRY TO AVOID INJURY BY ACCIDENTAL ARCING OF BATTERY CURRENT.
1. Position the battery in the battery tray.
2. Install the battery hold down clamp and bolt.

Torque the bolt to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.).
8F - 18
BATTERY SYSTEM
CAUTION: Use care when connecting the battery

vent tube to the battery. The vent tube nipple is
made of plastic and is easily damaged if not connected properly.
3. Gently connect the battery vent tube to the battery
nipple.
4. Latch the battery retention strap (4).

5. Connect the battery positive cable (1).
6. Connect the battery negative cable (2).
LX
LX
BATTERY HOLDDOWN
REMOVAL
1. Verify that the ignition switch and all accessories
are OFF.
2. Remove the rear compartment floor, trim panel to
gain access to the battery.
4. Remove the bolt from the battery hold down and
remove the hold down.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the battery hold down clamp and bolt.
Torque the bolt to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.).
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 19
8F - 20
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
BATTERY CABLES
DESCRIPTION
The battery cables (1) and (2) are large gauge,
stranded copper wires sheathed within a heavy plastic
or synthetic rubber insulating jacket. The wire used in
the battery cables combines excellent flexibility and
reliability with high electrical current carrying capacity.
The battery cables feature a stamped brass clamping
type female battery terminal crimped onto one end of
the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. A
square headed pinch-bolt and hex nut are installed at
the open end of the female battery terminal clamp.
Large eyelet type terminals are crimped onto the
opposite end of the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. The battery positive cable wires (1) have a
red insulating jacket to provide visual identification and
feature a larger female battery terminal clamp to allow
connection to the larger battery positive terminal post.
The battery negative cable wires (2) have a black
insulating jacket and a smaller female battery terminal
clamp.
The battery cables cannot be repaired and, if damaged or faulty they must be replaced. Both the battery positive
and negative cables are available for service replacement only as a unit with the battery wire harness, which may
include portions of the wiring circuits for the generator and other components on some models. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for the location of the proper battery cable wire harness diagrams. The wiring information
also includes proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as
well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds.
OPERATION
The battery cables connect the battery terminal posts to the vehicle electrical system. These cables also provide a
path back to the battery for electrical current generated by the charging system for restoring the voltage potential of
the battery. The female battery terminal clamps on the ends of the battery cable wires provide a strong and reliable
connection of the battery cable to the battery terminal posts. The terminal pinch bolts allow the female terminal
clamps to be tightened around the male terminal posts on the top of the battery. The eyelet terminals secured to the
opposite ends of the battery cable wires from the female battery terminal clamps provide secure and reliable connection of the battery cables to the vehicle electrical system.

BATTERY CABLES
A voltage drop test will determine if there is excessive resistance in the battery cable terminal connections or the
battery cable. If excessive resistance is found in the battery cable connections, the connection point should be disassembled, cleaned of all corrosion or foreign material, then reassembled. Following reassembly, check the voltage
drop for the battery cable connection and the battery cable again to confirm repair.
When performing the voltage drop test, it is important to remember that the voltage drop is giving an indication of
the resistance between the two points at which the voltmeter probes are attached. EXAMPLE: When testing the
resistance of the battery positive cable, touch the voltmeter leads to the battery positive cable terminal clamp and to
the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud. If you probe the battery positive
terminal post and the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud, you are reading the combined voltage drop in the battery positive cable terminal clamp-to-terminal post connection and the battery positive cable.
VOLTAGE DROP TEST

The following operation will require a voltmeter accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt. Before performing this test, be certain
that the following procedures are accomplished:
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 21
The battery is fully-charged, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - BATTERY CHARGING) for the proper battery charging procedure.
The battery has successfully passed a load test, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY STANDARD PROCEDURE - USING MICRO 420 BATTERY TESTER) for the proper load test procedure.
Fully engage the parking brake.
If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Park position.
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Neutral position
and block the clutch pedal in the fully depressed position.
Verify that all lamps and accessories are turned off.
To prevent the engine from starting, remove the Automatic Shut Down (ASD) relay. The ASD relay is located
in the Power Distribution Center (PDC), in the engine compartment. See the fuse and relay layout label affixed
to the underside of the PDC cover for ASD relay identification and location.
1. Remove the spare tire cover to gain access to the
battery. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter
to the battery negative terminal post. Connect the
negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery negative cable terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the
voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor
connection between the battery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery negative terminal post.
2. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the

battery positive terminal post. Connect the negative
lead of the voltmeter to the battery positive cable
terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch
in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor connection
8F - 22
BATTERY SYSTEM
between the battery positive cable terminal clamp and the battery positive terminal post.
3. Using a suitable jumper wire, connect the voltmeter
to measure between the battery negative cable terminal clamp and a good clean ground on the
engine block. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in
the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the
reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery negative cable eyelet terminal connection at
the transmission housing. Repeat the test. If the
reading is still above 0.2 volt, perform Step 4 and
Step 5.
4. Connect the voltmeter to measure between the battery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery
negative cable eyelet terminal connection at the
vehicle body. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in
the vehicle body. Repeat the test. If the reading is
still above 0.2 volt, replace the battery rear nega-
LX
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
tive cable, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/CABLES - REMOVAL).

5. Connect the voltmeter to measure between the battery negative cable eyelet terminal connection at
the right front strut tower and the battery negative
cable eyelet terminal connection at the transmission housing. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in
the right front strut tower. Repeat the test. If the
reading is still above 0.2 volt, replace the battery
8F - 23
8F - 24
BATTERY SYSTEM
front negative cable, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/CABLES - REMOVAL).

6. Using a suitable jumper wire, connect the voltmeter
to measure between the battery positive cable terminal clamp and the starter solenoid B(+) terminal
stud. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the
Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading
is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery positive cable eyelet terminal connection at the starter
solenoid B(+) terminal stud. Repeat the test. If the
reading is still above 0.2 volt, perform Step 7 and
Step 8.
7. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield to

gain access to the battery positive cable bulkhead
outside terminal, (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/RF WHEELHOUSE SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL). Connect the voltmeter to measure
between the battery positive cable bulkhead outside terminal and the starter solenoid B(+) terminal
stud. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the
Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading
is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery positive cable bulkhead outside terminal connection.
Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2
volt, replace the battery front positive cable, (Refer
LX
LX
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/CABLES - REMOVAL).
8. Remove the right front carpet to gain access to the
battery positive cable bulkhead inside terminal.
Connect the voltmeter to measure between the battery positive cable terminal clamp and the battery
positive cable bulkhead inside terminal connection.
Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start
position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is
above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery positive cable bulkhead inside terminal connection.
Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2
volt, replace the battery rear positive cable, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/CABLES REMOVAL).
REMOVAL
NEGATIVE - ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off.
battery.
4. Remove the fastener securing the battery negative
cable to the right front strut tower.
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 25
8F - 26
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
5. Raise vehicle on hoist, (Refer to LUBRICATION &

MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
6. Remove the fastener securing the battery negative
cable to the transmission housing.
7. One at a time, remove the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is free
from the vehicle.
8. Remove the battery cable from the engine compartment.
NEGATIVE - REAR COMPARTMENT

battery.
3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable
(3).
4. Remove the fastener (4) securing the battery negative cable to the body.
5. Remove the cable from the vehicle.
LX
POSITIVE - BATTERY TO BULKHEAD
battery.
(3).
4. Disconnect the battery positive cable (1).
5. Remove the Power Distribution Center (PDC) cover

(2).
6. Remove the battery positive cable to rear PDC fastener (3).
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 27
8F - 28
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
7. One at a time, free the battery positive cable from

the routing clips located in the rear compartment
area.
8. Remove the right, front seat, (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT - REMOVAL).

9. Remove the right, rear seat cushion. Pull upward at forward edge of each retainer loop of the rear seat cushion
to disengage retainer loops from cups in floor.
10. Remove the right, front and rear door sill trim panels.
11. Remove the right, B - pillar lower trim panel, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/B-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
12. position carpet aside to gain access to the battery positive cable.
13. One at a time, free the battery positive cable from
the routing clips located in the rear seat area.
14. Position the bulkhead insulator aside to gain

access to the battery positive cable bulkhead fastener.
15. Remove the battery positive cable to bulkhead
fastener.
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 29
16. Remove the battery positive cable from the vehicle making note of the cable routing under the
floor cross members.
POSITIVE - ENGINE COMPARTMENT

battery.
(3).
4. Raise vehicle on hoist, (Refer to LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).

5. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield to gain access to the battery positive cable bulkhead outside
terminal, (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/RF WHEELHOUSE SPLASH SHIELD - REMOVAL).
8F - 30
BATTERY SYSTEM
6. Remove the battery positive cable to bulkhead

fastener.
7. Remove the battery positive cable to starter

fastener.
LX
LX
8. On the 2.7L and 3.5L free the battery positive cable
from the routing clips located at the back of the
engine.
9. On the 5.7L free the battery positive cable from the

routing clip located at the back of the starter.
10. Remove the battery positive cable from the vehicle making note of the cable routing.
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 31
8F - 32
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
INSTALLATION
NEGATIVE - ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Position the battery negative cable in the engine
compartment.
2. Raise vehicle on hoist, (Refer to LUBRICATION &
MAINTENANCE/HOISTING - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
3. Install the fastener securing the battery negative
cable to the transmission housing. Torque the bolt
to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.).
4. One at a time, install the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is installed
exactly where it was in the vehicle.
5. Lower vehicle.
6. Install the fastener securing the battery negative
cable to the right front strut tower.

8. Install the spare tire cover.
LX
NEGATIVE - REAR COMPARTMENT
1. Position the battery negative cable in the vehicle.
2. Install the fastener (4) securing the battery negative
cable to the body.
POSITIVE - BATTERY TO BULKHEAD

1. Position the battery positive cable in the vehicle
taking care to route the cable under the floor cross
members.
2. Position the bulkhead insulator aside to gain

access to the battery positive cable bulkhead fastener.
3. Install the battery positive cable to bulkhead fastener.
4. Position the bulkhead insulator back to the normal
position.
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 33
8F - 34
BATTERY SYSTEM
LX
1. One at a time, secure the battery positive cable to

the routing clips located in the rear seat area.
2. One at a time, secure the battery positive cable to

the routing clips located in the rear compartment
area.
3. Position the carpet back to the normal position.

4. Install the right, B - pillar lower trim panel, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/B-PILLAR TRIM - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the right, front and rear door sill trim panels.
6. Install the right, rear seat cushion. Engage retainer loops into cup on floor kick up. Push downward at forward
edge at each retainer loop of the rear seat cushion to engage retainers.
7. Install the right, front seat, (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT - INSTALLATION).
LX
8. Install the battery positive cable to rear Power Distribution Center (PDC) fastener (3).
9. Install the PDC cover (5).

10. Connect the battery positive cable (1).
POSITIVE - ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Position the battery positive cable in the engine
compartment.
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 35
8F - 36
BATTERY SYSTEM
2. On the 2.7L and 3.5L secure the battery positive

cable to the routing clips located at the back of the
engine.
3. On the 5.7L secure the battery positive cable to the

routing clip located at the back of the starter.
LX
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
8F - 37
4. Install the battery positive cable to starter fastener.
5. Install the battery positive cable to bulkhead

fastener.
6. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield, (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/RF WHEELHOUSE SPLASH
SHIELD - INSTALLATION).
7. Lower vehicle.
8F - 38
BATTERY SYSTEM

LX
LX
BATTERY SYSTEM
BATTERY TRAY
REMOVAL
1. Remove the battery, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - REMOVAL).
2. Using a small flat bladed tool, gently release the
two mounting tabs that secure the Power Distribution Center (PDC) to the battery tray. Position the
PDC aside.
3. Remove the battery tray mounting fasteners and

remove the battery tray from the vehicle.
8F - 39
8F - 40
BATTERY SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
1. Position the battery tray in the vehicle and install
the mounting fasteners.
2. Position the Power Distribution Center (PDC) onto

the battery tray mounting tabs. Gently apply downward pressure on the PDC until it snaps into place.
3. Install the battery, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - INSTALLATION).
LX
CHARGING
LX
8F - 41
CHARGING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
CHARGING
DESCRIPTION - CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 42
OPERATION - CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
GENERATOR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
REMOVAL
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
INSTALLATION
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8F - 42
CHARGING
LX
CHARGING
DESCRIPTION - CHARGING SYSTEM
The
charging system consists of:

Generator
Decoupler Pulley (If equipped)
Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) circuitry within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Ignition switch (refer to the Ignition System section for information)
Battery (refer to the Battery section for information)
Ambient Air Temperature (If equipped)
Inlet Air Temperature (calculated battery temperature)(If equipped)
Voltmeter (refer to the Instrument Cluster section for information if equipped)
Wiring harness and connections (refer to the Wiring section for information)
Accessory drive belt (refer to the Cooling section for more information)
Battery Temperature sensor (if equipped)
OPERATION - CHARGING SYSTEM

The charging system is turned on and off with the ignition switch. The system is on when the engine is running and
the ASD relay is energized. The ASD relay is energized when the PCM grounds the ASD control circuit. This voltage
is connected through the PCM or IPM (intelligent power module) (if equipped) and supplied to one of the generator
field terminals (Gen. Source +) at the back of the generator.
The generator is driven by the engine through a serpentine belt and pulley or decoupler pulley arrangement.
The amount of DC current produced by the generator is controlled by the EVR (field control) circuitry contained
within the PCM. This circuitry is connected in series with the second rotor field terminal and ground.
An Ambient air temperature sensor is mounted on the bumper used to calculate the temperature near the battery.
This temperature data, along with data from monitored line voltage (battery voltage sense circuit), is used by the
PCM to vary the battery charging rate. This is done by cycling the feed path to control the strength of the rotor
magnetic field. The PCM then compensates and regulates generator current output accordingly to maintain system
voltage at the targeted system voltage based on battery temperature.
All vehicles are equipped with On-Board Diagnostics (OBD). All OBD-sensed systems, including EVR (field control)
circuitry, are monitored by the PCM. Each monitored circuit is assigned a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). The PCM
will store a DTC in electronic memory for certain failures it detects and illuminate the (MIL) lamp. Refer to On-Board
Diagnostics in the Electronic Control Modules (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - DESCRIPTION) section for more DTC information.
The Charging system Battery light indicates problems with the charging system (voltage too high/low, generator
failure, etc.). If an extreme condition is indicated, the lamp will be illuminated. The signal to activate the lamp is sent
via the PCI bus circuits. The lamp is located on the instrument panel. Refer to the Instrument Cluster section for
additional information.
The PCM uses the inlet air temperature sensor or ambient temperature sensor to control the charge system voltage.
This temperature, along with data from monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM to vary the battery charging rate.
The system voltage is higher at cold temperatures and is gradually reduced as the calculated battery temperature
increases.
The ambient temperature sensor is used to control the battery voltage based upon ambient temperature (approximation of battery temperature). The PCM maintains the optimal output of the generator by monitoring battery voltage and controlling it to a range of 13.5 - 14.7 volts based on battery temperature.
CHARGING
LX
8F - 43

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors critical input and output circuits of the charging system, making sure
they are operational. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is assigned to each input and output circuit monitored by the
OBD system. Some circuits are checked continuously and some are checked only under certain conditions.
If the OBD system senses that a monitored circuit is bad, it will put a DTC into electronic memory. The DTC will stay
in electronic memory as long as the circuit continues to be bad. The PCM is programmed to clear the memory after
40 good trip if the problem does not occur again.
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
A DTC description can be read using the DRBIIIT scan tool. Refer to the appropriate Powertrain Diagnostic Procedures manual for information.
A DTC does not identify which component in a circuit is bad. Thus, a DTC should be treated as a symptom, not as
the cause for the problem. In some cases, because of the design of the diagnostic test procedure, a DTC can be
the reason for another DTC to be set. Therefore, it is important that the test procedures be followed in sequence,
to understand what caused a DTC to be set.
ERASING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
The DRBIIIT Scan Tool must be used to erase a DTC.
The
following procedures may be used to diagnose the charging system if:

the check gauges lamp or battery lamp is illuminated with the engine running
the voltmeter (if equipped) does not register properly
an undercharged or overcharged battery condition occurs.
Remember that an undercharged battery is often caused by:

accessories being left on with the engine not running
a faulty or improperly adjusted switch that allows a lamp to stay on. Refer to Ignition-Off Draw Test (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM/BATTERY - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
loose generator belt.
INSPECTION
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors critical input and output circuits of the charging system, making sure
they are operational. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is assigned to each input and output circuit monitored by the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system. Some charging system circuits are checked continuously, and some are
checked only under certain conditions.
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Codes in; Powertrain Diagnostic manual for more DTC information. This will include a
complete list of DTCs including DTCs for the charging system.
To perform a complete test of the charging system, refer to the appropriate Powertrain Diagnostic Procedures service manual and the DRBIIIT scan tool. Perform the following inspections before attaching the scan tool.
1. Inspect the battery condition. Refer to the Battery section (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/BATTERY SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for procedures.
2. Inspect condition of battery cable terminals, battery posts, connections at engine block, starter solenoid and
relay. They should be clean and tight. Repair as required.
3. Inspect all fuses in both the fuseblock and Power Distribution Center (PDC) or IPM (if equipped) for tightness in
receptacles. They should be properly installed and tight. Repair or replace as required.
4. Inspect generator mounting bolts for tightness. Replace or tighten bolts if required. Refer to the Generator
Removal/Installation section of this group for torque specifications (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHARGING SPECIFICATIONS).
5. Inspect generator drive belt condition and tension. Tighten or replace belt as required. Refer to Belt Tension
Specifications (Refer to 7 - COOLING/ACCESSORY DRIVE - SPECIFICATIONS).
6. Inspect decoupler pulley (if equipped). Ensure decoupler pulley is driving the alternator rotor.
7. Inspect automatic belt tensioner (if equipped). Refer to the Cooling System for more information.
8F - 44
CHARGING
LX
8. Inspect generator electrical connections at generator field, battery output, and ground terminal (if equipped). Also
check generator ground wire connection at engine (if equipped). They should all be clean and tight. Repair as
required.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
Generator Mounting Bolts

- 2.7L
65
48

- 3.5L
65
48

- 5.7L
65
48
Generator Support Bracket

Bolt/Nuts - 5.7L
41
30
13
115
Generator B+ Output
Cable Terminal Nut
LX
CHARGING
8F - 45
GENERATOR
DESCRIPTION
The generator is belt-driven by the engine. It is serviced only as a complete assembly. If the generator fails for any
reason, the entire assembly must be replaced. The generator produces DC voltage.
OPERATION
As the energized rotor begins to rotate within the generator, the spinning magnetic field induces a current into the
windings of the stator coil.
The Y type stator winding connections deliver the induced AC current to 6 positive and 6 negative diodes for rectification. From the diodes, rectified DC current is delivered to the vehicles electrical system through the generator,
battery, and ground terminals.
Noise emitting from the generator may be caused by:
Worn, loose or defective bearings
Loose or defective drive pulley
Incorrect, worn, damaged or misadjusted drive belt
Loose mounting bolts
Misaligned drive pulley
Defective stator or diode
Damaged internal fins
REMOVAL
2.7L
2. Remove generator drive belt. Refer to the Cooling
System section.
3. Disconnect generator field circuit plug.

4. Remove B+ terminal nut and wire.
8F - 46
CHARGING
5. Remove 2 lower mounting bolts.
6. Remove upper bolt.
7. Remove generator.
LX
LX
3.0L DIESEL
2. Raise vehicle and support.
3. Remove front belly pan.
4. Remove middle belly pan.

5. Remove rear belly pan.
CHARGING
8F - 47
8F - 48
CHARGING
6. Remove side covers.
7. Remove sway bar heat shields.
8. Remove sway bar brackets.
LX
LX
9. Swing sway bar down and out of the way.
10. Clamp front heater hose.
11. Clamp rear heater hose.
CHARGING
8F - 49
8F - 50
CHARGING
12. Disconnect heater tube connection. There will be

some coolant loss.
13. Support engine.

14. Remove heat shield from motor mount.
LX
LX
15. Remove lower engine mount bolts.
16. Remove upper engine mount bolts.
17. Raise engine and remove motor mount.
CHARGING
8F - 51
8F - 52
CHARGING
18. Disconnect fuel line bracket from engine mount

bracket.
19. Remove engine mount bracket from vehicle. Fuel

line bracket mounting hole (1), engine mount
holes (2), Bracket mounting holes (3).
20. Lower engine.

21. Disconnect electrical connectors from generator.
LX
LX
22. Loosen upper mounting bolts.
23. Loosen lower mounting bolts.
24. Relocate heater tube.
25. Remove generator from vehicle.
3.5L
2. Remove generator drive belt. Refer to the Cooling System section.
CHARGING
8F - 53
8F - 54
CHARGING
3. Remove bracket bolts.

4. Remove upper mounting bolt.

6. Remove middle splash pan.
7. Disconnect generator field circuit plug.
8. Remove B+ terminal nut and wire.
LX
LX
CHARGING
8F - 55
9. Remove lower mounting bolts.
10. Remove generator.
6.1L
WARNING: DISCONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE FROM BATTERY BEFORE REMOVING BATTERY OUTPUT WIRE
(B+ WIRE) FROM GENERATOR. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE TO ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery.
8F - 56
CHARGING
3. A heat shield (1) is used over the right engine

mount (3). Remove two heat shield mounting bolts
(2). The heat shield must be removed to gain
access to generator support bracket nut (refer to
following step).
4. Loosen, but do not remove generator support

bracket nut (4).
5. Remove bolt (3).
6. Unsnap plastic insulator cap from B+ output terminal.
7. Remove B+ terminal mounting nut at rear of generator. Disconnect terminal from generator.
8. Disconnect field wire connector at rear of generator
by pushing on connector tab.
9. Lower vehicle.
10. Remove generator drive belt. Refer to 7, Cooling
System for procedure.
11. Partially drain some engine coolant and remove

upper radiator hose.
12. Remove two generator mounting bolts (1).
13. Remove generator (2) from vehicle.
LX
LX
CHARGING
8F - 57
5.7L
WARNING: DISCONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE FROM BATTERY BEFORE REMOVING BATTERY OUTPUT WIRE
(B+ WIRE) FROM GENERATOR. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE TO ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Disconnect negative battery cable at battery.

Remove generator drive belt. Refer to 7, Cooling System for procedure.
Raise and support vehicle.
Unsnap plastic insulator cap from B+ output terminal.
Remove B+ terminal mounting nut at rear of generator. Disconnect terminal from generator.
Disconnect field wire connector at rear of generator by pushing on connector tab.
Remove generator support bracket nut (4) and bolt
(3). Remove support bracket (1).
8. Remove 2 generator mounting bolts (1).

9. Remove generator (2) from vehicle.
8F - 58
CHARGING
INSTALLATION
2.7L
1. Install generator.
2. Install upper bolt mounting bolt.
LX
LX
3. Install 2 lower mounting bolts.
4. Tighten bolts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.).
5. Install B+ terminal nut and wire. Tighten nut to 13

Nm (115 in. lbs.).
6. Connect generator field circuit plug.
7. Install generator drive belt. Refer to the Cooling
System section.
CHARGING
8F - 59
8F - 60
CHARGING
3.0L DIESEL
1. Install the 2 upper bolts into generator. Install generator to vehicle.
2. Hand start the 2 upper bolts.

3. Start the 2 lower bolts.
4. Torque bolts to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
LX
LX
5. Connect the electrical connectors.
6. Install the engine mount bracket to engine.

7. Torque bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.).
8. Install fuel line bracket and tighten bolt.
CHARGING
8F - 61
8F - 62
CHARGING
9. Loose install engine mount.
10. Hand start engine mount upper bolts.
11. Lower engine.

12. Install lower engine mount bolts. Torque bolts to
50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
LX
LX
13. Install engine mount heat shield and tighten bolt.
14. Connect heater tube and start tube nut.
15. Tighten tube nut.
CHARGING
8F - 63
8F - 64
CHARGING
16. Release rear heater tube clamp.
17. Release front heater tube clamp.
18. Swing sway bar up and into place.
LX
LX
19. Install mounting brackets and tighten bolts to 60
Nm (44 ft. lbs.).
20. Install sway bar mounting bracket heat shields.
21. Install drive belt.
CHARGING
8F - 65
8F - 66
CHARGING
22. Install rear belly pan.
23. Install middle belly pan.
24. Install front belly pan.
LX
CHARGING
LX
25.
26.
27.
28.
Install belly pan side shield.

Lower vehicle.
Connect negative battery cable.
Check coolant level and refill if necessary.
3.5L
1. Install generator.
2. Install lower mounting bolts (3). Loosen install the

upper mounting bolt (4).
3. Tighten lower mounting bolts to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.).
4. Connect generator field circuit plug.

5. Install B+ terminal nut and wire. Tighten nut to 13
Nm (115 in. lbs.).
6. Install middle splash pan.
7. Lower vehicle.
8F - 67
8F - 68
CHARGING
8. Remove loose installed upper bolt (4).

9. Install bracket (2) and bracket bolt (1).
10. Install upper mounting bolt (4) and bracket (2).
11. Tighten upper mounting bolt to 65 Nm (48 ft.
lbs.).
12. Tighten Bracket bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
13. Install generator drive belt. Refer to the Cooling
System section.
6.1L
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
1. Position generator (2) to engine and install 2
mounting bolts (1). Do not tighten bolts (1) at this
time.
LX
LX
3. Position support bracket (1) to generator and install
bolt (3). Tighten all bolts / nut. Refer to Torque
Specifications.
4. Install heat shield (1) and two heat shield mounting

bolts (2).
5. Snap field wire connector into rear of generator.
6. Install B+ terminal eyelet to generator output stud.
Tighten mounting nut. Refer to Torque Specifications.
7. Lower vehicle.
CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim
using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt
can be damaged.
CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory
drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. The
water pump may be rotating in the wrong direction
if the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the
engine to overheat. Refer to belt routing label in
engine compartment, or refer to Belt Schematics
in 7, Cooling System.
8. Install generator drive belt. Refer to 7, Cooling System for procedure.
9. Install upper radiator hose and fill cooling system with coolant.
10. Install negative battery cable to battery.
CHARGING
8F - 69
8F - 70
CHARGING
LX
5.7L
1. Position generator (2) to engine and install 2
mounting bolts (1).
2. Tighten bolts. Refer to Torque Specifications.
3. Position support bracket (1) to generator and install

bolt (3) and nut (4). Tighten bolt / nut. Refer to
Torque Specifications.
4. Snap field wire connector into rear of generator.

5. Install B+ terminal eyelet to generator output stud. Tighten mounting nut. Refer to Torque Specifications.
6. Lower vehicle.
CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt can be
damaged.
CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. The water
pump may be rotating in the wrong direction if the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the engine to overheat. Refer to belt routing label in engine compartment, or refer to Belt Schematics in 7, Cooling System.
7. Install generator drive belt. Refer to 7, Cooling System for procedure.
8. Install negative battery cable to battery.
LX
CHARGING
8F - 71
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
DESCRIPTION
The Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) is not a separate component. It is actually a voltage regulating circuit
located within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EVR is not serviced separately. If replacement is necessary, the PCM must be replaced.
OPERATION
The amount of DC current produced by the generator is controlled by EVR circuitry contained within the PCM. This
circuitry is connected in series with the generators second rotor field terminal and its ground.
Voltage is regulated within the PCM on the NGC vehicles, to control the strength of the rotor magnetic field. The
EVR circuitry monitors system line voltage at the PDC and calculated battery temperature or inlet air temperature
sensor (refer to Inlet Air Temperature Sensor, if equipped, for more information ). It then determines a target charging voltage. If sensed battery voltage is lower than the target voltage, the PCM feeds the field winding until sensed
battery voltage is at the target voltage. A circuit in the PCM cycles the feed side of the generator field at 250 times
per second (250Hz), but has the capability to feed the field control wire 100% of the time (full field) to achieve the
target voltage. If the charging rate cannot be monitored (limp-in), a duty cycle of 20% is used by the PCM in order
to have some generator output. Also refer to Charging System Operation for additional information.
8F - 72
STARTING
LX
STARTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
STARTING
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - STARTING
SYSTEM TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - FEED CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - CONTROL
CIRCUIT TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
STARTER MOTOR
REMOVAL
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.0L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
REMOVAL - 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
INSTALLATION
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.0L diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
INSTALLATION - 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
LX
STARTING
8F - 73
STARTING
DESCRIPTION
The starting system consists of:
Starter relay
Starter motor (including an integral starter solenoid)
Other components to be considered as part of starting system are:
Battery
Battery cables
Ignition switch and key lock cylinder
Clutch pedal position switch (manual transmission)
Park/neutral position switch (automatic transmission)
Wire harnesses and connections.
The Battery, Starting, and Charging systems operate in conjunction with one another, and must be tested as a complete system. For correct operation of starting/charging systems, all components used in these 3 systems must perform within specifications. When attempting to diagnose any of these systems, it is important that you keep their
interdependency in mind.
The diagnostic procedures used in each of these groups include the most basic conventional diagnostic methods, to
the more sophisticated On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) built into the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Use of an
induction-type milliampere ammeter, volt/ohmmeter, battery charger, carbon pile rheostat (load tester), and 12-volt
test lamp may be required.
OPERATION
These components form two separate circuits. A high amperage circuit that feeds the starter motor up to 300+
amps, and a control circuit that operates on less than 20 amps.
The PCM controls a double start over-ride safety that does not allow the starter to be engaged if the engine is
already running.

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - STARTING SYSTEM TEST
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to the Wiring Diagrams.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIRBAGS, REFER TO THE PASSIVE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
BEFORE ATTEMPTING STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT
DIAGNOSIS OR SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
INSPECTION
Before removing any unit from the starting system for repair or diagnosis, perform the following inspections:
Battery - Visually inspect the battery for indications of physical damage and loose or corroded cable connections. Determine the state-of-charge and cranking capacity of the battery. Charge or replace the battery, if
required. Refer to the Battery section for more information.
Ignition Switch - Visually inspect the ignition switch for indications of physical damage and loose or corroded
wire harness connections.
Transmission Range Sensor or Park/Neutral Switch - Visually inspect the transmission range sensor for
indications of physical damage and loose or corroded wire harness connections.
Starter Relay - Visually inspect the starter relay for indications of physical damage and loose or corroded wire
harness connections.
Starter Motor - Visually inspect the starter motor for indications of physical damage and loose or corroded
wire harness connections.
8F - 74
STARTING
LX
Starter Solenoid - Visually inspect the starter solenoid for indications of physical damage and loose or corroded wire harness connections.
Wiring - Visually inspect the wire harness for damage. Repair or replace any faulty wiring, as required. Check
for loose or corroded wire harness connections at main engine ground and remote jump post.
Power Distribution Center (PDC) - Visually inspect the B+ connections at the PDC for physical damage and
loose or corroded harness connections.
STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
CONDITION
STARTER FAILS
TO ENGAGE.
STARTER
ENGAGES,
FAILS TO TURN
ENGINE.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CORRECTION
1. BATTERY
DISCHARGED OR
FAULTY.
1. REFER TO THE BATTERY SECTION FOR MORE

INFORMATION. CHARGE OR REPLACE BATTERY, IF
REQUIRED.
2. STARTING CIRCUIT
WIRING FAULTY.
2. REFER TO FEED CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TEST AND FEED

CIRCUIT TEST IN THIS SECTION.
3. STARTER RELAY
FAULTY.
3. REFER TO RELAY TEST, IN THIS SECTION. REPLACE

RELAY, IF NECESSARY.
4. IGNITION SWITCH
FAULTY.
4. REFER TO IGNITION SWITCH TEST, IN THE STEERING

SECTION OR 8 WIRING DIAGRAMS. REPLACE SWITCH, IF
NECESSARY.
5. PARK/NEUTRAL
POSITION SWITCH
(AUTO TRANS) FAULTY
OR MIS-ADJUSTED.
5. REFER PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH TEST, IN THE

TRANSAXLE. SECTION FOR MORE INFORMATION. REPLACE
SWITCH, IF NECESSARY.
6. CLUTCH INTERLOCK
SWITCH (MAN TRANS)
FAULTY.
6. REFER TO CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH TEST, IN

THE CLUTCH. SECTION. REPLACE SWITCH, IF NECESSARY.
7. STARTER SOLENOID
FAULTY.
7. REFER TO SOLENOID TEST, IN THIS SECTION. REPLACE

STARTER ASSEMBLY, IF NECESSARY.
8. STARTER ASSEMBLY
FAULTY.
8. IF ALL OTHER STARTING SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND

CIRCUITS CHECK OK, REPLACE STARTER ASSEMBLY.
9. FAULTY TEETH ON
RING GEAR.
9. ROTATE FLYWHEEL 360, AND INSPECT TEETH AND RING

GEAR REPLACED IF DAMAGED.
10. PCM DOUBLE

START OVERRIDE
OUTPUT FAILURE.
10. REFER TO PCM DIAGNOSTIC. CHECK FOR CONTINUITY

BETWEEN PCM AND TERMINAL 85. REPAIR OPEN CIRCUIT
AS REQUIRED. IF OK, PCM MAY BE DEFECTIVE.
1. BATTERY
DISCHARGED OR
FAULTY.
1. REFER TO THE BATTERY SECTION FOR MORE

INFORMATION. CHARGE OR REPLACE BATTERY AS
NECESSARY.
2. STARTING CIRCUIT
WIRING FAULTY.
2. REFER TO THE FEED CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TEST AND

THE FEED CIRCUIT TEST IN THIS SECTION. REPAIR AS
NECESSARY.
3. STARTER ASSEMBLY
FAULTY.

4. ENGINE SEIZED.
4. REFER TO THE ENGINE SECTION, FOR DIAGNOSTIC AND

SERVICE PROCEDURES.
5. LOOSE
CONNECTION AT
BATTERY, PDC,
STARTER, OR ENGINE
GROUND.
5. INSPECT FOR LOOSE CONNECTIONS.
STARTING
LX
CONDITION
STARTER
ENGAGES,
SPINS OUT
BEFORE
ENGINE
STARTS.
STARTER DOES
NOT
DISENGAGE.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
8F - 75
CORRECTION
6. FAULTY TEETH ON
RING GEAR.

1. BROKEN TEETH ON
STARTER RING GEAR.
1. REMOVE STARTER. INSPECT RING GEAR AND REPLACE

IF NECESSARY.
2. STARTER ASSEMBLY
FAULTY.

1. STARTER
IMPROPERLY
INSTALLED.
1. INSTALL STARTER. TIGHTEN STARTER MOUNTING

HARDWARE TO CORRECT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. STARTER RELAY
FAULTY.
2. REFER TO RELAY TEST, IN THIS SECTION. REPLACE

RELAY, IF NECESSARY.
3. IGNITION SWITCH
FAULTY.
3. REFER TO IGNITION SWITCH TEST, IN THE STEERING

SECTION. REPLACE SWITCH, IF NECESSARY.
4. STARTER ASSEMBLY
FAULTY.

5. FAULTY TEETH ON
RING GEAR.

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - FEED CIRCUIT RESISTANCE TEST

Before proceeding with this operation, review Diagnostic Preparation and Starter Feed Circuit Tests. The following
operation will require a voltmeter, accurate to 1/10 of a volt.
CAUTION: Ignition and Fuel systems must be disabled to prevent engine start while performing the following tests.
1. To disable the Ignition and Fuel systems, disconnect the Automatic Shutdown Relay (ASD). The ASD relay is
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the PDC cover for proper relay location.
2. Gain access to battery terminals.
3. With all wiring harnesses and components properly connected, perform the following:
a. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery negative post, and positive lead to the battery
negative cable clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the START position. Observe the voltmeter. If
voltage is detected, correct poor contact between cable clamp and post.
b. Connect positive lead of the voltmeter to the battery positive post, and negative lead to the battery positive
cable clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch key in the START position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage
is detected, correct poor contact between the cable clamp and post.
c. Connect negative lead of voltmeter to battery negative terminal, and positive lead to engine block near the
battery cable attaching point. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the START position. If voltage reads
above 0.2 volt, correct poor contact at ground cable attaching point. If voltage reading is still above 0.2 volt
after correcting poor contacts, replace ground cable.
4. Connect positive voltmeter lead to the starter motor housing and the negative lead to the battery negative terminal. Hold the ignition switch key in the START position. If voltage reads above 0.2 volt, correct poor starter to
engine ground.
a. Connect the positive voltmeter lead to the battery positive terminal, and negative lead to battery cable terminal on starter solenoid. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the START position. If voltage reads above
0.2 volt, correct poor contact at battery cable to solenoid connection. If reading is still above 0.2 volt after
correcting poor contacts, replace battery positive cable.
8F - 76
STARTING
LX
b. If resistance tests do not detect feed circuit failures, replace the starter motor.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - CONTROL CIRCUIT TEST

The
starter control circuit has:

Starter motor with integral solenoid
Starter relay
Transmission range sensor, or Park/Neutral Position switch with automatic transmissions
Ignition switch
Battery
All related wiring and connections
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
CAUTION: Before performing any starter tests, the ignition and fuel systems must be disabled.
To disable ignition and fuel systems, disconnect the Automatic Shutdown Relay (ASD). The ASD relay is
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the PDC cover for the proper relay location.
STARTER SOLENOID
WARNING: CHECK TO ENSURE THAT THE TRANSMISSION IS IN THE PARK POSITION WITH THE PARKING
BRAKE APPLIED. THIS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
1. Verify battery condition. Battery must be in good condition with a full charge before performing any starter tests.
Refer to Battery Tests.
2. Perform Starter Solenoid test BEFORE performing the starter relay test.
3. Perform a visual inspection of the starter/starter solenoid for corrosion, loose connections or faulty wiring.
4. Locate and remove the starter relay from the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the PDC label for relay
identification and location.
5. Connect a remote starter switch or a jumper wire between the remote battery positive post and terminal 87 of the
starter relay connector.
a. If engine cranks, starter/starter solenoid is good. Go to the Starter Relay Test.
b. If engine does not crank or solenoid chatters, check wiring and connectors from starter relay to starter solenoid and from the battery positive terminal to starter post for loose or corroded connections. Particularly at
starter terminals.
c. Repeat test. If engine still fails to crank properly, trouble is within starter or starter mounted solenoid, and
replace starter. Inspect the ring gear teeth.
STARTER RELAY
WARNING: CHECK TO ENSURE THAT THE TRANSMISSION IS IN THE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION WITH THE
PARKING BRAKE APPLIED. THIS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
RELAY TEST
The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment. Refer to the PDC
label for relay identification and location.
Remove the starter relay from the PDC as described in this group to perform the following tests:
1. A relay in the de-energized position should have continuity between terminals 87A and 30, and no continuity
between terminals 87 and 30. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, replace the faulty relay.
2. Resistance between terminals 85 and 86 (electromagnet) should be 75 5 ohms. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK,
replace the faulty relay.
STARTING
LX
8F - 77
3. Connect a battery B+ lead to terminals 85 and a ground lead to terminal 86 to energize the relay. The relay
should click. Also test for continuity between terminals 30 and 87, and no continuity between terminals 87A and
30. If OK, refer to Relay Circuit Test procedure. If not OK, replace the faulty relay.
CAV
FUNCTION
30
B (+)
85
IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT
86
PCM-CONTROLLED GROUND
87
STARTER RELAY OUTPUT
87A
NO CONNECT
RELAY CIRCUIT TEST

1. The relay common feed terminal cavity (30) is connected to battery voltage and should be hot at all times. If OK,
go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the PDC fuse as required.
2. The relay normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to terminal 30 in the de-energized position, but is not used
for this application. Go to Step 3.
8F - 78
STARTING
LX
3. The relay normally open terminal (87) is connected to the common feed terminal (30) in the energized position.
This terminal supplies battery voltage to the starter solenoid field coils. There should be continuity between the
cavity for relay terminal 87 and the starter solenoid terminal at all times. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the
open circuit to the starter solenoid as required.
4. The coil battery terminal (85) is connected to the electromagnet in the relay. It is energized when the ignition
switch is held in the Start position and the clutch pedal is depressed (manual trans). Check for battery voltage at
the cavity for relay terminal 86 with the ignition switch in the Start position and the clutch pedal is depressed
(manual trans), and no voltage when the ignition switch is released to the On position. If OK, go to Step 5. If not
OK, check for an open or short circuit to the ignition switch and repair, if required. If the circuit to the ignition
switch is OK, see the Ignition Switch Test procedure in this group.
5. The coil ground terminal (86) is connected to the electromagnet in the relay. It is grounded by the PCM if the
conditions are right to start the car. For automatic trans. cars the PCM must see Park Neutral switch low and
near zero engine speed (rpm). For manual trans. cars the PCM only needs to see near zero engine speed (rpm)
and low clutch interlock input and see near zero engine speed (rpm). To diagnose the Park Neutral switch of the
trans range sensor refer to the transaxle section. Check for continuity to ground while the ignition switch is in the
start position and if equipped the clutch pedal depressed. If not OK and the vehicle has an automatic trans. verify
Park Neutral switch operation. If that checks OK check for continuity between PCM and the terminal 86. Repair
open circuit as required. Also check the clutch interlock switch operation if equipped with a manual transmission.
If OK, the PCM may be defective.
SAFETY SWITCHES
For diagnostics of the Transmission Range Sensor, refer to the Transaxle section for more information.
If equipped with Clutch Interlock/Upstop Switch, refer to Diagnosis and Testing in the Clutch section.
IGNITION SWITCH
After testing starter solenoid and relay, test ignition switch and wiring. Refer to the Ignition Section or Wiring Diagrams for more information. Check all wiring for opens or shorts, and all connectors for being loose or corroded.
BATTERY
For battery diagnosis and testing, refer to the Battery section for procedures.
ALL RELATED WIRING AND CONNECTORS

Refer to Wiring Diagrams for more information.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
2.7L Starter Mounting

bolts
54.2
40

bolts
54.2
40

bolts
54.2
40
3.0L Diesel Starter

Mounting bolts
54.2
40
Intermediate Shaft Pinch

Bolt
43
32
Starter B+ Nut
11
97.4
LX
STARTER MOTOR
REMOVAL
2.7L
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect negative battery cable

Install steering wheel holder locking steering wheel in straight-ahead position.
Raise vehicle and support.
Remove the underbody splash shield.
5. Starter assembly.
6. Remove the intermediate steering shaft center bolt.
STARTING
8F - 79
8F - 80
STARTING
7. Bolt removed.
8. Separate the intermediate steering shaft upper and

lower shaft.
9. Disconnect the electrical connection from the

starter.
LX
LX
10. Remove the 3 starter mounting bolts and wiring
clip.
11. Pull starter forward and down.
12. Work starter up and around exhaust.
STARTING
8F - 81
8F - 82
STARTING
13. Work starter past the intermediate steering shaft.
14. Remove starter from vehicle.
LX
LX
3.0L DIESEL
3. Remove the rear belly pan.

4. Remove the middle belly pan.
STARTING
8F - 83
8F - 84
STARTING
5. Disconnect the battery connection.
6. Disconnect the solenoid connection.
7. Remove the 2 mounting bolts.
LX
LX
3.5L
1. Disconnect negative battery cable
2. Install steering wheel holder locking steering wheel in straight-ahead position.
4. Remove the underbody splash shield.
5. Starter assembly.
STARTING
8F - 85
8F - 86
STARTING
6. Remove the intermediate steering shaft center bolt.
7. Bolt removed.
8. Separate the intermediate steering shaft upper and

lower shaft.
LX
LX
9. Disconnect the electrical connection from the
starter.
10. Remove the 3 starter mounting bolts and wiring

clip.
11. Pull starter forward and down.
STARTING
8F - 87
8F - 88
STARTING
12. Work starter up and around exhaust.
13. Work starter past the intermediate steering shaft.
LX
LX
STARTING
8F - 89
5.7L
REAR WHEEL DRIVE (RWD)
1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable.
3. Remove three starter mounting bolts (1).
4. Move starter motor (2) towards front of vehicle far
enough for nose of starter to clear. Always support
starter motor (2) during this process. Do not let
starter motor hang from wire harness.
5. Remove battery cable-to-solenoid nut.
6. Remove solenoid wire from solenoid stud.
7. Remove starter motor.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)

The steering gear assembly must be partially lowered to gain access to starter. Do not disconnect any hydraulic
hoses or remove any steering linkage. Proceed.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove coupling bolt (pinch bolt) securing steering gear to steering column.
Remove three steering gear mounting bolts and slightly lower gear. Temporarily support the steering gear.
Remove steering gear heat-shield.
Remove two starter mounting bolts (2).
Move starter motor (1) towards front of vehicle far

8F - 90
STARTING
REMOVAL - 6.1L
3. Remove two heat shield nuts (2) and remove heat
shield (3).
4. Remove three starter mounting bolts (1).

5. Move starter motor (2) towards front of vehicle far
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
2.7L
1. Work starter up and pass the transmission and
exhaust.
2. Work starter up and pass the intermediate shafts.
STARTING
8F - 91
8F - 92
STARTING
3. Starter pass the intermediate shaft.
4. Angle starter up toward engine.
5. Install plastic retainer into starter dust shield. The

dust shield has TOP marked on it and the plastic
retainer goes in the hole.
LX
LX
6. Plastic retainer installed.
7. Install dust shield to the engine block using the
plastic retainer to hold dust shield in place.
8. Install starter.
9. Install starter bolts.
10. Tighten bolts to 54.2 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
11. Install electrical connection to starter.
STARTING
8F - 93
8F - 94
STARTING
12. Match flats inside intermediate shaft with that in

intermediate shaft extension, then slide intermediate shaft onto extension.
13. Aline the hole in the shafts.
14. Install pinch bolt fastening intermediate shaft to

intermediate shaft extension.
15. Tighten pinch bolt to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.).
16.
17.
18.
19.
Install the underbody splash shield.

Lower vehicle.
Remove the steering wheel holder.
LX
LX
3.0L diesel
1. Install starter to vehicle.
2. Install the 2 mounting bolts. Torque fasteners to

54.2 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
STARTING
8F - 95
8F - 96
STARTING
3. Connect battery connection.

4. Connect solenoid connection.
5. Starter installed.
6. Install the rear belly pan.
LX
LX
7. Install the middle belly pan.
8. Lower vehicle.
3.5L
1. Work starter up and pass the transmission and
exhaust.
STARTING
8F - 97
8F - 98
STARTING
2. Work starter up and pass the intermediate shafts.
3. Starter pass the intermediate shaft.
4. Angle starter up toward engine.
LX
LX
5. Install plastic retainer into starter dust shield. The
dust shield has TOP marked on it and the plastic
retainer goes in the hole.
6. Plastic retainer installed.

7. Install dust shield to the engine block using the
plastic retainer to hold dust shield in place.
8. Install starter.
9. Install starter bolts.
10. Tighten bolts to 54.2 Nm (40 ft. lbs.).
STARTING
8F - 99
8F - 100
STARTING
11. Install electrical connection to starter.
12. Match flats inside intermediate shaft with that in

intermediate shaft extension, then slide intermediate shaft onto extension.
13. Aline the hole in the shafts.
LX
LX
14. Install pinch bolt fastening intermediate shaft to
intermediate shaft extension.
15. Tighten pinch bolt to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.).
16. Install the underbody splash shield.
17. Lower vehicle.
18. Remove the steering wheel holder.
INSTALLATION - 6.1L
1. Position starter (2) into transmission but do not
install bolts.
2. Connect solenoid wire to starter motor (snaps on).
3. Position battery cable to solenoid stud. Install and
tighten battery cable eyelet nut. Refer to Torque
Specifications. Do not allow starter motor to hang
from wire harness.
4. Install and tighten three mounting bolts (1). Refer
to Torque Specifications.
STARTING
8F - 101
8F - 102
STARTING
5. Position heat shield (3) and install two shield

mounting nuts (2).
6. Lower vehicle.
5.7L
install bolts.
from wire harness.
4. Install and tighten three mounting bolts (1). Refer
to Torque Specifications.
5. Lower vehicle.
LX
LX
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)
install bolts.
from wire harness.
4. Install and tighten both mounting bolts (2). Refer to
Torque Specifications.
5. Install steering gear assembly and mounting bolts.
Install steering column coupling bolt (pinch bolt).
Refer to Steering section for torque specifications.
6. Install steering gear heat-shield.
7. Lower vehicle.
STARTING
8F - 103
HEATED SYSTEMS
LX
8G - 1
HEATED SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
HEATED GLASS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . 1

HEATED MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . 8
HEATED SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . 10

HEATED SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . 73
HEATED GLASS - SERVICE INFORMATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
ELECTRIC BACKLIGHT (EBL) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 3
GRID-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
STANDARD PROCEDURE
GRID LINE AND TERMINAL REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . 4
RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SWITCH-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8G - 2
LX

DESCRIPTION
CAUTION: Grid lines can be damaged or scraped off with sharp instruments. Care should be taken in cleaning glass or removing foreign materials, decals or stickers. Normal glass cleaning solvents or hot water
used with rags or toweling is recommended.
The rear window defogger system, also known as
electric backlight (EBL), consists of two vertical bus
bars (1) linked by a series of grid lines (2) fired onto
the inside surface of the rear window (3).
The EBL system is turned On or Off by a switch and
timing circuit integral to the A/C-heater control located
at the center of the instrument panel.
Circuit protection is provided by two cartridge fuses
located in the power distribution center (PDC). One
fuse is for the heated rear window grid circuit and the
other fuse is for the heated outside mirror grid circuit,
when equipped.
OPERATION
The electric backlight (EBL) system is controlled by a
momentary switch (1) located in the A/C-heater control
(2) on the instrument panel. When the rear window
defogger switch is pressed to the On position, the
A/C-heater control energizes the rear window defogger (EBL) relay and battery current is then directed
through the relay and to the rear window defogger grid
lines and the heated outside rear view mirrors, when
equipped. The grid lines heat the glass to help clear
the rear window and outside mirror surfaces of fog or
frost.
An amber indicator (3) in the rear window defogger
switch will illuminate to indicate when the EBL system
is turned on. The A/C-heater control contains the EBL
system control circuitry including the timer logic.
NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically
after ten minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last five
minutes.
The EBL system will be automatically turned off after an initial programmed time interval of about ten minutes. After
the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is turned on again during the same ignition
cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about five minutes. The EBL system will automatically shut off
if the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, or it can be turned off manually by pressing the rear window
defogger switch a second time.
Repair of the rear window defogger grid lines, bus bars, terminals or pigtail wires can be accomplished using the
Mopar Rear Window Defogger Repair Kit (Part Number 04549275) or equivalent (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
LX
8G - 3
HEATED GLASS/REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GRID - STANDARD PROCEDURE - GRID LINE AND TERMINAL
REPAIR).

ELECTRIC BACKLIGHT (EBL) SYSTEM
NOTE: Illumination of the defogger switch indicator lamp does not necessary mean that electrical current is
reaching the rear glass heating grid lines.
NOTE: For circuit descriptions and diagrams of the rear window defogger system, refer to 8W - WIRING
DIAGRAM INFORMATION.
Operation of the electric backlight (EBL) system can be confirmed by the following:
1. If equipped with the automatic temperature control
(ATC) heating-A/C system, use a scan tool and
check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) related
to the A/C-heater control. If equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) heating-A/C system,
use the A/C-heater control to check for diagnostic
trouble codes (DTCs) related to the A/C-heater
control (Refer to 24 - HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HVAC
SELF DIAGNOSTICS). If no DTCs are found, go to
Step 2. If any DTCs are found, repair as required,
then proceed to Step 2
2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Set the
rear window defogger switch in the On position.
The rear window defogger operation can be
checked by feeling the rear window or outside rear
view mirror glass surfaces. A distinct difference in temperature between the grid lines (4 and 5) and the adjacent
clear glass or the mirror glass should be detected within three to four minutes of operation.
3. If a temperature difference is not detected, use a 12-volt DC voltmeter and contact the rear glass heating grid
terminal A (1) with the negative lead, and terminal B (2) with the positive lead. The voltmeter should read battery
voltage. If the voltmeter does not read battery voltage, check the following:
Confirm that the ignition switch is in the On position.
Make sure that the rear glass heating grid feed wire (3) and ground wire (6) are connected to the terminals.
Confirm that the ground wire has continuity to ground.
Check the EBL relay and fuses located in the power distribution center (PDC) in the engine compartment. The
relay and fuses must be tight in their receptacles and all electrical connections must be secure.
When the above steps have been completed and the rear glass heating grid is still inoperative, one or more of the
following is faulty:
Rear window defogger switch in the A/C-heater control.
Rear window defogger grid lines (all grid lines would have to be broken, or the power feed or the ground wire
disconnected, for the entire heating grid to be inoperative).
4. If the EBL system operation has been verified but the rear window defogger LED indicator does not illuminate,
replace the A/C-heater control (Refer to 24 - HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING/CONTROLS/CONTROL-A/C
HEATER - REMOVAL).
8G - 4
LX
GRID-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

STANDARD PROCEDURE
GRID LINE AND TERMINAL REPAIR
WARNING: Materials contained in the Repair Kit (Part Number 04549275) may cause skin or eye irritation.
The kit contains epoxy resin and amine type hardener, which are harmful if swallowed. Avoid contact with
the skin and eyes. For skin contact, wash the affected areas with soap and water. For contact with the eyes,
flush with plenty of water. Do not take internally. If taken internally, induce vomiting and call a physician
immediately. Use with adequate ventilation. Do not use near fire or flame. Contains flammable solvents.
Keep out of the reach of children. Failure to follow the warnings could result in possible personal injury or
death.
Repair of the rear glass heating grid lines, bus bars, terminals or pigtail wires can be accomplished using the Mopar
Rear Window Defogger Repair Kit (Part Number 04549275) or equivalent.
1. Mask the repair area with masking tape (3) so that
the conductive epoxy can be applied neatly. Extend
the epoxy application onto the grid line (2) or the
bus bar on each side of the break (1).
2. Follow the instructions in the repair kit for preparing
the damaged area.
3. Remove the package separator clamp and mix the
two conductive epoxy components thoroughly
within the packaging. Fold the package in half and
cut the center corner to dispense the epoxy.
4. For grid line repairs, mask the area to be repaired
with masking tape or use a template.
5. Apply the epoxy through the slit in the masking
tape or template. Overlap both ends of the break
by at least 19 millimeters (0.75 inch).
6. For a terminal or pigtail wire replacement, mask the adjacent areas so the epoxy can be extended onto the
adjacent grid line as well as the bus bar. Apply a thin layer of epoxy to the area where the terminal or pigtail wire
was fastened and onto the adjacent grid line.
7. Apply a thin layer of conductive epoxy to the terminal or bare wire end of the pigtail and place it in the proper
location on the bus bar. To prevent the terminal or pigtail wire from moving while the epoxy is curing, it must be
wedged or clamped.
8. Carefully remove the masking tape or template.
CAUTION: Do not allow the glass surface to exceed 204 C (400 F) when using a heat gun, or the glass
may fracture.
9. Allow the epoxy to cure 24 hours at room temperature, or carefully use a heat gun for fifteen minutes. When
using a heat gun, hold it approximately 25.4 centimeters (10 inches) from the repair and do not allow the glass
surface to exceed 204 C (400 F).
10. After the conductive epoxy is properly cured, remove the wedge or clamp from the terminal or pigtail wire.
11. Connect the wire harness leads to the grid terminals or pigtail wires and verify EBL operation.
LX
8G - 5
RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

DESCRIPTION
The rear window defogger (EBL) relay (1) is a International Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay.
Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have
common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The EBL relay is a
electromechanical device that switches battery current
through a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC)
to the rear window defogger grid and when equipped,
switches battery current through a fuse in the PDC to
the heated outside rear view mirrors. The EBL relay is
energized when the relay coil is provided a ground
path by the control circuitry within the A/C-heater control.
The EBL relay is located in the PDC at the rear of the
vehicle, near the battery.
OPERATION
The ISO-standard rear window defogger (EBL) micro-relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current
input controlled by the A/C-heater control to control the high current output to the rear window defogger grid lines.
The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure.
When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the
fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows
high current to flow to the rear window defogger grid lines.
When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate
voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil
collapses.
The EBL relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the power distribution
center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the EBL relay include:
The common feed terminal (30) receives a battery current input from a fused B(+) circuit at all times.
The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground through the EBL relay control circuit only when the A/C-heater
control electronically pulls the circuit to ground.
The coil battery terminal (86) receives a battery current input from a fused B(+) circuit at all times.
The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current to the rear window defogger grid through the EBL
relay output circuit and a fuse located in the PDC only when the EBL relay coil is energized.
The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery
current output only when the EBL relay coil is de-energized.
The EBL micro-relay cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Refer to the appropriate
wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard micro-relay and for complete rear window defogger
(EBL) wiring diagrams.
8G - 6
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
2. Open the cover of the power distribution center
(PDC) (1) located at the rear of the vehicle near
the battery (2).
3. Remove the EBL relay (3) from the PDC.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the EBL relay (3) into the proper receptacle of the power distribution center (PDC) (1)
located at the rear of the vehicle near the battery
(2).
2. Align the EBL relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the PDC receptacle and push down firmly
on the relay until the terminals are fully seated.
3. Close the cover of the PDC.
4. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
LX
LX
8G - 7
SWITCH-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

DESCRIPTION
The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system
(1) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (2), which
is located in the center of the instrument panel. When
the rear window defogger switch is activated, the timing circuit integral to the A/C-heater control operates
the rear window defogger (EBL) relay. An amber indicator (3) in the rear window defogger switch will illuminate to indicate when the EBL system is turned on.
When the EBL relay is activated, current is directed to
the rear window defogger grid lines and when
equipped, to the heated outside rear view mirrors. The
grid lines heat the window and mirror glass to help
clear the surfaces of fog or frost.
OPERATION
An LED indicator will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When the switch is activated,
the A/C-heater control operates the rear window defogger (EBL) relay. The EBL relay controls the current flow to the
heating grid of the rear window and when equipped, the heated outside rear view mirrors.
NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after ten minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last five minutes.
The EBL system will initially be on for approximately ten minutes or until the rear window defogger switch or the
ignition switch is turned off. After the initial time interval has expired, if the defogger switch is turned On again during
the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about five minutes.
NOTE: ATC A/C-heater controls are NOT interchangeable between other model years or other vehicle lines.
If replacement of the A/C-heater control is required, only use the control designed for the vehicle being
serviced.
The rear window defogger switch and the rear window defogger LED indicator cannot be repaired and, if faulty or
damaged, the A/C-heater control must be replaced (Refer to 24 - HEATING & AIR CONDITIONING/CONTROLS/
CONTROL-A/C HEATER - REMOVAL).
8G - 8
HEATED MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LX
8G - 9

DESCRIPTION
The optional heated mirror system is controlled by the
momentary rear window defogger switch (1) which is
integral to the A/C-heater control (2). An amber indicator lamp in the switch (3) will illuminate to indicate
when the rear window defogger (EBL) system is
turned on.
The heated mirror system only operates in concert with the EBL system, and will be automatically shut off after a
programmed time interval of about ten minutes. After the initial time interval has expired, if the defogger switch is
turned on again during the same ignition cycle, the heated mirror system will automatically shut off after about five
minutes.
The heated mirror system will automatically shut off if the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, or it can be
shut off manually by pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time.
OPERATION
When the rear window defogger switch is pressed, the rear window defogger (EBL) system becomes activated and
an electric heater grid located behind the glass of each of the outside rear view mirrors is energized. When energized, each of these heater grids produce heat to help clear the outside rear view mirrors of ice, snow, or fog.
If the outside mirror heating grids are both inoperative, refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/HEATED GLASS - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING in this group. If only one of the outside mirror heating grids is inoperative, refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER MIRRORS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
The heating grid behind each outside mirror glass cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the mirror glass
must be replaced (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/MIRROR-SIDE VIEW - GLASS - REMOVAL).
8G - 10
HEATED SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

B1084-LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
B1087-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 15
B1092-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
B1094-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER
CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
B1096-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER
B1098-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER
B120E-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
B120F-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR
B1216-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR
B1217-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR
B121A-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR
B121B-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR
B1222-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR
B1223-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR
B221A-HEATED SEAT MODULE INTERNAL . . . 66
U0019CAN B BUS HSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . . 70
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HFM . . . 71
SCCM - CAN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
LX

8G - 11
8G - 12
B1084-LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
8G - 13
When Monitored:Ignition on, during the heated seat operation.

Set Condition:This code is set after the Cluster detects the heated seat switch sense circuit low for a predetermined amount of time.
Possible Causes
(P365) LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE SHORTED TO GROUND
LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1084-LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE

Operate the Heated Seat Switch in both positions several times.
Is the DTC B1084 LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/
PERFORMANCE active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present
at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide,
inspect the wiring and connectors.
2.
DISCONNECT THE LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH CONNECTOR AND CHECK SWITCH STATUS
Turn the ignition switch off.

Disconnect the Left Heated Seat Switch connector.
NOTE: Check connectors - Clean and repair as necessary.
With the scan tool in CCN Inputs/Outputs, read the Left Heated Seat
state.
Does the switch state display Not Set?
Yes
>> Replace the Left Heated Seat Switch.

No
>> Go To 3
8G - 14
3.
CHECK THE (P365) LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Cluster C3 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P365) Left Heated
Seat Switch sense circuit.
Was the resistance below 5.0 ohms?
Yes
>> Repair the (P365) Left Heated Seat Switch sense circuit for
a short to ground
No
>> Replace the Cluster in accordance with the Service Information.

LX
LX
B1087-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE
8G - 15
8G - 16
LX

Set Condition:This code is set after the Cluster detects the heated seat switch sense circuit low for a predetermined amount of time.
Possible Causes
(P366) RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE SHORTED TO GROUND
RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1087-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE

Is the DTC B1087 RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
DISCONNECT THE RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH CONNECTOR AND CHECK SWITCH STATUS

Disconnect the Right Heated Seat Switch connector.
With the scan tool in CCN Inputs/Outputs, read the Right Heated Seat
state.
Does the switch state display Not Set?
Yes
>> Replace the Right Heated Seat Switch.

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE (P366) RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (P366) Right Heated
Seat Switch sense circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P366) Right Heated Seat Switch sense circuit
for a short to ground
No

8G - 17
8G - 18
B1092-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8G - 19

Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module detects the control circuit shorted to
ground.
Possible Causes
(P187) DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER SHORTED TO GROUND
SEAT HEATER ELEMENT PIGTAIL HARNESS SHORTED
SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED
SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1092-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B1092 FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
DISCONNECT LEFT CUSHION HEATER 2-WAY CONNECTOR AND READ DTCS
Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Heater connector.

With the scan tool, erase HSM DTCs
Does the scan tool display the same DTC?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Go To 3
8G - 20
3.
CHECK THE LEFT SEAT BACK HEATER RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Left Seat Back Heater connector.

Check the resistance of the seat back heater element by measuring
between the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver and the Ground circuit
at the Left seat back heater connector.
No
>> Go To 4
Yes
>> Replace the seat back heater element as necessary.

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 (Refer to
4.
CHECK THE LEFT SEAT BACK HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure between the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit at the
Left seat back heater connector and the seat frame for a short to
ground.
Yes
>> Repair the pigtail harness for a short to ground condition or

replace the seat back heater element as necessary.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK THE LEFT CUSHION HEATER RESISTANCE
Check the resistance of the cushion heater element by measuring

at the Left seat cushion heater connector.
No
>> Go To 6
Yes
>> Replace the heater element as necessary.

LX
LX
6.
CHECK THE LEFT CUSHION HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure between the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit at the
Left seat cushion heater connector and the seat frame for a short to
ground.
Yes
>> Repair the pigtail harness or replace the heater element as

necessary.
No
>> Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the

wiring and connectors for an intermittent short to ground.
7.
Check the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for a short to ground
Disconnect the Heat Seat Module connector.

Measure the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit to ground at
the HSM connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for a
short to ground.
No
>> Replace the Heated Seat Module.

8G - 21
8G - 22
B1094-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8G - 23

Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module detects an open in the seat heater
B(+) driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(P187) LEFT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER WIRE OPEN
(Z912) GROUND WIRE OPEN
SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN
SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT OPEN
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1094-FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B1094 FRONT LEFT SEAT HEATER CONTROL
CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR AN OPEN SEAT HEATER ELEMENT
Disconnect the Left Seat Cushion Heater 2 way connector.

Measure the total resistance of the cushion and seat back heater elements at the Left Seat Cushion 2 way connector (seat side).
Is the total resistance 2.5 ohms + or .5 ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 3
8G - 24
3.
CHECK THE LEFT SEAT BACK HEATER RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Left Seat Back Heater 2 way connector.

at the connector.
Yes
>> Repair the open pigtail harness or replace the seat back
heater element as necessary.
No
>> Repair the open pigtail harness or replace the seat cushion
4.
CHECK THE LEFT SEAT HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the Ground circuit at the Left Seat Heater
Cushion 2 way connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open ground circuit.

LX
LX
5.
Check the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for an open.
Disconnect the Heated Seat Module connector.

Measure the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit from the Left
Seat Cushion Heater 2way connector (harness side) to the HSM connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (P187) Left Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for an
open.
8G - 25
8G - 26
B1096-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8G - 27

Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module detects the seat heater B(+) driver
circuit shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
(P188) RIGHT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER SHORTED TO GROUND
SEAT HEATER ELEMENT PIGTAIL HARNESS SHORTED
SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED
SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT SHORTED
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1096-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B1096-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
DISCONNECT RIGHT SEAT CUSHION HEATER 2-WAY CONNECTOR AND READ DTCS
Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Heater connector.

With the scan tool, erase HSM DTCs
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Go To 3
8G - 28
3.
CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT BACK HEATER RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Right Seat Back Heater connector.

between the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver and the Ground circuit at the Right seat back heater connector.
No
>> Go To 4
Yes
>> Replace the seat back heater element as necessary.

4.
CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT BACK HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure between the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit at
the Right Seat Back Heater connector and the seat frame for a short to
ground.
Yes
>> Repair the pigtail harness for a short to ground condition or

replace the seat back heater element as necessary.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT CUSHION HEATER RESISTANCE
Check the resistance of the cushion heater element by measuring

between the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver and the Ground circuit at the Right seat cushion heater connector.
No
>> Go To 6
Yes
>> Replace the heater element as necessary.

LX
LX
6.
CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT CUSHION HEATER FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure between the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit at
the Right Seat Cushion Heater connector and the seat frame for a short
to ground.
Yes
>> Repair the pigtail harness or replace the heater element as

necessary.
No

wiring and connectors for an intermittent short to ground.
7.
Check the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for a short to ground

Measure the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit to ground at
the HSM connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for
a short to ground.
No

8G - 29
8G - 30
B1098-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8G - 31

Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module detects an open in the seat heat
B(+) driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(P188) PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER WIRE OPEN
(Z911) GROUND WIRE OPEN
SEAT CUSHION HEATER ELEMENT OPEN
SEAT BACK HEATER ELEMENT OPEN
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1098-FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B1098 FRONT RIGHT SEAT HEATER CONTROL
CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR AN OPEN SEAT HEATER ELEMENT
Disconnect the Right Seat Cushion Heater 2 way connector.

Measure the total resistance of the cushion and seat back heater elements at the Right Seat Cushion Heater 2 way connector (seat side).
Is the total resistance 2.5 ohms + or .5 ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 3
8G - 32
3.
CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT BACK PAD HEATER RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Right Seat Back Heater 2 way connector.

between the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver and the Ground circuit at the Right seat back heater connector.
Yes
>> Repair the open pigtail harness or replace the seat back
No
>> Repair the open pigtail harness or replace the seat cushion
4.
CHECK THE RIGHT SEAT HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the Ground circuit at the Right Seat Cushion
Heater 2 way connector (harness side).
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open ground circuit.

LX
LX
5.
Check the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for an open.

Measure the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit from the Right
Seat Cushion Heater connector to the HSM connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (P188) Right Seat Heater B(+) Driver circuit for
an open.
8G - 33
8G - 34
B120E-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8G - 35
When Monitored:Continously with the ignition on.

Set Condition:This code is set immediately when the Cluster detects excessive voltage on the heated seat
indicator control circuit.
Possible Causes
(P83) LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B120E-LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH IS
ACTIVE

Does the DTC B120E-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
DISCONNECT THE LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH AND RE-READ DTC

With the scan tool erase DTCs
Cycle the ignition switch off then back on.
Does the DTC B120E-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Left Heated Seat switch.

8G - 36
3.
DISCONNECT THE CLUSTER C3 CONNECTOR AND CHECK FOR VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage at the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator
Driver circuit at the Cluster C3 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator Driver circuit for a short to battery.
No

LX
LX
B120F-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
8G - 37
8G - 38
LX

Set Condition:This code is set immediately when the Cluster detects low voltage on the heated seat indicator
control circuit.
Possible Causes
PDC FUSE #8
PDC FUSE #40
(F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN
(P83) LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN/SHORTED TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B120F-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B120F-LEFT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
INSPECT PDC FUSES
Check PDC fuses #8 and #40.

Is either fuse open?
Yes
>> Check for a possible short to ground on the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit and
replace the fuse as necessary.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8G - 39
Reinstall fuse if removed in previous test.

Measure the voltage at the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
Disconnect the Left Heated Seat switch connector.

Measure the voltage of the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (RunStart) circuit at the Left Heated Seat Switch connector.
Is the voltage above 10.0 volts ?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start)

circuit for an open.
5.
CHECK THE (P83) LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Seat High Indicator Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator Driver circuit for a short to ground
No
>> Go To 6
8G - 40
6.
CHECK THE (P83) LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator
Driver circuit between the Cluster C3 connector and the Left Heated
Seat Switch connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (P83) Left Heated Seat High Indicator Driver circuit for an open.
LX
LX
B1216-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8G - 41
8G - 42
LX

Possible Causes
(P81) LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1216-LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH IS
ACTIVE

Does the DTC B1216-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
DISCONNECT THE DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH AND RE-READ DTC

Does the DTC B1216-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Left Heated Seat switch.

LX
3.

Measure the voltage at the (P81) Left Heated Seat Low Indicator Driver
circuit at the Cluster C3 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P81) Left Heated Seat Low Indicator Driver circuit for a short to battery.
No

8G - 43
8G - 44
B1217-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8G - 45

control circuit.
Possible Causes
PDC FUSE #8
PDC FUSE #40
(P81) LEFT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN/SHORTED TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1217-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B1217-LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
INSPECT PDC FUSES

Yes
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
No
>> Go To 3
8G - 46
3.
LX

Measure the voltage at the (P81) Left Heated Seat Low Indicator Driver
circuit at the Cluster C3 connector.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
Disconnect the Left Heated Seat switch connector.

Measure the voltage of the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (RunStart) circuit at the Left Heated Seat Switch connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
CHECK THE (P81) LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Seat Lo Indicator Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P81) Left Heated Seat Lo Indicator Driver circuit for a short to ground
No
>> Go To 6
LX
6.
CHECK THE (P81) LEFT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P81) Left Heated Seat Lo Indicator

Driver circuit between the Cluster C3 connector and the Driver Heated
Yes

No
>> Repair the (P81) Left Heated Seat Lo Indicator Driver circuit for an open.
8G - 47
8G - 48
B121A-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8G - 49

Possible Causes
(P84) RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B121A-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH IS
ACTIVE

Does the DTC B121A-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
DISCONNECT THE RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH AND RE-READ DTC

Does the DTC B121A-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Right Heated Seat switch.

8G - 50
3.
Disconnect the Cluster C-3 connector.

Measure the voltage at the (P84) Right Heated Seat High Indicator
Driver circuit at the Cluster C-3 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P84) Right Heated Seat High Indicator Driver
circuit for a short to battery.
No

LX
LX
B121B-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
8G - 51
8G - 52
LX

control circuit.
Possible Causes
PDC FUSE #8
PDC FUSE #40
(P84) RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN/SHORTED TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B121B-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B121B-RIGHT HEATED SEAT HI INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
INSPECT PDC FUSES

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Measure the voltage at the (P84) Right Heated Seat High Indicator
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
Disconnect the Right Heated Seat switch connector.

Measure the voltage of the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (RunStart ) circuit at the Right Heated Seat Switch connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start )

8G - 53
8G - 54
5.
CHECK THE (P84) RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Seat High Indicator Driver circuit.
Yes
circuit for a short to ground
No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK THE (P84) RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P84) Right Heated Seat High Indicator
Driver circuit between the Cluster C3 connector and the Right Heated
Yes

No
LX
LX
B1222-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8G - 55
8G - 56
LX

Possible Causes
(P82) RIGHT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1222-RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH IS
ACTIVE

Does the DTC B1222-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
DISCONNECT THE PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH AND RE-READ DTC

Does the DTC B1222-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Right Heated Seat switch.

LX
3.

Measure the voltage at the (P82) Right Heated Seat Low Indicator
Yes
>> Repair the (P82) Right Heated Seat Low Indicator Driver
circuit for a short to battery.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/
FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No

8G - 57
8G - 58
B1223-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8G - 59

control circuit.
Possible Causes
PDC FUSE #8
PDC FUSE #40
(P82) RIGHT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN/SHORTED TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1223-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B1223-RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
INSPECT PDC FUSES

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8G - 60
3.
LX

Measure the voltage at the (P82) Right Heated Seat Low Indicator
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
Disconnect the Right Heated Seat switch connector.

Measure the voltage of the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit at
the Right Heated Seat Switch connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit for an
open.
5.
CHECK THE (P82) RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Seat Lo Indicator Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P82) Right Heated Seat Lo Indicator Driver circuit for a short to ground
No
>> Go To 6
LX
6.
CHECK THE (P82) RIGHT HEATED SEAT LO INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P82) Right Heated Seat Lo Indicator

Driver circuit between the Cluster C-3 connector and the Right Heated
Yes

No
>> Repair the (P82) Right Heated Seat Lo Indicator Driver circuit for an open.
8G - 61
8G - 62
LX

When Monitored:Engine running, during heated seat operation.
Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module receives a low charging system
voltage message over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage under 11.3 volts on the (A33) Fused B(+) circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLAGE LOW
(A33) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK PCM FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DTC
With the scan tool, read Powertrain Control Module DTCs.

Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the Powertrain
Control Module?
Yes
>> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHARGING - DIAGNOSIS AND

TESTING) for Charging System diagnostic procedures.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW IS ACTIVE

Turn the ignition switch to the Off position then start the engine and let run for one minute.
Does the DTC B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.

Start the engine and let idle.
Measure the voltage on the (A33) Fused B(+) circuit at the HSM connector and compare to voltage at the vehicle battery.
Is the voltage at the HSM connector the same as measured at
the battery?
Yes

No
>> Repair the (A33) Fused B(+) circuit as necessary.

8G - 63
8G - 64
LX

When Monitored:Engine running, during heated seat operation.
Set Condition:This code is set immediately after the Heated Seat Module receives a high charging system
voltage message over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage over 15 volts on the (A33) Fused B(+) circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLAGE HIGH
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the Powertrain
Control Module?
Yes
>> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHARGING - DIAGNOSIS AND

TESTING) for Charging System diagnostic procedures.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH IS ACTIVE

Turn the ignition switch to the Off position then start the engine and let run for one minute.
Attempt to operate the heated seats.
Does the DTC B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.

Measure the voltage on the (A33) Fused B(+) circuit at the HSM connector and compare to voltage at the vehicles battery.
Is the voltage at the HSM connector the same as measured at
the battery?
Yes

No

8G - 65
8G - 66
B221A-HEATED SEAT MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:Ignition on.
Set Condition:This code is set immediately if the Heated Seat Module internal self test fails.
Possible Causes
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B221A-HEATED SEAT MODULE INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B221A-HEATED SEAT MODULE INTERNAL reset?
Yes

No
LX
LX
U0019CAN B BUS HSM
8G - 67
8G - 68
LX
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
will set.
Possible Causes
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display U0019 CAN B BUS CIRCUIT?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
No
>> Go to 3
LX
3.

Measure the resistance of the (D55) Can B Bus (+) circuit between the
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Heated Seat Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
Measure the resistance of the (D54) Can B Bus () circuit between the
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Heated Seat Module connector.
Yes

No

8G - 69
8G - 70
LX

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

LX
8G - 71
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HFM

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

8G - 72
LX
test procedure.

test procedure.
HEATED SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX
8G - 73

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
HEATED SEAT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
HEATER-CUSHION PAD
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
HEATED SEAT ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
MODULE-HEATED SEATS
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
HEATED SEAT MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
SWITCH-HEATED SEAT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
HEATED SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8G - 74
LX

DESCRIPTION
WARNING: The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger
airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly, its related
components, or trim cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.
Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat trim covers not designated for the specific model being
repaired. Always use the correct seat trim cover specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat trim cover with an aftermarket trim cover.
Do not add a secondary trim cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
Vehicles with the heated seat option can be visually
identified by the two heated seat switches (1) located
in the center stack of the instrument panel. The
heated seat system allows the driver and front seat
passenger to select from two different levels of electrical seat heating (HI/LO). The heated seat system for
this vehicle includes the following major components,
which are described in further detail later in this section:
Heated Seat Elements - Four heated seat elements are used per vehicle. Two heated seat
elements are integral to each seat, one in the
seat back and the other in the seat cushion.
Heated Seat Module - One heated seat module
is used per vehicle. The Heated Seat Module is
mounted under the right front seat. This module
contains the control logic and software for the
front heated seat system. The module communicates on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data
bus.
Heated Seat Switches - Two heated seat switches are used per vehicle, one for each heated seat. Both
switches are mounted in the instrument panel center stack.
Instrument Cluster (CCN) - A Cab Compartment Node (CCN) is part of the instrument cluster on this vehicle.
The CCN utilizes integrated software and information carried on the CAN data bus. The CCN serves as the
link between the heated seat switches and the heated seat module.
OPERATION
The heated seat system operates on battery current received through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
Fused ignition switch output (run) circuits are used, so that the heated seat system will only operate when the ignition switch is in the On position. The heated seat system will turn Off automatically whenever the ignition switch is
turned to any position except On.
A Heated Seat Module is used to control the heated seat system. The module responds to heated seat switch
messages and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through
integral solid-state relays.
When either of the heated seat switches are depressed a resistance signal is sent to the Cab Compartment Node
(CCN) or instrument cluster. The CCN then sends a message via the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to the
LX
8G - 75
heated seat module, signaling the module to energize the heating element for the selected seat. Amber Light Emitting Diodes LEDS) in the top portion of each switch indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for
high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch once will select high-level heating. Pressing the switch a
second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the heating elements off.
The heated seat module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four
minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.
Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after two hours.
The module will automatically turn off the heating elements if it detects an OPEN or LOW short in the heating element circuit.

HEATED SEAT SYSTEM
In order to obtain conclusive testing, the heated seat system and the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit
must be checked. Any diagnosis of the heated seat system should begin with, the use of a scan tool and the
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the heated seat option utilize a low voltage cut-off feature. This feature turns
off power to the heated seat system anytime vehicle voltage is below 11.1v or above 15.5v. Be certain to
8G - 76
LX
HEATER-CUSHION PAD
DESCRIPTION
Vehicles equipped with the optional heated seat system have two, carbon fiber heated seat elements, located in
each front seat. One heating element is used for each seat cushion and another for each seat back.
Each of the heated seat element consists of multiple heating circuits operating in parallel throughout the carbon fiber
element. The heated seat elements are captured between the leather trim cover and the seat cushion assembly. If
a malfunction occurs in one or more of the individual carbon fiber circuits, the others will continue to provide heat.
The heated seat elements cannot be repaired. If found to be damaged or inoperative, a new heating element
assembly must be installed.
OPERATION
One end of the heated seat element is connected to ground at all times through a splice under the seat. Battery
current is directed to the other end of the heated seat element by the heated seat module. The heated seat module
will energize the heated seat element when the heated seat switch is depressed in the Low or High position.
As electrical current passes through the heated seat element, the resistance of the wire used in the element disperses some of the electrical current in the form of heat. The heat produced by the heated seat element then radiates through the underside of the seat cushion and seat back trim covers, warming the seat cover and its occupant.

HEATED SEAT ELEMENT
Refer to the appropriate wiring information for
complete circuit schematic or connector pin-out
information.
The wire harness connectors (2&3) for the heating
elements are located under the seat (1).
NOTE: When checking heated seat elements for
continuity, be certain to move the heating element
being checked. Moving the element, such as sitting in the seat will eliminate the possibility of an
intermittent open in the element which would only
be evident if the element was in a certain position.
Failure to check the element in various positions
could result in an incomplete test.
1. Locate and disconnect the seat electrical connector.
2. Check the resistance between the circuit leading in
and out of the suspect heated seat element. The
resistance should be between 3.8 - 4.8 ohms for a
seat cushion element and 4.3 - 5.4 ohms for a seat
back element. If OK, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
HEATED SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If not OK, replace the inoperative heated seat element.
LX
REMOVAL
NOTE: Do not remove the factory installed heating
elements (3) from the seat or seat back cushions.
The original element is permanently attached and
cannot be removed without permanent damage.
The replacement heating element is designed to
be applied directly on top of the inoperative factory installed heating element.
2. Remove the appropriate seat cushion, (Refer to 23
- BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER REMOVAL) or seat back trim cover, (Refer to 23 BODY/SEATS/SEAT BACK CUSHION / COVER REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the inoperative heated seat cushion or
seat back element electrical connectors (2).
4. Locate the wires leading from the inoperative heating element and cut them off flush with the edge of
the original heating element.
INSTALLATION
1. Peel off the adhesive backing on the back of the
replacement heating element (2) and stick directly
on top of the factory installed heating element (1).
CAUTION: During the installation of the replacement heating element, be careful not to fold or
crease the element assembly. Folds or creases will
cause premature failure.
8G - 77
8G - 78
2. Connect the new heating element electrical connectors (3&4).

4. Verify heated seat system operation.
5. Install the appropriate seat cushion, (Refer to 23 BODY/SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER - INSTALLATION) or seat back trim cover, (Refer to 23 BODY/SEATS/SEAT BACK CUSHION / COVER INSTALLATION).
NOTE: Make certain the seat wire harness is correctly routed through the seat and seat back. The
excess wire between the cushion and back elements should be securely tucked between the rear
of the cushion foam and the rear carpet flap of the
trim cover.
LX
LX
8G - 79
MODULE-HEATED SEATS
DESCRIPTION
The heated seat module (1) is located under the right
front seat. It has a single electrical connector (3) and
four locking tabs (2) that secure it to the floor cross
member. The module can be accessed through the
separation between the front and rear carpet assemblies.
The heated seat module is a microprocessor designed
to use Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus messages from the instrument cluster also known as the
Cabin Compartment Node (CCN). The CCN receives
inputs from the heated seat switches and in turn signals the heated seat module to operate the heated
seat elements for both front seats.
OPERATION
The heated seat module operates on fused battery current received from the ignition switch. The module is
grounded to the body at all times through the electrical connector. Inputs to the module include Controller Area
Network (CAN) data bus messages and standard hardwired 12volt power and ground. In response to the CAN
inputs the heated seat module will control the battery current to the appropriate heated seat elements.
When a heated seat switch CAN data bus signal is received by the heated seat module, the module energizes the
selected heated seat element. The Low heat set point is about 38C (100.4F), and the High heat set point is about
42C (107.6F).
If the heated seat module detects a heated seat element OPEN or SHORT circuit, it will record and store the appropriate diagnostic trouble code (DTC).

HEATED SEAT MODULE
8G - 80
REMOVAL
2. Remove the right front seat from the vehicle, (Refer
to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT - REMOVAL).
3. Reposition the front carpet assembly aside to gain
access to the heated seat module (1).
4. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the
heated seat module (1).
5. Unsnap the heated seat module retaining clips (2)
from the floor crossmember.
6. Remove the heated seat module (1) from the
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the heated seat module (3) in the vehicle.
2. Position the retaining clips (2) with the retaining
holes (1) in the floor cross member. Firmly apply
even pressure to the module (3) until all four retaining clips (2) snap into place.
LX
LX
3. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the
heated seat module (1).
4. Reposition the front carpet assembly to the original
position.
5. Install the right, front seat, (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT - INSTALLATION).
7. Check for proper heated seat system operation.
8G - 81
8G - 82
LX
SWITCH-HEATED SEAT
DESCRIPTION
The heated seat switches (1) are both mounted in the
instrument panel. The two switches are snapped into
mounting holes in the instrument panel center bezel.
The two heated seat switches are identical in appearance and construction.
Each heated seat switch provides a resistor-multiplexed signal to the Cab Compartment Node (CCN).
Amber Light Emitting Diodes LEDS) in the top portion
of each switch indicate the level of heat in use: Two
LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none
for off. Pressing the switch once will select high-level
heating. Pressing the switch a second time will select
low-level heating. Pressing the switch a third time will
shut the heating elements off.
The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are inoperative or damaged, or the switch is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch assembly must be replaced.
OPERATION
The heated seat switches receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. Depressing the heated seat switch provides a hard-wired resistor multiplexed signal
to the Cabin Compartment Node (CCN). The CCN is responsible for supplying the Controller Area Network (CAN)
data bus message to the heated seat module, signaling the module to power the heated seat element of the
selected seat and maintain the temperature setting.
If the heated seat switch is depressed to a different position (Low or High) than the currently selected state, the
CCN will go through the process again to change the temperature setting. If a heated seat switch is depressed a
second time to the same position as the currently selected state, the CCN and heated seat module interprets the
second input as a request to turn the seat heater OFF. The CCN will then signal the heated seat module to turn the
heated seat elements for that seat off.
LX
8G - 83

HEATED SEAT SWITCH
REMOVAL
2. Remove the ash receiver (1) from the instrument
panel, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/
ASH RECEIVER - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the heated seat switch connector (2)
from the heated seat switch (3).
4. From the back of the ash receiver (1), gently pry
the switch (3) free and push the heated seat switch
out through the front of the bezel.
INSTALLATION
1. From the front of the ash receiver (1), gently push
the heated seat switch (3) in through the front of
the bezel.
2. Connect the heated seat switch connector (2) onto
the heated seat switch (3).
3. Install the ash receiver (1) into the instrument
panel, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/
ASH RECEIVER - INSTALLATION).
5. Verify heated seat system operation.
HORN
LX
8H - 1
HORN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
HORN - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . 1
HORN SYSTEM- SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . 16
HORN - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

B2332HORN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B2336HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
B2337HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH

FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
B2338HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
FCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
8H - 2

LX
LX
B2332HORN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE
8H - 3
8H - 4
LX
Theory of Operation
The Horn Switch is connected to the Right Steering Switch. The switching status is transferred to the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) by way of the LIN bus, a serial sub-bus. The SCCM converts the data to CAN(B) and
sends the message to the corresponding module on the bus.
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Steering Column Control Module senses that the Horn Switch is in the Set position for greater than 50
seconds.
Possible Causes
INTERMITTENT HORN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE DTC
(X3) HORN SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X903) HORN SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
(X3) HORN SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
HORN SWITCH
RIGHT STEERING SWITCH
STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE (SCCM)
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE
NOTE: If P0562BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or P0563BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH is set along with this DTC,
diagnose the battery voltage DTC first.
Ignition on, engine not running.
With the Scan Tool, select View DTCs in the Steering Column Control Module.
Is the DTC status Active at this time?
Yes
>> Go to 2
No
>> Go to 7
2.
(X3) HORN SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X903) HORN SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT

Remove the Driver Airbag in accordance with the Service information.
Disconnect the Horn Switch harness connector.
Disconnect the Right Steering Switch harness connector.
NOTE: Before proceeding, thoroughly inspect the wiring harness
and connectors between the Horn Switch and the Right Steering
Switch for a short to ground or any other circuit.
Measure the resistance between the (X3) Horn Switch circuit and the
(X903) Horn Switch Return circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X3) Horn Switch circuit for a short to the (X903)
Horn Switch Return circuit.
Perform the VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
No
>> Go to 3
LX
3.
8H - 5
(X3) HORN SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE: Before proceeding, thoroughly inspect the wiring harness

and connectors between the Horn Switch and the Right Steering
Switch for a short to ground or to any other circuit.
Measure the resistance between the (X3) Horn Switch circuit at the harness connector to the Right Switch and ground (include the metal casing at the back side of the Airbag).
Yes
>> Repair the (X3) Horn Switch circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go to 4
4.
HORN SWITCH
Measure the resistance between the (X3) Horn Switch circuit and the
(X903) Horn Switch Return circuit at the harness connector to the horn
switch.
Yes
>> Replace the Horn Switch in accordance with the Service

Information.
No
>> Go to 5
5.
RIGHT STEERING SWITCH

Replace the Right Steering Switch in accordance with the Service Information.
NOTE: The C206 (LIN bus) connector must be connected for this test.
Press and release the Horn Switch several times.
With the Scan Tool, Clear Stored DTCs in the Steering Column Control Module.
With the Scan Tool, select Data Display and view the Horn switch data.
While monitoring the Horn switch data, press and release the Horn Switch several times.
Does the Horn switch data change from Set to Not Set when the switch is pressed and released?
Yes
>> Test Complete.
No
>> Go to 6
8H - 6
6.
View repair.
Repair
Replace the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) in accordance with the Service Information.
7.
INTERMITTENT HORN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE DTC
The conditions necessary to set this DTC are not present at this time.
Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, wiggle test the wiring and connectors.
Look for the data to change or for the DTC to reset during the wiggle test.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
LX
LX
B2336HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW FCM
8H - 7
8H - 8
LX
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module detects a shorted low condition on the Horn Relay Control circuit this DTC will
set.
Possible Causes
HORN FUSE
(A905) FUSED B(+) OPEN
RELAY
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Horn Switch several times.
Cycle the ignition from on to off 3 times and leave on.
Does the scan tool display B2336 HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
HORN FUSE
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the Horn fuse.
Does the test light illuminate and was the fuse OK?
No
>> Replace the horn fuse if open and check for a short to ground on the Horn Relay Output circuit or
correct the open B(+) circuit to the fuse.
Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8H - 9
OPEN (A905) FUSED B(+) TO RELAY
Remove the Horn Relay from the PDC.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the Fused B(+)
circuit at the relay connector.
Does the test light illuminate?
No
>> Replace the Power Distribution Center.

Yes
>> Go To 4
4.
HORN RELAY
Install a known good relay in place of the Horn Relay.

Does the scan tool display B2336 HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
No
>> Replace the original Horn Relay.

Yes
>> Go To 5
5.
(X4) HORN RELAY CONTROL SHORTED
Remove the Horn Relay.

Disconnect the Front Control Module from the PDC 49 way connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X4) Horn Relay
Control circuit at the relay.
Yes

No
>> Replace the Front Control Module.

8H - 10
B2337HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH FCM
LX
LX
8H - 11
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module detects excessive current on the Horn Relay Control circuit.
Possible Causes
HORN RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.

HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
HORN RELAY

Does the scan tool display B2337 HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
No

Yes
>> Go To 3
8H - 12
3.
SHORTED POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
Remove the Horn Relay.

Measure the voltage between (X4) Horn Relay Control circuit and
ground.
Yes

No

LX
LX
B2338HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN FCM
8H - 13
8H - 14
LX
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module does not detect voltage on the Horn Relay Control circuit.
Possible Causes
HORN FUSE
B(+) OPEN
RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.

OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
HORN FUSE
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the Horn fuse.
Does the test light illuminate and was the fuse OK?
No
>> Replace the horn fuse if open and check for a short to ground on the Horn Relay Output circuit or
correct the open B(+) circuit to the fuse.
Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8H - 15
OPEN FUSED B(+) TO RELAY
Remove the Horn Relay from the PDC.

circuit at the relay connector.
Does the test light illuminate?
No

Yes
>> Go To 4
4.
HORN RELAY

Does the scan tool display B2338 HORN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
No

Yes
>> Go To 5
5.
(X4)HORN RELAY CONTROL OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X4)Horn Relay Control circuit from the
relay connector to FCM connector.
Yes

No

8H - 16
HORN SYSTEM- SERVICE INFORMATION
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HORN SYSTEM . . . 17
HORN
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SWITCH-HORN
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
HORN SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LX
8H - 17

DESCRIPTION
The dual-note horn system features two electromagnetic horn units. The horn system includes the following major components:
Horn - The two horns are located behind the
grille below a trim cover.
Horn Switch - The horn switch is molded into
the driver airbag trim cover.
OPERATION
The horn system operates on battery current received through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The
horn system circuit is designed so that the system will remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HORN SYSTEM

The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the horn system requires the use of a scan
tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information.
In most cases, any problem involving continually sounding horns can be quickly alleviated by removing the horn
fuse from the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
PERSONAL INJURY.
8H - 18
HORN
REMOVAL
2. Remove cover above horn.
3. Disconnect electrical harness connector.
4. Remove mounting fastener and remove horn.
INSTALLATION
1. Position horn. Install and tighten mounting fasteners.
2. Connect electrical harness connector.
3. Install cover above horn.
LX
LX
8H - 19
SWITCH-HORN
DESCRIPTION
The horn switch is molded into the driver airbag cover. The horn switch can not be serviced separately. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER AIRBAG - REMOVAL).

HORN SWITCH
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the horn system requires the use of a scan
tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information.
PERSONAL INJURY.
IGNITION CONTROL
LX
8I - 1
IGNITION CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
IGNITION SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
IGNITION SYSTEM - SERVICE INFORMATION. . . 31
IGNITION SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
IGNITION SYSTEM - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
B2100-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT
CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B2104-IGNITION UNLOCK RUN/START
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B2105-IGNITION UNLOCK RUN/START
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
B211EIGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
B211FIGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL

CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
B2120IGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
B2122-IGNITION RUN CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
8I - 2

LX
LX
B2100-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
8I - 3
8I - 4
LX
When Monitored:
Anytime the ignition input is compared against the CAN B Bus ignition status message.
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will set this DTC if the CAN bus message and the hardwired ignition circuit do not
match.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE IGNITION RELATED FCM DTCS
(A106) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT OPEN
(F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
REAR PDC FUSE
IGNITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: If B2104 or B2105 are active, perform those tests first before proceeding.
NOTE: Check the rear PDC fuses. An open fuse can cause this DTC to set. If open refer to the wiring diagrams to help isolate a possible shorted circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Remove the Fuse 29 from the rear PDC.
Measure the voltage of the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit (input side of fuse).
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
LX
3.
8I - 5

NOTE: Check Fuse 29 and 8 in the rear PDC for an open.
Remove the FCM from the IPM.
NOTE: Install the fuse in the rear PDC.
Measure the voltage of the (F202) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (F202) Ignition Switch Output circuit for an open between the rear PDC and the IPM.
4.

NOTE: Check Fuse 8 in the rear PDC for an open.
Disconnect the Ignition Switch harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (A106) Fused B+ circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit for an
open between the Ignition Switch and the rear PDC. If ok,
replace the Ignition Switch in accordance with the service
information.
No
>> Repair the (A106) Fused B+ circuit for an open.

8I - 6
B2104-IGNITION UNLOCK RUN/START CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8I - 7
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will set this DTC within 500ms if the ignition unlock run/start circuit voltage is less
than the expected value.
Possible Causes
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
SHIFTER LEVER ASSEMBLY
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

8I - 8
3.
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (F902) Ignition Unlock
Run Start circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit for a
short to ground.
No

LX
LX
B2105-IGNITION UNLOCK RUN/START CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8I - 9
8I - 10
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on or off and with the FCM awake.
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will set this DTC within 2 seconds if the ignition unlock run/start circuit voltage is not
what the expected value should be.
Possible Causes
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT OPEN
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds then turn the ignition
off.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on then back to off.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the off position when performing the following step.
Using a 12volt test light connected to ground, check the (F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit for a
short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

With the test light still connected from the previous step, check the
(F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(F902) IGNITION UNLOCK RUN START CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit
between the Shifter Lever Assembly and the FCM-PDM connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (F902) Ignition Unlock Run Start circuit for an
open.
8I - 11
8I - 12
B211EIGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8I - 13
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will set this DTC within 500ms if the (P307) Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit is
open or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
(P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Install a substitute relay in place of the original Accessory Delay Relay.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the original Accessory Delay Relay.

8I - 14
3.

Remove the Accessory Delay Relay from the Rear Power Distribution
Module.
Measure the resistance of the Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit
from the Front Control Module PDM connector to the Relay connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit for an

open.
4.
(P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P307) Accessory

Delay Relay Control circuit at the relay cavity (85).
Yes
>> Repair the (P307) Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit for
a short to ground.
No

LX
LX
B211FIGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8I - 15
8I - 16
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
shorted to voltage.
Possible Causes
(P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.
(P307) ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Module.
Measure the voltage of the (P307) Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit at the relay connector (cavity 85).
Yes
>> Repair the (P307) Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit for
a short to voltage.
No

circuits. If OK, replace and program the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
LX
B2120IGNITION RUN/ACC/PAD CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
8I - 17
8I - 18
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
open.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.

Module.
Measure the resistance of the Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit
from the Front Control Module PDM connector to the relay connector.
No
>> Repair the Accessory Delay Relay Control circuit for an

open.
Yes

circuits. If OK, replace and program the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
8I - 19
8I - 20
B2122-IGNITION RUN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8I - 21
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module will set this DTC within 500ms if the (F921) or (F923) Run Relay Control circuit
voltage is open or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
(F921) or (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND
RUN RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
RUN RELAY

Install a substitute Run Relay in place of the original Run Relay.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the original Run Relay.

8I - 22
3.
(F921) or (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Remove the Run Relay from the Rear Power Distribution Module.
NOTE: This circuit contains a diode. When checking resistance of
this circuit the red ohmmeter lead must be connected to the Run
Relay cavity (85) and the black ohmmeter lead must be connected
to the FCMPDM connector.
NOTE: Ensure the diode is installed correctly in the Rear Power
Distribution Module.
Measure the resistance of the Run Relay Control circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the Run Relay Control circuit for an open.

4.
(F921) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
NOTE: This circuit contains a diode. When checking for a short to

ground you must check both sides of the diode.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (F921) Run Relay
Control circuit at the Run Relay cavity (85).
Yes
>> Repair the (F921) Run Relay Control circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8I - 23

Control circuit at the FCMPDM connector.
Yes
ground.
No

8I - 24
B2123-IGNITION RUN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8I - 25
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
voltage is shorted to voltage.
Possible Causes
(F921) or (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
RUN RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
RUN RELAY

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.
(F921) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

voltage you must check both sides of the diode.
Measure the voltage of the (F921) Run Relay Control circuit at the Run
Relay cavity (85).
Yes
voltage.
No
>> Go To 4
8I - 26
4.
(F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

voltage you must check both sides of the diode.
Measure the voltage of the (F923) Run Relay Control circuit at the
FCMPDM connector.
Yes
voltage.
No

LX
LX
B2124-IGNITION RUN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
8I - 27
8I - 28
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
voltage is open or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
(F921) or (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND
RUN RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
RUN RELAY

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
(F921) or (F923) RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

NOTE: This circuit contains a diode. When checking resistance of
this circuit the red ohmmeter lead must be connected to the run
relay cavity (85) and the black ohmmeter lead must be connected
to the FCMPDM connector.
Measure the resistance of the Run Relay Control circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the Run Relay Control circuit for an open.

4.

Control circuit at the Run Relay cavity (85).
Yes
ground.
No
>> Go To 5
8I - 29
8I - 30
5.

Control circuit at the FCMPDM connector.
Yes
ground.
No

LX
LX
IGNITION SYSTEM - SERVICE INFORMATION
8I - 31

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION
IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
OPERATION - IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SPARK PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION
REMOVAL
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
INSTALLATION
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
COIL-IGNITION
REMOVAL
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.7/6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
INSTALLATION
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.7/6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CAPACITOR-IGNITION COIL
REMOVAL
2.7/3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
INSTALLATION
2.7/3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SWITCH-IGNITION
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CYLINDER-IGNITION KEY AND LOCK
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
SENSOR-KNOCK
REMOVAL
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
INSTALLATION
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
PLUG-GLOW
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
RELAY-GLOW PLUG
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GLOW PLUG
RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
PLUG-SPARK
DESCRIPTION - PLATINUM PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
REMOVAL
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.7L/6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
INSTALLATION
2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.7L/6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8I - 32
LX

DESCRIPTION
IGNITION SYSTEM
NOTE: All engines use a fixed ignition timing system. Basic ignition timing is not adjustable. All spark
advance is determined by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
The ignition system used on these engines is referred to as the Direct Ignition System (DIS). The systems three
main components are the coils, crankshaft position sensor, and camshaft position sensor. If equipped with the coil
on plug ignition system it utilizes an ignition coil for every cylinder, it is mounted directly over the each spark plug.
OPERATION - IGNITION SYSTEM

The crankshaft position sensor and camshaft position sensor are hall effect devices. The camshaft position sensor
and crankshaft position sensor generate pulses that are inputs to the PCM. The PCM determines engine position
from these sensors. The PCM calculates injector sequence and ignition timing from crankshaft & camshaft position.
For a description of both sensors, refer to Camshaft Position Sensor and Crankshaft Position Sensor.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
Camshaft Position Sensor

- 2.7L
12
105

- 3.5L
12
105
12
105
Crankshaft Position
Sensor - 2.7L
12
105
Crankshaft Position
Sensor - 3.5L
12
105
12
105
Ignition Coil Mounting 2.7L
6.2
55
Ignition Coil Mounting 3.5L
6.7
60
Ignition Coil Mounting 5.7L V-8 Engine
12
105 ( 20)
Ignition Coil Mounting 6.1L V-8 Engine
6-8
53 - 71 in. lbs.
Knock Sensor - 2.7L
10
83
Knock Sensor - 3.5L
20
15.2
* Knock Sensor - 5.7/6.1L

V-8 Engine
20
15
176
Spark Plugs - 2.7L
17
150
Spark Plugs - 3.5L
28
20
** Spark Plugs - 5.7L V-8

Engine
18 ( 3)
13 ( 2)

- 5.7L V-8 Engine
Crankshaft Position
Sensor - 5.7L V-8 Engine
LX
DESCRIPTION
Nm
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
** Spark Plugs - 6.1L V-8

Engine
15 - 20
11 - 15
Capacitor Nut
12
8.8
106
* Do not apply any

sealant, thread-locker or
adhesive to bolts. Poor
sensor performance may
result.
** Torque critical tapered
design. Do not exceed 15
ft. lbs.
SPARK PLUGS
ENGINE
PLUG TYPE
ELECTRODE GAP
2.7L
RE10PMC5
0.048 TO 0.058 in.
3.5L
ZFR5LP-13G
0.048 TO 0.058 in.
5.7L Hemi V-8
Champion - RE14MCC4
1.14 mm (0.045 in.)
6.1L Hemi V-8
NGK PLZTR5A-13
1.3 mm (0.050 in.)
8I - 33
8I - 34
SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION
REMOVAL
2.7L
2. Unlock and disconnect electrical connector.
3. Remove mounting bolt.

4. Remove sensor.
LX
LX
3.5L
1. Camshaft Position Sensor location.
3. Unlock electrical connector.

4. Remove electrical connector.
8I - 35
8I - 36
5. Remove mounting bolt.

6. Remove sensor.
5.7L
The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) on the 5.7L V-8
engine (1) is bolted to the front/top of the timing chain
cover (2).
1. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor.
2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3).
3. Carefully twist sensor from timing chain cover.
4. Check condition of sensor o-ring.
LX
LX
6.1L
The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) on the 6.1L V-8
engine (1) is bolted to the front/top of the timing chain
cover (2).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor.

Remove sensor mounting bolt (3).
Carefully twist sensor from timing chain cover.
Check condition of sensor o-ring.
INSTALLATION
2.7L
1. Install sensor.
2. Install mounting bolt.
3. Tighten bolt to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.).
8I - 37
8I - 38
4. Connect electrical connector and lock.

3.5L
1. Install new spacer to sensor if installing the old
sensor or new sensor will have the spacer
installed.
LX
LX
2. Install sensor and insert until sensor makes contact
with tone wheel.
3. Install mounting bolt.
4. Tighten mounting bolt to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.).
5. Install electrical connector.

6. Lock connector.
8I - 39
8I - 40
5.7L
1. Clean out machined hole in timing chain cover.
2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor
o-ring.
3. Install sensor (1) into timing chain cover (2) with a
slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to o-ring may result.
CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt,
be sure sensor is completely flush to timing chain
cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor
mounting tang may result.
4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (105
in. lbs.)
5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor.
6.1L
1. Clean out machined hole in timing chain cover.
2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor
o-ring.
3. Install sensor (1) into timing chain cover (2) with a
slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to o-ring may result.
CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt,
be sure sensor is completely flush to timing chain
cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor
mounting tang may result.
4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (105
in. lbs.)
5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor.
LX
LX
COIL-IGNITION
REMOVAL
2.7L
2. Remove the intake manifold, (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - REMOVAL)
3. Prior to removing the ignition coils, spray compressed air around the coil area and spark plug.
4. Remove electrical connector from ignition coil.

5. Remove 2 fasteners from ignition coil assembly.
6. Remove ignition coil assembly.
8I - 41
8I - 42
3.5L
3. Prior to removing the ignition coils, spray compressed air around the coil area.
4. Unlock and remove electrical connector from ignition coil.
On 3.5L engines, it is necessary to loosen the screws

by alternating back and forth. Do not lose the spacers
under the coil when loosening the screws.
5. Remove 2 fasteners from ignition coil assembly.
6. Remove ignition coil assembly.
LX
LX
5.7/6.1L
A separate ignition coil (1), mounted to the valve cover
is used for each cylinder. Each coil fires the two spark
plugs at times predetermined by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
1. Unlock electrical connector (1) by pressing on tab

while pulling electrical connector from coil.
2. Remove two coil mounting bolts (3).
8I - 43
8I - 44
3. Carefully pull up coil from cylinder head opening

with a slight twisting action. Twisting will help break
loose boots (1) from spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
2.7L
1. Install ignition coil assembly to spark plug.
2. Install coil screws and tighten: 2.7L engine to 6.2
Nm (55 in. lbs.).
3. Connect the electrical connector and lock.
LX
LX
4. Install the intake manifold, (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - INSTALLATION)
3.5L
On 3.5L engines, it is necessary to tighten the screws
under the coil when installing ignition coils.
1. Install ignition coil assembly to spark plug.
2. Install coil screws and tighten 3.5L engines to 6.7
Nm (60 in. lbs.).
3. Connect the electrical connector and lock.
8I - 45
8I - 46

5.7/6.1L
1. Before installing coil(s), apply dielectric grease to
inside of spark plug boots (1).
LX
LX
2. Position ignition coil into valve cover and push both
spark plug boots onto each spark plug.
3. Install two coil mounting bolts (3) and tighten to 12
Nm (105 in. lbs.).
4. Connect electrical connector (1) to coil and lock
connector.
8I - 47
8I - 48
CAPACITOR-IGNITION COIL
REMOVAL
2.7/3.5L
1. Remove the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove nut and capacitor.
6.1L
The ignition capacitor (1) is attached to the left-rear
corner of the intake manifold (3).
1. Remove electrical connector (2).
2. Remove mounting nut (4) and remove capacitor.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
2.7/3.5L
1. Install capacitor and tighten nut.
2. Attach electrical connector to capacitor.
3. Install the negative battery cable.
6.1L
1. Install sensor (1) to mounting stud.
2. Install and tighten nut (4).
3. Install electrical connector (2).
8I - 49
8I - 50
LX
SWITCH-IGNITION
REMOVAL
The ignition switch attaches to the lock cylinder housing on the end opposite the lock cylinder. For ignition switch
terminal and circuit identification, refer to the Wiring Diagrams section.
1. Disconnect negative cable from battery.
2. Remove the Instrument Panel Center Bezel, (Refer
to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/CLUSTER
BEZEL - REMOVAL) Chrysler and (Refer to 23 BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/CLUSTER BEZEL REMOVAL) Dodge.
3. Bezel cluster removed.
LX
4. Remove side trim panel to steering column cover.
5. Remove the screws that secure the steering column cover to the instrument panel and relocate
panel.
6. Pull the steering column cover rearward at the top
and right side of the cover to release the snap
retainers from the instrument panel.
7. Remove the screws that secure the instrument
panel steering column cover reinforcement to
bracket and remove reinforcement from the vehicle.
8I - 51
8I - 52
8. Remove the 2 front mounting nuts.
9. Remove the lower mounting nut.
10. Slide the assembly rearward into the instrument

panel and down to gain access to switch.
LX
LX
11. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ignition Switch and SKREEM Module.
12. Remove the interlock cable by depressing the

locking tab and pulling straight out.
8I - 53
8I - 54
LX
13. Interlocking cable removed.
14. Remove ignition switch mounting screw.

15. Squeeze the 2 locking tabs to remove ignition
switch from the lockhousing.
1
2
3
4
Ignition Key Housing

Ignition Switch
Ignition Switch Mounting Screws
Locking Tabs
INSTALLATION
The ignition switch attaches to the lock cylinder housing on the end opposite the lock cylinder. For ignition switch
terminal and circuit identification, refer to the Wiring Diagrams section.
LX
1. A tab on the ignition switch indexes to a notch in
the lock cylinder housing. Also, a slot in the end of
the ignition switch fits over the shaft in the end of
the lock cylinder housing. Use the ignition key to
rotate the lock cylinder to align the ignition switch
with lock cylinder housing. Insert ignition switch into
lock housing until locking tabs are seated into
openings on lock housing.
2. Install ignition switch mounting screw.
3. Install the interlock cable into the switch assembly.
8I - 55
8I - 56
4. Attach electrical connector to SKREEM Module.
5. Install switch assembly into Instrument Panel.
6. Attach electrical connector to ignition switch.
LX
LX
7. Tighten the 2 mounting nuts.
8. Tighten the lower mounting nut.
9. Install steering column reinforcement.
8I - 57
8I - 58
10. Steering column reinforcement installed.
11. Install the Steering column reinforcement cover.

12. Install trim panel end.
13. Install the Bezel cluster.
LX
LX
14. Install the ignition switch bezel ring.
15. Connect the negative battery cable.
8I - 59
8I - 60
CYLINDER-IGNITION KEY AND LOCK

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.

Remove bezel ignition switch ring.
Pull center console bezel loose from instrument panel.
Insert ignition key and turn to the ON position.
Depress the locking tab on the ignition switch
housing.
6. Pull the key cylinder from the ignition switch housing.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Install key in lock cylinder. Turn key to ON position (retaining tab on lock cylinder can be
depressed).
2. The shaft at the end of the lock cylinder aligns with
the socket in the end of the housing. To align the
socket with the lock cylinder, ensure the socket is
in the ON position.
3. Align the lock cylinder with the grooves in the
housing. Slide the lock cylinder into the housing
until the tab sticks through the opening in the
housing.
4. Turn key to Off position and remove key.
8I - 61
8I - 62
5. Install center console bezel to instrument panel.

6. Install bezel ignition switch ring.
LX
LX
SENSOR-KNOCK
REMOVAL
2.7L
The sensors screws into the cylinder block, directly
below the intake manifold.
2. Remove intake manifold, (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
3. Remove the passenger side cylinder head, refer to
the Engine section (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/CYLINDER HEAD - REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect electrical connector from knock sensor.
5. Use a crows foot socket to remove the knock
sensors.
3.5L
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the upper intake manifold, (Refer to 9 ENGINE/MANIFOLDS/INTAKE
MANIFOLD
REMOVAL)
8I - 63
8I - 64
4. Remove the knock sensor.
5.7L
Two sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is bolted to
the outside of cylinder block below the exhaust manifold (3).
1. Raise vehicle.
2. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5).
3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip
on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the
bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used
as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or
thread locking compound to these bolts.
4. Remove sensor from engine.
LX
LX
6.1L
Two knock sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is
bolted to the outside of cylinder block below the
exhaust manifold (3).
1. Raise vehicle.
2. Remove heat shield (1) from knock sensor. Shield

snaps to sensor.
8I - 65
8I - 66
3. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5).

4. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip
on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the
bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used
as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or
thread locking compound to these bolts.
5. Remove sensor from engine.
INSTALLATION
2.7L
The sensors screws into the cylinder block, directly
below the intake manifold.
1. Install knock sensor. Tighten knock sensor to 10
Nm (7 ft. lbs.) torque. Over or under tightening
effects knock sensor performance resulting in
possible improper spark control.
2. Attach electrical connector to knock sensor.
3. Install the passenger side cylinder head, (Refer to
9 - ENGINE/CYLINDER HEAD - INSTALLATION)
4. Install intake manifold, (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/MANIFOLDS/INTAKE MANIFOLD - INSTALLATION)
5. connect negative battery cable.
LX
LX
3.5L
1. Install knock sensor. Tighten knock sensor to 20
Nm (15.2 in. lbs.) torque. Over or under tightening effects knock sensor performance, possibly
causing improper spark control.
2. Route the knock sensor wire in the proper location.

8I - 67
8I - 68
4. Connect electrical connector.

5.7L
1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole.
2. Install sensor (1) into cylinder block.
NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance,
possibly causing improper spark control. Always
use the specified torque when installing the knock
sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is
relatively light for an 8mm bolt.
NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam
is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for
plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not
apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking
compound to these bolts.
3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Refer to
torque specification.
4. Install electrical connector to sensor.
LX
LX
6.1L
1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole.
2. Install sensor (1) onto cylinder block.
NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance,
possibly causing improper spark control. Always
use the specified torque when installing the knock
sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is
relatively light for an 8mm bolt.
NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam
is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for
plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not
apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking
compound to these bolts.
3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Refer to
torque specification.
4. Install electrical connector (5) to sensor.
5. Install heat shield (1) to sensor (shield snaps on).
8I - 69
8I - 70
LX
PLUG-GLOW
DESCRIPTION
Glow plugs are used to help start a cold or cool
engine. The glow plugs will heat up and glow to heat
the combustion chamber of each cylinder. An individual glow plug is used for each cylinder. Each glow
plug is threaded into the side of the cylinder head
below the cylinder head cover.
OPERATION
The glow plugs are used to preheat the combustion chambers in order to achieve the ignition temperature required
for the fuel-air mixture.
The glow plug consists of a housing with a female thread and an interference-fit rod. The heating element is integrated in the glow rod. It consists of a heating winding and a control winding connected in series.
When the glow plug system is switched ON, a current of about 30 ampere flows to each glow plug. The heating
winding heats the glow plug. The control winding increases its resistance as the temperature rises and limits the
current to approximately 15-25 ampere. The glow plug is protected this way from overloads.
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Engine temperature must be at least 90C (194F) before removing glow plugs. If cylinder head is
already removed, warm cylinder head to 90C (194F) before removing glow plugs.
2. Remove engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect glow plug electrical connector (1).
WARNING: Risk of injury to skin and eyes from handling hot or glowing objects. Wear protective gloves,
clothing and eye wear.
4. Remove glow plugs and clean glow plug bay.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clean glow plug bay and install glow plug. Tighten glow plugs to 12 Nm (106 lbs. in.).
Connect glow plug electrical connector (1).
Install engine cover (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - INSTALLATION).
LX
8I - 71
RELAY-GLOW PLUG
DESCRIPTION
There are two glow plug relays. These relays are located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine
compartment.
OPERATION
When the ignition (key) switch is place in the ON position, a signal is sent to the ECM relating current engine coolant temperature. This signal is sent from the engine coolant temperature sensor.
After receiving this signal, the ECM will determine if, when and for how long of a period the glow plug relays should
be activated. This is done before, during and after the engine is started. Whenever the glow plug relays are activated, it will control the 12 volt 100 amp circuit for the operation of the four glow plugs. Each relay control two glow
plugs.
The Glow Plug lamp is tied to this circuit. Lamp operation is also controlled by the ECM.
With a cold engine, the glow plug relays and glow plugs may be activated for a maximum time of 200 seconds.
Refer to the following Glow Plug Control chart for a temperature/time comparison of the glow plug relay operation.
In this chart, Pre-Heat and Post-Heat times are mentioned. Pre-Heat is the amount of time the glow plug relay
control circuit is activated when the ignition (key) is switched ON, without the engine running. Post-Heat is the
amount of time the glow plug relay control circuit is activated after the engine is operated. The Glow Plug lamp will
not be activated during the post-heat cycle.
Engine Coolant
Temperature 9Key ON9
Wait-To Start Lamp 9ON9

(Seconds)
Pre-Heat Cycle (Glow

Plugs On Seconds)
Post-Heat Cycle
(Seconds)
-30C
20 SEC.
35 SEC.
200 SEC.
-10C
8 SEC.
23 SEC.
180 SEC.
+10C
6 SEC.
21 SEC.
160 SEC.
+30C
5 SEC.
20 SEC.
140 SEC.
+40C
4 SEC.
19 SEC.
70 SEC.
+70C
1 SEC.
16 SEC.
20 SEC.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GLOW PLUG RELAYS

Refer to the appropriate Diesel Powertrain Diagnosis Manual for information on diagnosing the glow plug relays.
8I - 72
LX
PLUG-SPARK
DESCRIPTION - PLATINUM PLUGS
The V6 engines use platinum resistor spark plugs. They have resistance values of 6,000 to 20,000 ohms when
checked with at least a 1000 volt tester. For spark plug identification and specifications, Refer to the Specifications
section.
Do not use an ohm meter to check the resistance of the spark plugs. This will give an inaccurate reading.
When the spark plugs use a single or double platinum tips and they have a recommended service life of 100,000
miles for normal driving conditions per schedule A in this manual. The spark plugs have a recommended service life
of 75,000 miles for severe driving conditions per schedule B in this manual. A thin platinum pad is welded to both
or just the center electrode end(s). Extreme care must be used to prevent spark plug cross threading, mis-gapping
and ceramic insulator damage during plug removal and installation.
CAUTION: Cleaning of the platinum plug may damage the platinum tip.
LX
8I - 73
REMOVAL
2.7L
Always remove the ignition coil assembly by grasping
at the spark plug boot, turning the assembly 1/2 turn
and pulling straight back in a steady motion.
3. Prior to removing the ignition coils, spray compressed air around the coil area and spark plug or
contaminates from spark plug tube..
4. Remove the ignitions coil.
5. Remove the spark plug using a quality socket with
a rubber or foam insert.
6. Inspect the spark plug condition.
3.5L
Always remove the ignition coil assembly by grasping
at the spark plug boot, turning the assembly 1/2 turn
and pulling straight back in a steady motion.
3. Prior to removing the ignition coils, spray compressed air around the coil area and spark plug or
contaminates from spark plug tube..
4. Remove the ignitions coil.
5. Remove the spark plug using a quality socket with
a rubber or foam insert.
6. Inspect the spark plug condition.
5.7L/6.1L
Each individual spark plug is located under each ignition coil. Each individual ignition coil must be removed to gain
access to each spark plug. Refer to Ignition Coil Removal/Installation.
1. Remove necessary air filter tubing at throttle body.
2. Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head.
3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign
material from entering combustion chamber.
4. Remove spark plug from cylinder head using a quality socket with a rubber or foam insert. Also check condition
of ignition coil o-ring and replace as necessary.
5. Inspect spark plug condition.
8I - 74
LX
INSTALLATION
2.7L
1. To avoid cross threading, start the spark plug into
the cylinder head by hand.
2. Tighten spark plugs. Tighten to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.
lbs.).
3. Install ignition coil assembly onto spark plug.
4. Hand tighten coil screws.
5. Tighten ignition coil screws to 6.7 Nm (60 in. lbs.).
6. Connect and lock the electrical connector.
3.5L
1. To avoid cross threading, start the spark plug into
the cylinder head by hand.
2. Tighten spark plugs. Tighten to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.).
3. Install ignition coil assembly onto spark plug.
4. Hand tighten coil screws.
5. Tighten ignition coil screws to 6.7 Nm (60 in. lbs.).
6. Connect and lock the electrical connector.
5.7L/6.1L
Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs
do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged.
Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the
spark plug gap or a cracked porcelain insulator.
1. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading.
2. Tighten spark plugs. Refer to torque specifications.
3. Before installing ignition coil(s), check condition of coil o-ring and replace as necessary. To aid in coil installation,
apply silicone to coil o-ring.
4. Install ignition coil(s). Refer to Ignition Coil Removal/Installation.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
LX
8J - 1
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - SERVICE

INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
B1200-AIRBAG WARNING INDICATOR
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B1202-AIRBAG WARNING INDICATOR
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
B1225-REAR WIPER INDICATOR CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
B1226-REAR WIPER INDICATOR CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
B160A-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
B160B-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
B1613-PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
B1614-PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
B1694-ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
B1695-ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
B2107-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
B2213CCN INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
U0019CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SCCM-CAN-B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
8J - 2

LX
LX
8J - 3
B1200-AIRBAG WARNING INDICATOR CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
With the ignition on and when requested to turn on by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
Set Condition:
The Instrument Cluster software detects the voltage across the Airbag Lamp is below 0.5 volts when ON.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: The Instrument Cluster performs internal tests on the Airbag Lamp during each ignition cycle.
With
Turn
Wait
With
the scan tool, erase DTCs.

the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on.
for the Instrument Cluster to perform the bulb check.
the scan tool, read DTCs.
Is the DTC active?

Yes
>> Replace and program the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Test complete.
8J - 4
LX
B1202-AIRBAG WARNING INDICATOR CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
With the ignition on and when requested to turn on by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
Set Condition:
The Instrument Cluster software detects the voltage across the Airbag Lamp is above 4.0 volts when ON.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: The Instrument Cluster performs internal tests on the Airbag Lamp during each ignition cycle.
Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition on.
Wait for the Instrument Cluster to perform the bulb check.
Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Replace and program the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Test complete.
LX
B1225-REAR WIPER INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8J - 5
8J - 6
LX
When Monitored:
Ignition Run-Start transition to on.
Set Condition:
Rear Wiper Output status HIGH.
Possible Causes
(W213) REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
SWITCH BANK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Activate the rear wiper switch.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
by inspecting the related wiring harness for chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also
2.
CHECK THE (W213) REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Disconnect the Instrument Cluster C3 harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W213) Rear Wiper Indicator Driver Circuit between the Instrument Cluster Harness connector and the Switch
Bank harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (W213) Rear Wiper Indicator Driver Circuit for
an open.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE REAR WIPER SWITCH

Reconnect the Switch Bank harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (W213) Rear Wiper Indicator Driver Circuit
at the Instrument Cluster C3 harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Replace the Switch Bank in accordance with the service

information.
8J - 7
8J - 8
B1226-REAR WIPER INDICATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8J - 9
When Monitored:
Ignition Run-Start transition to on.
Set Condition:
Rear Wiper Output status LOW.
Possible Causes
(W213) REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
SWITCH BANK
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (W213) REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect Switch Bank harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (W213) Rear Wiper Indicator Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W213) Rear Wiper Indicator Driver circuit for a
short to voltage.
No
8J - 10
B160A-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8J - 11
When Monitored:
With the Instrument Cluster awake.
Set Condition:
Panel Dimmer Input less than 0.5 volts.
Possible Causes
(E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
HEADLAMP SWITCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Activate the Panel Dimmer Switch.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK OPERATION OF HEADLAMP SWITCH
Disconnect the Headlamp Switch harness connector.

With the scan tool, read Instrument Cluster DTCs.
Does the scan tool display-B160B-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Replace the Headlamp Switch in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
8J - 12
3.
CHECK THE (E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (E2) Panel Lamps
Dimmer Signal Circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (E2) Panel Lamps Dimmer Signal Circuit for a
short to ground.
No
LX
LX
B160B-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8J - 13
8J - 14
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Panel Dimmer Input greater than 4.8 volts.
Possible Causes
(E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(L900) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(L900) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
(E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
HEADLAMP SWITCH
Diagnostic Test
1.

Activate the Panel Dimmer Switch.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT, AND THE (L900) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX
RETURN CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Using a test light, measure for voltage on the (E2) Panel Lamps Dimmer Signal circuit.
Using a test light, measure for voltage on the (L900) Headlamp Switch
MUX Return circuit.
Is voltage present on the E2 or L900 circuit?
Yes
>> Repair the E2 or the L900 for a short to voltage.

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH
Connect a jumper wire at the Headlamp Switch harness connector

between the (E2) Panel Lamps Dimmer Signal circuit and the (L900)
Headlamp Switch MUX Return circuit.
Does the Scan tool display-B160A-PANEL DIMMER INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (L900) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (L900) Headlamp Switch MUX Return
circuit between the Instrument Cluster C2 harness connector and the
Headlamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (L900) Headlamp Switch MUX Return circuit for
an open.
No
>> Go To 5
8J - 15
8J - 16
5.
CHECK THE (E2) PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (E2) Panel Lamps Dimmer Signal circuit
between the Instrument Cluster C1 harness connector and the Headlamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (E2) Panel Lamps Dimmer Signal circuit for an
open.
No
LX
LX
B1613-PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8J - 17
8J - 18
LX
When Monitored:
With the Ignition on, and the Panel Illumination active.
Set Condition:
Panel Illumination Status HIGH.
Possible Causes
(E12) PANEL LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
HEADLAMP SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
CLOCK MODULE SHORTED TO GROUND
PRNDL LAMP SHORTED TO GROUND
SWITCH BANK SHORTED TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Activate the Panel Illumination.
Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE SWITCH BANK FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Switch Bank harness connector.
Does the scan tool display-B1614PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes

information.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Driver Heated Seat Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Driver Heated Seat Switch in accordance with

No
>> Go To 5
8J - 19
8J - 20
5.
CHECK THE PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Passenger Heated Seat Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Passenger Heated Seat Switch in accordance

No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK THE CLOCK MODULE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Clock Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Clock Module in accordance with the service

information.
No
>> Go To 7
LX
LX
7.
CHECK THE PRNDL LAMP FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the PRNDL Lamp harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the PRNDL Lamp in accordance with the service

information.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
CHECK THE (E12) PANEL LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

With all the above components disconnected, measure the resistance
to ground of the (E12) Panel Lamps Driver Circuit from the Instrument
Cluster C3 harness connector.
Is the resistance less than 10K ohms?
Yes
>> Repair the (E12) Panel Lamps Driver circuit for a short to
ground.
No
8J - 21
8J - 22
B1614-PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8J - 23
When Monitored:
With the Ignition on, and the Panel Illumination not active.
Set Condition:
Panel Illumination status HIGH.
Possible Causes
(E12) PANEL LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Wait 30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK (E12) PANEL LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (E12) Panel Lamps Driver Circuit
between the Instrument Cluster C3 harness connector and the Headlamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (E12) Panel Lamps Driver Circuit for an open.
No
8J - 24
B1694-ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8J - 25
When Monitored:
Indicator Dimming Signal active. ATC not present.
Set Condition:
Indicator Dimmer Signal Output status LOW.
Possible Causes
(E22) INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Activate the Accessory Dimming.
Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK (E22) INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the A/C Heater Control C1 (MTC) harness connector.
Check the voltage on the (E22) Indicator Dimmer Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (E22) Indicator Dimmer Signal circuit for a short
to voltage.
No
8J - 26
B1695-ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8J - 27
When Monitored:
Ignition Run/Start transition to on, and ATC not present.
Set Condition:
Input Dimmer Signal Output status HIGH.
Possible Causes
(E22) INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (E22) INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (E22) Indicator Dimmer Signal Circuit
between the Instrument Cluster C3 Harness connector and the Switch
Bank harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (E22) Indicator Dimmer Signal Circuit for an

open.
No
8J - 28
B2107-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
8J - 29
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Ignition switch in RUN or START, and Ignition RUN/START LOW. Ignition Switch in LOCK or UNLOCK, and
Ignition RUN/START HIGH.
Possible Causes
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH FUSES
(F202) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) OPEN
IGNITION SWITCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Wait
With

the ignition on.
the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK PDC FUSES
Inspect PDC fuses #8, and #29 in the PDC.

Yes
>> Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for a short to ground
condition.
No
>> Go To 3
8J - 30
3.
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE ON THE (F202) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT

Measure the voltage of the (F202) Fused Ignition Switch Output (RunStart) circuit.
Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (F202, F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (F202, F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output
(Run-Start) circuit between the Instrument Cluster C3 harness connector and the Ignition Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (F202, F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output (RunStart) circuit for an open.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
CHECK THE (A106) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the voltage on the (A106) Fused B+ circuit at the Ignition

Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Ignition Switch in accordance with the service

information.
No

8J - 31
8J - 32
B2108-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8J - 33
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Ignition Switch Sense circuit voltage less than .3 volts.
Possible Causes
(G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
(G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (G900) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT
IGNITION SWITCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Wait
With

the ignition on.
the scan tool, record and erase DTCs.
30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK OPERATION OF IGNITION SWITCH

Connect a jumper wire between Ignition Switch harness connector cavities 3 and 5.
NOTE: This will provide power to the vehicle systems with the
ignition switch disconnected.
With the scan tool, erase Instrument Cluster DTCs.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display-B2109-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes

information.
No
>> Go To 3
8J - 34
3.
CHECK THE (G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (G900) IGNITION SWITCH
SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT
Remove the jumper wire between Ignition Switch harness connector

cavities 3 and 5.
Measure the resistance between the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense Circuit and the (G900) Ignition Switch Sense Return circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense Circuit for a short to
the (G900) Ignition Switch Sense Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
LX
CHECK THE (G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G20) Ignition Switch
Sense Circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense Circuit for a short to
ground.
No
LX
B2109-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8J - 35
8J - 36
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Ignition Switch Sense circuit voltage greater than 4.7 volts.
Possible Causes
(G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G900) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
IGNITION SWITCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Wait
With

the ignition on.
the scan tool, record and erase DTCs
30 seconds.
Is the DTC active?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
LX
3.
8J - 37
CHECK THE (G20) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

cavities 3 and 5.
Measure the voltage of the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense Circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (G20) Ignition Switch Sense circuit for a short to
voltage.
No
4.
CHECK OPERATION OF IGNITION SWITCH

With the scan tool, erase Instrument Cluster DTCs.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display-B2108-IGNITION SWITCH SENSE
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes

information.
No
>> Go To 5
8J - 38
5.
CHECK THE (G900) IGNITION SWITCH SENSE RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN.

cavities 3 and 5.
Measure the resistance of the (G900) Ignition Switch Sense Return circuit between the Instrument Cluster C2 harness connector and the Ignition Switch Harness connector.
Is the resistance greater than 5 ohms?
Yes
>> Repair the (G900) Ignition Switch Sense Return circuit for
an open.
No
LX
LX
8J - 39
B2213CCN INTERNAL
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Instrument Cluster detects an internal failure.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OPERATION
With the scan tool, read Cluster DTCs.

Is DTC: B2213CABIN COMPARTMENT NODE/CLUSTER INTERNAL active?
YES
NO
>> Test complete.
8J - 40
U0019CAN B BUS
LX
LX
8J - 41
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
will set.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Is the DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module DTCs.

Does the scan tool display the U0019CAN B BUS DTC?
Yes
No
>> Go to 3
8J - 42
3.

Front Control Module C1 harness connector and the Instrument Cluster
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
Front Control Module C1 harness connector and the Instrument Cluster
Yes
No

LX
LX
8J - 43

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

8J - 44
LX
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
LX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - SERVICE INFORMATION
8J - 45

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - SERVICE

INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
STANDARD PROCEDURE
ENHANCED SEATBELT REMINDER
PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
CLUSTER LENS
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8J - 46
LX

DESCRIPTION
The instrument cluster is an ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) that is located in the instrument
panel above the steering column opening, directly in
front of the driver. The remainder of the EMIC, including the mounts and the electrical connections, are
concealed within the instrument panel behind the cluster bezel. Besides analog gauges and indicators, the
EMIC module incorporates two blue-green digital Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) units for displaying
odometer/trip odometer information, engine hours,
automatic transmission gear selector position
(PRNDL), several warning or reminder indications and
certain diagnostic information. The instrument cluster
also includes the hardware and software necessary to
serve as the electronic body control module and is
sometimes referred to as the Cab Compartment Node
or CCN.
Besides typical instrument cluster gauge and indicator
support, the electronic functions and features that the
EMIC supports or controls include the following:
Accessory Power Delay Relay Control - The EMIC provides timing and control for the accessory power
delay relay based upon inputs from both the ignition switch and the door ajar switches.
Audible Warnings - The EMIC electronic circuit board is equipped with an audible tone transducer and programming that allows it to provide various audible alerts to the vehicle operator, including chime tones and
beep tones. An electromechanical relay is also soldered onto the circuit board to produce audible clicks that
emulate the sound of a conventional turn signal or hazard warning flasher. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHIME/
BUZZER - DESCRIPTION).
Automatic Headlamps Control - On models equipped with optional automatic headlamps, the EMIC monitors
inputs from both the headlamp switch and a sun load sensor located on the top of the instrument panel to
provide automatic headlamps.
Brake Lamp Control - The EMIC provides electronic brake lamp request messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for brake lamp control, excluding control of the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL), which remains controlled by a direct hard wired output of the brake
lamp switch.
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Control - The EMIC monitors inputs from the brake lamp switch, ignition
switch, and the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then controls a high-side driver output to operate the
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) solenoid that locks and unlocks the automatic transmission gearshift
selector lever on the steering column.
Compass Mini Trip Computer Support - The EMIC provides support for the optional Compass Mini Trip
Computer (CMTC) by calculating average fuel economy, distance to empty and outside temperature values
and storing trip odometer and elapsed ignition on time data. The EMIC receives data and reset requests from
the CMTC and transmits the appropriate information for the CMTC to display using electronic messaging.
Enhanced Accident Response Support - The EMIC monitors an input from the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) and, following an airbag deployment, will immediately disable the power lock output, unlock all doors by
activating the power unlock output, then enables the power lock output if the power lock switch input remains
inactive for two seconds. The EMIC also monitors an input from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to automatically turn on the interior lighting after an airbag deployment event, ten seconds after the vehicle speed is
zero. The interior lighting remains illuminated until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, at which time
the interior lighting returns to normal operation and control. These Enhanced Accident Response System
(EARS) features are each dependent upon a functional vehicle electrical system following the vehicle impact
event.
LX
8J - 47
Exterior Lamp Load Shedding - The EMIC provides a battery saver feature which will automatically turn off
all exterior lamps that remain on with the ignition switch in the Off position after a timed interval of about five
minutes.
Exterior Lighting Control - The EMIC provides electronic head lamp and/or park lamp request messages to
the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for the appropriate exterior
lamp control of standard head and park lamps, as well as optional front fog lamps. This includes support for
headlamp beam selection and the optical horn feature, also known as flash-to-pass.
Exterior Lighting Fail-safe - In the absence of a headlamp switch input, the EMIC will turn on the cluster
illumination lamps and provide electronic headlamp low beam and park lamp request messages to the Front
Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for default exterior lamp operation. The
FCM will also provide default park lamp and headlamp low beam operation and the EMIC will turn on the
cluster general illumination lighting if there is a failure of the electronic data bus communication between the
EMIC and the FCM.
Fuel Level Data Support - The EMIC provides a current source for and receives a hard wired analog input
from the fuel level sending unit located on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank. The EMIC uses this input to
calculate the proper fuel gauge needle position and low fuel indicator operation. Based upon this input, the
EMIC also calculates fuel level, average fuel economy and distance to empty data, then uses electronic messaging to transmit this data over the CAN data bus for use by other electronic modules in the vehicle.
Heated Seat Control - The EMIC monitors inputs from the ignition switch and electronic engine speed messages from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to control a high side driver output to the heated seat switch
Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicators. This input allows the heated seat switches to wake up the heated seat
module if the switch is actuated. The EMIC will de-energize the heated seat switch LED indicators, which
deactivates the heated seat system, if the ignition switch is turned to any position except On or Start, or if the
engine speed message indicates zero. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/HEATED SEATS - DESCRIPTION).
Horn Control - The EMIC monitors an input from the horn switch and provides electronic horn request messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for horn relay control.
The EMIC also controls horn relay operation in this manner to provide the horn features of the optional
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS).
Interior Lamp Load Shedding - The EMIC provides a battery saver feature which will automatically turn off all
interior lamps that remain on after a timed interval of about fifteen minutes.
Interior Lighting Control - The EMIC monitors inputs from the interior lighting switch, the door ajar switches,
the reading lamp switches, and the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) to provide courtesy lamp
control. This includes support for timed illuminated entry with theater-style fade-to-off and courtesy illumination
defeat features.
Panel Lamps Dimming Control - The EMIC monitors hard wired multiplexed inputs from the headlamp switch
on the instrument panel, then provides a hard wired 12-volt Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output that synchronizes the dimming level of all panel lamps dimmer controlled lamps with that of the cluster illumination
lighting.
Power Locks - The EMIC monitors inputs from the power lock switches and the Sentry Key REmote Entry
Module (SKREEM) to provide control of the power lock motors through high side driver outputs to the motors.
This includes support for rolling door locks (also known as automatic door locks), automatic door unlock, briefcase lock mode, door lock inhibit mode, and central locking (with the optional Vehicle Theft Security System
only). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER LOCKS - DESCRIPTION).
Remote Keyless Entry - The EMIC supports the standard Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system features,
including support for the RKE Lock, Unlock (with optional driver-door-only unlock, and unlock-all-doors), Panic,
audible chirp, optical chirp, illuminated entry modes, an RKE programming mode, as well as optional Vehicle
Theft Security System (VTSS) arming (when the proper VTSS arming conditions are met) and disarming.
Remote Radio Switch Interface - The EMIC monitors inputs from the optional remote radio switches and then
provides the appropriate electronic data bus messages to the radio to select the radio operating mode, volume
control, preset station scan and station seek features.
Turn Signal & Hazard Warning Lamp Control - The EMIC monitors hard wired multiplexed inputs from the
multi-function switch on the steering column, then provides electronic turn and hazard lamp request messages
to the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for turn and hazard lamp
control. The EMIC also provides an audible click at one of two rates to emulate normal and bulb out turn or
hazard flasher operation based upon electronic lamp outage messages from the FCM, and provides an audible
turn signal on chime warning if a turn is signalled continuously for more than about 1.6 kilometers (one mile)
and the vehicle speed remains greater than about twenty-four kilometers-per-hour (fifteen miles-per-hour).
8J - 48
LX
Vacuum Fluorescent Display Synchronization - The EMIC monitors hard wired multiplexed inputs from the
headlamp switch on the instrument panel, then transmits electronic panel lamp dimming level messages which
allows all other electronic modules on the CAN data bus with Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) units to coordinate their illumination intensity with that of the EMIC VFD units. This includes a parade mode (also known as
funeral mode) that allows all VFD units in the vehicle to be illuminated at full (daytime) intensity while driving
during daylight hours with the exterior lamps turned On.
Vehicle Theft Security System Control - The EMIC monitors inputs from the door ajar switches, the liftgate
ajar switch, the ignition switch, and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM), then provides electronic
horn and lighting request messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the Integrated Power Module (IPM) for the appropriate VTSS alarm output features.
Wiper/Washer System Control - The EMIC monitors both hard wired multiplexed inputs from the front wiper
and washer switches in the multi-function switch on the steering column and electronic messages from the rear
wiper and washer switches in the heater and air conditioner control on the instrument panel. The EMIC then
provides electronic wiper and/or washer request messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) located on the
Integrated Power Module (IPM) for the appropriate front or rear wiper and washer system features. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS - DESCRIPTION).
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

Eight switches mounted on the steering wheel control the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Pressing the
switches, conveniently selects from a variety of useful information. Personal settings, hands-free system communication system screens, Navigation system screens, trip computer functions, outside temperature, compass headings, audio modes and System Status messages including Tire Pressure Monitor System warnings can be displayed
in the EVIC. For more detailed information (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER - DESCRIPTION).
CHRYSLER INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS

Three clusters are offered on Chrysler 300 sedans.
300 AND 300 TOURING EDITION
The Chrysler 300 and base 300 Touring Edition model
instrument clusters include the following features:
Four large easy to read gauges: Fuel, speedometer, tachometer and engine temperature.
Electroluminescent silhouette-lit alabaster gauges
(gauge faces glow blue-green when headlamps
are on). Electroluminescent lighting is totally uniform and glare free for optimum driver visibility.
Black gauge pointers.
Vertical vacuum-fluorescent transmission shift-range indicator.
Up to 19 warning indicators depending on equipment level.
Chrome gauge rings.
140-mph speedometer.
Vacuum-fluorescent odometer with outside temperature indicator and three warning indicators: Trunk Ajar, Low
Washer Fluid, and Door Ajar.
300 TOURING LUXURY, LUXURY SPORT, AND SRT8
Instrument clusters on Chrysler 300 Touring Edition
with Luxury or Luxury Sport packages include the following features:
LX
8J - 49

Chrome gauge rings.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center with driver-interactive three-line dot-matrix display controlled by steering
wheel switches.
180-mph speedometer on SRT8.
HEMI C AND EXPORT 300C
The Chrysler 300Hemi C and Export 300C instrument
cluster include the following features:
Chrome gauge rings.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center with driver-interactive three-line dot-matrix display controlled by steering
wheel switches.
APPEARANCE AND LIGHTING
Alabaster gauge faces with black nomenclature and black pointers provide excellent visibility in daylight. With the
headlamps on, the electroluminescent gauges glow blue-green. The lighting intensity of the gauges can be adjusted
to suit the drivers preference, using the thumbwheel dimmer control that is part of the headlamp switch. Electroluminescent lighting is totally uniform and glare free for optimum driver visibility.
FIXED SEGMENT DISPLAYS
The standard cluster features two fixedsegment vacuum fluorescent digital displays to show transmission range
and odometer reading. The fixed-segment odometer display also includes the following indicators:
ODOMETER DISPLAY INDICATORS
INDICATOR
DISPLAY
COLOR
Trunk Ajar
ISO
Blue/Green
Low Wash
ISO
Blue/Green
Door Ajar
ISO
Blue/Green
Numeric
Blue/Green
Outside Temperature
INDICATOR LAMPS
The following indicator lamps are included in all instrument clusters. Actual usage depends on how the vehicle is
equipped.
8J - 50
LX
INDICATOR LAMPS
INDICATOR
DISPLAY
COLOR
Right Turn
ISO
Green
Left Turn
ISO
Green
Front Fog Lamps
ISO
Green
Rear Fog (Export Only)
ISO
Amber
High Beam
ISO
Blue
Word U.S. only/ISO Export
Red
Seat Belt
ISO
Red
Airbag
ISO
Red
Electronic Throttle Control
ISO
Red
Low Oil Pressure
ISO
Red
Engine Temperature
ISO
Red
Charge
ISO
Red
VTA (Vehicle Theft Alarm)
Dot
Red
ABS
ISO
Amber
Check Engine
ISO
Amber
BAS (Brake Assist)
ISO
Amber
ASR/ESP (Anti-Slip Regulation/Electronic

Stability Program)
ISO
Amber
Low Fuel
ISO
Amber
TPM (Tire Pressure Monitor)
ISO
Amber
Brake
DODGE INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS

Two clusters are offered on the Dodge Magnum Sports Tourer.
DODGE MAGNUM SE AND SXT
The Magnum SE and SXT instrument clusters include
the following features:
Horizontal odometer with outside temperature
indicator and four blue-green ISO messages
(fixed segment display).
Vertical transmission shift-range indicator.
White mask and lens assembly for individual
gauges.
Electroluminescent silhouette-lit white gauges
(gauges glow white when headlamps are on).
Four large easy to read gauges: Fuel, 140-mph speedometer, tachometer and engine temperature.
Non-lit orange pointers.
DODGE MAGNUM RT
The Magnum RT instrument cluster includes the following features:
Vertical transmission shift-range indicator.
White mask and lens assembly for individual
gauges.
Electroluminescent silhouette-lit white gauges
(gauges glow white when headlamps are on).
LX
8J - 51
Four large easy to read gauges: Fuel, 140-mph speedometer, tachometer and engine temperature.
Non-lit orange pointers.
Dot-matrix Electronic Vehicle Information Center with Driver-Interactive Display.
APPEARANCE AND LIGHTING

White gauge faces with black nomenclature provide excellent visibility in daylight. Pointers are non-lit orange. With
the headlamps on, the electroluminescent gauges glow white. The lighting intensity of the gauges can be adjusted
to suit the drivers preference, using the thumbwheel dimmer control that is part of the headlamp switch. Electroluminescent lighting is uniform and glare free for optimum driver visibility.
FIXED SEGMENT DISPLAYS
The standard cluster features two fixedsegment vacuum fluorescent digital displays to show transmission range
and odometer reading. The fixed-segment odometer display also includes the following indicators:
ODOMETER DISPLAY INDICATORS
INDICATOR
DISPLAY
COLOR
Hatch Ajar
ISO
Blue/Green
Low Wash
ISO
Blue/Green
Door Ajar
ISO
Blue/Green
Numeric
Blue/Green
Outside Temperature
INDICATOR LAMPS
The following indicator lamps are included in all instrument clusters. Actual usage depends on how the vehicle is
equipped.
INDICATOR LAMPS
INDICATOR
DISPLAY
COLOR
Right Turn
ISO
Green
Left Turn
ISO
Green
Front Fog Lamps
ISO
Green
High Beam
ISO
Blue
Brake
Word U.S. only/ISO Export
Red
Seat Belt
ISO
Red
Airbag
ISO
Red
Electronic Throttle Control
ISO
Red
Low Oil Pressure
ISO
Red
Engine Temperature
ISO
Red
Charge
ISO
Red
VTA (Vehicle Theft Alarm)
Dot
Red
ABS
ISO
Amber
Check Engine
ISO
Amber
BAS (Brake Assist)
ISO
Amber
ASR/ESP (Anti-Slip Regulation/Electronic

Stability Program)
ISO
Amber
Low Fuel
ISO
Amber
TPM (Tire Pressure Monitor)
ISO
Amber
8J - 52
LX
OPERATION
The microprocessor-based EMIC hardware and software uses various inputs to control the gauges and indicators
visible on the face of the cluster. Some of these inputs are hard wired, but most are in the form of electronic messages that are transmitted by other electronic modules over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/COMMUNICATION - OPERATION).
The EMIC microprocessor smooths the input data using algorithms to provide gauge readings that are accurate,
stable and responsive to operating conditions. These algorithms are designed to provide gauge readings during
normal operation that are consistent with customer expectations. However, when abnormal conditions exist such as
high coolant temperature, the algorithm can drive the gauge pointer to an extreme position and the microprocessor
can sound a chime through the on-board audible tone transducer to provide distinct visual and audible indications of
a problem to the vehicle operator. The EMIC may also produce audible warnings for other electronic modules in the
vehicle based upon electronic tone request messages received over the CAN data bus. Each audible warning is
intended to provide the vehicle operator with an audible alert to supplement a visual indication.
The EMIC circuitry operates on battery current received through a fused B(+) fuse on a non-switched fused B(+)
circuit, and on battery current received through a fused ignition switch output (run-start) fuse on a fused ignition
switch output (run-start) circuit. This arrangement allows the EMIC to provide some features regardless of the ignition switch position, while other features will operate only with the ignition switch in the On or Start positions. The
EMIC circuitry is grounded through a ground circuit of the instrument panel wire harness.
The EMIC also has a self-diagnostic actuator test capability (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING), which will test each of the CAN bus message-controlled functions of the cluster by
lighting the appropriate indicators, positioning the gauge needles at several predetermined calibration points across
the gauge faces, and illuminating all segments of the odometer/trip odometer and gear selector indicator VacuumFluorescent Display (VFD) units.
GAUGES
All gauges receive battery current through the EMIC circuitry only when the ignition switch is in the On or Start
positions. With the ignition switch in the Off position battery current is not supplied to any gauges, and the EMIC
circuitry is programmed to move all of the gauge needles back to the low end of their respective scales. Therefore,
the gauges do not accurately indicate any vehicle condition unless the ignition switch is in the On or Start positions.
All of the EMIC gauges are air core magnetic units. Two fixed electromagnetic coils are located within each gauge.
These coils are wrapped at right angles to each other around a movable permanent magnet. The movable magnet
is suspended within the coils on one end of a pivot shaft, while the gauge needle is attached to the other end of the
shaft. One of the coils has a fixed current flowing through it to maintain a constant magnetic field strength. Current
flow through the second coil changes, which causes changes in its magnetic field strength. The current flowing
through the second coil is changed by the EMIC circuitry in response to messages received over the CAN data bus.
The gauge needle moves as the movable permanent magnet aligns itself to the changing magnetic fields created
around it by the electromagnets.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN)
data bus.
The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument
cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch
is in the On or Start positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the
scale after the ignition switch is turned to the Off position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle
position and provides the following features:
Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
engine coolant temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54 C (130 F)] and the high end of
normal [about 122 C (252 F)], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the
gauge scale.
Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
engine coolant temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54 C (130 F)], the gauge needle is held
at the C increment at low end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge
LX
8J - 53
scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the engine temperature is above about
54 C (130 F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
engine coolant temperature is above about 122 C (252 F), the gauge needle is moved into the red zone on
the gauge scale, the engine temperature indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The
gauge needle remains in the red zone and the engine temperature indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the engine temperature is below about 122 C (252 F),
or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only
repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled off and then on again by the
appropriate engine temperature messages from the PCM.
Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge
needle at the last indication for about five seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position,
whichever occurs first. After five seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge
scale.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to
confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper engine coolant temperature messages to the instrument cluster. For further
diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the instrument cluster turns on the
engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the
engine cooling system requires service. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster.
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the level of fuel in the fuel tank. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by
the cluster from the fuel level sending unit on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit
board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Start
positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition
switch is turned to the Off position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides
Fuel Level Sending Unit Input - The cluster provides a constant current source to the fuel level sending unit
and monitors a return input on a fuel level sense circuit. The resistance through the fuel level sending unit
increases as the fuel level falls and decreases as the fuel level rises causing changes in the sense input voltage. The cluster programming applies an algorithm to calculate the proper fuel gauge needle position based
upon the fuel level sense input, then moves the gauge needle to the proper relative position on the gauge
scale. This algorithm is used to dampen gauge needle movement against the negative effect that fuel sloshing
within the fuel tank can have on accurate inputs from the fuel tank sending unit to the cluster.
Less Than Ten Percent Tank Full Input - Each time the fuel level sense input to the cluster indicates the fuel
tank is about ten percent full or less for ten consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for sixty
consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, the gauge needle is moved to about the
one-eighth graduation on the gauge scale, the low fuel indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is
sounded. The low fuel indicator remains illuminated until the fuel level sense input indicates that the fuel tank
is greater than about thirteen percent full for ten consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for
sixty consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to
the Off position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle
if the low fuel indicator is cycled off and then on again by the appropriate inputs from the fuel level sending
unit.
Less Than Empty Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank is less than the Empty gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low
end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the
fuel level sense input to the cluster is a short circuit.
More Than Full Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank is more than the Full gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low
8J - 54
LX
fuel level sense input to the cluster is an open circuit.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fuel gauge needle will be swept to
several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of
the gauge and the cluster control circuitry.
The instrument cluster continually monitors the fuel tank sending unit to determine the level of fuel in the fuel tank.
The cluster then sends the proper fuel level messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller
Area Network (CAN) data bus. For further diagnosis of the fuel gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls
the gauge, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The fuel gauge is
serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster.
SPEEDOMETER
The speedometer gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the vehicle road speed. This gauge is controlled by
the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The speedometer is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Start
Vehicle Speed Message - Each time the cluster receives a vehicle speed message from the PCM it will calculate the correct vehicle speed reading and position the gauge needle at that relative speed position on the
gauge scale. The cluster will receive a new vehicle speed message and reposition the gauge pointer accordingly about every 88 milliseconds. The gauge needle will continually be positioned at the relative vehicle speed
position on the gauge scale until the vehicle stops moving, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off
position, whichever occurs first.
Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a speedometer message, it will hold the gauge needle at
the last indication for about three seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first. After three seconds, the gauge needle will return to the left end of the gauge scale.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the speedometer needle will be swept
to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality
of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors the vehicle speed sensor to determine the vehicle road speed. The PCM then sends
the proper vehicle speed messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the speedometer or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING). The speedometer is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine speed. This gauge is controlled by the
instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster
from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The tachometer is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit
board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Start
Engine Speed Message - Each time the cluster receives an engine speed message from the PCM it will
calculate the correct engine speed reading and position the gauge needle at that relative speed position on the
gauge scale. The cluster will receive a new engine speed message and reposition the gauge pointer accordingly about every 88 milliseconds. The gauge needle will continually be repositioned at the relative engine
speed position on the gauge scale until the engine stops running, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off
Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine speed message, it will hold the gauge needle
at the last indication for about three seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first. After three seconds, the gauge needle will return to the left end of the gauge scale.
LX
8J - 55
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tachometer needle will be swept to
several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of
the gauge and the cluster control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors the crankshaft position sensor to determine the engine speed. The PCM then sends
the proper engine speed messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the tachometer or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING). The tachometer is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster.
The gauges are diagnosed using the EMIC self-diagnostic actuator test (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). Proper testing of the CAN data bus and the electronic data bus message
inputs to the EMIC that control each gauge require the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
VACUUM-FLUORESCENT DISPLAYS
The Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) units are soldered to the EMIC electronic circuit board. With the ignition
switch in the Off or Accessory positions, the odometer display is activated when the driver door is opened (Rental
Car mode) and is deactivated when the driver door is closed. Otherwise, both display units are active when the
ignition switch is in the On or Start positions, and inactive when the ignition switch is in the Off or Accessory positions.
The illumination intensity of the VFD units is controlled by the EMIC circuitry based upon an input from the headlamp switch and a dimming level input received from the panel dimmer switch. The EMIC synchronizes the illumination intensity of other VFD units with that of the units in the EMIC by sending electronic dimming level messages
to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the CAN data bus.
While in the odometer mode with the ignition switch in the On position and the engine not running, depressing the
odometer/trip odometer switch for about six seconds will display the engine hours information. Holding this switch
depressed while turning the ignition switch from the Off position to the On position will initiate the EMIC self-diagnostic actuator test. Refer to the instrument cluster diagnosis and testing service information for additional details on
this cluster function. The EMIC microprocessor remembers which display mode is active when the ignition switch is
turned to the Off position, and returns the VFD display to that mode when the ignition switch is turned On again.
The VFD units are diagnosed using the EMIC self-diagnostic actuator test (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). Proper testing of the CAN data bus and the electronic data bus message
inputs to the EMIC that control some of the VFD functions requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the
appropriate diagnostic information.
TRANSMISSION RANGE INDICATOR
The electronic transmission range indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that
has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument
cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received from the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The transmission range indicator information is displayed by a dedicated Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit
soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the transmission range
indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the Off position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from
battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission model that is
in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry operates the transmission
range indicator VFD to provide the following features:
Selected Gear Message - Each time the cluster receives a selected gear message from the PCM, a box will
be illuminated around the appropriate character in the gear selector indicator VFD. The box will remain illuminated until the cluster receives a different selected gear message, or until the ignition switch is turned to the
Off position, whichever occurs first.
Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a selected gear message from the PCM within three
seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will display all gear selector positions boxed (selected) until a valid
selected gear message is received or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs
first.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the gear selector indicator VFD will
display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD
portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry.
8J - 56
LX
The PCM continually monitors a hard wired multiplex input from the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then sends
the proper selected gear messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the transmission range indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls this function, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Transmission Range indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
INDICATORS
Indicators are located in various positions within the EMIC and are all connected to the EMIC electronic circuit
board. The various EMIC indicators are controlled by different strategies; some receive fused ignition switch output
from the EMIC circuitry and have a switched ground, while others are grounded through the EMIC circuitry and have
a switched battery feed. However, all indicators are completely controlled by the EMIC microprocessor based upon
various hard wired and electronic message inputs. All indicators except those located within the VFD units are illuminated at a fixed intensity, which is not affected by the selected illumination intensity of the electro-luminescent
EMIC general illumination lamp. The illumination intensity of those within the VFD units is synchronized with that of
the EMIC general illumination lamp.
In addition, certain indicators in this instrument cluster are automatically configured or self-configured. This feature
allows the configurable indicators to be enabled by the EMIC circuitry for compatibility with certain optional equipment. The EMIC defaults for the ABS indicator and airbag indicator are enabled, and these configuration settings
must be programmatically disabled in the EMIC using a diagnostic scan tool for vehicles that do not have this equipment. The automatically configured or self-configured indicators remain latent in each EMIC at all times and will be
active only when the EMIC receives the appropriate CAN message inputs for that optional system or equipment.
ABS INDICATOR
The ABS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle
operator when the ABS system is faulty or inoperative.
This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the
instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster
from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The ABS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that
logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the
fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be off when the ignition switch is in any
position except On or Start. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the ABS indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the ABS indicator is illuminated for about
four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB.
ABS Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a lamp-on message from the CAB, the ABS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-off message from
the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-on or lamp-off messages from the CAB for five consecutive message cycles, the ABS indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster
receives a valid message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first.
Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the ABS indicator will be
turned on, then off again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and
the cluster control circuitry.
ABS Diagnostic Test - The ABS indicator is blinked on and off by lamp-on and lamp-off messages from the
CAB during the performance of the ABS diagnostic tests.
The CAB continually monitors the ABS circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. If the CAB sends a
lamp-on message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a system malfunction and/or that the
ABS system has become inoperative. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it
detects. Each time the ABS indicator fails to light due to an open or short in the cluster ABS indicator circuit, the
cluster sends a message notifying the CAB of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the CAB will each store
a DTC. The ABS indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
LX
8J - 57
AIRBAG INDICATOR
The airbag indicator gives an indication to the vehicle
operator when the airbag system is faulty or inoperative. The airbag indicator is controlled by a transistor
on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon
cluster programming and electronic messages
received by the cluster from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data
bus.
The airbag indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the airbag indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the airbag indicator is illuminated for
about six to eight seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the ORC.
ORC Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a lamp-on message from the ORC, the airbag indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated for about twelve seconds or until the cluster
receives a lamp-off message from the ORC, whichever is longer.
Communication Error - If the cluster receives no airbag messages for ten consecutive message cycles, the
airbag indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-off
message from the ORC.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the airbag indicator will be turned on,
then off again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster
control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the airbag indicator is a function of the instrument cluster.
The ORC continually monitors the airbag system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The ORC then sends the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. If the ORC
sends a lamp-on message after the bulb test, it indicates that the ORC has detected a system malfunction and/or
that the airbags and seat belt tensioners may not deploy when required, or may deploy when not required. The
ORC will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the airbag indicator fails
to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster airbag indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the
ORC of the condition, the instrument cluster and the ORC will each store a DTC, and the cluster will flash the seat
belt indicator on and off as a backup to notify the vehicle operator. The Airbag indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
BRAKE/PARK BRAKE INDICATOR
The brake indicator gives an indication to the vehicle
operator when the parking brake is applied, when
there are certain brake hydraulic system malfunctions
as indicated by a low brake hydraulic fluid level condition, or when the brake fluid level switch is disconnected. The brake indicator can also give an indication when certain faults are detected in the Antilock Brake
System (ABS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster
programming, electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a hard wired input from the park brake switch.
The brake indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the brake indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the brake indicator is illuminated for
about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB.
Brake Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a lamp-on message from the CAB, the brake indicator will be illuminated. The CAB can also send brake lamp-on messages as feedback during ABS diagnostic
procedures. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-off message from the CAB, or
until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
8J - 58
LX
Park Brake Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on the park brake switch sense circuit (park
brake switch closed = park brake applied or not fully released) while the ignition switch is in the On position,
the brake indicator flashes on and off. The indicator continues to flash until the park brake switch sense input
to the cluster is an open circuit (park brake switch open = park brake fully released), or until the ignition switch
is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the brake indicator will be
The park brake switch on the park brake pedal mechanism provides a hard wired ground input to the instrument
cluster circuitry through the park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied or not fully released.
The CAB continually monitors the ABS system circuits and sensors, including the brake fluid level switch on the
brake master cylinder reservoir, to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends
the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. If the CAB sends a lamp-on message after the
bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a brake hydraulic system malfunction and/or that the ABS system
has become inoperative. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. The
Brake/Park Brake indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
CHARGING INDICATOR
The charging indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electrical system voltage is too
low or too high. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by
the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The charging indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the charging indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the charging indicator is illuminated by
the instrument cluster for about two seconds as a bulb test.
Voltage Low Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the electrical
system voltage is low (less than about 11.5 volts is a charge fail condition), the charging indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
electrical system voltage is normal (greater than about 12.0 volts, but less than 16.0 volts), or until the ignition
switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Voltage High Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the electrical
system voltage is high (greater than about 16.0 volts), the charging indicator will be illuminated. The indicator
remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the electrical system voltage
is normal (less than about 15.5 volts, but greater than 11.5 volts), or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the charging indicator will be turned on,
control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors the electrical system voltage to control the generator output. The PCM then sends
the proper system voltage messages to the instrument cluster. If the instrument cluster turns on the charging indicator due to a charge fail or voltage high condition, it may indicate that the charging system requires service. For
further diagnosis of the charging indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Charging indicator is serviced with the
instrument cluster.
ENGINE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
The engine temperature indicator gives an indication
to the vehicle operator when the engine temperature
gauge reading reflects a condition requiring immediate
attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on
LX
8J - 59
the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The engine temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic
circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current
input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be off when the ignition
switch is in any position except On or Start. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the
instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the engine temperature indicator for the following
reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the engine temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM.
Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
engine coolant temperature is above about 122 C (252 F), the engine temperature indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the engine coolant temperature is below about 119 C (246 F), or until the
ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat
during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled off and then on again by the appropriate engine temperature messages from the PCM.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine temperature indicator will be
The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper engine coolant temperature messages to the instrument cluster. For further
diagnosis of the engine temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the instrument cluster turns on the engine
temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine
cooling system requires service. The Engine Temperature indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL INDICATOR
The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator gives
an indication to the vehicle operator when the ETC
system is faulty or inoperative. The ETC indicator is
controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area
Network (CAN) data bus.
The ETC indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the ETC indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the ETC indicator is illuminated for about
fifteen seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM.
ETC Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a lamp-on message from the PCM, the ETC indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed on and off, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM
message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash for about twelve seconds or until the
cluster receives a lamp-off message from the PCM, whichever is longer. If the indicator is illuminated solid with
the engine running the vehicle will usually remain drivable. If the indicator is flashing with the engine running
the vehicle may require towing. A flashing indicator means the ETC system requires immediate service.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ETC indicator will be turned on, then
off again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control
circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the ETC indicator is a function of the PCM.
The PCM continually monitors the ETC system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. If the PCM
sends a lamp-on message after the bulb test, it indicates that the PCM has detected an ETC system malfunction
and/or that the ETC system is inoperative. The PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction
it detects. Each time the ETC indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster ETC indicator circuit,
8J - 60
LX
the cluster sends a message notifying the PCM of the condition, the instrument cluster and the PCM will each store
a DTC. The Electronic Throttle Control indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
FOG LAMP INDICATOR
The fog lamp indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator whenever the optional fog lamps are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on
the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area
Network (CAN) data bus.
The fog lamp indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the
fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only
illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn
on the fog lamp indicator for the following reasons:
Fog Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a fog lamp-on message from the FCM indicating the
fog lamp relay is energized, the fog lamp indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until
the cluster receives a fog lamp-off message from the FCM.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fog lamp indicator will be turned on,
control circuitry.
The instrument cluster continually monitors a hard wired input from the headlamp switch to determine the selected
fog lamp switch status. The instrument cluster then sends the proper fog lamp-on and lamp-off messages to the
FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM activates the fog lamp relay then sends the proper fog lamp indicator
lamp-on and lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the fog lamp indicator or the
instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Fog Lamp indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
The high beam indicator gives an indication to the
vehicle operator whenever the headlamp high beams
are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired multiplex input
received by the cluster from the headlamp beam select switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the washer/
beam select switch mux circuit.
The high beam indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit,
and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on
the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only
on the high beam indicator for the following reasons:
High Beam Headlamps-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a high beam headlamps-on input from the
headlamp beam select switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the washer/beam select switch mux circuit, the headlamp high beams and the high beam indicator will be illuminated. The headlamp high beams and
the high beam indicator remain illuminated until the cluster receives a high beam headlamps-off input from the
multi-function switch, or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever
occurs first.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the high beam indicator will be turned
on, then off again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the
cluster control circuitry.
The instrument cluster continually monitors the headlamp switch and the multi-function switch to determine the
proper headlamp low beam and high beam control. The instrument cluster then sends the proper low beam and
high beam lamp-on and lamp-off messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network
(CAN) data bus and turns the high beam indicator on or off accordingly. For further diagnosis of the high beam
indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The High Beam indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
LX
8J - 61
LOW FUEL INDICATOR

The low fuel indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the level of fuel in the fuel tank
becomes low. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by the
cluster from the fuel level sending unit on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank.
The low fuel indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the low fuel indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the low fuel indicator is illuminated for
about two seconds as a bulb test.
Less Than Ten Percent Tank Full Input - The cluster provides a constant current source to the fuel level
sending unit and monitors a return input on a fuel level sense circuit. The resistance through the fuel level
sending unit increases as the fuel level falls and decreases as the fuel level rises causing changes in the
sense input voltage. Each time the fuel level sense input to the cluster indicates the fuel tank is about ten
percent full or less for ten consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for sixty consecutive seconds
and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, the fuel gauge needle is moved to about the one-eighth graduation
on the gauge scale, the low fuel indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The low fuel
indicator remains illuminated until the fuel level sense input indicates that the fuel tank is greater than about
thirteen percent full for ten consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for sixty consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the low fuel indicator
is cycled off and then on again by the appropriate inputs from the fuel level sending unit.
Less Than Empty Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank is less than the Empty gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low
fuel level sense input to the cluster is a short circuit.
More Than Full Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank is more than the Full gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low
fuel level sense input to the cluster is an open circuit.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low fuel indicator will be turned on,
control circuitry.
The instrument cluster continually monitors the fuel tank sending unit to determine the level of fuel in the fuel tank.
The cluster then sends the proper fuel level messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller
Area Network (CAN) data bus. For further diagnosis of the low fuel indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that
controls the LED, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Low
Fuel indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to
the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure
reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic
circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current
input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be off when the ignition
switch is in any position except On or Start. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the
instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the low oil pressure indicator for the following reasons:
8J - 62
LX
Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the
engine oil pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The
indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the engine oil
pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator on in response to an engine oil pressure low message if the
engine speed is greater than zero.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be
The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then
sends the proper engine oil pressure messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the low oil pressure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Low Oil Pressure indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII)
emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster
circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM over
the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will
only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition
switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be off when the ignition switch is in any position
except On or Start. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the MIL for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the indicator is illuminated for about
fifteen seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM.
MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a MIL lamp-on message from the PCM, the indicator
will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed on and off, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM will send a lamp-off message automatically.
Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM be reset before a lamp-off message will be
sent. For more information on the PCM, and the DTC set and reset parameters, (Refer to 25 - EMISSIONS
CONTROL - OPERATION).
Communication Error - If the cluster receives no messages from the PCM for ten consecutive message
cycles, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator
remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned on
during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry.
The PCM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is
in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the MIL or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the instrument cluster turns on the MIL after the
bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require
service. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp is serviced with the instrument cluster.
SEAT BELT INDICATOR
The seat belt indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the driver side front seat
belt. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the
instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster
programming and a hard wired input from the seat belt switch in the driver side front seat belt retractor through the
seat belt indicator driver circuit.
LX
8J - 63
The seat belt indicator also includes a programmable enhanced seat belt reminder or beltminder feature that is
enabled when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. This beltminder feature can be disabled and enabled by the
customer using a specific programming event sequence, or by the dealer using a diagnostic scan tool.
The seat belt indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
transistor. The instrument cluster will turn on the seat belt indicator for the following reasons:
Seat Belt Reminder Function - Each time the cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition
switch output (run-start) circuit, the indicator will be illuminated as a seat belt reminder for about six seconds,
or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first. This reminder function will occur
regardless of the status of the seat belt switch input to the cluster.
Driver Side Front Seat Belt Not Buckled - Beltminder Active - Following the seat belt reminder function,
each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seat belt switch open =
seat belt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the Start or On positions, the indicator will be illuminated. In
addition, if the driver side front seat belt remains unbuckled about sixty seconds after the conclusion of the
seat belt reminder function with the vehicle speed greater than about 8 kilometers-per-hour (5 miles-per-hour),
the seat belt indicator will begin to cycle between flashing on and off for three seconds, then lighting solid for
two seconds. The seat belt indicator will continue to cycle between flashing and solid illumination for thirteen
complete cycles, until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seat belt switch
closed = seat belt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Driver Side Front Seat Belt Not Buckled - Beltminder Inactive - Following the seat belt reminder function,
each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seat belt switch open =
seat belt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the Start or On positions, the indicator will be illuminated. The
seat belt indicator remains illuminated until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground
(seat belt switch closed = seat belt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first.
Airbag Indicator Backup - If the instrument cluster detects a fault in the airbag indicator circuit it will send a
message indicating the fault to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), then flash the seat belt indicator on
and off. The cluster will continue to flash the seat belt indicator until the airbag indicator circuit fault is resolved,
or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the seat belt indicator will be turned on,
control circuitry.
The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt indicator driver input to the instrument
cluster. The seat belt switch input to the instrument cluster circuitry may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic
tools and methods. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The Seat Belt indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
SECURITY INDICATOR
The security indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS) is arming or is armed. On models equipped
with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), the
security indicator also gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the SKIS. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit
board based upon cluster programming, hard wired inputs to the cluster from the various security system components, electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) over the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
The security indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and
that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the
fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only
on the security indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the security indicator illuminates for
about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the SKREEM.
8J - 64
LX
VTSS Indication - During the sixteen second VTSS arming function, the cluster will flash the security indicator
on and off repeatedly at a steady, fast rate to indicate that the VTSS is in the process of arming. Following
successful VTSS arming, the cluster flashes the security indicator on and off continuously at a slower rate to
indicate that the VTSS is armed. The security indicator continues flashing at the slower rate until the VTSS is
disarmed or triggered. If the VTSS has alarmed and rearmed, the cluster will flash the security indicator at a
steady, slow rate for about thirty seconds after the VTSS is disarmed.
SKIS Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a SKIS lamp-on message from the SKREEM, the
security indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed on and off, or illuminated solid, as dictated
by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash until the cluster
receives a SKIS lamp-off message from the SKREEM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position,
whichever occurs first. For more information on the SKIS and the security indicator control parameters, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM - OPERATION).
Communication Error - If the cluster receives no SKIS lamp-on or lamp-off messages from the SKREEM for
ten consecutive message cycles, the security indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator
remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid SKIS lamp-on or lamp-off message is received
from the SKREEM.
Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the security indicator will be
The instrument cluster circuitry controls the security indicator whenever the ignition switch is in the Off position and
the VTSS is arming, armed, or alarming. Whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Start positions, the SKREEM
performs a self-test to decide whether the SKIS is in good operating condition and whether a valid key is present in
the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-on or lamp-off messages to the instrument
cluster. For further diagnosis of the security indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator,
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the instrument cluster
flashes the security indicator upon ignition On, or turns on the security indicator solid after the bulb test, it indicates
that a SKIS malfunction has occurred or that the SKIS is inoperative. The Security indicator is serviced with the
instrument cluster.
TRACTION CONTROL INDICATOR
The traction control indicator gives an indication to the
vehicle operator when the electronic Traction Control
System (TCS) has been activated. This indicator is
controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board
based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data
bus.
The traction control indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only
allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition
switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be off when the ignition switch is in any position
except On or Start. The indicator only illuminates when it is switched to ground by the instrument cluster circuitry.
The instrument cluster will turn on the traction control indicator for the following reasons:
Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position the traction control indicator is illuminated
for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB.
Traction Control Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives a traction control lamp-on message
from the CAB indicating that the TCS has been activated, the traction control indicator will be illuminated. The
indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a traction control lamp-off message from the CAB, or
until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever occurs first.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the traction control indicator will be
The CAB continually monitors the traction control switch to determine the proper outputs to the components of the
Antilock Brake System (ABS). The CAB then sends the proper traction control lamp-on and lamp-off messages to
the instrument cluster. For further diagnosis of the traction control indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that
controls the indicator, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The
Traction Control indicator is serviced with the instrument cluster.
LX
8J - 65
TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS

The turn signal indicators give an indication to the
vehicle operator that the turn signal (left or right indicator flashing) or hazard warning (both left and right
indicators flashing) have been selected and are operating. These indicators are controlled by transistors on
the instrument cluster electronic circuit board based upon the cluster programming, a hard wired multiplex input
received by the cluster from the turn signal and hazard warning switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the
turn/hazard switch mux circuit, and electronic messages received from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known
as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus.
Each turn signal indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit,
and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on
the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, each LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED
only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will
turn on the turn signal indicators for the following reasons:
Turn Signal-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a turn signal-on input from the turn signal switch circuitry
of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, it sends the appropriate electronic turn signal
switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds to these messages by controlling a battery voltage output and the flash rate for either the right or left turn signal lamps. The FCM also
sends the appropriate electronic messages back to the EMIC to control the illumination and flash rate of the
right or left turn signal indicators, as well as to control the click rate of an electromechanical relay soldered
onto the EMIC electronic circuit board that emulates the sound emitted by a conventional turn signal flasher.
The turn signals and the turn signal indicators continue to flash on and off until the cluster receives a turn
signal-off input from the multi-function switch, or until the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, whichever
occurs first.
Hazard Warning-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a hazard warning-on input from the hazard warning
switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, it sends the appropriate electronic hazard switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds to these messages by controlling a battery voltage output and the flash rate for each of the right and left turn signal lamps.
The FCM also sends the appropriate electronic messages back to the EMIC to control the illumination and
flash rate of the right and left turn signal indicators, as well as to control the click rate of an electromechanical
relay soldered onto the EMIC electronic circuit board that emulates the sound emitted by a conventional hazard warning flasher. The turn signals and the turn signal indicators continue to flash on and off until the cluster
receives a hazard warning-off input from the multi-function switch.
Lamp Out Mode - The instrument cluster also sends electronic turn signal on and off messages to the FCM
over the CAN data bus, and the FCM flashes the appropriate exterior turn signal lamps. If the FCM detects an
inoperative turn signal lamp or circuit, it increases the flash rate for the remaining operative turn signals and
sends an electronic message back to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster then increases the flash
rate of the turn signal indicator(s) and the clicking rate of the electromechanical relay to provide an indication
of the problem to the vehicle operator.
Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the turn signal indicators will be turned
on, then off again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of each LED and the
cluster control circuitry.
The instrument cluster continually monitors the multi-function switch and electronic messages from the FCM to
determine the proper turn signal and hazard warning system control. For further diagnosis of the turn signal indicators or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicators, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). The Turn Signal indicators are serviced with the instrument cluster.
CLUSTER ILLUMINATION
The EMIC has a single electro-luminescent lamp that provides cluster back lighting whenever the exterior lighting is
turned On. The illumination intensity of this lamp is adjusted when the interior lighting thumbwheel on the headlamp
switch is rotated (down to dim, up to brighten) to one of six available minor detent positions. The EMIC monitors a
resistor multiplexed input from the headlamp switch on a dimmer input circuit. In response to that input, the EMIC
electronic circuitry converts a fused 12-volt input it receives on a hard wired panel lamps dimmer switch signal circuit into a 12-volt Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) output.
8J - 66
LX
The EMIC uses this PWM output to control the illumination intensity of the electro-luminescent cluster illumination
lamp and the VFD units on the EMIC circuit board, then provides a synchronized PWM output on various hard wired
fused panel lamps dimmer switch signal circuits to control and synchronize the illumination intensity of other incandescent illumination lamps in the vehicle. The EMIC also transmits electronic dimming level messages over the CAN
data bus to other electronic modules in the vehicle to control and synchronize the illumination intensity of their VFD
units to that of the EMIC VFD units.
In addition, the thumbwheel on the headlamp switch has a Parade Mode position to provide a parade or funeral
mode. The EMIC monitors the request for this mode from the headlamp switch, then transmits an electronic dimming level message to illuminate all VFD units in the vehicle at full (daytime) intensity for easier visibility when
driving in daylight with the exterior lighting turned On.
The electro-luminescent lamp unit consists of layers of phosphor, carbon, idium tin oxide, and dielectric applied by
a silk-screen process between two polyester membranes and includes a short pigtail wire and connector. The lamp
pigtail wire is connected to a connector receptacle on the EMIC circuit board. The EMIC powers this lamp with an
Alternating Current (AC) rated at 80 volts rms (root mean squared) and 415 Hertz produced by a transformer on the
circuit board, which excites the phosphor particles causing them to luminesce.

The following Modes allow the driver to access and display the driver- interactive features:
TRIP MODE
Provides a choice of units displayed in English or metric. The following information can be displayed at the top of
the screen: Average MPG, distance to empty (DTE), Trip A and Trip B odometers, and elapsed time. The odometer
is displayed at the bottom of the screen. If warnings exist, they will replace the odometer in the display. The driver
can scroll to view multiple warnings.
COMPASS, TEMPERATURE AND AUDIO MODE
Compass heading and outside temperature are displayed at the top of the screen. On the lower half of the screen
the audio mode is displayed along with the odometer.
TELEPHONE MODE
Provides the following information and features for the optional hands-free communications system:
Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent.
Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air time in minutes and seconds, call ended, busy, call failed,
roaming and no phone connection.
Caller ID phone number display.
NAVIGATION MODE
Displays Turn-by-Turn directions that appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a
programmed route.
PERSONAL SETTINGS MODE
Allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in Park.
SYSTEM STATUS MODE
Displays warnings and user interaction messages. Initial warnings will be displayed full-screen for three seconds,
then override the odometer and show text warnings on the bottom line of the display. Critical text warnings will be
displayed until the failure is corrected. Non-critical text warnings will be displayed for 60 seconds. The driver can
scroll to view multiple messages. A single chime sounds for all warnings.
For a more detailed operation of the EVIC (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER - OPERATION).
LX
8J - 67

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment, personal injury or death.
If all of the instrument cluster gauges and indicators are inoperative, be certain to check the instrument cluster fused
B(+) fuse and the instrument cluster fused B(+) and ground circuits for shorts or opens. Refer to the appropriate
wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures,
details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire
harness connectors, splices and grounds.
If an individual hard wired gauge or indicator is inoperative, refer to the diagnosis and testing service information for
that specific gauge or indicator. If an individual Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus message-controlled gauge
or indicator is inoperative, perform the Actuator Test as follows:
CAUTION: Instrument clusters used in this model automatically configure themselves for compatibility with
the features and optional equipment in the vehicle in which they are initially installed. The instrument cluster is programmed to do this by embedding the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and other information
critical to proper cluster operation into electronic memory. This embedded information is learned through
electronic messages received from other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network
(CAN) data bus, and through certain hard wired inputs received when the cluster is connected to the vehicle
electrically. Once configured, the instrument cluster memory may be irreparably damaged and certain irreversible configuration errors may occur if the cluster is connected electrically to another vehicle; or, if an
electronic module from another vehicle is connected that provides data to the instrument cluster (including
odometer values) that conflicts with that which was previously learned and stored. Therefore, the practice
of exchanging (swapping) instrument clusters and other electronic modules in this vehicle with those
removed from another vehicle must always be avoided. Failure to observe this caution may result in instrument cluster damage, which is not reimbursable under the terms of the product warranty. Service replacement instrument clusters are provided with the correct VIN, and the certified odometer and engine hours
values embedded into cluster memory, but will otherwise be automatically configured for compatibility with
the features and optional equipment in the vehicle in which they are initially installed.
NOTE: Certain indicators in this instrument cluster are automatically configured. This feature allows those
indicators to be activated or deactivated for compatibility with certain optional equipment. If the problem
being diagnosed involves improper illumination of the cruise indicator, the electronic throttle control indicator, the tow/haul indicator, the service four-wheel drive indicator, the four-wheel drive low indicator, the
four-wheel drive lock indicator, the transmission overtemp indicator, the security indicator or the gear selector indicator, disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. After about five minutes, reconnect the battery negative cable and turn the ignition switch to the On position. The instrument cluster should
automatically relearn the equipment in the vehicle and properly configure the configurable indicators
accordingly.
ACTUATOR TEST
The instrument cluster actuator test will put the instrument cluster into its self-diagnostic mode. In this mode the
instrument cluster can perform a self-diagnostic test that will confirm that the instrument cluster circuitry, the gauges,
and the indicators are capable of operating as designed. During the actuator test the instrument cluster circuitry will
position each of the gauge needles at various calibration points and illuminate all of the segments in the Vacuum
Fluorescent Display (VFD) units.
Successful completion of the actuator test will confirm that the instrument cluster is operational. However, there may
still be a problem with the CAN data bus, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), the Front Control Module (FCM),
8J - 68
LX
the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), the Controller Anti-lock Brake
(CAB), or the hard wired inputs to one of these electronic control modules. Use a diagnostic scan tool to diagnose
these components. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
1. Begin the test with the ignition switch in the Off position.
2. Depress the odometer/trip odometer switch button.
3. While still holding the odometer/trip odometer switch button depressed, turn the ignition switch to the On position,
but do not start the engine.
4. Release the odometer/trip odometer switch button.
5. The instrument cluster will simultaneously begin to illuminate all of the operational segments in both VFD units,
and perform a bulb check of each operational LED indicator. The VFD segments and LED indicators remain
illuminated as each gauge needle is swept to several calibration points and back. If a VFD segment or an LED
indicator fails to illuminate, or if a gauge needle fails to sweep through the calibration points and back during this
test, the instrument cluster must be replaced.
6. The actuator test is now completed. The instrument cluster will automatically exit the self-diagnostic mode and
return to normal operation at the completion of the test. The actuator test will be aborted if the ignition switch is
turned to the Off position, or if a vehicle speed message indicating that the vehicle is moving is received from the
PCM over the CAN data bus during the test.
7. Go back to Step 1 to repeat the test, if necessary.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
ENHANCED SEATBELT REMINDER PROGRAMMING
The seatbelt indicator also includes a programmable enhanced seatbelt reminder or beltminder feature that is
enabled when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. This beltminder feature provides extended and modified visual
seatbelt indicator and audible chime warning responses to an unbuckled driver side front seat belt. The beltminder
feature may be disabled or enabled by the customer using the programming sequence that follows, or by the dealer
using a diagnostic scan tool. The following sequence of events must occur within sixty (60) seconds of the ignition
switch being placed in the On position in order for the programming to be completed successfully.
1. With the ignition switch in any position except On or Start, buckle the driver side front seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position and wait for the seatbelt indicator reminder function to conclude (about
six seconds).
3. Unbuckle and buckle the driver side front seat belt three or more times, ending with the belt buckled.
4. Turn the ignition switch to any position except On or Start to toggle the beltminder feature from its current setting
(from active to inactive, or from inactive to active). A single chime tone will provide an audible confirmation that
the programming sequence has been successfully completed.
LX
REMOVAL
2.
WARNING: Wait two minutes for the airbag system
reserve capacitor to discharge before beginning
any airbag system or component service. Failure
to do so may result in accidental airbag deployment, personal injury or death.
3. Remove the instrument cluster bezel (Refer to 23 BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/CLUSTER BEZEL REMOVAL).
4. Remove the four cluster retaining screws.
5. Disconnect the cluster electrical connectors.
6. Remove cluster from instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Position cluster into instrument panel opening.
2. Connect the cluster electrical connectors.
3. Install the four cluster retaining screws.
4. Install the cluster bezel (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/CLUSTER BEZEL - INSTALLATION).
8J - 69
8J - 70
CLUSTER LENS
REMOVAL
2.
4. Remove the cluster lens retaining screws.
5. Separate the cluster lens from the cluster and
remove from Instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Place cluster lens into position on cluster.
2. Install the cluster lens screws.
LX
LX
INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD

DESCRIPTION
The Instrument Panel Switch Pod includes push button controls for the Hazard Flashers, Electronic Stability Program (ESP) or Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) Off
switch, and on Dodge models Rear Wiper/Washer.
Also the Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator is
located within the switch pod. The switch pod is a single unit with one wire connector and two mounting
tabs and cannot be taken apart or serviced. If one or
more of the switches, or illumination is inoperative, the
entire pod must be replaced.
The Instrument Panel Switch Pod is located in the

instrument panel center bezel just above the radio,
and between the A/C outlet ducts.
There a different configurations depending on the model and country.
DOMESTIC SEDAN
The sedan for sale in North America will have a Hazard Switch , Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator, and Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Off Switch.
8J - 71
8J - 72
LX
If equipped with Anti-Lock brakes, but not with ESP,

the vehicle will be equipped with the Traction Control
System (TCS).
DOMESTIC WAGON
The wagon for sale in North America will have Rear
Wipe/Wash Switch, Hazard Switch, Passenger Airbag
Disabled (PAD) Indicator, and Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Off Switch.
EXPORT WAGON
The wagon for sale outside North America will have
Rear Wipe/Wash Switch, Hazard Switch, Passenger
Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator, and Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Off Switch.
Export wagons may also have Rear Wipe/Wash

Switch, Hazard Switch, Passenger Airbag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator, and Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) Off
Switch.
OPERATION
LIFTGATE WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
A liftgate wiper and washer rocker switch provides intermittent wiper operation as well as rear washer operation.
Pressing one side of the rocker switch knob actuates the washer system, while pressing the other side of the rocker
switch knob turns the intermittent rear wiper ON and OFF. When the rear intermittent wiper is ON, an indicator in
the switch knob is illuminated. Refer to Wipers/Washers for description and operation of the Rear WiperWasher
Switch.
LX
8J - 73
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH

A latching push-button hazard-warning switch is placed in the instrument panel switch pod. This is an ergonomic
place for the switch where it can be conveniently reached. Refer to Lamps/Lighting - Exterior for description and
operation of the hazard warning switch.
PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLED (PAD) INDICATOR

The indicator is placed in the instrument panel switch pod. This is an ergonomic place for the indicator where it can
be conveniently seen by all interior occupants. Refer to Restraints for description and operation of the Passenger
Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) OFF SWITCH

A momentary contact, push-button ESP switch is placed in the instrument panel switch pod. This is an ergonomic
place for the switch where it can be conveniently reached. Refer to Brakes for description and operation of the ESP
system and ESP off switch.
ANTI-SLIP REGULATION (ASR) OFF SWITCH

A momentary contact, push-button ASR switch is placed in the instrument panel switch pod. This is an ergonomic
place for the switch where it can be conveniently reached. Refer to Brakes for description and operation of the ASR
system and ASR off switch.
REMOVAL
2.
3. Remove the instrument panel center bezel (Refer
to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER BEZEL - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the two screws (1) from the rear of the
switch pod.
5. Separate switch from center bezel.
8J - 74
INSTALLATION
1. Place the switch pod in the bezel opening and
install the two screws (1).
2. Install the instrument panel ceter bezel (Refer to 23
BODY/INSTRUMENT
PANEL/INSTRUMENT
LX
LAMPS
LX
8L - 1
LAMPS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - SERVICE
INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - SERVICE
INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
B162B-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B162F-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
B1630-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
B1633-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
B1634-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
B1637-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
B1638-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
B163B-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
B163C-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
B163F-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
B1640-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
B1643-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
B1644-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
B1647-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
B1648-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL

CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
B1659-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
B168F-FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH STUCK . . . 47
B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
B165D-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
B1667-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
B1668-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
B1607-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
B1608-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
B167A-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT
SOURCE CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
B167B-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT
SOURCE CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
B2235-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST
ECU INTERNAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
B2236-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST
ECU INTERNAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
B2239-HID LEVELING TRANSLATOR ECU
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8L - 2

LX
LX
B162B-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8L - 3
8L - 4
LX
When Monitored:
With the Headlamps activated.
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a LOW condition.
Possible Causes
(L43) LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Scan Tool, clear all FCM DTCs.
Headlamps on.
Scan Tool read the DTC information.
Does the Scan Tool read: B162B-LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
2.
(L43) LEFT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L43) Left Low Beam
Control circuit.
Yes
>> Replace the Front Control Module (FCM) in accordance

No
>> Repair the (L43) Left Low Beam Control circuit for a short
to ground condition.
LX
B162F-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8L - 5
8L - 6
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L44) RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Headlamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B162F-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L44) Right Low Beam
Control circuit.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (L44) Right Low Beam Control circuit for a short
LX
B1630-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8L - 7
8L - 8
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a HIGH condition.
Possible Causes

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Headlamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1630-RIGHT LOW BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the resistance of the (L44) Right Low Beam Control circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (L44) Right Low Beam Control circuit for a short
to battery condition.
No

LX
B1633-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8L - 9
8L - 10
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L33) LEFT HIGHBEAM OUTPUT CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Highbeam Headlamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1633-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(L33) LEFT HIGHBEAM OUTPUT CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L33) Left Highbeam
Output circuit.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (L33) Left Highbeam Output circuit for a short to
ground condition.
LX
B1634-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8L - 11
8L - 12
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L33) LEFT HIGH BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Headlamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1634-LEFT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(L33) HIGH BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L33) Left High Beam Control circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (L33) Left High Beam Control circuit for a short
No

LX
B1637-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8L - 13
8L - 14
LX
When Monitored:
With the Highbeam Headlamps activated.
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a High condition.
Possible Causes
(L34) RIGHT HIGHBEAM OUTPUT CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Highbeam Headlamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1637-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(L34) RIGHT HIGHBEAM OUTPUT CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L34) Right Highbeam
Output circuit.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (L34) Right Highbeam Output circuit for a short
LX
B1638-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8L - 15
8L - 16
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Headlamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1638-RIGHT HI BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(L34) RIGHT HIGH BEAM CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L34) Right High Beam Control circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (L34) Right High Beam Control circuit for a short
No

LX
B163B-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8L - 17
8L - 18
LX
Possible Causes
(L61) FRONT LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Left Turn Signals on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B163B-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
L61 FRONT LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the FCM C2 connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L61) Front Left Turn
Signal Control circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (L61) Front Left Turn Signal Control circuit for a
short to ground.
LX
3.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L61) Front Left Turn Signal Control circuit in the FCM.
Yes
>> Replace the Power Distribution Center in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Replace the Front Control Module in accordance with the service information.
8L - 19
8L - 20
B163C-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8L - 21
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
When the Front Control Module detects a short to battery on the Control circuit.
Possible Causes
(L61) TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn the
Clear all
Turn the
With the
ignition on.
FCM DTCs
Left Turn Signal on.
Does the scan tool read: B163C-FRONT LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
L61 LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L61) Front Left Turn Signal Control circuit.
No
>> Repair the (L61) Turn Signal Control circuit.

Yes
>> Go To 3
8L - 22
3.

Disconnect the Front Control Module from the PDC 49-way connector.
Measure the voltage between (L61) Front Left Turn Signal Control circuit and ground.
Yes
No
LX
LX
B163F-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8L - 23
8L - 24
LX
Possible Causes
(L60) FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Right Turn Signals on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B163F-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
L60 FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L60) Front Right Turn
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (L60) Front Right Turn Signal Control circuit for
a short to ground.
LX
3.

Disconnect the FCM connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L60) Front Right Turn Signal Control circuit in the FCM.
Yes
No
8L - 25
8L - 26
B1640-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8L - 27
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L60) FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn the
Clear all
Turn the
With the
ignition on.
FCM DTCs
Right Turn Signal on.
Does the scan tool read: B1640-FRONT RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
L60 FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the PDC connector from the FCM.
Measure the resistance of the (L60) Front Right Turn Signal Control circuit.
No
>> Repair the (L60) Front Right Turn Signal Control circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
8L - 28
3.

Measure the voltage between (L60) Front Right Turn Signal Control circuit and ground.
Yes

No

LX
LX
B1643-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8L - 29
8L - 30
LX
Possible Causes
(L63) REAR LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT
MODULE POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Left Turn Signals on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1643-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
L63 REAR LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the FCM PDM connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L63) Rear Left Turn
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (L63) Rear Left Turn Signal Control circuit for a
short to ground.
LX
3.

Disconnect the PDM connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L63) Rear Left Turn Signal Control circuit in the PDM.
Yes
>> Replace the Module Power Distribution Center in accordance with the service information.
No
8L - 31
8L - 32
B1644-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8L - 33
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L63) REAR LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn the
Clear all
Turn the
With the
ignition on.
FCM DTCs
Left Turn Signal on.
Does the scan tool read: B1644-REAR LEFT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
L63 REAR LEFT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the PDM connector from the FCM.
Measure the resistance of the (L63) Rear Left Turn Signal Control circuit.
No
>> Repair the (L63) Rear Left Turn Signal Control circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
8L - 34
3.

Disconnect the Front Control Module from the PDM 49 way connector.
Measure the voltage between (L63) Rear Left Turn Signal Control circuit and ground.
Yes

No

LX
LX
B1647-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8L - 35
8L - 36
LX
Possible Causes
(L62) REAR RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT
MODULE POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Right Turn Signals on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1647-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
L62 REAR RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L62) Rear Right Turn
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (L62) Rear Right Turn Signal Control circuit for a
short to ground.
LX
3.

Disconnect the PDM connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L62) Rear Right Turn Signal Control circuit in the PDM.
Yes
No
8L - 37
8L - 38
B1648-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8L - 39
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L62) REAR RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn the
Clear all
Turn the
With the
ignition on.
FCM DTCs
Does the scan tool read: B1648-REAR RIGHT TURN CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
L62 REAR RIGHT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L62) Rear Right Turn Signal Control circuit.
No
>> Repair the (L62) Rear Right Turn Signal Control circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
8L - 40
3.

Measure the voltage between (L62) Rear Right Turn Signal Control circuit and ground.
Yes

No

LX
LX
B1659-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8L - 41
8L - 42
LX
When Monitored:
With the Fog Lamps activated.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L89) FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Fog Lamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1659-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(L89) FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the FCM PDM harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L89) Fog Lamp Control circuit.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (L89) Fog Lamp Control circuit for a short to
ground condition.
LX
B1660-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8L - 43
8L - 44
LX
When Monitored:
With the Front Fog Lamps activated.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY

MODULE-POWER DISTRIBUTION
Diagnostic Test
1.

With the Scan Tool, clear all FCM DTCs.
Actuate the Front Fog Lamps.
With the Scan Tool read the DTC information.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1660-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY

Remove and install a known good relay in place of the Front Fog Lamp Relay.
Do the Front Fog Lamps operate normally?
Yes
>> Replace the Front Fog Lamp Relay in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.

Remove the Front Fog Lamp Relay from the MPD.
Remove the FCM from the Module Power Distribution.
Measure the voltage of the (L89) Front Fog Lamp Relay Output circuit
and ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Module Power Distribution center in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Replace the Module Front Control in accordance with the

LX
B1661-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
8L - 45
8L - 46
LX
When Monitored:
With the Fog Lamps activated.
Set Condition:
When the IPM detects an OPEN condition.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Replace the Fog Lamp relay with and known good relay.
With the Scan Tool, clear all IPM DTCs.
Turn the Fog Lamps ON then OFF.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1661-FRONT FOG LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Replace the Integrated Power Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No
>> Test complete.

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
LX
B168F-FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH STUCK
8L - 47
8L - 48
LX
When Monitored:
With the Fog Lamps on.
Set Condition:
When the CCN detects a Fog Lamp Switch Stuck message on the BUS.
Possible Causes
HEADLAMP SWITCH
(L307) SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (L900) SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
(L307) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX SHORT TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Fog Lamp Switch several times.
Turn the ignition on and wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display: B168F-FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH STUCK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
2.
HEADLAMP SWITCH SHORTED

Disconnect the Headlamp Switch connector.
Does the scan tool display: B168F-FRONT FOG LAMP SWITCH STUCK?
No
Yes
>> Go To 3
3.
(L307) HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L307) Headlamp
Switch Mux circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (L307) Headlamp Switch Mux circuit for a short
to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.

(L307) SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (L900) SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (L307) Switch Mux circuit and the
(L900) Switch Return circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (L307) Switch Mux circuit for a short to the
(L900) Switch Return circuit.
No
>> Replace the Instrument Cluster.

8L - 49
8L - 50
B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8L - 51
When Monitored:
With the Park Lamps activated.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L177) PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Park Lamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B165C-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(L177) PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the FCM PDM harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L177) Park Lamp
Control circuit.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (L177) Park Lamp Control circuit for a short to
ground condition.
8L - 52
B165D-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8L - 53
When Monitored:
With the Front Fog Lamps activated.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
PARK LAMP RELAY

MODULE-POWER DISTRIBUTION
Diagnostic Test
1.

Actuate the Park Lamps.
With the Scan Tool read the DTC information.
Does the Scan Tool read: B165D-PARK LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
PARK LAMP RELAY

Remove and install a known good relay in place of the Park Lamp Relay.
Do the Front Fog Lamps operate normally?
Yes
>> Replace the Park Lamp Relay in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
3.

Remove the Park Lamp Relay from the MPD.
Remove the FCM from the Module Power Distribution.
Measure the voltage of the (L177) Park Lamp Relay Control circuit and
ground.
Yes
>> Replace the Module Power Distribution center in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Replace the Module Front Control in accordance with the

8L - 54
B1667-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8L - 55
Possible Causes
(L1) BACKUP LAMPS FEED CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Reverse Lamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1667-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
L1 BACKUP LAMPS FEED CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between ground and the (L1) Backup Lamps
Feed circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (L1) Backup Lamps Control circuit for a short to
ground.
3.

Disconnect the FCM from the IPM connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L1) Backup Lamps Feed circuit in the IPM.
Yes
No
8L - 56
B1668-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8L - 57
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(L1) BACKUP LAMPS CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn the
Clear all
Turn the
With the
ignition on.
FCM DTCs
Does the scan tool read: B1668-REVERSE LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
L1 BACKUP LAMPS CONTROL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (L1) Backup Lamps Control circuit.
No
>> Repair the (L1) Backup Lamps Control circuit.

Yes
>> Go To 3
8L - 58
3.

Measure the voltage between (L1) Backup Lamps Control circuit and ground.
Yes

No

LX
LX
B1607-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8L - 59
8L - 60
LX
Possible Causes
HEADLAMP SWITCH
(L900) MUX RETURN CIRCUIT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Scan Tool, clear all CCN DTCs.
Headlamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1607-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
HEADLAMP SWITCH

Measure the voltage of the (L900) MUX Return circuit.
Does the voltage read 5.0 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.

Disconnect the Instrument Cluster C2 connector.
Measure the resistance of the (L900) MUX Return circuit to ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (L900) Headlamp MUX return circuit.

No
8L - 61
8L - 62
B1608-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8L - 63
Possible Causes
HEADLAMP SWITCH
(L900) HEADLAMP MUX RETURN CIRCUIT
(L307) HEADLAMP MUX INPUT CIRCUIT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Scan Tool, clear all CCN DTCs.
Headlamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B1608-HEADLAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
HEADLAMP SWITCH

Measure the voltage between the (L900) Headlamp MUX Return circuit and (L307) Headlamp Input MUX circuit.
Does the voltage read 0.0 volts?
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8L - 64
3.

Measure the resistance of the (L900) Headlamp MUX Return circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (L900) Headlamp MUX Return circuit.

4.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Measure the resistance of the (L307) Headlamp MUX circuit.
Yes
>> Replace the instrument Cluster in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Repair the (L307) Headlamp MUX circuit.

LX
LX
B167A-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT
8L - 65
8L - 66
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The code will set when the HID Module detects an INOP Headlamp Source.
Possible Causes
HEADLAMP SOURCE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Verify DTC B167A-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT IS ACTIVE
This is a Headlamp Source failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B167A-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT?
Repair
Replace the appropriate Headlamp Source in accordance with the service information.
LX
LX
B167B-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT
8L - 67
8L - 68
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The code will set when the HID Module detects an INOP Headlamp Source.
Possible Causes
HEADLAMP SOURCE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Verify DTC B167B-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT IS ACTIVE
This is a Headlamp Source failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B167B-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP LIGHT SOURCE CIRCUIT?
Repair
Replace the appropriate Headlamp Source in accordance with the service information.
LX
LX
B2235-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Continuously with the Headlamps on.
Set Condition:
The code will set when a Check Sum error is detected.
Possible Causes
LEFT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Verify DTC B2235-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL IS ACTIVE
This is an internal Ballast ECU failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B2235-LEFT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL?
Repair
Replace the Left Side Headlamp Ballast ECU in accordance with the service information.
8L - 69
8L - 70
B2236-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Continuously with the Headlamps on.
Set Condition:
The code will set when a Check Sum error is detected.
Possible Causes
RIGHT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Verify DTC B2236-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL IS ACTIVE
This is an internal Headlamp Ballast ECU failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B2236-RIGHT FRONT HEADLAMP BALLAST ECU INTERNAL?
Repair
Replace the Right Side Headlamp Ballast ECU in accordance with the service information.
LX
LX
B2239-HID LEVELING TRANSLATOR ECU INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The code will set when the HID Module detects an internal failure.
Possible Causes
MODULE INTERNAL FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Verify DTC B2239-HID LEVELING TRANSLATOR ECU INTERNAL IS ACTIVE
This is an internal module failure
View repair
Does the DTC reset and read B2239-HID LEVELING TRANSLATOR ECU INTERNAL?
Repair
Replace the HID Translator Module in accordance with the service information.
8L - 71
8L - 72
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR - SERVICE

INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
STANDARD PROCEDURE
FRONT LAMP AIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
SPECIFICATIONS
EXTERIOR LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
AUTO HEADLAMP SENSOR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
FOG LAMP UNIT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP UNIT - CHARGER
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL LAMP
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
HEADLAMP
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HEADLAMPS . . 94
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE - EXPORT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
HEADLAMP LEVEL SENSOR - EXPORT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
SWITCH-HEADLAMP
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
HEADLAMP UNIT
REMOVAL - 300C AND MAGNUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
INSTALLATION - 300C AND MAGNUM . . . . . . . . . 116
LICENSE PLATE LAMP UNIT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
REPEATER LAMP - EXPORT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
SWITCH - STOP LAMP
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
STOP LAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
ADJUSTMENTS
STOP LAMP SWITCH ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . 128
TAIL LAMP UNIT
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
SPOT LAMP - POLICE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
SPOT LAMP ASSEMBLY - POLICE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
SPOT LAMP ASSEMBLY - POLICE . . . . . . . . . . 135
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
UNDERHOOD LAMP - POLICE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
UNDERHOOD LAMP UNIT - POLICE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
LX
8L - 73

DESCRIPTION
The exterior lighting system for this model includes the following exterior lamp units:
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp - A Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) is centered on the rear
shelf trim panel at the base of the backlite on sedans, and on the liftgate spoiler just above the liftgate glass
opening at the rear of the vehicle on the wagon.
Front Fog Lamps - Vehicles equipped with this option have a fog lamp unit mounted near each outboard end
of the front bumper support, behind the lower portion of the front fascia.
Front Headlamp Units - A front headlamp unit is mounted to the front of each front fender panel on either
side of the grille opening.
License Plate Lamp - A rear license plate lamp unit is mounted to the rear fascia, just above the license plate
tub.
Tail Lamp Units - A tail lamp unit is mounted to the rear of each quarter panel on either side of the liftgate
opening.
These exterior lighting lamps and their controls are combined to provide the following exterior lighting features:
Automatic Headlamps - Vehicles with the automatic headlamps option are equipped with a unique headlamp
switch that includes an automatic position and a sun load sensor located on the top of the instrument panel to
sense ambient light levels. When the Auto position of the headlamp switch is selected, the headlamps are
turned On automatically when ambient light levels are low.
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles manufactured for sale in Canada illuminate the low beam filament of the
headlamp bulb in each front lamp unit to serve as the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Fleet vehicles manufactured for sale in the United States illuminate the high beam filament of the headlamp bulb in each front
lamp unit to serve as the DRL.
Other components of the exterior lighting system for this model include:
Backup Lamp Switch - A Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) integral to the solenoid pack on the valve body
of the electronic automatic transmission performs the backup lamp switch function for this model.
Brake Lamp Switch - A plunger-type brake lamp switch is located on the steering column support bracket
under the instrument panel and is actuated by the brake pedal arm.
Front Control Module - The Front Control Module (FCM) is integral to the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
The FCM/IPM is located in the engine compartment, near the battery and the Power Distribution Center (PDC).
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION).
Headlamp Switch - A headlamp switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, below and outboard
of the steering column. The headlamp switch includes a rotary knob for the park lamps and headlamps On or
Off, and a push button switch for selecting the front fog lamps on vehicles so equipped. The headlamp switch
also features a vertical thumbwheel for selecting the panel lamps dimming level, a Parade mode to illuminate
all Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) units at full brightness for visibility when driving in daylight with the
exterior lighting turned On, and for interior lighting control.
Instrument Cluster - The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) is also known as the Cab Control
Node (CCN) in this vehicle. The EMIC/CCN is located in the instrument panel above the steering column
opening, directly in front of the driver. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DESCRIPTION).
Multi-Function Switch - The multi-function switch is located on the steering column, just below the steering
wheel. A control stalk that extends from the left side of the switch is used to select the turn signal lamps (right
or left) and to select the headlamp beam (low, high or optical horn).
OPERATION
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
Power is reduced using pulse-width modulation (PWM) to the high beams, where by the power is switched on and
off rapidly instead of remaining on continuously. The duration and interval of the power pulses is programmed into
the IPM.
8L - 74
LX
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP SYSTEM

Automatic headlamps are controlled by the Cab Compartment Node (CCN). With the headlamp switch in the AUTO
position, the CCN will control the headlamp, parking, side marker, tail and instrumentation lamps based on ambient
light levels. Ambient light levels are monitored by the CCN using the ambient light signal present. Ambient light
readings are averaged to limit cycling the lamps ON and OFF when passing through areas with varying light levels.
The automatic headlamps will only function when the engine is running with the RPM greater than 300. When the
headlamp switch is in the AUTO position (Automatic mode), the Headlamp Time Delay system will function when the
ignition switch is placed in any position other than run/start.
HEADLAMP TIME DELAY SYSTEM

The headlamp time delay system is activated by turning the headlamps ON (high or low beam) while the engine is
running, turning the ignition switch OFF, and then turning the headlamp switch OFF. The Cab Compartment Node
(CCN) will allow the headlamps to remain ON for 90 seconds (configurable) before they automatically turn off (If the
key is in the ignition during the headlamp time delay mode, then both the headlamps and park lamps (including
panel dimming) will be ON). Refer to the Owners Manual for more information.
If the headlamp switch is in the Auto Headlamp Position, the headlamps are ON due to the night signal from the
ambient light sensor and the ignition switch is in any position other than run/start, the CCN shall enter a 90 second
(configurable) Auto Headlamps time delay mode. If the key is in the ignition during the headlamp time delay mode,
then both the headlamps and park lamps (including panel dimming) will be ON. If the key is not in the ignition, then
only the headlamps will be ON. The CCN will allow the headlamps to remain ON for 90 seconds before they automatically turn OFF. Refer to the Owners Manual for more information.
WARNING
Eye protection should be used when servicing glass components. Personal injury or death could result.
This vehicle contains mercury added devices added by the manufacturer: High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps. Remove devices before vehicle disposal. Upon removal of devices, please reuse, recycle, or
dispose of as hazardous waste.
Do not back probe any connectors or pierce any wiring to the HID headlamp system. High voltage (a/c voltage) is used in this system and component and personal injury or death could result (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/HEADLAMP - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HID HEADLAMPS).
Do not power up the headlamp assembly with the headlamp access cover off. A high voltage a/c (alternating
current) shock may occur causing personal injury or death.
On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further
diagnosis or service. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment
and possible personal injury or death.
Do not touch the glass of halogen bulbs with fingers or other possibly oily surface, reduced bulb life will
result. Do not use bulbs other than those indicated in the bulb application table. Damage to lamp and/or
daytime running lamp module can result. Do not use fuses, circuit breakers or relays having greater amperage value than indicated on the fuse panel or in the owners manual.
Do not use bulbs other than those listed in the bulb application table. Damage to lamp can result. Do not
touch bulbs with fingers or other oily surfaces. Bulb life will be reduced.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
FRONT LAMP AIMING
VEHICLE PREPARATION FOR LAMP ALIGNMENT
1. Check for and correct any burnt out bulbs.
2. Repair or replace any faulty, worn or damaged body or suspension components that could hinder proper lamp
alignment.
3. Verify proper tire inflation pressures.
4. Remove any accumulations of mud, snow or ice from the vehicle underbody and clean the front lamp lenses.
LX
8L - 75
5. Verify that there is no load in the vehicle (cargo or passengers), except for the driver.
6. The fuel tank should be Full. Add 2.94 kilograms (6.5 pounds) of weight over the fuel tank for each estimated
gallon of missing fuel.
7. Verify correct vehicle suspension height.
LAMP ALIGNMENT SCREEN PREPARATION
The procedure that follows will prepare a suitable front lamp alignment screen.
1. Tape a line on a level floor 7.62 meters (25 feet) away from and parallel to the flat wall that will be used as the
lamp alignment screen. The level floor will be used as the horizontal zero reference.
2. An adjacent wall or floor member that is perpendicular to the alignment screen can be used as the vertical zero
reference. If there is no adjacent wall or floor member that is perpendicular to the screen, tape a second line on
the floor perpendicular to both the alignment screen and the first line, and outboard of either side of where the
vehicle will be positioned. This will be used as the vertical zero reference.
3. Position the vehicle so that the side of the vehicle is parallel to the vertical zero reference, and so that the front
of the lamp lenses are in the vertical plane of the parallel line taped on the floor 7.62 meters (25 feet) away from
the screen.
4. Rock the vehicle side-to-side three times to allow the suspension to stabilize.
5. Jounce the front suspension three times by pushing downward on the front bumper and releasing.
6. Measure the distance between the optical center of one of the lamps being aimed (head or fog) and the floor
(horizontal zero reference). Transfer this measurement to the alignment screen with a piece of tape placed horizontally to the floor. This line will be used as the lamp horizontal reference.
8L - 76
LX
7. Measure the distance between the vertical zero reference and the optical center of the nearest lamp being aimed
(head or fog). Transfer this measurement to the alignment screen with a piece of tape placed vertically across
the appropriate (head or fog) lamp horizontal reference. This is the centerline reference for the first lamp.
8. Measure the distance on center between the first and the second lamp being aimed. Transfer this measurement
to the alignment screen with a second piece of tape placed vertically across the appropriate (head or fog) lamp
horizontal reference. This is the centerline reference for the second lamp.
HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT
There are three different kinds of headlamp aiming procedures:
Visual Aim Optical Left (VOL) - 300C with halogen and 300C w/HID.
Visual Aim Optical Right (VOR) - 300/300 Touring and Dodge Magnum.
Export - 300C w/HID - Export vehicles.
The VOL or VOR is embossed on the lower front of each headlamp unit.
VOL HEADLAMP AIMING
With the horizontal centerline of the headlamp (2) transferred on the wall, measure down 53 mm (2.1 in). This line
(1) will be the vertical aiming mark. Using the left side of the headlamp vertical centerline (3), adjust the headlamp
unit so the residual light from the headlamp, not the hot spot, is even with the line (1) that was marked previously
53 mm (2.1 in) below the horizontal centerline (2). The ideal alignment should be (5). The right headlamp aiming will
be the same, but using the area left of right headlamp vertical centerline (not shown).
1. Turn the headlamps On and select the Low beams.
2. Rotate the headlamp vertical adjustment screw (and horizontal on export) on each lamp to adjust the beam
height as required.
VOR HEADLAMP AIMING
With the horizontal centerline of the headlamp (1) transferred on the wall, this line (1) will be the vertical aiming
mark. Using the right side of the headlamp vertical centerline (2 for the left and 4 for the right), adjust the headlamp
unit so the residual light from the headlamp is even with the horizontal centerline (1). The ideal alignment should be
(5).
LX
8L - 77
height as required.
EXPORT HEADLAMP AIMING
With the horizontal centerline of the headlamp (1) transferred on the wall, measure down 76 mm (3 in). This line (6)
will be the vertical aiming mark. Using the intersecting point (5) of the horizontal centerline (6) and the vertical centerline (2) for the left headlamp, adjust the headlamp unit horizontally and vertically so (5) is the intersecting point
at lines (6 and 2). For the right headlamp unit, cover up the left headlamp and follow the same procedure but
intersecting at (6 and 4).
height as required.
FOG LAMP ALIGNMENT

A properly aimed front fog lamp will project a pattern on the alignment screen 100 millimeters (4 inches) below the
fog lamp centerline and straight ahead of the lamp.
1. Turn the fog lamps On.
2. Rotate the fog lamp vertical adjustment screw (2)
on each lamp to adjust the beam height as
required.
8L - 78
LX
SPECIFICATIONS
EXTERIOR LAMPS
BULB APPLICATION TABLE
LAMP
BULB
CHRYSLER 300/300 TOURING
Back-Up
3057
CHMSL
LED (Replace as unit)
Front Fog
9145/H10
Front Park/Turn
3757AK
Front Sidemarker
W5W
High Beam Headlamp
9005
License
168
Low Beam Headlamp
9006
Rear Sidemarker
168
Tail/Stop/Turn
3057
CHRYSLER 300C
Back-Up
3057
CHMSL
Front Fog
9145/H10
Front Park/Turn
3157AK
Front Sidemarker
W5W
High Beam Headlamp
9005
License
W5W
Low Beam Headlamp (Halogen)
9006XS
Low Beam Headlamp (HID)
DIS
Tail/Stop/Turn
3057
DODGE MAGNUM
Back-Up
921/W16W
CHMSL
Front Fog
9145/H10
Front Park/Turn
3457AK
Front Sidemarker
194NA
High Beam Headlamp
9005
License
W5W
Low Beam Headlamp
9006
Rear Sidemarker
3757APY27/7W
Spot Lamp - Police
H3
Tail/Stop/Turn
3157KP27/7W
DODGE CHARGER
Back-Up
921
CHMSL
LED (Replaced as unit)
Front Fog
9145/H10
Front Park/Turn
3157NAK
Front Sidemarker
194
LX
LAMP
High Beam Headlamp
BULB
9005
License
168
Low Beam Headlamp
9006
Rear Sidemarker
168
Spot Lamp - Police
H3
Tail/Stop/Turn
3057
8L - 79
8L - 80
AUTO HEADLAMP SENSOR

REMOVAL
2. Remove the defroster grille (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INSTRUMENT PANEL/DEFROSTER GRILLE REMOVAL).
3. Using a trim stick (special tool #C-4755) or equivalent, gently pry up on the auto headlamp sensor
(1).
4. Pull the sensor from the top of the instrument
panel.
5. Disconnect the one electrical connector.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the one electrical connector.
2. Position the auto headlamp sensor (1) in instrument panel and press firmly down to snap into
place.
3. Install the defroster grille (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/DEFROSTER GRILLE INSTALLATION).

8L - 81
8L - 82
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP

REMOVAL
SEDAN
2. Remove the rear shelf trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/REAR SHELF TRIM PANEL REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the CHMSL electrical connector (1).
4. Remove the two mounting fasteners (3) to the

CHMSL (2).
LX
LX
WAGON
1. Remove the rear spoiler (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/SPOILER - REMOVAL).
2. With the rear spoiler on bench, remove the fasteners and electrical connector from the CHMSL.
INSTALLATION
SEDAN
1. Place the center high mounted stop lamp (2) into
position at the bottom of the backlite.
2. Install and tighten the mounting fasteners (3).
3. Connect the electrical connector (1).
8L - 83
8L - 84
WAGON
1. Place the CHMSL on the spoiler (1) and install and
tighten the mounting fasteners.
2. Install the spoiler (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/
SPOILER - INSTALLATION).
LX
LX
FOG LAMP UNIT

REMOVAL
2. Open hood and remove the upper radiator closeout
panel (2 and 4).
3. Remove the six upper fascia retaining fasteners
(Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/
FRONT FASCIA - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the headlamp unit (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/HEADLAMP

UNIT - REMOVAL).
5. From behind the bumper fascia, disconnect the

harness connector.
6. Remove two fog lamp unit mounting fasteners.
7. Remove fog lamp unit (1).
8L - 85
8L - 86
INSTALLATION
1. Position the fog lamp unit (1) in fascia opening.
2. Install the two fog lamp unit mounting fasteners.
3. Connect the harness connector.
4. Install the headlamp unit (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/HEADLAMP

UNIT - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the six upper fascia retaining fasteners

FRONT FASCIA - INSTALLATION).
6. Install the upper radiator closeout panel (2 and 4).
LX
LX
FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP

REMOVAL
CHRYSLER
UNIT - REMOVAL).
3. It may be necessary to loosen the fascia (1) to gain

access to the side marker lamp (Refer to 13 FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA REMOVAL).
4. Remove side marker lamp from side marker lamp
unit by twisting lamp socket.
DODGE
UNIT - REMOVAL).
8L - 87
8L - 88
3. Remove the front side marker lamp from the headlamp unit.
INSTALLATION
CHRYSLER
1. Install the side marker lamp into side marker lamp
unit by twisting lamp socket.
2. If the fascia (1) was loosened to gain access to the
side marker lamp, install the fascia (Refer to 13 FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA INSTALLATION).

LX
LX
DODGE
1. Install the front side marker lamp into the headlamp
unit.

8L - 89
8L - 90
FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP UNIT - CHARGER

REMOVAL
1. Open hood, disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
2. If removing the left front side marker lamp unit, the
air cleaner housing must be removed to gain
access to the release tabs (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - REMOVAL). The right side
is accessible without removing any components.
3. Reach in behind the headlamp unit and on the outboard side of the unit, find and pinch together the
release tabs (1) of the front side marker lamp unit
(2).
4. Push the unit (2) forward and out of the front fascia.
5. Disconnect the side marker lamp unit connector by
releasing the retaining tab and pull it out of the
lamp unit.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the side marker lamp unit (2) electrical
connector.
2. Push the unit (2) rearward making sure that the
alignment dowel (3) is lined up and firmly push into
place until it seats with a snap.
3. If the left front side marker lamp unit was replaced,
the air cleaner housing must be reinstalled (Refer
to 9 - ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - INSTALLATION).
4. Connect the battery negative cable and close hood.
LX
LX
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL LAMP

REMOVAL
2. From atop the headlamp unit, reach behind and
just below the upper radiator crossmember and
twist the park/turn signal lamp socket out.
3. Remove the lamp from the socket.
INSTALLATION
1. Install lamp into socket.
2. Install lamp socket (1) into the headlamp unit. Twist
sochet clockwise.
8L - 91
8L - 92
LX
HEADLAMP
DESCRIPTION
Quad headlamps are standard equipment on this model. They are halogen headlamps, both low and high beams.
This vehicle may be equipped with optional High
Intensity Discharge (HID) low beams. The HID type
lamp is used in place of the conventional halogen low
beam lamp. High beam lamps remain the same halogen type.
HID lamps get their name from the intense white light
produced by the electrical discharge. The light produced by the HID lamps appears as a white color as
opposed to the yellow color of the standard halogen
lamps.
HID lighting provides about three times the light output
of standard halogen lamps while using less energy.
The lamps are also designed to last 10 times longer
than standard halogen lamps.
OPERATION
To turn on the headlamps, turn the left knob of the
headlamp switch clockwise to the first detent for parking lamp and instrument panel lamp operation. Turn to
the second detent for headlamp, park lamp and instrument panel lamp operation.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) rely on an AC (alternating current) electrical charge to ignite xenon gas
contained in a sealed beam lamp. The HID lamps are similar in operation to common vapor filled street headlamps.
Instead of using a filament to produce light, the gas inside the lamp is ignited by creating an arc between two
electrodes.
The color of the light source is classified as its color temperature. As the color temperature increases, the color of
the light moves from yellow to blue-white to white. The light produced by the HID lamps appears as a white color
as opposed to the yellow color of the standard (halogen) lamps. HID lamps provide light as a higher color temperature than standard halogen lamps.
For the color temperature of different lamp types, refer to the COLOR TEMPERATURE table. As a point of reference, typical sunlight at noon has a color temperature of 4977 C (8990 F).
LX
COLOR TEMPERATURE
LAMP
TEMPERATURE
INCANDESCENT LAMPS
2527 C (4580 F)
HALOGEN LAMPS
2927 C (5300 F)
HID LAMPS
3827 C (6920 F)
There are three components to each of the HID headlamps:

1. Ballast Module - The 12 volt Direct Current (DC)
power supplied by the low beam relay is converted
to Alternating Current (AC) power by the ballast
module. Each lamp requires its own ballast module. The ballast converts and steps up the low
beam relay output to 800 volts AC, and supplies
the lamp assembly via a cable connected to the
igniter.
2. Lamp/Igniter - The lamp contains electrodes and

xenon gas. The lamp takes about 10-15 seconds of
warm-up time to reach full operation. The light
appears blue during warm-up and then turns to
white. The igniter controls the voltage applied to
the lamp electrodes. The igniter uses the voltage
supplied by the ballast module and momentarily
steps up the voltage to 25,000 volts to start the
lamp. Once ignited, it will reduce the voltage to 85
volts.
8L - 93
8L - 94
LX
3. Cable - The cable is used to transfer the high voltage produced by the ballast module to the
lamp/igniter.

HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HEADLAMPS
The High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps are supplied B+ voltage and ground, the same as normal halogen
low beam lamps. The low beam system is different from there forward. The ballast module is mounted to the bottom
of the headlamp unit. The ballast module has internal circuit protection to prevent module damage in case of an
open or shorted circuit. The module has overcharge and undercharge circuit protection. If either is sensed, the module will not illuminate the headlamps for that key cycle or until the fault is corrected. Recycle the ignition and headlamp switch if both headlamps do not illuminate. Before determining the headlamp assembly is faulty, check the
connector at the headlamp and check if there is voltage coming from the IPM pin providing the power to the respective headlamp. If the module senses a short or open circuit condition, it will not operate the lamp/igniter.
WARNING: The headlamp unit must be removed to perform these tests (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/
LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/HEADLAMP UNIT - REMOVAL). Failure to do so could result in personal injury or
death.
1. Inspect lamp for a burned out lamp. If lamp is burned out it will appear black or smoky, similar to a normal
halogen bulb. If lamp looks OK, go to Step 2.
2. Check for B+ battery voltage at the connector going into the ballast module. Refer to Wiring Diagrams for connector location. If battery voltage and a good ground are present, go to Step 3. If B+ voltage and a good ground
are not present, refer to Wiring Diagrams for circuit and connector locations to find short or open circuit.
3. Plug in a known good ballast module and check for lamp operation. If lamp lights, replace ballast module. If lamp
still fails to light, replace igniter assembly.
LX
REMOVAL
HALOGEN HEADLAMP
NOTE: If replacing the left low or high beam headlamp, the air box has to be removed first (Refer to
9 - ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - REMOVAL).
2. Disconnect the lamp electrical connector.
3. Twist lamp (1 and 2) out of headlamp housing.
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) HEADLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED) - LOW BEAM

HEADLAMP
NOTE: If replacing the left front low beam HID
headlamp, the air box has to be removed first
(Refer to 9 - ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM REMOVAL).
2. Remove the rubber boot (1) protecting the lamp/igniter from the elements.
8L - 95
8L - 96
3. Disconnect the electrical cable connector to the

lamp/igniter by pulling straight down.
4. Release the retaining wire clip on the back of the

lamp/igniter.
5. Grab the igniter by pulling rearward and rocking it
slightly as you pull.
6. Pull the igniter straight out of the headlamp unit.
The lamp is integral to the igniter and cannot be
separated.
BALLAST MODULE
UNIT - REMOVAL).
LX
LX
2. From the underside of the headlamp unit, remove

the six retaining screws (1).
3. Pull the ballast module out of headlamp unit.

4. Disconnect the two electrical connectors (1 and 2).
One of the connectors (1) will be a standard
push tab to release connector.
The second connector (2) has a lever that must
be rotated away or down from the wire of the
cable and connector.
5. Separate ballast module from headlamp unit.
CABLE
UNIT - REMOVAL).
8L - 97
8L - 98
2. From the underside of the headlamp unit, remove

3. Pull the ballast module out of headlamp unit.

4. Disconnect the cable connector (2) Move the lever
away or down from the wire of the cable and
connector.
5. Remove the rubber boot (1) protecting the lamp/igniter from the elements.
LX
LX
6. Disconnect the electrical cable connector to the

lamp/igniter by pulling straight down.
7. Maneuver
separate.
cable
through
headlamp
unit
to
8L - 99
8L - 100
INSTALLATION
HALOGEN HEADLAMP
1. Twist lamp (1 or 2) into headlamp housing clockwise.
2. Connect the lamp electrical connector.
NOTE: If replacing the left low or high beam headlamp, the air box has to be reinstalled (Refer to 9 ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - INSTALLATION).
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) HEADLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED) - LOW BEAM

HEADLAMP
1. Push the igniter straight into the headlamp unit with
the connector pointing straight down. The lamp is
integral to the igniter.
2. Put the retaining wire clip on the back of the
lamp/igniter.
LX
LX
3. Connect the electrical cable connector to the

lamp/igniter.
4. Install the rubber boot (1) protecting the lamp/igniter from the elements.
NOTE: If replacing the left low beam headlamp, the
air box has to be reinstalled (Refer to 9 - ENGINE/
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - INSTALLATION).
8L - 101
8L - 102
BALLAST MODULE
1. Connect the two electrical connectors (1 and 2).
One of the connectors (1) will be a standard
push tab to release connector.
The second connector (2) has a lever that must
be locked when connected.
2. Position the ballast module in of headlamp unit.
3. From the underside of the headlamp unit, install


LX
LX
CABLE
1. Maneuver cable through headlamp unit.
2. Connect the cable electrical connectors (2). The

connector (2) has a lever that must be locked when
connected.
8L - 103
8L - 104
3. From the underside of the headlamp unit, install

4. Connect the electrical cable connector to the

lamp/igniter.
5. Install the rubber boot (1) protecting the lamp/igniter from the elements.
LX
LX

8L - 105
8L - 106
LX
HEADLAMP LEVELING MODULE - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
The Headlamp Leveling Module or HID Translator
Module is the remote electronic sub-component of the
headlamp leveling system. The HID translator module
is used to translate communication of the headlamps
leveling system. The sensors communicate over a
K-Line to the headlamp stepper motors, then to the
translator module. To enable the scan tool to read system inputs and outputs, and to retrieve Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs), the translator module must
convert this K-Line data into Controller Area Network
(CAN) data.
The HID translator module is located inside the right
front engine compartment, just behind the headlamp
unit. It is mounted to a stamped steel bracket by one
fastener and has one electrical connector that connects it to the wiring harness.
OPERATION
The system is designed to automatically level the vehicles headlamps, regardless of cargo or passenger loads or
road conditions. When the vehicle is loaded with passengers and/or cargo, as the ignition is turned to RUN, the
system will look at the front and rear sensors and make an adjustment based upon feedback from the sensor to see
if it has approximately 27.5 degrees from its zero or neutral position. The headlamp stepper motor then adjusts the
headlamp up or down for proper headlamp aiming. The system is dynamic. The headlamp level will be adjusted
while driving if required based on sensor inputs.
NOTE: If the headlamp leveling module (HID translator module) or sensors are replaced, the system needs
to be calibrated using a Scan Tool.
When in calibration mode, the key in the RUN position, the vehicle doors, trunk/liftgate, and hood must be closed.
In addition, no one is seated in vehicle, the vehicle may not be touched (bounced or bumped) until the calibration
is complete. The headlamps must be ON to power the stepper motors. The approximate calibration time is 12 - 15
seconds. The scan tool will display a status of calibration message. These being either still in progress, passed,
or failed.
If a system fault occurs, the translator module will store the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and enable it to be read
using the scan tool and assist in diagnosing the headlamp leveling system.
LX
8L - 107
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the one electrical connector to the HID
translator module (1).
3. Remove the one nut (2) holding the module (1) to
the bracket.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: When replacing the headlamp leveling module/HID translator module, the system must be calibrated using a Scan Tool.
1. Install the one nut (2) holding the module (1) to the
bracket.
2. Connect the one electrical connector to the HID
translator module.
4. Using a Scan Tool, calibrate the headlamp levelling
system.
8L - 108
HEADLAMP LEVEL SENSOR - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
The headlamp leveling system uses two headlamp
level sensors to determine when the vehicle has had
its ride height or angle changes, due to passenger/
cargo additions and road conditions.
There is one sensor (1) mounted on the spring link (3)

on the right side of the rear suspension.
LX
LX
8L - 109
There is a second sensor (2) mounted on the upper

control arm (1) on the right side, in the front of the
vehicle.
Each sensor has a link that is connected to the suspension and to the sensor, one electrical connector
that connects the sensor to the vehicles electrical system wiring harness, and one bracket that mounts with
one nut to the vehicle.
OPERATION
The system is designed to automatically level the headlamps, regardless of cargo/passenger loads or road conditions. When the vehicle is loaded with passengers and/or cargo, as the ignition is turned to RUN, the system will
look at the front and rear sensors and make an adjustment to the headlamp stepper motors based upon feedback
from the sensor to see if it has moved approximately 27.5 degrees from its zero or neutral position. The headlamp
stepper motor then adjusts the headlamp up or down for proper headlamp aiming.
The headlamp level sensors act like a potentiometer to relay information via the data bus to the HID translator
module when the vehicle has changed its angle or ride height in either the front or rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: If the headlamp leveling module (HID translator module) or sensors are replaced, the system needs
to be calibrated using a Scan Tool.
When in calibration mode, the vehicle doors, trunk/liftgate, and hood must be closed. In addition, the vehicle may
not be touched (bounced or bumped) until the calibration is complete. The headlamps must be ON to power the
stepper motors. The approximate calibration time is 12 - 15 seconds. The scan tool will display a status of calibration message. These being either still in progress, passed, or failed.
If a system fault occurs, the translator module will store the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and enable it to be read
using the scan tool and assist in diagnosing the headlamp leveling system.
8L - 110
REMOVAL
FRONT
2. Hoist vehicle.
3. Unsnap the sensor link from the upper control arm
(front) (1).
4. Disconnect the one electrical connector (4).
5. Remove the two speed nuts (3) to remove sensor
and bracket (2).
REAR
2. Hoist vehicle.
3. Unsnap the sensor link from the spring link (rear)
(3).
5. Remove the two fasteners to the sensor and
bracket (1).
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
FRONT
1. Install the two retaining nuts (3) to the sensor and
bracket (2).
2. Connect the one electrical connector (4).
3. Snap the sensor link onto the upper control arm
(front) (1).
4. Remove the vehicle from the hoist.
6. Using a Scan Tool, calibrate the headlamp leveling
system.
REAR
1. Install the fasteners to the sensor and bracket (1).
3. Snap the sensor link onto the spring link (rear) (3).
4. Remove the vehicle from the hoist.
6. Using a Scan Tool, calibrate the headlamp leveling
system.
8L - 111
8L - 112
LX
SWITCH-HEADLAMP
REMOVAL
WARNING: Wait two minutes for the airbag system reserve capacitor to discharge before beginning any airbag system or component service. Failure to do so may result in accidental airbag deployment, personal
injury or death.
2. Remove steering column opening cover (Refer to
COLUMN OPENING COVER - REMOVAL).
3. From underneath and behind the instrument panel,
push up on the lower clip on headlamp switch then
wiggle it down and out of instrument panel.
4. Disconnect
connector.
the
headlamp
switch
electrical
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the headlamp switch electrical connector.
2. Position headlamp switch in instrument panel and
firmly snap into place.
3. Install the steering column opening cover (Refer to
COLUMN OPENING COVER - INSTALLATION).
LX
HEADLAMP UNIT
REMOVAL - 300C AND MAGNUM
2. Open hood and remove the two upper headlamp
unit mounting screws.
3. The two upper retaining screws (1) are located just

in front of the upper radiator cross-member.
NOTE: It may be necessary to loosen the side of

the fascia to access the lower headlamp unit
retaining screw (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/
BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the one lower headlamp unit retaining
screw.
8L - 113
8L - 114
LX
5. Disconnect the electrical connectors.

6. Separate headlamp unit from vehicle.
REMOVAL - CHARGER
1. On Charger models, the fascia must first be removed to gain access for the removal of headlamp unit and fasteners (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - REMOVAL).
3. Open hood and remove the two upper headlamp
unit mounting screws.
LX
4. The two upper retaining screws (1) are located just

in front of the upper radiator cross-member.
5. Remove the one lower headlamp unit retaining

screw.
6. Disconnect the electrical connectors.

7. Separate headlamp unit from vehicle.
8L - 115
8L - 116
INSTALLATION - 300C AND MAGNUM

1. Position the headlamp unit in the opening in the
headlamp mounting cross-member.
2. Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the one lower headlamp unit retaining screw.

NOTE: If the fascia was loosened, reattach it
FRONT FASCIA - INSTALLATION).
4. Install the two upper retaining screws (1).

LX
LX
INSTALLATION - CHARGER
1. Position the headlamp unit in the opening in the
headlamp mounting cross-member.
3. Install the one lower headlamp unit retaining screw.
4. Install the two upper retaining screws (1).
8L - 117
8L - 118
5. Install front fascia (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - INSTALLATION).

LX
LX
LICENSE PLATE LAMP UNIT

REMOVAL
1. Remove the two mounting screws (1) to the license
lamp unit.
2. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp unit by

twisting socket counterclockwise.
8L - 119
8L - 120
3. Separate socket from lamp.
INSTALLATION
1. Position lamp socket into lamp unit.
LX
LX
2. Twist the socket clockwise until stops.
3. Maneuver the lamp unit up into rear fascia and

install the two retaining screws (1).
8L - 121
8L - 122
LX
MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
The multi-function switch (2) is located on the steering
column, just below the steering wheel, within the
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM).
The only visible components of the multi-function

switch are the control stalk and control knob that
extend through the SCCM on the left side of the column. The remainder of the switch including its mounting provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn
signal cancel actuator are concealed within the
SCCM.
Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly
identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, slide into channels in a receptacle
in the circuit board within the SCCM. A single integral connector receptacle in the circuit board connects the switch
to the vehicle electrical system through the instrument panel wire harness.
The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions:
Front Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary position for front washer
system operation.
Front Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous front wipe switch positions, low speed or high speed; and, an intermittent front wipe mode with six delay interval positions.
Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of
the headlamp high or low beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp
high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as
flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device.
Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change)
switching and detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps.
The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is faulty, or if the switch is
damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN
CONTROL MODULE - DISASSEMBLY).
LX
8L - 123
OPERATION
The multi-function switch operates as follows:
Front Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed
towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the front washer mode. The washer
pump will continue to operate in the front washer mode until the control knob is released. The multi-function
switch provides an output by sending electronic front washer switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the washer pump in the front washer mode.
Front Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one
of the continuous front wiper detents, to one of six intermittent ( or auto wipe sensitivity positions if so
equipped) wiper detents, or to the Off position to select the front wiper mode. The multi-function switch provides an output by sending electronic front wiper switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus.
The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper on/off and high/low relays in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) for front wiper system control.
Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pushed toward the instrument
panel for a latching high beam selection. Pulling the stalk rearward toward the steering wheel for a latching low
beam selection. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned
off, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The
multi-function switch provides an output to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes or de-energizes the selected low or high beam circuits.
Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the right turn
signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the left turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent
position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momentary position in each direction that provides turn signals only until the control stalk is released. When the control stalk is moved to a turn signal switch detent position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the
steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and
the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steering wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the
turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction opposite that which is signaled. If the left turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past
the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the
steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the
control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral Off position. When a turn signal is activated, the multifunction switch provides an output to the FCM over the CAN data bus. In addition, the message is sent to the
CCN via the CAN bus to activate the proper signal within the EMIC. The FCM energizes and flashes or deenergizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits.
The multi-function switch can be diagnosed using a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is faulty, or if the switch is
damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN
CONTROL MODULE - DISASSEMBLY).
8L - 124
REPEATER LAMP - EXPORT

REMOVAL
1. Push lamp (3) to the left and disengage lamp by
rotating it out of the metal around its left edge.
2. Remove lamp.
3. Rotate Socket out.
4. Remove Bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. Replace Bulb.
2. Engage right hook of lamp (3) into the sheet metal
(2 - note correct orientation of lettering on lens).
3. Rotate lamp in place until left side engages (light
audible click).
LX
LX
8L - 125
SWITCH - STOP LAMP

DESCRIPTION
The stop lamp switch (2) is located under the instrument panel at the brake pedal arm. This switch contains three internal switches controlling various
functions of the vehicle, one of them controls operation of the vehicles brake lamps. Other functions of
the internal switches include speed control deactivation and brake sense for the ABS and the brake transmission shift interlock.
OPERATION
The
stop lamp switch has three internal switches used for various functions. Among these are:
Brake lamp actuation
Speed control deactivation, and
Brake sense for ABS and brake transmission shift interlock
When the brake pedal is in the released position, the plunger on the outside of the stop lamp switch is pushed
inward by the brake pedal. In this position, the electrical contacts for one internal switch are open while the electrical
contacts for other two internal switches are closed.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the plunger on the outside of the stop lamp switch extends outward. This action
closes the electrical contacts for the one internal switch and opens the contacts for the remaining two switches
within the stop lamp switch. The internal switch which closes when the brake pedal is pressed completes the circuit
to the brake lamps at the rear of the vehicle, thus allowing illumination of the brake lamps and the center-highmounted stop lamp (CHMSL).

STOP LAMP SWITCH
NOTE: Before proceeding with this diagnostic test, verify the adjustment of the stop lamp switch to rule out
misadjustment. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/STOP LAMP SWITCH - ADJUSTMENTS)
If the electrical circuit has been tested and the stop lamp switch is suspected of being faulty, it can be tested using
the following method.
8L - 126
LX
1. Remove the switch from the vehicle. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/STOP LAMP
SWITCH - REMOVAL)
2. With the switch in the released position (plunger
extended), use an ohmmeter to test each of the
three internal switches as shown. You should
achieve the results as indicated in the figure.
3. Gently push the plunger on the stop lamp switch in

until it stops.
4. With the switch in the depressed position (plunger
pushed in), use an ohmmeter to test each of the
three internal switches as shown. You should
achieve the results as indicated in the figure.
If you do not achieve the results as indicated in both
figures, the switch is faulty and must be replaced.
5. Install the switch in the vehicle. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/STOP
LAMP SWITCH - INSTALLATION)
LX
8L - 127
REMOVAL
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Remove the stop lamp switch (2) from its bracket
on the brake pedal assembly (6). To do so, rotate
the stop lamp switch in a counterclockwise direction approximately 30 degrees from its proper
mounting position. Pull the switch rearward and
remove it from its mounting bracket.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (1) from
the switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Prior to installing the stop lamp switch into its bracket, the plunger must be moved to its fully
extended position using the procedure described in Step 1.
1. Hold the stop lamp switch firmly in one hand. Using your other hand, pull outward on the plunger of the switch
until it has ratcheted out to its fully extended position.
2. Connect the wiring harness connector (1) to the
stop lamp switch (2).
3. Mount the stop lamp switch into the bracket on the
brake pedal assembly (6) as follows: Depress the
brake pedal as far down as possible. Install the
switch in its bracket by aligning the index key on
switch with the notch in the square mounting hole
of the mounting bracket. Once the switch is fully
seated, rotate the switch clockwise approximately
30 degrees to lock the switch into the bracket.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when pulling back on the brake pedal to adjust the stop
lamp switch. If to much force is used, damage to
the stop lamp switch or striker can result.
4. Gently pull back on brake pedal until the pedal
stops moving. This will cause the switch plunger to
ratchet backward to the correct position.
5. Check for proper operation of the brake lamps and
speed control.
8L - 128
LX
ADJUSTMENTS
STOP LAMP SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Remove the stop switch from its bracket. To do so, rotate the stop lamp switch in a counterclockwise direction
approximately 30 degrees from its proper mounting position. Pull the switch rearward and remove it from its
mounting bracket.
3. Hold the stop lamp switch firmly in one hand. Using your other hand, pull outward on the plunger of the switch
until it has ratcheted out to its fully extended position.
4. Mount the stop lamp switch into the bracket as follows: Depress the brake pedal as far down as possible. Install
the switch in its bracket by aligning the index key on switch with the notch in the square mounting hole of the
mounting bracket. Once the switch is fully seated, rotate the switch clockwise approximately 30 degrees to lock
the switch into the bracket.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force when pulling back on the brake pedal to adjust the stop lamp switch.
If to much force is used, damage to the stop lamp switch or striker can result.
5. Gently pull back on brake pedal until the pedal stops moving. This will cause the switch plunger to ratchet backward to the correct position.
6. Check for proper operation of the brake lamps and speed control.
LX
TAIL LAMP UNIT

REMOVAL
SEDAN
2. From inside the trunk, peel back the trunk trim and
disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the three plastic wing nuts (3).

4. Pull the tail lamp unit (1) straight out of the rear of
the quarter trim panel.
8L - 129
8L - 130
WAGON
2. Remove the two push fasteners (1) in the liftgate
opening.
3. From inside the cargo area, using a trim stick (special tool #C-4755) or equivalent, gently pry the
access panel off the rear of the quarter trim panel.
4. Remove the one plastic wing nut.
5. Pulling rearward, release the mounting tabs of the

tail lamp unit (1).
LX
LX
6. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from tail

lamp unit (1).
1. Twist counterclockwise to remove the Stop (1),

Turn Signal (2), or Back-Up lamps.
8L - 131
8L - 132
INSTALLATION
SEDAN
1. Position the tail lamp unit (1) in the rear quarter
panel of vehicle.
2. Install and tighten the three plastic wing nuts (3).
3. From within the trunk, connect the electrical connector (1) to tail lamp unit (2).
4. Replace trunk carpeting.
LX
LX
WAGON
1. Connect the electrical connector (3) to the tail lamp
unit (2).
2. Position the tail lamp unit (2) in quarter panel opening.

3. Give a firm push forward to seat the indexing pins.
4. Install and tighten the one plastic wing nut.
5. Install the two push pin fasteners (1) in the liftgate

opening.
8L - 133
8L - 134
SPOT LAMP - POLICE

REMOVAL
1. Remove the PDC cover and pull the fuse, depending on which spot lamp is being serviced.
2. Raise the spot lamp from the stowed to the operating position.
3. Support the spot lamp sealed beam in position.
4. Remove the screws (1) retaining the bezel to the
spot lamp head assembly.
5. Remove the bezel from the spot lamp head assembly.
6. Tilt the sealed beam (2) away from the spot lamp
head assembly.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector to the spot
lamp head assembly.
8. Remove the bulb from the lamp housing by moving
the hold downs.
9. Remove bulb from lamp.
INSTALLATION
1. Position bulb into spot lamp assembly.
2. Install the hold downs.
3. Connect the electrical connector to the spot lamp
head assembly.
4. Tilt the sealed beam (2) toward the spot lamp head
assembly.
5. Install the bezel to the spot lamp head assembly.
6. Install the screws (1) retaining the bezel to the spot
lamp head assembly.
7. Lower the spot lamp from the operating to stowed
position.
8. Install the fuse and PDC cover.
LX
LX
8L - 135

DESCRIPTION
This vehicle may be equipped with up to two spot
lamp assemblies attached to the A-Pillars. The spot
lamp assembly switch is located on the handle just
above the rotating handle grip.
Each spot lamp assembly contains a 100 watt halogen
bulb. The spot lamp assemblies are fused individually
and powered hot at all times. There are three fuses in
the Power Distribution Center (PDC) that control the
spot lamp assemblies:
The
parts available for service are:

Complete spot lamp assembly.
H3 100 watt halogen bulb.
Inside control handle w/switch.
OPERATION
Use this switch (1) to turn the spot lamp assembly ON
and OFF. Rotate and twist the handle to adjust the
position of the spot lamp assembly.

IF SPOT LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT
1. If both spot lamps are inoperative, check spot lamp master fuse. Refer to Wiring Diagrams for fuse locations. If
fuse is OK, refer to Step 4. If fuse is damaged or inoperative, replace as necessary.
2. If the left spot lamp is inoperative, check fuse. If fuse is OK, refer to Step 4. If fuse is damaged or inoperative,
replace as necessary. If fuse blows again, find short to ground. Refer to Wiring Diagrams for circuit information.
3. If the right spot lamp is inoperative, check fuse. If fuse is OK, refer to Step 4. If fuse is damaged or inoperative,
replace as necessary. If fuse blows again, find short to ground. Refer to Wiring Diagrams for circuit information.
4. Check for B+ power at the spot lamp bulb with switch turned ON (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING
- EXTERIOR/SPOT LAMP - REMOVAL). If there is B+ power at the spot lamp bulb connector, replace bulb. If
there is not B+ power present, refer to Step 5.
5. If there is not B+ power present at the spot lamp with the switch turned on, check circuit for an open. Possibly
the connector in the A-pillar. Refer to Wiring Diagrams for circuit information.
8L - 136
LX
6. If there is B+ power at the spot lamp connector, and no B+ power at the spot lamp bulb, then the switch is
damaged or inoperative within the spot lamp assembly and the entire unit must be replaced. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/SPOT LAMP - REMOVAL).
7. If lamp still does not light, remove the handle (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/SPOT
LAMP - REMOVAL), and check the contact on the shaft end of the head assembly into the handle to make sure
the contact is not damaged.
IF SPOT LAMP IS HARD TO TURN

1. Check that the head housing clamping screw creates just enough drag to hold the spot lamp head in position in
windy conditions. Extreme drag will require more force on the handle to move the spot lamp head and cause
damage.
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Make sure that the master spot lamp
feed or either the left or right spot lamp feed are
removed from the Power Distribution Center (PDC)
before performing service on the spot lamps.
1. Remove the fuse cover and pull the fuse, depending on which spot lamp is being serviced.
2. Raise the spot lamp from the stowed to the operating position.
3. Using a trim stick or equivalent, gently pry out on
the A-pillar trim to release it. This will allow access
to the spot lamp electrical connector.
4. Remove the instrument panel end cap.
5. Disconnect the spot lamp electrical connector
(located behind the instrument panel end-cap).
6. Loosen, but do not remove the bolt (1) retaining

the handle to the outer tube.
NOTE: Do not remove the bolt all the way.
7. Using a plastic tipped hammer, gently tap the head
of the handle retaining bolt and the opposing
wedge nut.
8. Remove the handle from the outer tube.
9. Remove the A-pillar trim from the spot lamp outer
tube.
LX
CAUTION: Support the head of the spot lamp

while loosening the head assembly clamp screw.
10. Loosen the clamp screw (1) at the base of the
spot lamp head assembly.
11. Carefully remove the spot lamp head with the

intermediate and inner shafts from the outer tube
and mounting bracket.
12. Remove the screws retaining the spot lamp

mounting bracket to the A-pillar.
13. Remove the spot lamp outer tube and mounting
bracket from the A-pillar.
8L - 137
8L - 138
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Make sure that the master spot lamp
feed or either the left or right spot lamp feed are
removed from the Power Distribution Center (PDC)
before performing service on the spot lamps.
1. Install the spot lamp outer tube and mounting
bracket to the A-pillar.
2. Install the screws retaining the spot lamp mounting
bracket to the A-pilla and tighten to 33 Nm (29 in.
lbs.).
3. Carefully lift the edge of the secondary door seal
along the windshield pillar to expose the spot lamp
outer tube and apply a small amount of clear silicone sealer to the base of the outer tube.
4. Carefully install the spot lamp head with the intermediate and inner shafts to the outer tube and
mounting bracket until the head assembly bottoms
out on the outer tube.
LX
LX
5. Tighten the clamp screw (1) at the base of the spot

lamp head assembly in small increments while testing the effort required to rotate the spot lamp
between the stowed and operating positions. Stop
tightening the clamp screw when the spot lamp can
maintain any desired position.
6. Position the A-pillar trim to the spot lamp outer

tube.
CAUTION: Support the head of the spot lamp
while tightening the head assembly clamp screw.
Maintain an operating or vertical position.
7. Install the handle to the outer tube.
a. Position the spot lamp handle in the operating
(downward close to vertical) position to the
outer tube.
b. There are two detent positions to which the
handle must line up and engage. Rotate the
knob of the handle and the handle base to aid
in engaging each of the detents. Using the
wedge nut opening on the handle for visual
aid, rotate the handle as necessary while
installing, in order to bring the flat detent on
the intermediate shaft into view along the bottom of the opening.
8. Tighten the bolt (1) retaining the handle to the outer tub and tighten to 6.5 Nm (58 in. lbs.).
8L - 139
8L - 140
LX
9. Connect the spot lamp electrical connector.

10. Install the instrument panel end-cap.
11. Install the A-pillar trim.
12. Install the fuse, depending on which spot lamp is
being serviced.
13. Inspect the operation of the spot lamp to ensure that the range of movement is correct.
Using the handle, rotate the spot lamp from the operating position to the stowed position and back. Ensure
that the lamp will maintain the desired position. The stowed position should be just above the windshield and
the operating position should be vertical to slightly outboard.
Using the knob of the handle, rotate the head of the spot lamp around on its axis. The spot lamp must rotate
360 degrees on its axis.
14. If the spot lamp head does not rotate 360 degrees on its axis, or if excessive effort is required to rotate the
lamp head on its axis, perform the following:
a. Remove the handle and inspect for damage to the inner shaft and the gears in the handle. Repair or replace
as necessary.
b. If no damage is present to the inner shaft or the gears in the handle, reinstall the handle and reinspect the
operation of the lamp.
c. If the spot lamp head still does not properly rotate 360 degrees on its axis, remove the cover from the end
of the spot lamp head assembly and inspect for damage to the gears in the head assembly. Repair or
replace as necessary.
15. Lower the spot lamp to the stowed position.
LX
UNDERHOOD LAMP - POLICE

REMOVAL
1. Open hood, disconnect and isolate the battery negative remote terminal or pull fuse in the PDC.
2. Insert a small flat blade in access slot between the
lamp base (1) and lamp lens (2).
3. Lift the lamp lens (2) upward and remove the lamp
lens (2).
4. Depress bulb terminal (2) inward to release bulb

(1).
INSTALLATION
1. Engage the replacement bulb wire loop (3) to terminal closest to lamp base (4) wire connector.
2. Depress the opposite terminal inward and engage
the remaining bulb wire loop (3).
8L - 141
8L - 142
3. Position the lamp lens (2) on the lamp base (1)

and firmly snap into place.
4. Connect the battery negative remote cable or insert
fuse in the PDC.
LX
LX
UNDERHOOD LAMP UNIT - POLICE

REMOVAL
1. Open hood, disconnect and isolate the battery negative remote terminal or pull fuse in the PDC.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from
lamp unit (2).
3. Remove the push-pin fastener attaching underhood
lamp unit (2) to inner hood panel.
4. Remove the underhood lamp unit (2) from the
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the underhood lamp unit (2) on the hood
inner panel.
2. Install the push-pin fastener attaching the lamp unit
base (2) to the inner hood panel.
3. Connect the wire harness connector (1).
4. Connect the battery negative remote cable or reinsert fuse in the PDC.
5. Close hood.
8L - 143
8L - 144
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
B161B-COURTESY/DOME LAMP CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
B161F-READING LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
LX

8L - 145
8L - 146
B161B-COURTESY/DOME LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8L - 147
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Cluster detects a Short to Ground on the (M24) Courtesy Lamps Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(M24) COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn the
Clear all
Turn the
With the
ignition on.
Cluster DTCs.
Courtesy Lamps on.
Scan Tool, read the Cluster DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B161B-COURTESY/DOME LAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2.
(M24) COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (M24) Courtesy Lamp Driver circuit to
ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (M24) Courtesy lamp Driver circuit for a short to
ground.
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/
No
8L - 148
B161F-READING LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8L - 149
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Cluster detects a short to ground on the (M27) Reading/Rail Lamps Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(M27) READING/RAIL LAMPS DRIVER
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn the
Clear all
Turn the
With the
ignition on.
Cluster DTCs.
Driver Reading Lamps on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B161F-READING LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2.
(M27) READING/RAIL LAMPS DRIVER

Disconnect the Cluster C3 harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (M27) Reading/Rail
Lamps Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (M27) Reading/Rail Lamps Driver circuit for a

short to ground.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER1. (Refer to 8
No
>> Relpace the Cluster in accordance with the service information.

Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER1. (Refer to 8
8L - 150
LX
LX
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - SERVICE INFORMATION
8L - 151

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
LAMPS/LIGHTING - INTERIOR - SERVICE

INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
INTERIOR LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
DOME LAMP - POLICE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
REMOVAL
LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
DOME LAMP UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
INSTALLATION
LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
DOME LAMP UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

DOOR COURTESY LAMP
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
LIFTGATE LAMP
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
READING LAMP
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8L - 152
LX

SPECIFICATIONS
INTERIOR LAMPS
BULB APPLICATION TABLE
LAMP
BULB
CHRYSLER
Door Courtesy
562
Glove Box
194
Overhead Console
578
Rear Courtesy
W5W
Shift Indicator
JKLE14140
Trunk
579
Visor Vanity
A6220
DODGE
Door Courtesy
562
Glove Box
194
Liftgate
578
Overhead Console
578
Rear Courtesy
W5W
Shift Indicator
JKLE14140
Trunk
Visor Vanity
562
A6220
LX
8L - 153
DOME LAMP - POLICE

DESCRIPTION
The dome lamp is B+ battery-fed, fused, and operates independently of the standard factory installed dome lamp
switch. It features duel switched white incandescent and red Light Emitting Diode (LED) lights. The lamp is mounted
on the headliner at the longitudinal center-line, rearward of the factory installed overheard console, approximately
19.5 inches from the front windshield header. The police package, optioned dome lamp has a three way switch
mounted on the rear side of the lamp assembly. One position for the incandescent light, one position or the red
LED, and one middle position for OFF. When the when the vehicle is put into stealth mode, this lamp will still be
operational. It must be shut off manually due to its direct battery feed.
REMOVAL
LAMP BULB
2. Gently pull off the dome lamp cover.
3. Reach up into the lamp unit and pull down on the lamp bulb.
DOME LAMP UNIT

2. Slide the dome lamp unit towards the right rear of the vehicle. There is lip on the retaining bracket that will slide
out of the headliner opening to allow for removal.
3. Pull down gently on the left front of the dome lamp unit and then slide the unit toward the left front of the vehicle.
This will allow for the retaining bracket to release from the headliner.
4. Disconnect the dome lamp unit electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
LAMP BULB
1. Place lamp bulb into lamp unit.
2. Position dome lamp unit cover over unit and firmly snap into place.
DOME LAMP UNIT

1. Connect the dome lamp unit electrical connector.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Position the lamp unit into the headliner mounting hole.

Slide the longer of the two bracket tabs up into the headliner toward the right rear.
Slide the dome lamp unit toward the left front of the vehicle until you feel the bracket take a seat in the headliner.
Connect the battery negative cable.
8L - 154
DOOR COURTESY LAMP

REMOVAL
2. Remove the front door trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/DOOR - FRONT/TRIM PANEL - REMOVAL).
3. With the trim panel on bench, gently pull the door

courtesy lamp (1) out of courtesy lamp unit.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Place the door courtesy lamp (1) into the courtesy
lamp unit.
2. Install the front door trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/DOOR - FRONT/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
8L - 155
8L - 156
LIFTGATE LAMP
REMOVAL
2. Open liftgate.
3. Using a trim stick (3) (special tool #C-4755) or
equivalent, gently pry out on liftgate lamp lens (2)
and remove from trim panel (1).
4. Gently pry up on the edge of the affected lamp and

pull out of the liftgate lamp unit to remove.
INSTALLATION
1. Place new lamp over retaining clips in liftgate lamp
unit retaining clips and firmly snap into place.
LX
LX
2. Place the liftgate lamp lens (2) over the retaining

pins making sure that they are lined up and then
firmly snap into place.
8L - 157
8L - 158
READING LAMP
REMOVAL
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
2. Using a trim stick (special tool #C-4755) or equivalent, gently pry out the top (toward windshield)
side of the reading lamp lens.
3. Lift the top of the lens up and slide forward (toward

windshield) until the tab is released from the overhead console.
4. Gently pull the lamp out of the overhead console.
LX
LX
REAR
2. Using a trim stick (special tool #C-4755) or equivalent, gently pry out the edge of the reading lamp
lens. There will be a small slot on the side of the
lens that should be used. Looking at the unit it will
be on the left side of the lens.
3. Lift out on the lens and slide the lens to the left so
that the retaining tabs are exposed and the lens
can be then removed.
4. Grasp lamp with fingers and firmly pull lamp (1)

from unit.
8L - 159
8L - 160
INSTALLATION
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
1. Firmly push the lamp into the overhead console.
2. Place the tab inside the rear edge of the overhead
console. Carefully push down on the side of the
lens opposite from the tab side, making sure to
snap in both sides of the lens.
REAR
1. Firmly push the lamp (1) into the reading lamp unit.
2. Looking at the lamp unit place the right side in first

and make sure the tabs are under the lip of the
unit. Slide right and then firmly snap lens (1) into
place.
LX
MESSAGE SYSTEMS
LX
8M - 1
MESSAGE SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
MESSAGE CENTER - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
MESSAGE CENTER - SERVICE INFORMATION . 136
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - ELECTRICAL
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - SERVICE

INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
MESSAGE CENTER - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
MESSAGE CENTER - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
P1462 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
P1463 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
P1504 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
P1505 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
P164A MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 18
P164B MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . 21
P170A PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
P170B PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
P170C ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
P170D ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
C1088 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
C1089 BRAKE LAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
B1693 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
B1694 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
B17CF EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP
REQUEST 1 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
B17D2 EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP
REQUEST 2 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
B17D4 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT

CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
B17D5 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
B19B4 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
P19B5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
P1A5B PANIC ALARM MUTE REQUEST
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
B1A5D PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION
B1A5E PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION
STATUS CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
B1CC1 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION
B1CC2 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION
B237C DATA COMMUNICATION RADIO
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
B237F HORN MUTE REQUEST CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
B2381 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
B2382 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
B2384 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
B2385 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
U0021 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . 122
8M - 2
U0022 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 124

U0023 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . 126
U0024 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . 128
U0025 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 130
U0026 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . 132
U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
IPM (FCM/TIPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
(ORC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE . . . . . . . 134
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARK
ASSIST CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
LX

(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
HANDS FREE PHONE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 135
HEATED SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . 135
MEMORY SEAT CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . 135
STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE . . 135
LX

8M - 3
8M - 4
P1462 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8M - 5
When Monitored:
With the ignition switch on.
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Fuel Level Status Signal
circuit below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
AFTERMARKET LIGHT/SIREN CONTROLLER
1.
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Table of Contents in ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS for a complete list of the symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2. Diagnostic Test
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
>> If the DTC is stored, check for an intermittent condition. Visually inspect the related wiring harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals, and repair any obvious problems.
3.
CHECK THE (W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit
between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 6
4.
LX
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W514) CHECK THE FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) 24 way harness connector (aftermarket light/siren controller
side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
No
>> Refer to electrical diagnostics for the aftermarket light/siren

controller, and repair or replace the aftermarket light/siren
controller in accordance with the manufacturers service
information.
5.
CHECK THE MULTI-PURPOSE MODULE (POLICE AND TAXI INTERFACE MODULE-PTIM)

Disconnect all Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) and aftermarket light/siren controller
Check for damaged or corroded pins, pinched wires, or damaged connectors, and repair any obvious problems.
Connect all Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) and aftermarket light/siren controller
With the scan tool monitor active codes as you work through the following step.
Wiggle the wiring harness and connectors of the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) and
aftermarket light/siren controller.
If only stored codes return continue the test until the problem area has been isolated, and repair any obvious problems.
Is DTC P1462 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
>> Repair is complete. The problem may have been caused by a loose or corroded terminal.
LX
P1463 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8M - 7
8M - 8
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Fuel Level Status Signal
circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 9
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL

Disconnect Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface ModulePTIM) 24 way harness connector (aftermarket light/siren controller side).
Measure the voltage of the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
No

controller, and repair or replace the aftermarket light siren
information.
5.
CHECK THE (W514) FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface ModulePTIM) 24 way and the (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connectors.
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W514) Fuel Level Status Signal circuit for an
open or high resistance.
8M - 10
6.
LX

harness connectors.
Connect all Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) and aftermarket light/siren controller harness connectors.
Is DTC P1463 FUEL LEVEL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
P1504 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8M - 11
8M - 12
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Vehicle Speed Signal
Possible Causes
(W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 electrical connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal circuit
between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 electrical connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 13
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W526) THE VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL

side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal circuit for a short
to ground.
No

controller, and repair or replace the aftermarket light siren/
information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is DTC P1504 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 14
P1505 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 15
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Vehicle Speed Signal
Possible Causes
(W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER

Measure the voltage of the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 16
4.
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal circuit for a short
to power.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W526) VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface ModulePTIM) 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface
Module-PTIM) C2 harness connectors.
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W526) Vehicle Speed Signal for an open or

high resistance.
LX
LX
6.
8M - 17

harness connectors.
Is DTC P1505 VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 18
P164A MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8M - 19
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 20
4.
LX
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes
>> Repair the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit for a

short to ground.
No

information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is DTC P164A MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
P164B MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8M - 21
8M - 22
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO POWER
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER

Measure the voltage of the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 23
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit for a

short to power.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W516) MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connectors.
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W516) Malfunction Indicator Signal circuit for an

8M - 24
6.
LX

harness connectors.
Is DTC P164B MIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
P170A PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8M - 25
8M - 26
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the P/N Switch Sense circuit
below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 27
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit for a short to
ground.
No

information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is DTC P170A PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 28
P170B PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 29
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the P/N Switch Sense circuit
above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit between
ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 30
4.
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W519) P/N SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit between
Yes
>> Repair the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit for a short to
voltage.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W519) PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W519) P/N Switch Sense circuit for an open or
high resistance.
LX
LX
6.
8M - 31

harness connectors.
Is DTC P170B PARK/NEUTRAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 32
P170C ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8M - 33
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Engine Running Status
Signal circuit below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W529) Engine Running Status Signal
circuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 34
4.
LX
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W529) Engine RPM Output circuit for a short to
ground.
No

information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is DTC P170C ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
P170D ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8M - 35
8M - 36
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Engine Running Status
Signal above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W529) Engine Running Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 37
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W529) Engine Running Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W529) Engine Running Status Signal circuit for
a short to voltage.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W529) ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
circuit between the PTIM 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police
And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connectors.
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W529) Engine Running Status Signal circuit for
an open or high resistance.
8M - 38
6.
LX

harness connectors.
Is DTC P170D ENGINE RPM OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
C1088 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8M - 39
8M - 40
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Brake Lamp Switch
Sense circuit below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 41
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground.
No

information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is DTC C1088 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 42
C1089 BRAKE LAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 43
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Brake Lamp Switch
Sense circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO POWER
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 44
4.
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit for a
short to power.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W520) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W520) Brake Lamp Switch Sense circuit for an
LX
LX
6.
8M - 45

harness connectors.
Is DTC C1089 BRAKE LAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 46
B1693 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8M - 47
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Cluster Dimmer Switch
Possible Causes
(W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 48
4.
LX
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch circuit
between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) 22 way harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch circuit for a short
to ground.
No

information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is DTC B1693 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
B1694 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8M - 49
8M - 50
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Cluster Dimmer Switch
Possible Causes
(W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 electrical connector.
Measure the voltage of the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch Sense circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 51
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) 24 way electrical connector (aftermarket light/siren controller
side).
Measure the voltage of the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch Sense circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch Sense circuit for
a short to ground.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W525) CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Disconnect the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) 24 way connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch Sense
circuit between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface
Module-PTIM) 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) C2 electrical connectors.
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W525) Cluster Dimmer Switch Sense circuit for
8M - 52
6.
LX

Is B1694 ACCESSORY DIMMING CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
B17CF EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP REQUEST 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
8M - 53
8M - 54
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Front Flashing Lights
Signal circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W500) FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO POWER
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W500) FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER

Measure the voltage of the (W500) Front Flashing Lights Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 55
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W500) FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W500) Front Flashing Lights Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W500) Front Flashing Lights Signal circuit for a
short to power.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W500) FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W500) Front Flashing Lights Signal circuit between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W500) Front Flashing Lights Signal circuit for an
8M - 56
6.
LX

harness connectors.
Is B17CF EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP REQUEST 1 CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
B17D2 EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP REQUEST 2 CIRCUIT HIGH
8M - 57
8M - 58
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Rear Flashing Lights Signal circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W501) REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W501) REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W501) Rear Flashing Lights Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 59
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W501) REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W501) Rear Flashing Lights Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W501) Rear Flashing Lights Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W501) REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W501) Rear Flashing Lights Signal circuit between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W501) Rear Flashing Lights Signal circuit for an
8M - 60
6.
LX

harness connectors.
Is B17D2 EMERGENCY FLASHING LAMP REQUEST 2 CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
B17D4 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8M - 61
8M - 62
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Headlamp Switch Sense
Possible Causes
(W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 63
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit for a

short to ground.
No

information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is B17D4 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 64
B17D5 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 65
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Headlamp Switch Sense
Possible Causes
(W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 66
4.
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit for a

short to power.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W521) HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W521) Headlamp Switch Sense circuit for an

LX
LX
6.
8M - 67

harness connectors.
Is P17D5 HEADLAMP STATUS OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 68
B19B4 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8M - 69
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Driver Door Ajar Switch
Possible Causes
(W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W524) Driver Door Ajar Switch Sense
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 70
4.
LX
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W524) Driver Door Ajar Switch Sense circuit for
a short to ground.
No

information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is B19B4 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
P19B5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8M - 71
8M - 72
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Driver Door Ajar Switch
Possible Causes
(W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W524) Driver Door Ajar Switch Sense circuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 73
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W524) Driver Door Ajar Switch Sense circuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes
a short to voltage.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W524) DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Module-PTIM) 24 way and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
8M - 74
6.
LX

harness connectors.
Is P19B5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
P1A5B PANIC ALARM MUTE REQUEST CIRCUIT HIGH
8M - 75
8M - 76
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W512) SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W512) SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER

Measure the voltage of the (W512) Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 77
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W512) SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W512) Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit
between ground and the PTIM C2 harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (W512) Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W512) SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W512) Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W512) Security Alarm Mute Signal circuit for an
8M - 78
6.
LX

harness connectors.
Is P1A5B PANIC ALARM MUTE REQUEST CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
B1A5D PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8M - 79
8M - 80
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Security Alarm On Signal
Possible Causes
(W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 81
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT

side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit for a

short to ground.
No

information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is B1A5D PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 82
B1A5E PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION STATUS CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 83
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Security Alarm On Signal
Possible Causes
(W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 84
4.
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit for a

short to voltage.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W517) SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W517) Security Alarm On Signal circuit for an

LX
LX
6.
8M - 85

harness connectors.
Is P1A5E PANIC ALARM ACTIVATION STATUS CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 86
B1CC1 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8M - 87
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Front or Side Airbag Status Signal circuits below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> If the vehicle is equipped with a side airbag, go to 4. Otherwise, go to 5.
No
>> Go To 7.
8M - 88
4.
CHECK THE (W522) SIDE AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W522) Side Airbag Deployment Notification Output circuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module
(Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) C2 harness connector.
Yes
>> Go to 7.
No
>> Go To 6.
5.
LX
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
No

information.
LX
6.
8M - 89
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit for a
short to ground.
No

information.
7.

harness connectors.
Is B1CC1 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 90
B1CC2 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 91
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Front or Side Airbag Status Signal circuits above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 5.
No
>> If equipped with a side airbag, go to 4. Otherwise, Go To 8.
8M - 92
4.
CHECK THE (W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Go To 7.
5.
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit for a
short to power.
No

information.
LX
LX
6.
8M - 93
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W522) Side Airbag Deployment Notification Output circuit for a short to voltage.
No

information.
7.
CHECK THE (W522) SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 9.
No
>> Repair the (W522) Side Airbag Status Signal circuit for an
8M - 94
8.
LX
CHECK THE (W523) FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Yes
>> Go To 9.
No
>> Repair the (W523) Front Airbag Status Signal circuit for an
9.

harness connectors.
Is B1CC2 DEPLOYMENT NOTIFICATION OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
8M - 95
8M - 96
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Fused (B+) input voltage
below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(A913) FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2.
No
2.
NOTE: Repair any PCM charging/cranking DTCs before proceeding with this test.
NOTE: Verify the battery is fully charged.
Yes
>> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No
>> Go To 3.
3.
CHECK (A913) FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the voltage of the (A913) Fused (B+) circuit in the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) harness connector.
Yes
>> Go to 4.
No
>> Repair the (A913) Fused (B+) circuit for an open.

FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING).
LX
4.
8M - 97

Is B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 98
LX
LX
8M - 99
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Fused (B+) input voltage
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2.
No
2.
NOTE: Repair any PCM charging/cranking DTCs before proceeding with this test.
NOTE: Verify the battery is fully charged.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3.
3.

Is B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 100
B237C DATA COMMUNICATION RADIO INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 101
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Police Radio Input Signal
Possible Causes
(W511) POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W511) POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W511) Police Radio Input Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 102
4.
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W511) POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W511) Police Radio Input Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W511) Police Radio Input Signal circuit for a
short to power.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W511) POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W511) Police Radio Input Signal circuit
between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface ModulePTIM) 24 way and the PTIM C2 harness connectors.
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W511) Police Radio Input Signal circuit for an
LX
LX
6.
8M - 103

harness connectors.
Is B237C DATA COMMUNICATION RADIO INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 104
B237F HORN MUTE REQUEST CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 105
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Horn Mute Signal circuit
Possible Causes
(W513) HORN MUTE SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W513) HORN MUTE REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W513) Horn Mute Request Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 106
4.
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W513) HORN MUTE REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W513) Horn Mute Request Signal circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (W513) Horn Mute Request Signal circuit for a
short to voltage.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W513) HORN MUTE REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W513) Horn Mute Request Signal circuit
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W513) Horn Mute Request Signal circuit for an
LX
LX
6.
8M - 107

harness connectors.
Is B237F HORN MUTE REQUEST CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 108
B2381 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8M - 109
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Driver Seat Belt Switch
Possible Causes
(W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Switch Sense
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 110
4.
LX
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Switch Sense circuit for
a short to ground.
No

information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is B2381 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
B2382 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8M - 111
8M - 112
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Driver Seat Belt Switch
Possible Causes
(W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Switch Sense circuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 113
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Switch Sense circuit between ground and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Yes
a short to power.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W515) DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Module-PTIM) 24 way and the PTIM C2 harness connectors.
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
8M - 114
6.
LX

harness connectors.
Is B2382 DRIVER SEAT BELT OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
LX
B2384 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8M - 115
8M - 116
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Horn Switch Sense circuit below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (W518) Horn Switch Sense circuit
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
LX
4.
8M - 117
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO GROUND IN THE (W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Yes
>> Repair the (W515) Driver Seat Belt Sense circuit for a short
to ground.
No

information.
5.

harness connectors.
Is B2384 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 118
B2385 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 119
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the Horn Switch Sense circuit above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
1.
Yes
No
2.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 3.
No
3.
CHECK THE (W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (W518) Horn Switch Sense circuit between
Yes
>> Go To 4.
No
>> Go To 5.
8M - 120
4.
ISOLATE THE SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE (W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT

side).
Measure the voltage of the (W518) Horn Switch Sense circuit between
Yes
>> Repair the (W518) Horn Switch Sense circuit for a short to
voltage.
No

information.
5.
CHECK THE (W518) HORN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Yes
>> Go To 6.
No
>> Repair the (W518) Horn Switch Sense circuit for an open or
high resistance.
LX
LX
6.
8M - 121

harness connectors.
Is B2385 HORN SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH still displayed?
Yes
No
8M - 122
U0021 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8M - 123
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected an open condition on the
(W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (+) circuit.
Possible Causes
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM)
Diagnostic Test
1.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2.
No
2.
CHECK THE (W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (+) circuit
between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface ModulePTIM) C2 connector and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) 24 way harness connector (aftermarket light/siren controller side).
Yes

No
>> Repair the (W527) Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi

Interface Module-PTIM) CAN B Bus (+) circuit for an open.
8M - 124
U0022 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8M - 125
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected the (W527) VSIM CAN B
Bus (+) circuit is below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2.
No
2.
CHECK (W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

side).
Measure the resistance between ground and the (W527) VSIM CAN B
Bus (+) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short
to ground.
No

circuits. If ok, replace the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And
Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) in accordance with the service
information.
8M - 126
U0023 CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 127
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Bus (+) circuit is above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(W528) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2.
No
2.
VSIM CAN B BUS CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the VSIM CAN B Bus circuits.
Yes
>> Repair the VSIM CAN B Bus circuit(s) for a short to voltage.
No

information.
8M - 128
U0024 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8M - 129
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM) has detected an open condition on the
(W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (-) circuit.
Possible Causes
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface Module-PTIM)
Diagnostic Test
1.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2.
No
2.
CHECK THE (W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

side).
Measure the resistance of the (W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (-) circuit
between the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi Interface ModulePTIM) C2 connector and the Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi
Interface Module-PTIM) 24 way harness connector (aftermarket light/siren controller side).
Yes

No
>> Repair the (W528) Multi-Purpose Module (Police And Taxi

Interface Module-PTIM) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
8M - 130
U0025 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8M - 131
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Bus (-) circuit is below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2.
No
2.
CHECK (W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

side).
Measure the resistance between ground and the (W527) VSIM CAN B
Bus (-) circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W527) VSIM CAN B Bus (+) circuit for a short
to ground.
No

information.
8M - 132
U0026 CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8M - 133
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Bus (-) circuit is above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
(W528) VSIM CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(W527) VSIM CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Erase the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2.
No
2.
VSIM CAN B BUS CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the VSIM CAN B Bus circuits.
Yes
>> Repair the VSIM CAN B Bus circuit(s) for a short to voltage.
No

information.
8M - 134
LX
U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH IPM (FCM/TIPM)

test procedure.
U0151 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

(ORC)
test procedure.
U0156 LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE

test procedure.
U0159-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH PARK ASSIST CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

LX
8M - 135
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0212-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
8M - 136
MESSAGE CENTER - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
MODULE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
MODULE - POLICE/TAXI INTERFACE . . . . . . . . 137
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
LX
8M - 137
MODULE
DESCRIPTION
The Police/Taxi Interface Module (PTIM) (1) serves as
an interface between the aftermarket module and
various control modules of the vehicle. It is located in
the instrument panel center stack (2) where the ash
receiver is normally located on non-fleet equipped
vehicles. Depending on the request from the aftermarket module, the PTIM retrieves information from
the Front Control Module (FCM), Sentry Key Remote
Entry Module (SKREEM)/Wireless Control Module
(WCM), Occupant restraint controller (ORC), Cabin
Compartment Node (CCN), and Steering Column
Module (SCM) via the Controller Area Network
(CAN)-B data bus and makes them available for specific applications that the aftermarket module may
apply. This microprocessor based module shall be in
sleep mode or wake-up mode based on the status
of the CAN BUS. The PTIM is operational when battery power is supplied independent of the ignition
switch power.

MODULE - POLICE/TAXI INTERFACE
Any diagnosis of the Police/Taxi Interface Module (PTIM) should begin with the use of a scan tool and the proper
Diagnostic Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN)
Data Bus is functional and that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the
CAN Data Bus.
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out
information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds.
Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
REMOVAL
2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the
console cubby bin (1).
3. Remove the nuts (2) and screws (4) that secure
the accessory mounting bracket (3). Remove the
accessory mounting bracket (3) from the vehicle.
8M - 138
4. Remove the nut (2) securing the console (3) to the

mounting stud (5).
5. Lift the console (3) off the mounting stud (5) and
pull rearward to release the console mounting clips
from the instrument panel (1).
6. Disconnect the power outlet (4) electrical connector
(6) and remove the console (3) from the vehicle.
7. Remove the Police/Taxi Interface Module (PTIM)

retaining screws (3).
8. Pull the PTIM (1) rearward to release the PTIM
mounting bracket from the instrument panel center
stack (2).
9. Disconnect the electrical connectors (2) from the

PTIM (3) and remove it from the vehicle.
LX
LX
10. Remove the PTIM (1) from the mounting bracket

(5) by releasing the retaining clip (4) and rotating
the PTIM upward releasing the locating tab (2)
from the bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the Police/Taxi Interface Module (PTIM) (1)
onto the mounting bracket (5) by inserting the
locating tab (2) and rotating the PTIM downward
until the retaining clip (4) is securely snapped into
place.
2. Position the PTIM (3) into the vehicle and connect

the electrical connectors (2).
8M - 139
8M - 140
3. Push the PTIM (1) forward to insert the PTIM

mounting bracket clips into the instrument panel
center stack (2).
4. Install the retaining screws (3).
5. Position the console into the vehicle.

6. Connect the power outlet (4) electrical connector
(6)
7. Push forward to insert the console mounting clips
into the instrument panel (1). Lower the console (3)
onto the mounting stud (5) and install the retaining
nut (2).
8. Position the accessory mounting bracket (3) into

the vehicle and onto the mounting studs (7).
9. Install the nuts (2) and screws (4) that secure the
accessory mounting bracket (3).
10. Install the console cubby bin (1).
LX
LX
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
8M - 141

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
B1A32-UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
SWITCH 1 STUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
SWITCH 2 STUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
SWITCH 3 STUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
B2217 - EVIC/EOM/CMTC INTERNAL . . . . . . . . 146
B222D - ECU UNABLE TO CONFIGURE /
CONFIGURATION NOT LEARNED. . . . . . . . . . 147
B2331VEHICLE NEEDS DEGAUSSED . . . . . . 148
U0019CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER . . . . 152
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE . . . . 152
CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE . . . . . 152
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . 152
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
DRIVER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
PASSENGER DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
SCCM-CAN-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO
HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL
MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8M - 142

LX
LX
8M - 143
B1A32-UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR SWITCH 1 STUCK

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Electronic Overhead Module detects the UGDO switch in the closed position for more than 2 minutes.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPLACE THE ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE
When this code is set, the Electronic Overhead Module must be replaced.
Repair
Replace the Electronic Overhead Module in accordance with the Service Information.
8M - 144
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
Repair
LX
8M - 145

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
Repair
8M - 146
B2217 - EVIC/EOM/CMTC INTERNAL

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, internal self test routine running.
Set Condition:
The Electronic Overhead Module fails one of seven internal tests.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
With
Wait
With
VERIFY OPERATION OF THE ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD MODULE

the ignition on.
the scan tool, erase Electronic Overhead Module DTCs.
the scan tool, activate the Electronic Overhead Module self test.
for self test to complete.
the scan tool, read Electronic Overhead Module DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B2217EVIC/EOM/CMTC INTERNAL?

YES
>> Replace the Electronic Overhead Module in accordance with the service information.
NO
>> Test complete.

LX
LX
8M - 147
B222D - ECU UNABLE TO CONFIGURE / CONFIGURATION NOT LEARNED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Electronic Overhead Module does not receive the configuration information from the Front Control Module.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
NO COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE
ACTIVE FCM DTCs
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With

the
the
the
the
ignition on.
scan tool, record and erase any Electronic Overhead Module DTCs.
ignition off, wait 30 seconds then turn the ignition on.
Is the DTC active?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The condition that caused this code to set is not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram as a
guide, inspect the wiring and connectors for an intermittent condition. Operate the system several times
and recheck for active DTCs.
2.
CHECK COMMUNICATION TO THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE
With the scan tool, check to see if the Front Control Module is active on the bus.
Is the scan tool able to communicate with the Front Control Module?
Yes
>> Replace the Electronic Overhead Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Refer to the symptom list for problems related to Communication. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8M - 148
LX
B2331VEHICLE NEEDS DEGAUSSED

When Monitored:
Vehicle speed greater than 10 mph.
Set Condition:
The magnetic field around the vehicle is greater than 2.4 guass.
Diagnostic Test
1.
PERFORM THE VEHICLE DEMAGNITIZING PROCEDURE
NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing is required.

NOTE: After demagnitizing, the vehicle will enter Auto Fast-Cal when the ignition is turned on.
NOTE: Ensure that the correct compass variance is stored in the compass memory. See Setting Compass
Variance in the Service Information.
View repair.
Repair
Refer to the Service Information and perform the Compass Demagnitizing Standard Procedure.
LX
U0019CAN B BUS
8M - 149
8M - 150
LX
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
If the Can B Bus (+) or B Bus () circuit is open, shorted to voltage, or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC U0019CAN B BUS

the
the
the
the
ignition on.
scan tool, record and erase any Electronic Overhead Module DTCs.
Is DTC U0019CAN B BUS active?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE CAN B BUS RELATED DTCS IN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE

Does the scan tool display any active CAN B BUS related DTCs?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No
>> Go to 3
LX
3.
CHECK (D55) CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Disconnect the Electronic Overhead Module harness connector.
Front Control Module C1 harness connector and the Electronic Overhead Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
CHECK THE (D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Front Control Module C1 harness connector and the Electronic Overhead Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Electronic Overhead Module in accordance

No

8M - 151
8M - 152
LX

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

LX
8M - 153
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

8M - 154
LX
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0241-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH AUTO HIGHBEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL

MODULE
test procedure.
LX
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - SERVICE INFORMATION
8M - 155

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
OVERHEAD CONSOLE - SERVICE

INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
STANDARD PROCEDURE
COMPASS CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
COMPASS VARIATION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . 163
UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
STANDARD PROCEDURE
PROGRAMMING TRANSMITER CODES . . . . . 167
ERASING TRANSMITTER CODES . . . . . . . . . . . 168
REPROGAMMING TRANSMITTER CODES . . . 168
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . 170
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8M - 156

DESCRIPTION
An overhead console is standard on this vehicle and
includes the following components:
Overhead storage compartment (1)
Front map/reading lamps (2)
Power sunroof switch (3) - if equipped
Universal transmitter (4)
Electronic Overhead Module
The overhead console assembly is mounted by three

snap clips (1) securing it to a molded plastic retainer
bracket located above the headliner. The Electronic
Overhead Module is secured to the overhead console
with screws (2).
REMOVAL
2. Pull downward on the sides of the overhead console housing firmly and evenly to disengage the
snap clips from the overhead console bracket.
LX
LX
3. Lower the overhead console from the headliner far

enough to access the wire harness connectors (2).
4. Disconnect the roof wire harness connectors (2)
from the overhead console wire harness connector.
5. Remove the overhead console from the headliner.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the overhead console near the mounting
location on the headliner.
2. Reconnect the roof wire harness connectors (2) to
the overhead console.
3. Align the snap clips on the overhead console housing with their receptacles (1) in the overhead console bracket.
4. Push upward firmly and evenly on the sides of the
overhead console housing over the snap clip locations until the snap clip is fully engaged with its
receptacle in the overhead console bracket.
5. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
8M - 157
8M - 158
LX

DESCRIPTION
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. The display is located
in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the
speedometer and tachometer. This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC displays information related
to the following:
System Status
Vehicle information warning message displays
Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped
Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
Compass display
Outside temperature display
Trip computer functions
UConnect hands-free communication system displays If Equipped
Navigation system screens If Equipped
Audio mode display
The
EVIC system is comprised of several different components. Those components are:

Instrument Cluster
Steering Wheel Switches
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Electronic Overhead Module
Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus
Local Interface Network (LIN) Data Bus
The EVIC display is part of the Instrument Cluster assembly and is not serviced as a separate component. If the
display is inoperative the complete Instrument Cluster assembly must be replaced, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - REMOVAL). If the steering wheel switches are inoperative and require replacement, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/AUDIO/REMOTE SWITCHES - REMOVAL) for the appropriate procedure. If the compass position sensor (Electronic Overhead Module) is inoperative and requires replacement, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
OVERHEAD CONSOLE/UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL) for the appropriate procedure.
OPERATION
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) uses both non-switched and ignition switched sources of battery
current so that some of its features remain operational at any time, while others may only operate with the ignition
switch in the On position. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the EVIC display will return to the
last function being displayed before the ignition was turned to the Off position.
The EVIC system is comprised of several different components that communicate over the Controller Area Network
(CAN) and Local Interface Network (LIN) Data Buses. If the system is inoperative a scan tool and the appropriate
diagnostic information must be used to diagnose the system.
LX
8M - 159
The steering wheel switches are used to operate the

different functions of the EVIC system. Pressing and
releasing the MENU button (1) will change the mode
displayed between Trip Functions, Navigation (If
Equipped), System Status, Personal Settings, and
Telephone (If Equipped). Pressing and releasing the
C/T (compass/thermometer) button (3) will cause the
EVIC to return to the compass/thermometer/trip computer display mode from any other mode.
The SCROLL buttons (3) are used to scroll through

Trip Functions, Navigation (If Equipped), System Status Messages, and Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features). Pressing and releasing the
FUNCTION SELECT button (1) accepts a selected
choice. The AUDIO MODE SELECT button (2)
changes the mode of the radio from AM to FM to Tape
to CD, or to Satellite (SAT) depending on which radio
is in the vehicle. This button can also be used to
return to a previous navigation menu selection.
EVIC DISPLAY MODES

SYSTEM STATUS MODE
Displays warnings and user interaction messages. Initial warnings will be displayed full-screen for three seconds,
then override the odometer and show text warnings on the bottom line of the display. Critical text warnings will be
displayed until the failure is corrected. Non-critical text warnings will be displayed for 60 seconds. The driver can
scroll to view multiple messages by using the SCROLL buttons.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out
Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out
Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out
Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
Memory 1/2 Profile Set
Memory 1/2 Profile Recall
Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not In Park (with a single chime)
8M - 160
LX
Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled (with a single chime)

Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion)
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
Adjustable Pedals Disabled Cruise Engaged
Adjustable Pedals Disabled Vehicle In Reverse
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Transmit
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Training
Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Trained
Clearing Channels
Channels Cleared
Channels Defaulted
Did Not Train
Left Front Tire Low Pressure
Left Rear Tire Low Pressure
Right Front Tire Low Pressure
Right Rear Tire Low Pressure
Check Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System
Service Park Assist System
TRIP MODE
Provides a choice of units displayed in English or metric. The following information can be displayed at the top of
the screen:
Average Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Distance to empty (DTE)
Trip A odometer
Trip B odometer
Elapsed time
The EVIC trip computer features several functions that can be reset. Pressing and releasing the FUNCTION
SELECT button once will clear the resettable function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur if a resettable
function is currently being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function (>Reset ALL will be displayed
during this 3 second window).
The odometer is displayed at the bottom of the screen. If warnings exist, they will replace the odometer in the
display. The driver can scroll to view information in the EVIC by using the SCROLL buttons.
COMPASS, TEMPERATURE AND AUDIO MODE
Compass heading and outside temperature are displayed at the top of the screen. On the lower half of the screen
the audio mode is displayed along with the odometer. Eight-point compass headings are displayed (N, S, E, W, NE,
NW, SE, SW) and up to 15 compass variance settings can be set and recalled. Outside temperature is displayed in
C (degrees Celsius) or F (degrees Fahrenheit). Audio mode can display any one of 12 radio station preset frequencies, CD disc number, CD track number, tape, and one of 200 Satellite Radio Channels - if equipped.
TELEPHONE MODE - IF EQUIPPED
Provides the following information and features for the optional hands-free communications system:
Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent
Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air time in minutes and seconds, call ended, busy, call failed,
roaming and no phone connection
Caller ID phone number display
LX
8M - 161
NAVIGATION MODE - IF EQUIPPED

When the Navigation System is On, the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on
the Navigation Unit. When the Menu display is active, the SCROLL buttons can be used to scroll through the list,
the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE SELECT button can be used
to return to the previous menu. When the Map display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will
change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
If Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings, the Navigation System will provide turn by turn
directions to the programmed destination in the EVIC display. The name of the approaching road is displayed at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to show the direction of the turn and the remaining distance to the turn
counted down.
PERSONAL SETTINGS MODE (CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES)
Allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in Park by pressing and releasing the MENU
button until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC. The following personal settings can be set and recalled:
Language: English, Spanish, German, Italian or French
Display units in English or Metric
Lock doors automatically at 15 mph (24 Kph), On or Off
Unlock door automatically on exit, On or Off
Remote Keyless Entry unlock driver door on first press or unlock all doors on first press
Recall Memory with Remote Keyless Entry Unlock, On or Off
Sound horn with Remote Keyless Entry Lock, On or Off
Delay turning headlamps off for 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds
Headlamps on with wipers, On or Off
Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers, On or Off
Automatically move seat back on exit, On or Off
Tilt mirrors down and in when transmission is shifted to Reverse, On or Off
Delay Power off to accessories until exit off, 45-seconds maximum, 5-minute maximum, 10-minute maximum
or 60-minute maximum
Turn headlamps on with Remote Keyless Entry Lock, On or Off
Turn headlamps on with Remote Keyless Entry Unlock, Off or 30 seconds
Park Assist System, On or Off
Confirmation of Voice Commands, On or Off
Turn-by-Turn Navigation, On or Off

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) data is obtained from several components on the Controller Area
Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. The EVIC will not function properly if the bus messages from any of these components is not received. If no EVIC data is displayed, check the CAN Data Bus circuit communications, the Instrument Cluster functions and the Front Control Module (FCM).
The use of a scan tool and the proper diagnostic procedures information are recommended for further testing of the
EVIC and the CAN Data Bus circuit. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete circuit schematic or
connector pin-out information.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
COMPASS CALIBRATION
CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the
compass. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console.
8M - 162
LX
The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit
to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the
compass readings appear to be erratic or the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays CAL, perform
the following calibration procedure. Also, any time EVIC service replacement components are installed, they must be
calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other
vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines.
Calibrate the compass manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
2. Depress and hold the C/T push button (3) for
approximately two seconds.
3. Use the SCROLL buttons (3) until MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION is highlighted.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
(1) to start the calibration. The message CAL will
appear in the EVIC display.
5. Drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from
large metal objects and power lines, through one or
two complete circles in not less than 16 seconds.
The CAL message will disappear from the display
to indicate that the compass is now calibrated.
NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that
vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) is necessary.
NOTE: If the CAL message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the
compass, or the unit is inoperative. Repeat the
calibration procedure at least one more time.
NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may
be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the calibration procedure in another location.
LX
8M - 163
COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING
A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to
demagnetize, or degauss, the roof panel above the
overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as
continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They
must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7
millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe.
To demagnetize the roof panel proceed as follows:

1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure.
2. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28
centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the
vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center
line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from
scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized.
3. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet,
while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2
feet) away from the compass unit.
4. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at
the windshield header, with the degaussing tool
connected.
5. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of
the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in
place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a
slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing
13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move
the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each
side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11
inches) back from the windshield header.
6. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly
back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of
the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the
roof panel, disconnect the tool.
7. Calibrate the compass, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER - STANDARD PROCEDURE - COMPASS CALIBRATION) and adjust the compass variance, (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER - STANDARD PROCEDURE COMPASS VARIATION ADJUSTMENT).
COMPASS VARIATION ADJUSTMENT

Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true
geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great
enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance setting may need
to be changed.
To set the compass variance:
8M - 164
1. Using the Variance Settings map, find your geographic location and note the zone number.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
3. Depress and hold the C/T push button (3) for
approximately two seconds.
LX
LX
4. Use the SCROLL buttons (3) until COMPASS

VARIANCE is highlighted. The COMPASS VARIANCE message and the last variance zone number will be displayed.
5. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
(1) until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display.
6. Depress and release the C/T push button (3) to

exit.
7. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass.
8M - 165
8M - 166
LX
DESCRIPTION
The universal transmitter transceiver is integral to the
overhead console. The only visible component of the
universal transmitter are the three transmitter push
buttons (4) at the front of the overhead console. The
buttons are marked with one, two or three illuminated
dots, respectively, for identification of each channel.
Each of the three universal transmitter push buttons
controls an independent radio transmitter channel.
Each of these three channels can be trained to transmit a different radio frequency signal for the remote
operation of garage door openers, motorized gate
openers, home or office lighting, security systems or
just about any other device that can be equipped with
a radio receiver in the 286 to 399 MegaHertz (MHz)
frequency range for remote operation. The universal
transmitter is capable of operating systems using
either rolling code or non-rolling code technology. The system will not transmit operating signals if the Vehicle Theft
Security System is armed.
The universal transmitter cannot be repaired, and is available for service only as a unit. This unit includes the push
button switches and the plastic module.

If the Universal Transmitter is inoperative, but the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) is operating normally,
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER - STANDARD PROCEDURE) for
instructions on training the Transmitter. Retrain the Transmitter with a known good transmitter as instructed and test
the Transmitter operation again.
If the unit is still inoperative, test the universal transmitter with Radio Frequency Detector special tool as
described below:
1. Turn the Radio Frequency (RF) Detector ON. A
chirp will sound and the green power LED will
light. If the green LED does not light, replace the
battery.
2. Hold the RF detector within one inch of the
TRAINED universal transmitter and press any of
the transmitters buttons.
3. The red signal detection LEDs will light and the tool
will beep if a radio signal is detected. Repeat this
test for each button. If any button is inoperative,
replace the universal transmitter assembly, (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL).
If both the Transmitter and the EVIC module are inoperative, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for further diagnosis.
LX
8M - 167
STANDARD PROCEDURE
PROGRAMMING TRANSMITER CODES
CAUTION: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicles
exhaust while training the transceiver. Exhaust
gas can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Your motorized door or gate will open
and close while you are training the Universal
Transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if people
or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death
to people and pets or damage to objects.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display which includes
HomeLinkT system messages. The EVIC is located in
the upper part of the cluster between the speedometer
and tachometer.
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkT buttons (4), and release only when the EVIC display shows Channels
Cleared (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to
program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLinkT buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLinkT buttons.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLinkT button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter
buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.
4. The EVIC display will show Channel X Training (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after the
EVIC display shows Channel X Trained.
NOTE: If the EVIC display shows Did Not Train repeat steps 24.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLinkT button and observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC display shows
Channel X Transmit (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3), programming is complete and your device should activate
when the HomeLinkT button is pressed and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLinkT buttons, begin with Programming step two. Do not
repeat step one.
NOTE: If your hand-held transmitter appears to program the universal transceiver, but your garage door
does not operate using the transmitter and your garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, your
garage door opener may have a multiple security code system (rolling code system). Please proceed to
steps 68 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most common garage door
openers require this step.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the learn or smart button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the learn or smart button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLinkT button.
Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door
opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming.
9. HomeLinkT should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
8M - 168
LX
10. To program the remaining two HomeLinkT buttons, begin with Programming step two. Do not repeat step
one.
ERASING TRANSMITTER CODES

NOTE: Individual channels cannot be erased. Erasing the transmitter codes will erase ALL programmed
codes.
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed note below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkT buttons and release only when the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) display shows Channels Cleared (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds. HomeLinkT is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time,
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
REPROGAMMING TRANSMITTER CODES

CAUTION: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicles exhaust
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects.
To program a device to HomeLinkT using a HomeLinkT button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT button
(4). Do NOT release the button.
2. The EVIC display will show Channel X Transmit (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds
and then change to Channel X Training. Without
releasing the HomeLinkT button, proceed to step 3.
3. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
1-3 inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLinkT buttons.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both the
HomeLinkT button that you want to train and the
hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the
buttons until step 4 has been completed.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLinkT button and observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC display shows Channel X Transmit (where X is
Channel 1, 2, or 3), programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLinkT button is
pressed and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLinkT buttons, begin with Programming step two. Do not
repeat step one.
NOTE: If your hand-held transmitter appears to program the universal transceiver, but your garage door
does not operate using the transmitter and your garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, your
garage door opener may have a multiple security code system (rolling code system). Please proceed to
steps 68 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most common garage door
openers require this step).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the learn or smart button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
LX
8M - 169
7. Firmly press and release the learn or smart button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLinkT button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door
opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming.
9. HomeLinkT should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the overhead console assembly, (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE REMOVAL).
3. Remove the universal transmitter retaining screws
(2) and separate the transmitter from the overhead
console.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: In addition to the Universal Transmitter
operation the Electronic Overhead Module is
responsible for some of the compass functions.
Anytime the Electronic Overhead Module is
replaced the compass variance value must be set,
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER - STANDARD PROCEDURE - COMPASS VARIATION
ADJUSTMENT).
1. Position the universal transmitter onto the overhead
console assembly and install the retaining screws
(2).
2. Install the overhead console assembly, (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE - INSTALLATION).
4. Program the universal transmitter codes, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/UNIVERSAL
TRANSMITTER - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8M - 170
LX
SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE

DESCRIPTION
The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor
type sensor. it is mounted to the lower front fascia
behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine
compartment.
The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted
or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be
replaced.
OPERATION
The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent by the Front
Control Module (FCM). The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature
sensor signal circuit voltage to the FCM. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the FCM senses a specific voltage on the temperature sensor signal circuit. The FCM then translates the voltage into a temperature reading that
it sent over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to other modules utilizing temperature information.

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, and the Front Control
Module (FCM). If any portion of the ambient temperature sensor circuit fails or if the Controller Area Network (CAN)
data bus information is missing, a ( ) will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display in
place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 55 C (130 F), or if the sensor circuit
is shorted, 55 C (130 F) will appear in the EVIC display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed
to temperatures below - 40 C (- 40 F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - 40 C (- 40 F) will appear in the EVIC
display.
The ambient temperature sensor circuit can also be diagnosed using the following Sensor Test, and Sensor Circuit
Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or
incorrect, test the EVIC operation, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE
INFO CENTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
SENSOR TEST
1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the
ambient temperature sensor harness connector.
2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40 C (- 40 F), the sensor resistance is 336
kilohms. At 55 C (130 F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 kilohms. The sensor resistance should read between
these two values. If OK, refer to Sensor Circuit Test in this group. If not OK, replace the inoperative ambient
temperature sensor.
SENSOR CIRCUIT TEST

1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the wire
harness connectors from the ambient temperature sensor and the FCM.
2. Connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness
connector.
3. Check for continuity between the sensor return circuit and the ambient temperature sensor signal circuit cavities
of the FCM harness connector. There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open sensor
return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required.
LX
8M - 171
4. Check for continuity between the ambient temperature sensor signal circuit cavity of the FCM harness connector
and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, test the EVIC operation, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If not OK,
repair the shorted ambient temperature sensor signal circuit as required.
REMOVAL
2. Remove the belly pan, (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the
ambient temperature sensor (2).
4. Remove the fastener that secures the ambient temperature sensor bracket to the front fascia.
5. Remove the ambient temperature sensor from the
vehicle.
8M - 172
INSTALLATION
1. Position the ambient temperature sensor in the
vehicle.
2. Install the fastener that secures the ambient temperature sensor to the front fascia.
3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the

ambient temperature sensor (2).
4. Install the belly pan, (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/BELLY PAN - INSTALLATION).
LX
POWER SYSTEMS
LX
8N - 1
POWER SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . . 1

POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . 50
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
POWER MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION. . 114
POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . 119
page
POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION. . . . .

POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS . . . . . .
POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO . . . . .
POWER WINDOWS - ELECTRICAL
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION .
184
201
220
228
290
POWER LOCKS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

B1801DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . 3
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
B1806PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK
SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW CLUSTER . . . . . . . . 12
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK
CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
B1826TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH INPUT

CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
*DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE
INOPERATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
*ALL DOORS FAIL TO LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
*PASSENGER DOORS FAIL TO UNLOCK . . . . . 35
*RIGHT DOOR LOCKS INOPERATIVE
(LHD ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
*LEFT DOOR LOCKS INOPERATIVE (LHD
ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
*DRIVER DOOR LOCK INOPERATIVE . . . . . . . . 43
*ONE PASSENGER DOOR LOCK
INOPERATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
8N - 2

LX
LX
B1801DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW CLUSTER
8N - 3
8N - 4
LX
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is below 0.15 volts for over 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (G167) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT
DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORT TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Driver Door Lock Switch in all positions several times.
Does the scan tool display B1801DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED

Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch C1 and C2 connectors.
Does the scan tool display B1801DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW?
No
>> Replace the Driver Express Window/Door Lock Switch.

BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8N - 5

Measure the resistance between ground and the (G161) Driver Door
Lock Switch Mux circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit for a
short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(G161) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (G167) DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (G161) Driver Door Lock Switch
Mux circuit (in the C1 connector) and the (G167) Driver Door Lock
Switch Return circuit (in the C2 connector).
Yes
short to the (G167) Driver Door Lock Switch Return circuit.
No

8N - 6
LX
B1803DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK CLUSTER
LX
8N - 7

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is between 0.8 and 1.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
RETURN CIRCUIT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1803DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Does the scan tool display B1803DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
No

Yes
>> Go To 3
8N - 8
3.
LX

Yes
short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
RETURN CIRCUIT

Mux circuit and the (G167) Driver Door Lock Switch Return circuit in
the Cluster C2 connector.
Yes
No

LX
B1804DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK

CLUSTER
8N - 9
8N - 10
LX

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is between 0.15 and 0.8 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
RETURN CIRCUIT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1804DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Does the scan tool display B1804DRIVER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK?
No

Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8N - 11

Yes
short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
RETURN CIRCUIT

Mux circuit and the (G167) Driver Door Lock Switch Return circuit in
the Cluster C2 connector.
Yes
No

8N - 12
B1806PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW CLUSTER
LX
LX
8N - 13
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is below 0.15 volts for over 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (P37) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Passenger Door Lock Switch in all positions several times.
Does the scan tool display B1806PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Passenger Express Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
Does the scan tool display B1806PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/
UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW?
No
>> Replace the Passenger Express Window/Door Lock Switch.

Yes
>> Go To 3
8N - 14
3.
LX

Measure the resistance between ground and the (G160) Passenger
Door Lock Switch Mux circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (G160) Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(G160) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (P37) PASSENGER DOOR LOCK

Measure the resistance between the (G160) Passenger Door Lock
Switch Mux circuit and the (P37) Passenger Door Lock Switch Return
circuit.
Yes
for a short to the (P37) Passenger Door Lock Switch
Return circuit.
No

LX
8N - 15
B1808PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK

CLUSTER
8N - 16
LX

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is between 0.8 and 1.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1808PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
2.

UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK LOCK?
No

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to
Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8N - 17

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.

circuit.
Yes
Return circuit.
No

8N - 18
LX
B1809PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK

CLUSTER
LX
8N - 19

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Door Lock Switch Mux circuit is between 0.15 and 0.8 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1809PASSENGER DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK
UNLOCK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK UNLOCK?
No

Yes
>> Go To 3
8N - 20
3.
LX

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.

circuit.
Yes
Return circuit.
No

LX
B1826TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8N - 21
8N - 22
LX
When Monitored:
Whenever the module is awake.
Set Condition:
When the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit is shorted low for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(G25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
DECKLID OR LIFTGATE SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Decklid or Liftgate Switch several times.
Does the scan tool display B1826TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
2.
TRUNK SWITCH SHORTED
Disconnect the Decklid or Liftgate Release Switch connector.

Cycle the ignition from on to off three times.
Does the scan tool display B1826TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
No
>> Replace the decklid or liftgate switch.

Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(P25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND.

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate
Release Switch sense circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Replace the Instrument Cluster

8N - 23
8N - 24
*DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE INOPERATIVE
LX
LX
Possible Causes
(P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(G25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(G25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
DECKLID OR LIFTGATE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
DECKLID OR LIFTGATE SWITCH INOPERATIVE
DECKLID OR LIFTGATE LATCH INOPERATIVE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
DECKLID/LIFTGATE OPERATIONAL FROM RKE ONLY
Is the Decklid Or Liftgate operational from the RKE only?

No
>> Go To 2
Yes
>> Go To 7
2.
DECKLID OR LIFTGATE LATCH INOPERATIVE
NOTE: Ensure all fuses are good before proceeding.

Disconnect the liftgate or decklid latch connector.
Connect a test light between the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate Release Driver
circuit and the Ground circuit.
Operate the decklid or liftgate and observe the test light.
Does the testlight illuminate brightly for approximately 300 ms.
when the decklid or liftgate is operated?
Yes
>> Replace the Decklid or Liftgate Latch.

No
>> Go To 3
8N - 25
8N - 26
3.
OPEN GROUND CIRCUIT.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the Ground circuit in the latch connector.
No
>> Repair the Ground circuit for an open.

Yes
>> Go To 4
4.
(P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND.

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate
Release Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate Release Driver circuit for

a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
(P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE.

Measure the voltage between Ground and the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate
Release Driver circuit.
Yes

a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
(P31) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN.

Measure the resistance of the (P31) Decklid/Liftgate Release Driver circuit between the Latch connector and the Cluster C3 connector.
No

an open.
Yes

7.
IS THIS VEHICLE A 4 DOOR SEDAN?
Is this vehicle a 4 door sedan?

Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Go To 12
8N - 27
8N - 28
8.
DECKLID SWITCH INOPERATIVE.
NOTE: Ensure the Decklid Latch is connected before proceeding.

Disconnect the Decklid Release Switch connector.
Turn the Ignition On.
Momentarily connect a jumper wire between the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate
Release Switch Sense circuit and the Ground circuit.
Did the decklid open?
Yes
>> Replace the decklid switch.

No
>> Go To 9
9.
SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the Ground circuit.
No

Yes
>> Go To 10
10.

Yes
No
>> Go To 11
LX
LX
11.
8N - 29
(P25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN.
Measure the resistance of the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch

sense circuit between the Switch connector and the Cluster C1 connector.
No
>> Repair the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit for an open.
Yes

12.
LIFTGATE SWITCH INOPERATIVE.
Turn the Ignition Off.

Disconnect the Liftgate Release Switch connector.
Connect an ohmmeter between the terminals of the switch connector (Switch Side).
Press and hold the switch closed while measuring the resistance of the switch.
Is the resistance approximately 4700.0 ohms?
No
>> Replace the liftgate switch.

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
Yes
>> Go TO 13
8N - 30
13.
SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the Ground circuit in the Liftgate Release Switch harness connector.
No
>> Repair the Ground circuit for an open.Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION
TEST - VER 1).
Yes
>> Go To 14
14.

Yes
No
>> Go To 11
LX
LX
15.
(P25) DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN.
Measure the resistance of the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch

sense circuit between the Switch connector and the Cluster C1 connector.
No
>> Repair the (G25) Decklid/Liftgate Release Switch Sense circuit for an open.
Yes

8N - 31
8N - 32
*ALL DOORS FAIL TO LOCK
LX
LX
8N - 33
Theory of Operation
Both the Door Lock Driver circuits (P392 and P393) are connected together inside the Cluster. Therefore either
circuit shorted will affect all door locks. Depending on where the short is, some doors may lock.
Possible Causes
(P392) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DOOR LOCK DTCS

Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds then turn the ignition on.
Try to operate the door locks several times.
Does the scan tool display any Door Lock System DTCs?
No
>> Go To 2
Yes
>> Refer to symptom list for problems related to POWER DOOR LOCKS.
2.
CHECK (P392) DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE: If only one motor is inoperative when the door locks are actuated, disconnect that motor and retest
to see if the other doors lock properly. If they do, replace the defective motor.
NOTE: Ensure the door lock inhibit (key in ignition) and the door ajar systems are operating properly before
proceeding. These systems affect the door lock locking functions if they are not working as they should.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P392) Door Lock
Driver circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
Yes
>> Repair the (P392) Door Lock Driver circuit for a short to
ground.
8N - 34
3.
CHECK (P393) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P393) Door Lock
Driver circuit.
No
>> Replace the Cluster in accordance with service information.

Yes
ground.
LX
LX
*PASSENGER DOORS FAIL TO UNLOCK
8N - 35
8N - 36
LX
Possible Causes
(P303) PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
(P303) PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
NOTE: If only one motor fails to unlock when the door locks are actuated, disconnect that motor and retest
to see if the other doors unlock properly. If they do, replace the defective motor.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P303) Passenger
Doors Unlock Driver circuit.
No

Yes
>> Repair the (P303) Passenger Doors Unlock Driver circuit

LX
*RIGHT DOOR LOCKS INOPERATIVE (LHD ONLY)
8N - 37
8N - 38
LX
Possible Causes
(P392) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
(P303) PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
This test is only for Left Hand Drive vehicles because on the Right Hand Drive vehicles the Right Rear door lock is
connected with the Left Front door and the Left Rear door lock is connected with the Right Front (driver) door.
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK (P392) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
NOTE: Graphics show Right Front Latch, Right Rear is similar.

Remove either right door inner trim panels to gain access to the door
latch connector.
Disconnect the Right Door Latch connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P392) Door Lock Driver circuit between
the Cluster C1 connector and the Right Door Latch connector.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Repair the (P392) Door Lock Driver circuit for an open.
LX
2.
CHECK (P303) PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P303) Passenger Doors Unlock Driver

circuit.
Yes

No

for an open.
8N - 39
8N - 40
*LEFT DOOR LOCKS INOPERATIVE (LHD ONLY)
LX
LX
8N - 41
Possible Causes
CLUSTER
Theory of Operation
This test is only for Left Hand Drive vehicles because on the Right Hand Drive vehicles the Right Rear door lock is
connected with the Left Front door and the Left Rear door lock is connected with the Right Front (driver) door.
Diagnostic Test
1.

Remove the left door inner trim panel to gain access to the door latch
connector.
Disconnect the Left Rear Door Latch connector.
the Cluster C1 connector and the Left Rear Door Latch connector.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 42
2.
CHECK (P303) PASSENGER DOORS UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P303) Passenger Doors Unlock Driver

circuit between the Cluster C1 connector and the Left Rear Door Latch
connector.
Yes

No

for an open.
LX
LX
*DRIVER DOOR LOCK INOPERATIVE
8N - 43
8N - 44

Possible Causes

(P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
(P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
DRIVER DOOR LATCH
CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
DRIVER DOOR LATCH INOPERATIVE
Disconnect the Driver Door Latch connector.

Connect a test light between the (P393) Door Lock Driver circuit and
the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Driver circuit.
Close the front doors or trip the door latches to the closed position.
Operate the door locks in both positions and observe the test light.
Does the test light illuminate brightly for approximately 300 ms.
when the door locks are actuated?
Yes
>> Replace the Driver Door Latch.

No
>> Go To 2
2.
CHECK (P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Driver circuit
between the Latch connector and the Cluster C1 connector.
No
>> Repair the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Driver circuit for an
open.
Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
LX
3.
CHECK (P1) DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P1) Driver Door
Unlock Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P1) Driver Door Unlock Driver circuit for a short
to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
the Cluster C1 connector and the Driver Door Latch connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
5.
CHECK (P393) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P393) Door Lock
Driver circuit.
Yes
ground.
No
>> Replace the Instrument Cluster in accordance with service

information.
8N - 45
8N - 46
*ONE PASSENGER DOOR LOCK INOPERATIVE
LX
LX
8N - 47
Possible Causes
(P392) OR (P393) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
(P392) OR (P393) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(P303) PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
DOOR LATCH
Diagnostic Test
1.
PASSENGER DOOR LATCH INOPERATIVE
NOTE: Graphics in this test show Passenger Front Latch (LHD) but the other 2 passenger latches are identical. They are also similar for RHD.
Disconnect the inoperative Passenger Door latch connector.
Connect a test light between the (P392/3) Door Lock Driver circuit and
the (P303) Passenger Door Unlock Driver circuit.
Close the front doors or trip the door latches to the closed position.
Operate the door locks in both positions and observe the test light.
Does the test light illuminate brightly for approximately 300
ms. when the door locks are actuated?
Yes
>> Replace the Passenger Door Latch.

No
>> Go To 2
8N - 48
2.
CHECK (P303) PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P303) Passenger Door Unlock Driver
circuit between the Latch connector and the Cluster C1 connector.
No
>> Repair the (P303) Passenger Door Unlock Driver circuit for
an open.
Yes
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK (P303) PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P303) Passenger

Door Unlock Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P303) Passenger Door Unlock Driver circuit for
a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
LX
LX
4.
CHECK (P392/3) DOOR LOCK DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P392/3) Door Lock Driver circuit

between the Cluster C1 connector and the Passenger Door Latch connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P392/3) Door Lock Driver circuit for a short to
ground.
No
>> Repair the (P392/3) Door Lock Driver circuit for an open.
8N - 49
8N - 50
POWER LOCKS - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
POWER LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER . . . 56
STANDARD PROCEDURE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY CUSTOMER
PREFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SPECIFICATIONS
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER . . . 57
LX
8N - 51

DESCRIPTION
POWER LOCKS
The power lock system allows all of the doors and liftgate to be locked or unlocked electrically by operating a switch
on either front door trim panel. The power lock system receives non-switched battery current through a fuse in the
Junction Block (JB), so that the power locks remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position.
The instrument cluster locks the doors automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds 25.7 Km/h (15 mph), all doors
are closed, and the accelerator pedal is depressed. The rolling door lock feature can be disabled through the EVIC.
This vehicle also offers several customer programmable features, which allows the selection of several optional
electronic features to suit individual preferences.
The power lock system for this vehicle can also be operated remotely using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters.
CENTRAL LOCKING/UNLOCKING
The central locking system controls powered operation of the door and liftgate locks and the illuminated entry system. Central locking includes the following features:
Automatic locking of the doors and liftgate when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 25 km/h (15 mph).
Locking prevention with a door lock switch or the RKE transmitter if the key is in the ignition switch and the
drivers door is open.
Driver selectable unlocking mode: Unlock only the drivers door or all doors and the liftgate with one press of
the RKE transmitter unlock button. The drivers door cylinder can also be used to unlock the door. One turn of
the cylinder will unlock the drivers door, two turns within five seconds will unlock all doors.
Automatic illumination of interior courtesy lamps when the vehicle is unlocked.
Locking all doors and the liftgate by pressing the lock button on the RKE transmitter, or by pressing a lock
switch on one of the front doors.
DOOR LOCK MOTORS

The lock mechanisms are actuated by a reversible electric motor mounted within each door. The power lock motors
are integral to the door latch units.
The power lock motors cannot be adjusted or repaired. If inoperative or damaged, the door latch unit must be
replaced.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system locks and unlocks the doors and liftgate, turns on interior lamps, and arms
and disarms the Vehicle Theft Security System (if equipped). The RKE system operates on non-switched battery
current through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM), so that the system remains operational regardless of
the ignition switch position.
The RKE transmitters are also equipped with a Panic button. If the Panic button on the RKE transmitter is
depressed, the horn will sound and the exterior lights will flash on the vehicle for about three minutes or until the
Panic button is depressed a second time. A vehicle speed of approximately 25.7 kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-perhour) will also cancel the panic event.
The RKE system can also perform other functions on this vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Vehicle
Theft Security System (VTSS), the RKE transmitter will arm the VTSS when the Lock button is depressed and disarm the VTSS when the Unlock button is depressed.
The RKE system includes two transmitters when the vehicle is shipped from the factory, but the system can retain
the vehicle access codes of up to a total of eight transmitters. The transmitter codes are retained in the RKE module memory, even if the battery is disconnected. If an RKE transmitter is faulty or lost, new transmitter vehicle
access codes can be programmed into the system using a scan tool.
This vehicle also offers several customer programmable features, which allows the selection of several optional
electronic features to suit individual preferences. Customer programmable feature options affecting the RKE system
include:
8N - 52
LX
Remote Unlock Sequence - Allows the option of having only the driver side front door unlock when the RKE
transmitter Unlock button is depressed the first time. The remaining doors unlock when the button is depressed
a second time within five seconds of the first unlock press. Another option is having all doors and liftgate
unlock upon the first depression of the RKE transmitter Unlock button.
Sound Horn on Lock - Allows the option of having the horn sound a short chirp as an audible verification that
the RKE system received a valid Lock request from the RKE transmitter, or having no audible verification.
Flash Lights with Lock and Unlock - Allows the option of having the park lamps flash as an optical verification that the RKE system received a valid Lock request or Unlock request from the RKE transmitter, or having no optical verification.
Programming Additional Transmitters - Allows up to a total of eight transmitter vehicle access codes to be
stored in the receiver memory.
Certain functions and features of the RKE system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in the
vehicle over the CAN data bus network. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the data bus network, the
use of a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information are required.
OPERATION
POWER LOCKS
The instrument cluster locks or unlocks the doors when an actuation input signal from a door lock switch or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is received. The instrument cluster turns on the output drivers and provides a voltage level to the door lock motor for a specified time. All passenger doors can be locked or unlocked using a
mechanical button mounted on the door trim panel. The drivers door can be locked or unlocked by using the key
cylinder.
DOOR LOCK MOTORS

The door lock motors are controlled by the instrument cluster. A positive and negative battery connection to the two
motor terminals will cause the motor to move in one direction. Reversing the current will cause the motor to move
in the opposite direction.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

LOCK: Pressing the LOCK button locks all doors, sounds horn (chirp) once if enabled, flashes the park lamps
once if enabled, and arms the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS), if enabled. The chirp verifies that the
instrument cluster has sent a message for door lock operation. If a door has not been closed before pressing
the LOCK button, the vehicle may not be secured and the VTSS (if equipped) will not arm until the door is
closed.
UNLOCK: Pressing the UNLOCK button once will unlock the drivers door first if enabled, flashes the park
lamps twice if enabled, activates the illuminated entry system, and disarms the Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS), if equipped. Pressing the UNLOCK button twice within five seconds will unlock all doors, if drivers
door first is enabled.
PANIC: Pressing the PANIC button sounds the horns at half second intervals, flashes the exterior lamps, and
turns ON the interior lamps. The panic alarm will remain on for three minutes or until either the PANIC button
is actuated again or the vehicle speed exceeds 25.7 Km/h (15 mph) which will cancel the panic event.

POWER LOCKS
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a
scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information.
Following are tests that will help to diagnose the hard wired components and circuits of the power lock system.
However, these tests may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of this system. In order to obtain conclusive testing
of the power lock system, the CAN data bus network must be checked.
LX
8N - 53
PRELIMINARY DIAGNOSIS
As a preliminary diagnosis for the power lock system, note the system operation while you actuate both the Lock
and Unlock functions with the power lock switches and with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Then,
proceed as follows:
If the entire power lock system fails to function with either the power lock switches or the RKE transmitter,
check the fuse in the Junction Block (JB).
If the power lock system functions with both power lock switches, but not with the RKE transmitter, proceed to
diagnosis of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system.
If the power lock system functions with the RKE transmitter, but not with one or both power lock switches,
proceed to diagnosis of the door lock switches.
If the driver side power lock switch operates only the driver side front door power lock motor, but all other
power lock motors operate with the passenger side power lock switch or the RKE transmitter, use a scan tool
and the appropriate diagnostic information to diagnose the CAN data bus.
If only one power lock motor fails to operate with both power lock switches and the RKE transmitter, use a
scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information to diagnose the CAN data bus.
8N - 54
LX
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK
DESCRIPTION
A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The drivers side window/lock switch includes the following:
Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system.
Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock
out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be
operated only from the master switches.
Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door also has
a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side
front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch
houses individual master switches for each passenger door power window.
The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following:
Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system.
Power Window Switch - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the passenger side front door.
OPERATION
The driver side window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down
feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror
selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single assembly. The switches in the window/lock
switch can be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and methods.
Power Lock Switch
The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the
instrument cluster (without memory). If equipped with the memory system, the circuitry is connected to the memory
mirror module. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to
the instrument cluster or memory mirror input, which allows the instrument cluster or memory module to sense the
switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster or memory module controls the
battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The LightEmitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit
breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch
will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions.
Power Window Switches
The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power
Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever
the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window
switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on
each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window includes an auto-down feature.
When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window
is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is
cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position
window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current
feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power
windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls
the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out.
LX
REMOVAL
2. Remove the door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
3. Using a flat bladed tool, remove the window/lock
switch (2) from the door trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Install window/lock switch (2) to door trim panel
and snap into place.
2. Install door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/DOOR
- FRONT/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
8N - 55
8N - 56
LX

Using special tool 9001, first test to ensure that the
transmitter is functioning. Typical testing distance is
2.5 centimeters (1 inch) for Asian transmitters and
30.5 centimeters (12 inches) for all others. To test,
position the transmitter as shown. Press any transmitter button, then test each button individually. The tool
will beep if a radio signal strength that lights five or
more LEDs is detected. Repeat this test three times.
If transmitter fails any of the test refer to the proper
Diagnostic Procedures information.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY CUSTOMER PREFERENCES
HORN CHIRP DISABLING/ENABLING
The horn chirp can be toggled using a scan tool or by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To DISABLE (cancel) the horn chirp feature: With the ignition in the ON position, press and hold the transmitter
LOCK button for four seconds. While pressing the LOCK button in, press the PANIC button within six seconds.
Release both buttons when a single chime is heard.
To ENABLE the horn chirp feature, repeat the above procedure.
UNLOCK SEQUENCE
The unlock sequence can be toggled using a scan tool or by using the following procedure.
1. Place the key in the ignition.
2. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position four times, ending in the ON position
(Do not start the engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the drivers door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction. A single chime will be heard to
indicate the feature has been disabled.
This will toggle between Driver door first and Unlock all doors function.
To ENABLE this feature, repeat the above procedure.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER BATTERIES

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter case snaps open and shut for battery access. To replace the RKE
transmitter batteries:
1. Using a trim stick or a thin coin, gently pry at the notch in the center seam of the RKE transmitter case halves
located near the key ring until the two halves unsnap.
2. Lift the back half of the transmitter case off of the RKE transmitter.
3. Remove the two batteries from the RKE transmitter.
LX
8N - 57
4. Replace the battery with a new CR2032. Be certain that the battery is installed with the polarity correctly oriented.
5. Align the two RKE transmitter case halves with each other, and squeeze them firmly and evenly together using
hand pressure until they snap back into place.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING

If vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent, new Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
programed using a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Information. If vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Theft
Deterrent, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
SPECIFICATIONS
Normal operation range is up to 20 meters (60 feet) away from the vehicle. Range may be better or worse depending on the environment around the vehicle.
8N - 58
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
POWER MIRRORS - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
B1D04MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE DRIVER
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
B1D07MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT STUCK DRIVER DOOR
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
B1D09,B1D12MIRROR POSITION SENSOR
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW
MEMORY MIRROR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
B1D0A,B1D13MIRROR POSITION SENSOR
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH DOOR
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
B1D0C,B1D15MIRROR VERTICAL
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
B1D0D,B1D16MIRROR VERTICAL
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
B1D0F,B1D18MIRROR HORIZONTAL
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
B1D10,B1D19MIRROR HORIZONTAL
POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
B1D1E,B1D2AMIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
B1D22,B1D2EMIRROR HORIZONTAL
MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/
PERFORMANCE DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . 94
B1D4DMEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
STUCK DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . 101
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 102
B2218,B2219-DOOR MODULE INTERNAL . . . . 104
U0019CAN B BUS DRIVER DOOR
MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
U0019CAN B BUS PASSENGER DOOR

MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . 111
CONTROL MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
SUNROOF CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
HANDS FREE PHONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
SCCM - CAN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
LX

8N - 59
8N - 60
B1D04MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE DRIVER

DOOR MODULE
LX
LX
8N - 61

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Module receives a mirror movement command from the switch but then senses an open
or shorted circuit on one of the switch sense circuits for over 100 ms., this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE OPEN
(P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO GROUND
(P703) MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE
CIRCUIT
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE OPEN
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO GROUND
(P704) MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE
CIRCUIT
(P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE OPEN
(P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO GROUND
(P705) MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE
CIRCUIT
(P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE OPEN
(P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO GROUND
(P706) MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
(P710) MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE OPEN
(P710) MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO GROUND
(P710) MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
MIRROR SWITCH
DRIVER DOOR MODULE
Theory of Operation
This code will only set in vehicles that have the Memory System. The supply circuit for the Memory Mirrors are
supplied by the Driver Door Module.
Diagnostic Test
1.

Press the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Does the scan tool display B1D04MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. If the conditions returns, replace the switch.
8N - 62
2.
LX
TEST THE SWITCH

Remove the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch assembly.
Test the Mirror Switch in all positions by using the procedure in SERVICE INFORMATION / POWER LOCKS / WINDOW/LOCK SWITCH / DIAGNOSING & TESTING / WINDOW/LOCK SWITCH.
Does the switch pass the test in all positions
No
>> Replace the Mirror Switch.

Yes
>> Go to 3
3.
TEST FOR SWITCH SENSE WIRE SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect the Driver Door Module C3 connector.

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P703) Mirror Horizontal Left Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Door Module connector.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P704) Mirror Horizontal Right Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Door Module connector.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P705) Mirror Vertical
Down Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Door Module connector.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P706) Mirror Vertical
Up Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Door Module connector.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (P710) Mirror Common Switch Sense circuit in the Driver Door Mirror Module connector.
Is the resistance below 5000.0 ohms in any of the circuits?
Yes
>> Repair the Appropriate Switch Sense circuit for a short to

ground.
No
>> Go to 4
LX
4.
TEST FOR SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
Disconnect the Mirror Switch connector.

Measure the resistance of the (P703) Mirror Horizontal Left Switch
Sense circuit between the Driver Door Module connector and the Mirror
Switch connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P704) Mirror Horizontal Right Switch
Switch connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P705) Mirror Vertical Down Switch
Switch connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P706) Mirror Vertical Up Switch Sense
circuit between the Driver Door Module connector and the Mirror Switch
connector.
Measure the resistance of the (P710) Mirror Common Switch Sense circuit between the Driver Door Module connector and the Mirror Switch
connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms in all of the Switch Sense
circuits?
No
>> Repair the Appropriate Switch Sense circuit for an open.

Yes
>> Go to 5
5.
TEST FOR A SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO ANOTHER SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between each of the switch sense circuits to

each of the other switch sense circuits.
Is the resistance below 10000.0 ohms between any of the
switch sense circuits?
Yes
>> Repair the appropriate switch sense circuit for a short to

the other switch sense circuits.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer
to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
No
>> Replace the Driver Door Module.

8N - 63
8N - 64
B1D07MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK DRIVER DOOR

MODULE
LX
LX
8N - 65

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Module receives a mirror movement command from the switch for over 30 seconds, this
code will set.
Possible Causes
MIRROR SWITCH
DRIVER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Press the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Does the scan tool display B1D07MIRROR ADJUST SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors. If the conditions returns, replace the switch.
2.
TEST THE SWITCH

Remove the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch assembly.
Remove the Mirror Switch.
Test the Mirror Switch in all positions by using the procedure in SERVICE INFORMATION / POWER LOCKS / WINDOW/LOCK SWITCH / DIAGNOSING & TESTING / WINDOW/LOCK SWITCH.
Does the switch pass the test in all positions
No
>> Replace the Mirror Switch.

Yes

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
8N - 66
B1D09,B1D12MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT LOW

MEMORY MIRROR MODULE
LX
LX
8N - 67

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Door Module senses voltage below 4.3 volts on the Mirror Position Sensor Supply circuit for
over 30 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the Driver and Passenger code depending on
the side the code appeared in.
Possible Causes
(P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) OR (P66) MIRROR
MIRROR SHORTED
DRIVER OR PASSENGER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Mirror Switch in all directions several times.
Does the scan tool display B1D09 or B1D12MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 68
2.
TEST FOR A SHORTED MIRROR

Disconnect the appropriate mirror connector.
Measure the voltage between the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position Sensor Supply circuit and the ((P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes
>> Replace the Mirror.

No
>> Go to 3
3.
TEST THE (P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY WIRE

Disconnect the appropriate Driver Door Module connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position Sensor Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position Sensor Supply

circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go to 4
LX
LX
4.
8N - 69
TEST THE (P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY WIRE SHORTED TO THE (P69) OR
(P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT.
Measure the resistance between the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position

Sensor Supply circuit and the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes

circuit for a short to the (P69) or (P66) Sensor Ground Circuit.
No
>> Replace the appropriate Driver Door Module.

BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1)..
8N - 70
B1D0A,B1D13MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH

DOOR MODULE
LX
LX
8N - 71

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses voltage above 5.5 volts on the Mirror Position Sensor Supply
circuit for over 30 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the Driver and Passenger code
depending on the side the code appeared in.
Possible Causes
(P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN
(P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(P69) R (P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
MIRROR OPEN
DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1D0A or B1d13MIRROR POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 72
2.
TEST FOR AN OPEN MIRROR

Measure the voltage between the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position Sensor Supply circuit and the ((P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes

No
>> Go to 3
3.
TEST THE (P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY WIRE FOR AN OPEN

Disconnect the appropriate Door Module C4 connector.
Measure the resistance between of the (P145) or (P146) Mirror Position
Sensor Supply circuit between the Module connector and the Mirror
connector.
No

Yes
>> Go to 4
LX
LX
4.
8N - 73
TEST THE (P69) OR (P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the ((P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground

circuit between the Module connector and the Mirror connector.
No
>> Repair the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit for
an open.
Yes
>> Go to 5
5.
TEST THE (P145) OR (P146) MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY WIRE SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between ground and the (P145) or (P146) Mirror
Position Sensor Supply circuit.
Yes

circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Replace the appropriate Door Module.

8N - 74
B1D0C,B1D15MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

DOOR MODULE
LX
LX
8N - 75

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses a value below the parameter of the mirror sensor on the
Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for over 60 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the
Driver and Passenger code depending on the side the code appeared in.
Possible Causes
(P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) OR (P66) MIRROR
MIRROR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1D0C or B1D15MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 76
2.

Does the scan tool display B1D0C or B1D15MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
No

Yes
>> Go to 3
3.
TEST THE (P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (P67) or (P64) Mirror
Vertical Position Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go to 4
LX
LX
4.
8N - 77
TEST THE (P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P69) OR
(P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT.
Measure the resistance between the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit and the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for a short to the (P69) or (P66) Sensor Ground Circuit.
No

8N - 78
B1D0D,B1D16MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

DOOR MODULE
LX
LX
8N - 79

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses a value above the parameter of the mirror sensor on the
Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for over 60 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the
Possible Causes
(P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(P69) OR (P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
MIRROR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1D0D or B1D16MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 80
2.

Does the scan tool display B1D0D or B1D16MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
No

Yes
>> Go to 3
3.
TEST THE (P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position
Signal circuit and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go to 4
LX
LX
4.
Measure the resistance of the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit between the Module connector and the Mirror connector.
No
an open.
Yes
>> Go to 5
5.
TEST THE (P67) OR (P64) MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position

Signal circuit between the Module connector and the Mirror connector.
No
>> Repair the (P67) or (P64) Mirror Vertical Position Signal circuit for an open.
Yes

8N - 81
8N - 82
B1D0F,B1D18MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW

DOOR MODULE
LX
LX
8N - 83

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses a value below the parameter of the mirror sensor on the
Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit for over 60 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the
Possible Causes
(P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (P69) OR (P66) MIRROR
MIRROR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1D0F or B1D18MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 84
2.
LX

Does the scan tool display B1D0F or B1D18MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
No

Yes
>> Go to 3
3.
TEST THE (P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Horizontal Position Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal Position Signal

No
>> Go to 4
LX
4.
8N - 85
TEST THE (P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (P69)
OR (P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT.
Measure the resistance between the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal

Position Signal circuit and the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes

circuit for a short to the (P69) or (P66) Sensor Ground Circuit.
No

8N - 86
LX
B1D10,B1D19MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

DOOR MODULE
LX
8N - 87

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses a value above the parameter of the mirror sensor on the
Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit for over 60 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the
Possible Causes
(P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(P69) OR (P66) MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
MIRROR OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1D10 or B1D19MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 88
2.
LX
TEST FOR AN OPEN MIRROR

Measure the voltage between the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit and the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes

No
>> Go to 3
3.
TEST THE (P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal Position Signal circuit and ground.
Yes

No
>> Go to 4
LX
4.

Measure the resistance of the (P69) or (P66) Mirror Sensor Ground circuit between the Module connector and the Mirror connector.
No
an open.
Yes
>> Go to 5
5.
TEST THE (P65) OR (P68) MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P65) or (P68) Mirror Horizontal Position

Signal circuit between the Module connector and the Mirror connector.
No

Yes

8N - 89
8N - 90
LX
B1D1E,B1D2AMIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE

DOOR MODULE
LX
8N - 91

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Memory Mirror Module senses a value below the tolerance of the mirror motor on the Mirror Vertical
Motor Control circuit for over 10 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the Driver and Passenger code depending on the side the code appeared in.
Possible Causes
(P71) OR (P72) MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(P71) OR (P72) MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z912) OR (Z911) GROUND
CIRCUIT
MIRROR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1D1E or B1D2AMIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 92
2.

Does the scan tool display B1D1E or B1D2AMIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE?
No

Yes
>> Go to 3
3.
TEST THE (P71) OR (P72) MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR DRIVER WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Vertical Motor Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P71) or (P72) Mirror Vertical Motor Driver circuit
No
>> Go to 4
LX
LX
4.
8N - 93
TEST THE (P71) OR (P72) MIRROR VERTICAL MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z912)
GROUND CIRCUIT.
Measure the resistance between the (P71) or (P72) Mirror Vertical

Motor Driver circuit and the (Z912) or (Z911) Ground circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P71) or (P72) Mirror Vertical Motor Driver circuit
for a short to the (Z912) or (Z911) Ground Circuit.
No

8N - 94
LX
B1D22,B1D2EMIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE

DOOR MODULE
LX
8N - 95

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Driver/Passenger Door Module senses a value below the tolerance of the mirror motor on the Mirror
Horizontal Motor Driver circuit for over 10 ms., this code will set.NOTE: This test covers both the Driver and
Passenger code depending on the side the code appeared in.
Possible Causes
(P75) OR (P74) MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(P75) OR (P74) MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z912) OR (Z911) GROUND
CIRCUIT
MIRROR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1D22 or B1D2EMIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 96
2.
LX

Does the scan tool display B1D22 or B1D2EMIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE?
No

Yes
>> Go to 3
3.
TEST THE (P75) OR (P74)) MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Horizontal Motor Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P75) or (P74) Mirror Horizontal Motor Driver circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go to 4
LX
4.
8N - 97
TEST THE (P75) OR (P74) MIRROR HORIZONTAL MOTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z912)
OR (Z911) GROUND CIRCUIT.
Measure the resistance between the (P75) or (P74) Mirror Horizontal

Driver circuit and the (Z912) or (Z911) Ground circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (P75) or (P74) Mirror Horizontal Motor Driver circuit for a short to the (Z912) or (Z911) Mirror Heater
Ground Circuit.
No

8N - 98
B1D4DMEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK DOOR MODULE
LX
LX
8N - 99
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Memory Select Switch Mux is under 2.6 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(P200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX WIRE PARTIAL SHORT TO GROUND
(P200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G920) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT
MEMORY SET SWITCH
DRIVER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Press the Memory Set Switch several times in all positions.
Does the scan tool display MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
MEMORY SELECTOR SWITCH SHORTED TO GROUND

Disconnect the Memory Set Switch connector.
Does the scan tool display MEMORY SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
STUCK?
No
>> Replace the Memory Set Switch.

Yes
>> Go to 3
8N - 100
3.
(P200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (P200) Memory Select
Switch Mux circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the Memory Select Switch Mux wire for a short to
ground.
Perform the BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer
to BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1).
No
>> Go to 4
4.
(P200) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (G920) MEMORY SELECT SWITCH
RETURN CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (P200) Memory Select Switch Mux
circuit and the (G920) Memory Select Switch Return circuit in the Driver
Door Module C3 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P200) Memory Select Switch Mux circuit for a
short to the (G920) Memory Select Switch return circuit.
No

LX
LX
8N - 101

When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately after the Door Module detects voltage under 11.3 volts on the (A913) Fused B(+)
circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW
Diagnostic Test
1.

Are there any Charging System DTCs set in the Powertrain Control Module?
Yes
>> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/CHARGING - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) for Charging System diagnostic
procedures.
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position then start the engine and let run for one minute.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
3.

Measure the voltage on the (A913) Fused B(+) circuit at the Door Module C4 connector and compare to voltage at the vehicle battery.
Is the voltage at the Door Module C4 connector the same as
measured at the battery?
Yes
>> Replace the Driver/Passenger Door Module in accordance

No

8N - 102
LX

When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately after the Door Module detects voltage over 15 volts on the (A913) Fused B(+)
circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
procedures.
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.


Measure the voltage on the (A913) Fused B(+) circuit at the Door Module C4 connector and compare to voltage at the vehicle battery.
Is the voltage at the Door Module C4 connector the same as
measured at the battery?
Yes
>> Replace the Driver/Passenger Door Module in accordance

No

8N - 103
8N - 104
LX
B2218,B2219-DOOR MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately if the Driver/Passenger Door Module internal self test fails.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B2218, B2219-DOOR MODULE INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B2218 or B2219 - DOOR MODULE INTERNAL reset?
Yes

No
LX
U0019CAN B BUS DRIVER DOOR MODULE
8N - 105
8N - 106
LX
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B (-) circuit is open.
Possible Causes
DRIVER DOOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on at least five times, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds per
cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
>> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Driver Door Module C4
connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
Measure the resistance of the (D54) CAN B Bus () circuit between the
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Driver Door Module C4
connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Driver Door Module in accordance with the

No

8N - 107
8N - 108
U0019CAN B BUS PASSENGER DOOR MODULE
LX
LX
8N - 109
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B (-) circuit is open.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Cycle the ignition switch from off to on at least five times, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds per
cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8N - 110
3.

Disconnect the Passenger Door Module C4 connector.
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Passenger Door Module
C4 connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Passenger Door Module
C4 connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Passenger Door Module in accordance with

No

LX
LX
8N - 111

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

8N - 112
LX
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS FREE PHONE

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

LX
8N - 113
test procedure.

test procedure.
8N - 114
POWER MIRRORS - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
POWER MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
MIRROR-INSIDE REARVIEW
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . 116
SWITCH-MIRROR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
POWER MIRROR SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
LX
8N - 115

DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT MIRROR
The automatic day/night mirror system is able to automatically change the reflectance of the inside rear view and
outside left mirror in order to reduce the glare of headlamps approaching the vehicle from the rear. The automatic
day/night rear view mirror receives battery current through a fuse in the junction block only when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR

The power operated rear view mirrors allow the driver to adjust both outside mirrors electrically from the driver side
front seat position by operating a switch on the driver side front door trim panel. The power mirrors receive a nonswitched battery feed through a fuse in the junction block so that the system will remain operational, regardless of
the ignition switch position.
OPERATION
A switch located on the bottom of the automatic day/night mirror housing allows the vehicle operator to select
whether the automatic dimming feature is operational. When the automatic day/night mirror is turned on, the mirror
switch is lighted by an integral Light-Emitting Diode (LED). The mirror will automatically disable its self-dimming
feature whenever the vehicle is being driven in reverse. The day/night mirror is automatically turned ON each time
the ignition is turned to the ON position, regardless if it was previously turned OFF.

POWER MIRRORS
Any diagnosis of the Power Mirror system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the
use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information.
1. Check the fuses in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK,
repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse(s).
2. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit
to the PDC as required.
3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the driver side power window switch and bezel
assembly and unplug the wire harness connector from the power mirror switch. Connect the battery negative
cable. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity in the door wire harness half of the power mirror
switch wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the junction block as
required.
4. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity in the
door wire harness half of the power mirror switch wire harness connector and a good ground. There should be
continuity. If not OK, repair open in the ground circuit.
8N - 116
LX
MIRROR-INSIDE REARVIEW
DESCRIPTION
The automatic day/night mirror uses a thin layer of electrochromic material between two pieces of conductive glass
to form the face of the mirror. When the mirror switch is in the ON position, two photocell sensors are used by the
mirror circuitry to monitor external light levels and adjust the reflectance of the mirror.
OPERATION
The ambient photocell sensor is located on the forward-facing (windshield side) of the rear view mirror housing, and
detects the ambient light levels outside of the vehicle. The headlamp photocell sensor is located inside the rear view
mirror housing behind the mirror glass and faces rearward, to detect the level of the light being received at the rear
window side of the mirror. When the circuitry of the automatic day/night mirror detects that the difference between
the two light levels is too great (the light level received at the rear of the mirror is much higher than that at the front
of the mirror), it begins to darken the mirror.
The automatic day/night mirror circuitry also monitors the transmission using an input from the backup lamp circuit.
The mirror circuitry is programmed to automatically disable its self-dimming feature whenever it senses that the
transmission backup lamp circuit is energized.
The automatic day/night mirror is a completely self-contained unit and cannot be repaired. If faulty or damaged, the
entire mirror assembly must be replaced.

1. Check the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as
required and replace the faulty fuse.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go
to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the ignition switch as required.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Unplug the wire
harness connector from the automatic day/night mirror. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition
switch to the ON position. Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch output (run/start) circuit cavity of
the automatic day/night mirror wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit to
the junction block as required.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity
between the ground circuit cavity of the automatic day/night mirror wire harness connector and a good ground.
There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the circuit to ground as required.
5. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Apply the parking brake. Place
the transmission gear selector lever in the Reverse position. Check for battery voltage at the backup lamp switch
output circuit cavity of the automatic day/night mirror wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK,
repair the open circuit as required.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Plug in the automatic day/night
mirror wire harness connector. Connect the battery negative cable. Cover the forward facing ambient photocell
sensor to keep out any ambient light. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Place the transmission gear
selector lever in the Neutral position. Place the mirror switch in the ON (the LED in the mirror switch is lighted)
position. Cover the forward facing ambient photocell sensor to keep out any ambient light.
NOTE: The ambient photocell sensor must be covered completely, so that no light reaches the sensor. Use
a finger pressed tightly against the sensor, or cover the sensor completely with electrical tape.
7. Shine a light into the rearward facing headlamp photocell sensor. The mirror glass should darken. If OK, go to
Step 8. If not OK, replace the faulty automatic day/night mirror unit.
8. With the mirror glass darkened, place the transmission gear selector lever in the Reverse position. The mirror
should return to its normal reflectance. If not OK, replace the faulty automatic day/night mirror.
LX
8N - 117
SWITCH-MIRROR
DESCRIPTION
A power mirror switch is located on the drivers door trim panel, attached to the window/lock switch. The power
mirror switch includes the following:
Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rotary joystick switch selects the right or left power mirror for
adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off in the center position.
Power Mirror Adjustment Switch - A momentary joystick directional switch allows the driver to adjust the
selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right or Left directions.
OPERATION
The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the IPM on a fused B(+) circuit
so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rotary joystick selector
switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a center OFF position.
After the right or left mirror is selected, the joystick is moved to adjust the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left.
In vehicles without Memory Mirrors the power mirror switch circuitry controls the battery current and ground feeds to
each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. In vehicles with Memory Mirrors the mirror switch
connects to the driver power mirror module. The driver memory mirror module uses the mirror switch inputs to control the battery current and ground feeds to driver mirror motor and sends a CAN Bus message to the passenger
mirror module. The passenger mirror module controls the battery current and ground feeds to passenger mirror
motors based on the CAN bus message from the driver memory module.
In vehicles equipped with the exterior day/night mirror, the operation of the dimming feature is controlled by the
interior day/night mirror. The exterior mirror is hard wired to the interior mirror.

POWER MIRROR SWITCH
2. Remove the power mirror switch (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER MIRRORS/POWER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch.
4. Test the switch continuity. refer to the Power Mirror Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for
the switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch as required.
POWER MIRROR SWITCH TEST
CONTINUITY BETWEEN
PINS OF MIRROR
SWITCH
SWITCH POSITION
LEFT MIRROR SELECTED
UP
PINS 5 & 7, PINS 4 & 3
DOWN
PINS 4 & 7, PINS 5 & 3
RIGHT
PINS 4 & 9, PINS 5 & 3
LEFT
PINS 4 & 3, PINS 5 & 9

RIGHT MIRROR SELECTED
UP
PINS 4 & 3, PINS 5 & 6
DOWN
PINS 4 & 6, PINS 5 & 3
RIGHT
PINS 4 & 8, PINS 5 & 3
LEFT
PINS 4 & 3, PINS 5 & 8
8N - 118
REMOVAL
2. Remove the door trim panel.
3. Remove the power mirror switch from the door trim
panel by twisting the switch counter-clockwise.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install power mirror switch to door trim panel.

Connect wire harness connectors to switches.
Install door trim panel.
Connect battery negative cable.
LX
LX
POWER SEATS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
8N - 119

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

B1D62POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK . . . . . . 121
B1D63POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN . . . . . . . 122
B1D6DSEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
B1D6ESEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
B1D71SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION
B1D72SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION
B1D75SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION
B1D76SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION
B1D79SEAT RECLINER POSITION
B1D7ASEAT RECLINER POSITION
B1D7BSEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . 146
B1D7FSEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR
B1D83SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR
B1D87SEAT BACKREST MOTOR
B1D9BSEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP
NOT LEARNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
B221C-MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL . 171
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . . . 172
U0021-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . 175
U0022-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 176
U0023-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . 177
U0024-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . 178
U0025-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 179
U0026-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . 180

CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
HEADLAMP LEVEL TRANSLATOR. . . . . . . . . . 181
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
HANDS FREE PHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
SCCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION
TEST VER 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8N - 120

LX
LX
8N - 121
B1D62POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK

When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Memory Seat Module detects the switch engaged in an active position for over 50 seconds, this
code will set.
Possible Causes
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH
Diagnostic Test
1.

Press the Seat Switch in all directions several times.
Wait one minute.
Does the scan tool display B1D62POWER SEAT SWITCH STUCK?
Yes
>> Replace the Driver Seat Switch as necessary.

Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
8N - 122
B1D63POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN
LX
LX
8N - 123
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
When the Memory Seat Module detects an open driver seat switch MUX circuit this code will set.
Possible Causes
(P239) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX OPEN
(P339) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX OPEN
(P599) DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN OPEN
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Press the Seat Switch in all directions several times.
Wait one minute.
Does the scan tool display B1D63POWER SEAT SWITCH OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (P239) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module C4 connector.

Measure the resistance between the (P239) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/
Horizontal Switch MUX circuit and the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX
Return circuit in the C4 connector.
Is the resistance 47.0 ohms + or 1.0?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
8N - 124
3.
CHECK THE (P339) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance between the (P339) Driver Seat Front Vertical/
Recliner Switch MUX circuit and the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX
Return circuit in the C4 connector.
Is the resistance 47.0 ohms + or 1.0?
Yes
>> Replace the Memory Seat Module.

Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST
VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No
>> Go To 4
4.
LX
CHECK THE (P339) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX WIRE RESISTANCE
Disconnect the Driver Seat Switch.

Measure the resistance of the (P339) Driver Seat Front Vertical/Recliner Switch MUX circuit between the C4 connector and the Driver
Is the resistance below 1.0 ohm?
Yes
>> Replace the Driver Seat Switch.

No
>> Repair the (P339) Driver Seat Front Vertical/Recliner Switch

MUX circuit for an open.
LX
5.
CHECK THE (P239) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUX WIRE RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the (P239) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Horizontal Switch MUX circuit between the C4 connector and the Driver Seat
Switch connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (P239) Driver Seat Rear Vertical/Horizontal

Switch MUX circuit for an open.
6.
8N - 125
CHECK THE (P599) DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN WIRE RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return
circuit between the C4 connector and the Driver Seat Switch connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Driver Seat Switch.

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 (Refer to
No
>> Repair the (P599) Driver Seat Switch MUX Return circuit
for an open.
8N - 126
B1D6DSEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8N - 127
When Monitored:
When the seat motor is activated (sensor supply voltage is switched on whenever motor is activated).
Set Condition:
If sensor voltage is not within a specified range this DTC will set. This DTC will only set when the seat switch
is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
DRIVER HORIZONTAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D6DSEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor.

NOTE: Check connectors Clean and repair as necessary.
Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position during the next step.
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (G401) Driver Seat
Horizontal Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat Horizontal Sensor Ground at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate for approximately two seconds
then turn off with the seat switch engaged?
Yes
>> Replace the seat track horizontal motor assembly.

No
>> Go To 3
8N - 128
3.
LX
CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position
Sense wire at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense

No

LX
B1D6ESEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
8N - 129
8N - 130
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If during motor operation the sensor voltage is not within a specified range this code will set. This DTC will
only set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
(G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
DRIVER RECLINER SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Move the seat switch in the horizontal position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D6ESEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Move the seat switch in the horizontal positions three times.
Does the same DTC reset?
No
>> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible intermittent short to voltage from another circuit, if OK
replace the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER
Yes
>> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible short to voltage from another circuit, if OK replace the
Memory Seat Module.
LX
B1D71SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
8N - 131
8N - 132
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Move the Seat Switch in the Front Vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D71SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor.

Move the seat switch in the front vertical position during the next step.
Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to the Driver
Seat Front Vertical Sensor Ground at the Front Driver Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Front Driver Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8N - 133
CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense wire at the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector to ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense
No

8N - 134
B1D72SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8N - 135
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
REAR DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Move the seat switch front vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D72SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Move the seat switch in the both front vertical positions three times.
No
>> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible intermittent short to another circuit, if OK replace the Front
Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Yes
>> Inspect the position sense wire for a possible short to another circuit, if OK replace the Memory Seat
Module.
8N - 136
B1D75SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8N - 137
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Move the Seat Switch in the Rear Vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D75SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor.

Move the seat switch in the rear vertical position during the next step.
Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Sensor Ground at the Rear Driver Seat Adjuster Motor
connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor

assembly.
No
>> Go To 3
8N - 138
3.
CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position
Sense wire at the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense
No

LX
LX
B1D76SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
8N - 139
8N - 140
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Move the seat switch rear vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D76SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Move the seat switch in the both rear vertical positions three times.
No
replace the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Yes
Memory Seat Module.
LX
B1D79SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
8N - 141
8N - 142
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Move the Seat Switch recliner position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D79SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor.

Move the seat switch in the recliner position during the next step.
Recliner Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Recliner Position Sensor Ground at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8N - 143
CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position
Sense wire at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit for a short to ground.
No

8N - 144
B1D7ASEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8N - 145
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Move the seat switch recliner position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D7ASEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Move the seat switch in the both recliner positions three times.
No
replace the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor assembly.
Yes
Memory Seat Module.
8N - 146
B1D7BSEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
8N - 147
When Monitored:
Whenever the seat motor is activated.
Set Condition:
If the Memory Seat Module does not detect the rotation of the seat motor this DTC will set. This DTC will only
set when the seat switch is moved in the same direction three consecutive times.
Possible Causes
SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G491) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
(P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
DRIVER HORIZONTAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR RELATED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor DTCs?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete
list of symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Move the Seat Switch in the Horizontal position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D7BSEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8N - 148
3.

Horizontal Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat Horizontal Sensor Ground at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER VOLTAGE
Using a 12-volt test light connect one lead to the (P115) Driver Seat
Horizontal Forward Driver circuit and the other lead to (P117) Driver
Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat
Adjuster Motor connector.
Does the test light illuminate with the seat switch engaged?
Yes
>> Replace the track/horizontal motor assembly.

No
>> Go To 7
LX
LX
5.
CHECK THE (G401) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position
Sense circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Is the resistance above 1.0 ohm?
Yes
>> Repair the (G401) Driver Seat Horizontal Position Sense

No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK THE (G491) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G491) Driver Seat Horizontal Sensor

Ground circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G491) Driver Seat Horizontal Senor Ground circuit for an open.
No

8N - 149
8N - 150
7.
CHECK THE (P115) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward
Driver circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P115) Driver Seat Horizontal Forward Driver circuit for an open.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
CHECK THE (P117) DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward

Driver circuit at the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C3 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P117) Driver Seat Horizontal Rearward Driver

No

LX
LX
8N - 151
B1D7FSEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
8N - 152
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G494) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER
(P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER MOTOR
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Diagnose and repair other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list
of symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Move the Seat Switch in the Front Vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D7FSEAT FRONT VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.

Move the Seat Switch in the front vertical position during the next step.
Front Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Front Vertical Sensor Ground at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP/DOWN DRIVER VOLTAGE
Move the Seat Switch in the front vertical position during the next step.
Front Vertical Up Driver circuit and the other lead to (P121) Driver Seat
Front Vertical Down Driver circuit at the Front Driver Vertical Seat
Yes
>> Replace the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster motor

assembly.
VER 1
No
>> Go To 7
8N - 153
8N - 154
5.
CHECK THE (G404) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense circuit at the Front Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector to the C3 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G404) Driver Seat Front Vertical Position Sense
VER 1
No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK THE (G494) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G494) Driver Seat Front Vertical Sensor
Ground circuit at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector to the C3 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G494) Driver Seat Front Vertical Senor Ground
VER 1
No

VER 1
LX
LX
7.
CHECK THE (P119) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up
Driver circuit at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
to the C3 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P119) Driver Seat Front Vertical Up Driver circuit for an open.
VER 1
No
>> Go To 8
8.
CHECK THE (P121) DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down
Driver circuit at the Driver Front Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
Yes
>> Repair the (P121) Driver Seat Front Vertical Down Driver
VER 1
No

VER 1
8N - 155
8N - 156
B1D83SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
8N - 157
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G492) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER
(P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Diagnose and repair other DTC(s) first. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list
of symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Move the Seat Switch in the Rear Vertical position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D83SEAT REAR VERTICAL MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8N - 158
3.

Move the Seat Switch in the rear vertical position during the next step.
Rear Vertical Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Sensor Ground at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP/DOWN DRIVER VOLTAGE
Move the Seat Switch in the rear vertical position during the next step.
Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit and the other lead to (P113) Driver Seat
Rear Vertical Down Driver circuit at the Rear Driver Vertical Seat
Yes
>> Replace the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster motor

assembly.
VER 1
No
>> Go To 7
LX
LX
5.
CHECK THE (G402) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position
Sense circuit at the Rear Driver Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
Yes
>> Repair the (G402) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Position Sense
VER 1
No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK THE (G492) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G492) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Sensor
Ground circuit at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
Yes
>> Repair the (G492) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Senor Ground
Perform MEMORY SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST VER
1
No

VER 1
8N - 159
8N - 160
7.
CHECK THE (P111) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up
Driver circuit at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
Yes
>> Repair the (P111) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Up Driver circuit
for an open.
VER 1
No
>> Go To 8
8.
CHECK THE (P113) DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down
Driver circuit at the Driver Rear Vertical Seat Adjuster Motor connector
Yes
>> Repair the (P113) Driver Seat Rear Vertical Down Driver
VER 1
No

VER 1
LX
LX
B1D87SEAT BACKREST MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
8N - 161
8N - 162
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
(G493) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
(P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
list of symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Move the Seat Switch in the Recliner position three times.
Does the scan tool display B1D87SEAT BACKREST MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.

Move the Seat Switch in the Recliner position during the next step.
Recliner Position Sense circuit and the other lead to Driver Seat
Recliner Position Sensor Ground at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster
Motor connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT RECLINER FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER VOLTAGE
Move the Seat Switch in the Recliner position during the next step.
Recliner Up Driver circuit and the other lead to (P143) Driver Seat
Recliner Down Driver circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor
connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Recliner motor assembly.

VER 1
No
>> Go To 7
8N - 163
8N - 164
5.
CHECK THE (G403) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE WIRE FOR AN OPEN

Sense circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to
the C2 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G403) Driver Seat Recliner Position Sense circuit for an open.
VER 1
No
>> Go To 6
6.
CHECK THE (G493) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSTION SENSOR GROUND FOR AN OPEN

Sensor Ground circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to the C2 connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G493) Driver Seat Recliner Position Senor

Ground circuit for an open.
VER 1
No

VER 1
LX
LX
7.
CHECK THE (P141) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER WIRE FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver
circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to the C2
connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P141) Driver Seat Recliner Up Driver circuit for
an open.
VER 1
No
>> Go To 8
8.
CHECK THE (P143) DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver
circuit at the Driver Recliner Seat Adjuster Motor connector to the C2
connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (P143) Driver Seat Recliner Down Driver circuit
for an open.
VER 1
No

VER 1
8N - 165
8N - 166
LX
B1D9BSEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP NOT LEARNED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Seat becomes de-standardized. If the seat is not standardized, an Easy Exit/Entry function can not be performed. If seat is standardized (learn seat cushion horizontal front hardstop) and then becomes de-standardized (conditions are: seat cushion motor is 5% past the expected hard stop position or seat cushion hall sensor
failure is occured), a DTC is logged.
Possible Causes
OTHER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES SET IN THE MEMORY SEAT MODULE
SEAT STANDERDIZATION ROUTINE NOT PERFORMED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display any seat position sensor or circuit performance DTCs?
Yes
list of symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Move the seat in the full forward horizontal position.
Does the scan tool display B1D9BSEAT HORIZONTAL FRONT STOP NOT LEARNED?
Yes
>> With the scan tool, perform the MSM Standard Routine.
No
LX
8N - 167

When Monitored:
Engine running, during seat motor operation.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately after the Seat Memory Module receives a low charging system voltage message
over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage under 9.5 volts on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW
SEAT MEMORY MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
procedures.
No
>> Go To 2
Perform POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
2.

Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position then start the engine and operate the driver power seat.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8N - 168
3.
Disconnect the Memory Seat Module connector.

Measure the voltage on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit at the MSM connector and compare to voltage at the vehicle battery.
Is the voltage at the MSM connector the same as measured at
the battery?
Yes

VER 1.
No

VER 1.
LX
LX
8N - 169

When Monitored:
Engine running, during seat operation.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately after the Memory Seat Module receives a high charging system voltage message
over the CAN B Bus or detects voltage over 16.5 volts on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit.
Possible Causes
CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
procedures.
No
>> Go To 2
2.

Attempt to operate the driver power seat.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8N - 170
3.
Disconnect the Seat Memory Module connector.

Measure the voltage on the (A110) Fused B(+) circuit at the MSM connector and compare to voltage at the vehicles battery.
Is the voltage at the MSM connector the same as measured at
the battery?
Yes

VER 1.
No

VER 1.
LX
LX
8N - 171
B221C-MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
This code is set immediately if the Memory Seat Module internal self test fails.
Possible Causes
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B221C-MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

Does the DTC B221C-MEMORY SEAT MODULE INTERNAL reset?
Yes

No
8N - 172
LX
LX
8N - 173
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit or (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit open.
Possible Causes
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

With the scan tool, record and erase MSM DTCs
With the scan tool, read active MSM DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

ground.
Yes

circuits. If ok, replace the Memory Seat Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8N - 174
3.

ground.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
LX
LX
U0021-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
8N - 175
8N - 176
LX
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit is open.
Possible Causes
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

ground.
Yes

No
U0022-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW

LX
8N - 177
test procedure.
U0023-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH

test procedure.
8N - 178
U0024-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8N - 179
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
The Memory Seat Module detects the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open.
Possible Causes
MEMORY SEAT MODULE
Theory of Operation
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

ground.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (D54) CAN B Bus (-) circuit for an open.
U0025-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT LOW

8N - 180
LX
test procedure.
U0026-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
LX
8N - 181
test procedure.

test procedure.
U0181LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HEADLAMP LEVEL TRANSLATOR

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
U0197-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH HANDS FREE PHONE

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

8N - 182
LX
test procedure.
U0212LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SCCM

test procedure.

test procedure.
LX
8N - 183
POWER SEAT SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST VER 1

Diagnostic Test
1.
Perform Power Seat System Verification Test
Disconnect all jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components and connectors.
Ensure that all accessories are turned off.
Ensure that the battery is fully charged.
If either the Memory Seat Module or the Driver Horizontal Seat Adjuster Motor/Seat Track was replaced, the MSM
Standard Routine must be performed using the scan tool.
With the scan tool, record and erase DTCs from all modules.
Operate the driver seat in all positions.
With the Memory Switch on the Drivers Door, program the Drivers Seat No. 1 Button to a desired position and
Driver No. 2 Button to a different position.
Verify that both Memory positions can be recalled from the RKE transmitter and the Memory Switch on the Drivers
Door.
Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the ignition on.
Check for DTCs in the modules.
Are DTCs present in any of the modules or is the original condition still present?
Yes
>> The repair is not complete. Refer to the related category for the DTC or symptom that is still present.
No
8N - 184
POWER SEATS - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
STANDARD PROCEDURE
MEMORY SYSTEM PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . 189
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
POWER SEAT RECLINER

REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
SWITCH-SEAT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
POWER SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
LX
8N - 185

DESCRIPTION
POWER SEAT SYSTEM
WARNING: The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger
airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly, its related
components, or trim cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.
Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat trim covers not designated for the specific model being
repaired. Always use the correct seat trim cover specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat trim cover with an aftermarket trim cover.
Do not add a secondary trim cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/MoparT.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
The power seat system allows the driver and front
seat passenger to electrically adjust their seating positions using the power seat switches located on the
outboard seat cushion side shield of each front seat.
The eight-way power seat includes a six-way adjustable seat cushion track and a two-way power seat
back. The power seat can be adjusted up, down, front
up, front down, forward, rearward, recliner forward,
and recliner rearward. The power seat system is also
available with the heated seat option and memory
seat option that automatically positions the driver
power seat for two different drivers (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/HEATED SEATS - DESCRIPTION ) and
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM below.
8N - 186
LX
The power seat system for this vehicle includes the

following major components:
Power Seat Adjuster - The power seat adjuster
is made up of the upper and lower power seat
adjuster assemblies. The upper power seat
adjuster contains two reversible motors that are
connected to worm-drive gearboxes that move
the seat adjuster through a combination of
screw-type drive units. These motors are the
height adjust motor and the front tilt motor. On
vehicles equipped with non-memory power seats,
each motor contains a self-resetting circuit
breaker to protect it from overload. On vehicles
equipped with memory power seats the motor
overload protection is a function of the Memory
Seat Module (MSM). Consecutive or frequent
resetting of the circuit breakers may damaged the motors.
The height adjust motor is located on the rear of the upper power seat adjuster assembly and controls the up
and down movement of the entire seat. The height adjust motor can be serviced separately from the power
seat adjuster assembly.
The front tilt motor is located on the front of the
upper power seat adjuster assembly and controls
the up and down movement of the seat front
only. The front tilt motor can be serviced separately from the power seat adjuster assembly.
The lower power seat adjuster contains one

reversible motor that is connected to a wormdrive gearbox that moves the seat adjuster
through a screw-type drive unit. On vehicles
equipped with non-memory power seats, the
motor will contain a self-resetting circuit breaker
to protect it from overload. On vehicles equipped
with memory power seats the motor overload
protection is a function of the Memory Seat Module (MSM). The motor is part of the lower power
seat track unit and must be replaced as an
assembly, (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT
ADJUSTERS - REMOVAL).
Power Seat Recliner - The power seat recliner replaces the manual seat recliner.
LX
8N - 187
The power seat option includes an electrically

operated power seat back recliner mechanism.
The power seat recliner switch is integral to the
power seat switch assembly, but is actuated with
a separate switch knob.
The power seat recliner motor cannot be
repaired. If the unit is inoperative or damaged,
the seat back frame must be replaced, (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/POWER
SEAT MOTOR - REMOVAL).
Power Seat Switches - Vehicles may be equipped with driver only, or driver and passenger power seat
switches. One seat switch is used for each front
seat. The power seat switches are paddle-type
levers mounted on the outboard seat side
shields. Movement of the seat cushions and
backs mimics the action of the switch paddles.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/
SEAT SWITCH - DESCRIPTION) for additional
information.
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM

An electronic memory seat system is available on certain models. The memory system is able to store and recall all
driver side power seat positions, outside mirror positions, power tilt/telescopic steering column positions and power
adjustable pedal position. The system can be set for two different drivers. On vehicles with a factory installed radio
connected to the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus network, the memory system is also able to store and
recall up to twelve radio station presets (six AM and six FM), also for two drivers. The memory system will also
store and recall the last station listened to for each driver, even if it is not one of the twelve preset stations.
The memory system will automatically recall all of these settings when a button of the memory switch is depressed,
or when the doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (if enabled). If the vehicle has
more than two drivers the RKE transmitter recall of memory features can be disabled. This is a customer programmable feature of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) set through the use of the appropriate steering
wheel switches. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE/ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFO CENTER OPERATION) for additional information on the customer programmable features.
The memory system also has an Easy Entry and /Exit feature that provides the driver with more room to enter or
exit the vehicle. When the seat is in a memorized position, it will move rearward 55 millimeters or to the end of its
travel, whichever occurs first, when the key is removed from the ignition switch lock cylinder. This is also a customer
8N - 188
LX
programmable feature of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) set through the use of the appropriate
steering wheel switches.
The memory system also has a 9Tilt in Reverse9 feature that tilts the outside mirrors down a fixed, incremental angle
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the RUN position. This feature provides the
customer with a better view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up. The mirrors
move back to their previous position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE.
The
memory system includes the following components:

Memory Selector Switch - located in the driver door trim panel.
Driver Door Module (DDM) - located in the driver door, behind the trim panel.
Passenger Door Module (PDM) - located in the passenger door, behind the trim panel.
Hall Effect Sensors - Outside Mirror - The hall effect sensor is permanently installed on the outside mirror
motor. This hall effect sensor is used to provide a reference signal to the memory heated seat mirror module,
letting the module know the exact position of the mirror.
Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) - located at ignition key cylinder.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter - located with ignition key.
Memory Seat Module (MSM) - located underneath the driver seat and also controls the Adjustable Pedals.
Hall Effect Sensors - Seat Track - These hall effect sensors are permanently installed in each of the power
seat track motors. They are used to provide a reference signal to the memory heated seat mirror module,
letting the module know the exact position of the seat cushion and recliner.
Radio - located in the instrument panel center stack.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) - located in the instrument panel center stack.
Certain functions and features of the memory system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in
the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN bus allows the sharing of sensor information.
This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, internal controller hardware, and component sensor current loads. At
the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many
new feature capabilities. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the CAN bus, the use of a scan tool and
the proper diagnostic information are needed.
OPERATION
POWER SEAT SYSTEM
The power seat system receives battery current through a 50 amp fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) so
that the power seats remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position.
When a power seat switch is actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the power seat switch
contacts to the appropriate motor or motors. The motor and drive unit operate to move the seat in the selected
direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the power seat track is reached. When the switch is
moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor is reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the motor to run in the opposite direction.
MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM

The Memory Seat Module (MSM) receives battery current through a 25 amp circuit breaker in the Power Distribution
Center (PDC) so that the power seats remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position. When the driver
memory seat switch control knob is actuated, a resistance signal is sent to the MSM via the Controller Area Network
(CAN) bus circuit. The MSM is responsible for the 12V battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster
motor. The adjuster motor operates to move the power seat adjuster mechanism through its drive unit in the
selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached.
The MSM receives memory set/position switch input through the CAN bus circuit. The MSM also receives hard
wired input from the hall effect sensors, mounted on each of the driver power seat adjuster motors and the driver
side view mirror motor. The programmed software in the module allows it to know where the seat/mirror is located
in its designed travel by a pulse count generated from the hall effect sensors. This way, when the memory switch is
depressed the module will power the seat adjuster/mirror motors until the correct preset location is achieved. The
module will prevent the seat memory recall function from being initiated, if the transmission gear selector lever is not
in the Park position, or if the vehicle is moving. These inputs are monitored over the Controller Area Network (CAN)
bus circuit by the MSM.
LX
8N - 189
For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in a position other than Park or the

MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
In order to obtain conclusive testing of the power seats with and without the memory system option, the Controller
Area Network (CAN) bus, and all of the electronic modules that provide inputs to, or receive outputs from the memory system components must be checked. Use a scan tool and the proper diagnostic information to accurately diagnose the power seat/memory seat systems.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the memory/heated seat option utilize a low voltage cut-off feature. This feature turns off the 12V power to the power seat system anytime vehicle voltage is below 11.0V. Be certain to
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER

Operate the power seat switch and move the seat in all directions. The seat should move in each of the selected
directions.
If the power seat adjuster fails to operate in more than one direction, proceed as follows:
1. Inspect the power seat adjuster motors to ensure the electrical connectors are fully seated to the motors. If OK,
go to Step 2. If not OK, connect the electrical connector to the fully seated position.
2. Check the power seat fuse in the power distribution center. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, replace the inoperative
fuse.
3. Remove the power seat switch from the seat cushion side panel. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+)
circuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open
circuit to the power distribution center as required.
4. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connector and a
good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the open circuit to ground as
required.
5. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/SEAT SWITCH - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). If the switch tests
OK, check the wire harness between the power seat switch and the motor. If the circuits check OK, replace the
inoperative power seat adjuster assembly. If the circuits are not OK, repair the wire harness as required.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
MEMORY SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
The Memory Seat Module (MSM) interfaces with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system via the Controller Area
Network (CAN) bus. The proper procedure of setting and recalling a memory position using the RKE is as follows:
1. Press and release memory switch 1 or 2 to recall memory position 1 or 2.
2. Adjust the seat, recliner, adjustable pedal position, set radio station presets, set HVAC temperature preset, and
the side view mirrors to the desired position.
3. Press momentarily and release memory switch S.
4. Within five seconds, press momentarily and release memory switch 1 or 2.
5. To link the RKE transmitter: within ten seconds, press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters
To program the second drivers position, repeat the above procedure using memory switch 2. The second RKE
transmitter can be programmed in the same fashion as indicated in Step 5.
8N - 190
LX
NOTE: The module will abort a recall if the transmission is moved out of park or if any seat movement is
activated whether manually or by memory recall. The module will also abort a recall if any movement of the
adjustable pedals is detected.
To recall either of the programmed positions momentarily press and release either memory selector switch 1 or 2.
If using RKE, just press and release the UNLOCK button on the proper transmitter for either position 1 or 2.
A recall is possible any time the vehicle transmission is in PARK and the seatbelt is unbuckled. This condition is
monitored by the MSM.
LX
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER
REMOVAL
WARNING: A seat structure that has seen significant load may have the locking mechanism activated and may exhibit the following symptoms:
Locking pawl (2) loose
Locking pawl (2) engaged into the seat frame
sidemember (1)
Height adjuster only works on outboard side
Broken or missing shear pin (3)
If any one or more of these symptoms exist
replace the height adjuster assembly. Do not
attempt any repairs. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury or death.
FRONT TILT MOTOR

2. Remove the affected seat with the inoperative
motor (1) (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT FRONT - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the seat cushion and pan (Refer to 23 BODY/SEATS/SEAT
CUSHION
COVER
REMOVAL).
8N - 191
8N - 192
LX
4. Disconnect the motor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fasteners holding the motor to the seat

adjuster (1).
6. Remove motor from seat adjuster (2).
HEIGHT ADJUST MOTOR

WARNING: Use caution when removing the height adjust motor (3) if the motor is inoperative, and the
power seat is not in the full up position. The seat adjuster assembly (2) is under load from the height adjust
spring and may cause the motor to rotate under pressure when the fasteners are removed. The seat
adjuster assembly also may spring upward when the motor is removed. If the height adjust motor is operative, move the power seat to the full up position prior to disconnecting the battery.
LX
2. Remove the affected seat with the inoperative
motor (3) (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT FRONT - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the seat cushion and pan (Refer to 23 BODY/SEATS/SEAT
CUSHION
COVER
REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect the motor electrical connector.
5. Remove
the seat
6. Remove
7. Remove
the fasteners (1) holding the motor (3) to

adjuster (2).
screw and washer from the motor shaft.
motor (3) from seat adjuster (2).
8N - 193
8N - 194
INSTALLATION
WARNING: A seat structure that has seen significant load may have the locking mechanism activated and may exhibit the following symptoms:
Locking pawl (2) loose
Locking pawl (2) engaged into the seat frame
sidemember (1)
Height adjuster only works on outboard side
Broken or missing shear pin (3)
If any one or more of these symptoms exist
replace the height adjuster assembly. Do not
attempt any repairs. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury or death.
FRONT TILT MOTOR

1. Position motor (1) on seat adjuster (2).
LX
LX
2. Install the fasteners (1) holding the motor to the
seat adjuster (2). Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (44
in. lbs.).
3. Connect the motor electrical connector.

4. Install the seat cushion (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER - INSTALLATION).
5. Clip the wire harness to cushion pan.
6. Install the seat assembly (Refer to 23 - BODY/
8. Verify normal operation of the power seat
assembly.
8N - 195
8N - 196
HEIGHT ADJUST MOTOR

1. Ensure the seat adjuster (2) is in the full up position by pulling upward on the upper adjuster
assembly.
2. Position motor (3) on seat adjuster (2).
3. Install the motor shaft screw and washer and
tighten until snug. Do not torque screw at this
time.
4. Install the screws (1) holding the motor (3) to the

seat adjuster (2). It may be necessary to twist
the motor slightly to align the fastener holes.
5. Starting with the bottom screw, tighten the motor
screws (1) to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.).
6. Tighten the motor shaft screw and washer to 6.5
Nm (57.5 in. lbs.).
7. Connect the motor electrical connector.

8. Install the seat cushion (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT CUSHION COVER - INSTALLATION).
9. Clip the wire harness to cushion pan.
10. Install the seat assembly (Refer to 23 - BODY/
12. Verify normal operation of the power seat
assembly.
LX
LX
POWER SEAT RECLINER

REMOVAL
NOTE: The recliner motor is serviced as part of
the seat back frame. Do not attempt to transfer the
motor as the service part will come equipped with
a new motor installed.
1. Remove the seat back frame assembly (Refer to
23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT BACK CUSHION/COVER
- REMOVAL).
2. Remove any parts that will need to be installed on
new seat back frame assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Install parts from old seat back assembly as necessary.
2. Install the seat back (1) (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT
BACK
CUSHION/COVER
INSTALLATION).
8N - 197
8N - 198
LX
SWITCH-SEAT
DESCRIPTION
Both the driver and passenger power seats can be adjusted in eight different ways using the power seat switch. The
power seat switch is located on the lower outboard side of the seat cushion on the seat cushion side shield on all
models.
The individual switches in the power seat switch assembly cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or faulty,
the entire power seat switch must be replaced.
OPERATION
When a power seat switch is actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to
the power seat adjuster or recliner adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat or recliner
through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is
reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are
reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction.
On vehicles equipped with memory system, a resistance signal is sent to the Memory Seat Module (MSM) via the
Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, when the driver memory seat switch control knob is actuated. The MSM
is responsible for the 12v battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster motor. The adjuster motor operates to move the power seat adjuster mechanism through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is
released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached.
No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The
power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However,
consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker may result in motor damage.

POWER SEAT SWITCH
DRIVER WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/SEAT
SWITCH - REMOVAL).
3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the
power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER
SEAT SWITCH WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the
faulty power seat switch. If switch tests OK (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/POWER
SEAT ADJUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY
LX
SWITCH POSITION
OFF
CONTINUITY BETWEEN
7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
RECLINER UP
6-3, 7-1, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
RECLINER DOWN
6-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
HORIZONTAL FORWARD
6-8, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
HORIZONTAL REARWARD
6-4, 7-1, 7-3, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
FRONT TILT DOWN
6-5, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
FRONT TILT UP
6-9, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-10, 7-11
REAR TILT DOWN
6-10, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-11
REAR TILT UP
6-11, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10
PASSENGER SEAT
SWITCH - REMOVAL).
3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the
power seat switch. Refer to PASSENGER POWER
SEAT SWITCH CONTINUITY table. If not OK,
replace the faulty power seat switch. If switch tests
OK (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER SEATS/
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND
TESTING).
PASSENGER POWER SEAT SWITCH CONTINUITY

SWITCH POSITION
CONTINUITY BETWEEN
OFF
7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
RECLINER UP
6-3, 7-1, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
RECLINER DOWN
6-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
HORIZONTAL FORWARD
6-8, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
HORIZONTAL REARWARD
6-4, 7-1, 7-3, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
FRONT TILT DOWN
6-5, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11
FRONT TILT UP
6-9, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-10, 7-11
REAR TILT DOWN
6-10, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-11
REAR TILT UP
6-11, 7-1, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10
8N - 199
8N - 200
LX
DRIVER WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM

SWITCH - REMOVAL).
3. Use an ohmmeter to test the resistance of the
power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER
SEAT SWITCH WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM
CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the faulty
power seat switch. If switch tests OK (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/POWER
SEATS/POWER
SEAT
ADJUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY

SWITCH POSITION
CONTINUITY BETWEEN
RESISTANCE VALUE
OFF
10-4
OPEN
OFF
10-11
OPEN
OFF
1-4
47 OHMS
OFF
1-11
47 OHMS
REAR TILT UP
10-11
169 OHMS
REAR TILT DOWN
10-11
76 OHMS
HORIZONTAL FORWARD
10-11
43 OHMS
HORIZONTAL REARWARD
10-11
10 OHMS
RECLINER UP
10-4
43 OHMS
RECLINER DOWN
10-4
10 OHMS
FRONT TILT UP
10-4
169 OHMS
FRONT TILT DOWN
10-4
76 OHMS
ALL RESISTANCE VALUES ARE FIVE PERCENT
REMOVAL
2. Remove the seat cushion side panel from the seat and disconnect the electrical harness connector.
3. Using a small flat bladed tool, gently release the four mounting tabs that secure the power seat switch and separate switch from trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the power seat switch on the seat cushion side panel. Gently apply pressure to the switch until the four
mounting tabs that secure the switch snap into place.
2. Connect the power seat switch electrical connector.
3. Install the seat cushion side panel on the seat.
5. Verify normal operation of the power seat assembly.
POWER TOP - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSIS
LX
8N - 201

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

B1841SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
B1844SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
B1847SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
B1849SUNROOF MOTOR CONTROL
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE (STALLED) . . . . . . 212
B2227SUNROOF ECU INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . 213

CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
U0019CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
8N - 202

LX
LX
B1841SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8N - 203
8N - 204
LX
Theory of Operation
The Sunroof Motor/Module supplies a 12 volt supply circuit to the sunroof switch. When the switch is closed to any
of the 3 sense circuits (open, close or vent), it sends that command back to the module.
When Monitored:
Whenever the Sunroof module is awake.
Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that the open switch has been applied for over 15 seconds or there is
a short to voltage on the Sunroof Open Switch Sense circuit, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
SUNROOF SWITCH SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Press and release the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1841SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Check the switch for any binding conditions and using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
2.

Disconnect the Sunroof Switch connector.
Does the scan tool display B1841SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Sunroof Switch.

LX
3.
8N - 205
(Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
NOTE: To further diagnose the sunroof, it is necessary to lower or

remove the headliner.
Lower the headliner to gain access to the Sunroof Motor/Module connector.
Disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module connector.
NOTE: Ensure the A-Pillar connector is connected before proceeding.
Measure the voltage between the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense circuit and Ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(Q3) SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Disconnect the A-Pillar connector.
Measure the resistance between the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense
circuit and the (Q6) Sunroof Switch Supply circuit in the Sunroof Motor/
Module connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q3) Sunroof Open Switch Sense circuit for a
short to the (Q6) Sunroof Switch Supply circuit.
No
>> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module.

Perform the Sunroof Position Calibration, (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION). Perform
the Excessive Force Limitation Calibration, (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION CALIBRATION).
8N - 206
B1844SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8N - 207
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that the close switch has been applied for over 15 seconds or there is
a short to voltage on the Sunroof Close Switch Sense circuit, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1844SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Does the scan tool display B1844SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

8N - 208
3.
LX
(Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense circuit and Ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(Q5) SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense
Module connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q5) Sunroof Close Switch Sense circuit for a
No

LX
B1847SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8N - 209
8N - 210
LX
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that the vent switch has been applied for over 15 seconds or there is
a short to voltage on the Sunroof Vent Switch Sense circuit, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1847SUNROOF VENT SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Does the scan tool display B1847SUNROOF VENT SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
8N - 211
(Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense circuit and Ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(Q4) SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q6) SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense
Module connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q4) Sunroof Vent Switch Sense circuit for a
No

8N - 212
LX
B1849SUNROOF MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE (STALLED)

When Monitored:
Whenever the Sunroof motor/module is in motion.
Set Condition:
Whenever the sunroof motor/module is attempting to move the sunroof in response to the input switches (or in
response to an obstacle), and it doesnt appear to be responding correctly. This code is usually set when there
is some type of binding in the sunroof mechanism.
Possible Causes
MECHANICAL BINDING, STICKING OR CABLES OUT OF CALIBRATION
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1849SUNROOF MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE (STALLED)?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Check for any binding or sticking conditions.
2.
SUNROOF MOTOR
NOTE: To further diagnose the sunroof, it is necessary to lower or remove the headliner.
NOTE: Any time the Sunroof Motor is removed, it is necessary to perform the Position Calibration when the
motor is re-installed.
Lower the headliner to gain access to the Sunroof Motor/Module.
Remove the Sunroof Motor/Module from the sunroof.
While holding the motor firmly in your hand, have an assistant press the sunroof switch Open and after the motor
stops press Close (NOT VENT) several times and observe the motor operation.
Did the motor operate smoothly and powerfull?
Yes
>> Repair or replace the sunroof mechanism as necessary in accordance with Service Information.Perform
BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
No
>> Replace the Sunroof Motor Module in accordance with service information.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - INSTALLATION) Perform BODY VERIFICATION
TEST - VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1).
LX
8N - 213
B2227SUNROOF ECU INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Whenever the module has determined that there is a motor or electronic malfunction, this code will set.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Sunroof Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B2227SUNROOF ECU INTERNAL?
Yes

Perform the Sunroof Position Calibration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION). Perform the Excessive Force Limitation
Calibration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION CALIBRATION).
No
>> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Operate the Sunroof several
times and recheck for DTCs. If the code reappears now or later, replace the Sunroof Motor/Module.

test procedure.

test procedure.
8N - 214
U0019CAN B BUS
LX
LX
8N - 215
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open, shorted to voltage or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
With the scan tool, read

Cycle the ignition switch
cycle.
Turn the ignition off and
With the scan tool, read
the active DTCs.

from off to on at least five times, leaving the ignition on for a minimum of 90 seconds per
wait 30 seconds.
the active DTCs.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8N - 216
3.

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Sunroof Motor/Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Sunroof Motor/Module connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with the

No

LX
LX
8N - 217

When Monitored:
At all times.
Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input below 9.5 volts (motor operating or not). After this code is set, it
becomes stored when the voltage exceeds 9.6 volts.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
(X13) FUSED B(+) OR (Z909) GROUND CIRCUIT HAS HIGH RESISTANCE
POWER TOP MOTOR/MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK ENGINE DTCs
NOTE: Ensure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.

With the scan tool, read ENGINE DTCs
Are there any ENGINE BATTERY OR CHARGING SYSTEM DTCs present?
No
>> Go to 2
Yes
>> Refer to symptom list for problems related to ENGINE.
2.

Start the engine and run for two minutes.
Does the scan tool display BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW in the Sunroof module only?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
8N - 218
3.
LX
(X13) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT RESISTED
Lower the headliner and disconnect the Sunroof Motor/Module connector.

Test for a resisted (X13) Fused B(+) circuit by connecting a 12-volt test
light between the (X13) Fused B(+) circuit and the (Z909) Ground circuit
in the Sunroof Motor/Module connector. The test light must illuminate
brightly. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the
battery.
Yes
>> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with Service Information. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/
MOTOR - REMOVAL)
No
>> Test the (X13) Fused B(+) and the (Z909) Ground circuits to
determine which one has the high resistance. Repair the
(X13) Fused B(+) circuit or the (Z909) Ground circuit for
high resistance.
LX
8N - 219

When Monitored:
At all times.
Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input above 16 volts. This code will become stored when the voltage
drops below 15.9 volts.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
SUNROOF MOTOR/ MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK ENGINE DTCs

Are there any ENGINE DTCs present?
No
>> Go to 2
Yes
2.

Does the scan tool display BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH in this module only?
Yes
>> Replace the Sunroof Motor/Module in accordance with service information. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER TOP/MOTOR - REMOVAL)
No
8N - 220
POWER TOP - SUNROOF SERVICE INFO
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
POWER TOP - SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
MOTOR/MODULE-SUNROOF
MOTOR/MODULE - SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
STANDARD PROCEDURE
SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . 223
EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL)

CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
SWITCH - SUNROOF
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
SWITCH - POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
LX
8N - 221

DESCRIPTION
The power sunroof system allows the sunroof to be opened, closed or placed in the vent position electrically by
actuating a switch in the overhead console. The sunroof system receives battery feed through a fuse in the Power
Distribution Center (PDC). The sunroof will operate normally with the key in any position while the Accessory Delay
system is active.
The sunroof glass panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation and slides rearward under the roof when open. The
panel seals flush with the roof in the closed position to eliminate wind noise. The sunroof includes a manual-sliding
sunshade to cover the deep-tinted glass panel.
8N - 222
LX
In addition to the standard power sunroof operation, this vehicle offers several additional features. There is an
express (one-touch) opening and closing feature as well as Excessive Force Limitation (EFL). The EFL function
detects obstacles trapped between the glass and the vehicle roof during a closing motion. Upon sensing an obstacle
the EFL function will reverse direction of the glass to allow removal of the obstacle.
The
main components of the power sunroof system are:

The motor/module assembly
The power sunroof glass and frame assembly
The power sunroof switch
The manual-sliding sunshade
OPERATION
This vehicle has a vent, tilt and slide power sunroof system with express (one-touch) open and closing feature. The
sunroof system receives constant battery feed through a fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The sunroof
will operate normally with the key in any position while the Accessory Delay system is active. If the sunroof is moving when the key is turned to the START position (crank engine), all motions stop until the key is released, then the
previously requested sunroof motion will resume. The sunroof will also complete a requested motion if the Accessory Delay system goes inactive while the motion is in progress.
A combination push-button and rocker switch module mounted in the overhead console controls sunroof operation.
The sunroof switch is a rocker design with a push button in the center of the two halves of the rocker. Pressing the
rocker towards the front of the car commands the sunroof closed. Pressing the rocker towards the rear of the car
commands the sunroof open. Pressing the center push button commands the sunroof up into the vent position
(Rear of sunroof glass raises above the vehicle roof with glass still covering the sunroof opening). All switch commands operate with the glass starting in any position. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/SWITCH - OPERATION) for additional information.
An electronic control system, integral to the motor/module assembly, provides the express open and close functions.
Pressing the 9open9 or 9close9 end of the rocker switch moves the sunroof glass panel to the full open or full closed
position, respectively. During express closing, anytime an obstacle is detected in the way of the glass, the motor will
stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching an occupants finger, ice in the track, etc. This function is called Excessive
Force Limitation (EFL). There are two methods of overriding the EFL function.
1. When three EFL events occur without the glass being allowed to fully close, the next close attempt will only
move while the close switch is continuously actuated. This allows the sunroof to be forced closed if multiple close
attempts fail.
2. If the sunroof close switch is continuously actuated during an EFL event, through the reversal, and during a two
second wait time, then continuing to hold the close switch will cause the roof to move towards close with the EFL
protection disabled. This allows the sunroof to be forced closed if it is known that a reversal will occur.
While in EFL override, the closing motion will cease if the sunroof switch is released at any time.
The motor/module is programmed to learn the speed required to drive the panel based on position and recalibrates
itself as needed. If the sunroof becomes uncalibrated, it will only respond to the vent switch. If the vent switch is
pressed, the glass will move toward vent; if the switch is released, all motion stops. In the event that the sunroof
system becomes uncalibrated perform the sunroof position calibration procedure, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE -SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION).

POWER TOP - SUNROOF
Any diagnosis of the power sunroof system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic
Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus is
functional, that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the CAN Data Bus,
and that the power sunroof motor is being sent the proper hard wired output by the sunroof switch.
LX
8N - 223
MOTOR/MODULE-SUNROOF
MOTOR/MODULE - SUNROOF
Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus is
functional, that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the CAN Data Bus,
and that the power sunroof motor is being sent the proper hard wired output by the sunroof switch.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION
Press the power sunroof switch (Open, Closed, and Vent). If no movement occurs when either the open switch or
closed switch is pressed, but the system does move when the vent button is pressed and held, the system is not
calibrated. Perform the following procedure to position calibrate the power sunroof system.
1. Turn the ignition to the RUN position.
2. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and hold until the sunroof glass panel has moved to the full
vent position and the motor movement has stopped for at least 1 second.
3. Press the close switch on the power sunroof switch and hold for a moment (at least 100ms) and release. The
sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full close position. If the sunroof glass panel does not return to
the full close position, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for full system diagnosis.
4. Verify proper system operation.
EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRATION

NOTE: Verify the battery is in good condition prior to performing this procedure. Do not leave the vehicle on
a battery charger while performing this procedure. If the voltage at the sunroof motor/module drops below
11 volts or exceeds 15 volts at anytime while this procedure is being performed, the Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) function will not be properly calibrated.
1. Turn the ignition to the RUN position.
2. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and hold until the sunroof glass panel has moved to the full
vent position and the motor movement has stopped for at least 1 second.
3. Press the close position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue
travel to the full closed position. This will be considered the first sunroof closed position in a series of four
sunroof closes.
4. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should move to the full
vent position. After the sunroof motor/module has stopped, press the close position on the power sunroof switch
and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full closed position. This will be considered
the second sunroof closed position in a series of four sunroof closes.
5. Continue to move the sunroof glass to the vent then closed positions two more times so that the sunroof glass
has moved to the closed position a total of four times starting with the first sunroof close in step 3.
6. Press the open position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel
to the full open position.
7. Press the close position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue
travel to the full closed position. This will be considered the first sunroof closed position in a series of five
sunroof closes.
8N - 224
LX
8. Press the open position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should move to the
full open position. After the sunroof motor/module has stopped, press the close position on the power sunroof
switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full closed position. Continue to move
the sunroof glass to the open then closed position four more times so that the sunroof glass has
moved to the closed position a total of five times starting with the first sunroof close in step 7.
Verify proper EFL calibration by placing a standard pencil at the front of the sunroof and then moving the
sunroof to the full closed position. The sunroof should reverse direction upon contact without damage to
the pencil.
REMOVAL
WARNING: The Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) feature must be calibrated any time a sunroof motor/module is replaced with a new component. Failure to perform this procedure could result in vehicle damage
and/or personal injury. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRATION) for the appropriate procedure.
2. Remove the vehicle headliner, (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/HEADLINER - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the power sunroof motor/module electrical
connector (2).
4. Remove the retaining screws (3) and remove the
motor/module (1) from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
WARNING: The Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) feature must be calibrated any time a sunroof motor/module is replaced with a new component. Failure to perform this procedure could result in vehicle damage
and/or personal injury. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRATION) for the appropriate procedure.
LX
1. Position the power sunroof motor/module (1) in the
vehicle.
2. Install the motor/module retaining screws (3).
Tighten the screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.).
3. Connect the motor/module electrical connector (2).
4. Connect the battery negative cable and move the
sunroof through one open and close cycle to confirm proper system operation.
5. Install the vehicle headliner, (Refer to 23 - BODY/
INTERIOR/HEADLINER - INSTALLATION).
6. Perform the sunroof position calibration, (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/MOTOR - STANDARD PROCEDURE - SUNROOF POSITION
CALIBRATION).
7. Perform the Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) calibration, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER TOP/
MOTOR
STANDARD
PROCEDURE
EXCESSIVE FORCE LIMITATION (EFL) CALIBRATION).
8. Verify proper operation of the power sunroof system.
8N - 225
8N - 226
LX
SWITCH - SUNROOF
DESCRIPTION
The power sunroof switch (3) is a combination pushbutton and rocker switch module mounted in the overhead console. The sunroof switch is a direct contact
unit that is directly wired to the sunroof motor/module
assembly. The sunroof switch performs the following
functions:
Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed)
Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed)
Power sunroof vent (switch center button
pushed)
The power sunroof switch is part of the overhead
console assembly and cannot be replaced separately. If the switch is damaged or inoperative the
overhead console must be replaced, (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE - REMOVAL).
OPERATION
The power sunroof switch is hard wired to the sunroof motor/module assembly. The switch receives battery current
from the motor/module when the ignition switch is in the RUN and ACCESSORY positions or the vehicle Accessory
Delay System is active. When one of the switch positions is pressed it sends battery current back to the motor/
module, signaling it to move the power sunroof to the appropriate position. The motor/module will perform one of the
following functions:
Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed)
Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed)
Power sunroof vent (switch center button pushed)

SWITCH - POWER SUNROOF
Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus
circuit is functional, that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the CAN
Data Bus, and that the power sunroof motor/module assembly is being sent the proper hard wired output by the
sunroof switch.
information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. If completing the
LX
8N - 227
appropriate diagnostic information results in the sunroof switch being inoperative, perform the following test prior to
switch replacement.
2. Remove the overhead console, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the power sunroof switch wire harness
connector.
4. Using an ohmmeter, test the continuity of the
power sunroof switch in each switch position. Refer
to the POWER SUNROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY
TABLE . If OK, inspect the wiring harness and connectors for damage. Use a scan tool and the
proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to complete diagnosis of the power sunroof system. If not
OK, replace the overhead console.
POWER SUNROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY TABLE

SWITCH POSITION
OFF
CONTINUITY BETWEEN PINS

NO CONTINUITY
SUNROOF OPEN
B&D
SUNROOF CLOSED
B&C
SUNROOF VENT
B&A
8N - 228
POWER WINDOWS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
POWER WINDOWS - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
B1852DRIVER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT
STUCK DDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
B1854DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW DDM. . . . . . . . . . . 233
B1855DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH DDM . . . . . . . . . . 236
B1858DRIVER WINDOW POSITION
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW DDM . . . . 239
B1859DRIVER WINDOW POSITION
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH DDM. . . . 242
B185A-DRIVER WINDOW POSITION
SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE - DDM . 244
B185D-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH
CIRCUIT STUCK - PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
B185FPASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW PDM. . . . . . . . . . . 253
B1860PASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH PDM . . . . . . . . . . 256
B1863PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW PDM . . . . 259
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH PDM. . . . 262
SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE - PDM . 264
B1868DRIVER PASSENGER WINDOW
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK DDM . . . . . . . . . . 270
DDM/PDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
DDM/PDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
B2218, B2219DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR
MODULE INTERNAL DDM/PDM . . . . . . . . . . 275
U0019CAN B BUS-DDM/PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
B16A4PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH
BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT LOW PDM . . . . . 280
B16A5PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH
BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT HIGH PDM . . . . . 283

CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
HEADLAMP LEVELING TRANSLATOR . . . . . . 286
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
SCCM - CAN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
*FRONT WINDOW MOVES ABOUT 3
INCHES AND QUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
LX

8N - 229
8N - 230
B1852DRIVER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK DDM
LX
LX
8N - 231
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Driver Window Driver Express Switch Mux circuit is below 3.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(Q221) DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q221) DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Z421) DRIVER
EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORT TO GROUND
DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM)
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Driver Window Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1852DRIVER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
DRIVER WINDOW SWITCH SHORTED

Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch C2 connector.
Does the scan tool display B1852DRIVER WINDOW SWITCH
CIRCUIT STUCK?
No

Yes
>> Go To 3
8N - 232
3.
(Q221) DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q221) Driver Window
Driver Express Switch Mux circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q221) Driver Window Driver Express Switch

Mux circuit for a short to ground.
Yes
>> Go To 4
4.
(Q221) DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Z421) DRIVER
Measure the resistance between the (Q221) Driver Window Driver

Express Switch Mux circuit and the (Z421) Driver Express Switch
Return circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q221) Driver Window Driver Express Switch

Mux circuit for a short to the (Z421) Driver Express Switch
Return circuit.
No

LX
LX
B1854DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW DDM
8N - 233
8N - 234
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When both Driver Window Driver circuits (Up and Down) are grounded during a window movement command,
this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q311) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q311) DRIVER WINDOW
EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT
WINDOW MOTOR SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Try to operate the Driver Window up and down several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1854DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Driver Window Motor connector.
Operate the driver window switch up and down several times.
Does the scan tool display B1854DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
No
>> Replace the Window Motor.

Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8N - 235
(Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q321) Driver Window Express Down Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q321) Driver Window Express Down Driver circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(Q311) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q311) Driver Window
Express Up Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q311) Driver Window Express Up Driver circuit

No
>> Go TO 5
5.
(Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q311) DRIVER WINDOW
EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (Q321) Driver Window Express

Down Driver circuit and the (Q311) Driver Window Express Up Driver
circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q321) Driver Window xpress Down Driver circuit for a short to the (Q311) Driver Window Express Up
Driver circuit.
No

8N - 236
B1855DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH DDM
LX
LX
8N - 237
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When both Driver Window Driver circuits (Up and Down) are supplied with voltage during a window movement
command, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(Q311) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1855DRIVER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(Q321) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q321) Driver Window Express Down
Driver circuit and Ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q321) Driver Window Express Down Driver circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
8N - 238
3.
(Q311) DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between the (Q311) Driver Window Express Up

Driver circuit and Ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q311) Driver Window Express Up Driver circuit

No

LX
LX
B1858DRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW DDM
8N - 239
8N - 240
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Driver Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit falls below 1.4 volts for over 315 ms., this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q305) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Driver Window up and down several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1858DRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Operate the driver window switch up and down several times.
Does the scan tool display B1858DRIVER WINDOW POSITION
SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW?
No

Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(Q305) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q305) Driver Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q305) Driver Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit
No

8N - 241
8N - 242
B1859DRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH DDM
LX
LX
8N - 243
When Monitored:
Whenever the power is turned off to the module and it goes from being awake to sleep mode.
Set Condition:
When the Driver Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit is above 0.96 volts for over 15 ms. and the power to the
module has been turned off, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q305) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Wait
With
the ignition on.

the scan tool, record and erase DTCs
30 seconds.
the scan tool, read the active DTCs.
Does the scan tool display B1859DRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(Q305) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q305) Driver Window Hall Sensor
Supply circuit and Ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q305) Driver Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit
No

8N - 244
B185A-DRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE - DDM
LX
LX
8N - 245
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When one or both of the window motor hall sensors does not generate a signal during a window movement,
this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q303) DRIVER WINDOW
HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z405) DRIVER WINDOW
HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
(Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z405) DRIVER WINDOW
HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
WINDOW MOTOR MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Test
1.

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B185ADRIVER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 246
2.
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the Driver Window Hall
Sensor A Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the Driver Window Hall Sensor A signal circuit for a
short to ground.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
(Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B Signal circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
LX
LX
4.
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (Q301) Driver Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2 connector.
No
>> Repair the (Q301) Driver Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit for an open.
Yes
>> Go To 5
5.
(Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B

Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2 connector.
No
>> Repair the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B Signal circuit for an open.
Yes
>> Go TO 6
8N - 247
8N - 248
6.
(Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z405) DRIVER
WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN
Measure the resistance between the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor
B Signal circuit and the (Z405) Driver Window Hall Senspr Return circuit.
No
>> Repair the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B Signal circuit for a short to the Driver Window Hall Sensor Return circuit.
Yes
>> Go TO 7
7.
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z405) DRIVER
A Signal circuit and the (Z405) Driver Window Hall Senspr Return circuit.
No
>> Repair the (Q301) Driver Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit for a short to the (Z405) Driver Window Hall Sensor
Return circuit.
Yes
>> Go TO 8
LX
LX
8.
8N - 249
(Q301) DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q303) DRIVER WINDOW HALL
SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A Signal circuit and the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q301) Driver Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit for a short to the (Q303) Driver Window Hall Sensor B
Signal circuit.
No

8N - 250
B185D-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK - PDM
LX
LX
8N - 251
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Express Switch Mux circuit is below 3.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(Q336) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q336) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Q936)
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPESS SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT
PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM)
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Passenger Window Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B185D-PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The conditions that caused this code to set are not present at this time. Check for a sticking switch and
using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the wiring and connectors.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
2.

Disconnect the Passenger Window/Door Lock Switch connector.
Does the scan tool display B185DPASSENGER WINDOW
SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK?
No

Yes
>> Go To 3
8N - 252
3.
(Q336) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q336) Passenger
Window Express Switch Mux circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q336) Passenger Window Express Switch Mux

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(Q336) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q936) PASSENGER
Measure the resistance between the (Q336) Passenger Window

Express Switch Mux circuit and the (Q936) Passenger Express Switch
Return circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q336) Passenger Express Switch Mux circuit

for a short to the (Q936) Passenger Window Express
Switch Return circuit.
No
>> Replace the Passenger Door Module.

LX
LX
B185FPASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW PDM
8N - 253
8N - 254
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When both Passenger Window Driver circuits (Up and Down) are grounded during a window movement command, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q312) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q312) PASSENGER
WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.

Try to operate the Passenger Window up and down several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B185FPASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Passenger Window Motor connector.
Operate the passenger window switch up and down several times.
Does the scan tool display B185FPASSENGER WINDOW
MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
No

Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8N - 255
(Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the (Q322) Passenger
Window Express Down Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q322) Passenger Window Express Down

Driver circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(Q312) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Window Express Up Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q312) Passenger Window Express Up Driver

No
>> Go To 5
5.
(Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q312) PASSENGER
WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (Q322) Passsenger Window

Express Down Driver circuit and the (Q312) Passenger Window
Express Up Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q322) Passenger Window xpress Down Driver

circuit for a short to the (Q312) Passenger Window Express
Up Driver circuit.
No

8N - 256
B1860PASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH PDM
LX
LX
8N - 257
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When both Passenger Window Driver circuits (Up and Down) are supplied with voltage during a window movement command, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(Q312) PASSENGR WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (DDM)
Diagnostic Test
1.

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1860PASSENGER WINDOW MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(Q322) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q322) Passenger Window Express
Down Driver circuit and Ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q322) Passenger Window Express Down

Driver circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
8N - 258
3.
(Q312)PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage between the (Q312) Passenger Window Express

Up Driver circuit and Ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q312) Passenger Window Express Up Driver

No

LX
LX
8N - 259
B1863PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW PDM
8N - 260
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit falls below 1.4 volts for over 315 ms., this code will
set.
Possible Causes
(Q306) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Passenger Window up and down several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1863PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Operate the passenger window switch up and down several times.
Does the scan tool display B1863PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY LOW?
No

Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(Q306) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q306) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply

No

8N - 261
8N - 262
B1864PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH PDM
LX
LX
8N - 263
When Monitored:
Whenever the power is turned off to the module and it goes from being awake to sleep mode.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit is above 0.96 volts for over 15 ms. and the power to
the module has been turned off, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q306) P[ASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Passenger Window up and down several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
With the scan tool, read the stored DTCs.
Does the scan tool display B1864PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(Q306) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (Q306) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply circuit and Ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q306) Passenger Window Hall Sensor Supply

No

8N - 264
LX
B1865PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE - PDM
LX
8N - 265

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When one or both of the window motor hall sensors do not generate a signal within 1.25 ms during a window
movement, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Q304) PASSENGER
WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z404) PASSENGER
WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
(Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z404) PASSENGER
WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
WINDOW MOTOR MALFUNCTION
Diagnostic Test
1.

Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1865PASSENGER WINDOW POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
8N - 266
2.
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between Ground and the Passenger Window
Hall Sensor A Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the Passenger Window Hall Sensor A signal circuit

No
>> Go To 3
3.
(Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Window Hall Sensor B Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall Sensor B Signal

No
>> Go To 4
LX
LX
4.
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor

A Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2 connector.
No
>> Repair the (Q302) Passenger Window Hall Sensor A Signal

Yes
>> Go To 5
5.
(Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall Sensor

B Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2 connector.
No

Yes
>> Go To 6
8N - 267
8N - 268
6.
(Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z404) PASSENGER
Measure the resistance between the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall

Sensor B Signal circuit and the (Z404) Passenger Window Hall Sensor
Return circuit in the PDM C2 connector.
No

circuit for a short to the (Z404) Passenger Window Hall
Sensor Return circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 7
7.
(Q302) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z404) PASSENGER

Sensor A Signal circuit and the (Z404) Passenger Window Hall Sensor
Return circuit in the PDM C2 connector.
No

circuit for a short to the (Z404) Passenger Window Hall
Sensor Return circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
8.
8N - 269
(Q304) PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q304) PASSENGER
WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Sensor A Signal circuit and the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall Sensor
B Signal circuit.
Yes

circuit for a short to the (Q304) Passenger Window Hall
Sensor B Signal circuit.
No

8N - 270
B1868DRIVER PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK DDM
LX
LX
8N - 271
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Driver Express Switch Mux circuit is below 3.5 volts for over 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
(Q222) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(Q222) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO THE (Z421) DRIVER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Operate the Driver Passenger Window Switch in all positions several times.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B1868DRIVER PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Driver Window/Door Lock Switch C2 connector.
Does the scan tool display B1868DRIVER PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT STUCK?
No

Yes
>> Go To 3
8N - 272
3.
(Q222) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (Q222) Passenger
Window Driver Express Switch Mux circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q222) Passenger Window Driver Express

Switch Mux circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(Q222) PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Z421) DRIVER
Measure the resistance between the (Q222) Passenger Window Driver

Express Switch Mux circuit and the (Z421) Driver Express Switch
Return circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (Q222) Passenger Window Driver Express

Switch Mux circuit for a short to the (Z421) Driver Express
Switch Return circuit.
No

LX
LX
8N - 273
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW DDM/PDM

When Monitored:
At all times.
Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input below 9.0 volts, this code will set.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK ENGINE DTCs

No
>> Go to 2
Yes
2.

Start the engine and run for 2 minutes.
Does the scan tool display B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW?
Yes

No
8N - 274
LX
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH DDM/PDM

When Monitored:
At all times.
Set Condition:
Anytime the module senses voltage input above 15.9 volts, this code will set.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINE DTC
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK ENGINE DTCs

No
>> Go to 2
Yes
2.

Does the scan tool display B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH?
Yes

No
LX
8N - 275
B2218, B2219DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR MODULE INTERNAL DDM/PDM

When Monitored:
At all times.
Set Condition:
Whenever the module detects an EEPROM failure
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Diagnostic Test
1.
Replace the Door Module
NOTE: Anytime this code is logged, the module must be replaced.

Repair
Replace the appropriate Door Module.
8N - 276
U0019CAN B BUS-DDM/PDM
LX
LX
8N - 277
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
3.
MEMORY SYSTEM EQUIPPED?
IS THIS VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE MEMORY SYSTEM?

No
>> Go To 4
Yes
>> Go To 6
8N - 278
4.

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Door Module C2 connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
5.
Yes
>> Replace the appropriate Door Module in accordance with

No

LX
LX
6.

Yes
>> Go To 7
No
7.
Yes
>> Replace the appropriate Door Module in accordance with

No

8N - 279
8N - 280
B16A4PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT LOW PDM
LX
LX
8N - 281
When Monitored:
Whenever the module is awake, the park lamps are on and the window lock out switch is on.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Express Switch Illumination Driver circuit falls below 3.0 volts for over 25 ms.
and the above conditions are met, this code will set.
Possible Causes
(E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q936)
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN
WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Ensure the passenger window lock out switch is on.
Turn the park lights on.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B16A4PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCHSHORTED

Operate the passenger window lock out switch several times.
Does the scan tool display B16A4PASSENGER WINDOW
SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT LOW?
No
>> Replace the Window/Door Lock Switch.

Yes
>> Go To 3
8N - 282
3.
(E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Turn the park lamps off.
Measure the resistance between Ground and the (E34) Passenger Window Express Switch Illumination Driver circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (E34) Passenger Window Express Switch Illumination Driver circuit for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
LX
(E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO (Q936)
Measure the resistance between the (E34) Passenger Window Express

Switch Illumination Driver circuit and the (Q936) Passenger Window
Express Switch Return circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (E34) Passenger Window Express Switch Illumination Driver circuit for a short to the (Q936) Passenger
Window Express Switch Return circuit.
No

LX
8N - 283
B16A5PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT HIGH PDM
8N - 284
LX
When Monitored:
Whenever the power is turned off to the module and it goes from awake to sleep mode.
Set Condition:
When the Passenger Window Express Switch Illumination Driver circuit is above 2.5 volts for over 15 ms. and
the switch illumination output is turned off.
Possible Causes
(E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Ensure the passenger window lock out switch is off.
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the scan tool display B16A5PASSENGER WINDOW SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCHSHORTED

Operate the passenger window lock out switch several times.
Does the scan tool display B16A5PASSENGER WINDOW
SWITCH BACKLIGHTING CIRCUIT HIGH?
No
>> Replace the Window/Door Lock Switch.

Yes
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8N - 285
(E34) PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage between the (E34) Passenger Window Express
Switch Illumination Driver circuit and Ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (E34) Passenger Window Express Switch Illumination Driver circuit for a short to voltage.
No


test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

8N - 286
LX
test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

LX
8N - 287
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
8N - 288
*FRONT WINDOW MOVES ABOUT 3 INCHES AND QUITS
NOTE: The Driver circuits are shown but the Passenger side is similar.
LX
LX
8N - 289

Possible Causes
WINDOW HALL SENSOR A AND SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUITS OPEN
WINDOW MOTOR (HALL SENSOR OPEN)
Diagnostic Test
1.
TEST FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

Does the scan tool display any Power Window related DTCs?
No
>> Go To 2
Yes
>> Refer to symptom list for problems related to POWER WINDOWS.

2.
WINDOW HALL SENSOR A AND SENSOR B SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
NOTE: Both Window Hall Sensor Signal circuits (A and B) must be open or closed for the result of this test
to be valid.
Disconnect the appropriate Window Motor connector.
Measure the resistance of the Window Hall Sensor A Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2
connector.
Measure the resistance of the Window Hall Sensor B Signal circuit between the Motor connector and the Module C2
connector.
Is the resistance below 2.0 ohms on both Signal circuits?
No
>> Repair the Window Hall Sensor Signal circuits for opens.
Yes

8N - 290
POWER WINDOWS - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
POWER WINDOW SWITCH

REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
LX
8N - 291

DESCRIPTION
The power window system allows each of the door windows to be raised and lowered electrically by actuating a
switch on the trim panel of each respective door. A master switch on the driver side front door trim panel allows the
driver to raise or lower each of the passenger door windows and to lock out the individual switches on the passenger doors from operation. The power window system receives battery feed through a circuit breaker in the Junction Block (JB), only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The power window system includes the power window switches on each door trim panel, circuit breaker, door modules and the power window motors inside each door.
The window motors are replaced with the window regulator assembly. If the window motors require replacement, the
window regulator must be replaced.
OPERATION
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
The power windows are controlled by a window/lock switch on the trim panel of each front door. Switches in the
driver door window/lock switch allows the driver to control the passenger windows.
The power window switch for the driver side front door window has a second detent position beyond the normal
Down position that provides an automatic one-touch window down feature.
Some vehicles may be equipped with an express closing feature (front windows only). During an express closing,
anytime an obstacle is detected in the way of the glass, the motor will stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching an
occupants fingers, etc. Modules in the doors are programmed to compare the position of the glass to the amount
of current that is being used to drive up the glass.
The system also includes various features to manage the perceived forces on the glass as it travels up. If the
express closing calibration is lost, the system will self-calibrate itself after the windows are moved up and down two
cycles.
The power window switches control the battery and ground feeds to the power window motors. All of the passenger
door power window switches receive their battery and ground feeds through the circuitry of the window/lock switch.
When the power window lockout switch is in the Lock position, the battery feed for the individual passenger door
power window switches is interrupted.
POWER WINDOW MOTOR

A permanent magnet reversible motor moves the window regulator through an integral gearbox mechanism. A positive and negative battery connection to the two motor terminals will cause the motor to rotate in one direction.
Reversing the current through these same two connections will cause the motor to rotate in the opposite direction.
In addition, each power window motor is equipped with an integral self-resetting circuit breaker to protect the motor
from overloads.

POWER WINDOWS
Any diagnosis of the Power Windows system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the
use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information.
8N - 292
POWER WINDOW SWITCH

REMOVAL
2. Remove rear door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
DOORS - REAR/TRIM PANEL - REMOVAL).
3. Remove switch (1) from door trim panel (2).
INSTALLATION
1. Install switch (1) to rear door trim panel (2).
2. Install rear door trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
DOORS - REAR/TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
LX
RESTRAINTS
LX
8O - 1
RESTRAINTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
RESTRAINTS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . 1
RESTRAINTS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . 363
RESTRAINTS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

B1203-SRS WARNING INDICATOR
CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
B1204-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
B1B00-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
B1B08-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
B1B09-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
B1B0A-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
B1B0B-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1
B1B0C-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2

CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
B1B0D-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
B1B0E-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
B1B0F-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2
B1B18-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
B1B19-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
B1B1A-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
B1B1B-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1
B1B20-RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . 107
B1B28-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT
PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . 110
B1B29-1ST ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT
PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 113
B1B2A-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT
PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . 117
B1B2B-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT
PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
B1B2C-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT
PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . 125
B1B2D-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT
PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8O - 2
B1B2E-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT

PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . 133
B1B2F-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT
PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
B1B70-UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE
ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL . . . . . . 141
B1B71-UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE
ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL . . . . . . 146
B1B72-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE
ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL . . . . 151
B1B73-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE
B1B75-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE
B1B76-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE
B1B78-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
B1B7A-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
B1B7D-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
B1B7E-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
B1B7F-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR PERFORMANCE. . 201
SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION
SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . 231
B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION
B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION
LX
B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION
SENSOR CONFIGURATION MISMATCH . . . . 248
B1BA5-AIRBAG SQUIB CONFIGURATION
MISMATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
B1BA6-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION
UNDETERMINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION
SYSTEM VERIFICATION REQUIRED . . . . . . . 253
B1BA8-OCM SYSTEM OUT OF
CALIBRATION/NOT CALIBRATED . . . . . . . . . . 256
B1BB8-SRS WARNING INDICATOR STATUS
MISMATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
B1BBA-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
B1BBB-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR INPUTS SHORTED TOGETHER. . . 262
B1BBC-OCS NEGATIVE SYSTEM WEIGHT . . 265
B1BBD-OCM CURRENT CONFIGURATION
TABLE UNPROGRAMMED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
B1BC7-DEPLOYMENT DATA RECORD FULL . 269
B1BC8-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSORS PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
B212D-IGNITION RUN ONLY INPUT
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
B2201-CALIBRATION MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . 297
B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH . . 298
B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH . . 299
B2207-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
CONTROLLER INTERNAL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
B220A-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
B220B-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
CONTROLLER FIRING STORED ENERGY . . 306
B220C-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
CONTROLLER ACCELEROMETER 1
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
B220D-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
CONTROLLER ACCELEROMETER 2
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
B220F-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
CONTROLLER CONTROL DRIVER 1 . . . . . . . 309
CONTROLLER CONTROL DRIVER 2 . . . . . . . 310
B2212-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION
MODULE INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
B223B-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION
MISMATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
LX
B223D-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION
MODULE DTC PRESENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
U0019-CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE . . . . 318
U0022-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . 321
U0023-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . 321
U0026-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . 321
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
(ORC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
U0170-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UPFRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION
SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
U0171-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UPFRONT RIGHT SATELLITE
ACCELERATION SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
U0172-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT
SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION
SENSOR 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
U0173-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT
SENSOR 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
8O - 3
U0175-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT

SENSOR 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
U0176-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT
SENSOR 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
*DIAGNOSIS AND CHECKOUT
PROCEDURE FOR SEAT WEIGHT
SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
*OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 . . . . . . . . . 358
*ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 . . . . . . . . . 360
U1414-IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING ECU
CONFIGURATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
U1415-IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING VEHICLE
CONFIGURATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
8O - 4

LX
LX
8O - 5
B1203-SRS WARNING INDICATOR CIRCUIT/PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the CAN B bus for a message from the
Instrument Cluster containing the airbag warning indicator status. The ORC requests the warning lamp status
from the Instrument Cluster once every second.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set immediately if the indicator status is LOW or HIGH.
Possible Causes
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ACTIVE DTCs
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

NOTE: When reconnecting Airbag system components, the ignition must be turned off and the battery must
be disconnected.
With the scan tool, read ORC DTCs.
Select DTC type.
Active
Go To 2
Stored
Go To 4
2.
CHECK FOR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DTCs

Does the scan tool display any Instrument Cluster DTCs?
Yes
>> Refer to the symptom list for problems related to the Instrument Cluster.
Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
REPLACE THE ORC
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition off, disconnect the battery and wait two minutes before proceeding.
WARNING: If the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) is dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to
take the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.
View Repair
Repair
Replace the ORC in accordance with the service information.
8O - 6
4.
LX
With the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs from all Airbag modules.
If any ACTIVE codes are present they must be resolved before diagnosing any stored codes.
Look for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.
The following additional checks may assist you in identifying a possible intermittent problem.
Reconnect any disconnected components and harness connector.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition on, then reconnect the battery.
With the scan tool, monitor active codes as you work through the following steps.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, maintain a safe distance from all airbags while performing the
following steps.
Wiggle the wiring harness and connectors of the related airbag circuit or component.
If codes are related to the Driver Airbag circuits, rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop.
If only stored codes return, continue the test until the problem area has been isolated.
In the previous steps you have attempted to recreate the conditions responsible for setting the active DTC in question.
Does the scan tool display any ACTIVE DTCs?
Yes
>> Select the appropriate diagnostic procedure from the Table of Contents in this section.
No
>> No problem found at this time. Erase all codes before returning vehicle to customer.
LX
B1204-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT LOW
8O - 7
8O - 8
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) cannot detect voltage on the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator
Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT RUN-START CIRCUIT OPEN
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR LAMP (SWITCH BANK)
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1204-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE

NOTE: The scan tool, SRS Airbag Load Tool MRL 8443, and DVOM are required to perform the following
test.
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1204-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.
CHECK THE PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT VOLTAGE AT THE ORC CONNECTOR.
WARNING: If the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) is dropped

at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal
injury or death.
Disconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connector.
Connect the Load Tool ORC Adaptor (8443-24) to the ORC C2 connector.
Measure the voltage of the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver
circuit between the ORC Adaptor cavity 9 and ground.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8O - 9
CHECK (F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT RUN-START CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Disconnect the Switch Bank Connector

Measure the voltage of the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output RunStart circuit at the Switch Bank connector cavity 5.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output Run-Start circuit open or low voltage condition. Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
4.
CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver
circuit between the ORC Adaptor cavity 9 and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit

Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
No

information. Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER
1.
5.
REPLACE THE ORC
Repair
Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8O - 10
6.
LX
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH
8O - 11
8O - 12
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) senses a low resistance to battery voltage on the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH
OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH IS ACTIVE

test.
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 5
2.
CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (F23) FUSED
IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT

injury or death.
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the
proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and
Disconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connectors.
Disconnect the OCM C1 connector.
Disconnect the Switch Bank connector.
Connect the appropriate Load Tool ORC Adaptor (8443-24) to the ORC
connectors.
LX
8O - 13
Measure the resistance between the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit and the (F23) Fused Ignition
Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit in the Switch Bank connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit for a short to the (F23) Fused Ignition
Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Remove the Airbag Run-Start Fuse from the PDC.
circuit in the Switch Bank connector cavity 4.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH WITH SWITCH BANK
CONNECTOR DISCONNECTED
Reconnect the Airbag Run-Start Fuse from the PDC.
Remove the Load Tool ORC Adaptor from the ORC connectors.
Reconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connectors.
Reconnect the OCM C1 connector.
With the scan tool, erase ORC DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1205-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>>
No
>> Replace the Switch Bank in accordance with the Service Information.
8O - 14
5.
LX
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
B1206-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT OPEN
8O - 15
8O - 16
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) cannot detect voltage on the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator
Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
SWITCH BANK CONNECTOR DISCONNECTED
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1206 PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE

test.
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1206-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.
VERIFY THAT SWITCH BANK CONNECTOR IS CONNECTED

Gain access to the Switch Bank connector.
Is the Switch Bank connected to the dash harness?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Connect the Switch Bank to the dash harness.

3.
CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT OPERATION
Disconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connector.
Connect the appropriate Load Tool ORC Adaptor (8443-24) to the ORC connector.
LX
8O - 17
Measure the voltage of the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit between the ORC Adaptor cavity 9 and
the Switch Bank connector cavity 4.
Yes
>>
take the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.Replace
the ORC in accordance with the service information.
No
4.
>> Go To 4
CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

injury or death.
Measure the resistance of the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver
circuit between the ORC Adaptor cavity 9 and the Switch Bank connector cavity 4.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

for an open.
5.
CHECK (F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
Measure the voltage of the (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit at the Switch Bank connector
cavity 5.
Yes
>> Replace the Switch Bank in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Repair the open (F23) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit.
8O - 18
6.
LX
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
8O - 19
8O - 20
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects over current on the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator
Driver circuit.
Possible Causes
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (F23) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH
OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
(G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF INDICATOR LAMP (SWITCH BAN)
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER IS ACTIVE

test.
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.
CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (F23) FUSED
IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT

injury or death.
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the
proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and
Disconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connectors.
Disconnect the Switch Bank connector.
Connect the appropriate Load Tool ORC Adaptor (8443-24) to the ORC
connectors.
LX
8O - 21
Measure the resistance between the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit and the (F23) Fused Ignition
Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit in the Switch Bank connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G104) Passenger Airbag Indicator Driver circuit for a short to the (F23) Fused Ignition
Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK (G104) PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

circuit.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
Remove the Load Tool ORC Adaptor from the ORC connectors.
Reconnect the ORC C1 and C2 connectors.
Reconnect the OCM C1 connector.
Does the scan tool display active: B1207-PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR CIRCUIT SHORTED
TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Replace the Switch Bank in accordance with the Service Information.
8O - 22
5.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
View Repair
Repair
6.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
B1B00-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW
8O - 23
8O - 24
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Driver Squib 1
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Driver Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OR (R45) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.
DETERMINE ACTIVE OR STORED DTC

test.
NOTE: When reconnecting airbag system components the Ignition must be turned off and the Battery must
be disconnected.
Select Active or Stored DTC.
Is the DTC active or stored?
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.
CHECK FOR SHORTED SQUIB CIRCUITS IN DRIVER AIRBAG

Disconnect the Driver Airbag Squib connectors.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, do not place an
intact undeployed airbag face down on a hard surface, the airbag
will propel into the air if accidentally deployed.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the Driver Airbag Squib connectors.
With the scan tool, read the active ORC DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1B00 DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Driver Airbag in accordance with the Service

Information.
Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1
LX
3.
8O - 25
CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool Jumper from the Driver Airbag Squib
connectors.
Remove the Steering Control Module from the steering column in accordance with the Service Information.
Disconnect the Steering Control Module connector.
With the Steering Control Module Connector attached to the steering
column, connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the
Steering Control Module connector.
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Replace the Clockspring in accordance with the Service

Information.
4.
CHECK (R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT AND (R45) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A
SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Steering Control
Module connector.
Disconnect the ORC connectors.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool ORC Adaptor to the ORC C2 connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R43) Driver Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
between ground and the Steering Column Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10K ohms for either measurement?
Yes
>> Repair the Driver Squib 1 circuits with a resistance below

10K ohms for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 26
5.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
Replace the ORC in accordance with the Service Information.
6.
STORED ORC DTC
With the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs from all Airbag System Modules.
With the scan tool monitor active codes as you work through the following steps.
If only stored codes return continue the test until the problem area has been isolated.
In the previous steps you have attempted to recreate the conditions responsible for setting active DTC in question.
Are any ACTIVE DTCs present?
Yes
No
LX
B1B01-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
8O - 27
8O - 28
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Driver Squib 1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected voltage on the Driver Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OR (R45) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.

CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

Information.
LX
3.
8O - 29
CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Driver Airbag
Squib connectors.
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

Information.
4.
SHORT TO BATTERY

Module connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R43) Driver Squib 1 Line 2 circuit between
the Steering Control Module connector and ground.
Is there any voltage present for either measurement?
Yes
>> Repair the Driver Squib 1 circuits with voltage present for a
short to Battery.
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 30
5.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6.
STORED ORC DTC
In the previous steps you have attempted to recreate the conditions responsible for setting active DTCs in question.
Yes
No
LX
B1B02-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN
8O - 31
8O - 32
LX
When Monitored:
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Driver Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OPEN
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 7
LX
2.
CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN DRIVER AIRBAG

CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

Information.
3.
CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN

Squib connectors.
CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

Information.
8O - 33
8O - 34
4.
CHECK (R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Module connector.
between the Steering Control Module connector and the ORC Load
Tool Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (R43) Driver Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for an open.
Then, Go To 5
5.

Tool Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
LX
LX
6.
8O - 35
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
7.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
8O - 36
B1B03-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
LX
LX
8O - 37
When Monitored:
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Driver Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R45) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.

CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

Information.
8O - 38
3.
CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool ORC from the Driver Airbag Squib connectors.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

Information.
4.
CHECK (R43) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R45) DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1
CIRCUIT

Module connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R43) Driver Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
and the (R45) Driver Squib 1 Line 1 circuit at the Steering Control Module connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (R43) Driver Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for a short to
the (R45) Driver Squib 1 Line 1 circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8O - 39
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
8O - 40
B1B04-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8O - 41
When Monitored:
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Driver Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R63) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R61) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.

CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

Information.
8O - 42
3.
CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool Jumper from the Driver Airbag Squib
connectors.
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

Information.
4.
SHORT TO GROUND

Module connector.
Is the resistance below 10K ohms for either measurement?
Yes
>> Repair the Driver Squib 2 circuits with a resistance below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8O - 43
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
8O - 44
B1B05-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8O - 45
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Driver Squib 2 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected voltage on the Driver Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R63) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R61) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

NOTE: The Scan Tool, SRS Airbag Load Tool MRL 8443 and DVOM are required to perform the following
test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.

CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

Information.
8O - 46
3.
CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

Squib connectors.
With the Steering Control Module connector attached to the steering
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

Information.
4.
SHORT TO BATTERY

Module connector.
Is there any voltage present for either measurement?
Yes
>> Repair the Driver Squib 2 circuits with voltage present for a
short to Battery.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8O - 47
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6.
STORED ORC DTC
In the previous steps you have attempted to recreate the conditions responsible for setting active DTCs in question.
Yes
No
8O - 48
B1B06-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8O - 49
When Monitored:
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Driver Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 7
8O - 50
2.
CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN DRIVER AIRBAG

CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

Information.
3.
CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN

Squib connectors.
CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

Information.
LX
LX
4.

Module connector.
Tool Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
Then, Go To 5
5.

Tool Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
8O - 51
8O - 52
6.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
7.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B07-DRIVER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
8O - 53
8O - 54
LX
When Monitored:
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Driver Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R63) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R61) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 CIRCUIT
CLOCKSPRING
DRIVER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

NOTE: The Scan Tool, SRS Airbag Load Tool MRL 8443 and DVOM are required to perform the following
test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

Information.
LX
3.
8O - 55
CHECK CLOCKSPRING SQUIB CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool ORC from the Driver Airbag Squib connectors.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

Information.
4.
CHECK (R63) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R61) DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2
CIRCUIT

Module connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R63) Driver Squib 2 Line 1 circuit
and the (R61) Driver Squib 2 Line 2 circuit at the Steering Control Module connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (R63) Driver Squib 2 Line 1 circuit for a short to
the (R61) Driver Squib 2 Line 2 circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 56
5.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B08-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW
8O - 57
8O - 58
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Passenger Squib
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Passenger Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OR (R44) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO
GROUND
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.
CHECK FOR SHORTED SQUIB CIRCUITS IN PASSENGER AIRBAG

Disconnect the Passenger Airbag Squib connector.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, do not place an intact
undeployed airbag face down on a hard surface, the airbag will propel into the air if accidentally deployed.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool to the Passenger Airbag Squib connector.
Does the scan tool display: B1B08 PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Passenger Airbag in accordance with the Service Information.
LX
3.
8O - 59
CHECK (R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT AND (R44) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool from the Passenger Airbag Squib connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R42) Passenger Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
between ground and the Passenger Airbag Squib connector.
Is the resistance below 10K ohms on either circuit?
Yes
>> Repair the Passenger Squib 1 circuits with a resistance below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
8O - 60
B1B09-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8O - 61
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Passenger Squib 1
circuits.
Set Condition:
When the ORC has detected voltage on the Passenger Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
BATTERY
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

Does the scan tool display: B1B09 PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8O - 62
3.
LX
FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

Measure the voltage of the (R42) Passenger Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
between the Passenger Airbag Squib connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the Passenger Squib 1 circuits with voltage present for a short to battery.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B0A-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN
8O - 63
8O - 64
LX
When Monitored:
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Passenger Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OPEN
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.
CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN PASSENGER AIRBAG

Does the scan tool display: B1B0A PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.
CHECK (R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

between the Passenger Airbag Squib connector and the 8443 ORC
Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (R42) Passenger Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for and
open. Then, Go To 4
4.

between the Passenger Airbag Squib connector and the 8443 ORC
Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (R44) Passenger Squib 1 Line 1 circuit for an

open.
8O - 65
8O - 66
5.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
If there are no possible causes remaining, view repair.
Repair
6.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B0B-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
8O - 67
8O - 68
LX
When Monitored:
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Passenger Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R44) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

Does the scan tool display: B1B0B PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.
8O - 69
CHECK (R42) PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R44) PASSENGER SQUIB 1
LINE 1 CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (R42) Passenger Squib 1 Line 2
circuit and the (R44) Passenger Squib 1 Line 1 circuit at the Passenger
Airbag Squib connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (R42) Passenger Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for a short
to the (R44) Passenger Squib 1 Line 1 circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
8O - 70
B1B0C-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8O - 71
When Monitored:
2 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Passenger Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
GROUND
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

Does the scan tool display: B1B0C PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
2 CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8O - 72
3.
LX
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Yes
>> Repair the Passenger Squib 2 circuits with a resistance below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B0D-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT HIGH
8O - 73
8O - 74
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage of the Passenger Squib 2
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected voltage on the Passenger Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
BATTERY
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

Does the scan tool display: B1B0D PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
2 CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.
8O - 75
FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

Yes
>> Repair the Passenger Squib 2 circuits with voltage present for a short to battery.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
8O - 76
B1B0E-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8O - 77
When Monitored:
2 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Passenger Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.
CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN PASSENGER AIRBAG

Does the scan tool display: B1B0E PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8O - 78
3.

between the Passenger Airbag Squib connector and the 8443 Load
Tool ORC Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go to 4
No

open. Then, Go To 4
4.

between the Passenger Airbag Squib connector and the 8443 Load
Tool ORC Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

open.
LX
LX
5.
8O - 79
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
View Repair
Repair
6.
STORED ORC DTC
If codes are related to the Passenger Airbag circuits, rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop.
Yes
No
8O - 80
B1B0F-PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
LX
LX
8O - 81
When Monitored:
2 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Passenger Squib 2 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R64) PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R62) PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 CIRCUIT
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

then reconnect the battery
Does the scan tool display: B1B0F PASSENGER AIRBAG SQUIB
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8O - 82
3.
LX
CHECK (R64) PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R62) PASSENGER SQUIB 2
LINE 2 CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (R64) Passenger Squib 2 Line 1
circuit and the (R62) Passenger Squib 2 Line 2 circuit at the Passenger
Airbag Squib connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (R64) Passenger Squib 2 Line 1 circuit for a short
to the (R62) Passenger Squib 2 Line 2 circuit.
No
>> Go to 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B18-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW
8O - 83
8O - 84
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Left Curtain Squib
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance of the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED
TO GROUND
LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.
CHECK FOR SHORTED SQUIB CIRCUITS IN LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

Disconnect the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector.
intact undeployed curtain airbag face down on a hard surface, the
airbag will propel into the air if accidentally deployed.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the Left Side
Curtain Airbag connector.
Does the scan tool display: B1B18 LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Left Side Curtain Airbag in accordance with the
LX
3.
8O - 85
CHECK (R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Left Side Curtain
Airbag connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R3) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit
between ground and the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector.
between ground and the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector.
Yes
>> Repair the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits with a resistance

below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
IF only stored codes return continue the test until the problem area has been isolated.
8O - 86
LX
Yes
No
LX
B1B19-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
8O - 87
8O - 88
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Left Curtain Squib 1
circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected voltage on the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED
TO BATTERY
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

Does the scan tool display: B1B19 LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.
8O - 89
CHECK (R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

Airbag connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R3) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit
between the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector and ground.
Measure the voltage of the (R1) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
between the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits with voltage present for a short to battery.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition off then disconnect the battery and wait two
minutes before proceeding.
Yes
No
8O - 90
B1B1A-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8O - 91
When Monitored:
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OPEN
(R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.
CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

Does the scan tool display: B1B1A LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB
1 CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8O - 92
3.
CHECK (R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Airbag connector.
between the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector and the Load Tool ORC
Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (R3) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit for an
open. Then, Go To 4
4.
CHECK (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
between the Left Side Curtain Airbag connector and the Load Tool ORC
Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (R1) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for an
open.
LX
LX
5.
8O - 93
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
6.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
8O - 94
B1B1B-LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
LX
LX
8O - 95
When Monitored:
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Left Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

Does the scan tool display: B1B1B LEFT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
8O - 96
3.
LX
CHECK (R3) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R1) LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1
LINE 2 CIRCUIT

Airbag connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R3) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 1
circuit and the (R1) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit at the Left Side
Yes
>> Repair the (R3) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit for a
short to the (R1) Left Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B20-RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW
8O - 97
8O - 98
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Right Curtain
Squib 1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT
SHORTED TO GROUND
RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.
CHECK FOR SHORTED SQUIB CIRCUITS IN RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

Disconnect the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the Right Side
Does the scan tool display: B1B20 RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN
SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Right Side Curtain Airbag in accordance with

LX
3.
8O - 99
CHECK (R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Right Side Curtain
Airbag connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R4) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit
between ground and the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector.
between ground and the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector.
Yes
>> Repair the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits with a resistance below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No
>> Go to 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
8O - 100
B1B21-RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8O - 101
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Right Curtain Squib
1 circuits.
Set Condition:
When the ORC detects voltage on the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT
SHORTED TO BATTERY
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

intact uncoupled curtain airbag face down on a hard surface, the
SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

8O - 102
3.
LX
CHECK (R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

Airbag connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R4) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit
between the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector and ground.
Measure the voltage of the (R2) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit
between the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits with voltage present for a short to battery.
No
>> Go to 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
>> No problem found at this time. Erase all codes before returning vehicle to customer
LX
B1B22-RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN
8O - 103
8O - 104
LX
When Monitored:
Squib 1 circuits.
Set Condition:
When the ORC has detects an open or high resistance on the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT OPEN
(R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.
CHECK FOR OPEN SQUIB CIRCUITS IN RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go to 3
No

LX
3.
CHECK (R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Airbag connector.
between the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector and the 8443 ORC
Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (R4) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit for an
open. Then, Go To 4
4.
CHECK (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
between the Right Side Curtain Airbag connector and the 8443 ORC
Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (R2) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit for an
open.
8O - 105
8O - 106
5.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
6.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B23-RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
8O - 107
8O - 108
LX
When Monitored:
Squib 1 circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Right Curtain Squib 1 circuits.
Possible Causes
(R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
CIRCUIT
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

SQUIB 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go to 3
No

LX
3.
8O - 109
CHECK (R4) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R2) RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1
LINE 2 CIRCUIT

Airbag connector.
Measure the resistance between the (R4) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 1
circuit and the (R2) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit at the Right
Side Curtain Airbag connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (R4) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 1 circuit for a
short to the (R2) Right Curtain Squib 1 Line 2 circuit.
No
>> Go to 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
8O - 110
B1B28-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8O - 111
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Driver Seat Belt
Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
(R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R53) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2
CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.
CHECK FOR SHORTED DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER

Disconnect the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the Driver Seat
Belt Pretensioner connector.
Does the scan tool display: B1B28 1st ROW DRIVER SEAT
BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner in accordance

with the Service Information.
8O - 112
3.
LX
CHECK (R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R53) DRIVER SEAT BELT
TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Driver Seat Belt
Pretensioner connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R55) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1
circuit between ground and the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
circuit between ground and the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Yes
>> Repair the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits with a resistance below 10K ohms for a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B29-1ST ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH
8O - 113
8O - 114
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Driver Seat Belt
Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC detects voltage on the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

Does the scan tool display: B1B29 1st ROW DRIVER SEAT
BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
8O - 115
CHECK (R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R53) DRIVER SEAT BELT
TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

Measure the voltage of the (R55) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1 circuit between the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and ground.
Measure the voltage of the (R53) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2 circuit between the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits with voltage
present for a short to battery.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
8O - 116
LX
Yes
No
LX
B1B2A-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN
8O - 117
8O - 118
LX
When Monitored:
Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.
CHECK FOR OPEN DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER

Does the scan tool display: B1B2A 1st ROW DRIVER SEAT
BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
CHECK (R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

circuit between the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and the
8443 ORC Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (R55) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1 circuit
for and open. Then Go To 4
4.
CHECK (R53) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
circuit between the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and the
8443 ORC Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
for and open.
8O - 119
8O - 120
5.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
Replace the ORC in accordance with Service Information.
6.
STORED ORC DTC
WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, TURN THE IGNITION OFF, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY AND WAIT TWO MINUTES BEFORE PROCEEDING.
WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, TURN THE IGNITION ON, THEN RECONNECT THE
BATTERY.
Yes
No
LX
B1B2B-1st ROW DRIVER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED

TOGETHER
8O - 121
8O - 122
LX

When Monitored:
Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Driver Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
(R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R53) DRIVER SEAT BELT
TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.
SELECT ACTIVE OR STORED DTC

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
LX
2.
8O - 123

Disconnect the Driver Seatbelt Pretensioner connector.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition on
Does the scan tool display: B1B2B 1st ROW DRIVER SEAT
BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.
CHECK (R55) DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R53) DRIVER SEAT
BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (R55) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner
Line 1 circuit and the (R53) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2 circuit at
the Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Yes
for a short to the (R53) Driver Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2
circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
8O - 124
4.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B2C-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW
8O - 125
8O - 126
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the resistance of the Passenger Seat
Belt Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance on the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
(R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT OR (R54) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER
LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.
CHECK FOR SHORTED PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER

Disconnect the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Connect the 8443 Load Tool and appropriate Jumper to the Passenger
Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Does the scan tool display: B1B2C 1st ROW PASSENGER
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner in accordance with the Service Information.
LX
3.
8O - 127
CHECK (R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R54) PASSENGER SEAT
BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the 8443 Load Tool and Jumper from the Passenger Seat
Measure the resistance of the (R56) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner
Line 1 circuit between ground and the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Line 2 circuit between ground and the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Yes
>> Repair the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits with a resistance below 10k ohms for a short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
8O - 128
LX
Yes
No
LX
B1B2D-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH
8O - 129
8O - 130
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the voltage on the Passenger Seat Belt
Tensioner circuits.
Set Condition:
The ORC detects voltage on the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
LINE 2 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
2.

Does the scan tool display: B1B2D 1st ROW PASSENGER
SEAT BELT TENSIONER CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.
8O - 131
CHECK (R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT AND (R54) PASSENGER SEAT
BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

Measure the voltage of the (R56) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1
circuit between the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and
ground.
Measure the voltage of the (R54) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2
circuit between the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits with voltage present for a short to battery.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
8O - 132
LX
Yes
No
>> No problem found at this time. Erase all codes before returning vehicle to customer
LX
B1B2E-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN
8O - 133
8O - 134
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected an open or high resistance on the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
LINE 2 CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 6
2.
CHECK FOR OPEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER

Does the scan tool display: B1B2E 1st ROW PASSENGER
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.
CHECK (R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Line 1 circuit between the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector
and the 8443 ORC Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (R56) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1 circuit for an open. Then Go To 4
4.
CHECK (R54) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Line 2 circuit between the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector
and the 8443 ORC Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go to 5
No
>> Repair the (R54) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 2 circuit for an open.
8O - 135
8O - 136
5.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
Replace the ORC in accordance with Service Information.
6.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
8O - 137
B1B2F-1st ROW PASSENGER SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED

TOGETHER
8O - 138
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The ORC has detected low resistance between the Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner circuits.
Possible Causes
(R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R54) PASSENGER SEAT BELT
TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT
ORC
Diagnostic Test
1.

test.
be disconnected.
ORC - ACTIVE DTC
Go To 2
ORC - STORED DTC
Go To 5
LX
2.
8O - 139

WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition on
Does the scan tool display: B1B2F 1st ROW PASSENGER
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONER CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
3.
CHECK (R56) PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE (R54)
PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (R56) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1 circuit and the (R54) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line
2 circuit at the Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (R56) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner Line 1 circuit for a short to the (R54) Passenger Seat Belt Tensioner
Line 2 circuit.
No
>> Go to 4
8O - 140
4.
LX
REPLACE THE ORC
be disconnected.
Repair
5.
STORED ORC DTC
Yes
No
LX
B1B70-UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL
8O - 141
8O - 142
LX
When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Front Left Impact Sensor over
the sensor signal circuit. The sensor communication and on board diagnostics are powered by the ORC signal.
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Front Left Impact Sensor do not establish and maintain valid data communications.
Possible Causes
(R79) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
(R79) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B70-UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B70-UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
CHECK THE (R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT
TO BATTERY

Disconnect the Front Left Impact Sensor connector.
Disconnect the ORC connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal circuit and (R81) Sensor Ground circuit at the Front Left Impact Sensor
connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (R79, R81) Front Left Impact Sensor circuits for
a short to battery.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE (R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal
circuit between the Front Left Impact Sensor connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal circuit for
a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
8O - 143
CHECK THE (R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor
Signal and (R81) Sensor Ground circuits at the Front Left Impact Sensor connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (R79, R81) Front Left Impact Sensor circuits
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 144
5.
CHECK THE (R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Connect the 8443 Load Tool ORC Adaptor to the Occupant Restraint
Control Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R81) Front Left Impact Sensor Ground
circuit between the Front Left Impact Sensor connector and the 8443
Load Tool ORC Adaptor.
Is the resistance below 1 ohm?
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (R81) Front Left Impact Sensor 1 Ground circuit
for an open or high resistance.
6.
CHECK THE (R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
LX
LX
7.
8O - 145
CHECK OPERATION OF THE FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR
Replace the Front Left Impact Sensor.

Reconnect the vehicle body harness to the impact sensor.
Remove any special tools or jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components - except the Battery.
Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector - use the most current software available.
Use the scan tool and erase the stored codes in all airbag system modules.
Turn the Ignition Off, and wait 15 seconds before turning the Ignition On.
Wait one minute, and read active codes and if there are none present read the stored codes.
Did the active Front Left Impact Sensor DTC return?
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
REPLACE THE OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
WARNING: If the airbag control module is dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the
proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.
Repair
Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller in accordance with Service Information.
9.
TEST FOR AN INTERMITTENT CONDITION
following steps.
Yes
>> Select the appropriate symptom from Symptom List.
No
8O - 146
B1B71-UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL
LX
LX
8O - 147
When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Front Right Impact Sensor over
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Front Right Impact Sensor do not establish and maintain valid data
communications.
Possible Causes
(R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B71-UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR INTERNAL IS

ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B71-UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR
INTERNAL?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
CHECK THE (R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A
SHORT TO BATTERY

Disconnect the Front Right Impact Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal circuit and (R82) Sensor Ground circuit at the Front Right Impact Sensor
Yes
>> Repair the (R80, R82) Front Right Impact Sensor circuits
for a short to battery.
No
>> Go To 3
8O - 148
3.
CHECK THE (R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn ignition on, then

reconnect the battery.
Measure the resistance of the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal
circuit between the Front Right Impact Sensor connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal circuit
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor
Signal and (R82) Sensor Ground circuits at the Front Right Impact Sensor connector.
Yes
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8O - 149
CHECK THE (R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Connect the 8443 Load Tool ORC Adaptor to the Occupant Control
Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R82) Front Right Impact Sensor Ground
circuit between the Front Right Impact Sensor connector and the 8443
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (R82) Front Right Impact Sensor 2 Ground circuit for an open or high resistance.
6.
CHECK THE (R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
8O - 150
7.
LX
CHECK OPERATION OF THE FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR
Replace the Front Right Impact Sensor.

Did the active Front Right Impact Sensor DTC return?
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Repair
Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller in accordance with Service Instructions.
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
B1B72-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL
8O - 151
8O - 152
LX
When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Left Side Impact Sensor 1 over
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Left Side Impact Sensor 1 do not establish and maintain valid data
communications.
Possible Causes
(R13, R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R13) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B72-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL 1 IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B72-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
CHECK THE (R13, R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT
TO BATTERY

Disconnect the Left Side Impact Sensor 1 connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R13) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal circuit and (R15) Sensor Ground circuit at the Left Side Impact Sensor 1
Yes
>> Repair the (R13, R15) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 circuits
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE (R13) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (R13) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal
circuit between the Left Side Impact Sensor 1 connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (R13) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal circuit
No
>> Go To 4
4.
8O - 153
CHECK THE (R13, R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R13) Left Side Impact Sensor 1
Signal and (R15) Sensor Ground circuits at the Left Side Impact Sensor
1 connector.
Yes
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 154
5.
CHECK THE (R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R15) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Ground
circuit between the Left Side Impact Sensor 1 connector and the 8443
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (R15) Left Side Impact Sensor 1 Ground circuit
6.
CHECK THE (R13) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
LX
LX
7.
8O - 155
CHECK OPERATION OF THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1
Replace the Left Side Impact Sensor 1.

Did the active Left Side Impact Sensor 1 DTC return?
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Repair
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 156
B1B73-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL
LX
LX
8O - 157
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B73-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B73-LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
TO BATTERY

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8O - 158
3.

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (R17, R19) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
2 connector.
Yes
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8O - 159
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
8O - 160
7.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Repair
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
B1B75-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL
8O - 161
8O - 162
LX
When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Right Side Impact Sensor 1
over the sensor signal circuit. The sensor communication and on board diagnostics are powered by the ORC
signal.
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 do not establish and maintain valid data
communications.
Possible Causes
(R14, R16) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R16) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R14) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B75-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B75-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 INTERNAL?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
CHECK THE (R14, R16) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A
SHORT TO BATTERY

Disconnect the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R14) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal
circuit and (R16) Sensor Ground circuit at the Right Side Impact Sensor
1 connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (R14, R16) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 circuits
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE (R14) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (R14) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal
circuit between the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (R14) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 Signal circuit
No
>> Go To 4
4.
8O - 163
CHECK THE (R14, R16) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R14) Right Side Impact Sensor 1
Signal and (R16) Sensor Ground circuits at the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 connector.
Yes
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 164
5.
CHECK THE (R16) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R16) Right Side Impact Sensor 1
Ground circuit between the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 connector and
the 8443 Load Tool ORC Adaptor.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (R16) Right Side Impact Sensor 1 Ground circuit
6.
CHECK THE (R14) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
circuit between the Right Side Impact Sensor 1 connector and the 8443
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
LX
LX
7.
8O - 165
CHECK OPERATION OF THE RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1
Replace the Right Side Impact Sensor 1.

Did the active Right Side Impact Sensor 1 DTC return?
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Repair
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 166
B1B76-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL
LX
LX
8O - 167
When Monitored:
signal.
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY ACTIVE B1B76-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2 INTERNAL

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display an active: B1B76-RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2
INTERNAL?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
SHORT TO BATTERY

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8O - 168
3.
Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (R18, R20) RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Yes
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8O - 169
RESISTANCE
Controller C2 connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
8O - 170
7.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Repair
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
8O - 171
B1B78-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT PERFORMANCE
8O - 172
LX
When Monitored:
When CAN ignitions status is Run or SNA, during auto zero and while performing the Occupant Classification
Module System Verification Test.
Set Condition:
During the occupant classification verification test: if the module detects that the sensor input is less than 1.4
volts or greater than 3.6 volts. During auto zero: if the module detects that the sensor input is less than 1 volt
or greater than 4 volts.
Possible Causes
PASSENGER SEAT HARNESS WIRES CHAFED, PIERCED, PINCHED, PARTIALLY BROKEN
PASSENGER SEAT HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINALS BROKEN, BENT PUSHED OUT, SPREAD,
CORRODED, CONTAMINATED
LEFT-FRONT PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
DAMAGE TO THE PASSENGER SEAT STRUCTURE, RISER ASSEMBLY, CROSSMEMBERS, SEAT TRACKS,
FLOOR PAN
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE (OCM)
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE INTERNAL FAULTS, IGNITION FAULTS, AND BATTERY FAULTS IN THE OCCUPANT
CLASSIFICATION MODULE (OCM)

be disconnected.
With the scan tool, read Occupant Classification Module (OCM) DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs relating to internal faults, ignition faults, or battery faults?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTCs. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list of
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B78-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT PERFORMANCE IS
ACTIVE
With the scan tool, read OCM DTCs.

Does the scan tool display active: B1B78-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
LX
3.
8O - 173
INSPECT PASSENGER SEAT HARNESS WIRES AND CONNECTORS
Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the Passenger Seat Harness wiring and connectors. Look
for chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.
Are any of these conditions present?
Yes
>>
Replace the Passenger Seat Harness in accordance with the Service Information.
No
4.
>> Go To 4
PERFORM OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST
Verify that all of the Seat Weight Sensor mounting screws are torqued to specification. Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS.
NOTE: Failure to follow test instructions or aborting the test will cause faults to set when performing the
Occupant Classification Module System Verification Test. To prevent faults due to process errors: Verify
That All Tests Steps That Led You Here Were Performed As Directed; Verify That The Ignition Is In Run; Wait
30 Seconds After Changing The Seat Weight Before Proceeding To Allow The System To Stabilize; Only
Press Scan Tool Buttons When Directed To Do So; and Perform The Occupant Classification Module System
Verification Test To Completion.
With the scan tool in OCM, select More Options, select System Tests, and select Occupant Classification Module
System Verification Test. Run the test by following the instructions displayed on the scan tool. When the test is
complete, wait two minutes, and then proceed as follows.
Does the scan tool display any active PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR PERFORMANCE DTCs?
Yes
>> Perform the *Diagnosis/Checkout Procedure For Seat Weight Sensors.

No - But Other DTCs Present

Diagnose and repair the DTCs. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list of
symptoms.
No Active DTCs Present
5.
following steps.
8O - 174
LX
Yes
>> Select appropriate symptom from Symptom List.
No
LX
8O - 175
B1B79-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8O - 176
LX

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is in IGN_RUN, the module checks the sensor input ranges.
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is less than 3.4 .6% of the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt
circuit voltage. This DTC will also set if the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt circuit is shorted to ground.
However, this condition would prevent communication with the OCM and cause a Lost Communication With
OCM DTC to set in other modules.
Possible Causes
PASSENGER SEAT HARNESS IMPROPERLY ROUTED
(R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLT CIRCUIT OPEN
LEFT-FRONT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B79PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B79PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 10
LX
3.
8O - 177
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4
VERIFY THAT PASSENGER SEAT HARNESS IS ROUTED CORRECTLY
Verify that the Passenger Seat Harness is routed correctly.

Is the Passenger Seat Harness routed correctly?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Reroute the Passenger Seat Harness as necessary. Then, Go To 5
5.
CHECK IF MORE THAN ONE PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display any active PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTCs?
Yes - More Than One PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC Is Active.
Perform the Diagnosis/Checkout Procedure For Seat Weight Sensors.
Perform OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1
Yes - Only DTC B1B79 Is Active.
Go To 6
No - But Other DTCs Present.
symptoms.
No - No Active DTCs Present.
8O - 178
6.
CHECK VOLTAGE OF (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLT CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Left-Front Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Go To 9
7.
CHECK (R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (R717) LT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit between ground and the OCM C2 connector.
Yes
>>
NOTE: Do not attempt to repair the Seat Harness. Replace the Seat
Harness if the condition inspecting or testing for is present in the
Seat Harness.
Replace the Passenger Seat Harness in accordance with
No
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
8.
CHECK (R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (R717) LT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Front Seat Weight
Sensor connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Left-Front Seat Weight Sensor in accordance

with the Service Information. Perform OCS VERIFICATION
TEST - VER 1. If DTC B1B79PASSENGER SEAT
WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
returns active, replace the OCM in accordance with the
No
>>
Seat Harness.
Replace the Passenger Seat Harness in accordance with
9.
CHECK (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt circuit
between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Front Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
Yes
>> Replace the OCM in accordance with the Service Information.

No
>>
Seat Harness.
Replace the Passenger Seat Harness in accordance with the
8O - 179
8O - 180
10.
LX
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
8O - 181
B1B7A-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT

HIGH
8O - 182
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is greater than 96 0.6% of the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt
circuit voltage.
Possible Causes
(R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5
VOLT CIRCUIT
(R728) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
LEFT-FRONT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B7APASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B7APASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 3 - LEFT FRONT INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 9
LX
3.
8O - 183
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Reroute the Passenger Seat Harness as necessary.

5.
Yes - More Than One PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC Is Active
Perform the *Diagnosis/Checkout Procedure For Seat Weight Sensors.
Yes - Only DTC B1B7A Is Active
Go To 6
symptoms.
No - No Active DTCs Present
8O - 184
6.
LX
CHECK (R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (R717) LT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal circuit.
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
7.
>> Go To 7
CHECK (R717) LT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 5 VOLT CIRCUIT
Disconnect the Left-Front Seat Weight Sensor connector.

Measure the resistance between the (R717) LT-FT Seat Weight Sensor
Signal circuit and the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt circuit.
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
>> Go To 8
LX
8.
8O - 185
CHECK (R728) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (R728) Seat Weight Sensor Ground circuit
between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Front Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
Yes

No
>>
Seat Harness.
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 186
B1B7D-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
8O - 187
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
RIGHT-FRONT PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
FLOOR PAN
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B7DPASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT PERFORMANCE IS
ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B7DPASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 188
3.
LX
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4
Yes

No, But Other DTCs Present

symptoms.
5.
following steps.
LX
8O - 189
Yes
No
8O - 190
B1B7E-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT

LOW
LX
LX
8O - 191

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is less than 3.4 0.6% of the (R701) Seat Weight Sensor 5 Volt
Possible Causes
(R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
RIGHT-FRONT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B7E-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B7EPASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 10
8O - 192
3.
LX
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Reroute the Passenger Seat Harness as necessary. Then, Go To 5
5.
Yes - Only DTC B1B7E Is Active
Go To 6
symptoms.
LX
6.

Disconnect the Right-Front Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Go To 9
7.
CHECK (R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (R718) RT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
>> Go To 8
8O - 193
8O - 194
8.
CHECK (R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (R718) RT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Front Seat Weight
Sensor connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Right-Front Seat Weight Sensor in accordance

TEST - VER 1. If DTC B1B7E-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT LOW returns
active, replace the OCM in accordance with the Service
Information.
No
>>
Seat Harness.
9.

between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Front Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Yes

No
>>
Seat Harness.
LX
LX
10.
8O - 195
following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 196
B1B7F-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT

HIGH
LX
LX
8O - 197

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
circuit voltage.
Possible Causes
(R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5
VOLT CIRCUIT
RIGHT-FRONT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B7FPASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B7FPASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 2 - RIGHT FRONT
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 9
8O - 198
3.
LX
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
Yes, More Than One PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC Is Active
Yes, Only DTC B1B7F Is Active
Go To 6
symptoms.
LX
6.
CHECK (R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
8O - 199

Measure the voltage of the (R718) RT-FT Seat Weight Sensor Signal circuit.
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
7.
>> Go To 7
CHECK (R718) RT-FT SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT
Disconnect the Right-Front Seat Weight Sensor connector.

Measure the resistance between the (R718) RT-FT Seat Weight Sensor
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
>> Go To 8
8O - 200
8.
LX
between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Front Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Yes

No
>>
Seat Harness.
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
8O - 201
B1B82-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR PERFORMANCE
8O - 202
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
LEFT-REAR PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
FLOOR PAN
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B82PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR PERFORMANCE IS
ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B82PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
LX
3.
8O - 203
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4
Yes

symptoms.
5.
following steps.
8O - 204
LX
Yes
No
LX
8O - 205
B1B83-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8O - 206
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
LEFT-REAR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B83PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW IS
ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B83PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 10
LX
3.
8O - 207
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
Yes - Only DTC B1B83 Is Active
Go To 6
symptoms.
8O - 208
6.

Disconnect the Left-Rear Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Go To 9
7.
CHECK (R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (R705) LT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
8.
CHECK (R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (R705) LT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Rear Seat Weight
Sensor connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Left-Rear Seat Weight Sensor in accordance

TEST - VER 1. If DTC B1B83-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW returns
Information.
No
>>
Seat Harness.
9.

between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Rear Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
Yes

No
>>
Seat Harness.
8O - 209
8O - 210
10.
LX
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
8O - 211
B1B84-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8O - 212
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
circuit voltage.
Possible Causes
(R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5
VOLT CIRCUIT
LEFT-REAR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B84PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B84PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 4 - LEFT REAR INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 9
LX
3.
8O - 213
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
Go To 6
symptoms.
No - Active DTCs Present
8O - 214
6.
LX
CHECK (R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (R705) LT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal circuit.
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
7.
>> Go To 7
CHECK (R705) LT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT
Disconnect the Left-Rear Seat Weight Sensor connector.

Measure the resistance between the (R705) LT-RR Seat Weight Sensor
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
>> Go To 8
LX
8.
8O - 215
between the OCM C2 connector and the Left-Rear Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
Yes

No
>>
Seat Harness.
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 216
B1B87-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
8O - 217
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
RIGHT-REAR PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
FLOOR PAN
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B87PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR PERFORMANCE IS
ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B87PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 218
3.
LX
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4
Yes


symptoms.
5.
following steps.
LX
8O - 219
Yes
No
8O - 220
LX
B1B88-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
8O - 221

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
RIGHT-REAR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B88PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B88PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT
CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 10
8O - 222
3.
LX
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
Yes, More Than One PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC Is Active
Go To 6
symptoms.
LX
6.

Disconnect the Right-Rear Seat Weight Sensor connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Go To 9
7.
CHECK (R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (R706) RT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
>> Go To 8
8O - 223
8O - 224
8.
CHECK (R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (R706) RT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Rear Seat Weight
Sensor connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Right-Rear Seat Weight Sensor in accordance

TEST - VER 1. If DTC B1B88PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT LOW returns
Information.
No
>>
Seat Harness.
9.

between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Rear Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
Yes

No
>>
Seat Harness.
LX
LX
10.
8O - 225
following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 226
LX
B1B89-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
8O - 227

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
circuit voltage.
Possible Causes
(R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5
VOLT CIRCUIT
RIGHT-REAR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B89PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B89PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 1 - RIGHT REAR INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 9
8O - 228
3.
LX
Yes
>>
No
4.
>> Go To 4

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
Go To 6
symptoms.
LX
6.
8O - 229
CHECK (R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (R706) RT-RR Seat Weight Sensor Signal
circuit.
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
7.
>> Go To 7
CHECK (R706) RT-RR SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R701) SEAT WEIGHT
Disconnect the Right-Rear Seat Weight Sensor connector.

Measure the resistance between the (R706) RT-RR Seat Weight Sensor
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
>> Go To 8
8O - 230
8.
LX
between the OCM C2 connector and the Right-Rear Seat Weight Sensor
connector.
Yes

No
>>
Seat Harness.
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
8O - 231
8O - 232
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is between 8 and 12 mA.
Possible Causes
DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
1.
IDENTIFYING VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

NOTE: The Seat Track Position Sensor(s) will be wired to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) if the
vehicle is not equipped with the Occupant Classification Module (OCM).
With the scan tool, read ORC and if equipped OCM active DTCs.
Select the module reporting the Seat Track Position Sensor DTC(s)
ORC
>> Go To 5
OCM
Go To 2 Diagnostic Test
2.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE INTERNAL FAULTS, IGNITION FAULTS, BATTERY FAULTS, OR SEAT TRACK
POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH OR LOW FAULTS IN THE OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
(OCM)
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs relating to internal faults, ignition faults, battery faults, or
Seat Track Position Sensor Circuit High or Low faults?
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 8
4.
PERFORM SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR PERFORMANCE TEST
With the scan tool, erase OCM DTCs.

Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds and then turn the ignition on.
Cycle the driver seat to the full forward position and then to the full rearward position.
Return the driver seat to its approximate original position.
Wait two minutes, and then with the scan tool, read OCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>>
LX
8O - 233
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure
to take the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.Replace the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.If DTC B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE returns active, replace the OCM in accordance with the Service Information.
No
5.
>> Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1. Diagnostic Test

CHECK FOR ACTIVE INTERNAL FAULTS, IGNITION FAULTS, BATTERY FAULTS, OR SEAT TRACK
POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH OR LOW FAULTS IN THE OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER
(ORC)
With the scan tool, read Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) DTCs.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs relating to internal faults, ignition faults, battery faults, or
Seat Track Position Sensor Circuit High or Low faults?
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
VERIFY THAT B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE

Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Go To 8
7.
PERFORM SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR PERFORMANCE TEST

Cycle the driver seat to the full forward position and then to the full rearward position.
Return the driver seat to its approximate original position.
Yes
>>
the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.If DTC B1B8C-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE returns active, replace the ORC in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
8O - 234
8.
LX
With the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs from the OCM and ORC.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
8O - 235
8O - 236
LX
When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is in IGN_RUN and the module is configured for a Seat Track Position
Sensor, the module checks the sensor input current ranges.
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is less than or equal to 0.3 ma. This DTC may set when the current
is between 0.3 mA and 2.0 mA.
Possible Causes
DRIVER SEAT HARNESS IMPROPERLY ROUTED
DRIVER SEAT HARNESS WIRES CHAFED, PIERCED, PINCHED, PARTIALLY BROKEN
DRIVER SEAT HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINALS BROKEN, BENT, PUSHED OUT, SPREAD, CORRODED,
CONTAMINATED
(R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
(R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT OPEN
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER (ORC)
Diagnostic Test
1.

ORC
>> Go To 8
OCM
2.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8O - 237
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 14
4.
INSPECT DRIVER SEAT HARNESS WIRES AND CONNECTORS
Using the wiring diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the Driver Seat Harness wiring and connectors. Look for
chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated
terminals.
Yes
>>
Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the Service Information.
No
5.
>> Go To 5
VERIFY THAT DRIVER SEAT HARNESS IS ROUTED CORRECTLY
Verify that the Driver Seat Harness is routed correctly.

Is the Driver Seat Harness routed correctly?
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Reroute the Driver Seat Harness as necessary.

6.
CHECK (R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT AND (R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR
VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (R261) Seat Position
Sensor Data-Driver circuit.
Sensor Voltage-Driver circuit.
Is the resistance below 10k ohms on either circuit?
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 7
8O - 238
7.
LX
VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (R261) Seat Position Sensor Data-Driver
circuit between the OCM C1 connector and the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R263) Seat Position Sensor VoltageDriver circuit between the OCM C1 connector and the Driver Seat Track
Position Sensor connector.
Is the resistance of either circuit above 5.0 ohms?
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the
No
>>

WARNING: If the Occupant Classification module (OCM) is dropped
injury or death.Replace the OCM in accordance with the service
information.
Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1. Diagnostic Test
8.
RESTRAINT CONTROLLER (ORC)
With the scan tool, read Occupant restraint Controller (ORC) DTCs.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 9
9.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8D-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Go To 14
LX
10.
8O - 239
terminals.
Yes
>>
No
11.
>> Go To 11

Yes
>> Go To 12
No

12.
CHECK (R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT AND (R263) SEAT POSITION
SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Sensor Data-Driver circuit.
Sensor Voltage-Driver circuit.
Is the resistance below 10k ohms on either circuit?
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
>> Go To 13
8O - 240
13.
LX
SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect the ORC C1 connector.

Measure the resistance of the (R261) Seat Position Sensor Data-Driver
circuit between the ORC-C1 connector and the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R263) Seat Position Sensor VoltageDriver circuit between the ORC-C1 connector and the Driver Seat Track
Position Sensor connector.
Is the resistance of either circuit above 5.0 ohms?
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the
No
>>

injury or death.Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC )
in accordance with the service information.
14.
With the scan tool, record and erase all DTCs from the OCM.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
8O - 241
8O - 242
LX
When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is in IGN_RUN and the module is configured for a Seat Track Position
Sensor, the module checks the sensor input current ranges.
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the sensor input is greater than or equal to 20.5 mA. This DTC may set when the
current is between 17 mA and 20.5 mA.
Possible Causes
DRIVER SEAT HARNESS IMPROPERLY ROUTED
DRIVER SEAT HARNESS WIRES CHAFED, PIERCED, PINCHED, PARTIALLY BROKEN
DRIVER SEAT HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINALS BROKEN, BENT, PUSHED OUT, SPREAD, CORRODED,
CONTAMINATED
(R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (R263) SEAT POSITION SENSOR
VOLTAGE-DRVER CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.

ORC
>> Go To 9
OCM
2.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 16
LX
4.
8O - 243

terminals.
Yes
>>
No
5.
>> Go To 5

Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
CHECK FOR DTC B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH WITH DRIVER SEAT
TRACK POSITION SENSOR DISCONNECTED
Disconnect the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Does the scan tool display: B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>>
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition off, disconnect the battery and wait two minutes before proceeding.Replace the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor in accordance with the service information.
8O - 244
7.
VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (R261) Seat Position Sensor Data-Driver circuit.
Measure the voltage of the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage-Driver
circuit.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts on either circuit?
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
disconnect the battery and wait two minutes before proceeding.Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the Service Information.
No
8.
>> Go To 8
CHECK (R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R263) SEAT
POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (R261) Seat Position Sensor DataDriver circuit and the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage-Driver circuit.
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
LX
>> Replace the OCM in accordance with the Service information.

LX
8O - 245
Diagnostic Test
9.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 10
10.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH IS ACTIVE
Does the scan tool display active: B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 11
No
>> Go To 16
11.
terminals.
Yes
>>
No
12.
>> Go To 12

Yes
>> Go To 13
No

8O - 246
13.
LX
CHECK FOR DTC B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH WITH DRIVER
SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR DISCONNECTED
Disconnect the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Wait two minutes, and then with the scan tool, read ORC DTCs.
Does the scan tool display: B1B8E-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 14
No
>>
WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, turn the ignition off, disconnect the battery and wait two minutes before proceeding.Replace the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor in accordance with the service information.
14.
SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (R261) Seat Position Sensor Data-Driver circuit at the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage-Driver
circuit at the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Is the voltage above 0.2 volts on either circuit?
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
disconnect the battery and wait two minutes before proceeding.Replace the Driver Seat Harness in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Go To 15
LX
15.
8O - 247
CHECK (R261) SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA-DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO (R263) SEAT
POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE-DRIVER CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (R261) Seat Position Sensor DataDriver circuit and the (R263) Seat Position Sensor Voltage-Driver circuit
in the Driver Seat Track Position Sensor connector.
Yes
>>
Seat Harness.
No
16.
>> Replace the ORC in accordance with the Service information.

following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 248
B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION MISMATCH
LX
LX
8O - 249
When Monitored:
With the ignition on the OCM monitors the Seat Track Position Sensors circuits.
Set Condition:
If the module detects current on the Seat Track Position Sensors circuits and the module is not configured for
STPS.
Possible Causes
SENSORS
WIRING
Diagnostic Test
1.

Select the module reporting the Active Seat Track Position Sensor DTC(s)
ORC
>> Go To 5
OCM
2.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
VERIFY THAT B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION MISMATCH IS ACTIVE
Wait 2 minutes, and then with the scan tool, read OCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION
MISMATCH?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
8O - 250
4.
LX
VERIFY WIRING

Inspect the driver and passenger seat wiring for Seat Position Sensors.
Are Seat Position Sensor(s) present?
Yes
>>
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure
to take the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.Replace the OCM in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
No
5.
>> Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1 Diagnostic Test

Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
VERIFY THAT B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION MISMATCH IS ACTIVE

Wait 2 minutes, and then with the scan tool, read ORC DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B1B91-DRIVER SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION
MISMATCH?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
7.
VERIFY WIRING

Inspect the driver and passenger seat wiring for Seat Position Sensors.
Are Seat Position Sensor(s) present?
Yes
>>
the ORC in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
No
>> Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
LX
8O - 251
B1BA5-AIRBAG SQUIB CONFIGURATION MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If an Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) configured for vehicles without side airbags is installed in a vehicle
with side airbags.
Possible Causes
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1BA5 AIRBAG SQUIB CONFIGURATION MISMATCH IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B1BA5 AIRBAG SQUIB CONFIGURATION MISMATCH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 5
2.
VERIFY THAT VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (OCS)
Vehicles equipped with a Occupant Classification System (OCS) will have a Passenger Airbag On/Off Indicator
Lamp mounted to the dashboard. Verify that the vehicle is equipped with this indicator lamp.
With the scan tool, select ECU View and check that the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is active on the bus.
Is the vehicle equipped with an Occupant Classification System (OCS)?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the ORC in accordance with Service Information.

3.
CHECK ORC PART NUMBER WITH SCAN TOOL
With the scan tool, select ECU View, select ORC, select ECU Details, and read the ORC part number.
Is the part number correct for the vehicle?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

8O - 252
4.
LX
CHECK VIN WITH SCAN TOOL
With the scan tool, read the VIN.

Is the correct VIN displayed?
Yes

No
>> Replace the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) in accordance with Service Information.
5.
following steps.
Yes
No
B1BA6-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION UNDETERMINED

When Monitored:
With the ignition on or off.
Set Condition:
Because other DTCs have made occupant detection impossible. This DTC will set in addition to all sensor and
module DTCs and will be erased when the repairs are completed.
Refer to B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM VERIFICATION REQUIRED for the diagnostic test procedure.
LX
B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM VERIFICATION REQUIRED
OCS SEAT WEIGHTS MRL #9077
8O - 253
8O - 254
LX
When Monitored:
With the CAN ignition status as IGN_RUN, the module tries to detect potentially damaging events and monitors the CAN Bus for the X Impact messages (crash event causing one or more airbag or pretensioner to
deploy) or upon detecting an Offset Event (if equipped).
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the module detects a potentially damaging event or the Impact messages from the CAN
Bus input.
Possible Causes
B1BA7-OCS VERIFICATION REQUIRED DTC ACTIVE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE (OCM) ACTIVE DTCs:
ACTIVE INTERNAL FAULTS

IGNITION FAULTS
BATTERY FAULT
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTCs
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs listed above?
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM VERIFICATION REQUIRED IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM VERIFICATION
REQUIRED?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
Verify that the passenger seat is empty.

Perform a visual inspection of the Passenger Seat, wiring, connectors, risers, sensors, and retainers. Look for
terminals. Also, inspect for damaged or bent risers, a damaged or bent seat and seat structure, damaged or bent
seat tracks, and damaged or loose sensors. Repair or replace any problems found in accordance with the service
information and then continue this procedure. Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS.
NOTE: Failure to follow the test instructions or aborting the test will cause faults to set when performing
the Occupant Classification Module System Verification Test. To prevent faults due to process errors: Verify
complete, proceed as follows.
LX
8O - 255

Does the scan tool display active: B1BA7-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM VERIFICATION
REQUIRED?
Yes


symptoms.
4.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC B1BA8OCM SYSTEM OUT OF CALIBRATION/NOT CALIBRATED

Does the scan tool display active: B1BA8-OCM SYSTEM OUT OF CALIBRATION/NOT CALIBRATED?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC. Refer to the Table of Contents in this Section for a complete list of symptoms.
No
>> Perform OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8O - 256
LX
B1BA8-OCM SYSTEM OUT OF CALIBRATION/NOT CALIBRATED

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is IGN_RUN or status not available.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the module or the technician initiated a system verification (rezero) process and the system
verification process was not successfully completed.
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs?
Yes - B1BA8 is Active
Yes Other DTCs Present
symptoms.
LX
8O - 257
B1BB8-SRS WARNING INDICATOR STATUS MISMATCH

When Monitored:
After the Instrument Cluster bulb check is completed, the ORC compares the lamp request by the ORC (On or
Off) and the Lamp On request by the Instrument Cluster (On or Off) Can bus messages. Each message is
transmitted one time per second or when a change in the lap state occurs.
Set Condition:
If the lamp request by the ORC (On or Off), and the Lamp On by the Instrument Cluster (On or Off), messages
do not match, this code will set.
Possible Causes
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER, INSTRUMENT CLUSTER MESSAGE MISMATCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Select DTC type.
Active
Go To 2
Stored
Go To 5
2.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DTCs

Does the scan tool display and active Instrument Cluster DTCs?
Yes
>> Refer to symptom list for problems related to the Instrument Cluster.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
CHECK THE ORC AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FOR LAMP STATUS
With the scan tool view the Instrument Cluster Data Display.
Cycle the ignition key and observe the SRS Indicator Lamp Request status (Set/Not Set) during the Instrument
Cluster bulb check.
With the scan tool view the ORC Data Display.
Cycle the ignition key and observe the SRS Indicator Lamp Status (Lamp On/Lamp Off) during the Instrument Cluster bulb check.
Did the Data Display information match the operation of the lamp?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
8O - 258
4.
LX
Repair
Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller in accordance with the service information.
5.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
B1BBA-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT
8O - 259
8O - 260
LX
When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is in IGN_RUN, the module checks the sensor supply.
Set Condition:
If the OCM detects that the sensor supply shorted. NOTE: A shorted supply circuit will cause a NO
RESPONSE FROM OCM condition.
Possible Causes
OCS SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT B1BBA-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT DTC IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1BBA-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT?
Yes

Perform the OCS VERIFICATION REQUIRED procedure.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
Yes
>>
No
3.
>> Go To 3
following steps.
LX
8O - 261
Yes
No
8O - 262
B1BBB-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INPUTS SHORTED TOGETHER
LX
LX
8O - 263
When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is in IGN_RUN.
Set Condition:
If the OCM detects any two sensors voltages below 20 mV for 10 minutes while any other sensor is greater
than 40 mV. Note: 1 a/d count is equal to 5 mV. NOTE: A shorted supply circuit will cause a NO
RESPONSE FROM OCM condition.
Possible Causes
OCS SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT B1BBB-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INPUTS SHORTED TOGETHER

Does the scan tool display active: B1BBB-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR INPUTS SHORTED
TOGETHER ?
Yes

Perform the OCS VERIFICATION REQUIRED procedure.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
Yes
>>
No
3.
>> Go To 3
following steps.
8O - 264
LX
Yes
No
LX
B1BBC-OCS NEGATIVE SYSTEM WEIGHT
8O - 265
8O - 266
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects a seat weight sensor input with the total seat weight below -6.5 kg +/- 1kg.
Possible Causes
FLOOR PAN
OBJECT UNDER SEAT OR REAR SEAT FOLDED DOWN AND RESTING AGAINST PASSENGER SEAT
Diagnostic Test
1.
TEST CONDITIONS
ACTIVE INTERNAL DTC

IGNITION DTC
BATTERY DTC
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR DTC
be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display any active DTCs listed above?
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
ACTIVE OR STORED DTC

Does the scan tool display active: B1BBC-NEGATIVE SYSTEM WEIGHT?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.

LX
8O - 267

Does the scan tool display active: B1BBC-OCS NEGATIVE SYSTEM WEIGHT DTC?
Yes


symptoms.
4.
STORED B1BBC-OCS NEGATIVE SYSTEM WEIGHT DTC
IF only stored codes return continue the test until the problem area has been isolated.
Yes
No
8O - 268
LX
B1BBD-OCM CURRENT CONFIGURATION TABLE UNPROGRAMMED

When Monitored:
If the Configuration Table is not programmed at the supplier or when the checksum is invalid.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the module was received unprogrammed from the supplier, the vehicle line was not identified correctly or if the flash procedure was not completed successfully
Possible Causes
NEW OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
INTERNAL CHECKSUM FAILURE
Diagnostic Test
1.
MODULE CONFIGURATION
Does the scan tool display B1BBD-OCM CURRENT CONFIGURATION TABLE UNPROGRAMMED?
Yes
>> Perform the B1BA7OCS VERIFICATION REQUIRED diagnostic procedure.
No
>> Replace the Occupant Classification Module in accordance with the service information.
With the scan tool, perform the OCM SYSTEM VERIFICATION procedure.
LX
8O - 269
B1BC7-DEPLOYMENT DATA RECORD FULL

When Monitored:
With the ignition on. The modules on board diagnostics continuously performs internal circuit tests.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the module identifies an out of range internal circuit.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Is the Deployment Data Record Full DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1.
2.
proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.
View repair.
Repair
8O - 270
B1BC8-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS PERFORMANCE

LX
LX
8O - 271
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the module detects the difference between 2 sensors is less than 3 A/D (15 mV) counts for 10 consecutive
minutes while at least one sensor count is changing and greater than 8 A/D (40 mV) counts.
Possible Causes
OTHER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR FAULTS ACTIVE IN THE OCM
PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS
FLOOR PAN
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
NOTE: This DTC will take 10 minutes to mature, allow plenty of time for the code to mature between as you
work through the test steps.
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
VERIFY THAT DTC B1BC8-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: B1BC8-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 6
3.
CHECK FOR OTHER ACTIVE PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR FAULTS IN THE OCM

Does the scan tool display any other active Seat Weight Sensor DTCs?
Yes
symptoms.
No
>> Go To 4
8O - 272
4.
LX
Yes
>>
No
5.
>> Go To 5
Does the scan tool display any active B1BC8-PASSENGER SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS PERFORMANCE
DTC?
Yes

Other DTCs ACTIVE

symptoms.
No
6.

LX
8O - 273
NOTE: This DTC will take 10 minutes to mature, allow plenty of time for the code to mature between as you
work through the test steps.
following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 274
B2101-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8O - 275
When Monitored:
While the CAN bus is RUN or signal not available and the IOD status is IN. The module checks the (F201)
Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit voltage input range.
Set Condition:
With the ignition on, if voltage on the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit is equal to or
below 6.50 0.25 volts. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition off, if the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit is 2.4 to 5.0 volts.
Possible Causes
(F20) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN
(F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
OPEN FUSE (27)
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B2101 IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT LOW IS ACTIVE IN THE ORC.

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B210-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 7
2.
INSPECT AIRBAG RUN-START FUSE

Remove the Airbag Run-Start Fuse from the rear Power Distribution Center and inspect the fuse.
Is the Run/Start fuse open?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
3.
CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output

(Run-Start) circuit between ground and the Airbag Run-Start fuse terminal (output side).
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

related wiring and connectors. Look for chafed, pierced,
pinched, or partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed
out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.
Replace Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
8O - 276
4.
CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT RESISTANCE WITH ORC
CONNECTORS DISCONNECTED

can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or
death.
Disconnect the both ORC connectors.
Connect the Load Tool ORC 8443-24 Adaptor to the ORC C2 connector.
(Run-Start) circuit between 8443-24 adaptor and ground).
Yes
>> Repair the (F201) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit shorted to ground.
No
>> Replace the ORC in accordance with the Service Information.

Replace the Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 .
5.
CHECK (F201) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the voltage of the (F201) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start)
circuit at the Airbag Run-Start fuse terminal (supply side).
Is the voltage above 6.50 0.25 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open (F201) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start)

circuit.
6.
CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Reinstall the Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
Install the Airbag Load tool ORC 8443-24 adaptor to the ORC C2 connector.
LX
LX
8O - 277
Measure the voltage of the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit between the 8443-24 connector
and ground.
Yes

No
7.
following steps.
Yes
No
>> No problem found Erase all codes before returning vehicle to customer.
8O - 278
LX
B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status is RUN or signal not available and the IOD status is 9IN9. The module
checks the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit voltage input range.
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the ignition voltage is greater than 24.25 volts 0.25 volts for 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE WIRING AND HARNESS CONNECTORS
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 3
2.
Yes
No

3.
following steps.
LX
8O - 279
Yes
No
8O - 280
LX
LX
8O - 281
When Monitored:
OCM-While the CAN bus ignition status received is RUN or signal not available, the module checks the (A106)
Fused B(+) circuit voltage input range.
Set Condition:
OCM-If the module detects that the battery voltage is less than or equal to 6.50 0.25 volts.
When Monitored:
ORC-While the CAN bus ignition status received is RUN or signal not available, the module checks the (F201)
Fused Ignition Switch Output (RUN/START) circuit and the (F214) Fused Run Relay Output (RUN only) circuit
voltage input range.
Set Condition:
ORC-If the module detects that the battery voltage is less than or equal to 6.50 0.25 volts on the (F201) or
(F214) circuits.
Possible Causes
OCM (A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT
ORC (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN/START) CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC (F214) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1.

be disconnected.
Select module and DTC type.
OCM Active
Go To 2
OCM Stored
Go To 4
ORC Active
Go To 3
ORC Stored
Go To 4
8O - 282
2.
LX
TEST THE VOLTAGE OF OCM (A106) FUSED B(+) CIRCUITS.

Measure the voltage of the (A106) Fused (B+) circuit.
Is the voltage above 6.50 0.25 volts on both circuits?
Yes
>> Replace the OCM in accordance with the service information. Perform the Occupant Classification Module System
Verification Test.
No
>> Repair the low voltage on the (A106) FUSED B(+) circuit.
3.
MEASURE THE VOLTAGE OF ORC (F214) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT AND THE (F201) FUSED
IGNITION OUTPUT RUN/START CIRCUITS
Measure the voltage of the (F214) fused Run Relay Output and (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output Run/Start circuits.
Is the voltage above 6.50 0.25 volts on both circuits?
Yes

No
>> Repair the (F214) Fused Run relay Output and/or (F201) Fused Ignition Switch output Run/Start circuits
for an open.
4.
following steps.
LX
8O - 283
Yes
No
8O - 284
LX
LX
8O - 285
When Monitored:
While the CAN bus ignition status received is RUN or signal not available, the module checks the (A106)
Fused B(+) circuit voltage input range.
Set Condition:
If the module detects that the battery voltage is greater than or equal to 24.25 0.25 volts for 10 seconds.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display active: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 4
2.
CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE TO THE OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
With the scan tool in Data Display, read OCM battery voltage.
Is the battery voltage greater than 24.25 volts 0.25 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.
Yes
No

4.
following steps.
8O - 286
LX
Yes
No
LX
B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
8O - 287
8O - 288
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition in the Run-Start position.
Set Condition:
If voltage on the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit drops below 6.0 volts.
Possible Causes
(F20) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN
(F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
OPEN FUSE (27)
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE IN THE ORC.

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 2
2.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN IN OCM.
Does the scan tool display active: B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 11
3.
INSPECT AIRBAG RUN-START FUSE

Remove the Airbag Run-Start Fuse from the rear Power Distribution Center and inspect the fuse.
Is the Run/Start fuse open?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 7
LX
4.
8O - 289
CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

Replace Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
5.
CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT RESISTANCE WITH ORC
CONNECTORS DISCONNECTED

death.
Connect the Load Tool ORC 8443-24 Adaptor to the ORC C2 connector.
(Run-Start) circuit between 844324 adaptor and ground).
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Replace
Replace
Perform
Perform
the ORC in accordance with the Service Information.

the Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8O - 290
6.
CHECK (F201) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT RESISTANCE WITH OCM C1
CONNECTOR DISCONNECTED
WARNING: If the Occupant Classification Module is dropped at

any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal
injury or death.
Yes

Replace the Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
No
>> Replace
tion.
Replace
Perform
Perform
7.
the OCM in accordance with the Service Informathe Airbag Run-Start Fuse.
ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
CHECK (F201) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Measure the voltage of the (F20) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit at the Airbag Run-Start fuse terminal (supply side).
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Repair the open (F20) Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start)

circuit.
8.
LX

Install the Airbag Load tool ORC 8443-24 adaptor to the ORC C2 connector.
LX
8O - 291
Measure the voltage of the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) Circuit between the 8443-24 connector
and ground.
Yes

Perform OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1 if DTC B210C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT
OPEN was Active in the OCM.
No
9.

Disconnect the both Occupant Classification Module (OCM) connectors.
Measure the voltage of the (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (RunStart) Circuit between the OCM connector and ground.
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Repair the open (F201) Fused Ignition Switch Output (RunStart) circuit between the OCM and the splice.
10.
VERIFY THAT DTC B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN DTC IS ACTIVE.
Reconnect both Occupant Restraints Controller (ORC) connectors.

Reconnect both Occupant Classification Module (OCM) connectors.
With the scan tool, read Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) DTCs and Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
DTCs.
Select the module displaying the active: B212C-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) in accordance with the Service Information.
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
Replace the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) in accordance with the Service Information.
8O - 292
11.
LX
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
8O - 293
B212D-IGNITION RUN ONLY INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

When Monitored:
With the ignition in the Run position.
Set Condition:
If voltage on the (F214) Fused Run Relay Output circuit drops below 6.50 0.25 volts.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE FCM RUN RELAY TROUBLE CODES
(F922) RUN RELAY CIRCUIT OPEN
FUSE 28 OPEN
(F214) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B212D-IGNITION RUN ONLY INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B212D-IGNITION RUN ONLY INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 8
2.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE FCM RUN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT DTC
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module (FCM) DTCs.
Does the scan tool display active: B2122, B2123, or B2124 DTCs?
Yes
>> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/IGNITION CONTROL - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - B2122), (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/IGNITION CONTROL - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - B2123), (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
IGNITION CONTROL - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - B2124).
No
>> Go To 3
3.
INSPECT AIRBAG RUN CIRCUIT FUSE

Remove the Airbag Run Circuit Fuse No. 28 from the Power Distribution Center and inspect the fuse.
Is the fuse open?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 6
8O - 294
4.
CHECK (F214) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT RESISTANCE
Measure the resistance of the (F214) Run Relay Output circuit between
the Airbag Run Relay Output Circuit fuse No. 28 (supply side) terminal
and ground.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

Replace Airbag Run Circuit Fuse.
5.
CHECK (F214 ) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT RESISTANCE WITH ORC C2 CONNECTOR
DISCONNECTED

death.
Connect the appropriate Load Tool ORC 8443-24 Adaptor to the ORC
connector.
Measure the resistance of the (F214) Fused Run Relay Output circuit
between 8443-24 adaptor and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the (F214) Fused Run Relay Output circuit for a
short to ground.
Replace the Airbag Run Circuit Fuse.
No

Replace the Airbag Run Circuit Fuse.
LX
LX
6.
8O - 295
CHECK (F922) RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (F922) Run Relay Output circuit at the Airbag Run Circuit fuse terminal (supply side).
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open (F922) Run Relay Output circuit.

7.
CHECK (F214) FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

Reinstall the Airbag Run Circuit Fuse.
Connect the Airbag Load Tool ORC 8443-24 Adaptor to the ORC C1
harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (F214) Fused Run Relay Output Circuit
between the 8443-24 adaptor and ground.
Yes

No
>> Repair the open (F214) Fused Run Relay Output circuit.
8.
8O - 296
LX
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
8O - 297
B2201-CALIBRATION MISMATCH
When Monitored:
With the Ignition on.
Set Condition:
This DTC will be set when the VIN stored in the PCM does not match the VIN stored in the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC does not support a stored B2201 DTC.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B2201-CALIBRATION MISMATCH IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B2201-CALIBRATION MISMATCH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Test Complete.
2.
CHECK VIN IN PCM
With the scan tool compare the VIN that is programmed into the PCM to the VIN stored in the ORC.
Does the VIN programmed into the PCM match the VIN stored in the ORC?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the service information. Ensure
the PCM is replaced with the correct vehicle line PCM.
3.
View repair.
Repair
8O - 298
LX
B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Occupant Restraint Controller will receive and monitor the VIN message from the PCM and record the VIN
if different from the last VIN.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT VIN PROGRAMMED IN PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active : B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK VIN IN PCM
With the scan tool compare the VIN that is programmed into the PCM to the VIN on the vehicle.
Does the VIN programmed into the PCM match the vehicles VIN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with Service Information.
Perform the (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1
3.
View repair.
Repair
LX

8O - 299
8O - 300
LX
When Monitored:
During power-up, the ORC and OCM monitors the CAN bus for the VIN message.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the VIN information received from the PCM is different from the stored VIN.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT VIN PROGRAMMED INTO THE PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: Troubleshoot any Ignition, Battery, Seat Weight Sensor, or OCM Internal DTCs BEFORE proceeding
NOTE: Ensure that the battery is fully charged.
Select the module and DTC type.
OCM-Active
Go To 2
OCM-Stored
Erase code with scan tool, test complete.
ORC-Active
Go To 4
ORC-Stored
Erase code with scan tool, test complete.
2.
CHECK THE VIN STORED IN THE PCM
With the scan tool, compare the VIN that is stored in the PCM to the VIN of the vehicles VIN plate.
Does the VIN stored in the PCM match the vehicles VIN?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace and Configure the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 5. Refer to (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
3.

LX
8O - 301

Does the scan tool display active: B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH?
Yes


symptoms.
4.
CHECK THE VIN STORED IN THE PCM
With the scan tool, compare the VIN that is stored in the PCM to the VIN of the vehicles VIN plate.
Does the VIN stored in the PCM match the vehicles VIN?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Replace and Configure the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the service information.
Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 5. Refer to (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
5.
View repair.
Repair
8O - 302
LX
B2207-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER INTERNAL 1

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPLACE OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER

With the scan tool, erase and read ORC DTCs.
WARNING: If the Occupant Restraint Controller is dropped at any time, it must be replaced. Failure to take
When this code is set, view repair.
Repair
Replace the Occupant Restraint Controller in accordance with the Service Information.
Perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST-VER. 1.
LX
8O - 303

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Repair
8O - 304
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Repair
LX
8O - 305
B220A-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER INTERNAL 4

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Repair
8O - 306
LX
B220B-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER FIRING STORED ENERGY

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Repair
LX
8O - 307
B220C-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER ACCELEROMETER 1 INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Repair
8O - 308
LX
B220D-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER ACCELEROMETER 2 INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Repair
LX
8O - 309
B220F-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER CONTROL DRIVER 1

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Repair
8O - 310
LX
B2210-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER CONTROL DRIVER 2

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Repair
LX
B2212-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE INTERNAL

8O - 311
8O - 312
LX
When Monitored:
While the IGN status is RUN or signal not available, while the CAN bus system voltage is between 10 and 16
volts, and during the OCS Verification Test.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the module detects an internal failure.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
PERFORM THE OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE VERIFICATION TEST
NOTE: Ensure that the passenger seat is empty.

NOTE: Ensure that all seat and strain gauge sensor bolts are properly torqued.
Turn the ignition off, wait 10 seconds and turn ignition on.
Did the DTC: B2212-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE INTERNAL reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Perform the OCS VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
2.

Does the scan tool display any active DTCs?
Yes - B2212 is ACTIVE
Replace the Occupant Classification Module in accordance with the service information.
Yes - other DTCs ACTIVE
symptoms.
No
LX
8O - 313
B223B-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Front Control Module sends a message to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) that the vehicle is not
equipped with an Occupant Classification Module (OCM) but the ORC is receiving OCM messages over the
Can B bus.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC B223B-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: B223B-VEHICLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
COMPARE STORED VINS IN THE PCM AND ORC
With the scan tool, read and record the VIN that is stored in the PCM.
With the scan tool, read and record the VIN that is stored in the ORC.
Do the VINs stored in the PCM and ORC match?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the Service Information.
Ensure the PCM is replaced with the correct VIN.
3.
View repair.
Repair
8O - 314
LX
B223D-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE DTC PRESENT

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the ORC receives a bus message with the active OCM DTC Present bit set.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE DTC IN OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE OR STORED DTC
With the scan tool, read the OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER active DTCs.
Is the B223D-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE DTC active?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> With the scan tool, perform the ORC VERIFICATION TEST VER-1.
2.
ACTIVE DTC IN OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
With the scan tool, read the OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE active DTCs.
Are there any active DTC present?
Yes
>> Refer to the symptom list for problems related to the OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE (OCM).
No
>> Go To 3
3.
Repair
LX
U0019-CAN B BUS
MS-CAN B D54 AND D55
8O - 315
8O - 316
LX

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open, shorted to voltage, or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE U0019 CAN B BUS DTC IN FRONT CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY DTC U0019-CAN B BUS IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: U0019-CAN B BUS?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> If the DTC is stored, check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for
chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also, inspect the related connectors for broken,
bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.
Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
2.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE CAN B BUS RELATED DTCS IN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE (FCM)
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module (FCM) DTCs
Does the scan tool display any active: CAN B BUS related DTCs?
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Disconnect the Front Control Module (FCM) C1 connector.
Front Control Module C1 connector and the ORC C2 connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
CHECK (D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Front Control Module C1 connector and the ORC C2 connector.
Yes

No

8O - 317
8O - 318
MS-CAN B D54 AND D55
LX
LX
8O - 319

When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus (-) circuit is open, shorted to voltage, or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE U0020 CAN B BUS DTC IN OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY DTC U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE IS ACTIVE

Does the scan tool display active: U0020-CAN B BUS OFF PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> If the DTC is stored, check for an intermittent condition by inspecting the related wiring harness for
chafed, pierced, pinched, and partially broken wires. Also, inspect the related connectors for broken,
bent, pushed out, spread, corroded, or contaminated terminals.
Perform ORC VERIFICATION TEST VER 1.
2.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE CAN B BUS RELATED DTCS IN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE (FCM)
With the scan tool, read Front Control Module (FCM) DTCs
Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
No
>> Go To 3
8O - 320
3.

Disconnect the Front Control Module (FCM) C1 connector.
Front Control Module C1 connector and the OCM C1 connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
CHECK (D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Front Control Module C1 connector and the OCM C1 connector.
Yes

No

LX
LX
8O - 321
U0022-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT LOW

test procedure.
U0023-CAN B BUS (+) CIRCUIT HIGH

test procedure.
U0026-CAN B BUS (-) CIRCUIT HIGH

test procedure.
U0121-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

CONTROL MODULE
test procedure.
U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.

(ORC)
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

8O - 322
LX
test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.
LX
8O - 323
U0170-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR
8O - 324
LX

When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Front Left Impact Sensor over
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Front Left Impact Sensor do not establish and maintain valid data communications.
Possible Causes
(R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC U0170-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: U0170-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT LEFT SATELLITE
ACCELERATION SENSOR?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
CHECK THE (R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT
TO BATTERY

Disconnect the Front Left Impact Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal circuit and (R81) Sensor Ground circuit at the Front Left Impact Sensor
Yes
>> Repair the (R79, R81) Front Left Impact Sensor circuits for
a short to battery.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE (R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance of the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor Signal
circuit between the Front Left Impact Sensor connector and ground.
Yes
a short to ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
8O - 325
CHECK THE (R79, R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R79) Front Left Impact Sensor
Signal and (R81) Sensor Ground circuits at the Front Left Impact Sensor connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (R79, R81) Front Left Impact Sensor circuits
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 326
5.
CHECK THE (R81) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Control Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (R81) Front Left Impact Sensor 1 Ground circuit
6.
CHECK THE (R79) FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
LX
LX
7.
8O - 327
CHECK OPERATION OF THE FRONT LEFT IMPACT SENSOR
Replace the Front Left Impact Sensor.

Did the active Front Left Impact Sensor DTC return?
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Repair
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 328
LX
U0171-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR
LX
8O - 329

When Monitored:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) continuously communicates with the Front Right Impact Sensor over
Set Condition:
This code will set, if the ORC and the Front Right Impact Sensor do not establish and maintain valid data
communications.
Possible Causes
(R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
(R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ORC, FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC U0171-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: U0171-LOST COMMUNICATION W/UP-FRONT RIGHT SATELLITE
ACCELERATION SENSOR?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
CHECK THE (R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR A
SHORT TO BATTERY

Disconnect the Right Front Impact Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor Signal circuit and (R82) Sensor Ground circuit at the Front Right Impact Sensor
Yes
>> Repair the (R80 and R82) Front Right Impact Sensor circuits for a short to battery.
No
>> Go To 3
8O - 330
3.
CHECK THE (R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

circuit between the Front Right Impact Sensor connector and ground.
Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (R80, R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure the resistance between the (R80) Front Right Impact Sensor
Signal and (R82) Sensor Ground circuits at the Front Right Impact Sensor connector.
Yes
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8O - 331
CHECK THE (R82) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (R82) Front Right Impact Sensor Ground
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the (R82) Front Right Impact Sensor 2 Ground circuit for an open or high resistance.
6.
CHECK THE (R80) FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR HIGH RESISTANCE
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
8O - 332
7.
LX
CHECK OPERATION OF THE FRONT RIGHT IMPACT SENSOR
Replace the Front Right Impact Sensor.

Did the active Front Right Impact Sensor DTC return?
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Repair
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
8O - 333
U0172-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR

1
8O - 334
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC U0172-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1
IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: U0172-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
TO BATTERY

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
8O - 335
CHECK THE (R13, R15) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
1 connector.
Yes
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 336
5.
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
LX
LX
7.
8O - 337

Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Repair
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 338
LX
U0173-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR

2
LX
8O - 339

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC U0173-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2
IS ACTIVE

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: U0173-LOST COMMUNICATION W/LEFT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
TO BATTERY

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8O - 340
3.

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
CHECK THE (R17, R19) LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
2 connector.
Yes
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8O - 341
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
8O - 342
7.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Repair
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
U0175-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR 1
8O - 343
8O - 344
LX

When Monitored:
signal.
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT DTC U0175-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR
1

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display active: U0175-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
SHORT TO BATTERY

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
8O - 345
Yes
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
8O - 346
5.
RESISTANCE
Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
LX
LX
7.
8O - 347

Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Repair
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
8O - 348
U0176-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR 2
LX
LX
8O - 349

When Monitored:
signal.
Set Condition:
communications.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY ACTIVE DTC U0176-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION

SENSOR 2

be disconnected.
Does the scan tool display an active: U0176-LOST COMMUNICATION W/RIGHT SIDE SATELLITE ACCELERATION SENSOR 2?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
SHORT TO BATTERY

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8O - 350
3.
Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
Yes
shorted together.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
8O - 351
RESISTANCE
Controller C2 connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
8O - 352
7.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
View Repair
Repair
9.
following steps.
Yes
No
LX
8O - 353

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
8O - 354
*DIAGNOSIS AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURE FOR SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS
LX
LX
1.
8O - 355
VERIFY COMPLAINT

Move the front passenger seat to the full rear position. Verify that the seat is empty, the seat back is in the normal
upright position, and that the seat is not interfering with any interior components.
Verify that all related connectors are properly seated and locked.
With the scan tool in OCM, select Data Display and note the Passenger Seat Weight Sensor voltage for all four
sensors (Left Front, Right Front, Left Rear and Right Rear).
Move the front passenger seat to the mid track position.
Using the scan tool, note the Passenger Seat Weight Sensor voltage for all four sensors.
Move the front passenger seat to the full forward position.
Using the scan tool, note the Passenger Seat Weight Sensor voltage for all four sensors. The voltage should be
from 1.4 to 3.6 volts for each sensor in each position (full rear, mid track, and full forward).
Is any sensors voltage reading out of the acceptable range in any position?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Perform test B1BA7 Occupant Classification System Verification Required. If the test passes, the seat
weight sensing system is working properly. Return to the procedure that directed you to this procedure.
2.
CHECKING FOR BENT FLOOR PAN

Loosen all of the mounting screws retaining the front passenger seat to the vehicle crossmembers, but do not
remove them. Verify that the seat is loose and that no binding exists between the seat and the crossmembers.
Move the front passenger seat to the full rear position and then to the full forward position.
Tighten all of the mounting screws to specification. Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS.
Move the front passenger seat to the full rear position.
Move the front passenger seat to the mid track position.
Move the front passenger seat to the full forward position.
from 1.4 to 3.6 volts for each sensor in each position.
Is any sensors voltage reading out of the acceptable range in any position?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Perform test B1BA7 Occupant Classification System Verification Required. If the test passes, the seat
weight sensing system is working properly. Return to the procedure that directed you to this procedure.
8O - 356
3.
LX
CHECKING SEAT TO RISER STRESS

Loosen all of the mounting screws retaining the front passenger seat track to the riser, but do not remove them.
Verify that the seat track is loose and that no binding exists between the seat track and the risers.
from 1.5 to 3.5 volts for each sensor.
Is any sensors voltage reading out of the acceptable range?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Visually inspect for damaged or bent risers and crossmembers. Also, verify that the riser holes line up
with the seat mounts in the crossmembers.
If riser damage is apparent, replace the risers in accordance with the Service Information. Then, reinstall
the Seat Weight Sensors, and Go To 6.
If crossmember or floorpan damage is present, repair or replace the components as necessary in accordance with the Service Information. Reinstall the seat in the vehicle in accordance with the Service
Information. Turn the ignition on. With the scan tool in OCM, select More Options, select System Tests,
and select Occupant Classification Module System Verification Test. Run the test by following the directions displayed on the scan tool. When the test is complete, Go To 1.
4.
TEST SEAT FRAME

Remove the front passenger seat from the risers in accordance with the Service Information. Return the risers to
their normal mounting position.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Visually inspect for damaged or bent risers, a damaged or bent seat and seat structure, and damaged
or bent seat tracks. Also, verify that the holes in the center of the sensors line up with the seat track
holes and that the seat track position locating tabs are locked in the same parallel slots. If riser damage
is apparent, replace the risers in accordance with the Service Information. Then, reinstall the Seat
Weight Sensors, and Go To 6.
If seat or seat track damage is present, replace the components as necessary in accordance with the
Service Information. Then, Go To 7
LX
5.
8O - 357
TEST SENSOR

Loosen the mounting screws of all of the Seat Weight Sensors, but do not remove them. Verify that the sensors are
loose and that no binding exists between the sensors and the risers.
Yes
>> Replace any Seat Weight Sensors that have an unacceptable voltage reading in accordance with the
Service Information. Then, Go To 6.
No
>> Replace the risers in accordance with the Service Information. Then, reinstall the Seat Weight Sensors,
and Go To 6
6.
CHECKING FOR IMPROPER SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR TORQUE

Tighten all of the Seat Weight Sensor mounting screws to specification. Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS.
Yes
>> Loosen the mounting screws of all Seat Weight Sensors with an unacceptable voltage reading, and
repeat Steps 5 and 6.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
TEST SEAT TRACKS

Mount the front passenger seat on the risers in accordance with service information.
Yes
>> Replace the seat track in accordance with the Service Information. Verify that no binding exists between
the seat and risers. Then, repeat Steps 6 and 7.
No
>>
Reinstall the seat in the vehicle in accordance with the Service Information. Turn the ignition on. With
the scan tool in OCM, select More Options, select System Tests, and select Occupant Classification
Module System Verification Test. Run the test by following the instructions displayed by the scan tool.
When the test is complete, Go To 1
8O - 358
*OCS VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1
LX
LX
8O - 359
1.
1. Remove any special tools or jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components - except the
Battery.
WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, TURN THE IGNITION ON THEN RECONNECT THE
BATTERY.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector - use the most current software available.
3. With the scan tool to erase stored DTCs in all airbag system modules.
4. Turn the ignition off, and wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on.
5. Wait one minute, and read active codes and if there are none present read the stored codes.
6. Note: Read the DTCs in all airbag system related modules.
7. If the scan tool shows any active or stored codes, return to the Table of Content and follow path specified for that
trouble code. If no active or stored codes are present, the repair is complete.
Are any DTCs present or is the original condition still present?
Yes
>> Repair is not complete, refer to appropriate symptom list.
No
8O - 360
LX
*ORC VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1

1.
1. Remove any special tools or jumper wires and reconnect all previously disconnected components - except the
Battery.
WARNING: TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, TURN THE IGNITION ON THEN RECONNECT THE
BATTERY.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector - use the most current software available.
3. With the scan tool to erase stored DTCs in all airbag system modules.
4. Turn the ignition off, and wait 15 seconds, then turn the ignition on.
5. Wait one minute, and read active codes and if there are none present read the stored codes.
6. Note: If equipped with Airbag On - Off switch, read the DTCs in all switch positions.
7. Note: Read the DTCs in all airbag system related modules.
8. If the scan tool shows any active or stored codes, return to the Table of Contents and follow path specified for
that trouble code. If no active or stored codes are present, the repair is complete.
Are any DTCs present or is the original condition still present?
Yes
>> Repair is not complete, refer to appropriate symptom list.
No
LX
8O - 361
U1414-IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING ECU CONFIGURATION DATA

When Monitored:
With the ignition on. The ORC on board diagnostics continuously monitors the CAN Bus message from the
FCM containing the ORC Configuration Data.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the appropriate CAN Bus message is not received by the ORC.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
FRONT CONTROL MODULE FAILURE

Does the scan tool display any Front Control Module DTCs?
Yes
>> Select appropriate symptom from Symptom List. Repair all FCM active DTCs and before diagnosing the
ORC DTCs.
No
Perform the *AIRBAG SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
8O - 362
LX
U1415-IMPLAUSIBLE/MISSING VEHICLE CONFIGURATION DATA

When Monitored:
With the ignition on. The ORC on board diagnostics loads the ORC Configuration Data from the FCM CAN
Bus message.
Set Condition:
This DTC will set if the CAN Bus message was received but the information is invalid or corrupt.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
the proper precautions can result in accidental airbag deployment and personal injury or death.
Disconnect the ORC harness connector(s).
Repair
Perform the *AIRBAG SYSTEM VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1.
RESTRAINTS - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX
8O - 363

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
AIRBAG SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
STANDARD PROCEDURE
HANDLING AIRBAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
SERVICE AFTER AN AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT . 369
HANDLING NON-DEPLOYED
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
SPECIFICATIONS
RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
CLOCKSPRING
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
STANDARD PROCEDURE
CLOCKSPRING CENTERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
CURTAIN AIRBAG
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
DRIVER AIRBAG
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
DRIVER AIRBAG TRIM COVER
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTER
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
IMPACT SENSOR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
PASSENGER AIRBAG
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
SEAT BELT AND RETRACTOR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
SEAT BELT BUCKLE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
SEAT BELT TENSIONER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
8O - 364
LX

DESCRIPTION
The Occupant Restraint System include both active and passive types. Active restraints are those which require the
vehicle occupants to take some action to employ, such as fastening a seat belt; while passive restraints require no
action by the vehicle occupants to be employed.
ACTIVE RESTRAINTS
The active restraints include:
Front Seat Belts - Both front seating positions are equipped with three-point seat belt systems employing
lower B-pillar mounted inertia latch-type emergency locking retractors, height-adjustable upper B-pillar mounted
turning loops, a traveling lower seat belt anchor secured to the outboard side of the seat frame, and a traveling
end-release seat belt buckle secured to the inboard side of the seat frame. The driver side front seat belt
retractor includes an integral seat belt switch that detects whether the driver side front seat belt has been
fastened.
Second Row Seat Belts - All three second row seating positions are equipped with three-point seat belt systems. The outboard seating position belts employ lower C-pillar mounted inertia latch-type emergency locking
retractors, self-cinching latch plates for compatibility with child seats, fixed lower seat belt anchors secured to
the floor panel. The center position retractor is secured within the center rear seat back panel, and the fixed
lower seat belt anchor and the fixed end-release buckle are both secured to the floor panel.
Child Restraint Anchors - All vehicles are equipped with three, fixed-position, child seat upper tether anchors
for the second row seating. These upper anchors are integral to the rear shelf panel on sedans, and the back
of each second row seat back on wagons. Two lower anchors are also provided for each second row seating
position. These lower anchors are accessed from the front of the rear seat where the seat back meets the seat
cushion.
PASSIVE RESTRAINTS
The passive restraints include the following:
Dual Front Airbags - Multistage driver and front
passenger airbags are standard in this model.
This airbag system is a passive, inflatable, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and vehicles
with this equipment can be readily identified by
the SRS - AIRBAG logo molded into the driver
airbag trim cover in the center of the steering
wheel and also into the passenger airbag door
on the top of the instrument panel above the
glove box. Vehicles with the airbag system can
also be identified by the airbag indicator, which
will illuminate in the Electro-Mechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) for about seven seconds as
a bulb test each time the ignition switch is turned
to the On position. A pyrotechnic-type seat belt
tensioner is also integral to the driver and passenger front seat belt retractors to work in conjunction with the dual front airbags.
Occupant Classification System - Vehicles manufactured for sale in North America (except Mexico) also
include an Occupant Classification System (OCS) with components that are located on the front seats. These
components include an Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and four seat weight sensors on the passenger
seat, and a seat track position sensor on the driver seat. Vehicles equipped with the OCS components can be
readily identified by a passenger airbag disabled indicator located just above the radio, between the a/c outlets
on the instrument panel.
Curtain Airbags - Curtain airbags are available when it is also equipped with dual front airbags. This airbag
system is a passive, inflatable, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) and can be readily identified by a
molded identification trim button with the SRS - AIRBAG logo located on the headliner above each B-pillar.
LX
8O - 365
The supplemental restraint system includes the following major components, which are described in further
detail elsewhere in this service information:
Airbag Indicator - The airbag indicator is integral to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC), which
is located on the instrument panel in front of the driver.
Clockspring - The clockspring is located near the top of the steering column, directly beneath the steering
wheel.
Curtain Airbag - In vehicles equipped with this option, a curtain airbag is secured to each inside roof side rail,
and extends from the A-pillar to the D-pillar. The curtain airbags are concealed above the headliner trim.
Driver Airbag - The driver airbag is located in the center of the steering wheel, beneath the driver airbag trim
cover.
Driver Knee Blocker - The driver knee blocker is a structural unit secured to the back side of and integral to
the instrument panel steering column opening cover.
Front Impact Sensor - Two front impact sensors are used on vehicles equipped with dual front airbags, one
left side and one right side. One sensor is located on the back side of each vertical member of the radiator
support.
Occupant Classification Module - Vehicles equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) include
an Occupant Classification Module (OCM) which is secured to the underside of the passenger side front seat
cushion frame.
Occupant Restraint Controller - The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) is located on a mount on the floor
panel transmission tunnel in front of the transmission gear selector, and is concealed below the instrument
panel.
Passenger Airbag - The passenger airbag is located in the instrument panel, beneath the passenger airbag
door on the top of the instrument panel above the glove box on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Passenger Airbag Disabled Indicator - The Occupant Classification System (OCS) includes a passenger airbag disabled indicator which is located just above the radio in the instrument panel center stack, between the
a/c outlets.
Passenger Knee Blocker - The passenger knee blocker is a structural reinforcement that is integral to and
concealed within the glove box door.
Seat Belt Tensioner - A seat belt tensioner is integral to both front seat belt retractor units on vehicles
equipped with dual front airbags. The seat belt retractor and tensioner units are secured to the right and left
inner B-pillars and concealed beneath the lower B-pillar trim.
Seat Track Position Sensor - The Occupant Classification System (OCS) includes two seat track position
sensors. One sensor is located on the inboard side of the outboard seat adjuster track on both the driver and
the passenger front seats.
Seat Weight Sensor - Vehicles equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) include four seat
weight sensors, one on each corner of the passenger side front seat between the seat cushion frame and the
seat adjuster tracks.
Side Impact Sensor - Four side impact sensors are used on vehicles equipped with the curtain airbags, two
on each side of the vehicle. One sensor is located near each right and left side B-pillar and C-pillar concealed
behind the interior trim.
The ORC, the OCM, and the EMIC each contain a microprocessor and programming that allow them to communicate with each other using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used by
8O - 366
LX
the ORC for control of the airbag indicator in the EMIC. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/COMMUNICATION - DESCRIPTION).
OPERATION
ACTIVE RESTRAINTS
The primary passenger restraints in this or any other vehicle are the seat belts and child restraint anchors. Seat
belts and child restraint anchors are referred to as an active restraint because the vehicle occupants are required to
physically fasten and properly adjust these restraints in order to benefit from them. See the owners manual in the
vehicle glove box for more information on the features, use and operation of all of the factory-installed active
restraints.
PASSIVE RESTRAINTS
The passive restraints are referred to as a supplemental restraint system because they were designed and are
intended to enhance the protection for the occupants of the vehicle only when used in conjunction with the seat
belts. They are referred to as passive restraints because the vehicle occupants are not required to do anything to
make them operate; however, the vehicle occupants must be wearing their seat belts in order to obtain the maximum safety benefit from the factory-installed supplemental restraint system.
The supplemental restraint system electrical circuits are continuously monitored and controlled by a microprocessor
and software contained within the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). An airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical
Instrument Cluster (EMIC) illuminates for about seven seconds as a bulb test each time the ignition switch is turned
to the On or Start positions. Following the bulb test, the airbag indicator is turned on or off by the ORC to indicate
the status of the supplemental restraint system. If the airbag indicator comes on at any time other than during the
bulb test, it indicates that there is a problem in the supplemental restraint system electrical circuits. Such a problem
may cause airbags not to deploy when required, or to deploy when not required.
Deployment of the supplemental restraints depends upon the angle and severity of an impact. Deployment is not
based upon vehicle speed; rather, deployment is based upon the rate of deceleration as measured by the forces of
gravity (G force) upon the impact sensors. When an impact is severe enough, the microprocessor in the ORC signals the inflator of the appropriate airbags to deploy their cushions. The front seat belt tensioners are provided with
a deployment signal by the ORC in conjunction with the front airbags.
During a frontal vehicle impact, the knee blockers work in concert with properly fastened and adjusted seat belts to
restrain both the driver and the front seat passenger in the proper position for an airbag deployment. The knee
blockers also absorb and distribute the crash energy from the driver and the front seat passenger to the structure
of the instrument panel. The seat belt tensioners remove the slack from the front seat belts to provide further assurance that the driver and front seat passenger are properly positioned and restrained for an airbag deployment.
The airbag deployment and deflation occur very rapidly. In a typical 48 kilometer-per-hour (30 mile-per-hour) barrier
impact, from the moment of impact until the airbags are fully inflated takes about 40 milliseconds. Within one to two
seconds from the moment of impact, the airbags are almost entirely deflated. The times cited for these events are
approximations, which apply only to a barrier impact at the given speed. Actual times will vary somewhat, depending
upon the vehicle speed, impact angle, severity of the impact, and the type of collision.
When the ORC monitors a problem in any of the dual front airbag system circuits or components, including the seat
belt tensioners, it stores a fault code or Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in its memory circuit and sends an electronic message to the EMIC to turn on the airbag indicator. Proper testing of the supplemental restraint system
components, the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, the electronic message inputs to and outputs from the
EMIC or the ORC, as well as the retrieval or erasure of a DTC from the ORC or the EMIC requires the use of a
diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
See the owners manual in the vehicle glove box for more information on the features, use and operation of all of
the passive restraints.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
In vehicles equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS), the OCS automatically suppresses or enables
passenger airbag and seat belt tensioner operation based upon whether or not the passenger front seat is occupied
and, if the seat is occupied, classifies the size of the occupant and whether the seat is occupied by a child seat.
The OCS has an Occupant Classification Module (OCM) that monitors inputs from the seat weight sensors under
the passenger side front seat cushion and from the seat track position sensors on the passenger side and driver
LX
8O - 367
side seat adjuster tracks. Based upon those inputs the microprocessor within the OCM classifies the occupant of the
passenger front seat, and the proximity of each front seat to the front airbags. The OCM then sends electronic
occupant classification messages to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The microprocessor and programming of the ORC determines whether to enable or disable the deployment circuits for the passenger airbag and seat
belt tensioner; and, if enabled, what force level should be used to deploy each front airbag.
The OCS electrical circuits and components are continuously monitored by the OCM, and the OCM is continuously
monitored by the ORC. A passenger airbag disabled indicator is located in the instrument panel center stack just
above the radio, between the a/c outlets. This indicator receives battery current whenever the ignition switch is in
the On or Start positions, and illuminates only when the ORC pulls the indicator control circuit to ground. The indicator illuminates for about seven seconds as a bulb test each time the ignition switch is turned to the On or Start
positions. Following the bulb test, the indicator is turned on or off by the ORC based upon the electronic occupant
classification messages received from the OCM. This indicator is illuminated whenever the seat is occupied and
passenger airbag and seat belt tensioner operation has been suppressed, and is turned off whenever the seat is
empty or when the seat is occupied and the passenger airbag and seat belt tensioner are enabled.
When the OCM monitors a problem in any of the OCS circuits or components, it stores a fault code or DTC in its
memory circuit and sends an electronic message to the ORC. The ORC then sends an electronic message to the
Electro-Mechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) to turn on the airbag indicator. If for any reason the OCM is unable to
classify the occupant it sends an electronic message to the ORC, and the ORC suppresses passenger airbag and
seat belt tensioner operation. Proper testing of the OCS components, the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus,
the electronic message inputs to and outputs from the OCM, the EMIC or the ORC, as well as the retrieval or
erasure of a DTC from the OCM, the ORC or the EMIC requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
See the owners manual in the vehicle glove box for more information on the features, use and operation of the
OCS.
WARNING
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable before beginning any airbag system component diagnosis, testing, removal, or installation procedures. Allow system capacitor to discharge for two minutes before
beginning any component service. This will disable the airbag system. Failure to disable the airbag system
may result in accidental airbag deployment, personal injury, or death.
Do not place an intact undeployed airbag face down on a solid surface. The airbag will propel into the air
if accidentally deployed and may result in personal injury or death.
When carrying or handling an undeployed airbag, the trim side (face) of the airbag should be pointing
towards the body to minimize possibility of injury if accidental deployment occurs. Failure to do this may
result in personal injury or death.
Replace airbag system components with MoparT replacement parts. Substitute parts may appear interchangeable, but internal differences may result in inferior occupant protection. Failure to do so may result
in occupant personal injury or death.
Wear safety glasses, rubber gloves, and long sleeved clothing when cleaning powder residue from vehicle
after an airbag deployment. Powder residue emitted from a deployed airbag can cause skin irritation. Flush
affected area with cool water if irritation is experienced. If nasal or throat irritation is experienced, exit the
vehicle for fresh air until the irritation ceases. If irritation continues, see a physician.
Do not use a replacement airbag that is not in the original packaging. This may result in improper deployment, personal injury, or death.
The factory installed fasteners, screws and bolts used to fasten airbag components have a special coating
and are specifically designed for the airbag system. Do not use substitute fasteners. Use only original
equipment fasteners listed in the parts catalog when fastener replacement is required.
During, and following, any child restraint anchor service, due to impact event or vehicle repair, carefully
inspect all mounting hardware, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. If a
child restraint anchor is found damaged in any way, the anchor must be replaced. Failure to do this may
result in personal injury or death.
Deployed and nondeployed airbags may or may not have live pyrotechnic material within the airbag inflator.
Do not dispose of driver/passenger/curtain airbags or seat belt tensioners unless you are sure of complete
deployment. Refer to the Hazardous Substance Control System for proper disposal. Dispose of deployed
airbags and tensioners consistent with state, provincial, local, and federal regulations.
8O - 368
LX
After any airbag component testing or service, do not connect the battery negative cable (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM) Personal injury or death may result if
the system test is not performed first.
If the vehicle is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS), do not connect the battery negative cable before performing the OCS Verification test using the scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic
information. Personal injury or death may result if the system test is not performed properly.
Never replace both the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and the Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
at the same time. If both require replacement, replace one, then perform the airbag system test (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM) before replacing the other.
Both the ORC and the OCM store OCS calibration data, which they transfer to one another when one of
them is replaced. If both are replaced at the same time, an irreversible fault will be set in both modules and
the OCS may malfunction and result in personal injury or death.
If both require replacement, replace one, then perform the airbag system test (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
RESTRAINTS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM) before replacing the other. Failure to do this
may result in personal injury or death.
If equipped with OCS, the seat weight sensor is a sensitive, calibrated unit and must be handled carefully.
Do not drop or handle roughly. If dropped or damaged, replace with another sensor. Failure to do so may
result in occupant injury or death.
If equipped with OCS, the front passenger seat must be handled carefully as well. When removing the seat,
be careful when setting on floor not to drop. If dropped, the sensor may be inoperative, could result in
occupant injury, or possibly death.
If equipped with OCS, when the passenger front seat is on the floor, no one should sit in the front passenger seat. This uneven force may damage the sensing ability of the seat weight sensors. If sat on and damaged, the sensor may be inoperative, could result in occupant injury, or possibly death.

AIRBAG SYSTEM
1. With the battery negative cable disconnected, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, then exit vehicle with the scan tool.
3. After checking that no one is inside the vehicle, connect the battery negative remote terminal.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Read and record the ACTIVE Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) data.
Read and record any STORED DTCs.
Refer to the proper diagnostic information if any DTCs are found in Step 4 and Step 5.
If the airbag warning lamp either fails to light, or goes ON and stays ON, there is a system malfunction. To test
the airbag warning lamp (bulb) operation in the cluster (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for any other system problems.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
HANDLING AIRBAGS
DEPLOYED AIRBAG
WARNING: The vehicle interior may contain a very small amount of powder, a by-product of airbag deployment. This powder can irritate the skin, eyes, nose and throat. Wear safety glasses, rubber gloves, and long
sleeved clothing when cleaning any of the powder residue from the vehicle. If you find that the cleanup is
irritating your skin, run cool water over the affected area. Also, if you experience nasal or throat irritation,
exit the vehicle for fresh air until the irritation ceases. If irritation continues, see a physician.
LX
8O - 369
UNDEPLOYED AIRBAG
WARNING: The airbags must be stored in its original special container until used for service. At no time
should a source of electricity be permitted near the inflator on the back of an airbag. When carrying or
handling an undeployed airbag, the trim side of the airbag should be pointing toward the body to minimize
the possibility of personal injury or death if accidental deployment occurs. Do not place undeployed airbag
face down on a solid surface, the airbag will propel into the air if accidental deployment occurs.
SERVICE AFTER AN AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT

DRIVER AIRBAG
After a Driver Airbag has been deployed due to a collision, the following MUST be replaced:
Driver Airbag
Clockspring Assembly
Steering Wheel
Complete Steering Column Assembly w/Lower Steering Column Coupler
All other airbag and vehicle components should be closely inspected following any airbag deployment, and should
be replaced when visible damage is incurred.
WARNING: Do not connect the battery negative cable (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM). Personal injury or death may result if the system test is not performed
first.
PASSENGER AIRBAG
After a Passenger Airbag has been deployed due to a collision. the following MUST be replaced:
Passenger Airbag
Instrument Panel Top Pad Assembly
first.
CURTAIN AIRBAG
After a Curtain Airbag has been deployed due to a collision, the following MUST be replaced:
Curtain Airbag Assembly
Headliner
A, B, and C-Pillar Trim on deployed side.
first.
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (OCS)

After an impact event, either front, rear, or side, the OCS system components need to be inspected and replaced if
found to be damaged.
This includes:
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
Passenger Airbag Disabled Indicator
8O - 370
LX
Seat Weight Sensor

WARNING: Never replace both the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and the Occupant Classification
Module (OCM) at the same time. If both require replacement, replace one, then perform the Airbag System
test (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM) before replacing the other. Both the ORC and the OCM store Occupant Classification System (OCS) calibration data,
which they transfer to one another when one of them is replaced. If both are replaced at the same time, an
irreversible fault will be set in both modules and the OCS may malfunction and result in personal injury or
death.
Whether replaced or not, the OCS must be re-zeroed to make sure that the system in within proper parameters to
sense the occupants weight correctly.
first.
WARNING: Following successful completion of the Airbag System test procedure, the Occupant Classification System Verification Test must be done using a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
Personal injury or death may result if the system test is not performed.
SEAT BELTS AND TENSIONERS

After a frontal impact where an airbag has been deployed due to a collision, the following MUST be replaced:
Front Seat Belt and Retractor (driver and passenger) with integral Tensioners.
first.
All other seat belts should be closely inspected for cuts, tears, fraying, or damage in any way following any frontal
impact or airbag deployment. The other seat belts are to be replaced when visible damage is incurred. Inspect the
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) child restraint anchors for damage after an impact event and
replace as needed.
CLEAN UP PROCEDURE
Roll or fold the airbag towards its mounting point (i.e.
instrument panel, steering wheel, knee blocker, curtain, or seat back). Then tape the ripped cover over
the deployed airbag if applicable.
Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any residual powder
from the vehicle interior. Work from the outside in to
avoid kneeling or sitting in a contaminated area. Vacuum the heater and A/C outlets as well. If the heater
or air conditioner was in RECIRC mode at time of airbag deployment, operate blower motor on low speed
and vacuum powder residue expelled from the heater
and A/C outlets. Multiple vacuum cleaning may be
necessary to decontaminate the interior of the vehicle.
HANDLING NON-DEPLOYED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTS

At no time should any source of electricity be permitted near the inflator on the back of a non-deployed airbag or
seat belt tensioner. When carrying a non-deployed airbag, the trim cover or airbag cushion side of the unit should
be pointed away from the body to minimize injury in the event of an accidental deployment. If the airbag unit is
placed on a bench or any other surface, the trim cover or airbag cushion side of the unit should be face up to
minimize movement in the event of an accidental deployment.
LX
8O - 371
When handling a non-deployed seat belt tensioner, take proper care to keep fingers out from under the retractor
cover and away from the seat belt webbing where it exits from the retractor cover. In addition, the supplemental
restraint system should be disarmed whenever any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, airbag,
impact sensor, or instrument panel components require diagnosis or service. Failure to observe this warning could
result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury.
All damaged, faulty or non-deployed airbags and seat belt tensioners which are replaced on vehicles are to be
handled and disposed of properly. If an airbag or seat belt tensioner unit is faulty or damaged and non-deployed,
refer to the Hazardous Substance Control System for proper disposal. Dispose of all non-deployed and deployed
airbags and seat belt tensioners in a manner consistent with state, provincial, local and federal regulations.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT STORAGE

Airbags and seat belt tensioners must be stored in their original, special container until they are used for service.
Also, they must be stored in a clean, dry environment; away from sources of extreme heat, sparks, and high electrical energy. Always place or store any airbag on a surface with its trim cover or airbag cushion side facing up, to
minimize movement in case of an accidental deployment.
SPECIFICATIONS
RESTRAINTS
DESCRIPTION
N-m
Ft. Lbs.
In. Lbs.
Curtain airbag inflator to C/D-pillar bolt
11
97
Curtain airbag roof side rail retaining screws
44
Driver airbag retaining bolts
10
89
Front seat belt anchor nut
37
27.5
328
Front seat belt buckle retaining nut
43
31.5
381
Front seat belt guide retaining screw
27
Front seat belt height adjuster retaining bolts
32
23.5
283
Front seat belt retractor retaining bolt
32
23.5
283
Front seat belt turning loop retaining bolt
40
30
354
Impact sensor retaining screws
62
Left and right side passenger airbag mounting screws
27
Occupant classification module retaining screws
18
Occupant restraint controller retaining screws
11
97
Passenger airbag mounting bolts
12
106
Rear center seat belt retractor anchor nut
34
25
301
Rear seat belt anchor bolt
32
23.5
283
Rear seat belt buckle retaining nut
34
25
301
Rear seat belt turning loop retaining bolt
40
29.5
354
Seat weight sensor - adjuster to riser center retaining nut
45
33
398
Seat weight sensor to seat riser nuts
40
29.5
354
Sedan - Rear center seat belt retractor retaining nut
34
25
301
Sedan - Rear seat belt retractor retaining bolt
32
23
283
Wagon - Rear seat belt retractor retaining bolt
34
25
301
Wagon - Rear center seat belt retractor retaining nut
34
25
301
8O - 372
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHOR

DESCRIPTION
The Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren, or LATCH
child restraint anchorage system provides for the
installation of suitable child restraints in certain seating
positions without using the seat belt provided for that
seating position. The second row seats are equipped
with a fixed-position child restraint upper tether anchor
for both the center and the two outboard seating positions, and child restraint lower anchors for all three
seating positions.
The three upper tether anchors are integral to the rear

shelf panel on sedans and the seat back frame on
wagons. These anchors are each constructed from a
heavy-gauge steel wire loop. The child restraint upper
tether anchors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if
faulty or damaged, they must be replaced.
The lower anchors (1) are permanently mounted to

the rear floor pan beneath the seat. These anchors
are also constructed from a heavy-gauge steel wire
loop welded to the floor pan. They are each accessed
from the front of their respective seats, at each side
where the seat back meets the seat cushion. These
lower anchors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if
faulty or damaged, they must be replaced as a unit.
LX
LX
8O - 373
OPERATION
See the owners manual in the vehicle glove box for more information on the proper use of all of the factory-installed
child restraint anchors.
8O - 374
CLOCKSPRING
DESCRIPTION
The clockspring assembly is secured with three
screws (1) onto the top of the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE DESCRIPTION) near the top of the steering column
behind the steering wheel.
The clockspring consists of a flat, round molded plastic case. Within the plastic case is a spool-like molded
plastic rotor with a hub. The surface of the rotor hub
has a large center hole. Within the plastic case and
wound around the rotor spool is a long ribbon-like
tape that consists of several thin copper wire leads
sandwiched between two thin plastic membranes. The
outer end of the tape terminates at the connector terminals that align themselves into the SCCM self-docking connector that faces the instrument panel, while
the inner end of the tape terminates at the pigtail
wires and connector receptacles on the hub of the
clockspring rotor that face the steering wheel.
LX
LX
8O - 375
Service replacement clocksprings are shipped precentered and with the screws backed out and holding
the clockspring into place. If reusing a clockspring or
installing a new one that you are unsure if it is centered or not, (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCKSPRING
STANDARD
PROCEDURE - CLOCKSPRING CENTERING).
The clockspring cannot be repaired. If the clockspring
is faulty, damaged, or if the driver airbag has been
deployed, the clockspring must be replaced.
OPERATION
The clockspring is a mechanical electrical circuit component that is used to provide continuous electrical continuity
between the fixed instrument panel wire harness and the electrical components mounted on or in the rotating steering wheel. On this model the rotating electrical components include the:
Driver Airbag
Horn Switch
Steering Wheel Switches (if the vehicle is so equipped)
The clockspring case is positioned and secured to Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) mounting housing near
the top of the steering column. The connector terminals on the tail of the fixed clockspring case connect the clockspring to the vehicle electrical system through the self-docking connector in the instrument panel wire harness.
The clockspring rotor is movable and is keyed to the steering column shaft that is molded onto the rotor hub. The
lobe on the turn signal cancel cam on the lower surface of the clockspring rotor hub contact a turn signal cancel
actuator of the multi-function switch to provide automatic turn signal cancellation.
Two short, yellow-sleeved pigtail wires on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor connect the clockspring to the
multistage driver airbag, while a steering wheel wire harness connects the two connector receptacles on the upper
surface of the clockspring rotor to the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector and, if the vehicle is so equipped, to
the optional steering wheel switches on the steering wheel.
Like the clockspring in a timepiece, the clockspring tape has travel limits and can be damaged by being wound too
tightly during full stop-to-stop steering wheel rotation. To prevent this from occurring, the clockspring is centered
when it is installed on the steering column. Centering the clockspring indexes the clockspring tape to the movable
steering components so that the tape can operate within its designed travel limits. However, if the clockspring is
removed from the steering column or if the steering shaft is disconnected from the steering gear, the clockspring
spool can change position relative to the movable steering components. The clockspring must be re-centered following completion of this service or the tape may be damaged.
8O - 376
LX
Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered. The screws that retain the clockspring to the SCCM
should not be removed until the clockspring has been installed on the SCCM. If the screws have been removed
before the clockspring is installed on the SCCM, the clockspring centering procedure must be performed (Refer to
8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/CLOCKSPRING - STANDARD PROCEDURE - CLOCKSPRING CENTERING).
The clockspring is located within the SCCM. If the clockspring has to be replaced (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE - DISASSEMBLY).
STANDARD PROCEDURE
CLOCKSPRING CENTERING
If the rotating tape (wire coil) in the clockspring is not
positioned properly with the steering wheel and the
front wheels, the clockspring may fail. The following
procedure MUST BE USED to center the clockspring
if it is not known to be properly positioned, or if the
front wheels were moved from the straight ahead position.
NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain
to turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position.
1. Position steering wheel and front wheels straight
ahead.
2. Remove the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN
CONTROL MODULE - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the clockspring (Refer to 19 - STEERING/
COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE - DISASSEMBLY).
4. The clockspring can rotate approximately 5 3/4
turns from lock to lock. To be properly centered,
rotate the clockspring rotor clockwise until the rotor
stops. Do not apply excessive force.
5. From the end of travel, rotate the rotor counterclockwise two turns and then keep going a little
more until the wires end up on the right side of the
column shaft (at the 3 oclock position).
LX
6. Install the SCCM (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN/STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE INSTALLATION)
WARNING: Do not connect the battery negative
cable (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING). Personal injury or
death may result if the system test is not performed properly.
8O - 377
8O - 378
LX
CURTAIN AIRBAG
DESCRIPTION
Curtain airbags are available when also equipped with
dual front airbags. These airbags are passive, inflatable, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components, and can be readily identified by a molded
identification trim button with the SRS - AIRBAG logo
located near the top of each upper B-pillar trim panel.
This system is designed to reduce injuries to the vehicle occupants in the event of a side impact collision.
Curtain airbags have two individually controlled curtain

airbags. These airbags are concealed and mounted
above the headliner where they are each secured to
one of the roof side rails. Each folded airbag cushion
extends along the roof rail from the A-pillar at the front
of the vehicle to the D-pillar at the rear of the vehicle.
The airbag cushion is initially secured during installation with plastic push-in fasteners to the roof rail.
A long tether extends down the A-pillar from the front

of the airbag cushion. A short tether is secured near
the top of the D-pillar.
The hybrid-type inflator for each airbag is secured to
the roof rail at the rear of airbag, back by the C and
D-pillars. The entire assembly is secured to the inside
of the roof rail with screws.
An airbag squib harness connector is routed up to the
rear of the airbag inflator. The body harness then connects the curtain airbag to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
The curtain airbag cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if deployed, faulty, or in any way damaged.
Once a curtain airbag has been deployed, the complete airbag, the headliner, the upper A, B, C and D-pillar trim,
and all other visibly damaged components must be replaced.
LX
8O - 379
OPERATION
Each curtain airbag is deployed individually by an electrical signal generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) to which it is connected through squib circuits. The hybrid-type inflator assembly for each airbag contains a
small canister of highly compressed inert gas. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signal to the airbag inflator, the electrical energy creates enough heat to ignite chemical pellets within the inflator.
Once ignited, these chemicals burn rapidly and produce the pressure necessary to rupture a containment disk in the
inert gas canister. The inflator and inert gas canister are sealed and connected to a tubular manifold so that all of
the released gas is directed into the folded curtain airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the airbag
cushion inflates it will drop down from the roof rail between the edge of the headliner and the side glass/body pillars
to form a curtain-like cushion to protect the vehicle occupants during a side impact collision.
The front and rear tethers keep the airbag cushion taut to the side of the vehicle, thus ensuring that the bag will
deploy in the proper position. Following the airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the
inert gas through the loose weave of the cushion fabric, and the deflated cushion hangs down loosely from the roof
rail.
REMOVAL
NOTE: The sedan and wagon curtain airbags are mounted similar and are removed the same way.
2. Remove the headliner from the vehicle (Refer to 23
- BODY/INTERIOR/HEADLINER - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the curtain airbag squib connector (2)
from the inflator (3).
4. Remove the screws (1) that secure the curtain airbag to the spring nuts in the roof side rail.
8O - 380
LX
5. Remove the push pin and unclip the front tether (2)
from the A-pillar (1).
6. Remove the bolt (2) holding the inflator to the

C/D-pillar.
7. The curtain airbag will be held in place with push pins. Release the push pins and remove bag from vehicle.
LX
8O - 381
INSTALLATION
NOTE: The sedan and wagon curtain airbags are mounted similar and are removed the same way.
1. Position the curtain airbag in vehicle along roof side rail and install by fastening to roof side rail with integral push
fasteners.
2. Install the bolt (2) holding the inflator to the C/Dpillar. Torque bolt to 11 Nm (97 in. lbs.).
8O - 382
LX
3. Clip the front tether (2) to the A-pillar (1) and install
push fastener.
4. Install the screws (1) that secure the curtain airbag to the spring nuts in the roof side rail. Torque screws to 5
Nm (44 in. lbs.).
5. Connect the curtain airbag squib connector (2) to
the inflator (3).
6. Install the headliner into the vehicle (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/HEADLINER - INSTALLATION).
cable (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM).
Personal injury or death may result if the system
test is not performed first.
LX
DRIVER AIRBAG
DESCRIPTION
The driver airbag used in this model is a multistage,
Next Generation-type that complies with revised federal airbag standards to deploy with less force than
those used in some prior models. A radial deploying
fabric cushion with internal tethers is used. The airbag
inflator is a dual-initiator, non-azide, pyrotechnic-type
unit with four mounting studs and is secured to the
stamped metal airbag housing by four flanged hex
nuts. Two keyed and color-coded connector receptacles on the driver airbag inflator connect the two inflator initiators to the vehicle electrical system through
two yellow-jacketed, two-wire pigtail harnesses of the
clockspring.
The driver airbag unit cannot be repaired, and must
be replaced if deployed or in any way damaged. The
driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit may be
disassembled from the driver airbag unit, and is available for separate service replacement.
The driver airbag protective trim cover (1) is the most
visible part of the driver airbag. The driver airbag is
located in the center of the steering wheel (1), where
it is secured with two screws to the armature of the
four-spoke steering wheel. Concealed beneath the
driver airbag trim cover are the horn switch, the folded
airbag cushion, the airbag cushion retainer, the airbag
housing, the airbag inflator, and the retainers that
secure the inflator to the airbag housing.
The airbag cushion, housing, and inflator are secured
within the trim cover.
8O - 383
8O - 384
LX
The vertical walls of this trim cover have small windows with blocking tabs that are engaged by hook formations around the perimeter of the airbag housing.
Each hook is inserted through one of the windows and
the blocking tab in each window keeps the hook properly engaged with the trim cover, locking the trim
cover securely into place on the airbag housing.
The resistive membrane-type horn switch is secured
with heat stakes to the inside surface of the driver airbag trim cover, between the trim cover and the folded
airbag cushion.
OPERATION
The multistage driver airbag is deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
through the driver airbag squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflator. By using two initiators, the airbag can be deployed at multiple levels of force. The force level is controlled by the ORC to suit the
monitored impact conditions by providing one of three delay intervals between the electrical signals provided to the
two initiators. The longer the delay between these signals, the less forcefully the airbag will deploy.
When the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to each initiator, the electrical energy generates enough heat to
initiate a small pyrotechnic charge which, in turn ignites chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these
chemical pellets burn rapidly and produce a large quantity of inert gas. The inflator is sealed to the back of the
airbag housing and a diffuser in the inflator directs all of the inert gas into the airbag cushion, causing the cushion
to inflate. As the cushion inflates, the driver airbag trim cover will split at predetermined breakout lines, then fold
back out of the way along with the horn switch unit. Following an airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly
deflates by venting the inert gas towards the instrument panel through vent holes within the fabric used to construct
the back (steering wheel side) panel of the airbag cushion.
Some of the chemicals used to create the inert gas may be considered hazardous while in their solid state before
they are burned, but they are securely sealed within the airbag inflator. Typically, both initiators are used and all
potentially hazardous chemicals are burned during an airbag deployment event.
The inert gas that is produced when the chemicals are burned is harmless. However, a small amount of residue
from the burned chemicals may cause some temporary discomfort if it contacts the skin, eyes, or breathing passages. If skin or eye irritation is noted, rinse the affected area with plenty of cool, clean water. If breathing passages
are irritated, move to another area where there is plenty of clean, fresh air to breath. If the irritation is not alleviated
by these actions, contact a physician.
LX
8O - 385
REMOVAL
2. From behind the steering wheel (1), remove the
two screw covers and screws (5) to the driver airbag (3).
CAUTION: Do not pull on the horn switch feed pigtail wire to disengage the connector from the
driver airbag or to disconnect the horn switch to
steering wheel wire harness connection. Improper
pulling on this pigtail wire or connection can
result in damage to the horn switch membrane or
feed circuit.
3. Carefully pull airbag rearward just far enough to disconnect the two airbag squib connectors (2) and the horn
connector (4).
4. Separate driver airbag from steering column.
NOTE: The driver airbag trim cover is available for service separately. If the horn switch is faulty or the trim
cover is damaged, the airbag cushion assembly may be transferred to a new trim cover. If the airbag is
defective, the entire driver airbag and driver airbag trim cover must be replaced as an assembly.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: The driver airbag trim cover is available for
service separately. If the horn switch is faulty or
the trim cover is damaged, the airbag cushion
assembly may be transferred to a new trim cover.
If the airbag is defective, the entire driver airbag
and driver airbag trim cover must be replaced as
an assembly.
1. Position driver airbag (3) in steering wheel (1) near
mounting location.
2. Connect the two airbag squib connectors (2) and
the horn connector (4).
3. Position the driver airbag mounting screws (2) into
the driver airbag. From behind the steering wheel
(1) install the two screws (5) to the driver airbag.
Torque the two screws (5) to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.).
cable (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - AIRBAG SYSTEM). Personal injury or death may result if the system test is not
performed first.
8O - 386
LX
DRIVER AIRBAG TRIM COVER

REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not pull on the horn switch feed pigtail wire to disengage the connector from the
driver airbag or to disconnect the horn switch to
steering wheel wire harness connection. Improper
pulling on this pigtail wire or connection can
result in damage to the horn switch membrane or
feed circuit.
2. Remove the driver airbag (2) (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER
AIRBAG
REMOVAL).
3. With driver airbag removed, pick a corner and push down on the inflator (1) or latch hook mounting plate until the
latch hooks (2) push out of the driver airbag cover (3).
4. Remove driver airbag from driver airbag cover.
5. The membrane type horn switch is integral to the driver airbag trim cover. If inoperative, the entire trim cover
must be replaced.
INSTALLATION
1. Place the driver airbag into new driver airbag trim
cover. Be careful not to pinch the airbag cushion
between the latch hook mounting plate and the trim
cover.
NOTE: Make sure that the horn switch wire harness is routed through the cut-out on the side of
the trim cover and positioned in the hook on the
back of the housing. Attach connector to the
housing.
2. Push down on the latch hook mounting plate and
guide the latch hooks into the slots on the driver
airbag cover.
LX
3. Once all the latch hooks have been started, pull
the driver airbag cover away from the driver airbag
to fully seat the latch hooks.
4. Install the driver airbag (2) (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS/DRIVER AIRBAG - INSTALLATION). Torque the two screws (1) to 10 Nm (89 in.
lbs.).
8O - 387
8O - 388
FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTER

REMOVAL
1. Remove the upper turning loop (3) trim cover (2).
2. Remove the upper turning loop retaining bolt (4).
3. Remove the upper B-pillar trim (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/B-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
LX
LX
4. Remove the two bolts (1) to the seat belt height
adjuster (2).
INSTALLATION
1. Position height adjuster making sure that indexing
tab is in the proper hole.
2. Install the two mounting bolts (1). Torque bolts to
32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.).
8O - 389
8O - 390
3. Install the upper B-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/

INTERIOR/B-PILLAR TRIM - INSTALLATION).
4. Position the upper turning loop (3) and install the

retaining bolt (4). Torque bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
5. Install the upper turning loop (3) trim cover (2).
LX
LX
IMPACT SENSOR
DESCRIPTION
FRONT IMPACT SENSORS
Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this model,
one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle.
These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact
sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each front sensor is secured with two
screws (2) to the backs of the right and left vertical
members of the radiator support within the engine
compartment.
The right and left front impact sensors are identical in

construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of
the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which
includes an electronic communication chip and an
electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry
and components.
The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted
and, if damaged or faulty, they must be replaced.
SIDE IMPACT SENSORS

Four side impact sensors are used on this model
when it is equipped with the curtain airbags, two each
for the left and right sides of the vehicle. The sedan
and wagon side impact sensor locations are identical.
These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact
sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with two
screws to the inner right or left B-pillar and C-pillar
within the passenger compartment.
8O - 391
8O - 392
LX
The right and left side impact sensors are identical in

construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of
the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which
includes an electronic communication chip and an
electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry
and components.
The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted
and, if damaged or faulty, they must be replaced.
OPERATION
FRONT IMPACT SENSORS
The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides
verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip
that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the
system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through
dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit.
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors, the ORC, and the electronic message communication between the sensors and the ORC requires the use of a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
SIDE IMPACT SENSORS

The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides
verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip
that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground
through the same left or right sensor plus and minus circuits in a series arrangement from the ORC. The impact
sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit.
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors, the ORC, and the electronic message communication between the sensors and the ORC requires the use of a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
LX
REMOVAL
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
NOTE: If replacing the left front impact sensor, the
air intake system needs to be removed (Refer to 9
- ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the two mounting screws (2).
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR

B-PILLAR MOUNTED SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/B-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the two retaining screws (2).
8O - 393
8O - 394
C-PILLAR MOUNTED SIDE IMPACT SENSOR

2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the two retaining screws (2).
INSTALLATION
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
1. Position the front impact sensor in the correct
mounting location and install the two mounting
screws (2). Torque screws (2) to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.).
NOTE: If replacing the left front impact sensor, the
air intake system needs to be installed (Refer to 9
- ENGINE/AIR INTAKE SYSTEM - INSTALLATION).
LX
LX
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
B-PILLAR MOUNTED SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
1. Position the B-pillar mounted impact sensor in the
correct mounting location and install the two
mounting screws (2). Torque screws (2) to 7 Nm
(62 in. lbs.).
3. Install the B-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
C-PILLAR MOUNTED SIDE IMPACT SENSOR

1. Position the C-pillar mounted impact sensor in the
correct mounting location and install the two
mounting screws (2). Torque screws (2) to 7 Nm
(62 in. lbs.).
3. Install the C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/
8O - 395
8O - 396
LX

DESCRIPTION
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is secured
with two screws to a mount on the underside of the
passenger side front seat cushion frame near the outboard front corner. Concealed within a hollow in the
center of the molded plastic OCM housing is a microprocessor and the other electronic circuitry of the
module. The module housing is sealed to enclose and
protect the internal electronic circuitry. The OCM software is flash programmable.
A non-calibrated OCM is available for service replacement. The OCM and all of the other components of
the Occupant Classification System (OCS) including
the passenger front seat, the seat weight sensors, the
passenger or driver seat track position sensor and the
seat adjusters, cushion, back, frame, foam, springs,
and wiring harness are a factory-calibrated and
assembled unit. Any time any one of these components is removed or replaced for any reason, the OCM must be
re-calibrated using a diagnostic scan tool, the Occupant Classification Seat Weight special tool, and the Occupant
Classification System Verification Test. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedures.
The OCM cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if damaged or faulty, it must be replaced.
OPERATION
The microprocessor in the Occupant Classification
Module (OCM) (2) contains the Occupant Classification System (OCS) logic circuits. The OCM uses OnBoard Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with
other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with
the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication
is also used for OCS diagnosis and testing through
the 16-way data link connector located on the driver
side lower edge of the instrument panel.
The OCM (2) provides voltage to the four seat weight
sensors located on the corners of the passenger front
seat (1, 3, and 4), and to the seat track position sensors on the outboard passenger and driver front seat
upper seat tracks. The OCM then monitors return
inputs from each of the sensors on dedicated hard
wired data communication circuits. The seat weight
sensor input allows the OCM to determine whether the
passenger side front seat is occupied and the relative
size of the occupant by providing a weight-sensing reference to the load on the seat. The seat track position sensor
provides an additional logic input to the OCM microprocessor that allows it to determine the position of the front seat
passenger and driver relative to the front airbags.
LX
8O - 397
Pre-programmed decision algorithms and OCS calibration allow the OCM microprocessor to determine
when passenger airbag protection is appropriate
based upon the seat load as signaled by the seat
weight sensors. When the programmed conditions are
met, the OCM sends the proper electronic occupant
classification messages over the CAN data bus to the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), and the ORC
enables or disables the deployment circuits for the
passenger front supplemental restraints. The ORC
also provides a control output for the Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator in the instrument panel based
upon the electronic occupant classification messages it receives from the OCM.
The OCM also sends electronic driver and passenger seat track position messages to the ORC over the CAN data
bus. The ORC uses the seat track position data as an additional logic input for determining the force level with
which to deploy the multistage front airbags.
The OCM microprocessor continuously monitors all of the OCS electrical circuits and components to determine the
system readiness. If the OCM detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) and sends the appropriate electronic messages to the ORC over the CAN data bus. Then the ORC
sets a DTC and sends messages to control the airbag indicator operation accordingly. An active fault only remains
for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault
causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the OCM and the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a
number of ignition cycles, the OCM will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored
DTC is latched forever.
The OCM receives battery current on a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. The OCM receives ground
through a ground circuit and take out of the body wire harness. These connections allow the OCM to be operational
whenever the ignition switch is in the Start or On positions.
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the OCM, the CAN data bus network, and the electronic message inputs to and outputs from the OCM requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate
REMOVAL
death.
8O - 398
LX

2. Reach under the front edge of the passenger front
seat cushion to access and disconnect the two harness connectors (3) from the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) (4).
3. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the OCM
to the OCM bracket (1).
4. Remove the OCM from under the passenger front
seat.
INSTALLATION
death.
1. Carefully position the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) (4) to the OCM bracket (1).
2. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure
the OCM to the OCM bracket. Tighten the screws
to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.).
3. Connect the two harness connectors (3) to the
OCM.
WARNING: Following successful completion of the
Airbag System test procedure, the Occupant Classification System Verification Test must be done
using a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic
information.
LX
8O - 399

DESCRIPTION
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2), sometimes referred to as the Airbag Control Module (ACM),
is secured with three screws to a stamped steel
mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor
panel transmission tunnel underneath the instrument
panel center stack, beneath the center floor console in
the passenger compartment of the vehicle. Concealed
within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum
ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC
which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact
sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy
storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is
secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with four
screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic
circuitry and components.
The ORC housing has integral mounting flanges in

three locations. Two molded plastic electrical connectors (1 and 2) exit the rearward facing side of the
ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC
to the vehicle electrical system through two connectors.
The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the
ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are
only serviced as a unit with the ORC. The ORC cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or faulty,
it must be replaced.
OPERATION
The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the supplemental restraint system logic
circuits and controls all of the supplemental restraint system components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics
(OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool
using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag
indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) and for supplemental restraint system diagnosis and
testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel.
The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the supplemental restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn on the airbag
indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current
ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a
fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other
internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever.
8O - 400
LX
On models equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS), the ORC communicates with the Occupant
Classification Module (OCM) over the CAN data bus. The ORC will internally disable the passenger airbag and seat
belt tensioner deployment circuits if the OCM detects that the passenger front seat is unoccupied or that it is occupied by a load that is inappropriate for an airbag deployment. The ORC also provides a control output to the passenger airbag disabled indicator through the passenger airbag indicator driver circuit. The OCM notifies the ORC
when it has detected a monitored system fault and stored a DTC in its memory for any faulty OCS component or
circuit, then the ORC sets a DTC and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly.
The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit and a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit of the instrument panel wire
harness. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the Start or On
positions.
The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the Start or On positions, this
capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the front supplemental restraint components for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide
backup supplemental restraint system protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during
an impact.
Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also monitors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left vertical members of the
radiator support near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate
of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. On vehicles equipped
with curtain airbags, the ORC also monitors inputs from four additional remote impact sensors located on the left
and right inner B-pillars and C-pillars to control deployment of the curtain airbags.
The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the
ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a supplemental restraint deployment by
detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed
a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. Vehicles equipped with curtain airbags, feature a second safing
sensor within the ORC to provide confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing
sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle.
Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled
by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require supplemental
restraint system protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front airbag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC
sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels, the
front seat belt tensioners and, if the vehicle is so equipped, either curtain airbag. For vehicles equipped with the
OCS, the passenger airbag and seat belt tensioner will be deployed by the ORC only if enabled by the OCM messages (passenger airbag disabled indicator Off) at the time of the impact.
The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC, the CAN data bus, and the electronic message inputs to and outputs from the ORC requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic
information.
REMOVAL
death.
LX
2. Remove the center floor console (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR
CONSOLE
REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the two electrical connectors (1 and 2).
4. Move the sound deadening material (1) as needed

to access the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
mounting screws.
8O - 401
8O - 402
LX
5. Remove the three mounting screws (1) to the ORC

(2).
INSTALLATION
WARNING: Do not install ORC if mounting location is deformed or damaged. This will cause the ORC to be
improperly located and could result in occupant personal injury or death.
death.
1. Position the ORC (2) into position and install the
three mounting screws (1). Tighten the screws to
11 Nm (97 in. lbs.).
LX
2. Make sure to reinstall the sound deadening material (1) over the ORC.
3. Connect the two electrical connectors (1 and 2).
4. Install the center floor console (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTALLATION).

8O - 403
8O - 404
PASSENGER AIRBAG
DESCRIPTION
The passenger airbag used in this model is a multistage, Next Generation-type that complies with revised
federal airbag standards to deploy with less force than
those used in some prior models. The passenger airbag consists of a stamped and welded metal housing,
the airbag cushion, the airbag inflator, and a stamped
metal airbag cushion retainer plate that is secured to
the airbag housing. The airbag housing contains the
airbag inflator and the folded airbag cushion. A rectangular fabric cushion is used.
The airbag inflator is a non-azide, pyrotechnic-type
unit that is secured to and sealed within the airbag
housing. A short four-wire pigtail harness with a keyed,
yellow connector insulator connects the two inflator initiators to the vehicle electrical system through the
instrument panel wire harness.
This passenger airbag cannot be repaired, and must
be replaced if deployed, faulty, or in any way
damaged.
The horizontal surface of the injection molded, thermoplastic passenger airbag door (2) is the most visible
part of the passenger airbag. The passenger airbag
door is located above the glove box opening on the
top of the instrument panel, in front of the front seat
passenger seating position.
LX
LX
8O - 405
Located below the passenger airbag door within the

instrument panel is the passenger airbag. The passenger airbag housing fits into a molded receptacle on the
back of the airbag door, where twelve stamped hook
formations on the forward and rearward edges of the
airbag housing are engaged in mating small window
openings on the forward and rearward flanges of the
receptacle to secure the airbag door to the airbag
housing. These airbag door fasteners and mounting
provisions are all concealed beneath the instrument
panel base trim.
The passenger airbag is secured by four screws (1)

through a stamped mounting bracket to the instrument
panel cover/pad and two bolts (2) to the instrument
panel structural support.
OPERATION
The multistage passenger airbag is deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) through the passenger airbag squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflator. By using
two initiators, the airbag can be deployed at multiple levels of force. The force level is controlled by the ORC to suit
the monitored impact conditions by providing one of three delay intervals between the electrical signals provided to
the two initiators. The longer the delay between these signals, the less forcefully the airbag will deploy.
When the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to each initiator, the electrical energy generates enough heat to
initiate a small pyrotechnic charge which, in turn ignites chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these
chemical pellets burn rapidly and produce a large quantity of inert gas. The inflator is sealed to the airbag cushion
and a diffuser in the inflator directs all of the inert gas into the airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the
cushion inflates, the passenger airbag door will split at predetermined tear seam lines concealed on the inside surface of the door, then the door will pivot up over the top of the instrument panel and out of the way. Following an
airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the inert gas through vent holes within the fabric
used to construct the back (windshield side) of the airbag cushion. Typically, both initiators are used during an airbag deployment event.
8O - 406
LX
REMOVAL
DEPLOYED PASSENGER AIRBAG
For deployed passenger airbags, the instrument
panel top pad must be replaced.
1. Open hood.
3. Remove instrument panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT
PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL
ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect the passenger airbag electrical connector (3).
5. Remove the four left and right passenger airbag
mounting screws (1).
6. Remove the two lower passenger airbag mounting
bolts (2).
7. Separate passenger airbag from instrument panel.
8. Remove and inspect all reusable components from the instrument panel and transfer to the new instrument panel
top pad.
9. Clean powder residue from interior of vehicle (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - STANDARD PROCEDURE - SERVICE AFTER AN AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT).
NONDEPLOYED PASSENGER AIRBAG

2. Remove the right side silencer pad (Refer to 23 BODY/INSTRUMENT
PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL SILENCER - REMOVAL).
LX
3. Remove the glove box assembly (Refer to 23 BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX REMOVAL).
4. Remove the two inboard mounting screws (2) to

the passenger airbag just below the distribution
duct (1) and to the left of the distribution housing.
5. Remove the two outboard mounting screws (1) to

the passenger airbag just below the distribution
duct.
8O - 407
8O - 408
6. Remove the two passenger airbag mounting bolts

(2) to the crosscar beam.
7. Disconnect the passenger airbag electrical connector (3).
8. Maneuver the passenger airbag down in a way to

clear any obstacles that may impede the removal
of the airbag.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
DEPLOYED PASSENGER AIRBAG
NOTE: For deployed passenger airbags, the instrument panel top pad must be replaced.
1. Clean powder residue from interior of vehicle
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/RESTRAINTS - STANDARD PROCEDURE - SERVICE AFTER AN AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT).
2. Inspect and transfer all reusable components from
the old instrument panel top pad to the new instrument panel top pad.
3. Position new passenger airbag into instrument
panel cavity.
4. Install the two lower passenger airbag mounting

bolts (2). Torque bolts to 11.6 Nm (103 in. lbs.).
5. Install the four left and right passenger airbag
mounting screws (1). Torque screws to 2.8 Nm (25
in. lbs.).
6. Connect the passenger airbag electrical connector
(3).
7. Install new instrument panel assembly (Refer to 23
BODY/INSTRUMENT
PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL ASSEMBLY - INSTALLATION).
8O - 409
8O - 410
NONDEPLOYED PASSENGER AIRBAG

1. Maneuver the passenger airbag up into the instrument panel in a way to clear any obstacles that
may impede the installation of the airbag.
2. Place the passenger into the cavity of the passenger airbag door.
LX
LX
3. Install the two passenger airbag mounting bolts (2)
to the crosscar beam. Torque bolts to 11.6 Nm
(103 in. lbs.).
4. Connect the passenger airbag electrical connector
(3).
5. Install the two inboard mounting screws (2) to the

passenger airbag just below the distribution duct
(1) and to the left of the distribution housing.
Torque screws to 2.8 Nm (25 in. lbs.).
6. Install the two outboard mounting screws (1) to the

passenger airbag just below the distribution duct.
Torque screws to 2.8 Nm (25 in. lbs.).
8O - 411
8O - 412
7. Install the glove box assembly (Refer to 23 BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX INSTALLATION).
8. Install the right side silencer pad (Refer to 23 BODY/INSTRUMENT

PANEL/INSTRUMENT
PANEL SILENCER - INSTALLATION).
LX
LX
SEAT BELT AND RETRACTOR

REMOVAL
FRONT
2. Remove trim cover (3) from the seat cushion outboard trim cover.
3. Remove seat belt (1) lower anchor nut (2) from
seat cushion frame.
4. Remove the upper turning loop (3) trim cover (2).

5. Remove the upper turning loop retaining bolt (4).
8O - 413
8O - 414
6. Remove the lower B-pillar trim (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/B-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
7. Remove the one screw (2) to the front seat belt

web guide (3).
8. Disconnect the tensioner (2) squib connector (3).
LX
LX
9. Remove the one screw between the upper retractor
indexing tabs in B-pillar.
10. Remove the one front seat belt retractor (4)
retaining bolt (3).
11. Pull the retractor inboard and release the indexing
tabs (2) from the B-pillar (1).
REAR - SEDAN
1. Remove the lower seat belt anchor (2) bolt (3).
2. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
8O - 415
8O - 416
3. Remove the one upper turning loop retaining bolt

(2).
4. Remove the one seat belt retractor (4) mounting

bolt (3).
5. Pull retractor inboard and drop down to release
tabs from slots.
LX
LX
REAR - WAGON
1. Remove the lower seat belt anchor (2) bolt (3).
2. Remove the quarter trim panel.

3. Remove the one rear seat belt retractor (4) retaining nut (2).
REAR CENTER - SEDAN

1. Remove the rear seat cushion (Refer to 23 BODY/SEATS/SEAT
CUSHION
COVER
REMOVAL).
2. Remove the one nut (3) to the seat belt lower
anchor.
8O - 417
8O - 418
3. Remove the rear shelf trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/REAR SHELF TRIM PANEL REMOVAL).
4. Remove the one retaining nut (1) to the center seat

belt retractor (2).
REAR CENTER - WAGON

1. Remove the left seat back trim cover (60% portion
of the rear folding seats) (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT
BACK
CUSHION/COVER
REMOVAL).
2. Disconnect the rear seat back latching cable from
seat frame.
NOTE: If the seat back is not fully latched, the
center seat belt will not release from the retractor.
3. Remove the one bolt (2) holding the rear center
seat belt retractor.
LX
LX
INSTALLATION
FRONT
1. Position the retractor in the B-pillar (1) with the
indexing tabs (2).
2. Install the one front seat belt retractor (4) retaining
bolt (3). Torque bolt to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the one screw between the upper retractor
indexing tabs (2) in B-pillar.
4. Connect the tensioner (2) squib connector (3).
5. Install the one screw (2) to the front seat belt web
guide (3). Torque screw to 3 Nm (20 in. lbs.).
8O - 419
8O - 420
6. Position the upper turning loop (3) and install the

retaining bolt (4). Torque bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
7. Install the upper turning loop (3) trim cover (2).
8. Install the lower B-pillar trim (Refer to 23 - BODY/

9. Position the seat belt (1) onto the stud on the seat
cushion frame and install the lower anchor nut (2).
Torque nut to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.).
10. Install the trim cover (3) onto the seat cushion
outboard trim cover.
LX
LX
REAR - SEDAN
1. Position the retractor (4) on the C-pillar to the
indexing tab slips up into the pillar.
2. Install the retractor mounting bolt (3). Torque bolt to
32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the one upper turning loop retaining bolt (2).

Torque bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the upper C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR

TRIM
INSTALLATION).
8O - 421
8O - 422
5. Install the lower seat belt anchor (2) bolt (3).

REAR - WAGON
1.
Place the one rear seat belt retractor (4) so that

the indexing tab is in its slot.
2. Install the retaining nut (2). Torque nut to 34 Nm

(25 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the quarter trim panel.
4. Install the lower seat belt anchor (2) bolt (3).

LX
LX
REAR CENTER - SEDAN
1. Place the rear center retractor (2) into position and
install the one retaining nut (1). Torque nut to 34
Nm (25 ft. lbs.).
2. Install the rear shelf trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/REAR SHELF TRIM PANEL INSTALLATION).
8O - 423
8O - 424
3. Install the one nut (3) to the seat belt lower anchor.
Torque nut to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the rear seat cushion (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT
CUSHION
COVER
INSTALLATION).
REAR CENTER - WAGON

1. Position the rear center retractor into position in the
seat back.
2. Install the one bolt (2) holding the rear center seat
belt retractor. Torque nut to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.).
3. Install the left seat back trim cover (60% portion of
the rear folding seats) (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/
SEAT - INSTALLATION).
LX
LX
SEAT BELT BUCKLE

REMOVAL
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE
2. Remove center console from vehicle (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR
CONSOLE
REMOVAL).
3. Remove the inner side shield from the front seat
cushion.
4. Disconnect the one electrical connector.
5. Remove the one nut to the buckle assembly.
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE

1. Remove the rear seat cushion (Refer to 23 BODY/SEATS/SEAT
CUSHION
COVER
REMOVAL).
2. Remove the one nut (2) to the seat belt buckle.
8O - 425
8O - 426
LX
INSTALLATION
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE
1. Position the front seat belt buckle onto the stud
near the rear of the inboard seat cushion frame.
2. Install the retaining nut onto seat cushion frame.
Tighten the nut to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.)
3. Connect the seat belt buckle electrical connector.
4. Install the seat cushion side shield.
5. Install floor console (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/FLOOR CONSOLE - INSTALLATION).
Airbag System test procedure, the Occupant Classification System Verification Test must be done using a
scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information.
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE

1. Position the rear seat belt buckle onto mounting
studs (3).
2. Install retaining nut. Torque nut to 34 Nm (25 ft.
lbs.).
3. Install rear seat cushion (Refer to 23 - BODY/
SEATS/SEAT
CUSHION
COVER
INSTALLATION).
LX
8O - 427
SEAT BELT TENSIONER

DESCRIPTION
Seat Belt Tensioners supplement the dual front airbags. The seat belt tensioners are integral to the front
seat belt retractors (2), which are secured to the inner
B-pillar (1) on the right and left sides of the vehicle.
The retractor is concealed beneath the lower B-pillar
trim. The seat belt tensioner consists primarily of a
sprocket/pinion, a steel tube, a cast metal housing,
numerous steel balls, a stamped metal ball trap, a torsion bar, a small pyrotechnically activated gas generator, and a short pigtail wire. All of these components
are located on one side of the retractor spool on the
outside of the retractor housing except for the torsion
bar, which serves as the spindle upon which the
retractor spool rides. The seat belt tensioners are controlled by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
and are connected to the vehicle electrical system
through the body wire harness (3).
The seat belt tensioners cannot be repaired and, if
faulty or damaged, the entire front seat belt and
retractor unit must be replaced. If the front airbags have been deployed, the seat belt tensioners have also been
deployed. The seat belt tensioners are not intended for reuse and must be replaced following any front airbag
deployment. A growling or grinding sound while attempting to operate the seat belt retractor is a sure indication that
the seat belt tensioner has been deployed and requires replacement. Refer to the proper Body Diagnostic Procedures manual for diagnosis and testing.
OPERATION
The seat belt tensioners are deployed in conjunction with the front airbags by a signal generated by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver or passenger seat belt tensioner line 1 and line 2 (or squib) circuits.
When the ORC sends the proper electrical signal to the tensioners, the electrical energy generates enough heat to
initiate a small pyrotechnic gas generator. The gas generator is installed in one end of a steel tube that contains
numerous steel balls. As the gas expands, it pushes the steel balls through the tube into a cast metal housing,
where a ball guide directs the balls into engagement with the teeth of a sprocket that is geared to one end of the
retractor spool. As the balls drive past the sprocket, the sprocket turns and drives the seat belt retractor spool causing the slack to be removed from the front seat belts. The ball trap captures the balls as they leave the sprocket and
are expelled from the housing.
Removing excess slack from the front seat belts not only keeps the occupants properly positioned for an airbag
deployment following a frontal impact of the vehicle, but also helps to reduce injuries that the occupant might experience in these situations as a result of harmful contact with the steering wheel, steering column, instrument panel
and/or windshield. Also, the seat belt tensioner torsion bar that the retractor spool rides upon is designed to deform
in order to control the loading being applied to the occupants by the seat belts during a frontal impact, further reducing the potential for occupant injuries.
The ORC monitors the condition of the seat belt tensioners through circuit resistance, and will illuminate the airbag
indicator in the instrument cluster and store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected. For
proper diagnosis of the seat belt tensioners, a scan tool is required and the appropriate body diagnostic information.
8O - 428
LX
SEAT TRACK POSITION SENSOR

DESCRIPTION
The seat track position sensor (1) is a Hall Effect-type
sensor. This sensor consists of a Hall Effect Integrated
Circuit (IC) chip encased in potting material within a
cavity of the molded plastic sensor housing. The sensor housing has two integral snap features (3) and
snaps into a stamped metal bracket located on the
lower outboard seat adjuster track. A molded connector (2) integral to the sensor housing is connected to
the vehicle electrical system through the driver seat
wire harness.
The seat track position sensor cannot be adjusted or
repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the entire sensor
must be replaced.
OPERATION
The seat track position sensor is designed to provide a seat position data input to the Occupant Classification Module (OCM) indicating whether the driver front seat is in a forward or rearward position. The OCM sends electronic
seat position messages to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data
bus. The ORC uses this data as an additional logic input for use in determining the appropriate deployment force to
be used when deploying the multistage front airbags.
The seat track position sensor receives a nominal five volt supply from the OCM. The sensor communicates the
seat position by modulating the voltage returned to the OCM on a sensor data circuit. The OCM also monitors the
condition of the sensor circuits and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected, then
send messages to the ORC to illuminate the airbag indicator in the instrument cluster. For proper diagnosis of the
seat track position sensor, a diagnostic scan tool is required and the appropriate diagnostic information.
REMOVAL
2. Reach under the front edge of the front seat cushion to access the seat track position sensor (3) in a
bracket (1) located on the lower outboard seat
track (5).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (4) from the
sensor.
4. Using a small screwdriver, depress the snap feature (2) and pull the sensor out of the bracket.
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Position the seat track position sensor (3) on the
end of the bracket (1) located on the lower outboard seat track (5).
2. Push the sensor firmly into the bracket until the
snap feature (2) locks into place.
3. Connect the electrical connector (4) to the sensor.
information.
8O - 429
8O - 430
LX
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR

DESCRIPTION
The seat weight sensors (4) are strain gauge-type
units. The electronic elements of the sensor are
encased in a potting material within the molded plastic
sensor housing. Four sensors (4) are used in the
Occupant Classification System (OCS). A sensor is
located at each corner of the passenger side front
seat.
The strain gauge for each sensor is secured by three
screws and nuts (2) between the seat cushion frame
and the seat adjusters (3). A molded connector receptacle (1) integral to each sensor housing is connected
to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated
connector and take out of the passenger seat wire
harness beneath the seat cushion frame.
The seat weight sensors cannot be adjusted or
repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the entire sensor
must be replaced.
WARNING: The Seat Weight Sensor is a sensitive, calibrated unit and must be handled carefully. Do not
drop or handle roughly. If dropped or damaged, replace with another sensor. Failure to do so may result in
occupant injury or death.
WARNING: The front passenger seat must be handled carefully as well. When removing the seat, be careful
when setting on floor not to drop. If dropped, the sensor may be inoperative, could result in occupant
injury, or possibly death.
WARNING: When the seat is on the floor, no one should sit in the front passenger seat. This uneven force
may damage the sensing ability of the seat weight sensors. If sat on and damaged, the sensor may be
inoperative, could result in occupant injury, or possibly death.
OPERATION
The seat weight sensor units are designed to sense the relative weight of a load applied to the passenger side front
seat, which provides a logic input to the microprocessor of the Occupant Classification Module (OCM). When a load
is applied to the seat, the strain gauge of each sensor is flexed causing a change of electrical resistance through
the strain gauge. These changes in resistance are measured by the sensor and the internal sensor circuitry
changes the sensor output voltage.
Each weight sensor receives a nominal five volts and a ground through parallel hard wired circuits from the OCM.
The OCM then monitors the output voltage of each sensor on dedicated hard wired data communication circuits.
The hard wired circuits between the sensors and the OCM may be diagnosed and tested using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. However, the most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the seat weight
sensor inputs to the OCM, and the electronic message communication between the OCM and the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
LX
8O - 431
REMOVAL
MANUAL PASSENGER FRONT SEAT
WARNING: The Seat Weight Sensor is a sensitive,
calibrated unit and must be handled carefully. Do
not drop or handle roughly. If dropped or damaged, replace with another sensor. Failure to do so
may result in occupant injury or death.
WARNING: The front passenger seat must be handled carefully as well. When removing the seat, be
careful when setting on floor not to drop. If
dropped, the sensor may be inoperative, could
result in occupant injury, or possibly death.
WARNING: When the seat is on the floor, no one
should sit in the front passenger seat. This
uneven force may damage the sensing ability of
the seat weight sensors. If sat on and damaged,
the sensor may be inoperative, could result in
WARNING: Wait two minutes for the airbag system reserve capacitor to discharge before beginning any airbag system or component service. Failure to do so may result in accidental airbag deployment, personal
injury or death.
2. Remove front passenger seat (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT - REMOVAL).
3. Remove the adjuster to riser mounting bolt (3). For
additional information (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/
SEAT RISER - REMOVAL).
8O - 432
4. Remove the two nuts (2) holding the seat weight

sensor (4) to the seat riser.
POWER FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a power
front passenger seat, to remove the adjuster from
the riser it is necessary to have battery power to
move the seat forward and rearward to access the
mounting bolts.
1. Remove front passenger seat mounting bolts
(Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT - REMOVAL).
LX
LX
2. Remove the adjuster to riser mounting bolt (3). For
additional information (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/
SEAT RISER - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the two nuts (2) holding the seat weight

sensor (4) to the seat riser.
8O - 433
8O - 434
LX
INSTALLATION
MANUAL PASSENGER FRONT SEAT
WARNING: The Seat Weight Sensor is a sensitive,
calibrated unit and must be handled carefully. Do
not drop or handle roughly. If dropped or damaged, replace with another sensor. Failure to do so
may result in occupant injury or death.
WARNING: The front passenger seat must be handled carefully as well. When removing the seat, be
careful when setting on floor not to drop. If
dropped, the sensor may be inoperative, could
result in occupant injury, or possibly death.
WARNING: When the seat is on the floor, no one
should sit in the front passenger seat. This
uneven force may damage the sensing ability of
the seat weight sensors. If sat on and damaged,
the sensor may be inoperative, could result in
1. Position the seat weight sensor onto passenger front seat riser.
2. Install the two nuts (2) holding the seat weight sensor (4) to the seat riser. Torque nuts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
4. Install the adjuster to riser mounting bolt (3).
Torque nuts to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). For additional
information (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT
RISER - INSTALLATION).
LX
5. Install the front passenger seat (Refer to 23 BODY/SEATS/SEAT - INSTALLATION)
information.
POWER FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a power
front passenger seat, to remove the adjuster from
the riser it is necessary to have battery power to
move the seat forward and rearward to access the
mounting bolts.
1. Position the seat weight sensor onto passenger
front seat riser.
2. Install the two nuts (2) holding the seat weight sensor (4) to the seat riser. Torque nuts to 40 Nm (30
ft. lbs.).
8O - 435
8O - 436
4. Install the adjuster to riser mounting bolt (3).

Torque nuts to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.). For additional
information (Refer to 23 - BODY/SEATS/SEAT
RISER - INSTALLATION).
5. Install the front passenger seat bolts (Refer to 23 BODY/SEATS/SEAT - INSTALLATION).

information.
LX
SPEED CONTROL
LX
8P - 1
SPEED CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
SPEED CONTROL
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
8P - 2
SPEED CONTROL
LX
SPEED CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
The speed control system is fully and electronically controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). A cable
and a vacuum controlled servo are not used. This is a servo-less system. The switch is labeled: ON/OFF,
RES/ACCEL, SET, COAST, and CANCEL.
OPERATION
When speed control is selected by depressing the ON switch, the PCM allows a set speed to be stored in its RAM
for speed control. To store a set speed, depress the SET switch while the vehicle is moving at a speed between 25
and 100 mph. In order for the speed control to engage, the brakes cannot be applied, nor can the gear selector
indicating the transmission is in Park or Neutral or low.
The
speed control can be disengaged manually by:

Stepping on the brake pedal
Depressing the OFF switch
Depressing the CANCEL switch.
NOTE: Depressing the OFF switch or turning off the ignition switch will erase the set speed stored in the
PCM (the ECM with a diesel engine).
For added safety, the speed control system is programmed to disengage for any of the following conditions:
An indication of Park or Neutral
A rapid increase rpm (indicates that the clutch has been disengaged)
Excessive engine rpm (indicates that the transmission may be in a low gear)
The speed signal increases at a rate of 10 mph per second (indicates that the coefficient of friction between
the road surface and tires is extremely low)
The speed signal decreases at a rate of 10 mph per second (indicates that the vehicle may have decelerated
at an extremely high rate)
Once the speed control has been disengaged, depressing the RES/ACCEL switch (when speed is greater than 20
mph) restores the vehicle to the target speed that was stored in the PCM (the ECM with a diesel engine).
While the speed control is engaged, the driver can increase the vehicle speed by depressing the RES/ACCEL
switch. The new target speed is stored in the PCM (the ECM with a diesel engine) when the RES/ACCEL is
released. The PCM (the ECM with a diesel engine) also has a 9tap-up9 feature in which vehicle speed increases at
a rate of approximately 1 mph for each momentary switch activation of the RES/ACCEL switch.
A tap down feature is used to decelerate without disengaging the speed control system. To decelerate from an
existing recorded target speed, momentarily depress the COAST switch. For each switch activation, speed will be
lowered approximately 1 mph.
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY
LX
8Q - 1
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - SERVICE

INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL

DIAGNOSTICS
B1A20-PRE-ARM TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
B1A24KEY NOT PROGRAMMED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
B1A25-INVALID KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B1A26MAXIMUM NUMBER OF KEYS
PROGRAMMED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
B1A27SKREEM PROGRAMMING
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
B1A28-ECM MISMATCH WITH SKIM . . . . . . . . . . 11
B1A29-SKIM BASESTATION MISMATCH . . . . . . 14
B1A2A-KEY 1 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 17
B1A2BA-KEY 2 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . 20
B1A2C-KEY 3 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 23
B1A2D-KEY 4 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 26
B1A2E-KEY 5 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 29
B1A2F-KEY 6 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 32
B1A30-KEY 7 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 35
B1A31-KEY 8 COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . 38
B1A35-UNIDENTIFIED KEY
COMMUNICATION ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
B1A37SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
B1A38SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
B1A3ASECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
B1A3BSECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
B1A3C-INTERNAL SIREN BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . 54
B1A3D-SIREN BATTERY TAMPER / LOSS
OF POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
B1A3E-SIREN / ITM MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
B1A3F-ITM ARMING SEQUENCE
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
B1A41-SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR

CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
RETURN CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
B1A44-SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
RETURN CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
B1A47-SECURITY TRANSMITTER/
RECEIVER SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
B2101-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT LOW . . . . 82
B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT HIGH . . . . 85
B210A-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
B210D-SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
B2204-ECU CONFIGURATION MISMATCH . . . . 95
B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH . . . 96
B2206-CURRENT VIN MISSING/MISMATCH . . . 98
B2224SKREEM INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
B2228-SKREEM INTERNAL - RKE
RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
B2229-SKREEM INTERNAL - SKIM
IMMOBILIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
B222A-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . 102
B223C-INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
B2254-COLUMN LOCK MODULE INTERNAL . 104
U0019-CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
U0019CAN B BUS ITM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
8Q - 2

CENTRAL GATEWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
LX

CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
U110D-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SECURITY SIREN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
U1416-IMPLAUSIBLE SECURITY SIREN
SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
STANDARD PROCEDURE
SKREEM/SKIM VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
LX

8Q - 3
8Q - 4
LX
B1A20-PRE-ARM TIMEOUT
When Monitored:
During the VTSS pre-arm process.
Set Condition:
If the VTSS pre-arm sequence is interrupted within sixteen seconds after securing the vehicle.
Possible Causes
INTERMITTENT PROBLEM WITH FUSED (B+) TO CLUSTER
INTERMITTENT PROBLEM WITH CAN B BUS CIRCUITS TO CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
DETERMINING IF DTC IS CURRENT
NOTE: Diagnose any related Communication DTC(s) before continuing.

With a scan tool, read and record DTC(s).
With the scan tool, clear DTC(s).
Turn the ignition off and remove the key from the ignition.
Lock and close all doors to allow the VTSS to go from pre-arm to armed status and wait one minute.
Disarm the VTSS.
Using the scan tool, read DTC(s).
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Remove the Cluster and inspect the Fused B (+) and both CAN B BUS circuits for spread terminals or
intermittent opens.
MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No
>> DTC is not active at this time. Test complete.
LX
8Q - 5
B1A24KEY NOT PROGRAMMED

When Monitored:
Possible Causes
KEY NOT PROGRAMMED
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY MODULE (SKREEM)
Diagnostic Test
1.
PROGRAM ALL OF THE IGNITION KEYS

With the scan tool, attempt to program the key(s) into the SKREEM.
Was the programming of the key(s) successful?
Yes
>> Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY STANDARD PROCEDURE).
No
>> Replace the ignition key and attempt to program it into the SKREEM. If the DTC resets, replace and
program the SKREEM in accordance with the Service Information.
NOTE: If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module, it must be replaced along with the
SKREEM.
Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8Q - 6
B1A25-INVALID KEY
LX
LX
8Q - 7
When Monitored:
At ignition on and during Key Programming Mode.
Set Condition:
When the SKREEM does not receive a transponder response after 8 consecutive transponder read attempts
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
MULTIPLE KEY OPERATION
IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
INTERMITTENT WIRING HARNESS PROBLEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
With the scan tool, read and record the SKREEM DTCs.
With the scan tool, erase the SKREEM DTCs
NOTE: Perform the following test several times to ensure the DTC is current.
Wait 10 seconds.
With the scan tool, read the SKREEM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display the DTC that was previously erased?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.
CHECKING FOR MULTIPLE KEYS
Are there multiple vehicle ignition keys available?

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
NOTE: Perform the following steps using one of the vehicle ignition keys. When finished, repeat the procedure using each of the other vehicle keys, one at a time.
With the scan tool, erase the SKREEM DTCs.
Wait 10 seconds.
Turn the ignition on
Is the DTC present for all ignition keys?
Yes
>> Replace and program the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Replace the ignition key(s) that cause the SKIM DTC.
8Q - 8
4.
With
With
Wait
Turn
With
LX
REPROGRAM KEY
the scan tool, attempt to reprogram the ignition key to the SKREEM.
the scan tool, erase the SKREEM DTCs.
10 seconds.
the ignition on.
the scan tool, read the SKREEM DTCs.
Does the DTC set again?

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Test complete.
5.
PROGRAM NEW IGNITION KEY
Replace the ignition key with a new key.

With the scan tool, program the new ignition key to the SKREEM.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST
No
>> Test complete.
6.

NOTE: Check the following items:
Visually inspect the related wiring harness. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken
wires.
Visually inspect the related wiring harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded
terminals.
Refer to any Technical Service Bulletins (TSB) that may apply.
Yes
>> Repair wiring harness/connectors as necessary.

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
8Q - 9
B1A26MAXIMUM NUMBER OF KEYS PROGRAMMED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the maximum number of keys (8) have been programmed into the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module
(SKREEM).
Possible Causes
MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF KEY PROGRAMMED INTO SKREEM
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPROGRAM ALL IGNITION KEYS
NOTE: This procedure will clear all the key information from the SKREEM. It is important to obtain all of the
customers ignition keys so they may be reprogrammed into the module.
With the scan tool, clear all the key information in the SKREEM.
Program the all of the customer keys into the SKREEM (maximum eight).
Did the Maximum Number of Keys Programmed display again?
Yes
>> Replace and program the SKREEM in accordance with the Service Information.
NOTE: If this vehicle is equipped with a Steering Column Lock Module it must be replaced along with the
SKREEM.
No
>> Programming of the keys was successful. Test complete.

8Q - 10
LX
B1A27SKREEM PROGRAMMING PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY THAT THE DTC IS ACTIVE

NOTE: Before continuing, review and check for the following:
Review the repair history of the vehicle.
Ensure that the vehicle has the correct PCM and SKREEM installed by verifying the part numbers.
With the scan tool, ensure that the PCM and SKREEM are programmed correctly. Compare the PCM VIN
to the SKREEM VIN and ensure the two VINs match.
With the scan tool, clear DTCs.
Perform 5 ignition cycles, leaving the ignition switch on for a minimum of 90 seconds per cycle.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
SKREEM.
No
>> The DTC is not active at this time. Test complete.
LX
B1A28-ECM MISMATCH WITH SKIM
8Q - 11
8Q - 12
LX
When Monitored:
At ignition on, after ignition on during any rolling code handshake that occurs with the PCM due to a SKIM or
PCM reset.
Set Condition:
When a PCM STATUS message with a Valid Key status is not received by the SKIM within 3.5 seconds of
transmitting the last Valid Key Code message to the PCM.
Possible Causes
VERIFYING PCM VIN
REPLACE SKREEM AND CHECK DTCS
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
With
Turn
Wait
Turn
With

the ignition off.
10 seconds.
the ignition on and wait 2 minutes.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 4
2.
VERIFYING THE PCM VIN

With the scan tool, select Engine system from the main menu.
Display and record the Vehicle Identification Number.
NOTE: Ensure that a VIN has been programmed into the PCM. If a VIN is not displayed, attempt to program
the PCM with the correct VIN before continuing.
Does the VIN recorded from the PCM match the VIN of the vehicle?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Perform the PCM replaced to update the VIN in the PCM.
3.

Replace and program the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module in accordance with the Service Information.
With the scan tool, display and clear all PCM and SKREEM DTCs.
Perform 5 ignition key cycles leaving the ignition key on for 90 seconds per cycle.
With the scan tool, check for SKREEM DTCs.
Yes
No

LX
4.
8Q - 13
INTERMITTENT

NOTE: Check for the following conditions:
wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8Q - 14
B1A29-SKIM BASESTATION MISMATCH
LX
LX
8Q - 15
When Monitored:
PCM reset.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
VERIFYING PCM VIN
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
With
Turn
Wait
Turn
With

the ignition off.
10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 4
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
3.

Yes
No

8Q - 16
4.
LX
INTERMITTENT

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
B1A2A-KEY 1 COMMUNICATION ERROR
8Q - 17
8Q - 18
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
LX
4.
With
With
Wait
Turn
With
8Q - 19
REPROGRAM KEY
10 seconds.
the ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Test complete.
5.

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
6.

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8Q - 20
B1A2BA-KEY 2 COMMUNICATION ERROR
LX
LX
8Q - 21
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
NOTE: Perform the following steps using one of the vehicle ignition keys. When finished, repeat the procedure using each of the other vehicle keys one at a time.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
8Q - 22
4.
With
With
Wait
Turn
With
LX
REPROGRAM KEY
10 seconds.
the ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Test complete.
5.

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
6.

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
B1A2C-KEY 3 COMMUNICATION ERROR
8Q - 23
8Q - 24
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
LX
4.
With
With
Wait
Turn
With
8Q - 25
REPROGRAM KEY
10 seconds.
the ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Test complete.
5.

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
6.

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8Q - 26
B1A2D-KEY 4 COMMUNICATION ERROR
LX
LX
8Q - 27
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
8Q - 28
4.
With
With
Wait
Turn
With
LX
REPROGRAM KEY
10 seconds.
the ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Test complete.
5.

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
6.

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
B1A2E-KEY 5 COMMUNICATION ERROR
8Q - 29
8Q - 30
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
LX
4.
With
With
Wait
Turn
With
8Q - 31
REPROGRAM KEY
10 seconds.
the ignition on.

Yes
No
>> Test complete.
5.

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
6.

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8Q - 32
B1A2F-KEY 6 COMMUNICATION ERROR
LX
LX
8Q - 33
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
8Q - 34
4.
With
With
Wait
Turn
With
LX
REPROGRAM KEY
10 seconds.
the ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Test complete.
5.

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
6.

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
B1A30-KEY 7 COMMUNICATION ERROR
8Q - 35
8Q - 36
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
LX
4.
With
With
Wait
Turn
With
8Q - 37
REPROGRAM KEY
10 seconds.
the ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Test complete.
5.

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
6.

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8Q - 38
B1A31-KEY 8 COMMUNICATION ERROR
LX
LX
8Q - 39
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
8Q - 40
4.
With
With
Wait
Turn
With
LX
REPROGRAM KEY
10 seconds.
the ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Test complete.
5.

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
6.

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
B1A35-UNIDENTIFIED KEY COMMUNICATION ERROR
8Q - 41
8Q - 42
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
within 2.0 seconds.
Possible Causes
IGNITION KEY
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
LX
4.
With
With
Wait
Turn
With
8Q - 43
REPROGRAM KEY
10 seconds.
the ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Test complete.
5.

Wait 10 seconds.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
6.

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8Q - 44
B1A37SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8Q - 45
When Monitored:
When the VTSS is armed.
Set Condition:
If the current flow on the sensor signal circuit is above a specified range this DTC will set.
Possible Causes
(A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Close all doors and arm the VTSS and wait 2 minutes.
Disarm the VTSS turn the ignition on.
Turn the ignition on and with the scan tool, read DTCs.
Does the scan tool display B1A37SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW ?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
2.

Disconnect the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector.
Turn the ignition on and with the scan tool, erase DTCs.
Does the scan tool display B1A41SECURITY TRANSMITTER
SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Replace the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER 1 (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No
>> Go To 3
8Q - 46
3.
LX
CHECK THE (A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Turn the ignition is off.

Disconnect the Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (A645) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Signal circuit at the Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (A645) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Signal circuit

No

LX
B1A38SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
8Q - 47
8Q - 48
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1A38SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH ?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector
Measure for voltage between chassis ground and the (A645) Intrusion
Transmitter Sensor Signal circuit at the Intrusion Transceiver Module
connector.
Yes

No
>> Replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance with the Service Information.
LX
B1A3ASECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
8Q - 49
8Q - 50
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
INTRUSION SENSOR RECEIVER
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1A3ASECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW ?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector.
Turn the ignition on and with the scan tool, erase DTCs.
Does the scan tool display B1A44SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Replace the Intrusion Sensor Receiver.

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
CHECK THE (G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (G460) Intrusion
Receiver Sensor Signal circuit at the Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G460) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Signal circuit

No

8Q - 51
8Q - 52
B1A3BSECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8Q - 53
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the scan tool display B1A3BSECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH ?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure for voltage between chassis ground and the (G460) Intrusion
Receiver Sensor Signal circuit at the Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
Yes

No

8Q - 54
B1A3C-INTERNAL SIREN BATTERY
LX
LX
8Q - 55
When Monitored:
Continuously with the engine over 600 RPM.
Set Condition:
When the internal battery within the siren does not charge as expected, the ITM sets this code.
Possible Causes
VEHICLE STORED WITH NO BATTERY VOLTAGE FOR EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME
SIREN
Diagnostic Test
1.

Start the engine and allow it to idle for 2 minutes then turn the engine off.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
VEHICLE STORED WITH NO BATTERY VOLTAGE FOR EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME
NOTE: If the vehicle was allowed to sit with no battery voltage for an extended period of time the back up
battery located in the siren may discharge and need to be recharged.
Was the vehicle battery power just restored after the vehicle was stored with no power for an extended
period of time?
Yes
>> Allow the vehicle to sit with a fully charged battery for two hours then restart this procedure.
No
>> Replace the Siren in accordance with the Service Information. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8Q - 56
B1A3D-SIREN BATTERY TAMPER / LOSS OF POWER SUPPLY
LX
LX
8Q - 57
When Monitored:
Continuously with the VTSS armed.
Set Condition:
If the ITM detects incorrect voltage at the siren this code will set.
Possible Causes
HARNESS TAMPERING/INTERMITTENT CONDITION
SIREN GROUND OPEN
SIREN
Diagnostic Test
1.
INSPECT SIREN HARNESS
Inspect the wiring harness to the siren for any signs of tampering or intermittent condition.
Were there any problems found?
Yes
>> Repair wiring as necessary.

No
>> Go To 2
2.

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.
CHECK THE FUSED B(+) CIRCUIT AT THE SIREN

Disconnect the Siren connector.
circuit at the siren connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the Fused B(+) circuit for an open.

8Q - 58
4.
CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT AT THE SIREN
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, check the Ground circuit
at the siren connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Siren in accordance with the Service Information.

No

LX
LX
8Q - 59
B1A3E-SIREN / ITM MISMATCH

When Monitored:
While the VTSS is armed.
Set Condition:
ITM losses battery voltage.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS
INTERMITTENT LOSS OF FUSED B(+) TO THE ITM WITH THE VTSS ARMED
Diagnostic Test
1.

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Check for and correct any CAN B Bus DTCs set in the ITM or other modules. Also check for intermittent loss Fused B(+) to the ITM.
No

8Q - 60
LX
B1A3F-ITM ARMING SEQUENCE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
ITM losses battery voltage.
Possible Causes
CAN B BUS COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS
INTERMITTENT LOSS OF FUSED B(+) TO THE ITM DURING THE VTSS PRE-ARM PROCESS
Diagnostic Test
1.

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Check for and correct any CAN B Bus DTCs set in the ITM or other modules. Also check for intermittent loss Fused B(+) to the ITM.
No

LX
B1A41-SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN
8Q - 61
8Q - 62
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the voltage current is below a specified range this DTC will set.
Possible Causes
(A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(G945) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER OPEN/MISSING
Diagnostic Test
1.

Close all doors and arm the VTSS and wait 1 minute.
Disarm the VTSS turn the ignition on and wait 1 minute.
Does the scan tool display B1A41SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

NOTE: Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
With the scan tool actuate the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.
Measure the voltage between (A645) Intrusion Sensor Signal circuit and
(G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Ground circuit.
Is the voltage above 10.0 volts
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
LX
3.
8Q - 63
CHECK THE INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER

Install a known good Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.
With the scan tool erase DTCs.
Close all doors and arm the VTSS and wait 1 minute.
Disarm the VTSS turn the ignition on and wait 1 minute.
Does the scan tool display B1A41SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
No
>> Replace the original Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.

4.
CHECK THE (A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL WIRE

Measure the resistance of the (A645) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Signal circuit between the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector and the
Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
Yes

for an open.
No
>> Go To 5
8Q - 64
5.
CHECK THE (G945) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Ensure Ignition is off.

Measure the resistance of the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor
Ground circuit from the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector to the
Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Ground circuit for an open.
LX
LX
B1A42-SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
8Q - 65
8Q - 66
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO (G945) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER
SENSOR GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Connect a known good Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.
Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the original Intrusion Sensor Transmitter.

LX
3.
8Q - 67
CHECK THE (A645) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO (G945)
INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND

Disconnect the Intrusion Sensor Transceiver connector.
Measure the resistance between the (A645) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Signal circuit to the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Ground circuit in the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector.
Yes

for a short to the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor
Ground circuit.
No
8Q - 68
B1A43-SECURITY TRANSMITTER SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8Q - 69
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Intrusion Transceiver Module detects a short to ground condition on the sensor ground circuit.
Possible Causes
(G945) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECK THE (G945) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Transmitter Sensor Ground circuit at the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter
connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Ground circuit for a short to ground.
No

8Q - 70
B1A44-SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8Q - 71
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(G946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
INTRUSION SENSOR RECEIVER OPEN/MISSING
Diagnostic Test
1.

Close all doors and arm the VTSS and wait one minute.
Disarm the VTSS turn the ignition on and wait one minute.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE (G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

With the scan tool actuate the Intrusion Sensor Receiver.
Measure the voltage between (G460) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Signal
circuit and (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground circuit.
Is the voltage above 10.0 volts
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
8Q - 72
3.
LX
CHECK THE INTRUSION SENSOR RECEIVER

Install a known good Intrusion Sensor Receiver.
With the scan tool erase DTCs.
Close all doors and arm the VTSS and wait one minute.
Disarm the VTSS turn the ignition on and wait one minute.
Yes
No
>> Replace the original Intrusion Sensor Receiver.

4.
CHECK THE (G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL WIRE

Measure the resistance of the (G460) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Signal
circuit between the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector and the Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
Yes

for an open.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
5.
CHECK THE (G946) SENSOR GROUND WIRE FOR AN OPEN
Ensure Ignition is off.

Measure the resistance of the (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground
circuit from the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector to the Intrusion
Transceiver Module connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground circuit

for an open.
8Q - 73
8Q - 74
B1A45-SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR CIRCUIT SHORTED TOGETHER
LX
LX
8Q - 75
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO (G946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR
GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Connect a known good Intrusion Sensor Receiver.
Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the original Intrusion Sensor Receiver.

8Q - 76
3.
LX
CHECK THE (G460) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL WIRE FOR A SHORT TO (G946)
INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND

Disconnect the Intrusion Sensor Transceiver connector.
Measure the resistance between the (G460) Intrusion Receiver Sensor
Signal circuit to the (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground circuit in
the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector.
Yes

for a short to the (G946) Sensor Ground circuit.
No

LX
B1A46-SECURITY RECEIVER SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT LOW
8Q - 77
8Q - 78
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Intrusion Transceiver Module detects a short to ground condition on the sensor ground circuit.
Possible Causes
(946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go to 2
No

2.
CHECK THE (G946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Receiver Sensor Ground circuit at the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector.
Yes

No

LX
8Q - 79
B1A47-SECURITY TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT HIGH
8Q - 80
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Intrusion Transceiver Module detects a short to battery condition on the sensor ground circuit.
Possible Causes
(G945) INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
(G946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
Diagnostic Test
1.

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go to 2
No

2.
CHECK THE (G946) INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Measure the voltage of the (G946) Intrusion Receiver Sensor Ground
circuit in the Intrusion Sensor Receiver connector.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
8Q - 81
CHECK THE (G945) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY

Measure the voltage of the (G945) Intrusion Transmitter Sensor Ground
circuit in the Intrusion Sensor Transmitter connector.
Yes
>> Repair the (G945) Transmitter Sensor Ground circuit for a

short to voltage.
No

8Q - 82
B2101-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT LOW
LX
LX
8Q - 83
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the ignition switch input voltage below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPEN
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: Diagnose any related Powertrain DTC(s) before continuing.

Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go to 2
2.
NOTE: Check for any of the follow conditions:

Poor wire to terminal connection
Corroded terminals
Backed out or loose terminals
Broken wire internal to the insulation
Dirty (partial) module ground
With the ignition on, wiggle the related wires.
Using a scan tool, read DTC(s).
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Repair the wiring as necessary.

No
3.
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT OPENED
NOTE: Check the related fuses to the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. If the fuse is found
to be open, repair the circuit for a shorted condition.
Disconnect the SKREEM harness connector.
Using a 12 volt test light connected to ground, probe the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit in the
SKREEM harness connector.
Yes
>> Go to 4
No
>> Repair the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for an open.
8Q - 84
4.
LX
SKREEM
NOTE: A dirty (partial) ground can cause abnormal conditions within a system. Ensure the module has a
good ground before continuing.
Reconnect the SKREEM connector
Back probe the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit.
Start the engine.
Using the scan tool, view battery voltage under Data Display in the Engine category.
Compare the voltage on the scan tool to the voltage reading on the voltmeter.
Is the voltage on the scan tool equal to the voltmeter reading +/- .5 volt?
Yes
No
>> Repair the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for high resistance.
LX
B2102-IGNITION RUN/START INPUT HIGH
8Q - 85
8Q - 86
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the ignition switch input voltage above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go to 2
2.

Corroded terminals
Does the DTC reset?
Yes

No
3.
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
Yes
>> Repair the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
LX
B210A-SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the system voltage is below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
FUSED (B+) CIRCUIT OPEN
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go to 2
2.

Corroded terminals
Does the DTC reset?
Yes

No
8Q - 87
8Q - 88
3.
LX
NOTE: Check the related fuses to the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit. If the fuse is found
to be open repair the circuit for a shorted condition.
Yes
>> Go to 4
No
>> Repair the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for an open.
4.

Using a 12 volt test light connected to ground, probe the Fused (B+) circuit in the SKREEM harness connector.
Yes
>> Go to 5
No
>> Repair the Fused (B+) circuit for an open.

5.
SKREEM
NOTE: Repeat the below procedure for both the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit and the
Fused (B+) circuit.
Reconnect the SKREEM connector.
Back probe the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit and then the Fused (B+) circuit.
Start the engine.
Yes
No
>> Repair the circuit(s) that indicated the incorrect voltage.

LX
B210D-SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH
8Q - 89
8Q - 90
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the system voltage above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go to 2
2.

Corroded terminals
Does the DTC reset?
Yes

No
3.
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
Yes
>> Repair the Fused Ignition Switch Output (Run-Start) circuit for a short to voltage.
No
>> Replace and reprogram the SKREEM in accordance with the Service Information.
LX
8Q - 91
8Q - 92
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the Fused (B+) input voltage below a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go to 2
2.

Corroded terminals
Dirty (partial ) module ground
Does the DTC reset?
Yes

No
3.
NOTE: Check the related fuses to the Fused (B+) circuit. If the fuse is found to be open repair the circuit for
a shorted condition.
Using a 12 volt test light connected to ground, probe the Fused (B+) circuit in the SKREEM harness connector.
Yes
>> Go to 4
No
>> Repair the Fused (B+) circuit for an open.

LX
4.
8Q - 93
SKREEM
Reconnect the SKREEM connector
Back probe the Fused (B+) circuit.
Start the engine.
Yes
No
>> Repair the Fused (B+) circuit for high resistances.

8Q - 94

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The SKREEM has detected the Fused (B+) input voltage above a calibrated value.
Possible Causes
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
CAUTION: Diagnose and repair all Powertrain DTCs before continuing.

With the scan tool, record and erase the SKREEM DTCs.
Using the scan tool, read the SKREEM DTCs.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
No
>> Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST.
LX
LX
8Q - 95
B2204-ECU CONFIGURATION MISMATCH

When Monitored:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the DTC reset?
Yes
SKREEM.
Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No
8Q - 96
LX
B2205-ORIGINAL VIN MISSING/MISMATCH

When Monitored:
PCM reset.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
VERIFYING PCM VIN
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
With
Turn
Wait
Turn
With

the ignition off.
10 seconds.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 4
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
LX
3.
8Q - 97

Yes
No

4.
INTERMITTENT

wires.
terminals.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
8Q - 98
LX

When Monitored:
Anytime the ignition key is in the ON position.
Set Condition:
VIN stored in Intrusion Transceiver Module does not match the VIN stored in the Cluster.
Possible Causes
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE SWAPPED FROM DIFFERENT VEHICLE
Diagnostic Test
1.

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Using the scan tool under Miscellaneous functions initialize the Intrusion Transceiver Module.
No

LX
8Q - 99
B2224SKREEM INTERNAL
When Monitored:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the DTC reset?
Yes
SKREEM.
No
8Q - 100
LX
B2228-SKREEM INTERNAL - RKE RECEIVER

When Monitored:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the DTC reset?
Yes
SKREEM.
No
LX
8Q - 101
B2229-SKREEM INTERNAL - SKIM IMMOBILIZER

When Monitored:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the DTC reset?
Yes
SKREEM.
No
8Q - 102
LX

When Monitored:
Anytime the ignition key is in the ON position.
Set Condition:
If the Intrusion Transceiver Module is not configured.
Possible Causes
INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE CONFIGURATION
Diagnostic Test
1.
CONFIGURE THE INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE
Using the scan tool under miscellaneous functions perform the initialization procedure for the Intrusion Transceiver
Module.
Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
No
>> Test complete.

LX
8Q - 103
B223C-INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
Internal Intrusion Transceiver Module test failed.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Disarm the VTSS.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
No

8Q - 104
B2254-COLUMN LOCK MODULE INTERNAL
LX
LX
8Q - 105
When Monitored:
Continuously.
Set Condition:
If the SKREEM does not receive the correct response message back from the Steering Column Lock Module.
Possible Causes
(F892) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D508) TIRE PRESSURE BUS CIRCUIT OPEN
STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
INTERMITTENT DTC
With the scan tool, erase the current SKREEM DTCs.

Arm the VTSS and wait one minute.
Disarm the VTSS and turn the ignition on.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> The condition that caused this symptom is currently not present. Inspect the related wiring harness for
a possible intermittent condition. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched or partially broken wires.
2.
Gain access to the Steering Column Lock Module.

Disconnect the Steering Column Lock Module connector.
B(+) circuit in the Steering Column Lock Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (A917) Fused B(+) circuit for an open.

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - VER 1. (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES STANDARD PROCEDURE)
8Q - 106
3.
(A892) IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN) CIRCUIT OPEN
Ensure the ignition key is fully inserted into the ignition switch.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, check the (A892) Ignition
Switch Output (Key-In) circuit in the Steering Column Lock Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (A892) Ignition Switch Output (Key-In) circuit for
an open.
4.

Ground circuit at the Steering Column Lock Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (Z910) Ground circuit for an open.

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - 1A. (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES STANDARD PROCEDURE)
5.
(D508) TIRE PRESSURE BUS CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (D508) Tire Pressure Bus circuit between
the SKREEM and the Steering Column Lock Module connectors.
Yes
>> Replace the Steering Column Lock Module in accordance

Perform SKREEM VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
No
>> Repair the (D508) Tire Pressure Bus circuit for an open.
LX
LX
U0019-CAN B BUS
8Q - 107
8Q - 108
LX
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Whenever the CAN B Bus (+) or CAN B Bus () circuit is open, shorted to voltage or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
SKREEM
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTCs

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Does the scan tool display any CAN B BUS DTCs - ACTIVE?
Yes
>> Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
No
>> Go To 3
3.

Disconnect the SKREEM connector.
Disconnect the Front Control Module connector.
Measure the resistance of the (D55) CAN B Bus (+) circuit between the Front Control Module harness connector
and the SKREEM harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
8Q - 109
Measure the resistance of the (D54) CAN B Bus () circuit between the Front Control Module harness connector
and the SKREEM harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the SKREEM in accordance with the service information.

No

8Q - 110
U0019CAN B BUS ITM
LX
LX
8Q - 111
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8Q - 112
3.

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Intrusion Transceiver Module connector.
Yes

No

LX
LX
8Q - 113
U0141-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH FRONT CONTROL MODULE

test procedure.
U0146-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH CENTRAL GATEWAY

(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) and perform the
U0141-Lost Communication With Front Control Module test for the diagnostic test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
8Q - 114
U110D-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH SECURITY SIREN
LX
LX
8Q - 115
When Monitored:
Continuously while the VTSS is armed.
Set Condition:
If the Intrusion Transceiver Module does not receive messages from the Siren.
Possible Causes
(A117) FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) CIRCUIT OPEN
(D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY
(D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(D96) SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
SIREN
Diagnostic Test
1.
INTERMITTENT DTC
With the scan tool, erase the current Intrusion Transceiver Module DTCs.
Arm the VTSS and wait 1 minute.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
Gain access to the VTSS Siren.

B(+) (I.O.D.) circuit in the Siren connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (A117) Fused B(+) (I.O.D.) circuit for an open.
8Q - 116
3.
LX
(Z904) GROUND CIRCUIT

Ground circuit at the siren connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
FAULTY SIREN
Use the DRBIIIT and set up as follows:

Use the Scope input cable CH7058, Cable to Probe adapter CH7062,
and the red and black test probes.
Connect the scope input cable to the channel one connector on the
DRBIIIT. Attach the red and black leads and the cable to probe adapter
to the scope input cable.
Select DRBIIIT Stand-alone.
Select lab scope.
Select Live.
Select 12 volt square wave.
Press F2 for Scope.
Press F2 and use the down arrow to set voltage range to 20 volts.
Press F2 again when complete.
Connect the black lead to the chassis ground. Connect the red lead to the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit in the
Siren connector.
Close all doors and arm the VTSS.
Observe the voltage displayed on the DRBIIIT Lab Scope.
Is there a voltage square wave present 1 to 2 seconds?
Yes
>> Connect a known good siren and try to reset the DTC. If the DTC does not reset the original siren
needs to be replaced. If the DTC does reset replace the ITM.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
5.
Disconnect the Siren harness connector.

Measure the voltage of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for a short to
voltage.Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - 1A. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No
>> Go To 6
6.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D96) Siren Signal
Control circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
ground.
7.

Measure the resistance of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit
between the Intrusion Transceiver Module and the Siren connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for an open.
8Q - 117
8Q - 118
U1416-IMPLAUSIBLE SECURITY SIREN SIGNAL RECEIVED
LX
LX
8Q - 119
When Monitored:
Continuously while the VTSS is armed.
Set Condition:
If the Intrusion Transceiver Module does not receive messages from the Siren.
Possible Causes
SIREN
Diagnostic Test
1.
INTERMITTENT DTC
With the scan tool, erase the current Intrusion Transceiver Module DTCs.
Arm the VTSS and wait one minute.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(A117) FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
Gain access to the VTSS Siren.

B(+) (I.O.D.) circuit in the Siren connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (A117) Fused B(+) (I.O.D.) circuit for an open.
8Q - 120
3.
LX
(Z904) GROUND CIRCUIT

Ground circuit at the siren connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
FAULTY SIREN
Use the DRBIIIT and set up as follows:

Use the Scope input cable CH7058, Cable to Probe adapter CH7062,
and the red and black test probes.
Connect the scope input cable to the channel one connector on the
DRBIIIT. Attach the red and black leads and the cable to probe adapter
to the scope input cable.
Select DRBIIIT Stand-alone.
Select lab scope.
Select Live.
Select 12 volt square wave.
Press F2 for Scope.
Press F2 and use the down arrow to set voltage range to 20 volts.
Press F2 again when complete.
Connect the black lead to the chassis ground. Connect the red lead to the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit in the
Siren connector.
Close all doors and arm the VTSS.
Observe the voltage displayed on the DRBIIIT Lab Scope.
Is there a voltage square wave present 1 to 2 seconds?
Yes
>> Connect a known good siren and try to reset the DTC. If the DTC does not reset the original siren
needs to be replaced. If the DTC does reset replace the Intrusion Transceiver Module in accordance
No
>> Go To 5
LX
5.

Measure the voltage of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit.
Yes
voltage.Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST - 1A. (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No
>> Go To 6
6.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (D96) Siren Signal
Control circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
ground.
7.

Measure the resistance of the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit
between the Intrusion Transceiver Module and the Siren connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (D96) Siren Signal Control circuit for an open.
8Q - 121
8Q - 122
STANDARD PROCEDURE
LX
LX
8Q - 123
SKREEM/SKIM VERIFICATION
Diagnostic Test
1.
SKREEM/SKIM VERIFICATION
NOTE: When entering the PIN, care should be taken because the SKREEM will only allow 3 consecutive
attempts to enter the correct PIN. If 3 consecutive incorrect PINs are entered the SKREEM will Lock Out the
scan tool. To exit Lock Mode, the ignition key must remain the Run position for I hour. All accessories must
be off. A battery charger connected to the battery during this time period is recommended.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a premium Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) system, when the SKREEM
and/or the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to
run a routine that allows the SKREEM to be programmed with the ID number and location of the spare tire
pressure sensor mounted in the wheel of the spare tire. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM/Wireless
Control Module menu item as appropriate. In addition, if the SKREEM is replaced, the spare tire must be
dismounted from its wheel to access and note the ID number on the spare tire pressure sensor so that the
ID code for that sensor can be programmed into the new SKREEM.
1. Reconnect the previously disconnected components and connectors.
2. Obtain the vehicles unique Personal Identification Number (PIN) assigned to its original SKREEM. This number can be obtained from the vehicle invoice or from the DaimlerChrysler Customer Center (Phone 1-800-9921997).
3. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WCM/Wireless Control Module. Then select the desired
procedure and follow the display on the scan tool.
4. If the vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System program the Palcard Pressure Values into the
WCM/SKREEM.
5. Ensure all the customers key have been programmed into the new module if necessary.
6. With the scan tool, ease all DTCs. Perform 5 ignition key cycles, leaving the key on for at least 90 seconds
per cycle.
7. With the scan tool, read SKREEM DTC(s).
8.
SKREEM.
Are there any SKREEM DTC(s) present?
Yes
>> Repair not complete, refer to the appropriate symptom.
No
8Q - 124
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - SERVICE INFORMATION
LX

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - SERVICE

INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM/
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM . . . 128
HOOD AJAR SWITCH - EXPORT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
INTRUSION MODULE - EXPORT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
INTRUSION SENSOR - EXPORT
DESCRIPTION
TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
OPERATION
TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
REMOVAL
TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
INSTALLATION
TRANSMITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
SHAFT LOCK MODULE - EXPORT
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
(SKREEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
TRANSPONDER KEY
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TRANSPONDER PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . 146
VTSS/SKIS INDICATOR LAMP
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
LX
8Q - 125

DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM
The VTSS is available in two different configurations: One is designed for vehicles manufactured for sale in North
America; while the other configuration is designed for vehicles manufactured for sale in markets outside of North
America, also referred to as export markets. In addition, the VTSS for export is available in two versions: base and
premium. All vehicles equipped with VTSS are also equipped with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and the
Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), regardless of their market destination.
The North American and export base version of the VTSS system provide perimeter vehicle protection by monitoring
the vehicle doors, the ignition switch, and for vehicles built for certain markets where it is required equipment, the
hood. If unauthorized vehicle use or tampering is detected, these systems respond by pulsing the vehicle horn as
an audible deterrent and flashing certain exterior lamps as a visual deterrent.
The export premium version of the VTSS system is only available in vehicles manufactured for sale in certain markets where it is required equipment. The export premium version of the VTSS provides the same perimeter protection features as the base version, but adds interior vehicle intrusion protection.
The VTSS includes the following major components, which are described in further detail elsewhere in this service
information:
Door Ajar Switches - A door ajar switch is integral to the door latch mechanism of each front and rear door.
The FCM/IPM is located in the engine compartment, near the battery and the Power Distribution Center (PDC)
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION).
Horn Relay - The horn relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment
near the battery
Ignition Switch - The ignition switch is located on the steering column in the passenger compartment (Refer
to 8 - ELECTRICAL/IGNITION CONTROL/IGNITION SWITCH - DESCRIPTION).
Instrument Cluster - The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) is also known as the Cab Compartment Node (CCN). The EMIC/CCN is located in the instrument panel above the steering column opening,
directly in front of the driver (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DESCRIPTION).
Intrusion Module - An intrusion module is located the passenger side instrument panel, just above the glove
box of vehicles built for sale in certain export markets where it is required equipment (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER MODULE - DESCRIPTION).
Intrusion Sensor Receiver - An intrusion sensor receiver is located in the right front corner of the overhead
console above the headliner in the passenger compartment of vehicles built for sale in certain export markets
where it is required equipment (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/INTRUSION SENSOR
RECEIVER - DESCRIPTION).
Intrusion Sensor Transmitter - An intrusion sensor transmitter is located in the right C-pillar upper trim panel
in the passenger compartment of vehicles built for sale in certain export markets where it is required equipment (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/INTRUSION SENSOR TRANSMITTER DESCRIPTION).
Liftgate Ajar Switch - Wagon only - A liftgate ajar switch is integral to the latch mechanism of the liftgate.
Security Indicator - The security indicator is integral to the instrument cluster (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - OPERATION).
Siren - An alarm siren is located behind the left front wheelhouse splash shield, outboard of the left front frame
rail. A single screw secures the mounting bracket to the right end of the front crossmember of vehicles built for
sale in certain export markets where it is required equipment.
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM

The Sentry Key Remote Entry System (SKREES) provides passive vehicle protection by preventing the engine from
operating unless a valid electronically encoded key is detected in the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREES used in
combination with the export premium version of the VTSS adds a steering shaft lock feature that provides passive
protection by preventing the vehicle from being steered unless a valid electronically encoded key is detected in the
ignition lock cylinder.
8Q - 126
LX
The SKREES includes the following major components, which are described in further detail elsewhere in this service information:
Powertrain Control Module - The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in the engine compartment.
Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM)/Wireless Control Module (WCM) - The Sentry Key REmote
Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), is located on the right
side of the steering column near the ignition lock cylinder housing and an integral molded plastic antenna ring
circles the ignition lock cylinder like a halo. The SKREEM and its antenna are concealed beneath the instrument panel steering column shrouds.
Sentry Key Transponder - The Sentry Key transponder is contained within the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter on the ignition key.
Security Indicator - The security indicator is integral to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster. (Refer to 8
- ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - OPERATION).
Shaft Lock Module - A shaft lock module is located on the lower end of the steering column casting below the
instrument panel in the passenger compartment of vehicles built for sale in certain export markets where it is
required equipment.
OPERATION
The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC), sometimes referred to as the Cab Compartment Node (CCN), is
used to control and integrate many of the functions and features included in the Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS). In the VTSS, the EMIC/CCN receives inputs indicating the status of the door ajar switches, the liftgate ajar
switch and the ignition switch. The EMIC/CCN will process the information from all of these inputs, internally control
the security indicator as appropriate, and send electronic messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM internally controls the output to the hazard warning lamps and
sends a control output to energize or de-energize the horn relay as appropriate.
Following are paragraphs describing the operation of each of the VTSS features.
ENABLING
VTSS should be learned off the vehicle configuration message from the FCM when the EMIC/CCN gets replaced.
ARMING
Passive arming of the VTSS occurs when the vehicle is exited with the key removed from the ignition switch, the
headlamps are turned off, and the doors are locked while they are open using the power lock switch. Active arming
occurs when the Lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is depressed to lock the vehicle. For
active arming to occur, the doors must be closed and the ignition switch must be in the Off position when the RKE
transmitter Lock button is depressed. The power lock switch will not function if the key is in the ignition switch or
the headlamps are turned on with the driver side front door open.
Pre-arming of the VTSS is initiated when a door or the liftgate is open when the vehicle is locked using a power
door lock switch or when the RKE transmitter Lock button is depressed. Pre-arming will not occur if the key is in
the ignition switch or the headlamps are turned on with the driver side front door open. When the VTSS is prearmed, the arming sequence is delayed until all of the doors and the liftgate have been closed. The VTSS will
remain in Pre-Armed mode for up to seventeen seconds after all doors and the liftgate have been closed.
Once the VTSS begins the passive or active arming sequence, the security indicator in the instrument cluster will
flash rapidly for about seventeen seconds. This indicates that VTSS arming is in progress. If the ignition switch is
turned to the On position, a door or the liftgate is opened, a door or the liftgate is unlocked by any means, or the
RKE Panic button is depressed during the seventeen second arming process, the security indicator will stop flashing and the arming process will abort. Once the seventeen second arming sequence is successfully completed, the
security indicator will flash at a slower rate, indicating that the VTSS is armed.
DISARMING
Since this model is not equipped with lock cylinder switches, passive disarming of the VTSS is only possible if the
vehicle is equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). On vehicles with SKIS, turning the
ignition switch to the On position using a valid SKIS key will passively disarm VTSS. Active disarming of the VTSS
occurs when the vehicle is unlocked by depressing the Unlock button of the RKE transmitter. Once the alarm has
been activated, either disarming method will also deactivate the alarm. Depressing the Panic button on the RKE
transmitter will not disarm the VTSS.
LX
8Q - 127
POWER-UP MODE
When the armed VTSS senses that the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it enters its power-up
mode. In the power-up mode the alarm system remains armed following a battery failure or disconnect. If the VTSS
was armed prior to a battery disconnect or failure, the technician or vehicle operator will have to actively or passively disarm the alarm system after the battery is reconnected. The power-up mode will also apply if the battery
goes dead while the system is armed, and battery jump-starting is attempted. The VTSS will be armed until the
technician or vehicle operator has actively or passively disarmed the alarm system. If the VTSS is in the disarmed
mode prior to a battery disconnect or failure, it will remain disarmed after the battery is reconnected or replaced, or
if jump-starting is attempted.
TAMPER ALERT
The VTSS tamper alert feature will sound the horn three times upon disarming, if the alarm was triggered and has
since timed-out (about eighteen minutes) or if the battery has been disconnected and reconnected. This feature
alerts the vehicle operator that the VTSS alarm was activated while the vehicle was unattended.
INTRUSION ALARM
The intrusion alarm is an exclusive feature of the export premium version of the VTSS, which is only available in
certain markets where it is required. When the VTSS is armed, the intrusion module uses a hard wired outputs to
control an ultrasonic transmitter and receiver which allows the module to monitor the interior of the vehicle for movement. If motion is detected, the intrusion module sends an electronic message to the EMIC/CCN and the FCM over
the CAN data bus to invoke the visual alarm features, and sends an electronic message to the siren over a dedicated serial bus to invoke the audible alarm feature.
The motion detect feature of the intrusion module can be disabled by depressing the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter three times within 15 seconds during VTSS arming, while the security indicator is still flashing rapidly.
The VTSS provides a single short siren chirp as an audible confirmation that the motion detect disable request has
been received.
The intrusion module must be electronically enabled in order for the intrusion alarm to perform as designed. The
intrusion alarm function of the module is enabled on vehicles equipped with this option at the factory, but a service
replacement module must be configured and enabled by the dealer using a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. The intrusion module monitors the conditions of the transmitter and receiver sensors
as well as the siren, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) if a system
malfunction is detected. The intrusion module can be diagnosed, and any stored DTC can be retrieved using a
diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS, sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry System
(SKREES), ) is designed to provide passive protection against unauthorized vehicle use by disabling the engine
after about two seconds of running, whenever any method other than a valid Sentry Key is used to start the vehicle.
The SKIS/SKREES is considered a passive protection system because it is always active when the ignition system
is energized and does not require any customer intervention. The SKIS/SKREES uses Radio Frequency (RF) communication to obtain confirmation that the key in the ignition switch is a valid key for operating the vehicle. The
microprocessor-based SKIS/SKREES hardware and software also uses electronic messages to communicate with
other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/COMMUNICATION - OPERATION).
Pre-programmed Sentry Key transponders are provided with the vehicle from the factory. Each Sentry Key REmote
Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), will recognize a maximum
of eight Sentry Keys. If the customer would like additional keys other than those provided with the vehicle, they may
be purchased from any authorized dealer. These additional keys must be programmed to the SKREEM/WCM in the
vehicle in order for the system to recognize them as valid keys. This can be done by the dealer using a diagnostic
scan tool or, if Customer Learn programming is an available SKIS/SKREES feature in the market where the vehicle
was purchased, the customer can program the additional keys, as long as at least two valid Sentry Keys are already
available. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - STANDARD PROCEDURE - TRANSPONDER
PROGRAMMING).
In vehicles equipped with an export premium version of the VTSS, the SKIS also controls an electronic shaft lock
module on the steering column that locks the steering shaft from rotation unless a valid key is detected in the igni-
8Q - 128
LX
tion lock cylinder. The SKREEM communicates with the shaft lock module over a dedicated serial bus to monitor
and control the shaft lock function.
The SKREEM performs a self-test of the SKIS and the shaft lock module each time the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) if a system malfunction is detected. The SKREEM will also send an electronic message to the instrument cluster if a fault is
detected, and the instrument cluster illuminates the security indicator or displays a textual shaft lock error message
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) as appropriate. The SKIS can be diagnosed, and any stored
DTC can be retrieved using a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.

VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM/SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (SKIM)/SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
(SKREES)
Conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIM), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry System (SKREES), the ElectroMechanical
Instrument Cluster (EMIC), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, or
the electronic message inputs used to provide the electronic features of the SKREES. The most reliable, efficient,
and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM, the EMIC, the PCM, the CAN data bus, and the electronic message
inputs for the SKREES requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
CONDITION
SECURITY INDICATOR
FAILS TO LIGHT DURING
BULB TEST
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTION
1. Light-Emitting Diode (LED)

faulty.
1. Perform the instrument cluster actuator test.

(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING ACTUATOR TEST)..
2. Fuse faulty.
2. Check the SKREEM fused B(+) fuse and the

fused ignition switch output (run-start) fuse in the
Junction Block (JB). Replace fuses, if required.
3. Ground path faulty.
3. Check for continuity to ground at the connector

for the SKREEM. Repair wiring, if required.
4. Battery feed faulty.
4. Check for battery voltage at the connector for

the SKREEM. Repair wiring, if required.
5. Ignition feed faulty.
5. Check for battery voltage at the connector for

the SKREEM with the ignition switch in the On
position. Repair wiring, if required.
SECURITY INDICATOR
FLASHES FOLLOWING
BULB TEST
1. Invalid key in ignition

switch lock cylinder.
1. Replace the key with a known valid key.
2. Key-related fault.
2. Use a diagnostic scan tool and the appropriate

diagnostic information for further diagnosis.
SECURITY INDICATOR
LIGHTS SOLID FOLLOWING
BULB TEST
1. SKREES system
malfunction/fault detected.

2. SKREES system
inoperative.

VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM

However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ElectroMechanical
Instrument Cluster (EMIC), the Front Control Module (FCM), the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, or the
electronic message inputs used to provide the electronic features of the VTSS. The most reliable, efficient, and
LX
8Q - 129
accurate means to diagnose the EMIC, the FCM, the CAN data bus, and the electronic message inputs for the
VTSS requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
8Q - 130
LX
HOOD AJAR SWITCH - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole,
spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is used
only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) for sale in certain markets where it
is required equipment. The switch is connected to the
vehicle electrical system through the headlamp and
dash wire harness.
The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting
collar (4) and sleeve on the upper end of the switch
body. The sleeve has a one-time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by
closing the hood. Two integral latches (2) lock the
switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped
steel switch mounting bracket. The mounting bracket
is secured toward the left rear of the engine compartment. The underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is
closed.
An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or
repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit.
OPERATION
The hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed
by the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the
spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. The switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM
uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts.
The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a
ribbed, ratcheting sleeve at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting
collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is
closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the sleeve and the sleeve is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the sleeve
are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position.
REMOVAL
1. Unlatch and open the hood.
3. From the top of the hood ajar switch mounting bracket, squeeze the two switch latch tabs together and pull the
switch upward.
4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole in the mounting bracket far enough to access and disconnect the
wire harness connector and remove switch from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Self-adjustment of the hood ajar switch is a one-time feature. If the switch is damaged, ineffective,
removed or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit.
1. Position the hood ajar switch near the hole in the mounting bracket.
2. Pull the wire harness connector through the switch mounting bracket and reconnect it to the switch.
3. From the top of the mounting bracket, press the switch downward into the mounting hole until the integral switch
latch tabs lock it into place.
LX
5. Close and latch the hood. This will adjust the hood ajar switch to the proper height.
8Q - 131
8Q - 132
LX
INTRUSION MODULE - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
An intrusion module (1) is part of the premium version
of the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS). The premium version of the VTSS is only available in vehicles
built for certain markets, where the additional features
offered by this system are required. The intrusion
module is located in the passenger compartment. This
unit is designed to work in conjunction with the intrusion sensor transmitter and intrusion sensor receiver
to provide interior motion detection and serves as the
interface between the Forward Control Module (FCM),
the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC),
(CCN), and the alarm siren.
The intrusion module has two integral mounts (2) that
are secured behind the passenger side instrument
panel, just above the glove box. Concealed within the
molded plastic housing is the circuitry of the module,
which includes a microprocessor. The module is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a connector
of the body wire harness.
The intrusion module unit cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced.
OPERATION
The microprocessor in the intrusion module contains the motion detection logic circuits and controls all of the features of the premium version of the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS). The module uses On-Board Diagnostics
(OBD) and can communicate with other modules in the vehicle as well as with a diagnostic scan tool using the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used by the module to communicate with
the Forward Control Module (FCM) and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC), sometimes referred to as
the Cab Compartment Node (CCN). The module also communicates with the alarm siren over a dedicated serial
bus circuit.
The intrusion module microprocessor continuously monitors inputs from the intrusion sensor transmitter and receiver
as well as inputs from the EMIC/CCN and the alarm siren module. The module energizes the intrusion sensor transmitter, which transmits ultrasonic signals into the vehicle cabin through a transmit transducer, then monitors the
current draw of the transmitter to detect problems with the transmitter and transmitter circuits. The module also
energizes the intrusion sensor receiver, which listens to the ultrasonic signals through a receive transducer as they
bounce off of objects in the vehicle interior, then monitors the current draw of the receiver for data signals and to
detect problems with the receiver and receiver circuits. If an object is moving in the interior, a detection circuit in the
module senses this movement through the modulation of the returning data signals from the receiver.
If movement is detected, the intrusion module sends an electronic message to the FCM over the CAN data bus to
flash the exterior lighting and sends another message to the alarm siren module over the dedicated serial bus line
to sound the siren. When the EMIC/CCN or FCM detect a breach in the perimeter protection through a door or hood
ajar switch input, they send an electronic message to the intrusion module and the module sends a message to the
FCM to flash the exterior lighting and a message to the alarm siren module to sound the siren. The module also
monitors message inputs from the alarm siren module for siren battery or siren input/output circuit tamper alerts,
and siren battery condition alerts, then sets active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) for any monitored
system faults it detects. An active fault only remains for the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes
a DTC to be stored in memory by the module. If a fault does not recur for 50 ignition cycles, the module will automatically erase the stored DTC.
The intrusion module receives constant battery voltage (when armed), and is grounded at all times through a hard
wired remote ground point. These connections allow the module to remain operational, regardless of the ignition
switch position. Use a diagnostic scan tool and refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for proper diagnosis
of the system.
LX
8Q - 133
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.

Remove the glove box (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX - REMOVAL).
Reach up behind the instrument panel and remove the two retaining screws to the intrusion module.
Disconnect the electrical connector to the intrusion Module.
5. Remove the module from the instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position the intrusion module on the passenger side of the instrument panel and connect the electrical connector.
Install and tighten the two fasteners that secure the module to the instrument panel.
Install the glove box (Refer to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/GLOVE BOX - INSTALLATION).
Connect the battery negative cable.
8Q - 134
LX
INTRUSION SENSOR - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
TRANSMITTER
An intrusion sensor transmitter (2) is part of the premium version of the Vehicle Theft Security System
(VTSS). The premium version of the VTSS is only
available in vehicles built for certain markets, where
the additional features offered by this system are
required. This unit is designed to work in conjunction
with the intrusion sensor receiver to provide interior
motion detection inputs to the intrusion module, which
serves as the interface between the Forward Control
Module (FCM), the ElectroMechanical Instrument
Cluster (EMIC), sometimes referred to as the Cab
Compartment Node (CCN), and the alarm siren.
The transmitter is located in the passenger compartment, where it is concealed behind the right C-pillar.
The trim bezel has a small round opening that faces
the front of the vehicle through which the transducer is
aimed. Concealed within the molded plastic transmitter
housing is the circuitry of the transmitter which
includes an ultrasonic transmit transducer (1).
The intrusion sensor transmitter cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. The
transmitter mounting bracket is serviced as a unit with the headliner. The transducer trim bezel is available for separate service replacement.
RECEIVER
An intrusion sensor receiver (1) is part of the premium
version of the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS).
The premium version of the VTSS is only available in
vehicles built for certain markets, where the additional
features offered by this system are required. This unit
is designed to work in conjunction with the intrusion
sensor transmitter to provide interior motion detection
inputs to the intrusion module, which serves as the
interface between the Forward Control Module (FCM),
the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC),
(CCN), and the alarm siren.
The receiver is located in the passenger compartment,
where it is concealed behind the right front corner of
the overhead console housing and engages three
latch tabs integral to the receiver housing. The ultrasonic receiver transducer (2) is aimed through a small
dedicated round opening in the overhead console forward of the reading lamps and is the only evidence of
the receiver that is visible from the passenger compartment.
Concealed within the receiver housing is the circuitry which includes the receive transducer. The receiver is connected to the vehicle electrical system wire harness that is integral to the headliner.
The intrusion sensor receiver cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. The
receiver mounting bracket is serviced as a unit with the overhead console.
LX
8Q - 135
OPERATION
TRANSMITTER
The intrusion sensor transmitter operates only when it is energized by the intrusion module. The transmitter generates ultrasonic signals into the vehicle cabin through a transmit transducer. Then the intrusion sensor receiver listens to the returning signals as they bounce off of objects in the vehicle interior and provides input signals to the
intrusion module. If an object is moving in the interior, a detection circuit in the intrusion module senses this movement through the modulation of the returning signals that occur due to the Doppler effect. The intrusion module
monitors the current draw of the transmitter circuits to determine the condition of the transmitter and, if the draw is
too high or too low, it will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected.
Use a diagnostic scan tool and refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for diagnosis and testing of the system.
RECEIVER
The intrusion sensor receiver operates only when it is energized by the intrusion module. The receiver monitors
ultrasonic signals generated in the vehicle cabin by the intrusion sensor transmitter through a receive transducer.
The receiver listens to the ultrasonic signals as they bounce off of objects in the vehicle interior and provides input
signals to the intrusion module. If an object is moving in the interior, a detection circuit in the intrusion module
senses this movement through the modulation of the returning signals that occur due to the Doppler effect. The
intrusion module monitors the current draw of the receiver circuits to determine the condition of the receiver and, if
the draw is too high or too low, it will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected.
Use a diagnostic scan tool and refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for diagnosis and testing of the system.
REMOVAL
TRANSMITTER
2. If replacing the bezel, pull the bezel (1) inboard
from the C-pillar (3), or use a trim stick or equivalent to unsnap it from the transducer housing (2) of
the intrusion sensor transmitter.
3. Remove the C-pillar trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/INTERIOR/C-PILLAR TRIM - REMOVAL).
4. Remove the two retaining screws from the C-pillar
and remove the sensor.
8Q - 136
RECEIVER
2. Remove the overhead console from the headliner.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE
- REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (5) on the
receiver housing.
4. Release the three latch features (2) of the mounting bracket and disengage the receiver from the
bracket.
INSTALLATION
TRANSMITTER
1. Position the sensor on the inside of the C-pillar.
2. Install the two retaining screws.
4. Install the C-pillar (Refer to 23 - BODY/INTERIOR/
C-PILLAR TRIM - INSTALLATION).
5. If installing the bezel, position the bezel (1) over
the transducer housing (2) of the intrusion sensor
transmitter and press it straight on until it snaps
into place against the Cpillar (3).
LX
LX
RECEIVER
1. Position the intrusion sensor receiver (1) to the
mounting bracket (4) on the right front corner of the
overhead console housing (3).
2. Press the receiver down until the three latch features (2) of the bracket are fully engaged.
3. Connect the electrical connector (5) on the receiver
housing.
4. Install the overhead console onto the headliner.
(Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/OVERHEAD CONSOLE
- INSTALLATION).
8Q - 137
8Q - 138
LX
SHAFT LOCK MODULE - EXPORT

DESCRIPTION
A shaft lock module (1) is part of the premium version of
the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) in the Vehicle
Theft Security System (VTSS). The premium version of
the SKIS is only available in vehicles built for certain
markets, where the additional features offered by this
system are required. The shaft lock module is located in
a bracket integral to the lower end of the steering column
housing casting below the instrument panel in the passenger compartment. This unit is designed to work in
conjunction with the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module
(SKREEM) to control a locking bolt (2) that engages a
machined slot in the steering shaft to prevent shaft rotation whenever there is not a valid key present in the ignition lock cylinder on the instrument panel.
Concealed within the module is the electronic circuitry
of the module, and a bi-directional electric motor that
actuates the locking bolt. The module is connected to
the vehicle electrical system through the instrument
panel wire harness.
The mounting provisions for the shaft lock module are designed to resist unauthorized tampering. The module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position, or while the steering column is installed in the vehicle. The shaft lock module unit cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or
damaged, the entire steering column must be replaced.
OPERATION
The electronic circuitry within the shaft lock module contains all of the logic circuits and components to monitor and
control the operation of the shaft locking bolt. The module uses a serial data bus for bi-directional communication
with the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module
(WCM). If the module detects a problem with the positioning or operation of the locking bolt, it sends an error message to the SKREEM/WCM. The SKREEM/WCM then stores a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends an electronic error message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC), sometimes referred to as the Cab
Compartment Node (CCN), over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a SERVICE COLUMN LOCK
message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
The shaft lock module continuously monitors inputs from the SKREEM/WCM and energizes the electric motor to
move the locking bolt to the locked or unlocked position based upon that input. If the SKREEM/WCM indicates that
the key present in the ignition lock cylinder is invalid, the locking bolt remains in the locked position. When the
SKREEM/WCM indicates that a valid key is present in the ignition lock cylinder, the shaft lock module operates a
motor to move the locking bolt to the unlocked position. However, to prevent inadvertent column locking due to a
failure while the vehicle is being operated, the module cannot move the locking bolt from the unlocked position to
the locked position as long as a key remains in the ignition lock cylinder.
The shaft lock module receives ground at all times through a hard wired remote ground point. The module receives
battery voltage to operate and to move the locking bolt in the unlocked direction on a B(+) circuit, and receives
battery voltage to operate the locking bolt in the locked direction only when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. These connections allow the module to remain operational, regardless of the ignition switch position.
For added system security, the shaft lock module learns a unique Secret Key code from the SKREEM/WCM over
the serial data bus upon initialization. This code is stored in the memory of the module and cannot be changed.
Therefore, if the SKREEM/WCM requires service replacement, a new shaft lock module will also be required.
Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM/WCM Secured Access Mode. The
Secured Access Mode is required during service to initialize a new shaft lock module. The shaft lock module is not
available for separate service replacement. It is integral to the steering column so a complete column must be
installed if the module is damaged or inoperative (Refer to 19 - STEERING/COLUMN - REMOVAL).
Use a diagnostic scan tool and refer to the appropriate diagnostic information to diagnose and test the system.
LX
8Q - 139

DESCRIPTION
The Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (3),
sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module
(WCM), performs the functions of what used to be the
Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM), the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Module, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring (TPM) System.
The SKREEM/WCM is located on and around

(antenna ring) (4) the ignition key cylinder (2) along
with the ignition switch (1). It is accessible only from
behind the instrument panel, to the left of the steering
column. Serviceability requires lock cylinder removal
to access the complete unit.
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (SKREES)

The Sentry Key REmote Entry System (SKREES), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
(SKIS), authenticates an electronically coded Transponder Key placed into the ignition and sends a valid/invalid key
message to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) based upon the results. The VALID/INVALID KEY message
communication is performed using a rolling code algorithm via the Programmable Controller Area Network (CAN)
data bus. A VALID KEY message must be sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) within two seconds of
ignition ON to free the engine from immobilization.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE transmitter uses radio frequency signals to communicate with the SKREEM/WCM. The SKREEM/WCM is
on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus network. When the operator presses a button on the transmitter, it
sends a specific request to the SKREEM/WCM. In turn the SKREEM/WCM sends the appropriate request over the
CAN bus to the Integrated Power Module (IPM) to activate the park lamps, the headlamps, and the horn for horn
chirp.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM)

If equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) System, each of the vehicles four wheels will have a valve
stem with a pressure sensor and radio transmitter built in. Signals from the tire pressure sensor/transmitter are
received and interpreted by the SKREEM/WCM.
A sensor/transmitter in a mounted wheel will broadcast its detected pressure once per minute when the vehicle is
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h). Each sensor/transmitters broadcast is uniquely coded so that the SKREEM/
WCM can determine the location.
8Q - 140
LX
OPERATION
SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (SKREES)
The Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM),
receives an encrypted Radio Frequency (RF) signal from the transponder key. The SKREEM/WCM then decrypts
the signal and broadcasts the requested remote commands to the appropriate modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. A valid transponder key ID must be incorporated into the RF signal in order for
the SKREEM/WCM to pass the message on to the appropriate modules.
Automatic transponder key synchronization is done by the SKREEM/WCM if a valid transponder key is inserted into
the ignition cylinder, and the ignition is turned ON. This provides a maximum operation window for RKE functions.
Each Sentry Key Remote Entry System (SKREES), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
(SKIS), consists of a SKREEM/WCM and a transponder key. Each system has a secret key code unique to that
system. The secret key is electronically coded in the SKREEM/WCM and in all programmed transponder keys. It is
used for immobilization and RKE functions for data security. In addition, each transponder key will have a unique
identification.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

After pressing the lock button on the RKE transmitter, all of the door locks will lock, the illuminated entry will turn off
(providing all doors are closed), and the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) (if equipped) will arm. After pressing
the unlock button, on the RKE transmitter, one time, the driver door lock will unlock, the illuminated entry will turn on
the courtesy lamps, and the VTSS (if equipped) will disarm. After pressing the unlock button a second time, the
remaining door locks will unlock. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or a scan tool can reprogram this
feature to unlock all of the door locks with one press of the unlock button. If the vehicle is equipped with the memory system, the memory message will identify which transmitter (1 or 2) sent the signal. Refer to Overhead Console/
Electronic Vehicle Information Center for more information on customer programmable features.
The SKREEM/WCM is capable of retaining up to 8 individual access codes (8 transmitters). If the PRNDL is in any
position except park, the SKREEM/WCM will disable the RKE. The 4 button transmitter uses 1-CR2032 battery. The
minimum battery life is approximately 4.7 years based on 20 transmissions a day at 84F (25C). Use a scan tool
or the Miller Tool 9001 RF Detector to test the RKE transmitter. Use a scan tool or the customer programming
method to program the RKE system. However, the SKREEM/WCM will only allow RKE programming when the ignition is in the ON position, the PRNDL is in park position, and the VTSS (if equipped) is disarmed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING (TPM)

The SKREEM monitors the signals from the tire pressure sensor/transmitters and determines if any tire has gone
below the low pressure threshold LOW TIRE PRESSURE THRESHOLDS table.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE THRESHOLDS
SYSTEM STATUS
INDICATOR
TIRE PRESSURE
ON
172 kPa (25 PSI)
OFF
207 kPa (30 PSI)
LX
8Q - 141
CRITICAL AND NON-CRITICAL SYSTEM ALERTS

CRITICAL: A critical alert will be triggered when a tire pressure has gone below a set threshold pressure. The
SKREEM will send a message to the cluster to display X TIRE(S) LOW PRESSURE. X will be the number of
tires reporting low pressure. The message will display for the duration of the current ignition cycle or until an EVIC
button is pressed. If the display is removed without correcting the condition, it will reappear 300 seconds to warn the
driver of the low pressure condition.
NONCRITICAL: A noncritical alert will be triggered when no signal is received from a sensor/transmitter or when a
sensor/transmitter low battery condition is detected. The cluster will display SERVICE TIRE PRESS. SYSTEM.

For proper diagnosis and testing of the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the
Wireless Control Module (WCM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM),
use a scan tool and appropriate diagnostic information.
REMOVAL
3. Remove the steering column opening cover (Refer
to 23 - BODY/INSTRUMENT PANEL/STEERING
COLUMN OPENING COVER - REMOVAL).
4. Reach up behind the left side of the center stack
and disconnect the ignition switch (6) and
SKREEM (5) electrical connectors.
8Q - 142
LX
5. From underneath the ignition switch/lock assembly, loosen the lower retaining screw (2).
6. Remove the two mounting nuts (1) from the front of the instrument panel.
7. Push the ignition switch/lock assembly (3) inward toward the bulkhead.
8. Remove the SKREEM mounting screw (1) on the
ignition lock assembly and separate the SKREEM
from the ignition lock assembly.
NOTE: After a SKREEM/WCM is replaced, the ignition/transponder keys need to be programmed to
the new SKREEM/WCM. Follow the directions on
the diagnostic scan tool. The transponder key for
the SKREES/SKIM and the RKE will both be programmed during this operation. There is no need
to program the fob of the key for RKE functionality
once the transponder key is programmed to the
new SKREEM/WCM.
NOTE: When a PCM and the SKREEM/WCM are
replaced at the same time, perform the following
steps in order:
PROGRAMMING).
LX
8Q - 143
INSTALLATION
NOTE: After a SKREEM/WCM is replaced, the ignition/transponder keys need to be programmed to
the new SKREEM/WCM. Follow the directions on
the diagnostic scan tool. The transponder key for
the SKREES/SKIM and the RKE will both be programmed during this operation. There is no need
to program the fob of the key for RKE functionality
once the transponder key is programmed to the
new SKREEM/WCM.
NOTE: When a PCM and the SKREEM/WCM are
replaced at the same time, perform the following
steps in order:
Program all ignition/transponder keys to the new
SKREEM/WCM.
PROGRAMMING).
1. Position the SKREEM on the ignition lock housing and install the retaining screw (1).
2. Position the ignition switch/lock assembly (3) up in behind the instrument panel and push rearward.
3. Install the two mounting nuts to the front of the instrument panel (1).
8Q - 144
4. From underneath the ignition switch/lock assembly,

tighten the lower retaining screw (3).
5. Reach up behind the left side of the center stack
and connect the ignition switch (6) and SKREEM
(5) electrical connectors.
7. Install the steering column opening cover (Refer to
COLUMN OPENING COVER - INSTALLATION).
LX
LX
8Q - 145
TRANSPONDER KEY
DESCRIPTION
Each ignition key (2) used in the Sentry Key Remote
Entry System (SKREES), sometimes referred to as
the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) has a transponder chip included on the circuit board (4) beneath
the cover (1) of the integral Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter (3). In addition to having to be cut to
match the mechanical coding of the ignition lock cylinder and programmed for operation of the RKE system,
each new Sentry Key has a unique transponder identification code that is permanently programmed into it
by the manufacturer, and which must be programmed
into the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM),
sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module
(WCM), to be recognized by the SKREES/SKIS as a
valid key.
The Sentry Key transponder cannot be adjusted or

repaired. If faulty or damaged, the entire key and RKE
transmitter unit must be replaced.
OPERATION
When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes
referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), communicates through its antenna with the Sentry Key transponder using a Radio Frequency (RF) signal. The SKREEM/WCM then listens for a RF response from the transponder through the same antenna. The Sentry Key transponder chip is within the range of the SKREEM/WCM
transceiver antenna ring when it is inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREEM/WCM determines whether
a valid key is present in the ignition lock cylinder based upon the response from the transponder. If a valid key is
detected, that fact is communicated by the SKREEM/WCM to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and the PCM allows the engine to continue running. If the PCM receives an
invalid key message, or receives no message from the SKREEM/WCM over the CAN data bus, the engine will be
disabled after about two seconds of operation. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will also respond
to the invalid key message on the CAN data bus by flashing the security indicator on and off.
Each Sentry Key has a unique transponder identification code permanently programmed into it by the manufacturer.
Likewise, the SKREEM/WCM has a unique Secret Key code programmed into it by the manufacturer. When a Sentry Key is programmed into the memory of the SKREEM/WCM, the SKREEM/WCM stores the transponder identification code from the Sentry Key, and the Sentry Key learns the Secret Key code from the SKREEM/WCM. Once
the Sentry Key learns the Secret Key code of the SKREEM/WCM, it is permanently stored in the memory of the
transponder. Therefore, once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a particular vehicle, it cannot be used on any
other vehicle (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/TRANSPONDER KEY - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
8Q - 146
LX
The Sentry Key REmote Entry System (SKREES), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
(SKIS), performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the On position, and will store key-related fault
information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM/WCM memory if a Sentry Key transponder
problem is detected. The Sentry Key transponder chip can be diagnosed, and any stored DTC can be retrieved
using a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information.
Common communication problems:
Two transponder keys too close together.
Speed Pass too close to transponder key.
Solid indicator that there is a system failure.
Loss of PCM communication.
Failed antenna circuit.
order:
PROGRAMMING).
STANDARD PROCEDURE
TRANSPONDER PROGRAMMING
order:
PROGRAMMING).
All Sentry Keys included with the vehicle are pre-programmed to work with the Sentry Key Remote Entry System
(SKREES), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), when it is shipped from the factory.
The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM),
can be programmed to recognize up to a total of eight Sentry Keys. When programming a blank Sentry Key transponder, the key must first be cut to match the ignition switch lock cylinder in the vehicle for which it will be used.
Once the additional or new key has been cut, the SKREEM/WCM must be programmed to recognize it as a valid
key. There are two possible methods to program the SKREEM/WCM to recognize a new or additional valid key, the
Secured Access Method and the Customer Learn Method. Following are the details of these two programming
methods.
LX
8Q - 147
SECURED ACCESS METHOD

The Secured Access method applies to all vehicles. This method requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. This
method will also require that you have access to the unique four-digit PIN code that was assigned to the original
SKREEM/WCM. The PIN code MUST be used to enter the Secured Access Mode in the SKREEM/WCM. This PIN
number may be obtained from the vehicle owner, from the original vehicle invoice, or from the DaimlerChrysler Customer Center. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for the proper Secured Access method programming
procedures.
NOTE: The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
CUSTOMER LEARN METHOD

The Customer Learn feature is only available on domestic vehicles, or those vehicles which have a U.S. country
code designator. This programming method also requires access to at least two valid Sentry Keys. If two valid Sentry Keys are not available, or if the vehicle does not have a U.S. country code designator, the Secured Access
Method MUST be used to program new or additional valid keys to the SKREEM/WCM. The Customer Learn programming method procedures are as follows:
1. Obtain the blank Sentry Key(s) that are to be programmed as valid keys for the vehicle. Cut the blank key(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder mechanical key codes.
2. Insert one of the two valid Sentry Keys into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the On position.
3. After the ignition switch has been in the On position for longer than three seconds, but no more than fifteen
seconds, cycle the ignition switch back to the Off position. Replace the first valid Sentry Key in the ignition switch
lock cylinder with the second valid Sentry Key and turn the ignition switch back to the On position. The second
valid Sentry Key must be inserted in the lock cylinder within fifteen seconds of removing the first valid key.
4. About ten seconds after the completion of Step 3, the security indicator in the instrument cluster will start to flash
to indicate that the system has entered the Customer Learn programming mode.
5. Within sixty seconds of entering the Customer Learn programming mode, turn the ignition switch to the Off position, replace the valid Sentry Key with a blank Sentry Key transponder, and turn the ignition switch back to the
On position.
6. About ten seconds after the completion of Step 5, the security indicator will stop flashing, stay on solid for three
seconds, then turn off to indicate that the blank Sentry Key has been successfully programmed. The SKREES/
SKIS will immediately exit the Customer Learn programming mode. After the ignition is cycled the vehicle may be
started using the newly programmed valid Sentry Key.
NOTE: The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Each of these steps must be repeated and completed in their entirety for each additional Sentry Key that is to be
programmed. If the above steps are not completed in the given sequence, or within the allotted time, the SKREEM/
WCM will exit the Customer Learn programming mode and the programming will be unsuccessful. The SKREEM/
WCM will also automatically exit the Customer Learn programming mode if it sees a non-blank Sentry Key
transponder when it should see a blank, if it has already programmed eight (8) valid Sentry Keys, or if the ignition
switch is turned to the Off position for more than about fifty seconds.
NOTE: If an attempt is made to start the vehicle while in the Customer Learn mode (security indicator flashing), the SKREES/SKIS will respond as though the vehicle were being started with an invalid key. In other
words, the engine will stall after about two seconds of operation. No faults will be set.
NOTE: Once a Sentry Key has been programmed as a valid key to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed as a
valid key for use on any other vehicle.
8Q - 148
LX
VTSS/SKIS INDICATOR LAMP

DESCRIPTION
The Sentry Key Remote Entry System (SKREES), sometimes referred to as the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
(SKIS), uses an indicator light to convey information on the status of the system to the customer. This light is shared
with the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS). The light is located in the instrument panel switch pod, just to the
right of the cluster. The indicator light is controlled by the Cab Compartment Node (CCN), via the Controller Area
Network (CAN) data bus based upon messages it receives from the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM),
sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM),on the CAN data bus, and is hard wired to the cluster.
OPERATION
The VTSS/SKREES lamp is controlled according to Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), sometimes
referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), messages. Then, the SKREEM/WCM sends messages to the
Front Control Module (FCM) to operate the light based upon the results of the SKREES/SKIS self tests. The light
may be actuated in two possible ways, flashing or on solid. If the light comes on and stays on solid after a power-up
test, this indicates that the SKREEM/WCM has detected a system malfunction. If the SKREEM/WCM detects an
invalid key when the ignition switch is moved to the ON position, it sends a message on the CAN bus to the FCM,
to flash the light. The SKREEM/WCM can also send a message to flash the light and generate a single audible
chime at the same time. These two events occurring simultaneously indicate that the SKREES/SKIS has been
placed into the 9Customer Learn9 mode (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY/TRANSPONDER
KEY - STANDARD PROCEDURE). If the light comes on and stays on after the power-up test, diagnosis of the
SKREES/SKIS should be performed using a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information. The light is not a
serviceable component.
WIPERS/WASHERS
LX
8R - 1
WIPERS/WASHERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
WIPERS/WASHERS - ELECTRICAL
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
WIPERS/WASHERS - SERVICE INFORMATION . . 63
WIPERS/WASHERS - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
WIPERS/WASHERS - ELECTRICAL
DIAGNOSTICS
B2304-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B2305-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B2313-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
B2317-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
B231F-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR
B2320-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR
B2321-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR
B230D-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
B230E-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
B231B-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL

CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
B231C-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
B231D-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL
CIRCUIT OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
B2323-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR
B2328-WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR
INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (RSM) . . . . . . 53
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH (RSM) . . . . . . 54
B2211-RAIN SENSOR MODULE
INITIALIZATION PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . 55
B221D-(RSM) RAIN SENSOR MODULE
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
B2329-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 1
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
B232A-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 2
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
B232B-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 3
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
B232C-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 4
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
U0019CAN B BUS (RSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8R - 2

LX
LX
B2304-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8R - 3
8R - 4
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The FCM detects a short to ground condition.
Possible Causes
FRONT WIPER MOTOR

(W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Wipers on, then off.
Scan Tool, read the FCM DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2304-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
WIPER MOTOR

Disconnect the Front Wiper Motor harness connector.
Activate the Wipers
Wait 30 seconds.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2305-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Replace the Front Wiper Motor in accordance with the service information.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(W7) FRONT WIPER MOTOR PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the IPM C5 harness connector.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (W7) Front Wiper Park
Switch Sense circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit for a
short to ground condition.
No

8R - 5
8R - 6
B2305-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8R - 7
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The FCM detects an open condition.
Possible Causes
(W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Front Wipers on, then off.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2305-WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(W7) FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Front Wiper Motor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W7) Front Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit for a
short to voltage.
No
>> Replace the FCM in accordance with the service information.

FRONT CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) )
8R - 8
B2313-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8R - 9
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a short/low condition.
Possible Causes

WIPER ON/OFF RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: Check all fuses and circuit breakers before proceeding with
the diagnosis of this DTC.
Remove the Wiper ON/OFF relay.
Measure the voltage at cavity 86 of the Wiper ON/OFF relay.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Check the (A11) Fused B+ circuit for an open.

2.
WIPER ON/OFF RELAY

Replace the Wiper ON/OFF relay with and known good relay.
Turn the Wipers ON then OFF.
With the Scan Tool, read the Wiper DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2313-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Wiper ON/OFF relay.

8R - 10
3.

Disconnect the FCM from the IPM.
Measure the voltage on cavity 27 (Wiper ON/OFF Relay Control) of the
IPM.
Yes

No
>> Replace the IPM in accordance with the service information.

LX
LX
B2314-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8R - 11
8R - 12
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a short/HIGH condition.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the Scan Tool read: B2314-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
No
>> Test complete.

LX
B2315-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
8R - 13
8R - 14
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the Scan Tool read: B2315-WIPER ON/OFF CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
No
>> Test complete.

LX
B2317-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8R - 15
8R - 16
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

WIPER HI/LOW RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.
Remove the Wiper HI/LOW relay.
Measure the voltage at cavity 86 of the Wiper HI/LOW relay.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
WIPER HI/LOW RELAY

Replace the Wiper HI/LOW relay with and known good relay.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2313-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Wiper HI/LOW relay.

LX
3.

Measure the voltage on cavity 29 (Wiper HI/LOW Relay Control) of the
IPM.
Yes

No

8R - 17
8R - 18
B2318-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8R - 19
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the Scan Tool read: B2318-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
No
>> Test complete.

8R - 20
B2319-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8R - 21
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the Scan Tool read: B2319-WIPER HI/LOW CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
No
>> Test complete.

8R - 22
B231F-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8R - 23
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a short/low condition on the washer Pump Motor Control circuit.
Possible Causes
(W10)/(W20) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TOGETHER

(W10) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
WIPER WASHER PUMP
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Washers on.
Scan Tool, read the Wiper/Washers DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B231F-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
WASHER PUMP MOTOR

Disconnect the Washer Pump Motor connector.
Does the Scan Tool read:B231F-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Washer Pump Motor in accordance with the

8R - 24
3.
(W10)/(W20) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUITS SHORT TOGETHER

Disconnect the IPM C4 and C5 harness connectors.
Measure the resistance between the (W10) and (W20) Washer Pump
Motor Control circuits.
Yes
>> Repair the (W10) and (W20) Washer Pump Motor Control
circuits for a short together.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (W10) Washer Pump
Motor Control circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W10) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit for a
short to ground.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (W20) Washer Pump
Motor Control circuit.
Yes
short to ground.
No

8R - 25
8R - 26
B2320-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8R - 27
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(W10) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Washers on.
Scan Tool, read the Wiper/Washers DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2320-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Washer Pump Motor harness connector.
Measure the voltage of the (W10) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit.
Yes
short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 3
8R - 28
3.

Measure the Voltage of the (W20) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit.
Yes
short to voltage.
No

LX
LX
B2321-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
8R - 29
8R - 30
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(W10) WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Washers on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2321-FRONT/REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Disconnect the Washer Pump Motor harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W10) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W10) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit for an
open.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Measure the resistance of the (W20) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W20) Washer Pump Motor Control circuit for an
open.
No

8R - 31
8R - 32
B230D-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8R - 33
Possible Causes
REAR WIPER MOTOR
(W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Rear Wipers on.
Does the Scan Tool read: B230D-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
REAR WIPER MOTOR

Disconnect the Rear Wiper Motor connector.
With the Scan Tool, read the FCM DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B230D-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH
INPUT CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Rear Wiper Motor in accordance with the service information.
8R - 34
3.
(W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (W17) Rear Wiper
Park Switch Sense circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit for
a short condition.
No

LX
LX
B230E-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
8R - 35
8R - 36
LX
Possible Causes
(W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Rear Wipers on.
Scan Tool, read the Rear Wiper DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B230E-REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
(W17) REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the Rear Wiper Motor connector.
Measure the resistance of the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W17) Rear Wiper Park Switch Sense circuit for
an open condition.
No

LX
B231B-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
8R - 37
8R - 38
LX
Possible Causes
REAR WIPER RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: Check all fuses and circuit breakers before proceeding with the diagnosis of this DTC.
Remove the Rear Wiper relay.
Measure the voltage at cavity 86 of the Rear Wiper relay.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
REAR WIPER RELAY

Replace the Rear Wiper relay with and known good relay.
Turn the Rear Wipers ON then OFF.
Does the Scan Tool read: B231B-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Rear Wiper relay.

LX
3.

Measure the voltage on cavity 28 (Rear Wiper Relay Control) of the
IPM.
Yes

No

8R - 39
8R - 40
B231C-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8R - 41
Possible Causes
REAR WIPER RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.

Replace the Rear Wiper relay with a known good relay.
Does the Scan Tool read: B231C-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
No
>> Test complete.

8R - 42
B231D-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
LX
LX
8R - 43
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the Scan Tool read: B231D-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN?
Yes
No
>> Test complete.

8R - 44
B2323-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8R - 45
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes

WIPER ON/OFF RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.
Remove the Headlamp Washer relay.
Measure the voltage at cavity 86 of the Headlamp Washer relay.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY

Replace the Headlamp Washer relay with a known good relay.
Activate the Headlamp Washers.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2323-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Headlamp Washer relay.

8R - 46
3.
(W24) HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Disconnect the IPM C4 Connector.
Measure the resistance to ground of the (W24) Headlamp Washer
Relay Control circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W24) Headlamp Washer Relay Control circuit

No

LX
LX
B2324-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8R - 47
8R - 48
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY

Does the Scan Tool read: B231C-REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
No
>> Test complete.

LX
B2325-HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
8R - 49
8R - 50
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the FCM detects a high condition.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.

Does the Scan Tool read: B2325HEADLAMP WASHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
No
>> Test complete.

LX
B2328-WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8R - 51
8R - 52
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(W1) WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
the
the
the
the
ignition on.
Wiper Washers on.
Scan Tool, read the Wiper DTCs.
Does the Scan Tool read: B2328-WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
W1 WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the Washer Fluid Level Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage of the (W1) Washer Fluid Level Sensor control circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (W1) Washer Fluid Level Sensor control circuit.
No

LX
8R - 53
B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW (RSM)

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Rain Sensor Module supply voltage less than 8.0 volts.
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
Turn
With
Wait
With
the ignition on.

the scan tool, record and erase Rain Sensor Module DTCs.
30 seconds.
the scan tool, read Rain Sensor Module DTCs.
Is DTC: B210D-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW active?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
No
>> Replace the Rain Sensor Module in accordance with the service information.
8R - 54
LX
B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH (RSM)

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Rain Sensor Module supply voltage greater than 16.0 volts.
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Wait
With
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH

the ignition on.
the scan tool, record and erase Rain Sensor Module DTCs.
30 seconds.
the scan tool, read Rain Sensor Module DTCs.
Is DTC: B210E-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH active?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
No
LX
8R - 55
B2211-RAIN SENSOR MODULE INITIALIZATION PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
This DTC is set when the internal initialization state machine is set to FAIL.
Possible Causes
WINDSHIELD
RAIN SENSOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECK FOR DELAMINATION ON THE WINDSHIELD
NOTE: If module has been reflashed or powered up while not connected to the windshield, this DTC will set.
If this is the case, reattach the RSM to the windshield and proceed.
Check the contact surface of the Rain Sensor Module to the windshield for delamination (this will resemble air bubbles in the contact area).
Is delamination present on the windshield?
Yes
>> Replace the windshield in accordance with the service information

No
>> Go To 2
2.
REPLACE THE RAIN SENSOR MODULE
With the scan tool read RSM DTCs.

Does the scan tool read: B2211-RAIN SENSOR MODULE INITIALIZATION PERFORMANCE?
Yes
>> Replace the RSM in accordance with the service information.

No
>> Test complete.
8R - 56
LX
B221D-(RSM) RAIN SENSOR MODULE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Rain Sensing Module detects an internal failure.
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPLACE THE RAIN SENSING MODULE
With the scan tool, read RSM DTCs.

Is DTC: B221D-(RSM) RAIN SENSOR MODULE INTERNAL active?
Yes
>> Replace the Rain Sensing Module in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Test complete.
LX
8R - 57
B2329-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 1 PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Each optical track (received value) is monitored once a second while the rain sensor is active (WK Intermittent
1-5, LX intermittent 16) and compared to a small value. The optical track value must be below this value for
4 minutes (checked once per second) before this DTC will be set. Once the DTC is set, the optical track must
be above the threshold for 4 minutes (checked once per second) before the DTC is cleared.
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: Check the contact surface of the RSM to the windshield for Delamination (this will resemble air bubbles in the contact area). If Delamination is present, replace the windshield in accordance with the service
information.
Does the scan tool read: B2329-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 1 PERFORMANCE?
Yes

No
>> Test complete.
8R - 58
LX
B232A-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 2 PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
1-5, LX intermittent 1-6) and compared to a small value. The optical track value must be below this value for
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
information.
Does the scan tool read: B232A-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 2 PERFORMANCE?
Yes

No
>> Test complete.
LX
8R - 59
B232B-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 3 PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
information.
Does the scan tool read: B232B-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 3 PERFORMANCE?
Yes

No
>> Test complete.
8R - 60
LX
B232C-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 4 PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSING MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
information.
Does the scan tool read: B232C-RAIN SENSOR OPTICAL PATH 4 PERFORMANCE?
Yes

No
>> Test complete.
LX
8R - 61
U0019CAN B BUS (RSM)

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
If the Can B Bus (+) or B Bus () circuit is open, shorted to voltage, or shorted to ground.
Possible Causes
RAIN SENSOR MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Turn
With
Turn
With
CHECK FOR ACTIVE DTC U0019CAN B BUS

the
the
the
the
ignition on.
scan tool, record and erase any Rain Sensor Module DTCs.
Is DTC U0019CAN B BUS active?

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK FOR ACTIVE CAN B BUS RELATED DTCS IN THE FRONT CONTROL MODULE

Yes
>> Diagnose and repair the DTC(s). (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/
No
>> Go to 3
3.

Disconnect the Rain Sensor Module harness connector.
and the Rain Sensor Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

8R - 62
4.
LX
CHECK THE (D54) CAN B BUS () CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
and the Rain Sensor Module harness connector.
Yes
No

LX
WIPERS/WASHERS - SERVICE INFORMATION
8R - 63

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
CHECK VALVE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
FRONT WIPER MODULE
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
FRONT WIPER MOTOR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
HEADLAMP WASHER
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
HEADLAMP WASHER HOSE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
HEADLAMP WASHER PUMP MOTOR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
SENSOR-RAIN
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
REAR WIPER MOTOR - WAGON ONLY
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
WASHER PUMP MOTOR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
WASHER RESERVOIR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
WIPER ARMS
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8R - 64
LX

DESCRIPTION
FRONT WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
The wiper and washer system includes the following major components:
The FCM/IPM is located in the engine compartment, near the right shock tower. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/
POWER DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION).
Front Washer Nozzle - Two washer nozzles with integral check valves are secured to the hood panel near the
base of the windshield.
Front Washer Plumbing - The plumbing for the washer system consists of nylon hoses and molded plastic
fittings. The plumbing is routed within the engine compartment from the washer reservoir. The front washer
hose is routed across the underside of the hood panel to the washer nozzles.
Front Wiper Arms - The two wiper arms are secured with nuts to the threaded ends of the two wiper pivot
shafts, which extend through the cowl panel located near the base of the windshield.
Front Wiper Blade - The two wiper blades are secured to the two wiper arms with an integral latch, and are
parked on the glass near the bottom of the windshield when the wiper system is not in operation.
Front Wiper Module - The wiper pivot shafts are the only visible components of the front wiper module. The
remainder of the module is concealed within the engine compartment beneath the cowl panel. The wiper module includes a cast aluminum wiper module bracket, two rubber-isolated wiper module mounts, one dowel on
the underside of the wiper motor, the wiper motor crank arm, the two wiper drive links, the two powered wiper
pivots.
directly in front of the driver. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DESCRIPTION).
Multi-Function Switch - The multi-function switch is located on the steering column, just behind the steering
wheel. A control stalk that extends from the left side of the switch that is dedicated to providing all of the driver
controls for the front wiper and washer systems, turn signal, and high and low beam functions (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/LAMPS/LIGHTING - EXTERIOR/MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH - DESCRIPTION).
Rain Sensor - Vehicles equipped with the automatic wiper feature have a Rain Sensor located just below the
inside rear view mirror button. The sensor bracket is bonded to the inside surface of the windshield glass.
Washer Fluid Level Switch - The washer fluid level switch is located in a dedicated hole on the lower portion
of the washer reservoir, ahead of the right front wheel house splash shield.
Washer Pump/Motor - The reversible electric washer pump/motor is located in the lower portion of the washer
reservoir, ahead of the right front wheel house splash shield. The washer pump/motor is a reversible motor
(wagon only) and provides washer fluid to either the front or rear (wagon only) washer system plumbing,
depending upon the direction of the pump motor rotation.
Washer Reservoir - The washer reservoir is mounted just in front of the right front wheel splash shield. The
filler neck is located in the right front corner of the engine compartment.
Wiper High/Low Relay - The wiper high/low relay is an International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment.
Wiper On/Off Relay - The wiper on/off relay is an International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment.
HEADLAMP WASHERS
The headlamp washers on this vehicle (if equipped) work in conjunction with the windshield washers. The headlamp
washers are enabled with the headlamps ON and the windshield washers activated. With the windshield washers
activated the headlamp washers will spray once for a predetermined amount of time.
REAR WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM - WAGON ONLY

The rear wiper and washer system includes the following major components:
The FCM/IPM is located on the side of engine compartment. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/POWER DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION).
LX
8R - 65
Instrument Panel Switch Pod - The rear wiper/washer switch is part of the instrument panel switch pod. The
pod contains the rear wipe/wash switch, the hazard switch, the passenger airbag disabled (PAD) indicator, and
the electronic stability program (ESP) off switch. The instrument panel switch pod is located in the instrument
panel center bezel, just above the radio and in between the A/C outlets.
directly in front of the driver. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - DESCRIPTION).
Rear Washer Nozzle - A rear washer nozzle is secured to a mounting hole in the liftgate panel.
Rear Washer Plumbing - The plumbing for the washer system consists of nylon hoses and molded plastic
fittings. The rear washer hose is routed through the dash panel from the engine compartment into the passenger compartment, along the right side body harness, then up the c-pillar and into the liftgate.
Rear Wiper Arm - The single rear wiper arm is secured by a nut directly to the rear wiper motor output shaft,
which extends through the center of the liftgate outer panel near the base of the liftgate glass.
Rear Wiper Blade - The single rear wiper blade is secured to the rear wiper arm with an integral latch, and is
parked near the bottom of the liftgate glass when the rear wiper system is not in operation.
Rear Wiper Motor - The rear wiper motor output shaft is the only visible component of the rear wiper motor.
The remainder of the motor is concealed within the liftgate beneath the liftgate. The rear wiper motor includes
the motor bracket, the rear wiper motor, and the rear wiper motor park switch.
Rear Wiper Relay - The rear wiper relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery.
Washer Reservoir - The rear washer system shares a single reservoir and reversible pump with the front
washer system, but has its own dedicated plumbing.
OPERATION
FRONT WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
All front wiper and washer system functions are initiated with the control knob on the end of the multifunction switch control stalk that extends from the left
side of the steering column, just behind the steering
wheel. Rotating the control knob on the end of the
control stalk, selects the Off, Intermittent, Auto (on
models equipped with automatic wipers), Low, or High
front wiper system operating modes. In the Intermittent
mode, the control knob also allows the vehicle operator to select from one of six intermittent wipe intervals.
In the Auto mode, the control knob also allows the
vehicle operator to select from one of six automatic wiper sensitivity levels. Pressing in on the end of the control
stalk momentarily activates the Mist Wipe. Pressing it in all the way will activate the windshield washers. In the Auto
mode, as you increase the sensitivity of the wipers (less delay between wipes), the result will be a corresponding
acknowledgment wipe to let you know you made an adjustment to the system. The multi-function switch provides
hard wired resistor multiplexed inputs to the Steering Column Control Module (SCCM), for all of the wiper and
washer system functions. The SCCM then sends electronic messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the
Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus requesting the appropriate front wiper and washer system operating
modes.
All the front wiper and washer system operation is controlled by the FCM logic circuits, and that logic will only allow
these systems to operate when the ignition switch is in the Accessory or On positions. Battery current is directed
from a B(+) fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) to the wiper on/off relay and the wiper high/low relay in the
PDC through a fused B(+) circuit. The FCM uses low side drivers to control wiper system operation by energizing
or de-energizing the wiper high/low and wiper on/off relays. The FCM uses both high side and low side drivers to
control the operation of the washer pump/motor unit. The multi-function switch circuitry receives a clean ground
output from the SCCM on a multi-function switch return circuit, then provides resistor multiplexed inputs to the
SCCM on an intermittent wipe mux circuit to indicate the selected wiper system mode and on a wash/beam select
mux circuit to indicate the selected washer system mode.
8R - 66
LX
AUTOMATIC WIPE MODE

In models equipped with the automatic wiper feature, the internal circuitry of both the multi-function switch, the rain
sensor, and the CCN work in concert to provide an automatic wiper mode with five sensitivity selections. When
selected, this switch position will automatically operate the front wipers at the designated sensitivity setting and
maintain visibility through the windshield glass at that predetermined sensitivity setting.
With automatic wipers, when the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved to one of the
six Auto sensitivity positions, the SCCM sends an electronic message to the Rain Sensor over the Controller Area
Network (CAN) data bus network indicating the selected position. The sensor monitors an area within the wipe pattern of the windshield glass for the accumulation of moisture. Based upon internal programming and the selected
sensitivity level, when sufficient moisture has accumulated the rain sensor sends the appropriate electronic wipe
command messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus and the FCM operates the front wiper system accordingly.
As the sensitivity level is set higher, the rain sensor is more sensitive to moisture accumulation and will send wipe
commands more frequently. The SCCM logic is also programmed to provide an immediate wipe cycle each time the
control knob on the multi-function switch is moved from a non-automatic wipe position to one of the six Auto sensitivity positions, and another immediate wipe cycle each time the control knob is moved from a lower Auto sensitivity position to a higher Auto sensitivity position.
CONTINUOUS WIPE MODE
When the Low position of the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is selected, the SCCM
sends an electronic wiper switch low message to the FCM, then the FCM energizes the wiper on/off relay. This
directs battery current through the normally open contacts of the energized wiper on/off relay and the normally
closed contacts of the de-energized wiper high/low relay to the low speed brush of the wiper motor, causing the
wipers to cycle at low speed.
When the High position of the control knob is selected, the SCCM sends an electronic wiper switch high message
to the FCM, then the FCM energizes both the wiper on/off relay and the wiper high/low relay. This directs battery
current through the normally open contacts of the energized wiper on/off relay and the normally open contacts of the
energized wiper high/low relay to the high speed brush of the wiper motor, causing the wipers to cycle at high
speed.
When the Off position of the multi-function switch control knob is selected, the SCCM sends an electronic wiper
switch off message to the FCM. If the wiper motor was operating at high speed, the FCM immediately de-energizes
the wiper high/low relay causing the wiper motor to return to low speed operation. Then one of two events will
occur. The event that occurs depends upon the position of the wiper blades on the windshield at the moment that
the control knob Off position is selected.
If the wiper blades are in the down position on the windshield when the Off position is selected, the park switch that
is integral to the wiper motor is closed to ground and provides a hard wired park switch sense input to the FCM.
The FCM then de-energizes the wiper on/off relay and the wiper motor ceases to operate. If the wiper blades are
not in the down position on the windshield at the moment the Off position is selected, the park switch is an open
circuit and the FCM keeps the wiper on/off relay energized, which causes the wiper motor to continue running at low
speed until the wiper blades are in the down position on the windshield and the park switch input to the FCM is
again closed to ground.
HEADLAMPS ON WITH WIPERS MODE
The CCN provides an automatic headlamps on with wipers feature for models equipped automatic headlamps. This
is a customer programmable feature. If this feature is enabled, the headlamps will turn on automatically whenever
the windshield wipers are turned on; and, if the headlamps were turned on automatically when the wipers were
turned on, they will also turn off automatically when the wipers are turned off. If this feature is enabled, when the
automatic wiper mode is selected the headlamps will turn on automatically only after the wipers complete a minimum of five automatic wipe cycles within about sixty seconds, and they will turn off automatically after four minutes
elapse without any wipe cycles.
INTERMITTENT WIPE MODE
When the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved to one of the Intermittent interval
positions the SCCM sends an electronic wiper switch delay message to the FCM, then the FCM electronic intermittent wipe logic circuit responds by calculating the correct length of time between wiper sweeps based upon the
selected delay interval input. The FCM monitors the changing state of the wiper motor park switch through a hard
LX
8R - 67
wired park switch sense input. This input allows the FCM to determine the proper intervals at which to energize and
de-energize the wiper on/off relay to operate the wiper motor intermittently for one low speed cycle at a time.
The FCM logic is also programmed to provide vehicle speed sensitivity to the selected intermittent wipe delay intervals. In order to provide this feature the FCM monitors electronic vehicle speed messages from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and doubles the selected delay interval whenever the vehicle speed is approximately sixteen
kilometers-per-hour (ten miles-per-hour) or less.
PULSE WIPE MODE
When the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is depressed to the momentary pulse wipe
position for less than about one-half second, the SCCM sends an electronic switch message to the FCM, then the
FCM energizes the wiper on/off relay for one complete wipe cycle. The FCM de-energizes the relay when the state
of the park switch sense changes to ground, parking the wiper blades near the base of the windshield.
WASH MODE
When the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is depressed to the momentary Wash position
for more than about one-half second, the SCCM sends an electronic washer switch message to the FCM, then the
FCM directs battery current and ground to the washer pump/motor unit. This will cause the washer pump/motor unit
to be energized for as long as the Wash switch is held closed up to about ten seconds, and to de-energize when
the front Wash switch is released.
When the control knob is depressed to the momentary Wash position while the wiper system is operating in one of
the intermittent interval positions, the washer pump/motor operation is the same. However, the FCM also energizes
the wiper on/off relay to override the selected delay interval and operate the wiper motor in a continuous low speed
mode for as long as the control knob is held depressed, then de-energizes the relay and reverts to the selected
delay mode interval several wipe cycles after the control knob is released. If the control knob is held depressed for
more than about ten seconds, the FCM will suspend washer pump/motor operation until the knob is released. then
cycled back to the Wash position if so desired.
The headlamp washer system (if equipped) utilizes a separate high pressure pump that is attached to the windshield washer reservoir. The headlamp washer pump feeds nozzles that are mounted in the front fascia of the vehicle. The nozzle bodies spray the headlamps with high pressure washer solvent when the system is activated.
To activate the headlamp washers, turn ON the headlamps and then press the windshield washer control knob. This
will operate the windshield washers and direct two timed high pressure sprays onto the headlamp lens.
WIPE-AFTER-WASH MODE
When the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function switch is depressed to the momentary Wash position
for more than about one-half second while the wiper system is not operating, the instrument cluster sends an electronic washer switch message to the FCM, then the FCM directs battery current and ground to the washer pump/
motor unit and energizes the wiper on/off relay. This will cause the washer pump/motor unit to be energized and
operate the wiper motor in a continuous low speed mode for as long as the Wash switch is held closed up to about
ten seconds. When the control knob is released, the FCM de-energizes the washer pump/motor unit, but allows the
wiper motor to operate for several additional wipe cycles before it de-energizes the wiper on/off relay and parks the
wiper blades near the base of the windshield.
If the control knob is held depressed for more than about thirty seconds, the FCM will suspend washer pump/motor
operation until the knob is released, then cycled back to the Wash position; however, the wipers will continue to
operate for as long as the Wash switch is held closed. The FCM monitors the changing state of the wiper motor
park switch through a hard wired wiper park switch sense circuit input. This input allows the FCM to count the
number of wipe cycles that occur after the Wash switch is released, and to determine the proper interval at which
to de-energize the wiper on/off relay to complete the wipe-after-wash mode cycle.
8R - 68
LX
REAR WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM - WAGON ONLY

All rear wiper and washer system functions are initiated with the rear wiper and washer switch in the
instrument panel switch pod located on the instrument
panel center bezel, just above the radio and below the
a/c outlets (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER/INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH POD REMOVAL). Pushing the left side of the wiper/washer
switch selects the rear wiper system operating mode
(intermittent). it has fixed 10 seconds delay between
wipe (not adjustable). indicator at bottom of the WIPE
graphic will light up when the wipe switch is ON and goes away when the wipe is OFF. Depressing the momentary
contact switch activates the rear washer system. When a rear wiper or washer mode is selected, the circuitry within
the instrument panel switch pod sends an electronic rear wiper/washer switch status message over the Controller
Area Network (CAN) data bus to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) also referred to as the Cab Compartment Node (CCN). The CCN then sends electronic messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the CAN
data bus requesting the appropriate rear wiper and washer system operating modes.
INTERMITTENT WIPE MODE
When the rear wiper switch is pressed to the left, the instrument cluster sends an electronic wiper switch message
to the FCM, then the FCM electronic wipe logic circuit responds by selecting a predetermined length of time
between wiper sweeps.
WASH MODE
When the rear washer control switch is depressed to the right in the momentary Wash position, the instrument cluster sends an electronic washer switch message to the FCM, then the FCM directs battery current and ground to the
washer pump/motor. This will cause the washer pump/motor to be energized for as long as the Wash switch is held
closed up to about ten seconds, and to de-energize when the rear wiper/washer switch is released.
WIPE-AFTER-WASH MODE
When the rear washer switch is released from the momentary Wash position, the instrument cluster sends an electronic washer switch message to the FCM. The FCM de-energizes the washer pump/motor, but allows the rear
wiper motor to operate for several wipe cycles before it de-energizes the rear wiper relay.
OFF MODE
When the Off position of the rear wiper switch is selected, one of three events is possible. The event that will occur
depends upon the position of the wiper blade on the liftgate glass and the mode the wiper motor is operating under
at the moment that the Off position is selected. If the wiper blade is in the down position on the glass and the rear
wiper system is operating in the intermittent cycle mode when the Off position is selected, the park switch is open
and the FCM de-energizes the rear wiper relay control coil causing the rear wiper motor to cease to operate.
If the wiper blade is not in the down position on the glass and is operating in the intermittent cycle mode when the
Off position is selected, the park switch is closed to ground and the FCM keeps the rear wiper relay control coil
energized to operate the rear wiper motor until the rear wiper blade is in the down position on the glass and the
park switch input is an open circuit.
The third event occurs with the rear wiper operating in the wipe-after-wash mode when the Off position is selected,
in which case the FCM will continue to run the wiper motor until the completion of two wipes after wash before the
rear wiper blade is parked. The FCM will also run the rear wiper motor to park the rear wiper blade if the ignition
switch is turned to the Off position while the rear wiper system is still operating.
LX
CHECK VALVE
REMOVAL
The rear washer check valve is located on the lower
liftgate.
2. Remove the lower liftgate trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/DECKLID/HATCH/LIFTGATE/TAILGATE/
TRIM PANEL - REMOVAL).
3. Remove check valve by twisting washer hose at
each end.
INSTALLATION
1. Insert check valve into washer hose.
2. Install lower liftgate trim panel (Refer to 23 BODY/DECKLID/HATCH/LIFTGATE/TAILGATE/
TRIM PANEL - INSTALLATION).
8R - 69
8R - 70
LX
FRONT WIPER MODULE

DESCRIPTION
The front wiper module is secured with screws
through two rubber grommet-type insulators to the
cowl plenum panel. The module is located in the rear
of the engine compartment where it is concealed
beneath the molded plastic cowl plenum grille panel.
The ends of the pivot shafts protruding through openings in the cowl plenum cover/grille panel are the only
visible components of the wiper module. The wiper
module consists of the following major components:
Crank Arm - The wiper motor crank arm is a stamped steel unit with an internally splined hole on the driven
end that is secured to the wiper motor output shaft with a nut, and a long ball stud secured to the drive end
to accept the wiper linkage.
Linkage - The two wiper linkage members are each constructed of stamped steel. A driver side drive link with
a plastic socket-type bushing in the left end, and a plastic sleeve-type bushing in the right end. The socket
bushing is snap-fit over the pivot ball stud on the left pivot lever arm, while the sleeve bushing is fit over the
longer pivot stud on the wiper motor crank arm. The passenger side drive link has a plastic socket-type bushing on each end. One end of this drive link is snap-fit over the ball stud on the right pivot lever arm, while the
other end is snap-fit over the top of the driver side drive link on the ball stud of the wiper motor crank arm.
Motor - The wiper motor is secured on the underside of the module bracket near the center with three screws.
The wiper motor output shaft passes through a hole in the module bracket, where a nut secures the wiper
motor crank arm to the motor output shaft. The two-speed permanent magnet wiper motor features an integral
transmission, an internal park switch, and an internal Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) circuit breaker.
Pivots - This module features two pivots. The two wiper pivot shafts have lever arms with ball studs at their
base to accept the wiper linkage. The upper end of all three pivot shafts has a threaded stud with a tapered
and serrated area just below the threads to accept the left wiper arm or the right wiper arm links.
The front wiper module cannot be adjusted or repaired. The front wiper motor is available for separate service
replacement. If any other component of the module is inoperative or damaged, the entire front wiper module unit
must be replaced.
OPERATION
The front wiper module operation is controlled by the battery current inputs received by the wiper motor through the
wiper on/off and wiper high/low relays. The wiper motor speed is controlled by current flow to either the low speed
or the high speed set of brushes. The park switch is a single pole, single throw, momentary switch within the wiper
motor that is mechanically actuated by the wiper motor transmission components. The park switch alternately opens
and closes the wiper park switch sense circuit to ground, depending upon the position of the wipers on the glass.
This feature allows the motor to complete its current wipe cycle after the wiper system has been turned Off, and to
park the wiper blades in the lowest portion of the wipe pattern. The automatic resetting circuit breaker protects the
motor from overloads.
The wiper motor crank arm, the two wiper linkage members, and the two wiper pivots mechanically convert the
rotary output of the wiper motor to the back and forth wiping motion of the wiper arms and blades on the glass.
LX
REMOVAL
2. Remove the wiper arms (1) and (2) (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER ARMS REMOVAL).
3. Remove the cowl panel (1) (Refer to 23 - BODY/

EXTERIOR/COWL GRILLE - REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector (1).
8R - 71
8R - 72
5. Remove the two retaining bolts (1 and 4) and

remove wiper module (3) from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Inspect the grommet (1) that the wiper motor sits
in. If cracked, brittle, or damaged, replace the
grommet (1).
2. While positioning the wiper module in its mounting

location, make sure that the dowel on the bottom of
the wiper motor (1) slides into the mounting grommet (2) correctly.
LX
LX
3. Install the two retaining bolts (1 and 4). Torque

bolts to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.).
4. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector (1).
5. Install the cowl panel (1) (Refer to 23 - BODY/EXTERIOR/COWL GRILLE - INSTALLATION).
8R - 73
8R - 74
6. Install the wiper arms (1) and (2) (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER ARMS INSTALLATION). Torque nuts to 18 Nm (150 in.
lbs.).
LX
LX
FRONT WIPER MOTOR

REMOVAL
2. Remove the front wiper module (3) (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER MODULE - REMOVAL).
3. With front wiper module on bench or in vise,

remove the one nut attaching the bellcrank to the
motor shaft.
8R - 75
8R - 76
4. Using a flat bladed tool, carefully pry the bellcrank

from the wiper motor shaft.
5. Separate the bellcrank from the wiper motor shaft.
6. Remove the two motor mounting bolts (1).
LX
LX
NOTE: When separating the motor from the linkage, there are two pocket nuts that may fall out.
Take care to keep these and reinstall them during
installation.
7. Separate the wiper
module/linkage.
motor
from
the
wiper
INSTALLATION
1. Ensure that the shaft seal (3) is on the new motor
shaft. If necessary, transfer the one on the old
motor. If transferred, make sure the seal is in good
shape (not brittle, free from cracks, and not
damaged).
2. Ensure that the pocket nuts (1) are in place in the

motor before assembly.
8R - 77
8R - 78
3. If needed to install pocket nut (1), align the nut with

the pocket.
4. Drop nut (1) into pocket.
5. Place wiper motor in its mounting location making

sure that the pocket nuts are in place.
LX
LX
6. Install and tighten the mounting bolts (1).
7. Position the bellcrank on the wiper motor shaft.
8. Align the bellcrank with the linkage arms.
8R - 79
8R - 80
9. Install and tighten the nut to the bellcrank.
10. Install the front wiper module (3) (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER MODULE - INSTALLATION).
LX
LX
8R - 81
HEADLAMP WASHER
DESCRIPTION
The headlamp washers work in conjunction with the
windshield washers. The headlamp washers are
enabled with the headlamps ON and the front windshield washers activated. With the windshield washers
activated the headlamp washers will spray twice for a
predetermined amount of time.
OPERATION
The headlamp washer system utilizes a separate high pressure pump that is attached to the windshield washer
reservoir. The headlamp washer pump feeds nozzles that are mounted in the front fascia of the vehicle. The nozzles
are aimed in front of the headlamp assembly. These nozzles spray the headlamps when the system is activated.
To activate the headlamp washers, turn ON the headlamps and then press the front windshield washer control knob.
This will operate the windshield washers and direct one, timed high pressure sprays onto the headlamp lens.
REMOVAL
2. Loosen front fascia as necessary on the side to be
removed (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/
BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect washer hose (2) from headlamp
washer.
4. Remove headlamp washer from front fascia (1).
8R - 82
INSTALLATION
1. Install headlamp washer to front fascia (1).
2. Attache washer hose (2) to headlamp washer fitting
(3).
3. Install front fascia (1) (Refer to 13 - FRAME &
BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - INSTALLATION).
LX
LX
HEADLAMP WASHER HOSE

REMOVAL
The headlamp washer hose (2) is a special high pressure hose with specific fittings (3), and must be
replaced as a unit.
2. Loosen up the fascia (1) on the side of the vehicle
in which hose needs replacing (Refer to 13 FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA REMOVAL).
3. When disconnecting hose (2) , press down firmly
on latch (3) at headlamp washer pump motor and
washer assembly and pull apart.
INSTALLATION
The headlamp washer hose is a special high pressure
hose with specific fittings, and must be replaced as a
unit.
1. Install the new high pressure headlamp washer
hose (2) assembly. Push fitting (3) on until a snap
is heard.
2. Install the fascia (Refer to 13 - FRAME &
BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - INSTALLATION).
8R - 83
8R - 84
HEADLAMP WASHER PUMP MOTOR

REMOVAL
2. Drain washer fluid from the reservoir and into a
suitable clean container. This can be done by disconnecting the windshield washer hose from the
front (outboard) washer pump and allowing the
washer fluid to drain into a container through a
temporary jumper hose connected to the front
washer pump.
3. Remove the washer reservoir (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WASHER
RESERVOIR - REMOVAL).
4. Disconnect the high pressure headlamp washer
pump hose by pressing down firmly on latch and
pulling hose off.
5. Disconnect the high pressure headlamp washer
pump motor electrical connector (1).
6. Remove pump from reservoir by pulling pump up
and away from reservoir cavity and out of mounting
grommet. Do not damage reservoir/pump sealing
surface or puncture reservoir during removal.
7. Remove pump grommet and discard.
INSTALLATION
1. Use new grommet when installing a new pump
assembly.
2. Assure that the pump is aligned to and fully seated
in the reservoir cavity.
3. Install the washer reservoir (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WASHER RESERVOIR INSTALLATION).
4. Connect the electrical harness connectors to the
washer pump motors and the fluid level sensor.
5. Connect the high pressure headlamp washer hose
by firmly pushing hose onto inlet until a snap is
heard.
6. Refill the reservoir with fluid drained previously.
LX
LX
SENSOR-RAIN
DESCRIPTION
The Rain Sensor is the primary component of the
automatic wiper system.
The rain sensor is located on the inside of the windshield, just below the rear view mirror mounting button
(1).
Sliding cam locks (6) on each side of the top sides of

the sensor (either side of the connector) secures the
sensor to the mounting bracket (9) that is bonded (1)
to the windshield glass. A small screwdriver can be
used to push in the tabs until the slider protrudes from
the opposing side of the sensor case (5). Concealed
within the sensor housing (5) is the electronic circuitry
(7) of the module, which includes four Infrared diodes,
four photocells, and a microprocessor.
The rain sensor software is Flash compatible, which
means it can be reprogrammed using Flash reprogramming procedures. However, if any of the hardware of the sensor is damaged or faulty, the entire
rain sensor must be replaced. The rain sensor bracket
(9) is serviced as a unit with the windshield glass. If
the bracket is faulty, damaged, or separated from the
windshield glass, the windshield must be replaced.
8R - 85
8R - 86
LX
OPERATION
The microprocessor-based Rain Sensor senses moisture in the wipe pattern (1) on the outside of the windshield glass and sends wipe commands to the Front
Control Module (FCM). Four Infrared diodes within the
sensor generate infrared light beams that are aimed
by four of the convex optical lenses near the base of
the sensor through the windshield glass. Four additional convex optical lenses near the top of the sensor
are focused on the infrared light beams on the outside
of the windshield glass and allow the four photocells
within the sensor to sense changes in the intensity of
these infrared light beams. When sufficient moisture
accumulates within the wipe pattern (1) of the windshield glass, the sensor detects a change in the monitored infrared light beam intensity.
The internal programming of the sensor then sends
the appropriate electronic wipe command messages to
the FCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data
bus. The FCM responds by activating or deactivating
the front wiper system. The CCN sends electronic sensitivity level messages to the rain sensor over the CAN data
bus based upon the driver-selected sensitivity setting of the control knob on the control stalk of the multi-function
switch. The higher the selected sensitivity setting the more sensitive the rain sensor is to the accumulated moisture
on the windshield glass, and the more frequently the sensor will send wipe commands to the FCM to operate the
front wiper system.
The rain sensor operates on battery current received through a fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) on a
fused B+ circuit. The rain sensor receives ground at all times through the body wire harness. It is important to note
that the default condition of the automatic wiper system is low. Therefore, if no message is received by the FCM
from the rain sensor for more than about five seconds when in the Auto sensitivity wipe mode, the wipers will default
to a constant low wipe state.
The rain sensor ground and battery current inputs may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and methods. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the rain sensor requires the use of a scan tool
and the appropriate diagnostic information.
REMOVAL
3. Using a small screwdriver or equivalent, from the
top (connector side) push in the tabs until the slider
protrudes from the opposing (bottom) side of the
sensor case.
4. Gently pull each slider (1) slightly more until the
cam lock releases the sensor.
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Make sure that the slider locks are positioned correctly in the downward position, sticking out of the
side opposite the connector.
2. Position the rain sensor below the inside rear view
mirror, over the bracket and gently push down to
seat it on the bracket.
3. Push the slider cam locks (1) inward until they are
flush with the side of the sensor case.
4. Connect the wire harness connector to the sensor.
8R - 87
8R - 88
LX
REAR WIPER MOTOR - WAGON ONLY

REMOVAL
2. Remove the rear wiper arm (3) (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER
ARMS
REMOVAL).
3. Remove the liftgate trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/DECKLID/HATCH/LIFTGATE/TAILGATE/TRIM PANEL REMOVAL).
LX
4. Remove the three mounting fasteners (1).
5. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (5).

6. Separate the wiper motor (3) from the liftgate.
7. Inspect the wiper motor shaft to liftgate seal (1).
8R - 89
8R - 90
INSTALLATION
1. Inspect the shaft-to-liftgate seal (1) in liftgate.
2. If seal is damaged, brittle, or deformed in any way

replace. Position shaft seal (1) with the arrow in the
UP position.
LX
LX
3. Position wiper motor (3) in liftgate.
4. Install the mounting nuts (1). Torque nuts to 8 Nm

(70 in. lbs).
5. Connect the electrical harness connector (5).
8R - 91
8R - 92
LX
6. Install lower liftgate trim panel (Refer to 23 - BODY/DECKLID/HATCH/LIFTGATE/TAILGATE/TRIM PANEL INSTALLATION).

7. Install the rear wiper arm (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/WIPERS/WASHERS/WIPER ARMS - INSTALLATION). Torque nut to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.).
LX
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

REMOVAL
washer pump.
4. Remove the washer fluid level switch by pulling out

of reservoir. Inspect the grommet and if installing a
new switch, always use a new grommet.
8R - 93
8R - 94
INSTALLATION
1. Inspect grommet and if installing new switch, use a
new grommet. Position the switch into opening and
firmly press into place.

LX
LX
WASHER PUMP MOTOR

REMOVAL
washer pump.
4. Remove the washer pump motor by pulling out of

reservoir. Inspect the grommet and if installing a
new motor, always use a new grommet.
8R - 95
8R - 96
INSTALLATION
1. Inspect grommet and if installing new motor, use a
new grommet. Position the motor into opening and
firmly press into place.

LX
LX
8R - 97
WASHER RESERVOIR
REMOVAL

2. Remove the front fascia (4) (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - REMOVAL).
3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (1 and 3)
from reservoir.
4. Disconnect hose from reservoir (2) and drain fluid
into container.
8R - 98
5. Remove the rear mounting fastener (2).
6. Remove the remaining fasteners (1).
LX
LX
7. Remove the reservoir (4) from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position reservoir (4) in vehicle.
8R - 99
8R - 100
2. Install mounting fasteners (1). Torque fasteners to 7

Nm (62 in. lbs).
3. Install rear mounting fastener (2). Torque fastener

to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs).
LX
LX
8R - 101
4. Connect electrical harness connectors (1 and 3)

and hoses (2) to reservoir.
5. Install front fascia (4) (Refer to 13 - FRAME & BUMPERS/BUMPERS/FRONT FASCIA - INSTALLATION).
7. Fill reservoir.
8R - 102
WIPER ARMS
REMOVAL
FRONT WIPER ARM
1. Remove the nut caps (3).
2. Remove the retaining nuts (4).
3. Using a suitable two jaw puller (5), separate the

wiper arm (7) from the wiper pivot.
LX
LX
4. Remove the wiper arms (1 and 2).
REAR WIPER ARM - WAGON

1. Remove the nut cap (2).
2. Remove the retaining nut (1).
3. Gently rock the wiper arm from side to side to
loosen it from the shaft.
4. Remove the wiper arm (3).
8R - 103
8R - 104
INSTALLATION
FRONT WIPER ARM
1. Install wiper arms (1) on wiper arm pivots.
2. Install retaining nuts (4). Torque nuts to 18 Nm (13
ft. lbs.).
3. Install nut caps (3).
REAR WIPER ARM - WAGON

1. Install wiper arm (3).
2. Install retaining nut (1). Torque nut to 18 Nm (13 ft.
lbs.).
3. install nut cap (2).
LX
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION
LX
8T - 1
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - ELECTRICAL
DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

B1411-HFM LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
B1412-HFM LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
B1415-HFM RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
B1416-HFM RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
B1435-VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE
SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . 18
SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
B1438VOICE RECOGNITION SWITCH
STUCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
B1439-PHONE SWITCH STUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
B145A-TELEMATICS MIRROR CONTROL
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
B1459-TELEMATICS MIRROR CONTROL
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
B1492GENERAL MICROPHONE
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
B2203ROM CHECKSUM PERFORMANCE . . . 43
B222A-VEHICLE LINE MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
B222EFLASH CHECKSUM PERFORMANCE . 45
B222FFLASH WRITE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . 46
B2223-(HFM) HANDS FREE PHONE
INTERNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
B2230RAM WRITE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 48
U0019CAN B BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
U0156-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH EOM . . . 52
CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
SDARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
8T - 2
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

SCCM - CAN B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
LX

SENSING MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
LX

8T - 3
8T - 4
B1411-HFM LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8T - 5
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects low voltage on the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the resistance of the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit between
the HFM connector and the radio connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit for an open
8T - 6
3.
(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit for short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
Measure the resistance of the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit

between the HFM connector and the radio connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit for an

open.
LX
LX
5.

(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit
and the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit for a short to
the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit.
No

circuits. If ok, replace and program the Hands Free Module
8T - 7
8T - 8
B1412-HFM LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
8T - 9
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects high voltage on the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the resistance of the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit between
the HFM connector and the radio connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit for an open
8T - 10
3.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No

open.
4.
(X703) LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X703) Left Audio Output circuit for a short to
voltage.
No

LX
LX
B1415-HFM RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW
8T - 11
8T - 12
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects low voltage on the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the resistance of the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit for an open.
LX
3.
(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X704) Right Audio
Output circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit for short to
ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

open.
8T - 13
8T - 14
5.
(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X795) COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit
and the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit for a short to
the (X795) Common Audio Output circuit.
No

LX
LX
B1416-HFM RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8T - 15
8T - 16
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects high voltage on the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit.
Possible Causes
(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the resistance of the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit for an open.
LX
3.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No

open.
4.
(X704) RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X704) Right Audio Output circuit for a short to
voltage.
No

8T - 17
8T - 18
B1435-VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
8T - 19
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects an invalid voltage signal on the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal circuit.
Possible Causes
INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK THE VOLTAGE OF THE (X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL

Disconnect the Inside Rear View Mirror C2 harness connector.
With the scan tool, monitor the VR Phone Switch voltage.
While monitoring the VR Phone Switch voltage, momentarily connect a
jumper wire between the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal circuit and ground.
NOTE: The scan tool sensor voltage should switch from above 4.7
volts when the jumper is not connected to below 0.6 volts when
the jumper is connected.
Does the sensor voltage switch from above 4.7 volts to below
0.6 volt as described?
Yes
>> Replace the Inside Rear View Mirror in accordance with the
No

8T - 20
B1436-VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8T - 21
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects voltage below 0.6 volts on the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal
circuit.
Possible Causes
(X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO (X835) SENSOR GROUND
CIRCUIT
(X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
Check for active DTC

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
8T - 22
3.
(X730) VOICE/RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (X835) SENSOR

GROUND CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone
Switch Signal circuit and the (X835) Sensor Ground circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal

circuit for a short to the (X835) Sensor Ground circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(X730) VOICE/RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal circuit.
Yes

No

LX
LX
B1437-VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH
8T - 23
8T - 24
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects voltage above 4.7 volts on the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal
circuit.
Possible Causes
(X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
(X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(X835) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the voltage of the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch
Signal circuit.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Connect a jumper wire between (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone
Switch Signal circuit and the (X835) Sensor Ground circuit.
With the scan tool, monitor the VR Phone Switch Voltage.
Is the voltage approximately 0 volts?
Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(X730) VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch
Signal circuit between the HFM connector and the inside rear view mirror connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

8T - 25
8T - 26
5.
(X835) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X835) Sensor Ground circuit between

the HFM connector and the inside rear view mirror connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the (X835) Sensor Ground circuit for an open.

LX
LX
B1438VOICE RECOGNITION SWITCH STUCK
8T - 27
8T - 28
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects voltage between 3.5 volts and 4.0 volts on the (X730) Voice Recognition/
Phone Switch Signal circuit for more than 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

jumper wire between (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal
circuit and ground.
Yes
No

LX
B1439-PHONE SWITCH STUCK
8T - 29
8T - 30
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects voltage between 2.8 volts and 3.3 volts on the (X730) Voice Recognition/
Phone Switch Signal circuit for more than 30 seconds.
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

jumper wire between (X730) Voice Recognition/Phone Switch Signal
circuit and ground.
Yes
No

LX
B145A-TELEMATICS MIRROR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH
8T - 31
8T - 32
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects high voltage on the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit.
Possible Causes
(X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT OPEN
(X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Attempt to make a phone call with the system.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the resistance of the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit between
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit for an open.

LX
3.
8T - 33
(X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit.
Is the voltage above 1.0 volt?
Yes
>> Repair the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit for short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
Replace the Inside Rear View Mirror in accordance with the service information.
cycle.
Yes
>> Inspect the wiring and connectors for damage or shorted circuits. If ok, replace and program the Hands
Free Module in accordance with the service information.
No

8T - 34
B1459-TELEMATICS MIRROR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
8T - 35
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects low voltage on the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit.
Possible Causes
(X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.

Measure the resistance of the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit between
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit for an open.

8T - 36
3.
LX
(X793) MICROPHONE FEED CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (X793) Microphone

Feed circuit
Yes
>> Repair the (X793) Microphone Feed circuit for short to

ground.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
cycle.
Yes
No

LX
B1492GENERAL MICROPHONE PERFORMANCE
8T - 37
8T - 38
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects a fault in any of the microphone circuits.
Possible Causes
(X712) MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) CIRCUIT OPEN
(X792) MICROPHONE IN (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
(X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TO GROUND
(X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
LX
2.

Measure the resistance of the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuit
between the HFM connector and the inside rear view mirror connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the (X712) Microphone 1 IN (+) circuit for an open.

3.
Measure the resistance of the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuit

between the HFM connector and the inside rear view mirror connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (X722) Microphone 2 IN (+) circuit for an open.

8T - 39
8T - 40
4.
(X792) MICROPHONE IN (-) CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (X792) Microphone IN (-) circuit between

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (X792) Microphone IN (-) circuit for an open.

5.
(X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and each (X712) (X722)

(X792) Microphone circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the Microphone circuit that measured below 100.0

ohms for short to ground.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
(X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of each (X712) (X722) (X792) Microphone circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the Microphone circuit that measured above 1.0 volt
for short to voltage.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
(X712) (X722) (X792) MICROPHONE CIRCUITS SHORTED TOGETHER

Measure the resistance between each (X712) (X722) (X792) Microphone circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the Microphone circuit that measured below 100.0

ohms for a short together.
No
>> Go To 8
8T - 41
8T - 42
8.
LX
cycle.
Yes
No

LX
8T - 43
B2203ROM CHECKSUM PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module detects a fault during an internal diagnostic check.
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPLACE THE HANDS FREE MODULE IF DTC IS ACTIVE

cycle.
Yes
>> Replace and program the Hands Free Module in accordance with the service information.
No
8T - 44
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Hands Free Module will receive and monitor the vehicle line message from the PCM and record the vehicle line if different from the last vehicle line.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT PCM
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECK VEHICLE LINE IN PCM
With the scan tool compare the vehicle line that is programmed into the PCM to the vehicle line of the vehicle.
Does the vehicle line programmed into the PCM match the vehicle?
Yes
No
>> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the service information. Ensure
the PCM is replaced with the correct vehicle line PCM.
LX
8T - 45
B222EFLASH CHECKSUM PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
No
8T - 46
LX
B222FFLASH WRITE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
No
LX
8T - 47
B2223-(HFM) HANDS FREE PHONE INTERNAL

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
No
8T - 48
LX
B2230RAM WRITE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
No
LX
U0019CAN B BUS
8T - 49
8T - 50
LX
When Monitored:
Continuously
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
HANDS FREE MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.

cycle.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
With the scan tool, read the Front Control Module active DTCs.
Yes
>> (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING) and

perform the appropriate diagnostic test.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Front Control Module C1 connector and the Hands Free Module connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
Front Control Module C1 connector and the Hands Free Module connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Hands Free Module in accordance with the

No

8T - 51
8T - 52
LX

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

(SKREEM/WCM)
test procedure.

LX
8T - 53
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

MODULE
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

8T - 54
LX
test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.

test procedure.
LX
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - SERVICE INFORMATION
8T - 55
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION - SERVICE
INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICE INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING TELECOMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
HANDS FREE MODULE

REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8T - 56
LX

DESCRIPTION
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
The hands-free cellular system uses Bluetooth technology to provide wireless communication between the operators compatible cellular telephone and the vehicles on-board receiver.
The system uses voice recognition technology to control operation. The incoming voice is broadcast through the
vehicles radio speakers, automatically overriding any other audio signals on the front speakers when the hands-free
system is in use. A microphone in the rear view mirror receives the vehicle occupants voices. If a call is in progress
when the ignition is switched off, the hands-free system will continue to operate for up to 45 seconds as part of the
Accessory Relay Delay function. Thereafter, the call can continue on the hand-held telephone.
The system will communicate with a telephone that is anywhere within the vehicle. However, covering the hand held
phone or the hands-free phone module with a metal object may block the signal. The system will recognize up to
seven telephones, each of which is given a spoken identification by the user during the setup process. The system
includes Spanish and French voice recognition in addition to English.
Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A 9phone9 button turns the system
on and off; a 9voice recognition9 (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice
command.
OPERATION
TELECOMMUNICATION
Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A 9phone9 button turns the system
on and off; a 9voice recognition9 (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice
command. The system includes the following features:
Phonebook - Stores telephone numbers for later recall by name or other verbal identification, called a voice
tag, and memory location.
Four memory locations - Home, Work, Cellular and Pager. A maximum of 32 unique names or voice tags may
be stored at the same time, with a different number in each of the four memory locations.
Voice tag dialing - Dials the number associated with a voice tag and memory location.
Digit dialing - Dials the telephone number by recognizing the names of the digits as they are spoken.
Receiving calls - A voice prompt notifies the user of an incoming call. A voice response accepts or rejects the
call without manual intervention.
Privacy Mode - Switches the call to the handheld telephone and the hands-free system and back again using
the voice recognition (or voice command) button and a voice command, if desired.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TELECOMMUNICATION

Any diagnosis of the Telecommunication system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on
the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIRBAGS, REFER TO ELECTRICAL, RESTRAINTS BEFORE
ATTEMPTING ANY STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
LX
CONDITION
Phone Not
Available

POSSIBLE CAUSE
1. Bluetooth phone not
paired to the system.
2. Bluetooth phone not
present or turned OFF.
Phone Pairing
Failed
Poor Voice
Recognition
Phonebook
names not
recognized
consistently
8T - 57
CORRECTION
1. Ensure that phone(s) are paired to the system.
2. Make sure paired phone is present, turned ON and that the
Bluetooth option is enabled on the phone.
3. Bluetooth phone has

low battery.
3. At low battery levels, some phones will turn off Bluetooth

functionality. Ensure cellular phone is charged to an adequate
level.
1. Phone does not

support Hands Free
Profile
1. The Telecommunication system requires the cellular phone to

be Bluetooth enabled, as well as supporting the Hands Free
Profile. The customer will have to upgrade their phone to one
supporting Hands Free Profile. A list of suggested phones is
available at: http://www.chrysler.com/uconnect.
2. Phone not Bluetooth

enabled.
2. The Telecommunication system requires the cellular phone to

be Bluetooth enabled. A list of suggested phones is available
at: http://www.chrysler.com/uconnect.
3. PIN entered on the

phone is not the same
as PIN spoken to the
system.
3. The PIN spoken to the system must be the same PIN entered
into the phone.
4. Phone has reached

maximum number of
allowed devices paired.
4. Remove one of the previously paired devices from its list.
1. Microphone failure
1. Using a scan tool, check for microphone fault codes.
2. Customer not waiting

for the beep before
speaking.
2. Ensure customer is waiting for the system 9beep9 prior to

beginning the speech to be recognized.
3. Customer not
speaking in a smooth
normal manner.
3. Verify that the customer is attempting to use the system with a

smooth consistent voice. The system is designed to accept
normal speech spoken at a normal tone, some people tend to
speak to a computer loud and slow, which results in reduced
performance.
4. Rear view mirror not

properly attached to
mounting.
4. Mirror must be firmly mounted to the mounting location. Ensure

that mirror is tightened to the specified torque.
5. High levels of noise in

vehicle compartment
5. System performance is increased when noise conditions in the

vehicle are lowered. Ideal conditions include windows closed.
6. Object interfering with

microphone input
6. Verify that there is no object, hanging from the mirror, that

could be obstructing the microphone.
7. User not saying 9send9

after a pager dialing
request
7. User must say 9send9 at the end of a Pager Dialing request.
8. Other passengers
talking while customer is
attempting to use the
system
8. Although designed for primary use by the driver, the

microphone will pick up passengers in any seat of the vehicle.
System performance is increased in low noise environments.
1. Phonebook names
recorded in high noise
conditions
1. For increased system performance, it is recommended that the

phone book entries are recorded in a low noise environment. That
is, vehicle in park, with windows up.
8T - 58
CONDITION
Poor Phone
audio quality.
No Phone Audio
POSSIBLE CAUSE
LX
CORRECTION
2. Phonebook name(s)
short
2. For increased performance it is recommended that the user

use both first and last name as a phonebook entry. Example 9
James Johnson9 as opposed to 9James9.
3. Phonebook names
recorded by another user
3. It is recommended that each user of the system record their

own phonebook entries. This will increase the recognition
performance.
4. Similar names in
phonebook
4. For increased system performance it is recommended that the

user do not enter similar sounding names in the phonebook.
5. Object interfering with

microphone input
5. Object interfering with microphone input.
1. Microphone failure
1. Use a scan tool, and check for Microphone faults.
2. Rear view mirror not

properly fixed to
mounting button
2. Mirror must be firmly mounted to the mounting location. Tighten

mirror to the specified torque.
3. System being used in

high noise conditions
3. System performance is increased when noise conditions in the

vehicle are lowered. Ideal conditions include windows closed.
1. Phone setting cause

phone audio to be routed
to handset.
1. Route audio to 9Hands free9 device.
LX
HANDS FREE MODULE

REMOVAL
2. Remove the glove box.
3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector.
4. Remove the mounting fasteners

5. Remove the hands free module.
INSTALLATION
1. Position hands free module. Install and tighten
mounting fasteners.
8T - 59
8T - 60
2. Connect wire harness connector.

3. Install glove box.
LX
WIRING
LX
8W - 1
WIRING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION . . . . . . .

COMPONENT INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUSE/RELAY BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE . . . . . . . . .
GROUND DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUS COMMUNICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STARTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . .
VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANTILOCK BRAKES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM . . . . .
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET . .
AIR CONDITIONING/HEATER . . . . . . . . . . .
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEM. . . . . . . .
INTERIOR LIGHTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUDIO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8W-01-1
8W-02-1
8W-10-1
8W-11-1
8W-13-1
8W-15-1
8W-18-1
8W-20-1
8W-21-1
8W-30-1
8W-31-1
8W-33-1
8W-35-1
8W-39-1
8W-40-1
8W-41-1
8W-42-1
8W-43-1
8W-44-1
8W-47-1
page
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER . . . . . . . . . . . .

OVERHEAD CONSOLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRONT LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TURN SIGNALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WIPERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATIONS . . . .
CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPEED PROPORTIONAL STEERING . . . . . .
SPLICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTOR/GROUND/SPLICE
LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8W-48-1
8W-49-1
8W-50-1
8W-51-1
8W-52-1
8W-53-1
8W-55-1
8W-56-1
8W-60-1
8W-61-1
8W-62-1
8W-63-1
8W-64-1
8W-65-1
8W-70-1
8W-80-1
8W-91-1
8W-97-1
LX
8W-01 WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION
8W - 01 - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING
DIAGRAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION . . . . . . 7
DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . 7
DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION
AND INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND
AND SPLICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
WARNING
WARNINGS - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING
HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
STANDARD PROCEDURE
STANDARD PROCEDURE ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)
SENSITIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF
VOLTAGE POTENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR
CONTINUITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A

SHORT TO GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES
POWERING SEVERAL LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
VOLTAGE DROP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SPECIAL TOOLS
WIRING/TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CONNECTOR
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
DIODE
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TERMINAL
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
WIRE
STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING . . . . 21
8W - 01 - 2
LX
WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS
DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it
is important to understand all of their features and characteristics.
Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the
ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page.
All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed
from the ignition.
Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A
dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete.
It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they
appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches
and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only.
LX
8W - 01 - 3
8W - 01 - 4
LX
LX
8W - 01 - 5
SYMBOLS
International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used
around the world.
8W - 01 - 6
LX
LX
8W - 01 - 7
TERMINOLOGY
This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams.
LHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Hand Drive Vehicles
RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Hand Drive Vehicles
ATX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive
MTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive
AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive
MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive
SOHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Over Head Cam Engine
DOHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Over Head Cam Engine
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America
Except Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicles Built For Sale In North America
DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION

Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit,
gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen
gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer.
WIRE COLOR CODE CHART
COLOR CODE
COLOR
BL
BLUE
BK
BLACK
BR
BROWN
DB
DARK BLUE
DG
DARK GREEN
GY
GRAY
LB
LIGHT BLUE
LG
LIGHT GREEN
OR
ORANGE
PK
PINK
RD
RED
TN
TAN
VT
VIOLET
WT
WHITE
YL
YELLOW
WITH TRACER
DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS

All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and its function. To identify which circuit
code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and
does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models.
8W - 01 - 8
LX
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE CHART

CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
BATTERY FEED
BRAKE CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROLS
DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUITS
DIMMING ILLUMINATION
CIRCUITS
FUSED CIRCUITS
MONITORING CIRCUITS
(GAUGES)
MULTIPLE
NOT USED
OPEN
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
INTERIOR LIGHTING
MULTIPLE
NOT USED
POWER OPTION (BATTERY

FEED)
POWER OPTIONS (IGNITION

FEED)
PASSIVE RESTRAINT
SUSPENSION/STEERING
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/
TRANSFER CASE
OPEN
SPEED CONTROL, WIPER/

WASHER
WIPERS
AUDIO SYSTEMS
TEMPORARY
GROUNDS
DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION

The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group,
it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay
is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another
group if it contains some associated wiring.
Splice diagrams in Section 8W-70 show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices
serves. Section 8W-70 only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the
wiring diagrams.
Section 8W-80 shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified
using the name/number on the diagram pages.
LX
8W - 01 - 9
DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION

CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical
example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before
attempting a repair.
IDENTIFICATION
In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows:
In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers.
In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers.
In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers.
Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers.
Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a G and follow the same series numbering as the in-line
connectors.
Splices are identified with an S and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition,
S001S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment.
Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a
component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier.
LOCATIONS
Section 8W-91 contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name
(or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts in
section 8W-91 reference the figure numbers of the illustrations.
The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness
branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations
WARNING
WARNINGS - GENERAL
WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings
that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced.
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to
be on.
WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
park. A manual transmission should be in neutral.
WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area.
WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts.
WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s),
tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
8W - 01 - 10
LX
WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery.
WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS

TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS
When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed
and explained below.
Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in
a circuit.
WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and
ground.
Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and
the red lead to the positive side of the circuit.
CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in todays vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating.
Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit
means good continuity.
CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in todays vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure
the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicles electrical system
can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings.
Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing
terminals in connectors. Select the proper size
tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert
the probing end (2) into the terminal being
tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert
the meter probe.
INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS

Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a
sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the
following items.
Connectors are fully seated
Spread terminals, or terminal push out
Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position
Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem
Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture
Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground
Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation
Wiring broken inside of the insulation
LX
8W - 01 - 11
TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS

When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and
explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle
is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem.
1. Verify the problem.
2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same
circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams.
3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most
likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue.
4. Isolate the problem area.
5. Repair the problem area.
6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to
the wiring diagrams.
STANDARD PROCEDURE
STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE
DEVICES
All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a
symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any
component with this symbol, comply with the following
procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic
charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge
into the component. If it is not known whether the part
is ESD sensitive, assume that it is.
1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding
across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance.
2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure.
3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first.
4. Do not remove the part from its protective packing until it is time to install the part.
5. Before removing the part from its package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle.
8W - 01 - 12
LX
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL

1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known
good ground.
2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the
selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need
to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the
appropriate test procedure.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY

1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked
or, disconnect the battery.
2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of
the circuit being tested
3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means
good continuity.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse.
2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse.
3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test
lamp.
4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the
wiring harness.
LX
8W - 01 - 13
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES

POWERING SEVERAL LOADS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits.
Replace the blown fuse.
Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery.
Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the
short to ground has been isolated.
STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP

1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the
side of the circuit closest to the battery.
2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other
side of the switch, component or circuit.
3. Operate the item.
4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage
between the two points.
8W - 01 - 14
SPECIAL TOOLS
WIRING/TERMINAL
PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807
TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680
TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638
TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934
LX
LX
CONNECTOR
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery.
2. Release Connector Lock (2).
3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from
its mating half/component.
4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1).
8W - 01 - 15
8W - 01 - 16
5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1).
LX
LX
1
2
3
4
5
6
- TYPICAL CONNECTOR
- PICK FROM SPECIAL TOOL KIT 6680
- APEX CONNECTOR
- PICK FROM SPECIAL TOOL KIT 6680
- AUGAT CONNECTOR
- SPECIAL TOOL 6932
8W - 01 - 17
7 - MOLEX CONNECTOR
8 - SPECIAL TOOL 6742
9 - THOMAS AND BETTS CONNECTOR
11 - TYCO CONNECTOR
6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to
remove the terminal from the connector.
8W - 01 - 18
LX
INSTALLATION
1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector.
2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities.
For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams.
3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out.
4. Replace dress cover (if applicable).
5. Connect connector to its mating half/component.
6. Connect battery and test all affected systems.
LX
8W - 01 - 19
DIODE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the
protective covering.
3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention
to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3).
INSTALLATION
1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode.
2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate
wiring diagram for current flow.
3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder.
4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements.
5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems.
8W - 01 - 20
LX
TERMINAL
REMOVAL
1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section.
2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector.
INSTALLATION
1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired.
2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove onehalf (1/2) inch of insulation.
3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure) (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION/WIRE - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector.
5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component.
6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 11/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair.
7. Connect battery and test all affected systems.
LX
8W - 01 - 21
WIRE
STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING
When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams.
1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each
wire that needs to be spliced.
2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing
on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will
be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair
area.
3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other
inside of the splice clip (1).
4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA,

crimp the splice clip and wires together.
5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin

core type solder (1) only.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER.

6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and
heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of
both ends of the tubing.
LX
8W-02 COMPONENT INDEX
8W - 02 - 1
Component
Page
Actuator-Blend Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Actuator-Mode Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Actuator-Recirculation Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43
Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47, 48
Antenna-Global Positioning System . . . . . . . 8W-55
Antenna-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47
Assembly-Electrohydraulic Control Unit . . . . 8W-31
Assembly-Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve . . 8W-30
Assembly-Natural Vacuum Leak Detection . . 8W-30
Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Assembly-Variable Line Pressure . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Backlite-Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47
Backlite-Electric Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Booster-Active Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35
Capacitors-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Clutch-A/C Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Coils-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Connector-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Connector-Police Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18
Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Display-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Fan-Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Flasher-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10, 11, 13
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10, 13
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20
Glow Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15
Heater-Cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Heater-Crankcase Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Heaters-Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Horns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41
Injectors-Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Lamp-Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Lamp-Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Lamp-PRNDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Lamp-Reading-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Lamp-Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Component
Page
Lamps-Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Lamps-Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Lamps-Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 51
Lamps-High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Lamps-High Intensity Discharge . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Lamps-License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Lamps-Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Lamps-Park/Turn Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Lamps-Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Lamps-Side Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52
Lamps-Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Lamps-Tail Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Lamps-Tail Stop/Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Lamps-Tail Stop/Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51, 52
Lamps-Tail Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52
Lamps-Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Lamps-Turn Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52
Lamps-Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Latches-Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61
Lighter-Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41
Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47
Mega Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49, 55, 62
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35
Module-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Module-Clock-Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49
Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Module-Front Blower Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13, 18
Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55
Module-Headlamp Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Module-Intrusion Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56, 63
Module-Occupant Classification . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43
Module-Occupant Restraint Controller . . . . . 8W-43
Module-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30, 31
Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Module-Steering Column-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Module-Steering Control . 8W-33, 41, 43, 47, 50, 51,
52, 53, 56, 65
Module-Traffic Information Receiver . . . . . . . 8W-55
8W - 02 - 2
Component
Page
Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Modules-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60, 62
Motor-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Motor-Blower-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Motor-Boost Pressure Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motor-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Motor-Intake Swirl Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Motor-Steering Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Motor-Steering Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64
Motors-Seats Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Motors-Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60
Motors-Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41
Pump-Washer-Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47
Receiver-Intrusion Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47
Relay-A/C Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Relay-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Relay-Auto Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Relay-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Relay-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Relay-High Intensity Discharge Lamp . . . . . 8W-50
Relay-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41
Relay-PTCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Relay-Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 51
Relay-Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48
Relay-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Relay-Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21
Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Relay-Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Relay-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Relays-Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 51
Relays-Police . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11
Relays-Radiator Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Relays-Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Resistor Block-Blower Motor-Front . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Seat Belt-Tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43
Sensor-Accelerator Pedal Position . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Sensor-Ambient Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Boost Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Sensor-Brake Pedal Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35
Sensor-Brake Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35
Sensor-Camshaft Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Crankshaft Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65
Sensor-Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Evaporator Temperature . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
LX
Component
Page
Sensor-Exhaust Differential Pressure . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Exhaust Gas Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Fuel Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Inlet Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Inlet Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Intake Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Knocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Manifold Absolute Pressure . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Mass Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Post-Catalyst Exhaust Gas
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Pre-Catalyst Exhaust Gas
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensor-Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Sensor-Seat Track Position-Driver . . . . . . . . . 8W-43
Sensor-Shift Lever Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Sensor-Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Sensor-Transmission Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Sensor-Washer Fluid Level-Front . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Sensors Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43
Sensors Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Sensors-Headlamps Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Sensors-Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Sensors-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Sensors-Seat Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43
Sensors-Wheel Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35, 40
Siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Solenoid-Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Solenoid-Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Solenoid-Fuel Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Solenoid-Manifold Tuning Valve . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyls . . 8W-30
Solenoid-Proportional Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Solenoid-Short Runner Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47
Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21
Switch-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56
Switch-Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35, 44, 52, 53
Switch-Decklid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61
Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44, 50
Switch-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41
Switch-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Switch-Liftgate Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61
Switch-Memory Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56, 63
Switch-Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62
Switch-Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Switch-Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Switch-Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
LX
Component
Page
Switch-Security Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Switch-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64
Switches-Heated Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Switches-Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60
Switches-Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Switches-Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Switches-Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41, 47
Component
Switches-Window/Door Locks
Throttle Body . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transducer-A/C Pressure . . . .
Transmitter-Intrusion Sensor
Transponders-Tire Pressure .
Valve-EGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve-EGR Air Flow Control .
8W - 02 - 3
Page
. . . . . . . . . 8W-60, 61
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
. . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
LX
8W-10 POWER DISTRIBUTION
8W - 10 - 1

Component
Page
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18, 22
Amplifier-Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Amplifier-Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
Backlite-Electric Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 8
Circuit Breaker No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8, 12, 14, 16, 19
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8, 13, 20, 22
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
Diode-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13, 14
Diode-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Diode-Zener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
Flasher-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 8
Fuse 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 10
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 10
Fuse 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
Fuse 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
Fuse 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
Fuse 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 15
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Fuse 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Fuse 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Fuse 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Fuse 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Fuse 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Fuse 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
Fuse 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17, 18
Fuse 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Fuse 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14
Fuse 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Fuse 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
Fuse 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Fuse 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Fuse 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
Fuse 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 8
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7, 10
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Lamp-Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Left . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Right . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
Lamp-Spot-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
Lamp-Spot-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
Lighter-Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Mega Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Mirror-Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14
Module-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Module-Clock-Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 17
Component
Page
Module-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 17
Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8, 18
Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 14
Module-Front Blower Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8, 14, 15, 17, 20
Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Module-Headlamp Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
Module-Integrated Power . . 8W-10-7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 15, 17, 20
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
Module-Intrusion Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
Module-Occupant Classification . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 13
Module-Occupant Restraint Controller . . . . . . 8W-10-13, 20
Module-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 14
Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . . 8W-10-8, 14, 19
Module-Steering Column-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 19
Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
Module-Traffic Information Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14
Motor-Blower-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Power Distribution Center . 8W-10-2, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 19, 20, 22
Power Outlet-Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
Power Outlet-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Relay-Fog Lamp-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
Relay-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 13
Relay-PTC No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Relay-PTC No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Relay-PTC No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Relay-Police-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
Relay-Police-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
Relay-Police-No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
Relay-Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
Relay-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Relay-Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13, 14
Relay-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
Sensor-Mass Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14
Sensor-Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
Siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
Switch-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
Switch-Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 18
Switch-Seat-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
Switch-Seat-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13, 19
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Express . . . . 8W-10-18
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Rear . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
LX
8W-11 FUSE/RELAY BLOCK
8W - 11 - 1
8W-11 FUSE/RELAY BLOCK
Component
Page
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
Connector-Police Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-9
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5, 9
Fuse 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5, 9
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5, 9
Fuse 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-9
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-9
Fuse 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-9
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-2, 5, 6, 8, 9
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-9
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
Heater-Cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5
Component
Page
Mega Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8
Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8
Relay-PTC No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5
Relay-PTC No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5
Relay-PTC No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-5
Relay-Police-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8, 9
Relay-Police-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8, 9
Relay-Police-No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-8, 9
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-11-4, 8
LX
8W-13 INTEGRATED POWER MODULE
8W - 13 - 1
8W-13 INTEGRATED POWER MODULE
Component
Page
Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29, 34
Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch . . . 8W-13-28
Assembly-Variable Line Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-20, 23
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-19, 20, 22, 23
Clutch-A/C Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 21
Coil-Ignition-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 19, 21
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-32
Diode-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37
Fan-Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27, 28
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Fuse 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Fuse 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
Fuse 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
Fuse 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Fuse 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27, 37
Fuse 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17
Fuse 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17
Fuse 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26
Fuse 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26
Fuse 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27
Fuse 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27
Fuse 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
Fuse 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
Fuse 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Fuse 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
Fuse 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17
Fuse 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
Fuse 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37
Fuse 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11, 24
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11, 17
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12, 26
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12, 28
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11
Heater-Crankcase Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
Horn-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
Horn-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
Injector-Fuel-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 19, 22
Injector-Fuel-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-19, 22
Lamp-Backup-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29
Lamp-Backup-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-35
Lamp-Fog-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Lamp-Fog-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Lamp-High Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36
Lamp-High Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Right . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Lamp-License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15
Lamp-License-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15
Lamp-License-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15
Lamp-Low Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36
Lamp-Low Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14, 36
Component
Page
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14, 36
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
Lamp-Side Repeater-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36
Lamp-Side Repeater-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36
Lamp-Tail Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
Lamp-Tail Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16, 35
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16, 35
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16, 30
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16, 30
Lamp-Tail Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-30
Lamp-Tail Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-30
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15, 35
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15, 35
Lamp-Turn-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-30
Lamp-Turn-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-30
Lamp-Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
Mega Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11
Mirror-Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26, 28
Module-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29, 34
Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17, 24, 25, 27, 28
Module-Front Control . 8W-13-2, 3, 12, 13, 14, 17, 24, 26, 27, 28,
29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37
Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11, 25
Module-Integrated Power . 8W-13-2, 3, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 24, 25,
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 37
Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17, 27, 28, 29
Motor-Boost Pressure Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
Motor-Intake Swirl Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
Motor-Wiper-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26, 31
Motor-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-33
Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11, 37
Pump-Washer-Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-31
Relay-A/C Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13, 28
Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37
Relay-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Relay-Auto Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17
Relay-Fog Lamp-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Relay-Fog Lamp-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37
Relay-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
Relay-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13, 31
Relay-High Intensity Discharge Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Relay-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
Relay-PTC No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-24
Relay-PTC No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-24
Relay-PTC No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-24
Relay-Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
Relay-Radiator Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
Relay-Radiator Fan High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27
Relay-Radiator Fan High/Low Control . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27
Relay-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-37
Relay-Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-27
Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
Relay-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
Relay-Wiper High/Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26
Relay-Wiper On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-26
Relay-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-31
Sensor-Ambient Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-33
Sensor-Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
Sensor-Washer Fluid Level-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-33
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-33
Solenoid-Short Runner Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-20, 23
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-11, 27
Switch-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-12
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-33
Switch-Security Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
Transducer-A/C Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-31, 33
Valve-Egr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
LX
8W-15 GROUND DISTRIBUTION
8W - 15 - 1
8W-15 GROUND DISTRIBUTION
Component
Page
Amplifier-Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
Amplifier-Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17
Assembly-Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 8
Assembly-Natural Vacuum Leak Detection . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25
Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 22, 23
Backlite-Electric Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 23, 26
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Clutch-A/C Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 8, 11
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12, 15
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
Diode-Zener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25
Fan-Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5, 6
Flasher-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 3
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 5
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6, 7, 8, 10
G103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
G104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
G105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
G109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
G110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
G111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12, 13
G201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15, 16
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18, 19, 20, 21
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 21, 22, 23, 24
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 22
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 8
Heater-Seat Back-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
Heater-Seat Back-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
Heater-Seat Cushion-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
Heater-Seat Cushion-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
Lamp-Backup-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27, 30
Lamp-Backup-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28, 30
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 22
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
Lamp-Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
Lamp-Fog-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27, 30
Lamp-Fog-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28, 30
Lamp-Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
Lamp-High Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2
Lamp-High Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4
Lamp-License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-29, 30
Lamp-License-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-29, 30
Lamp-License-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-29, 30
Lamp-Low Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3
Lamp-Low Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4
Lamp-PRNDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 23
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5
Lamp-Reading-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28
Lamp-Side Repeater-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3
Lamp-Side Repeater-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Lamp-Tail Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27
Lamp-Tail Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28
Lamp-Tail Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27
Lamp-Tail Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-30
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-30
Lamp-Turn-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-30
Lamp-Turn-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-30
Lamp-Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
Lamp-Vanity-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
Lamp-Vanity-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
Latch-Door-Decklid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 22
Latch-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Latch-Door-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
Component
Page
Latch-Door-Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Latch-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Latch-Door-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
Lighter-Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Mirror-Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4
Module-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25
Module-Clock-Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Module-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
Module-Front Blower Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2
Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 23
Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
Module-Headlamp Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5
Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 22
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 6
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
Module-Intrusion Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
Module-Occupant Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
Module-Occupant Restraint Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Module-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25
Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6, 7
Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Module-Steering Column-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Module-Traffic Information Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16, 17
Motor-Boost Pressure Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
Motor-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Motor-Intake Swirl Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
Motor-Wiper-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3, 8
Motor-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
Power Outlet-Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 23
Power Outlet-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Pump-Washer-Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Relay-High Intensity Discharge Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Relay-Police-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Relay-Police-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Relay-Police-No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Relay-Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25
Relay-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Relay-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-25
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 8
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 8
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 8
Sensor-Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Sensor-Washer Fluid Level-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4
Siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
Solenoid-Manifold Tuning Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 8
Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-9
Switch-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
Switch-Decklid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-12
Switch-Liftgate Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
Switch-Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Switch-Seat Belt-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 21
Switch-Seat Belt-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
Switch-Seat-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
Switch-Seat-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 21
Switch-Security Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-6
Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 23
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 22
Valve-EGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
LX
8W-18 BUS COMMUNICATIONS
8W - 18 - 1
8W-18 BUS COMMUNICATIONS
Component
Page
Amplifier-Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 6
Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-10
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-6
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 5
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2
Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-9
Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
Module-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-8
Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-10
Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2, 9
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2, 3, 9
Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 5, 6
Module-Headlamp Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3
Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
Component
Page
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-5
Module-Intrusion Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-5
Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
Module-Occupant Classification . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
Module-Occupant Restraint Controller . . 8W-18-5, 6
Module-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2, 9
Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . . 8W-18-6
Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-6, 10
Module-Traffic Information Receiver . . . . . 8W-18-6
Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-9
Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-8
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-5, 6
Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3
Sensor-Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-9
Sensor-Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 5
LX
8W-20 CHARGING SYSTEM
8W - 20 - 1
8W-20 CHARGING SYSTEM
Component
Page
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
Mega Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2
Component
Page
Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-3
Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-3
Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2
Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
8W-21 STARTING SYSTEM
LX
8W - 21 - 1
8W-21 STARTING SYSTEM
Component
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . .
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator . . . . . . . . . . .
Module-Engine Control .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
Component
Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . .
Module-Integrated Power . .
Module-Powertrain Control
Post-Pass Through . . . . . . .
Relay-Starter . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
8W-21-2
LX
8W-30 FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM
8W - 30 - 1
8W-30 FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM
Component
Page
Assembly-Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve . . . . 8W-30-14

Assembly-Natural Vacuum Leak Detection . . . . 8W-30-15
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 9
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-18
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17
Fan-Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Fuse 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 21
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 19
Fuse 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8, 19
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8, 19
Fuse 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8, 16, 19
Fuse 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-19
Fuse 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Fuse 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Fuse 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 21
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-20
Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11, 13, 14, 16, 17, 19, 23
G109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
G111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 18
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 18
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14, 22
Glow Plug No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Glow Plug No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Glow Plug No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Glow Plug No. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Glow Plug No. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Glow Plug No. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Heater-Crankcase Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23
Injector-Fuel-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7, 8, 24
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 17
Module-Engine Control . . 8W-30-16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29
Module-Front Control . . . 8W-30-2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 16, 17, 19, 20
Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 18, 21
Module-Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22, 23
Module-Integrated Power . . . 8W-30-2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 16, 19, 20
Module-Powertrain Control . 8W-30-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
Component
Page
Motor-Boost Pressure Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23

Motor-Intake Swirl Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23
Post-Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 18, 21, 22
Relay-A/C Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Relay-Auto Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 5, 6, 8, 19
Relay-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 19, 21
Relay-PTC No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-20
Relay-PTC No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-20
Relay-PTC No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-20
Relay-Radiator Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Relay-Radiator Fan High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Relay-Radiator Fan High/Low Control . . . . . . . 8W-30-16
Relay-Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 19
Sensor-Accelerator Pedal Position . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14, 29
Sensor-Ambient Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17
Sensor-Boost Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-27
Sensor-Camshaft Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10, 25
Sensor-Crankshaft Position . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10, 25
Sensor-Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . 8W-30-12, 28
Sensor-Exhaust Differential Pressure . . . . . . . . 8W-30-28
Sensor-Exhaust Gas Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-28
Sensor-Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-27
Sensor-Fuel Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-27
Sensor-Inlet Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-26
Sensor-Inlet Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12
Sensor-Intake Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-26
Sensor-Knock No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12
Sensor-Knock No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12
Sensor-Manifold Absolute Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10
Sensor-Mass Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-21, 26
Sensor-Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-13, 25
Sensor-Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-13, 25
Sensor-Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-20, 23
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Sensor-Post-Catalyst Exhaust Gas Temperature . 8W-30-28
Sensor-Pre-Catalyst Exhaust Gas Temperature . 8W-30-28
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17
Solenoid-Fuel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-27
Solenoid-Fuel Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-27
Solenoid-Manifold Tuning Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14
Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 . . . . 8W-30-13
Solenoid-Proportional Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15
Solenoid-Short Runner Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-4, 7
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Switch-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-21
Switch-Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-25
Switch-Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12
Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 15
Throttle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10
Valve-EGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23
Valve-EGR Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-26
LX
8W-31 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
8W - 31 - 1
8W-31 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Component
Page
Assembly-Electrohydraulic Control Unit . . 8W-31-8
Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4, 6
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 5
Assembly-Variable Line Pressure . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 3
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3
Fuse 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2
Fuse 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6, 7
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4, 6
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6
Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6, 7
Component
Page
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 3, 6
Module-Powertrain Control . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 3, 4, 5
Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6, 8
Relay-Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3
Relay-Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6
Relay-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2
Sensor-Input Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4
Sensor-Output Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4
Sensor-Shift Lever Position . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-7
Sensor-Transmission Range . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3
Solenoid-Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-7
Switch-Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-7
LX
8W-33 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL
8W - 33 - 1
8W-33 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL
Component
Assembly-Shifter Lever
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module-Antilock Brakes
Module-Electronic Shift
Module-Engine Control .
Page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3, 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
Component
Page
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2, 3
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Abs-Right Front . . . . . 8W-33-4
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right Front . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
Throttle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3
LX
8W-35 ANTILOCK BRAKES
8W - 35 - 1
8W-35 ANTILOCK BRAKES
Component
Page
Booster-Active Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-5
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2
Fuse 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-5
Fuse 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-3
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-3
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3, 4, 5
Component
Page
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3, 5
Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-5
Sensor-Brake Pedal Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4
Sensor-Brake Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front . . . . . 8W-35-4
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-3
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front . . . . 8W-35-4
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2
LX
8W-39 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM
8W - 39 - 1
8W-39 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM
Component
Page
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 3, 4, 5
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-7
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2
Fuse 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-7
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3, 7
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 4, 7, 8
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-5
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4
Latch-Door-Decklid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4
Latch-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3
Latch-Door-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3
Latch-Door-Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-5
Latch-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3
Component
Page
Latch-Door-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 3
Module-Intrusion Transceiver . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 7, 8
Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . . 8W-39-2
Module-Steering Column-Lock . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 7
Receiver-Intrusion Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-8
Siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-7, 8
Switch-Decklid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4
Switch-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-7
Switch-Liftgate Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-5
Switch-Security Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-3
Transmitter-Intrusion Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-8
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front . . . . 8W-39-6
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front . . . 8W-39-6
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Rear . . . . 8W-39-6
LX
8W-40 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
8W - 40 - 1
8W-40 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Component
Page
Circuit Breaker No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Connector-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . 8W-40-14
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-4, 8, 9
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-13
Fuse 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9
Fuse 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-10, 12
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-12
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-10
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2, 13
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5, 6, 11
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3, 5, 11
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Front Door . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Front Door . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
Lamp-Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
Lamp-Prndl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8, 9
Lamp-Reading-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
Lamp-Vanity-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
Lamp-Vanity-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
Component
Page
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-10
Module-Clock-Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8, 9
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2, 10, 13
Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . . . . 8W-40-13, 14
Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . . 8W-40-11
Power Distribution Center . . . . . 8W-40-2, 9, 11, 13
Sensor-Ambient Air Temperature . . . . . . . 8W-40-10
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-10
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Abs-Right Front . . . . 8W-40-10
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right Front . . . . . . . 8W-40-10
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3, 8, 9
Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3, 8, 9
Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-4, 8, 9
Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-4, 8, 9
Switch-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-4
Switch-Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6
Switch-Seat Belt-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6
Switch-Seat Belt-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express . 8W-40-6
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger . . . 8W-40-6, 7
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger
Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11, 12
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11, 12
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11
LX
8W-41 HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET
8W - 41 - 1
8W-41 HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET
Component
Page
Fuse 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-4
Fuse 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
Fuse 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
Fuse 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-3
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
Horn-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-4
Horn-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-4
Component
Page
Lighter-Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-3
Power Outlet-Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
Power Outlet-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2
Relay-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-4
Switch-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-3
Switch-Steering-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-3
LX
8W-42 AIR CONDITIONING/HEATER
8W - 42 - 1
8W-42 AIR CONDITIONING/HEATER
Component
Page
Actuator-Blend Door-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 9
Actuator-Blend Door-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-9
Actuator-Mode Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-5, 9
Actuator-Recirculation Door . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 9
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-5, 7, 8
Clutch-A/C Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . 8W-42-3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Fuse 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Fuse 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
Fuse 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 7
Fuse 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
Fuse 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
Fuse 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3
Fuse 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 7
Fuse 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 10
Fuse/Relay Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
G110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
Component
Page
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 8
G201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 10
Heater-Cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Module-Engine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 11
Module-Front Blower Power . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-10
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 7, 11
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 11
Motor-Blower-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-6, 10
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 4, 7, 10
Relay-A/C Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
Relay-PTC No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Relay-PTC No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Relay-PTC No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-11
Relay-Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 7
Relay-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-3, 4, 7, 10
Resistor Block-Blower Motor-Front . . . . . . 8W-42-6
Sensor-Evaporator Temperature . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 10
Sensor-Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-8
Transducer-A/C Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2
LX
8W-43 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEM
8W - 43 - 1
8W-43 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Component
Page
Airbag-Driver Squib 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-3
Airbag-Passenger Squib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-5
Airbag-Side Curtain-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7
Airbag-Side Curtain-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
Fuse 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2, 6
Fuse 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-3
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-3
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
Module-Occupant Classification . . . . . . . 8W-43-4, 6
Module-Occupant Restraint
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2, 3, 4, 5, 7
Component
Page
Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-5
Seat Belt-Tensioner-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-5
Sensor-Front Impact-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-5
Sensor-Front Impact-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-5
Sensor-Seat Track Position-Driver . . . . . 8W-43-3, 6
Sensor-Seat Weight-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
Sensor-Seat Weight-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
Sensor-Seat Weight-Right Front . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
Sensor-Seat Weight-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7
Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7
Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7
Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-7
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2
LX
8W-44 INTERIOR LIGHTING
8W - 44 - 1
8W-44 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Component
Page
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 8, 9
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Fuse 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2
Fuse 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-3, 4, 8, 10
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 8
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5, 8, 9
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5, 8, 9
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5
Lamp-Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5, 6
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Front Door . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-3
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Front Door . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5
Component
Page
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-3
Lamp-Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Lamp-Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-3
Lamp-PRNDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9
Lamp-Spot-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Lamp-Spot-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Lamp-Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Lamp-Vanity-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-4
Lamp-Vanity-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-4
Module-Clock-Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-10
Module-Occupant Restraint Controller . . . . 8W-44-6
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 6, 10
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 8
Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-7, 8
Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8
Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8
LX
8W-47 AUDIO SYSTEM
8W - 47 - 1
8W-47 AUDIO SYSTEM
Component
Page
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-3
Amplifier-Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-6, 7, 8, 9
Amplifier-Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-9
Antenna-Global Positioning System . . . . . . 8W-47-3
Antenna-Satellite No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-10
Backlite-Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-3
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 6, 10, 12, 14
Fuse 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-9
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-15
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-3
Fuse 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 10, 12, 14
Fuse 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-6
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 10, 12, 14
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-6, 15
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-9
Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . 8W-47-12, 13
Module-Front Control . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 6, 11, 13, 15
Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-14
Component
Page
Power Distribution
Center . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 6, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 11, 12, 14
Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-10, 11
Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center . . . . . . . 8W-47-8
Speaker-Instrument Panel-Left . . . . . . . 8W-47-5, 8
Speaker-Instrument Panel-Right . . . . . . 8W-47-5, 8
Speaker-Left Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4, 5, 7
Speaker-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4, 5, 7
Speaker-Right Front Door . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4, 5, 7
Speaker-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4, 5, 7
Speaker-Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-8, 9
Switch-Steering-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-15
Switch-Steering-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-15
8W-48 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
LX
8W - 48 - 1
8W-48 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Component
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite
Backlite-Electric Heated . . .
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . .
Fuse 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page
8W-48-2
8W-48-2
8W-48-2
8W-48-2
8W-48-2
8W-48-2
Component
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver . . . .
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger .
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . .
Relay-Rear Window Defogger . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page
8W-48-2
8W-48-2
8W-48-2
8W-48-2
8W-48-2
8W-48-2
LX
8W-49 OVERHEAD CONSOLE
8W - 49 - 1
8W-49 OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Component
Page
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 5
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-4
Fuse 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-4
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-3
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3, 4
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2
Component
Page
Mirror-Inside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-3
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-3
Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-4, 5
Switch-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-6
LX
8W-50 FRONT LIGHTING
8W - 50 - 1
8W-50 FRONT LIGHTING
Component
Page
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 3
Flasher-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-10, 11
Fuse 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-6
Fuse 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-6
Fuse 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-9
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4
Fuse 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-6
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-10
Fuse 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 5, 6, 9, 10
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-3
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-8
Lamp-Fog-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-9
Lamp-Fog-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-9
Lamp-High Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 10
Lamp-High Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 10
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Left . . . 8W-50-6, 7
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Right . . 8W-50-6, 7
Lamp-Low Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-6
Component
Page
Lamp-Low Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-6
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 5
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 5
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Front . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4
Lamp-Side Repeater-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5
Lamp-Side Repeater-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5
Module-Front Control . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10
Module-Headlamp Leveling . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 7
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 6, 9
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7, 10
Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-10
Relay-Fog Lamp-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-9
Relay-High Intensity Discharge Lamp . . . . 8W-50-6
Relay-Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Left . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7, 8
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Right . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7, 8
Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-3
LX
8W-51 REAR LIGHTING
8W - 51 - 1
8W-51 REAR LIGHTING
Component
Page
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2, 3
Fuse 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6
Fuse 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-11
Fuse 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
Fuse 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
Fuse 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4, 5, 7
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4, 5, 7
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
Lamp-Backup-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-9, 10
Lamp-Backup-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-9, 10
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 7
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-11
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-11
Lamp-License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6
Lamp-License-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6
Lamp-License-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-7
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8
Lamp-Tail Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-7
Component
Page
Lamp-Tail Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 7
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Right . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 8
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-7
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 6, 10
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 6, 10
Lamp-Turn-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10
Lamp-Turn-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10
Module-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2, 6, 9, 11
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6, 9, 11
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4, 11
Relay-Fog Lamp-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-11
Relay-Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6
Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4, 7
Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3
LX
8W-52 TURN SIGNALS
8W - 52 - 1
8W-52 TURN SIGNALS
Component
Page
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4, 5
Lamp-Backup-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
Lamp-Backup-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3
Lamp-Side Repeater-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3
Lamp-Side Repeater-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3
Component
Page
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4
Lamp-Tail Turn-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4
Lamp-Tail Turn-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
Lamp-Turn-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
Lamp-Turn-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2, 3, 4, 5
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4, 5
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2
LX
8W-53 WIPERS
8W - 53 - 1
8W-53 WIPERS
Component
Page
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-5
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-7
Fuse 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-5
Fuse 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2
Fuse 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-6
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-3
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-5
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 4
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 4, 7
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-3, 5
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-6
Module-Front Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 4, 6, 7
Component
Page
Module-Integrated Power . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 4, 6, 7
Motor-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-7
Motor-Wiper-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2
Motor-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-6
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . 8W-53-3, 4, 5, 6
Pump-Washer-Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4
Relay-Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-7
Relay-Wiper High/Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2
Relay-Wiper On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2
Relay-Wiper-Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-6
Sensor-Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4
Sensor-Washer Fluid Level-Front . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-5
LX
8W-55 NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATIONS
8W - 55 - 1
8W-55 NAVIGATION/TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Component
Page
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-3
Antenna-Global Positioning System . . . . . . 8W-55-2
Backlite-Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-3
Fuse 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-2, 3, 4
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-5
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-2, 3, 4, 5
Component
Page
Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-4, 5
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-55-2, 3, 4
LX
8W-56 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS
8W - 56 - 1
8W-56 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS
Component
Page
Display-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-6
Fuse 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2
Fuse 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-6
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2, 3
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-6
Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-3, 5
Module-Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-6, 7, 8
Motor-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2, 3
Component
Page
Motor-Steering Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5
Motor-Steering Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5
Relay-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2
Relay-Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-6
Sensor-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5
Sensor-Park Assist-No. 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-7, 8
Sensor-Park Assist-No. 10 . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-7, 8
Switch-Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-2, 3
Switch-Memory Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-3
LX
8W-60 POWER WINDOWS
8W - 60 - 1
8W-60 POWER WINDOWS
Component
Page
Circuit Breaker No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4, 5, 6
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4, 5
Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-4, 5
Module-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-6
Motor-Window-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-3
Motor-Window-Driver Express . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-5
Motor-Window-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4
Motor-Window-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-3
Motor-Window-Passenger Express . . . . . . . 8W-60-6
Motor-Window-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4
Component
Page
Relay-Accessory Delay . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4, 5, 6
Switch-Power Window-Left Rear . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4
Switch-Power Window-Right Rear . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 3
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver
Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-4, 5
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger . . . . . 8W-60-3
Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-6
LX
8W-61 POWER DOOR LOCKS
8W - 61 - 1
8W-61 POWER DOOR LOCKS
Component
Page
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-6
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-3, 4, 5, 6
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-5, 6
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-7
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-6
Component
Page
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 3
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver
Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 4
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger . . . 8W-61-2, 3
Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 4
LX
8W-62 POWER MIRRORS
8W - 62 - 1
8W-62 POWER MIRRORS
Component
Page
Control-A/C-Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2
Fuse 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2
Fuse 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 3, 5, 6
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 3, 4, 5
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-3, 6
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver . . . . . . . 8W-62-3, 5
Component
Page
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger . . 8W-62-3, 5, 6
Module-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 4, 5
Module-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 6
Relay-Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2
Switch-Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 3, 4, 5
LX
8W-63 POWER SEATS
8W - 63 - 1
8W-63 POWER SEATS
Component
Page
Circuit Breaker No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 8
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-7
Fuse 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4
Fuse 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-7
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-7
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 4, 5, 6, 8
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3, 4, 5, 6
Heater-Seat Back-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5
Heater-Seat Back-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-6
Heater-Seat Cushion-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5
Heater-Seat Cushion-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-6
Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4
Module-Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4, 8, 9
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal . . 8W-63-2, 9
Component
Page
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Recliner . . . 8W-63-2, 9
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Driver
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 9
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Passenger
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Horizontal . 8W-63-3
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Recliner . . . 8W-63-3
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear
Driver Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 9
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Passenger
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3
Power Distribution Center . . . . . 8W-63-2, 3, 4, 7, 8
Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-7
Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-7
Switch-Seat-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 8
Switch-Seat-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3
LX
8W-64 POWER SUNROOF
8W - 64 - 1
8W-64 POWER SUNROOF
Component
Page
Fuse 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64-2
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64-2
Component
Page
Switch-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-64-2
LX
8W-65 SPEED PROPORTIONAL STEERING
8W - 65 - 1
8W-65 SPEED PROPORTIONAL STEERING
Component
Page
Assembly-Shifter Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-2
Fuse 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-2
G202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-2
Module-Electronic Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-2
Component
Page
Module-Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-65-3
LX
8W-70 SPLICE INFORMATION
8W - 70 - 1
8W-70 SPLICE INFORMATION

Component
Page
S100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
S101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5
S102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3
S103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
S104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
S105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-2
S106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-3
S107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-18, 22
S108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-19, 23
S109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-20, 21
S110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-4
S111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-4
S112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
S113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4
S114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
S115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-8
S116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7
S117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7
S118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15
S119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15
S120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
S121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-3
S122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-9
S123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7
S124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-9
S125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
S126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14
S127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-14
S128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
S129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-28
S130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-13
S131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
S132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3
S133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3
S134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36
S135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-36
S136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-9
S138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
S139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6
S140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21
S141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6
S142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
S143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-17, 24
S144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29
S145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
S146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
S148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10
S149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10
S150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
S151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
S152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-7
S155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
S156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-25
S157 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S162 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S163 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S164 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S165 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
S200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
S201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
S202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
S203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
S204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-6
S205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-6
S206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-10
S207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-10
S208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8
S209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14
S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
S211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-2
S212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
S213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
S214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
S215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
S216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6
S217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
S218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 5
S219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-4, 5
S220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-9
S221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5
S222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5
S223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5
S224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5
S225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5
S226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5
S227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
Component
S228
S229
S230
S231
S232
S233
S234
S235
S236
S237
S300
S301
S302
S303
S304
S305
S306
S307
S308
S309
S310
S311
S312
S313
S314
S315
S316
S317
S318
S319
S320
S321
S322
S323
S326
S327
S328
S329
S330
S331
S332
S333
S334
S335
S336
S337
S338
S339
S340
S341
S342
S343
S344
S345
S346
S347
S348
S349
S350
S351
S352
S353
S354
S355
S356
S357
S358
S359
S360
S361
S362
S363
S370
S371
S372
S373
S374
S375
S376
S377
S378
S379
S380
S381
S382
S383
S384
S385
S386
Page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-34
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-29, 30
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-56-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-29
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-27
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-26
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-18-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-31
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-31
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-35
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-13-35
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
LX
8W-80 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS
8W - 80 - 1
Component
Page
Actuator-Blend Door-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-7
Actuator-Blend Door-Right (ATC) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-7
Actuator-Mode Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-7
Actuator-Recirculation Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-7
Airbag-Passenger Squib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-8
Airbag-Side Curtain-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-8
Airbag-Side Curtain-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-9
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite C1 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-9
Amplifier-Radio C1 (Midline II/Highline) . 8W-80-10
Amplifier-Radio C2 (Midline II/Highline) . 8W-80-10
Amplifier-Subwoofer (SRT8 Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-11
Antenna Cable-Satellite Radio No. 1 . . . . 8W-80-11
Antenna Cable-Satellite Radio No. 2 . . . . 8W-80-11
Antenna-Global Positioning System
(Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-11
Assembly-Electrohydraulic Control Unit
(NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-12
Assembly-Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve
(Gas Except SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-12
Assembly-Natural Vacuum Leak Detection (Gas
Except Export Except SRT8/Police) . . . 8W-80-13
Assembly-Natural Vacuum Leak Detection
(Police/SRT8 Except Export) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-13
Assembly-Shifter Lever (Console NAG1) . 8W-80-13
Assembly-Shifter Lever (RLE) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-13
Switch (RLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-13
Assembly-Variable Line Pressure (RLE) . . 8W-80-14
Backlite-Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-14
Backlite-Electric Heated (Ground) . . . . . . 8W-80-14
Backlite-Electric Heated (Power) . . . . . . . 8W-80-14
Battery-Negative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-14
Battery-Positive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-15
Booster-Active Brake (MK25) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-15
C100 (2.7L/3.5L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-15
C100 (2.7L/3.5L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-16
C100 (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-16
C100 (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-17
C100 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-17
C100 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-17
C101 (5.7L MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-18
Component
C101 (5.7L MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C103 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C103 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C107 (SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C107 (SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C108 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C108 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C205 (Except Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C205 (Except Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C208 (Column NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C208 (Column NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C304 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C304 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C305 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C305 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C306 (LX48 Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C306 (LX48 Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C306 (LX48 Except Base/LX49 Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C306 (LX48 Except Base/LX49 Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page
8W-80-18
8W-80-18
8W-80-19
8W-80-19
8W-80-20
8W-80-20
8W-80-21
8W-80-21
8W-80-22
8W-80-22
8W-80-22
8W-80-23
8W-80-23
8W-80-23
8W-80-24
8W-80-24
8W-80-25
8W-80-26
8W-80-26
8W-80-27
8W-80-28
8W-80-29
8W-80-29
8W-80-30
8W-80-30
8W-80-31
8W-80-31
8W-80-31
8W-80-31
8W-80-31
8W-80-32
8W-80-32
8W-80-33
8W-80-33
8W-80-34
8W-80-35
8W-80-35
8W-80-35
8W-80-36
8W-80-36
8W-80-36
8W-80-36
8W-80-37
8W-80-37
8W-80-37
. . . 8W-80-37
. . . 8W-80-38
8W - 80 - 2
Component
C306 (LX49 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C306 (LX49 Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C307 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C307 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C308 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C308 (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C309 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C309 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C310 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C310 (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C311 (Sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C311 (Sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C315 (Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C315 (Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C315 (Midline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C315 (Midline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C315 (Premium) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C315 (Premium) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C316 (LHD Heated Seat/RHD Power
Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C316 (LHD Heated Seat/RHD Power
Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C316 (RHD Power/Heated Seat) . . . . .
C316 (RHD Power/Heated Seat) . . . . .
C317 (Satellite Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C317 (Satellite Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C318 (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C318 (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1 (2.7L/3.5L) . .
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1 (SRT8) . . . . .
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 2 (2.7L/5.7L) . .
Cluster C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cluster C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cluster C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch-A/C Compressor (Gas) . . . . . . .
Clutch-A/C Compressor (Diesel) . . . . .
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (5.7L Early Build) .
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (3.5L Late Build) .
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (2.7L/3.5L Early
Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (5.7L Late Build/
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page
8W-80-38
8W-80-39
8W-80-39
8W-80-39
8W-80-40
8W-80-40
8W-80-40
8W-80-40
8W-80-41
8W-80-41
8W-80-41
8W-80-42
8W-80-42
8W-80-42
8W-80-43
8W-80-43
8W-80-43
8W-80-43
8W-80-44
8W-80-44
8W-80-44
8W-80-45
. . . 8W-80-45
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8W-80-45
8W-80-45
8W-80-46
8W-80-46
8W-80-46
8W-80-47
8W-80-47
8W-80-47
8W-80-47
8W-80-48
8W-80-48
8W-80-49
8W-80-49
8W-80-50
8W-80-50
8W-80-50
8W-80-50
. . . 8W-80-51
. . . 8W-80-51
. . . 8W-80-51
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8W-80-51
8W-80-52
8W-80-52
8W-80-52
8W-80-52
Component
Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coil-Ignition-No. 4 (3.5L Late Build) . .
Coil-Ignition-No. 4 (5.7L Early Build) . .
Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector-Interface-Police/Taxi . . . . . .
Connector-Police Accessories (Police) . .
Control-A/C-Heater C1 (ATC) . . . . . . . .
Control-A/C-Heater C1 (MTC) . . . . . . .
Control-A/C-Heater C2 (ATC) . . . . . . . .
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display-Park Assist (Parktronics) . . . . .
Fan-Radiator C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan-Radiator C2 (AWD/Diesel/SRT8
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan-Radiator C2 (SRT8 Except Export)
Flasher-Headlamp C1 (Police) . . . . . . .
Flasher-Headlamp C2 (Police) . . . . . . .
Generator (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator-Eyelet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glow Plug No. 1 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater-Cabin (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater-Crankcase Vent (Diesel) . . . . . .
LX
Page
. . 8W-80-52
. . 8W-80-53
. . 8W-80-53
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8W-80-53
8W-80-53
8W-80-54
8W-80-54
8W-80-54
. . 8W-80-54
. . 8W-80-54
. . 8W-80-55
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8W-80-55
8W-80-55
8W-80-55
8W-80-56
. . 8W-80-56
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8W-80-56
8W-80-56
8W-80-57
8W-80-57
8W-80-58
8W-80-58
8W-80-59
8W-80-59
8W-80-59
8W-80-60
8W-80-60
8W-80-60
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8W-80-61
8W-80-61
8W-80-61
8W-80-61
8W-80-62
8W-80-62
8W-80-62
8W-80-62
8W-80-62
8W-80-63
8W-80-63
8W-80-63
8W-80-63
8W-80-63
8W-80-64
LX
Component
Page
Heater-Seat Back-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64
Heater-Seat Back-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64
Heater-Seat Cushion-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64
Heater-Seat Cushion-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-65
Horn-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-65
Horn-No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-65
Injector-Fuel-No. 1 (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-65
Injector-Fuel-No. 1 (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-66
Injector-Fuel-No. 7 (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-68
Injector-Fuel-No. 8 (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-68
Lamp-Backup-Left (300C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-68
Lamp-Backup-Left (300T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69
Lamp-Backup-Left (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69
Lamp-Backup-Right (300C) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69
Lamp-Backup-Right (300T) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69
Lamp-Backup-Right (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70
Lamp-Cargo (LX48 Chrysler) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70
Lamp-Cargo (LX48 Dodge) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70
Lamp-Cargo (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop (LX48
Chrysler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop (LX48
Dodge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-71
Lamp-Center High Mounted Stop (LX49) . 8W-80-71
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Front Door (Except
Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-71
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-71
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Front Door (Except
Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-72
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-72
Lamp-Dome (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-72
Lamp-Fog-Left Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-72
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear (300C Export) . . . . . 8W-80-72
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear (LX49 Export) . . . . . 8W-80-73
Lamp-Fog-Right Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-73
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear (300C Export) . . . . 8W-80-73
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear (LX49 Export) . . . . 8W-80-73
Lamp-Glove Box (Except Police) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-74
Lamp-High Beam-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-74
Lamp-High Beam-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-74
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Left (HID
Lamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-74
Lamp-High Intensity Discharge-Right (HID
Lamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-75
8W - 80 - 3
Component
Page
Lamp-License (Except 300C/Export) . . . . . 8W-80-75
Lamp-License-Left (300C/Export) . . . . . . . 8W-80-75
Lamp-License-Right (300C/Export) . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Lamp-Low Beam-Left (Except HID
Lamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Lamp-Low Beam-Right (Except HID
Lamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front (300C Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front (300T/
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-77
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front (LX49 Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-77
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front (300C Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-77
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front (300T/
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-78
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front (LX49 Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-78
Lamp-PRNDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-78
Lamp-Reading-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-79
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Front (LX48) . . . . 8W-80-79
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Rear (300T) . . . . 8W-80-79
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Front (LX48) . . 8W-80-79
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Rear (300T) . . . 8W-80-80
Lamp-Side Repeater-Left (Export) . . . . . . 8W-80-80
Lamp-Side Repeater-Right (Export) . . . . . 8W-80-80
Lamp-Spot-Left (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-80
Lamp-Spot-Right (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Lamp-Tail Park-Left (300C Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Lamp-Tail Park-Right (300C Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Left (300C) . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Right (300C) . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left (300T) . . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right (300T) . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Lamp-Tail Turn-Left (300C Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Lamp-Tail Turn-Left (300C Export) . . . . . 8W-80-83
Lamp-Tail Turn-Right (300C Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-83
Lamp-Tail Turn-Right (300C Export) . . . . 8W-80-83
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-83
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84
Lamp-Turn-Left Rear (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84
Lamp-Turn-Right Rear (LX49) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84
Lamp-Underhood (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84
Lamp-Vanity-Left (Except Police) . . . . . . . 8W-80-85
Lamp-Vanity-Right (Except Police) . . . . . . 8W-80-85
Latch-Door-Decklid (LX48) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-85
Latch-Door-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-85
Latch-Door-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-86
Latch-Door-Liftgate (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-86
8W - 80 - 4
Component
Page
Latch-Door-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-86
Latch-Door-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-87
Lighter-Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-87
Media System-Monitor/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-87
Mirror-Inside Rearview C1 (Except Base) . 8W-80-88
Mirror-Inside Rearview C2 (Hands Free) . 8W-80-88
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver (Except
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-88
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Driver
(Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-89
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger (Except
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-89
Mirror-Outside Rearview-Passenger
(Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-89
Module-Antilock Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-90
Module-Brake (Trailer Tow) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-91
Module-Clock-Analog (Except Police) . . . . 8W-80-91
Module-Door-Driver C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-91
Module-Door-Driver C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-91
Module-Door-Driver C3 (Memory) . . . . . . 8W-80-92
Module-Door-Driver C4 (Memory) . . . . . . 8W-80-92
Module-Door-Passenger C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-93
Module-Door-Passenger C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-93
Module-Door-Passenger C4 (Memory) . . . . 8W-80-93
Module-Electronic Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-94
Module-Electronic Shift C1 (Column
NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-94
Module-Electronic Shift C2 (Column
NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-94
Module-Engine Control C1 (Diesel) . . . . . 8W-80-95
Module-Engine Control C2 (Diesel) . . . . . 8W-80-97
Module-Front Blower Power C1 (ATC) . . . 8W-80-98
Module-Front Blower Power C2 (ATC) . . . 8W-80-98
Module-Front Control C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-98
Module-Front Control C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-99
Module-Front Control IPM . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-99
Module-Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-100
Module-Glow Plug (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-100
Module-Glow Plug-Eyelet (Diesel) . . . . . . 8W-80-101
Module-Hands Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-101
Module-Headlamp Leveling (Export) . . . 8W-80-101
Module-Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-102
Module-Integrated Power C1 . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-102
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi C1 . . . . . . . 8W-80-105
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi C2 . . . . . . . 8W-80-105
Module-Intrusion Transceiver (RHD) . . . 8W-80-106
Module-Memory Seat C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-106
LX
Component
Page
Module-Memory Seat C5 (Adjustable
Pedals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-107
Module-Occupant Classification C1 (Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-107
Module-Occupant Classification C2 (Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-108
Module-Occupant Restraint Controller
C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-108
Module-Occupant Restraint Controller
C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-109
Module-Park Assist (Parktronics) . . . . . . 8W-80-109
Module-Powertrain Control C1 . . . . . . . . 8W-80-110
Module-Powertrain Control C4 (RLE) . . . 8W-80-113
Module-Sentry Key Remote Entry . . . . . 8W-80-114
Module-Steering Column-Lock (RHD) . . . 8W-80-114
Module-Steering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-114
Module-Traffic Information Receiver C1
(Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-115
(Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-115
(Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-115
Module-Transmission Control C1
(NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-115
Module-Transmission Control C2
(NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-116
Motor-Adjustable Pedals (LHD) . . . . . . . 8W-80-116
Motor-Blower-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-116
Motor-Boost Pressure Servo (Diesel) . . . . 8W-80-116
Motor-Headlamp Washer (HID Lamps) . . 8W-80-117
Motor-Intake Swirl Servo (Diesel) . . . . . . 8W-80-117
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal . . 8W-80-117
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Recliner (Except
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-117
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Recliner
(Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-118
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Driver
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-118
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Passenger
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-118
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger
Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-118
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Recliner
(RHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-119
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Driver
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-119
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Passenger
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-119
Motor-Steering Telescope (LHD
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-119
Motor-Steering Tilt (LHD Memory) . . . . 8W-80-120
Motor-Window-Driver (Base) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-120
LX
Component
Page
Motor-Window-Driver Express (Except
Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-120
Motor-Window-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-120
Motor-Window-Passenger (Base) . . . . . . . 8W-80-121
Motor-Window-Passenger Express (Except
Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-121
Motor-Window-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-121
Motor-Wiper-Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-121
Motor-Wiper-Rear (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-122
Motor/Module-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-122
Post-Pass Through-Eyelet . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-122
Post-Pass Through-Eyelet . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-122
Power Outlet-Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-123
Power Outlet-Rear (LX49) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-123
Pump-Washer-Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-123
Radio C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-124
Radio C2 (Satellite Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-124
Radio-Antenna (Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-125
Radio-Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-125
Receiver-Intrusion Sensor (RHD) . . . . . . 8W-80-125
Receiver-Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-125
Relay-Headlamp Washer (HID Lamps) . . 8W-80-126
Resistor Block-Blower Motor-Front
(MTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-126
Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-126
Seat Belt-Tensioner-Passenger . . . . . . . . 8W-80-126
Sensor-Accelerator Pedal Position . . . . . . 8W-80-127
Sensor-Adjustable Pedals (LHD
Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-127
Sensor-Ambient Air Temperature . . . . . . 8W-80-127
Sensor-Boost Pressure (Diesel) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-127
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-128
Sensor-Brake Pedal Travel (MK25) . . . . . 8W-80-128
Sensor-Brake Pressure (MK25) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-128
Sensor-Camshaft Position (2.7L/3.5L) . . . 8W-80-128
Sensor-Camshaft Position (5.7L/SRT8) . . 8W-80-129
Sensor-Camshaft Position (Diesel) . . . . . 8W-80-129
Sensor-Crankshaft Position (Diesel) . . . . 8W-80-129
Sensor-Crankshaft Position (Gas) . . . . . . 8W-80-129
Sensor-Dynamics (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-129
Sensor-Engine Coolant Temperature
(Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-130
Sensor-Engine Coolant Temperature
(Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-130
Sensor-Evaporator Temperature . . . . . . . 8W-80-130
Sensor-Exhaust Differential Pressure
(Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-130
Sensor-Exhaust Gas Pressure (Diesel) . . 8W-80-131
Sensor-Front Impact-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-131
Sensor-Front Impact-Right . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-131
Sensor-Fuel Pressure (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-131
Sensor-Fuel Temperature (Diesel) . . . . . . 8W-80-132
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Left (Export) . . . 8W-80-132
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Right (Export) . 8W-80-132
8W - 80 - 5
Component
Page
Sensor-Inlet Air Pressure (Diesel) . . . . . . 8W-80-132
Sensor-Inlet Air Temperature (Gas) . . . . 8W-80-133
Sensor-Input Speed (RLE) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-133
Sensor-Intake Air Temperature (Diesel) . 8W-80-133
Sensor-Knock No. 1 (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-133
Sensor-Knock No. 2 (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . . 8W-80-134
Sensor-Manifold Absolute Pressure
(Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-134
Sensor-Mass Air Flow (Diesel) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-134
Sensor-Oil Pressure (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-134
Sensor-Oil Pressure (5.7L/SRT8) . . . . . . 8W-80-135
Sensor-Oil Temperature (5.7L/SRT8) . . . 8W-80-135
Sensor-Oil Temperature (Diesel) . . . . . . . 8W-80-135
Sensor-Output Speed (RLE) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-135
Sensor-Oxygen (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-135
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front (Gas) . . . . . . . 8W-80-136
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear (Gas) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-136
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front (Gas) . . . . . . 8W-80-136
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear (Gas) . . . . . . 8W-80-136
Sensor-Park Assist-No. 10 (Parktronics) . 8W-80-137
Sensor-Park Assist-No. 7 (Parktronics) . . 8W-80-137
Sensor-Post-Catalyst Exhaust Gas Temperature
(Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-138
Sensor-Pre-Catalyst Exhaust Gas Temperature
(Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-138
Sensor-Rain (Auto Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-138
Sensor-Seat Track Position-Driver . . . . . 8W-80-138
Sensor-Seat Weight-Left Front (Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-138
Sensor-Seat Weight-Left Rear (Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-139
Sensor-Seat Weight-Right Front (Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-139
Sensor-Seat Weight-Right Rear (Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-139
Sensor-Shift Lever Position (Column
NAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-139
Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-140
Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-140
Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-140
Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-140
Sensor-Sun (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-141
Sensor-Transmission Range (RLE) . . . . . 8W-80-141
Sensor-Washer Fluid Level-Front . . . . . . 8W-80-141
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front . . . 8W-80-141
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear . . . . . . . . 8W-80-142
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front . . 8W-80-142
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right Front (Except
ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-142
Siren (RHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-143
Solenoid-Fuel Pressure (Diesel) . . . . . . . 8W-80-143
Solenoid-Fuel Quantity (Diesel) . . . . . . . 8W-80-143
8W - 80 - 6
Component
Page
Solenoid-Manifold Tuning Valve (2.7L/
3.5L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-143
Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 (5.7L
MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-144
MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-144
MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-144
MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-144
Solenoid-Proportional Purge (Gas) . . . . . 8W-80-145
Solenoid-Short Runner Valve (3.5L) . . . . 8W-80-145
Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center
(Highline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-145
Speaker-Instrument Panel-Left . . . . . . . 8W-80-145
Speaker-Instrument Panel-Right . . . . . . 8W-80-146
Speaker-Left Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-146
Speaker-Left Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-146
Speaker-Right Front Door . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-146
Speaker-Right Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-146
Speaker-Subwoofer (Highline Except
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-147
Speaker-Subwoofer (SRT8 Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-147
Starter (2.7L/3.5L/5.7L AWD) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-147
Starter (5.7L RWD/SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-147
Starter (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-147
Starter-Fusible Link-Eyelet (Except 5.7L RWD/
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-148
Starter-Fusible Link-Eyelet (5.7L RWD/
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-148
Starter-Post-Pass Through-Eyelet (Except 5.7L
RWD/SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-148
Starter-Post-Pass Through-Eyelet (5.7L RWD/
SRT8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-148
Switch-Adjustable Pedals (LHD) . . . . . . . 8W-80-149
Switch-Autostick (Column NAG1) . . . . . . 8W-80-149
Switch-Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-149
Switch-Decklid Release (LX48) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-149
Switch-Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-150
Switch-Heated Seat-Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-150
Switch-Heated Seat-Right . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-150
Switch-Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-150
Switch-Ignition C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-151
LX
Component
Page
Switch-Ignition C2 (RHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-151
Switch-Liftgate Release (LX49) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-151
Switch-Memory Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-151
Switch-Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-152
Switch-Oil Level (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-152
Switch-Oil Pressure (2.7L/3.5L) . . . . . . . 8W-80-152
Switch-Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-152
Switch-Power Window-Left Rear . . . . . . 8W-80-153
Switch-Power Window-Right Rear . . . . . 8W-80-153
Switch-Seat Belt-Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-153
Switch-Seat Belt-Passenger (Except
Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-153
Switch-Seat-Driver (Except Memory) . . . 8W-80-154
Switch-Seat-Driver (Memory) . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-154
Switch-Seat-Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-154
Switch-Security Hood (Export) . . . . . . . . 8W-80-155
Switch-Steering-Left (Premium) . . . . . . . 8W-80-155
Switch-Steering-Right (Premium) . . . . . . 8W-80-155
Switch-Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-155
Switch-Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-156
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver C1
(Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-156
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver C2
(Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-156
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express C1
(Except Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-156
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express C2
(Except Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-157
(Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-157
Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Express
(Except Base) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-157
Throttle Body (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-157
Transducer-A/C Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-158
Transmitter-Intrusion Sensor (RHD) . . . 8W-80-158
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front (Tire
Pressure Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-158
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front (Tire
Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Rear (Tire
Valve-EGR (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-159
Valve-EGR Air Flow Control (Diesel) . . . 8W-80-159
LX
8W - 80 - 7
ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-LEFT - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C55 20DB/WT
LEFT BLEND DOOR COMMON DRIVER
C255 20WT/DB
LEFT BLEND DOOR DRIVER
ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-RIGHT (ATC) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C52 20DB/LG
RIGHT BLEND DOOR COMMON DRIVER
C252 20LG/DB
RIGHT BLEND DOOR DRIVER
ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C66 20DB/OR
MODE DOOR COMMON DRIVER
C266 20OR/DB
MODE DOOR DRIVER
ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C68 20DB/YL
RECIRCULATION DOOR COMMON DRIVER
C268 20YL/DB
RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER
8W - 80 - 8
LX
AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 - BLACK/YELLOW 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R45 20LG/OR
DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1
R43 20LG/BR
AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 - BROWN/YELLOW 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R63 20LG/WT
R61 20LG/VT
AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB - YELLOW 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R44 20LB/OR
PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1
R42 20LB/BR
R64 20LB/WT
R62 20LB/VT
AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT - YELLOW 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R1 20LB/WT
LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2
R3 20LB/OR
LX
8W - 80 - 9
AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT - YELLOW 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R4 20OR/LB
RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1
R2 20WT/LB
AMPLIFIER-ANTENNA-BACKLITE C1 - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C15 12DB/WT
FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
F880 20PK/DG
FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT
AMPLIFIER-ANTENNA-BACKLITE C2 - 1 WAY
CAV
1
CIRCUIT
D999 18WT/OR
FUNCTION
ANTENNA GRID SIGNAL
AMPLIFIER-ANTENNA-BACKLITE C3 - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D5 6WT/OR
ANTENNA SIGNAL
D931 WT/YL
ANTENNA SHIELD
8W - 80 - 10
LX
AMPLIFIER-ANTENNA-BACKLITE C4 - 1 WAY
CAV
1
CIRCUIT
C215 14LB
FUNCTION
ELECTRIC HEATED BACKLITE DRIVER
AMPLIFIER-RADIO C1 (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) - NATURAL 14 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X201 18GY/VT
AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
X202 18DG/VT
AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
X303 18DG/TN
AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
X304 18DG/BR
AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
X300 18GY/BR
AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+)
X291 18GY/YL
AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
X292 18DG/YL
AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
X393 18DG/GY
AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
10
11
12
X394 18YL/GY
AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)
13
X390 18DG/BR
AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-)
14
AMPLIFIER-RADIO C2 (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE) - WHITE 20 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X209 18GY/OR
AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+)
X208 18GY/DG
AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+)
X200 18GY/BR (HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED CENTER I/P SPEAKER (+)
X13 16DG/GY
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
X51 18DG/DB
RADIO LEFT AUDIO (+)
X52 18GY/DB
RADIO RIGHT AUDIO (+)
Z910 16BK/TN
GROUND
10
X299 18GY/YL
AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-)
11
X298 18GY/LG
AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-)
12
X290 18GY/OR (HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED CENTER I/P SPEAKER (-)
13
X13 16DG/GY
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
14
15
16
17
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
18
X57 18DG/OR
RADIO LEFT AUDIO (-)
19
X58 18GY/OR
RADIO RIGHT AUDIO (-)
20
Z910 16BK/TN
GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 11
AMPLIFIER-SUBWOOFER (SRT8 EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A139 16RD/YL
FUSED B(+)
X300 18GY/BR
X390 18DG/BR
X30 18DG/YL
SUBWOOFER 1 (+)
X31 18GY/TN
SUBWOOFER 1 (-)
Z912 16BK/OR
GROUND
ANTENNA CABLE-SATELLITE RADIO NO. 1 - BLUE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D106 6WT/LG
SATELLITE ANTENNA SIGNAL 1
D126 WT/TN
SATELLITE ANTENNA SHIELD 1
ANTENNA CABLE-SATELLITE RADIO NO. 2 - WHITE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D109 6WT/OR
D129 WT/YL
ANTENNA-GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (NAVIGATION) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D8 6WT/LB
GPS ANTENNA SIGNAL
D108 LB/WT
GPS ANTENNA SHIELD
8W - 80 - 12
LX
ANTENNA-SATELLITE NO. 1 - BLUE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D106 WT/LG
D126 WT/TN
ANTENNA-SATELLITE NO. 2 - WHITE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D109 WT/OR
D129 WT/YL
ASSEMBLY-ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT (NAG1) - BLACK 13 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
T71 20YL/OR
INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL
T76 20YL/TN
MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
T70 20YL
T54 20DG/OR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL
T78 20YL
SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE
T72 20YL/DB
SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE
T74 20YL/LG
2-3 SOLENOID CONTROL
T73 20YL/GY
10
T77 20YL/BR
SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
11
T75 20YL/LB
TCC SOLENOID CONTROL
12
T13 20DG/VT
SENSOR GROUND
13
T60 20YL/GY
1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL
ASSEMBLY-EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION VALVE (GAS EXCEPT SRT8) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K34 20DB/LG
EGR SIGNAL
F856 20YL/PK
5 VOLT SUPPLY
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND
K35 20DB/VT
EGR SOL CONTROL
LX
8W - 80 - 13
ASSEMBLY-NATURAL VACUUM LEAK DETECTION (GAS EXCEPT EXPORT EXCEPT SRT8/POLICE) BLACK 2 WAY
CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 20BK/GY
GROUND
K107 20VT/WT
NVLD SWITCH SIGNAL
ASSEMBLY-NATURAL VACUUM LEAK DETECTION (POLICE/SRT8 EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 20BK/GY
GROUND
K107 20VT/WT
NVLD SWITCH SIGNAL
K106 20VT/GY
NVLD SOL CONTROL
ASSEMBLY-SHIFTER LEVER (CONSOLE NAG1) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F902 20PK
IGNITION UNLOCK-RUN-START
Z911 20BK/WT (EXCEPT SRT8)
GROUND
Z912 20BK/OR (SRT8)
GROUND
B29 20DG/WT
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
D65 20WT/LG
CAN C BUS (+)
D64 20WT/LB
CAN C BUS (-)
ASSEMBLY-SHIFTER LEVER (RLE) - WHITE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
B29 20DG/WT
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH (RLE) - LT. BROWN 10 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
T60 20YL/GY
OD SOLENOID CONTROL
T59 20YL/LB
UD SOLENOID CONTROL
T16 16YL/OR
TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT
T19 20YL/DB
T47 20YL/DG
2-4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
T9 20DG/TN
OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
T20 20DG/WT
L/R SOLENOID CONTROL
10
T50 20YL/TN
L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
8W - 80 - 14
LX
ASSEMBLY-VARIABLE LINE PRESSURE (RLE) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F856 20YL/PK
5 VOLT SUPPLY
T38 20YL/BR
LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
T16 18YL/OR
T118 20DG
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CONTROL
BACKLITE-ANTENNA - NATURAL 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
D999 18WT/OR
FUNCTION
ANTENNA GRID SIGNAL
BACKLITE-ELECTRIC HEATED (GROUND) - BLACK 1 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z912 14BK/OR (LX48)
GROUND
Z914 14BK/GY (LX49)
GROUND
BACKLITE-ELECTRIC HEATED (POWER) - BLACK 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
C215 14LB
FUNCTION
ELECTRIC HEATED BACKLITE DRIVER
BATTERY-NEGATIVE - 1 WAY
CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z915 4BK (DIESEL)
GROUND
Z915 6BK (GAS)
GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 15
BATTERY-POSITIVE - 1 WAY
CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A1 1RD
B(+)
A1 6RD
B(+)
BOOSTER-ACTIVE BRAKE (MK25) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
B135 20DG/LG
BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH OPEN
B134 20DG/YL
BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH CLOSE
B132 20DG/LB
ACTIVE BRAKE BOOSTER SOLENOID (-)
B131 20DG/YL
ACTIVE BRAKE BOOSTER SOLENOID (+)
B136 20DG/LB
BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH SIGNAL
C100 (2.7L/3.5L) - BLACK (ENGINE SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
F855 20PK/YL
F856 20YL/PK
G6 20VT/GY
K236 20DB/LG (3.5L)
K343 16BR/YL
T15 20YL/BR (2.7L)
10
T16 16YL/OR (2.7L)
11
12
T750 16LG
13
Z904 14BK/BR (2.7L)
13
Z904 16BK/BR (3.5L)
14
C3 18DB/YL
8W - 80 - 16
C100 (2.7L/3.5L) - BLACK (HEADLAMP AND

DASH SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
F855 20PK/YL
F856 20YL/PK
G6 20VT/GY
K236 20DB/LG
K343 16BR/YL
T15 20YL/BR
10
T16 16YL/OR
11
12
T750 16YL/GY
13
Z904 14BK/BR
14
C3 18DB/YL
C100 (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK (ENGINE SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
T750 16LG (5.7L)
T750 16YL/GY (SRT8)
G6 20VT/GY
K26 20BR/YL
K28 20BR/LB
K97 16DB/YL
K451 20BR/LB (5.7L)
K98 16DB/YL
K343 16BR/YL
10
K452 20BR/LB (5.7L)
11
K454 20BR/OR (5.7L)
12
F855 20PK/YL
13
F856 20YL/PK
14
C3 18DB/YL
15
G224 20VT/YL
16
Z904 16BK/BR
LX
LX
C100 (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK (HEADLAMP AND

DASH SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
T750 16YL/GY
G6 20VT/GY
K26 20BR/YL
K28 20BR/LB
K97 16DB/YL
K451 20BR/WT (5.7L)
K98 16DB/YL
K343 16BR/YL
10
K452 20BR/LB (5.7L)
11
K454 20BR/OR (5.7L)
12
F855 20PK/YL
13
F856 20YL/PK
14
C3 18DB/YL
15
G224 20VT/YL
16
Z904 14BK/BR
C100 (DIESEL) - BLACK (HEADLAMP AND

DASH SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
K343 16BR/YL
Z904 14BK/BR
C3 18DB/YL
G6 20VT/GY
F202 20PK/GY
T750 16YL/GY
C100 (DIESEL) - (ENGINE SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
K343 16RD/DG
Z904 16BR
C3 18BL/DG
G6 20BL/RD
F202 18BK/GY
T750 14VT
8W - 80 - 17
8W - 80 - 18
C101 (5.7L MDS) - DK. GRAY (ENGINE SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
K451 20BR/LB
K452 20BR/LB
K453 20BR/DG
K454 20BR/OR
Z904 18BK/BR
C101 (5.7L MDS) - DK. GRAY (MULTI DISPLACEMENT SOLENOID SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
K451 20BR/WT
K452 20BR/LB
K453 20BR/DG
K454 20BR/OR
Z904 20BK/BR
C102 - BLACK (INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
D71 20WT/DB
D72 20WT/LB
D54 20WT
D55 20WT/OR
D64 20WT/LB
D65 20WT/LG
D15 20WT/DG
10
D16 20WT/OR
11
D20 20WT/LG
12
D21 20WT/BR
13
F500 20DG/PK (EXCEPT POLICE)
14
R79 20LB/VT
15
R80 20VT/LB
16
R81 20LB/WT
17
18
R82 20WT/LB
19
L91 20WT/DB
20
F21 20PK/DG
21
F202 20PK/GY
22
23
F902 20PK (POLICE)
23
D96 20WT/LB (RHD)
24
25
D508 20WT/GY
26
LX
LX
C102 - LT. GRAY (HEADLAMP AND DASH SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
D71 20WT/DB
D72 20WT/LB
D54 20WT
D55 20WT/OR
D64 20WT/LB
D65 20WT/LG
D15 20WT/DG (EXCEPT SRT8)
10
D16 20WT/OR (EXCEPT SRT8)
11
D20 20WT/LG (GAS)
12
D21 20WT/BR
13
F500 20DG/PK (TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR)
14
R79 20LB/VT
15
R80 20VT/LB
16
R81 20LB/WT
17
18
R82 20WT/LB
19
L91 20WT/DB
20
F21 20PK/DG
21
F202 20PK/GY
22
23
F902 20PK (POLICE)
23
D96 20WT/LB (RHD)
24
25
D508 20WT/GY (TIRE PRESSURE

MONITOR)
26
C103 (LX48) - DK. GRAY (FRONT END LIGHTING SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
Z901 20BK/TN
Z902 20BK/BR
L777 20WT/VT
L89 20WT/YL (EXCEPT BASE)

MONITOR)
8W - 80 - 19
8W - 80 - 20
C103 (LX48) - DK. GRAY (HEADLAMP AND

DASH SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
Z901 18BK/DG
Z902 18BK/LB
L777 20WT/VT
L89 18WT/YL (EXCEPT BASE)

MONITOR)
C104 - BLACK (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
A22 12RD/WT
F880 20PK/DG (POLICE)

MONITOR)
B15 20DG/WT
B16 20LB/DG
F902 20PK (NAG1)
A22 12RD/WT
F855 20PK/YL
10
F856 20YL/PK
11
X13 16DG/GY
12
F20 20PK/WT (EXPORT)
13
14
P307 20LG/GY
15
K343 16BR/YL (EXPORT)
16
17
L62 20WT/YL
18
A117 20RD/DG (RHD)
19
20
B29 20DG/WT
21
B121 20DG/DB (MK25)
22
D51 20WT/BR (ESP)
23
D52 20WT/LB (ESP)
24
G4 20VT/LB (ESP)
25
G94 20VT/DB (ESP)
26
L63 20WT/DG
LX
LX
8W - 80 - 21
C104 - BLACK (HEADLAMP AND DASH SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
A22 12RD/WT
F880 20PK/DG (POLICE)
D508 20WT/GY (TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR)
B15 20DG/WT
B16 20LB/DG
F902 20PK (NAG1/RLE VLP)
A22 12RD/WT
F855 20PK/YL
10
F856 20YL/PK
11
X13 16DG/GY
12
F20 20PK/WT (EXPORT)
13
14
P307 20LG/GY
15
K343 18BR/YL (DIESEL)
15
F20 20PK/WT (GAS EXPORT)
16
17
L62 18WT/YL
18
A117 20RD/DG (RHD)
19
20
B29 20DG/WT
21
B121 20DG/DB (MK25)
22
D51 20WT/BR (ESP)
23
D52 20WT/LB (ESP)
24
G4 20VT/LB (ESP)
25
G94 20VT/DB (ESP)
26
L63 18WT/DG
C105 - BROWN (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
K23 20BR/WT
K29 20WT/BR
K106 20VT/GY (POLICE/SRT8 EXCEPT EXPORT)
K107 20VT/WT (EXCEPT EXPORT)
10
11
K400 20BR/VT
12
K167 20BR/YL
13
F923 20PK/YL
14
K31 20BR
15
L13 20WT/YL (EXPORT)
16
L239 20WT/DG (EXPORT)
17
L1 20WT/LG
18
B1 20DG/OR (ABS)
19
B2 20DG/LB (ABS)
20
B3 20DG/YL (ABS)
21
B4 20DG/GY (ABS)
22
W12 20BR/OR (LX49)
23
W17 18BR/YL (LX49 EXCEPT POLICE)
23
W17 18BR/LG (LX49 POLICE)
24
L124 18WT/DB (POLICE)
25
A72 20RD/OR (LHD ADJUSTABLE PEDALS EXCEPT MEMORY)
26
L777 20WT/VT
8W - 80 - 22
C105 - BROWN (HEADLAMP AND DASH SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
K23 20BR/WT
K29 20WT/BR
K106 20VT/GY (POLICE/SRT8 EXCEPT

EXPORT)
K107 20VT/WT (GAS)
10
11
K400 20BR/VT
12
12
K167 20BR/YL (GAS)
13
F923 20PK/YL
14
K31 20BR
15
16
17
L1 20WT/LG
18
B1 20DG/OR (ABS)
19
B2 20DG/LB (ABS)
20
B3 20DG/YL (ABS)
21
B4 20DG/GY (ABS)
22
W12 20BR/OR (LX49)
23
W17 20BR/LG (LX49)
24
L124 18WT/DB (POLICE)
25
A72 20RD/OR
26
L777 20WT/VT
C107 (SRT8) - BLACK (ENGINE SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
K21 20DB/LG
K900 20DB/DG
C107 (SRT8) - BLACK (INLET AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR JUMPER SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
K21 20DB/LG
K900 20DB/DG
LX
LX
C108 (DIESEL) - BLACK (STARTER SIDE)

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A11 6BR/RD
C108 (DIESEL) - BLACK (HEADLAMP AND

DASH SIDE)
CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A11 6BR/RD

CAV
CIRCUIT
A110 16OR/RD (LHD)
A106 20LB/RD (LHD)
G945 20VT/DG (RHD)
A917 16RD/TN (LHD EXCEPT POLICE)
A917 18RD/TN (POLICE)
A645 20RD/VT (RHD)
A300 16GY/LG
P37 20LG/TN (LHD)
G78 22VT/OR
F201 20PK/OR
C7 12DB
F20 20PK/WT
10
F202 20PK/GY
11
F214 20PK/LG
12
F23 20RD/OR
13
F500 20DG/PK
14
A930 18RD/LG (POLICE)
15
G74 18VT/WT (LHD)
16
G76 20VT/YL (LHD)
17
X13 16DG/GY (EXCEPT POLICE)
18
D64 20WT/LB (CONSOLE NAG1)
19
D65 20WT/LG (CONSOLE NAG1)
20
L1 20WT/LG (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR)
21
A23 20RD/YL
22
F880 20PK/DG (EXCEPT POLICE)
23
M24 18YL/WT
24
A931 18RD/WT (POLICE)
25
A932 18RD (POLICE)
26
8W - 80 - 23
8W - 80 - 24
C200 - NATURAL (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
A110 16OR/RD (LHD)
A106 20LB/RD (LHD)
G945 20VT/DG (RHD)
A917 18RD/TN (LHD)
A645 20RD/VT (RHD)
A300 16GY/LG
P37 20LG/TN (LHD)
G78 20VT/OR
F201 20PK/OR
C7 12DB
F20 20PK/WT
10
F202 20PK/GY
11
F214 20PK/LG
12
F23 20RD/OR
13
F500 20DG/PK
14
15
G74 20VT/WT (LHD)
16
G76 20VT/YL (LHD)
17
18
D64 20WT/LB (CONSOLE NAG1)
19
D65 20WT/LG (CONSOLE NAG1)
20
L1 20WT/LG (EXCEPT POLICE)
21
A23 20RD/YL
22
23
M24 18YL/WT
24
25
A932 18RD (LX48 POLICE)
25
A932 16RD (LX49 POLICE)
26

CAV
CIRCUIT
E12 20OR/GY
X304 18DG/BR
X394 18YL/GY
X202 18DG/VT (LHD)
X201 18GY/VT (RHD)
X292 18DG/YL (LHD)
X291 18DG/YL (RHD)
C115 20DB
G160 20VT/LG (LHD)
10
P392 20LG/DB
11
D54 20WT
12
D55 20WT/OR
13
A117 20RD/DG (EXCEPT POLICE)
14
P303 20TN (LHD)
15
P31 20TN/YL (LHD)
16
A205 16RD/OR
17
A913 20RD/GY
18
R58 20LB/GY (LHD)
LX
LX

CAV
CIRCUIT
19
B29 20DG/WT (POLICE)
20
D777 20WT/DG (PARKTRONICS)
21
X777 20DG/GY (PARKTRONICS)
22
Z171 20GY/BK (PARKTRONICS)
23
F942 18PK/BK (RHD)
24
25
G25 20VT/TN (LHD)
26
F942 18PK/BK (POLICE)
C201 - GREEN (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
E12 20OR/GY
X304 18DG/BR
X394 18YL/GY
X202 18DG/VT (LHD)
X201 18GY/VT (RHD)
X292 18DG/YL (LHD)
X291 18GY/YL (RHD)
C115 20DB
G160 20VT/LG (LHD)
10
P392 20LG/DB
11
D54 20WT
12
D55 20WT/OR
13
A117 20RD/DG
14
P303 20TN (LHD)
15
P31 20TN/YL (LHD EXCEPT LX48

POLICE)
15
P31 20BK (LX48 POLICE)
16
A205 16RD/OR
17
A913 20RD/GY
18
R58 20LB/GY (LHD)
19
B29 20DG/WT (POLICE)
20
21
22
23
F942 18PK/BK (RHD)
24
25
G25 20VT/TN (LX49)
26
F942 18PK/BK (POLICE)
8W - 80 - 25
8W - 80 - 26
C202 - NATURAL (HVAC SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
C55 20DB/WT
C255 20WT/DB
C52 20DB/LG (ATC)
C252 20LG/DB (ATC)
C66 20DB/OR
C266 20OR/DB
Z908 12BK (ATC)
C70 12DB/YL (MTC)
C7 12DB
C68 20DB/YL
10
C268 20YL/DB
11
C21 20DB/LG
12
C121 20DB/DG
13
C73 14DB/VT (MTC)
14
C72 14DB/OR (MTC)
15
C56 20DB/LB (ATC)
16
C71 16DB/BR (MTC)
C202 - NATURAL (INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
C55 20DB/WT
C255 22WT/DB
C52 22DB/LG (ATC)
C252 22LG/DB (ATC)
C66 20DB/OR
C266 20OR/DB
Z908 12BK/RD (ATC)
C70 12DB/YL (MTC)
C7 12DB
C68 22DB/YL
10
C268 22YL/DB (ATC EXCEPT SRT8

EARLY BUILD)
10
C268 20YL/DB (ATC SRT8 EARLY

BUILD/MTC)
11
C21 20DB/LG
12
C121 20DB/DG
13
C73 12DB/VT (MTC)
14
C72 18DB/OR (MTC)
15
C56 20DB/LB (ATC)
16
C71 16DB/BR (MTC)
LX
LX

CAV
CIRCUIT
B25 20GY/BK
G167 20VT/LB
G75 20VT
G77 20VT/GY
P112 20TN/OR (LHD AUTO DAY/NIGHT

MIRROR)
P37 20LG/TN (RHD)
Z210 20BK
X390 18DG/BR (HIGHLINE)
N4 20DB/WT
10
N5 20DB/WT
11
P1 20TN/LG
12
X303 18DG/TN
13
X393 18DG/GY
14
X201 18GY/VT (LHD)
14
X202 18DG/VT (RHD)
15
X291 18GY/YL (LHD)
15
X292 18DG/YL (RHD)
16
P393 20LG
17
P953 16DG/TN (LHD MEMORY)
17
A110 16OR/RD (RHD)
18
G914 20VT/GY (LHD MEMORY)
18
G74 20VT/WT (RHD)
19
P153 16TN/DG (LHD MEMORY)
19
G76 20VT/YL (RHD)
20
P151 20TN/OR (LHD MEMORY)
20
G160 20VT/LG (RHD)
21
P114 20TN/WT (LHD AUTO DAY/NIGHT

MIRROR)
21
A106 20LB/RD (RHD)
22
R57 20LG/GY
23
G161 20VT/DG
24
P152 20TN/LB (LHD MEMORY)
24
P303 20TN (RHD)
25
P157 16LB/TN (LHD MEMORY)
25
P31 20BK (RHD)
26
A917 18RD/TN (RHD)
8W - 80 - 27
8W - 80 - 28

CAV
CIRCUIT
B25 20GY/BK
G167 20VT/LB
G75 20VT
G77 20VT/GY
P112 20TN/OR (LHD AUTO DAY/NIGHT

MIRROR)
P37 20LG/TN (RHD)
Z210 20BK
X390 18DG/BR (HIGHLINE)
N4 20DB/WT
10
N5 20DB/WT
11
P1 20TN/LG
12
X303 18DG/TN
13
X393 18DG/GY
14
X201 18GY/VT (LHD)
14
X202 18DG/VT (RHD)
15
X291 18GY/YL (LHD)
15
X292 18DG/YL (RHD)
16
P393 20LG
17
P953 16DG/TN (LHD MEMORY)
17
A110 16OR/RD (RHD)
18
G914 20VT/GY (LHD MEMORY)
18
G74 18VT/WT (RHD)
19
P153 16TN/DG (LHD MEMORY)
19
G76 20VT/YL (RHD)
20
20
G160 20VT/LG (RHD)
21
P114 20TN/WT (LHD AUTO DAY/NIGHT

MIRROR)
21
A106 20LB/RD (RHD)
22
R57 20LG/GY
23
G161 20VT/DG
24
P152 20TN/LB (LHD MEMORY)
24
P303 20TN (RHD)
25
P157 16LB/TN (LHD MEMORY)
25
P31 20TN/YL (RHD)
26
D21 20PK (LHD EXCEPT POLICE)
26
A917 18RD/TN (RHD)
LX
LX
C204 - NATURAL (DOME SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
M24 18YL/WT
M27 18YL/LB
Z909 16BK/LG
A117 20RD/DG (EVIC)
F880 20PK (EVIC EXCEPT RHD SUNROOF)
F880 20PK/DG (RHD SUNROOF)
D54 20WT (EVIC/SUNROOF)
D55 20WT/OR (EVIC/SUNROOF)
10
10
A932 18RD (POLICE)
11
X13 16DG/GY (SUNROOF)
12
12
13
14
14
G460 20DG/VT (RHD)
15
G946 20LG/VT (RHD)
16
17
18
C204 - NATURAL (INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
E12 20OR/GY
M24 18YL/WT
M27 20YL/LB
Z909 16BK/LG
A117 20RD/DG (EXCEPT POLICE)
D54 20WT (EXCEPT POLICE)
D55 20WT/OR (EXCEPT POLICE)
10
10
A932 18RD (POLICE)
11
12
12
13
14
14
G460 20DG/VT (RHD)
15
G946 20LG/VT (RHD)
16
17
18
8W - 80 - 29
8W - 80 - 30
C205 (EXCEPT BASE) - NATURAL (INSTRUMENT

PANEL SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
F880 20PK/DG (AUTO WIPERS)
D54 20WT (AUTO WIPERS)
D55 20WT/OR (AUTO WIPERS)
F23 20RD/OR
L1 20WT/LG
P112 20TN/OR (LHD)
X835 20OR/GY (LHD HANDS FREE)
P114 20TN/WT (LHD)
10
Z909 20BK/LG
11
X712 22DG/LB (LHD HANDS FREE)
12
X722 22LB/DG (LHD HANDS FREE)
13
X792 22LB/DG (LHD HANDS FREE)
14
X793 22DG/YL (LHD HANDS FREE)
15
X730 20GY/YL (LHD HANDS FREE)
16
17
18
C205 (EXCEPT BASE) - NATURAL (INTERIOR

MIRROR JUMPER SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
F880 20BK/PK (AUTO WIPERS)
D54 20BK (AUTO WIPERS)
D55 20BK/WT (AUTO WIPERS)
F23 20BK/RD (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR)
L1 20BK/TN (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR)
P112 20BK/LB (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR)
X835 20BK/OR (HANDS FREE)
P114 20BK/DB (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR)
10
Z909 20BK/LG (AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR)
11
X712 20BK/DG (HANDS FREE)
12
X722 20BK/BR (HANDS FREE)
13
X792 20BK/YL (HANDS FREE)
14
X793 20BK/GY (HANDS FREE)
15
X730 20BK/VT (HANDS FREE)
16
17
18
LX
LX
C206 - NATURAL (STEERING PAD SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
D500 20WT
D501 20WT/LG
D502 20WT/OR (PREMIUM)
C206 - WHITE (CLOCKSPRING SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
D500 20WT
D501 20WT/LG
D502 20WT/OR (PREMIUM)

CAV
CIRCUIT
D5 6WT/OR
D931 WT/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
D5 6WT/OR
D931 WT/YL
C208 (COLUMN NAG1) - NATURAL (INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
Z910 20BK/TN
F902 20PK
B29 20DG/WT
D65 20WT/LG
D64 20WT/LB
8W - 80 - 31
8W - 80 - 32
C208 (COLUMN NAG1) - NATURAL (STEERING

COLUMN SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
Z910 22BK
F902 22LB
B29 22YL
D65 22LG/BK
D64 22GY

CAV
CIRCUIT
Q411 14OR/WT
C16 20DB/GY
A913 20RD/GY
Q412 14OR/LB
G75 20VT
G167 20VT/LB
G161 20VT/DG
M24 18YL/WT
D55 20WT/OR (EXCEPT BASE)
10
Q26 14OR/GY (BASE)
10
D54 20WT (EXCEPT BASE)
11
X201 18GY/VT
12
X291 18GY/YL
13
F880 20PK/DG (EXCEPT MEMORY)
14
Z912 14BK/OR
15
Q15 14OR/LB
16
P1 20TN/LG
17
P72 20TN/GY (EXCEPT MEMORY)
17
17
P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
18
P74 20TN/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY)
18
P114 20TN/WT (LHD MEMORY)
18
P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
19
Q611 14OR/GY
20
P393 20LG (LHD)
20
P392 20LG (RHD)
21
Q612 14OR/DB
22
F881 14PK
23
P76 22TN/LB (EXCEPT MEMORY)
24
Q16 14OR/TN (BASE)
LX
LX
C300 - NATURAL (DRIVER DOOR SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
Q411 14OR/WT
C16 20DB/GY
A913 20RD/GY
Q412 14OR/LB
G75 20VT
G167 20VT/LB
G161 20VT/DG
M24 20YL/WT (EXCEPT BASE)
10
Q26 14OR/GY (BASE)
10
11
X201 18GY/VT
12
X291 18GY/YL
13
14
Z912 14BK/OR
15
Q15 14OR/LB
16
P1 20TN/LG
17
17
17
P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
18
18
P114 20TN/WT (LHD MEMORY)
18
P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
19
Q611 14OR/GY
20
P393 20LG (LHD)
20
P392 20LG (RHD)
21
Q612 14OR/DB
22
F881 14PK
23
24
Q16 14OR/TN (BASE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
C16 20DB/GY
A913 20RD/GY (EXCEPT BASE)
Q26 14OR/GY (BASE)
G74 20VT/WT
P37 20LG/TN
G160 20VT/LG
M24 20YL/WT
10
11
X202 18DG/VT (LHD)
11
X201 18GY/VT (RHD)
12
X292 18DG/YL (LHD)
12
X291 18GY/YL (RHD)
13
F880 20PK/DG (EXCEPT BASE)
14
Z911 14BK/WT
15
Q15 14OR/LB (BASE)
16
P303 20TN
17
8W - 80 - 33
8W - 80 - 34

CAV
CIRCUIT
17
P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
18
18
P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
19
20
P392 20LG/DB (LHD)
20
P393 20LG/DB (RHD)
21
Q16 14OR/TN (BASE)
22
F881 14PK
23
24
C301 - NATURAL (PASSENGER DOOR SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
C16 20DB/GY
A913 20RD/GY (EXCEPT BASE)
Q26 14OR/GY (BASE)
G74 20VT/WT
P37 20LG/TN
G160 20VT/LG
M24 20YL/WT (EXCEPT BASE)
10
11
X202 18DG/VT (LHD)
11
X201 18GY/VT (RHD)
12
X292 18DG/YL (LHD)
12
X291 18GY/YL (RHD)
13
F880 20PK/DG (EXCEPT BASE)
14
Z911 14BK/WT
15
Q15 14OR/LB (BASE)
16
P303 20TN
17
17
P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
18
18
P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
19
20
P392 20LG/DB (LHD)
20
P393 20LG/DB (RHD)
21
Q16 14OR/TN (BASE)
22
F881 14PK
23
24
LX
LX

CAV
CIRCUIT
Q15 14OR/LB
Q411 14OR/WT
G77 20VT/GY
Z912 20BK/OR
P303 20TN
P393 20LG
10
Q611 14OR/GY
C302 - NATURAL (LEFT REAR DOOR SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
Q15 14OR/LB
Q411 14OR/WT
G77 20VT/GY
Z912 20LG/BK
P303 20TN
P393 20LG
10
Q611 14OR/GY

CAV
CIRCUIT
Q15 14OR/LB
Q412 14OR/LB
G76 20VT/YL
Z911 20BK/WT
P303 20TN
P392 20LG/DB
10
Q612 14OR/DB
8W - 80 - 35
8W - 80 - 36
C303 - NATURAL (RIGHT REAR DOOR SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
Q15 14OR/LB
Q412 14OR/LB
G76 20VT/YL
Z911 20BK/WT
P303 20TN
P392 20LG/DB
10
Q612 14OR/DB
C304 (LX49) - LT. GRAY (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
C15 12DB/WT
W13 16BR/LG
W17 18BR/YL (EXCEPT POLICE)
W17 18BR/LG (POLICE)
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
Z911 20BK/WT
Z914 14BK/GY
C304 (LX49) - LT. GRAY (LIFTGATE SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
C15 12DB/WT
W13 16BR/LG
W17 18BR/YL
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
Z911 20BK/WT
Z914 14BK/GY
C305 (LX49) - LT. GRAY (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
F880 20PK/DG
G25 20VT/TN
G78 20VT/OR
M24 20YL/WT
P31 20TN/YL
LX
LX
C305 (LX49) - LT. GRAY (LIFTGATE SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
F880 20PK/DG
G25 20VT/TN
G78 20VT/OR
M24 20YL/WT
P31 20TN/YL
C306 (LX48 BASE) - BLACK (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20WT/VT
Z914 20BK/GY
C306 (LX48 BASE) - BLACK (REAR END LIGHTING SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20WT/VT
Z914 20BK/BR
C306 (LX48 EXCEPT BASE/LX49 EXCEPT

EXPORT) - BLACK (BODY SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
X700 20GY/OR (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
L777 20WT/VT (LX49)
Z914 20BK/GY (2.7L/3.5L LX49)
Z914 16BK/GY (5.7L LX49)
D701 20WT/LB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
D700 20WT/GY (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
L53 20DG/WT (LX49 MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (LX49 MK25E)
D703 20WT/BK (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
L1 20WT/LG (LX49)
D704 20WT/DB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
L62 20WT/YL (LX49)
X750 20GY/LB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
L63 20WT/DG (LX49)
L777 20WT/VT (LX48)
Z914 20BK/GY (LX48 EXCEPT EXPORT)
Z914 18BK/GY (LX48 EXPORT)
10
8W - 80 - 37
8W - 80 - 38
C306 (LX48 EXCEPT BASE/LX49 EXCEPT

EXPORT) - BLACK (REAR END LIGHTING SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
X700 20GY/OR (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
L777 20WT/VT (LX49)
D701 20WT/LB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
Z914 18BK/BR (LX49)
D700 20WT/GY (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
L53 20DG/WT (LX49 MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (LX49 MK25E)
D703 20WT/BK (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
L1 20WT/LG (LX49)
D704 20WT/DB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
L62 18WT/YL (LX49)
X750 20GY/LB (LX48 PARKTRONICS)
L63 18WT/DG (LX49)
L777 20WT/VT (LX48)
Z914 20BK/BR (LX48)
10
C306 (LX49 EXPORT) - BLACK (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20WT/VT
Z914 16BK/GY
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
L1 20WT/LG
L62 20WT/YL
L63 20WT/DG
L90 20WT/OR
D700 20WT/GY
D701 20WT/LB
10
D703 20WT/BK
11
D704 20WT/DB
12
X700 20GY/OR
13
X750 20GY/LB
14
15
16
LX
LX
C306 (LX49 EXPORT) - BLACK (REAR END

LIGHTING SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20WT/VT
Z914 16BK/BR
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
L1 20WT/LG
L62 18WT/YL
L63 18WT/DG
L90 20WT/OR
D700 20WT/GY
D701 20WT/LB
10
D703 20WT/BK
11
D704 20WT/DB
12
X700 20GY/OR
13
X750 20GY/LB
14
15
16
C307 (LX48) - BLACK (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20WT/VT
Z914 20BK/GY
L63 20WT/DG
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
L1 20WT/LG
L90 20WT/OR (EXPORT)
C307 (LX48) - BLACK (LEFT TAIL LAMP SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20WT/VT (EXCEPT EXPORT)
L777 18WT/VT (EXPORT)
Z914 20BK/GY
L63 18WT/DG
L53 18DG/WT (MK25)
B29 18DG/WT (MK25E)
L1 20WT/LG (300C)
L1 18WT/LG (EXCEPT 300C)
8W - 80 - 39
8W - 80 - 40
C308 (LX48) - BLACK (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20WT/VT
Z914 20BK/GY
L62 20WT/YL
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
L1 20WT/LG
C308 (LX48) - BLACK (RIGHT TAIL LAMP SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20WT/VT (EXCEPT EXPORT)
L777 18WT/VT (EXPORT)
Z914 20BK/GY
L62 18WT/YL
L53 18DG/WT (MK25)
B29 18DG/WT (MK25E)
L1 20WT/LG (300C)
L1 18WT/LG (EXCEPT 300C)
C309 (LX49) - DK. GRAY (LEFT TAIL LAMP

SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20BR
Z914 20BK
L63 18RD/OR
L53 20BR/VT (MK25)
B29 20BR/VT (MK25E)
L1 20VT/RD
C309 (LX49) - DK. GRAY (REAR END LIGHTING

SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20WT/VT
Z914 20BK/BR
L63 18WT/DG
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
L1 20WT/LG
LX
LX
C310 (LX49) - DK. GRAY (REAR END LIGHTING

SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20WT/VT
Z914 20BK/BR
L62 18WT/YL
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
L1 20WT/LG
C310 (LX49) - DK. GRAY (RIGHT TAIL LAMP

SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
L777 20BR
Z914 20BK
L62 18RD/OR
L53 20BR/VT (MK25)
B29 20BR/VT (MK25E)
L1 20VT/RD
C311 (SUNROOF) - NATURAL (DOME SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
Q6 20OR/LG (LHD)
Q6 22OR/LG (RHD)
X13 16DG/GY
Q5 20OR/LB (LHD)
Q5 22OR/LB (RHD)
Z909 16BK/LG
D55 20WT/OR
D54 20WT
Q3 20OR/TN (LHD)
Q3 22OR/TN (RHD)
Q4 20OR/YL (LHD)
Q4 22OR/YL (RHD)
10
8W - 80 - 41
8W - 80 - 42
C311 (SUNROOF) - NATURAL (SUNROOF SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
Q6 20OR/LG
D270 20WT (FACTORY ONLY)
X13 18RD
Q5 20OR/LB
Z909 18BK
D55 20WT/OR
D54 20WT
Q3 20OR/TN
Q4 20OR/YL
10
C313 - LT. GRAY (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
Z912 16BK/OR
R57 20LG/GY
P187 20LG/BR (LHD HEATED SEAT)
P188 20LG/VT (RHD HEATED SEAT)
A110 16OR/RD (EXCEPT MEMORY)
P205 20LG/WT (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS

EXCEPT MEMORY)
P206 20LG/LB (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS

EXCEPT MEMORY)
A72 20RD/OR (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS

EXCEPT MEMORY)
C313 - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
Z912 20BK/OR (MEMORY)
Z912 18BK/OR (POWER HEATED SEAT

EXCEPT MEMORY)
Z912 16BK/OR (POWER SEAT/ADJUSTABLE PEDALS EXCEPT MEMORY)
R57 20LG/GY
P187 18LG/BR (LHD POWER HEATED

SEAT EXCEPT MEMORY)
P188 20LG/VT (RHD HEATED SEAT)
A110 16OR/RD (EXCEPT MEMORY)
P205 20LG/WT (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS

EXCEPT MEMORY)
P206 20LG/LB (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS

EXCEPT MEMORY)
A72 20RD/OR (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS

EXCEPT MEMORY)
LX
LX
C314 - LT. GRAY (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
A916 14RD (LHD)
Z911 14BK/WT (RHD)
Z911 14BK/WT (LHD)
P188 20LG/VT (LHD HEATED SEAT)
P187 20LG/BR (RHD HEATED SEAT)
A916 14RD (RHD)
C314 - LT. GRAY (PASSENGER SEAT SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
A916 14RD (LHD POWER SEAT)
Z911 18BK/OR (RHD HEATED SEAT)
Z911 16BK/OR (RHD POWER SEAT)
Z911 16BK/WT (LHD HEATED SEAT)
Z911 14BK/WT (LHD POWER SEAT)
P187 18LG/BR (RHD HEATED SEAT)
A916 16OR/RD (RHD POWER SEAT)
C315 (BASE) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT BACK

JUMPER SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
P41 18LG/GY
P43 18LG/VT
C315 (BASE) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
P41 18LG/GY
P43 18LG/VT
8W - 80 - 43
8W - 80 - 44
C315 (MIDLINE) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT

BACK JUMPER SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
P41 18LG/GY (LHD HEATED SEAT)
P141 18LG/BR (MEMORY)
P143 18LG/GY (MEMORY)
G493 20OR/VT (MEMORY)
Z912 20BK/OR (LHD HEATED SEAT)
G403 20VT/OR (MEMORY)
C315 (MIDLINE) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT

SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
P41 18LG/GY (LHD HEATED SEAT)
P141 18LG/BR (MEMORY)
G493 20OR/VT (MEMORY)
Z912 20BK/OR (LHD HEATED SEAT)
G403 20VT/OR (MEMORY)
C315 (PREMIUM) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT

BACK JUMPER SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
P141 18LG/BR
P143 18LG/GY
G493 20OR/VT
G403 20VT/OR
P187 20LG/BR (LHD)
P188 20LG/VT (RHD)
Z912 20BK/OR
LX
LX
C315 (PREMIUM) - LT. GRAY (DRIVER SEAT

SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
P141 18LG/BR
P143 18LG/GY
G493 20OR/VT
G403 20VT/OR
P187 20LG/BR (LHD)
P188 20LG/VT (RHD)
Z912 20BK/OR
C316 (LHD HEATED SEAT/RHD POWER SEAT) LT. GRAY (PASSENGER SEAT BACK JUMPER
SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
P188 20LG/VT (LHD)
P42 18LG/GY (RHD)
Z911 20BK/WT (LHD)
P44 18LG/VT (RHD)
C316 (LHD HEATED SEAT/RHD POWER SEAT) LT. GRAY (PASSENGER SEAT SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
P188 20LG/VT (LHD)
P42 18LG/GY (RHD)
Z911 20BK/WT (LHD)
P44 18LG/VT (RHD)
C316 (RHD POWER/HEATED SEAT) - LT. GRAY

(PASSENGER SEAT BACK JUMPER SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
P42 18LG/GY
P44 18LG/VT
P187 20LG/BR
Z911 20BK/OR
8W - 80 - 45
8W - 80 - 46
C316 (RHD POWER/HEATED SEAT) - LT. GRAY

(PASSENGER SEAT SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
P42 18LG/GY
P44 18LG/VT
P187 20LG/BR
Z911 20BK/OR
C317 (SATELLITE RADIO) - NATURAL (INSTRUMENT PANEL SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
D54 20WT
D55 20WT/OR
Z909 16BK/LG
A300 16GY/LG
X16 20DG/YL
X17 20DG/OR
X917 20DG
X926 20GY/OR
X521 20GY/LB
10
X522 20GY/DB
11
X910 20GY/DG
12
X510 20DG/LB
13
X511 20GY/LG
14
15
16
C317 (SATELLITE RADIO) - NATURAL (SATELLITE RADIO JUMPER SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
D54 20WT
D55 20WT/OR
Z909 18BK/LG
A300 18GY/LG
X16 20DG/YL
X17 20DG/OR
X917 20DG
X926 20GY/OR (DVD)
X521 20GY/LB (DVD)
10
X522 20GY/DB (DVD)
11
X910 20GY/DG (DVD)
12
X510 20DG/LB (DVD)
13
X511 20GY/LG (DVD)
14
15
16
LX
LX
8W - 80 - 47
C318 (POLICE) - LT. GRAY (BODY SIDE)

CAV
CIRCUIT
A100 16RD/WT
A101 16VT/RD
A102 16WT/RD
F100 16PK/VT
F101 16VT/PK
F102 16WT/PK
C318 (POLICE) - LT. GRAY (ACCESSORY

JUMPER SIDE)
CAV
CIRCUIT
A100 16RD/WT
A101 16VT/RD
A102 16WT/RD
F100 16PK/VT
F101 16VT/PK
F102 16WT/PK
CAPACITOR-IGNITION-NO. 1 (2.7L/3.5L) - BLACK 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
K343 16BR/YL
FUNCTION
FUSED ASD RELAY OUTPUT 2
CAPACITOR-IGNITION-NO. 1 (SRT8) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
8W - 80 - 48
LX
CAPACITOR-IGNITION-NO. 2 (2.7L/5.7L) - BLACK 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
K343 16BR/YL
FUNCTION
CLUSTER C1 - GRAY 26 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z910 18BK/TN
GROUND
L307 20WT/BR
HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX
E2 20OR/BR
PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL
G161 20VT/DG
DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX
G160 20VT/LG
PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX
G76 20VT/YL
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
10
G77 20VT/GY
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
11
P1 20TN/LG
DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER
12
P393 20LG
DOOR LOCK DRIVER
13
P392 20LG/DB
DOOR LOCK DRIVER
14
Z910 16BK/TN
GROUND
15
Z910 16BK/TN
GROUND
16
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
17
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
18
B25 20GY/BK
PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE
19
20
B27 20DG/WT
TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH SENSE
21
22
G25 20VT/TN
DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH SENSE
23
G78 22VT/OR
DECKLID/LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE
24
A110 16OR/RD
FUSED B(+)
25
A110 16OR/RD
FUSED B(+)
26
P303 20TN
PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER
LX
8W - 80 - 49
CLUSTER C2 - GRAY 16 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
N5 20DB/WT
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL
N4 20DB/WT
R57 20LG/GY
DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
W113 20BR/YL
REAR WIPER SWITCH MUX
L900 20WT/YL
HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN
P37 20LG/TN
PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN
G900 20VT/OR
IGNITION SWITCH SENSE RETURN
C105 18LB/LG (MTC)
HVAC MUX CONTROL
10
11
12
G20 20VT/BR
IGNITION SWITCH SENSE
13
G167 20VT/LB
DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN
14
15
G926 20VT/WT
REAR WIPER SWITCH MUX RETURN
16
Z210 20BK
GROUND
CLUSTER C3 - WHITE 26 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
W213 20BR/OR
REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER
E22 20OR/GY (ATC)
INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL
E22 18OR/GY (MTC)
G75 20VT
DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
P83 20TN/WT (HEATED SEATS)
LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER
P81 20TN/LB (HEATED SEATS)
LEFT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER
10
P84 20TN/VT (HEATED SEATS)
RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER
11
E12 20OR/GY
PANEL LAMPS DRIVER
12
M24 18YL/WT
COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER
13
14
A23 20RD/YL
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
15
F202 20PK/GY
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START)
16
G74 18VT/WT
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
17
R58 20LB/GY (LHD)
PASSENGER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
18
P365 20LG/GY (HEATED SEATS)
LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE
19
P366 20LG/LB (HEATED SEATS)
RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE
20
21
22
P82 20TN/DG (HEATED SEATS)
RIGHT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER
23
24
P31 20TN/YL
DECKLID/LIFTGATE RELEASE DRIVER
25
M27 20YL/LB
READING/RAIL LAMPS DRIVER
26
A917 16RD/TN (LHD EXCEPT POLICE)
FUSED B(+)
26
A917 18RD/TN (RHD/POLICE)
FUSED B(+)
8W - 80 - 50
LX
CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C3 18DB/YL
A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT
Z904 18BK/BR
GROUND
CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C3 18BL/DG
Z925 18BR
GROUND
COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 (5.7L EARLY BUILD) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K19 16DB/DG
COIL CONTROL NO. 1
COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 (3.5L LATE BUILD) - DK. GRAY 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K19 18DB/DG
COIL CONTROL NO. 1
K343 18BR/YL
LX
8W - 80 - 51
COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 (2.7L/3.5L EARLY BUILD) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K19 16DB/DG
COIL CONTROL NO. 1
COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 (5.7L LATE BUILD/SRT8) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K19 16DB/DG
COIL CONTROL NO. 1
K343 16BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K17 16DB/TN
COIL CONTROL NO. 2

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K17 16DB/TN
COIL CONTROL NO. 2
K343 16BR/YL
8W - 80 - 52
LX

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K17 18DB/TN
COIL CONTROL NO. 2
K343 18BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K17 16DB/TN
COIL CONTROL NO. 2

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K18 16DB/LG
COIL CONTROL NO. 3

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K18 18DB/LG
COIL CONTROL NO. 3
K343 18BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K18 16DB/LG
COIL CONTROL NO. 3
LX
8W - 80 - 53

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K18 16DB/LG
COIL CONTROL NO. 3
K343 16BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K15 16DB/GY
COIL CONTROL NO. 4

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K15 16DB/GY
COIL CONTROL NO. 4
K343 16BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K15 18DB/GY
COIL CONTROL NO. 4
K343 18BR/YL
8W - 80 - 54
LX

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K15 16DB/GY
COIL CONTROL NO. 4

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K16 16DB/YL
COIL CONTROL NO. 5

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K16 18DB/YL
COIL CONTROL NO. 5
K343 18BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K16 16DB/YL
COIL CONTROL NO. 5

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K16 16DB/YL
COIL CONTROL NO. 5
K343 16BR/YL
LX
8W - 80 - 55

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K10 16DB/OR
COIL CONTROL NO. 6

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K10 16DB/OR
COIL CONTROL NO. 6
K343 16BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K10 18DB/OR
COIL CONTROL NO. 6
K343 18BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K10 16DB/OR
COIL CONTROL NO. 6
8W - 80 - 56
LX

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K97 16DB/YL
COIL CONTROL NO. 7

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K97 16DB/YL
COIL CONTROL NO. 7
K343 16BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K98 16DB/YL
COIL CONTROL NO. 8
K343 16BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 16BR/YL
K98 16DB/YL
COIL CONTROL NO. 8
LX
8W - 80 - 57
CONNECTOR-INTERFACE-POLICE/TAXI - NATURAL 24 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
W500 20BR/OR
FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL
W501 20BR/VT
REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL
W511 20BR/WT
POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL
W512 20BR/VT
SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL
W513 20BR/GY
HORN MUTE SIGNAL
W514 20BR/YL
FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL
W515 20BR/LB
W516 20BR/DB
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL
W517 20BR/LG
SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL
10
W518 20BR/DG
HORN SWITCH SENSE
11
W519 20BR/TN
P/N SWITCH SENSE
12
W520 20BR/OR
BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE
13
W521 20BR/WT
HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE
14
W522 20BR/VT
SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL
15
W523 20BR/GY
FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL
16
Z384 20BK
SIGNAL RETURN
17
W524 20BR/YL
18
W525 20BR/LB
CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE
19
W526 20BR/DB
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
20
W527 20BR/LG
VSIM CAN B BUS (+)
21
W528 20BR/DG
VSIM CAN B BUS (-)
22
W529 20BR/TN
ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL
23
24
CONNECTOR-POLICE ACCESSORIES (POLICE) - LT. GRAY 8 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A100 16RD/WT
FUSED B(+)
A101 16VT/RD
FUSED B(+)
A102 16WT/RD
FUSED B(+)
F100 16PK/VT
POLICE NO. 1 RELAY OUTPUT
F101 16VT/PK
F102 16WT/PK
8W - 80 - 58
LX
CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 (ATC) - GRAY 22 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F500 20DG/PK
FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT
A23 20RD/YL
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
C115 20DB
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL
E12 20OR/GY
PANEL LAMPS DRIVER
G39 20VT/LB
SUN SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL
G139 20VT/OR
10
L24 20WT/VT
AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL
11
G939 20VT/DB
SUN SENSOR RETURN
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 (MTC) - BLACK 16 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F23 20RD/OR (EARLY BUILD)
F500 20DG/PK (LATE BUILD)
A23 20RD/YL
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
C105 18LB/LG
HVAC MUX CONTROL
C115 20DB
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL
C850 20LB/VT
BLOWER SWITCH POSITION SIGNAL
E12 20OR/GY
PANEL LAMPS DRIVER
E22 18OR/GY
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LX
8W - 80 - 59
CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 (ATC) - GRAY 16 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C266 20OR/DB
MODE DOOR DRIVER
C66 20DB/OR
C255 22WT/DB
C55 20DB/WT
C252 22LG/DB
RIGHT BLEND DOOR DRIVER
C52 22DB/LG
RIGHT BLEND DOOR COMMON DRIVER
C268 22YL/DB (EXCEPT SRT8 EARLY

BUILD)
C268 20YL/DB (SRT8 EARLY BUILD)
10
C68 22DB/YL
11
C21 20DB/LG
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
12
C121 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
13
C56 20DB/LB
FRONT BLOWER CONTROL
14
15
16
CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 (MTC) - GRAY 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C266 20OR/DB
MODE DOOR DRIVER
C66 20DB/OR
C255 22WT/DB
C55 20DB/WT
C268 20YL/DB
C68 22DB/YL
C21 20DB/LG
10
C121 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
11
12
CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C3 (MTC) - BLACK 10 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C70 12DB/YL
FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED
C850 20LB/VT
BLOWER SWITCH POSITION SIGNAL
C73 12DB/VT
FRONT BLOWER M2 SPEED
Z908 12BK/RD
GROUND
C72 18DB/OR
10
C71 16DB/BR
FRONT BLOWER LOW SPEED
8W - 80 - 60
LX
DATA LINK CONNECTOR - BLACK 16 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z910 20BK/TN
GROUND
Z910 20BK/TN
GROUND
D72 20WT/LB
CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+)
D21 20PK (EARLY BUILD)
SCI TRANSMIT (ECM/PCM)
D21 20WT/BR (LATE BUILD)
D16 20WT/OR
SCI RECEIVE (TCM)
10
11
12
D20 20WT/LG
SCI RECEIVE (PCM)
13
14
D71 20WT/DB
CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-)
15
D15 20WT/DG
SCI TRANSMIT (TCM)
16
A106 20LB/RD
FUSED B(+)
DISPLAY-PARK ASSIST (PARKTRONICS) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X777 20DG/GY
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY
Z171 20GY/BK
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND
D777 20WT/DG
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL
FAN-RADIATOR C1 - DK. GRAY 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
N24 12DG/DB
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
N210 12DB/DG
RADIATOR FAN HIGH/LOW CONTROL FEED
N23 10DB/DG
RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY OUTPUT
Z904 12BK/BR (EXCEPT POLICE/SRT8

EXPORT)
GROUND
Z401 12BK/DG (POLICE/SRT8 EXPORT) GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 61
FAN-RADIATOR C2 (AWD/DIESEL/SRT8 EXPORT) - DK. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K175 18BR/LB
RADIATOR FAN RELAY COIL SIGNAL
A934 10RD
FUSED B(+)
FAN-RADIATOR C2 (SRT8 EXCEPT EXPORT) - DK. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K175 18BR/LB
A934 10RD
FUSED B(+)
FLASHER-HEADLAMP C1 (POLICE) - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L33 18WT/LG
LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER
L34 18WT/GY
RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER
L33 18WT/LG
L34 18WT/GY
F880 20PK/DG
Z902 20BK/LB
GROUND
FLASHER-HEADLAMP C2 (POLICE) - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L33 18WT/LG
L34 18WT/GY
L33 18WT/LG
L34 18WT/GY
F880 20PK/DG
Z902 20BK/LB
GROUND
8W - 80 - 62
LX
GENERATOR (DIESEL) - BLUE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D509 20WT/BL
ECM LIN BUS
GENERATOR (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z904 18BK/BR
GROUND
K20 18BR/GY
GEN FIELD CONTROL
GENERATOR-EYELET - 1 WAY
CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A802 4RD
B(+)
A802 12BK (DIESEL)
B(+)
GLOW PLUG NO. 1 (DIESEL) - 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A202 16BK/BL
FUNCTION
GLOW PLUG NO. 1 CONTROL

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A203 16BK/VT
FUNCTION
LX
8W - 80 - 63

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A204 16BK/RD
FUNCTION

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A208 16BK/YL
FUNCTION

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A211 16BK/DG
FUNCTION

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A216 16BK/WT
FUNCTION
HEATER-CABIN (DIESEL) - LT. GRAY 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
N113 10DB/OR
PTC NO. 1 RELAY OUTPUT
N114 10DB/LB
N115 10DB/YL
8W - 80 - 64
LX
HEATER-CRANKCASE VENT (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
N116 18BR/VT
CRANKCASE VENT HEATER CONTROL
K343 18RD/DG
HEATER-SEAT BACK-LEFT - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P187 20LG/BR
LEFT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER
Z912 20BK/OR (LHD)
GROUND
Z911 20BK/OR (RHD)
GROUND
HEATER-SEAT BACK-RIGHT - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P188 20LG/VT
RIGHT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER
Z911 20BK/WT (LHD)
GROUND
Z912 20BK/OR (RHD)
GROUND
HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-LEFT - GREEN 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P187 20LG/BR
Z912 20BK/OR (LHD)
GROUND
Z911 20BK/OR (RHD)
GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 65
HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-RIGHT - GREEN 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P188 20LG/VT
Z911 20BK/WT (LHD)
GROUND
Z912 20BK/OR (RHD)
GROUND
HORN-NO. 1 - BLACK 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
X2 18DG/OR
FUNCTION
HORN RELAY OUTPUT
HORN-NO. 2 - BLACK 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
X2 18DG/OR
FUNCTION
HORN RELAY OUTPUT
INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K11 20BR/YL
INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1
K343 16BR/YL
8W - 80 - 66
LX
INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K611 16BK/BL
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 1 LOW-SIDE CONTROL
K11 16BL
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 1 HIGH-SIDE CONTROL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K612 16BK/VT
K12 16BL/VT

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K12 20BR/DB
K343 16BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K13 20BR/LB
K343 16BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K613 16BK/RD
K13 16BL/RD
LX
8W - 80 - 67

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K614 16BK/YL
K14 16BL/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K14 20BR/TN
K343 16BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K38 20BR/OR
K343 16BR/YL

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K638 16BK/DG
K38 16BL/DG

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K658 16BK/WT
K58 16BL/WT
8W - 80 - 68
LX

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K58 20BR/VT
K343 16BR/YL
INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 7 (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K26 20BR/YL
K343 16BR/YL
INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 8 (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K28 20BR/LB
K343 16BR/YL
LAMP-BACKUP-LEFT (300C) - GRAY 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 20BK/GY
GROUND
L1 20WT/LG
BACKUP LAMP FEED
LX
8W - 80 - 69
LAMP-BACKUP-LEFT (300T) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L1 18WT/LG
BACKUP LAMP FEED
LAMP-BACKUP-LEFT (LX49) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 20BK
GROUND
L1 20VT/RD
BACKUP LAMP FEED
LAMP-BACKUP-RIGHT (300C) - GRAY 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 20BK/GY
GROUND
L1 20WT/LG
BACKUP LAMP FEED
LAMP-BACKUP-RIGHT (300T) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L1 18WT/LG
BACKUP LAMP FEED
8W - 80 - 70
LX
LAMP-BACKUP-RIGHT (LX49) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 20BK
GROUND
L1 20VT/RD
BACKUP LAMP FEED
LAMP-CARGO (LX48 CHRYSLER) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G78 20VT/OR
A117 20RD/DG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
LAMP-CARGO (LX48 DODGE) - WHITE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G78 20VT/OR
A117 20RD/DG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
LAMP-CARGO (LX49) - GRAY 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 20BK/GY
GROUND
M24 20YL/WT
LAMP-CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP (LX48 CHRYSLER) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY OUTPUT
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
LX
8W - 80 - 71
LAMP-CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP (LX48 DODGE) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
LAMP-CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP (LX49) - NATURAL 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
L53 20DG/WT (MK25)
B29 20DG/WT (MK25E)
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
LAMP-COURTESY-LEFT FRONT DOOR (EXCEPT BASE) - WHITE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
M24 20YL/WT
Z912 20BK/OR
GROUND
LAMP-COURTESY-LEFT REAR - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
M24 20YL/WT
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
M27 20YL/LB
8W - 80 - 72
LX
LAMP-COURTESY-RIGHT FRONT DOOR (EXCEPT BASE) - WHITE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
M24 20YL/WT
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
LAMP-COURTESY-RIGHT REAR - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
M24 20YL/WT
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
M27 20YL/LB
LAMP-DOME (POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A932 18RD
FUSED B(+)
Z909 18BK/LG
GROUND
LAMP-FOG-LEFT FRONT - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L89 20WT/YL (LX48 EXCEPT BASE)
FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
L89 18WT/YL (LX49)
Z902 20BK/BR (LX48 EXCEPT BASE)
GROUND
Z902 18BK/LB (LX49)
GROUND
LAMP-FOG-LEFT REAR (300C EXPORT) - GREEN 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L90 18WT/OR
REAR FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
LX
8W - 80 - 73
LAMP-FOG-LEFT REAR (LX49 EXPORT) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L90 20WT/OR
Z914 20BK/BR
GROUND
LAMP-FOG-RIGHT FRONT - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L89 20WT/YL (LX48 EXCEPT BASE)
L89 18WT/YL (LX49)
Z901 20BK/TN (LX48 EXCEPT BASE)
GROUND
Z901 18BK/DG (LX49)
GROUND
LAMP-FOG-RIGHT REAR (300C EXPORT) - GREEN 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L90 18WT/OR
LAMP-FOG-RIGHT REAR (LX49 EXPORT) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L90 20WT/OR
Z914 20BK/BR
GROUND
8W - 80 - 74
LX
LAMP-GLOVE BOX (EXCEPT POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
M27 20YL/LB
LAMP-HIGH BEAM-LEFT - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L33 18WT/LG
Z902 18BK/LB
GROUND
LAMP-HIGH BEAM-RIGHT - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L34 18WT/GY
Z901 18BK/DG
GROUND
LAMP-HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE-LEFT (HID LAMPS) - DK. GRAY 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L303 18WT/OR
LEFT HID LAMP DRIVER
D205 20WT/DB (EXPORT)
SCI RECEIVE (LEFT HID LAMP)
Z902 18BK/LB
GROUND
F500 20DG/PK (EXPORT)
HEADLAMP LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
LX
8W - 80 - 75
LAMP-HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE-RIGHT (HID LAMPS) - DK. GRAY 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L304 18OR/WT
RIGHT HID LAMP DRIVER
D211 20WT/RD (EXPORT)
SCI RECEIVE (RIGHT HID LAMP)
Z901 18BK/DG
GROUND
F500 20DG/PK (EXPORT)
LAMP-LICENSE (EXCEPT 300C/EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L777 20WT/VT
PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
Z914 20BK/BR
GROUND
LAMP-LICENSE-LEFT (300C/EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L777 20WT/VT
Z914 20BK/BR
GROUND
8W - 80 - 76
LX
LAMP-LICENSE-RIGHT (300C/EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L777 20WT/VT
Z914 20BK/BR
GROUND
LAMP-LOW BEAM-LEFT (EXCEPT HID LAMPS) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L43 18WT/DB
LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER
Z902 18BK/LB
GROUND
LAMP-LOW BEAM-RIGHT (EXCEPT HID LAMPS) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L44 18WT/TN
RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER
Z901 18BK/DG
GROUND
LAMP-PARK/TURN-LEFT FRONT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z902 18BK/LB
GROUND
L777 20WT/VT
L61 18WT/LG
LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
LX
8W - 80 - 77
LAMP-PARK/TURN-LEFT FRONT (300T/EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z902 18BK/LB
GROUND
L777 20WT/VT
L61 18WT/LG
LAMP-PARK/TURN-LEFT FRONT (LX49 EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L61 18WT/LG
L777 20WT/VT
Z902 18BK/LB
GROUND
LAMP-PARK/TURN-RIGHT FRONT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z901 18BK/DG
GROUND
L777 20WT/VT
L60 18WT/TN
RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
8W - 80 - 78
LX
LAMP-PARK/TURN-RIGHT FRONT (300T/EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z901 18BK/DG
GROUND
L777 20WT/VT
L60 18WT/TN
LAMP-PARK/TURN-RIGHT FRONT (LX49 EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L60 18WT/TN
L777 20WT/VT
Z901 18BK/DG
GROUND
LAMP-PRNDL - WHITE 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
E12 20OR/GY
PANEL LAMPS DRIVER
Z912 20BK/OR
GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 79
LAMP-READING-FRONT - NATURAL 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
M24 20YL/WT
M27 20YL/LB
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
LAMP-SIDE MARKER-LEFT FRONT (LX48) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L777 20WT/VT
Z902 20BK/BR
GROUND
LAMP-SIDE MARKER-LEFT REAR (300T) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L777 18WT/VT
LAMP-SIDE MARKER-RIGHT FRONT (LX48) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L777 20WT/VT
Z901 20BK/TN
GROUND
8W - 80 - 80
LX
LAMP-SIDE MARKER-RIGHT REAR (300T) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L777 18WT/VT
LAMP-SIDE REPEATER-LEFT (EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L61 18WT/LG
Z902 20BK/LB
GROUND
LAMP-SIDE REPEATER-RIGHT (EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L60 18WT/TN
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND
LAMP-SPOT-LEFT (POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A931 18RD/WT
FUSED B(+)
LX
8W - 80 - 81
LAMP-SPOT-RIGHT (POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A930 18RD/LG
FUSED B(+)
LAMP-TAIL PARK-LEFT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - GREEN 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L777 18WT/VT
LAMP-TAIL PARK-RIGHT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - GREEN 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L777 18WT/VT
LAMP-TAIL STOP/PARK-LEFT (300C) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L777 18WT/VT
L53 18DG/WT (MK25)
B29 18DG/WT (MK25E)
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
8W - 80 - 82
LX
LAMP-TAIL STOP/PARK-RIGHT (300C) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L777 18WT/VT
L53 18DG/WT (MK25)
B29 18DG/WT (MK25E)
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
LAMP-TAIL STOP/TURN-LEFT (300T) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L777 18WT/VT
L63 18WT/DG
LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
LAMP-TAIL STOP/TURN-RIGHT (300T) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L777 18WT/VT
L62 18WT/YL
RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
LAMP-TAIL TURN-LEFT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L63 18WT/DG
LX
8W - 80 - 83
LAMP-TAIL TURN-LEFT (300C EXPORT) - NATURAL 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L63 18WT/DG
LAMP-TAIL TURN-RIGHT (300C EXCEPT EXPORT) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L62 18WT/YL
LAMP-TAIL TURN-RIGHT (300C EXPORT) - NATURAL 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 18BK/GY
GROUND
L62 18WT/YL
LAMP-TAIL/STOP-LEFT (LX49) - BROWN 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L777 20BR
Z914 20BK
GROUND
Z914 20BK
GROUND
L53 20BR/VT (MK25)
B29 20BR/VT (MK25E)
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
8W - 80 - 84
LX
LAMP-TAIL/STOP-RIGHT (LX49) - BROWN 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L777 20BR
Z914 20BK
GROUND
Z914 20BK
GROUND
L53 20BR/VT (MK25)
B29 20BR/VT (MK25E)
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
LAMP-TURN-LEFT REAR (LX49) - TAN 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 20BK
GROUND
Z914 20BK
GROUND
L63 18RD/OR
LAMP-TURN-RIGHT REAR (LX49) - TAN 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 20BK
GROUND
Z914 20BK
GROUND
L62 18RD/OR
LAMP-UNDERHOOD (POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A904 16RD
FUSED B(+)
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 85
LAMP-VANITY-LEFT (EXCEPT POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
M27 20YL/LB
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
LAMP-VANITY-RIGHT (EXCEPT POLICE) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
M27 20YL/LB
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
LATCH-DOOR-DECKLID (LX48) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z911 18BK/WT
GROUND
Z911 20BK/WT (LHD EXCEPT POLICE)
GROUND
Z911 20BK (RHD/POLICE)
GROUND
G78 20VT/OR (LHD EXCEPT POLICE)
G78 20BK (RHD/POLICE)
P31 20TN/YL (LHD EXCEPT POLICE)
P31 20BK (RHD/POLICE)
LATCH-DOOR-DRIVER - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G75 20VT
Z912 20BK/OR
GROUND
P1 20TN/LG
DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER
P393 20LG
DOOR LOCK DRIVER
8W - 80 - 86
LX
LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G77 20VT/GY
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
Z912 20LG/BK
GROUND
P303 20TN
P393 20LG
DOOR LOCK DRIVER
LATCH-DOOR-LIFTGATE (LX49) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G78 20VT/OR
Z914 20BK/GY
GROUND
Z914 20BK/GY
GROUND
P31 20TN/YL
LATCH-DOOR-PASSENGER - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G74 20VT/WT
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
P303 20TN
P392 20LG/DB
DOOR LOCK DRIVER
LX
8W - 80 - 87
LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G76 20VT/YL
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
P303 20TN
P392 20LG/DB
DOOR LOCK DRIVER
LIGHTER-CIGAR - GRAY 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A205 16RD/OR
FUSED B(+)
Z910 16BK/TN
GROUND
MEDIA SYSTEM-MONITOR/DVD - LT. GRAY 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X510 20DG/LB
DVD AUDIO RIGHT (+)
X926 20GY/OR
AUX AUDIO COMMON
X521 20GY/LB
AUX AUDIO LEFT (+)
A300 18GY/LG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
X511 20GY/LG
DVD AUDIO LEFT (+)
X910 20GY/DG
DVD AUDIO COMMON
X522 20GY/DB
AUX AUDIO RIGHT (+)
10
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
11
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
12
Z909 18BK/LG
GROUND
8W - 80 - 88
LX
MIRROR-INSIDE REARVIEW C1 (EXCEPT BASE) - BLACK 7 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F23 20BK/RD
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
L1 20BK/TN
BACKUP LAMP FEED
P112 20BK/LB
AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR (+)
P114 20BK/DB
AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR (-)
MIRROR-INSIDE REARVIEW C2 (HANDS FREE) - BLACK 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X722 20BK/BR
MICROPHONE 2 IN (+)
X712 20BK/DG
MICROPHONE 1 IN (+)
X793 20BK/GY
MICROPHONE FEED
X730 20BK/VT
VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL
10
11
X835 20BK/OR
SENSOR GROUND
12
X792 20BK/YL
MICROPHONE IN (-)
MIRROR-OUTSIDE REARVIEW-DRIVER (EXCEPT MEMORY) - NATURAL 8 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P71 20TN/DG
DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER
P76 20TN/LB
MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
P75 20TN/LG
DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER
C16 20DB/GY
Z912 20BK/OR
GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 89
MIRROR-OUTSIDE REARVIEW-DRIVER (MEMORY) - BLACK 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z912 20BK/OR
GROUND
P73 20TN/VT
DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
C16 20DB/GY
P71 20TN/DG
P75 20TN/LG
P145 20LG/OR
DRIVER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
P67 20TN/OR
DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL
P114 20TN/WT (LHD)
AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR (-)
P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
POWER FOLDING MIRROR RETURN
P65 20TN/VT
DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL
10
P69 20TN/WT
DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND
11
P112 20TN/OR (LHD)
AUTO DAY/NIGHT MIRROR (+)
11
P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
POWER FOLDING MIRROR DRIVER
12
MIRROR-OUTSIDE REARVIEW-PASSENGER (EXCEPT MEMORY) - NATURAL 8 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P72 20TN/GY
PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER
P76 20TN/LB
P74 20TN/OR
PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER
C16 20DB/GY
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
MIRROR-OUTSIDE REARVIEW-PASSENGER (MEMORY) - BLACK 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
P70 20TN/LB
PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
C16 20DB/GY
P72 20TN/GY
P74 20TN/OR
P146 20LG/DB
PASSENGER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
P64 20TN
PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL
P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
P68 20TN/YL
PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL
10
P66 20TN/LG
PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND
11
P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
12
8W - 80 - 90
LX
MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES - BLACK 47 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A107 10TN/RD
FUSED B(+)
B137 20DG/BR (MK25)
BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
F202 20PK/GY (EXCEPT MK25E)
B15 20DG/WT (MK25E)
BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL
B937 20DG/BR (MK25)
BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR RETURN
G4 20VT/LB (MK25)
DYNAMICS SENSOR SUPPLY
B237 20DG/YL (MK25)
BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR SUPPLY
F202 20PK/GY (MK25E)
B16 20LB/DG (TCS)
10
11
D65 20WT/LG (EXCEPT MK25E)
CAN C BUS (+)
12
D65 20WT/LG (MK25E)
CAN C BUS (+)
13
D64 20WT/LB (MK25E)
CAN C BUS (-)
14
15
D64 20WT/LB (EXCEPT MK25E)
CAN C BUS (-)
16
Z903 14BK/DG (EXCEPT MK25E)
GROUND
16
Z903 10BK/DG (MK25E)
GROUND
17
B131 20DG/YL (MK25)
ACTIVE BRAKE BOOSTER SOLENOID (+)
18
B83 20DG/WT (MK25)
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY
18
D52 20WT/LB (MK25E)
DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK
19
B984 20DG/OR (MK25)
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN
19
D51 20WT/BR (MK25E)
DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK
20
B84 20DG/YL (MK25)
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
21
22
G4 20VT/LB (MK25E)
23
24
G94 20VT/DB (MK25)
DYNAMICS SENSOR GROUND
25
D51 20WT/BR (MK25)
26
27
B135 20DG/LG (MK25)
BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH OPEN
28
B136 20DG/LB (MK25)
BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH SIGNAL
29
D52 20WT/LB (MK25)
29
G94 20VT/DB (MK25E)
30
B134 20DG/YL (MK25)
BRAKE PEDAL FORCE SWITCH CLOSE
31
B132 20DG/LB (MK25)
ACTIVE BRAKE BOOSTER SOLENOID (-)
32
A111 14DG/RD
FUSED B(+)
33
B6 20DG/WT
RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
34
B7 20DG/VT
RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
35
B121 20DG/DB (MK25)
STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL
36
B4 20DG/GY
LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
37
B3 20DG/YL
LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
38
B15 20DG/WT (TCS)
39
40
41
42
B1 20DG/OR
RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
43
B2 20DG/LB
RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
44
45
B9 20DG/LG
LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
46
B8 20DG/TN
LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
47
Z903 10BK/DG
GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 91
MODULE-BRAKE (TRAILER TOW) - BLUE 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A914 16RD
FUSED B(+)
B400 16DB
TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT
B29 20DG/WT
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
Z914 16BK/GY
GROUND
MODULE-CLOCK-ANALOG (EXCEPT POLICE) - NATURAL 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A117 20RD/DG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
E12 20OR/GY
PANEL LAMPS DRIVER
MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z912 14BK/OR
GROUND
F881 14PK
Q321 16OR/DB
DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER
Q311 16OR/LB
DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER
MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 - BLACK 16 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A913 20RD/GY (EXCEPT MEMORY)
FUSED B(+)
Z912 18BK/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY)
GROUND
Q15 18OR/LB
WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT
Q222 20OR/GY
PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH

MUX
D54 20WT (EXCEPT MEMORY)
CAN B BUS (-)
D55 20WT/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY)
CAN B BUS (+)
10
11
Q221 20GY/OR
DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX
12
Z421 20BK/BR
DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN
13
Z405 20BK
DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN
14
Q303 20WT/OR
DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL
15
Q301 20OR/WT
DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL
16
Q305 20OR
DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY
8W - 80 - 92
LX
MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 (MEMORY) - GRAY 16 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P550 20TN/LG
MIRROR SWITCH SUPPLY
E55 20OR/DG
MIRROR SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER
P703 20DB/LG
MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE
P710 20LG
MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE
P705 20LG/OR
MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE
P950 20TN/GY
MIRROR SWITCH RETURN
10
G920 20VT/YL
MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN
11
12
13
G200 20VT/BR
MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX
14
15
P704 20LG/TN
MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE
16
P706 20LG/GY
MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE
MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C4 (MEMORY) - DK. GRAY 22 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A913 20RD/GY
FUSED B(+)
P73 20TN/VT
DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
P71 20TN/DG
P75 20TN/LG
P65 20TN/VT
DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL
P67 20TN/OR
DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL
P145 20LG/OR
DRIVER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
10
Z912 18BK/OR
GROUND (DRIVER SIDE IDENTIFIER LHD/RHD)
11
12
Z912 18BK/OR
GROUND
13
14
15
16
17
P69 20TN/WT
DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND
18
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
19
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
20
21
22
LX
8W - 80 - 93
MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z911 14BK/WT
GROUND
F881 14PK
Q322 16LG/OR
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER
Q312 16DB/OR
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER
MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 - BLACK 16 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
FUSED B(+)
Q336 20OR/GY
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX
E34 20OR/TN
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER
D54 20WT (EXCEPT MEMORY)
CAN B BUS (-)
D55 20WT/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY)
CAN B BUS (+)
10
11
12
Q936 20OR/LG
13
Z404 20BK/LG
PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN
14
Q304 20LG/OR
PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL
15
Q302 20OR/LG
PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL
16
Q306 20OR/DB
PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY
MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C4 (MEMORY) - DK. GRAY 22 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A913 20RD/GY
FUSED B(+)
P70 20TN/LB
PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER
P72 20TN/GY
P74 20TN/OR
P68 20TN/YL
PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL
P64 20TN
PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL
P146 20LG/DB
PASSENGER MIRROR POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
10
11
12
Z911 16BK/WT
GROUND
13
14
15
16
17
P66 20TN/LG
PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND
18
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
19
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
20
21
22
8W - 80 - 94
LX
MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
A117 20RD/DG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
F880 20PK (EXCEPT RHD SUNROOF)
F880 20PK/DG (RHD SUNROOF)
MODULE-ELECTRONIC SHIFT C1 (COLUMN NAG1) - BLACK 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z910 22BK
GROUND
F902 22LB
B29 22YL
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
D65 22LG/BK
CAN C BUS (+)
D64 22GY
CAN C BUS (-)
22YL
AUTOSTICK SWITCH MUX SUPPLY
22GY
AUTOSTICK SWITCH MUX SIGNAL
10
22BK
SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR GROUND
11
22LB
SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
12
22LG/BK
SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
MODULE-ELECTRONIC SHIFT C2 (COLUMN NAG1) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K321 24BK
BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL
F902 24BK
LX
8W - 80 - 95
MODULE-ENGINE CONTROL C1 (DIESEL) - BLACK 96 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K11 16BL
K12 16BL/VT
K13 16BL/RD
K902 20GY/WT
O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM
K844 20RD/VT
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
K900 20BR/RD
INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
K934 20OR
EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
10
K944 20BR/DG
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GROUND
11
K312 20GY/OR
EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR

SIGNAL
12
N116 18BR/VT
CRANKCASE VENT HEATER CONTROL
13
14
15
K853 20RD/VT
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
16
17
18
F858 20GY/YL
EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
19
K356 20RD/BK
BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
20
N117 20GY
INTAKE SWIRL SERVO MOTOR CONTROL
21
22
X635 20GY/DG
BOOST PRESSURE SERVO MOTOR CONTROL
23
K369 18RD/GY
FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID 12 VOLT SUPPLY
24
K315 20GY/PK
EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE MOTOR (-)
25
K14 16BL/YL
26
K38 16BL/DG
27
K58 16BL/WT
28
K960 18BR/VT
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
29
30
31
K41 20DG/BK
O2 1/1 REFERENCE SIGNAL
32
33
K44 20YL/GY
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
34
K358 20GY/BL
OIL LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL
35
36
37
K957 18BR
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR GROUND
38
39
G224 20YL/GY
OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
40
F851 20DG
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
41
K313 20DG/GY

SUPPLY
42
K668 20BR/BK
INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
43
K350 20RD/WT
FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
44
45
46
47
K366 18BK/BL/DG
FUEL QUANTITY SOLENOID 12 VOLT SUPPLY
48
K99 16GY/BR
O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL
49
K638 16BK/DG
50
K611 16BK/BL
51
K658 16BK/WT
52
K222 20BR/RD
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
53
Z753 16BR/BK
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GROUND
8W - 80 - 96
LX

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
54
55
56
K914 20BL/DG
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
57
Z42 20DG/BL
O2 1/1 NEGATIVE CURRENT CONTROL
58
59
60
K2 20DG/RD
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
61
K156 20BL/RD
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
62
K916 20BR/WT
PRE-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
63
K915 20BR/WT
POST-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
64
K359 20GY/BR
FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
65
K181 20DG/VT
FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
66
K157 20BL/YL
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR SIGNAL
67
K390 20DG/PK

RETURN
68
69
70
71
K34 20GY/YL
EGR SOLENOID CONTROL
72
K314 20GY/RD
EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE MOTOR (+)
73
K612 16BK/VT
74
K613 16BK/RD
75
K614 16BK/YL
76
Z36 20YL/DG
OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
77
K24 16DG/WT
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
78
K936 20GY/PK
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
79
80
K43 20GY/RD
O2 1/1 POSITIVE CURRENT CONTROL
81
K35 20GY/BK
EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
82
K37 20GY/YL
BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
83
K352 20YL
PRE-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
84
K21 20DG/WT
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
85
K68 20RD/BL
INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
86
87
K656 20BR/GY
BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
88
D509 20WT/BL
ECM LIN BUS
89
K353 20YL/WT
POST-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
90
K362 20DG/YL
INLET AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
91
92
93
K370 18BK/WT
FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
94
K365 18YL/BK
FUEL QUANTITY SOLENOID CONTROL
95
96
LX
8W - 80 - 97

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K344 14BR/GY
Z904 14BK/BR
GROUND
K343 14BR/YL
Z904 14BK/BR
GROUND
K342 14BR/WT
Z904 14BK/BR
GROUND
K167 16BR/YL
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1 GROUND
10
11
K355 18BR/DG
EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
12
K29 20WT/BR
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL
13
14
G6 20VT/GY
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
15
F855 20PK/YL
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY
16
K354 18BR/LG
EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
17
F856 20YL/PK
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
K23 20BR/WT
25
26
27
28
29
30
K951 20BR/DB
EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
31
32
K31 20BR
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
K400 20BR/VT
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 GROUND
41
F202 20PK/GY
42
K51 20BR/WT
ASD RELAY CONTROL
43
D21 20WT/BR
44
T752 20DG/OR
STARTER RELAY CONTROL
45
46
47
48
F21 20PK/DG
FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)
49
50
51
D65 20WT/LG
CAN C BUS (+)
52
D64 20WT/LB
CAN C BUS (-)
53
54
C13 20LB/OR
A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL
55
K363 20OR/BR
PTC NO. 3 RELAY CONTROL
56
57
58
8W - 80 - 98
LX
MODULE-FRONT BLOWER POWER C1 (ATC) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z908 12BK
GROUND
C56 20DB/LB
FRONT BLOWER CONTROL
C7 12DB
MODULE-FRONT BLOWER POWER C2 (ATC) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C7 12DB
BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY
Z134 12BK/LG
GROUND
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 - BLACK 24 WAY

CAV
FUNCTION
CIRCUIT
Z902 18BK/LB
GROUND
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
D72 20WT/LB
CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+)
D71 20WT/DB
CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-)
D65 20WT/LG
CAN C BUS (+)
D64 20WT/LB
CAN C BUS (-)
10
B20 20DG/OR
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE
11
C18 20LB/BR
A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER SIGNAL
12
B6 20DG/WT (EXCEPT ABS)
13
L91 20WT/DB
HAZARD SWITCH SENSE
14
W17 20BR/LG (LX49)
REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
15
B7 20DG/VT (EXCEPT ABS)
16
F891 20PK/GY
5 VOLT SUPPLY
17
18
W1 20BR/TN
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE
19
20
21
B29 20DG/WT
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
22
Z902 18BK/LB (DODGE SRT8)
GROUND
22
Z902 20BK/LB (EXCEPT DODGE SRT8)
GROUND
23
G70 20VT/LB (EXPORT)
HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE
24
LX
8W - 80 - 99
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 - BLACK 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L44 18WT/TN
G31 20VT/LG
AAT SIGNAL
G931 20VT/BR
SENSOR GROUND
L43 18WT/DB (EXCEPT HID LAMPS)
LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER
L33 18WT/LG
L60 18WT/TN
10
L61 18WT/LG
11
12
L34 18WT/GY
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM - BLACK 49 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A906
FUSED B(+)
A902
FUSED B(+)
A901
FUSED B(+)
A903
FUSED B(+)
L1
BACKUP LAMP FEED
10
W24 (HID LAMPS)
HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY CONTROL
11
W20 (LX49)
REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL
12
W10
FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL
13
F902
14
K361 (DIESEL)
15
X13
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
16
K360 (DIESEL)
17
F202
18
Z901
GROUND
19
20
21
L239 (EXPORT)
REAR FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL
22
F923
RUN RELAY CONTROL
23
24
25
Z901
GROUND
26
L139
FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL
27
W5
WIPER ON/OFF RELAY CONTROL
28
W12 (LX49)
REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL
29
W2
WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY CONTROL
30
K542
ASD RELAY OUTPUT
31
W7
FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
32
33
Z901
GROUND
34
L62
35
C918
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
36
37
8W - 80 - 100
LX
MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM - BLACK 49 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
38
P307
ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL
39
N201
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY CONTROL
40
41
Z901
GROUND
42
43
L63
44
45
N112
RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY CONTROL
46
P201 (EXCEPT MEMORY)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL
47
X4
HORN RELAY CONTROL
48
L177
PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL
49
K175 (AWD/SRT8/DIESEL)
MODULE-FUEL PUMP - BLACK 5 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
N4 20DB/WT
Z210 20BK
GROUND
N5 20DB/WT
Z912 16BK/OR
GROUND
N1 16DB/OR
FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT
MODULE-GLOW PLUG (DIESEL) - 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A202 16BK/BL
A203 16BK/VT
A204 16BK/RD
A208 16BK/YL
K343 20RD/DG
Z917 18BR
GROUND
A211 16BK/DG
A216 16BK/WT
10
11
12
D509 20WT/BL
ECM LIN BUS
LX
8W - 80 - 101
MODULE-GLOW PLUG-EYELET (DIESEL) - 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A802 7RD
FUNCTION
B(+)
MODULE-HANDS FREE - DK. GRAY 22 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A300 16GY/LG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
X722 22LB/DG
MICROPHONE 2 IN (+)
X703 22DG/OR
LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT
X704 22DG/YL
RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT
10
X795 20DG
COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT
11
12
13
14
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
15
X730 20GY/YL
VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL
16
X712 22DG/LB
MICROPHONE 1 IN (+)
17
X792 22LB/DG
MICROPHONE IN (-)
18
19
20
X793 22DG/YL
MICROPHONE FEED
21
X835 20OR/GY
SENSOR GROUND
22
Z909 18BK/LG
GROUND
MODULE-HEADLAMP LEVELING (EXPORT) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F500 20DG/PK
D205 20WT/DB
SCI RECEIVE (LEFT HID LAMP)
Z901 20BK/DG
GROUND
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
D211 20WT/RD
SCI RECEIVE (RIGHT HID LAMP)
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
8W - 80 - 102
LX
MODULE-HEATED SEATS - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z911 18BK/WT
GROUND
A33 14RD/YL
FUSED B(+)
P187 20LG/BR
P188 20LG/VT
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 - GREEN 26 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z901 14BK/DG
GROUND
C13 20LB/OR (GAS)
C3 18DB/YL (GAS)
L303 18WT/OR (HID LAMPS)
LEFT HID LAMP DRIVER
A111 14DG/RD (ABS)
FUSED B(+)
10
11
12
13
14
FUSED B(+)
15
L304 18OR/WT (HID LAMPS)
RIGHT HID LAMP DRIVER
16
X2 18DG/OR
HORN RELAY OUTPUT
17
L62 18WT/YL
18
Z901 16BK/DG
GROUND
19
C918 20BK/LB
20
F923 20PK/YL
RUN RELAY CONTROL
21
22
F202 20PK/GY
23
REAR FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL
24
K175 18BR/LB (AWD/SRT8/DIESEL)
25
W12 20BR/OR (LX49)
REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL
26
LX
8W - 80 - 103
MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 - LT. GRAY 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
N24 12DG/DB
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Z901 12BK/DG
GROUND
N210 12DB/DG
RADIATOR FAN HIGH/LOW CONTROL FEED
N23 10DB/DG
RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY OUTPUT
MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 - BLACK 15 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P307 20LG/GY
ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL
L63 18WT/DG
L1 20WT/LG
BACKUP LAMP FEED
A934 10RD (AWD/SRT8/DIESEL)
FUSED B(+)
A22 12RD/WT
FUSED B(+)
A904 16RD (EXCEPT SRT8 EXCEPT

HID LAMPS)
FUSED B(+)
Z904 20BK/BR (2.7L/3.5L)
GROUND
C13 20LB/OR (DIESEL)
10
A22 12RD/WT
FUSED B(+)
11
12
W3 14BR/WT
FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT
13
T16 16YL/OR (2.7L/3.5L)
14
T16 16YL/OR (2.7L/3.5L)
14
C3 18DB/YL (DIESEL)
15
T15 20YL/BR (2.7L/3.5L)
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
15

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
FUSED B(+)
W24 20BR/OR (HID LAMPS)
A107 10TN/RD (ABS)
FUSED B(+)
10
A72 20RD/OR
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT
11
Z904 20BK/BR (HID LAMPS EXCEPT

SRT8 EARLY BUILD)
GROUND
11
Z901 20BK/DG (HID LAMPS SRT8

EARLY BUILD)
GROUND
12
L44 18WT/TN (HID LAMPS)
13
14
15
16
8W - 80 - 104
LX

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
17
18
19
L89 18WT/YL (FOG LAMPS)
20
W10 20BR
21
22
F902 20PK
23
24
F21 20PK/DG
25
26
W4 14BR/OR
FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT
MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 - BLUE 26 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
T751 20YL (GAS)
T752 20DG/OR
T750 16YL/GY
A209 18RD (GAS)
FUSED B(+)
K361 20WT/BR (DIESEL)
10
K360 20GY/BR (DIESEL)
11
X13 16DG/GY
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
12
W7 20BR/GY
13
14
15
K51 20BR/WT
ASD RELAY CONTROL
16
A22 16RD/WT (EXCEPT BASE/SRT8)
FUSED B(+)
17
K342 14BR/WT (DIESEL)
17
K342 16BR/WT (GAS)
18
19
20
L777 20WT/VT
21
22
Z901 16BK/DG
GROUND
23
W20 20BR/YL (LX49)
24
25
K344 14BR/GY (DIESEL)
26
26
K343 16BR/YL (GAS)
LX
8W - 80 - 105
MODULE-INTERFACE-POLICE/TAXI C1 - GRAY 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A913 20RD/GY
FUSED B(+)
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
Z910 20BK/TN
GROUND
10
11
12
MODULE-INTERFACE-POLICE/TAXI C2 - DK. GRAY 22 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
W500 20BR/OR
FRONT FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL
W501 20BR/VT
REAR FLASHING LIGHTS SIGNAL
W511 20BR/WT
POLICE RADIO INPUT SIGNAL
W512 20BR/VT
SECURITY ALARM MUTE SIGNAL
W513 20BR/GY
HORN MUTE SIGNAL
W514 20BR/YL
FUEL LEVEL STATUS SIGNAL
W515 20BR/LB
W516 20BR/DB
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR SIGNAL
W517 20BR/LG
SECURITY ALARM ON SIGNAL
10
W518 20BR/DG
HORN SWITCH SENSE
11
W519 20BR/TN
P/N SWITCH SENSE
12
W520 20BR/OR
BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE
13
W521 20BR/WT
HEADLAMP SWITCH SENSE
14
W522 20BR/VT
SIDE AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL
15
W523 20BR/GY
FRONT AIRBAG STATUS SIGNAL
16
Z384 20BK
SIGNAL RETURN
17
W524 20BR/YL
18
W525 20BR/LB
CLUSTER DIMMER SWITCH SENSE
19
W526 20BR/DB
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
20
W527 20BR/LG
VSIM CAN B BUS (+)
21
W528 20BR/DG
VSIM CAN B BUS (-)
22
W529 20BR/TN
ENGINE RUNNING STATUS SIGNAL
8W - 80 - 106
LX
MODULE-INTRUSION TRANSCEIVER (RHD) - BLACK 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A23 20RD/YL
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
A645 20RD/VT
INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL
G460 20DG/VT
INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL
D96 20WT/LB
SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
Z910 20BK/TN
GROUND
G945 20VT/DG
10
G946 20LG/VT
11
12
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
MODULE-MEMORY SEAT C1 - BLACK 14 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P205 16LG/WT (LHD ADJUSTABLE

PEDALS)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD
P206 16LG/LB (LHD ADJUSTABLE

PEDALS)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD
P153 16TN/DG (LHD)
TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER
P157 16LB/TN (LHD)
TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
P953 16DG/TN (LHD)
STEERING MOTOR COMMON
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
A110 12OR/RD
FUSED B(+)
G13 18VT/LB (LHD ADJUSTABLE PEDALS)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY
10
Z912 12BK/OR
GROUND
11
P152 20TN/LB (LHD)
TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE
12
G914 20VT/GY (LHD)
SENSOR RETURN
13
P151 20TN/OR (LHD)
TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE
14
G14 18VT/DB (LHD ADJUSTABLE PED- ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL

ALS)
MODULE-MEMORY SEAT C2 - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G493 20OR/VT
DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR

GROUND
P141 18LG/BR
DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
P143 18LG/GY
DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER
G403 20VT/OR
DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE
LX
8W - 80 - 107
MODULE-MEMORY SEAT C3 - NATURAL 14 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G404 20VT/YL
DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE
G402 20VT/DB
DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE
G401 20VT/LG
DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE
G494 20YL/VT
DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND
G492 20LB/VT
DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND
G491 20VT/GY
DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND
P115 16LG
DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
P117 16LG/LB
DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
10
P113 18LG/WT
DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
11
12
P111 18LG/YL
DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER
13
P121 18LG/DB
DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
14
P119 18LG/DG
DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER
MODULE-MEMORY SEAT C4 - WHITE 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P599 20LG/TN
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN
P239 20LG/WT
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL

SWITCH MUX
P339 20LG/DB
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER

SWITCH MUX
P9 20LG/OR
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH SUPPLY
MODULE-MEMORY SEAT C5 (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q102 20OR/LB
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD
Q103 20OR/LG
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD
Q101 20OR/LB
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH GROUND
MODULE-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION C1 (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 10 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A106 20LB/RD
FUSED B(+)
F201 20PK/OR
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
R263 20LB/VT
DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE
R261 20LB/WT
DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA
10
Z911 18BK/WT
GROUND
8W - 80 - 108
LX
MODULE-OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION C2 (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R701 20LG
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR 5 VOLT
R717 20LG/DG
SEAT WEIGHT LEFT FRONT SENSOR SIGNAL
R718 20LB/DG
SEAT WEIGHT RIGHT FRONT SENSOR SIGNAL
R706 20LB/OR
SEAT WEIGHT RIGHT REAR SENSOR SIGNAL
R705 20LG/OR
SEAT WEIGHT LEFT REAR SENSOR SIGNAL
10
11
12
R728 20LB/YL
SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR GROUND
MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 - YELLOW 32 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R53 20LG/YL
DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2
R55 20LG/DG
R56 20LB/DG
PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1
R54 20LB/YL
10
11
12
13
R261 20LB/WT (EXPORT)
14
15
R13 20LG/TN (SIDE AIRBAGS)
LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL
16
R16 20BR/LG (SIDE AIRBAGS)
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND
17
R263 20LB/VT (EXPORT)
18
19
R15 20LG/BR (SIDE AIRBAGS)
LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND
20
R19 20LG/WT (SIDE AIRBAGS)
21
R20 20WT/LG (SIDE AIRBAGS)
22
R17 20LG (SIDE AIRBAGS)
23
R18 20LB (SIDE AIRBAGS)
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL
24
R14 20TN/LG (SIDE AIRBAGS)
25
R1 20LB/WT (SIDE AIRBAGS)
26
R3 20LB/OR (SIDE AIRBAGS)
27
R4 20OR/LB (SIDE AIRBAGS)
28
R2 20WT/LB (SIDE AIRBAGS)
29
30
31
32
LX
8W - 80 - 109
MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 - YELLOW 32 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R43 20LG/BR
R45 20LG/OR
R63 20LG/WT
R61 20LG/VT
R42 20LB/BR
R44 20LB/OR
R64 20LB/WT
R62 20LB/VT
G104 20VT/GY (EARLY BUILD)
PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER
10
11
12
R82 20WT/LB
RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND
13
14
15
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
16
F201 20PK/OR
17
18
19
20
R81 20LB/WT
LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND
21
22
Z913 18BK/LG
GROUND
23
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
24
F214 20PK/LG
25
R79 20LB/VT
LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL
26
R80 20VT/LB
RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL
27
28
29
30
31
32
MODULE-PARK ASSIST (PARKTRONICS) - BLACK 18 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D703 20WT/BK
PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL
D700 20WT/GY
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
X750 20GY/LB
PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND

PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND
Z171 20GY/BK
10
Z914 20BK/GY
GROUND
23
D704 20WT/DB
24
D701 20WT/LB
25
D777 20WT/DG
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL
26
27
28
X700 20GY/OR
PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY
29
X777 20DG/GY
PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY
30
F500 20DG/PK
8W - 80 - 110
LX
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 - BLACK/BLACK 38 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K98 16DB/YL (5.7L/SRT8)
COIL CONTROL NO. 8
K97 16DB/YL (5.7L/SRT8)
COIL CONTROL NO. 7
K28 20BR/LB (5.7L/SRT8)
K26 20BR/YL (5.7L/SRT8)
Z904 16BK/BR
GROUND
10
11
F202 20PK/GY
12
F902 20PK (RLE)
13
14
15
16
K236 20DB/LG (3.5L)
SRV CONTROL
17
18
Z904 16BK/BR
GROUND
19
20
G6 20VT/GY
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL
21
22
23
24
25
D20 20WT/LG
SCI RECEIVE (PCM)
26
D16 20WT/OR (EXCEPT SRT8)
SCI RECEIVE (TCM)
27
F856 20YL/PK
5 VOLT SUPPLY
28
K452 20BR/LB (5.7L MDS)
MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4
29
A209 18RD
FUSED B(+)
30
T751 20YL
31
K141 20DB/YL
O2 1/2 SIGNAL
32
K904 20DB/DG
O2 RETURN (DOWN)
33
K243 20BR
O2 2/2 SIGNAL
34
D65 20WT/LG
CAN C BUS (+)
35
D64 20WT/LB
CAN C BUS (-)
36
D21 20WT/BR
37
D15 20WT/DG (EXCEPT SRT8)
SCI TRANSMIT (TCM)
38
LX
8W - 80 - 111
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 - BLACK/ORANGE 38 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K10 18DB/OR (3.5L LATE BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 6
K10 16DB/OR (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE

BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 6
K16 18DB/YL (3.5L LATE BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 5
K16 16DB/YL (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE

BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 5
K15 18DB/GY (3.5L LATE BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 4
K15 16DB/GY (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE

BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 4
K58 20BR/VT
K38 20BR/OR
K124 18DB/GY
ETC MOTOR (+)
K18 18DB/LG (3.5L LATE BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 3
K18 16DB/LG (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE

BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 3
K35 20DB/VT (EXCEPT SRT8)
EGR SOL CONTROL
K17 18DB/TN (3.5L LATE BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 2
K17 16DB/TN (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE

BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 2
10
K19 18DB/DG (3.5L LATE BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 1
10
K19 16DB/DG (EXCEPT 3.5L LATE

BUILD)
COIL CONTROL NO. 1
11
K14 20BR/TN
12
K13 20BR/LB
13
K12 20BR/DB
14
K11 20BR/YL
15
K922 18BR/DB
TP SENSOR RETURN
16
K136 18BR (2.7L/3.5L)
MTV CONTROL
16
K453 20BR/DG (5.7L MDS)
17
K199 20BR/VT
18
K99 20BR/LG
19
K20 18BR/GY
GEN FIELD CONTROL
20
K2 20VT/OR
ECT SIGNAL
21
K22 18BR/OR
TP SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL
22
K34 20DB/LG (EXCEPT SRT8)
EGR SIGNAL
23
K1 20VT/BR
MAP SIGNAL
24
K942 20BR/LG
KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN
25
K42 20DB/YL
KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL
26
27
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
28
K122 18BR/DG
29
F855 20PK/YL
5 VOLT SUPPLY
30
K21 20DB/LG
IAT SIGNAL
31
K41 20DB/LB
O2 1/1 SIGNAL
32
K902 20BR/DG
O2 RETURN (UP)
33
K43 20DB/LG
O2 2/1 SIGNAL
34
K44 20DB/GY
CMP SIGNAL
35
K24 20DB/WT
CKP SIGNAL
36
K242 20BR/WT (5.7L/SRT8)
37
K924 20WT/BR (5.7L/SRT8)
38
K126 18DB/LG
ETC MOTOR (-)
8W - 80 - 112
LX
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 - BLACK/NATURAL 38 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K51 20BR/WT
ASD RELAY CONTROL
K454 20BR/OR (5.7L MDS)
K451 20BR/WT (5.7L MDS)
K106 20VT/GY (POLICE/SRT8 EXCEPT

EXPORT)
NVLD SOL CONTROL

K299 20BR/WT
10
K399 20BR/GY
11
C13 20LB/OR
12
13
14
B16 20LB/DG
15
16
K167 20BR/YL
APPS NO. 1 RETURN
17
K400 20BR/VT
APPS NO. 2 RETURN
18
19
K342 16BR/WT
20
K52 20DB/OR
EVAP PURGE CONTROL
21
22
23
B15 20DG/WT
24
25
K23 20BR/WT
APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL
26
27
28
K342 16BR/WT
29
K70 20DB/BR
EVAP PURGE RETURN
30
31
32
33
G224 20VT/YL (5.7L/SRT8)
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL
34
35
K107 20VT/WT
NVLD SWITCH SIGNAL
36
K29 20WT/BR
APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL
37
K31 20BR
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL
38
T752 20DG/OR
LX
8W - 80 - 113
MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 (RLE) - BLACK/GREEN 38 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
T60 20YL/GY
OD SOLENOID CONTROL
T59 20YL/LB
UD SOLENOID CONTROL
T19 20YL/DB
10
T20 20DG/WT
L/R SOLENOID CONTROL
11
T118 20DG (VLP)
PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CONTROL
12
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND
13
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND
14
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND
15
T1 20DG/LB
TRS T1 SENSE
16
T3 20DG/DB
TRS T3 SENSE
17
18
T15 20YL/BR
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
19
T16 16YL/OR
20
21
22
T9 20DG/TN
OD PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
23
24
25
26
27
T41 20YL/DB
TRS T41 SENSE (P/N SENSE)
28
T16 16YL/OR
29
T50 20YL/TN
L/R PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
30
T47 20YL/DG
2-4 PRESSURE SWITCH SENSE
31
T38 20YL/BR (VLP)
LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
32
T14 20DG/BR
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
33
T52 20DG/OR
INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
34
T13 20DG/VT
SENSOR GROUND
35
T54 20DG/OR
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
36
37
T42 20DG/YL
TRS T42 SENSE
38
T16 16YL/OR
8W - 80 - 114
LX
MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY - BLACK 8 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D508 20WT/GY
TIRE PRESSURE BUS
F202 20PK/GY
Z910 18BK/TN
GROUND
A23 20RD/YL (LHD)
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
A917 18RD/TN (RHD)
FUSED B(+)
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
MODULE-STEERING COLUMN-LOCK (RHD) - 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A917 18RD/TN
FUSED B(+)
Z910 20BK/TN
GROUND
F892 20PK/LB
IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN)
D508 20WT/GY
TIRE PRESSURE BUS
MODULE-STEERING CONTROL - BLACK 14 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R63 20LG/WT
R61 20LG/VT
R45 20LG/OR
R43 20LG/BR
Z910 20BK/TN
GROUND
A913 20RD/GY
FUSED B(+)
10
D65 20WT/LG
CAN C BUS (+)
11
D64 20WT/LB
CAN C BUS (-)
12
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
13
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
14
LX
8W - 80 - 115
MODULE-TRAFFIC INFORMATION RECEIVER C1 (EXPORT) - BLACK 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
A300 20GY/LG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
Z909 20BK
GROUND
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
10
11
12

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D5 6WT/OR
ANTENNA SIGNAL
D931 WT/YL
ANTENNA SHIELD

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D6 6WT/OR
RADIO ANTENNA SIGNAL
D932 WT/YL
RADIO ANTENNA SHIELD
MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 (NAG1) - BLACK 18 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
10
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
F942 18PK/BK
FUSED TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT
30
Z912 18BK/OR (LHD EXCEPT POLICE)
GROUND
30
Z910 18BK/TN (RHD/POLICE)
GROUND
8W - 80 - 116
LX
MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 (NAG1) - BLACK 14 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
12
T70 20YL
13
T72 20YL/DB
SENSOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE
14
T60 20YL/GY
1-2/4-5 SOLENOID CONTROL
15
T73 20YL/GY
16
T74 20YL/LG
17
T75 20YL/LB
TCC SOLENOID CONTROL
33
T13 20DG/VT
SENSOR GROUND
34
T54 20DG/OR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR-P/N SWITCH SIGNAL
35
T71 20YL/OR
36
T76 20YL/TN
MODULATION PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
37
T77 20YL/BR
SHIFT PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
38
T78 20YL
SOLENOID SUPPLY VOLTAGE
H1
D65 20WT/LG
CAN C BUS (+)
L2
D64 20WT/LB
CAN C BUS (-)
MOTOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (LHD) - NATURAL 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P206 20LG/LB (EXCEPT MEMORY)
P206 16LG/LB (MEMORY)
P205 20LG/WT (EXCEPT MEMORY)
P205 16LG/WT (MEMORY)
MOTOR-BLOWER-FRONT - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z134 12BK/LG
GROUND
C7 12DB (ATC)
BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY
C7 12DB (MTC)
MOTOR-BOOST PRESSURE SERVO (DIESEL) - NATURAL 5 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K343 18RD/DG
Z904 18BR
GROUND
X635 20GY/DG
BOOST PRESSURE SERVO MOTOR CONTROL
LX
8W - 80 - 117
MOTOR-HEADLAMP WASHER (HID LAMPS) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
W23 16BR/OR
HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY OUTPUT
Z904 16BK/BR
GROUND
MOTOR-INTAKE SWIRL SERVO (DIESEL) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z904 18BR
GROUND
K343 18RD/DG
N117 20GY
INTAKE SWIRL SERVO MOTOR CONTROL
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL - GRAY 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P115 16LG (LHD MEMORY)
P117 16LG/LB (RHD MEMORY)
P17 16LG/DG (EXCEPT MEMORY)
P117 16LG/LB (LHD MEMORY)
P115 16LG (RHD MEMORY)
G491 20VT/GY (MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND
G401 20VT/LG (MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER (EXCEPT MEMORY) - NATURAL 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P43 18LG/VT
P41 18LG/GY
8W - 80 - 118
LX
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER (MEMORY) - BLUE 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P143 18LG/GY
P141 18LG/BR
G493 20OR/VT
DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR

GROUND
G403 20VT/OR
DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL - GRAY 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P21 18LG/TN (EXCEPT MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER
P121 18LG/DB (MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER
P119 18LG/DG (MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER
G494 20YL/VT (MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND
G404 20VT/YL (MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT PASSENGER VERTICAL - GRAY 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P20 18LG/LB (LHD)
PASSENGER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER
P20 18LG/TN (RHD)
P18 18LG/OR (LHD)
PASSENGER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER
P18 18LG/LB (RHD)
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL - GRAY 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P16 16LG/WT
PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER
P14 16LG/OR (LHD)
PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER
P14 16LG/DG (RHD)
LX
8W - 80 - 119
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER RECLINER (RHD) - NATURAL 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P44 18LG/VT
PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
P42 18LG/GY
PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL - GRAY 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P13 18LG/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER
P113 18LG/WT (MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER
P11 18LG/YL (EXCEPT MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER
P111 18LG/YL (MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER
G492 20LB/VT (MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND
G402 20VT/DB (MEMORY)
DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE
MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR PASSENGER VERTICAL - GRAY 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P12 18LG/YL (LHD)
PASSENGER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER
P12 18LG/OR (RHD)
P10 18LG/TN (LHD)
PASSENGER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER
P10 18LG/YL (RHD)
MOTOR-STEERING TELESCOPE (LHD MEMORY) - NATURAL 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P953 16DG/TN
P157 16LB/TN
TELESCOPE STEERING MOTOR FORWARD/REARWARD DRIVER
P152 20TN/LB
TELESCOPE STEERING FORWARD/REARWARD POSITION SENSE
G914 20VT/GY
SENSOR RETURN
8W - 80 - 120
LX
MOTOR-STEERING TILT (LHD MEMORY) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P953 16DG/TN
P153 16TN/DG
TILT STEERING MOTOR UP/DOWN DRIVER
P151 20TN/OR
TILT STEERING UP/DOWN POSITION SENSE
G914 20VT/GY
SENSOR RETURN
MOTOR-WINDOW-DRIVER (BASE) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q21 16OR/WT
DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
Q11 16OR/LG
DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
MOTOR-WINDOW-DRIVER EXPRESS (EXCEPT BASE) - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z405 20BK
DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN
Q303 20WT/OR
DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL
Q321 16OR/DB
DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER
Q305 20OR
DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY
Q301 20OR/WT
DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL
Q311 16OR/LB
DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER
MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q211 16TN/LB
LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
Q111 16TN/YL
LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
LX
8W - 80 - 121
MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER (BASE) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q22 16OR/VT
PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
Q12 16OR/BR
PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER EXPRESS (EXCEPT BASE) - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z404 20BK/LG
PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN
Q304 20LG/OR
PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL
Q322 16LG/OR
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER
Q306 20OR/DB
PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY
Q302 20OR/LG
PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL
Q312 16DB/OR
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER
MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q212 16OR/VT
RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
Q112 16OR/BR
RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
MOTOR-WIPER-FRONT - BLACK 5 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
W4 14BR/OR (LHD)
Z902 14BK/LB (RHD)
GROUND
W3 14BR/WT (LHD)
W7 20BR/GY (RHD)
W7 20BR/GY (LHD)
W4 14BR/OR (RHD)
Z904 14BK/BR (DODGE SRT8)
GROUND
GROUND
W3 14BR/WT (RHD)
8W - 80 - 122
LX
MOTOR-WIPER-REAR (LX49) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
W13 16BR/LG
REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL
W17 18BR/YL
REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
Z914 16BK/GY
GROUND
MOTOR/MODULE-SUNROOF - LT. GRAY 10 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q4 20OR/YL
SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE
Q3 20OR/TN
SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
Z909 18BK
GROUND
Q5 20OR/LB
SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE
X13 18RD
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
D270 20WT (FACTORY ONLY)
SUNROOF DIAGNOSTIC
10
Q6 20OR/LG
SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY
POST-PASS THROUGH-EYELET - (BATTERY SIDE) 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A1 1RD
FUNCTION
B(+)
POST-PASS THROUGH-EYELET - (STARTER SIDE) 1 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A11 4BR/RD (DIESEL)
B(+)
A11 4RD (GAS)
B(+)
LX
8W - 80 - 123
POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A305 16RD/LB
FUSED B(+)
Z912 16BK/OR
GROUND
POWER OUTLET-REAR (LX49) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A105 16DB/RD
FUSED B(+)
Z914 16BK/GY
GROUND
PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD - NATURAL 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
W10 20BR
Z904 20BK/BR (LX48)
GROUND
W20 20BR/YL (LX49)
8W - 80 - 124
LX
RADIO C1 - DK. GRAY 22 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A300 16GY/LG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
X703 22DG/OR (HANDS FREE)
LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
X202 18DG/VT (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
X292 18DG/YL (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
X291 18GY/YL (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
10
X201 18GY/VT (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
11
Z909 18BK/LG
GROUND
12
A300 16GY/LG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
13
14
15
16
X704 22DG/YL (HANDS FREE)
RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT
17
X795 20DG (HANDS FREE)
COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT
18
X303 18DG/TN (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
18
X51 18DG/DB (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
RADIO LEFT AUDIO (+)
19
X393 18DG/GY (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
19
X57 18DG/OR (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
RADIO LEFT AUDIO (-)
20
X394 18YL/GY (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)
20
X58 18GY/OR (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
RADIO RIGHT AUDIO (-)
21
X304 18DG/BR (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
21
X52 18GY/DB (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
RADIO RIGHT AUDIO (+)
22
Z909 18BK/LG
GROUND
RADIO C2 (SATELLITE RADIO) - BLACK 10 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X16 20DG/YL
AUDIO SIGNAL RIGHT (+)
X917 20DG
AUDIO SIGNAL COMMON
X510 20DG/LB
DVD AUDIO RIGHT (+)
X926 20GY/OR
AUX AUDIO COMMON
X17 20DG/OR
AUDIO SIGNAL LEFT (+)
X910 20GY/DG
DVD AUDIO COMMON
X511 20GY/LG
DVD AUDIO LEFT (+)
X521 20GY/LB
AUX AUDIO LEFT (+)
10
X522 20GY/DB
AUX AUDIO RIGHT (+)
LX
8W - 80 - 125
RADIO-ANTENNA (NAVIGATION) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D8 WT/LB
GPS ANTENNA SIGNAL
D108 LB/WT
GPS ANTENNA SHIELD
RADIO-ANTENNA - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D5 6WT/OR (EXCEPT EXPORT)
ANTENNA SIGNAL
D6 6WT/OR (EXPORT)
RADIO ANTENNA SIGNAL
D931 WT/YL (EXCEPT EXPORT)
ANTENNA SHIELD
D932 WT/YL (EXPORT)
RADIO ANTENNA SHIELD
RECEIVER-INTRUSION SENSOR (RHD) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G460 20DG/VT
INTRUSION RECEIVER SENSOR SIGNAL
G946 20LG/VT
RECEIVER-SATELLITE - BLACK 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A300 18GY/LG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
Z909 18BK/LG
GROUND
X17 20DG/OR
AUDIO SIGNAL LEFT (+)
D54 20WT
CAN B BUS (-)
D55 20WT/OR
CAN B BUS (+)
10
11
X917 20DG
AUDIO SIGNAL COMMON
12
X16 20DG/YL
AUDIO SIGNAL RIGHT (+)
8W - 80 - 126
LX
RELAY-HEADLAMP WASHER (HID LAMPS) - LT. GRAY 5 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A904 16RD
FUSED B(+)
W24 20BR/OR
W23 16BR/OR
HEADLAMP WASHER RELAY OUTPUT
A904 16RD
FUSED B(+)
RESISTOR BLOCK-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT (MTC) - BLACK 5 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C70 12DB/YL
FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED
Z134 12BK/LG
GROUND
C73 14DB/VT
C72 14DB/OR
C71 16DB/BR
FRONT BLOWER LOW SPEED
SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R53 20LG/YL
R55 20LG/DG
SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R56 20LB/DG
R54 20LB/YL
LX
8W - 80 - 127
SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F856 20YL/PK (DIESEL)
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2 5

VOLT SUPPLY
F856 20YL/PK (GAS)
5 VOLT SUPPLY
K29 20WT/BR (DIESEL)
K29 20WT/BR (GAS)
APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL
K400 20BR/VT (DIESEL)
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 2

GROUND
K400 20BR/VT (GAS)
APPS NO. 2 RETURN
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1

GROUND
K167 20BR/YL (GAS)
APPS NO. 1 RETURN
K23 20BR/WT (DIESEL)
K23 20BR/WT (GAS)
APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL
F855 20PK/YL (DIESEL)
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR NO. 1 5

VOLT SUPPLY
F855 20PK/YL (GAS)
5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (LHD MEMORY) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G914 20VT/GY
SENSOR RETURN
G14 18VT/DB
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL
G13 18VT/LB
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY
SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G31 20VT/LG
AAT SIGNAL
G931 20VT/BR
SENSOR GROUND
SENSOR-BOOST PRESSURE (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K656 20BR/GY
BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
K37 20GY/YL
BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
K356 20RD/BK
BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
8W - 80 - 128
LX
SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
GROUND
GROUND
B20 20DG/OR
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE
SENSOR-BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL (MK25) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
B237 20DG/YL
BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR SUPPLY
B937 20DG/BR
BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR RETURN
B137 20DG/BR
BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-BRAKE PRESSURE (MK25) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
B984 20DG/OR
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN
B84 20DG/YL
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
B83 20DG/WT
BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY
SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION (2.7L/3.5L) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F856 20YL/PK
5 VOLT SUPPLY
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
K44 20DB/GY
CMP SIGNAL
LX
8W - 80 - 129
SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION (5.7L/SRT8) - GRAY 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K44 20DB/GY
CMP SIGNAL
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
F856 20YL/PK
5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K944 20BR/DG
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GROUND
K44 20YL/GY
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
K844 20RD/VT
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION (DIESEL) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z753 16BR/BK
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GROUND
K24 16DG/WT
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
K853 20RD/VT
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION (GAS) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F855 20PK/YL
5 VOLT SUPPLY
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
K24 20DB/WT
CKP SIGNAL
SENSOR-DYNAMICS (ESP) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D51 20WT/BR
D52 20WT/LB
G4 20VT/LB
G94 20VT/DB
8W - 80 - 130
LX
SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K2 20VT/OR
ECT SIGNAL
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K222 20BR/RD
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
K2 20DG/RD
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C21 20DB/LG
C121 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
SENSOR-EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K355 18BR/DG
EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
K951 20BR/DB
EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR

GROUND
K354 18BR/LG
EXHAUST DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT

SUPPLY
LX
8W - 80 - 131
SENSOR-EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F858 20GY/YL
EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
K934 20OR
EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
K35 20GY/BK
EXHAUST GAS PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R81 20LB/WT
LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND
R79 20LB/VT
LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R82 20WT/LB
RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND
R80 20VT/LB
RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-FUEL PRESSURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K359 20GY/BR
FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
K181 20DG/VT
FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
K350 20RD/WT
FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
8W - 80 - 132
LX
SENSOR-FUEL TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K914 20BL/DG
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
K156 20BL/RD
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-HEADLAMP LEVEL-LEFT (EXPORT) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z901 20BK/DG
GROUND
Z921 20BK
GROUND
L13 20WT/YL
F500 20DG/PK
Z921 20BK
GROUND
SENSOR-HEADLAMP LEVEL-RIGHT (EXPORT) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z914 20BK/GY
GROUND
Z920 20BK
GROUND
Z920 20BK
GROUND
L13 20WT/YL
F500 20DG/PK
SENSOR-INLET AIR PRESSURE (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K900 20BR/RD
INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
K68 20RD/BL
INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
K668 20BR/BK
INLET AIR PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
LX
8W - 80 - 133
SENSOR-INLET AIR TEMPERATURE (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K21 20DB/LG
IAT SIGNAL
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
SENSOR-INPUT SPEED (RLE) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
T13 20DG/VT
SENSOR GROUND
T52 20DG/OR
INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K960 18BR/VT
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
K21 20DG/WT
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K942 20BR/LG
K42 20DB/YL
8W - 80 - 134
LX
SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K924 20WT/BR
K242 20BR/WT
SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (GAS) - GRAY 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K1 20VT/BR
MAP SIGNAL
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
F856 20YL/PK
5 VOLT SUPPLY
SENSOR-MASS AIR FLOW (DIESEL) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F202 18RD/DG
K957 18BR
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR GROUND
K362 20DG/YL
INLET AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
K157 20BL/YL
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE (DIESEL) - 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F851 20DG
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
G6 20BL/RD
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
K936 20GY/PK
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 135
SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F855 20PK/YL
5 VOLT SUPPLY
G6 20VT/GY
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
SENSOR-OIL TEMPERATURE (5.7L/SRT8) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G224 20VT/YL
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
SENSOR-OIL TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z36 20YL/DG
OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
G224 20YL/GY
OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED (RLE) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
T13 20DG/VT
SENSOR GROUND
T14 20DG/BR
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-OXYGEN (DIESEL) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K43 20GY/RD
O2 1/1 POSITIVE CURRENT CONTROL
Z42 20DG/BL
O2 1/1 NEGATIVE CURRENT CONTROL
K99 16GY/BR
K343 16RD/DG
K902 20GY/WT
O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM
K41 20DG/BK
O2 1/1 REFERENCE SIGNAL
8W - 80 - 136
LX
SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT (GAS) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K99 20BR/LG
Z907 18BK
GROUND
K902 20BR/DG
O2 RETURN (UP)
K41 20DB/LB
O2 1/1 SIGNAL
SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR (GAS) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K299 20BR/WT
GROUND
GROUND
K904 20DB/DG
O2 RETURN (DOWN)
K141 20DB/YL
O2 1/2 SIGNAL
SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT (GAS) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K199 20BR/VT
Z907 18BK
GROUND
K902 20BR/DG
O2 RETURN (UP)
K43 20DB/LG
O2 2/1 SIGNAL
SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR (GAS) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K399 20BR/GY
GROUND
GROUND
K904 20DB/DG
O2 RETURN (DOWN)
K243 20BR
O2 2/2 SIGNAL
LX
8W - 80 - 137
SENSOR-PARK ASSIST-NO. 10 (PARKTRONICS) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D704 20WT/DB
X750 20GY/LB
X700 20GY/OR

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D700 20WT/GY
X750 20GY/LB
X700 20GY/OR

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D701 20WT/LB
X750 20GY/LB
X700 20GY/OR

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D703 20WT/BK
X750 20GY/LB
X700 20GY/OR
8W - 80 - 138
LX
SENSOR-POST-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K915 20BR/WT
POST-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
K353 20YL/WT
POST-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-PRE-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K916 20BR/WT
PRE-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
K352 20YL
PRE-CATALYST EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-RAIN (AUTO WIPERS) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F880 20BK/PK
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
D55 20BK/WT
CAN B BUS (+)
D54 20BK
CAN B BUS (-)
SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R261 20LB/WT
R263 20LB/VT
SENSOR-SEAT WEIGHT-LEFT FRONT (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R701 20LG
R728 20LB/YL
R717 20LG/DG
SEAT WEIGHT LEFT FRONT SENSOR SIGNAL
LX
8W - 80 - 139
SENSOR-SEAT WEIGHT-LEFT REAR (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R701 20LG
R728 20LB/YL
R705 20LG/OR
SEAT WEIGHT LEFT REAR SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-SEAT WEIGHT-RIGHT FRONT (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R701 20LG
R728 20LB/YL
R718 20LB/DG
SEAT WEIGHT RIGHT FRONT SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-SEAT WEIGHT-RIGHT REAR (EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R701 20LG
R728 20LB/YL
R706 20LB/OR
SEAT WEIGHT RIGHT REAR SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-SHIFT LEVER POSITION (COLUMN NAG1) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
22BK
SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR GROUND
22LG/BK
SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY
22LB
SHIFT LEVER POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
8W - 80 - 140
LX
SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R15 20LG/BR
R13 20LG/TN
SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R19 20LG/WT
R17 20LG
SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R16 20BR/LG
R14 20TN/LG
SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R20 20WT/LG
R18 20LB
LX
8W - 80 - 141
SENSOR-SUN (ATC) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G39 20VT/LB
G939 20VT/DB
SUN SENSOR RETURN
L24 20WT/VT
AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL
G139 20VT/OR
SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE (RLE) - LT. GREEN 10 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K900 20DB/DG
SENSOR GROUND
T54 20DG/OR
TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
T1 20DG/LB
TRS T1 SENSE
T3 20DG/DB
TRS T3 SENSE
T42 20DG/YL
TRS T42 SENSE
10
T41 20YL/DB
TRS T41 SENSE (P/N SENSE)
SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z901 20BK/DG
GROUND
W1 20BR/TN
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE
SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
B9 20DG/LG
LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
B8 20DG/TN
LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
8W - 80 - 142
LX
SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
B2 20DG/LB
RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
B1 20DG/OR
RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
B4 20DG/GY
LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY
B3 20DG/YL
LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
B7 20DG/VT
B6 20DG/WT
SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-RIGHT FRONT (EXCEPT ABS) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
B7 20DG/VT
B6 20DG/WT
LX
8W - 80 - 143
SIREN (RHD) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A117 20RD/DG
FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.)
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND
D96 20WT/LB
SIREN SIGNAL CONTROL
SOLENOID-FUEL PRESSURE (DIESEL) - NATURAL 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K370 18BK/WT
FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL
K369 18RD/GY
FUEL PRESSURE SOLENOID 12 VOLT SUPPLY
SOLENOID-FUEL QUANTITY (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K365 18YL/BK
FUEL QUANTITY SOLENOID CONTROL
K366 18BK/BL/DG
FUEL QUANTITY SOLENOID 12 VOLT SUPPLY
SOLENOID-MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE (2.7L/3.5L) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z904 18BK/BR
GROUND
K136 18BR
MTV CONTROL
8W - 80 - 144
LX
SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 1 (5.7L MDS) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K451 20BR/WT
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K452 20BR/LB
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K453 20BR/DG
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K454 20BR/OR
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 145
SOLENOID-PROPORTIONAL PURGE (GAS) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K52 20DB/OR
EVAP PURGE CONTROL
K70 20DB/BR
EVAP PURGE RETURN
SOLENOID-SHORT RUNNER VALVE (3.5L) - GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K236 20DB/LG
SRV CONTROL
K343 16BR/YL
SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-CENTER (HIGHLINE) - WHITE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X200 18GY/BR
AMPLIFIED CENTER I/P SPEAKER (+)
X290 18GY/OR
AMPLIFIED CENTER I/P SPEAKER (-)
SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-LEFT - WHITE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X201 18GY/VT (MIDLINE I)
X209 18GY/OR (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+)
X291 18GY/YL (MIDLINE I)
X299 18GY/YL (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-)
8W - 80 - 146
LX
SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-RIGHT - WHITE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X202 18DG/VT (MIDLINE I)
X208 18GY/DG (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+)
X292 18DG/YL (MIDLINE I)
X298 18GY/LG (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-)
CAV
CIRCUIT
SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR - WHITE 3 WAY

FUNCTION
X201 18GY/VT (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
X201 18GY/VT (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
X291 18GY/YL (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
X291 18GY/YL (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
CAV
CIRCUIT
SPEAKER-LEFT REAR - WHITE 3 WAY

FUNCTION
X393 18DG/GY (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
X393 18DG/GY (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
X303 18DG/TN (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
X303 18DG/TN (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
CAV
CIRCUIT
SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR - WHITE 3 WAY

FUNCTION
X202 18DG/VT (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
X202 18DG/VT (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
X292 18DG/YL (LOWLINE I)
X292 18DG/YL (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
CAV
CIRCUIT
SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR - WHITE 3 WAY

FUNCTION
X394 18YL/GY (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)
X394 18YL/GY (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)
X304 18DG/BR (LOWLINE/MIDLINE I)
RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
X304 18DG/BR (MIDLINE II/HIGHLINE)
AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
LX
8W - 80 - 147
SPEAKER-SUBWOOFER (HIGHLINE EXCEPT SRT8) - WHITE 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X300 18GY/BR
X390 18DG/BR
SPEAKER-SUBWOOFER (SRT8 EXCEPT EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
X30 18DG/YL
SUBWOOFER 1 (+)
X31 18GY/TN
SUBWOOFER 1 (-)
STARTER (2.7L/3.5L/5.7L AWD) - BLACK 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
T750 16LG
FUNCTION
STARTER (5.7L RWD/SRT8) - NATURAL 1 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
T750 16LG (5.7L RWD)
T750 16YL/GY (SRT8)
STARTER (DIESEL) - 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
T750 14VT
FUNCTION
8W - 80 - 148
LX
STARTER-FUSIBLE LINK-EYELET (EXCEPT 5.7L RWD/SRT8) - 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A802 8LB
FUNCTION
B(+)
STARTER-FUSIBLE LINK-EYELET (5.7L RWD/SRT8) - 1 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A802 8LB (5.7L RWD)
B(+)
A802 4RD (SRT8)
B(+)
STARTER-POST-PASS THROUGH-EYELET (EXCEPT 5.7L RWD/SRT8) - 1 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A11 4BR/RD (DIESEL)
B(+)
A11 4RD (GAS)
B(+)
STARTER-POST-PASS THROUGH-EYELET (5.7L RWD/SRT8) - 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
A11 4RD
FUNCTION
B(+)
LX
8W - 80 - 149
SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (LHD) - WHITE 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
GROUND
Q103 20OR/LG (MEMORY)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD
Q102 20OR/LB (MEMORY)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH FORWARD
GROUND
A72 20RD/OR (EXCEPT MEMORY)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT
Q101 20OR/LB (MEMORY)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH GROUND
SWITCH-AUTOSTICK (COLUMN NAG1) - WHITE 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
22YL
AUTOSTICK SWITCH MUX SUPPLY
22GY
AUTOSTICK SWITCH MUX SIGNAL
SWITCH-BANK - BLACK 12 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L91 20WT/DB
HAZARD SWITCH SENSE
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
B27 20DG/WT
TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH SENSE
G104 20VT/GY (EARLY BUILD)
PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER
F23 20RD/OR
E22 20OR/GY
E12 20OR/GY
PANEL LAMPS DRIVER
W113 20BR/YL
REAR WIPER SWITCH MUX
W213 20BR/OR
REAR WIPER INDICATOR DRIVER
10
G926 20VT/WT
REAR WIPER SWITCH MUX RETURN
11
12
SWITCH-DECKLID RELEASE (LX48) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z910 20BK/TN
GROUND
G25 20VT/TN
8W - 80 - 150
LX
SWITCH-HEADLAMP - BLACK 10 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
L307 20WT/BR
HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX
E2 20OR/BR
PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL
L900 20WT/YL
HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN
E12 20OR/GY
PANEL LAMPS DRIVER
Z910 20BK/TN
GROUND
10
SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-LEFT - BLACK 8 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F23 20RD/OR
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
P365 20LG/GY
LEFT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE
P83 20TN/WT
LEFT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER
P81 20TN/LB
LEFT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER
E12 20OR/GY
PANEL LAMPS DRIVER
SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-RIGHT - BLACK 8 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F23 20RD/OR
Z909 20BK/LG
GROUND
P366 20LG/LB
RIGHT HEATED SEAT SWITCH SENSE
P84 20TN/VT
RIGHT HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER
P82 20TN/DG
RIGHT HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER
E12 20OR/GY
PANEL LAMPS DRIVER
SWITCH-HORN - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D500 20WT (BASE)
LIN BUS
X3 20DG/VT (PREMIUM)
HORN SWITCH SIGNAL
D501 20WT/LG (BASE)
LIN SLAVE RETURN
X903 20GY/LG (PREMIUM)
HORN SWITCH RETURN
LX
8W - 80 - 151
SWITCH-IGNITION C1 - BLACK 5 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G900 20VT/OR
IGNITION SWITCH SENSE RETURN
G20 20VT/BR
IGNITION SWITCH SENSE
F20 20PK/WT
F21 20PK/DG
A106 20LB/RD
FUSED B(+)
SWITCH-IGNITION C2 (RHD) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A106 20LB/RD
FUSED B(+)
F892 20PK/LB
IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (KEY-IN)
SWITCH-LIFTGATE RELEASE (LX49) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G25 20VT/TN
Z914 20BK/GY
GROUND
SWITCH-MEMORY SET - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G920 20VT/YL
MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN
G200 20VT/BR
MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX
8W - 80 - 152
LX
SWITCH-MIRROR - LT. GRAY 10 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P110 20LG/WT (RHD)
E55 20OR/DG (MEMORY)
MIRROR SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER
P710 20LG (MEMORY)
MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE
GROUND
P950 20TN/GY (MEMORY)
MIRROR SWITCH RETURN
FUSED B(+)
P550 20TN/LG (MEMORY)
MIRROR SWITCH SUPPLY
MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE
P71 20TN/DG (EXCEPT MEMORY)
P705 20LG/OR (MEMORY)
MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE
P704 20LG/TN (MEMORY)
MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE
P75 20TN/LG (EXCEPT MEMORY)
P703 20DB/LG (MEMORY)
MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE
10
P699 20LG/DG (RHD)
SWITCH-OIL LEVEL (DIESEL) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K358 20GY/BL
OIL LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL
SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE (2.7L/3.5L) - LT. GREEN 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G6 20VT/GY
SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE - BLACK 1 WAY

CAV
1
CIRCUIT
B25 20GY/BK
FUNCTION
PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE
LX
8W - 80 - 153
SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q611 14OR/GY
MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN)
Q211 16TN/LB
LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
Q111 16TN/YL
LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
Q411 14OR/WT
MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)
Q15 14OR/LB
SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q612 14OR/DB
MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN)
Q212 16OR/VT
RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
Q112 16OR/BR
RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
Q412 14OR/LB
MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP)
Q15 14OR/LB
SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Z912 20BK/OR
GROUND
R57 20LG/GY
SWITCH-SEAT BELT-PASSENGER (EXCEPT EXPORT) - LT. GRAY 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
R58 20LB/GY
PASSENGER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
8W - 80 - 154
LX
SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER (EXCEPT MEMORY) - BLACK 11 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P41 18LG/GY
P43 18LG/VT
P17 16LG/DG
P21 18LG/TN
DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER
A110 16OR/RD
FUSED B(+)
Z912 16BK/OR
GROUND
P15 16LG/WT
P19 18LG/LB
DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER
10
P13 18LG/OR
DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER
11
P11 18LG/YL
DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER
SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER (MEMORY) - GRAY 11 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P599 20LG/TN
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN
P239 20LG/WT
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL

SWITCH MUX
10
P9 20LG/OR
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH SUPPLY
11
P339 20LG/DB
DRIVER SEAT SWITCH FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER

SWITCH MUX
SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER - BLACK 11 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
P42 18LG/GY (RHD)
PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER
P44 18LG/VT (RHD)
PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER
P16 16LG/WT (LHD)
P16 16LG/DG (RHD)
P20 18LG/LB (LHD)
P20 18LG/TN (RHD)
A916 14RD (LHD)
FUSED B(+)
A916 16OR/RD (RHD)
FUSED B(+)
Z911 14BK/WT (LHD)
GROUND
Z911 16BK/OR (RHD)
GROUND
P14 16LG/OR (LHD)
P14 16LG/WT (RHD)
P18 18LG/OR (LHD)
P18 18LG/LB (RHD)
10
P12 18LG/YL (LHD)
10
P12 18LG/OR (RHD)
11
P10 18LG/TN (LHD)
11
P10 18LG/YL (RHD)
LX
8W - 80 - 155
SWITCH-SECURITY HOOD (EXPORT) - BLACK 2 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G70 20VT/LB
HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE
Z904 20BK/BR
GROUND
SWITCH-STEERING-LEFT (PREMIUM) - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
G907 20VT
EVIC/NAV MUX RETURN
D503 20WT/OR
LIN LIGHTING
G106 20VT/OR
EVIC MUX SIGNAL 1
G206 20VT/OR
EVIC MUX SIGNAL 2
SWITCH-STEERING-RIGHT (PREMIUM) - BLACK 10 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
D503 20WT/OR
LIN LIGHTING
X903 20GY/LG
HORN SWITCH RETURN
G106 20VT/OR
EVIC MUX SIGNAL 1
G206 20VT/OR
EVIC MUX SIGNAL 2
D500 20WT
LIN BUS
D502 20WT/OR
LIN SLAVE FEED
X3 20DG/VT
HORN SWITCH SIGNAL
D501 20WT/LG
LIN SLAVE RETURN
G907 20VT
EVIC/NAV MUX RETURN
10
SWITCH-STOP LAMP - GRAY 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
B15 20DG/WT
Z912 20BK/OR
GROUND
B16 20LB/DG
F202 20PK/GY
B29 20DG/WT
BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
A103 20PK/DB
FUSED B(+)
8W - 80 - 156
LX
SWITCH-SUNROOF - BLACK 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q4 20OR/YL (LHD)
Q4 22OR/YL (RHD)
Q6 20OR/LG (LHD)
Q6 22OR/LG (RHD)
Q5 20OR/LB (LHD)
Q5 22OR/LB (RHD)
Q3 20OR/TN (LHD)
Q3 22OR/TN (RHD)
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 (BASE) - LT. GRAY 8 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F881 14PK
G167 20VT/LB
Z912 14BK/OR
GROUND
Q15 14OR/LB
Q21 16OR/WT
DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
Q11 16OR/LG
DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
G161 20VT/DG
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 (BASE) - LT. GRAY 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q411 14OR/WT
Q412 14OR/LB
Q612 14OR/DB
Q611 14OR/GY
Q26 14OR/GY
MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER (DOWN)
Q16 14OR/TN
MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER (UP)
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 (EXCEPT BASE) - LT. GRAY 8 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F881 14PK
Q611 14OR/GY
Q411 14OR/WT
Q612 14OR/DB
Q15 14OR/LB
Z912 18BK/OR
GROUND
Q412 14OR/LB
LX
8W - 80 - 157
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 (EXCEPT BASE) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q221 20GY/OR
DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH MUX
Q222 20OR/GY
PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH

MUX
G161 20VT/DG
Z421 20BK/BR
DRIVER EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN
G167 20VT/LB
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER (BASE) - LT. GRAY 8 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
Q26 14OR/GY
MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER (DOWN)
Q22 16OR/VT
PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
Q12 16OR/BR
PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
Q15 14OR/LB
F881 14PK
G160 20VT/LG
P37 20LG/TN
Q16 14OR/TN
MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER (UP)
SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER EXPRESS (EXCEPT BASE) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
E34 20OR/TN
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH ILLUMINATION DRIVER
Q336 20OR/GY
PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX
Q936 20OR/LG
P37 20LG/TN
G160 20VT/LG
F880 20PK/DG
THROTTLE BODY (GAS) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K22 18BR/OR
F855 18PK/YL
5 VOLT SUPPLY
K124 18DB/GY
ETC MOTOR (+)
K122 18BR/DG
K126 18DB/LG
ETC MOTOR (-)
K922 18BR/DB
TP SENSOR RETURN
8W - 80 - 158
LX
TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE - GRAY 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
C918 20BK/LB
F891 20PK/GY
5 VOLT SUPPLY
C18 20LB/BR
A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER SIGNAL
TRANSMITTER-INTRUSION SENSOR (RHD) - BLACK 3 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
A645 20RD/VT
INTRUSION TRANSMITTER SENSOR SIGNAL
G945 20VT/DG
TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT (TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F500 20DG/PK
D508 20WT/GY
TIRE PRESSURE BUS
Z902 20BK/BR (LX48)
GROUND
Z902 20BK/LB (LX49)
GROUND
Z902 20BK/BR (LX48)
GROUND
Z902 20BK/LB (LX49)
GROUND
TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT (TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F500 20DG/PK
D508 20WT/GY
TIRE PRESSURE BUS
Z901 20BK/TN (LX48)
GROUND
Z901 20BK/DG (LX49)
GROUND
Z901 20BK/TN (LX48)
GROUND
Z901 20BK/DG (LX49)
GROUND
LX
8W - 80 - 159
TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT REAR (TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR) - BLACK 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
F500 20DG/PK
D508 20WT/GY
TIRE PRESSURE BUS
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
Z911 20BK/WT
GROUND
VALVE-EGR (DIESEL) - 4 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K34 20GY/YL
EGR SOLENOID CONTROL
K343 18RD/DG
Z904 18BR
GROUND
VALVE-EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL (DIESEL) - 6 WAY

CAV
CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
K315 20GY/PK
EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE MOTOR (-)
K390 20DG/PK

RETURN
K313 20DG/GY

SUPPLY
K314 20GY/RD
EGR AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE MOTOR (+)
K312 20GY/OR

SIGNAL
LX
8W-91 CONNECTOR/GROUND/SPLICE LOCATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
CONNECTOR/GROUND/SPLICE LOCATION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
8W - 91 - 1
8W - 91 - 2
LX
CONNECTOR/GROUND/SPLICE LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
This section provides illustrations identifying connector, ground and splice locations in the vehicle. Connector,
ground and splice indexes are provided. Use the wiring diagrams in each section for connector, ground and splice
identification. Refer to the appropriate index for the proper figure number. For items that are not shown in this section N/S is placed in the Fig. column.
CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Actuator-Blend Door-Left
BK
Left Side of HVAC Unit
36
Actuator-Blend Door-Right
(ATC)
BK
Center of HVAC Unit
34
Actuator-Mode Door
BK
Left Side of HVAC Unit
36
Actuator-Recirculation Door
BK
Right Side of HVAC Unit
35
Airbag-Driver Squib 1
BK/YL
At Steering Wheel
42
Airbag-Driver Squib 2
BR/YL
At Steering Wheel
42
Airbag-Passenger Squib
YL
Passenger side of Instrument Panel
37, 38, 49
Airbag-Side Curtain-Left
YL
Body Behind Left Rear Seat
62, 63
Airbag-Side Curtain-Right
YL
Body Behind Right Rear Seat
64, 74
Amplifier-Antenna-Backlite C1
BK
Upper Right Backlite
64, 73, 78
BK
Amplifier-Radio C1
NAT
Driver Side of Instrument Panel
37, 39, 40
Amplifier-Radio C2
WT
37, 39, 40
Amplifier-Subwoofer (SRT8)
BK
Center Rear Shelf
64
Antenna Cable-Satellite Radio

No. 1
BL
Rear Center Headliner
71, 72
Antenna Cable-Satellite Radio

No. 2
WT
71, 72
Antenna-Global Positioning
System (Navigation)
GY
Antenna-Satellite No. 1
BL
Left Rear Trunk
71, 72
Antenna-Satellite No. 2
WT
Left Rear Trunk
71, 72
Assembly-Electrohydraulic
Control Unit (NAG1)
BK
Right Side Transmission
7, 33
Assembly-Exhaust Gas
Recirculation valve (2.7L)
BK
Rear of Engine
17
BK
Rear of Engine
20
BK
Right Front Engine
24
Assembly-Natural Vacuum
Leak Detection (Except
Export)
BK
In Right Rear Wheel Well
64, 65
N/S
Upper Right Backlite
64, 73, 78
N/S
N/S
LX
8W - 91 - 3
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Assembly-Shifter Lever
(Console NAG1)
BK
Below Center Console
53
Assembly-Shifter Lever (RLE)
WT
53
Assembly-Transmission
Solenoid/Pressure Switch
LT-BR
At Top of Transmission
17, 20
Assembly-Variable Line
Pressure (RLE)
BK
On Transmission
N/S
Backlite-Antenna
NAT
Right Backlite
73
Backlite-Electric Heated
(POWER)
BK
Right Backlite
73
Backlite-Electric Heated
(GROUND)
BK
Left Backlite
62, 78
Battery-Negative
Right Rear Trunk
80, 81
Battery-Positive
Right Rear Trunk
81, 82
Booster-Active Brake
BK
Left Rear Engine Compartment
C100 (2.7L/3.5L)
BK
Right Engine Compartment
7, 9, 17, 20
C100 (5.7L/SRT8)
BK
7, 25, 28, 29
C100 (DIESEL)
BK
8, 9, 30
C101 (5.7L
DK GY
26
C102
LT GY/BK
Passenger Side of Instrument Panel
37, 38, 47, 53
C103 (LX48)
DK GY
Right Front Engine Compartment
C104
BK
52, 53
C105
BR
52, 53
C106 (NAG1)
LT GY
Left Kick Panel
N/S
C107
BK
Top Front of Engine
28
C108 (DIESEL)
BK
Right Rear Engine Compartment
7, 15
C200
NAT/BK
37, 38, 47, 52, 53
C201
GN/BK
37, 38, 47, 52, 53
C202
NAT
Right Side of HVAC Unit
35, 37, 38, 47
C203
BK
Driver Side Kick Panel
37, 39, 40, 43, 51, 54
C204
NAT
Right Side Instrument Panel
37, 39, 49, 66
C205
NAT
Left Instrument Panel
36, 37, 38, 50
C206
NAT/WT
At Steering Wheel
42
C207
BK
37, 39, 47, 53, 54
C208 (Column NAG1)
NAT
At Bottom of Steering Column
N/S
C300
NAT
Front of Driver Door
51, 54, 60
C301
NAT
Front of Passenger Door
52, 53, 60
C302 (Body)
NAT
Front of Left Rear Door
57
C302 (Door)
NAT
Front of Left Rear Door
61
C303 (Body)
NAT
Front of Right Rear Door
58
C303 (Door)
NAT
At Right B-Pillar
61
C304 (LX49)
LT GY
Top Front of Liftgate
78
C305 (LX49)
LT GY
Top Front of Liftgate
78
8W - 91 - 4
LX
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
C306
BK
Right Rear Body
75, 76, 86
C307 (LX48)
BK
Left Rear Taillamp Assembly
76, 85
C308 (LX48)
BK
Right Rear Taillamp Assembly
76, 85
C309 (LX49)
DK GY
Left Rear Fascia
83, 84, 86
C310 (LX49)
DK GY
Right Rear Fascia
83, 84, 86
C311
NAT
Rear of Sunroof
66, 70
C313
LT GY
Below Driver Seat
51, 55
C314
LT GY
Below Passenger Seat
52, 53, 56
C315
LT GY
Rear Driver Seat
N/S
C316
LT GY
Passenger Seat
56
C317
NAT
Left Kick Panel
37, 38, 40, 43, 59
Capacitor-Ignition-No. 1
BK
Right Side Engine Near T/O for Ignition

Coil No. 5
N/S
(6.1L)
BK
At Rear of Left Engine Head
N/S
(2.7L/5.7L)
BK
Top Left of Engine
18
Cluster C1
GY
Rear of Instrment Cluster
37, 39, 44
Cluster C2
GY
37, 39, 44
Cluster C3
WT
37, 39, 44
Clutch-A/C Compressor
BK
Front of Engine
18, 26, 29
Clutch-A/C Compressor
(DIESEL)
BK
On Engine Harness
N/S
Coil-Ignition-No. 1 (2.7L/3.5L)
BK
Top Right Front of Engine
N/S
BK
Top Left Front of Engine
26, 28, 29
BK
18, 22
BK
25, 28
BK
Top Right of Engine
N/S
BK
Top Left of Engine
26, 28, 29
BK
Top Left of Engine
18, 22
BK
Top Right of Engine
25, 28
BK
Top Right Rear of Engine
N/S
BK
Top Left Rear of Engine
26, 28, 29
BK
18, 22
BK
25, 28
BK
26, 28, 29
BK
25, 28
Connector-Interface-Police/
Taxi
NAT
At Mini Console
N/S
Connector-Police Accessories
Lt. GY
Control-A/C-Heater C1 (ATC)
GY
At Center Stack
37, 38, 46
Control-A/C-Heater C1 (MTC)
BK
At Center Stack
37, 38, 46
Control-A/C-Heater C2
GY
At Center Stack
37, 38, 46
N/S
LX
8W - 91 - 5
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Control-A/C-Heater C3 (MTC)
BK
At Center Stack
37, 46
Data Link Connector
BK
Driver Side of Instrument Panel Above

Pedals
37, 39, 40, 43
Diode-No. 1 (NAG1)
N/S
Diode-No. 2
N/S
Diode-Zener
N/S
Display-Park Assist
(Parktronics)
BK
Center Rear Headliner, Above Backlite
66
Fan-Radiator C1
DK GY
Right Front of Engine Compartment
3, 4
Fan-Radiator C2 (SRT8/
DIESEL)
DK-GY
3, 4
Flasher-Headlamp C1
(Police)
LT GY
N/S
Flasher-Headlamp C2
(Police)
LT GY
N/S
Fuse Block A (Police)
Right Kick Pannel
53
Fuse Block B (Police)
Right Kick Pannel
53
Fuse/Relay Block 1 (DIESEL)
Behind Right Shocktower, Engine

Compartment
7, 15
Fuse/Relay Block 2 (DIESEL)
Behind Right Shocktower, Engine

Compartment
7, 15
Generator (GAS)
BK
Right Front of Engine
17, 20, 25, 28
Generator (DIESEL)
BL
On Engine Harness
N/S
Generator-Eyelet
17, 20, 25, 28
Glow Plug-No. 1
BK
Right Top of Engine
31
Glow Plug-No. 2
BK
Left Top of Engine
31
Glow Plug-No. 3
BK
Right Top of Engine
31
Glow Plug-No. 4
BK
Left Top of Engine
31
Glow Plug-No. 5
BK
Right Top of Engine
31
Glow Plug-No. 6
BK
Left Top of Engine
31
Heater-Cabin (DIESEL)
LT GY
At Left Side of HVAC
53
Heater-Crankcase Vent
(DIESEL)
BK
Top Center of Engine
N/S
Heater-Seat Back-Left
GY
Near Driver Seat Back Pivot
N/S
Heater-Seat Back-Right
GY
Near Passenger Seat Back Pivot
56
Heater-Seat Cushion-Left
GN
Under Driver Seat
55
Heater-Seat Cushion-Right
GN
Under Passenger Seat
56
Horn-No. 1
BK
Horn-No. 2
BK
Injector-Fuel-No.1 (2.7L/3.5L)
BK
N/S
Injector-Fuel-No.1 (5.7L)
BK
26
BK
At Left Side of Intake Manifold
29
Injector-Fuel-No.1 (DIESEL)
BK
Right Top of Engine
31
BK
18
8W - 91 - 6
LX
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
BK
25, 28
BK
Left Top of Engine
31
BK
Top Right of Engine
N/S
BK
Top Left of Engine
26
BK
29
BK
Right Top of Engine
31
BK
Top Left of Engine
18
BK
Top Right of Engine
25, 28
BK
Left Top of Engine
31
BK
N/S
BK
26
BK
29
BK
Right Top of Engine
31
BK
18
BK
25, 28
BK
Left Top of Engine
31
BK
26
BK
29
BK
25, 28
Lamp-Back-Up-Left (300C)
GY
Right Tail Lamp Assembly
85
Lamp-Back-Up-Left (300T)
GY
Left Tail Lamp Assembly
83
Lamp-Back-Up-Left (LX49)
LT GY
84
Lamp-Back-Up-Right (300C)
GY
85
Lamp-Back-Up-Right (300T)
GY
83
Lamp-Back-Up-Right (LX49)
LT GY
84
Lamp-Cargo (LX48 Chrysler)
BK
Bottom Center of Backlite
64
Lamp-Cargo (LX48 Dodge)
WT
64
Lamp-Cargo (LX49)
GY
Rear of Liftgate
78
Lamp-Center High Mounted

Stop (LX48 Chrysler)
LT GY
64

Stop (LX48 Dodge)
BK
64

Stop (LX49)
NAT
Right of Liftgate
78
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Front
Door (Except Base)
WT
At Bottom of Door
60
Lamp-Courtesy-Left Rear
BK
Left Rear of Headliner
66
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Front
Door (Except Base)
WT
At Bottom of Door
60
Lamp-Courtesy-Right Rear
BK
Right Rear of Headliner
66
Rear of Overhead Console
68
Inside of Left Front Fascia
Lamp-Dome (Police)
Lamp-Fog-Left Front
BK
LX
8W - 91 - 7
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear (300C

Export)
GN
Left Rear Taillamp Assembly
85
Lamp-Fog-Left Rear (LX49

Export)
GY
Left Rear Fascia
86
Lamp-Fog-Right Front
BK
Inside of Right Front Fascia
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear (300C

Export)
GN
Right Rear Taillamp Assembly
85
Lamp-Fog-Right Rear (LX49

Export)
GY
Right Rear Fascia
86
Lamp-Glove Box
BK
37, 38, 49
Lamp-High Beam-Left
BK
Left Front Lamp Assembly
1, 4
Lamp-High Beam-Right
BK
Right Front Lamp Assembly
1, 2
Lamp-High Intensity
Discharge-Left (HID Lamps)
DK GY
Lamp-High Intensity
Discharge-Right ( HID
Lamps)
DK GY
Lamp-License (Except 300C

Export)
BK
Center of Rear Fascia
86
Lamp-License-Left (Export)
BK
86
Lamp-License-Right (Export)
BK
86
Lamp-Low Beam-Left (Except

HID Lamps)
GY
1, 4
Lamp-Low Beam-Right
(Except HID Lamps)
GY
1, 2
Lamp-Park/Turn-Left Front
BK
1, 4
Lamp-Park/Turn-Right Front
BK
1, 2
Lamp-PRNDL
WT
53
Lamp-Reading-Front
NAT
Overhead Console
69
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Front

(LX48)
BK
Behind Left Front Fender
Lamp-Side Marker-Left Rear

(300T)
BK
83
Lamp-Side Marker-Right
Front (LX48)
BK
Behind Right Front Fender
Lamp-Side Marker-Right Rear

(300T)
BK
83
Lamp-Side Repeater-Left
(Export)
BK
Behind Left Front Fender
Lamp-Side Repeater-Right
(Export)
BK
Behind Right Front Fender
Lamp-Spot-Left (Police)
Top of Left A-Pillar
67
Lamp-Spot-Right (Police)
Top of Right A-Pillar
67
85
Lamp-Tail Park-Left (300C

Except Export)
GN
8W - 91 - 8
LX
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Lamp-Tail Park-Right (300C

Except Export)
GN
85
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Left
(300C)
BK
85
Lamp-Tail Stop/Park-Right
(300C)
BK
85
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Left
(300T)
BK
83
Lamp-Tail Stop/Turn-Right
(300T)
BK
83
Lamp-Tail Turn-Left (300C

Except Export)
GY
85
Lamp-Tail Turn-Left (300C

Export)
NAT
85
Lamp-Tail Turn-Right (300C

Except Export)
NAT
85
Lamp-Tail Turn-Right (300C

Export)
GY
85
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Left (LX49)
BR
84
Lamp-Tail/Stop-Right (LX49)
BR
84
Lamp-Turn-Left Rear (LX49)
TN
84
Lamp-Turn-Right Rear (LX49)
TN
84
Lamp-Underhood (Police)
BK
Right Rear Under Hood
16
Lamp-Vanity-Left
BK
Left Visor
66
Lamp-Vanity-Right
BK
Right Visor
66
Latch-Door-Decklid (LX48)
BK
At Decklid Latch
77
Latch-Door-Driver
BK
Left Front Door
60
Latch-Door-Left Rear
BK
Rear of Left Rear Door
61
Latch-Door-Liftgate (LX49)
BK
At Liftgate Latch
78
Latch-Door-Passenger
BK
Right Front Door
60
Latch-Door-Right Rear
BK
Rear of Right Rear Door
61
Lighter-Cigar
GY
Center Stack
37, 38, 47
Media System-Monitor/DVD
LT-GY
Rear Center Console
N/S
Mirror-Inside Rearview C1
(Except Base)
BK
Center Top of Windshield
50
Mirror-Inside Rearview C2
(Hands Free)
BK
Center Top of Windshield
50
Mirror-Outside RearviewDriver (Except Memory)
NAT
Driver Door
60
Mirror-Outside RearviewDriver (Memory)
BK
Driver Door
60
Mirror-Outside RearviewPassenger (Except Memory)
NAT
Passenger Door
60
Mirror-Outside RearviewPassenger (Memory)
BK
Passenger Door
60
LX
8W - 91 - 9
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Module-Antilock Brakes
BK
Module-Brake (Trailer Tow)
BL
Left Kick Panel
51
Module-Clock Analog
NAT
Top Center Indstrument Panel
37, 38, 46
Module-Door-Driver C1
BK
Middle of Driver Door
60
BK
60
(Memory)
GY
60
(Memory)
DK GY
60
Module-Door-Passenger C1
BK
Middle of Passenger Door
N/S
BK
N/S
(Memory)
DK GY
N/S
Module-Electronic Overhead
BK
Overhead Console
66, 69
Module-Electronic Shift C1
(Column NAG1)
BK
N/S
Module-Electronic Shift C2
(Column NAG1)
BK
N/S
Module-Engine Control C1
(DIESEL)
BK
N/S
Module-Engine Control C2
(DIESEL)
BK
8, 9
Module-Front Blower Power

C1 (ATC)
BK
Center HVAC Unit
34
Module-Front Blower Power

C2 (ATC)
BK
Center HVAC Unit
34
Module-Front Control C1
BK
Module-Front Control C2
BK
Module-Front Control IPM
BK
At End of IPM
N/S
Module-Fuel Pump
BK
Top of Fuel Tank
57
Module-Glow Plug
Top Center of Engine
31, 32
Module-Glow Plug-Eyelet
In Starter Harness
N/S
Module-Hands Free
DK GY
37, 47
Module-Headlamp Leveling
(Export)
BK
2, 6
Module-Heated Seats
BK
53, 54
Module-Integrated Power C1
GN
LT GY
BK
LT GY
BL
Module-Integrated PowerEyelet
14
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi
C1
GY
In Mini Console, at Center Stack end
48
8W - 91 - 10
LX
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Module-Interface-Police/Taxi
C2
DK GY
In Mini Console, at Center Stack end
48
Module-Intrusion Transceiver
(RHD)
BK
Left Side of Instrument Pannel
38
Module-Memory Seat C1
BK
Below Driver Seat
51, 55
BK
Below Driver Seat
55
NAT
Below Driver Seat
55
WT
Below Driver Seat
55
BK
Below Driver Seat
55
Module-Occupant
Classification C1 (Except
Export)
BK
53, 56
Module-Occupant
Classification C2 (Except
Export)
BK
56
Controller C1
YL
In Center Console
53
Controller C2
YL
In Center Console
37, 38, 43
Module-Park Assist
(Parktronics)
BK
Behind Right Rear Seat
76
C1 (LHD)
BK/BK
C1 (RHD)
BK/BK
C2
BK/OR
17, 20, 25, 28, 29
C3 (LHD)
BK/NAT
C3 (RHD)
BK/NAT
C4
BK/GN
17, 20
Module-Sentry Key Remote

Entry
BK
Steering Column
37, 39, 40
Right Side of Steering Column
39
Module-Steering ColumnLock (RHD)

Module-Steering Control
BK
Steering Column
37, 39, 41, 44
Module-Traffic Information
Receiver C1 (EXPORT)
BK
Instrument Panel Near Radio
N/S
BK
N/S
BK
N/S
Module-Transmission Control
C1 (NAG1)
BK
Below Steering Column
39, 43, 51, 54
LX
8W - 91 - 11
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Module-Transmission Control
C2 (NAG1)
BK
Below Steering Column
8, 43, 51, 54
Motor-Adjustable Pedals
NAT
At Adjustable Pedal Assembly
53
Motor-Blower-Front
BK
Right Side HVAC Unit
34, 35
Motor-Boost Pressure Servo
NAT
On Turbocharger Assembly
31
Motor-Headlamp Washer
(HID Lamps)
BK
Behind Right Front Bumper
Motor-Intake Swirl Servo
BK
At Top Center of Engine, Intake Valley
31
Motor/Module-Sunroof
LT GY
70
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver
Horizontal
GY
Below Driver Seat
55
Recliner (Except Memory)
NAT
Driver Seat Back
N/S
Recliner (Memory)
BL
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front
Driver Vertical
GY
Below Driver Seat
55
Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front
Passenger Vertical
GY
Front Passenger Seat
56
Motor-Seat AdjusterPassenger Horizontal
GY
56
Driver Vertical
GY
Rear Driver Seat
N/S
Passenger Vertical
GY
56
Motor-Steering Telescope
(Memory)
NAT
Steering Column
37, 40
Motor-Steering Tilt (Memory)
BK
Steering Column
37, 40
Motor-Window-Driver (Base)
LT GY
60
Motor-Window-Driver-Express
(Except Base)
LT GY
60
Motor-Window-Left Rear
LT GY
Middle of Left Rear Door
61
Motor-Window-Passenger
(Base)
LT GY
60
Motor-Window-Passenger
Express (Except Base)
LT GY
60
Motor-Window-Right Rear
LT GY
Middle of Right Rear Door
61
Motor-Wiper-Front (RHD)
BK
7, 15
Motor-Wiper-Front (LHD)
BK
Motor-Wipe-Rear (LX49)
BK
Rear Decklid
78
Post-Pass Through-Eyelet
(Battery Side)
Right Front Kick Panel
79
Post-Pass Through-Eyelet
(Starter Side)
Right Wheel Well
10
Power Distribution CenterEyelet
Right Rear Trunk
81
N/S
8W - 91 - 12
LX
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Power Outlet-Console
BK
In Center of Console
53
Power Outlet-Rear (LX49)
BK
Right Rear Cargo Area
65, 74
Pump-Washer-Windshield
NAT
Radio C1
DK GY
Rear of Radio
37, 38, 45
Radio C2
BK
Rear of Radio
37, 38, 45
Radio-Antenna (Navigation)
GY
Radio-Antenna
BK
Rear of Radio
37, 38, 49
Receiver-Intrusion Sensor
(RHD)
BK
Above the Glove Box
N/S
Receiver-Satellite
BK
Left Rear Side Trunk
59
Relay-Headlamp Washer
(HID Lamps)
LT GY
Below Right Front Lamp Housing
Resistor Block-Blower
Motor-Front (MTC)
BK
Center HVAC Unit
34
Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver
(LHD)
BK
Left B-Pillar
57
Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver
(RHD)
BK
At Base of Right B-Pillar
58
Seat Belt-TensionerPassenger (LHD)
BK
Right B-Pillar
58
Seat Belt-TensionerPassenger (RHD)
BK
At Base of Left B-Pillar
57
Sensor-Accelerator Pedal
Position
BK
53, 54
N/S
Sensor-Adjustable Pedals
BK
51
Sensor-Ambient Air
Temperature
BK
At Front Side of Air Control Valve
31
Sensor-Boost Pressure
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level
(LHD)
GY
Sensor-Brake Fluid Level

(RHD)
GY
7, 15
Sensor-Brake Pedal Travel
BK
Sensor-Brake Pressure
BK
Sensor-Camshaft Position
(2.7L/3.5L)
BK
Top Front of Engine
19
(5.7L)
GY
Top Front of Engine
N/S
(6.1L)
GY
N/S
On Top of Right Valve Cover
31
(DIESEL)
Sensor-Crankshaft Position
(2.7L)
BK
Right Rear of Engine
17
(3.5L)
BK
20
LX
8W - 91 - 13
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
(5.7L/6.1L)
BK
25, 28
(DIESEL)
BK
Left Rear Engine Block, Near

Bellhousing
30
Sensor-Dynamics
BK
53
Sensor-Engine Coolant
Temperature
BK
Front of Engine
19
Temperature (6.1L)
BK
Left Front of Engine
N/S
Temperature (DIESEL)
BK
Top of Left Engine Head, Under Center

of Fuel Rail
31
Sensor-Evaporator
Temperature
BK
Center HVAC Unit
34
Sensor-Exhaust Differential
Pressure (LHD DIESEL)
Sensor-Exhaust Differential
Pressure (RHD DIESEL)
Sensor-Exhaust Gas
Pressure (DIESEL)
Next to EGR Valve, Center of Engine

side
30, 31
Sensor-Front Impact-Left
GY
Left Front Engine Compartment
Sensor-Front Impact-Right
GY
Sensor-Fuel Pressure
(DIESEL)
BK
At Rear of Right Fuel Rail
31
On Front of High Pressure Fuel Pump
31
Sensor-Fuel Temperature
(DIESEL)
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Left
(Export)
BK
N/S
Sensor-Headlamp Level-Right
(Export)
BK
Under Right Side Body
2, 64
On Rear of Air Filter Box
32
Sensor-Inlet Air Pressure

(DIESEL)
Sensor-Inlet Air Temperature
BK
Top of Engine, or in Air Intake System
18, 21, 25
Sensor-Input Speed
BK
Right Side of Transmission
17, 20
Sensor-Intake Air
Temperature (DIESEL)
BK
On Rear of Air Inlet Tube, Just before

Air Control Valve
31
Sensor-Knock No. 1
BK
Rear of Engine
18, 26, 29
Sensor-Knock No. 2
(5.7L/6.1L)
BK
25, 28
Sensor-Manifold Absolute
Pressure
GY
Top of Engine, or in Intake Manifold
18, 21, 22, 26, 28, 29
Sensor-Mass Air Flow

(DIESEL)
BK
At Air Filter Box
32
Sensor-Oil Pressure (5.7L)
BK
N/S
Sensor-Oil Pressure (6.1L)
BK
28
Left Front of Engine Near Fuel Quantity

Solenoid
N/S
Sensor-Oil Pressure
(DIESEL)
8W - 91 - 14
LX
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Sensor-Oil Temperature
(5.7L/6.1L)
BK
25, 28
Sensor-Oil Temperature
(DIESEL)
BK
At Rear of Oil Pan
30
Sensor-Output Speed
BK
17, 20
AT Rear of Engine
N/S
Sensor-Oxygen (DIESEL)
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front
(2.7L/ 3.5L)
BK
17, 20
(5.7L)
BK
25, 26
(6.1L)
BK
28, 29
Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear
BK
8, 11, 12, 13
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front
(2.7L/3.5L)
BK
Left Side of Engine
18, 21
(5.7L)
BK
Right Side of Engine
25
(6.1L)
BK
28, 29
Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear
BK
Lower Rear of Engine Compartment
11, 12, 13
Sensor-Park Assist-No. 7
BK
Right Rear Fascia
86
BK
Right Rear Fascia
86
BK
Left Rear Fascia
86
BK
Left Rear Fascia
86
Sensor-Post-Catalyst Exhaust
Gas Temperature (DIESEL)
BK
At Rear of Engine
N/S
Sensor-Pre-Catalyst Exhaust
Gas Temperature (DIESEL)
BK
At Rear of Engine
N/S
Sensor-Rain (Auto wipers)
BK
At Inside Rearview Mirror
50
Sensor-Seat Track PositionDriver
GY
Below Driver Seat
51, 54, 55
Sensor-Seat Weight-Left
Front (Except Export)
BK
56
Sensor-Seat Weight-Left Rear

(Except Export)
BK
56
Sensor-Seat Weight-Right
Front (Except Export)
BK
56
Sensor-Seat Weight-Right
Rear (Except Export)
BK
56
Sensor-Shift Lever Position

(Column NAG1)
BK
Steering Column
N/S
Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1
GY
Left B-Pillar
57
Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2
GY
Rear of Left Rear Door
62, 63
Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1
GY
Right B-Pillar
58
Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2
GY
64, 65
Sensor-Sun (ATC)
BK
Top Center Instrument Panel
37, 38, 45
LX
8W - 91 - 15
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Sensor-Transmission Range
LT GN
17, 20
Sensor-Washer Fluid
Level-Front
LT GY
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABSLeft Front
BK
Left Front Wheel Well
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Left
Front (Except ABS)
BK
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABSRear
BK
Right Front of Cargo Pan
65
Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABSRight Front
BK
Right Front Wheel Well
Sensor-Wheel Speed-Right
Front (Except ABS)
BK
Right Front Wheel Well
Siren
BK
Solenoid-Fuel Pressure
(DIESEL)
NAT
At Front of Left Fuel Rail
31
Solenoid-Fuel Quantity
(DIESEL)
BK
On Front of Hi Pressure Fuel Pump
31
Solenoid-Manifold Tuning
Valve (2.7L/3.5L)
GY
Front of Engine
19, 21
Solenoid-Multi Displacement
System Cyl 1 (5.7L MDS)
BK
In Valley Under Intake
N/S
BK
N/S
BK
N/S
BK
N/S
Solenoid-Proportional Purge
(GAS)
BK
Solenoid-Short Runner Valve

(3.5L)
GY
Top of Engine
19, 21
N/S
Solenoid-Starter
Speaker-Insturment
Panel-Center (Highline)
WT
37, 38, 45
Speaker-Insturment
Panel-Left
WT
Top Left Instrument Panel
37, 38, 40
Speaker-Insturment
Panel-Right
WT
Right Instrument Panel
37, 39, 49
Speaker-Left Front Door
WT
Bottom of Door
60
Speaker-Left Rear (LX48)
WT
Left Rear Shelf
62
Speaker-Left Rear (LX49)
WT
Body Behind Left Rear Seat
63
Speaker-Right Front Door
WT
Bottom of Door
60
Speaker-Right Rear (LX48)
WT
Right Rear Shelf
64
Speaker-Right Rear (LX49)
WT
Body Behind Right Rear Seat
65
8W - 91 - 16
LX
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Speaker-Subwoofer (Highline
Except SRT8)
WT
Center Rear Shelf
64
Speaker-Subwoofer (SRT8)
BK
Center Rear Shelf
62
Starter (2.7L/3.5L/5.7L AWD)
BK
Left Rear of Engine
18, 21
Starter (5.7L RWD)
NAT
Right Rear fo Engine
25
Starter (6.1L)
NAT
Right Rear fo Engine
28
Rear of Engine
N/S
Starter (DIESEL)
Starter-Fusible Link-Eyelet
(2.7L/3.5L/5.7L AWD)
Left Side of Engine
18, 21, 23
(5.7L RWD)
Right Side of Engnie
25, 27
(6.1L)
Right Rear of Engnie
28
Starter-Post-Pass ThroughEyelet (2.7L/3.5L)
Left Side of Engine
23
Starter-Post-Pass ThroughEyelet (V8)
27
Switch-Adjustable Pedals
WT
Right Side of Driver Seat
N/S
Switch-Autostick (Column
NAG1)
WT
Steering Column
N/S
Switch-Bank
BK
37, 38, 46
Switch-Decklid Release
(LX48)
BK
37, 44
Switch-Decklid Release
(RHD)
BK
39
Switch-Headlamp
BK
37, 39, 44
Switch-Heated Seat-Left
BK
Center Stack
37, 38, 43, 47
Switch-Heated Seat-Right
BK
Center Stack
37, 38, 43, 47
Switch-Horn
BK
Steering Wheel
42
Switch-Ignition (LHD)
BK
In IP to Right of Steering Cloumn
37, 40
Switch-Ignition C1 (RHD)
BK
39
Switch-Ignition C2 (RHD)
BK
39
Switch-Liftgate Release
(LX49)
BK
Left Rear Liftgate
78
Switch-Memory Set
BK
60
Switch-Mirror
LT GY
60
Switch-Oil Level
BK
Bottom Left of Oil Pan
30
Switch-Oil Pressure
(2.7L/3.5L)
LT GN
Front of Engine
N/S
Switch-Parking Brake
BK
Base of Parking Brake
51
Switch-Power Window-Left
Rear
LT GY
Left Rear Door
61
Switch-Power Window-Right
Rear
LT GY
Right Rear Door
61
LX
8W - 91 - 17
CONNECTOR NAME/
NUMBER
COLOR
LOCATION
FIG.
Switch-Seat Belt-Driver
(LX48)
LT GY
Below Driver Seat
55
Switch-Seat Belt-Driver
(LX49)
LT GY
Below Left B-Pillar
51
Switch-Seat Belt-Passenger
LT GY
53
Switch-Seat-Driver (Except
Memory)
BK
N/S
Switch-Seat-Driver (Memory)
GY
N/S
Switch-Seat-Passenger
BK
Side of Passenger Seat
56
Switch-Security Hood (LHD)
BK
7, 15
Switch-Security Hood (RHD)
BK
Switch-Steering-Left
(Premium)
BK
Left Steering Wheel
42
Switch-Steering-Right
(Premium)
BK
Right Steering Wheel
42
Switch-Stop Lamp
GY
Base of Brake Pedal
51, 54
Switch-Sunroof
BK
Overhead Console
69
Switch-Window/Door
Lock-Driver C1 (Base)
LT GY
60
Switch-Window/Door
Lock-Driver C2 (Base)
LT GY
60
Switch-Window/Door
Lock-Driver Express C1
(Except Base)
LT GY
60
Switch-Window/Door
Lock-Driver Express C2
(Except Base)
BK
60
Switch-Window/Door
Lock-Passenger (Base)
LT GY
Middle of Passenger Door, Similar to

Driver Door
N/S
Switch-Window/Door
Lock-Passenger Express
(Except Base)
BK
Middle of Passenger Door, Similar to

Driver Door
N/S
Throttle Body
BK
Top of Intake Manifold
18, 21, 26, 28
Transducer-A/C Pressure
GY
8, 9, 32
Transmitter-Intrusion Sensor
(RHD)
BK
Near Glove Box
N/S
Transponder-Tire PressureLeft Front
BK
Left Front Side of Engine Compartment
Transponder-Tire PressureRight Front
BK
Transponder-Tire PressureRight Rear
BK
High in Right Rear Wheel Well
64, 65
Valve-Air Flow Control
BK
Right Front Corner of Engine
31
On Top of Engine, Left Rear
30
31
Valve-EGR (DIESEL)
Valve-EGR Airflow Control
(DIESEL)
BK
8W - 91 - 18
LX
GROUNDS
GROUND
LOCATION
FIG.
G100
Left Front of Engine Compartment
G101
G102
Right of Engine Compartment
6, 15
G104
Right of Engine Compartment
17, 20, 25, 28, 29
G105 (2.7L/3.5L)
On Engine Near T/O for Ignition Coil No. 5
N/S
G105 (5.7L/6.1L)
Rear of Engine
25, 28
G106 (2.7L/3.5L)
Left Side of Engine
18, 21
G106 (5.7L/6.1L)
Rear of Engine
25, 28, 29
G107 (3.5L)
Right Side of Engine Near Generator
N/S
G108
Left Side of Engine
21
G109 (SRT8)
On Right Shock Tower, Near Purge Solenoid
28, 29
G110
On Engine Harness
N/S
G111
31
G200 (LHD)
Left Instrument Panel Near T/O for Ignition Switch
37, 40
G200 (RHD)
Left Side of Center Stack
38
G201
Passenger side of Instrument Panel
37, 38, 49
G202
Driver Side of Instrument Panel Near T/O for Cluster C3
37, 39, 40
G300
Below Left B-Pillar
51, 52
G301
Below Right B-Pillar
53, 54
G302
Right Front of Cargo Pan
65
G303
Right Rear Cargo Pan
80
G304
Next to Decklid Latch
77
SPLICES
SPLICE
LOCATION
FIG.
S100
Rear of Engine
18, 21, 25, 28, 29
S101
N/S
S102
N/S
S105
Right Rear of Engine Compartment
17, 20, 25, 28
S106
17, 20, 25, 28
S107 (2.7L)
Top of Engine
18
S107 (3.5L)
Top of Engine Between Take Outs for Fuel Injectors No. 3

and No. 5
N/S
S107 (5.7L/6.1L)
Top of Engine
25, 28, 29
S108 (2.7L)
Rear of Engine
18
S108 (3.5L)
Between Take Outs for Fuel Injectors No. 4 and No. 6
22
S108 (5.7L)
Top of Engine Between Fuel Injectors No. 5 and No. 7
26
S108 (SRT8)
Right Rear Top of Engine, Next to Ign Coil No. 8
28, 29
S109
20, 25, 28
S110
Rear Engine Compartment
17, 21, 25, 28
S111
Left Side of Engine
18, 25, 28
LX
8W - 91 - 19
SPLICE
LOCATION
FIG.
S112
17, 20, 25, 28
S113
17, 20
S114
17, 20
S115
25, 28
S116
17, 20
S117
17
S118 (LHD)
S118 (RHD)
S119 (GAS)
S120
N/S
S121 (LHD)
S121 (RHD) (3.5L/5.7L)
S122
6, 7
S123 (LHD) (GAS)
S123 (LHD) (DIESEL)
S123 (RHD) (DIESEL)
S124 (LHD)
S124 (RHD)
S125 (LHD)
S125 (RHD) (GAS)
S126
S126 (RHD)
Right Side Engine Compartment
S127
S127 (RHD)
S128 (LHD)
Front Engine Compartment
S128 (RHD)
S129 (Except SRT8)
S129 (RHD) (GAS)
S130 (LHD DIESEL)
S130 (GAS)
S130 (RHD)
S131 (LHD) (GAS)
S131 (RHD) (DIESEL)
S132 (LHD Export)
S132 (RHD)
S133 (LHD Export)
S133 (RHD)
S134 (LHD) (Export)
S134 (RHD)
Right Side of Engine Compartment
S135 (LHD)
S135 (LHD) (DIESEL)
S135 (RHD)
S136
N/S
8W - 91 - 20
SPLICE
LOCATION
LX
FIG.
S138
N/S
S139
N/S
S140
N/S
S141(SRT8)
53
S142 (SRT8)
Right Rear of Engine, on Fusible Link eyelet T/O
28
S143
S143 (DIESEL)
In T/O for Diesel Fuse Block
7, 15
S143 (SRT8)
In T/O to C100
S144
N/S
S145
Right Front on Engine
31
S146
Left Rear Top of Engine
30
S148
Left Rear Top of Engine
31
S149
Right Side on Engine Compartment
S150
In T/O for C108
S155 (DIESEL)
7, 15
S156 (LHD)
S156 (RHD)
S200 (LHD)
49
S200 (RHD)
Center Instrument Panel
38
S201 (LHD)
40
S201 (RHD)
In Center Stack
38
S202 (LHD)
49
S202 (RHD)
38
S203 (LHD)
49
S203 (RHD)
38
S204
Above Steering Column
39, 45
S205
Above Steering Column
39, 45
S206 (LHD)
45
S206 (RHD)
Right Side of Center Stack
39
S207 (LHD)
45
S207 (RHD)
39
S208 (LHD)
40
S208 (RHD)
39
S209 (LHD)
40
S209 (RHD)
39
S210
Left Center Instrument Panel
38, 45
S211 (LHD)
Center Instrument Panel
45
S211 (RHD)
39
S212 (LHD)
45
S212 (RHD)
39
S213 (LHD)
49
S213 (RHD)
38
S214 (LHD Export)
49
LX
8W - 91 - 21
SPLICE
LOCATION
FIG.
S214 (RHD)
38
S215 (LHD)
49
S215 (RHD)
Left of Center Stack
38
S216
Behind Center Stack
46
S217 (LHD)
49
S217 (RHD)
Left of Center Stack
38
S218 (LHD)
49
S218 (RHD)
38
S219 (LHD)
49
S219 (RHD)
38
S220 (LHD)
49
S220 (RHD)
38
S221
In T/O for Left Instrument Panel Speaker
40
S222 (LHD)
In T/O for Rightt Instrument Panel Speaker
49
S222 (RHD)
38
S223 (LHD)
In T/O for Left Instrument Panel Speaker
40
S223 (RHD)
38
S224
In T/O for Right Instrument Panel Speaker
49
S225
40
S226 (LHD)
40
S227 (LHD)
45
S227 (RHD)
38
S228
Left Side Instrument Panel
44
S229 (RHD)
39
S231 (RHD)
39
S300 (Except SRT8)
Below Right Front Door
53
S300 (SRT8)
Near T/O for Right Taillamp
76
S300 (RHD)
Body Below Driver Seat
54
S301
64
S302
In Power Distribution Center
75, 76
S303
Below Right Rear Door
58
S304
53
S305
Right Rear Body
76
S306 (LHD)
Right Kick Panel
53
S306 (RHD)
54
S307
Right Kick Panel
53, 54
S308
Left Kick Panel
51, 52
S309 (LHD)
Right Kick Panel
53
S309 (RHD)
54
S310
Right Kick Panel
53, 54
S311
Right Kick Panel
53, 54
S312 (Export)
Right Rear Body
75, 76
S313 (LHD)
58
8W - 91 - 22
LX
SPLICE
LOCATION
FIG.
S314 (LHD)
Right Kick Panel
53
S314 (RHD)
54
S315
75, 76
S316 (LHD)
Right Kick Panel
53
S316 (RHD)
54
S317 (LHD)
Right Kick Panel
53
S317 (RHD)
54
S318
53, 54
S319
58
S320
75, 76
S321
75, 76
S322
75, 76
S323
75, 76
S324 (RHD)
Body Below Passenger Seat
52
S325 (RHD)
Body Below Passenger Seat
52
S326
75, 76
S327
Left Kick Panel
51, 52
S328
Below Right Front Door
53, 54
S329
75, 76
S330
Left Kick Panel
51, 52
S331
58
S332
Below Driver Seat
55
S333
Below Driver Seat
55
S334
56
S335
56
S336
56
S337
56
S338
Front Headliner
66
S339
Front Headliner
66
S340
Front Headliner
66
S341
Front Headliner
66
S342
Front Headliner
66
S343
Near T/O for Inside Rearview Mirror
50
S344
Right Rear Fascia
86
S345
Right Rear Fascia
86
S346 (Parktronics)
Middle Rear Fascia
86
S347 (Parktronics)
Middle Rear Fascia
86
S348 (LX49)
Middle Rear Fascia
86
S349 (LX49)
Left Rear Fascia
86
S350 (Right)
Right Tail lamp Assembly
83, 85
S351 (Right)
Right Tail lamp Assembly
83, 85
S352 (Left)
Left Tail lamp Assembly
83, 85
S353 (Left)
Left Tail lamp Assembly
83, 85
LX
SPLICE
LOCATION
S354
8W - 91 - 23
FIG.
N/S
S355
Bottom of Left Front Door
60
S356 (Driver Except

Base)
60
S357
60
S358
60
S359
60
S360 (Passenger)
Bottom of Right Front Door
60
S361
Right Rear Fascia
N/S
S362 (Trailer Tow)
Right Side of Trunk
75
S362 (RHD)
Near Right Taillamp Connector
76
S363 (LX49 Export)
Right Rear Fascia
86
S364
N/S
S370
Center Console
N/S
S371
Center Console
N/S
S372
Center Console
N/S
S373
Center Console
N/S
LX
Fig. 1 FRONT LIGHTING RIGHT (LEFT SIMILAR)
8W - 91 - 24
8W - 91 - 25
Fig. 2 RIGHT FRONT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
LX
LX
Fig. 3 RIGHT FRONT ENG COMP RAD YOKE
8W - 91 - 26
8W - 91 - 27
Fig. 4 FRONT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
LX
8W - 91 - 28
Fig. 5 RIGHT SIDE LIGHTING
LX
8W - 91 - 29
Fig. 6 RIGHT SIDE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
LX
LX
Fig. 7 RIGHT INNER FENDER SHIELD
8W - 91 - 30
8W - 91 - 31
Fig. 8 LEFT REAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT (LHD)
LX
LX
Fig. 9 LEFT REAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT (RHD)
8W - 91 - 32
LX
Fig. 10 RIGHT WHEEL WELL
Fig. 11 REAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT V6
8W - 91 - 33
8W - 91 - 34
Fig. 12 REAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT V8
Fig. 13 REAR ENGINE COMPARTMENT (AWD)
LX
LX
Fig. 14 INTEGRATED POWER MODULE
8W - 91 - 35
LX
Fig. 15 FUSE RELAY BLOCK (DIESEL)
8W - 91 - 36
LX
Fig. 16 HOOD (POLICE)
8W - 91 - 37
LX
Fig. 17 ENGINE 2.7L RIGHT REAR
8W - 91 - 38
8W - 91 - 39
Fig. 18 ENGINE 2.7L LEFT REAR
LX
8W - 91 - 40
Fig. 19 ENGINE 2.7L/3.5L FRONT
LX
8W - 91 - 41
LX
LX
8W - 91 - 42
LX
Fig. 22 ENGINE 3.5L LEFT SIDE
8W - 91 - 43
LX
Fig. 23 STARTER CONNECTIONS (2.7L/3.5L)
8W - 91 - 44
LX
Fig. 24 ENGINE 5.7L RIGHT FRONT
8W - 91 - 45
LX
8W - 91 - 46
8W - 91 - 47
LX
LX
Fig. 27 STARTER CONNECTIONS (V8)
8W - 91 - 48
8W - 91 - 49
Fig. 28 ENGINE 6.1L RIGHT REAR (SRT8)
LX
LX
Fig. 29 ENGINE 6.1L LEFT REAR (SRT8)
8W - 91 - 50
8W - 91 - 51
Fig. 30 LEFT REAR ENGINE (3.0L DIESEL)
LX
LX
Fig. 31 ENGINE (3.0L DIESEL)
8W - 91 - 52
8W - 91 - 53
Fig. 32 AIR INTAKE BOX (3.0L DIESEL)
LX
LX
Fig. 33 TRANSMISSION
8W - 91 - 54
LX
Fig. 34 HVAC CENTER
Fig. 35 HVAC RIGHT
8W - 91 - 55
LX
Fig. 36 HVAC AND INSTRUMENT PANEL
8W - 91 - 56
8W - 91 - 57
Fig. 37 INSTRUMENT PANEL (LHD)
LX
LX
Fig. 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL (RHD)
8W - 91 - 58
8W - 91 - 59
Fig. 39 INSTRUMENT PANEL RIGHT (RHD)
LX
LX
Fig. 40 STEERING COLUMN (LHD)
8W - 91 - 60
LX
Fig. 41 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCHES
Fig. 42 HORN PAD SWITCHES
8W - 91 - 61
8W - 91 - 62
Fig. 43 INSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT
Fig. 44 INSTRUMENT PANEL - COLUMN
LX
8W - 91 - 63
Fig. 45 INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER FRONT (LHD)
LX
LX
Fig. 46 INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER STACK
8W - 91 - 64
8W - 91 - 65
Fig. 47 INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER AND RIGHT
LX
8W - 91 - 66
Fig. 48 POLICE/TAXI INTERFACE MODULE (LHD)
LX
8W - 91 - 67
Fig. 49 INSTRUMENT PANEL RIGHT
LX
8W - 91 - 68
Fig. 50 LEFT A-PILLAR
LX
8W - 91 - 69
Fig. 51 BODY LEFT FRONT (LHD)
LX
8W - 91 - 70
Fig. 52 BODY LEFT FRONT (RHD)
LX
8W - 91 - 71
Fig. 53 BODY RIGHT FRONT (LHD)
LX
LX
Fig. 54 BODY RIGHT FRONT
8W - 91 - 72
8W - 91 - 73
Fig. 55 DRIVER SEAT
LX
LX
Fig. 56 PASSENGER SEAT
8W - 91 - 74
8W - 91 - 75
Fig. 57 BODY LEFT SIDE
LX
LX
Fig. 58 BODY RIGHT SIDE
8W - 91 - 76
8W - 91 - 77
Fig. 59 SATELLITE RADIO JUMPER
LX
LX
Fig. 60 LEFT FRONT DOOR (RIGHT SIMILAR)
8W - 91 - 78
LX
Fig. 61 RIGHT REAR DOOR (LEFT SIMILAR)
Fig. 62 LEFT REAR QUARTER (LX48)
8W - 91 - 79
8W - 91 - 80
Fig. 63 BODY LEFT REAR QUARTER (LX49)
LX
8W - 91 - 81
Fig. 64 BODY RIGHT REAR QUARTER (LX48)
LX
LX
Fig. 65 BODY RIGHT REAR QUARTER (LX49)
8W - 91 - 82
8W - 91 - 83
Fig. 66 HEADLINER
LX
8W - 91 - 84
Fig. 67 HEADLINER
Fig. 68 CENTER HEADLINER
LX
LX
Fig. 69 OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Fig. 70 SUNROOF
8W - 91 - 85
LX
Fig. 71 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CABLES (LX48)
8W - 91 - 86
8W - 91 - 87
Fig. 72 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA CABLES (LX49)
LX
LX
Fig. 73 BACKLITE
8W - 91 - 88
LX
Fig. 74 REAR CARGO RIGHT (LX49)
Fig. 75 RIGHT REAR AND PDC (LX49)
8W - 91 - 89
LX
Fig. 76 TRUNK (LX48)
8W - 91 - 90
LX
Fig. 77 DECKLID (LX48)
8W - 91 - 91
LX
Fig. 78 LIFTGATE (LX49)
8W - 91 - 92
LX
Fig. 79 BODY RIGHT POWER CABLES
Fig. 80 TRUNK BATTERY CONNECTIONS
8W - 91 - 93
8W - 91 - 94
Fig. 81 TRUNK BATTERY AND PDC CONNECTIONS
Fig. 82 BODY B+ REAR ROUTE
LX
8W - 91 - 95
Fig. 83 RIGHT TAIL LAMP (LX49) (LEFT SIMILAR)
LX
8W - 91 - 96
Fig. 84 RIGHT TAIL LAMP (LX49) (LEFT SIMILAR)
Fig. 85 RIGHT TAIL LAMPS (LX48) (LEFT SIMILAR)
LX
8W - 91 - 97
Fig. 86 REAR FASCIA
LX
LX
8W - 97 - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page
POWER DISTRIBUTION
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
POWER OUTLET
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8W - 97 - 2
LX
POWER DISTRIBUTION
DESCRIPTION
CAUTION: Within the power distribution system there are replaceable diodes that can be installed incorrectly. Ensure when replacing a diode that it is inserted in the correct orientation.
The
power distribution system for this vehicle consists of the following components:
Cigar Lighter Outlet
Front Control Module (FCM) - located underhood
Integrated Power Module (IPM) - located underhood
Power Distribution Center (PDC) - located in trunk
Power Outlets
Refer to Wiring Diagrams for complete circuit schematics.

The
power distribution system also incorporates various types of circuit control and protection features, including:
Automatic resetting circuit breakers
Blade-type fuses
Cartridge fuses
Relays
OPERATION
The power distribution system for this vehicle is designed to provide safe, reliable, and centralized distribution points
for the electrical current required to operate all of the many standard and optional factory-installed electrical and
electronic powertrain, chassis, safety, security, comfort and convenience systems. At the same time, the power distribution system was designed to provide ready access to these electrical distribution points for the technician to use
when conducting diagnosis and repair of inoperative circuits. The power distribution system can also prove useful
for the sourcing of additional electrical circuits that may be required to provide the electrical current needed to operate many accessories that the vehicle owner may choose to have installed.
LX
8W - 97 - 3

DESCRIPTION
The majority of electrical system fuses and relays are housed in the two Power Distribution Centers (PDC). One is
located in the engine compartment, combined with the Front Control Module (FCM) to form the Integrated Power
Module (IPM). The other is next to the battery at the rear of the vehicle.
REMOVAL
(2).
2. Open the battery cable nut cover to expose nut.

3. Remove battery cable nut and battery cable from
the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
8W - 97 - 4
4. Disengage the outboard retaining clip, and rotate

the IPM to access wire harness connectors.
5. Disconnect wire harness connectors from IPM.
6. Disengage the two inboard retaining clips.
7. Remove IPM from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Position Integrated Power Module (IPM) to vehicle.
Engage the three retaining clips.
LX
LX
2. Disengage the outboard retaining clip and rotate

the IPM to access wire harness connectors.
3. Connect electrical harness connectors to IPM.
4. Connect battery cable to IPM.

5. Install and tighten retaining nut.
6. Close the battery cable nut cover.
7. Connect battery negative cable (2).
8W - 97 - 5
8W - 97 - 6

DESCRIPTION
The majority of electrical system fuses and relays are
housed in the two Power Distribution Centers (PDC).
One is located in the engine compartment, combined
with the Front Control Module (FCM) to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The other is next to the
battery at the rear of the vehicle. The PDC located
next to the battery is replaced only as part of the body
wiring harness.
LX
LX
8W - 97 - 7
POWER OUTLET
DESCRIPTION
Sedans are equipped with two 12volt electrical outlets. Wagons are equipped with three 12volt electrical outlets.
The outlets are located in the following locations:
Cargo area right quarter trim panel (wagons only).
Inside the center console.
Next to the ash receiver in the center stack.
The outlets in the console and quarter trim panel have power at all times, and include tethered covers. The outlet
in the ash receiver tray is shipped with power available only when the ignition is in the ON position. This outlet can
be changed to provide power at all times by moving a fuse in the fuse block.
REMOVAL
2. Pull the cigar lighter knob and element out of the cigar lighter receptacle base, or unsnap the protective cap from
the power outlet.
3. Look inside the cigar lighter or power outlet and note the position of the rectangular retaining bosses of the
mount that secures the receptacle base.
4. Insert a pair of external snap ring pliers into the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and engage the tips
of the pliers with the retaining bosses of the mount.
5. Squeeze the pliers to disengage the mount retaining bosses from the receptacle base and, using a gentle rocking motion, pull the pliers and the receptacle base out of the mount.
6. Pull the receptacle base away far enough to access the wire harness connector.
7. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the cigar lighter or power outlet.
8. Remove the cigar lighter or power outlet.
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the wire harness connector to the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle.
2. Install the cigar lighter or power outlet mount into position.
3. Align the splines on the outside of the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle with the
grooves on the inside of the mount.
4. Press firmly on the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base until the retaining bosses of the mount are fully
engaged in their receptacles.
5. Install the cigar lighter knob and element into the cigar lighter receptacle base, or the protective cap into the
power outlet receptacle base.
ENGINE
LX
9-1
ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . 1

ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS - DIESEL. 1039
ENGINE - 2.7L DOHC - SERVICE
INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899
page
ENGINE
ENGINE
ENGINE
ENGINE
3.5L
5.7L
6.1L
3.0L
- SERVICE INFORMATION . . . .
SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . .
SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . .
TD SERVICE INFORMATION . .
2095
2285
2452
2602
ENGINE ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
page
page

PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INTERMITTENT CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
P0016CRANKSHAFT / CAMSHAFT TIMING
MISALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
P0031-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
P0071-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
P0072-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
P0073AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
P0107-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
P0108-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
P0111-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
P0112-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
P0113-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
P0116ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . 75
P0117-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
P0118-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
P0121-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
P0125-INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMP FOR
CLOSED-LOOP FUEL CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . 102
P0128-THERMOSTAT RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . 105
P0129-BAROMETRIC PRESSURE OUT-OFRANGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
P0131-O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . 121
P0132-O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . 125
P0133-O2 SENSOR 1/1 SLOW RESPONSE . . 130
P0135-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9-2

PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
P0171-FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 LEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
P0172-FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 RICH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
P0174-FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 LEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
P0175-FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 RICH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
P0196ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . 211
P0197-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
P0198-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
P0201-FUEL INJECTOR 1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 223
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
P0300- MULTIPLE CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE . . . . 270
P0301-CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
P0315-NO CRANK SENSOR LEARNED . . . . . . 349
P0325-KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . 352
P0330-KNOCK SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . 356
P0335-CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
P0339-CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
INTERMITTENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
P0340-CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
P0344-CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
INTERMITTENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
P0401-EGR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE . . . . . . 389
P0403-EGR SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
P0404-EGR POSITION SENSOR
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
P0405-EGR POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
LX
P0406-EGR POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
P0420-CATALYST 1/1 EFFICIENCY . . . . . . . . . . 410
P0430-CATALYST 2/1 EFFICIENCY . . . . . . . . . . 413
P0440-GENERAL EVAP SYSTEM FAILURE . . . 416
P0441-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
P0442-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM MEDIUM
LEAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
P0443-EVAP PURGE SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . 434
P0452-NVLD PRESSURE SWITCH STUCK
CLOSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
P0453-NVLD PRESSURE SWITCH STUCK
OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
P0455-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM LARGE LEAK . 448
P0456-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM SMALL LEAK . 454
P0457-LOOSE FUEL CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
P0461-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
P0462-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
P0480-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT . 478
P0481-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT . 481
P0498-NVLD CANISTER VENT VALVE
SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
P0499-NVLD CANISTER VENT VALVE
SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
P0501-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1
PERFORMANCE (Not Equipped with ABS). . . 493
ERRATIC (Not Equipped with ABS). . . . . . . . . . 496
PERFORMANCE (Equipped with ABS) . . . . . . 499
ERRATIC (Equipped with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
P0506-IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE
LOWER THAN EXCEPTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
P0507-IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE
HIGHER THAN EXCEPTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
P0513-INVALID SKIM KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
P0520-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
P0524-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TOO LOW . . 530
P0532-A/C PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
P0533-A/C PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
P0551-POWER STEERING PRESSURE
SWITCH PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . 552
LX
P0571-BRAKE SWITCH 1 PERFORMANCE . . 555
P0572-BRAKE SWITCH 1 STUCK ON . . . . . . . . 560
P0573-BRAKE SWITCH 1 STUCK OFF . . . . . . . 564
P0579SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED
SWITCH #1 PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
SWITCH #1 LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
P0585-SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED
SWITCH 1/2 CORRELATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
SWITCH PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
P0600-SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK . . . . . . 581
P0601-INTERNAL MEMORY CHECKSUM
INVALID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
P0606-INTERNAL ECM PROCESSOR . . . . . . . 583
P060B-ETC A/D GROUND PERFORMANCE . . 584
P060D-ETC LEVEL 2 APP PERFORMANCE . . 585
P060E-ETC LEVEL 2 TPS PERFORMANCE . . 586
P060F-ETC LEVEL 2 ECT PERFORMANCE . . 587
P061A-ETC LEVEL 2 TORQUE
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
P061C-ETC LEVEL 2 RPM PERFORMANCE . . 589
P0622-GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
P0627-FUEL PUMP RELAY CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . 594
P062C-ETC LEVEL 2 MPH PERFORMANCE . . 598
P0630-VIN NOT PROGRAMMED IN PCM . . . . 599
P0632-ODOMETER NOT PROGRAMMED IN
PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
P0633-SKIM KEY NOT PROGRAMMED IN
PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
P0642-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
P0643-PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
P0645-A/C CLUTCH RELAY CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . 606
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
CIRCUIT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
P0660MANIFOLD TUNE VALVE SOLENOID
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
P0685-AUTO SHUTDOWN RELAY CONTROL
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
P0688-AUTO SHUTDOWN RELAY SENSE
CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
P0700-TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
(MIL REQUEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
P0703-BRAKE SWITCH 2 PERFORMANCE . . 628
P0850-PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
P1115-GENERAL TEMPERATURE
RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
P01404-EGR POSITION SENSOR
RATIONALITY CLOSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
P1411CYLINDER 1 REACTIVATION
CONTROL PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
9-3
P1501VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1/2
CORRELATION DRIVE WHEELS (Not
Equipped with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
CORRELATION NON DRIVE WHEELS
(Not Equipped with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
CORRELATION DRIVE WHEELS
(Equipped with ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
CORRELATION NON DRIVE WHEELS
(Equipped with ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
P1521INCORRECT ENGINE OIL TYPE . . . . . 669
P1572-BRAKE SWITCH STUCK ON . . . . . . . . . 670
P1573-BRAKE SWITCH STUCK OFF . . . . . . . . 674
P1593SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 1/2
STUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
P1603-PCM INTERNAL DUAL-PORT RAM
COMMUNICATION FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
P1604-PCM INTERNAL DUAL-PORT RAM
READ/WRITE INTEGRITY FAILURE . . . . . . . . 684
P1607-PCM INTERNAL SHUTDOWN TIMER
RATIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
CIRCUIT ERRATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
CIRCUIT ERRATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
P1696-EEPROM MEMORY WRITE DENIED/
INVALID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
P1697-EMR (SRI) MILEAGE NOT STORED . . . 697
P1897PCM PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
P2008SHORT RUNNER VALVE SOLENOID
CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
P2066-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
P2072-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
SYSTEM - ICE BLOCKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
P2097-DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM
1 LEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
1 RICH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
2 LEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
2 RICH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
MOTOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
MOTOR PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
MODULE PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
9-4

MODULE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
- FORCED LIMITED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
- UNABLE TO CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
- UNABLE TO OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
P2115-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR 1 MINIMUM STOP
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
SENSOR 2 MINIMUM STOP
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
MOTOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
P2135-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1/2
CORRELATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
ERRATIC (Not Equipped with ABS). . . . . . . . . . 809
ERRATIC (Equipped with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
SENSOR 1 MAXIMUM STOP
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
SENSOR 2 MAXIMUM STOP
PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
P2172-HIGH AIRFLOW/VACUUM LEAK
DETECTED (INSTANTANEOUS
ACCUMULATION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
P2173-HIGH AIRFLOW/VACUUM LEAK
DETECTED (SLOW ACCUMULATION) . . . . . . 828
P2174-LOW AIRFLOW/RESTRICTION
DETECTED (INSTANTANEOUS
ACCUMULATION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
P2175-LOW AIRFLOW/RESTRICTION
DETECTED (SLOW ACCUMULATION) . . . . . . 850
P2181-COOLING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE . 861
P2299-BRAKE PEDAL POSITION /
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
INCOMPATIBLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
P2302-IGNITION COIL 1 SECONDARY
CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION . . . . . . 870
LX
P2503-CHARGING SYSTEM OUTPUT LOW . . 910
P3400-MDS RATIONALITY BANK 1 . . . . . . . . . . 915
P3402-CYLINDER 1 DEACTIVATION
P3401-MDS SOLENOID 1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . 940
P3497-MDS RATIONALITY BANK 2 . . . . . . . . . . 972
U0001-CAN C BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
U0101-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH TCM . . 976
ELECTRIC GEAR SHIFT MODULE . . . . . . . . . 977
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
CLUSTER/CCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
(SKREEM/WCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
U110A-LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
SCCM - CAN - C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
U110C-NO FUEL LEVEL BUS MESSAGE
RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
U110E-LOST AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
U110F-LOST FUEL VOLUME MESSAGE . . . . . 993
U1110-LOST VEHICLE SPEED MESSAGE . . . . 995
U1120-LOST WHEEL DISTANCE MESSAGE . . 997
U1403-IMPLAUSIBLE FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL . . 999
U1411-IMPLAUSIBLE FUEL VOLUME
SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
U1412-IMPLAUSIBLE VEHICLE SPEED
SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
U1417-IMPLAUSIBLE LEFT WHEEL
DISTANCE SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
U1418-IMPLAUSIBLE RIGHT WHEEL
DISTANCE SIGNAL RECEIVED . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
*5.7L INTERMITTENT NO CRANK
CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
*CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM . 1013
LX
*HARD START FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
*ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT START . 1019
*FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . 1022
*NO CRANK CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
*NO RESPONSE WITH A NO START
CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
9-5
*START AND STALL CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

STANDARD PROCEDURE
POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST . . . . . . . 1036
9-6

LX
LX
9-7
PRE-DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

Diagnostic Test
1.
NO RESPONSE WITH A NO START CONDITION
Is the customer complaint a NO RESPONSE WITH A NO START condition?

Yes
>> Check the vehicle for any NO START related PCM DTC(s) or Vehicle Theft Security related DTC(s).
If no Theft related DTC(s) are present, refer to the NO RESPONSE WITH A NO START CONDITION
test.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
NO RESPONSE
Make sure the scan tool will communicate with the appropriate modules.
Are you currently experiencing a NO RESPONSE condition with the PCM?
Yes
>> The NO RESPONSE condition must be properly diagnosed before continuing.

Refer to Section 8 ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS and perform
the appropriate Communication test.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
NO START
Is the customer complaint a NO START condition?

Yes
>> Check the vehicle for any NO START related PCM DTC(s) or Vehicle Theft Security related DTC(s).
If no Theft related DTC(s) are present, refer to the Non DTC Diagnostic Procedures that relate to Fuel
and Starting.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
VEHICLE HISTORY AND TSB(s)
Continue by reading PCM DTC(s) and record the related Freeze Frame data if any DTC(s) are present.
Whether or not any DTC(s) are present you will want to check the following items which may assist in repairing the
customers complaint successfully.
Check the vehicles repair history.
If the vehicle has a repair history that pertains to the customers current complaint, review the repair.
Inspect the vehicle for any aftermarket accessories that may have been installed incorrectly.
Check for any TSB(s) related to the customers complaint or DTC(s).
If a TSB applies, follow the instructions per the TSB.
Choose the following scenario that best applies.
The TSB repaired the customers complaint.
Testing complete.
A DTC is present, no TSB applies, or the TSB didnt repair the customers complaint.
Go To 5
No DTC(s) are present.
Refer to the INTERMITTENT CONDITION Diagnostic Procedure.
9-8
5.
LX
WIRE HARNESS INSPECTION
Clear the DTC(s).

Attempt to duplicate the customer complaint.
Whether the customer complaint can be duplicated or not, make a quick wire harness inspection related to the
DTC(s) that were previously cleared.
Check the Powertrain Control Module connectors, the suspected component connection, in-line connectors, wire
harness splices, PCM power and ground circuits, and any related fuses.
If the DTC(s) are fuel or air related, check the fuel level, quality and the air duct system.
Were any repairs made that fixed the customers complaint?
Yes
>> Testing complete.
No
>> Refer to the diagnostic test procedure related to the DTC.
LX
9-9
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: The conditions that set the DTC are not present at this time. The following list may help in identifying the intermittent condition.
Review the scan tool Freeze Frame information. If possible, try to duplicate the conditions under which the DTC set.
With the engine running at normal operating temperature, monitor the scan tool parameters related to the DTC while
wiggling the wire harness. Look for parameter values to change and/or a DTC to set.
Visually inspect the related wire harness. Disconnect all the related harness connectors. Look for any chafed,
pierced, pinched, partially broken wires and broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Perform a voltage drop test on the related circuits between the suspected faulty component and the PCM.
CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing the PCM harness connectors will damage
the PCM terminals resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special Tool #8815 to perform
diagnosis.
Inspect and clean all PCM, engine, and chassis grounds that are related to the most current DTC.
If numerous trouble codes were set, use a wire schematic and look for any common ground or supply circuits.
For any Relay DTCs, actuate the Relay with the scan tool and wiggle the related wire harness to try to interrupt the
actuation.
For intermittent Evaporative Emission trouble codes perform a visual and physical inspection of the related parts
including hoses and the Fuel Filler cap.
For intermittent Misfire DTCs check for restrictions in the Intake and Exhaust system, proper installation of Sensors,
vacuum leaks, and binding components that are run by the accessory drive belt.
Use the scan tool to perform a System Test if one applies to the failing component.
A co-pilot, data recorder, and/or lab scope should be used to help diagnose intermittent conditions.
Yes
>> Perform the necessary repairs.

No
>> Test Complete.
9 - 10
LX
P0016CRANKSHAFT / CAMSHAFT TIMING MISALIGNMENT

When Monitored:
Engine cranking and Engine running
Set Condition:
Powertrain Control Module detects an error when the camshaft position is out of phase with the crankshaft
position. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
ERRATIC CAM POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR TONE WHEEL/PULSE RING
ERRATIC CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR TONE WHEEL/PULSE RING
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
With the scan tool clear the DTC(s).
Start the engine and run until operating temp is reached. (Closed Loop)
If the DTC does not reset it may be necessary to test drive the vehicle.
Does the P0016 return?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECKING THE CMP SIGNAL WITH A LAB SCOPE
With a lab scope, backprobe the (K44) CMP Signal circuit at the CMP
Sensor harness connector.
WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct
line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts, or
fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death.
Start the engine.
Observe the lab scope screen.
Are there any irregular or missing signals?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 6
LX
3.
9 - 11
CMP WIRE HARNESS INSPECTION

Visually inspect the related wire harness. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires.
Visually inspect the related wire harness connectors. Look for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Make sure the Crankshaft Position Sensor and the Camshaft Position Sensor are properly installed and the mounting bolt(s) are torqued to their proper specification.
Refer to any TSBs that may apply.
Were any of the above conditions present?
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
TONE WHEEL/PULSE RING INSPECTION
Remove the Camshaft Position Sensor.

Inspect the Tone Wheel/Pulse Ring for damage, foreign material, or excessive movement.
Yes
>> Repair or replace the Tone Wheel/Pulse Ring as necessary.

No
>> Go To 5
5.

Repair
Replace the Camshaft Position Sensor.
6.
ERRATIC CMP SIGNAL

Remove the lab scope probe.
With scan tool, erase DTCs.
Start the engine.
Gently tap on and wiggle the Cam Position Sensor.
Inspect the Sensor connector and harness connector, and inspect the PCM connector and harness connector for
loose, bent, corroded, or pushed out pins/terminals.
Inspect the related wire harness and the splices in the CMP circuit.
Does the P0016 return?
Yes
>> Repair the wiring/connector concerns as needed or replace the Camshaft Position Sensor.
No
>> Go To 7
9 - 12
7.
LX
CHECKING THE CKP SIGNAL WITH A LAB SCOPE

With a lab scope, backprobe the (K24) CKP Signal circuit at the CKP
harness connector.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Go To 10
8.
CKP WIRE HARNESS INSPECTION

Visually inspect the related wire harness. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires.
Make sure the Crankshaft Position Sensor and the Camshaft Position Sensor are properly installed and the mounting bolt(s) are torqued to their proper specification.
Yes

No
>> Go To 9
9.
TONE WHEEL/FLEX PLATE INSPECTION
Remove the Crankshaft Position Sensor.

Inspect the Tone Wheel/Flex Plate slots for damage, foreign material, or excessive movement.
Yes
>> Repair or replace the Tone Wheel/Flex Plate as necessary.

No
>> Replace the Crankshaft Position Sensor.

LX
10.
9 - 13
ERRATIC CKP SIGNAL
NOTE: The conditions that set this DTC are not present at this time. The following test may help in identifying the intermittent condition.
Start the engine.
Gently tap on and wiggle the Crank Position Sensor.
Inspect the Sensor connector and harness connector, and inspect the PCM connector and harness connector for
loose, bent, corroded, or pushed out pins/terminals.
Inspect the related wire harness and the splices in the CKP circuits.
Yes
>> Repair the wiring/connector concerns as needed or replace the Crankshaft Position Sensor.
No
>> Test Complete.
9 - 14
P0031-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 15
When Monitored:
Battery voltage above 10.6 volts, ASD is powered up, and O2 heater is powered.
Set Condition:
Desired state does not match Actual state. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K99) O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
O2 SENSOR HEATER OPERATION

NOTE: Wait a minimum of 8 minutes to allow the O2 Sensor to cool down before continuing the test. Allow
the O2 Sensor voltage to stabilize at 5.0 volts.
With a scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater Test.
With the scan tool, monitor 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage for at least 2 minutes.
Does the O2 Sensor voltage stay above 4.5 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
O2 HEATER ELEMENT

NOTE: Allow the O2 Sensor to cool down to room temperature.
Disconnect the 1/1 O2 Sensor harness connector.
Measure the resistance across the O2 Sensor Heater element, between the Heater Control terminal and the Heater
ground terminal at the component.
NOTE: O2 Heater Element resistance values should be measured at 70F (21.1C). The resistance value will
vary with different temperature values.
Is the O2 Sensor Heater Element resistance between 2.0 and 30.0 ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the O2 Sensor.

9 - 16
3.
LX
O2 SENSOR

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 1/1Heater Test with the O2 Sensor
harness connector still disconnected.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (K99) O2 1/1
Heater Control circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Does the test light illuminate brightly and flash on and off during the actuation?
Yes

Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer
to 9 - ENGINE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Disconnect the PCM harness connectors.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater
Control circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
PCM
NOTE: Before continuing, check the PCM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal
push out. Repair as necessary.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. Pay particular attention to all Power and
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
>> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
LX
P0032-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER CIRCUIT HIGH
9 - 17
9 - 18
LX
When Monitored:
Battery voltage above 10.6 volts, ASD is powered up, and O2 heater is off.
Set Condition:
Desired state does not equal Actual state. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(Z904) O2 1/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

With a scan tool, read DTCs.
Is the DTC active at this time?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
O2 HEATER ELEMENT

Measure the resistance across the O2 Sensor Heater element between the O2 Heater Control terminal and the O2
Heater ground terminal at the component.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
(K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 1/1 Heater Test with the Sensor harness connector still disconnected.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.
(Z904) O2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance between an engine ground and the (Z904) O2
1/1 Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Repair the open in the (Z904) O2 1/1Heater ground circuit.

5.
(K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit in the
O2 Sensor harness connector.
Does the voltmeter indicate any voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K99) O2 1/1

Heater Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 19
9 - 20
6.
LX

Measure the resistance of the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit from
the O2 Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit.
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 21
9 - 22
LX
When Monitored:
Battery voltage above 10.6 volts, ASD is powered up, and O2 heater is on.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 1/2 Heater Test.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
O2 HEATER ELEMENT

Measure the resistance across the O2 Sensor Heater element, between the O2 Heater Control terminal and the O2
Heater ground terminal at the component.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
9 - 23
O2 SENSOR

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater Test with the 1/2 O2 Sensor
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.

Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K299) O2 1/2 Heater

Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 24
LX
LX
9 - 25
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K299) O2 SENSOR 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
O2 HEATER ELEMENT

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

9 - 26
3.

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 1/2 Heater Test with the O2 Sensor
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.

Yes

No
>> Repair the open in the (Z902) O2 1/2 Heater ground circuit.
5.

Yes

No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
9 - 27

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 28
LX
LX
9 - 29
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

With a scan tool, monitor 2/1 O2 Sensor voltage for at least 2 minutes.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
O2 HEATER ELEMENT

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

9 - 30
3.
LX
O2 SENSOR

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater Test with the O2 Sensor harness connector still disconnected.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.

Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K199) O2 2/1 Sensor

No
>> Go To 5
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 31
9 - 32
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
O2 HEATER ELEMENT

Measure the resistance across the O2 Sensor Heater element, between the O2 Heater Control terminal and the
Heater ground terminal at the component connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.

With the scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater Test with the Sensor harness
connector still disconnected.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.

Yes

No
5.

Yes

No
>> Go To 6
9 - 33
9 - 34
6.
LX

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Repair
Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
LX
9 - 35
9 - 36
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K399) O2 SENSOR 2/2 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
O2 HEATER ELEMENT

Heater ground terminal in the component connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
9 - 37
O2 SENSOR

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater Test with the O2 Sensor harness connector still disconnected.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.

Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K399) O2 2/2 Sensor

No
>> Go To 5
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 38
LX
LX
9 - 39
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
O2 HEATER ELEMENT

Heater ground terminal in the component connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

9 - 40
3.

With a scan tool, actuate the O2 2/2 Heater Test with the Sensor harness connector still disconnected.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 5
4.

Yes

No
5.

Measure the voltage on the (K399) O2 Heater 2/2 Control circuit in the
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
9 - 41

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 42
P0071-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
9 - 43
Theory of Operation
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor performance looks at the outputs of three temperature sensors and compares
them under cold start conditions. Following a start to run delay time, the outputs of the ambient, engine coolant, and
intake air temperature sensors will be compared. If the engine coolant and intake air temperature sensors agree and
the ambient air temperature does not agree, the ambient air temperature sensor is declared as irrational.
When Monitored:
Engine off time is greater than 480 minutes. Ambient temperature is greater than 4 C (38 F).
Set Condition:
After a calibrated amount of cool down time the PCM compares the ECT Sensor, IAT Sensor, and the Ambient
Air Temp Sensor values. If the IAT Sensor value is not within -10 C (18 F) of the other two temperature
sensors. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
(G931) SENSOR GROUND HIGH RESISTANCE
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Diagnose any CAN - C Communication DTCs before continuing.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
AAT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.6 VOLTS

Disconnect the AAT sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the AAT voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
9 - 44
3.
LX
AAT SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (G31) AAT Signal circuit and the
(G931) Sensor ground circuit in the AAT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the AAT voltage.
Is the voltage below 1.0 volt with the jumper wire installed?
Yes
>> Replace the AAT Sensor.

No
>> Go To 4
NOTE: Remove the jumper wire before continuing.
4.
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Reconnect the AAT sensor harness connector.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (G31) AAT Signal circuit at the AAT sensor harness
connector and the FCM.
WARNING: WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put
your hands near the pulleys, belts, or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions
can result in personal injury or death.
Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
Monitor the voltmeter.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the high resistance in the (G31) AAT Signal circuit.
5.
(G931) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Reconnect the AAT sensor harness connector.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (G931) Sensor ground circuit at the AAT sensor harness connector and the FCM.
WARNING: When the engine is operating, do not stand in direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the
pulleys, belts, or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or
death.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the high resistance in the (G931) Sensor ground circuit.
LX
6.
9 - 45
NOTE: Before continuing, check the FCM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal
Ground circuits.
Yes

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST VER - 1.
No
>> Replace the Front Control Module per Service Information.

9 - 46
P0072-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 47
When Monitored:
The ignition key on.
Set Condition:
Ambient Temperature Sensor is less than 0.078 of a volt at the PCM for 2.8 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three
good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G931) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
AAT SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.078 OF A VOLT
NOTE: Diagnose any CAN - C Communication DTCs before continuing.

With a scan tool, read the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor voltage.
Is the voltage below 0.078 of a volt?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECKING AAT SENSOR

Disconnect the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the AAT Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Replace the Ambient Temperature Sensor.

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 48
3.
LX
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Disconnect the C2 FCM harness connectors.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G31) AAT Signal circuit in the AAT Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (G31) AAT Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (G931) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (G931) Sensor ground circuit and the (G31) AAT Signal circuit in the AAT Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (G931) Sensor ground circuit and the (G31) AAT Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
>> Replace and program the Front Control Module per Service Information.
LX
P0073AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
9 - 49
9 - 50
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
The Ambient Temperature Sensor voltage is greater than 4.98 volts at the PCM for 2.8 seconds. One Trip
Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(G931) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1.
AAT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.98 VOLTS

With a scan tool, read the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
AAT SENSOR

Disconnect the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor harness connector.
Connect a jumper wire between the (G31) AAT Signal circuit and the
(G931) Sensor ground circuit in the AAT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read AAT Sensor voltage.
Yes
No
>> Replace the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor.

>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
Disconnect the C2 FCM harness connector.

Measure the voltage on the (G31) AAT Signal circuit in the AAT Sensor
harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (G31) AAT Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(G31) AAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (G31) AAT Signal circuit from the AAT
Sensor harness connector to the C2 FCM harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (G31) AAT Signal circuit.

9 - 51
9 - 52
5.
LX
(G931) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance of the (G931) Sensor ground circuit from the
AAT Sensor harness connector to the C2 FCM harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (G931) Sensor ground circuit.

6.
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
>> Replace the Front Control Module per Service Information.

LX
P0107-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
9 - 53
9 - 54
LX
When Monitored:
Engine speed between 600 to 3500 RPM. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
The MAP sensor signal voltage is below 0.0782 of a volt for 1.7 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to
turn off the MIL, (ETC light will flash.)
Possible Causes
(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN
(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
MAP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.0782 OF A VOLT

With a scan tool, read the MAP Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Disconnect the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the MAP
Is the voltage between 4.5 to 5.2 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 6
LX
3.
9 - 55
MAP SENSOR
With a scan tool, monitor the MAP Sensor voltage with the Sensor harness connector disconnected.
Yes
>> Replace the MAP Sensor.

No
>> Go To 4
4.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K1) MAP Signal circuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
Measure the resistance between the (K1) MAP Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K900) Sensor ground and
the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
9 - 56
6.

Measure the resistance of the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit from the
MAP Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit.

7.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (F856) 5-volt Supply
circuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
8.
9 - 57
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 58
P0108-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
9 - 59
When Monitored:
Engine speed between 600 to 3500 RPM. Battery voltage greater than 10.37 volts.
Set Condition:
The MAP sensor signal voltage is greater than 4.92 volts for 3.0 seconds. One trip fault. Three good trips to
turn off the MIL. (ETC light will flash).
Possible Causes
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
MAP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.92 VOLTS
Start the engine.

With a scan tool, read the MAP Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
MAP SENSOR

Connect a jumper wire between the (K1) MAP Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, monitor the MAP Sensor voltage.
Yes
No

>> Go To 3
9 - 60
3.
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K1) MAP Signal circuit in the MAP Sensor
harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K1) MAP Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Measure the resistance of the (K1) MAP Signal circuit from the MAP
Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.

LX
LX
5.
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K1) MAP Signal circuit and the
(F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit
and the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
Measure the resistance of the (K900) Sensor ground circuit from the
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K900) Sensor ground circuit.

9 - 61
9 - 62
7.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0111-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR RATIONALITY
9 - 63
9 - 64
LX
Theory of Operation
Intake Air Temperature Sensor performance looks at the outputs of three temperature sensors and compares them
under cold start conditions. Following a start to run delay time, the outputs of the ambient, engine coolant, and
intake air temperature sensors will be compared. If the engine coolant and ambient air temperature sensors agree
and the intake air temperature does not agree, the intake air temperature sensor is declared as irrational.
When Monitored:
The engine off time is greater than 480 minutes. Ambient Temperature if greater than 4C (38F).
Set Condition:
After a calibrated amount of cool down time the PCM compares the ECT Sensor, IAT Sensor, and the Ambient
Air Temp Sensor values. If the IAT Sensor value is not within 10C of the other two temperature sensors. Two
Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
(K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
IAT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.6 VOLTS

Disconnect the IAT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the IAT voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
LX
3.
9 - 65
IAT SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (K21) IAT Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the IAT Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the IAT Sensor.

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Disconnect the C2 PCM harness connector.
the PCM terminals resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special Tool #8815 along with
the #8815-1 to perform the diagnosis.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K21) IAT Signal circuit at the IAT Sensor harness
connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected with the
circuits correct polarity.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the high resistance in the (K21) IAT Signal circuit.
5.

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit at the IAT Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected with
the circuits correct polarity.
9 - 66
LX

Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0112-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
9 - 67
9 - 68
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on and battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts.
Set Condition:
When the Inlet Air Temp Sensor Signal circuit voltage is less than .078 volt for more than 2.8 seconds. One
trip failure. Three good trips to clear the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K21) IAT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND
(K21) IAT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
IAT SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.078 OF A VOLT

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
IAT SENSOR

Disconnect the IAT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read IAT voltage.
Is the voltage above 4.5 of a volts?
Yes
>> Replace the Intake Air Temperature Sensor.

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(K21) IAT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K21) IAT Sensor Signal circuit in the IAT Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K21) IAT Sensor Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K21) IAT SENSOR SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K21) IAT Sensor Signal circuit
and the (K900) Sensor ground circuit in the IAT Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K900) Sensor ground circuit
and the (K21) IAT Sensor Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
9 - 69
9 - 70
5.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0113-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
9 - 71
9 - 72
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts.
Set Condition:
The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor circuit voltage at the PCM goes above 4.98 volts for 2.8 seconds.
One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
IAT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
IAT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.98 VOLTS

With a scan tool, read the Intake Air Temperature Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
IAT SENSOR

Disconnect the Intake Air Temperature Sensor harness connector.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K21) IAT Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the IAT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the IAT Sensor voltage.
Yes
No
>> Replace the IAT Sensor.

>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K21) IAT Signal circuit in the IAT Sensor
harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K21) IAT Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K21) IAT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the PCM harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the (K21) IAT Signal circuit from the IAT Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K21) IAT Signal circuit.

9 - 73
9 - 74
5.
LX
IAT Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0116ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
9 - 75
9 - 76
LX
When Monitored:
Engine off time is greater than 480 minutes. Ambient temperature is greater than 4 C (38 F).
Set Condition:
After a calibrated amount of cool down time, the PCM compares the ECT Sensor, IAT Sensor and the Ambient
Air Temperature Sensor values. If the ECT Sensor value is not within calibrated temperature amount of the
other two temperature sensors an error is detected. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL. (ETC
lamp will illuminate with the MIL.)
Possible Causes
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.6 VOLTS

Disconnect the ECT Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, read the ECT voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
LX
3.
9 - 77
ECT SENSOR
Connect a jumper wire between the (K2) ECT Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the ECT Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the ECT Sensor.

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

CAUTION: CAUTION: Do not probe the PCM harness connectors. Probing the PCM harness connectors will
damage the PCM terminals resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special Tool #8815
along with the #8815-1 to perform the diagnosis.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K2) ECT Signal circuit at the ECT Sensor harness
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the high resistance in the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.
9 - 78
5.
LX

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit at the ECT Sensor
harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected
with the circuits correct polarity.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0117-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
9 - 79
9 - 80
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor circuit voltage at the PCM is less than 0.078 of a volt for more
than 2.8 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to clear the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND
ECT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.078 OF A VOLT

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
ECT SENSOR

Disconnect the ECT harness connector.
With a scan tool, read ECT voltage.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (K900) Sensor ground circuit and
the (K2) ECT Signal circuit in the ECT Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to between the (K900) Sensor ground circuit and the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K2) ECT Signal circuit in the ECT Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
9 - 81
9 - 82
5.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0118-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
9 - 83
9 - 84
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor circuit voltage at the PCM is greater than 4.98 volts for more
than 2.8 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL. (ETC lamp will illuminate with the MIL.)
Possible Causes
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
ECT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ECT SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.98 VOLTS

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
ECT SENSOR

Disconnect the ECT harness connector.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K2) ECT Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the ECT harness connector.
With a scan tool, read ECT voltage.
Yes
No

>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Measure the voltage on the (K2) ECT Signal circuit in the ECT Sensor
harness connector.
Is voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K2) ECT Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Measure the resistance of the (K2) ECT Signal circuit from the ECT
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.

9 - 85
9 - 86
5.
LX
ECT Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0121-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE
9 - 87
9 - 88
LX
When Monitored:
Ignition on and No MAP Sensor DTCs set.
Set Condition:
TP Sensor signals do not correlate to the MAP Sensor signal. Two Trip Fault. ETC light will illuminate. P2135
should set with this code also.
Possible Causes
RESISTANCE IN THE (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 OR (K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE IN (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE IN THE (K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR/THROTTLE BODY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Diagnose any other TP Sensor DTC(s) before continuing.

NOTE: The throttle plate should be free from binding and carbon build up, make sure the throttle plate is at
the idle position.
NOTE: Inspect the engine for vacuum leaks, repair before continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 8
2.
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Connect the PCM harness connectors.
With a scan tool, monitor the TP Sensor No.1 and No.2 voltage.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K922) Sensor Return circuit and
the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
NOTE: TP Sensor No.1 voltage should change from approximately
4.5 volts to less than 0.5 of a volt.
For TP Sensor No.2, connect a jumper wire between (F855) 5-volt supply circuit and the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 signal circuit.
0 volts to 5.0 volts?
Is the voltage reading within the listed specification when the
jumper wire is installed?
Yes
>> Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. After
LX
9 - 89
installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the ETC

RELEARN function.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (K122) TP SENSOR
NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT

the PCM terminals resulting in poor terminal to pin connection. Install Miller Special Tool #8815 along with
the #8815-1 to perform the diagnosis.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit at the Throttle
Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected with the circuits correct polarity.
Repeat the voltage drop test for the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit or the (K122) TP Sensor
No.2 Signal circuit.
4.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit at the Throttle Body harness connector to
the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected with the circuits correct polarity.
9 - 90
LX

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit.
5.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT

Perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K922) Sensor Return circuit at the Throttle Body harness connector to
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K922) Sensor Return circuit.
6.
Measure the resistance between the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit and the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit in the Throttle Body
harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit and the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
8.
9 - 91
THROTTLE FOLLOWER TEST

With a scan tool, perform the Throttle Follower Test and monitor the TP Sensor No.1 or No.2 voltage.
Slowly press the throttle pedal down.
The voltage for TP Sensor No.1 should start at approximately 0.3 of a volt and increase to above 4.7 volts.
The voltage for TP Sensor No.2 should start at approximately 4.7 volts and decrease to approximately 0.3 of a volt.
Is the voltage within the range of the listed specification for the appropriate Sensor?
Yes

No
>> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the ETC RELEARN function.
9 - 92
P0122-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 93
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Throttle Position Sensor voltage at the PCM is less than 0.16 of a volt for 0.7 of a second. One Trip Fault.
Three good trips to turn off the MIL. ETC light will illuminate.
Possible Causes
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: If a 5-Volt Supply DTC has also set, diagnose the 5-Volt DTC before continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 10
2.
P0222 ALSO SET
Was the P0222-TP SENSOR NO.2 VOLTAGE LOW DTC set along with the P0122?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.

Disconnect the Throttle Body harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the Throttle
Body harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 7
9 - 94
4.
LX
With a scan tool, monitor the TP Sensor No.1 voltage with the Sensor harness connector disconnected.
Yes
>> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, using a scan tool select the ETC RELEARN function.
No
>> Go To 5
5.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K22) TP Sensor No.1
Signal circuit in the Throttle Body harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K22) TP Sensor No.1

Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
Measure the resistance between the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit and the (K922) Sensor Return circuit in the Throttle Body harness
connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K922) Sensor Return circuit
and the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 9
LX
7.

to perform diagnostics.
Throttle Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
circuit in the Throttle Body harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 9
9 - 95
9 - 96
9.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
10.
With a scan tool, perform the Throttle Follower Test.

Monitor the TP Sensor No.1 voltage.
Does voltage start at approximately 0.8 of a volt and go above 3.5 volts with a smooth transition?
Yes

No
>> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, using a scan tool select ETC RELEARN function.
LX
P0123-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
9 - 97
9 - 98
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Throttle Position Sensor No.1 voltage is greater than 4.8 volts for 25 ms. One Trip Fault. ETC light will illuminate.
Possible Causes
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
THROTTLE PLATE JAMMED AGAINST THE MAXIMUM STOP
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
TP SENSOR NO.1 VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.8 VOLTS
NOTE: Make sure the throttle is fully closed and free from binding or carbon build up.
NOTE: If a 5-Volt Supply DTC has also set, diagnose the 5-Volt DTC before continuing.
NOTE: If P2101 is also set, then make sure that the blade moves freely and does not hang up near Wide
Open Throttle before trying to repair P0123.
Start the engine.
With a scan tool, read the TP Sensor No.1 voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 8
2.

Connect a jumper wire between the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit and the (K922) Sensor Return circuit in the Throttle Body harness
connector.
With a scan tool, monitor the TP Sensor No.1 voltage.
Is the voltage below 0.5 of a volt with the jumper wire
installed?
Yes
>> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body

Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, using a scan tool, select the ETC
RELEARN function.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 99

Measure the voltage on the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit in the Throttle Body harness connector.
Is voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Measure the resistance of the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit from
the Throttle Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
9 - 100
5.
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit and the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the Throttle Body harness
connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 6
6.
Measure the resistance of the (K922) Sensor Return circuit from the
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K922) Sensor Return circuit.

LX
LX
7.
9 - 101
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
8.

Monitor the TP Sensor No.1 voltage.
Yes

No
>> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, using a scan tool select the ETC RELEARN function.
9 - 102
P0125-INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMP FOR CLOSED-LOOP FUEL CONTROL
LX
LX
9 - 103
When Monitored:
With battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts and after engine is started.
Set Condition:
The engine temperature does not enable closed loop. Failure time depends on start-up coolant temperature
and ambient temperature. (i.e. 2 minutes for a start temp of 10C (50F) or up to 10 minutes for a vehicle with
a start-up temp of -28C (19F). Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
THERMOSTAT
ECT SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
CHECKING COOLANT LEVEL AND CONDITION

NOTE: If an Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) DTC is set along with this code, diagnose the ECT DTC first.
NOTE: Inspect the ECT terminals and related PCM terminals. Make sure the terminals are free from corrosion and damage.
NOTE: The best way to diagnose this DTC is to allow the vehicle to sit overnight outside in order to have
a totally cold soaked engine.
NOTE: Extremely cold outside ambient temperatures may have caused this DTC to set.
WARNING: Never open the cooling system when the engine is hot. The system is under pressure. Extreme
burns or scalding may result. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death.
Allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system.
Inspect the coolant system for proper level and condition.
Is the coolant level and condition OK?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Inspect the vehicle for a coolant leak, make the appropriate repairs, and add the correct amount of
coolant.
2.
THERMOSTAT OPERATION
NOTE: This test works best if performed on a cold engine (cold soak).
With a scan tool, read the Eng Coolant Temp Deg value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight (cold soak), the
temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient temperature.
NOTE: If engine coolant temperature is above 82C (180F), allow the engine to cool until 65C (150F) is
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up monitor the Eng Coolant Temp Deg value. The temp deg value change should be a smooth
transition from start up to normal operating temp 82C (180F). Also monitor the actual coolant temperature with a
thermometer.
9 - 104
LX
NOTE: As the engine warms up to operating temperature, the actual coolant temperature (thermometer reading) and the scan tool Eng Coolant Temp Deg values should stay relatively close to each other.
Using the appropriate service information, determine the proper opening temperature of the thermostat.
Did the thermostat open at the proper temperature?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the thermostat.

3.
ECT SENSOR OPERATION

With a scan tool, read the Eng Coolant Temp Deg value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight (cold soak), the
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up monitor the Eng Coolant Temp Deg value. The temp deg value change should be a smooth
thermometer.
NOTE: As the engine warms up to operating temperature, the actual coolant temperature (thermometer reading) and the scan tools Eng Coolant Temp Deg value should stay relatively close to each other.
Is the thermometer reading relatively close to the scan tool ECT reading?
Yes
>> Test Complete.
No
>> Replace the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor.

LX
P0128-THERMOSTAT RATIONALITY
9 - 105
9 - 106
LX
Theory of Operation
The PCM predicts what the engine coolant temperature should be, based on the engine coolant temperature at
start-up, ambient temperature and how the vehicle is subsequently driven. The predicted engine coolant temperature is compared to the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor reading. The error between the two is calculated and
integrated with respect to time. When the Thermostat diagnostic runs, the integrated error is compared to a calibrated threshold and pass/fail is determined. Separate pass and fail thresholds are used in order to improve accuracy of the diagnostic.
When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
The PCM predicts a coolant temperature value that it will compare to the actual coolant temperature. A significant difference results in an error. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K900), (G931) SENSOR GROUND
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: If any ECT, AAT, CMP or CKP sensor DTCs have set along with P0128, diagnose them before continuing.
NOTE: Make sure that the Pinion Factor has been programmed correctly into the PCM.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

LX
2.
9 - 107
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
NOTE: If an Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) DTC is set along with this code, diagnose the ECT DTC first.
NOTE: Inspect the ECT terminals and related PCM terminals. Make sure the terminals are free from corrosion and damage.
WARNING: Never open the cooling system when the engine is hot. The system is under pressure. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in personal injury including extreme burns, scalding, or death. Allow the
engine to cool before opening the cooling system.
Check the coolant system to make sure that the coolant is in good condition and at the proper level.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Inspect the vehicle for a coolant leak and add the necessary amount of coolant.
3.
With a scan tool, read the ECT Deg value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight (cold soak), the temperature
value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient temperature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up, monitor the ECT Deg value. The temp deg value change should be a smooth transition
from start up to normal operating temp 82C (180F). Also monitor the actual coolant temperature with a thermometer.
NOTE: As the engine warms up to operating temperature, the actual coolant temperature (thermometer reading) and the scan tool, ECT Temperature value should stay relatively close to each other.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
AMBIENT AIR TEMP SENSOR OPERATION

With a scan tool, read and record the AAT Sensor Temperature value.
Using the DRB Temperature Probe #CH7050, or an equivalent temperature measuring tool, measure the ambient air
temperature near the AAT Sensor.
Is the AAT Sensor value with -15C (5F) of the temperature probe reading?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 7
9 - 108
5.
LX
WARNING: Make sure the engine cooling system is cool before removing the pressure cap or any hose. The
cooling system is pressurized when hot. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury
including extreme burns, scalding, or death.
With a scan tool, read and record the ECT Sensor Temperature value.
Use the DRB Temperature Probe #CH7050, or an equivalent temperature measuring tool, measure the engine coolant temperature.
Is the ECT Sensor value with -15C (5F) of the temperature probe reading?
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Go To 7
6.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES
Inspect the Temperature Sensors for any physical damage.

Inspect the engine coolant. Make sure the coolant is at the proper level. Refer to the Service Information COOLING.
Make sure the Temperature Sensors are properly installed.
Make sure the CMP and CKP sensors are installed properly. Check the connectors for any signs of damage.
With the engine running at normal operating temperature, monitor the Temperature sensor parameters while wiggling the wire harness. Look for parameter values to change.
Visually inspect the related wire harness. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, partially broken wires and broken,
bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
diagnosis.
Inspect and clean all PCM, engine, and chassis grounds.
Yes

No
>> Test Complete.
7.
SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
NOTE: Visually inspect both the component and the PCM/FCM

connectors. Look for damage, partially broken wires and backed
out or corroded terminals
Disconnect the applicable Temperature Sensor harness connector.
Disconnect the applicable controller harness connectors.
Measure the voltage on the Signal circuit at the Temperature Sensor
harness connector.
Is voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the Signal circuit.

No
>> Go To 8
LX
8.
9 - 109
TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Connect the controller harness connectors.
Connect a jumper wire across Sensor harness connectors.
With a scan tool, read the Temperature Sensor voltage.
Does the voltage start at 5.0 volts and drop below 1.0 volt
when the jumper wire is installed?
Yes
>> Replace the appropriate Temperature Sensor.

No
>> Go To 9
NOTE: Disconnect the jumper wire before continuing.
9.
SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the Sensor Signal circuit Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815 or the FCM.
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Repair the open in the Sensor Signal circuit.

9 - 110
10.
LX
SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance of the Sensor ground circuit from the appropriate Temperature Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal
of special tool #8815 or the FCM.
Yes
>> Go To 11
No
>> Repair the open in the Sensor ground circuit.

11.
SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the Sensor Signal circuit in the Temperature Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the Signal circuit.

No
>> Go To 12
LX
12.
SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the Signal circuit and the Sensor
ground circuit in the Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the Sensor ground circuit and the
Sensor Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 13
9 - 111
9 - 112
13.
FCM/PCM
NOTE: Before continuing, check the FCM/PCM harness connector

terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as
necessary.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and
connectors. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits.
Yes

No
>> Replace applicable Control Module per Service Information.

LX
LX
9 - 113
9 - 114
LX
LX
P0129-BAROMETRIC PRESSURE OUT-OF-RANGE LOW
9 - 115
9 - 116
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition key on. No Cam or Crank signal within 75 ms. Engine speed less than 250 RPM.
Set Condition:
The PCM senses the voltage from the MAP sensor to be less than 2.2 volts but above 0.04 of a volt for 300
milliseconds. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL. (ETC lamp will flash)
Possible Causes
(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K900) SENSOR GROUND
MAP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Is the DTC active at this time.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 7
LX
3.
9 - 117
MAP SENSOR
With a scan tool, monitor the MAP Sensor voltage with the Sensor harness connector disconnected.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.

#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.

9 - 118
5.
the (K1) MAP Signal circuit in the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K900) Sensor ground circuit
and the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
Yes
No
>> Replace the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with

the Service information.
LX
LX
7.

Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
8.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

9 - 119
9 - 120
9.
LX
Yes
No
>> Go To 10
10.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0131-O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT LOW
9 - 121
9 - 122
LX
When Monitored:
Engine running for less than 30 seconds and the O2 Sensor Heater Temperature is less than 251C (484F)
with battery voltage greater 10.4 volts.
Set Condition:
The oxygen sensor signal voltage is below 1.5 volts for 3 seconds after starting engine. One Trip Fault. Three
Possible Causes
(K902) O2 RETURN UPSTREAM CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K902) O2 RETURN UPSTREAM CIRCUIT
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (Z904) O2 1/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
O2 SENSOR BELOW 1.5 VOLTS
Start the engine.

Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
With a scan tool, read the 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
(K41) O2 SENSOR 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT

With a scan tool, monitor the O2 Sensor voltage.
Is the 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage above 4.8 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
LX
3.
O2 SENSOR
Measure the voltage on the (K902) O2 Return Upstream circuit in the

Is the voltage at 2.5 volts?
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K902) O2 RETURN UPSTREAM CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K902) O2 Upstream
Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K902) O2 Return

Upstream circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
5.
(K41) O2 SENSOR 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1
Signal circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 123
9 - 124
6.
LX
(K41) O2 SENSOR 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K902) O2 RETURN UPSTREAM CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit
and the (K902) O2 Return Upstream circuit in the O2 Sensor harness
connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K902) O2 Return Upstream

circuit and the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
(K41) O2 SENSOR 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z904) O2 1/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit
and the (Z904) O2 1/1Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor harness
connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (Z904) O2 1/1 Heater ground
circuit and the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0132-O2 SENSOR 1/1 CIRCUIT HIGH
9 - 125
9 - 126
LX
When Monitored:
O2 Sensor Heater Temperature is greater than 496C (925F) and battery voltage greater than 10.4 volts.
Set Condition:
The Oxygen Sensor voltage is above 3.7 volts for 40 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the
MIL.
Possible Causes
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
O2 SENSOR ABOVE 3.7 VOLTS
NOTE: When only one O2 Sensor is shorted to voltage, the scan tool will display all O2 Sensor voltage
readings at approximately 5.0 volts. When diagnosing this DTC, only diagnose the O2 Sensor that set the
DTC.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
Start the engine and allow the engine to idle.

Measure the voltage on the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit in the
1/1 O2 Sensor harness connector.
NOTE: Measure the voltage in reference to ground, not the (K902)
O2 Upstream Return circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K41) O2 Sensor

1/1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Measure the voltage on the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit in the
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K902) O2

Upstream Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
1/1 O2 SENSOR

Connect a jumper wire between the (K41) O2 1/1 Signal circuit and the
(K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, monitor the 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage.
Is the voltage between 2.3 and 2.7 volts with the jumper wire
installed?
Yes
No

>> Go To 5
9 - 127
9 - 128
5.

Measure the resistance of the (K41) O2 1/1 Signal circuit from the 1/1
O2 Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (K41) O2 1/1 Signal circuit.

6.
Measure the resistance of the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit from

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit.

LX
LX
7.
9 - 129
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 130
P0133-O2 SENSOR 1/1 SLOW RESPONSE
LX
LX
9 - 131
Theory of Operation
For an aged O2 sensor, the response rate to the air/fuel change is slower than when it was new. The O2 sensor
tends to move less with the same air/fuel changes in a given time frame. Therefore by observing the activity of
voltage readings from the upstream O2 sensor, the quality of the O2 sensor can be detected.
When Monitored:
Vehicle is started and driven between 20 and 55 MPH with the Throttle open for a minimum of 120 seconds.
Coolant greater than 70C (158F). Catalytic Converter Temp greater than 600C, (1112F) and EVAP Purge is
active.
Set Condition:
O2 Sensor response is too slow for a calibrated amount of time. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the
MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
(K902) O2 RETURN UPSTREAM CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Check for contaminants that may have damaged the O2 Sensor: contaminated fuel, unapproved silicone, oil and coolant.
NOTE: After the repairs have been made, verify proper O2 Sensor operation. If all the O2 Sensor voltage
readings have not returned to normal, follow the diagnostic procedure for the remaining O2 Sensors.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

9 - 132
2.
LX
EXHAUST LEAK
Start the engine.

Inspect the exhaust for leaks between the engine and the O2 Sensor.
If a leak is heard but unable to be located, it may be necessary to use special tool Miller Tool #8404A Evaporative
Emissions Leak Detector (EELD) on the exhaust system to find leaks.
Connect the SMOKE supply tip (black hose) to the exhaust cone adapter (if equipped) and place it into the tail pipe.
Set the smoke/air control switch to SMOKE.
Press the remote smoke/air start button.
While still holding the remote smoke/air start button, use the white light (#8404-CLL) to follow the EVAP system
path, and look for the source of the leak indicated by exiting smoke.
If a leak is concealed from view, release the remote smoke/air start button, and use the ultraviolet (UV) black light
#8404-UVL and the yellow goggles 8404-20 to look for residual traces of dye that is left behind by the smoke.
The exiting smoke deposits a residual fluid that is either bright green or bright yellow in color when viewed with a
UV light.
Be sure to check the exhaust manifold to cylinder head connection for leaks.
Are there any exhaust leaks?
Yes
>> Repair or replace the leaking exhaust parts as necessary.

No
>> Go To 3
3.
(K41) O2 1/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K41) O2 1/1 Signal circuit at the O2 Sensor harness
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the high resistance in the (K41) O2 1/1 Signal circuit.
LX
4.
9 - 133
(K902) O2 RETURN CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K902) O2 Return circuit at the O2 Sensor harness
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K902) O2 Return circuit.

5.
O2 SENSOR

Repair
Replace the O2 Sensor
9 - 134
P0135-O2 SENSOR 1/1 HEATER PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
9 - 135
When Monitored:
Engine running and heater duty cycle greater than 0%. Battery voltage greater than 11.0 volts.
Set Condition:
No sensor output is received when the PCM powers up the sensor heater. Two trip fault. Three good trips to
turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(Z904) O2 1/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR HEATER ELEMENT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

the O2 Sensor voltage to stabilize between 4.6 and 5.0 volts.
Does the voltage stay above 4.5 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

NOTE: Allow the O2 sensor to cool down to room temperature.
Disconnect the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the O2 Heater Element across the 1/1 O2 Sensor connector between the O2 Heater
Control terminal and the Heater ground terminal.
Is the resistance of the O2 Sensor Heater Element between 2.0 and 30.0 ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

9 - 136
3.
LX
(K99) O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
Disconnect the O2 harness connectors.

With the scan tool, actuate the O2 Heater.
Using a 12-volt test light connected ground, probe the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit from the O2 harness
connector.
NOTE: The test light should be illuminated and bright. Compare the brightness to that of a direct connection to the battery.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K99) O2 1/1 Heater Control circuit.
4.
(Z904) O2 1/1 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
Using a 12-volt test light connected battery voltage, probe the (Z904) O2 Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor
harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (Z904) O2 1/1 Heater ground circuit.
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 137
9 - 138
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K141) O2 1/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
(K141) O2 1/2 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (Z902) O2 1/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Start the engine.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Is the O2 Sensor voltage above 4.8 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
LX
3.
O2 SENSOR
Measure the voltage on the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in

the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K904) O2 Downstream

Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
5.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal
circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 139
9 - 140
6.
LX
(K141) O2 1/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit and
the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness
connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K904) O2 Downstream

Return circuit and the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
(K141) O2 1/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z902) O2 1/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
the (Z902) O2 1/2 Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
circuit and the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 141
9 - 142
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
MIL.
Possible Causes
(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K141) O2 1/2 SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

O2 Downstream Return circuit.
Yes

1/2 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
O2 SENSOR

Connect a jumper wire between the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit and
the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in the 1/2 O2 Sensor harness
connector.
installed?
Yes
No

>> Go To 5
9 - 143
9 - 144
5.

Measure the resistance of the (K141) O2 1/2 Signal circuit from the O2
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
Measure the resistance of the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit

from the O2 Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit.

LX
LX
7.
9 - 145
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 146
LX
LX
9 - 147
When Monitored:
Coolant greater than 70C (158F). Catalytic Converter Temp greater than 600C (1112F) and EVAP Purge is
active.
Set Condition:
The oxygen sensor signal voltage switches less than 16 times from lean to rich within 20 seconds during monitoring. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
(K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

9 - 148
2.
LX
EXHAUST LEAK
Start the engine.

UV light.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
9 - 149

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
O2 SENSOR

Repair
Replace the O2 Sensor
9 - 150
LX
LX
9 - 151
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(Z902) O2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Measure the resistance of the O2 Heater Element across the O2 Sensor connector between the O2 Heater Control
terminal and the Heater ground terminal.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

9 - 152
3.
LX

connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
(Z902) O2 1/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUITHIGH HIGH RESISTANCE
harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (Z902) O2 1/2 Heater ground circuit.
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 153
9 - 154
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K43) O2 2/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
(K43) O2 2/1 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (Z904) HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Start the engine.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
LX
3.
O2 SENSOR

Yes
>> Replace the 2/1 O2 Sensor.

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K902) O2 Upstream
Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K902) O2 Upstream

Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
5.

Yes
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 155
9 - 156
6.
LX
(K43) O2 2/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K43) O2 2/1 Signal circuit and the
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K902) O2 Upstream Return

No
>> Go To 7
7.
(K43) O2 2/1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z904) HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K43) O2 2/1 Signal circuit and the
(Z904) O2 Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (Z904) O2 Heater ground circuit and the (K43) O2 2/1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 157
9 - 158
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
MIL.
Possible Causes
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

O2 Upstream Return circuit.
Yes

2/1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K902) O2

Upstream Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
O2 SENSOR

Connect a jumper wire between the (K43) O2 2/1 Signal circuit and the
in place?
Yes
No

>> Go To 5
9 - 159
9 - 160
5.

Measure the resistance of the (K43) O2 2/1 Signal circuit from the 2/1
O2 Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
Measure the resistance of the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit from

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit.

LX
LX
7.
9 - 161
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 162
LX
LX
9 - 163
Theory of Operation
For an aged O2 sensor , the response rate to the air/fuel change is slower than when it was new. The O2 sensor
tends to move less with the same air/fuel changes in a given time frame. Therefore by observing the activity of
voltage readings from the upstream O2 sensor, the quality of the O2 sensor can be detected.
When Monitored:
Coolant greater than 70C (158F). Catalytic Converter Temp greater than 600C, (1112F) and EVAP Purge is
active.
Set Condition:
O2 Sensor response is too slow for a calibrated amount of time. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the
MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
(K902) O2 UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
With a scan tool, read DTCs and record the related Freeze Frame data.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

9 - 164
2.
LX
EXHAUST LEAK
Start the engine.

UV light.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
9 - 165

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
O2 SENSOR

Repair
Replace the O2 Sensor.
9 - 166
LX
LX
9 - 167
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(Z904) O2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Measure the resistance of the O2 Heater Element across the O2 Sensor connector between the O2 Heater Control
terminal and the O2 Heater ground terminal.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

9 - 168
3.
LX

connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
(Z904) O2 SENSOR HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (Z904) O2 Heater ground circuit.
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 169
9 - 170
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K243) O2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
(K243) O2 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (Z902) O2 2/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Start the engine.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
LX
3.
O2 SENSOR
Measure the voltage on the (K904) O2 Donwstream Return circuit in

Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K904) O2 Downstream

Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
5.

Yes
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 171
9 - 172
6.
LX
(K243) O2 2/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K904) O2 DOWNSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
the (K904) O2 Dowstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K904) O2 Downstream

Return circuit and the (K243) O2 2/2 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
(K243) O2 2/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z902) O2 2/2 HEATER GROUND CIRCUIT
the (Z902) O2 2/2 Heater ground circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 8
8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 173
9 - 174
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
MIL.
Possible Causes
(K243) O22/2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

O2 Downstream Return circuit.
Yes

2/2 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

the 2/2 O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
O2 SENSOR

Connect a jumper wire between the (K243) O2 2/2 Signal circuit and
the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in the 2/2 O2 Sensor harness
connector.
installed?
Yes
No

>> Go To 5
9 - 175
9 - 176
5.

Measure the resistance of the (K243) O2 2/2 Signal circuit from the O2
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
Measure the resistance of the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit

from the O2 Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit.

LX
LX
7.
9 - 177
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 178
LX
LX
9 - 179
When Monitored:
Coolant greater than 70C (158F). Catalytic Converter Temp greater than 600C (1112F) and EVAP Purge is
active.
Set Condition:
The oxygen sensor signal voltage switches less than 16 times from lean to rich within 20 seconds during monitoring. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
O2 SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

9 - 180
2.
LX
EXHAUST LEAK
Start the engine.

UV light.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
LX
4.
9 - 181

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
O2 SENSOR

Repair
Replace the O2 Sensor.
9 - 182
LX
LX
9 - 183
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
PCM
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING.
Diagnostic Test
1.

With a scan tool, monitor 2/2 O2 Sensor voltage for at least 2 minutes.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Measure the resistance of the 2/2 O2 Heater Element, between the O2 Heater Control terminal and the O2 Heater
ground terminal in the O2 Sensor connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

9 - 184
3.
LX

connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (Z902) O2 Heater ground circuit.
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0171-FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 LEAN
9 - 185
9 - 186
LX
When Monitored:
With the engine running in closed loop mode, the ambient/battery temperature above 20. F and altitude below
8500 ft.
Set Condition:
If the PCM multiplies short term compensation by long term adaptive and a certain percentage is exceeded for
two trips, a freeze frame is stored, the MIL illuminates and a trouble code is stored. Two Trip Fault. Three good
trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE
FUEL PUMP INLET STRAINER PLUGGED
FUEL PUMP MODULE
O2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
O2 RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
MAP SENSOR OPERATION
ENGINE MECHANICAL PROBLEM
FUEL FILTER/PRESSURE REGULATOR (HIGH)
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Diagnose all other trouble codes before continuing.

NOTE: Check for contaminants that may have damaged an O2 Sensor: contaminated fuel, unapproved silicone, oil and coolant.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECKING FUEL PRESSURE
WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in personal injury or death.
Install a fuel pressure gauge to the fuel rail.
With a scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge.
NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi).
LX
9 - 187
CAUTION: Stop All Actuations.

Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading.
Within Specification
Go To 3
Above Specification
Replace the fuel filter/pressure regulator.
Below Specification
Go To 12
3.
O2 SENSOR OPERATION
Start the engine.

NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensors Signal or Return circuit is shorted to ground the scan tool will display all
O2 Sensor voltage readings low. The O2 Sensor that is shorted to ground will display a voltage reading
near or at 0 volts.
NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensor Signal or Return circuits are shorted to voltage, the scan tool will display all
O2 Sensor voltage readings high.
With a scan tool, monitor all of the O2 Sensor voltage readings.
Is the voltage switching between 2.5 and 3.4 volts for all the O2 Sensors?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 8
4.
1/1 O2 SENSOR HEATER OPERATION

With a scan tool, actuate the 1/1 O2 Heater Test.
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 188
5.
LX

Connect a Vacuum Gauge to a Manifold Vacuum source.
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to idle.
NOTE: If engine will not idle, maintain a constant RPM above idle.
With the scan tool, read the MAP Sensor vacuum value.
Is the scan tool reading within 1( of the Vacuum Gauge reading?
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
NOTE: For this test to be valid, the thermostat must be operating correctly.
With a scan tool, read the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight (cold soak), the temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient temperature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up, monitor the ECT Sensor value. The temperature value change should be a smooth transition from start up to normal operating temperature 82C (180F). The value should reach at least 82C (180F).
Did the ECT value increase smoothly and did it reach at least 180F (82C)?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.

Check for any of the following conditions/mechanical problems.
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM - must be free from leaks.
ENGINE VACUUM - must be at least 13 inches in neutral.
ENGINE VALVE TIMING - must be within specifications.
ENGINE COMPRESSION - must be within specifications.
ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM - must be free of any restrictions or leaks.
ENGINE PCV SYSTEM - must flow freely.
TORQUE CONVERTER STALL SPEED - must be within specifications.
POWER BRAKE BOOSTER - no internal vacuum leaks.
FUEL - must be free of contamination.
FUEL INJECTOR - plugged or restricted injector; control wire not connected to correct injector.
Are there any engine mechanical problems?
Yes

No
>> Go To 11
LX
8.
1/1 O2 SENSOR

O2 Sensor voltage should read 5.0 volts on the scan tool with the connector disconnected.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K41) Signal circuit and the (K902)
O2 Upstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
NOTE: The voltage should drop from 5.0 volts to 2.5 volts with the
jumper wire in place.
Did the O2 Sensor voltage change from 5.0 volts to 2.5 volts
with the jumper wire installed?
Yes

No
>> Go To 9
9.
With a scan tool, monitor the 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage reading with the
jumper wire removed.
NOTE: The scan tool will display all O2 Sensor voltage readings
approximately 5.0 volts when only one O2 Sensors Signal circuit
is shorted to voltage.
NOTE: The scan tool will display one O2 Sensor voltage close to
zero and the others will read lower than normal when one O2 Sensor Signal circuit contains excessive resistance.
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Check the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit for a short to
ground, open, or short to voltage. Inspect the O2 Sensor
connector and the PCM harness connector. If OK, replace
and program the Powertrain Control Module per Service
Information.
9 - 189
9 - 190
10.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 11
No
>> Check the O2 Return circuit for a short to ground, open, or

short to voltage. Inspect the O2 Sensor connector and the
PCM harness connector. If OK, replace and program the
Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
11.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
12.
Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module.
Install special 5/16 fuel line adapter tool #6539 between disconnected fuel line and the fuel pump module.
Attach a fuel pressure test gauge to the T fitting on tool #6539.
Is the fuel pressure within specification?
Yes
>> Repair or replace fuel supply line as necessary.

No
>> Go To 13
LX
13.
9 - 191
FUEL PUMP INLET STRAINER

WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released.
Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer.
Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged?
Yes
>> Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer.

No
>> Go To 14
14.
FUEL PUMP MODULE

Repair
Replace the Fuel Pump Module.
9 - 192
P0172-FUEL SYSTEM 1/1 RICH
LX
LX
9 - 193
When Monitored:
With the engine running in closed loop mode, the ambient/battery temperature above 20. F and altitude below
8500 ft.
Set Condition:
If the PCM multiplies short term compensation by long term adaptive and a purge fuel multiplier and the result
is below a certain value for 30 seconds over two trips, a freeze frame is stored, the MIL illuminates and a
trouble code is stored. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID OPERATION
O2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
O2 RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
MAP SENSOR
ECT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Check for contaminates that may have damaged an O2 Sensor: contaminated fuel, unapproved silicone, oil and coolant.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge.
Go To 3
Above Specification
9 - 194
LX

3.
O2 SENSOR OPERATION
Start the engine.

NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensors Signal or Return circuit is shorted to ground or voltage, all the other O2
Sensor voltage readings will be affected.
With the scan tool, monitor the 1/1 O2 Sensor voltage reading.
Is the voltage switching between 2.5 and 3.4 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 9
4.

With the scan tool, perform the 1/1 O2 Heater Test.
With the scan tool, monitor the O2 Sensor voltage while performing the Heater test for at least 2 minutes.
Does the voltage stay above 4.5 volts during the Heater test?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.

Start the engine.
With a scan tool, read the MAP Sensor vacuum value.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

NOTE: Remove the vacuum gauge before continuing.
LX
6.
9 - 195
With a scan tool, read the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight
(cold soak), the temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient temperature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up, monitor the Engine Coolant Temperature value. The temp value change should be a
smooth transition from start up to normal operating temp 82C (180F). The value should reach at least 82C
(180F).
Did the ECT value increase smoothly and reach at least 180F (82C)?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.

Disconnect the hoses at the Evap Purge Solenoid.
Using a hand vacuum pump, apply 10 inches of vacuum to the Evap Purge Solenoid vacuum source port on the
component side.
Did the Evap Purge Solenoid hold vacuum?
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Replace the EVAP Purge Solenoid.

NOTE: Connect the vacuum hoses before continuing.
8.

AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM - must be free from restrictions.
Yes

No
>> Go To 12
9 - 196
9.
LX
1/1 O2 SENSOR
NOTE: Perform the following test on the O2 Sensors whose voltage was not switching properly in the previous step.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit
and the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness
connector.
NOTE: The voltage should drop from 5.0 volts down to 2.5 volts
with the jumper wire connected.
Did the O2 Sensor voltage drop from 5 volts to 2.5 volts when
the jumper wire was installed?
Yes
>> Replace the 1/1 O2 Sensor

No
>> Go To 10
10.

Start the engine.
Yes
>> Check the (K41) O2 Sensor 1/1 Signal circuit for damage,
short to ground, open, or short to voltage. Inspect the O2
Sensor connector and the PCM harness connector. If OK,
replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per
No
>> Go To 11
LX
11.
9 - 197
(K902) O2 SENSOR UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
Engine still running.

Yes
>> Go To 12
No
>> Check the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit for damage,

NOTE: Turn the ignition off before continuing.
12.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 198
P0174-FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 LEAN
LX
LX
9 - 199
When Monitored:
With the engine running in closed loop mode, the ambient/battery temperature above 20 F and altitude below
8500 ft.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
FUEL PUMP MODULE
O2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
O2 RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Diagnose all other trouble codes before continuing.

NOTE: Check for contaminants that may have damaged an O2 Sensor: contaminated fuel, unapproved silicone, oil and coolant.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
9 - 200
LX

Go To 3
Above Specification
Below Specification
Go To 12
3.
O2 SENSOR OPERATION
Start the engine.

NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensors Signal or Return circuit is shorted to ground the scan tool will display all
O2 Sensor voltage readings low. The O2 Sensor that is shorted to ground will display a voltage reading
near or at 0 volts.
NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensor Signal or Return circuits are shorted to voltage, the scan tool will display all
O2 Sensor voltage readings high.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 8
4.

NOTE: Perform the following test on all O2 Sensors.
With a scan tool, actuate the 2/1 O2 Heater Test.
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
LX
5.
9 - 201

Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
With the scan tool, read the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor value. If the engine was allowed to sit
overnight (cold soak), the temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient
temperature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up, monitor the ECT Sensor value. The temperature value change should be a smooth transition from start up to normal operating temperature 82C (180F). The value should reach at least 82C (180F).
Did the ECT value increase smoothly and did it reach at least 180F (82C)?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.

Yes

No
>> Go To 11
9 - 202
8.
O2 SENSOR

With the scan tool, monitor the 2/1 O2 Sensor voltage.
connector.
Did the O2 Sensor voltage change from 5.0 volts to 2.5 volts
when the jumper wire was installed?
Yes

No
>> Go To 9
9.
O2 SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
With the scan tool, monitor all the O2 Sensor voltage reading with the
jumper wire removed.
NOTE: The scan tool will display all O2 Sensor voltage readings
approximately 5.0 volts when only one O2 Sensors Signal circuit
is shorted to voltage.
NOTE: The scan tool will display one O2 Sensor voltage close to
zero and the others will read lower than normal when one O2 Sensor Signal circuit contains excessive resistance.
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Check all the O2 Signal circuits for a short to ground, open,
or short to voltage. Inspect the O2 Sensor connector and
the PCM harness connector. If OK, replace and program
the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
LX
LX
10.
9 - 203

Yes
>> Go To 11
No
>> Check the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit for a short to

ground, open, or short to voltage. Inspect the O2 Sensor
Information.
11.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
12.
Install special 5/16 fuel line adapter tool #6539 between disconnected fuel line and the fuel pump module.
Attach a fuel pressure test gauge to the T fitting on tool #6539.
Yes

No
>> Go To 13
9 - 204
13.
LX

WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released.
Yes

No
>> Go To 14
14.
FUEL PUMP MODULE

Repair
Replace the Fuel Pump Module.
LX
P0175-FUEL SYSTEM 2/1 RICH
9 - 205
9 - 206
LX
When Monitored:
With the engine running in closed loop mode, the ambient/battery temperature above 20 F and altitude below
8500 ft.
Set Condition:
If the PCM multiplies short term compensation by long term adaptive and a purge fuel multiplier and the result
is below a certain value for 30 seconds over two trips, a freeze frame is stored, the MIL illuminates and a
trouble code is stored. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
O2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
O2 RETURN CIRCUIT
O2 SENSOR
MAP SENSOR
ECT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Check for contaminates that may have damaged an O2 Sensor: contaminated fuel, unapproved silicone, oil and coolant.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
Go To 3
Above Specification
LX
9 - 207

3.
O2 SENSOR OPERATION
Start the engine.

NOTE: If one of the O2 Sensors Signal or Return circuit is shorted to ground or voltage, all the other O2
Sensor voltage readings will be affected.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 9
4.

With the scan tool, perform the 2/1 O2 Heater Test for each O2 Sensor.
With the scan tool, monitor the 2/1 O2 Sensor voltage while performing the Heater test for at least 2 minutes.
Does the voltage stay above 4.5 volts for each Sensor?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.

Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

NOTE: Remove the vacuum gauge before continuing.
9 - 208
6.
LX
With the scan tool, read the Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight
(cold soak), the temperature value should be a sensible value that is somewhere close to the ambient temperature.
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up, monitor the Engine Coolant Temperature value. The temp value change should be a
smooth transition from start up to normal operating temp 82C (180F). The value should reach at least 82C
(180F).
Did the ECT value increase smoothly and reach at least 180F (82C)?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.

Disconnect the hoses at the Evap Purge Solenoid.
Using a hand vacuum pump, apply 10 inches of vacuum to the Evap Purge Solenoid vacuum source port on the
component side.
Did the Evap Purge Solenoid hold vacuum?
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

NOTE: Connect the vacuum hoses before continuing.
8.

AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM - must be free from restrictions.
Yes

No
>> Go To 12
LX
9.
2/1 O2 SENSOR

connector.
NOTE: The voltage should drop from 5.0 volts down to 2.5 volts
with the jumper wire connected.
Did the O2 Sensor voltage drop from 5 volts to 2.5 volts when
the jumper wire was installed?
Yes
>> Replace the O2 Sensor

No
>> Go To 10
10.
O2 SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Start the engine.
Yes
>> Check the (K43) O2 Sensor 2/1 Signal circuit for damage,
No
>> Go To 11
9 - 209
9 - 210
11.
LX
(K902) O2 SENSOR UPSTREAM RETURN CIRCUIT
Engine still running.

Yes
>> Go To 12
No
>> Check the (K902) O2 Upstream Return circuit for damage,

NOTE: Turn the ignition off before continuing.
12.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0196ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
9 - 211
9 - 212
LX
When Monitored:
Engine off time is greater than 480 minutes. Ambient temperature is greater than 4C (38 F).
Set Condition:
The PCM detects the Engine Oil Temp value is incorrect by comparing it with the other engine inputs. Three
Possible Causes
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Disconnect the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
(K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Replace the Engine Oil Temperature Sensor.

No
>> Go To 8
LX
4.

NOTE: Visually inspect both the component and the PCM connectors. Look for damaged, partially broken wires, and backed out or
corroded terminals.
Measure the voltage on the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit in
the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Is voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (G224) Engine Oil
Temp Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.

Measure the resistance of the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit
from the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector to the appropriate
terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit.
9 - 213
9 - 214
6.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G224) Engine Oil
Temp Signal circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (G224) Engine Oil Temp
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND
Measure the resistance between the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal
circuit and the (K900) Sensor ground circuit in the Engine Oil Temp
Yes
the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 9
LX
LX
8.
9 - 215

Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal
of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

9.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 216
P0197-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 217
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Engine Oil Temperature sensor circuit voltage at the PCM is less than the calibrated amount. One Trip
Fault. Three good trips to clear the MIL.
Possible Causes
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
With the scan tool, clear the DTC.

Does the P0198-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH set?
Yes
>> Replace the Engine Oil Temp Sensor.

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 218
3.
LX
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to between the (K900) Sensor ground circuit and the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(G224) ENGINE OIL TEMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G224) Engine Oil
Temp Signal circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (G224) Engine Oil Temp
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0198-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
9 - 219
9 - 220
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Engine Oil Temperature sensor circuit voltage at the PCM is greater than the calibrated amount. One Trip
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

IS the DTC active at this time?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
ENGINE OIL TEMP SENSOR
With the scan tool, clear the DTC.

Connect a jumper wire between the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit and the (K900) Sensor ground circuit in the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Does the P0197-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
LOW DTC set?
Yes
No
>> Replace the Engine Oil Temp Sensor.

>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Measure the voltage on the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit in
the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector.
Yes
Temp Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Measure the resistance of the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit
from the Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector to the appropriate
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (G224) Engine Oil Temp Signal circuit.
9 - 221
9 - 222
5.
LX
Engine Oil Temp Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0201-FUEL INJECTOR 1 CIRCUIT
9 - 223
9 - 224
LX
When Monitored:
With battery voltage greater than 10 volts. Auto Shutdown Relay energized. Engine speed less than 3000 rpm.
Set Condition:
No inductive spike is detected after injector turn off.
Possible Causes
(K343) ASD RELAY OUTPUT 2 CIRCUIT
(K11) INJECTOR CONTROL NO.1 CIRCUIT OPEN
(K11) INJECTOR CONTROL NO.1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Disconnect the No.1 Fuel Injector harness connector.
With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Relay.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, backprobe the (K343)
ASD Relay Output 2 circuit in the Fuel Injector harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance or short to ground in the

(K343) ASD Relay Output 2 circuit.
LX
3.
FUEL INJECTOR
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, backprobe the (K11)

Injector Control No.1 circuit.
With the scan tool, actuate the Fuel Injector.
What is the state of the test light during the actuation?
Brightly Blinking.
Replace the Fuel Injector.
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5
4.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K11) Injector Control
No.1 circuit in the Injector harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K11) Injector Control

No.1 circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 225
9 - 226
5.
LX

Measure the resistance of the (K11) Injector Control No.1 circuit from
the Fuel Injector harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (K11) Injector Control No.1 circuit.
6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 227
9 - 228
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

ASD Relay Output 2 circuit in the No.2 Fuel Injector harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
FUEL INJECTOR

With the scan tool, actuate the No.2 Fuel Injector.
Brightly Blinking.
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5
4.

Yes

No.2 circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 229
9 - 230
5.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 231
9 - 232
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

ASD Relay Output 2circuit in the No.3 Fuel Injector harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

(K343) ASD Relay Output 2circuit.
3.
FUEL INJECTOR
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, backprobe the (K13) Injector Control No.3 circuit.
Brightly Blinking.
LX
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5
4.

Yes

No.3 circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
5.

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
9 - 233
9 - 234
6.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 235
9 - 236
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
FUEL INJECTOR

Brightly Blinking.
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5
4.

Yes

No.4 circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 237
9 - 238
5.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 239
9 - 240
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
FUEL INJECTOR

Brightly Blinking.
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5
4.

Yes

No.5 circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 241
9 - 242
5.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 243
9 - 244
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
FUEL INJECTOR

Brightly Blinking.
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5
4.

Yes

No.6 circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 245
9 - 246
5.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 247
9 - 248
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to
9 - ENGINE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
LX
3.
FUEL INJECTOR

Brightly Blinking.
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5
4.

Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K26) Injector Control No.7
circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 249
9 - 250
5.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 251
9 - 252
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

With a scan tool, read DTC.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
FUEL INJECTOR

Brightly Blinking.
ON Constantly.
Go To 4
OFF Constantly.
Go To 5
4.

Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K28) Injector Control No.8
circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 253
9 - 254
5.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0221-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 PERFORMANCE
9 - 255
9 - 256
LX
When Monitored:
Ignition on and No MAP Sensor DTCs set.
Set Condition:
TP Sensor signals do not correlate to the MAP Sensor signal. Two Trip Fault. ETC light will illuminate. P2135
should set with this code also.
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
Ignition
Diagnose any other TP Sensor DTC(s) before continuing.

The throttle plate and linkage should be free from binding and carbon build up.
Make sure the throttle plate is at the idle position.
on, engine not running.
NOTE: Inspect the engine for vacuum leaks.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 8
2.

4.5 volts to less than 0.5 of a volt.
0 volts to 5.0 volts?
Yes
LX
9 - 257

RELEARN function.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND (K122) TP SENSOR
NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit at the Throttle
Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected with the circuits correct polarity.
Repeat the voltage drop test for the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit or the (K122) TP Sensor
4.

Perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit at the Throttle Body harness connector to
9 - 258
LX

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
5.

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
Measure the resistance between the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit and the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit in the Throttle Body
harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 7
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
8.
9 - 259

Yes

No
9 - 260
P0222-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW
For a complete Engine wiring diagram Refer to Section 8W.
LX
LX
9 - 261
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Throttle Position Sensor voltage at the PCM is less than 0.16 of a volt for 0.7 of a second. One Trip Fault.
Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
THROTTLE PLATE JAMMED AGAINST THE MAXIMUM STOP
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
TP SENSOR NO.2 BELOW 0.35 OF A VOLT
NOTE: If a 5-Volt supply DTC has also set, diagnose the 5-Volt DTC before continuing.
NOTE: Make sure the throttle moves freely and does not hang up at Wide Open Throttle, by performing the
Throttle Follower Test
NOTE: If P2101 is also set, then make sure that the blade moves freely and does not hang up near Wide
Open Throttle before trying to repair P0222.
With the scan tool, read the TP Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 11
2.
P0122 ALSO SET
Was the P0122-TP SENSOR NO.1 VOLTAGE LOW DTC set along with the P0222?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
9 - 262
3.

Measure the voltage on the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the Throttle
Body harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 8
4.
Connect a jumper wire between the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit and the
(K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit in the Throttle Body harness connector.
With the scan tool, monitor the TP Sensor No.2 voltage.
installed?
Yes
No
>> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body

Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, with a scan tool select the ETC
RELEARN function.
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.

Measure the resistance of the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit
from the Throttle Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit.
6.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K122) TP Sensor

No.2 Signal circuit at the Throttle Body harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K122) TP Sensor No.2

Signal.
No
>> Go To 7
9 - 263
9 - 264
7.
(K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K922) SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit and the (K922) TP Sensor Return circuit at the Throttle Body harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K922) Sensor Return circuit
No
>> Go To 10
8.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

LX
LX
9.
9 - 265
circuit at the Throttle Body harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 10
10.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
11.

With the scan tool, perform the Throttle Follower Test.
Monitor the TP Sensor No.2 voltage while slowly pressing the Throttle pedal down.
Is there a smooth voltage change from high to low?
Yes

No
>> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, with a scan tool select the ETC RELEARN function.
9 - 266
P0223-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
9 - 267
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Throttle Position Sensor No.2 Signal circuit voltage is greater than 4.9 volts for 25 ms. One Trip Fault. ETC
light will illuminate.
Possible Causes
(K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: If a 5-Volt supply DTC has also set, diagnose the 5-Volt DTC before continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 7
2.

Disconnect the Throttle Body Assembly harness connector.
With the scan tool monitor the TP Sensor No.2 voltage.
Is the voltage below 0.5 volt?
Yes
>> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, with the scan tool select the ETC RELEARN function.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 268
3.

Measure the voltage on the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit at the
Throttle Body harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K122) TP Sensor

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit and the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit at the Throttle Body harness
connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit and the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
9 - 269
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (K922) Sensor Return circuit.

6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
7.
With the scan tool, perform the Throttle Follower Test.

Monitor the TP Sensor No.2 voltage while slowly pressing the Throttle pedal down.
Is there a smooth voltage change from high to low?
Yes

No
>> Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, with the scan tool select the ETC RELEARN function.
9 - 270
LX
P0300- MULTIPLE CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE

When Monitored:
Any time the engine is running, and the adaptive numerator has been successfully updated.
Set Condition:
The threshold to set the fault is application specific; it is tied to the level of misfire that will cause emissions to
increase to 1.5 times the standard or in some cases 1%. It is always a two trip fault above the calibrated RPM.
It takes 1 soft fail to set a malfunction and two trips to set the MIL. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
INJECTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT
IGNITION WIRE
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL
FUEL PUMP MODULE
FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
CYLINDER MIS-FIRE CONDITION ACTIVE
NOTE: Check for any TSBs that apply to a Misfire condition. Review the vehicle repair history for any misfire condition repairs that have been performed.
Engine running.
Observe the WHICH CYLINDER IS MISFIRING screen and identify the cylinders that have a misfire present.
Is there a misfire present at this time?
Yes
>> Go To 2
NOTE: Repeat the below checks for each cylinder that is indicating a misfire present.
No

LX
2.
9 - 271
VISUAL INSPECTION
NOTE: Anything that affects the speed of the crankshaft can cause a misfire DTC.
NOTE: When a Misfire is detected for a particular cylinder, the PCM will shut down that cylinders Injector
Control circuit.
- Visually inspect the engine for any of the following conditions.
- Worn serpentine belt
- Binding Engine-Driven accessories: A/C Compressor, P/S Pump, Water pump.
- Misalignment Water pump, P/S Pump and A/C Compressor pulleys
- Corroded PCM power and ground circuits.
- Improper CKP, CMP, MAP, and TP Sensor mounting
- Poor connector/terminal to component connection. i.e., CKP sensor, Fuel Injector, Ign coil, etc.
- Vacuum leaks
- Restricted Air Induction system or Exhaust system.
- Internal engine component failures.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
NOTE: On the 2.7 and 3.5L engines, cylinders 1, 3 and 5, it is necessary to remove the upper intake to
access the ignition coils and the Fuel Injector harness connectors.
Disconnect the Ignition Coil harness connector.
Disconnect the Fuel Injector harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (K343) ASD Relay Output 2 circuit in the Ignition Coil
harness connector and Fuel Injector harness connector while the relay is actuating.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance or short to ground in the (K343) ASD Relay Output 2 circuit.
4.
IGNITION SYSTEM OPERATION
access the ignition coils. Once the ignition coil has been removed from the cylinder head, the intake must
be reinstall to be able to crank the engine. Move the ignition coil harness connector through the slots in the
upper intake and then connect the coil to the harness connector. Secure the upper intake to the lower
intake in accordance with the service information.
Connect the Ignition Coil harness connector.
Remove the Ignition Coil.
Leave the Fuel Injector harness connector of the cylinder being tested disconnected.
Install a spark tester on the Ignition Coil.
While cranking the engine observe the spark coming from the spark tester.
9 - 272
LX
NOTE: A crisp blue spark that is able to jump the gap of the spark tester should be generated.
Is good spark present?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 14
NOTE: Connect the Fuel Injector harness connector before continuing.
5.
SPARK PLUG
NOTE: Vehicles that are equipped with the 5.7L or 6.1L engines must have both sparks (per cylinder)
removed and inspected to ensure proper operation.
Remove the Spark Plug.
Inspect the Spark Plug for the following conditions.
- Cracks
- Carbon Tracking
- Foreign Material
- Gap size out of specifications
- Loose or broke electrode
NOTE: Lightly tap the bottom of the spark plug on a solid surface. The electrode in the spark plug should
not move.
Yes
>> Replace the Spark Plug.

No
>> Go To 6
6.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Start the engine and observe the fuel pressure reading.
Go To 7
Below Specification
Go To 12
Above Specification
LX
7.
9 - 273
NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary.
these instructions can result in personal injury or death
Install special tool #6539 (5/169) or #6631 (3/89) fuel line adapter.
Install the fuel pressure gauge.
Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure.
NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi).
Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the
engine.
Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes.
NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi).
Does the gauge fall below the listed specification?
Yes
>> Replace the leaking Fuel Injector(s).

No
>> Go To 8
8.
FUEL INJECTOR OPERATION
CAUTION: After each Fuel Injector actuation, start the engine to clean the cylinder of fuel. Failure to do so
could cause engine damage.
Remove special tool #C4390.
Start the engine and allow the fuel pressure to reach maximum pressure.
Using the scan tool, actuate the Fuel Injector.
Monitor the fuel pressure gauge.
Does the fuel pressure gauge indicate a drop in fuel pressure?
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 10
9 - 274
LX
NOTE: Turn the ignition off, remove the Fuel Pressure gauge, and connect the fuel lines before continuing.
9.

ENGINE VACUUM - must be at least 13 inches in neutral
ENGINE VALVE TIMING - must be within specifications
ENGINE COMPRESSION - must be within specifications
ENGINE PCV SYSTEM - must flow freely
TORQUE CONVERTER STALL SPEED - must be within specifications
POWER BRAKE BOOSTER - no internal vacuum leaks
FUEL - must be free of contamination
CAM LOBES - must not be worn excessively
CYLINDER LEAKAGE TEST - must be within specifications
VALVE SPRINGS - cannot be weak or broken
Yes

No
>> Go To 17
10.
FUEL INJECTOR

Disconnect the Fuel Injector harness connector.
Control circuit.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the Injector Control circuit.
Does the test light blink/flicker?
Yes
>> Replace the Fuel Injector.

No
>> Go To 11
11.
INJECTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT

diagnosis.
Check the Injector Control circuit for an open, short to ground, and short to voltage.
Was a problem found with the Injector Control circuit?
Yes
>> Repair the excessive resistance or short in the Injector Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 17
LX
12.
9 - 275
FUEL SUPPLY LINE RESTRICTED

Install special tool #6539 (5/169) #6631(3/89) fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply
line and the fuel pump module.
Yes

No
>> Go To 13
13.

Yes

No
>> Before continuing, check the Fuel Pump Module harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or
terminal push out. Make sure the ground circuit is operating properly. Repair as necessary. Replace the
Fuel Pump Module.
14.
IGNITION WIRE
NOTE: If the vehicle being tested does not have an ignition wire answer YES to this test and continue.
Remove the ignition wire.
Measure the resistance of the ignition wire.
Yes
>> Go To 15
No
>> Replace the Ignition Wire.

9 - 276
15.
LX
IGNITION COIL

Remove the Fuel Pump Relay.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the Coil Control circuit.
Crank the engine for 5 second while observing the test light.
Does the test light brightly blink/flicker?
Yes
>> Replace the Ignition Coil.

No
>> Go To 16
16.
COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT

diagnosis.
Check the Coil Control circuit for an open, short to ground, and short to voltage.
Was a problem found with the Coil Control circuit?
Yes
>> Repair the Coil Control circuit.

No
>> Go To 17
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0301-CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE
9 - 277
9 - 278
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
(K11) INJECTOR CONTROL NO.1 CIRCUIT
(K19) COIL CONTROL NO.1 CIRCUIT
IGNITION WIRE
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL
FUEL PUMP MODULE
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Engine running.
Observe the WHICH CYLINDER IS MISFIRING screen for at least one minute on the scan tool.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION
Control circuit.
- Vacuum leaks
LX
9 - 279

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
NOTE: On the 2.7 and 3.5L engines, cylinders 1, 3 and 5, it is necessary to remove the upper intake to access the ignition coils and
the Fuel Injector harness connectors.
Disconnect the Ignition Coil No.1 harness connector.
Disconnect the Fuel Injector No.1 harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (K343) ASD
Relay Output 2 circuit in the Ignition Coil harness connector and Fuel
Injector harness connector while the relay is actuating.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
Connect the Ignition Coil No.1 harness connector.
9 - 280
LX
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 14
5.
SPARK PLUG
NOTE: Vehicles that are equipped with the 5.7L or 6.1L engines must have both spark plugs (per cylinder)
- Cracks
- Carbon Tracking
- Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Go To 7
Below Specification
Go To 12
Above Specification
LX
7.
9 - 281
engine.
Yes

No
>> Go To 8
8.
Using the scan tool, actuate the No.1 Fuel Injector.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 10
9 - 282
LX
9.

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
10.
FUEL INJECTOR

NOTE: When a Misfire is detected for a particular cylinder, the
PCM will shut down that cylinders Injector Control circuit.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (K11) Injector
Control No.1 circuit.
Yes

No
>> Go To 11
LX
11.
9 - 283

Check the (K11) Injector Control No.1 circuit for an open, short to
ground, and short to voltage.
Was a problem found with the (K11) Injector Control No.1 circuit?
Yes
>> Repair the excessive resistance or short in the (K11) Injector Control No.1 circuit.
No
>> Go To 17
12.

Yes

No
>> Go To 13
9 - 284
13.
LX

Yes

No
Fuel Pump Module.
14.
IGNITION WIRE
Yes
>> Go To 15
No

15.
IGNITION COIL

Using a 12-volt test light connected to 12-volts, probe the (K19) Coil
Yes

No
>> Go To 16
LX
16.
9 - 285

Check the (K19) Coil Control No.1 circuit for an open, short to ground,
and short to voltage.
Was a problem found with the (K19) Coil Control No.1 circuit?
Yes
>> Repair the (K19) Coil Control No.1 circuit.

No
>> Go To 17
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 286
LX
LX
9 - 287
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
IGNITION WIRE
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL
FUEL PUMP MODULE
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Engine running.
Observe the WHICH CYLINDER IS MISFIRING screen for at least one minute with the scan tool.
Is there a misfire present?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION
Control circuit.
Visually inspect the engine for any of the following conditions.
- Vacuum leaks
9 - 288
LX

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Disconnect the Ignition Coil No.2 harness connector.
Disconnect the Fuel Injector No.2 harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
LX
9 - 289
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 14
5.
SPARK PLUG
- Cracks
- Carbon Tracking
- Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Go To 7
Below Specification
Go To 12
Above Specification
9 - 290
7.
LX
NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair /replace as necessary.
engine.
NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi)
Yes

No
>> Go To 8
8.
Using scan tool, actuate the No.2 Fuel Injector.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 10
LX
9 - 291
9.

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
10.
FUEL INJECTOR

Yes

No
>> Go To 11
9 - 292
11.
LX

Yes
No
>> Go To 17
12.

Yes

No
>> Go To 13
LX
13.
9 - 293

Yes

No
terminal push out. Ensure the ground circuit is operating properly. Repair as necessary. Replace the
Fuel Pump Module.
14.
IGNITION WIRE
Yes
>> Go To 15
No

15.
IGNITION COIL

Yes

No
>> Go To 16
9 - 294
16.
LX

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 295
9 - 296
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
IGNITION WIRE
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL
FUEL PUMP MODULE
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Engine running.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION
Control circuit.
- Vacuum leaks
LX
9 - 297

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
(K343) ASD RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Disconnect the No.3 Ignition Coil harness connector.
With a scan tool, actuate the ASD Relay.
Relay Output circuit in the Ignition Coil harness connector and Fuel
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
9 - 298
LX
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 14
5.
SPARK PLUG
- Cracks
- Carbon Tracking
- Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Go To 7
Below Specification
Go To 12
Above Specification
LX
7.
9 - 299
engine.
Yes

No
>> Go To 8
8.
Using a scan tool, actuate the No.3 Fuel Injector.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 10
9 - 300
LX
9.

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
10.
FUEL INJECTOR

Yes

No
>> Go To 11
LX
11.
9 - 301

Yes
No
>> Go To 17
12.

Yes

No
>> Go To 13
9 - 302
13.
LX

Yes

No
Fuel Pump Module.
14.
IGNITION WIRE
Yes
>> Go To 15
No

15.
IGNITION COIL

Yes

No
>> Go To 16
LX
16.
9 - 303

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 304
LX
LX
9 - 305
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
IGNITION WIRE
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL
FUEL PUMP MODULE
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Engine running.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION
Control circuit.
- Vacuum leaks
9 - 306
LX

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Relay Output circuit in the Ignition Coil harness connector and Fuel
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
Connect the No.4 Ignition Coil harness connector.
Remove the No.4 Ignition Coil.
LX
9 - 307
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 14
5.
SPARK PLUG
- Cracks
- Carbon Tracking
- Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Go To 7
Below Specification
Go To 12
Above Specification
9 - 308
7.
LX
engine.
NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi)
Yes

No
>> Go To 8
8.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 10
LX
9 - 309
9.

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
10.
FUEL INJECTOR

Yes

No
>> Go To 11
9 - 310
11.
LX

Yes
No
>> Go To 17
12.

Yes

No
>> Go To 13
LX
13.
9 - 311

Yes

No
Fuel Pump Module.
14.
IGNITION WIRE
Yes
>> Go To 15
No

15.
IGNITION COIL

Yes

No
>> Go To 16
9 - 312
16.
LX

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 313
9 - 314
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
IGNITION WIRE
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL
FUEL PUMP MODULE
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Engine running.
Observe the WHICH CYLINDER IS MISFIRING screen for at least one minute with a scan tool.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION
Control circuit.
- Vacuum leaks
LX
9 - 315

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
9 - 316
LX
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 14
5.
SPARK PLUG
- Cracks
- Carbon Tracking
- Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Go To 7
Below Specification
Go To 12
Above Specification
LX
7.
9 - 317
engine.
Yes

No
>> Go To 8
8.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 10
9 - 318
LX
9.

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
10.
FUEL INJECTOR

Yes

No
>> Go To 11
LX
11.
9 - 319

Yes
No
>> Go To 17
12.

Yes

No
>> Go To 13
9 - 320
13.
LX

Yes

Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 5. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE -DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No
Fuel Pump Module.
14.
IGNITION WIRE
Yes
>> Go To 15
No

15.
IGNITION COIL

Yes

No
>> Go To 16
LX
16.
9 - 321

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 322
LX
LX
9 - 323
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
IGNITION WIRE
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL
FUEL PUMP MODULE
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Engine running.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION
Control circuit.
- Vacuum leaks
9 - 324
LX

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
LX
9 - 325
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 14
5.
SPARK PLUG
- Cracks
- Carbon Tracking
- Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Go To 7
Below Specification
Go To 12
Above Specification
9 - 326
7.
LX
engine.
Yes

No
>> Go To 8
8.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 10
LX
9 - 327
9.

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
10.
FUEL INJECTOR

Yes

- 5. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
MODULES/POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE -DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No
>> Go To 11
9 - 328
11.
LX

Yes
No
>> Go To 17
12.

Yes

No
>> Go To 13
LX
13.
9 - 329

Yes

No
Fuel Pump Module.
14.
IGNITION WIRE
Yes
>> Go To 15
No

15.
IGNITION COIL

Yes

No
>> Go To 16
9 - 330
16.
LX

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 331
9 - 332
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
IGNITION WIRE
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL
FUEL PUMP MODULE
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Engine running.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION
Control circuit.
- Vacuum leaks
LX
9 - 333

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No

9 - 334
4.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 14
5.
SPARK PLUG
- Cracks
- Carbon Tracking
- Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Go To 7
Below Specification
Go To 12
Above Specification
LX
7.
9 - 335
engine.
Yes

No
>> Go To 8
8.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 10
9 - 336
LX
9.

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
10.
FUEL INJECTOR

NOTE: When a Misfire is detected for a particular cylinder, the PCM
will shut down that cylinders Injector Control circuit.
Yes

No
>> Go To 11
LX
11.
9 - 337

Yes
No
>> Go To 17
12.

Yes

No
>> Go To 13
13.

Yes

No
Fuel Pump Module.
9 - 338
14.
LX
IGNITION WIRE
Yes
>> Go To 15
No

15.
IGNITION COIL

Yes

No
>> Go To 16
16.

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
LX
17.
9 - 339
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 340
LX
LX
9 - 341
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
IGNITION WIRE
SPARK PLUG
IGNITION COIL
FUEL PUMP MODULE
FUEL INJECTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Engine running.
Is there misfire present at this time?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION
Control circuit.
- Vacuum leaks
9 - 342
LX

Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.

LX
9 - 343
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Go To 14
5.
SPARK PLUG
- Cracks
- Carbon Tracking
- Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
6.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Go To 7
Below Specification
Go To 12
Above Specification
9 - 344
7.
LX
engine.
Yes

No
>> Go To 8
8.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 10
LX
9 - 345
9.

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
10.
FUEL INJECTOR

NOTE: When a Misfire is detected for a particular cylinder, the PCM
will shut down that cylinders Injector Control circuit.
Yes

No
>> Go To 11
9 - 346
11.
LX

Yes
No
>> Go To 17
12.

Yes

No
>> Go To 13
13.

Yes

No
Fuel Pump Module.
LX
14.
9 - 347
IGNITION WIRE
Yes
>> Go To 15
No

15.
IGNITION COIL

Yes

No
>> Go To 16
16.

Yes

No
>> Go To 17
9 - 348
17.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0315-NO CRANK SENSOR LEARNED
9 - 349
9 - 350
LX
When Monitored:
Under closed throttle decel and A/C off. ECT above 75C (167F). Engine start time is greater than 50 seconds.
Set Condition:
One of the CKP sensor target windows has more than 2.86% variance from the reference. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
TONE WHEEL/PULSE RING
WIRE HARNESS
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

With a scan tool, clear DTCs, PCM battery disconnect to reset the PCM.
Start the engine.
If the MIL has not yet illuminated, test drive the vehicle to try to get the code to reset.
Does the code reset while cranking or during the test drive?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Visually inspect the CKP wire harness. Look for any chafed, pierced,
pinched, or partially broken wires.
Visually inspect the CKP wire harness connectors. Look for broken,
bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals.
Make sure the Crankshaft Position Sensor is properly installed and the
mounting bolt(s) are torqued to the proper specification.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 351

Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.

Repair
Replace the Crankshaft Position Sensor.
9 - 352
P0325-KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 353
When Monitored:
This monitor runs above 2000 rpm, under open throttle conditions. The high voltage test runs all the times the
engine is running.
Set Condition:
The High voltage fault will set at 4.8 volts. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K42) KNOCK SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K42) KNOCK SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K942) KNOCK SENSOR NO.1 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
(K42) KNOCK SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K942) KNOCK SENSOR NO.1 RETURN
CIRCUIT
(K42) KNOCK SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
KNOCK SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
(K42) KNOCK SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Disconnect the No.1 Knock Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (K42) Knock Sensor No.1 Signal circuit in
the Knock Sensor harness connector.
Does the voltmeter indicate voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K42) Knock Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 354
3.

Measure the resistance of the (K42) Knock Sensor No.1 Signal circuit
from the Knock Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the open in the (K42) Knock Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
4.
Measure the resistance of the (K942) Knock Sensor No.1 Return circuit
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K942) Knock Sensor No.1 Return
circuit.
LX
LX
5.
9 - 355
(K42) KNOCK SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (K942) KNOCK SENSOR NO.1 RETURN
CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K42) Knock Sensor No.1 Signal
circuit and the (K942) Knock Sensor No.1 Return circuit in the Knock
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K42) Knock Sensor No.1
Signal circuit and the (K942) Knock Sensor No.1 Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
(K42) KNOCK SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K42) Knock Sensor
No.1 Signal circuit in the Knock Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K42) Knock Sensor No.1
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
KNOCK SENSOR
Replace the Knock Sensor.

With the scan tool, erase DTC.
Attempt to operate the vehicle using the information noted in the Freeze Frame.
Yes
>>
push out. Repair as necessary. Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
No
>> Test Complete.
9 - 356
P0330-KNOCK SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 357
When Monitored:
This monitor runs above 2000 rpm, under open throttle conditions. The high voltage test runs all the times the
engine is running.
Set Condition:
The High voltage fault will set at 4.8 volts. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K242) KNOCK SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K242) KNOCK SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K924) KNOCK SENSOR NO.2 RETURN
CIRCUIT
(K242) KNOCK SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
KNOCK SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
(K242) KNOCK SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Disconnect the No.2 Knock Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (K242) Knock Sensor No.2 Signal circuit in
the Knock Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K242) Knock Sensor No.2 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 358
3.

Measure the resistance of the (K242) Knock Sensor No.2 Signal circuit
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the open in the (K242) Knock Sensor No.2 Signal
circuit.
4.
Measure the resistance of the (K924) Knock Sensor No.2 Return circuit
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K924) Knock Sensor No.2 Return
circuit.
LX
LX
5.
(K242) KNOCK SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (K924) KNOCK SENSOR NO.2 RETURN
CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K242) Knock Sensor No.2 Signal
circuit and the (K924) Knock Sensor No.2 Return circuit in the Knock
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K242) Knock Sensor No.2
Signal circuit and the (K924) Knock Sensor No.2 Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
9 - 359
(K242) KNOCK SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K242) Knock Sensor
No.2 Signal circuit in the Knock Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K242) Knock Sensor No.2
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
9 - 360
7.
LX
KNOCK SENSOR
Replace the Knock Sensor.

With the scan tool, erase DTC.
Attempt to operate the vehicle using the information noted in the Freeze Frame.
Yes
>>
push out. Repair as necessary. Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
P0335-CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
9 - 361
9 - 362
LX
When Monitored:
Engine cranking.
Set Condition:
No CKP signal is present during engine cranking, and at least 8 camshaft position sensor signals have
occurred. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K24) CKP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K24) CKP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K24) CKP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED GROUND
(K24) CKP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Crank the engine.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 14
2.

Disconnect the CKP Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the CKP
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 10
LX
3.
(K24) CKP SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Measure the voltage on the (K24) CKP Signal circuit in the CKP Sensor
harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 7
4.

CKP Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

9 - 363
9 - 364
5.
LX
(K24) CKP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K24) CKP Signal circuit and the
(F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the CKP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K24) CKP Signal circuit and
the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
NOTE: Inspect the slots on the flywheel for damage. If a problem is found repair as necessary.
Repair
7.

Measure the voltage on the (K24) CKP Signal circuit in the CKP Sensor
harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K24) CKP Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
LX
8.

Measure the resistance of the (K24) CKP Signal circuit from the CKP
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Repair the open in the (K24) CKP Signal circuit.

9.
(K24) CKP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K24) CKP Signal circuit in the CKP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K24) CKP Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 13
9 - 365
9 - 366
10.

Measure the voltage on the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the CKP
Yes
No
>> Go To 11
11.

Measure the resistance of the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit from the CKP
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 12
No

LX
LX
12.
9 - 367
circuit in the CKP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 13
13.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Repair
14.
ERRATIC CKP SENSOR SIGNAL

With a lab scope probe and the Miller special tool #6801, backprobe the (K24) CKP Signal circuit in the CKP harness connector.
Wiggle the related wire harness and lightly tap on the Crank Position Sensor.
Look for any pulses generated by the CKP Sensor.
Did the CKP Sensor generate any erratic pulses?
Yes
>> Inspect the related wire harness and replace the Crankshaft Position Sensor if no wiring problems were
found.
No
>> Go To 15
9 - 368
15.
LX
ERRATIC CMP SIGNAL

With a lab scope probe and the Miller special tool #6801, backprobe the (K44) CMP Signal circuit in the CMP
harness connector.
Wiggle the related wire harness and lightly tap on the Cam Position Sensor.
Look for any pulses generated by the CMP Sensor.
Did the CMP Sensor generate any pulses?
Yes
>> Inspect the related wire harness and replace the Camshaft Position Sensor if no wiring problems were
found.
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
P0339-CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR INTERMITTENT
9 - 369
9 - 370
LX
When Monitored:
While cranking the engine and with the engine running.
Set Condition:
When the CKP Sensor failure counter reaches 20. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

With a scan tool read DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
2.
CHECKING CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL WITH A LAB SCOPE

Install Miller Special Tools #8815 and #8815-1 to perform diagnosis.
Using a lab scope, probe the (K24) CKP Signal circuit in the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 8
LX
3.
9 - 371

Visually inspect the related wire harness including the ground circuit. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires.
Make sure the Crankshaft Position Sensor and the Camshaft Position Sensor are properly installed and the mounting bolt(s) are torqued to the proper specification.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND
Disconnect the CKP Sensor connector.

Measure the voltage on the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the Sensor
harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open or short to ground in the (F855) 5-volt

Supply circuit. Use Miller special tool #8815 when checking
for an open circuit to prevent PCM harness connector terminal damage.
5.

Carefully disconnect the Negative Battery (Ground) cable.
Yes

No
>> Go To 6
9 - 372
6.
LX
CHECKING CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL WITH A LAB SCOPE
Install the CKP Sensor and connect the battery cable.

NOTE: An intermittent condition in the Cam Position Sensor can
cause the P0339 to set.
Using a lab scope, probe the (K44) CMP Signal circuit in the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Wiggle the related wire harness and lightly tap on the Cam Position
Sensor.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Replace the Cam Position Sensor.

No
>> Go To 7
7.

Repair
8.

Disconnect the CKP Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (K24) CKP Signal circuit in the Sensor harness connector.
Wiggle the related wire harness while taking this measurement.
Is the voltage above 1 volt?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K24) CKP Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 9
LX
9.

Measure the resistance in the (K24) CKP Signal circuit from the CKP
harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Wiggle the wire harness while taking this measurement.
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K24) CKP Signal

circuit.
10.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K24) CKP Signal circuit in the CKP Sensor harness connector.
Wiggle the related wire harness while monitoring the resistance value.
Does the resistance ever go below 100 ohms?
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K24) Signal circuit.

No
>> Go To 11
9 - 373
9 - 374
11.
LX
Measure the resistance between the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit and
the (K24) CKP Signal circuit in the CKP harness connector.
Yes
and the (K24) CKP Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 12
12.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0340-CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT
9 - 375
9 - 376
LX
When Monitored:
During engine cranking and with the engine running. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
At least 5 seconds or 2.5 engine revolutions have elapsed with crankshaft position sensor signals present but
no camshaft position sensor signal. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K44) CMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K44) CMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K44) CMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED GROUND
(K44) CMP SIGNAL SHORTED TO (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Crank the engine.

With a scan tool read the DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 14
2.

Disconnect the CMP Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the CMP
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 10
LX
3.
(K44) CMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Measure the voltage on the (K44) CMP Signal circuit in the CMP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 7
4.

CMP Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

9 - 377
9 - 378
5.
LX
(K44) CMP SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K44) CMP Signal circuit and the
(F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the CMP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K44) CMP Signal circuit and
No
>> Go To 6
6.
NOTE: Inspect the Camshaft sprocket for damage per the Service Information. If a problem is found repair
as necessary.
Repair
7.

Measure the voltage on the (K44) CMP Signal circuit in the CMP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K44) CMP Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
LX
8.

Measure the resistance of the (K44) CMP Signal circuit from the CMP
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Repair the open in the (K44) CMP Signal circuit.

9.
(K44) CMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K44) CMP Signal circuit in the CMP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K44) CMP Signal circuit
No
>> Go To 10
9 - 379
9 - 380
10.

Measure the voltage on the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the CMP
Yes
No
>> Go To 11
11.

Measure the resistance of the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit between the
CMP Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 12
No

LX
LX
12.
9 - 381
circuit in the CMP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 13
13.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
14.
ERRATIC CMP SIGNAL
With a lab scope probe and the Miller special tool #6801, back probe
the (K44) CMP Signal circuit in the CMP harness connector.
Wiggle the related wire harness and lightly tap the Camshaft Position
Sensor.
9 - 382
LX

Did the CMP Sensor generate any erratic pulses?
Yes
>> Replace the Camshaft Position Sensor.

No
>> Go To 15
15.
ERRATIC CKP SIGNAL

With a lab scope probe and the Miller special tool #6801, backprobe
the (K24) CKP Signal circuit in the CKP harness connector.
Wiggle the related wire harness and lightly tap on the Crankshaft Position Sensor.
Did the CKP Sensor generate any erratic pulses?
Yes
>> Replace the Crankshaft Position Sensor.

No
>> Test Complete.
LX
P0344-CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR INTERMITTENT
9 - 383
9 - 384
LX
When Monitored:
While cranking the engine and engine running.
Set Condition:
When the failure counter reaches 20. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K44) CMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECKING CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL WITH A LAB SCOPE

Using a lab scope, probe the (K44) CMP Signal circuit in the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 8
LX
3.
9 - 385

Visually inspect the related wire harness including the ground circuit. Look for any chafed, pierced, pinched, or partially broken wires.
Make sure the Crankshaft Position Sensor and the Camshaft Position Sensor are properly installed and the mounting bolt(s) are torqued to the proper specification.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORTED TO GROUND
Disconnect the CMP Sensor connector.

Measure the voltage on the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the CMP harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open or short to ground in the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit. Use Miller special tool #8815 when checking for
an open circuit to prevent PCM harness connector terminal
damage.
5.
TONE WHEEL/PULSE RING INSPECTION

Carefully disconnect the Battery Ground cable.
Remove the Camshaft Position Sensor.
Inspect the Tone Wheel/Pulse Ring for damage, foreign material, or excessive movement.
Yes
>> Repair or replace the Tone Wheel/Pulse Ring as necessary.

No
>> Go To 6
9 - 386
6.
LX
CHECKING CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL WITH A LAB SCOPE
NOTE: An intermittent condition in the Crank Position Sensor can

cause the P0344 to set.
Install the CMP Sensor and connect the Battery cable.
Using a lab scope, probe the (K24) CKP Signal circuit in the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Wiggle the related wire harness and lightly tap on the Crank Position
Sensor.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Replace the Crank Position Sensor.

No
>> Go To 7
7.

Repair
8.

Disconnect the CMP Sensor connector.
Measure the voltage on the (K44) CMP Signal circuit.
Does the voltage ever increase above 5.2 volts?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K44) CMP Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 9
LX
9.

Measure the resistance in the (K44) CMP Signal circuit from the CMP
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K44) CMP Signal

circuit.
10.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K44) CMP Signal circuit in the CMP Sensor harness connector.
Wiggle the related wire harness while monitoring the resistance value.
Does the resistance ever go below 100 ohms?
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K44) CMP Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 11
9 - 387
9 - 388
11.
LX
(K44) CMP SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit and the
(K44) CMP Signal circuit in the CMP harness connector.
Yes
and the (K44) CMP Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 12
12.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0401-EGR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
9 - 389
9 - 390
LX
When Monitored:
Engine running for greater than two minutes with the Engine Coolant Temp greater than 70C (158F). EGR
active. Less than 8500 feet. Ambient temperature greater than -6C (20F).
Set Condition:
The PCM closes the EGR valve while monitoring the O2 Sensor signal. Once a closed EGR fueling sample
has been established the PCM then ramps in EGR and additional fueling while monitoring the O2 sensor signal in the open state. A fueling sample is again established. The PCM then compares the different O2 Sensor
signal readings (fueling samples). If a larger than expected variation is detected, a soft failure is recorded.
Three soft failures set a one trip failure. After two failed trips, a DTC is set and the MIL is illuminated.
Possible Causes
(Z904) EGR SOLENOID GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(K35) EGR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT
EGR SOLENOID ASSEMBLY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
EGR OPERATION
NOTE: If the vehicle is running rough at idle (scan tool not actuating) follow the yes path to continue.
Turn all accessories off.
Start the engine.
With the scan tool, enter Engine System Test, then EGR System Test.
Actuate the OPEN function in the EGR System Test.
Did the engine run rough or stall?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 5
3.
EGR VALVE OPEN AT IDLE

Disconnect the EGR Solenoid Assembly harness connector.
Start engine. Attempt to allow the engine to idle.
Does the engine run rough or stall?
Yes
>> Inspect the EGR tube assembly. If OK, replace the EGR valve.
No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.
9 - 391
EGR VALVE ASSEMBLY INSPECTION
Inspect the EGR Assembly for the following.

Gasket(s) for leaking
Damage and/or holes in the EGR tube(s)
Carbon build up on or near the EGR pintle and passage ways.
Obstruction in the EGR tubes.
Were any problem found?
Yes
>> Repair or replace the EGR Assembly as necessary.

No
>> Go To 5
5.
Disconnect the EGR Solenoid harness connector.

Using a 12-volt test light, jump across the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control
terminal and the (Z904) Ground terminal in the EGR Solenoid harness
connector.
With the scan tool, actuate the EGR solenoid.
Does the 12-volt test light flash on and off?
Yes
>> Inspect the tube(s) for obstructions and damage, repair as

necessary. If OK, replace the EGR Solenoid Assembly.
No
>> Go To 6
6.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to the 12-volts, probe the (Z904)
EGR Solenoid ground circuit in the EGR Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (Z904) EGR Solenoid ground circuit.
9 - 392
7.
LX
(K35) EGR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Reconnect the EGR harness connector.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit at the EGR Solenoid harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are connected with the circuits correct polarity.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Repair the high resistance in the ((K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit.
8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0403-EGR SOLENOID CIRCUIT
9 - 393
9 - 394
LX
When Monitored:
Engine running. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
The EGR solenoid control circuit is not in the expected state when requested to operate by the PCM. One Trip
Fault.
Possible Causes
(K35) EGR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K35) EGR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K35) EGR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
(K35) EGR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
NOTE: The test light should not illuminate until it is commanded

on using the scan tool.
Turn off all accessories.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to the (Z904) EGR Solenoid ground
circuit, probe the (K34) EGR Solenoid Control circuit.
With a scan tool, actuate the EGR solenoid.
Does the 12-volt test light illuminate when the EGR solenoid is
commanded on?
Yes
>> Replace the EGR Solenoid Assembly.

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

EGR Solenoid ground circuit in the EGR Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the open in the (Z904) EGR Solenoid ground circuit.
4.
(K35) EGR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit in the
EGR Solenoid connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
(K35) EGR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K35) EGR Solenoid
Control circuit in the EGR Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 395
9 - 396
6.
LX
(K35) EGR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit and the (K900) Sensor ground circuit in the
EGR Solenoid connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K900) Sensor ground circuit and the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
7.

Measure the resistance of the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit from
the EGR Solenoid harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Repair the open in the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit.
8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0404-EGR POSITION SENSOR PERFORMANCE
9 - 397
9 - 398
LX
When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
The EGR flow or valve movement is not what is expected.
Possible Causes
(K35) EGR SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT
(K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
EGR POSITION VOLTAGE HIGH
NOTE: Diagnose all other EGR DTC(s) before continuing.

With a scan tool, read the EGR Position Sensor voltage.
Is the voltage between 4.7 volts to 5.0 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
EGR POSITION VOLTAGE LOW

Using a jumper wire, jumper between (K34) EGR Sensor Signal circuit and (K900) Sensor Ground circuit in the
EGR Solenoid Sensor harness connector
Yes
>> Replace EGR Valve Assembly in accordance with the Service Information.
No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.
9 - 399
(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Reconnect the EGR harness connector.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit at the EGR Solenoid
Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter leads are
connected with the circuits correct polarity.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
5.
(K34) EGR SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

along with the 8815-1 to perform the diagnosis.
Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K34) EGR Sensor Signal circuit at the EGR Solenoid
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K34) EGR Sensor Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit at the EGR Solenoid
9 - 400
LX
Yes
>>
No

LX
P0405-EGR POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
9 - 401
9 - 402
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on. Battery voltage above 10.0 volts.
Set Condition:
EGR Position Sensor Signal is less than 0.1 of a volt. One trip Fault.
Possible Causes
(K34) EGR POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K34) EGR POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
EGR POSITION SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
EGR POSITION SENSOR BELOW 0.2 OF A VOLT

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Measure the voltage of the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the EGR
Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 6
3.
EGR POSITION
With the scan tool, monitor the EGR Position Sensor voltage.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.
(K34) EGR POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K34) EGR Position
Sensor Signal circuit in the EGR Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground circuit in the (K34) EGR Position
No
>> Go To 5
5.
(K34) EGR SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K34) EGR Position Sensor Signal
circuit and (K900) Sensor ground circuit in the EGR Solenoid harness
connector.
Yes
the (K34) EGR Position Sensor Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
6.

circuit in the EGR Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 7
9 - 403
9 - 404
7.
LX

EGR Solenoid harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0406-EGR POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
9 - 405
9 - 406
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
EGR position sensor signal is greater than 4.89. One trip Fault.
Possible Causes
(K34) EGR POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(K34) EGR POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K34) EGR POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
EGR POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.5 VOLTS
Start the engine.

With the scan tool, read the EGR Position Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
(K34) EGR POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (K34) EGR Position Sensor Signal
circuit and the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the EGR Solenoid harness
connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K34) EGR Position Sensor
Signal circuit and the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
(K34) EGR POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K34) EGR Sensor Signal circuit in the
EGR Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K34) EGR Position Sensor Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Connect a jumper wire between the (K34) EGR Position Sensor Signal
circuit and the (K900) Sensor ground circuit.
With the scan tool, monitor the EGR Position Sensor voltage.
Yes
No

>> Go To 5
9 - 407
9 - 408
5.
(K34) EGR POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K34) EGR Position Sensor Signal circuit
from the EGR Solenoid harness connector to the appropriate terminal
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (K34) EGR Position Sensor Signal
circuit.
6.
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

LX
LX
7.
9 - 409
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 410
LX
P0420-CATALYST 1/1 EFFICIENCY

Theory of Operation
The State of Change (SOC) catalyst monitor uses the signals from both the upstream and downstream O2 sensors
to detect aging of the catalyst. Based on the fact that when a catalyst ages, it loses some of its Oxygen Storage
Capacity (OSC). As a result, part of the untreated exhaust gases can breakthrough the catalyst and causes the
downstream O2 sensor to deviate from its neutral (Stoichiometric) position. By observing the activities in the downstream O2 signal, the degradation level of catalyst can be detected. In general, the higher the downstream O2
sensor SOC value, the more exhaust gas breakthrough and the lower the OSC of the catalytic converter.
When Monitored:
The monitor will run at between 1400 and 2300 RPM. It also runs between 40 and 70 KPA.
Set Condition:
If the final State of Change index is within the calibrated fail threshold. Two trip fault. Three good trips to turn
off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
ENGINE MECHANICAL CONDITION
AGING O2 SENSOR
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: A new rear O2 Sensor along with an aging front O2 Sensor may cause the DTC to set. Review the
repair history of the vehicle before continuing.
NOTE: If an O2 Sensor DTC set along with the Catalytic Converter Efficiency DTC diagnose the O2 Sensor
DTC(s) before continuing.
NOTE: Check for contaminants that may have damaged the O2 Sensor and Catalytic Converter: contaminated fuel, unapproved silicone, oil and coolant, repair necessary.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

LX
2.
9 - 411
VISUALLY INSPECT CATALYTIC CONVERTER
NOTE: Ensure the top and bottom of the Catalytic Converter are thoroughly inspected.
Inspect the Catalytic Converter for the following damage.
Damage Catalytic Converter, dents or holes.
Severe discoloration caused by overheating the Catalytic Converter.
Catalytic Converter broke internally.
Leaking Catalytic Converter.
Yes
>> Replace the Catalytic Converter. Repair the condition that may have caused the failure.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
EXHAUST LEAK
Start the engine.

UV light.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
Check the exhaust for excessive smoke caused by an internal problem in the engine.
Is an engine mechanical condition present?
Yes
>> Repair the engine mechanical condition as necessary.

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 412
5.
LX
AGING O2 SENSOR
A new rear O2 Sensor along with an aging front O2 Sensor may cause the DTC to set.
Review the vehicles repair history.
Has the rear O2 Sensor been replaced without replacing the front O2 Sensor?
Yes
>> Replace the Front O2 Sensor as necessary.

No
>> Go To 6
6.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
If there are no possible cause remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Catalytic Converter.
LX
9 - 413
P0430-CATALYST 2/1 EFFICIENCY

Theory of Operation
The State of Change (SOC) catalyst monitor uses the signals from both the upstream and downstream O2 sensors
to detect aging of the catalyst. Based on the fact that when a catalyst ages, it loses some of its Oxygen Storage
Capacity (OSC). As a result, part of the untreated exhaust gases can breakthrough the catalyst and causes the
downstream O2 sensor to deviate from its neutral (Stoichiometric) position. By observing the activities in the downstream O2 signal, the degradation level of catalyst can be detected. In general, the higher the downstream O2
sensor SOC value, the more exhaust gas breakthrough and the lower the OSC of the catalytic converter.
When Monitored:
The monitor will run at between 1400 and 2300 RPM. It also runs between 40 and 70 KPA.
Set Condition:
If the final State of Change index is within the calibrated fail threshold. Two trip fault. Three good trips to turn
off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
AGING O2 SENSOR
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: A new rear O2 Sensor along with an aging front O2 Sensor may cause the DTC to set. Review the
repair history of the vehicle before continuing.
NOTE: If an O2 Sensor DTC set along with the Catalytic Converter Efficiency DTC diagnose the O2 Sensor
DTC(s) before continuing.
NOTE: Check for contaminants that may have damaged the O2 Sensor and Catalytic Converter: contaminated fuel, unapproved silicone, oil and coolant, repair necessary.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

9 - 414
2.
LX
VISUALLY INSPECT CATALYTIC CONVERTER
NOTE: Ensure the top and bottom of the Catalytic Converter are thoroughly inspected.
Inspect the Catalytic Converter for the following damage.
Damage Catalytic Converter, dents or holes.
Severe discoloration caused by overheating the Catalytic Converter.
Catalytic Converter broke internally.
Leaking Catalytic Converter.
Yes
>> Replace the Catalytic Converter. Repair the condition that may have caused the failure.
No
>> Go To 3
3.
EXHAUST LEAK
Start the engine.

UV light.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
Check the exhaust for excessive smoke caused by an internal problem in the engine.
Is an engine mechanical condition present?
Yes
>> Repair the engine mechanical condition as necessary.

No
>> Go To 5
LX
5.
9 - 415
AGING O2 SENSOR
A new rear O2 Sensor along with an aging front O2 Sensor may cause the DTC to set.
Review the vehicles repair history.
Has the rear O2 Sensor been replaced without replacing the front O2 Sensor?
Yes
>> Replace the 2/1 O2 Sensor as necessary.

No
>> Go To 6
6.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
If there are no possible cause remaining, view repair.

Repair
Replace the Catalytic Converter.
9 - 416
P0440-GENERAL EVAP SYSTEM FAILURE
LX
LX
9 - 417
Theory of Operation
The theory behind the Natural Vacuum Leak Detection (NVLD) is adherence to the Ideal Gas Law. Pressure in a
sealed vessel will change linearly as a function of the temperature of the gas in the vessel. Even small leaks will
allow the pressure in the vessel to come to equilibrium with the atmospheric pressure. The General Evap test runs
by commanding purge flow during the leak size test and evaluates the NVLD vacuum switch.
When Monitored:
Engine running after a cold start. Fuel Level greater than 12%. Fuel level below 88%. No NVLD switch during
previous eng off time. No NVLD switch close during leak size purge draw. Ambient Temperature between 4C
and 32C (39F and 89F).
Set Condition:
The PCM does not see the NVLD switch close during the medium/large leak test. The PCM then will increase
the vacuum supply to the EVAP system by increasing flow through the EVAP Purge valve. If the switch does
not close with an increase in vacuum an error is detected. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID VACUUM SUPPLY
(K107) NVLD SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LEAK DETECTION
NVLD ASSEMBLY
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
VEHICLE HISTORY AND SERVICE BULLETIN INVESTIGATION

With a scan tool, read DTCs and record the related Freeze Frame data if any DTC(s) are present.
Check for any service bulletin(s) related to the customers complaint or DTC(s).
If a service bulletin applies, follow the instructions per the service bulletin.
The service bulletin repaired the customers complaint.
Testing complete.
A DTC is present, no service bulletins apply, or the service bulletin didnt repair the customers complaint.
Go To 2
9 - 418
2.
LX
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: If any of the following DTCs are set (P0443, P0452, P0453, P0498, or P0499) diagnose them first
before continuing with P0440.
NOTE: A loose gas cap could have caused this DTC to set. Make sure the gas cap is tight and in good
condition.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.
VISUAL AND PHYSICAL INSPECTION

Perform a visual and physical inspection of the entire Evaporative Emission system.
Check for the following conditions:
- Hoses disconnected or left off
- Holes or cracks
- Loose seal points
- Evidence of damaged components
- Incorrect routing of hoses and tubes
- Fuel Cap left off or bad gasket seal
Were any of the above conditions found?
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
EVAP VACUUM SUPPLY HOSE INSPECTION
Carefully inspect the Evap Purge Solenoid vacuum supply hose for proper routing.
Check for a pinched or plugged hose from the throttle body or intake manifold to the Purge Solenoid.
Make sure the vacuum port at the throttle body or intake manifold is free from any blockage.
Yes
>> Repair the vacuum supply, hose/tube as necessary.

No
>> Go To 5
5.
CHECKING EVAP PURGE SOLENOID FUNCTIONALITY
NOTE: To continue testing you will need Miller Tool #8404 Evaporative Emission Leak Detector (EELD).
WARNING: Keep lit cigarettes, sparks, flames, and other ignition sources away from the test area to prevent
the ignition of explosive gases, Keep the test area well ventilated.
Connect the red power lead of the EELD to the battery positive terminal and the black ground lead to battery negative terminal.
Disconnect the vacuum hoses at the Evap Purge Solenoid.
Connect the SMOKE supply tip (black hose) to the CAN port on the Evap Purge Solenoid.
LX
9 - 419
While still holding the remote smoke/air start button, check to see if smoke is exiting the purge valve. This indicates
that there is a leak internal to the purge valve.
Is smoke visible from the EVAP Purge Solenoid?
Yes
>> Replace the Evap Purge Solenoid.

No
>> Go To 6
6.
NOTE: This is an optional method of checking the purge valve for leaks if the EELD is unavailable.
Disconnect the Smoke supply tip from the vacuum supply hoses at the EVAP Purge Solenoid.
Using a hand vacuum pump, apply 10 in Hg to the 9CAN9 side of the EVAP Purge Solenoid.
Observe the vacuum gauge for at least 15 seconds.
Does the EVAP Purge Solenoid hold vacuum?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.
NVLD SWITCH OPERATION
CAUTION: Do not attempt to probe the NVLD Terminals to diagnose the switch function. This may damage
the switch and disable the NVLD component. Follow procedures outlined in the service manual for NVLD
switch testing using a scan tool.
Connect the previously disconnected vacuum hose.
Start the engine.
Using the scan tool, perform the NVLD FORCED MONITOR TEST.
Monitor the NVLD Switch state.
NOTE: As the test runs, the NVLD Switch should go from an OPEN state to a CLOSED state and then return
to OPEN when the test is complete This may take up to 10 minutes.
Did the NVLD Switch operate as described above?
Yes
>> Test complete.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
VERIFY NVLD SWITCH OPERATION
Start the engine.

Using the scan tool, perform the NVLD FORCED MONITOR TEST for a second time.
While the NVLD FORCED MONITOR TEST is running, open/remove the gas cap.
Did the NVLD Switch go from OPEN to CLOSED?
Yes
>> Replace the NVLD Assembly.

No
>> Go To 9
9 - 420
9.
LX
VERIFY EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LEAK
the ignition of explosive gases. Keep the test area well ventilated.
To continue testing you will need Miller Tool #8404 Evaporative Emission Leak Detector (EELD).
NOTE: The fuel tank should have between 20% and 80% of fuel tank capacity to properly test the Evap
system.
Connect the red power lead of EELD to the battery positive terminal and the black ground lead to battery negative
terminal.
Block the vent hose of the EVAP Canister.
Connect shop air to the EELD.
Set the smoke/air control switch to AIR.
Insert the testers AIR supply tip (clear hose) into the .040 orifice on the testers control panel.
Position the red flag on the air flow meter so it is aligned with the indicator ball.
When the calibration is complete, release the remote button. The EELD flow meter is now calibrated in liters per
minute.
Install the service port adapter #8404-14 on the vehicles service port (if equipped) or install the #8404-ADP into the
filter line.
Connect the Air supply hose from the EELD to the service port (if equipped) or to the #8404-ADP adapter.
Press the remote button to activate AIR flow.
Compare the flow meter indicator ball reading to the red flag.
ABOVE the red flag indicates a leak present.
BELOW the red flag indicates a sealed system.
Is the indicator ball above the red flag?
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Go To 11
10.
NOTE: A thorough visual inspection of the Evap system hoses, tubes, and connections may save time in
your diagnosis. Look for any physical damage or signs of wetness at connections. The strong smell of fuel
vapors may aid diagnosis also.
Remove the Air supply hose from the service port or the #8404-ADP adapter.
Connect the SMOKE supply tip (black hose) to the service port (if equipped) or to the #8404-ADP adapter.
NOTE: The flow meter indicator ball will not move at this point.
NOTE: Make sure that smoke has filled the EVAP system by continuing to press the remote smoke/air start
button, remove the vehicle fuel cap, and wait for the smoke to exit. Once smoke is indicated reinstall the
fuel cap.
NOTE: For optimal performance, introduce smoke into the system for an additional 60 seconds; continue
introducing smoke at 15 second intervals, as necessary.
If a leak is concealed from view (i.e., top of fuel tank), release the remote smoke/air start button, and use the ultraviolet (UV) black light #8404-UVL and the yellow goggles 8404-20 to look for residual traces of dye that are left
behind by the smoke.
UV light.
LX
9 - 421
NOTE: The EVAP System is divided into three zones. A leak from any of these zones can cause this DTC to
set. The lists below specify the possible leak points in that specific zone. For further assistance see the
Zone Identification Chart below.
ZONE 1
1 Fuel Cap
2 Recirculation Check Valve.
3 Vapor Recirculation Line.
4 Signal Vapor Line for FVM.
5 Flow Management Valve.
6 Fuel Tank to Canister Vapor Line connection.
7 Fuel Tank Vent (Check Valve).
8 Vapor Line to Canister.
9 Flow Control Orfice.
10 Control Valve.
11 Liquid Trap.
12 Fuel Tank.
13 Check valve.
14 Fuel Fill Tube to Tank connector.
15 Fuel Fill Tube
Damaged or disconnected EVAP system components.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZONE 2
Filter.
NVLD.
Canister Vent Line.
Evap Canister.
Chassis Purge Valve.
Fuel Tank to Canister Vapor Line connection.
Evap Purge connection.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ZONE 3
Evap Purge Vacuum Line.
Connection to Chassis Line.
Connection to Canister.
Chassis Purge Line.
Connection to Evap Purge Harness.
Chassis Evap Purge Line connection to Engine Vacuum.
Evap Purge Valve.
Service Port.
NOTE: Carefully inspect the vent side of the EVAP Canister. Due to the filtering system in the canister the
smoke or dye may or may not be visible. Introducing smoke into the filtered side of the canister may assist
in locating the leak.
Was a leak found?
Yes
>> Repair or replace the leaking component as necessary.

No
>> Go To 11
9 - 422
11.
NVLD ASSEMBLY

Disconnect the NVLD electrical harness connector.
Check connectors - Clean/repair as necessary.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K107) NVLD Switch Signal circuit
and the (Z910) Ground circuit in the NVLD electrical harness connector.
Monitor the NVLD Switch state on the scan tool.
Does the Switch change from OPEN to CLOSED when the
Yes

No
>> Go To 12
12.

Measure the resistance between the (Z910) Ground circuit and ground.
Yes
>> Go To 13
No

to 9 - ENGINE - STANDARD PROCEDURE).
LX
LX
13.
9 - 423

Measure the resistance of the (K107) NVLD Switch Signal circuit from
the NVLD electrical harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 14
No
>> Repair the open in the (K107) Signal circuit.

14.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 424
P0441-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
9 - 425
When Monitored:
Cold start test. Engine Running. Small Leak Test Passed.
Set Condition:
The PCM activates the EVAP Purge solenoid gradually increases to maximum flow. During flow, the PCM
looks for the NVLD switch to close. If the PCM does not see the NVLD switch close at maximum flow an error
is detected. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID VACUUM SUPPLY
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID
Diagnostic Test
1.

Testing complete.
Go To 2
2.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: If any of the following DTCs are set (P0443, P0452, P0453, P0498, or P0499) diagnose them first
before continuing with P0441.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

9 - 426
3.
LX
NOTE: After disconnecting the Evap Purge vacuum connections, inspect the lines and solenoid for any
signs of contamination or foreign materials.
Using a hand vacuum pump, apply 10 in Hg to 9CAN9 side of the EVAP Purge Solenoid.
Observe the vacuum gauge.
With the scan tool, actuate the EVAP Purge Solenoid.
Does the vacuum drop when the solenoid is actuated?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

NOTE: Remove the vacuum pump before continuing.
4.
EVAP VACUUM SUPPLY HOSE INSPECTION

Carefully inspect the Evap Purge Solenoid vacuum supply hose for proper routing.
Check for a pinched or plugged hose from the throttle body or intake manifold to the Purge Solenoid.
Inspect the vacuum port at the throttle body or intake manifold for any damage or plugging.
Yes
>> Repair the vacuum supply hose/tube as necessary.

No
>> Go to 5
Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST.
5.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to probe the NVLD Terminals to diagnose the switch function. This may damage
the switch and disable the NVLD component. Follow procedures outlined in the service manual for NVLD
switch testing using a scan tool.
Connect the previously disconnected vacuum hose.
Start the engine.
to OPEN when the test is complete This may take up to 10 minutes.
Yes
>> Test complete.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
6.
9 - 427
VERIFY NVLD SWITCH OPERATION
Start the engine.

Using the scan tool, perform the NVLD FORCED MONITOR TEST for a second time.
While the NVLD FORCED MONITOR TEST is running, open/remove the gas cap.
Did the NVLD Switch go from OPEN to CLOSED?
Yes

No
>> Test complete.
9 - 428
P0442-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM MEDIUM LEAK
LX
LX
9 - 429
Theory of Operation
allow the pressure in the vessel to come to equilibrium with the atmospheric pressure. After key-off and a calibrated
amount of time, cool down from operating temperatures or diurnal ambient temperature the system pressure will
force the system to go negative or draw a vacuum if there is no leak. When the vacuum level reaches 1 H2O (0.25
KPA) the NVLD vacuum switch closes. This sends a signal to the NGC freezing a timer and registering a pass. If
a switch closure is not detected an assessment of leak size will be made.
When Monitored:
Engine Running. Cold start test. Fuel Level greater than 12%. Ambient Temperature between 4C and 32C
(39F and 89F) Close Loop fuel system. Test runs when small leak test is maturing.
Set Condition:
The PCM activates the EVAP Purge Solenoid to pull the EVAP system into a vacuum to close the NVLD
switch. Once the NVLD switch is closed, the PCM turns the EVAP Purge solenoid off to seal the EVAP system.
If the NVLD switch reopens before the calibrated amount of time for a Medium leak an error is detected. Two
Possible Causes
EVAP PURGE SYSTEM LEAK
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID
NVLD SWITCH
Diagnostic Test
1.

Testing complete.
Go To 2
9 - 430
2.
LX
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 3.
No

3.
LOOSE OR MISSING FUEL FILL CAP
Inspect the fuel fill cap.

Inspect the cap for any abnormal defects.
Was the cap off, missing, or broken?
Yes
>> Properly install the fuel fill cap and proceed to step.
No
>> Go To 4.
4.
NVLD SERVICE TEST
With the scan tool perform the NVLD Service Test.

Does the NVLD Service Test pass?
Yes
>> Test complete.

No
>> Go To 5
5.
To continue testing you will need Miller Tool #8404A Evaporative Emission Leak Detector (EELD).
system.
Block the vent hose of the canister if using the service port.
Insert the testers AIR supply tip (clear hose) into the appropriate calibration orifice on the testers control panel
minute to the size leak indicated by the DTC set in the PCM.
Install the service port adapter #8404-14 on the vehicles service port and block the vent hose of the EVAP Canister
(if equipped) or install the #8404-ADP service adaptor into the filter line.
NOTE: Larger volume fuel tanks, lower fuel levels or if the vehicle is equipped with a Flow Management
LX
9 - 431

Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
vapors may also aid diagnosis.
To continue testing, you will need Miller Tool #8404A Evaporative Emissions Leak Detector (EELD).
Remove the Air supply hose from the service port (if equipped) or from the #8404-ADP adapter.
NOTE: The flow meter indicator ball will not move in the smoke mode.
fuel cap.
If a leak is concealed from view (i.e., top of fuel tank), release the remote smoke/air start button, and use the ultraviolet (UV) black light #8404-UVL and the yellow goggles 8404-20 to look for residual traces of dye that is left
UV light.
Zone Identification Charts below.
ZONE 1
1 Fuel Cap
10 Control Valve.
11 Liquid Trap.
12 Fuel Tank.
13 Check valve.
15 Fuel Fill Tube
9 - 432
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZONE 2
Filter.
NVLD.
Canister Vent Line.
Evap Canister.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ZONE 3
Chassis Purge Line.
Evap Purge Valve.
Service Port.
NOTE: Carefully inspect the vent side of the EVAP Canister. Due to
the filtering system in the canister the smoke may not be as thick.
Introducing smoke into the filtered side of the canister may assist
Was a leak found?
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
7.
9 - 433
LEAK AT GAS CAP
Remove the SMOKE supply tip (black hose) from the service port (if equipped) or to the #8404ADP adapter.
Install gas cap adapter, Miller Tool #8382 (1/4 turn cap) or #6922 (screw cap) and #8399* (secondary seal depressor) and repeat test 5.
Was a leak found at the gas cap adapter?
Yes
>> Replace the Fuel Filler tube assembly.

No
>> Replace the gas cap.

8.
NOTE: After disconnecting the Evap Purge Solenoid vacuum connections, inspect the lines and solenoid for
any signs of contamination from the EVAP Canister. This may indicate a faulty check valve. Replace/repair
as necessary.
Press the remote smoke/air start button on the EELD.
While holding the remote smoke/air start button, check to see if smoke is exiting the purge valve. This indicates that
there is a leak internal to the purge valve.
NOTE: Below is an optional method of checking the purge valve for leaks if the EELD is unavailable.
Using a hand vacuum pump, apply 10 in HG to the CAN of the Evap Purge Solenoid.
NOTE: Monitor the vacuum gauge for at least 15 seconds.
Is smoke visible from the EVAP Purge Solenoid if using the EELD, or not hold a vacuum?
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

9.
Reconnect all vacuum hoses.

Start the engine.
Monitor the NVLD Switch.
NOTE: As the test runs, the NVLD Switch should go from an OPEN state to CLOSED. After the vacuum is
released form the EVAP system the Switch state will return to OPEN.
Yes
>> Refer to the INTERMITTENT CONDITION Diagnostic Procedure. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING)
No

9 - 434
P0443-EVAP PURGE SOLENOID CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 435
When Monitored:
The ignition on or engine running. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
The PCM will set a trouble code if the actual state of the solenoid does not match the intended state. One Trip
Possible Causes
(K52) EVAP PURGE CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K52) EVAP PURGE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K70) EVAP PURGE SOLENOID RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
(K70) EVAP PURGE SOLENOID RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Testing complete.
Go To 2
2.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

9 - 436
3.

Disconnect the EVAP Purge Solenoid harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light, jump across the (K52) Evap Purge Solenoid
Control circuit and (K70) Evap Purge Solenoid Return circuit in the
EVAP Purge Solenoid harness connector.
With a scan tool, actuate the EVAP Purge Solenoid.
Does the test light flash on and off?
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K52) EVAP PURGE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K52) Evap Purge Solenoid Control circuit from the Evap Purge Solenoid harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K52) EVAP Purge Solenoid Control
circuit.
LX
LX
5.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K52) Evap Purge
Solenoid Control circuit in the Evap Purge Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K52) EVAP Purge Solenoid Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
(K70) EVAP PURGE SOLENOID RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K70) Evap Purge Solenoid Return circuit
from the EVAP Purge Solenoid harness connector to the appropriate
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K70) Evap Purge Solenoid Return
circuit.
9 - 437
9 - 438
7.
LX
(K70) EVAP PURGE SOLENOID RETURN CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Solenoid Return circuit in the Evap Purge Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K70) Evap Purge Solenoid Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0452-NVLD PRESSURE SWITCH STUCK CLOSED
9 - 439
9 - 440
LX
When Monitored:
Immediately after the engine has been started.
Set Condition:
The PCM activates the NLVD Solenoid. If PCM does not see NVLD switch open an error is detected. One Trip
Possible Causes
(K107) NVLD SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
NVLD ASSEMBLY
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Testing complete.
Go To 2
2.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
9 - 441

Disconnect the EVAP Purge Solenoid harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light, jump across the Evap Purge Solenoid harness connector.
With the scan tool, actuate the EVAP Purge Solenoid.
Does the test light flash on and off?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 8
4.
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID LEAKS/STUCK OPEN

Connect the Evap Purge Solenoid harness connector.
as necessary.
Using a hand vacuum pump, apply 10 in Hg to the 9CAN9 of the EVAP Purge Solenoid.
Does the EVAP Purge Solenoid hold vacuum?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.

Using the scan tool, monitor the NVLD Switch State with the vacuum pump still installed and holding vacuum.
Does the scan tool display the NVLD state OPEN?
Yes
No

>> Go To 6
NOTE: Remove the vacuum pump and connect the vacuum hose before continuing.
9 - 442
6.
LX
NVLD ASSEMBLY
Disconnect the NVLD electrical connector.

Does the Switch change from CLOSED to OPEN?
Yes

No
>> Go To 7
7.
(K107) SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K107) NVLD Switch
Signal circuit in the NVLD Assembly harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K107) NVLD Switch Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 9
8.

Solenoid Control circuit in the EVAP Purge Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K52) Evap Purge Sol
Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 9
LX
9.
9 - 443
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 444
P0453-NVLD PRESSURE SWITCH STUCK OPEN
LX
LX
9 - 445
When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
If the PCM does not see the NVLD switch close during test an error is detected. One Trip Fault. Three good
Possible Causes
(K107) NVLD SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K107) NVLD SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K106) NVLD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT
NVLD ASSEMBLY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
Start the engine.

Using a scan tool, perform the NVLD FORCED MONITOR TEST.
to OPEN when the test is complete.
Yes

No
>> Go To 2
2.
NVLD ASSEMBLY

Monitor the NVLD Switch state on the scan tool.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K107) NVLD Switch Signal circuit
and the (Z914) Ground circuit in the NVLD harness connector.
Does the Switch change from OPEN to CLOSED with the
jumper wire installed?
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 446
3.
(K107) NVLD SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K107) NVLD Switch Signal circuit in the
NVLD electrical harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K107) NVLD

Switch Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Measure the resistance of the (K107) NVLD Switch Signal circuit from
the NVLD electrical harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K107) NVLD Switch Signal circuit.
LX
LX
5.
9 - 447
(K107) NVLD SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K106) NVLD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K107) NVLD Switch Signal circuit
and the (K106) NVLD Solenoid Control circuit in the NVLD electrical
harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K107) NVLD Switch Signal
circuit and the (K106) NVLD Solenoid Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

to 9 - ENGINE - STANDARD PROCEDURE) )
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 448
P0455-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM LARGE LEAK
LX
LX
9 - 449
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Engine Running. Cold start test. Fuel Level greater than 12%. Ambient Temperature between 4C and 32C
(39F and 89F) Close Loop fuel system. Test runs when small leak test is maturing.
Set Condition:
switch. Once the NVLD switch is closed, the PCM turns the EVAP Purge solenoid off to seal the EVAP system.
If the NVLD switch reopens before the calibrated amount of time for a Large leak an error is detected. Two
Possible Causes
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID
NVLD SWITCH
Diagnostic Test
1.

Testing complete.
Go To 2
9 - 450
2.
LX
ACTIVE DTC
Check for any related TSBs before continuing.

NOTE: Since a hot vehicle can conceal a leak, it is best to perform this test at room temperature.
NOTE: A loose gas cap could have caused this DTC to set. Make sure gas cap is tight and in good condition. Make sure the gas cap meets OEM specifications.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.
Check for the follow conditions:
- Holes or cracks
- Loose seal points
- Fuel Cap gasket seal
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
system.
LX
9 - 451
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Refer to the Freeze Frame data recorded in step 1. If the data indicates that the vehicle was in motion
when the DTC was set, verify that all hoses are properly connected.
5.
vapors may aid diagnosis also.
fuel cap.
UV light.
Zone Identification Charts below.
9 - 452
LX
ZONE 1
1 Fuel Cap
10 Control Valve.
11 Liquid Trap.
12 Fuel Tank.
13 Check valve.
15 Fuel Fill Tube
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZONE 2
Filter.
NVLD.
Canister Vent Line.
Evap Canister.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ZONE 3
Chassis Purge Line.
Evap Purge Valve.
Service Port.
NOTE: Carefully inspect the vent side of the EVAP Canister. Due to the filtering system in the canister the
smoke may not be as thick. Introducing smoke into the filtered side of the canister may assist in locating
the leak.
Was a leak found at the gas cap?
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Go To 7
LX
6.
9 - 453
LEAK AT GAS CAP
Remove the SMOKE supply tip (black hose) from the service port (if
equipped) or to the #8404ADP adapter.
Install gas cap adapter, Miller Tool #8382 (1/4 turn cap) or #6922 (screw
cap) and #8399* (secondary seal depressor) and repeat test 5.
Yes

No

7.
as necessary.
NOTE:
Monitor the vacuum gauge for at least 15 seconds.
Yes
>> Replace the NVLD.

No

9 - 454
P0456-EVAP PURGE SYSTEM SMALL LEAK
LX
LX
9 - 455
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Ignition off. Fuel Level less than 88%. Ambient Temperature between 4C and 43C (39F and 109F) Close
Loop fuel system.
Set Condition:
Due to temperature changes, a vacuum is created in the fuel tank and EVAP system. With the EVAP system
sealed, the PCM monitors the NVLD switch. If the NVLD switch does not close within a calibrated time allowance, an error is detected by the PCM. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EVAP PURGE SOLENOID
Diagnostic Test
1.

Testing complete.
Go To 2
9 - 456
2.
LX
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Since a hot vehicle can conceal a leak, it is best to perform this test at room temperature.
NOTE: A loose gas cap could have caused this DTC to set. Make sure gas cap is tight and in good condition. Make sure the gas cap meets OEM specifications.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.
Check for the follow conditions:
- Holes or cracks
- Loose seal points
- Fuel Cap gasket seal
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
system.
LX
9 - 457

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
fuel cap.
UV light.
Zone Identification Chart at the beginning of this diagnostic procedure.
ZONE 1
1 Fuel Cap
10 Control Valve.
11 Liquid Trap.
12 Fuel Tank.
13 Check valve.
15 Fuel Fill Tube
9 - 458
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZONE 2
Filter.
NVLD.
Canister Vent Line.
Evap Canister.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ZONE 3
Chassis Purge Line.
Evap Purge Valve.
Service Port.
Was a leak found?
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Go To 7
LX
LX
6.
9 - 459
LEAK AT GAS CAP
Yes

No

7.
as necessary.
Yes
>> Replace the NVLD.

No

9 - 460
P0457-LOOSE FUEL CAP
LX
LX
9 - 461
Theory of Operation
The PCM records the fuel level when the ignition key is turned off and then again when the ignition key is turn back
on. This is done to monitor for fuel level increase. If a fuel level increase is detected and the EVAP Leak monitor is
run and fails, the Loose Gas Cap DTC will set and the GAS CAP indicator will displayed in odometer to inform the
vehicle operator that the cap is off of loose.
When Monitored:
Ignition on. Ambient Temperature between 4C and 32C (39F and 89F) Close Loop fuel system. Test runs
after the medium leak test is inconclusive and the PCM has senses a fuel increase.
Set Condition:
switch. Once the NVLD switch is closed, the PCM turns the EVAP Purge Solenoid off to seal the EVAP system. If the NVLD switch reopens before the calibrated amount of time after a fuel tank fill, an error is detected.
Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
LOOSE OR MISSING FUEL CAP
FUEL FILL CAP
EVAP PURGE SYSTEM MEDIUM LEAK
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding (Refer to 9 - ENGINE DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
Diagnostic Test
1.

Testing complete.
Go To 2.
2.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 3.
No

9 - 462
3.
LX
LOOSE OR MISSING FUEL FILL CAP
Perform a visual and phyical inspection of the Fuel Fill Cap and the fill tube.
Improper installation of the Fuel Fill Cap

Loose or missing Fuel Filler Cap
Holes or Cracks
Damaged Locking tabs on Cap and/or fill tube
Damaged seal points on Cap and/or fill tube
Fuel Fill Cap gasket seal
Yes
>> Repair or replace the fuel fill cap or fill tube as necessary. Ensure proper fuel fill cap installation. Once
the repair is complete continue to step 4.
No
>> Go To 4.
4.
NVLD SERVICE TEST
With the scan tool perform the NVLD Service Test.

Does the NVLD Service Test pass?
Yes
>> Test complete.

No
>> Go To 5
5.
system.
LX
9 - 463

Yes
>> Go To 6.
No

6.
fuel cap.
UV light.
Zone Identification Chart below.
ZONE 1
1 Fuel Cap
10 Control Valve.
11 Liquid Trap.
12 Fuel Tank.
13 Check valve.
15 Fuel Fill Tube
9 - 464
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ZONE 2
Filter.
NVLD.
Canister Vent Line.
Evap Canister.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ZONE 3
Chassis Purge Line.
Evap Purge Valve.
Service Port.
Was a leak found?
Yes
>> Go To 7.
No
>> Go To 8.
LX
LX
7.
9 - 465
LEAK AT GAS CAP
Yes

No

8.
as necessary.
Yes
>> Go To 9.
No

9.
Reconnect all vacuum hoses.

Start the engine.
Monitor the NVLD Switch.
NOTE: As the test runs, the NVLD Switch should go from an OPEN state to CLOSED. After the vacuum is
released form the EVAP system the Switch state will return to OPEN.
Yes
>> Refer to the INTERMITTENT CONDITION Diagnostic Procedure. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS
AND TESTING)
No

9 - 466
P0461-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
9 - 467
When Monitored:
TEST No.1: With the ignition on, the fuel level is compared to the previous key down after a 20 second delay.
TEST No.2: The PCM monitors the fuel level at ignition on.
Set Condition:
TEST No.1: If the PCM does not see a difference in fuel level of greater than 0.1 volt the test will fail. TEST
No.2: If the PCM does not see a change in the fuel level of .1765 over a set amount of miles the test will fail.
Possible Causes
(N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(Z210) FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
FUEL TANK
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Diagnose any CAN - C or CAN - B Communication DTCs before continuing.

NOTE: Diagnose P0462 or P0463 first, if set along with P0461.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUALLY INSPECT FUEL TANK
Visually inspect the Fuel Tank for damage that may restrict the Fuel Sending Unit float from moving.
Is the Fuel Tank OK?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Fuel Tank as necessary.

9 - 468
3.

Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector.
Disconnect the C2 Cluster harness connectors.
Measure the resistance of the (N4) Fuel Level Signal circuit from the
Fuel Pump Module harness connector to the C2 Cluster harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the open in the (N4) Fuel Level Signal circuit.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1. (Refer to 8 ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC
CONTROL
MODULES/
4.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (N4) Fuel Level Signal
circuit in the Fuel Pump Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (N4) Fuel Level Signal circuit.
CONTROL
MODULES/
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
9 - 469
Measure the resistance of the (Z210) Fuel Level Sensor Ground circuit
from the Fuel Pump Module harness connector to the C2 Cluster harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (Z210) Fuel Level Sensor Ground
circuit.
CONTROL
MODULES/
6.
INTERNAL INSPECTION OF THE FUEL TANK
Remove the Fuel Tank per Service Information.
Remove the Fuel Pump Module.
Visually inspect the inside of the Fuel Tank for any obstructions or deformities.
Inspect the Fuel Pump Module Float arm for damage.
Yes
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL
No
>> Go To 7
7.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Repair
Replace the Fuel Level Sensor.
9 - 470
P0462-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 471
When Monitored:
Ignition on and battery voltage above 10.4 volts.
Set Condition:
The fuel level sensor signal voltage goes below 0.4 of a volt for more than 90 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three
Possible Causes
(N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z210) FUEL LEVEL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS).
Diagnostic Test
1.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.4 OF A VOLT
NOTE: Diagnose any CAN - B or CAN - C Communication DTCs before continuing.

With the scan tool, read the Fuel Level Sensor voltage.
Is the Fuel Level Sensor voltage below 0.4 of a volt?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Did the Fuel Level Sensor voltage change from below 0.4 of a volt to above 4.0 volts?
Yes
>> Replace the Fuel Level Sensor.

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 472
3.
LX

Yes
CONTROL
MODULES/
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z210) FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (N4) Fuel Level Signal circuit and
the (Z210) Fuel Level Sensor Ground circuit in the Fuel Pump Module
harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (Z210) Fuel Level Sensor
Ground circuit and the (N4) Fuel Level Signal circuit.
CONTROL
MODULES/
No
>> Go To 5
LX
5.
9 - 473
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
NOTE: Before continuing, check the Instrument Cluster harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage,
or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
>> Replace and program the Instrument Cluster per Service Information.
9 - 474
P0463-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
9 - 475
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The fuel level sensor signal voltage at the PCM goes above 4.9 volts for more than 90 seconds. One Trip
Possible Causes
(N4) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR VOLTS ABOVE 4.9 VOLTS
NOTE: Diagnose any CAN - B and CAN - C Communication DTCs before continuing.
With a scan tool, read the Fuel Level Sensor voltage.
Is the Fuel Level Sensor voltage above 4.9 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module electrical harness connector.
Connect a jumper wire between the (N4) Fuel Level Signal circuit and
harness connector.
Did the Fuel Level Sensor voltage change from above 4.8 volts
to below 0.4 of a volt with the jumper wire installed?
Yes
No

CONTROL
MODULES/
>> Go To 3
9 - 476
3.

Disconnect the C2 Cluster harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (N4) Fuel Level Signal circuit in the Fuel
Pump Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (N4) Fuel Level
Signal circuit.
CONTROL
MODULES/
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
CONTROL
MODULES/
LX
LX
5.
9 - 477
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
circuit.
CONTROL
MODULES/
6.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 478
P0480-COOLING FAN 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 479
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The ECM receives a CAN Bus message from the FCM indicating an open or shorted circuit on the Radiator
Fan Relay Control circuit.
Possible Causes
FUSED (B+) FEED CIRCUITS
(N201) RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(N201) RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY OPERATION
NOTE: When actuating the radiator fan relays, the Radiator Fan(s) may have a delay in operation and ramp
up slowly.
With a scan tool, select Radiator Cooling Fan Relay #1 Control State to actuate the Radiator Fan Control Relay.
Is the Cooling Fan Relay operating?
Yes
>> Refer to the *CHECKING FOR AN INTERMITTENT DTC Diagnostic Procedure. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
Perform the ECM Verification Test Ver. 1. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No
>> Go To 2
2.
FUSED B+ CIRCUITS

Remove the Radiator Fan Control Relay.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the Fused B+ circuits.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the open or short to ground in the Fused B+ circuits.

Inspect the related fuse and repair as necessary.
- ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES STANDARD PROCEDURE)
9 - 480
3.
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition on, engine not running.

With a scan tool, select Radiator Cooling Fan Relay #1 Control State,
Toggle, to actuate the Radiator Fan Control Relay.
Using a 12volt test light connected to battery voltage, probe the Radiator Control Relay Control circuit in the PDM.
Does the test light illuminate and flash on and off?
Yes
>> Replace the Radiator Fan Control Relay.

No
>> Go To 4
4.
(N201) RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (N201) Radiator Fan Control Relay Control circuit from the Relay to the FCM PDM 49 way connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Replace the PDM in accordance with the Service information.

5.
(N201) RADIATOR FAN CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (N201) Radiator Fan
Control Relay Control circuit at the Relay connection.
Yes
>> Replace the PDM in accordance with the Service information.

No
>> Replace Front Control Module in accordance with the Service Information.
LX
LX
P0481-COOLING FAN 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT
9 - 481
9 - 482
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The ECM receives a CAN Bus message from the FCM indicating an open or shorted circuit on the Radiator
Fan High Relay Control circuit.
Possible Causes
FUSED B+ CIRCUITS
(N112) RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(N112) RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY
Diagnostic Test
1.
RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY OPERATION

With a scan tool, select Radiator Cooling Fan Relay #2 Control State, to actuate the Radiator Fan High Relay.
Is the Cooling Fan Relay operating?
Yes
>> Refer to the *CHECKING FOR AN INTERMITTENT DTC Diagnostic Procedure. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
Perform the ECM Verification Test Ver. 1. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No
>> Go To 2
2.
FUSED B+ CIRCUITS

Remove the Radiator High Fan Relay.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the Fused B+ circuits in the Relay connection.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 483
RADIATOR FAN HI/LO CONTROL RELAY SHORTED INTERNALLY
With the test light still at the Fused B+ circuit (Radiator High Fan Relay), remove the Radiator Fan HI/LO Control
Relay.
When the relay is removed, does the test light illuminate brightly?
Yes
>> Replace the Radiator Fan HI/LO Control Relay.

No
>> Repair the open or short to ground in the Fused B+ circuits. Inspect the related fuse and repair as
necessary.
4.
RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition on, engine not running.

With a scan tool, select Radiator Cooling Fan Relay #2 Control State
and then Toggle, to actuate the Radiator Fan High Relay.
Using a 12volt test light connected to battery voltage, probe the Radiator Fan High Relay Control circuit in the PDM.
Does the test light illuminate and flash on and off?
Yes
>> Replace the Radiator Fan High Relay.

No
>> Go To 5
5.
(N112) RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (N112) Radiator Fan High Relay Control
circuit from the Relay connection to the FCM PDM 49 way connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Replace the PDM in accordance with the Service Information.

9 - 484
6.
LX
(N112) RADIATOR FAN HIGH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (N112) Radiator Fan
High Control circuit at the Relay connection.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.
RADIATOR FAN HI/LO CONTROL RELAY SHORTED INTERNALLY
With the probe still at the (N112) Radiator Fan High Control circuit, remove the Radiator Fan HI/LO Control Relay.
Is the resistance still below 100 ohms?
Yes
>> Repair the open or short to ground in the (N112) Radiator Fan High Control circuit.
No
>> Replace the Radiator Fan HI/LO Control Relay.

LX
P0498-NVLD CANISTER VENT VALVE SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW
9 - 485
9 - 486
LX
When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
The PCM detects a short in the NVLD Canister vent solenoid circuits. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn
off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K106) NVLD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
NVLD ASSEMBLY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Testing complete.
Go To 2.
2.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

3.
NVLD SOLENOID

Measure the resistance of the NVLD Solenoid Coil.
Is the resistance between 7.5 to 8.5 ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

LX
4.
9 - 487
(K106) NVLD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K106) NVLD Solenoid Control circuit in the NVLD electrical harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K106) NVLD Solenoid

Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 488
P0499-NVLD CANISTER VENT VALVE SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
9 - 489
When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
The PCM detects an open in the NVLD Canister vent solenoid circuits. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn
off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(K106) NVLD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K106) NVLD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
NVLD SOLENOID
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

Testing complete.
Go To 2.
2.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

9 - 490
3.
LX
NVLD SOLENOID

Disconnect the NVLD Assembly harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the NVLD Solenoid coil.
Is the resistance between 7.5 to 8.5 ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
(K106) NVLD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Take this measurement with the Ignition in the off (lock) position and in
the Ignition on, engine off position.
Measure the voltage on the (K106) NVLD Solenoid Control circuit in the
NVLD Assembly harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K106) NVLD

Solenoid Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
5.
(K106) NVLD SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K106) NVLD Solenoid Control circuit
from the NVLD Assembly harness connector to the appropriate terminal
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (K106) NVLD Solenoid Control circuit.
6.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

9 - 491
9 - 492
7.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0501-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE (Not Equipped with ABS)
9 - 493
9 - 494
LX
When Monitored:
With the engine running, transmission not in park or neutral, brakes not applied, and engine rpm greater than
1500.
Set Condition:
This code will set if no vehicle speed signal is received from the TCM Module for more than 11 seconds for 2
consecutive trips. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
ACTIVE BUS OR COMMUNICATION DTCS
TIRE CIRCUMFERENCE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: The following items must be check before continuing.

Pinion Factor and Tire Size MUST be programmed in the Front Control Module.
All Bus Communication DTCs MUST be diagnosed.
All Vehicle Speed DTCs that may be active in the Front Control Module or in the Transmission Control
Module MUST be diagnosed.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION
NOTE: This code can set due following conditions.

Unequal tire circumference between the tires on the vehicle.
Front or Rear wheels moving while the opposite wheels are not. (i.e., wheels slipping on loose gravel, ice
or hard acceleration)
Check tire pressure of all the tires.
Check tire wear on all the tires.
Ask the customer what the road and driving conditions were like when the fault set.
Yes
>> Repair as necessary. If the code set during a front OR rear wheel spin condition, no repair is necessary.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 495
PCM
push out. Repair as necessary. Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors.
Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 496
P0503-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1 ERRATIC (Not Equipped with ABS)
LX
LX
9 - 497
When Monitored:
Ignition on and battery voltage greater than 10 volts. Transmission in Drive or Reverse.
Set Condition:
Vehicle speed signal is erratic during road load conditions. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
TIRE CIRCUMFERENCE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 498
3.
LX
PCM
Yes

No
LX
P0501-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE (Equipped with ABS)
9 - 499
9 - 500
LX
When Monitored:
With the engine running, transmission not in park or neutral, brakes not applied, and engine rpm greater than
1500.
Set Condition:
This code will set if no vehicle speed signal is received from the ABS Module for more than 11 seconds for 2
consecutive trips. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
TIRE CIRCUMFERENCE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: The following items must be performed before continuing.

Pinion Factor and Tire Size MUST be programmed in the ABS Module.
All related Vehicle Speed and Wheel Speed DTCs that may be active in the ABS Module MUST be diagnosed. Refer to the ABS diagnostic information for the correct procedure.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 501
PCM
Yes

No
9 - 502
P0503-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1 ERRATIC (Equipped with ABS)
LX
LX
9 - 503
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Vehicle speed signal is erratic during road load conditions. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
TIRE CIRCUMFERENCE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 504
3.
LX
PCM
Yes

No
LX
9 - 505
P0506-IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE LOWER THAN EXCEPTED

When Monitored:
With the engine running at idle, MAF <250 mg/tdc, air temp >-17.8C (0F) and <-7C (19.4F) enable after
coolant temp >70C (158F) or air temp >-7C (19.4F), coolant temp >-7C (19.4F) <130C (266F), canister
purge <100% duty cycle, and no VSS, MAF/MAP, ECT, TPS, ETC, CRK Sensor DTCs nor any fuel system or
injector DTCs.
Set Condition:
Engine speed is 100 RPM or more below idle speed for 7 seconds. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off
the MIL.
Possible Causes
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
THROTTLE BODY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: If any other DTCs are present, they must be diagnosed and repaired before continuing this test.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
Inspect the Air Induction System for the following problems.

Restrictions: Dirty Air Cleaner, Foreign material trapped in the air intake tube, etc.
Leaks: Air Intake tube connection, Air Cleaner housing, etc.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
THROTTLE BODY OPERATION
Inspect the throttle body for carbon build up, other restrictions, and a bent throttle plate using a straight edge.
If the throttle plate does not close entirely it may be bent and needs to be replaced.
While the vehicle is running, lightly tap on ETC Motor, with your hand, and listen for idle to raise.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
9 - 506
4.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 507
P0507-IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE HIGHER THAN EXCEPTED

When Monitored:
With the engine running at idle, MAF <250 mg/tdc, air temp >-17.8C (0F) and <-7C (19.4F) enable after
coolant temp >70C (158F) or air temp >-7C (19.4F), coolant temp >-7C (19.4F) <130C (266F), canister
purge <100% duty cycle, and no VSS, MAF/MAP, ECT, TPS, ETC, CRK Sensor DTCs nor any fuel system or
injector DTCs.
Set Condition:
Engine speed is 200 RPM or more above idle speed for 7 seconds. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off
the MIL.
Possible Causes
VACUUM LEAKS
THROTTLE BODY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: If any other DTCs are present, they must be diagnosed and repaired before continuing this test.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
Inspect the Air Induction System for the following problems.

Restrictions: Dirty Air Cleaner, Foreign material trapped in the air intake tube, etc.
Leaks: Air Intake tube connection, Air Cleaner housing, etc.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 508
3.
LX
VACUUM LEAKS
Start the engine.

Inspect the vehicle for external vacuum leaks.
Inspect the engine for internal leaks.
Were any vacuum leaks found?
Yes
>> Repair the vacuum leak as necessary.

No
>> Go To 4
4.
THROTTLE BODY OPERATION
Inspect the throttle body for carbon build up, other restrictions, and a bent throttle plate using a straight edge.
If the throttle plate does not close entirely it may be bent and needs to be replaced.
While the vehicle is running, lightly tap on ETC Motor, with your hand, and listen for idle to raise.
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0513-INVALID SKIM KEY
9 - 509
9 - 510
LX
When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
The PCM detects an invalid SKREEM key. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT VIN PROGRAMMED IN THE PCM
NO COMMUNICATION WITH SKREEM
NO VIN PROGRAMMED IN THE PCM
IGNITION KEY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 6
2.
NO COMMUNICATION WITH SKREEM
With the scan tool, attempt to communicate with the SKREEM.

Can the scan tool communicate with the SKREEM?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Refer to Section 8 - Electrical VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS and perform
the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure.
Perform VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - STANDARD
PROCEDURE)
3.
SKREEM TROUBLE CODES SET

Are any DTCs present in the SKREEM?
Yes
>> Refer to Section 8 - Electrical VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY - ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS and perform
the appropriate Diagnostic Procedure.
PROCEDURE)
No
>> Go To 4
LX
4.
9 - 511
VIN PROGRAMMED INTO PCM
With the scan tool, display the VIN that is programmed in the PCM.
Has a VIN been programmed into the PCM?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Program the correct VIN into the PCM and retest.
PROCEDURE)
5.
PCM

Replace and program the SKREEM per Service Information.
With the scan tool, erase all SKREEM and PCM DTCs.
Attempt to start and idle the engine.
With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs.
Does the scan tool display this code?
Yes
>> NOTE: Before continuing, check the PCM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary. Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module per Service
Information.
PROCEDURE)
No
>> Test Complete.
6.
IGNITION KEY
NOTE: You must obtain the SKREEM pin number.

NOTE: This DTC could have been set if the SKREEM harness connector was disconnected, or if the
SKREEM was replaced recently.
NOTE: All keys that the customer uses for this vehicle must be tested to verify they are operating properly.
Verify the correct VIN is programmed into the PCM and SKREEM.
With each customer key, turn the ignition on and crank the engine to start.
With the scan tool, read the PCM DTCs. Look for P0513.
NOTE: If this DTC cannot be reset, it could have been an actual theft attempt.
Is the Good Trip Counter for DTC P0513 displayed and equal to 0?
Yes
>> Replace the Ignition Key.

PROCEDURE)
No
>> Test Complete.
9 - 512
P0520-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 513
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The PCM senses the oil pressure is out of the calibrated range.
Possible Causes
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
RESISTANCE (G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
RESISTANCE IN THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Ensure that the engine oil is at the proper level. Also, check the customers oil change history to
ensure that the oil is being changed at the correct intervals and that the proper oil viscosity is being used.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

With a scan tool, monitor the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor voltage.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit and
the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit.
NOTE: Engine Oil Pressure voltage should change from approximately 4.5 volts to less than 0.5 of a volt.
Yes
No
>> Replace the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor.

>> Go To 3
9 - 514
3.
LX
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit at the Engine
Oil Pressure Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815. Ensure the voltmeter
leads are connected with the circuits correct polarity.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit.
4.
(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit at the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor harness
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
5.

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
LX
6.
9 - 515
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 516
P0521-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
9 - 517
When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
The engine oil pressure never reaches the calibrated specification with the engine RPM at 1250.
Possible Causes
ENGINE OIL/ENGINE MECHANICAL
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
NOTE: The following items must be considered before determining the cause of this DTC. Failure to do so
may lead to misdiagnosis.
ENGINE MECHANICAL TOLERANCES OUT OF SPECIFICATION
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE OUT OF SPECIFICATION
LOW ENGINE OIL
OIL DIRTY OR DETERIORATED (Lack of scheduled oil changes)
ENGINE OIL CONTAMINATED (i.e., coolant and/or fuel)
If any of the above conditions are found, repair as necessary.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 518
3.

Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit in
the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor harness connector.
Yes
Pressure Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Yes
No
>> Remove the Engine Oil Pressure sensor and ensure the oil
passage/port is free from any blockage. If OK, replace the
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor.
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit
from the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (G6) Engine Oil

6.
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit Engine Oil Pressure Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
9 - 519
9 - 520
7.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (F856) 5VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (F856) 5-volt Supply

circuit.
8.
(F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY SHORTED TO GROUND
circuit in the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 9
LX
LX
9.
9 - 521
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance of the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit from the
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K900) Sensor

Ground circuit.
10.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 522
P0522-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 523
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Oil pressure signal is below the calibrated amount. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
ETC light will illuminate.
Possible Causes
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Measure the voltage on the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 6
3.
With a scan tool, monitor the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor voltage with the Sensor harness connector disconnected.
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
9 - 524
4.
LX

Measure the resistance between ground and the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit in the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor harness connector.
Yes
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Signal circuit and the (K900) Sensor Ground
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit and the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
6.

to perform diagnostics.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

LX
7.
9 - 525
Yes
No
>> Go To 8
8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 526
P0523-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
9 - 527
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Engine Oil pressure signal is greater than the calibrated amount. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Connect a jumper wire between the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal
circuit and the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit in the Engine Oil Pressure
Is the voltage below 0.5 of a volt with the jumper wire
installed?
Yes
No

>> Go To 3
9 - 528
3.
LX
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit in
Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit.
5.
(G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit and the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit and the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
6.
9 - 529
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K900) Sensor Ground circuit.

7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 530
P0524-ENGINE OIL PRESSURE TOO LOW
LX
LX
9 - 531
When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
The engine oil pressure never reaches the calibrated specification to allow the MDS activation.
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
NOTE: The following items must be considered before determining the cause of this DTC. Failure to do so
may lead to misdiagnosis.
ENGINE MECHANICAL TOLERANCES OUT OF SPECIFICATION
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE OUT OF SPECIFICATION
LOW ENGINE OIL
OIL DIRTY OR DETERIORATED (Lack of scheduled oil changes)
CORRECT VISCOSITY
ENGINE OIL CONTAMINATED (i.e., coolant and/or fuel)
If any of the above conditions are found, repair as necessary.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 532
3.

Yes
>> Remove the Engine Oil Pressure sensor and ensure the oil
passage/port is free from any blockage. If OK, replace the
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (G6) ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (G6) Engine Oil

LX
LX
5.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (G6) Engine Oil Pressure Signal circuit in the Engine Oil Pressure Sensor harness connector.
Yes
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (F856) 5VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

circuit.
9 - 533
9 - 534
7.
Yes
No
>> Go To 8
8.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

Ground circuit.
LX
LX
9.
9 - 535
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 536
P0532-A/C PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 537
When Monitored:
Engine running, A/C is learned, and AC Clutch Relay energized.
Set Condition:
The A/C pressure sensor signal voltage at the PCM goes below 0.58 of a volt for 2.6 seconds. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
(C18) A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(C18) A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (C918) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Test
1.
A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER VOLTAGE BELOW 0.6 OF A VOLT
NOTE: Make sure the A/C refrigerant System is properly charged per Service Information.
Start the engine.
With a scan tool, read the A/C Pressure Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Measure the voltage on the (F891) 5-volt Supply circuit in the A/C Pressure Transducer harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 6
3.
With the scan tool, monitor the A/C Pressure Transducer voltage.
Is the voltage above 0.6 of a volt?
Yes
>> Replace the A/C Pressure Transducer.

No
>> Go To 4
9 - 538
4.
(C18) A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between the (C18) A/C Pressure Signal circuit
in the A/C Pressure Transducer harness connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (C18) A/C Pressure Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
(C18) A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (C918) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

and the (C918) Sensor Ground circuit in the A/C Pressure Transducer
harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (C918) Sensor Ground circuit
and the (C18) A/C Pressure Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
6.

Measure the resistance of the (F891) 5-volt Supply circuit from the A/C
Pressure Transducer harness connector to the C1 FCM harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

LX
LX
7.
9 - 539
Measure the resistance between the (F891) 5-volt Supply circuit in the
A/C Pressure Transducer harness connector and ground.
Yes
No
>> Go To 8
8.
Ground circuits.
Yes

Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
No
>> Replace and program the Front Control Module per Service Information.
Perform BODY VERIFICATION TEST-VER 1.
9 - 540
P0533-A/C PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
9 - 541
When Monitored:
Engine running and the A/C Clutch Relay energized.
Set Condition:
The A/C pressure transducer signal at the PCM goes above 4.92 volts. One trip Fault. Three good trips to turn
off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(C18) A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(C18) A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(C18) A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (F891) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(C918) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Diagnostic Test
1.
A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.9 VOLTS
NOTE: Make sure the A/C refrigerant system is properly charged per Service Information.
Start the engine.
With a scan tool, read the A/C Pressure Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Connect a jumper wire between the (C18) A/C Pressure Signal circuit
and the (C918) Sensor Ground circuit in the Transducer harness connector.
With the scan tool, monitor the A/C Pressure Transducer voltage.
Yes
>> Replace the A/C Pressure Transducer.

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 542
3.
(C18) A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (C18) A/C Pressure Signal circuit in the A/C
Pressure Transducer harness connector.
Is there voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (C18) A/C Pressure Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(C18) A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (C18) A/C Pressure Signal circuit from
the A/C Pressure Transducer harness connector to the C1 FCM harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (C18) A/C Pressure Signal circuit.
LX
LX
5.
(C18) A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F891) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
and the (F891) 5-volt Supply circuit in the A/C Pressure Transducer
harness connector.
Yes
and the (C18) A/C Pressure Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
(C918) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (C918) Sensor Ground circuit from the
A/C Pressure Sensor harness connector to the C3 FCM harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (C918) Sensor Ground circuit

9 - 543
9 - 544
7.
LX
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 545
P0551-POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
With the ignition key on and engine running.
Set Condition:
With the vehicle above 40 m.p.h. for over 30 seconds, the power steering pressure switch remains open. Two
Possible Causes
(K66) P/S SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K66) P/S SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH

Disconnect the Power Steering Pressure Switch harness connector.
Connect a jumper wire to the (K66) P/S Switch Signal circuit at the
Power Steering Pressure Switch harness connector.
Use the scan tool to monitor the Power Steering Pressure Switch status.
Touch the other end of the jumper wire to the (Z988) Ground circuit at
the Power Steering Pressure Switch harness connector several times.
Did the Power Steering Pressure Switch status change from
High to Low when connecting and disconnecting the jumper
wire?
Yes
No
>> Replace the Power Steering Pressure Switch.

>> Go To 3
9 - 546
3.
LX
(K66) P/S SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

Using a voltmeter perform a voltage drop test. Backprobe the (K66) P/S Switch Signal circuit at the P/S Switch
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the high resistance in the (K66) P/S Switch Signal circuit.
4.

Using a 12-volt test light connected to battery voltage, probe the (Z988) Ground circuit in the Power Steering Pressure Switch connector.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the (Z988) Ground circuit.

5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0562-BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
9 - 547
9 - 548
LX
When Monitored:
The engine running. The engine speed greater than 1000 RPM.
Set Condition:
Battery voltage is 1 volt less than desired voltage for a set period of time. One Trip Fault. ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
RESISTANCE IN THE (A1) BATTERY POSITIVE CIRCUIT (A802 FUSE LINK CIRCUIT)
RESISTANCE IN THE GENERATOR CASE GROUND
GENERATOR OPERATION
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
before continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

LX
2.
9 - 549
(A1) B+ CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE

NOTE: Make sure all wires are clear of the engines moving parts.
Measure the voltage between the (A802) B+ Terminal at the Generator
and the (A1)Battery + Post.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (A802/A11/A1) B+

circuit between the Generator and Battery.
NOTE: Inspect the (A802) fuse link circuit and the Post Pass
Through connection, ensure proper operation.
No
3.
>> Go To 3
GENERATOR CASE GROUND HIGH RESISTANCE

Start the engine.
Measure the voltage between the Generator case and Battery ground post.
Yes
>> Repair excessive resistance in the Generator Ground between the Generator Case and Battery ground
side.
No
>> Go To 4
9 - 550
4.
GENERATOR OPERATION

Disconnect the Generator Field harness connector.
Using a 12-volt test light, jump it across the Generator Field harness
connector.
With the scan tool, actuate the Gen Field Control circuit.
Does the test light illuminate brightly and flash on and off?
Yes
>> Replace the Generator.

No
>> Go To 5
5.

Measure the resistance of the (K20) Gen Field Control circuit from the
Generator harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (K20) Gen Field Control circuit.
LX
LX
6.
9 - 551
Measure the resistance between the (K20) Gen Field Control circuit in
the Generator Field harness connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K20) Gen Field Control
circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
Measure the resistance between the (Z20) Ground circuit in the Generator Field harness connector and ground.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 552
P0563-BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
LX
LX
9 - 553
When Monitored:
With the ignition on. Engine RPM greater than 1000 RPM. With no other charging system codes set.
Set Condition:
Battery voltage is 1 volt greater than desired voltage. Battery voltage greater than 15.75 volts. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
(K20) GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
GENERATOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
before continuing.
NOTE: Inspect the fuses in the IPM. If a fuse is open use the wire diagram/schematic as a guide, inspect the
wiring and connectors for damage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
GENERATOR OPERATION

Using a 12-volt test light, jump across the Generator Field harness connector.
With the scan tool, actuate the Generator Field Driver.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 554
3.
LX
(K20) FIELD CIRCUIT SHORTED BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K20) Gen Field Control circuit at the Generator Field harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K20) Gen Field
Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0571-BRAKE SWITCH 1 PERFORMANCE
9 - 555
9 - 556
LX
When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
If the output of Brake Switch No.1 to the PCM looks like it is not applied, while Brake Switch No.2 circuit is
applied the fault will mature in 60ms. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 SIGNAL SHORTED TO GROUND
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 SIGNAL OPEN
(F202) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT OPEN
STOP LAMP SWITCH
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Make sure the Stop Lamp Switch is properly adjusted before continuing.
NOTE: Make sure the Stop Lamp Switch is properly wired, such as (B15) Brake Switch No.1 and (B16) Brake
Lamp Switch No.2 circuits are not switched at the harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Measure the resistance between the (B15) Brake Switch No.1 Signal
circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (B15) Brake Switch No.1
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Measure the resistance of the (B15) Brake Switch No.1 Signal circuit
between the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector and the appropriate
terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the open in the (B15) Brake Switch No.1 Signal circuit.
4.

Measure the resistance between the (B16) Brake Switch No.2 Signal
circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector and ground.
Yes
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
9 - 557
9 - 558
5.

between the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector and the appropriate
terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.
Reconnect the PCM harness connector.

Using a 12volt test light connected to ground, probe the (F202) Fused
Ignition Switch Output circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (F202) Fused Ignition Switch Output
circuit.
7.
Using the 12Volt test light connected to battery voltage, probe the
(Z912) Ground circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

LX
LX
8.
9 - 559
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Remove the Stop Lamp Switch.

Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the Stop Lamp Switch.
Next, measure the resistance between terminals 3 and 4 of the Stop Lamp Switch.
Press and release the Stop Lamp Switch while monitoring the ohmmeter during both of the above steps.
Does the resistance change from below 5.0 ohms to an open circuit for one or both of the measurements taken?
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Replace the Stop Lamp Switch.

9.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 560
P0572-BRAKE SWITCH 1 STUCK ON
LX
LX
9 - 561
When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes the Brake Switch #1 is mechanically stuck in the low/on position. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
STOP LAMP SWITCH
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Lamp Switch No.2 circuit are not switched at the harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (B15) Brake Switch
No.1 Signal circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 562
3.
LX

from the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector and the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
(B16) BRAKE SWITCH NO.2 SIGNAL SHORT TO VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage of the (B16) Brake Switch No.2 Signal circuit in
the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to voltage in the (B16) Brake Switch No.2
circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
STOP LAMP SWITCH

Apply and release the brake pedal switch while monitoring the ohmmeter during both of the above steps.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

LX
6.
9 - 563
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 564
P0573-BRAKE SWITCH 1 STUCK OFF
LX
LX
9 - 565
When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes Brake Switch No.1 is stuck in the Off/high position. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 SIGNAL ShORT TO VOLTAGE
STOP LAMP SWITCH
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 566
3.

Yes
>> Repair the short voltage in the (B15) Brake Switch No.1
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Yes
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
LX
LX
6.
9 - 567

Yes
>> Go To 7
No
circuit.
7.
Using the 12Volt test light connect to battery voltage, probe the (Z912)
Ground circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
STOP LAMP SWITCH

Apply and release the brake pedal switch while monitoring the ohmmeter during both of the above steps.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

9 - 568
9.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P0579SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED SWITCH #1 PERFORMANCE
9 - 569
9 - 570
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) has detected that the Speed Control Switch #1 is not operating
properly.
Possible Causes
INTERMITTENT SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 1/2 STUCK DTC
SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE
Yes
>> Go to 2
No
>> Go to 4
2.

Replace the Speed Control Switch in accordance with the Service Information.
Move the Speed Control Switch to each position several times.
Move the Speed Control Switch to each position several times while monitoring the Scan Tool.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Test Complete.
3.
View repair.
Repair
LX
4.
9 - 571
While monitoring the scan tool data relative to this circuit, move the Speed Control Switch to each position several
times.
Look for the DTC to reset while the switch is being moved to each position.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
9 - 572
P0580SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED SWITCH #1 LOW
LX
LX
9 - 573
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) has detected that the Speed Control Switch #1 is below the
calibrated value.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE
Yes
>> Go to 2
No
>> Go to 4
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Test Complete.
3.
View repair.
Repair
9 - 574
4.
LX
times.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
LX
P0585-SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED SWITCH 1/2 CORRELATION
9 - 575
9 - 576
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) has detected that a non-permissable combination has occurred
in the Speed Control Switch. Two trip Fault.
Possible Causes
INTERMITTENT SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED SWITCH 1/2 CORRELATION DTC
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE
NOTE: This DTC is a two trip fault. If the scan tool indicates a one trip failure, the possible cause may have
been the customer pressing both switches simultaneously. Test drive the vehicle and activate the Speed
Control system. If the DTC matures to an active fault a repair is necessary.
Yes
>> Go to 2
No
>> Go to 4
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Test Complete.
3.
View repair.
Repair
LX
4.
9 - 577
INTERMITTENT SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED SWITCH 1/2 CORRELATION DTC
times.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
9 - 578
P0591SPEED CONTROL MULTIPLEXED SWITCH PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
9 - 579
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) has detected that the Speed Control Switch #2 is not operating
properly.
Possible Causes
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE
Yes
>> Go to 2
No
>> Go to 4
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Test Complete.
3.
View repair.
Repair
9 - 580
4.
LX
times.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
LX
9 - 581
P0600-SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Internal Bus communication failure between processors. One Trip Fault. Three Global Good Trips to Clear.
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
PCM
NOTE: Diagnose any CMP or CKP Sensor faults before continuing. Check for intermittent loose CMP or CKP
connections.
The Powertrain Control Module is reporting internal errors, view repair to continue.
Repair
9 - 582
LX
P0601-INTERNAL MEMORY CHECKSUM INVALID

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Internal checksum for software failed, does not match calculated value. One Trip Fault, Three Good Trips to
clear.
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
PCM
connections.
Repair
LX
9 - 583
P0606-INTERNAL ECM PROCESSOR

When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
When the PCM recognizes an internal failure to communicate with the ECM or the CMP and CKP Sensor
count periods are too short. One trip fault. ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
PCM
connections.
Repair
9 - 584
LX
P060B-ETC A/D GROUND PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
When the Throttle Motor is powered.
Set Condition:
When A to D reading does not return to ground within a set period of time of test activation, this fault sets. The
test typically runs a couple of times per second, and is the reason why APP2 signal spikes to ground a couple
of times per second in normal running. Reprogramming the module may not always fix this fault. ETC lamp will
flash.
Possible Causes
PCM NEEDS TO BE PROGRAMMED
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
PROGRAM THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Verify the PCM is at the latest calibration (flash level).

NOTE: An intermittent loss of power to the PCM without performing an ETC Relearn procedure may cause
this DTC to set.
NOTE: Diagnose any other DTCs that may have set with the P060B.
Flash the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information if any updates are available.
Start the engine.
Operate the accelerator pedal. (do not exceed 3500 rpm)
Does this DTC reset by itself?
Yes
>> Replace and reprogram the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
9 - 585
P060D-ETC LEVEL 2 APP PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Throttle motor is powered and no matured faults related to APP Sensors.
Set Condition:
When secondary software determines that APPS 1 and APPS 2 signals do not match for a period of time. ETC
lamp will flash
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

this DTC to set.
Start the engine.
NOTE: Diagnose any other DTCs that may have set with the P060D.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
9 - 586
LX
P060E-ETC LEVEL 2 TPS PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Throttle motor is powered and no matured faults related to TP Sensors.
Set Condition:
When secondary software determines that TPS 1 and TPS 2 signals do not match for a period of time. ETC
lamp will flash.
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

this DTC to set.
Start the engine.
NOTE: Diagnose any other DTCs that may have set with the P060E.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
9 - 587
P060F-ETC LEVEL 2 ECT PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Throttle motor is powered and no matured faults related to the Engine Coolant Temp Sensor.
Set Condition:
When secondary software determines that the Coolant Temperature is implausible for a period of time. ETC
lamp will flash.
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: Diagnose any Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor DTCs before continuing.
this DTC to set.
Start the engine.
NOTE: Diagnose any other DTCs that may have set with the P060F.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
9 - 588
LX
P061A-ETC LEVEL 2 TORQUE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Throttle motor is powered.
Set Condition:
When secondary software determines that the customer requested output is not being achieved by the engine
for a period of time. ETC lamp will flash
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: Check the engine for air/vacuum leaks and diagnose any Fuel System Lean/Rich as well as MAP
Sensor DTCs before continuing.
this DTC to set.
Start the engine.
NOTE: Diagnose any other DTCs that may have set with the P061A.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
9 - 589
P061C-ETC LEVEL 2 RPM PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Throttle motor is powered and no camshaft or crankshaft electrical signal related DTCs are set.
Set Condition:
When secondary software determines that the engine speed is implausible for a period of time. ETC lamp will
flash.
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
NOTE: Diagnose any Camshaft Position and Crankshaft Position Sensor DTCs before continuing.
this DTC to set.
Start the engine.
NOTE: Diagnose any other DTCs that may have set with the P061C.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
9 - 590
P0622-GENERATOR FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 591
When Monitored:
With the ignition on. Engine running.
Set Condition:
When the PCM tries to regulate the generator field with no result during monitoring. One Trip Fault. Three
Possible Causes
(K20) GEN FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K20) GEN FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K20) GEN FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
GENERATOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
GENERATOR OPERATION

Using a 12-volt test light, jump it across the Generator Field harness
connector.
With the scan tool, actuate the Generator Field Control circuit.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 592
3.
(K20) GEN FIELD CIRCUIT SHORTED BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K20) Gen Field Control circuit in the Generator Field harness connector.
Yes
Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K20) GEN FIELD CIRCUIT OPEN

Generator Field harness connector to appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
LX
LX
5.
9 - 593
(K20) GEN FIELD CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K20) Gen Field Control circuit in the Generator Field harness connector.
Yes
circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
Measure the resistance between the (Z20) Ground circuit in the Gen
Field harness connector and ground.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 594
P0627-FUEL PUMP RELAY CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 595
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
An open or shorted condition is detected in the fuel pump relay control circuit. One Trip Fault. Three good trips
to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
(A109) FUSED B+ CIRCUIT
(K31) FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT
(K31) FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
FUEL PUMP RELAY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
FUEL PUMP RELAY OPERATION

With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel Pump Relay.
Is the Fuel Pump Relay operating?
Yes

No
>> Go To 2
2.
FUEL PUMP RELAY

Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM.
Measure the resistance of the Fuel Pump Relay Coil.
Is the resistance between 70 to 90 ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Fuel Pump Relay.

9 - 596
3.
(F20) FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (F20) Fused
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open or short to ground in the (F20) Fused Ignition Switch Output circuit. Inspect the related fuse and
repair as necessary.
4.

B+ circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open or short to ground in the (A109) Fused B+

circuit. Inspect the related fuse and repair as necessary.
LX
LX
5.
9 - 597
(K31) CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K31) Fuel Pump Relay Control circuit
from the IPM to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (K31) Fuel Pump Relay Control circuit.
6.
(K31) CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K31) Fuel Pump
Relay Control circuit in the IPM.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K31) Fuel Pump Relay
Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 598
LX
P062C-ETC LEVEL 2 MPH PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Throttle motor is powered and no vehicle speed related DTCs have matured.
Set Condition:
When secondary software determines that the vehicle speed is implausible for a period of time. ETC lamp will
flash
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.

this DTC to set.
Start the engine.
NOTE: Diagnose any other DTCs that may have set with the P062C.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
9 - 599
P0630-VIN NOT PROGRAMMED IN PCM

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
The VIN has not been programmed into the PCM. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
PROGRAMMING VIN INTO PCM
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
PROGRAMMING VIN INTO THE PCM

Using the scan tool, program VIN into the PCM.
Start the engine.
NOTE: If the engine will not start, crank the engine over for 15 seconds. Crank at least 2 times with the
ignition switch returning to the off position each time.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
No
>> The VIN has been successfully programmed into the PCM. Test is complete.
9 - 600
LX
P0632-ODOMETER NOT PROGRAMMED IN PCM

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
Odometer is not programed into the PCM. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
PROGRAMMING MILEAGE INTO THE PCM
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
PROGRAMMING MILEAGE INTO THE PCM

Using a scan tool, program the mileage into the PCM.
Start the engine.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
No
>> The mileage has been successfully programmed into the PCM. Test is complete.
LX
9 - 601
P0633-SKIM KEY NOT PROGRAMMED IN PCM

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
The SKIM Key information has not been programmed into the PCM. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn
off the MIL.
Possible Causes
PROGRAMMING SKIM KEY INTO THE PCM
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
PROGRAMMING SKIM KEY INTO THE PCM

With a scan tool, erase DTCs.
Using the scan tool, program the SKIM Key information into the PCM.
Start the engine.
NOTE: If the engine will not start, crank the engine over for 15 seconds. Crank at least 2 times with the
ignition switch returning to the off position each time.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
No
>> The SKIM KEY information has been successfully programmed into the PCM. Test is complete.
9 - 602
LX
P0642-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the PCM recognizes the Primary 5-volt Supply circuit voltage is too low. One Trip Fault. ETC light is
flashing.
Possible Causes
(F855) PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY SHORTED TO GROUND
SENSOR SHORTED TO GROUND
5-VOLT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

NOTE: Improperly installed aftermarket accessories can cause this DTC to set. Check for wiring added by
customer.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
(F855) PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

Disconnect all the Sensors that share the (F855) Primary 5-volt Supply
circuit.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (F855) Primary 5-volt
Supply circuit in the CKP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (F855) Primary 5-volt

Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 603
5-VOLT SENSOR

Reconnect all the previously disconnected Sensors except for the CKP
Measure the voltage on the (F855) Primary 5-volt Supply circuit in the
CKP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Replace the CKP Sensor.

4.
5-VOLT SENSOR SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the voltage on the (F855) Primary 5-volt Supply circuit at the
CAUTION: You must Turn the Ignition OFF when disconnecting
any of the Sensor harness connectors and Turn the Ignition On to
check the voltage readings.
While monitoring the voltage, disconnect each Sensor harness connector that shares the (F855) Primary 5-volt Supply circuit, one at a time.
NOTE: Reconnect all the Sensors and clear all trouble codes
before continuing.
Does the voltage increase above 4.5 volts when disconnecting
any of the remaining Sensors?
Yes
>> Replace the Sensor that causes the (F855) Primary 5-volt
Supply circuit voltage to increase when disconnected.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 604
LX
P0643-PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the PCM recognizes the Primary 5-volt Supply circuit voltage is too high. One Trip Fault. ETC light is
flashing.
Possible Causes
(F855) PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

circuit.
NOTE: Improperly installed aftermarket accessories can cause this
DTC to set. Check for wiring added by customer.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (F855) Primary

5-volt Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 605
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 606
P0645-A/C CLUTCH RELAY CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 607
When Monitored:
With the ignition on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts. A/C Switch on.
Set Condition:
An open or shorted condition is detected in the A/C clutch relay control circuit. One Trip Fault. Three good trips
to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
INTERNAL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
(C13) A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(C13) A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
A/C CLUTCH RELAY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
A/C CLUTCH RELAY OPERATION

With a scan tool, actuate the A/C Clutch Relay.
Is the A/C Clutch Relay operating?
Yes

No
>> Go To 2
2.
A/C CLUTCH RELAY RESISTANCE

Remove the A/C Clutch Relay from the IPM.
Measure the resistance of the A/C Clutch Relay Coil.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the A/C Clutch Relay.

3.
INTERNAL FUSED B+ CIRCUIT

Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the Internal Fused B+ circuit in the connection.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the open or short to ground in the Internal Fused B+ circuit. Check and replace any open fuses.
9 - 608
4.
LX
(C13) A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

diagnosis.
Measure the resistance of the (C13) A/C Clutch Relay Control circuit from the relay connection to the appropriate
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (C13) A/C Clutch Relay Control circuit.
5.
(C13) A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (C13) A/C Clutch Relay Control circuit at the IPM.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (C13) A/C Relay Clutch Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 609
P0652-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 2 CIRCUIT LOW

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the PCM recognizes the Auxiliary 5-volt Supply circuit voltage is too low One Trip Fault. ETC light is
flashing.
Possible Causes
(F856) AUXILIARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY SHORTED TO GROUND
CAM POSITION SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

NOTE: Improperly installed aftermarket accessories can cause this DTC to set. Check for wiring added by
customer.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Disconnect all the Sensors that share the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt Supply
circuit.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt
Supply circuit in the CMP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt

Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 610
3.
CMP SENSOR

Reconnect all the previously disconnected Sensors except for the CMP
Measure the voltage on the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt Supply circuit in the
CMP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
INTERNAL SENSOR SHORTED
Measure the voltage on the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt Supply circuit at the
CAUTION: You must Turn the Ignition OFF when disconnecting any
of the Sensor harness connectors and Turn the Ignition On to
While monitoring the voltage, disconnect each Sensor harness connector that shares the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt Supply circuit, one at a time.
any of the Sensor harness connectors?
Yes
>> Replace the Sensor that causes the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
9 - 611
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 612
LX
P0653-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 2 CIRCUIT HIGH

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the PCM recognizes the Auxiliary 5-volt Supply circuit voltage is too high. One Trip Fault. ETC light is
flashing.
Possible Causes
(F856) AUXILIARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

circuit.
NOTE: Improperly installed aftermarket accessories can cause this
DTC to set. Check for wiring added by customer.
Is the voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (F856) Auxiliary

No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 613
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 614
P0660MANIFOLD TUNE VALVE SOLENOID CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 615
When Monitored:
With the ignition on. ASD Relay energized. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
The PCM senses the MTV in not at the desired state. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
MTV (Z904) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
(K136) MTV CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K136) MTV CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(K136) MTV CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
MANIFOLD TUNED VALVE SOLENOID
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
MANIFOLD TUNE VALVE SOLENOID OPERATION

Disconnect the MTV Solenoid harness connector.
Using a 12volt test light, connect one end to the (K136) MTV Control circuit and the other end the (Z904) Ground
circuit in the MTV Solenoid harness connector.
With the scan tool, actuate (Toggle) the MTV Solenoid.
Yes
>> Replace the Manifold Tune Valve Solenoid.

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 616
3.
MTV SOLENOID (Z904) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
Measure the resistance between the Ground circuit in the MTV Solenoid harness connector and ground.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the open in the MTV Solenoid Ground circuit.

4.
(K136) MTV CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off

Measure the voltage of the (K136) MTV Control circuit in the MTV Solenoid harness connector.
Does the voltage indicate voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to voltage in the (K136) MTV Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
(K136) MTV CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between the (K136) MTV Control circuit in the
MTV Solenoid harness connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K136) MTV Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
9 - 617
(K136) MTV CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K136) MTV Control circuit between from
the MTV Solenoid harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the
special tool.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K136) MTV Control circuit.

Go To 7
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 618
P0685-AUTO SHUTDOWN RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 619
When Monitored:
With ignition on. Battery voltage above 10 volts.
Set Condition:
An open or shorted condition is detected in the ASD relay control circuit. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to
turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
(A922) FUSED B+ CIRCUITS
(K51) ASD RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K51) ASD RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
ASD RELAY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ASD RELAY OPERATION

Is the ASD Relay operating?
Yes

No
>> Go To 2
2.

Remove the ASD Relay from the IPM.
B+ circuits in the IPM.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

circuits. Inspect and replace any open fuses.
3.
ASD RELAY
Measure the resistance of the ASD Relay Coil.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Replace the ASD Relay.

9 - 620
4.
(K51) ASD RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K51) ASD Relay Control circuit from the
IPM to the appropriate terminals of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K51) ASD Relay Control circuit.
5.
(K51) ASD RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K51) ASD Relay Control circuit in the IPM.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K51) ASD Relay Control
circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
9 - 621
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 622
P0688-AUTO SHUTDOWN RELAY SENSE CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 623
When Monitored:
With ignition key on. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
No voltage sensed at the PCM when the ASD relay is energized. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off
the MIL.
Possible Causes
ASD RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
ASD RELAY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
VERIFY ASD DTC
NOTE: Diagnose P0685 - Auto Shutdown Relay Control Circuit first if it set along with this DTC.
With a scan tool, erase the DTC.
Attempt to start the engine. If the engine will not start, crank the engine for at least 15 seconds. It may be necessary to repeat several times.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
ENGINE OPERATION
Attempt to start the engine.

Does the engine start?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
9 - 624
3.
LX

Remove the ASD Relay.
Measure the resistance of the ASD Relay Output circuits from the
Relay connection to the appropriate terminals of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the ASD Relay Output circuit (s).
4.
ASD RELAY

Install a substitute relay in place of the ASD Relay.
Attempt to start the engine.
Does the DTC reset?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Replace the ASD Relay.

LX
5.

B+ circuits at the Relay connection.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

circuits. Inspect the related fuse and repair as necessary.
6.

Measure the resistance of the ASD Relay Output circuits from the
Relay connection to the appropriate terminals of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the ASD Relay Output circuit(s).

9 - 625
9 - 626
7.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 627
P0700-TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST)

When Monitored:
Ignition on and battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
An active DTC is stored in the TCM. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
DTC PRESENT IN THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC PRESENT IN TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE
This is an informational DTC letting you know that a DTC(s) is stored in the Transmission Control Module.
Erase this DTC from the PCM after all Transmission DTC(s) have been repaired.
Using a scan tool, read the Transmission Controller DTC and refer to the Transmission Category and perform the
appropriate symptom.
PCM Diagnostic Information complete.
Continue
Test Complete.
9 - 628
P0703-BRAKE SWITCH 2 PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
9 - 629
When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the PCM recognizes Brake Switch No.2 voltage is not equal to the applied value at the PCM when
Brake Switch No.1 is applied. This could be a normal condition. If this condition is seen repeatedly by the PCM
the fault is set. Cruise will not work for the rest of the key cycle.
Possible Causes
(L50) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN
(L50) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(L50) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(B29) BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
STOP LAMP SWITCH
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Make sure the Stop Lamp Switch is adjusted properly before continuing.
NOTE: Make sure the Stop Lamp Switch is properly wired, such as (B29) Brake Switch No.1 and (L50) Brake
Lamp Switch Output are not switched at the harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

B+ circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

circuit. Inspect the related fuse and repair as necessary.
9 - 630
3.
STOP LAMP SWITCH

Measure the resistance between the (A103) Fused B+ circuit terminal
and the (L50) Brake Lamp Switch Output terminal in the Stop Lamp
Switch.
Measure the resistance between the (Z429) Ground circuit terminal and
the (K29) Brake Switch No.1 Signal terminal in the Stop Lamp Switch.
Apply and release the brake pedal while monitoring the ohmmeter.
Does the resistance change from below 5.0 ohms to open circuit for each circuit check?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
(L50) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (L50) Brake Lamp Switch Output circuit in
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (L50) Brake Lamp
Switch Output circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
(L50) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (L50) Brake Lamp Switch Output circuit
from the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector to the C1 FCM harness
connector.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Repair the open in the (L50) Brake Lamp Switch Output circuit.
6.
(L50) BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (L50) Brake Lamp
Switch Output circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (L50) Brake Lamp Switch
Output circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
9 - 631
9 - 632
7.
LX
(B29) BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
from the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 633
P0850-PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Continuously with the transmission in Park, Neutral, or Drive and NOT in Limp-in mode.
Set Condition:
This code will set if the PCM detects an incorrect Park/Neutral switch state for a given mode of vehicle operation. One trip fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
TCM COMMUNICATION
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
P/N & D/R NOT IN CORRECT POSITION
NOTE: Before continuing, ensure communication can be established with the TCM. If the scan tool is unable
to communicate with the TCM or if there are related communication DTCs present refer to the Communication Category and perform the appropriate symptom.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECKING TCM DTC(S)

With the scan tool, read TCM DTCs.
Is there any there Transmission DTC(s) present?
Yes
>> Refer to the appropriate Transmission symptom in the Transmission category.
No
>> Before continuing, check the PCM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push
out. Repair as necessary. Replace and program the Powertrain Module in accordance with the Service
Information.
9 - 634
P1115-GENERAL TEMPERATURE RATIONALITY
LX
LX
9 - 635
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Ambient Air, Engine Coolant, and Intake Air Temp sensor inputs are compared under cold start conditions.
After start up the temp readings are monitored. If two of the three readings agree and the third doesnt, a DTC
is stored. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

With a scan tool, read the DTCs.
NOTE: All ECT, Intake Air, and Ambient Air Temperature Sensor codes must be diagnosed and repaired
before continuing.
NOTE: In cold weather, this DTC could be set by a non-OEM approved block heater and no repair would be
required.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
With a scan tool, read the ECT, Ambient Air Temp, and Intake Air Temp Sensor temp values.
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature while monitoring the three Sensor temperature values.
Is the temperature for each of the Sensors increasing properly?
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Disconnect the suspected faulty sensor.
Connect a jumper wire between the Sensor Signal circuit and the (K900) Sensor ground circuit.
With the scan tool, read the voltage of the suspected Sensor.
Did the voltage reading start at 4.8 to 5.0 volts and decrease to 0 volts when the jumper wire was
installed?
9 - 636
LX
Yes
>> Replace the faulty Sensor.

No
>> Go To 4
4.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the Sensor Signal circuit from the Sensor
Yes
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the Temperature Sensor

Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
#8815.
Yes

ground circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P01404-EGR POSITION SENSOR RATIONALITY CLOSED
9 - 637
9 - 638
LX
Theory of Operation
The EGR valve has a position sensor and the EGR position rationality is designed to make sure that the valve
moves freely within its operating range. Closed valve position reference check verifies that the valve is within its
allowable upper and lower limits. The EGR position rationality test looks for a sustained error relative to commanded
valve position.
When Monitored:
Engine running.
Set Condition:
The EGR flow or valve movement is not what is expected. A rationality error has been detected for the EGR
Open Position Performance. Two trip fault.
Possible Causes
(K34) EGR SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

LX
2.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No

circuit.
3.
Measure the resistance of the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit from
the EGR Solenoid harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the open in the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control circuit.
9 - 639
9 - 640
4.
LX
(K34) EGR SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K34) EGR Sensor
Signal circuit in the EGR Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K34) EGR Sensor Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.

Using a 12-volt test light, jumper cross the (K35) EGR Solenoid Control
circuit and the (Z904) Ground circuit in the EGR Solenoid harness connector.
With the scan tool, actuate the EGR Solenoid. Allowing it to actuate for
at least 15 seconds.
Yes
>> Replace the EGR Solenoid Assembly per Service Information.

No
>> Go To 6
6.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P1411CYLINDER 1 REACTIVATION CONTROL PERFORMANCE
9 - 641
9 - 642
LX
Theory of Operation
When all criteria has been met, power is supplied to each MDS Solenoid when the engine is making a transition
from 8 cylinder mode to 4 cylinder mode. By actuating the solenoid, oil pressure is raised to the pair of lifters that
coincide with each particular solenoid. The oil pressure pushes in the locking pins that allows the lifter to collapse,
decoupling the valves and camshaft.
When Monitored:
Transition from 4 to 8 cylinder mode.
Set Condition:
The MDS fails to disengage for cylinder 1.
Possible Causes
(K451) MDS SOLENOID NO.1 CONTROL SHORT TO VOLTAGE
OIL PASSAGES RESTRICTED
LIFTER
MDS SOLENOID NO.1
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
(K451) MDS SOLENOID NO.1 CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE

Disconnect the C101 harness connector.
diagnosis.
Measure the voltage on (K451) MDS Solenoid No.1 Control circuit in the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Is voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to voltage in the (K451) MDS Solenoid No.1 Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 643
MDS SOLENOID RESISTANCE

Measure the resistance between the (Z904) Ground Circuit and the (K451) MDS Solenoid No.1 Control Circuit in the
appropriate terminals of special tool #8815.
NOTE: It is important to follow the below temp/resistance values to ensure an accurate reading.
TEMPERATURE VALUE 20 F
RESISTANCE (OHMS) .25 ohms
0 F
8.8 ohms
32 F
9.5 ohms
68 F
10.3 ohms
100 F
11 ohms
150 F
12.2 ohms
200 F
13.4 ohms
250 F
14.4 ohms
300 F
15.6 ohms
Is the resistance within an acceptable range?

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Visually and Physically inspect the wiring harness between the C101 connector and the MDS Solenoid
connector. Repair as necessary. If OK, replace the MDS Solenoid in accordance with the Service Information.
4.
PCM CONTROL

Using a 12-volt test light connected to the (Z904) Ground circuit, probe the (K451) MDS Solenoid No.1 Control
circuit in the C100 harness connector.
With a scan tool, actuate the MDS Solenoid.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Replace and program the Powertrain Control Module in accordance with the Service Information.Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE - STANDARD PROCEDURE)
9 - 644
5.
LX
MDS SOLENOID 1
Turn the
Remove
Turn the
With the
ignition off.
the Intake Manifold per Service Information.
ignition on.
scan tool actuate the MDS Solenoid 1.
Can you feel and hear the Solenoid Actuating?

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Remove the Solenoid (1) and check for any debris that may
be blocking the oil passages (3) to the Solenoid. If the passages are clogged, clean the passages and replace the
MDS Solenoid 1. If the passages are not clogged with
debris, replace the MDS Solenoid 1.
6.

Remove both Solenoids on Bank 1 of the engine block.
Remove the Bank 1 Cylinder Head per Service Information.
Remove the Lifters from the left engine bank.
Inspect the oil passages to the Solenoids and from the Solenoids to the lifters.
Are the passages blocked?
Yes
>> Clean the oil passages as necessary. If the entire engine is restricted disassembly of the entire engine
block may be necessary.
No
>> Replace both sets of lifters if no other possible causes remain.

LX
9 - 645
9 - 646
LX
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
LIFTER
MDS SOLENOID NO.4
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

diagnosis.
Is voltage present?
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 647

0 F
8.8 ohms
32 F
9.5 ohms
68 F
10.3 ohms
100 F
11 ohms
150 F
12.2 ohms
200 F
13.4 ohms
250 F
14.4 ohms
300 F
15.6 ohms

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
PCM CONTROL

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
9 - 648
5.
LX
MDS SOLENOID 4
Turn the
Remove
Turn the
With the
ignition off.
ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.

Yes
No

LX
9 - 649
9 - 650
LX
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
LIFTER
MDS SOLENOID NO.6
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Disconnec the C101 harness connector.
diagnosis.
Is voltage present?
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 651

0 F
8.8 ohms
32 F
9.5 ohms
68 F
10.3 ohms
100 F
11 ohms
150 F
12.2 ohms
200 F
13.4 ohms
250 F
14.4 ohms
300 F
15.6 ohms

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
PCM CONTROL

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
9 - 652
5.
LX
MDS SOLENOID 6
Turn the
Remove
Turn the
With the
ignition off.
ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.

Remove the Lifters from the right engine bank.
Yes
No

LX
9 - 653
9 - 654
LX
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
LIFTER
MDS SOLENOID NO.7
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

diagnosis.
Is voltage present?
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 655

0 F
8.8 ohms
32 F
9.5 ohms
68 F
10.3 ohms
100 F
11 ohms
150 F
12.2 ohms
200 F
13.4 ohms
250 F
14.4 ohms
300 F
15.6 ohms

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.
PCM CONTROL

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
9 - 656
5.
LX
MDS SOLENOID 7
Turn the
Remove
Turn the
With the
ignition off.
ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
6.

Yes
No

LX
P1501VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION DRIVE WHEELS (Not

Equipped with ABS)
9 - 657
9 - 658
LX

When Monitored:
Ignition on, vehicle moving. Speed control is learned and the speed control is trying to be activated.
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes rear wheel speed is greater than the front wheel speed.
Possible Causes
TIRE CIRCUMFERENCE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: The following items must be checked before continuing.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION
NOTE: This code can set due to the following conditions.

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 659
PCM
Yes

No
9 - 660
LX
P1502VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION NON DRIVE WHEELS (Not

Equipped with ABS)
LX
9 - 661

When Monitored:
Ignition on and vehicle moving. Brake pedal must not be applied.
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes the front wheel speed is greater than the rear wheel speed.
Possible Causes
TIRE CIRCUMFERENCE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 662
3.
LX
PCM
Yes

No
LX
9 - 663
P1501VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION DRIVE WHEELS (Equipped

with ABS)
9 - 664
LX

When Monitored:
Ignition on and the vehicle moving. Speed control is learned and the speed control is trying to be activated.
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes the rear wheel speed is greater than the front wheel speed.
Possible Causes
TIRE CIRCUMFERENCE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 665
PCM
Yes

No
9 - 666
P1502VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION NON DRIVE WHEELS

(Equipped with ABS)
LX
LX
9 - 667

When Monitored:
Ignition on and the vehicle moving. Brake pedal must not be applied
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes the front axle speed is greater than the rear wheel speed.
Possible Causes
TIRE CIRCUMFERENCE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 668
3.
LX
PCM
Yes

No
LX
9 - 669
P1521INCORRECT ENGINE OIL TYPE

When Monitored:
Engine Running.
Set Condition:
Using the oil pressure, oil temperature and other vital engine inputs the PCM can determine the engine oil
viscosity. Incorrect viscosity will effect the operation of the MDS by delaying cylinder activation.
Possible Causes
INCORRECT ENGINE OIL TYPE
ENGINE OIL CONTAMINATION
ENGINE OIL
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Review the customers oil change history. Ensure the customers is using the correct engine oil viscosity. If the incorrect oil is being used, change the oil, using the correct engine oil viscosity.
Ignition on, engine off.
Yes
>> Go to 2
No
>> Test Complete.
2.
ENGINE OIL
NOTE: If set along with P1521, repair any engine oil pressure or temperature DTCs first before continuing.
The following conditions must be checked.
OEM recommended oil viscosity is being used.

Customer is following the oil change schedule.
Check the engine oil for contamination. (i.e., fuel and/or engine coolant)
Internal engine condition that may effect oil pressure.
Yes

No
>> Change the engine oil using the correct oil viscosity.
9 - 670
P1572-BRAKE SWITCH STUCK ON
LX
LX
9 - 671
When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes the Brake Switch #1 is mechanically stuck in the low/on position. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
STOP LAMP SWITCH
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Lamp Switch No.2 circuit are not switched at the harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 672
3.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.

Yes
>> Repair the short to voltage in the (B16) Brake Switch No.2
circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
STOP LAMP SWITCH

Apply and release the brake pedal while monitoring the ohmmeter during both of the above steps.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

LX
6.
9 - 673
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 674
P1573-BRAKE SWITCH STUCK OFF
LX
LX
9 - 675
When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes Brake Switch No.1 is stuck in the Off/high position. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
(B15) BRAKE SWITCH NO.1 SIGNAL ShORT TO VOLTAGE
STOP LAMP SWITCH
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

Yes
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 676
3.

Yes
>> Repair the short voltage in the (B15) Brake Switch No.1
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Yes
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
LX
LX
6.
9 - 677

Yes
>> Go To 7
No
circuit.
7.
Using the 12-volt test light connect to battery voltage, probe the (Z912)
Ground circuit in the Stop Lamp Switch harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
STOP LAMP SWITCH

Apply and release the brake pedal while monitoring the ohmmeter during both of the above steps.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

9 - 678
9.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P1593SPEED CONTROL SWITCH 1/2 STUCK
9 - 679
9 - 680
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The Steering Control Module (SCM) has detected that the Speed Control Switches are not operating properly.
Possible Causes
STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SCM)
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC IS ACTIVE
With the Scan Tool, select View DTCs in the Steering Control Module.
Yes
>> Go to 2
No
>> Go to 4
2.

With the Scan Tool, Clear Stored DTCs in the Steering Control Module.
With the Scan Tool, select View DTCs in the Steering Control Module.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Test Complete.
3.
STEERING CONTROL MODULE (SCM)
View repair.
Repair
Replace the Steering Control Module (SCM) in accordance with the Service Information.
LX
4.
9 - 681
times.
Yes
No
>> Test complete.
9 - 682
LX
P1603-PCM INTERNAL DUAL-PORT RAM COMMUNICATION FAILURE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Internal PCM failure detected. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
PCM FUSED IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
PCM INTERNAL
Diagnostic Test
1.
PCM IGNITION CIRCUITS

With a 12-volt test light connected to ground and with special tool
#8815 installed, probe the (F202) and (F924) Fused Ignition Switch circuits.
Perform the above check with the Ignition key in the off lock position,
Ignition on, engine not running position, and during cranking.
Wiggle the related wire harness while probing the special tool with the
test light to try to interrupt the circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Repair the open or excessive resistance in the (F202) and

(F924) Fused Ignition Switch (Off, Run, Start) circuits.
Inspect the related fuse, if the fuse is open check the circuits for a short to ground.
2.
PCM
The Powertrain Control Module is reporting internal errors.
LX
9 - 683
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 684
LX
P1604-PCM INTERNAL DUAL-PORT RAM READ/WRITE INTEGRITY FAILURE

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
PCM INTERNAL
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
PCM
LX
9 - 685
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 686
LX
P1607-PCM INTERNAL SHUTDOWN TIMER RATIONALITY

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
PCM INTERNAL
Diagnostic Test
1.

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
PCM
LX
9 - 687
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 688
LX
P1618-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1 CIRCUIT ERRATIC

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the PCM recognizes the Primary 5-volt Supply circuit voltage is varying too much to quickly. One Trip
Fault. ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
(F855) PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY SHORTED TO GROUND
(F855) PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN
5-VOLT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
(F855) PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND

circuit.
NOTE: This code can be caused by the improper installation of
after market accessories that may be causing excessive noise on
Measure the resistance between ground and the (F855) Primary 5-volt
Supply circuit in the CKP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (F855) Primary 5-volt

Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
Connect the PCM harness connectors and all the previously disconnected Sensor except for the CKP Sensor harness connector.
Throttle Body harness connector.
CAUTION: You must Turn the Ignition Off when disconnecting any
While monitoring the voltage, disconnect each Sensor harness connector that shares the (F855) Primary 5-volt Supply circuit, one at a time.
Yes
>> Replace the Sensor that causes the (F855) Primary 5-volt
No
>> Go To 4
4.
5-VOLT SENSOR

Connect all the previously disconnected Sensors except for the CKP
Yes
>> Replace the Crank Position Sensor.

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 689
9 - 690
5.
LX

circuit.
Measure the voltage on the (F855) Primary 5-volt Supply circuit in the
Is the voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (F855) Primary

No
>> Go To 6
6.
(F855) PRIMARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN

Reconnect all the sensors that were disconnected in the previous step
except for the CKP Sensor harness connector.
Measure the resistance in the (F855) Primary 5-volt Supply circuit from
the Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool
#8815.
It may be necessary to perform this test from every sensor that uses
the (F855) Primary 5-volt Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (F855) Primary 5-volt Supply circuit.
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 691
P1628-SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 2 CIRCUIT ERRATIC

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
When the PCM recognizes the Auxiliary 5-volt Supply circuit voltage is varying too much to quickly. One Trip
Fault. ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
(F856) AUXILIARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN
5-VOLT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

circuit.
NOTE: This code can be caused by the improper installation of
after market accessories that may be causing excessive noise on
Measure the resistance between ground and the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt
Supply circuit at the CMP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt

Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 692
3.
Connect the PCM harness connectors and all the previously disconnected Sensor except for the CMP Sensor harness connector.
CAUTION: You must Turn the Ignition OFF when disconnecting any
While monitoring the voltage, disconnect each Sensor harness connector that shares the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt Supply circuit, one at a time.
Yes
>> Replace the Sensor that causes the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt
No
>> Go To 4
4.
5-VOLT SENSOR

Connect all the previously disconnected Sensors except for the CMP
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

LX
LX
5.

circuit.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (F856) Auxiliary

No
>> Go To 6
6.
(F856) AUXILIARY 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT OPEN

Reconnect all the sensors that were disconnected in the previous step
except the CMP Sensor harness connector.
Measure the resistance in the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt Supply circuit from
the Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool
#8815.
It may be necessary to perform this test from every sensor that uses
the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt Supply circuit.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (F856) Auxiliary 5-volt Supply circuit.
9 - 693
9 - 694
7.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 695
P1696-EEPROM MEMORY WRITE DENIED/INVALID

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
An attempt to program/write to the internal EEPROM failed, Also checks at powerdown. One Trip Fault. Three
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
SCAN TOOL DISPLAYS A WRITE FAILURE
With a scan tool, perform the SRI Memory Test.

Does scan tool display Write Failure?
Yes
No
>> Go To 2
2.
SCAN TOOL DISPLAYS A WRITE REFUSED
With the a scan tool, perform the SRI Memory Test.

Does the scan tool display Write Refused?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
PCM REFUSED 2ND TEST
With a scan tool, perform the SRI Memory Test a third time.
NOTE: Retest the SRI Memory two more times.
Does the scan tool display Write Refused again?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
4.
SCAN TOOL DISPLAYS SRI MILEAGE INVALID

Does the scan tool display SRI Mileage Invalid?
Yes
>> Update the mileage and retest the SRI Memory.

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 696
5.
LX
COMPARE SRI MILEAGE WITH ODOMETER
Compare the SRI Mileage stored with the Instrument Panel Odometer.
Is the mileage within the specified range displayed on the scan tool?
Yes
>> Test Complete.
No

LX
9 - 697
P1697-EMR (SRI) MILEAGE NOT STORED

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
An attempt to program/write to the internal EEPROM failed, Also checks at powerdown. One Trip Fault. Three
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
SCAN TOOL DISPLAYS A WRITE FAILURE

Does scan tool display Write Failure?
Yes
No
>> Go To 2
2.
SCAN TOOL DISPLAYS A WRITE REFUSED
With the a scan tool, perform the SRI Memory Test.

Does the scan tool display Write Refused?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.
PCM REFUSED 2ND TEST
With a scan tool, perform the SRI Memory Test a third time.
NOTE: Retest the SRI Memory two more times.
Does the scan tool display Write Refused again?
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
4.
SCAN TOOL DISPLAYS SRI MILEAGE INVALID

Does the scan tool display SRI Mileage Invalid?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 698
5.
LX
COMPARE SRI MILEAGE WITH ODOMETER
Compare the SRI Mileage stored with the Instrument Panel Odometer.
Is the mileage within the specified range displayed on the scan tool?
Yes
>> Test Complete.
No

LX
9 - 699
P1897PCM PROCESSOR
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Internal controller failure. One Trip Fault. Three Global Good Trips to Clear.
Possible Causes
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
PCM
The Powertrain Control Module is reporting an internal error, view repair to continue.
Repair
9 - 700
P2008SHORT RUNNER VALVE SOLENOID CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 701
When Monitored:
With the ignition on. ASD Relay energized. Battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
The PCM senses the SRV is not at the desired state. One Trip Fault.
Possible Causes
(K343) FUSED AUTO SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT OPEN
(K236) SRV CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K236) SRV CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
(K236) SRV CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
SHORT RUNNER VALVE SOLENOID
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
SHORT RUNNER VALVE SOLENOID OPERATION

Disconnect the SRV Solenoid harness connector.
Using a 12volt test light, connect one end to the (K236) SRV Control circuit and the other end the (Z904) Ground
circuit in the SRV Solenoid harness connector.
With the scan tool, actuate (Toggle) the SRV Solenoid.
Yes
>> Replace the Short Runner Valve Solenoid.

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 702
3.
(K343) FUSED AUTO SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT2 CIRCUIT OPEN

Disconnect the Short Runner Valve Solenoid harness connector.
Using the scan tool, actuate (Toggle) the ASD Relay.
Using a 12-volt test light connected ground, probe the Fused ASD
Relay Output circuit in the SRV Solenoid harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the (K343) Fused ASD Relay Output circuit.

4.
(K236) SRV CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition off

Measure the voltage of the (K236) SRV Control circuit in the SRV Solenoid harness connector.
Does the voltage indicate voltage present?
Yes
>> Repair the short to voltage in the SRV Control circuit.

No
>> Go To 5
5.
(K236) SRV CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

Measure the resistance between the (K236) SRV Control circuit in the
SRV Solenoid harness connector and ground.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K236) SRV Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
9 - 703
(K236) SRV CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Measure the resistance of the (K236) SRV Control circuit between from
the SRV Solenoid harness connector to the appropriate terminal of the
special tool.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K236) SRV Control circuit.

7.
PCM
NOTE: Before continuing, check the PCM harness connector terminals for corrosion, damage, or terminal push out. Repair as necessary.
Using the schematics as a guide, inspect the wire harness and connectors. Pay particular attention to all Power and Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 704
P2066-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 PERFORMANCE
LX
LX
9 - 705
When Monitored:
TEST No.1: With the ignition on, the fuel level is compared to the previous key down after a 20 second delay.
TEST No.2: The PCM monitors the fuel level at ignition on.
Set Condition:
TEST No.1: If the PCM does not see a difference in fuel level of greater than 0.1 volt the test will fail. TEST
No.2: If the PCM does not see a change in the fuel level of .1765 over a set amount of miles the test will fail.
Possible Causes
FUEL TANK
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Diagnose any CAN - C or CAN - B Communication DTCs before continuing.

NOTE: Diagnose P2067 or P2068 first, if set along with P2066.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

Perform (NGC) POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST VER - 5. (Refer to 8 - ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULES/POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
2.
VISUALLY INSPECT FUEL TANK
Visually inspect the Fuel Tank for damage that may restrict the Fuel Sending Unit float from moving.
Is the Fuel Tank OK?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Replace the Fuel Tank as necessary.

9 - 706
3.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
CONTROL
MODULES/
4.
Yes
CONTROL
MODULES/
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
9 - 707
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
circuit.
CONTROL
MODULES/
6.
INTERNAL INSPECTION OF THE FUEL TANK
Remove the Fuel Tank per Service Information.
Remove the Fuel Pump Module.
Visually inspect the inside of the Fuel Tank for any obstructions or deformities.
Inspect the Fuel Pump Module Float arm for damage.
Yes

No
>> Go To 7
7.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Repair
Replace the Fuel Level Sensor.
9 - 708
P2067-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 709
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The fuel level sensor signal voltage goes below 0.4 of a volt for more than 90 seconds. One Trip Fault. Three
Possible Causes
(N5) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (Z210) FUEL LEVEL SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding. (Refer to 9 - ENGINE SCHEMATICS AND DIAGRAMS).
Diagnostic Test
1.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR VOLTAGE BELOW 0.4 OF A VOLT
NOTE: Diagnose any CAN - B or CAN -C Communication DTCs before continuing.

Is the Fuel Level Sensor voltage below 0.4 of a volt?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Did the Fuel Level Sensor voltage change from below 0.4 of a volt to above 4.0 volts?
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
9 - 710
3.
LX

Yes
CONTROL
MODULES/
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(N5) FUEL LEVEL SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (Z210) FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (N5) Fuel Level Signal circuit and
harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (Z210) Fuel Level Sensor
Ground circuit and the (N5) Fuel Level Signal circuit.
CONTROL
MODULES/
No
>> Go To 5
LX
5.
9 - 711
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 712
P2068-FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
9 - 713
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The fuel level sensor signal voltage at the PCM goes above 4.9 volts for more than 90 seconds. One Trip
Possible Causes
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Diagnostic Test
1.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR VOLTS ABOVE 4.9 VOLTS
NOTE: Diagnose any CAN - B and CAN - C Communication DTCs before continuing.
With a scan tool, read the Fuel Level Sensor voltage.
Is the Fuel Level Sensor voltage above 4.9 volts?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module electrical harness connector.
Connect a jumper wire between the (N5) Fuel Level Signal circuit and
harness connector.
Did the Fuel Level Sensor voltage change from above 4.8 volts
to below 0.4 of a volt with the jumper wire installed?
Yes
No

CONTROL
MODULES/
>> Go To 3
9 - 714
3.

Disconnect the C2 Cluster harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (N5) Fuel Level Signal circuit in the Fuel
Pump Module harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (N5) Fuel Level
Signal circuit.
CONTROL
MODULES/
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No
CONTROL
MODULES/
LX
LX
5.
9 - 715
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
circuit.
CONTROL
MODULES/
6.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 716
LX
P2072-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM - ICE BLOCKAGE

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes the Throttle plate is stuck during extremely cold Ambient Temperature operation. The
throttle plate goes through a de-icing procedure. If the throttle blade still doesnt move this fault sets. The MIL
will not illuminate. The vehicle will be in Limp home condition, limiting rpm and vehicle speed.
Possible Causes
THROTTLE PLATE FROZEN
Diagnostic Test
1.
THROTTLE BODY INSPECTION

NOTE: This DTC sets in extreme cold Ambient Temperatures with the throttle plate stuck. By the time the
vehicle gets to the dealership the condition may be corrected.
NOTE: Diagnose any other DTCs that may also be set before continuing.
Remove the Air Cleaner Assembly from the Throttle Body.
Check for any signs of a foreign material (ice or dirt) on the Throttle Plate or in the bore causing the Throttle Plate
to stick.
Is the throttle blade still stuck because it is frozen?
Yes
>> Allow the Throttle Body to thaw naturally in a room temperature climate.
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
P2097-DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM 1 LEAN
9 - 717
9 - 718
LX
When Monitored:
With the engine running in closed loop mode, the ambient/battery temperature above (-7C) 20F, altitude
below 8500 ft.
Set Condition:
If the PCM multiplies short term compensation by long term adaptive as well as a purge fuel multiplier and the
result is below a certain value for 30 seconds over two trips, a freeze frame is stored, the MIL illuminates and
a trouble code is stored. Two Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
1/2 O2 SENSOR
FUEL CONTAMINATION
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Check the vehicle repair history. If the 1/2 O2 has been replace make sure that the O2 sensor was
properly installed and meets OEM specification.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
EXHAUST LEAK

WARNING: To avoid personal injury from the exhaust system being hot, allow the exhaust to cool down to
a safe temperature before performing a physical inspection. Failure to follow these instructions can result in
Visually and Physically inspect for holes, cracks and blockage in the exhaust system.
Is the exhaust system is good condition?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair or Replace as necessary.

LX
3.
9 - 719

AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM - must be free from leaks
ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM - must be free of any restrictions or leaks
FUEL INJECTOR - plugged or restricted injector; control wire not connected to correct injector
Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
O2 SENSOR

The O2 Sensor voltage should read 5.0 volts on the scan tool with the
connector disconnected.
Using a jumper wire, jump the (K141) O2 Sensor 1/2 Signal circuit to
connector.
Did the O2 Sensor volts change from 5.0 volts to 2.5 volts?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 720
5.
Remove the jump wire.

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Check the (K141) O2 Sensor 1/2 Signal circuit for an open
LX
LX
6.
(K299) O2 SENSOR 1/2 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT

Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K299) O2 Sensor 1/2

No
>> Go To 7
7.

Yes
>> Check the fuel system for contaminants.

No
>> Check the (K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit for a short

to ground, open, or short to voltage. Inspect the O2 Sensor
Information.
9 - 721
9 - 722
LX
LX
P2097-DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM 1 RICH
9 - 723
9 - 724
LX
When Monitored:
below 8500 ft.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
1/2 O2 SENSOR
(K299) O2 HEATER 1/2 CONTROL CIRCUIT
FUEL CONTAMINATION
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Check the vehicle repair history. If the 1/2 O2 has been replaced make sure that the O2 sensor was
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
EXHAUST LEAK

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
9 - 725
Check for any of the following conditions/mechanical problems

Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
O2 SENSOR

connector.
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 726
5.

Yes
>> Go To 6
No
LX
LX
6.

Yes

No
>> Go To 7
7.

Yes

No

Information.
MODULES/POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
9 - 727
9 - 728
LX
LX
P2098-DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM 2 LEAN
9 - 729
9 - 730
LX
When Monitored:
below 8500 ft and fuel level greater than 15%.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
2/2 O2 SENSOR
(K399) O2 HEATER 2/2 CONTROL CIRCUIT
FUEL CONTAMINATION
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
EXHAUST LEAK

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
9 - 731

Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
O2 SENSOR

connector.
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 732
5.

With the scan tool, monitor the O2 Sensor voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No
>> Check the (K243) O2 Sensor 2/2 Signal circuit for a open
LX
LX
6.

Yes

No
>> Go To 7
7.

Yes

No

Information.
9 - 733
9 - 734
LX
LX
P2099-DOWNSTREAM FUEL TRIM SYSTEM 2 RICH
9 - 735
9 - 736
LX
When Monitored:
below 8500 ft.
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
EXHAUST LEAK
2/2 O2 SENSOR
FUEL CONTAMINATION
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
EXHAUST LEAK

Yes
>> Go To 3
No

LX
3.
9 - 737

Yes

No
>> Go To 4
4.
O2 SENSOR

Using a jumper wire, jump the (K243) O2 Signal 2/2 circuit to the
(K904) O2 Downstream Return circuit in the O2 Sensor harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 738
5.

Yes
or short to battery voltage. Inspect the O2 Sensor connector and the PCM harness connector. If OK, replace and
program the Powertrain Control Module per Service Information.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
(K399) O2 SENSOR 2/2 HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Yes

No
>> Go To 7
7.

Yes

MODULES/POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING)
No

Information.
9 - 739
9 - 740
LX
LX
P2100-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT
9 - 741
9 - 742
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on and the ETC Motor is not in Limp Home mode.
Set Condition:
When the PCM detects an internal error or a short between the ETC Motor- and ETC Motor + circuits in the
ETC Motor Driver. One trip fault. ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
THROTTLE PLATE / BORE INSPECTION
(K124) ETC POSITIVE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K126) ETC NEGATIVE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K124) ETC POSITIVE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K126) ETC NEGATIVE CIRCUIT
(K124) ETC POSITIVE CIRCUIT OPEN
(K124) ETC POSITIVE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K126) ETC NEGATIVE CIRCUIT OPEN
(K126) ETC NEGATIVE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
ETC MOTOR/THROTTLE BODY
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

NOTE: If the P2100 is intermittent, it is possible that the controller is overheating in extreme hot temperatures, and this is considered a normal protection operation. No repair is necessary.
NOTE: Low battery voltage can also cause excessive current draw, in very hot and very cold ambient temperatures. Make sure the battery can pass a Load test before continuing.
Look closely at the temperatures at which this DTC set.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
THROTTLE PLATE INSPECTION

to stick.
Were any signs of foreign material or scoring of the throttle plate or bore found?
Yes
>> Remove the debris if possible or replace the Throttle Body Assembly. Disconnect the Battery when
replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the ETC
RELEARN function.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

With a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (K124) ETC
Positive circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage on the (K124) ETC Positive circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (K126) ETC
Negative circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K126) ETC Negative circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.
(K124) ETC POSITIVE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K126) ETC NEGATIVE CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K124) ETC Positive circuit and
the (K126) ETC Negative circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Repair the short to between the (K124) ETC Positive circuit
and the (K126) ETC Negative circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 743
9 - 744
6.

Measure the resistance of the (K124) ETC Positive circuit from the
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K124) ETC Positive circuit.

7.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K124) ETC Positive
circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K124) ETC Positive circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
8.
Measure the resistance of the (K126) ETC Negative circuit between the
Throttle Body harness connector and the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Repair the open in the (K126) ETC Negative circuit.

9.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K126) ETC Negative
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K126) ETC Negative circuit.
No
>> Go To 10
9 - 745
9 - 746
10.
LX
ETC MOTOR
Reconnect the Throttle Body harness connector.

NOTE: Take the following measurement using special tool #8815 to
avoid possible damage to the Throttle Body harness connector.
Measure the resistance of the ETC Motor between the (K447) ETC
Positive circuit and the (K448) ETC Negative circuit at the appropriate
terminals of special tool #8815.
Is the resistance between 2.5 and 25 ohms at closed throttle?
Yes
>> Go To 11
No
RELEARN function.
11.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 747
P2101-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
With the vehicle running, ETC Motor not in Limp Home mode, and the TPS adaptation is complete.
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes too large of an error between the actual position of the Throttle Plate and the Set Point
position. One trip fault and the code will set within 5 seconds. Three good trips to turn off the MIL ETC light is
flashing.
Possible Causes
THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY
LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Before continuing visually inspect the throttle blade and bore for any obstructions. Icing of the throttle body may have caused this code to set.
NOTE: Low battery voltage can also cause excessive current draw, in very hot and very cold ambient temperatures. Make sure the battery can pass a Load test before continuing.
NOTE: Diagnose any 5-Volt Supply, Battery, and TP Sensor DTCs before continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

to stick.
Manually open and close the throttle plate using your hands.
Does the Throttle Plate move?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
RELEARN function.
9 - 748
3.
LX
THROTTLE POSITION WITHIN 2 DEGREES OF DESIRED THROTTLE POSITION
Start the engine.

With a scan tool, monitor the Actual Throttle Position and Desired Throttle Position.
Compare the Actual Throttle Position and the Set Point Throttle Position.
Is the Actual Throttle Position within 2 degrees of the Desired Throttle Position?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the ETC RELEARN function.
4.
ETC OPERATION

With a scan tool, actuate the Electronic Throttle Control Motor.
NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mirror to see the throttle blade.
Observe the throttle blade.
NOTE: Make sure the motion of the throttle blade is smooth and that it opens and closes.
Did the ETC motor operate properly?
Yes

No
>> Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the ETC RELEARN function.
LX
9 - 749
P2107-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MODULE PROCESSOR

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
Internal PCM failure. Module will attempt to reset, so you will be able to hear the throttle relearning. If the
condition is continuous, the vehicle may not be driveable. One trip fault. ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE NEEDS TO BE REPROGRAMMED
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPROGRAM THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Check for any related TSBs.

this DTC to set.
Start the engine.
Test drive the vehicle for 10 miles on a flat road surface.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
9 - 750
LX
P2108-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE

When Monitored:
Ignition on.
Set Condition:
Internal PCM failure. Customer may experience an extended cranking condition with limited driving and a
rough idle. One trip fault and the code will set within 5 seconds. ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE NEEDS TO BE REPROGRAMMED
Diagnostic Test
1.
REPROGRAM THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Check for any related TSBs.

NOTE: Inspect the Intake Manifold components for vacuum leaks, repair as necessary
this DTC to set.
NOTE: Diagnose any other DTCs that may have set with the P2108.
Start the engine.
Test drive the vehicle for 10 miles on a flat road surface.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
P2110-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL - FORCED LIMITED RPM
9 - 751
9 - 752
LX
When Monitored:
Ignition on and ETC motor is working.
Set Condition:
When the PCM requests to limit engine speed if PWM is too high for 20.5 seconds and before P2118 sets.
One trip fault and the code will set within 5 seconds. ETC light is illuminated.
Possible Causes
THROTTLE PLATE STUCK
ETC MOTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

In the Freeze Frame data, look at the temperature at which the fault occurred. If it occurred in extreme cold temperatures, Icing of the throttle body may have caused this code to set.
NOTE: Diagnose any TP Sensor faults, 5-Volt Supply faults, and Battery Voltage High or Low DTCs before
continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
THROTTLE PLATE STUCK

Check for any signs of a foreign material (ice or dirt) causing the Throttle to stick.
Manually open and close the throttle plate using your hands.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Remove the debris if possible or replace the Throttle Body Assembly if signs of physical damage are
present. Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the ETC RELEARN function.
LX
3.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

9 - 753
9 - 754
5.
Measure the resistance between a known good ground and the (K124)
ETC Positive circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool
#8815.
Yes
No
>> Go To 6
6.
ETC Negative circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool
#8815.
Yes
No
>> Go To 7
7.
ETC MOTOR

Yes
>> Go To 8
No
RELEARN function.
LX
LX
8.
9 - 755
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 756
P2111-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL - UNABLE TO CLOSE
LX
LX
9 - 757
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Just after key on, the throttle is opened and closed to test the system. If the TP Sensor does not return to
Limp Home Position at the end of this test, this DTC will set. One trip fault and the code will set within 5
seconds. ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
THROTTLE PLATE STUCK ABOVE LIMP HOME POSITION
TP SENSOR NO.1 AND TP SENSOR NO.2 BOTH READ 2.5 VOLTS
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Maximum engine speed could be reduced while this fault is active, it just depends where the throttle
gets stuck.
NOTE: The PCM tests the ETC Motor by opening and closing the Throttle Plate before starting the engine.
If during this test the Throttle plate does not return to the closed position this DTC sets.
NOTE: Diagnose any TP Sensor or 5-Volt Supply DTCs before continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
THROTTLE PLATE STUCK OPEN

Check for any signs of a foreign material causing the Throttle to remain open.
Using a scan tool actuate the ETC Motor.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Remove the debris if possible or replace the Throttle Body Assembly if signs of physical damage are
present. Disconnect the Battery when replacing the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, use a scan tool and perform the ETC RELEARN function.
9 - 758
3.
LX
TP SENSOR NO.1 AND TP SENSOR NO.2 BOTH EQUAL 2.5 VOLTS
With a scan tool, perform the Throttle Follower test while reading both TP Sensor voltage readings.
Are both TP Sensor readings stuck at 2.5 volts?
Yes
>> Check the TP Sensor Signal circuits for excessive resistance, being shorted to each other, or shorted to
the Sensor Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Disconnect the C3/C PCM harness connector.
to perform the diagnostics.
Positive circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815..
Yes
No
>> Go To 5
5.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

LX
6.
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.
ETC Positive circuit at the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
No
>> Go To 8
9 - 759
9 - 760
8.
LX
#8815.
Yes
No
>> Go To 9
9.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P2112-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL - UNABLE TO OPEN
9 - 761
9 - 762
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Just after key on, the throttle is opened and closed to test the system. If the TP Sensor does not return to
Limp Home Position at the end of this test, this DTC will set. One trip fault and the code will set within 5
seconds. ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
THROTTLE PLATE STUCK AT OR BELOW LIMP HOME POSITION
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

NOTE: Diagnose any TP Sensor, Battery Voltage, and 5-Volt Supply DTCs before continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
THROTTLE PLATE STUCK OPEN

If during this test the Throttle plate does not open this DTC sets.
Check for any signs of a foreign material causing the Throttle to remain open.
Using a scan tool actuate the ETC Motor.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
RELEARN function.
LX
3.

Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage on the (K126) ETC Negative circuit.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

9 - 763
9 - 764
5.
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

6.
ETC Positive circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool
#8815.
Yes
No
>> Go To 7
LX
LX
7.
9 - 765
#8815.
Yes
No
>> Go To 8
8.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 766
LX
P2115-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 MINIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
When Monitored:
Igniting on. During in plant mode the APP Sensors need to be checked to make sure that idle and full pedal
travel can be reached on both sensors. The test for P2115 is only enabled once test for P2166 has passed.
Set Condition:
APPS No.1 has failed to achieve the required minimum value during In Plant testing. One trip fault and the
code will set within 5 seconds. Engine will only idle.
Possible Causes
IN PLANT TEST FAILURE
APPS RELEARN
Diagnostic Test
1.

NOTE: This DTC is set when the APP Sensors are learned in plant but do not reach the Minimum or Maximum voltage range.
Start the engine.
NOTE: Diagnose any APPS out of Range and 5-Volt Supply DTCs before continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
APPS RELEARN
With a scan tool select the ETC RELEARN function.

Next, erase DTCs.
Start the engine.
Does the DTC return?
Yes
>> Replace the APPS Assembly per Service Information. After installation is complete, use a scan tool and
select the ETC RELEARN function.
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
9 - 767
P2116-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 MINIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
When Monitored:
Igniting on. During in plant mode the APP Sensors need to be checked to make sure that idle and full pedal
travel can be reached on both sensors. The test for P2116 is only enabled once test for P2167 has passed.
Set Condition:
APPS No.2 has failed to achieve the required minimum value during In Plant testing. One trip fault and the
code will be stored within 5 seconds. Engine will only idle.
Possible Causes
APPS RELEARN
Diagnostic Test
1.

With a scan tool read DTCs and record the related Freeze Frame data.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
APPS RELEARN

Next, erase DTCs.
Start the engine.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
9 - 768
P2118-ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 769
When Monitored:
With the ignition on and the ETC Motor is not in Limp Home mode.
Set Condition:
When the PCM detects an internal error or a short between the ETC Motor- and ETC Motor + circuits in the
ETC Motor Driver. One trip fault. ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
THROTTLE PLATE / BORE INSPECTION
(K124) ETC POSITIVE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO (K126) ETC NEGATIVE CIRCUIT
ETC MOTOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

NOTE: If the P2118 is intermittent, it is possible that the controller is overheating in extreme hot temperatures, and this is considered a normal protection operation. No repair is necessary.
Look closely at the temperatures at which this DTC set.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.

to stick.
Were any signs of foreign material or scoring of the throttle plate or bore found?
Yes
RELEARN function.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 770
3.

Disconnect the C3/C PCM harness connector.
Positive circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
No
>> Go To 4
4.
Using a 12-volt test light connected to ground, probe the (K126) ETC
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K126) ETC Negative circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
(K124) ETC POSITIVE CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K126) ETC NEGATIVE CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K124) ETC Positive circuit and
the (K126) ETC Negative circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Repair the short to between the (K124) ETC Positive circuit
and the (K126) ETC Negative circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

9 - 771
9 - 772
7.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K124) ETC Positive
Yes
No
>> Go To 8
8.
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

LX
LX
9.
9 - 773
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K126) ETC Negative
Yes
No
>> Go To 10
10.
ETC MOTOR

Yes
>> Go To 11
No
RELEARN function.
11.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 774
P2122-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 775
When Monitored:
With the ignition on and no other APPS No.1 DTCs present.
Set Condition:
When the APP Sensor No.1 voltage is too low. Engine will additionally idle if the brake pedal is pressed or has
failed. Acceleration rate and Engine output are limited. One trip fault and the code will set within 5 seconds.
ETC light is flashing.
Possible Causes
(K23) APP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN
(K23) APP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
(K23) APP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K167) APP SENSOR NO.1 RETURN CIRCUIT
APP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
APP SENSOR BELOW 0.25 OF A VOLT

With a scan tool, read the APP Sensor No.1 voltage.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 11
2.

Disconnect the APP Sensor harness connector.
Measure the voltage on the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the APP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 8
9 - 776
3.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
(K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit in the Sensor harness connector.
With a scan tool, monitor the APP Sensor No.1 voltage.
Yes
>> Replace the APP Sensor Assembly per Service Information.

After installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the
ETC RELEARN function to relearn the APPS values.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Measure the resistance of the (K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit
from the APP Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
LX
LX
5.
9 - 777
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K23) APP Sensor
No.1 Signal circuit in the APP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K23) APP Sensor No.1
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
(K23) APP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K167) APP SENSOR NO.1 RETURN
CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit and the (K167) Sensor No.1 Return circuit at the APP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K167) APP Sensor No.1
Return circuit and the (K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
9 - 778
7.
CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit and the (K400) Sensor No.2 Return circuit in the APP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 10
8.

Measure the resistance of the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit from the Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

LX
LX
9.
9 - 779
circuit in the APP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 10
10.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
11.
APP SENSOR SWEEP

Slowly press the Accelerator pedal down.
Yes

No
>> Replace the APP Sensor Assembly per Service Information. After installation is complete, use a scan
tool and select the ETC RELEARN function to relearn the APPS values.
9 - 780
P2123-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
LX
LX
9 - 781
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When APP Sensor No.1 voltage is too high. Engine will additionally idle if the brake pedal is pressed or has
Possible Causes
(K23) APP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K23) APP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL SHORTED TO THE (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
(K167) APP SENSOR NO.1 RETURN CIRCUIT OPEN
APP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
APPS NO.1 VOLTAGE ABOVE 4.8 VOLTS

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 8
2.

Using a jumper wire, connect it from the (K23) APP Sensor Signal circuit and the Sensor ground circuit.
With a scan tool, monitor the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor voltage.
Is the voltage reading 0 volt?
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 782
3.

Measure the voltage on the (K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit in the
APP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K23) APP Sensor
No
>> Go To 4
4.
(K23) APPS NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (F855) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance between the (K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit and the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the APP Sensor harness
connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short between the (K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit and the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
LX
LX
5.
connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 6
6.

Measure the resistance of the (K167) APP Sensor No.1 Return circuit
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K167) APP Sensor No.1 Return circuit.
9 - 783
9 - 784
7.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
8.
APP SENSOR NO.1 SWEEP

Slowly press the Accelerator Pedal down.
Yes

No
LX
P2127-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW
9 - 785
9 - 786
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the APP Sensor No.2 voltage is too low. Engine will only idle if the Brake pedal is Pressed or has failed.
Acceleration rate and Engine output are limited. One trip fault and the code will set within 5 seconds. ETC light
is flashing.
Possible Causes
APP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
APP SENSOR BELOW 0.25 OF A VOLT

NOTE: Sensor No. 2 is pulled low by the PCM as part of its system testing. This test happens a couple of
times a second. So you can expect to see voltages close to zero occasionally with a normal sensor.
Is the voltage consistently below 0.25 of a volt?
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 11
2.

Measure the voltage on the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit in the APP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 8
LX
3.
(K29) APP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit in the Sensor harness connector.
Is the voltage above 4.5 volts with the jumper wire installed?
Yes
>> Replace the APP Sensor Assembly per Service Information.

After installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the
ETC RELEARN function to relearn the APPS values.
No
>> Go To 4
4.

Measure the resistance of the (K29) APP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the open in the (K29) APP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit.
9 - 787
9 - 788
5.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K29) APP Sensor
No.2 Signal circuit in the APP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K29) APP Sensor No.2
Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.
CIRCUIT
Yes
No
>> Go To 7
LX
LX
7.
CIRCUIT
Yes
No
>> Go To 10
8.
9 - 789

Measure the resistance of the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit from the Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

9 - 790
9.
LX
circuit in the APP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 10
10.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
11.
APP SENSOR SWEEP

Slowly press the Accelerator pedal down.
Yes

No
LX
P2128-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH
9 - 791
9 - 792
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When APP Sensor No.2 voltage is too high. Idle is additionally forced any time the brake is applied or failed.
Acceleration rate and Engine output are limited. One trip fault and the code will set within 5 seconds. ETC light
is flashing.
Possible Causes
APP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
APPS NO.2 VOLTAGE ABOVE 3.0 VOLTS

NOTE: Diagnose any 5-Volt Supply DTCs before continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 8
2.

Disconnect the APP Sensor harness connector
Using a jumper wire, connect it from the (K29) APP Sensor Signal circuit and the Sensor ground circuit.
Is the voltage at 0 volt?
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Measure the voltage on the (K29) APP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit in the
APP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K29) APP Sensor
No
>> Go To 4
4.

connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 5
5.
connector.
Yes
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 793
9 - 794
6.
LX

special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K400) APP Sensor No.2 Return circuit.
7.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
8.
APP SENSOR NO.2 SWEEP

Slowly press the Accelerator Pedal down.
Yes

No
LX
P2135-THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION
9 - 795
9 - 796
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on and no other DTCs present for TP Sensor No.1 or No.2.
Set Condition:
PCM recognizes TP Sensors No.1 and No.2 are not coherent. One trip fault and the code will set within 5
seconds. ETC light is illuminated.
Possible Causes
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 OR (K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 OR (K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: The throttle plate and linkage should be free from binding and carbon build up.
NOTE: Make sure the throttle plate is at the idle position.
NOTE: Inspect the engine for vacuum leaks.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 11
2.
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 OR (K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY
VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K22) TP No.1 Signal and the (K122) TP
No.2 Signal circuits in the Throttle Body harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K22) TP Sensor

No.1 or (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.

Connect the PCM harness connector.
TP Sensor No.1 voltage should change from approximately 4.5 volts to
0.5 of a volt?
TP Sensor No.2 voltage should change from approximately 0 volts to
5.0 volts?
Is the voltage reading within the listed specification with the
jumper wire installed?
Yes
No
>> Replace the Throttle Body Assembly.

>> Go To 4
9 - 797
9 - 798
4.
LX
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 OR (K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit from
the Throttle Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.Measure the resistance of the (K122) TP Sensor No.2
Signal circuit from the Throttle Body harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 5
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K22) TP Sensor

No.1 or (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit.
LX
5.
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 OR (K122) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K22) TP Sensor No.1
Signal circuit and the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit at the
appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Is the resistance below 100 ohms for either circuit?
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K22) TP No.1 Signal or

(K122) TP No.2 Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
9 - 799
9 - 800
6.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No

circuit.
7.
Yes
No
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
8.
9 - 801

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

Return circuit.
9.
(K22) TP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL SHORTED TO (K122) TP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL
Measure the resistance between the (K22) TP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit and the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
No
>> Go To 10
10.
PCM
Ground circuits.
If there are no possible causes remaining, review repair.
Repair
9 - 802
LX
11.

Yes

No
LX
P2138-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1/2 CORRELATION
9 - 803
9 - 804
LX
When Monitored:
With the ignition on and no APPS No.1 and APPS No.2 DTC present.
Set Condition:
APPS values No.1 and No.2 are not coherent. Idle is additionally forced when the brake pedal is pressed or
Possible Causes
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K167) SENSOR NO.1 RETURN CIRCUIT
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K23) APP SENSOR NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K29) APP SENSOR NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
APP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

NOTE: Repair any other 5-Volt Supply or APPS High and Low DTCs before diagnosing P2138.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

LX
2.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K23) APPS NO.1 SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Measure the resistance of (K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit from
the APP Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminals of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K23) APP Sensor

3.
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE (K29) APPS NO.2 SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance of (K29) APPS No.2 Signal circuit from the APP
Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminals of special tool
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K29) APP Sensor

9 - 805
9 - 806
4.
Measure the resistance of the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit from the APP
#8815.
Yes

circuit.
No
>> Go To 5
5.

Measure the resistance of the (F856) 5-volt Supply circuit from the APP
#8815.
Yes

circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K167) Sensor No.1

Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 7
7.
from the APP Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K400) Sensor No.2

Return circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
9 - 807
9 - 808
8.
LX
CHECKING APPS NO.1 AND NO.2 WITH A LAB SCOPE

Set up a lab scope in a way that you can view two graphs simultaneously.
Backprobe (K23) APP Sensor No.1 Signal circuit using Channel 1 at the APP Sensor harness connector.
Backprobe (K29) APP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit using Channel 2 at the APP Sensor harness connector.
Slowly press and release the Accelerator Pedal while monitoring the lab scope screen.
Does the scope pattern show any missing or erratic signals?
Yes
No
>> Go To 9
9.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P2161-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 2 ERRATIC (Not Equipped with ABS)
9 - 809
9 - 810
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes the vehicle speed in No. 2 is erratic or high. No MIL and no ETC light. Cruise Control is
disabled.
Possible Causes
TIRE CIRCUMFERENCE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 811
PCM
Yes

No
9 - 812
P2161-VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR 2 ERRATIC (Equipped with ABS)
LX
LX
9 - 813
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes the vehicle speed signal No. 2 is erratic or high. No MIL and no ETC light. Cruise Control
is disabled.
Possible Causes
TIRE CIRCUMFERENCE
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
VISUAL INSPECTION

Yes
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 814
3.
LX
PCM
Yes

No
LX
9 - 815
P2166-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 MAXIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
When Monitored:
Ignition on. During in plant mode the APP Sensors need to be checked to make sure that idle and full pedal
travel can be reached on both sensors.
Set Condition:
APPS No.1 has failed to achieve the required maximum value during In Plant testing. One trip fault and the
Possible Causes
APPS RELEARN
Diagnostic Test
1.

Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
APPS RELEARN

Next, erase DTCs.
Start the engine.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
9 - 816
LX
P2167-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 2 MAXIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
When Monitored:
Ignition on. During in plant mode the APP Sensors need to be checked to make sure that idle and full pedal
travel can be reached on both sensors.
Set Condition:
APPS No.2 has failed to achieve the required maximum value during In Plant testing. One trip fault and the
Possible Causes
APPS RELEARN
Diagnostic Test
1.

Start the engine.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
APPS RELEARN

Next, erase DTCs.
Start the engine.
Yes
No
>> Test Complete.
LX
P2172-HIGH AIRFLOW/VACUUM LEAK DETECTED (INSTANTANEOUS

ACCUMULATION)
9 - 817
9 - 818
LX

When Monitored:
Ignition on and engine running with no MAP Sensor DTCs.
Set Condition:
A large vacuum leak has been detected or both of the TP Sensors have failed based on their position being
2.5 volts and the calculated MAP value is less than the actual MAP minus an Offset value. One trip fault and
the code will set within 5 seconds. ETC light will flash.
Possible Causes
VACUUM LEAK
RESISTANCE IN THE (F856) 5-VOLT SUPPLY CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE IN THE (K1) MAP SIGNAL CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE IN (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE IN THE TP SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
TP SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
RESISTANCE IN THE (K922) TP SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT
MAP SENSOR
TP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: The most likely cause of this DTC is a vacuum leak.

NOTE: Diagnose any 5-Volt Supply, TP Sensor, Fuel System Lean or Rich, or MAP Sensor DTCs before continuing.
NOTE: The throttle plate should be free from binding and carbon build up.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

LX
2.
9 - 819
VACUUM LEAK
NOTE: This code is enabled on engines with a plastic intake manifold and is intended to limit the maximum
engine speed if a large crack occurs.
NOTE: A large vacuum leak is most likely the cause of this DTC.
Inspect the Intake Manifold and Throttle body for leaks and cracks.
Inspect the Power Brake Booster for any vacuum leaks.
Inspect the PCV system for proper operation or any vacuum leaks.
Inspect the MAP Sensor for proper installation.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Start the engine.

Snap the Accelerator pedal.
Does the MAP Sensor voltage vary from below 2.0 volts at idle to above 3.5 volts at Wide Open Throttle?
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 11
4.
TP SENSOR OPERATION

TP Sensor No.1 should start at approximately 0.8 of a volt and increase to 4.2 volts.
TP Sensor No.2 should start at approximately 4.2 volts and decrease to 0.8 of a volt.
Is the voltage transition smooth between the appropriate values?
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 820
5.

tool #8815.
Is the resistance above 100 ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

circuit.
6.
Measure the resistance between ground and (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit at the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
LX
LX
7.
TP SENSOR

With a scan tool, monitor the TP Sensor voltage.
connector.
TP Sensor No.1 voltage should start at approximately 4.8 volts and
decrease to 0.2 of a volt.
Connect a jumper wire between the (K122) TP Sensor No.2 Signal circuit and the (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit in the Throttle Body harness
connector.
TP Sensor No.2 voltage should start at approximately 0 volts and
increase to 4.8 to 5.2 volts.
Does the TP Sensor voltage change to the appropriate voltage
Yes
>> Disconnect the Battery before replacing the Throttle Body

Assembly. Replace the Throttle Body Assembly. After installation is complete, use a scan tool and select the ETC
RELEARN function
No
>> Go To 8
9 - 821
9 - 822
8.

Measure the resistance of the (K22) and (K122) TP Signal circuits from
the Throttle Body harness connector to the appropriate terminals of
special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K22) or (K122) TP

LX
LX
9.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K22) and (K122) TP
Signal circuits at the appropriate terminal of the special tool #8815.
Is the resistance above 100 ohms for each circuit?
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K22) or (K122) TP Sensor Signal circuit.
9 - 823
9 - 824
10.
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 17
No

Return circuit.
11.

Disconnect the C1/A PCM harness connector.
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 12
No

circuit.
LX
LX
12.
Is the resistance above 100k ohms?
Yes
>> Go To 13
No
13.
MAP SENSOR

Does the scan tool display MAP voltage from approximately
4.9 volts to below 0.5 volt with the jumper wire installed?
Yes
No

>> Go To 14
9 - 825
9 - 826
14.

#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 15
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K1) MAP Signal circuit
15.
Yes
>> Go To 16
No
LX
LX
16.
9 - 827
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 17
No

ground circuit.
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 828
P2173-HIGH AIRFLOW/VACUUM LEAK DETECTED (SLOW ACCUMULATION)
LX
LX
9 - 829
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
A large vacuum leak has been detected or both of the TP Sensors have failed based on their position being
2.5 volts and the calculated MAP value is less than the Gas Flow Adaptation value is too high. One trip fault
the code will set within 5 seconds. ETC light will flash.
Possible Causes
VACUUM LEAK
MAP SENSOR
TP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

NOTE: Diagnose any 5-Volt Supply, TP Sensor, Oxygen Sensor, Fuel related, or MAP Sensor DTCs before
continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

9 - 830
2.
LX
VACUUM LEAK
NOTE: This code is enabled on engines with a plastic intake manifold and is intended to limit the maximum
engine speed if a large crack occurs.
NOTE: A large vacuum leak is most likely the cause of this DTC.
Inspect the Intake Manifold and Throttle body for leaks and cracks.
Inspect the Power Brake Booster for any vacuum leaks.
Inspect the PCV system for proper operation or any vacuum leaks.
Inspect the MAP Sensor for proper installation.
Yes

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Start the engine.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 11
4.
TP SENSOR OPERATION

Yes

No
>> Go To 5
LX
5.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

circuit.
6.
Measure the resistance between ground and (F855) 5-volt Supply circuit between the appropriate terminals of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
9 - 831
9 - 832
7.
TP SENSOR

connector.
connector.
Yes

RELEARN function
No
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
8.

special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

9 - 833
9 - 834
9.
Signal circuits at the appropriate terminals of special tool #8815.
Is the resistance above 100k ohms for each circuit?
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
LX
LX
10.
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 17
No

Return circuit.
11.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 12
No

circuit.
9 - 835
9 - 836
12.
Yes
>> Go To 13
No
13.
MAP SENSOR
Connect the C1 PCM harness connector.

Yes
No

>> Go To 14
LX
LX
14.

#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 15
No
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the (K1) MAP Signal circuit.
15.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K1) MAP Signal circuit at the MAP Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 16
No
9 - 837
9 - 838
16.
LX
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 17
No

ground circuit.
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P2174-LOW AIRFLOW/RESTRICTION DETECTED (INSTANTANEOUS

ACCUMULATION)
9 - 839
9 - 840
LX

When Monitored:
Set Condition:
PCM calculated MAP value is greater than actual MAP value plus an offset value. One trip fault and the code
will set within 5 seconds. Three good trips to turn of the MIL. ETC light will flash.
Possible Causes
RESTRICTED AIR INLET SYSTEM
MAP SENSOR
TP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

NOTE: Diagnose any 5-Volt Supply, TP Sensor, Fuel System Lean or Rich, or MAP Sensor DTCs before continuing.
NOTE: Question the customer about weather conditions, as ICE build up on the blade can cause this fault
when ambient is around +4 to -10 Celsius range.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

LX
2.
9 - 841

Remove the Air Cleaner Assembly.
Remove the Air Filter.
Inspect the Throttle Body opening for signs of any foreign materials.
Check the intake tube/ air cleaner for obstructions.
Were any restrictions found?
Yes
>> Repair the restriction as necessary.

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Start the engine.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 11
4.
TP SENSOR OPERATION

Yes

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 842
5.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

circuit.
6.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
LX
LX
7.
TP SENSOR

connector.
connector.
Yes

RELEARN function
No
>> Go To 8
9 - 843
9 - 844
8.

special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

LX
LX
9.
Is the resistance above 100 ohms for each circuit?
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
9 - 845
9 - 846
10.
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 17
No

Return circuit.
11.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 12
No

circuit.
LX
LX
12.
Yes
>> Go To 13
No
13.
MAP SENSOR
Connect the C1/A PCM harness connector.

Yes
No

>> Go To 14
9 - 847
9 - 848
14.

#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 15
No
15.
Yes
>> Go To 16
No
LX
LX
16.
9 - 849
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 17
No

ground circuit.
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9 - 850
P2175-LOW AIRFLOW/RESTRICTION DETECTED (SLOW ACCUMULATION)
LX
LX
9 - 851
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
PCM calculated MAP value is greater than actual MAP value plus an offset value. One trip fault and the code
will set within 5 seconds. Three good trips to turn off the MIL. ETC light will flash.
Possible Causes
MAP SENSOR
TP SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

NOTE: Diagnose any 5-Volt Supply, TP Sensor, Oxygen Sensor, Fuel related or MAP Sensor DTCs before
continuing.
NOTE: Question the customer about weather conditions, as ICE build up on the blade can cause this fault
when ambient is around +4 to -10 Celsius range.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

9 - 852
2.
LX

Remove the Air Cleaner Assembly.
Remove the Air Filter.
Inspect the Throttle Body opening for signs of any foreign materials.
Check the intake tube/ air cleaner for obstructions - include snow packing questions to customer.
Were any restrictions found?
Yes
>> Repair the restriction as necessary.

No
>> Go To 3
3.
Start the engine.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Go To 11
4.
TP SENSOR OPERATION

Yes

No
>> Go To 5
LX
5.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 6
No

circuit.
6.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
9 - 853
9 - 854
7.
TP SENSOR

connector.
connector.
Yes

RELEARN function
No
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
8.

special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No

9 - 855
9 - 856
9.
Is the resistance above 100k ohms for each circuit?
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
LX
LX
10.
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 17
No

Return circuit.
11.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 12
No

circuit.
9 - 857
9 - 858
12.
Yes
>> Go To 13
No
13.
MAP SENSOR
Connect the C1/A PCM harness connector.

(K900) Sensor ground circuit.
Yes
No

>> Go To 14
LX
LX
14.

#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 15
No
15.
Yes
>> Go To 16
No
9 - 859
9 - 860
16.
LX
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 17
No

ground circuit.
17.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P2181-COOLING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
9 - 861
9 - 862
LX
When Monitored:
Ignition on, Engine running, and no ECT DTCs present.
Set Condition:
PCM recognizes that the ECT has failed its self coherence test. The coolant temp should only change at a
certain rate, if this rate is too slow or too fast this fault will set. Two trip fault. Three good trips to clear MIL.
ETC light will illuminate on first trip failure.
Possible Causes
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND
THERMOSTAT
ECT SENSOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

NOTE: If this code sets during extreme ambient temperatures, improper installation of a block heater could
be the cause of this DTC.
Diagnose all other ECT and Cooling System codes before continuing.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
NOTE: If a Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) DTC is set along with this code, diagnose the ECT DTC first.
NOTE: Inspect the ECT terminals and related PCM terminals. Ensure the terminals are free from corrosion
and damage.
NOTE: Need to make sure that no Cooling System DTCs are set or changes that would make the warm up
much slower or much faster: broken water pump can set this, addition of aftermarket auxiliary cooler can
set this DTC.
WARNING: Never open the cooling system when the engine is hot. The system is under pressure. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Allow the engine to cool before opening the
cooling system.
LX
9 - 863
Inspect the coolant system for proper level and condition.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Inspect the vehicle for a coolant leak and add the necessary amount of coolant.
3.
THERMOSTAT
With a scan tool, read the Eng Coolant Tmp Deg value. If the engine was allowed to sit overnight (cold soak), the
reached.
Start the Engine.
During engine warm-up monitor the Eng Coolant Tmp Deg value. The temp deg value change should be a smooth
thermometer.
NOTE: As the engine warms up to operating temperature, the actual coolant temperature (thermometer reading) and the Eng Coolant Tmp Deg on the scan tool should stay relatively close to each other.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No

4.
ECT SENSOR
Connect a jumper between the (K2) ECT Signal circuit and the (K900)
Sensor ground circuit in the ECT Sensor harness connector.
Disconnect the ECT Sensor harness connector.
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
9 - 864
5.

Measure the voltage on the (K2) ECT Signal circuit in the ECT Sensor
harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K2) ECT Signal
circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
6.

Measure the resistance of the (K2) ECT Signal circuit from the ECT
#8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
>> Repair the open in the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.

LX
LX
7.
ECT Sensor harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No

8.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K2) ECT Signal circuit in the ECT Sensor harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 9
9 - 865
9 - 866
9.
LX
(K2) ECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO THE (K900) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure the resistance between the (K2) ECT Signal circuit and the
(K900) Sensor ground circuit in the ECT Sensor harness connector.
Yes
the (K2) ECT Signal circuit.
No
>> Go To 10
10.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
P2299-BRAKE PEDAL POSITION / ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION

INCOMPATIBLE
9 - 867
9 - 868
LX

When Monitored:
Ignition on. No Break or APPS faults present.
Set Condition:
The PCM recognizes a brake application following the APPS showing a fixed pedal opening. Temporary or
permanent. Internally the PCM will reduce throttle opening below driver demand. One trip fault and the code
will be set within 5 seconds. ETC light will illuminate, the light will only stay illuminated while DTC is active.
Possible Causes
CUSTOMER PRESSING ACCELERATOR PEDAL, THEN PRESSING BRAKE PEDAL, AND CONTINUES
HOLDING THEM DOWN SIMULTANEOUSLY
STOP LAMP SWITCH
APP SENSOR
Diagnostic Test
1.
DTC INFORMATION
NOTE: If a pedal assembly becomes mechanically stuck the voltage output will stay fixed, if this is also
Followed by a long application of the brakes this code will set.
NOTE: When this code sets the pedal position in the PCM software will ramp to idle. If the Pedal voltage
changes OR the brake pedal is released, the pedal position in the PCM software will ramp up to the pedal
position and the ETC light will go out.
Diagnose all other Stop Lamp Switch and APP Sensor codes before continuing.
This code can be set by a driver who uses both feet while driving, one for the Accelerator Pedal and the other for
the Brake Pedal.
NOTE: The most likely cause of this DTC is caused by the customer Brake Torquing the engine by pressing
the Accelerator pedal and the pressing the Brake Pedal.
Ask the driver of the vehicle if these conditions apply to their driving habits.
Are the listed conditions part of the customers driving habits?
Yes
>> Advise the customer of what caused the DTC. This is normal operation of a ETC equipped vehicle
because of safety issues.
No
>> Go To 2
2.
STOP LAMP SWITCH OPERATION
With a scan tool, read both Stop Lamp Switch statuses while pressing and releasing the Brake Pedal.
Does the scan tool display the Pressed and Released while pressing and releasing the Pedal?
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Check the Stop Lamp Switch for proper installation and check the related circuits for opens and shorts
using the appropriate wiring diagram. If OK, replace the Stop Lamp Switch assembly.
LX
3.
9 - 869
APP SENSOR SWEEP

With a scan tool, monitor both APP Sensor voltage readings.
Slowly press the accelerator pedal from idle until it reaches the end stop near the floor.
APPS No.1 voltage should start at approximately 0.45 of a volt and increase to approximately 4.6 volts with a
smooth transition.
APPS No.2 voltage should start at approximately 0.22 of a volt and increase to approximately 2.31 volts with a
smooth transition.
Does the voltage for the appropriate sensor follow the list specification?
Yes

No
>> Check the Signal and Return circuits for opens and shorts. If OK, Replace the APP Sensor Assembly
per Service Information. After installation is complete, with a scan tool select the ETC RELEARN function to relearn the APPS values.
9 - 870
P2302-IGNITION COIL 1 SECONDARY CIRCUIT- INSUFFICIENT IONIZATION
LX
LX
9 - 871
When Monitored:
Engine running and battery voltage greater than 10 volts.
Set Condition:
If PCM detects that the secondary ignition burn time is incorrect, too short, or not present, an error is detected.
Possible Causes
(K19) COIL CONTROL NO.1 CIRCUIT OPEN
(K19) COIL CONTROL NO.1 CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND
SPARK PLUG
COIL ON PLUG
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
SECONDARY SPARK
NOTE: Inspect the ignition coil for damage, carbon tracking on the coil or a damaged spark plug insulator
boot. If a problem is found, replace the ignition coil.
Remove the ignition coil.
NOTE: 6.1L coils must have a spark tester installed on both sides of the coil during the following test. During the test, each side of the coil should output a crisp blue spark that is able to jump the gap of the spark
tester.
Install a spark tester(s) to the ignition coil.
be reinstalled to be able to crank the engine. Move the ignition coil harness connector through the slots in
the upper intake and then connect the coil to the harness connector. Secure the upper intake to the lower
Is good spark generated?
Yes
>> Ensure the cylinder is operating properly. If OK, replace the Spark Plug(s).
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 872
3.
LX

Relay Output 2 circuit in the Coil on Plug harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Repair the open or short to ground in the (K343) ASD Relay
Output 2 circuit between the IPM and Coil harness connector.
4.
IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE

NOTE: The following resistance measurement should be taken at 70-80 F.
Measure the resistance of the Ignition Coil.
Is the resistance between 0.53 to 0.65 ohms at 77F (25C) for the Ignition Coil being tested?
Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
IGNITION COIL
Using a 12-volt test light connected to a 12-volt source, probe the (K19)
Coil Control No.1 circuit.
Crank the engine for 5 seconds while observing the test light.
What is the condition of the test light while cranking the
engine?
Brightly blinking.
Replace the Ignition Coil.
ON constantly.
Go To 6
OFF constantly.
Go To 7
LX
6.

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K19) Coil Control
No.1 circuit in the Ignition Coil harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K19) Coil Control No.1
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
7.

Measure the resistance of the (K19) Coil Control No.1 circuit from the
Ignition Coil harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
>> Repair the open in the (K19) Coil Control No.1 circuit.
9 - 873
9 - 874
8.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9.

Cracks
Carbon Tracking
Foreign Material
Gap size out of specifications
Loose or broken electrode
not move.
Yes

No
>> Refer to the INTERMITTENT CONDITION symptom in the Driveability category.
LX
9 - 875
9 - 876
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPARK PLUG
COIL ON PLUG
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
SECONDARY SPARK
tester.
Yes
>> Ensure the cylinder is operating properly. If OK, replace the Spark Plug.
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 877
(K343) ASD RELAY OUTPUT2 CIRCUIT

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
IGNITION COIL
engine?
Brightly blinking.
ON constantly.
Go To 6
OFF constantly.
Go To 7
9 - 878
6.

Yes
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
7.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
LX
LX
8.
9 - 879
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9.
Visual and Physical Inspection

Cracks
Carbon Tracking
Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
9 - 880
LX
LX
9 - 881
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPARK PLUG
COIL ON PLUG
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
Secondary Spark
NOTE: Inspect the ignition coil for damaged, carbon tracking on the coil or a damaged spark plug insulator
tester.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 882
3.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
IGNITION COIL
engine?
Brightly blinking.
ON constantly.
Go To 6
OFF constantly.
Go To 7
LX
6.

Yes
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
7.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
9 - 883
9 - 884
8.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9.

Cracks
Carbon Tracking
Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 885
9 - 886
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPARK PLUG
COIL ON PLUG
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
Secondary Spark
tester.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 887

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
IGNITION COIL
engine?
Brightly blinking.
ON constantly.
Go To 6
OFF constantly.
Go To 7
9 - 888
6.

Yes
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
7.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
LX
LX
8.
9 - 889
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9.

Cracks
Carbon Tracking
Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
9 - 890
LX
LX
9 - 891
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPARK PLUG
COIL ON PLUG
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
Secondary Spark
NOTE: Inspect the ignition coil for damaged, carbon tracking on the coil or a damage spark plug insulator
tester.
Install a spark tester to the ignition coil.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 892
3.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
IGNITION COIL
engine?
Brightly blinking.
ON constantly.
Go To 6
OFF constantly.
Go To 7
LX
6.

Yes
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
7.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
9 - 893
9 - 894
8.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9.

Cracks
Carbon Tracking
Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 895
9 - 896
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPARK PLUG
COIL ON PLUG
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
Secondary Spark
tester.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 897

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
IGNITION COIL
engine?
Brightly blinking.
ON constantly.
Go To 6
OFF constantly.
Go To 7
9 - 898
6.

Yes
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
7.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
LX
LX
8.
9 - 899
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9.

Cracks
Carbon Tracking
Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
9 - 900
LX
LX
9 - 901
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPARK PLUG
COIL ON PLUG
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
Secondary Spark
tester.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 902
3.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
IGNITION COIL
engine?
Brightly blinking.
ON constantly.
Go To 6
OFF constantly.
Go To 7
LX
6.

Yes
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
7.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
9 - 903
9 - 904
8.
LX
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9.

Cracks
Carbon Tracking
Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 905
9 - 906
LX
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
SPARK PLUG
COIL ON PLUG
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No
>> Go To 9
2.
Secondary Spark
tester.
Install a spark tester to the ignition coil.
Yes
No
>> Go To 3
LX
3.
9 - 907

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
IGNITION COIL
engine?
Brightly blinking.
ON constantly.
Go To 6
OFF constantly.
Go To 7
9 - 908
6.

Yes
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
7.

tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 8
No
LX
LX
8.
9 - 909
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
9.

Cracks
Carbon Tracking
Foreign Material
not move.
Yes

No
9 - 910
P2503-CHARGING SYSTEM OUTPUT LOW
LX
LX
9 - 911
When Monitored:
The engine running. The engine speed greater than 1157 RPM.
Set Condition:
The battery sensed voltage is 1 volt below the charging goal for 13.47 seconds. The PCM senses the battery
voltage turns off the field driver and senses the battery voltage again. If the voltages are the same, the code
is set. One Trip Fault. Three good trips to turn off the MIL.
Possible Causes
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE BATTERY POSITIVE CIRCUIT
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE CASE GROUND
(K20) GEN FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO VOLTAGE
(K20) GEN FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN
(Z904) GEN GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN
GENERATOR
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Inspect the vehicle for aftermarket accessories that may exceed the Generator System output.
NOTE: The battery must be fully charged.
NOTE: The Generator belt tension and condition must be checked before continuing.
Start the engine.
Allow the idle to stabilize.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
FUSED B+ CIRCUIT HIGH RESISTANCE
Measure the voltage between the Generator B+ Output Terminal and the Battery+ Post.
Start the engine.
Yes
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the battery positive circuit between the Generator and Battery.
No
>> Go To 3
9 - 912
3.
LX
EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE CASE GROUND
Start the engine.
Warm the engine to operating temperature.
Measure the voltage between the Generator Case and Battery ground post.
Yes
>> Repair the excessive resistance in the Generator Case Ground.

No
>> Go To 4
4.
GENERATOR OPERATION

Using a 12-volt test light, jump across the Generator Field harness connector.
With a scan tool, actuate the Generator Field Driver.
Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.
(K20) GEN FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE

Measure the voltage on the (K20) Gen Field Control circuit in the Generator Field harness connector.
Yes
Control circuit.
No
>> Go To 6
LX
6.
(K20) FIELD CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN

Generator Field harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special tool #8815.
Yes
>> Go To 7
No
7.
Measure the resistance between ground and the (K20) Gen Field Control circuit in the Generator Field harness connector.
Yes
circuit.
No
>> Go To 8
9 - 913
9 - 914
8.
LX
Using a 12-volt test light connected to battery voltage, probe the (Z904)
Ground circuit in the Generator Field harness connector.
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Repair the open in the (Z904) Generator Ground circuit.

9.
PCM
Ground circuits.
Yes

No
LX
9 - 915
P3400-MDS RATIONALITY BANK 1

Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Transition from 4 to 8cylinder mode.
Set Condition:
O2 sensor readings on Bank 1 side indicate a lean condition while in 4 cylinder mode.
Possible Causes
INSUFFICIENT OIL PRESSURE ACTING ON THE LIFTER LOCKING PINS
LIFTER
MDS SOLENOID
Always perform the Pre-Diagnostic Troubleshooting procedure before proceeding (Refer to 9 - ENGINE DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING).
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC
NOTE: Diagnose any Deactivation or Oil Pressure DTCs before continuing with this test.
Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
MDS SOLENOID 1
Turn the
Remove
Turn the
With the
ignition off.
ignition on.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Remove the Solenoid and check for any debris that may be blocking the oil passages to the Solenoid.
If the passages are clogged, clean the passages and replace the MDS Solenoid 1. If the passages are
not clogged with debris, replace the MDS Solenoid 1.
9 - 916
3.
LX
MDS SOLENOID 7
With the scan tool actuate the MDS Solenoid 7.

Yes
>> Go To 4
No
>> Remove the Solenoid and check for any debris that may be blocking the oil passages to the Solenoid.
If the passages are restricted, clean the passages and replace the MDS Solenoid 7. If the passages are
not clogged with debris, replace the MDS Solenoid 7.
4.

Yes
No

LX
P3402-CYLINDER 1 DEACTIVATION CONTROL PERFORMANCE
9 - 917
9 - 918
LX
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
The MDS fails to engage for cylinder 1.
Possible Causes
(K451) MDS SOLENOID NO.1 CONTROL SHORT TO GROUND
(K451) MDS SOLENOID NO.1 CONTROL OPEN
LIFTER
MDS SOLENOID
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

LX
2.
CHECKING PCM CONTROL SIDE FOR THE MDS SOLENOID (C100)

Using a 12-volt test light, jumper from the (Z904) Ground Circuit and the
(K451) MDS Solenoid No.1 Control Circuit in the C100 harness connector (PCM side).
With the scan tool, actuate the MDS Solenoid No.1.
Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 6
3.

Measure the resistance between the (Z904) Ground Circuit and the
(K451) MDS SolenoidNo.1 Control Circuit in the C100 harness connector (MDS side).
NOTE: It is important to follow the below temp/resistance values to
ensure an accurate reading.

0 F
8.8 ohms
32 F
9.5 ohms
68 F
10.3 ohms
100 F
11 ohms
150 F
12.2 ohms
200 F
13.4 ohms
250 F
14.4 ohms
300 F
15.6 ohms
9 - 919
9 - 920

Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 2
4.
CHECKING PCM CONTROL SIDE FOR THE MDS SOLENOID BETWEEN C100 and C101

Reconnect the C100 harness connector.
Yes
>> Visually and Physically inspect the wiring harness between

the C101 connector and the MDS Solenoid connector.
Repair as necessary. If OK, replace the MDS Solenoid in
No
>> Go To 5
5.
(Z904) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN BETWEEN C100 and C101

Ground circuit in the C101 harness connector (PCM side).
Yes
>> Repair the (K451) MDS Solenoid No.1 Control circuit

between C100 and C101 connectors.
No
>> Repair the (Z904) Ground circuit between C100 and C101
connectors.
LX
LX
6.
(Z904) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (PCM SIDE)

Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.
(K451) MDS SOLENOID NO.1 CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO GROUND (PCM SIDE)

Measure the resistance between ground and the (K451) MDS Solenoid
No.1 Control circuit in the C100 harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to ground in the (K451) MDS Solenoid

No.1 Control circuit between the PCM harness connector
and the C100 harness connector.
No
>> Go To 8
9 - 921
9 - 922
8.
LX
(K451) MDS SOLENOID NO.1 CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN (PCM SIDE)

Measure the resistance of the (K451) MDS Solenoid No.1 Control circuit
from the C100 harness connector to the appropriate terminal of special
tool #8815.
Yes

No
>> Repair the open in the (K451) MDS Solenoid No.1 Control
circuit between the C100 harness connector and the PCM
harness connector.
9.
MDS SOLENOID 1

Remove the Intake Manifold per Service Information.
Yes
>> Go To 10
No
10.

Yes
No
LX
9 - 923
9 - 924
LX
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
LIFTER
MDS SOLENOID
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

LX
2.

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 6
3.

(K452) MDS Solenoid No.4 Control Circuit in the C100 harness connector (MDS side).

0 F
8.8 ohms
32 F
9.5 ohms
68 F
10.3 ohms
100 F
11 ohms
150 F
12.2 ohms
200 F
13.4 ohms
250 F
14.4 ohms
300 F
15.6 ohms
9 - 925
9 - 926

Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 2
4.

Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.

Yes

No
connectors.
LX
LX
6.

Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.

Yes

No
>> Go To 8
9 - 927
9 - 928
8.
LX

tool #8815.
Yes

No
harness connector.
9.
MDS SOLENOID 4

Yes
>> Go To 10
No
10.

Yes
No
LX
9 - 929
9 - 930
LX
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
LIFTER
MDS SOLENOID
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

LX
2.
9 - 931

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
3.

C100 harness connector (MDS side).
0 F
8.8 ohms
32 F
9.5 ohms
68 F
10.3 ohms
100 F
11 ohms
150 F
12.2 ohms
200 F
13.4 ohms
250 F
14.4 ohms
300 F
15.6 ohms

Yes
>> Go To 7
No
connector. Repair as necessary. If OK, replace the MDS Solenoid in accordance with the Service
Information.
9 - 932
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.

Yes

No
>> Go To 6
LX
LX
6.
9 - 933

tool #8815.
Yes

No
harness connector.
7.
MDS SOLENOID 6

Yes
>> Go To 8
No
8.

Yes
No
9 - 934
LX
LX
9 - 935
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
Possible Causes
LIFTER
MDS SOLENOID
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

9 - 936
2.
LX

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 6
3.

(K454) MDS Solenoid No.7 Control Circuit in the C100 harness connector (MDS side).

0 F
8.8 ohms
32 F
9.5 ohms
68 F
10.3 ohms
100 F
11 ohms
150 F
12.2 ohms
200 F
13.4 ohms
250 F
14.4 ohms
300 F
15.6 ohms
LX
Yes
>> Go To 9
No
>> Go To 2
4.

Yes

No
>> Go To 5
5.

Yes

No
connectors.
9 - 937
9 - 938
6.

Yes
>> Go To 7
No

7.

Yes

No
>> Go To 8
LX
LX
8.
9 - 939

tool #8815.
Yes

No
harness connector.
9.
MDS SOLENOID 7

Yes
>> Go To 10
No
10.

Yes
No
9 - 940
P3401-MDS SOLENOID 1 CIRCUIT
LX
LX
9 - 941
Theory of Operation
When Monitored:
Set Condition:
When the PCM recognizes a problem with the Solenoid Control circuit.
Possible Causes
(K451) MDS SOLENOID NO.1 CONTROL SHORT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
MDS SOLENOID NO.1
PCM
Diagnostic Test
1.
ACTIVE DTC

Yes
>> Go To 2
No

2.
CHECKING PCM CONTROL SIDE FOR THE MDS SOLENOID

Yes
>> Go To 3
No
>> Go To 4
9 - 942
3.
LX

(K451) MDS SolenoidNo.1 Control Circuit in the C100 harness connector (MDS side).

0 F
8.8 ohms
32 F
9.5 ohms
68 F
10.3 ohms
100 F
11 ohms
150 F
12.2 ohms
200 F
13.4 ohms
250 F
14.4 ohms
300 F
15.6 ohms

Yes
>> Go To 12
No
>> Go To 8
LX
4.

Yes
>> Go To 5
No

5.
(K451) MDS SOLENOID NO.1 CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE (PCM SIDE)

Measure the voltage on the (K451) MDS Solenoid No.1 Control circuit
in the C100 harness connector.
Yes
>> Repair the short to battery voltage in the (K451) MDS Solenoid No.1 Control circuit between the PCM harness connector and C100 harness connector.
No
>> Go To 10
9 - 943
9 - 944
6.

Yes

No
>> Go To 7
7.

tool #8815.
Yes

No
harness connector.
LX
LX
8.
(Z904) GROUND CIRCUIT OPEN (MDS SIDE)

Gain access to the MDS Solenoid.
Disconnect the MDS harness connector.
Measu

2006 LX SM

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

2006 LX SM

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

GROUP TAB LOCATOR

Lubrication & Maintenance

Service Manual Comment Forms

BODY CODE PLATE

BODY CODE PLATE

BODY CODE PLATE

BODY CODE PLATE LINE 3

BODY CODE PLATE LINE 2

BODY CODE PLATE LINE 1

IF TWO BODY CODE PLATES ARE REQUIRED

COMMON METRIC EQUIVALENTS

1 Cubic Inch = 16 Cubic Centimeters

1 Foot = 0.3 Meter

1 Cubic Foot = 0.03 Cubic Meter

1 Yard = 0.9 Meter

1 Cubic Yard = 0.8 Cubic Meter

1 Mile = 1.6 Kilometers

VECI label contains the following:

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

VIN DECODING INFORMATION

4 = Multipurpose Passenger Vehicle

K = Restraint System Advanced

4 = Multipurpose Passenger Vehicle

K = 300 / 300C (AWD) (LWD)

B = 4 Speed Automatic, Sales

T = 2.7L V6 CYL 24 ValveDOHC

Vehicle Build Sequence

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

PARTS AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Steering Gear & Linkage, Ball

MoparT Multi-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB

Fluid, Lubricant, and Genuine Part

MoparT Engine Oil

Latches: Door, Hood/Safety

MoparT Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB

Seat Regulator & Track

MoparT Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB

MoparT Lock Cylinder Lube

API QUALITY CLASSIFICATION

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

lubricants bearing designations defined by the following organization should be used.

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Association des Constructeurs Europens d Automobiles (European Automobile Manufacturers Association)

API SERVICE GRADE CERTIFIED

ENERGY CONSERVING OIL

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

SYNTHETIC ENGINE OILS

ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES/SUPPLEMENTS

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

POWER STEERING FLUID

OPERATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Fuel Tank - V6 Engine

Fuel Tank - V8 Engine

Engine Oil* - 2.7L

5.7L (6.0 qts.)